Pro C901 Service Manual
Uploaded by
Haiv1297Pro C901 Service Manual
Uploaded by
Haiv1297D095/M077
SERVICE MANUAL
(Book 1 of 3) 006001MIU
MAINFRAME
D095/M077
SERVICE MANUAL
(BOOK 1 OF 3) MAINFRAME
D095/M077
SERVICE MANUAL
Book 1 of 3
MAINFRAME
006001MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
© 2010 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
D095 Pro C901s Pro C901s Pro C901s Pro C901s
M077 Pro C901 Pro C901 Pro C901 Pro C901
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 10/2010 Original Printing
D095/M077
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRODUCT INFORMATION
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION .......................................................... 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................1-1
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ....................................................................1-2
1.2.1 PRINTER M077 .................................................................................1-2
1.2.2 COPIER D095 ...................................................................................1-4
1.3 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................1-6
1.3.1 MACHINE LAYOUT ...........................................................................1-6
1.3.2 PAPER PATH ....................................................................................1-7
Printer (M077) model ............................................................................1-7
Copier (D095) model .............................................................................1-8
1.3.3 FAN LOCATION ................................................................................1-9
1.4 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR
PRODUCTS....................................................................................................1-12
INSTALLATION
2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 2-1
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................2-1
2.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ..........................................................2-1
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ..............................................................................2-2
2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ................................................2-3
2.1.4 DIMENSIONS ....................................................................................2-3
Side View with Finisher SR5000 (B830) or SR5020 (D434) .................2-4
Side View with Ring Binder RB5000 (D392) .........................................2-4
Side View with Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391) .....................................2-5
Side View with High Capacity Stacker SK5000 (D364) .........................2-6
2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................2-6
Input voltage level .................................................................................2-6
Required Breaker ..................................................................................2-7
Main Power Switch................................................................................2-7
SM i D095/M077
Operation Switch ...................................................................................2-7
2.1.6 CORRECT PROCEDURE TO TURN OFF THE POWER .................2-8
Shut the Fiery Controller Down First .....................................................2-8
Then Shut Down the Machine ...............................................................2-8
2.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN... .............................................................................2-9
2.2.1 OVERVIEW OF OPTIONAL PERIPHERALS ....................................2-9
Optional Peripherals Configuration for Printer M077 .............................2-9
Optional Peripherals Configuration for Copier D095 ...........................2-11
2.3 MAINFRAME ............................................................................................2-14
2.3.1 ACCESSORIES ...............................................................................2-14
2.3.2 INSTALLATION ...............................................................................2-19
Rating Voltage for Peripherals ............................................................2-19
External Tape and Packing Material ...................................................2-20
Leveling the Mainframe .......................................................................2-21
Internal Tape and Packing Material.....................................................2-22
Install the Toner Bottles ......................................................................2-24
Installing the Operation Panel Unit ......................................................2-25
Keytop Adjustment ..............................................................................2-26
Attaching the Ground Plate .................................................................2-27
Installing the Attention Light ................................................................2-28
Connecting the Upper and Lower Tray Heaters ..................................2-28
Connecting the LCT-MF (D095 only) ..................................................2-30
Testing the Breaker Switch and Attaching the Caution Decal .............2-39
Connecting to the Controller ...............................................................2-40
Turn on the Machine Power ................................................................2-42
Controller Selection .............................................................................2-42
Fiery Language Selection ...................................................................2-42
Fiery Controller Settings......................................................................2-43
Paper Library Data ..............................................................................2-46
TCRU Setting ......................................................................................2-47
Load the Paper Trays..........................................................................2-47
Print an SMC Report ...........................................................................2-48
Checking the Print Quality...................................................................2-48
Make a Test Color Print (D095 only) ...................................................2-51
ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) Adjustment (D095 only) ...............2-52
Color Registration Procedure for MUSIC ............................................2-53
2.3.3 REAR CONTROLLER BOX REMOVAL ..........................................2-54
Rear Controller Box Removal .............................................................2-54
D095/M077 ii SM
2.4 A3/11"X17" TRAY UNIT TK5000 (B331) ..................................................2-58
2.4.1 ACCESSORIES ...............................................................................2-58
2.4.2 INSTALLATION ...............................................................................2-59
2.5 RING BINDER (D392) INSTALLATION ....................................................2-63
2.5.1 ACCESSORIES ...............................................................................2-63
2.5.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN .....................................................................2-64
2.5.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .......................................................2-65
Remove All Shipping Materials ...........................................................2-65
Prepare the Finisher for Docking ........................................................2-67
Prepare the Mainframe or other peripheral for Docking ......................2-67
Dock the Finisher to the Upstream Unit ..............................................2-69
Install the Shoes and Level the Finisher .............................................2-72
Peripheral Height Adjustment .............................................................2-72
Attach Ring Supply Level Indicator .....................................................2-73
Test the Breaker Switch ......................................................................2-74
2.5.4 CENTERING PAPER IN THE PAPER PATH ..................................2-75
Checking and Correcting Side-to-Side Registration ............................2-75
Checking and Correcting Skew ...........................................................2-78
2.5.5 AFTER INSTALLATION ..................................................................2-81
2.6 PERFECT BINDER (D391) INSTALLATION ............................................2-83
2.6.1 DOCKING THE PERFECT BINDER................................................2-83
Before Docking ...................................................................................2-83
Docking Procedure..............................................................................2-84
Peripheral Height Adjustment .............................................................2-86
2.6.2 FILLING BOOKBINDER GLUE SUPPLY UNIT ...............................2-88
Handling and Storing the Glue Pellet Supply ......................................2-89
2.6.3 TESTING THE BREAKER SWITCH ................................................2-90
2.7 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447) ..........................................2-91
2.7.1 ACCESSORIES ...............................................................................2-91
2.7.2 INSTALLATION ...............................................................................2-93
Shipping Tapes ...................................................................................2-93
Paper Guide, Sponge Strip, Ground Plate ..........................................2-94
Docking ...............................................................................................2-95
Lock Hasps .........................................................................................2-97
Height Adjustment ...............................................................................2-98
Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test .....................................................2-100
Check for Skew and Correct Side-to-Side Registration.....................2-100
Docking: Downstream .......................................................................2-101
SM iii D095/M077
Roll-Away Cart (D456) ......................................................................2-101
2.8 BRIDGE UNIT BU5000 (D379) ...............................................................2-103
2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................2-103
2.8.2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................2-104
Horizontal Bridge Unit .......................................................................2-104
Vertical Bridge Unit ...........................................................................2-109
2.9 LCIT RT5050 (D532) ..............................................................................2-114
2.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................2-114
2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR PRINTER (M077) ................2-115
Naming for double LCT units ............................................................2-115
Preparing for Installation ...................................................................2-116
Installation for only one LCT unit .......................................................2-117
Installation for two LCT units .............................................................2-121
2.9.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR COPIER (D095) ..................2-127
Preparing for Installation ...................................................................2-127
Installation for two LCT units .............................................................2-128
2.10 LCIT RT5030 (D452).........................................................................2-133
2.10.1 ACCESSORIES ......................................................................2-133
2.10.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-134
Tapes, Retainers ...............................................................................2-134
Docking .............................................................................................2-135
Height Adjustment .............................................................................2-137
2.10.3 IMAGE POSITION SENSOR, PAPER REGISTRATION
ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................2-137
2.10.4 LCIT (D452) TRAY HEATERS ................................................2-138
Accessories .......................................................................................2-138
Installation .........................................................................................2-139
2.11 MULTI BYPASS TRAY (B833) ..........................................................2-142
2.11.1 ACCESSORIES ......................................................................2-142
2.11.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-143
2.12 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5010 (B835) ..................................2-147
2.12.1 ACCESSORIES ......................................................................2-147
2.12.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-149
Setting up the Unit and Docking to the Mainframe ............................2-149
Docking the Next Peripheral Device..................................................2-152
Mounting the Tray Unit ......................................................................2-153
Peripheral Height Adjustment ...........................................................2-156
Docking the Cover Interposer Tray B835 ..........................................2-157
D095/M077 iv SM
Z-Fold Unit B660 to Cover Interposer Tray B835 ..............................2-157
Finisher B830 to Cover Interposer Tray B835 ...................................2-158
Firmware Update...............................................................................2-158
2.13 Z-FOLDING UNIT ZF4000 (B660) ....................................................2-159
2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ............................................................2-159
2.13.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-161
Unpacking .........................................................................................2-161
Attaching the Brackets ......................................................................2-162
Preparing for Docking .......................................................................2-163
Testing the Breaker ...........................................................................2-165
Docking the Z-Folding Unit to the Cover Interposer Tray or Mainframe2-166
Connecting the Z-Folding Unit B660 .................................................2-168
Connecting the Peripheral to the Z-Folding Unit B660 ......................2-169
2.14 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434)..............................................2-170
2.14.1 ACCESSORIES ......................................................................2-170
2.14.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-172
Tapes, Retainers, Shipping Plates ....................................................2-172
Ground Plate, Sponge Strip ..............................................................2-175
Booklet Tray, Shift Tray.....................................................................2-176
Docking .............................................................................................2-176
Height Adjustment .............................................................................2-178
Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test .....................................................2-180
Auxiliary Trays ..................................................................................2-180
Check for Skew and Correct Side-to-Side Registration.....................2-181
2.14.3 PUNCH UNIT PU5020 NA, EU, SC (D449-17, -27, -28).........2-182
Accessories .......................................................................................2-182
2.14.4 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-184
2.15 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455) ......................................................2-192
2.15.1 ACCESSORIES ......................................................................2-192
2.15.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-193
Tapes, Stopper Plate ........................................................................2-193
Output Tray .......................................................................................2-194
Ground Plate .....................................................................................2-195
Preparing the Booklet Finisher (D434) for Docking ...........................2-195
Docking .............................................................................................2-197
2.16 FINISHER SR5000 (B830) ................................................................2-199
2.16.1 ACCESSORIES ......................................................................2-199
Finisher SR5000 B830 Accessories ..................................................2-199
SM v D095/M077
2.16.2 FINISHER INSTALLATION .....................................................2-200
Removing tape and shipping retainers ..............................................2-200
Preparing before Docking .................................................................2-201
Docking the Finisher B830 ................................................................2-204
Connecting the Finisher B830 ...........................................................2-206
Peripheral Height Adjustment ...........................................................2-207
Support Tray .....................................................................................2-208
2.17 PUNCH UNIT PU5000 (B831) ..........................................................2-209
2.17.1 ACCESSORIES ......................................................................2-209
2.17.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-210
2.18 COOLING FAN UNIT TYPE 5000 (B831) .........................................2-214
2.18.1 COMPONENT CHECK ...........................................................2-214
2.18.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...............................................2-215
2.19 BUFFER PASS UNIT TYPE 5000 (M379) ........................................2-220
2.19.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ............................................................2-220
2.19.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-221
Unpacking .........................................................................................2-221
Preparing for Docking .......................................................................2-222
Docking the Buffer Pass Unit to the Mainframe ................................2-222
Removing the Shipping Brackets ......................................................2-225
Connecting the Other Peripheral to the Buffer Pass Unit ..................2-226
2.20 FUSER UNIT AIR SEPARATOR TYPE C901 (M390) ......................2-227
2.20.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ............................................................2-227
2.20.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-228
2.21 SKEW AND SIDE-TO-SIDE ADJUSTMENT .....................................2-237
2.21.1 SKEW AND SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ........................2-237
Overview ...........................................................................................2-237
Checking Side-to-Side Registration ..................................................2-240
Correcting Side-to-Side Registration .................................................2-242
Detecting Paper Skew.......................................................................2-245
Correcting Skew ................................................................................2-246
2.22 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A (B870) .............2-249
2.22.1 COMPONENT LIST ................................................................2-249
2.22.2 INSTALLATION ......................................................................2-250
2.23 MFP OPTION ....................................................................................2-253
2.23.1 VM CARD TYPE F (D377-04): D095 ONLY ...........................2-253
Installation Procedure .......................................................................2-253
D095/M077 vi SM
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................... 3-1
3.1 PM COUNTER ............................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 INITIALIZING PM PARTS ..................................................................3-1
3.1.2 DISPLAYING THE PM COUNTER ....................................................3-3
3.1.3 PM PARTS SCREEN DETAILS.........................................................3-4
All PM Parts list: Main Menu .................................................................3-4
Number button submenu .......................................................................3-5
Parts list for PM yield indicator ..............................................................3-6
3.2 PM TABLES................................................................................................3-7
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 4-1
4.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS ...............................................................................4-1
4.1.1 REAR CONTROLLER BOX ...............................................................4-1
4.1.2 DRUM ................................................................................................4-1
4.1.3 PCDU ................................................................................................4-2
4.1.4 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT........................................................4-2
4.1.5 SCANNER UNIT (D095 ONLY) .........................................................4-2
4.1.6 LASER UNIT .....................................................................................4-2
4.1.7 DEVELOPMENT................................................................................4-3
4.1.8 CLEANING ........................................................................................4-3
4.1.9 FUSING UNIT ....................................................................................4-3
4.1.10 PAPER FEED .............................................................................4-3
4.1.11 WASTE TONER..........................................................................4-4
4.1.12 FIERY CONTROLLER ................................................................4-4
4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS .......................................................4-5
4.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ..............................................................................4-5
4.2.2 LUBRICANTS ....................................................................................4-5
4.3 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................................4-6
4.3.1 SCANNING (D095 ONLY) .................................................................4-6
Scanner sub-scan magnification ...........................................................4-6
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration ..............................4-7
4.3.2 ADF (D095 ONLY) .............................................................................4-8
ADF side-to-side and leading edge registration ....................................4-8
4.3.3 COLOR IMAGE CHECK ....................................................................4-9
Checking Procedure..............................................................................4-9
SM vii D095/M077
Recovery Procedure .............................................................................4-9
4.3.4 COLOR REGISTRATION CHECK...................................................4-10
Checking Procedure for Printer (M077) model ....................................4-10
Checking Procedure for Copier (D095) model ....................................4-10
Recovery Procedure ...........................................................................4-11
4.3.5 RULED LINE CHECK ......................................................................4-11
Checking Procedure for Printer (M077)...............................................4-11
Checking Procedure for Copier (D095) model ....................................4-12
Recovery Procedure ...........................................................................4-13
4.3.6 IMAGE SHIFT CHECK BETWEEN THE 1ST AND 2ND PAGES ....4-13
Checking Procedure............................................................................4-13
Adjustment Procedure.........................................................................4-15
Adjustable User SP List ......................................................................4-16
4.3.7 IMAGE SKEW CHECK ....................................................................4-17
Checking Procedure............................................................................4-17
Adjustment Procedure.........................................................................4-17
4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS ...............................................................................4-19
4.4.1 FRONT DOOR.................................................................................4-19
Left Front Door ....................................................................................4-19
Right Front Door..................................................................................4-19
4.4.2 LEFT COVER ..................................................................................4-20
4.4.3 RIGHT COVER ................................................................................4-20
4.4.4 FRONT TOP COVER ......................................................................4-21
4.4.5 REAR TOP COVER.........................................................................4-22
4.4.6 REAR UPPER AND LOWER COVERS ...........................................4-22
Rear Upper Cover ...............................................................................4-22
Rear Lower Right Cover......................................................................4-22
Rear Lower Left Cover ........................................................................4-22
4.4.7 OPERATION PANEL ARM ..............................................................4-23
4.4.8 OPERATION PANEL .......................................................................4-24
4.4.9 OPU .................................................................................................4-25
4.4.10 MAIN KEY, SUB KEY AND APPLICATION KEY BOARD, AND
LCD UNIT .................................................................................................4-26
When reinstalling the application key board ........................................4-27
Inverter Fuse .......................................................................................4-27
4.4.11 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT .............................4-28
4.4.12 REAR CONTROLLER BOX ......................................................4-29
Opening the rear controller box ...........................................................4-29
D095/M077 viii SM
Detaching the rear controller box ........................................................4-30
4.5 LASER UNIT.............................................................................................4-33
4.5.1 CAUTION DECALS .........................................................................4-34
View from the top of the printer ...........................................................4-34
View from the rear of the printer ..........................................................4-36
4.5.2 LD SAFETY SWITCHES .................................................................4-37
4.5.3 LASER UNIT ...................................................................................4-38
Reinstallation ......................................................................................4-39
4.5.4 POLYGON MOTOR.........................................................................4-45
4.5.5 POLYGON MOTOR DRIVE BOARD ...............................................4-46
4.5.6 LD UNITS ........................................................................................4-48
When installing a new LD unit .............................................................4-49
4.5.7 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR .........................................4-53
4.6 TONER HOPPER .....................................................................................4-54
4.6.1 TONER BOTTLES ...........................................................................4-54
Cleaning Requirement ........................................................................4-54
4.6.2 TONER HOPPER COVER ..............................................................4-55
4.6.3 TONER HOPPER DOOR SWITCH .................................................4-56
4.6.4 RFID BOARD...................................................................................4-57
4.6.5 TONER BOTTLE MOTOR ...............................................................4-58
Lubricating the toner bottle motor gears..............................................4-59
4.6.6 SUB-HOPPER UNIT........................................................................4-61
Lubrication for the sub-hopper gears ..................................................4-63
After installing new sub-hopper unit ....................................................4-64
4.6.7 TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH .............................................................4-65
4.6.8 TONER PUMP CLUTCH .................................................................4-67
4.6.9 TONER END SENSOR ...................................................................4-67
4.6.10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR ........................................................4-68
4.6.11 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 ...............................4-69
4.6.12 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR 2 AND SENSOR .......4-71
4.7 IMAGE CREATION ...................................................................................4-72
4.7.1 CHARGE CORONA UNIT ...............................................................4-72
After installing a new charge corona unit ............................................4-72
4.7.2 DRUM CLEANING UNIT .................................................................4-73
Cleaning Requirement at PM Replacement ........................................4-74
When installing a new drum cleaning unit ...........................................4-75
After installing a new drum cleaning unit .............................................4-75
4.7.3 DRUM LUBRICANT BLADE ............................................................4-75
SM ix D095/M077
After installing a new drum lubricant blade..........................................4-76
4.7.4 DRUM CLEANING GEARS .............................................................4-76
After installing new drum cleaning gears.............................................4-76
4.7.5 DRUM LUBRICANT BAR AND DRUM LUBRICANT BRUSH
ROLLER ...................................................................................................4-77
After installing a new drum lubricant bar and drum lubricant brush roller
............................................................................................................4-78
4.7.6 DRUM CLEANING BLADE ..............................................................4-79
After installing a new drum cleaning blade ..........................................4-79
4.7.7 DRUM CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER ..............................................4-80
After installing a new drum cleaning brush roller .................................4-80
4.7.8 DRUM UNIT ....................................................................................4-81
Reassembling the Drum Unit ..............................................................4-82
Cleaning Requirement at PM Replacement ........................................4-82
After installing a new drum unit ...........................................................4-83
4.7.9 LUBRICATING THE DRUM .............................................................4-84
Reinstallation ......................................................................................4-84
4.7.10 QUENCHING LAMP .................................................................4-85
4.7.11 DRUM MOTOR .........................................................................4-85
4.7.12 DRUM CLEANING MOTOR .....................................................4-86
4.7.13 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR ..................................................4-86
Cleaning Requirement ........................................................................4-88
4.7.14 POTENTIAL SENSOR HVPS ...................................................4-89
4.7.15 DUST SHIELD GLASS .............................................................4-89
When reinstalling the dust shield glass ...............................................4-90
4.7.16 ERASE LAMP SHIELD GLASS ................................................4-91
Cleaning Requirement ........................................................................4-91
4.7.17 DEVELOPMENT UNIT .............................................................4-92
Before removal ....................................................................................4-92
Removal procedure .............................................................................4-93
Reassembling the Development Unit ..................................................4-94
After installing the new development unit ............................................4-95
4.7.18 DEVELOPER ............................................................................4-96
Removal ..............................................................................................4-96
Installation ...........................................................................................4-99
If the developer removal or installation fails ......................................4-102
4.7.19 TD SENSOR ...........................................................................4-103
After installing a new TD sensor .......................................................4-104
D095/M077 x SM
4.7.20 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR ......................................................4-104
4.7.21 DEVELOPMENT FAN .............................................................4-105
4.7.22 CHARGE CLEANING MOTOR ...............................................4-106
4.8 IMAGE TRANSFER ................................................................................4-107
4.8.1 ITB (IMAGE TRANSFER BELT) UNIT DRAWER ..........................4-107
Normal Slide-out Position ..................................................................4-107
Full Slide-out Position .......................................................................4-109
4.8.2 ITB CLEANING UNIT ....................................................................4-110
ITB Lubrication ..................................................................................4-112
After installing a new ITB cleaning unit .............................................4-113
4.8.3 ITB FAN CLEANING PROCEDURE ..............................................4-114
4.8.4 ITB CLEANING AND ITB LUBRICANT BLADES ..........................4-114
After installing a new ITB cleaning blade ..........................................4-114
4.8.5 ITB LUBRICANT BRUSH ROLLER AND LUBRICANT BAR .........4-115
After installing a new ITB lubricant brush roller or ITB lubricant bar ..4-116
4.8.6 ITB CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER .................................................4-116
After installing a new ITB cleaning brush roller .................................4-116
4.8.7 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT .............................................................4-117
When installing a new image transfer belt.........................................4-119
After installing a new image transfer belt ..........................................4-119
4.8.8 ID/MUSIC SENSORS ....................................................................4-120
After installing new ID/MUSIC sensors .............................................4-121
4.8.9 ITB DRIVE MOTOR .......................................................................4-121
4.8.10 ITB MOTOR ROTATION SENSORS ......................................4-122
Reinstalling the ITB motor rotation sensors ......................................4-123
4.8.11 BELT SPEED SENSOR ..........................................................4-124
When reinstalling the encoder roller with the encoder unit ................4-125
4.8.12 ITB BLACK AND COLOR LIFT MOTORS ..............................4-126
4.8.13 ITB BLACK AND COLOR LIFT SENSORS ............................4-127
4.8.14 FRONT AND REAR BELT OVERRUN SENSORS .................4-128
4.8.15 BELT CENTERING SENSOR .................................................4-129
4.8.16 IMAGE TRANSFER ROLLERS ..............................................4-130
After installing new image transfer rollers .........................................4-131
4.8.17 ITB BIAS ROLLER ..................................................................4-132
After installing a new ITB bias roller ..................................................4-133
4.8.18 ITB CLEANING MOTOR .........................................................4-133
4.8.19 ITB CLEANING UNIT SET SENSOR ......................................4-134
4.8.20 BELT CENTERING ROLLER SENSOR .................................4-135
SM xi D095/M077
4.8.21 BELT CENTERING ROLLER MOTOR ...................................4-136
4.8.22 TRB (TRANSFER RELAY BOARD)........................................4-136
4.8.23 TRANSFER HVPS ..................................................................4-137
4.9 PAPER REGISTRATION ........................................................................4-139
4.9.1 REGISTRATION UNIT DRAWER..................................................4-139
Pulling out the registration unit drawer ..............................................4-139
Removing the registration unit drawer...............................................4-139
Reinstalling the registration unit drawer ............................................4-140
4.9.2 INNER REGISTRATION COVER ..................................................4-141
4.9.3 LCT ENTRANCE SENSOR ...........................................................4-142
4.9.4 REGISTRATION TIMING SENSOR ..............................................4-143
4.9.5 REGISTRATION ENTRANCE SENSOR .......................................4-144
4.9.6 DOUBLE-FEED SENSOR .............................................................4-145
Double-Feed Sensor: Receptor ........................................................4-145
Double-Feed Sensor: LED ................................................................4-145
4.9.7 CIS (CONTACT IMAGE SENSOR) UNIT ......................................4-146
After installing a new CIS unit ...........................................................4-148
4.9.8 PAPER DUST TRAY .....................................................................4-149
Cleaning Requirement ......................................................................4-149
4.9.9 SHIFT ROLLER UNIT ....................................................................4-150
4.9.10 SHIFT ROLLER UNIT MOTOR...............................................4-153
4.9.11 SHIFT ROLLER HP SENSOR ................................................4-154
4.9.12 REGISTRATION GATE LIFT SENSOR ..................................4-155
4.9.13 PTR TIMING SENSOR ...........................................................4-155
4.9.14 REGISTRATION TIMING MOTOR .........................................4-156
4.9.15 REGISTRATION GATE MOTOR ............................................4-157
4.9.16 REGISTRATION ENTRANCE MOTOR ..................................4-158
4.9.17 SHIFT ROLLER MOTOR ........................................................4-160
4.9.18 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR 2 .........................................4-161
4.9.19 PTR TIMING MOTOR .............................................................4-162
4.9.20 DUPLEX TRANSPORT SENSOR 3 AND 4 ............................4-164
Duplex Transport Sensor 3 ...............................................................4-164
Duplex Transport Sensor 4 ...............................................................4-164
4.9.21 PTR MOTOR ..........................................................................4-165
4.9.22 SEPARATION HVPS ..............................................................4-166
4.9.23 PTR LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................4-167
4.9.24 PTR LIFT SENSOR ................................................................4-168
4.9.25 RCB ........................................................................................4-168
D095/M077 xii SM
4.10 PAPER TRANSFER..........................................................................4-170
4.10.1 PTR (PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER) UNIT ............................4-170
After installing a new paper transfer roller unit ..................................4-171
4.10.2 PTR ENTRANCE MYLAR CLEANING PROCEDURE ............4-171
Cleaning Requirement ......................................................................4-171
4.10.3 PTR LUBRICANT BAR ...........................................................4-172
After installing a new PTR lubricant bar ............................................4-172
4.10.4 PTR LUBRICANT BRUSH ROLLER.......................................4-173
After installing a new PTR lubricant brush roller ...............................4-173
4.10.5 PTR DISCHARGE PLATE ......................................................4-174
After installing a new PTR discharge plate........................................4-174
4.10.6 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER ................................................4-175
After installing a new paper transfer roller .........................................4-176
4.10.7 PTR CLEANING BLADE .........................................................4-176
After installing a new PTR cleaning blade .........................................4-176
4.10.8 PTR CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER.........................................4-177
After installing a new PTR cleaning brush roller ................................4-177
4.11 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT ....................................................4-178
4.11.1 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1) ......................................................4-178
When reinstalling the right tandem tray .............................................4-179
4.11.2 UNIVERSAL TRAY (TRAY 2) .................................................4-179
4.11.3 PAPER FEED UNIT 1 AND 2 .................................................4-180
4.11.4 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS....................4-181
4.11.5 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, TRAY LIFT SENSOR...............4-182
4.11.6 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR .........................................4-182
4.11.7 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ...................................................4-183
4.11.8 RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR .............................................4-184
4.11.9 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE..................................................4-185
Re-installation ...................................................................................4-186
4.11.10 2ND TRAY PAPER SIZE SWITCH .........................................4-187
4.11.11 PAPER FEED AND GRIP MOTORS ......................................4-188
1st Paper Feed and Grip Motor .........................................................4-188
2nd Paper Feed and Grip Motor .......................................................4-189
4.11.12 VERTICAL RELAY MOTOR ...................................................4-191
4.11.13 TRAY LIFT MOTORS .............................................................4-192
1st tray Lift Motor ..............................................................................4-192
2nd tray Lift Motor .............................................................................4-193
4.12 FUSING ............................................................................................4-194
SM xiii D095/M077
4.12.1 FUSING UNIT .........................................................................4-195
When reinstalling the fusing unit .......................................................4-197
After installing a new fusing unit ........................................................4-197
4.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRAWER ........................................................4-197
Pulling out the fusing unit drawer ......................................................4-197
Removing the fusing unit drawer .......................................................4-198
4.12.3 FUSING FRONT COVER .......................................................4-199
4.12.4 FUSING REAR COVER ..........................................................4-200
4.12.5 FUSING UPPER FRAME .......................................................4-200
4.12.6 FUSING CLEANING UNIT ......................................................4-202
After installing a new fusing cleaning unit .........................................4-202
4.12.7 CLEANING WEB ....................................................................4-203
When reinstalling the cleaning web ...................................................4-205
4.12.8 FUSING LAMPS .....................................................................4-207
Heating Roller Fusing Lamps ............................................................4-207
Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp ............................................................4-209
When reinstalling the fusing lamps....................................................4-212
4.12.9 FUSING BELT STRIPPER PLATE .........................................4-213
4.12.10 PARTS IN THE FUSING BELT ASSEMBLY ..........................4-214
Fusing Belt Assembly........................................................................4-214
Fusing Belt Tension Roller ................................................................4-216
Hot Roller Gear .................................................................................4-217
Fusing Belt ........................................................................................4-218
Hot Roller and Heating Roller ...........................................................4-219
Fusing Belt Tension Roller Bushing ..................................................4-220
4.12.11 HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR ........................................4-221
After installing a new heating roller thermistor ..................................4-221
4.12.12 HEATING ROLLER THERMOSTAT .......................................4-222
4.12.13 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER PAWL UNIT......................4-223
After installing a new pressure roller stripper pawl unit .....................4-224
4.12.14 ACCORDION JAM SENSOR ..................................................4-225
4.12.15 FUSING EXIT FRONT, CENTER AND REAR SENSOR ........4-226
Fusing Exit Front Sensor...................................................................4-226
Fusing Exit Center Sensor ................................................................4-226
Fusing Exit Rear Sensor ...................................................................4-227
4.12.16 FRONT AND REAR PRESSURE ROLLER HP SENSORS ....4-227
4.12.17 PRESSURE ROLLER .............................................................4-229
After installing a new pressure roller .................................................4-230
D095/M077 xiv SM
4.12.18 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTAT ...................................4-231
4.12.19 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR ................................................4-232
4.12.20 FUSING BELT THERMISTOR ................................................4-232
4.12.21 CLEANING WEB MOTOR AND CLEANING WEB END
SENSOR 4-233
4.12.22 FUSING MOTOR ....................................................................4-235
4.12.23 PRESSURE ROLLER LIFT MOTOR ......................................4-236
4.13 PAPER TRANSPORT AND EXIT .....................................................4-237
4.13.1 PTB (PAPER TRANSPORT BELT) UNIT ...............................4-237
4.13.2 PAPER TRANSPORT BELT ...................................................4-238
4.13.3 PTB MOTOR...........................................................................4-239
4.13.4 PTB JAM SENSOR.................................................................4-239
4.13.5 PTB FAN 1 AND 2 ..................................................................4-240
4.13.6 PAPER EXIT MOTOR ............................................................4-241
4.13.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR ...........................................................4-243
4.13.8 EXIT JUNCTION TIMING SENSOR .......................................4-244
4.13.9 INVERTER MOTOR ...............................................................4-245
4.13.10 INVERTER MOTOR FAN .......................................................4-246
4.13.11 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 .........................................4-247
4.13.12 SWITCHBACK MOTOR ..........................................................4-248
4.13.13 DUPLEX TRANSPORT SENSOR 1 AND 2 ............................4-249
Duplex transport sensor 1 .................................................................4-249
Duplex transport sensor 2 .................................................................4-249
4.13.14 SWITCHBACK SENSOR ........................................................4-251
4.13.15 SWITCHBACK LOWER SENSOR ..........................................4-252
4.13.16 PTR UNIT COOLING FAN ......................................................4-253
4.13.17 PDB (PAPER EXIT DRIVE BOARD) ......................................4-254
4.13.18 PAPER EXIT TRANSPORT MOTOR .....................................4-255
4.13.19 DE-CURLER UNIT..................................................................4-256
After installing a new de-curler unit ...................................................4-257
4.13.20 DE-CURLER UNIT MOTOR ...................................................4-257
4.13.21 DE-CURLER FEED MOTOR ..................................................4-258
4.13.22 DE-CURLER UNIT HP AND LIMIT SENSOR .........................4-259
4.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .........................................................4-260
4.14.1 BOARD LOCATION ................................................................4-260
4.14.2 IOB 1 AND 2 ...........................................................................4-260
IOB 1 .................................................................................................4-261
IOB 2 .................................................................................................4-261
SM xv D095/M077
4.14.3 IOB BRACKETS .....................................................................4-262
Opening out the IOB 1 Bracket .........................................................4-262
Opening out the IOB 2 Bracket .........................................................4-263
4.14.4 BCU ........................................................................................4-264
When reinstalling the BCU ................................................................4-264
When installing a new BCU ...............................................................4-264
4.14.5 AC DRIVE BOARD .................................................................4-265
4.14.6 FIB (FINISHER INTERFACE BOARD) AND RB (RELAY
BOARD) 4-266
4.14.7 PSU-G ....................................................................................4-267
4.14.8 CGB HVPS .............................................................................4-269
4.14.9 CONTROLLER NVRAM AND DIMM ......................................4-270
Before Controller NVRAM Removal ..................................................4-270
Removal Procedure for Controller NVRAM .......................................4-271
After New NVRAM Installation ..........................................................4-272
4.14.10 CONTROLLER BOARD ..........................................................4-273
4.14.11 HDD ........................................................................................4-275
When installing new HDDs ................................................................4-276
Disposal of HDDs ..............................................................................4-276
4.14.12 IPU ..........................................................................................4-277
4.14.13 PSU-C .....................................................................................4-278
4.14.14 CONTROLLER FANS .............................................................4-278
Controller Fans 1 and 2.....................................................................4-278
Controller Fans 3 and 4.....................................................................4-279
4.14.15 PSU-EA1, EA2 AND -EB ........................................................4-280
4.15 FIERY CONTROLLER ......................................................................4-281
4.15.1 FIERY CONTROLLER LEFT AND RIGHT COVER ................4-281
4.15.2 FIERY CONTROLLER FRONT COVER .................................4-282
4.15.3 FIERY CONTROLLER TOP COVER AND OPERATION PANEL
BOARD 4-283
4.15.4 VIDEO BOARD .......................................................................4-284
4.15.5 FIERY CONTROLLER MOTHER BOARD, DIMM AND CPU .4-285
When reassembling ..........................................................................4-286
4.15.6 FIERY CONTROLLER PSU....................................................4-287
4.15.7 HDD UNIT ...............................................................................4-288
4.15.8 DVD DRIVE ............................................................................4-289
4.15.9 FIERY CONTROLLER FRONT FAN ......................................4-290
4.16 OTHERS ...........................................................................................4-291
D095/M077 xvi SM
4.16.1 DUST FILTERS ......................................................................4-291
After installing a new dust filter .........................................................4-292
4.16.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER .......................................................4-292
Cleaning Requirement ......................................................................4-292
4.16.3 PSU FILTER ...........................................................................4-293
Cleaning Requirement ......................................................................4-293
4.16.4 CONTROLLER FILTER ..........................................................4-293
Cleaning Requirement ......................................................................4-293
4.16.5 OZONE FILTERS ...................................................................4-294
After installing new ozone filters ........................................................4-294
4.17 DOCUMENT FEEDER (D095 ONLY) ...............................................4-295
4.17.1 ADF UNIT ...............................................................................4-295
4.17.2 ADF COVERS.........................................................................4-296
4.17.3 ADF ORIGINAL TRAY ............................................................4-296
Original Tray .....................................................................................4-297
Original Table Cover .........................................................................4-297
Bottom Plate .....................................................................................4-297
4.17.4 FEED UNIT AND SEPARATION ROLLER .............................4-297
4.17.5 FEED BELT ............................................................................4-298
4.17.6 PICK-UP ROLLER ..................................................................4-299
4.17.7 ADF SENSORS ......................................................................4-300
Entrance Sensor and Length Sensor ................................................4-300
Registration Sensor...........................................................................4-300
Width Sensors ...................................................................................4-301
Exit Sensor, Inverter Sensor .............................................................4-302
4.17.8 TRANSPORT BELT ................................................................4-303
4.17.9 ADF MOTORS ........................................................................4-304
Bottom Plate Motor, Pick-up Motor ...................................................4-304
Feed-in, Transport, Feed-out Motors ................................................4-305
4.17.10 FEED-IN CLUTCH ..................................................................4-306
4.18 SCANNER UNIT (D095 ONLY) ........................................................4-308
4.18.1 EXPOSURE GLASS ...............................................................4-308
4.18.2 OPTICS DUST FILTER ..........................................................4-309
4.18.3 TOP FRONT COVER .............................................................4-310
4.18.4 TOP LEFT COVER .................................................................4-311
4.18.5 TOP RIGHT COVER...............................................................4-311
4.18.6 TOP REAR COVER ................................................................4-312
4.18.7 LENS BLOCK .........................................................................4-312
SM xvii D095/M077
4.18.8 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS ...................................................4-313
4.18.9 EXPOSURE LAMPS ...............................................................4-314
4.18.10 LAMP REGULATORS ............................................................4-315
4.18.11 SCANNER HP SENSOR ........................................................4-316
4.18.12 SCANNER MOTOR ................................................................4-316
4.18.13 SCANNER DRIVE WIRES ......................................................4-317
Preparation .......................................................................................4-317
Front, Rear Scanner Drive Wires ......................................................4-318
Reinstallation ....................................................................................4-318
4.18.14 MCU (MOTOR CONTROL UNIT) ...........................................4-320
4.18.15 SIB (SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD) ..................................4-320
4.19 LCT-MF (D095 ONLY) ......................................................................4-322
4.19.1 COVERS .................................................................................4-322
4.19.2 INNER COVERS.....................................................................4-323
4.19.3 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ...................................4-324
4.19.4 TRAYS ....................................................................................4-325
4.19.5 SIDE FENCE ..........................................................................4-326
Front Side Fence...............................................................................4-326
Rear Side Fence ...............................................................................4-327
4.19.6 SIDE FENCE BLOWER ..........................................................4-328
Front Side Fence Blower ...................................................................4-328
Rear Side Fence Blower ...................................................................4-328
4.19.7 LCT PAPER LENGTH SENSOR ............................................4-330
4.19.8 PAPER FEED UNIT ................................................................4-332
4.19.9 PAPER FEED, PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ......4-333
4.19.10 PAPER FEED, PAPER END AND PAPER LIFT SENSORS ..4-335
Paper Lift Sensor ..............................................................................4-335
Paper Feed and Paper End Sensors ................................................4-335
4.19.11 LCT EXIT MOTOR ..................................................................4-336
4.19.12 LCT EXIT ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR ................................4-336
4.19.13 LCT VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR .................................4-337
4.19.14 LCT HORIZONTAL RELAY MOTOR ......................................4-338
4.19.15 LCT PAPER FEED MOTOR, LCT GRIP MOTOR ..................4-339
Reinstallation ....................................................................................4-339
4.19.16 LCT LIFT MOTOR ..................................................................4-340
4.19.17 LCT EXIT SENSOR ................................................................4-341
4.19.18 LCT PAPER EXIT ROLLER CONTACT SENSOR .................4-341
4.19.19 LCT VERTICAL TRANSPORT AND GRIP SENSORS ...........4-342
D095/M077 xviii SM
4.19.20 PAPER HEIGHT, PAPER WIDTH SENSORS ........................4-344
Paper Height Sensors .......................................................................4-344
Paper Width Sensors ........................................................................4-344
4.19.21 MAIN BOARD .........................................................................4-345
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................ 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION ...............................................5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK.....................................................5-1
5.1.2 TO SWITCH TO THE APL (APPLICATION) WINDOW FOR TEST
PRINTING...................................................................................................5-2
5.1.3 USING THE SP MODE ......................................................................5-2
Direct Entry ...........................................................................................5-2
Button Selection Entry...........................................................................5-2
5.1.4 SP MODE BUTTON SUMMARY .......................................................5-3
5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES ..................................................................5-5
5.2.1 SP TABLES .......................................................................................5-5
5.2.2 SERVICE TABLE KEY ......................................................................5-5
5.2.3 ABBREVIATIONS FOR SP SERVICE TABLES ................................5-6
5.3 USING SP MODE .....................................................................................5-12
5.3.1 CPM DOWN (SP1201) ....................................................................5-12
SP1107-018: Low Temp On/Off ..........................................................5-12
SP1201-001 and -002: Threshold Temperature for CPM Down .........5-12
SP1201-003 to -005: Low Temp.: CPM Down Rate ............................5-12
SP1201-006 to -011: CPM Down Rate and Mode Threshold Temp ...5-13
SP1201-012 to -023: CPM Down Rate for Each Mode .......................5-13
5.3.2 USING THE DEBUG LOG ...............................................................5-15
Overview .............................................................................................5-15
Switching On and Setting Up Save Debug Log ...................................5-15
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD.............................................5-19
Recording Errors Manually ..................................................................5-20
Debug Log Codes ...............................................................................5-21
5.3.3 PAPER LIBRARY ............................................................................5-22
5.4 TEST PATTERN PRINTING .....................................................................5-23
5.4.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2109 002 ......................................5-23
Test Pattern Table...............................................................................5-24
5.5 SMC LISTS ...............................................................................................5-25
5.6 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801 ...............................................................5-26
SM xix D095/M077
5.7 SOFTWARE AND SYSTEM SETTING RESET ........................................5-28
5.7.1 SOFTWARE RESET .......................................................................5-28
5.7.2 RESETTING THE SYSTEM ............................................................5-28
5.8 PM COUNTER ..........................................................................................5-29
5.8.1 ACCESSING THE PM COUNTERS ................................................5-29
All PM Parts List ..................................................................................5-30
Parts List for PM Yield Indicator ..........................................................5-32
Parts Exceeding Target Yield ..............................................................5-32
Counter Clear for Parts Exceeding Target Yield .................................5-33
Clear All PM Settings ..........................................................................5-33
Counter List Print Out..........................................................................5-34
5.9 FIRMWARE UPDATE ...............................................................................5-35
5.9.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN... ..................................................................5-35
5.9.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE ..............................................5-35
Operation Panel Update......................................................................5-36
Engine Update ....................................................................................5-37
5.9.3 VERIFYING THE FIRMWARE UPDATE .........................................5-37
Errors during Firmware Update ...........................................................5-38
5.9.4 FIERY CONTROLLER SYSTEM UPDATE .....................................5-40
Fiery System Installation .....................................................................5-40
Updating the Fiery Controller ..............................................................5-43
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 6-1
6.1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ...........................................................................6-1
6.1.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 RECOVERY METHODS ....................................................................6-1
6.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES ..........................................................6-2
6.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES ..........................................................................6-8
6.2.1 SP3812 001 (DEVSETUP EXECUTE) ERRORS ..............................6-8
6.2.2 PROCESS CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING ................................6-10
Summary of Process Control SC Codes .............................................6-10
Process Control Self-Check: SP3821 .................................................6-11
6.2.3 MUSIC ADJUSTMENT RESULT .....................................................6-21
6.3 FIERY CONTROLLER TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................6-22
6.4 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................6-23
6.5 IMAGE PROBLEMS .................................................................................6-24
6.5.1 WHITE SPOTS ................................................................................6-24
D095/M077 xx SM
Mylar at the PTR Timing Roller ...........................................................6-24
Vertical Transport Path from Trays 1 and 2 ........................................6-25
Paper Path from the LCT-MF or Optional LCT ....................................6-26
6.5.2 COLOR SPOTS ...............................................................................6-27
For Printer M077 .................................................................................6-27
For Copier D095..................................................................................6-27
6.5.3 BLURRED IMAGE ...........................................................................6-28
Blurred Image due to Ozone ...............................................................6-28
6.5.4 BLURRED TEXT .............................................................................6-29
How to Enable Toner Reduction .........................................................6-29
Side Effect ...........................................................................................6-30
6.5.5 WHITE LINES IN B/W MODE ..........................................................6-30
6.5.6 VERTICAL WHITE LINE ..................................................................6-30
Decision Flow ......................................................................................6-30
1. Countermeasure for Drum Problem ................................................6-30
2. Countermeasure for Fusing Belt Error ............................................6-31
6.5.7 WHITE SCATTERED DOTS ...........................................................6-32
Before doing countermeasures ...........................................................6-32
Countermeasures................................................................................6-33
6.5.8 BLACK SPOTS AT 125 MM INTERVAL ..........................................6-33
6.5.9 FUSING PROBLEM.........................................................................6-34
Paper Wrinkles/ Worm Tracks ............................................................6-34
6.6 PAPER PROBLEMS .................................................................................6-35
6.6.1 CONSECUTIVE JAM 38 (C JAM)....................................................6-35
6.6.2 COLOR PAPER AND PREPRINTED PAPER .................................6-36
6.6.3 SMALL SIZE PAPER .......................................................................6-36
6.6.4 DOUBLE FEED PROBLEM FROM LCT (MAIN AND OPTION) ......6-36
Changing the "Wide LCT Fan Duty Adjustment" (SP1920-xxx) ..........6-37
Turning on the LCT Heater .................................................................6-37
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray ...............6-38
6.6.5 NO PAPER FEED FROM LCT (MAIN AND OPTION) .....................6-39
6.7 OPERATION PROBLEMS ........................................................................6-41
6.7.1 CLEARING SC 471, 475 OR 476 ....................................................6-41
6.7.2 ITB CONDITION CHECK ................................................................6-42
6.7.3 STAPLING ERROR FOR FINISHER SR5000 (B830) .....................6-42
6.7.4 REAR CONTROLLER BOX CONNECTION ERROR ......................6-45
Problem Cause ...................................................................................6-45
Possible Cause List.............................................................................6-46
SM xxi D095/M077
Abnormal Image when CN412 or CN415 is Disconnected..................6-47
6.7.5 REMAINING TONER DETECTION ERROR ...................................6-48
Cleaning Procedure for the Toner Supply Tube ..................................6-48
6.7.6 OPERATION ERROR AFTER CONTROLLER SELECTION ..........6-49
Recovery of "Please wait" for Printer Model ........................................6-49
Recovery of No Communication with Controller for Copier Model ......6-49
6.8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ..................................................6-50
6.8.1 BROWN FUSE CONDITIONS .........................................................6-50
PSU Type-EA1 ....................................................................................6-50
PSU Type-EA2 ....................................................................................6-50
PSU Type-EB ......................................................................................6-51
PSU Type-G ........................................................................................6-51
PSU Type-Controller ...........................................................................6-51
6.9 JAM DETECTION .....................................................................................6-52
6.9.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY ....................................................................6-52
Paper Size Code .................................................................................6-52
6.9.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES .............................................6-53
Mainframe ...........................................................................................6-53
Finisher SR5000 (B830)......................................................................6-60
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835) .................................................6-62
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434).........................................................6-64
Z-folding Unit ZF4000 (B660) ..............................................................6-67
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455) ..............................................................6-69
High Capacity Stacker SK5000 (D447) ...............................................6-70
Perfect Binder (D391) .........................................................................6-74
Ring Binder RB5000 (D392) ...............................................................6-77
Buffer Pass Unit (M379) ......................................................................6-79
LCT-MF or LCIT RT5020 (D532) ........................................................6-81
D095/M077 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
SEE D095/M007 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES SECTION FOR DETAILED TABLE OF
CONTENTS
B331 A3/DLT TRAY UNIT TK5000
SEE SECTION B331 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
D095/M077 xxii SM
B660 Z-FOLDING UNIT ZF4000
SEE SECTION B660 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
B830 FINISHER SR5000
SEE SECTION B830 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
B833 MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000
SEE SECTION B833 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
B835 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5010
SEE SECTION B835 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
D434 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020
SEE SECTION D434 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
D447 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010
SEE SECTION D447 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
D454 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020
SEE SECTION D455 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
D452 LCIT RT5030
SEE SECTION D452 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
D532 FINISHER SR5050
SEE SECTION D532 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
M379 BUFFER PASS UNIT
SEE SECTION M379 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
M390 FUSER UNIT AIR SEPARATOR TYPE C901
SEE SECTION M390 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS
SM xxiii D095/M077
PRODUCT INFORMATION (Book 1)
POSITION 1
TAB
APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS (Book 2)
INSTALLATION (Book 1)
POSITION 2
APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (Book 2)
TAB
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (Book 1)
POSITION 3
APPENDIX: SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS (Book 2)
TAB
LCIT RT5030 (D452) (Book 3)
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT (Book 1)
POSITION 4
APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES (Book 2)
TAB
Z-FOLDING UNIT ZF4000 (B660) (Book 3)
FINISHER SR5000 (B830)
HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447)
BUFFER PASS UNIT (M379)
FUSER UNIT AIR SEPARATOR TYPE C901 (M390)
POSITION 5
TAB
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE (Book 1)
POSITION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING (Book 1) TAB
MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000 (B833) (Book 3)
POSITION 7
TAB
A3/DLT TRAY KIT (B331) (Book 3)
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5000 (B835)
Read This First
Safety, Conventions, Trademarks
Conventions
Symbol What it means
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
Harness clamp
The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe the direction of paper feed. The arrows indicate the
direction of paper feed.
Warnings, Cautions, Notes
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning
could result in death or serious injury.
A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could
result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,
loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
Commonly Used Terms
In the SP tables, the finishers are referred to by number (1, 2, 3), and some devices that
appear in the SP tables are not supported overseas:
Z-Fold This refers to the Z-Folding unit.
ITB Image Transfer Belt
PTR Paper Transfer Roller
PTB Paper Transport Belt
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this
manual handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
Switches and Symbols
Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the
meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer
Customer Engineer
Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have completed service
training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine.
Reference Material for Maintenance
Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer engineers).
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine.
Before Installation, Maintenance
Shipping and Moving the Machine
Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine. If the machine is heavy, two or
more customer engineers may be required to prevent injuries (muscle strains, spinal
injuries, etc.) or damage to the machine if it is dropped or tipped over.
Personnel moving or working around the machine should always wear proper
clothing and footwear. Never wear loose fitting clothing or accessories (neckties,
loose sweaters, bracelets, etc.) or casual footwear (slippers, sandals, etc.) when
lifting or moving the machine.
Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the product.
Before you move the product, arrange the power cord so it will not fall under the
product.
Power
Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After
switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other
devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds,
then unplug the machine from the power source.
Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do checks
or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears, timing
belts, etc.).
After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from
electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit,
gears, timing belts, etc.
Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments
After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the
machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping
materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for
installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This
also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal
operation.
Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use
your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines. Make sure the room
where the machine is to be installed is well ventilated and spacious. Good ventilation
is especially important when the machine is used heavily.
To avoid possible build-up of ozone, locate this machine in a large well ventilated
room that has an air turnover of more than 30m3/hr/person.
Special Tools
Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.
For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described in the
service manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could damage parts, could
damage the machine or cause injuries.
During Maintenance
General
Before you begin a maintenance procedure:
1. Switch the machine off.
2. Disconnect the all power plugs from the power source.
3. Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes.
Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces.
Safety Devices
Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace
safety devices immediately.
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification
or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal
injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating normally
and safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
For replacements, use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with the
machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine could
lead to a fire and personal injuries.
Organic Cleaners
During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.) other
than those described in the service manual.
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic
solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous.
Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part
that generates heat.
Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials to
prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg injuries.
Use dry rags to soak up spills.
Batteries
Always replace a battery with the same type of battery prescribed for use. Replacing
a battery with any type other than the one prescribed for use could lead to an
explosion.
Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other trash. Remove them from the
work site and dispose of them in accordance with local laws and regulations
regarding the disposal of such items.
Ozone Filters
Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as described in the
service manual).
An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone filters if
they are not replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause
personnel working around the machine to feel unwell.
Power Plug and Power Cord
Always disconnect the all power plugs for the mainframe and other peripherals
before doing any maintenance procedure. After switching off the machine, power is
still supplied to the main machine and other devices. To prevent electrical shock,
switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds, then unplug the machine from the
power source.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it if
necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power
cord if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short
circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock.
Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make
sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg.
Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a fire.
Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power
cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the
ground wire on the plug.
Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension cord.
When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the plug,
not the cable.
After Installation, Servicing
Disposal of Used Items
Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges.
Toner or toner cartridges thrown into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious
injury. At the work site, always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with
plastic bags to avoid spillage before disposal or removal.
Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.)
in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such
items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste from
consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items at one of
our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
Return used selenium drums to the service center for handling in accordance with
company policy regarding the recycling or disposal of such items.
Points to Confirm with Operators
At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine.
Emphasize the following points.
Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems by
following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
Point out the parts inside the machine that should never be touched or attempted to
remove.
Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the
machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understood all the safety instructions described in
the operating instructions.
Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug,
not the cord) if any of the following events occur:
1) Something has spilled into the product.
2) Service or repair of the product is necessary.
3) The product cover has been damaged.
Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They should
never allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall into the
machine.
Special Safety Instructions for Toner
Accidental Physical Exposure
Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to
avoid spilling toner on clothing or the hands.
If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to
a well ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek
medical attention.
If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If
there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner.
If there are signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold
water. Never use hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain
fabric.
Handling and Storing Toner
Toner, used toner, and developer are extremely flammable.
Never store toner, developer, toner cartridges, or toner bottles (including empty toner
bottles or cartridges) in a location where they will be exposed to high temperature or
an open flame.
Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages,
cartridges, and bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges) out of
the reach of children.
Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location
that is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Rev. 06/02/2011
Toner Disposal
Never attempt to incinerate toner, used toner, or empty toner containers (bottles or
cartridges). Burning toner can explode and scatter, causing serious burns.
Always wrap used toner and empty toner bottles and cartridges in plastic bags to
avoid spillage. Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such
items.
Dispose of used toner and toner cartridges at one of our dealers or at an authorized
collection site. Always dispose of used toner cartridges and toner bottles in
accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
Safety Instructions for this Machine
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure
that the machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged.
2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open
while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically
driven components.
5. If the [Start] key is pressed before the machine completes the warm-up period (the [Start]
key starts blinking red and green), keep hands away from the mechanical and the
electrical components as the machine starts making copies as soon as the warm-up
period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine
is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
⇒7. Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an
explosion might occur.
Health Safety Conditions
1. Never operate the machine without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified types at the proper intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident,
it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water
as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
1. The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if
replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer
recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used
NVRAM must be handled in accordance with local regulations.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when
exposed to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local
regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more
than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may
lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based
optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a
location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a
qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer
engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or
service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit
section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with
those marks.
Safety Instructions for Fiery Controller
Fuse Caution
This controller uses a double pole fuse. Be careful when you do maintenance on the Fiery
Controller after the fuse circuit has been opened.
Double Pole/ Neutral Fusing
Batteries
WARNING:
Always replace a battery with the same type of battery prescribed for use. Replacing a
battery with any type other than the one prescribed for use could lead to an explosion.
Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other trash. Remove them from the
work site and dispose of them in accordance with local laws and regulations regarding
the disposal of such items.
PRODUCT INFORMATION
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
Specifications
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
Information
Product
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
See "Appendices" for the following information:
Specifications
SM 1-1 D095/M077
Machine Configuration
1.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1.2.1 PRINTER M077
Machine
No. Item Comments
Code
1 Mainframe M077 90 ppm
Common with AG-P1
2 Multi-Bypass Tray BY5000 B833
Alternate paper feed source
Unique
LCIT RT5050 D532
B832 or D532
3
Common with AG-P1
LCIT RT5000 B832
B832 or D532
Child option for use when installing
4 - Bridge Unit BU5000 D379
two LCTs (D532)
Unique
5 LCIT RT5050 D532
2nd LCT
6 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 M379 Common with AG-P1
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010
7 B835 Common with AG-P1
(Transport Unit)
Inserts cover sheets (2 trays).
8 Cover Interposer Tray (Tray Unit) B835
D095/M077 1-2 SM
Machine Configuration
Machine
No. Item Comments
Information
Code
Product
Common with AG-P1
9 Z-Folding Unit B660
Z-Folds large sheets
10 Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 D391 Common with B-C4 (K-C2)
Common with B-C4 (K-C2)
D391 is required.
11 Perfect Binder GB5000*1 D391
Only one of these (D391, D392 or
D447) can be installed.
Common with B-C4 (K-C2)
1
12 Ring Binder RB5000* D392 Only one of these (D391, D392 or
D447) can be installed.
Two stackers can be installed.
13 High Capacity Stacker SK5000 D447 Only one of these (D391, D392 or
D447) can be installed.
Common with AG-P1
14 Finisher SR5000 B830
Corner stapling, edge stapling
Common with AG-P1
15 - Punch Unit PU5000 B831
Child option for Finisher B830
Common with B-C4
16 Finisher SR5020 D434 Booklet stapling, corner stapling,
edge stapling
Common with B-C4
17 - Punch Unit PU 5020 B449
Child option for Finisher D434
18 Trimmer Unit TR5020 D455 Common with B-C4
19 - Tab Sheet Holder Type3260 B499 Common with AG-P1
20 - A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5000 B331 Common with AG-P1
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type
21 M390 Unique
C901
*1: Neither Perfect Binder (D391) nor Ring Binder (D392) can be installed in the M078 or
D097 model.
SM 1-3 D095/M077
Machine Configuration
1.2.2 COPIER D095
Machine
No. Item Comments
Code
1 Mainframe D095 90 cpm/ ppm
The ADF and Scanner are built
2 LCT-MF D095
into this LCT.
Child option for use when
3 - Bridge Unit BU5000 D379
installing optional LCT (D532)
Common with AG-C1
4 Multi-Bypass Tray BY5000 B833
Alternate paper feed source
5 LCIT RT5050 D532 Unique
6 Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 M379 Common with AG-C1
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010
7 B835 Common with AG-C1
(Transport Unit)
Inserts cover sheets (2 trays).
8 Cover Interposer Tray (Tray Unit) B835
Common with AG-C1
9 Z-Folding Unit B660
Z-Folds large sheets
10 Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 D391 Common with B-C4 (K-C2)
D095/M077 1-4 SM
Machine Configuration
Information
Machine
Product
No. Item Comments
Code
Common with B-C4 (K-C2)
D391 is required.
11 Perfect Binder GB5000*1 D391
Only one of these (D391, D392
or D447) can be installed.
Common with B-C4 (K-C2)
12 Ring Binder RB5000*1 D392 Only one of these (D391, D392
or D447) can be installed.
Two stackers can be installed.
13 High Capacity Stacker SK5000 D447 Only one of these (D391, D392
or D447) can be installed.
Common with AG-P1
14 Finisher SR5000 B830
Corner stapling, edge stapling
Common with AG-P1
15 - Punch Unit PU5000 B831
Child option for Finisher B830
Common with B-C4
16 Finisher SR5020 D434 Booklet stapling, corner
stapling, edge stapling
Common with B-C4
17 - Punch Unit PU 5020 B449
Child option for Finisher D434
18 Trimmer Unit TR5020 D455 Common with B-C4
19 - Tab Sheet Holder Type3260 B499 Common with AG-C1
20 - A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5000 B331 Common with AG-C1
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type
21 M390 Unique
C901
*1: Neither Perfect Binder (D391) nor Ring Binder (D392) can be installed in the M078 or
D097 model.
SM 1-5 D095/M077
Overview
1.3 OVERVIEW
1.3.1 MACHINE LAYOUT
1. Toner Hopper Unit
6. Registration Unit
2. Operation Panel
7. Paper Feed Unit
3. Laser Unit
8. Duplex Feed Path
4. PCDU (Photoconductor and
9. Fusing Unit
Development Unit)
10. Paper Exit Unit
5. ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit
D095/M077 1-6 SM
Overview
1.3.2 PAPER PATH
Information
Product
Printer (M077) model
1. Paper Exit Path (for next peripheral) 6. Paper Feed Path (from optional tray 3
2. Paper Transport Path and 4)
3. Paper Entrance Path (from optional LCT) 7. Paper Feed Path (from tray 1 and 2)
4. Bypass Tray Path 8. Duplex Path
5. Paper Entrance Path (from optional 2nd 9. Switchback Path
LCT) 10. Inverter Path
SM 1-7 D095/M077
Overview
Copier (D095) model
1. Paper Exit Path (for next peripheral)
7. Paper Feed Path (from tray 3 and 4)
2. Paper Transport Path
8. Paper Feed Path (from tray 1 and 2)
3. Paper Entrance Path (from LCT-MF)
9. Duplex Path
4. DF Scanning Path
10. Switchback Path
5. DF Scanning Path: Duplex Scanning
11. Inverter Path
6. Paper Transport Path (from optional LCT)
D095/M077 1-8 SM
Overview
1.3.3 FAN LOCATION
Information
Product
No. Description Air In / Out
1 Laser Unit MY In
2 Laser Unit KC In
3 Development CK Fan Out
4 Registration Fan Out
5 PTB Fan 2 Out
6 PTB Fan 1 Out
7 PTR Unit Cooling Fan Out
8 PTB Cooling Fan In
9 Paper Cooling Fan 3 In
10 ITB Fan In
SM 1-9 D095/M077
Overview
No. Description Air In / Out
10 Development Fan In
11 Fusing Fan 4 Out
12 Fusing Fan 1 Out
13 Fusing Fan 2 Out
14 Fusing Fan 3 Out
15 Paper Cooling Fan 1 Out
16 Paper Cooling Fan 2 In
17 Exit Fan Out
18 Fusing Exhaust Fan 3 Out
19 Fusing Exhaust Fan 2 Out
20 Fusing Exhaust Fan 1 Out
D095/M077 1-10 SM
Overview
No. Description Air In / Out
Information
Product
21 PSU Fan5 In
22 PSU Fan 4 In
23 Fusing Fan 6 Out
PSU Fan 3 Out
24 PSU Fan 2 Out
PSU Fan 1 Out
25 Controller Fan4 In
26 Controller Fan3 In
Plotter Cooling Fan 1 Out
27 Plotter Cooling Fan 2 Out
Plotter Cooling Fan 3 Out
28 Controller Fan2 Out
29 Fusing Fan 5 In
30 Controller Fan1 Out
31 Ozone Fan Out
SM 1-11 D095/M077
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
1.4 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH
PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
The D095 and M077 are successor models to the D016 and G178. If you have experience
with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this
manual.
Different Points from Predecessor Products
D095/M077 D016/G178
Controller Standard external Fiery Standard embedded Fiery
Toner Chemical toner/ Oil less Pulverized Toner
Max. Paper Simplex: 300 g/m2 Simplex: 300 g/m2
Thickness Duplex: 300 g/m2 Duplex: 220 g/m2
Operation Panel New Operation Panel Common Panel with
Katana series
New TCRU Units Feed Rollers and Fusing Unit -
Energy Star Yes No
Longer Durability Max. Monthly: 350K Max. Monthly:240K
Life: 21,000K Life: 14,400K
Fusing Unit No Oil Cleaning System Oil Cleaning System
Fusing Unit Air Optional Not available
Separation
Attention Light Yes No
New Peripherals Booklet Finisher SR5020 -
Trimmer Unit TR5020
High Capacity Stacker SK5010
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type
C901
Data Overwrite Standard (Installed in SD slot 1) Optional
Security Unit
D095/M077 1-12 SM
INSTALLATION
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
25 ~ 26 3/14/2011 Installing the operation panel unit
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Installation
1. Temperature Range
Recommended Temp.: 23°C (73.4°F)
Allowed Temp.: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 90°F) – See the Note below
2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% Rh
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or strong
light.)
4. Ventilation: Air must be replaced a minimum of 3 times per hour
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.10 mg/m3
If the machine is installed in a location where the ambient temperature is more
than 30°C (86°F): (1) Do not run full color printing longer than 2 hours, and (2)
never turn the main power switch off immediately after a long print job.
Leave the machine on so that the fans can expel the hot air from the machine
and cool the electronic components.
If this machine is to be used in a high temperature and high humidity condition,
the tray heater is required to get the proper print quality. Connect the tray heater
harness during the mainframe installation ( p.2-14 "Mainframe").
SM 2-1 D095/M077
Installation Requirements
6. If the installation area has air-conditioners or heaters, put the machine in a location that
agrees with these conditions:
Where there are no sudden temperature changes from low to high, or high to low.
Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in the summer.
Where it will not be directly exposed to reflected heat from a heater in the winter
7. Do not put the machine where it will be exposed to gases that can cause corrosion.
8. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 feet) above sea level.
9. Put the mainframe on a strong and level surface. The front and rear of the machine must
be less than 2.5 mm (0.1") away from level.
10. Do not put the machine where there could be strong vibrations.
11. Do not connect the machine to the same power source as other electrical devices.
12. The machine can make an electromagnetic field, and this can cause interference with
radio or television reception.
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL
Front to rear: Less than 2.5 mm (0.1") away from level
Right to left: Less than 5.0 mm (0.2") away from level
The machine feet can be turned to adjust them up or down, to make the machine level. For
details, see the "Leveling the Main Machine" in the "p.2-14 "Mainframe.”
D095/M077 2-2 SM
Installation Requirements
2.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Put the mainframe near the power source. Minimum clearance must be as shown below. The
same amount of clearance is necessary when optional peripheral devices are installed.
Installation
2.1.4 DIMENSIONS
SM 2-3 D095/M077
Installation Requirements
Side View with Finisher SR5000 (B830) or SR5020 (D434)
Mainframe: Printer M077
*1: Including the top right cover
Mainframe: Copier D095
*1: Including the top right cover
Side View with Ring Binder RB5000 (D392)
Mainframe: Printer M077
*1: Including the top right cover
D095/M077 2-4 SM
Installation Requirements
Mainframe: Copier D095
Installation
*1: Including the top right cover
Side View with Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391)
Mainframe: Printer M077
*1: Including the top right cover
Mainframe: Copier D095
*1: Including the top right cover
SM 2-5 D095/M077
Installation Requirements
Side View with High Capacity Stacker SK5000 (D364)
Mainframe: Printer M077
*1: Including the top right cover
Mainframe: Copier D095
*1: Including the top right cover
2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS
Make sure that the wall outlet is near the mainframe and that you can get access to it
easily. Make sure the plug is tightly connected to the outlet.
Do not connect more than one electrical device to the same power outlet.
Be sure to ground the machine.
Do not put objects on the power cord.
Input voltage level
North America 208 to 240V, 50/60 Hz: More than 24 A
Europe/Asia 220/230/240V, 50/60 Hz: More than 25 A
Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10%
D095/M077 2-6 SM
Installation Requirements
Required Breaker
The operating area where the machine is to be installed must have a required breaker for the
power line.
North America: Listed circuit breaker, rating:240V30A, double pole
Europe: Circuit breaker, rating:240V30A, double pole
Installation
Do not turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To
prevent damage to the hard disk or memory, push the operation switch to turn the
power off, then do nothing until the power LED goes off, and then turn the main
power switch off.
There are two power switches on the machine:
Main Power Switch
This is located inside the front left cover of the machine. This switch must always be on
unless a technician does work on the machine.
Operation Switch
This is located on the top-right side of the operation panel. This is the switch that the
customer uses to turn the machine on and off.
SM 2-7 D095/M077
Installation Requirements
2.1.6 CORRECT PROCEDURE TO TURN OFF THE POWER
Shut the Fiery Controller Down First
The Fiery controller must be shut down before turning off the power supply to the Fiery
controller. Therefore, turn off the Fiery controller first at the operation panel before turning off
the main power switch of the machine.
Use the "Shut Down" button on the operation panel to turn off the Fiery controller.
Do not turn off the main power switch of the mainframe before shutting down the Fiery
controller.
The shut down procedure for the Fiery controller is described below.
1. Press the "Fiery" tab on the operation panel.
2. Press the "Restart Fiery" button on the operation panel.
3. Press the "Shut Down" button on the operation panel.
The shutdown can be also done with the Service Menu of the Fiery controller. If you have
mistakenly turned off the machine first, use the "Service Menu" of the Fiery controller.
1. Press the button [A] (Menu) on the operation panel of the Fiery controller.
2. Select "Shut Down System" with the button [B].
Then Shut Down the Machine
1. Push the operation switch to turn the power off
2. When the power LED goes off, turn the main power switch off.
Do not turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
D095/M077 2-8 SM
Before You Begin...
2.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN...
2.2.1 OVERVIEW OF OPTIONAL PERIPHERALS
Optional Peripherals Configuration for Printer M077
Installation
There are many peripherals available for this machine. Install them in this order:
1. Mainframe (M077)
2. Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (B833)
This unit must be installed on the LCIT RT5050 (D532) before the LCT is docked
to the mainframe.
3. LCIT RT5050 (D532) or LCIT RT5030 (D452)
4. Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
This unit is required only when two LCITs RT5050 are installed at the same time.
Otherwise, it is not required.
5. LCIT RT5050 (D532)
6. Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 (M379)
7. Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835: Transport Unit)
8. Cover Interposer Tray (B835: Tray Unit)
SM 2-9 D095/M077
Before You Begin...
The Transport Unit (base) of the Cover Interposer Tray is narrow and cannot
fully support its tray unit. Part of the tray unit must rest on top of the Z-folding unit
(or the next peripheral device installed to the left of the cover interposer).
To prevent the Cover Interposer Tray from falling, always install the next
peripheral device in line before installing the tray unit "8" of the Cover Interposer
Tray.
9. Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
This unit cannot be installed in the same line as the High Capacity Stacker
SK5010 (D447) if two stacker units are to be installed in the mainframe.
10. Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 (D391)
This unit is a child option for the Perfect Binder GB5000. This is required when
the Perfect Binder GB5000 is installed in the mainframe.
One of the following units can be installed in the same line.
11: Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391)
12: Ring Binder RB5000 (D392)
13: High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447),
11. Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391)
12. Ring Binder RB5000 (D392)
13. High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
Two "High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)" units can be installed with the
mainframe at the same time.
If two stacker units are to be installed in the mainframe, Z-Folding Unit ZF4000
(B660) cannot be installed in the same line as the two stacker units.
14. Finisher SR5000 (B830)
15. Punch Unit PU 5000 (B831)
For Finisher SR5000 (B830) only
16. Finisher SR5020 (D434)
17. Punch Unit PU 5020 (B449)
For Finisher SR5020 (D434) only
18. Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455)
This unit requires the Finisher SR5020 (D434).
Other Options
These remaining options can be installed at any time and in any order.
19. Tab Sheet Holder Type3260 (B499)
D095/M077 2-10 SM
Before You Begin...
Option for tandem tray
20. A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5000 (B331)
Option for tandem tray
21. Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
22. Cooling Fan Unit Type 5000 (not shown)
Option for Finisher SR5000 (B830) only
Installation
23. Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (not shown)
24. VM Card Type F (not shown)
Optional Peripherals Configuration for Copier D095
There are many peripherals available for this machine. Install them in this order:
1. Mainframe (D095)
2. LCT-MF (D095)
3. Vertical and Horizontal Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
This unit is required only when the optional LCIT RT5050 is installed. Otherwise,
it is not required.
4. Multi Bypass Tray BY5000 (B833)
This unit must be installed on the LCIT RT5050 (D532) before the LCT is docked
to the LCT-MF.
5. LCIT RT5050 (D532)
6. Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 (M379)
7. Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835: Transport Unit and Tray)
8. Cover Interposer Tray (B835: Tray Unit)
SM 2-11 D095/M077
Before You Begin...
The "Transport Unit (base)" of the "Cover Interposer Tray" is narrow and cannot
fully support its tray unit. Part of the tray unit must rest on top of the Z-folding unit
(or the next peripheral device installed to the left of the cover interposer).
To prevent the "Cover Interposer Tray" from falling, always install the next
peripheral device in line before installing the tray unit "8" of the "Cover Interposer
Tray.”
9. Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
This unit cannot be installed in the same line as the High Capacity Stacker
SK5010 (D447) if two stacker units are to be installed in the mainframe.
10. Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 (D391)
This unit is a child option for the Perfect Binder GB5000. This is required when
the Perfect Binder GB5000 is installed in the mainframe.
One of the following units can be installed in the same line.
11: Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391)
12: Ring Binder RB5000 (D392)
13: High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447),
11. Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391)
12. Ring Binder RB5000 (D392)
13. High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
Two "High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)" units can be installed with the
mainframe at the same time.
I If two stacker units are to be installed in the mainframe, Z-Folding Unit ZF4000
(B660) cannot be installed in the same line as the two stacker units.
14. Finisher SR5000 (B830)
15. Punch Unit PU 5000 (B831)
For Finisher SR5000 (B830) only
16. Finisher SR5020 (D434)
17. Punch Unit PU 5020 (B449)
For Finisher SR5020 (D434) only
18. Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455)
This unit requires the Finisher SR5020 (D434).
D095/M077 2-12 SM
Before You Begin...
Other Options
These remaining options can be installed at any time and in any order.
19. Tab Sheet Holder Type3260 (B499)
Option for tandem tray
20. A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5000 (B331)
Option for tandem tray
Installation
21. Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
22. Cooling Fan Unit Type 5000 (not shown)
Option for Finisher SR5000 (B830) only
23. Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (not shown)
24. VM Card Type F (not shown)
SM 2-13 D095/M077
Mainframe
2.3 MAINFRAME
2.3.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
No. Figure-1 Description Q'ty
1 Sponge Strip 1
2 IF Connector Cover 1
3 Original Exit Tray 1
4 Leveling Shoe 4
5 Screw: M4x16 2
6 Screw: M4x8 6
7 Screw: M4x20 2
8 Washer Screw: M4x8 1
9 Stud Screw 2
D095/M077 2-14 SM
Mainframe
No. Figure-1 Description Q'ty
10 Upper Pin 2
11 Lower Pin 2
12 Decal for Face-up 1
Installation
13 Washer (for Grand Cable of LCT-MF) 1
14 Decal for Paper Loading 2
15 Decal for Paper Tray 1
16 Decal for Scale 2
17 Decal for Paper Size 1
SM 2-15 D095/M077
Mainframe
No. Figure-2 Description Q'ty
1 Decal for Paper Loading 2
2 Brand Logo Plate (only for EU model) 5
3 Decal for Paper Size 1
4 Grease Dispenser 1
5 Heater Guide 1
6 Top Right Cover (LCT-MF) 1
7 Support Tray for Finisher SR5000 (B830) 1
8 Shift Tray for Finisher SR5000 (B830) 1
9 Wrench 1
D095/M077 2-16 SM
Mainframe
Installation
No. Figure-3 Description Q'ty
1 Screw: M4x8 2
2 Screw: M3x6 2
3 Bind Screw: M4x8 4
4 Ground Plate 1
5 Leveling Shoe 4
6 SD Slot Cover 1
7 Manual Pocket 1
8 Relay Guide Plate for Finisher SR5000 (B830) 1
9 Entrance Guide Plate (A) 1
10 Entrance Guide Plate (B) 1
11 Entrance Guide Plate (C) 1
12 Mylar for Finisher SR5000 (B830) 1
SM 2-17 D095/M077
Mainframe
No. Figure-4 Description Q'ty
1 Screw: M3x8 3
2 Screw: M4x6 4
3 Attention Light 1
4 Developer Bottle for Each Color 4
5 Function Name Plate for NA and AA only 1
6 Keytop for Controller 2
7 Operation Panel Unit 1
8 Operation Panel Rear Upper Cover 1
9 Operation Panel Rear Lower Cover 1
- T6000 (70W) A4/LT (100 sheets) 1
D095/M077 2-18 SM
Mainframe
2.3.2 INSTALLATION
Rating Voltage for Peripherals
Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
Right Side
Installation
[A]: LCT "Rating Voltage of Output Connector for Accessory: Max. DC 24 V"
[B]: LCT Tray Heaters "Rating Voltage of Output Connector for Accessory: Max. AC 240 V
±10%"
Left Side
[C]: Finishers "Rating Voltage of Output Connector for Accessory: Max. DC 24 V"
SM 2-19 D095/M077
Mainframe
External Tape and Packing Material
Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do
these procedures. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
1. Remove all tapes and packing material from the mainframe.
2. To set the leveling shoes at the rear side, open the rear controller box ( p.4-29)
3. Set the leveling shoes [1] under the feet [2], then level the machine.
D095/M077 2-20 SM
Mainframe
Maximum lift height between a floor and one of casters is 5 mm. Do not lift the
machine over the maximum lift height (5 mm).
Leveling the Mainframe
The level between front side and rear side of the mainframe must be within ± 2.5 mm/1,000
Installation
mm. Adjust the machine's level by adjusting the four feet under the machine.
1. Open the front doors.
2. Open the waste toner bottle door [1].
3. Take out the waste toner bottle [2].
4. Place the leveling device [3] in 20 mm [4] from the bottom edge of the waste toner bottle
housing as shown above.
5. Check the level and adjust the four feet to keep the machine level.
Front to rear: Less than 2.5 mm (0.1")/1,000 mm away from level
If the front side is lower than the rear side:
Lift the front side of the machine by adjusting both feet at the front side only. Do not
adjust both sides' feet (front and rear) at the same time.
SM 2-21 D095/M077
Mainframe
If the front side is higher than the rear side:
Lift the rear side of the machine by adjusting both feet at the rear side only. Do not adjust
both sides' feet (front and rear) at the same time.
6. Install the waste toner bottle [5] in its housing.
7. Close the waste toner bottle door.
8. Close the left and right front doors.
9. Close the rear controller box ( x 4: upper x 2, lower x 2).
10. Reattach the rear top cover ( x 3).
Internal Tape and Packing Material
1. Open the front left and right doors.
2. Open tray 1.
3. Remove the bracket [1] with the red tag ( x 1).
4. Remove all strips of tape and retainers.
5. Close tray 1.
D095/M077 2-22 SM
Mainframe
Installation
6. Open tray 2.
7. Remove all strips of tape.
8. Remove the bracket [2] with the red tag ( x 1).
9. Close tray 2.
10. Press down the lock lever of the fusing drawer unit, and then pull out the fusing unit.
11. Remove all tape and retainers from the fusing drawer unit.
12. Push in the fusing drawer unit.
13. Press down the lock lever of the registration drawer unit, and then pull out the registration
drawer unit.
SM 2-23 D095/M077
Mainframe
14. Remove all strips of tape, tags, and retainers from the registration unit.
Install the Toner Bottles
The toner bottles contain pre-mixed developer.
1. Open the toner hopper door.
2. Install the toner bottles in the toner bottle tank.
Shake each toner bottle several times before installing in the toner bottle tank.
3. Close the toner hopper door.
D095/M077 2-24 SM
Rev. 3/14/2011 Mainframe
⇒ Installing the Operation Panel Unit
Installation
1. Take the operation panel unit [1] from the accessory box.
2. Set the operation panel unit on the operation panel bracket [2].
3. Attach the operation panel lower cover [3] to the operation panel bracket ( M4x8 x 2).
4. Hang the operation panel [4] on the operation panel bracket [5].
5. Secure the operation panel and connect two connectors to the relay connectors from the
mainframe ( M4x6 x 4, x 1, x 2)
Make sure the control panel is attached with the rounded tip M4x6 screws to
prevent the control panel from contacting the operation panel.
The three-pin harness in the bundle of operation panel harnesses is not used.
SM 2-25 D095/M077
Mainframe Rev. 3/14/2011
6. Attach the operation panel upper cover [5] ( x 2 each: M4x8).
Keytop Adjustment
Only for Pro C901, the keytop adjustment is required depending on the model's destination.
See the keytpo configuration for each model below.
For NA and AA models:
Fiery Controller
Other
Remove the blank keys, and then install the function name plate [1] and controller
function key top [2].
For EU models:
Fiery Controller
D095/M077 2-26 SM
Mainframe
Other
Remove the blank key, and then install the controller function key top [1].
Installation
Attaching the Ground Plate
1. Attach the ground plate [1] to the left bottom of the mainframe ( x 2).
If the Perfect Binder RB5000 (D391) is to be attached to the mainframe directly, do
not attach the ground plate [1].
SM 2-27 D095/M077
Mainframe
Installing the Attention Light
1. Connect the cable [1] from the controller box of the mainframe to the connector [2] of the
attention light.
2. Stand the attention light [3] on the top of the controller box, and then fasten the attention
light ( x 3; M3x8).
Connecting the Upper and Lower Tray Heaters
The machine comes from the factory with the tray heaters already installed but disconnected.
Tray heater connection is optional. The heaters should be connected if the location has high
temperature and high humidity.
Consult with the customer before connecting the tray heaters.
Doing this procedure connects the following tray heaters inside the mainframe at the
following locations:
One unit below the tandem tray
One unit below tray 2
One unit below the lower tray of the optional LCT
There are two ways to connect the tray heaters. If coated paper is mainly used, connect the
tray heaters connector to "CN606.”
D095/M077 2-28 SM
Mainframe
Engine ON Engine OFF
Connecting to CN602 Tray heaters: OFF Tray heaters: ON
Connecting to CN606 Tray heaters: ON Tray heaters: ON
Installation
"Engine ON" is "Low Power Mode", "Stand-by Mode" and "Engine Operating.”
"Engine OFF" is "Main Power OFF", "Operation Switch OFF" and "Sleep Mode.”
1. Switch off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord from the power source.
(Refer to p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power " in "Installation Requirements"
for how to turn off the machine without causing damage to the components.)
2. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
To set the connector
3. Release the heater harness [1] ( x 1)
4. Connect the white connector [1] to CN602 [2].
To connect the tray heaters connector to CN606
SM 2-29 D095/M077
Mainframe
5. First, connect the tray heaters connector to CN602 (see the procedure above).
6. Disconnect the 7-pin connector [1] from the relay connector (9 pins) [2].
7. Connect the 7-pin connector [1] to CN606 [3].
Connecting the LCT-MF (D095 only)
Turn off the machine and unplug it from the power source before you start the
installation procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
When removing the LCT-MF from the mainframe, make sure that all cables and
harnesses of the LCT-MF to the mainframe are disconnected.
Preparing for LCT-MF Installation
Outside of the ADF
1. Remove all tapes on the ADF.
D095/M077 2-30 SM
Mainframe
IF Cable and Feed Unit
Installation
1. Remove the retainer in the ADF and the tape on the I/F cable.
Under the ADF
2. Open the ADF, and then remove all tapes and retainers under the ADF and the tapes on
the exposure glass.
SM 2-31 D095/M077
Mainframe
LCT-MF
1. Remove all tapes and retainers on the LCT-MF.
In the Tray of the LCT-MF
2. Remove all tapes in the upper and lower trays of the LCT-MF.
Inside the Front Left Cover of the LCT-MF
D095/M077 2-32 SM
Mainframe
Installation
3. Remove all tapes inside the front left cover of the LCT-MF.
Connecting LCT-MF
4. Remove the covers from the right side of the mainframe.
Cover [A]: ( x 1), others: (hooks)
SM 2-33 D095/M077
Mainframe
5. Install the upper pins [1] with the grooved rings on the right upper cover.
6. Install the lower pins [2] on the right lower cover.
7. Remove the lower rear left cover [3] of the LCT-MF ( x 5)
8. Open the front door of the LCT-MF and remove screw [4].
D095/M077 2-34 SM
Mainframe
Installation
9. Remove the ground plate [5] ( x 2).
10. Turn over the ground plate and use the screws to fasten it to the same holes ( x 2).
11. Release the ground cable [6] (tape x 1, x 2).
12. If the tray heater will not be used, keep the LCT-MF tray heater relay harness [7]
clamped.
13. Move the LCT-MF to the right side of the mainframe.
14. Fasten the ground cable [8] with the washer [9] to the mainframe ( x 1).
15. If the tray heater of the LCT-MF will be used, attach the LCT-MF heater relay harness
[10] to the mainframe.
SM 2-35 D095/M077
Mainframe
If the customer will use coated paper in high temperature and high humidity
conditions, the tray heater of the LCT-MF is greatly needed. Connect the
LCT-MF relay harness at this moment.
16. Attach the cushion [11] to the top right side of the mainframe.
17. Align the LCT-MF on the joint pins and then move the LCT-MF much closer.
18. Dock the LCT-MF with the right side of the mainframe, after confirming that the ground
cable and LCT-MF tray heater relay harness are not pinched between the LCT-MF and
the mainframe.
19. Fasten screw [12] to lock the LCT-MF to the side of the mainframe.
20. Close the front door of the LCT-MF.
21. Reattach the lower rear left cover to the LCT-MF ( x 5).
D095/M077 2-36 SM
Mainframe
Installation
22. Attach I/F connectors [13] of the LCT-MF to the mainframe.
When removing the LCT-MF from the mainframe, make sure that all cables and
harnesses of the LCT-MF to the mainframe are disconnected.
23. Attach the IF connector cover [14] ( x 2: M4x16).
24. Insert the leveling shoes [15] (x 4) under the leveling feet and level the LCT-MF.
25. Adjust the LCT-MF level within ±5 mm by rotating each nut on the leveling shoes.
SM 2-37 D095/M077
Mainframe
26. Attach the stud screws [16] to the right side of the LCT-MF.
27. Attach the top right cover [17] ( x 2: M4x20).
Do not install the stud screws [16] and top right cover [17] if the optional LCT
(D532) is to be installed in addition to the LCT-MF.
28. Attach the original output tray [18] ( x 2: M4x8)
D095/M077 2-38 SM
Mainframe
Installation
29. Connect the I/F cable [19] of the ADF to the LCT-MF.
30. Attach the "Tray 3" decal above the line [20] on the LCT-MF and the "Tray 4" decal above
the line [21].
When attaching these decals, align the bottom edge of each decal with the line
on the each tray cover.
31. Change the tray size with User Tools (Tray Paper Settings).
Testing the Breaker Switch and Attaching the Caution Decal
This machine has two breaker switches at the left side of the controller box. Two switches are
used as follows:
For Main: This interrupts the DC power to the mainframe.
For Heater: This interrupts the power to the fusing unit. (SC547)
1. Plug the power cord into its power source.
SM 2-39 D095/M077
Mainframe
Do not turn on the copier. The copier should be off.
2. Use the tip of a small screwdriver to push the breaker test button.
The breaker switch should flip to the "O" position. This indicates that the breaker switch is
operating normally.
If the breaker switch does not flip to the "O" position, the switch must be replaced.
3. Raise the switch to the "|" position for normal operation.
The copier will not turn on if the breaker switch is not returned to the "|" position.
Connecting to the Controller
1. Place the controller on a flat floor.
For details about the installation requirements for the controller, refer to the
service manual for each controller.
2. Connect the power cable [1] to the power cord socket on the rear side of the controller.
D095/M077 2-40 SM
Mainframe
Only use the power cord that is provided with the controller or an appropriate
replacement power cord available from an authorized provider.
Installation
3. Connect the LAN cable [2] to the Gigabit Ethernet slot [3] at the right-rear.
4. Connect the LAN cable [4] from the mainframe to the lower network cable slot [5] of the
controller.
5. Connect the cable from the client network to the upper network cable slot [6] of the
controller.
SM 2-41 D095/M077
Mainframe
Turn on the Machine Power
1. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
To access this switch, you must open the front left door.
2. Enter SP2253-006 with the front left door open.
3. Press "Execute" to transport toner to each sub-hopper.
It may take several minutes (approximately 5 to 10 min.) to fill the sub-hoppers.
4. Exit the SP mode after "Completed" is displayed.
5. Close the front left door. Machine warm-up starts automatically, followed by process
control.
Do not turn off the machine during the warm-up. It takes about 6 minutes to
complete this process.
6. "Ready" appears on the LCD after the warm-up is complete.
Controller Selection
1. Select a controller to be used with SP5-193-001.
For Fiery controller, select "6" with SP5-193-001.
For Creo controller, select "5" with SP5-193-001
Never select "0" with SP5-193-001. If you do so, the machine cannot do any
operations without the special recovery procedure. For details about the special
recovery procedure, see p.6-49 "Operation Error after Controller Selection"
Fiery Language Selection
If a customer wants to use a language other than English to operate the Fiery controller, the
language selection must be done first. To select a different language, the Fiery system must
be re-installed. For details, see "p.5-40 "Fiery Controller System Update" in the section
"Service Tables" (Fiery System Installation < Firmware Update < Service Tables).
D095/M077 2-42 SM
Mainframe
Fiery Controller Settings
After turning on the power for the first time, it is required to set the settings for the "Fiery
Controller.”
1. Check that the Activity light on the LCD of the Fiery Controller is flashing green and then
go to the machine's operation panel.
Installation
2. "Please wait" may be shown on the operation panel.
3. Press the "Fiery" tab on the LCD after the Fiery operating menu has appeared.
4. Press the "Setup" button on the operation panel.
5. The "Login" screen appears.
6. Press the "Password" button, and the soft key pad screen appears.
7. Input "Fiery. 1" with the soft key pad, and then press the "OK" button.
When the password is input, capital letters and small letters must be correctly
input. Use the "Shift" button to input a capital letter.
8. The setup screen appears after you input the password correctly.
9. Press the "WINS" button.
10. Press "Use WINS" to disable this function, and then "Save.”
SM 2-43 D095/M077
Mainframe
11. Press the "DNS" button.
12. Press "Get DNS address automatically" to disable this function, and then press "Save.”
If "Get DNS address automatically" is correctly disabled, the button color is
changed from yellow to gray-out.
13. Press "IP Address" to enter the IP address.
D095/M077 2-44 SM
Mainframe
Installation
14. Press "IPv4 Address.”
15. Press the "Manual Configuration" button.
16. Press the "IP Address" bar [A] to enter the IPv4 address, and then enter the IPv4
address.
The soft key pad screen appears after pressing the "IP Address" button. Input the IP
address with the soft key pad, and then press the "OK" button.
17. Press the "Subnet Mask" bar [B] to enter the subnet mask IP, and then enter the subnet
mask IP.
The soft key pad screen appears after pressing the "Subnet Mask" button. Input the
IP address with the soft key pad, and then press the "OK" button.
18. Press the "Default gateway" bar [C] to enter the default gateway IP, and then enter the
default gateway IP.
The soft key pad screen appears after pressing the "Default gateway" button. Input
the IP address with the soft key pad, and then press the "OK" button.
19. Press the "Save" button after IP address setting has been completed.
20. Press the "Go Back" button, then the "Exit Setup" button.
SM 2-45 D095/M077
Mainframe
21. Press the "Reboot Now" button.
22. The Fiery server and copier system automatically turn off to reboot.
Paper Library Data
Install the Paper Library data using the following procedure.
Paper Library Updating Procedure
1. Make a folder in the directory of an SD card, and then name the folder "mqp.”
2. Copy the paper data base file in the "mqp" folder, and then rename the copied file
"library.mqp.”
3. Make sure that the mainframe is turned off.
4. Insert the SD card which has the "library.mqp" file in the upper SD card slot on the
controller.
5. Turn on the mainframe.
6. Make sure that the data version of the SD card is newer than the data version of the flash
ROM on the controller. If not, prepare the latest data version of the Paper Library on an
SD card.
The version of the data on the SD card can be checked with SP5711-202
The version of the data in the flash ROM on the controller can be checked with
SP5711-201.
D095/M077 2-46 SM
Mainframe
7. Enter SP5-711-001, and then press "Execute" [A] on the LCD.
8. Press "Execute" [B] again on the LCD.
Installation
9. Press "OK" [A] on the LCD after the "Completed." pop-up is displayed, and then exit the
SP mode.
10. Turn off the mainframe after updating, and then remove the SD card from the upper SD
card slot of the controller.
11. Turn on the mainframe, and then check the Paper Library data version with SP5-711-201
(Flash Rom).
TCRU Setting
1. If the installed machine is to be operated by TCRU, change the following SP settings.
SP5-062-001: Change the setting from "1" (Not displayed) to "0" (Displayed).
SP7-956-001: Change the setting from "0" (No operation) to "1" (Operation).
If these settings are not correctly set, the PM parts alarm never appears on the
LCD.
2. If the fusing unit is set for the target unit of TCRU operation, change the following SP
setting.
SP7-957-001: Change the setting from "1" (Not target) to "0" (Target).
Load the Paper Trays
For each paper tray:
1. Move the side fence and bottom fence to the correct positions for the paper.
2. Add paper to the trays.
3. Attach the paper size decals to the front of the paper cassette trays and the tandem tray.
It is not necessary to input the paper size setting for tray 2. This is detected
automatically.
SM 2-47 D095/M077
Mainframe
Print an SMC Report
1. Go into the SP mode.
2. Do SP5990-1 to print a full SMC report. Keep it in a safe location, with the factory setting
sheet.
Checking the Print Quality
It is necessary to check the print quality after installation, and before the customer starts to
use the machine. Check the following points and adjust the machine if there is a problem.
"T6000 (70W)", "mondi 90gsm" or "Hammermill Color COPY 105gsm" paper is
recommended for checking the output quality. If T6000 (70W), "mondi 90gsm" or
"Hammermill Color COPY 105gsm" paper is not available, use an equivalent quality
of these paper.
Select the proper paper type in the paper type selection when checking the print
quality. For details, see the "T6000 (70W) Paper Selection Procedure" described
below.
T6000 (70W) Paper Selection Procedure
1. Press the "Tray Paper Settings" button on the operation panel.
2. Press "Recall Paper Library" [1] on the LCD.
D095/M077 2-48 SM
Mainframe
Installation
3. Select "0044 TYPE6000<70W> 80 Ricoh" [2] with the "Next" [3] at the bottom-right of the
LCD.
4. Press "0044 TYPE6000<70W> 80 Ricoh" [2].
5. The paper registration completion pop-up appears on the LCD.
6. Press "Exit" [4] on the LCD.
In this procedure, the customer paper setting number is “18” as shown above.
However, the registered number [5] depends on how many customer paper settings
have already been registered.
SM 2-49 D095/M077
Mainframe
7. Select a tray for the T6000 (70W) paper, and then press it [6] on the LCD.
8. Press "Recall Custom Paper" [7] on the LCD.
9. Select "018 TYPE6000<70W> 80 Ricoh" [8], and then press "OK" [9] on the LCD.
10. The paper setting screen on the LCD is displayed as shown above after completing the
tray setting for TYPE6000<70W>. Check if the paper setting [10] has been changed
correctly.
Color Image Check
Check that the PS test page has a solid color without imperfections (not blotched or
scratched).
Check that the density differences in the PS test pattern are clearly visible. (See p.4-9
"Color Image Check" in the chapter "Replacement and Adjustment")
Color Registration Check
Check that the grid lines on the test pattern are superimposed correctly.
(See p.4-10 "Color Registration Check" in the chapter "Replacement and Adjustment")
Ruled Line Check
Check that the grid lines on the test pattern are not scratched.
(See p.4-11 "Ruled Line Check" in the chapter "Replacement and Adjustment")
D095/M077 2-50 SM
Mainframe
Image Shift Check between 1st and 2nd Pages
Print a test pattern and fold it in half vertically and horizontally. Check that the vertical and
horizontal center lines on the printed test pattern are not shifted with respect to the fold
lines.
(See p.4-13 "Image Shift Check between the 1st and 2nd Pages" in the chapter
"Replacement and Adjustment")
Installation
Image Skew Check
Check the distance between the image edge and paper edge at two points in the
main-scan direction and two points in the sub-scan direction.
(See p.4-17 "Image Skew Check" in the chapter "Replacement and Adjustment")
Make a Test Color Print (D095 only)
1. Make sure that A3 or DLT paper is in one of the trays.
Use the same type of paper that the customer normally uses for color outputs.
2. Put a "Color Chart C-4" on the exposure glass.
3. Select the full color mode and print one copy of the chart. You will use this in the ACC
procedure, if ACC is necessary.
4. Check the results of the copy with the customer.
If the quality of the color is satisfactory, ACC adjustment is not necessary.
If the quality of the color is not satisfactory, do the ACC adjustment described below.
SM 2-51 D095/M077
Mainframe
ACC (Automatic Color Calibration) Adjustment (D095 only)
Automatic color calibration is done at the factory with the procedure given below. Do this
procedure only if the color quality is not satisfactory for the customer.
1. Push [User Tools].
2. To print a color pattern, select Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration
3. Touch "Start.”
Machine will start self-check before
printing test pattern
Press [Start Printing].
4. Touch "Start Printing.”
Now self-checking.
Test pattern will be printed.
Please wait.
The machine does process control, then it prints a test pattern.
Place Test Pattern on the exposure glass correctly.
Then press [Start Scanning]
5. Remove the C-4 test chart from the exposure glass (this was put on the exposure glass
during the previous procedure 'Make a Test Color Print').
6. Place the color test pattern face-down (this is the test pattern that you made in step 4)
and 10 sheets (no-image) of paper on the color test pattern. The arrow and notation
("Face down and align the arrow with the rear left corner of the exposure glass.") must be
at the rear left corner.
7. Touch [Start Scanning] on the display. The machine scans the pattern one time.
Scanning…
Please wait.
If you see this error:
D095/M077 2-52 SM
Mainframe
Scanning failed.
Place test pattern on the exposure glass correctly.
Then press [Start Scanning].
Make sure that the arrow on the test pattern is in the upper left corner of the exposure
glass.
Installation
8. Remove the pattern from the exposure glass and replace it with the C-4 Color Chart.
9. Touch "Exit" three times to return to the Copy mode screen.
10. Make a full-color copy of the test chart.
11. Compare the results of the 1st copy (made in step 3 of "Make a Test Color Print") and the
2nd copy (made in step 10 above):
If the results of the 2nd copy are better than the results of the 1st copy, you are finished.
-or-
If the results of the 2nd copy are worse than the results of the 1st copy:
Push the [User Tools] key
Touch Maintenance> Auto Color Calibration> Previous Setting.
12. Remove the color chart from the exposure glass.
13. If the customer is not satisfied with the 1st copy or the 2nd copy, you must do the
"Checking the Print Quality" procedure again.
Color Registration Procedure for MUSIC
1. Push [User Tools].
2. Touch [Maintenance]> [Color Registration].
3. Touch [OK].
This completes color registration.
SM 2-53 D095/M077
Mainframe
2.3.3 REAR CONTROLLER BOX REMOVAL
Remove the rear controller box only if the machine is too large to pass through a narrow door
or passageway.
Rear Controller Box Removal
The rear controller box is unstable when it is removed from the mainframe. The
removed rear controller box can easily fall down. Be careful of this if you place the
controller box in a separate location.
1. Remove the rear top cover [1] ( x 3)
2. Remove the two screws attaching the rear controller box to the mainframe.
D095/M077 2-54 SM
Mainframe
Installation
3. Loosen the fixing pins at rear right and left bottom with a minus flat-headed screwdriver
or hex driver (5.5mm).
4. Open the rear controller box, while holding the right side (viewed from the rear).
5. Remove two ground cables [2] ( x 1 each).
6. Remove two ground cables [3] ( x 1 each).
SM 2-55 D095/M077
Mainframe
7. Connector cover [4] ( x 2).
8. Take out the air tube [5] from the cutout.
9. Unlock six clamps, and then disconnect all connectors.
Do not unlock clamps other than the clamps indicated by arrow marks.
Otherwise, incorrect connections may occur when attaching the rear controller
box.
10. Open the harness bracket [6] ( x 5).
D095/M077 2-56 SM
Mainframe
11. Remove the pivot brackets (upper and lower) [7] ( x 2 each).
Installation
12. The picture above shows that the rear controller box is away from the mainframe.
13. When reassembling the machine, look for a tube that comes from the rear of the machine.
Be very careful not to damage this tube. This comes from the fusing unit, and connects to
the optional air separator unit.
SM 2-57 D095/M077
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5000 (B331)
2.4 A3/11"X17" TRAY UNIT TK5000 (B331)
2.4.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:
Description Q'ty
1. Paper Size Decal 1
2. Short Connector 1
3. A3/DLT Tray 1
D095/M077 2-58 SM
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5000 (B331)
2.4.2 INSTALLATION
Switch the machine off and unplug it from the power source before starting the
following procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
Installation
1. Remove the shipping material [1] and metal retainer [2] ( x 1).
2. Check the position of the front and back side fences and make sure that they are set for
DLT or A3.
3. If you need to adjust the positions of the side fences for the paper to be loaded in the tray,
remove the front panel [3] ( x 4).
4. Remove the fences and adjust their positions for the paper to be loaded: front fence [4]
( x 1), back fence [5] ( x 1), and end fence [6] ( x 1)
SM 2-59 D095/M077
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5000 (B331)
5. Open the front doors.
6. Pull out the tandem feed tray [1] completely.
7. Push the right tandem tray [2] into the machine.
8. Remove the left tandem tray [3] ( x 2 left, x 3 right).
9. From the left tandem tray, remove the front cover [1] ( x 2).
10. Pull out the right tandem tray [2], then remove it ( x 2).
D095/M077 2-60 SM
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5000 (B331)
Installation
11. Insert the short connector [1] into the socket inside the machine [2].
Hold the connector as shown in the illustration.
12. Using the screws removed in Steps 8 to 10, install the tray [3] on the right rail [4], center
rail [5], left rail [6].
You must use the short, silver screws on the left and right rails. If you use one of
the longer screws, it will block the movement of the tray on the rails.
SM 2-61 D095/M077
A3/11"x17" Tray Unit TK5000 (B331)
13. Re-install the front cover [1] ( x 3).
14. Select the paper size setting for Tray 1 (A3 or DLT) with SP5-019-002 (Paper Size
Tray1).
15. After selecting the paper size, switch the machine off and on to change the indicator on
the operation panel.
D095/M077 2-62 SM
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
2.5 RING BINDER (D392) INSTALLATION
2.5.1 ACCESSORIES
Check each accessory against the list below to make sure that you have everything.
Installation
No. Item Q'ty
1. Docking Bracket 1
2. Entrance Guide Plate 1
3. Entrance Guide Plate: Short 1
4. Sponge Strip 1
5. Power Cord 1
6. Ring Opener 1
7. Ring Supply Level Indicator 1
8. Screws (M4 x 14) 4
9. Tapping Screws (M3 x 6) 4
10. Leveling Shoes 4
11. Ground (Earth) Plate 1
SM 2-63 D095/M077
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
2.5.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
The finisher weighs 140 kg (308 lb.).
IMPORTANT: To prevent bending or breaking the top cover, never lift the finisher by its top
cover [A]. Always raise the finisher from the base [B].
D095/M077 2-64 SM
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
2.5.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Switch the machine off and unplug it from the power source before starting the
following procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
Installation
Remove All Shipping Materials
1. Remove all visible tapes, wrapping material, and cushions attached to the outside of the
finisher and the power cord.
2. Remove:
[A] Brace x1 ( x4)
[B] Brace x2 ( x4)
[C] Two boxes (ring opener and accessories) and power cord
IMPORTANT: Do not discard these braces. They must be reattached to the finisher
before it is moved or shipped to another location.
SM 2-65 D095/M077
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
3. Open the right door and left door.
4. Remove all tapes and packing material.
5. Remove the brace and red tag [A] ( x2).
6. Pull the binder unit [A] out of the finisher until it stops.
7. Remove the tape [B] on top of the finisher.
8. Pull down the ring cartridge handle and cover [C].
9. Pull the ring cartridge out and remove the cushion [D].
10. Push the ring cartridge in and close its cover.
11. Push the binder unit into the finisher.
12. Close the left front door and right front door.
D095/M077 2-66 SM
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
Prepare the Finisher for Docking
For installing on the mainframe
Installation
1. Attach the entrance guide plate (marked "A") [A] provided with the mainframe ( x 2).
2. Remove the tape from the back of the sponge strip [B].
3. Attach the sponge strip to the top edge [C] of the finisher as shown above.
For installing on a peripheral
1. Attach the ground plate [A] to the right bottom of the ring binder ( x 2).
2. Attach the entrance guide plate [B] (not the short one) in the accessories ( x 2).
3. Remove the tape from the back of the sponge strip [C].
4. Attach the sponge strip to the top edge [D] of the finisher as shown above.
Prepare the Mainframe or other peripheral for Docking
For installing on the mainframe
SM 2-67 D095/M077
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
1. Attach the docking bracket to the mainframe ( x 4: M4x8 provided with the
mainframe).
2. Make sure that the ground plate provided with the mainframe is attached to the bottom
left of the mainframe ( x 2).
For installing on a peripheral
1. Attach the docking bracket to the peripheral ( x 4).
Use M4x14 screws in the accessories for the Buffer Pass Unit or Cover Interposer
B835.
Use M4x10 screws provided with the Z-Folding Unit B660 for the Z-Folding Unit
B660.
D095/M077 2-68 SM
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
Dock the Finisher to the Upstream Unit
Dock the Finisher to the Mainframe or Buffer Pass Unit (M379)
Installation
1. Open the right door of the finisher.
2. Pull out the locking lever [A] ( x 1).
3. Align the right side of the finisher with the docking brackets [B] on the left side of the
mainframe, and then slowly push the finisher onto the brackets.
4. Connect the finisher I/F cable [C] to the mainframe.
5. Push in the locking lever and check that it slides into the slots of the docking brackets.
6. Check that the top edge of the finisher is parallel with the left edge of the mainframe.
7. Refasten the locking lever [A] ( x 1) and close the right front door.
Dock the Finisher to the Cover Interposer B835
1. Open the right door of the finisher.
2. Pull out the locking lever [A] ( x 1).
SM 2-69 D095/M077
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
3. Align the right side of the finisher with the docking brackets [B] on the left side of the
upstream unit, and then slowly push the finisher onto the brackets.
4. Connect the finisher I/F cable [D] to the Cover Interposer B835.
5. Push in the locking lever and check that it slides into the slots of the docking brackets.
6. Check that the top edge of the finisher is parallel with the left edge of the upstream unit.
7. Refasten the locking lever [A] ( x 1) and close the right front door.
8. Remove the rear cover of the Ring Binder ( x8).
9. Remove the rear covers of the upstream unit.
10. Use a stubby screwdriver to loosen bracket [A] ( x3).
11. Fasten the bracket to the upstream unit at [B] ( x1).
12. Tighten the screws ( x3).
13. Re-attach the rear covers.
D095/M077 2-70 SM
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
Dock the Finisher to the Z-Folding Unit B660
Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] of the finisher ( x8).
2. Open the right door of the finisher.
3. Pull out the locking lever [B] ( x 1).
4. Align the finisher with the joint brackets [C], then slowly push the finisher onto the
brackets.
5. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the Z-Folding Unit.
6. Push in the locking lever [B].
7. Check that the top edges of the finisher are parallel with edges of the Z-Folding Unit.
8. Fasten the locking lever [B] ( x 1).
9. Fasten the screw [E] ( x 1).
10. Reattach the rear covers of the finisher and Z-Holding Unit.
11. Close the right door of the finisher.
SM 2-71 D095/M077
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
Install the Shoes and Level the Finisher
1. Set the leveling shoes (x4) under the feet of the finisher.
2. Open the right front door and left front door.
3. Place a level on the frame
4. Use a wrench to turn the nut at each foot until the machine is level.
Peripheral Height Adjustment
If this unit is to be installed to the left of the mainframe (D095 or M077), the following
adjustment procedure is required. If not, go to the next section "Attach Ring Supply
Level Indicator.”
1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP5-805-016.
1. Check the paper exit guide plate [A] of the mainframe and relay guide plate [B] of the
peripheral from the front side.
2. Remove the rear cover of the peripheral, and then check the paper exit guide plate of the
mainframe and relay guide plate of the peripheral from the rear side.
D095/M077 2-72 SM
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
Installation
3. If the red areas [C] on the front and rear side edges of the peripheral's relay guide plate
are level with the plate edge [D] on the decurler unit, no adjustment is required.
Otherwise, go to the next step.
The upper edge of the red area must not be above the top edge of plate edge [D],
and the lower edge of the red area must not be below the bottom edge of plate
edge [D])
4. Adjust the feet of the mainframe or peripheral so that the red areas at the front and rear
[C] are level with the plate edge [D], as explained above.
Attach Ring Supply Level Indicator
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the ring binder.
3. Lift the ring supply cartridge out of the top of the binder unit.
4. Set the ring supply level indicator [1] behind the tabs on the side of the ring supply
cartridge [2].
SM 2-73 D095/M077
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
Test the Breaker Switch
1. If the mainframe is on, turn it off.
2. Confirm that the breaker switch [A] is set to the right.
The breaker switch is at the bottom of the left rear corner near the power cord.
When it is set to the right, you should see a straight line (-).
3. Connect the power cord to the finisher, then connect the other end to a power supply
outlet.
4. Use the sharp point of a pen [B] or similar tool to push in the breaker switch until it snaps
to the off position. (You should see "0.”)
5. If the breaker does not snap to the off position:
Check that the power cord is correctly connected to the finisher and power supply.
Push the breaker switch again to see if it snaps to the off position.
If the breaker switch does not snap to the off position, it must be replaced.
6. Be sure to reset the breaker switch to the on (-) position.
D095/M077 2-74 SM
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
2.5.4 CENTERING PAPER IN THE PAPER PATH
At installation you must confirm that the paper is exiting the ring binder correctly and do the
necessary correction if required. There are two checks:
Side-to-side registration check. The paper should be centered in the paper path.
Skew check. The paper should feed straight out of the ring binder.
Installation
Checking and Correcting Side-to-Side Registration
Checking Side-to-Side Registration
Do this check to confirm that the paper is centered in the paper path.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the ring binder unit is connected.
2. If the finisher is connected to the left side of the ring binder, disconnect it and pull it away
from the left side of the ring binder.
3. Execute a run by feeding paper (A4 or LT) from Tray 2 of the host machine (punching
only, no ring binding).
4. During the run, each sheet of paper briefly protrudes about 5 to 10 mm before it switches
back into the ring binder and feeds to the punch unit, as shown above.
There are two scales on the left side of the ring binder below the paper exit.
The rear scale [1] is for LT-size paper and the front scale [2] is for A4-size paper. Be
sure to read the correct scale for the paper size in use.
5. Check the position of the paper on the scale to determine if the paper is centered.
Read the rear scale for LT-size paper and the front scale for A4-size paper.
The scale lines are spaced 1 mm apart.
The edges of the paper should be at the center line and not deviate more than
±2 mm.
SM 2-75 D095/M077
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
[A] Leading/trailing edges centered. No adjustment necessary.
[B] Leading/trailing edges offset to the rear more than 2 mm. Adjustment required.
[C] Leading/trailing edges offset to the front more than 2 mm. Adjustment required.
6. If the edge of the paper is on the scale at the center [A], no adjustment is required.
-or-
If the edge of the paper is ±2 mm off the center line on the scale, adjustment is required.
Do the procedure in the next section.
Correcting Side-to-Side Registration: Bracket Adjustment
If the Z-fold unit is the next unit on the right, you must first do the procedure below
and then do the procedure for the Z-fold unit described in the next section.
1. Disconnect the ring binder from the upstream unit.
2. On the docking bracket attached to the upstream unit, loosen screws (1), (2), (3), and (4).
D095/M077 2-76 SM
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
3. Remove bracket [A] ( x 1), rotate it 90 degrees, and re-fasten the screw. Changing the
position of this bracket aligns the oval cut-out horizontally and frees the joint bracket so it
can slide side-to-side.
4. Look at the scale [B].
5. Slide the bracket to the left or right and tighten the screw.
If the deviation from center was toward the front, slide the bracket to the rear and tighten
Installation
the screw (1).
-or-
If the deviation from center was toward the rear, side the bracket to the front and tighten
screw (1).
6. Tighten screws (2), (3), and (4).
7. Do another test run to check the results of the adjustment.
-or-
If the unit on the right is the Z-fold unit, do the procedure described in the next section
before doing more test runs.
Correcting Side-to-Side Registration: At Z-Fold Unit
After adjusting the docking bracket (described in the previous section), you must do this
procedure if the next unit on the right is the Z-fold unit.
1. At the base of the Z-fold unit, loosen screws [A] and [B].
2. Slide the plate left or right on the scales [C] and [D], to adjust the position by the same
amount as the adjustment on the docking bracket in the previous section.
3. Re-tighten all the screws.
SM 2-77 D095/M077
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
4. Do another test run and check the results of the adjustments.
Checking and Correcting Skew
Checking for Paper Skew
Do this check to confirm that the paper is not skewed in the paper path.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the ring binder unit is connected.
2. If the finisher is connected to the left side of the ring binder, disconnect it and pull it away
from the left side of the ring binder.
3. Execute a straight-through run (no ring binding, no punching) with A3 or DLT from Tray 2
of the host machine.
4. During the run, each sheet of paper exits the side of the ring binder, as shown above.
There are two scales on the left side of the ring binder below the paper exit.
The rear scale [1] is for DLT-size paper and the front scale [2] is for A3-size paper. Be
sure to read the correct scale for the paper size in use.
5. Check the position of the paper on the scale to determine if the paper skews as it exits.
Read the rear scale for DLT-size paper and front scale for A3-size paper.
The scale lines are spaced 1 mm apart.
The paper must not deviate more than ±2 mm on the scale.
D095/M077 2-78 SM
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
Installation
[A] Centered. No adjustment necessary.
Trailing edge skew to the front, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment
[B]
required.
Trailing edge skew to the rear, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment
[C]
required.
SM 2-79 D095/M077
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
Correcting Skew
1. Disconnect the ring binder from the upstream unit.
2. Remove the spacers from the right side of the ring binder at the base ( x2).
3. On the docking bracket attached to the upstream unit, loosen the screws.
4. Insert a spacer and tighten the screws.
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the front of the machine, insert a spacer [A] under
the rear end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
-or-
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the rear of the machine, insert a spacer [B] under
the front end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
5. To another run to check the adjustment. If skew is still present, insert another spacer.
D095/M077 2-80 SM
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
2.5.5 AFTER INSTALLATION
Confirm that the operators understand the following important points:
Decals attached to the machine that provide guidance for removing paper jams. Point out
the decal locations.
Detailed instructions on removing ring jams are provided in the operating instructions
Installation
under "Removing Jammed Ring Combs.”
When pulling out and pushing in the binder unit on its rails, always grip the binder unit by
its handle (Mc8).
SM 2-81 D095/M077
Ring Binder (D392) Installation
Always grip handle Mc8 when pulling out or pushing in the binder unit.
Never touch any other surface of the binder unit when it is moving on its rails.
To avoid injury the fingers, never push on the top of the binder unit to slide it
back into the finisher as shown above.
Never store paper, extra rings, manuals or any other material below the output tray.
Obstacles in this area (circled in the illustration below) will interfere with the raising and
lowering of the tray and cause an error.
D095/M077 2-82 SM
Perfect Binder (D391) Installation
2.6 PERFECT BINDER (D391) INSTALLATION
For details about installation of the following units before docking to the mainframe or other
option, see the main service manual of the "Perfect Binder - Machine Code: D391.”
Perfect Binder GB5000 (D391) (hereafter the "bookbinder")
Installation
Inserter-C1 (D391-18) (hereafter the "inserter")
Transit Pass Unit Type GB5000 (D391-19) (hereafter the "relay unit")
2.6.1 DOCKING THE PERFECT BINDER
Before Docking
Follow these steps below if the bookbinder is to be installed to the left side of the mainframe
(D095 or M077). If not, go to "Docking Procedure.”
1. Remove the entrance guide plate [A] and shoulder screw [B] of the relay unit.
2. Attach the relay guide plate (marked "A" provided with the D095 or M077 model) to the
entrance of the relay unit.
SM 2-83 D095/M077
Perfect Binder (D391) Installation
Docking Procedure
1. At the left rear corner of the bookbinder, confirm that cover [A] has been reattached (
x6).
2. On the left side of the mainframe (D095 or M077) or a peripheral, attach:
[A] Left joint bracket ("L") ( x2)
[B] Right joint bracket ("R") ( x2)
3. Open the front door of the relay unit.
4. Remove screw [A].
5. Pull the lock bar [B] out to lower it.
D095/M077 2-84 SM
Perfect Binder (D391) Installation
6. Slowly push the bookbinder against the side of the mainframe or peripheral.
Installation
7. Push in lock bar [A] to raise it and lock it in the cutouts of the joint brackets attached to
the mainframe or peripheral.
8. Reattach screw [B] to fasten the lock bar in the raised position.
9. Remove the brace [A] from the right front door of the bookbinder. ( x1)
10. Remove wrench [B].
11. Place a shoe [A] under the stoppers at each corner of the bookbinder.
12. Use your fingers (or the wrench) to turn the nut in the direction of the arrow until the nut
stops on top of the shoe.
SM 2-85 D095/M077
Perfect Binder (D391) Installation
13. At each corner use the wrench [A] to turn the nut in the direction of the arrow to raise the
bookbinder [B] until the caster [C] raises off the floor.
14. Place a level on the top edge of the front and right edge of the machine to confirm that
the bookbinder is level.
15. Adjust the corner stoppers until the machine is level.
16. Connect the bookbinder interface cable to the mainframe or peripheral.
Peripheral Height Adjustment
Follow these steps below if the bookbinder is to be installed to the left side of the mainframe
(D095 or M077). If not, these steps are not required.
1. Turn on the main power switch.
1. Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP5-805-016.
2. Check the paper exit guide plate [A] of the mainframe and relay guide plate [B] of the
peripheral from the front side.
3. Remove the rear cover of the peripheral, and then check the paper exit guide plate of the
mainframe and relay guide plate of the peripheral from the rear side.
D095/M077 2-86 SM
Perfect Binder (D391) Installation
Installation
4. If the red areas [C] on the front and rear side edges of the peripheral's relay guide plate
are level with the plate edge [D] on the decurler unit, no adjustment is required.
Otherwise, go to the next step.
The upper edge of the red area must not be above the top edge of plate edge [D],
and the lower edge of the red area must not be below the bottom edge of plate
edge [D])
5. Adjust the feet of the mainframe or peripheral so that the red areas at the front and rear
[C] are level with the plate edge [D], as explained above.
SM 2-87 D095/M077
Perfect Binder (D391) Installation
2.6.2 FILLING BOOKBINDER GLUE SUPPLY UNIT
1. Pull out the glue supply drawer until it stops.
2. Raise the two covers [A] and [B].
3. Note the load limit marks [C] inside the drawer on both sides.
D095/M077 2-88 SM
Perfect Binder (D391) Installation
Installation
4. Use the scoop [A] to fill the bin with glue pellets as far as the load limit marks on both
sides of the drawer.
Two scoops (about 380 g each) should be sufficient.
5. Close both covers.
6. Push in the glue supply drawer.
Handling and Storing the Glue Pellet Supply
Exercise precaution when choosing a location for storing the glue pellets.
Store the pellets where they will not be exposed to direct sunlight.
The storage location should be within this temperature range: -20°C to 40°C.
Never expose pellets to direct flame.
Keep the pellets out of the reach of small children. If pellets are accidentally ingested,
contact a physician immediately.
Never dispose of pellets by incinerating them. Obey local laws and regulations that
restrict disposal of such items.
When using the glue pellets:
Use only glue pellets recommended for use with this bookbinder.
Before the start of a job, press the glue warm-up button on the right front corner of the
bookbinder to start heating the glue.
Never fill the glue pellet supply drawer higher than the load limit marks shown on both
sides of the drawer.
SM 2-89 D095/M077
Perfect Binder (D391) Installation
2.6.3 TESTING THE BREAKER SWITCH
1. Turn off the mainframe.
The power supply to the bookbinder must be off.
2. Plug the bookbinder power cord into its power source.
3. Locate the breaker switch [A] at the right lower corner of the machine below the power
cord.
4. Raise the breaker switch [B] so you can see the "|" under the switch. This is the ON
position. (Ignore this step if the breaker switch is already at the "|" position.)
5. Use the tip of a small screwdriver to push the breaker test button [C].
The breaker switch should flip to the "O" (OFF) position. This indicates that the breaker
switch is operating normally.
If the breaker switch does not flip to the "O" position, the switch must be replaced.
6. Reset the switch to the "|" (ON) position for normal operation.
The bookbinder will not turn on if the breaker switch is not reset to the "|"
position.
D095/M077 2-90 SM
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
2.7 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447)
2.7.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
illustrations and lists.
Installation
High Capacity Stacker (D447)
No. Description Q'ty
1. Power Cord*1 1
2. Leveling Shoes 4
3. Ground Plate 1
4. Lock Hasp – Left*2 1
5. Lock Hasp – Right 1
6. Joint Bracket 1
7. Sponge Strip 1
8. Paper Guide 1
9. Screws M4x8 2
10. Screws M3x6 4
11. Screws M4x6 2
12. Screws M4x14 4
SM 2-91 D095/M077
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
*1: In case of using this unit in China, do not use this power cord in the accessories of the
High Capacity Stacker (D447). Ask your supervisor and use a power cord specified for
China’s usage.
*2: A lock is not provided.
Roll-Away Cart Type 5010 (456-17)
No. Description Q'ty
1. Paper Tray 1
2. Tray Cart Handle 1
3. Tray Cart Base 1
4. Screws M10x25 2
5. Paper Press Lever 1
If two high capacity stackers are to be installed in the same line, the second stacker
must be installed on the left side of the first stacker.
D095/M077 2-92 SM
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
2.7.2 INSTALLATION
Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is
disconnected before doing the following procedure.
Installation
Shipping Tapes
1. Remove all visible tape from the front [A] and back [B].
2. Open the front panel [A] and remove all visible tapes.
3. Open the front door [B] and remove all visible tapes.
SM 2-93 D095/M077
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
Paper Guide, Sponge Strip, Ground Plate
1. Remove the tape from the sponge strip [A] and attach the strip to the top right edge of the
unit.
The sponge strip closes the gap between the D447 and the upstream unit to
prevent paper or other objects from falling between the units.
2. Fasten the paper guide to the right side of the unit ( x2).
For installing on upstream peripherals other than the mainframe (D095 or M077),
use the paper guide [B] in the accessories of this unit.
If the upstream peripheral device is the Cover Interposer Tray (B835) or the
Decurl Unit DU5000 (D457), attach the black mylar provided with the cover
interposer tray or decurl unit to this paper guide.
For installing on the mainframe (D095 or M077), use the paper guide [C] (marked
"C") provided with the mainframe (D095 or M077).
D095/M077 2-94 SM
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
3. Attach the ground plate [A] to the bottom right edge of the unit ( x2 M3x6).
When attaching the stacker directly to the mainframe (D095 or M077), do not attach
the ground plate [A]. Only use it when attaching the stacker to another peripheral.
Docking
Docking to the mainframe
Installation
1. Fasten the joint bracket [A] to the mainframe (D095 or M077) ( x 4; M4x8 provided
with the mainframe D095/M077).
2. Open the front door of this unit.
Docking to the peripheral
1. Fasten the joint bracket [A] to the upstream unit ( x 4; M4x14).
2. Open the front door of this unit.
3. Remove the front right cover [A] ( x2).
SM 2-95 D095/M077
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
4. At the front right corner, remove the screw of the lock bar [A] ( x1 M3x6). Keep this
screw.
5. Pull the lock bar toward you until it stops.
6. Slowly push the unit [B] against the left side of the upstream unit (or main machine) so
that the lock bar is directly and squarely under the arms of the joint bracket [C].
7. Push the lock bar in completely so that it slides up into the notches in the arms on both
ends of the joint bracket.
8. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 4 ( x1).
9. Attach the I/F cable [D] to the upstream unit.
10. Remove the right rear lower cover [A] ( x4).
D095/M077 2-96 SM
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
Installation
11. Use a short screwdriver to loosen bracket [A] ( x2).
12. Fasten the bracket to the upstream unit at [B] ( x1).
13. Tighten the screws ( x3).
14. Re-attach the rear covers.
Lock Hasps
1. Fasten left lock hasp [A] ( x2) to the door.
2. Fasten right lock hasp [B] to the door frame ( x2).
SM 2-97 D095/M077
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
Height Adjustment
1. Set the leveling shoes [A].
2. Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level.
If this unit is to be installed to the left of the mainframe (D095 or M07), the following
adjustment procedure is required. If not, go to the next section "Power Cord,
Breaker Switch Test.”
1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP5-805-016.
3. Check the paper exit guide plate [A] of the mainframe and relay guide plate [B] of the
peripheral from the front side.
4. Remove the rear cover of the peripheral, and then check the paper exit guide plate of the
mainframe and relay guide plate of the peripheral from the rear side.
D095/M077 2-98 SM
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
Installation
5. If the cutouts [C] on the front and rear side edges of the peripheral's relay guide plate are
level with the plate edge [D] on the mainframe, no adjustment is required. Otherwise, go
to the next section "Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test.”
The upper edge of the cutouts must not be above the top edge of plate edge [D],
and the lower edge of the cutouts must not be below the bottom edge of plate
edge [D])
6. Adjust the feet of the mainframe or peripheral so that the cutouts at the front and rear [C]
are level with the plate edge [D], as explained above.
SM 2-99 D095/M077
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test
1. Insert the socket of the power cord [A] into the power connection point.
In case of using this unit in China, do not use this power cord in the accessories
of the High Capacity Stacker (D447). Ask your supervisor and use a power cord
specified for China’s usage.
2. Connect the power supply cord plug into a power outlet.
3. Test the breaker switch [B] ( "Installation" > "Common Adjustments" > "Breaker Switch
Testing").
Check for Skew and Correct Side-to-Side Registration
1. Load some A3/DLT paper in Tray 2 of the main machine.
2. Make several copies that will exit to the top tray.
3. Watch each sheet as it exits the machine to check for the presence of skew, and check
that the side-to-side registration is correct. ( p.2-237 "Skew and Side-to-Side
Adjustment")
D095/M077 2-100 SM
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
Docking: Downstream
Installation
Do this procedure only if another a second high capacity stacker unit will be
installed..
1. Remove the left exit cover [A] from the left side of the unit ( x2).
The joint bracket of the downstream unit will be attached here ( x4).
2. Peel the tape from the back of the sponge strip [B] and attach the strip as shown above.
Roll-Away Cart (D456)
1. Align the holes in the brackets of the paper tray [A] with the studs of the tray base [B].
2. Set the holes over the studs.
3. Set the paper press lever [C] into the recessed cut-out in the paper tray.
4. Insert the ends of the tray cart handle [D] into the handle holes. One end of the handle
SM 2-101 D095/M077
High Capacity Stacker SK5010 (D447)
passes through the paper press lever on the paper tray.
5. Lay the assembly down with the handles on the floor.
6. Fasten the end of each handle ( x1 each M10x25).
7. Make sure that both screws [E] are fastened securely.
8. Set the cart upright on its casters.
9. Open the front door [A].
10. Push the tray cart [B] into the unit and close the door.
D095/M077 2-102 SM
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
2.8 BRIDGE UNIT BU5000 (D379)
2.8.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Installation
No. Description Q'ty
1 Vertical Bridge Motor 1
2 Inner Lower Cover 1
3 Jam Removal Lever 1
4 Jam Removal Knob 1
5 Relay Connector 1
6 Inner Upper Cover 1
7 Paper Tray Decal 1
Screw: M3x8 2
Screw: M4x8 5
8
Tapping Screw: M4x8 (blue) 9
Screw: M4x10 1
9 Timing Belt 1
SM 2-103 D095/M077
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
2.8.2 INSTALLATION
Turn the machine power off and unplug it from the power source before starting the
following procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
The Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379) can be used only when the LCIT RT 5020 (D355) is
installed on the mainframe.
Horizontal Bridge Unit
1. Remove the right upper cover ( x 5)
D095/M077 2-104 SM
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
Installation
2. Open the front right door [2] ( x 1)
3. Remove the bracket [3] ( x 2)
4. Open the ADF [4].
5. Remove the screw covers [5].
SM 2-105 D095/M077
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
6. Open the front left door [6].
7. Remove the front top cover [7] ( x 6).
8. Remove two screws [8].
Keep these screws. These screws are necessary for a later step.
9. Pull out the horizontal bridge unit cover [9] and then remove it.
D095/M077 2-106 SM
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
Installation
10. Remove two brackets [10] from the horizontal bridge unit cover ( x 1 each).
11. Remove two step screws [11] from the horizontal bridge unit [12].
12. Attach the horizontal bridge unit cover [13] to the horizontal bridge unit ( x 2: removed
in step 5).
SM 2-107 D095/M077
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
13. Pull the rails [14] out fully until these rails stop.
14. Install the rear side of the horizontal bridge unit [15] on the rails.
First, align the two rear cutouts [16] of the horizontal bridge unit with the two rivets
[17] on the rails and install the rear side of the horizontal bridge unit.
15. Install the front side of the horizontal bridge unit on the rails as shown.
Align the two front cutouts with the two front rivets, and install the horizontal bridge
unit completely.
16. Secure the horizontal bridge unit with the rails ( x 2: M3x8)
D095/M077 2-108 SM
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
17. Push the horizontal bridge unit into the LCT.
18. Re-attach the front top cover ( x 2).
Vertical Bridge Unit
Before installing this unit, install the horizontal bridge unit first.
Installation
1. Remove the DF I/F cable [1].
2. Remove the rear upper cover [2] ( x 6).
3. Remove the two stays [3] ( x 4 each).
4. Pull out the upper tray [4] and horizontal bridge unit [5].
SM 2-109 D095/M077
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
5. Grip two parts [6] of the vertical bridge unit.
6. Install the vertical bridge unit [7] in the right side of the LCT. To do this, hang the two
holes in the bridge unit on the two step screws [8] on the LCT.
7. Lift up the vertical bridge unit and then slide it to the front side.
8. Secure the vertical bridge unit ( x 6: tapping screw M4x8 (blue)).
9. Reattach the two stays [9] which were removed in step 3 to the right side frame of the
LCT.
D095/M077 2-110 SM
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
Installation
10. Remove the step screw [10] with a red tag on the rear side of the vertical bridge unit.
11. Install the vertical bridge motor unit [11] in the rear side of the vertical bridge unit.
Insert the tab of the motor bracket in the cutout [12].
12. Secure the vertical bridge motor unit with three screws.
Fist secure three screws loosely, and then tighten screw [13] (tapping screws M4x8
(blue)) first. Screw [13] is a positioning screw.
SM 2-111 D095/M077
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
13. Install the timing belt [14] as shown.
14. Connect the motor harness [15] to the harness [16] from the LCT with the relay connector
[17].
15. Connect the harness [18] from the vertical bridge unit to the harness [19] from the LCT,
and then clamp it ( x 1).
16. Attach the inner upper cover [20] ( x 2: M4x8).
D095/M077 2-112 SM
Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)
17. Attach the inner lower cover [21] ( x 2: M4x8).
Installation
18. Attach the jam removal lever [22] ( x 1: M4x10).
19. Attach the jam removal knob [23] ( x 1: M4x8).
20. Reattach the right upper cover ( x 5).
21. Reattach the rear upper cover ( x 6 each).
22. Reassemble the LCT.
SM 2-113 D095/M077
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
2.9 LCIT RT5050 (D532)
2.9.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q'ty
1 Cushion 1
2 Top Right Cover 1
3 Rear Upper Left Cover 1
4 Leveling Shoes 4
5 Screw: M4x20 3
6 Screw: M4x8 1
7 Stud Screw 3
8 Upper Joint Pins 2
9 Lower Joint Pins 2
10 Washer 1
11 Paper Set Decal 2
12 Paper Tray Decal 1
13 Paper Tray and Size Decal Sheet 1
D095/M077 2-114 SM
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
Installation
2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR PRINTER (M077)
Turn off the machine and unplug it from the power source before you start the
installation procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
Naming for double LCT units
The drawing above shows the mainframe with the two LCTs installed. In this section, the LCT
[A] which is placed next to the mainframe is called the "1st LCT", and the LCT [B] which is
placed next to the 1st LCT is called the "2nd LCT.”
SM 2-115 D095/M077
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
Preparing for Installation
1. Remove all tapes and retainers in the LCT.
2. Attach the stud screw [1] to the rear side of the LCT.
3. Attach the top rear left cover [2] ( x 1: M4x20)
4. Attach the cushion [3] to the left top edge of the LCT.
If only this LCT is to be installed;
5. Attach the stud screws [4] to the left side of the LCT.
6. Attach the top right cover [5] ( x 2: M4x20)
D095/M077 2-116 SM
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
Installation for only one LCT unit
Installation
1. Remove the covers from the right side of the mainframe.
Cover [A]: ( x 1), others: (hooks)
2. Install the upper pins [1] with the grooved rings on the right upper cover.
3. Install the lower pins [2] on the right lower cover.
SM 2-117 D095/M077
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
4. Remove the lower rear left cover [3] of the LCT ( x 5)
5. Open the front door of the LCT and remove screw [4].
6. Remove the ground plate [5] ( x 2).
7. Turn over the ground plate and use the screws to fasten it to the same holes ( x 2).
D095/M077 2-118 SM
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
Installation
8. Release the ground cable [6] (tape x 1, x 2).
9. If the tray heater will not be used, keep the LCT tray heater relay harness [7] clamped.
10. Move the LCT to the right side of the mainframe.
11. Fasten the ground cable [8] with the washer [9] to the mainframe ( x 1: M4x8).
12. If the tray heater of the LCIT RT5050 will be used, attach the LCT heater relay harness
[10] to the mainframe.
If the customer will use coated paper in high temperature and high humidity
conditions, the tray heater of the LCIT RT5050 is greatly needed. Connect the
LCT relay harness at this moment.
13. Align the LCT on the joint pins and then move the LCT much closer.
14. Dock the LCT with the right side of the mainframe, after confirming that the ground cable
[8] and LCT tray heater relay harness [10] are not pinched between the LCT and the
mainframe.
SM 2-119 D095/M077
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
15. Fasten screw [11] to lock the LCT to the side of the mainframe.
16. Close the front door of the LCT.
17. Reattach the lower rear left cover to the LCT ( x 5).
18. Attach I/F connectors [12] to the mainframe.
19. Insert the leveling shoes [13] (x 4) under the leveling feet and level the LCT.
20. Adjust the LCT level within ± 5 mm by rotating each nut on the leveling shoes.
D095/M077 2-120 SM
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
Installation
21. Attach the "Tray 3" decal above the line [14] on the LCT and the "Tray 4" decal above the
line [15].
When attaching these decals, align the bottom edge of each decal with the line
on the each tray cover.
22. .Change the tray size with User Tools (Tray Paper Settings).
Installation for two LCT units
1. Install the bridge tray unit in the 1st LCT ( p.2-103 "Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379)").
2. Remove all tapes and retainers in the 2nd LCT.
3. Attach the stud screw [1] to the rear side of the 2nd LCT.
4. Attach the top rear left cover [2] ( x 1: M4x20)
5. Attach the cushion [3] to the left top edge of the LCT.
6. Attach the stud screws [4] to the left side of the 2nd LCT.
7. Attach the top right cover [5] ( x 2: M4x20).
SM 2-121 D095/M077
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
8. Remove the covers from the right side of the 1st LCT.
9. Install the upper pins [5] with the grooved rings on the right upper cover.
10. Install the lower pins [6] on the right lower cover.
D095/M077 2-122 SM
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
Installation
11. I/F cover [7] of the 1st LCT
12. Remove the lower rear left cover [8] of the 2nd LCT ( x 5)
13. Open the front cover of the 2nd LCT and remove screw [9].
SM 2-123 D095/M077
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
14. Remove the ground plate [10] from the 2nd LCT ( x 2).
15. Turn over the ground plate and use the screws to fasten it to the same holes ( x 2).
16. Release the ground cable [11] (tape x 1, x 2).
17. If the tray heater will not be used, keep the 2nd LCT tray heater relay harness [12]
clamped.
18. Move the 2nd LCT to the right side of the 1st LCT.
19. Fasten the ground cable [13] with the washer [14] to the 1st LCT ( x 1: M4x8).
20. If the tray heater of the LCIT RT5050 will be used, attach the 2nd LCT heater relay
harness [15] to the 1st LCT.
D095/M077 2-124 SM
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
If the customer will use coated paper in high temperature and high humidity
conditions, the tray heater of the LCIT RT5050 is greatly needed. Connect the
LCT relay harness at this moment.
21. Align the 2nd LCT on the joint pins and then move the 2nd LCT much closer.
22. Dock the 2nd LCT with the right side of the 1st LCT, after confirming that the ground
Installation
cable [13] and LCT heater relay harness [15] are not pinched between the 1st LCT and
the 2nd LCT.
23. Fasten screw [16] to lock the 2nd LCT to the side of the 1st LCT.
24. Close the front door of the 2nd LCT.
25. Reattach the lower rear left cover to the 2nd LCT ( x 5).
26. Attach I/F connector [17] of the 2nd LCT to the 1st LCT.
SM 2-125 D095/M077
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
27. Insert the leveling shoes [18] (x 4) under the leveling feet and level the 2nd LCT.
28. Adjust the LCT level within ± 5 mm by rotating each nut on the leveling shoes.
29. Attach the "Tray 5" decal above the line [19] on the LCT and the "Tray 6" decal above the
line [20].
When attaching these decals, align the bottom edge of each decal with the line
on the each tray cover.
These decals are provided with "Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379).”
30. Change the tray size with User Tools (Tray Paper Settings) if needed.
D095/M077 2-126 SM
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
2.9.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR COPIER (D095)
Turn off the machine and unplug it from the power source before you start the
installation procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
This LCT requires the Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379) to be installed in the Copier D095. Install
Installation
the Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379) first before this installation procedure.
Preparing for Installation
1. Remove all tapes and retainers in the LCT.
2. Attach the stud screw [1] to the rear side of the LCT.
3. Attach the top rear left cover [2] ( x 1: M4x20)
SM 2-127 D095/M077
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
4. Attach the cushion [3] to the left top edge of the LCT.
5. Attach the stud screws [4] to the left side of the LCT.
6. Attach the top right cover [5] ( x 2: M4x20)
Installation for two LCT units
1. Install the bridge tray unit in the LCT-MF ( p.2-103).
2. Remove the covers from the right side of the LCT-MF.
3. Install the upper pins [1] with the grooved rings on the right upper cover.
4. Install the lower pins [2] on the right lower cover.
D095/M077 2-128 SM
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
Installation
5. I/F cover [3] of the LCT-MF.
6. Remove the lower rear left cover [4] of the LCT ( x 5)
7. Open the front cover of the LCT and remove screw [5].
SM 2-129 D095/M077
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
8. Remove the ground plate [6] from the LCT ( x 2).
9. Turn over the ground plate and use the screws to fasten it to the same holes ( x 2).
10. Release the ground cable [7] (tape x 1, x 2).
11. If the tray heater will not be used, keep the LCT tray heater relay harness [8] clamped.
12. Move the LCT to the right side of the LCT-MF.
13. Fasten the ground cable [9] with the washer [10] to the LCT-MF ( x 1: M4x8).
14. If the tray heater of the LCIT RT5050 will be used, attach the LCT heater relay harness
[11] to the LCT-MF.
D095/M077 2-130 SM
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
If the customer will use coated paper in high temperature and high humidity
conditions, the tray heater of the LCIT RT5050 is greatly needed. Connect the
LCT relay harness at this moment.
15. Align the LCT on the joint pins and then move the LCT much closer.
16. Dock the LCT with the right side of the LCT-MF after confirming that the ground cable [9]
Installation
and LCT heater relay harness [11] are not pinched between the LCT-MF and the LCT.
17. Fasten screw [12] to lock the LCT to the side of the LCT-MF.
18. Close the front door of the LCT.
19. Reattach the lower rear left cover to the LCT ( x 5).
20. Attach I/F connector [13] of the LCT to the LCT-MF.
SM 2-131 D095/M077
LCIT RT5050 (D532)
21. Insert the leveling shoes [14] (x 4) under the leveling feet and level the LCT.
22. Adjust the LCT level within ± 5 mm by rotating each nut on the leveling shoes.
23. Attach the "Tray 5" decal above the line [15] on the LCT and the "Tray 6" decal above the
line [16].
When attaching these decals, align the bottom edge of each decal with the line
on the each tray cover.
These decals are provided with "Bridge Unit BU5000 (D379).”
24. Change the tray size with User Tools (Tray Paper Settings) if needed.
D095/M077 2-132 SM
LCIT RT5030 (D452)
2.10 LCIT RT5030 (D452)
This peripheral can be only installed in the M077 model.
2.10.1 ACCESSORIES
Installation
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
illustration and list:
No. Description Q'ty
1. Leveling Shoes 3
2. Decal – Paper Set 3
3. Tab Paper End Fence 1
4. Decal – Paper Size 2
5. Lower Joint Pins 2
6. Upper Joint Pins 2
7. Philips Screw - M4 x 8 1
Installation Procedure – English (not shown) 1
The tab paper end fence (3) is located in the LCIT unit, mounted on hooks behind the
front door.
SM 2-133 D095/M077
LCIT RT5030 (D452)
2.10.2 INSTALLATION
Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is
disconnected before doing the following procedure.
Tapes, Retainers
1. From the left side [A], remove the visible tape and other items.
2. At the front [B], open the trays and remove the tapes and retainers.
3. Open the front door and remove the tapes attached to the levers.
D095/M077 2-134 SM
LCIT RT5030 (D452)
Docking
Installation
1. Remove the covers [A] from the right upper side.
2. Remove the covers [B] from the right lower side.
3. Install the pins with the grooved rings [C] on the right upper cover.
4. Install the other pins [D] on the right lower cover.
5. Remove the lower stay [A] ( x 4).
6. Remove the two screws that secure the ground plate [B].
7. Turn over the ground plate and use the screws to fasten it to the same holes as shown
( x 2).
SM 2-135 D095/M077
LCIT RT5030 (D452)
If you are going to install the Multi Bypass Tray B833, it must be installed before
the LCIT is docked to the mainframe.
8. Move the LCIT to the right side of the main machine.
9. Fasten the ground wire [A] ( x 1).
10. Remove cover [B].
11. Open the LCIT front door and remove screw [C] ( x 1).
12. Align the LCIT on the joint pins, and dock the LCIT with the right side of the main
machine.
13. Fasten screw [C] to lock the LCIT to the side of the main machine.
14. Attach connector [D].
D095/M077 2-136 SM
LCIT RT5030 (D452)
Height Adjustment
Installation
1. Set the leveling shoes [A].
2. Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level.
2.10.3 IMAGE POSITION SENSOR, PAPER REGISTRATION
ADJUSTMENT
1. Calibrate the image position sensor.
2. Check side-to-side registration and adjust if necessary.
SM 2-137 D095/M077
LCIT RT5030 (D452)
2.10.4 LCIT (D452) TRAY HEATERS
Accessories
Check the accessories against the list below.
No. Description Qty
1. Cover Plate 1
2. Heaters (230V 18W) 2
3. Screws (M4x6) 7
4. Harness Clamps (small) 2
5. Harness Clamps (large) 2
6. Relay Harness (long) 1
7. Relay Harness (short) 1
The accessory kit contains the accessories for both the LCIT D452 and LCIT D453.
Only the items shown below are required for the LCIT D452.
D095/M077 2-138 SM
LCIT RT5030 (D452)
Installation
Installation
Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is
disconnected before doing the following procedure.
1. If the LCIT is already installed, disconnect the LCIT:
Lock bar ( x1)
Interface cable
Ground wire ( x1)
2. Remove the right cover [A] ( x6).
3. Open the bottom tray [B], remove all the paper, then pull out the tray completely.
Do not remove either tray.
SM 2-139 D095/M077
LCIT RT5030 (D452)
4. Attach the front heater [A] ( x2).
5. Attach the rear heater [B] ( x2).
6. Pass the relay harness [C] through the right side of the LCIT and connect it to the heaters
( x2).
7. Attach the cover plate [D] ( x3).
8. Load paper in the bottom paper tray.
9. Push the bottom paper tray into the LCIT.
10. Reattach the right cover ( x6).
11. Attach the three harness clamps.
Harness clamps and are already attached to the unit. Harness clamp
is provided with the accessory kit.
12. Set the harnesses in the clamps, then close them ( x3).
D095/M077 2-140 SM
LCIT RT5030 (D452)
Installation
13. Attach the LCIT relay harness [A] to the mainframe.
14. Reconnect the ground wire [B] to the mainframe ( x1).
15. Dock the LCIT to the mainframe.
Lock bar ( x1)
Interface cable
Confirm that the relay harness and the ground wire are not pinched between the
mainframe and the LCIT.
SM 2-141 D095/M077
Multi Bypass Tray (B833)
2.11 MULTI BYPASS TRAY (B833)
2.11.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
Description Q'ty
1. Tab Sheet Fence 1
2. Sponge Strip 1
3. Bracket 1
4. Joint Pins 2
5. Tapping Screws 3
6. End Fence 1
The Multi Bypass Unit must be installed on top of the LCT D532 before the LCT is
docked to the mainframe.
If the LCT is already installed, it must be disconnected from the mainframe before
installation of the Multi Bypass Unit B833.
D095/M077 2-142 SM
Multi Bypass Tray (B833)
2.11.2 INSTALLATION
The Multi Bypass Tray B833 can be installed on the LCIT RT5050 D532 only.
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following
procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
Installation
Before Installing the Multi Bypass Tray:
If the LCT is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
To prevent damage to the connectors and ground wire, before pulling the LCIT away from the
mainframe:
Pull the LCIT about 20 cm (8") away from the mainframe.
Disconnect the connectors and the ground wire ( x 1)
Pull the LCIT completely away from the machine.
Be sure to follow the correct tray installation procedure depending on which LCIT will be
installed.
1. Remove the accessory packet [A].
2. Remove all other tape and shipping materials.
SM 2-143 D095/M077
Multi Bypass Tray (B833)
3. Remove the paper slot cover [B] ( x 2) and discard the screws.
4. Use the edge of a fine tip flathead screwdriver to remove the smaller four covers [C].
5. Screw in the guide pins [D].
6. Attach the bracket [E] ( x 1).
7. Grip the bypass tray unit handle [F]. Then place your hand under the corner [G] diagonal
to the handle, then lift the unit and set it on top of the LCT.
8. Align the embossed arrows [H] on the top left cover of the bypass tray with the arrows on
the LCT top.
D095/M077 2-144 SM
Multi Bypass Tray (B833)
Installation
9. Remove the handle [A] ( x 2). Keep these screws.
10. Remove the cover [B] ( x 4).
11. Use the screws removed above to attach the handle [A] to the front frame.
12. Fasten the bypass tray rear frame [C] to the LCT ( x 1).
13. Fasten the bypass tray front frame [D] to the LCT ( x 1).
14. Connect the bypass tray harness [A] to the LCIT ( x 4).
15. Re-attach the cover.
16. Attach the end fence (follow the instructions on the decal attached to the top of the
bypass tray).
SM 2-145 D095/M077
Multi Bypass Tray (B833)
Open the LCT front door. Hang the tab sheet fence on the hooks [A] on top of
the LCT tab fence. When feeding tab sheets from the bypass tray, follow the
decal instructions on the tab fence to install the fence.
D095/M077 2-146 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
2.12 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5010 (B835)
2.12.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
Installation
Description Q'ty
1. Spacer 1
2. Black Mylar 1
3. Relay Guide Plate – Long (Not used)* see NOTE 1
4. "L" Hinge Pins (Tray Unit Front Cover) 2
5. Sponge Strip 1
6. Leveling Shoes 4
7. Front Docking Bracket 1
8. Rear Docking Bracket 1
9. Flat Knob Screw 1
10. Screw (M4 x 8) 4
11. Screw (M3 x 6) 2
12. Screw (M4 x 12) 2
13. Knob Screw 3
14. Screws (M4 x 14) (Not used) 1
15. Base Cover (Tray Unit) 1
16. Relay Guide Plate – Short (Not used)* see NOTE 4
17. Front Cover 1
SM 2-147 D095/M077
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
The relay guide plates (No.3 and No.15) are not used for the model D095. Use the
relay guide provided with the mainframe.
D095/M077 2-148 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
2.12.2 INSTALLATION
Setting up the Unit and Docking to the Mainframe
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following
procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
Installation
1. Remove all the tape and shipping materials from the tray unit [A].
2. Remove cover [A].
3. Remove all tape and shipping materials from the transport unit [B].
SM 2-149 D095/M077
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
4. Confirm that the connectors [A] are free.
5. Attach the front docking plate [B] ( x 2).
6. Attach the rear docking plate [C] ( x 2).
These docking plates [B] [C] and screws are provided with the next device in the
paper feed line.
7. Attach the black mylar [D] to the relay guide plate [E] of the next finishing device to be
installed to the left of the cover interposer tray (Z-folding unit, booklet finisher, or finisher).
Do not attach this mylar to either the long or short guide plates provided with the
cover interposer tray accessories.
8. Peel the tape from the back of the sponge strip [A] and attach it as shown.
9. Remove the ground plate [B] from the bottom cross-piece ( x 2: M3x6).
D095/M077 2-150 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
Installation
10. Attach the relay guide plate (marked "A") [A] ( x2: M3x6).
You must use the Relay Guide Plate (marked "A") which is provided with the
mainframe (D095 or M077).
11. Attach the rear docking bracket [A] ( x 2: M4x8 provided with the mainframe).
12. Attach the front docking bracket [B] ( x 2: M4x8 provided with the mainframe).
SM 2-151 D095/M077
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
13. If the Z-Folding Unit will be installed, loosen the screws for the rear runner [A] and front
runner [B].
14. Push the runners in and re-fasten them again with the screws.
15. Open the front door of the cover interposer tray.
16. Pull out the locking lever [A].
17. Align the finisher [B] with the joint brackets [C], then slowly push the finisher onto the
brackets.
18. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the mainframe.
19. Push in the locking lever.
20. Check that the top edges of the finisher are parallel with edges of the finisher (or
mainframe) to the right.
21. Fasten the locking lever [A] ( x 1)
22. Close the front door.
Docking the Next Peripheral Device
The next peripheral device to the left of the cover interposer tray must be installed before you
can mount the tray unit on top of the transport unit of the cover interposer tray.
The tray unit of the cover interposer tray is supported by the top of the next peripheral
device in line to the left, as well as the transport unit of the cover interposer.
The next peripheral device to the left of the cover interposer must be set up and docked
to the cover interposer before the transport unit of the cover interposer can be mounted.
Connect the next peripheral unit now.
Z-Folding Unit B660 (See p.2-159 in this chapter)
3000-Sheet Finisher B830 (See p.2-199 in this chapter)
Never attempt to mount the cover interposer tray unit until the next device in line
(Z-Folding Unit B660, or 3000-Sheet Finisher (B830) has been docked to the
transport unit (base) of the cover interposer tray.
D095/M077 2-152 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
To prevent bending the frame of the tray unit and damaging its alignment, always
remove the tray unit from the cover interposer tray transport unit at the following
times:
1) Before disconnecting either the cover interposer tray or the next peripheral device
to the left, or
2) Before doing any maintenance on either the cover interposer tray or the next
Installation
peripheral device to the left.
Mounting the Tray Unit
1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Confirm that the connectors [B] are free.
3. Place the tray unit [C] on top of the cover interposer transport unit.
4. Attach the knob screw [D] ( x 1).
5. Connect the harness connectors [E] ( x 5)
6. Reattach the rear cover.
SM 2-153 D095/M077
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
7. Remove the front inner cover [A] from the dual-tray unit ( x 2).
8. Fasten the tray unit to the top of the transport unit with the knob screws [B] ( x 2).
9. Attach the base cover [A] (flat knob screw x 1).
10. Confirm that the holes in the cover match the positions of the reference pins.
11. Re-attach the front inner cover [B] (removed at step 7 above).
12. Position the tray unit front door [C] so that its hinges match the posts on the frame of the
tray unit.
13. Hold the lower L-pin [D] as shown, insert it halfway, push it up, then rotate it into its
groove.
14. Hold the upper L-pin [E] as shown, insert it halfway, push it down, then rotate it into its
groove.
D095/M077 2-154 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
Installation
15. Attach the spacer [A] to the rear of the transport unit ( x 2: M4x12).
16. Set the leveling shoes [A] (x 4) under the feet.
17. Turn the nuts to adjust the height of the cover interposer until it is level.
If this peripheral is installed next to the main machine (D095 or M077), do the
"Peripheral Height Adjustment" following this procedure.
SM 2-155 D095/M077
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
Peripheral Height Adjustment
1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP5-805-016.
3. Check the paper exit guide plate [A] of the mainframe and relay guide plate [B] of the
peripheral from the front side.
4. Remove the rear cover of the peripheral, and then check the paper exit guide plate of the
mainframe and relay guide plate of the peripheral from the rear side.
5. If the red areas [C] on the front and rear side edges of the peripheral's relay guide plate
are level with the plate edge [D] on the mainframe, no adjustment is required. Otherwise,
go to the next step.
The upper edge of the red area must not be above the top edge of plate edge [D],
and the lower edge of the red area must not be below the bottom edge of plate
edge [D])
6. Adjust the feet of the mainframe or peripheral so that the red areas at the front and rear
[C] are level with the plate edge [D], as explained above.
D095/M077 2-156 SM
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
Docking the Cover Interposer Tray B835
The following units are docked to the cover interposer tray:
Z-Fold Unit B660
Finisher B830
Z-Fold Unit B660 to Cover Interposer Tray B835
Installation
1. Attach the rear docking bracket [A].
2. Attach the front docking bracket [B].
These docking plates [A] [B] and screws are provided with the next device for
the next device installation in the paper feed line.
3. Connect the Z-folding unit.
SM 2-157 D095/M077
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
Finisher B830 to Cover Interposer Tray B835
1. Fasten the joint bracket to the Cover Interposer Tray B835 (provided with B830) ( x 4:
provided with B830).
2. Dock the finisher.
Firmware Update
Install the latest version of the firmware for the cover interposer tray.
The cover interposer may not operate correctly with the mainframe unless the most recent
version of the firmware is installed.
D095/M077 2-158 SM
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
2.13 Z-FOLDING UNIT ZF4000 (B660)
This unit cannot be installed in the same line as the High Capacity Stacker SK5010
(D447) if two stacker units are to be installed in the mainframe.
Installation
2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:
Description Qty
1. Lock Bracket – Rear (Cover Interposer Tray) 1
2. Lock Bracket – Rear 1
3. Lock Bracket – Front (Cover Interposer Tray)*1 1
4. Lock Bracket – Front 1
5. Ground Plate (For Cover Interposer Tray) 1
6. Ground Plate (For Z-folding unit) 1
7. Ground Plate (For Finisher B830 or B836) 1
8. Right Docking Bracket 1
9. Left Docking Bracket 1
10. Power Cord 1
11. Front Spacer 1
12. Rear Spacer 1
13. Guide Plate 1
14. Sponge Strip 1
15. Teflon C-Clamp (Not used for this machine) 2
16. Screws M4x10 4
17. Screws M3 x 6 8
SM 2-159 D095/M077
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
Description Qty
18. Screws M4 x 8 4
19 Leveling Shoes 3
20. Drive Gear (Not used for this machine) 1
21. Drive Gear Assy (Not used for this machine) 1
D095/M077 2-160 SM
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
2.13.2 INSTALLATION
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following
procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
Installation
Unpacking
1. Detach the head of the I/F connector [A].
2. Remove all external tape [B] and shipping materials.
3. Open the front door [A].
4. Raise the horizontal transport plate [B] and remove the cushion [C].
5. Pull out the Z-folding mechanism [D] and remove the cushion [E].
6. Open the right vertical transport cover [F] completely (2 steps).
7. Remove four spacers [G] by pulling on the string.
SM 2-161 D095/M077
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
Attaching the Brackets
1. Attach the joint bracket [A] to the left of the Z-folding unit (use the joint bracket that is
provided with the peripheral to be installed to the left side of the Z-folding unit) ( x4:
M4x10).
Use the long screws provided with the Z-fold unit accessories.
2. Attach the brackets [B] to the lower left corner of the Z-fold unit.
If a peripheral other than Booklet Finisher B836 is to be docked, attach one bracket
( x2: M4x8 each).
If the Booklet Finisher B836 is to be docked to the Z-folding unit, attach both
brackets and ( x2: M4x8 each)
3. Attach the ground (earth) plate [C] to the side of the Z-folding unit if the Z-folding unit is to
be installed next to the Cover Interposer Tray (B835), Perfect Binder (D391) or Buffer
Pass Unit (M379) ( x 2: M3x6).
Set the ground plate so that there is no gap between the plate and the bottom
frame of the finisher (as shown).
D095/M077 2-162 SM
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
Preparing for Docking
Installation
1. Remove the tape from the sponge [A] and attach it to the Z-folding unit.
2. Remove the top cover [A] ( x 4).
3. Remove the seal from the double-sided tape on the bottom of the front spacer [B], then
attach it.
4. Remove the seal from the double-sided tape on the bottom of the rear spacer [C], then
attach it.
5. The spacers align the top of the Z-folding unit with the edge of the mainframe.
6. Reattach the top cover [A] ( x 4).
7. Make sure that the top cover is level with the tops of the rear and front spacers.
SM 2-163 D095/M077
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
Do Steps 8 and 9 only when the Z-Folding Unit (B660) is installed with Cover
Interposer Tray (B835).
8. Replace the entrance guide plate [A] with the longer guide plate [B] provided with the
accessories ( x 2) if this option is to be installed next to another finishing option.
If this peripheral is to be installed next to the mainframe (D095 or M077), use the
relay guide plate (marked "A") provided with the mainframe (D095/M077). For
details, see the procedure below.
9. Attach the mylar [C] (from the accessories for the Cover Interposer B835) as shown in
the illustration only to the guide plate provided with the Cover Interposer Tray B835.
If this option is to be installed next to the mainframe (D095 or M077):
Attach the relay guide plate [A] (marked "A" provided with the D095 or M077) ( x 2:
removed in the previous step)
D095/M077 2-164 SM
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
Testing the Breaker
Installation
1. The breaker switch is at the lower right side of the Z-folder. Confirm that the manual
breaker switch [A] is set to the right.
When the breaker switch is set to the right (the "—" mark will be visible), the
mainframe is ready to be turned on.
2. Connect the Z-folding unit power cord to the Z-folding unit and connect the other end of
the cord to an ac power source.
3. Push in the breaker test button with the tip of a screw driver until the breaker switch
snaps to the off position.
4. Confirm that the breaker switch is at the off position.
If the breaker switch does not move to the off position:
Confirm that the power cord is securely connected to the power supply.
Push the test button again.
If the breaker switch does not snap to the off position, the breaker switch must be
replaced.
5. Reset the breaker switch to the on position.
SM 2-165 D095/M077
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
Docking the Z-Folding Unit to the Cover Interposer Tray or Mainframe
The Z-Folding Unit is docked to the Cover Interposer Tray B835, or to the Mainframe if the
cover interposer tray is not used.
Z-Fold Unit to Cover Interposer Tray B835
1. Attach the rear docking bracket [A].
2. Attach the front docking bracket [B].
3. Connect the Z-folding unit.
Z-Fold B660 to Mainframe
1. Attach the rear docking bracket [A] ( x 2: M4x8 provided with the mainframe).
2. Attach the front docking bracket [B] ( x 2: M4x8 provided with the mainframe).
3. Connect the Z-folding unit.
4. Turn on the main power switch.
5. Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP5-805-016.
D095/M077 2-166 SM
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
Installation
6. Check the paper exit guide plate [A] of the mainframe and relay guide plate [B] of the
peripheral from the front side.
7. Remove the rear cover of the peripheral, and then check the paper exit guide plate of the
mainframe and relay guide plate of the peripheral from the rear side.
8. If the red areas [C] on the front and rear side edges of the peripheral's relay guide plate
are level with the plate edge [D] on the decurler unit, no adjustment is required.
Otherwise, go to the next step.
The upper edge of the red area must not be above the top edge of plate edge [D],
and the lower edge of the red area must not be below the bottom edge of plate
edge [D])
9. Adjust the feet of the mainframe or peripheral so that the red areas at the front and rear
[C] are level with the plate edge [D], as explained above.
SM 2-167 D095/M077
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
Connecting the Z-Folding Unit B660
1. Fasten brackets [A] (x2) (provided accessories) to the Cover Interposer Tray B835,
Perfect Binder D391, Buffer Pass Unit M379 or Mainframe ( x 2 each).
2. Remove support screw and bracket [B], push in the support, then reattach the screw and
bracket.
3. Pull the top cover [C] toward you then raise it.
4. Raise the horizontal transport plate [D] to the left.
5. Pull out the Z-folding mechanism [E].
6. Pull out the Z-folding unit lock lever [F] ( x 1).
7. At the right bottom edge of the Z-folding unit, confirm that the breaker switch is ON.
This switch should display "—.” If you see "O", set the switch to "—.” The
machine will not recognize the Z-folding unit if this switch is off.
8. Dock the Z-folding unit to the Cover Interposer Tray B835, Perfect Binder D391, Buffer
Pass Unit M379 or Mainframe.
9. Push in the lock lever [F] and fasten it ( x 1).
10. Push in the Z-folding mechanism [E], lower the horizontal transport plate [D], then close
the front door [C].
11. Connect the Z-Folding unit to the mainframe.
12. Connect the Z-Folding unit power cord to the Z-folding unit and connect the other end of
the cord to the power ac supply.
13. At the left bottom edge of the Z-folding unit, remove the bracket [A] ( x 1).
D095/M077 2-168 SM
Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
14. Push in the support [B].
15. Reattach the bracket [A] ( x 1).
With the support retracted, the Z-folding unit tips easily!
16. Attach the I/F cable to the Cover Interposer Tray B835, Perfect Binder D391, Buffer Pass
Unit M379 or Mainframe.
Installation
17. Connect the power cord to the Z-folding unit.
Connecting the Peripheral to the Z-Folding Unit B660
1. Remove the rear cover [1] of the peripheral.
2. Attach the ground plate [5] (No.7 in the accessories of this unit) to the peripheral ( x 2:
M3x6).
3. Open the front door of the finisher.
4. Pull out the locking lever [2] ( x 1).
5. Align the finisher with the joint brackets [3], then slowly push the finisher onto the
brackets.
6. Connect the finisher cable to the Z-Folding Unit.
7. Push in the locking lever.
8. Check that the top edges of the finisher are parallel with edges of the Z-Folding Unit.
9. Fasten the locking lever [2] ( x 1)
10. Fasten the screw [4].
11. Reattach the rear cover of the finisher
12. Close the front door.
SM 2-169 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
2.14 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434)
2.14.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
illustration and list.
No. Description Q'ty
1. Screws M4x14 (Joint Bracket) 4
2. Screws M3x8 (Shift Tray) 4
3. Screws M3x6 (Ground Plate) 2
4. Screws M3x6 (Paper Guide) 2
5. Leveling Shoes 4
6. Ground Plate 1
7. Power Cord*1 1
D095/M077 2-170 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
No. Description Q'ty
8. Joint Bracket 1
9. Sponge Strip 1
10. Paper Guide 1
Installation
11. Auxiliary Tray – Glossy Paper 1
12. Auxiliary Tray – Z-Fold Paper 1
13. Auxiliary Tray – Coated Thin Paper 1
Auxiliary Tray Holder – Glossy Paper and
14. 1
Coated Thin Paper
15. Auxiliary Tray Holder – Z-Fold Paper 1
16. Booklet Tray 1
17. Shift Tray 1
SM 2-171 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
2.14.2 INSTALLATION
Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is
disconnected before doing the following procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to
Turn Off the Power ")
Tapes, Retainers, Shipping Plates
The shipping plates prevent the staple unit from moving during transport. The plates
should be kept and re-attached before the unit is transported to another location.
1. Remove tapes:
[A] Left
[B] Rear
[C] Front
D095/M077 2-172 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
Installation
2. Open the front door [A].
3. Remove:
[B] Tapes, retainers inside
[C] Tag, wire, shipping plate ( x2)
4. Loosen the screws of the caster cover [A] ( x2).
5. Push the caster [B] down until it touches the floor.
6. With the caster touching the floor, tighten the caster cover screws.
This prevents the unit from tipping over when you pull out the staple unit.
SM 2-173 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
7. Grip handle [A] and slowly pull the staple unit out until it stops.
8. Remove:
[B] All tapes, retainers
[C] Tag, wire, shipping plate ( x2)
[D] Tag, wire, shipping plate ( x2)
9. Remove:
[A] Tapes, retainer
[B] Tapes
D095/M077 2-174 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
Ground Plate, Sponge Strip
Installation
1. Attach the ground plate [A] to the bottom right edge of the unit ( x2).
For installing to the mainframe (D095 or M077), do not attach the ground plate [A].
2. Attach the paper guide to the right side of the unit ( x2).
For installing on upstream peripherals other than the mainframe (D095 or M077),
use the paper guide [A] in the accessories of this unit.
If the upstream peripheral device is the Cover Interposer Tray (B835) or the
Decurl Unit DU5000 (D457), attach the black mylar provided with the cover
interposer tray or decurl unit to this paper guide.
For installing on the mainframe (D095 or M077), use the paper guide [B] (marked
"B") provided with the mainframe (D095 or M077).
3. Remove the tape from the sponge strip [C] and attach the strip to the top right edge of the
unit.
SM 2-175 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
Booklet Tray, Shift Tray
1. Attach the booklet tray [A] to the notch in the left cover (no screws).
2. Attach the shift tray [B] to the left side of the unit ( x4 M3x8).
Docking
1. Fasten the joint bracket [A] to the mainframe (D095 or M077) ( x 4; M4x8 provided
with the mainframe).
Use the screws ( x 4; M4x14) to fasten the joint bracket to other peripherals.
See the installation procedure for the upstream unit for information about which joint
bracket is to be used.
D095/M077 2-176 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
Installation
2. Open the front door [A] of the unit.
3. At the front right corner, remove the screw of the lock bar [B] ( x1 M3x6). Keep this
screw.
4. Pull the lock bar toward you until it stops.
5. Slowly push the unit [C] against the left side of the upstream unit (or main machine) so
that the lock bar is directly and squarely under the arms of the joint bracket [D].
6. Push the lock bar in completely so that it slides up into the notches in the arms on both
ends of the joint bracket.
7. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 3 ( x1).
8. Attach the I/F cable [E] to the upstream unit.
9. Remove:
[A] Rear upper cover ( x5)
[B] Rear lower cover ( x4)
SM 2-177 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
10. Use a short screwdriver to loosen bracket [A] ( x3).
11. Fasten the bracket to the upstream unit at [B] ( x1).
12. Tighten the screws ( x3).
13. Re-attach the rear covers.
Height Adjustment
1. Set the leveling shoes [A].
2. Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level.
If this unit is to be installed to the left of the mainframe (D095 or M07), the following
adjustment procedure is required. If not, go to the next section "Power Cord,
Breaker Switch Test.”
3. Turn on the main power switch.
4. Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP5-805-016.
D095/M077 2-178 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
Installation
5. Check the paper exit guide plate [A] of the mainframe and relay guide plate [B] of the
peripheral from the front side.
6. Remove the rear cover of the peripheral, and then check the paper exit guide plate of the
mainframe and relay guide plate of the peripheral from the rear side.
7. If the blue marks [C] on the front and rear side edges of the peripheral's relay guide plate
are level with the plate edge [D] on the mainframe unit, no adjustment is required.
Otherwise, go to the next section "Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test.”
The upper edge of the blue mark must not be above the top edge of plate edge
[D], and the lower edge of the blue mark must not be below the bottom edge of
plate edge [D])
8. Adjust the feet of the mainframe or peripheral so that the blue marks at the front and rear
[C] are level with the plate edge [D], as explained above.
SM 2-179 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
Power Cord, Breaker Switch Test
1. Insert the socket of the power cord [A] into the power connection point.
When using this unit in China, do not use the power cord in the accessories of
the Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434). Ask your supervisor and use a power cord
specified for use in China.
2. Connect the power supply cord plug into a power outlet.
3. Test the breaker switch [B] ( "Installation" > "Common Adjustments" > "Breaker Switch
Testing").
Auxiliary Trays
1. Attach to the rear cover:
[A] Z-fold auxiliary tray holder, and tray
[B] Glossy paper auxiliary tray holder, and tray
[C] Coated thin paper auxiliary tray
D095/M077 2-180 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
These tray holders can be installed on the front door if the auxiliary trays will be
used frequently.
2. Instruct the operator about when to use these auxiliary trays, as explained below.
Installation
Before feeding glossy paper, pull out the extension [A] of the shift tray and mount the
glossy paper auxiliary tray [B].
Before feeding Z-folded paper from the Multi Folding Unit (D454), set the Z-fold
auxiliary tray [C] on the shift tray.
Before feeding coated thin paper from the Multi Folding Unit (D454), set the coated
thin paper auxiliary tray [D] on the shift tray.
Check for Skew and Correct Side-to-Side Registration
1. Load some A3/DLT paper in Tray 2 of the main machine.
2. Make several copies that will exit to the shift tray.
3. Watch each sheet as it exits the machine to check for the presence of skew, and check
that the side-to-side registration is correct. ( p.2-237 "Skew and Side-to-Side
Adjustment")
SM 2-181 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
2.14.3 PUNCH UNIT PU5020 NA, EU, SC (D449-17, -27, -28)
Accessories
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
illustration and list.
D095/M077 2-182 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
No. Description Q'ty
1. Punch Drive Unit 1
Installation
2. Punch Unit 1
3. Punch Registration Unit 1
4. Punch Control Board 1
5. Sensor Arm and Sensor 1
6. Punch-out Hopper 1
7. Harness: Long 1
8. Harness: Board Relay 1
9. Spring 1
10. Step Screw 1
11. Screws M3x6 9
SM 2-183 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
2.14.4 INSTALLATION
Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is
disconnected before doing the following procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to
Turn Off the Power ")
Shipping Materials
1. Remove motor protector plate [A] ( x4).
Rear Cover
1. Remove upper rear cover [A] ( x4).
D095/M077 2-184 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
Right Upper Panel
Installation
1. Remove the right upper panel [A] ( x4).
Punch Registration Unit
1. Use a pair of nippers to remove knockouts [A].
2. Raise and open lever "RB3" [B].
3. Remove plate [A] and discard it ( x4).
SM 2-185 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
4. Insert the harness connectors [A] through the hole [B].
5. Make sure the harness connectors are through the hole completely and visible at the rear
of the machine.
6. Set and fasten the punch registration unit [C] ( x4, 2 screws each at front and back).
7. Clamp harness [A] ( x4).
8. Clamp harness [B] ( x2).
D095/M077 2-186 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
Sensor Arm
Installation
1. Attach sensor arm [A] ( x1 Step Screw, Spring x1).
2. Make sure the sensor arm swings freely on the step screw and spring.
3. Attach harness [B] to the sensor on top of the arm.
Punch Drive Unit, Punch Unit
1. On the punch unit, connect harness [A] ( x1, x1).
SM 2-187 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
2. Attach the punch mechanism [A] to the rails of the punch unit ( x1).
If you are installing the punch unit for Europe, connect the harness [B] ( x1,
x2).
The punch unit for North America has no punch switching motor, so this harness is
not required.
3. At the front, insert the punch unit [A] into the finisher and fasten it ( x4).
4. Remove the shoulder screw with red tag [B], and detach the tag and wire.
5. After removing the screw from hole , re-attach it at hole .
This screw must remain attached to the punch unit.
Before removing the punch unit from the finisher, the screw must be removed
from hole and re-attached at hole . This stabilizes the punch unit and
prevents it from wobbling from side to side while it is being removed and
handled after removal.
D095/M077 2-188 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
6. At the front, slide the punch-out hopper [A] into the finisher.
Installation
7. Route the harnesses from the CIS unit [A] through the hole.
8. Connect the harnesses at and ( x2).
9. If you are installing the punch unit for Scandinavia, fasten the extra connector (not used)
at ( x1).
10. Finish clamping the harnesses as shown above.
SM 2-189 D095/M077
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
Punch Control Board
1. Install the punch control board (Standoffs x4, no screws).
2. Connect the punch relay harness to the punch control board and punch main control
board .
Final Connection
1. Fasten the connectors to the punch unit PCB [A] ( x2).
2. Release harness [A] from the frame ( x2).
D095/M077 2-190 SM
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
Installation
3. Connect harness [A] to the punch control board ( x1).
4. Gather harness [A] and the board relay harness [B] and clamp them ( x3).
SM 2-191 D095/M077
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455)
2.15 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455)
This unit requires the Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434).
2.15.1 ACCESSORIES
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following
illustration and list.
No. Description Q'ty
1. Output Tray*1 1
2. Joint Bracket – Left (Marked "L") 1
3. Joint Bracket – Right (Marked "R") 1
4. Ground Plate 1
5. Sponges 2
6. Screws (M3x6 for Ground Plate) 2
7. Screws (M4x10 for Joint Bracket) 4
8. Leveling Shoes 4
9. Power Cord 1
*1: Screws (x2) for the output tray are attached to the left side of the unit.
D095/M077 2-192 SM
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455)
2.15.2 INSTALLATION
Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is
disconnected before doing the following procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to
Turn Off the Power ")
Installation
Tapes, Stopper Plate
1. Remove the tape on the right side to free the I/F cable [A].
2. Remove the tape from the left side [B].
3. Open the front door and remove the retainer [A].
4. Remove the stopper plate [B] ( x1).
Keep the stopper plate. It should be re-installed before transporting the unit to a
new location.
SM 2-193 D095/M077
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455)
Output Tray
1. Make sure that the front door [A] is open.
2. Remove:
[B] Left upper cover( x2)
[C] Left lower cover ( x2)
3. Remove the screws and from the left side.
4. Use the removed screws to attach the output tray [A].
5. Connect the output tray at [B].
6. Remove the sheet [C] of paper.
Do not remove this sheet [C] of paper before connecting the output tray to the
trimmer unit.
7. Reattach the left lower cover and left upper cover.
D095/M077 2-194 SM
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455)
Ground Plate
Installation
1. Attach the ground plate [A] to the right bottom edge ( x2 M3x6).
Preparing the Booklet Finisher (D434) for Docking
1. Open the front door [A] of the finisher.
2. Pull out the staple unit [B].
SM 2-195 D095/M077
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455)
3. At the rear of the finisher, remove:
[A] Rear upper cover ( x5)
[B] Rear lower cover ( x4)
4. Unfasten the booklet tray sensor actuator arm [A] ( x2).
5. Disconnect the actuator arm [B] and remove it ( x5, x1).
6. Store the actuator arm in a safe location for future use.
7. Reinstall the rear upper and lower cover.
D095/M077 2-196 SM
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455)
Docking
Installation
1. Attach:
[A] Left joint bracket, marked "L" ( x2, M4x10)
[B] Right joint bracket, marked "R" ( x2, M4x10)
2. Peel the tape from the back of the sponges and attach sponge and .
3. At the rear, remove screw from plate [A].
4. Loosen screw and lower the plate so you can see the lock bar [B].
5. Remove lock bar screw ( x1 M3x6). Keep this screw.
6. Push the lock bar [B] until it is unlocked.
7. Slowly push the unit [C] against the left side of the finisher so that the lock bar is directly
and squarely under the arms of the joint brackets.
8. At the rear, pull lock bar [B] toward you so that it slides up into the notches in the arms of
the joint brackets.
SM 2-197 D095/M077
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455)
9. Fasten the lock bar by re-attaching the screw removed in Step 5. ( x1).
10. Connect the unit I/F cable [D] to the finisher.
11. Connect the plug of the power cord to the power source.
12. Set a leveling shoe [A] under each corner of the unit.
13. At each corner, turn the nut to lower the bolt onto each shoe.
14. Use a level to check each side of the unit.
15. Turn each nut to adjust the height of each corner until each side is level.
D095/M077 2-198 SM
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
2.16 FINISHER SR5000 (B830)
2.16.1 ACCESSORIES
Finisher SR5000 B830 Accessories
Installation
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description Q'ty
1. Sponge Strip 1
2. Entrance Guide Plate 1
3. Ground Plate 1
4. Joint Bracket 1
5. Shift Tray 1
6. Leveling Shoes 4
7. Tapping Screws – M3 x 6 6
8. Screws – M4 x 8 4
9. Support Plate Pocket 1
10. Support Plate 1
11. Support Plate for Proof Tray 1
12. Side Tray 1
SM 2-199 D095/M077
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
2.16.2 FINISHER INSTALLATION
The firmware of this finisher (B830) must be ver.1.18 or more when installing in the D095 or
M077 model. For details about updating firmware, see the "p.5-35 "Firmware Update” in the
chapter "Service Tables.”
Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this
procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
Removing tape and shipping retainers
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all strips of tape and shipping retainers.
D095/M077 2-200 SM
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
Installation
2. Open the front door and remove the shipping retainers.
3. Remove the brackets, tags, and wires in this order: [A], [B], [C] ( x 2 each).
Preparing before Docking
Next to the mainframe (D095 or M077)
1. Install the table extension [A] ( x 2: M4 x 8).
The edge of the table extension should be aligned with the edge of the finisher.
2. Attach the cushion [B] to the right side of the upper cover.
SM 2-201 D095/M077
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
3. Open the front cover [A] and entrance guide [B] of the finisher.
4. Align the mylar [A] (provided with the D095 or M077) with the edge [B] of the entrance
guide as shown, and then attach it.
5. Install the entrance guide plate [A] provided with the D095 or M077 ( x 2: M3 x 6).
The screw hole [B] should be at the front side of the machine.
6. Close the entrance guide and front cover of the finisher.
D095/M077 2-202 SM
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
Installation
7. Insert the shift tray [A] into the grooves and fasten it ( x 4: M3 x 6).
Next to another option
1. Install the ground plate [A] ( x 2: M3 x 6).
If this finisher is to be installed next to the Z-Folding Unit B660, use the ground
plate provided with the Z-Folding Unit. See p.2-159 "Z-Folding Unit ZF4000
(B660)" in the chapter "Installation.”
Set the ground plate so that there is no gap between the plate and the bottom
frame of the finisher.
2. Install the table extension [B] ( x 2: M4 x 8).
3. Attach the cushion [C] to the right side of the upper cover.
The edge of the table extension should be aligned with the edge of the finisher.
4. Install the entrance guide plate [D] ( x 2: M3 x 6).
SM 2-203 D095/M077
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
5. Insert the shift tray [A] into the grooves and fasten it ( x 4: M3 x 6).
Docking the Finisher B830
The Finisher (B830) is docked to:
Z-folding unit
Cover Interposer tray (if Z-Folding Unit B660 is not installed)
Mainframe (if Z-Folding Unit B660 and Cover Interposer Tray B835 are all not installed.)
Finisher B830 to Z-Folding Unit B660
1. Fasten the joint bracket to the Z-Folding Unit B660 ( x 4: M4x8).
2. Dock the finisher. (Go to 'Connecting the Finisher B830'.)
Finisher B830 to Cover Interposer Tray B835
D095/M077 2-204 SM
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
Installation
1. Fasten the joint bracket to the Cover Interposer Tray B835 ( x 4: M4x8).
2. Dock the finisher. (Go to 'Connecting the Finisher B830'.)
Finisher B830 to Mainframe
1. Fasten the joint bracket to the mainframe ( x 4: M4x8 provided with the mainframe).
2. Dock the finisher. (Go to 'Connecting the Finisher B830'.)
SM 2-205 D095/M077
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
Connecting the Finisher B830
If this finisher is to be installed next to the Z-Folding Unit B660, see p.2-159
"Z-Folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)" in the chapter "Installation.”
1. Open the front door of the finisher.
2. Pull out the locking lever [A] ( x 1).
3. Align the finisher [B] with the joint brackets [C], then slowly push the finisher onto the
brackets.
4. Connect the finisher cable [D] to the mainframe or peripheral.
If this finisher is installed left next to the mainframe, "Peripheral Height
Adjustment" is required. See the "Peripheral Height Adjustment" following this
procedure.
5. Push in the locking lever [A].
6. Check that the top edges of the finisher are parallel with edges of the device (or
mainframe) to the right.
7. Fasten the locking lever [A] ( x 1)
8. Close the front door.
D095/M077 2-206 SM
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
Installation
9. Set the leveling shoes [A] (x4) under the feet.
10. Turn the nuts to adjust the height of the finisher until it is level.
11. Turn on the main power switch.
12. Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP5-805-016.
Peripheral Height Adjustment
1. Check the front top edge [A] of the B830 finisher and the front top cover edge [B] of the
mainframe.
The difference between these edges [A] [B] should be within ± 2mm.
2. Check the rear top edges as well as the front edges.
3. Adjust the feet of the mainframe or peripheral so that the front and rear top edges of the
B830 finisher are level with the front and rear edges of the mainframe.
SM 2-207 D095/M077
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
Support Tray
If a customer will use a large size (B4 or Legal or more) of coated paper, attach the support
tray [A] (provided with D095 or M077) to the shift tray [B] of the finisher.
D095/M077 2-208 SM
Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)
2.17 PUNCH UNIT PU5000 (B831)
The Punch Unit B831 is installed in the Finisher SR5000 B830.
2.17.1 ACCESSORIES
Installation
Check the accessories and their quantities against this list.
Description Qty
1. Punch unit 1
2. Punch Waste Hopper 1
3. Spacer (2 mm) 1
4. Spacer (1 mm) 1
5. Knob 1
6. Step Screw 1
7. Screw (M4 x 6) Black 1
8. Screw (M3 x 10) 2
9. Spring 1
10. Machine Screw, Washer (M4 x 6) 1
SM 2-209 D095/M077
Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)
2.17.2 INSTALLATION
Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this
procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
1. If the finisher is connected to the machine, disconnect it.
2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover ( x 2).
3. Remove the punch unit from its packing materials. Remove the motor protector plate [A]
( x 4) and the cam lock plate [B] ( x 2).
4. Remove the inner cover [A] ( x 3).
5. Behind the inner cover at [B] and [C], push the lock tabs to the right to release the inner
cover from the frame.
6. Remove the plastic sections [D] from the cover.
D095/M077 2-210 SM
Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)
Installation
7. Remove the paper guide [A] ( x 4).
8. Install the sensor arm [A] ( x 1, small step screw (M3 x 4).
Make sure that the sensor arm turns freely on the step screw.
9. Attach the spring [B].
SM 2-211 D095/M077
Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)
10. Position the 2 mm spacer [A] and attach the punch unit [B]. ( x 2, M3 x 10).
11. Use one of the screws removed from the motor protector plate to fasten the remaining
two spacers to the frame as shown.
These extra spacers can be used to adjust the position of the punch holes (front
to rear, across the page).
12. At the front, attach the punch unit knob [A] ( x 1).
13. Connect the PCB harness connector [A] to CN129 of the finisher PCB and to CN600 of
the punch unit PCB.
14. Connect the HP Sensor 2 harness connector [B] to CN130 of the finisher PCB and to HP
Sensor 2.
15. Connect the end of the hopper-full-sensor cable that has one connector [C] to the hopper
full sensor on the arm ( x 1, x 1).
D095/M077 2-212 SM
Punch Unit PU5000 (B831)
No special DIP switch settings are necessary for this punch unit. The punch unit
sends an identification signal to the machine. Then the machine knows the type
of punch unit that is installed.
Installation
16. Put the hopper [A] in the finisher.
17. Attach the inner cover and rear cover.
18. Close the front door and connect the finisher to the machine.
SM 2-213 D095/M077
Cooling Fan Unit Type 5000 (B831)
2.18 COOLING FAN UNIT TYPE 5000 (B831)
2.18.1 COMPONENT CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q'ty
1 Cooling Fan Unit 1
2 Upper Cover 1
3 Lower Cover 1
4 Screw: M3x6 7
D095/M077 2-214 SM
Cooling Fan Unit Type 5000 (B831)
2.18.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following
procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] of the finisher (B830) ( x 2).
2. Lower the shift tray [2] if the shift tray is at the top position.
3. Remove the jogger unit cover [3] ( x 2).
SM 2-215 D095/M077
Cooling Fan Unit Type 5000 (B831)
4. Align the hooks [4] [5] of the fan unit frame with the cutouts [6] [7] at the front and rear of
the finisher frame.
5. Put the front hook [4] into the front cutout [6] first, and then the rear hook [5] into the rear
cutout [7].
6. Put the harness [8] of the cooling fan unit through the cutout [9] in the finisher frame, and
clamp the harness with the clamp [10].
D095/M077 2-216 SM
Cooling Fan Unit Type 5000 (B831)
Installation
7. Slide the cooling fan unit [11] to the rear side, and then secure it with two screws.
Use the screws which were removed in step 3
8. Connect the harness of the cooling fan unit to CN135 [12] on the finisher main board, and
then clamp it with the seven clamps as shown above.
SM 2-217 D095/M077
Cooling Fan Unit Type 5000 (B831)
1. Disconnect the harness [13] if the harness of the punch unit has been connected
to CN135 [12], and then connect the harness of the cooling fan unit to CN135 [12].
2. Attach the harness [13] of the punch unit to the relay connector [14] of the cooling
fan harness.
3. Clamp the harness of the cooling fan unit with the seven clamps.
9. Reattach the rear cover of the finisher ( x 2)
10. Align the front tab [15] on the lower cover with the groove [16] under the cooling fan unit,
and align the rear tab [17] with the groove [18].
11. Install the lower cover [19] under the cooling fan unit ( x 2).
D095/M077 2-218 SM
Cooling Fan Unit Type 5000 (B831)
Installation
12. Install the upper cover [20] in the cooling fan unit ( x 7).
13. Turn on the mainframe.
14. Turn on the power switch [21] of the cooling fan unit.
15. Check the operation of the cooling fan unit.
SM 2-219 D095/M077
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 (M379)
2.19 BUFFER PASS UNIT TYPE 5000 (M379)
2.19.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list:
Description Qty
1. Sponge Stripe 1
2. Screw 4
3. Leveling Shoes 4
4. Rear Docking Bracket 1
5. Front Docking Bracket 1
6. Mylar 2*1
7. Power Cord 1
- Caution Decal for Multi Power Sources 1
*1: These items are used for the paper guide plate of the downstream peripheral.
D095/M077 2-220 SM
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 (M379)
2.19.2 INSTALLATION
Disconnect the power cord from the inlet of the buffer pass unit and unplug the
mainframe before starting the following procedure.
Do not pull out the buffer pass unit drawer until this unit has been docked to the
Installation
mainframe. Otherwise, the buffer pass unit can fall down.
( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
Unpacking
1. Remove all external tapes [A].
2. Open the front door [B] and remove all tapes [C].
Do not pull out the buffer pass unit drawer [D] until this unit has been docked to
the mainframe. Otherwise, the buffer pass unit can fall down.
SM 2-221 D095/M077
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 (M379)
Preparing for Docking
1. Remove the tape from the sponge stripe [A] and attach it to the buffer pass unit as shown
above.
Docking the Buffer Pass Unit to the Mainframe
1. Attach the rear docking bracket [A] ( x 2: M4x8).
2. Attach the front docking bracket [B] ( x 2: M4x8).
D095/M077 2-222 SM
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 (M379)
Installation
3. Open the front door [A].
4. Pull out the locking lever [B] ( x 1).
5. Dock the buffer pass unit [A] to the mainframe.
6. Push in the lock lever [B] and fasten it ( x 1).
7. Connect the I/F cable [A] of the buffer pass unit to the socket [B] of the mainframe.
8. Connect the power cord to the buffer pass unit and connect the other end of the cord to a
wall outlet.
SM 2-223 D095/M077
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 (M379)
9. Set the leveling shoes (x4) under the feet of the buffer pass unit.
10. Use a wrench to turn the nut [B] at each foot until the machine is level.
11. Attach the caution decal [A] for multi power sources to the power plug [B] (for NA) or [C]
(for EU) of the mainframe.
The caution decal [A] must be attached approximately 30 mm [D] from the power
plug end.
D095/M077 2-224 SM
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 (M379)
Removing the Shipping Brackets
Installation
1. First remove two screws [A] on the clamp bracket [B].
2. Pull out the buffer pass unit drawer [C].
3. Remove the clamp bracket [B] ( x 2).
4. Remove the four shipping brackets [D] ( x 1 each).
5. Push in the buffer pass unit drawer [C].
6. Close the front door.
SM 2-225 D095/M077
Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 (M379)
Connecting the Other Peripheral to the Buffer Pass Unit
1. Attach the docking bracket (provided with a downstream peripheral) to the left side [A] of
the buffer pass unit.
2. Attach the mylars [A] to the entrance guide plate [B] of the next finishing device to be
installed to the left of the buffer pass unit.
Do not attach these mylars to the entrance guide plate of the buffer pass unit.
3. Dock a peripheral to the buffer pass unit.
D095/M077 2-226 SM
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
2.20 FUSER UNIT AIR SEPARATOR TYPE C901 (M390)
2.20.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Installation
No. Description Q'ty
1 Air Separator Cover 1
2 Air Separator Unit 1
3 Air Nozzle Unit 1
4 Screw: M4 x 8 4
5 Tapping Screw: M4 x 8 6
6 Pipe duct 1
7 Cushion 2
SM 2-227 D095/M077
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
2.20.2 INSTALLATION
Turn the machine power off and unplug it from the power source before starting the
following procedure. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
1. Remove the rear lower right cover [A] ( x 4).
2. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 2).
3. Release the four clamps.
4. Take out the harness [B] and disconnect the power supply cable [C].
5. Take out the air tube [D] from the mainframe.
D095/M077 2-228 SM
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
Installation
6. Remove the tube cap [A] from the air tube [B] from the mainframe.
The air tube is mentioned in step 5.
7. Remove the joint cap [A] from the joint [B] on the air separator unit.
8. Connect the air tube [C] to the joint [B] on the air separator unit.
Make sure that air tube is firmly connected.
SM 2-229 D095/M077
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
9. Attach the air separator unit [A] to the mainframe (tapping screw; x 4).
The air separator unit weighs approximately 20.5 kg (45.2 lb.). Two people are
required to lift it or set it down.
10. Connect the harness [A] to CN682 on the main board of the air separator unit ( x 2).
11. Connect the power supply cable [B] to the required power connector on the air separator
unit, and then clamp the power supply cable ( x 1).
Consult with the customer about the voltage that is used on the customer site, and
then connect the power supply cable to the required connector referring to the table
below.
Voltage of the customer site Proper connector
180 - 204V 200V
205 - 213V 208V
214 - 224V 220V
225 - 234V 230V
235 - 264V 240V
D095/M077 2-230 SM
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
Installation
12. Attach the air separator cover [A] to the mainframe ( x 2).
13. Attach the cushions [B] to both corners of the air separator cover.
14. Open the front doors of the mainframe.
15. Pull out the handle [A].
16. Turn the lock lever [A] for the fusing unit drawer counterclockwise, and then pull out the
fusing unit drawer.
17. Remove the screw [B]
SM 2-231 D095/M077
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
18. Attach the handle [A] as shown above.
19. Hold the handle [A], and then lift the fusing unit vertically.
The fusing unit weighs approximately 29.2 kg (64.4 lb.). Handle it carefully when
you lift it and set it down.
20. Place the fusing unit on a suitable sheet of paper, and then remove the handle.
21. Fusing knob [A] ( x 1)
22. Fusing front cover [B] ( x 3)
D095/M077 2-232 SM
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
Installation
If you cannot remove the fusing knob screw, hold the drive gear [A] with pliers
and remove it.
23. Fusing rear cover [A] ( x 4)
24. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 3).
When rerouting the harness as shown above, route the harness between the
connectors [B] and [C].
SM 2-233 D095/M077
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
25. Remove the positioning pins [A] ( x 2)
26. Remove the fusing upper frame [A].
27. Replace the fusing belt stripper plate [A] with the air nozzle unit in the accessories
( x 2).
D095/M077 2-234 SM
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
Installation
28. Set the exhaust part [A] with the intake part [B] of the pipe duct facing the opposite
direction.
29. Attach the pipe duct [A] to the rear frame of the fusing unit ( x 4).
30. Reassemble the fusing unit.
SM 2-235 D095/M077
Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901 (M390)
31. Align the arrow decals [A] as shown above, and then set the fusing unit on the fusing unit
drawer.
32. Push in the fusing unit drawer, and then close the front doors.
33. Plug in the mainframe, and then turn on the main power switch.
34. Enter the SP mode.
35. Set the setting of SP1901-201 from "OFF: 0" to "ON: 1.”
36. Exit the SP mode.
D095/M077 2-236 SM
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
2.21 SKEW AND SIDE-TO-SIDE ADJUSTMENT
2.21.1 SKEW AND SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION
Overview
Installation
The paper feed path is extremely long when many peripheral units are installed. In such a
long path, the cumulative effect of paper skew or deviation in side-to-side registration may
require adjustment.
Skew [A] appears when the paper rotates away from the direction of paper feed. If
side-to-side registration shifts [B], the sheet remains straight but shifts left or right away from
center. ([C]: Feed Direction)
Skew and side-to-side registration are checked with graduated scales (shown above) where
paper exits the units. The scales are provided so that you can visually check and measure the
amount of skew or deviation in side-to-side registration.
A scale for detecting skew and checking side-to-side registration ("S-to-S") is provided on the
following peripheral units.
SM 2-237 D095/M077
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
Name Skew S-to-S Comment
A4 LCIT (B832) X* O* Side-to-side registration only; CIS
adjustment
A3 LCIT (D532) X O
Perfect Binder (D391) O O
Cover Interposer (B835) O O
Correction for both skew and
Ring Binder (D392) O O
side-to-side registration are
High Capacity Stacker (D447) O O possible.
Booklet Finisher (D434) O O
Finisher (B830) O O
*O: Adjustable, X: Not adjustable
Use either the rear scale or front scale, depending on the type of paper used in your area:
[A]: Rear: DLT SEF (LT LEF for Ring Binder (D392))
[B]: Front: A3 SEF (A4 LEF for Ring Binder (D392))
The illustrations below show where the scale for each peripheral unit is located:
D095/M077 2-238 SM
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
Installation
The illustration above shows the scale on the left side of the Booklet Finisher tray. The same
scale is at approximately the same position (paper exit) for the following units:
Ring Binder (D392): Left Exit
High Capacity Stacker (D447): Proof Tray
Booklet Finisher (D434): Shift Tray Exit
In the illustration below, the red lines indicate the joint brackets where adjustments are done
to eliminate skew and to correct side-to-side registration.
Here are some general rules for testing and adjusting for paper skew or a shift in side-to-side
registration.
SM 2-239 D095/M077
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
1. After installation of each peripheral device, do some test prints and check for the
presence of skew, and check that side-to-side registration is correct.
[1]: A4 LCIT (B832)
[2]: A3 LCIT (D532)
[7]: Z-Folding Unit (B660)
[8]: Ring Binder (D392)
[9]: High Capacity Stacker (D447)
[10]: Finisher SR5000 (B830)
[11]: Booklet Finisher (D434)
2. If you detect a problem with skew or side-to-side registration, do the adjustment on the
joint bracket attached to the peripheral unit upstream of the unit where the problem
occurred.
3. There is no adjustable joint bracket upstream of the following peripheral units. No
adjustment is possible upstream of these units:
[4]: Buffer Pass Unit Type 5000 (M379)
[5]: Perfect Binder (D391)
[6]: Cover Interposer (B835)
[12]: Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455-17)
4. Side-to-side registration is corrected by shifting the upstream joint bracket left or right.
5. Skew is eliminated by inserting spacers (shims) under the rear or front end of the joint
bracket. These spacers are provided with the peripheral units, attached by screws to the
units at the factory.
Checking Side-to-Side Registration
Do this procedure to confirm that the paper is centered in the paper path.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream unit.
2. Disconnect the unit to the left of the unit to be tested.
3. Execute a run by feeding paper from Tray 2 of the host machine.
If you are testing the Ring Binder (D392), execute the run by feeding paper (A4
or LT LEF) from Tray 2 of the host machine (punching only, no ring binding).
Feed A3 SEF for other units.
D095/M077 2-240 SM
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
4. When each sheet exits, check the position of the paper on the scale to see if the paper is
centered.
Read the rear scale for DLT-size paper
Read the front scale for A3-size paper.
If you are testing the ring binder, read the rear scale for LT LEF paper and the front
Installation
scale for A4 LEF paper. The paper does not exit. It will switch back and feed to the
punch unit.
The scale lines are spaced 2 mm apart.
5. The paper must not deviate more than ±2 mm on the scale.
[A] Leading/trailing edges centered. No adjustment necessary.
Leading/trailing edges offset to the rear by more than 2 mm. Adjustment
[B]
required.
Leading/trailing edges offset to the front by more than 2 mm. Adjustment
[C]
required.
If the edge of the paper is on the scale at the center [A], no adjustment is required.
-or-
If the edge of the paper is ±2 mm off the center line on the scale, adjustment is required.
Do the procedure in the next section.
SM 2-241 D095/M077
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
Correcting Side-to-Side Registration
1. Disconnect the peripheral unit from the upstream unit.
2. On the joint bracket attached to the upstream unit, loosen screws , , , and .
3. Remove bracket [A] ( x1), rotate it 90 degrees, and re-fasten the screw. Changing the
position of this bracket aligns the oval cut-out horizontally and frees the joint bracket so it
can slide from side to side.
4. Look at the scale [B].
5. Slide the bracket to the left or right and tighten the screw.
6. If the deviation from center was toward the front, slide the bracket to the rear and tighten
the screw .
-or-
If the deviation from center was toward the rear, side the bracket to the front and tighten
the screw .
7. Tighten screws , , and
8. Do another test run, so that you can check the results of the adjustment.
To Correct Side-to-Side Registration for B660 and B835
D095/M077 2-242 SM
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
Installation
This adjustment can be done on the left side of the mainframe, at the Z-Folding unit
B660 and at the cover interposer tray B835.
1. Loosen screws ( , , , ).
2. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 1), rotate it 90 degrees, then refasten it.
Re-positioning the bracket aligns the oval cut-out horizontally so that you can
slide the joint bracket to slide from side-to-side.
3. Use the scale [B] at the top of the rear end of the bracket.
Scale : 2mm
If the deviation from center was toward the front of the machine, slide the bracket to the
front and fasten it with the screw.
-or-
If the deviation from center was toward the back of the machine, slide the bracket to the
rear and fasten it with the screw.
SM 2-243 D095/M077
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
If you are doing this adjustment on the side of the Z-Folding unit:
At the base of the unit, loosen screws [A] and [B].
Slide the plate left or right.
Move the plate on the scales [C] and [D] by the same amount as the adjustment
done above on the long bracket.
Retighten the screws.
4. Do some more test prints and repeat the adjustment until it is correct.
D095/M077 2-244 SM
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
Detecting Paper Skew
Do this check to detect the presence of skew in the paper path.
1. Make sure that the I/F cable of the unit is connected to the upstream unit.
2. If a peripheral unit is connected on the left side, disconnect it and pull it away.
3. Execute a straight-through run.
Installation
4. Check the scale where each sheet exits.
The rear scale is for DLT-size paper.
The front scale [2] is for A3-size paper.
Be sure to read the correct scale for the paper size in use.
[A] Centered. No adjustment necessary.
Trailing edge skew to the front, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment
[B]
required.
Trailing edge skew to the rear, total skew more than ±2 mm. Adjustment
[C]
required.
SM 2-245 D095/M077
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
Correcting Skew
1. Disconnect the peripheral unit from the upstream unit.
2. Locate and remove the spacers from the peripheral unit where the problem occurred.
Locating and Removing Spacers
The photos below show where you can find the spacers for each unit.
Ring Binder (D392)
1. Look at the right side.
2. Remove the spacers ( x2).
High Capacity Stacker (D447)
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the right lock hasp [A] ( x2).
3. Remove right front cover [B] ( x2).
4. Remove the spacers ( x1).
D095/M077 2-246 SM
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
Booklet Finisher (D434)
Installation
1. Open the front door ( x1).
2. Remove the spacers ( x1).
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
1. Look at the right side ( x1).
2. Remove the spacers ( x1).
SM 2-247 D095/M077
Skew and Side-to-Side Adjustment
Inserting Spacers
1. Loosen the screws ( x4) of the joint bracket attached to the peripheral upstream of the
unit where the problem occurred.
2. Insert a spacer and tighten the screws.
If the trailing edge of the paper is skewing toward the front of the machine, insert a
spacer [A] under the rear end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
-or-
If the trailing edge is skewing toward the rear of the machine, insert a spacer [B] under
the front end of the bracket and tighten the screws.
3. Do another run to check the adjustment. If skew is still present, insert another spacer.
Each spacer is 2 mm thick.
Only two spacers are provided, so the maximum adjustment is 4 mm (using two
spacers).
D095/M077 2-248 SM
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)
2.22 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A
(B870)
2.22.1 COMPONENT LIST
Installation
Description Qt'y
1 Optional Counter Interface Board 1
2 Screw: M3x6 4
3 Band 1
4 Stud 4
5 Edge Clamp 1
6 Harness 1
SM 2-249 D095/M077
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)
2.22.2 INSTALLATION
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Controller box cover [1] ( x 12)
Loosen the screws shown above by arrows. It is not necessary to remove them.
3. Remove the controller box stay [2] ( x 2, x 4).
4. Attach the optional counter interface board [3] to the controller box stay ( x 4: M3x6).
D095/M077 2-250 SM
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)
Installation
5. Remove the cover [4] of the optional counter I/F on the right cover of the machine.
6. Route the cable [5] from the counter device ( x 3).
7. Connect the harness [6] to CN3 and the cable [7] from the counter device to CN1 on the
optional counter interface board ( x 1).
SM 2-251 D095/M077
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)
8. Route the harness [8] from the optional counter interface board and then connect it to the
relay harness [9] from the IOB ( x 2).
9. Reattach the controller box cover ( x 12).
10. Close the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
D095/M077 2-252 SM
MFP Option
2.23 MFP OPTION
2.23.1 VM CARD TYPE F (D377-04): D095 ONLY
The VM card application cannot be moved to another SD card. However, other
applications can be moved onto the VM card.
Installation
Installation Procedure
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [1] ( x1).
3. Turn the SD-card label face [2] to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly into slot 2
(upper slot) until you hear a click.
4. Reattach the SD card slot cover.
5. Switch the machine on.
6. On the operation panel, remove the bottom blank keytop [3] and replace it with the
keytop provided [4].
7. For NA and AA models, attach the decal [5] to the copier.
SM 2-253 D095/M077
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
PM Counter
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 PM COUNTER
The PM Counter main menu and submenu allows you to review the PM counts for both units
and individual components.
This machine can be maintained with PM parts replacement by a service engineer or TCRU
replacement by a trained customer. If TCRU replacement is done, the same PM counter is
also reset automatically. (For example: If the "Y PCU Drum Unit" is replaced by TCRU
replacement, the PM counter for the "Y PCU Drum Unit" is reset). For details about TCRU,
Maintenance
Preventive
see the "Replacement Guide: TCRU (for Pro C901S D095 or Pro C901 M077).”
The PM counter is counted double even if "A3/DLT Double Account"
(SSP5-104-001) is set to "0" (single click) for A3/DLT paper printing.
3.1.1 INITIALIZING PM PARTS
Some adjustments for new PM parts are automatically done after the PM counters are reset.
The list below shows what is automatically done after each PM counter reset.
PM Counter Automatic Adjustment
Y/M/C/Bk PCU Developer TD Sensor Initializing
Process Control
Y/M/C/Bk PCU Drum Process Control
MUSIC
Charge Corona Unit: Y/M/C/Bk Charge Unit Cleaning
Process Control
Image Transfer Roller: Y/M/C/Bk Image Transfer Bias Correction
Process Control
MUSIC
Image Transfer Belt Image Transfer Bias Correction Note
Process Control
MUSIC
ITB Bias Roller Paper Transfer Bias Correction
SM 3-1 D095/M077
PM Counter
PM Counter Automatic Adjustment
Process Control
MUSIC
PTR Unit Paper Transfer Bias Correction
Process Control
MUSIC
Paper Transfer Roller p.4-175 "Paper Transfer Roller"
PTR Cleaning Brush Roller p.4-177 "PTR Cleaning Brush
Roller"
PTR Lubricant Brush Roller p.4-173 "PTR Lubricant Brush
Roller"
PTR Cleaning Blade p.4-176 "PTR Cleaning Blade"
PTR Lubricant Bar p.4-172 "PTR Lubricant Bar"
PTR Discharge Plate p.4-174 "PTR Discharge Plate"
Fusing Unit
Hot Roller p.4-219 "Hot Roller and Heating
Roller"
Fusing Belt p.4-218 "Fusing Belt"
Pressure Roller p.4-229 "Pressure Roller"
Heating Roller Therimistor p.4-221 "Heating Roller
Thermistor"
Pressure Roller Thermistor Pressure Roller Thermostat
Web Cleaning Unit p.4-203 "Cleaning Web"
Before resetting the PM counter for the image transfer belt, another adjustment must
be done. For details, see p.4-117 "Image Transfer Belt" in the chapter "Replacement
and Adjustment.”
D095/M077 3-2 SM
PM Counter
3.1.2 DISPLAYING THE PM COUNTER
1. Enter the SP mode.
Maintenance
Preventive
2. Touch [PM Counter].
: All PM Parts List. Displays all PM items (all PM items, not only PM units). Lists all
PM items regardless of PM yield indicator settings.
: Parts list for PM yield indicator. Displays the items that have their PM yield
indicator settings set to "Yes.”
: Clear all PM settings. Resets all PM counter settings to "0" at the same time. PM
items can be reset one by one with the [Clear] button.
: Counter list print out. Prints the PM counter on paper.
SM 3-3 D095/M077
PM Counter
3.1.3 PM PARTS SCREEN DETAILS
All PM Parts list: Main Menu
The "All PM Parts list" displays all PM units and individual items. This list shows all PM items,
regardless of their "PM yield indicator settings.” ( Number button submenu)
Number buttons. Pressing a number button opens a submenu. ( Number button
[A]
submenu)
[B] Descriptions. The # mark denotes a "unit" (not individual item).
[C] PM yield buttons. Function is the same as the "PM yield indicator settings" button.
[D] Current PM counter value.
[E] Target PM interval. This can be changed by pressing a number button [A].
PM counter clear button. Function is the same as the [Clear current counter]
[F]
button.
D095/M077 3-4 SM
PM Counter
Number button submenu
Press any number button to open the submenu for a part. In the example below, the number
button [xxx] "Fusing Unit#" was pressed.
Maintenance
Preventive
[A]: Clear current counter. Press to reset the selected PM counter (in this example [xxx]
#Fusing Unit) to "0.” You can also clear the settings by pressing the [Clear] button on the right
side of the PM Counter Main Menu ([F] in the previous section).
[B]: Change target yield. Press the change the target PM yield. To change the setting:
Press [Change target yield]
Enter the number for the new target with the 10-key pad.
Press [#] on the operation panel.
[C]: PM yield indicator settings. [Yes] is the default. Press [No] to remove the current item
from the "Parts list for PM yield indicator.”
When set to "Yes", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) will not have their individual
items
When set to "No", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) only the individual
components will appear in the list (the units will not appear).
[D]: PM counter history. This is a summary of the most recent counts
Latest 1. The latest PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
Latest 2. The previous PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
Latest 3. The previous but one PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced.
SM 3-5 D095/M077
PM Counter
Parts list for PM yield indicator
This list shows the PM Parts Main Menu with only items set to "Yes.”
Note:
The # mark denotes a unit.
Items without the # (065 ITB) denote individual components.
An asterisk (*) will appear in the Exceed column [A] to show items that have exceeded
their target PM yields.
D095/M077 3-6 SM
PM Tables
3.2 PM TABLES
See "Appendices" for the following information:
Preventive Maintenance Items
Maintenance
Preventive
SM 3-7 D095/M077
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
48 05/11/2012 Added Moiré pattern to LD Units
98 03/29/2011 Developer removal
101 03/29/2011 Developer installation
148 10/17/2011 After installing a new CIS unit
148 6/19/2012 After installing a new CIS unit
General Cautions
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 GENERAL CAUTIONS
This machine has a Fiery controller (server type). The Fiery controller must be shut
down before turning off the power supply to the Fiery controller. Therefore, turn off
the Fiery controller first at the operation panel before turning off the main power
switch of the machine. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
Never switch off either power switch while any of the electrical components are
operating. Doing so might cause damage to units such as the transfer belt, drum,
and development unit when they are pulled out of or put back into the copier.
4.1.1 REAR CONTROLLER BOX
Replacement
Adjustment
This machine has four fans for four PCDUs in the rear controller box. These fans can exhaust
and
ozone and other dust and gases (NOx etc) from the machine.
Therefore, if you service the machine with the rear controller box open and check the printing
operation, dust and gases (NOx) can adhere to the OPC drums. This may cause an image
problem on the outputs (for example, white block pattern). Normally, process control can
solve this problem. However, if you want to recover the print quality as soon as possible, print
several sheets with solid color image (high coverage image).
4.1.2 DRUM
An organic photoconductor (OPC) drums are more sensitive to light and ammonia gas than a
selenium drum. Follow the cautions below when handling an OPC drum.
1. Never expose a drum to direct sunlight.
2. Never expose a drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a minute.
3. Never touch a drum surface with bare hands. If the drum surface is touched with a finger
or becomes dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton. Wipe with a dry cloth
after cleaning with wet cotton.
4. Never use alcohol to clean the drum (alcohol dissolves the drum surface).
5. Store drums in a cool, dry place away from heat.
6. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily damaged.
7. Never expose a drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
8. Dispose of used drums in accordance with local regulations.
SM 4-1 D095/M077
General Cautions
4.1.3 PCDU
1. To prevent drum scratches, remove the charge corona unit before pulling out the drum.
2. The Y, M, and C charge corona unit should always be replaced together as a set.
4.1.4 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT
1. Never touch the image transfer belt surface with bare hands.
2. Take care not to scratch the image transfer belt, as the surface is easily damaged.
3. Before installing a new image transfer belt, clean all the rollers and the inner part of the
ITB unit with a dry cloth to prevent the belt from slipping.
4.1.5 SCANNER UNIT (D095 ONLY)
1. When installing a new exposure glass, make sure that the white paint mark is at the rear
left corner.
2. Clean the exposure glass with alcohol or glass cleaner to reduce the amount of static
electricity on the glass surface.
3. Use a cotton pad with water or a blower brush to clean the mirrors and lenses.
4. Never bend or crease the exposure lamp cables.
5. Never disassemble the lens unit. Doing so will throw the lens and the copy image out of
focus.
6. Never adjust any CCD positioning screw. Doing so will throw the CCD out of position.
4.1.6 LASER UNIT
1. Never loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing. Doing
so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment.
2. Never adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit, as they are adjusted in the factory.
3. Never open the polygon motor cover. The polygon mirror and lenses are sensitive to
dust.
4. Never touch the glass surface of the polygon mirror motor unit with bare hands.
D095/M077 4-2 SM
General Cautions
4.1.7 DEVELOPMENT
1. Avoid nicking or scratching the development roller.
2. Place a development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it.
3. Always clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
4. Always dispose of used developer in accordance with local regulations.
5. Never load types of developer and toner into the development unit other than specified
for this model. Doing so will cause poor print quality and toner scattering.
6. Immediately after replacing the developer, do the SPs as described in the 'SP Codes
after Replacement' section of PCU replacement.
7. Never do SP3801 with used developer.
8. When using a vacuum cleaner to clean the development unit casing, always ground the
casing with your fingers to avoid damaging the toner density sensor with static electricity.
9. The TD sensor must be initialized:
After replacing developer. (Initialize the TD sensor only for the PCU where the
Replacement
developer was replaced.)
Adjustment
and
Never initialize the TD sensor more than once. Initializing the TD sensor more
than once can cause toner scatter inside the machine.
4.1.8 CLEANING
1. When servicing cleaning components, avoid nicking the edges of the cleaning blades.
2. Never handle a cleaning blade with bare hands.
3. Before disassembling a cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under it to catch any
toner falling.
4.1.9 FUSING UNIT
1. Never handle fusing lamps and rollers with bare hands.
2. Make sure that the fusing lamps are positioned correctly and do not touch the inner
surface of the rollers.
4.1.10 PAPER FEED
1. Do not touch the surfaces of the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers.
2. To avoid paper misfeeds, the side fences and end fence of the paper trays must be
positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size.
SM 4-3 D095/M077
General Cautions
4.1.11 WASTE TONER
1. Check the amount of waste toner at every service visit.
2. Always dispose of waste toner in accordance with local regulations.
3. Never throw toner into an open flame.
4.1.12 FIERY CONTROLLER
1. Use the "Shut Down" button on the operation panel to turn off the Fiery controller. Do not
turn off the main power switch of the mainframe before shutting down the Fiery controller.
The shut down procedure for the Fiery controller is described below.
Press the "Fiery" tab on the operation panel.
Press the "Restart Fiery" button on the operation panel.
Press the "Shut Down" button on the operation panel.
2. Then shut down the machine
Push the operation switch to turn the power off
When the power LED goes off, turn the main power switch off.
Do not turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.
The shutdown can be also done with the Service Menu of the Fiery controller. If you have
mistakenly turned off the machine first, use the "Service Menu" of the Fiery controller.
1. Press the button [A] (Menu) on the operation panel of the Fiery controller.
1. Select "Shut Down System" with the button [B].
D095/M077 4-4 SM
Special Tools and Lubricants
4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
4.2.1 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part No. Description
A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4 pcs./set)*1
A2929500 Test Chart – C4 (10 pcs./set) *1
A0299387 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE 87
B6455010 SD (Secure Digital) Card – 64 MB
M0779503 TEST PRINT TOOL V2
Replacement
Adjustment
*1: These tools are used only for the D095 model.
and
4.2.2 LUBRICANTS
Part No. Description
A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S5525
52039502 Silicon Grease G-501
B1329700 Drum setting powder pad applicator
G0049668 Grease – KS660 – SHIN-ETSU
54429103 Heat Resisting Grease MT-78
54479078 Launa Oil 40
SM 4-5 D095/M077
Image Adjustment
4.3 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
4.3.1 SCANNING (D095 ONLY)
Before doing the following scanner adjustments, perform or check the printing
registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment. Use a C4 test chart to
perform the following adjustments.
Scanner sub-scan magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Use SP4008 (Sub Scan Magnification Adj) to adjust if
necessary. Standard: ± 0.9%.
D095/M077 4-6 SM
Image Adjustment
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration
A: Leading edge registration
B: Side-to-side registration
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration.
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Adjust with the following SP modes if necessary. Standard: 0 ± 9 mm for sub-scan, 0 ± 2
and
mm for main-scan.
SP mode
Sub Scan Registration Adj SP4010-001
Main Scan Reg SP4011-001
SM 4-7 D095/M077
Image Adjustment
4.3.2 ADF (D095 ONLY)
ADF side-to-side and leading edge registration
A: Leading edge registration
B: Side-to-side registration
Make a temporary test chart as shown above using A3/DLT paper.
1. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF table and make a copy.
2. Check the registration, and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6006-001 Side-to-Side Regist:Front ± 3.0 mm
SP6006-002 Side-to-Side Regist:Rear ± 3.0 mm
SP6006-003 Leading Edge (Thin Original) ± 10 steps
SP6006-005 Leading Edge (Duplex-1st) ± 29 steps
SP6006-006 Leading Edge (Duplex-2nd) ± 29 steps
D095/M077 4-8 SM
Image Adjustment
4.3.3 COLOR IMAGE CHECK
Use "T6000 (70W)", "mondi 90gsm" or "Hammermill Color COPY 105gsm" paper to
check the image quality of the printout.
Checking Procedure
To check the color image on the output, do the following procedure.
1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Press the "Fiery" tab on the LCD.
3. Press the "Printable Info" button.
4. Press the "PS Test Page" button, and then the "OK" button.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Check if each 100% pattern [A] has a solid color without imperfections (not blotched or
scratched).
6. Color print via PC (Fiery print driver's test print page can be used.)
7. Check if the density difference between the 60% [B] and 50% [C] patterns is clearly
visible.
Recovery Procedure
If a problem appears on the test print, do the following procedures.
For Solid Color Problems
Enter the SP mode, and then execute the process control with SP3-820-001.
For Density Difference Problems
Execute the color calibration with the "Fiery Controller.”
SM 4-9 D095/M077
Image Adjustment
4.3.4 COLOR REGISTRATION CHECK
Checking Procedure for Printer (M077) model
To check the color registration on the output, do the following procedure.
1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Enter the SP mode and then select SP2109-002 ("Select Pattern" < "Write Test Pattern").
3. Select the No.9 (9: 20mm Grid) pattern in the test pattern list, and then press "OK.”
4. Press the "APL Window" button on the top of the LCD.
5. Select a paper size and print mode (simplex or duplex).
6. Prepare a PC for printing.
7. Print a test page in the Fiery printer driver.
8. Check that the grid lines for each color are superimposed correctly.
Do not use "Print" button on the LCD to print a test pattern. Only a black and white
image is outputted if you use "Print" button on the LCD. The color registration check
requires a color image output.
Make sure that a test page has black, red, green and blue colors.
Checking Procedure for Copier (D095) model
To check the color registration on the output, do the following procedure.
1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Set a sheet of paper on the original tray of ADF.
3. Enter the SP mode and then select SP2109-002 ("Select Pattern" < "Write Test Pattern").
4. Select the No.9 (9: 20mm Grid) pattern in the test pattern list, and then press "OK.”
5. Press the "APL Window" button on the top of the LCD.
6. Select a paper size and print mode (simplex or duplex).
7. Select the "Full Color" mode.
Make sure that the "Full Color" mode is selected. Otherwise, the color
registration check cannot be done correctly.
8. Press the "Start" key on the operation panel.
9. Check that the grid lines for each color are superimposed correctly.
D095/M077 4-10 SM
Image Adjustment
Recovery Procedure
If a problem appears on the test print, do the following procedures.
1. Exit from SP2109-002 and then select SP2153-001 ("Manual Execute: Mode a" <
"MUSIC Condition Settings 1").
2. Execute "MUSIC: Mode a.”
3. Print out the "20mm Grid" with SP2109-002, and then check the test pattern.
4.3.5 RULED LINE CHECK
Use "T6000 (70W)", "mondi 90gsm" or "Hammermill Color COPY 105gsm" paper to
check the image quality of the printout.
Checking Procedure for Printer (M077)
To check the ruled line on the output, do the following procedure.
Replacement
1. Turn on the main power switch.
Adjustment
2. Enter the SP mode (System SP) and then select SP2109-002 ("Select Pattern" < "Write
and
Test Pattern").
3. Select the No.9 (9: 20mm Grid) pattern in the test pattern list, and then press "OK.”
4. Print out the 20mm grid pattern sample for each single color with SP2109-004.
There are 8 bits on the screen in SP2109-004. Each bit corresponds with a color.
"0": Not selected, "1": Selected
[1] for "Black.” Press the "3" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[2] for "Cyan.” Press the "2" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[3] for "Magenta.” Press the "1" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[4] for "Yellow.” Press the "0" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
5. Press the "APL Window" button on the top of the LCD.
6. Select a paper size and print mode (simplex or duplex).
SM 4-11 D095/M077
Image Adjustment
7. Prepare a PC for printing.
8. Print a test page in the Fiery printer driver.
9. Check that the grid lines for each single color test pattern are not scratched.
Do not use "Print" button on the LCD to print a test pattern. Only a black and white
image is outputted if you use "Print" button on the LCD. The color registration check
requires a color image output.
Make sure that a test page has a relevant color.
Checking Procedure for Copier (D095) model
To check the ruled line on the output, do the following procedure.
1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Set a sheet of paper on the original tray of ADF.
3. Enter the SP mode and then select SP2109-002 ("Select Pattern" < "Write Test Pattern").
4. Select the No.9 (9: 20mm Grid) pattern in the test pattern list, and then press "OK.”
5. Print out the 20mm grid pattern sample for each single color with SP2109-004.
There are 8 bits on the screen in SP2109-004. Each bit corresponds with a color.
"0": Not selected, "1": Selected
[1] for "Black.” Press the "3" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[2] for "Cyan.” Press the "2" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[3] for "Magenta.” Press the "1" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[4] for "Yellow.” Press the "0" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
6. Press the "APL Window" button on the top of the LCD.
7. Select a paper size and print mode (simplex or duplex).
8. Select the "Full Color" mode.
Make sure that the "Full Color" mode is selected. Otherwise, the color
registration check cannot be done correctly.
D095/M077 4-12 SM
Image Adjustment
9. Press the "Start" key on the operation panel.
10. Check that the grid lines for each single color test pattern are not scratched.
Recovery Procedure
If a problem appears on the test print, do the following procedures.
Enter the SP mode, and then execute the process control with SP3-820-001.
4.3.6 IMAGE SHIFT CHECK BETWEEN THE 1ST AND 2ND
PAGES
Use "T6000 (70W)", "mondi 90gsm" or "HummerMILL Color COPY 105gsm" paper to
check the image quality of the printout.
Checking Procedure
To check the image shift on the output, do the following procedure.
Replacement
1. Turn on the main power switch.
Adjustment
2. Press the "User Tool" button, and then the "Adjustment Settings for Operators" button.
and
3. For Copier D095 only, do the followings.
Select “0702:Switch Print Screen.”
Select "Printer", then press "OK" (default "Copy").
4. Select “0101:Adjust Image Position With Feed Direction.”
5. Press the "To Print Screen" button on the top of the LCD.
6. Select a paper size and duplex print mode.
7. Press the "Print" button, and then the "OK" button to print the "Adjustment Printing" test
pattern.
SM 4-13 D095/M077
Image Adjustment
8. The test pattern is shown above.
The information [A] indicates the paper size and side (1st or 2nd).
9. Fold the printed test pattern in half vertically [A] and horizontally [B].
D095/M077 4-14 SM
Image Adjustment
1. Check if the vertical and horizontal center lines [A] on the 1st page of the printed test
pattern (shown as solid lines in the above diagram) are not shifted away from the fold
lines [B] (shown as dotted lines in the above diagram).
Acceptable shift range 1 mm
The diagram on the left above shows the result when there is no image shift.
The diagram on the right shows the result when the image on the test pattern is
shifted.
2. Check if the test pattern image on the 2nd side is shifted in the same manner as the 1st
page.
Acceptable shift range 1 mm
Adjustment Procedure
The adjustment for the sub-scan shift and main-scan shift are required at the
machine installation. To adjust the sub-scan shift and main-scan shift, use the user
Replacement
Adjustment
program mode or SP mode described below.
and
The adjustment for sub-scan shift can be done for each paper weight and the
adjustment for main-scan shift can be done for each paper tray.
1. Adjust the sub-scan shift [A] on the 1st page with "0101:Adjust Image Position With Feed
Direction" of the UP mode or SP1710-001 to -007.
2. Adjust the sub-scan shift [A] on the 2nd page with "0101:Adjust Image Position With
Feed Direction" of the UP mode or SP1711-001 to -007.
Input a - value to shift the image towards the leading edge.
Input a + value to shift the image towards the trailing edge.
3. Adjust the main-scan shift [B] on the 1st page with "0102:Adjust Image Position Across
Feed Direction" of the UP mode or SP1720-001 to -011.
SM 4-15 D095/M077
Image Adjustment
Each paper tray can be adjusted with UP mode or SP1721 (Image Pos:Sub (1st
page)).
4. Adjust the main-scan shift [B] on the 2nd page with "0102:Adjust Image Position Across
Feed Direction" of the UP mode or SP1721-001 to -011.
Input a - value to shift the image towards the front edge.
Input a + value to shift the image towards the rear edge.
Each paper tray can be adjusted with UP mode or SP1721 (Image Pos:Sub (2nd
page)).
5. Print out the test pattern, and then check the printed test pattern.
You can print out the test pattern in UP mode.
Adjustable User SP List
The following user SPs below can shift the image in the "Sub-Scan" direction.
Default setting: 0 mm
Adjustable range: [–3.0 to +3.0 mm]
User Mode Description
Paper Weight 1 to 7 For all trays: This shifts the image on the 1st page.
Paper Weight 1 (Back Side)
For all trays: This shifts the image on the 2nd page.
to 7 (Back Side)
The following user SPs below can shift the image in the "Main-Scan" direction.
Default setting: 0 mm
Adjustable range: [–3.0 to +3.0 mm]
User Mode Description
Tray 1 to 7 For all trays: This shifts the image on the 1st page.
Tray 1 (Back Side) to 7 (Back
For all trays: This shifts the image on the 2nd page.
Side)
D095/M077 4-16 SM
Image Adjustment
4.3.7 IMAGE SKEW CHECK
Use "T6000 (70W)", "mondi 90gsm" or "Hammermill Color COPY 105gsm" paper to
check the image quality of the printout.
Checking Procedure
To check the image skew on the output, do the following procedure.
1. Turn on the main power switch.
2. Enter the SP mode (System SP).
3. Press the "APL Window" button on the top of the LCD.
4. Select a paper size and duplex print mode.
5. Press the "Print" button to print the "Adjustment Printing" test pattern.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Check the distance between the image edge and paper edge at two points [A1] and [A2]
in the main-scan direction.
Acceptable range: [A1] – [A2] ±0.5 mm (A4 or LT SEF or more)
Adjustment Procedure
1. Check the gap between [A1] and [A2] described in the previous checking procedure.
2. Turn off the power of the mainframe and pull out the power cord.
See "p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power “ in "Installation
Requirements" for how to turn off the machine without causing damage to the
components.
SM 4-17 D095/M077
Image Adjustment
3. Pull out the registration drawer unit ( p.4-139).
4. Remove the inner registration cover ( p.4-141 "Inner Registration Cover").
5. Loosen the screws [A] on the adjustor [B].
6. Move the adjustor [B] in the "1" or "2" direction to adjust the image skew.
[A1] > [A2]: Move the adjustor in the "1" direction by the size of the gap (A1 – A2). One
notch on the scale = 0.15 mm
[A1] < [A2]: Move the adjustor in the "2" direction by the size of the gap (A2 – A1). One
notch on the scale = 0.15 mm
7. Tighten the screws on the adjustor.
8. Reassemble the machine.
9. Plug in and turn on the mainframe.
10. Check the image skew again.
D095/M077 4-18 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS
4.4.1 FRONT DOOR
Left Front Door
1. Remove the clip [A]
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Open the left front door [B].
and
3. Lift up the left front door, and then remove it.
Right Front Door
1. Remove the clip [A]
2. Open the right front door [B].
3. Lift up the right front door, and then remove it.
SM 4-19 D095/M077
Exterior Covers
4.4.2 LEFT COVER
1. Left cover [A] ( x 4)
4.4.3 RIGHT COVER
1. Right cover [A] ( x 4)
D095/M077 4-20 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.4 FRONT TOP COVER
1. Open the left and right front doors.
2. Open the toner hopper door [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Front top cover [B] ( x 2)
SM 4-21 D095/M077
Exterior Covers
4.4.5 REAR TOP COVER
1. Rear top cover [A] ( x 3)
4.4.6 REAR UPPER AND LOWER COVERS
Rear Upper Cover
1. Rear upper cover [A] ( x 5)
Rear Lower Right Cover
1. Rear lower right cover [B] ( x 4)
Rear Lower Left Cover
1. Rear lower left cover [C] ( x 2)
D095/M077 4-22 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.7 OPERATION PANEL ARM
1. Cover [A] (hooks)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Arm top cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Screw [C]
4. Arm left cover [D] ( x 2)
5. Arm right cover [E] ( x 2)
SM 4-23 D095/M077
Exterior Covers
6. Operation panel arm [F] ( x 4, x 1)
4.4.8 OPERATION PANEL
1. Hinge upper cover [A] ( x 2)
2. Hinge lower cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Operation panel [C] ( x 4, x 2, x 1)
D095/M077 4-24 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.9 OPU
1. Operation panel ( p.4-24)
2. Panel rear cover [A] ( x 8)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. OPU cover [B] ( x 10, x 2, x 2)
4. OPU [C] ( x 5, x 4)
SM 4-25 D095/M077
Exterior Covers
4.4.10 MAIN KEY, SUB KEY AND APPLICATION KEY BOARD,
AND LCD UNIT
1. Panel rear cover ( p.4-25 "OPU")
2. OPU bracket [A] ( x 11, x 4)
3. Main key board [A] ( x 8, x 1)
4. Sub key board [B] ( x 2, x 1)
5. Application key board [C] ( x 2)
6. LCD unit [D] ( x 3)
D095/M077 4-26 SM
Exterior Covers
When reinstalling the application key board
Make sure that the adjuster tab [A] on the application key board and adjuster [B] on the panel
rear cover are moved upwards as far as possible before attaching the panel rear cover to the
operation panel.
Inverter Fuse
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Rating Manufacturer Type No.
[A]: F1 DC72V/2A KOA CORP CCP2E50TTE
SM 4-27 D095/M077
Exterior Covers
4.4.11 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT
It is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times:
When you replace the operation panel.
When you replace the controller board.
When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly.
Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use only.
1. Press , press "1", "9", "9", "3", press 5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics menu.
2. On the touch screen press "Touch Screen Adjust" (or press "1").
3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark .
4. Press the lower right mark when " " shows.
5. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press ) when you are finished.
6. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu. Save the calibration
settings.
D095/M077 4-28 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.12 REAR CONTROLLER BOX
Opening the rear controller box
1. Rear top cover ( p.4-22)
2. Remove the two screws that attach the rear controller box to the mainframe.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Loosen the fixing pins at rear right and left bottom with a minus (flat-headed) screwdriver.
4. Open the rear controller box, while holding the right side (viewed from the rear).
SM 4-29 D095/M077
Exterior Covers
Detaching the rear controller box
1. Open the rear controller box (described in the previous procedure).
2. Remove two ground cables [A] ( x 1 each).
3. Remove two ground cables [B] ( x 1 each).
4. Connector cover [C] ( x 2).
D095/M077 4-30 SM
Exterior Covers
5. Unlock six clamps and disconnect all connectors.
Do not unlock clamps other than the clamps indicated by arrow marks.
Otherwise, wrong connections may be made when attaching the rear controller
box.
6. Open the harness bracket [D] ( x 5).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
7. Remove the pivot brackets (upper and lower) [E] ( x 2 each).
SM 4-31 D095/M077
Exterior Covers
8. The picture above shows that the rear controller box is away from the main machine.
9. When reassembling the machine, look for a tube that comes from the rear of the machine.
Be very careful not to damage this tube. This comes from the fusing unit, and connects to
the optional air separator unit.
D095/M077 4-32 SM
Laser Unit
4.5 LASER UNIT
The laser units in this machine employ a total of 16 laser beams produced by Class
3B LDs with a wavelength of 770 to 810 nm and intensity of Max. 111 (Rated. 38)
mW. The power intensity from the laser unit is 1.33 mW. The divergence of the laser
beams is 31 deg. (Ave.), // 9 deg. (Ave.) and laser beams are generated in CW
(Continuous Wave) mode. Direct exposure to the eyes could cause permanent
blindness.
Before adjusting or replacing the laser unit, push the main power switch to power the
machine off then unplug the machine from the power source. Allow the machine to
cool for a few minutes. The polygon motor continues to rotate for approximately one
to three minutes after the machine is switched off. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to
Turn Off the Power ")
Never power on the machine with any of these components removed: 1) LD unit, 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
polygon motor cover, 3) synchronization detector.
and
SM 4-33 D095/M077
Laser Unit
4.5.1 CAUTION DECALS
View from the top of the printer
The picture [A] shown above shows that the laser unit covers are detached.
D095/M077 4-34 SM
Laser Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
The picture [B] shown above shows that the laser unit is detached.
SM 4-35 D095/M077
Laser Unit
View from the rear of the printer
The picture [C] shown above shows that the flywheel is detached.
D095/M077 4-36 SM
Laser Unit
4.5.2 LD SAFETY SWITCHES
Replacement
Adjustment
and
For the safety of customers and customer engineers, switches in the machine prevent the
laser beam from switching on accidentally.
When the front door, the upper front cover, or the laser unit cover is open, the +5V or +6V line
connecting each LD driver on the LD drive board is disconnected.
However, the switches in the laser units are only installed for the customer engineer's safety
because the customer cannot access the laser units.
SM 4-37 D095/M077
Laser Unit
4.5.3 LASER UNIT
There are two laser units in this machine. The replacement procedures of the CK
and YM laser units are identical. Therefore, only the replacement procedure of the
laser unit CK is described in this section.
1. Toner hopper cover ( p.4-55)
2. Laser unit bracket [A] ( x 4)
3. Disconnect all harnesses [B] on the OPI board.
When reinstalling the laser unit, make sure that all harnesses [B] on the OPI
board are connected firmly. Otherwise, an SC error may be issued.
4. Laser unit [C] ( x 8: M4x12)
Hold the chains [D] at the both side of the laser unit, and then lift and move the
laser unit.
D095/M077 4-38 SM
Laser Unit
Reinstallation
Each laser unit is precisely adjusted at the factory. When you replace the laser unit, you must
input the values, which are adjusted for each new laser unit, and adjust some settings with
SP modes. The values are printed on a sheet of paper, which is provided with a new laser
unit.
If you replace the laser unit CK, it is only necessary to do the adjustments for the CK laser
unit.
If you replace the laser unit YM, it is only necessary to do the adjustments for the YM laser
unit.
1. Disable the automatic MUSIC and Process Control adjustment.
1) Change the setting value of SP2-193-001 to "0.”
2) Change the setting value of SP3-501-001 to "1.”
2. Disable 2-point detection.
1) Change the setting value of SP2-186-001 to "0.”
3. Check and reset the skew settings.
Replacement
Adjustment
Skew Adjustment for Laser Unit CK
and
1) Check and note the value of SP2-104-004 (current value).
2) Change the value of SP2-117-004 (skew motor K) to "1.”
3) Input the value, which is already checked in step 1), with SP2-119-004.
4) Execute "SP2-118-004" (skew adjustment for K)
5) Change the value of SP2-117-001 (skew motor C) to "1.”
Skew Adjustment for Laser Unit YM
1) Change the value of SP2-117-002 (skew motor M) to "1.”
2) Change the value of SP2-117-003 (skew motor Y) to "1.”
4. Input the LD unit adjustment settings.
Input Procedure for Laser Unit CK
Input the values of KB on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-101-001, 2-102-036 and -046.
1)
KB: xxx (for 2-101-001), xxx (for 2-101-002), xxx (for 2-102-036), xxx (for
2-102-046)
Input the values of KC on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-102-030, -0031, -032, -033, -034 and -035.
2)
KC: xxx (for -030), xxx (for -031), xxx (for -032), xxx (for -033), xxx (for
-034), xxx (for -035)
SM 4-39 D095/M077
Laser Unit
Input the values of KD on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-102-040, -041, -042, -043, -044 and -045.
3)
KD: xxx (for -040), xxx (for -041), xxx (for -042), xxx (for -043), xxx (for
-044), xxx (for -045)
Input the values of KE on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
4) SP2-115-001, -002, -005 and -006.
KE: xx (for -001), xx (for -002), xx (for -005), xx (for -006)
Input the values of KF on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-152-001, -002, -003, -004 and -005.
5)
KF: xxxx (for -001), xxxx (for -002), xxxx (for -003), xxxx (for -004), xxxx
(for -005)
Input the values of KG on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-152-006, -007, -008, -009 and -010.
6)
KG: xxxx (for -006), xxxx (for -007), xxxx (for -008), xxxx (for -009), xxxx
(for -010)
Input the values of KH on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-152-011, -012, -013, -014 and -015.
7)
KH: xxxx (for -011), xxxx (for -012), xxxx (for -013), xxxx (for -014), xxxx
(for -015)
Input the values of KJ on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-152-031, -032, -033, -034 and -035.
8)
KJ: xxxx (for -031), xxxx (for -032), xxxx (for -033), xxxx (for -034), xxxx
(for -035)
Input the values of KK on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-152-036, -037, -038, -039 and -040.
9)
KK: xxxx (for -036), xxxx (for -037), xxxx (for -038), xxxx (for -039), xxxx
(for -040)
Input the values of KL on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-152-041, -042, -043, -044 and -045.
10)
KL: xxxx (for -041), xxxx (for -042), xxxx (for -043), xxxx (for -044), xxxx
(for -045)
D095/M077 4-40 SM
Laser Unit
Input the values of KM on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-105-001, -002, -003, -004, -005, -006, -007 and -008.
11)
KM: xxx (for -001), xxx (for -002), xxx (for -003), xxx (for -004), xxx (for
-005), xxx (for -006), xxx (for -007), xxx (for -008)
Input the values of KN on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-105-009, -010, -011, -012, -013, -014, -015 and -016.
12)
KN: xxx (for -009), xxx (for -010), xxx (for -011), xxx (for -012), xxx (for
-013), xxx (for -014), xxx (for -015), xxx (for -016)
Input the values of KO on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
SP2-130-001, -002, -003, -004, -005, -006, -007, and -008.
13)
KO: xxx (for -001), xxx (for -002), xxx (for -003), xxx (for -004), xxx (for
-005), xxx (for -006), xxx (for -007) and xxx (for -008).
Input the values of KP on the sheet provided with a new laser unit CK for
Replacement
Adjustment
SP2-130-009, -010, -011, -012, -013, -014, -015 and -016.
and
14)
KP: xxx (for -009), xxx (for -010), xxx (for -011), xxx (for -012), xxx (for
-013), xxx (for -014), xxx (for -015) and xxx (for -016).
Input Procedure for Laser Unit YM
Input the values of KB on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-102-056 and -066.
1)
KB: xxx (for 2-101-003), xxx (for 2-101-004), xxx (for 2-102-056), xxx (for
2-102-066)
Input the values of KC on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-102-050, -0051, -052, -053, -054 and -055.
2)
KC: xxx (for -050), xxx (for -051), xxx (for -052), xxx (for -053), xxx (for
-054), xxx (for -055)
Input the values of KD on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-102-060, -061, -062, -063, -064 and -065.
3)
KD: xxx (for -060), xxx (for -061), xxx (for -062), xxx (for -063), xxx (for
-064), xxx (for -065)
SM 4-41 D095/M077
Laser Unit
Input the values of KE on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
4) SP2-115-003, -004, -007 and -008.
KE: xx (for -003), xx (for -004), xx (for -007), xx (for -008)
Input the values of KF on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-152-061, -062, -063, -064 and -065.
5)
KF: xxxx (for -061), xxxx (for -062), xxxx (for -063), xxxx (for -064), xxxx
(for -065)
Input the values of KG on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-152-066, -067, -068, -069 and -070.
6)
KG: xxxx (for -066), xxxx (for -067), xxxx (for -068), xxxx (for -069), xxxx
(for -070)
Input the values of KH on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-152-071, -072, -073, -074 and -075.
7)
KH: xxxx (for -071), xxxx (for -072), xxxx (for -073), xxxx (for -074), xxxx
(for -075)
Input the values of KJ on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-152-091, -092, -093, -094 and -095.
8)
KJ: xxxx (for -091), xxxx (for -092), xxxx (for -093), xxxx (for -094), xxxx
(for -095)
Input the values of KK on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-152-096, -097, -098, -099 and -100.
9)
KK: xxxx (for -096), xxxx (for -097), xxxx (for -098), xxxx (for -099), xxxx
(for -100)
Input the values of KL on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-152-101, -102, -103, -104 and -105.
10)
KL: xxxx (for -101), xxxx (for -102), xxxx (for -103), xxxx (for -104), xxxx
(for -105)
D095/M077 4-42 SM
Laser Unit
Input the values of KM on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-105-017, -018, -019, -020, -021, -022, -023 and -024.
11)
KM: xxx (for -017), xxx (for -018), xxx (for -019), xxx (for -020), xxx (for
-021), xxx (for -022), xxx (for -023), xxx (for -024)
Input the values of KN on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-105-025, -026, -027, -028, -029, -030, -031 and -032.
12)
KN: xxx (for -025), xxx (for -026), xxx (for -027), xxx (for -028), xxx (for
-029), xxx (for -030), xxx (for -031), xxx (for -032)
Input the values of KO on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
SP2-130-017, -018, -019, -020, -021, -022, -023 and -024.
13)
KO: xxx (for -017), xxx (for -018), xxx (for -019), xxx (for -020), xxx (for
-021), xxx (for -022), xxx (for -023) and xxx (for -024).
Input the values of KP on the sheet provided with a new laser unit YM for
Replacement
Adjustment
SP2-130-025, -026, -027, -028, -029, -030, -031 and -032.
and
14)
KP: xxx (for -025), xxx (for -026), xxx (for -027), xxx (for -028), xxx (for
-029), xxx (for -030), xxx (for -031) and xxx (for -032).
5. Reset the "Area Magnification Correction" settings.
For Laser Unit CK
1) Input "1" in the following SP settings.
SP2-180-004 (for Cyan)
SP2-180-005 (for Magenta)
SP2-180-006 (for Yellow)
For Laser Unit YM
1) Input "1" in the following SP settings.
SP2-180-005 (for Magenta)
SP2-180-006 (for Yellow)
6. Reset the "Main Magnification Table" setting.
1) Input "1" in the following SP settings.
SP2-180-007
7. Turn the machine off and on.
8. Clear the "MUSIC Result" setting.
1) Execute SP2-180-003.
SM 4-43 D095/M077
Laser Unit
9. Execute the 2-point detection for each color.
1) Execute SP2-184-001 (for Black), -002 (for Magenta), -003 (for Cyan) and -004 (for
Yellow).
10. Enable 2-point detection.
1) Change the setting value of SP2-186-001 to "1" (Auto).
11. Execute the manual MUSIC adjustment.
1) Execute SP2-153-004 (rough adjustment)
2) Execute SP2-153-001 (fine adjustment)
12. Enable the automatic MUSIC and Process Control adjustment.
1) Change the setting value of SP2-193-001 to "1" (Music ON).
2) Change the setting value of SP3-501-001 to "0" (Procon ON).
D095/M077 4-44 SM
Laser Unit
4.5.4 POLYGON MOTOR
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing any
procedure in this section. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes and cause
permanent blindness. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
An accidental static discharge could damage the laser diode board attached to the
lens block unit.
Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands.
The polygon motor rotates at extremely high speed and continues to rotate after you
switch the machine off. To avoid damaging the motor, never remove the polygon
motor within three minutes of switching off the main power and disconnecting the
power plug.
Do not touch any optical parts inside the LD unit.
Replacement
1. Toner hopper cover ( p.4-55)
Adjustment
2. Laser unit bracket ( p.4-38 "Laser Unit ")
and
3. Laser unit top cover [A] ( x 9)
When reassembling the laser unit top cover, make sure that the laser unit top
cover does not pinch the chains at both sides of the laser unit.
When reassembling the laser unit top cover, tighten screw first, then screw
. After that, there is no order for tightening.
SM 4-45 D095/M077
Laser Unit
4. Polygon motor [B] ( x3, x1)
Do not loosen the screws on the polygon motor cover (silver).
4.5.5 POLYGON MOTOR DRIVE BOARD
1. Toner hopper cover ( p.4-55)
2. Laser unit bracket ( p.4-38 "Laser Unit ")
3. Laser unit top cover ( p.4-45 "Polygon Motor")
4. Disconnect all connectors [A] on the OPI board.
When reinstalling the laser unit, make sure that all harnesses [A] on the OPI
board are connected firmly. Otherwise, an SC error may be issued.
5. Laser unit cover switch left bracket [B] and right bracket [C] ( x 2 each)
D095/M077 4-46 SM
Laser Unit
6. Laser synchronizing detectors [D] [E] ( x 1 each)
7. Disconnect the two harnesses and release the clamp.
8. Remove the two screws [F].
9. Disconnect the three harnesses and release the clamp.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
10. Lift the harness bracket [G].
11. Polygon motor drive board [H] ( x 2)
SM 4-47 D095/M077
Laser Unit Rev. 05/11/2012
4.5.6 LD UNITS
An accidental static discharge could damage the laser diode board attached to the
lens block unit.
Touch a metal surface to discharge any static electricity from your hands.
The polygon motor rotates at extremely high speed and continues to rotate after you
switch the machine off. To avoid damaging the motor, never remove the polygon
motor within three minutes of switching off the main power and disconnecting the
power plug.
Do not touch any optical parts inside the LD unit.
⇒ Moiré pattern*1 may appear even following the procedure in the service manual. If
the Moiré pattern appears, replacement of the whole laser unit is required.
⇒ If LD unit(s) keep failing after replacing the LD unit(s), replacement of whole laser
unit is required.
*1 Moiré Image Comparison:
Proper Image Moiré Image
1. Toner hopper cover ( p.4-55)
2. Laser unit bracket ( p.4-38 "Laser Unit ")
3. Laser unit top cover ( p.4-45 "Polygon Motor")
4. LD unit for Magenta or
Black [B]
( x 2, x 4)
5. LD unit for Yellow or
Cyan [C]
( x 2, x 4)
Do NOT hold the PCB [A] of the LD unit when removing it. Hold the frame [B] of the
LD unit.
D095/M077 4-48 SM
Laser Unit
Do NOT remove the spacer(s) [A]. These spacers are applied to compensate for the
deviation that is unique to each unit.
When installing a new LD unit
1. Turn on the machine.
2. Enter the SP mode.
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Disable the automatic MUSIC and Process Control adjustment by changing the
and
SP2-193-001 value to "0" and SP3-501-001 to "1.”
4. Disable the 2-point detection by changing the SP2-186-001 value to "0.”
5. Input the LD unit adjustment settings for the replaced new LD unit referring to a sheet of
paper, which is provided with a new LD unit.
LD unit for Yellow
Input the values of KB on the sheet provided with a new LD unit Y for
SP2-102-066.
1)
KB: xxx (for 2-101-003), xxx (for 2-101-004), xxx (for 2-102-056), xxx (for
2-102-066)
Input the values of KD on the sheet provided with a new LD unit Y for
SP2-102-060, -061, -062, -063, -064 and -065.
2)
KD: xxx (for -060), xxx (for -061), xxx (for -062), xxx (for -063), xxx (for
-064), xxx (for -065)
Input the values of KE on the sheet provided with a new LD unit Y for
3) SP2-115-007 and -008.
KE: xx (for -003), xx (for -004), xx (for -007), xx (for -008)
SM 4-49 D095/M077
Laser Unit
Input the values of KN on the sheet provided with a new LD unit Y for
SP2-105-025, -026, -027, -028, -029, -030, -031 and -032.
4)
KN: xxx (for -025), xxx (for -026), xxx (for -027), xxx (for -028), xxx (for
-029), xxx (for -030), xxx (for -031), xxx (for -032)
Input the values of KP on the sheet provided with a new LD unit Y for
SP2-130-025, -026, -027, -028, -029, -030, -031 and -032.
5)
KP: xxx (for -025), xxx (for -026), xxx (for -027), xxx (for -028), xxx (for
-029), xxx (for -030), xxx (for -031) and xxx (for -032).
LD unit for Cyan
Input the values of KB on the sheet provided with a new LD unit C for
SP2-102-046.
1)
KB: xxx (for 2-101-001), xxx (for 2-101-002), xxx (for 2-102-036), xxx (for
2-102-046)
Input the values of KD on the sheet provided with a new l LD unit C for
SP2-102-040, -041, -042, -043, -044 and -045.
2)
KD: xxx (for -040), xxx (for -041), xxx (for -042), xxx (for -043), xxx (for
-044), xxx (for -045)
Input the values of KE on the sheet provided with a new LD unit C for
3) SP2-115-005 and -006.
KE: xx (for -001), xx (for -002), xx (for -005), xx (for -006)
Input the values of KN on the sheet provided with a new LD unit C for
SP2-105-009, -010, -011, -012, -013, -014, -015 and -016.
4)
KN: xxx (for -009), xxx (for -010), xxx (for -011), xxx (for -012), xxx (for
-013), xxx (for -014), xxx (for -015), xxx (for -016)
Input the values of KP on the sheet provided with a new LD unit C for
SP2-130-009, -010, -011, -012, -013, -014, -015 and -016.
5)
KP: xxx (for -009), xxx (for -010), xxx (for -011), xxx (for -012), xxx (for
-013), xxx (for -014), xxx (for -015) and xxx (for -016).
D095/M077 4-50 SM
Laser Unit
LD unit for Black
Input the values of KB on the sheet provided with a new LD unit K for
SP2-101-001 and -036.
1)
KB: xxx (for 2-101-001), xxx (for 2-101-002), xxx (for 2-102-036), xxx (for
2-102-046)
Input the values of KC on the sheet provided with a new LD unit K for
SP2-102-030, -0031, -032, -033, -034 and -035.
2)
KC: xxx (for -030), xxx (for -031), xxx (for -032), xxx (for -033), xxx (for
-034), xxx (for -035)
Input the values of KE on the sheet provided with a new LD unit K for
3) SP2-115-001 and -002.
KE: xx (for -001), xx (for -002), xx (for -005), xx (for -006)
Replacement
Adjustment
Input the values of KM on the sheet provided with a new LD unit K for
and
SP2-105-001, -002, -003, -004, -005, -006, -007 and -008.
4)
KM: xxx (for -001), xxx (for -002), xxx (for -003), xxx (for -004), xxx (for
-005), xxx (for -006), xxx (for -007), xxx (for -008)
Input the values of KO on the sheet provided with a new LD unit K for
SP2-130-001, -002, -003, -004, -005, -006, -007, and -008.
13)
KO: xxx (for -001), xxx (for -002), xxx (for -003), xxx (for -004), xxx (for
-005), xxx (for -006), xxx (for -007) and xxx (for -008).
LD unit for Magenta
Input the values of KB on the sheet provided with a new LD unit M for
SP2-102-056.
1)
KB: xxx (for 2-101-003), xxx (for 2-101-004), xxx (for 2-102-056), xxx (for
2-102-066)
Input the values of KC on the sheet provided with a new LD unit M for
SP2-102-050, -0051, -052, -053, -054 and -055.
2)
KC: xxx (for -050), xxx (for -051), xxx (for -052), xxx (for -053), xxx (for
-054), xxx (for -055)
SM 4-51 D095/M077
Laser Unit
Input the values of KE on the sheet provided with a new LD unit M for
3) SP2-115-003 and -004.
KE: xx (for -003), xx (for -004), xx (for -007), xx (for -008)
Input the values of KM on the sheet provided with a new LD unit M for
SP2-105-017, -018, -019, -020, -021, -022, -023 and -024.
4)
KM: xxx (for -017), xxx (for -018), xxx (for -019), xxx (for -020), xxx (for
-021), xxx (for -022), xxx (for -023), xxx (for -024)
Input the values of KO on the sheet provided with a new LD unit M for
SP2-130-017, -018, -019, -020, -021, -022, -023 and -024.
13)
KO: xxx (for -017), xxx (for -018), xxx (for -019), xxx (for -020), xxx (for
-021), xxx (for -022), xxx (for -023) and xxx (for -024)
6. Reset the "Main Magnification Table" setting by inputting "1" in SP2-180-007.
7. Turn off and on the machine.
8. Execute SP2-180-003 to clear the "MUSIC Result" setting.
9. Execute the 2-point detection for each color by executing SP2-184-001 (for Black), -002
(for Magenta), -003 (for Cyan) and -004 (for Yellow).
10. Enable the 2-point detection by changing the SP2-186-001 value to "1" (Auto).
11. Execute the manual MUSIC adjustment; SP2-153-004 (for rough adjustment) and
SP2-153-001 (for fine adjustment).
12. Enable the automatic MUSIC and Process Control adjustment; set the SP2-193-001
value to "1" (Music ON) and SP3-501-001 value to "0" (Process Control ON).
13. Print a test page, and then check if the image quality is acceptable.
D095/M077 4-52 SM
Laser Unit
4.5.7 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR
A1: Leading edge detector for Y or C/ A2: Leading edge detector for K or M
Replacement
B1: Trailing edge detector for Y or C/ B2: Trailing edge detector for K or M
Adjustment
1. Toner hopper cover ( p.4-55)
and
2. Laser unit bracket ( p.4-45 "Polygon Motor")
3. Laser unit top cover ( p.4-45 "Polygon Motor")
4. Laser synchronizing detector [A] ( x 1, x 1)
When re-installing the laser synchronizing detector, first connect the harness
and then install it in the laser unit. This makes reassembly easier.
SM 4-53 D095/M077
Toner Hopper
4.6 TONER HOPPER
4.6.1 TONER BOTTLES
1. Open the toner hopper door.
2. Pull the toner lock lever [A].
3. Toner bottles
Cleaning Requirement
The area [A] shown above must be cleaned at 400 K intervals. Clean the area with a dry
cloth.
Do not pull out toner bottles when you clean the area [A] unless a toner bottle is
empty. Otherwise, toner from a toner bottle may scatter around this area.
D095/M077 4-54 SM
Toner Hopper
4.6.2 TONER HOPPER COVER
1. All toner bottles ( p.4-54)
2. Front top cover ( p.4-21)
3. Rear top cover ( p.4-22)
4. Operation panel arm ( p.4-23)
Replacement
5. Top right cover [A] ( x 2)
Adjustment
and
6. Top left cover [B] ( x 2)
7. Disconnect the harness [C] at the right side of the toner hopper unit.
8. Remove the four screws.
9. Hold the handles [D] of the toner hopper unit and then remove it.
SM 4-55 D095/M077
Toner Hopper
4.6.3 TONER HOPPER DOOR SWITCH
1. Top right cover ( p.4-55 "Toner Hopper Cover")
2. Open the toner hopper door [A].
3. Toner hopper right cover [B] ( x 2)
4. Door switch bracket [C] ( x 2)
5. Toner hopper door switch [D] ( x 2, x 2)
D095/M077 4-56 SM
Toner Hopper
4.6.4 RFID BOARD
1. Toner hopper cover ( p.4-55)
2. Toner hopper rear cover [A]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. RFID board [B] ( x 1 for yellow or x 2 for cyan, magenta or black, hooks)
SM 4-57 D095/M077
Toner Hopper
4.6.5 TONER BOTTLE MOTOR
1. Toner hopper cover ( p.4-55)
2. Toner hopper rear cover ( p.4-57 "RFID Board")
3. Remove the toner transport tube [A] and then clip it.
4. Toner hopper frame [B] ( x 1, x 2: Yellow or x 3: other colors, x 4)
5. Toner bottle motor [C] ( x 2, x 1)
Place the toner hopper frame on a sheet of paper because toner may fall from
the toner hopper.
D095/M077 4-58 SM
Toner Hopper
Lubricating the toner bottle motor gears
Lubricating the toner bottle motor gears is required at 2,400 K intervals. Apply grease
(Barrierta - S552R) to the toner bottle motor gears following the procedure below.
1. Rear top cover [A] ( x 3)
2. Remove the screw [B] on the top left cover.
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Stand behind the machine.
and
4. Hold the top area [C] of the toner hopper rear cover with your left hand and the bottom
area [D] with your right hand.
SM 4-59 D095/M077
Toner Hopper
5. Lift up the toner hopper rear cover [E] with your right hand, pulling the top area toward
you to release the toner hopper cover.
6. Release the other side of the toner hopper cover using your other hand.
Use your right hand for the top area and left hand for the bottom area
7. Apply grease (Barrerta - S552R) on the toner motor gears [F] so that the notches
between the teeth of the gears are filled with grease.
Two brackets [G] project over the frame. When applying grease, be careful not
to be injured.
D095/M077 4-60 SM
Toner Hopper
4.6.6 SUB-HOPPER UNIT
IMPORTANT
Do not remove the terminal case [A] of the development roller in this removal procedure.
Replacement
Adjustment
Removing the terminal case [A] is not necessary for this removal procedure. Be careful
and
that the spring in the terminal case does not fall when removing the terminal case [A].
1. Remove the target color toner bottle.
2. Pull out the target PCDU drawer ( p.4-73 "Drum Cleaning Unit").
3. Fusing fan 4 [A] ( x 2, x 1) for yellow sub-hopper unit removal
4. Development fan bracket(s) ( x 2, x 1 each)
For yellow, remove the development fan bracket [B] immediately to right of the yellow
sub-hopper unit.
For other colors, remove the development fan brackets [B] and [C] on both sides of
the black, magenta or cyan sub-hopper unit.
SM 4-61 D095/M077
Toner Hopper
5. Remove the toner transport tube [D] and then close the end with a clip.
6. Disconnect the three connectors, and then slide the stopper [E] to the right-hand side.
NOTE:
Do not leave the stopper [A] as shown above for a long time, or the stopper's shape
may be deformed.
If the sub-hopper unit has to be removed for a long time, slide the stopper to the
groove [B] temporarily before reinstalling the sub-hopper unit.
7. Slide the bushing [F] to the right-hand side.
D095/M077 4-62 SM
Toner Hopper
8. Pull the sub-hopper unit [G] toward the rear side ( x 1).
Lubrication for the sub-hopper gears
This lubrication procedure must be done at 3,200 K interval or after a new sub-hopper unit is
installed.
1. Remove the fusing fan 4 and other development fan brackets.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Put 0.5 ml [A] of "Grease Barrierta" in the grease dispenser [B].
3. Insert the grease dispenser into the opening [C] of the each sub-hopper unit, and then
push the grease dispenser to put grease into the sub-hopper gear.
4. Put grease into all gears of the sub-hopper units (YMCK).
SM 4-63 D095/M077
Toner Hopper
5. Rotate the toner supply motor [D] by three or four rotations.
6. Repeat steps from 2 to 5.
After installing new sub-hopper unit
Toner must be supplied to a new sub-hopper unit which you have replaced. Follow the
procedure below.
1. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
To access this switch, you must open the front left door.
2. Enter the SP2253-xxx with the front left door open.
3. Select the SP number from -001 to -006 depending on which color's sub-hopper unit has
been removed.
-001: Black, -002: Cyan, -003: Magenta, -004: Yellow, -005: Color (CMY), -006: All
colors (KCMY)
4. Press "Execute" to transport toner to the sub-hopper(s).
It may take several minutes (approximately 5 to 10 min.) to fill the sub-hopper(s).
5. Exit the SP mode after "Completed" is displayed.
1. Close the front left door. Machine warm-up starts automatically, followed by process
control.
Do not turn off the machine during the warm-up. It takes about 6 minutes to
complete this process.
2. "Ready" appears on the LCD after the warm-up is complete.
D095/M077 4-64 SM
Toner Hopper
4.6.7 TONER SUPPLY CLUTCH
1. Sub-hopper unit ( p.4-61)
2. Drive gear [A] (hook) and idle gears [B].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Upper gear cover [C] (hook)
4. Lower gear cover [D] ( x 1)
5. Make the shaft [E] free ( x 1, x 1).
SM 4-65 D095/M077
Toner Hopper
6. Gear [F] ( x 1)
7. Sub-hopper frame [G] ( x 2, x 1)
8. Toner supply clutch unit [H] ( x 1, x 1, bushing x 1)
9. Toner supply clutch gear [I] ( x 1)
10. Toner supply clutch [J]
D095/M077 4-66 SM
Toner Hopper
4.6.8 TONER PUMP CLUTCH
1. Sub-hopper unit ( p.4-61)
2. Toner supply clutch unit ( p.4-65)
3. Toner pump clutch unit [A] ( x 1, x 1, bushing x 2)
4. Toner pump clutch gear [B] ( x 1)
Replacement
5. Toner pump clutch [C]
Adjustment
and
4.6.9 TONER END SENSOR
1. Sub-hopper unit ( p.4-61)
2. Drive gear and idle gears ( p.4-65 "Toner Supply Clutch")
3. Sub-hopper frame ( p.4-65 "Toner Supply Clutch")
4. Place the sub-hopper with the toner end sensor [A] facing upward.
5. Toner end sensor [A] ( x 2)
Keep the toner end sensor [A] facing upward while you remove the toner end sensor.
Otherwise, toner may spill out from the sub-hopper.
SM 4-67 D095/M077
Toner Hopper
4.6.10 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Harness guide bracket [A] ( x 1, x 6)
3. Toner supply motor bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
4. Motor cover [C] ( x 2)
5. Toner supply motor [D] ( x 3)
D095/M077 4-68 SM
Toner Hopper
4.6.11 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Harness guide bracket [A] ( x 1, x 6)
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Move the waste toner transport motor 1 bracket [B] to the left-hand side, and then and
remove it ( x 3, x 1).
SM 4-69 D095/M077
Toner Hopper
4. Waste toner transport motor 1 [C] ( x 3)
D095/M077 4-70 SM
Toner Hopper
4.6.12 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR 2 AND SENSOR
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Open the IOB 2 bracket ( p.4-262 "IOB Brackets").
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Waste toner transport motor 2 bracket [A] ( x 5, x 2, x 3)
A proper screwdriver or ratchet is necessary to remove this bracket.
Head [B]: 70 mm or more, Full length [C]: 120 mm or less
4. Remove:
Waste toner transport motor 2 [D] ( x 3)
Waste toner transport motor 2 sensor [E] (hooks)
SM 4-71 D095/M077
Image Creation
4.7 IMAGE CREATION
For some PM parts, automatic adjustment will be executed after clearing the PM
counter ( p.3-1 "Initializing PM Parts"). Open one of the front doors, and then close
it after clearing the PM counter. The door open/close will execute the automatic
adjustment for the replaced PM parts.
4.7.1 CHARGE CORONA UNIT
1. Open the left and right front door.
2. Front top cover ( p.4-21)
3. Press down the lock lever [A].
4. Charge corona unit [B]
When installing the charge corona unit, push the charge corona unit until you hear
click sound. Otherwise, SC3xx may be issued.
After installing a new charge corona unit
Clear the PM counter for the charge corona unit. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in the
chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-72 SM
Image Creation
4.7.2 DRUM CLEANING UNIT
1. Front top cover ( p.4-21)
2. Charge corona unit ( p.4-72)
3. Inner cover [A] for the PCDU drawer ( x 3)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Rotate the drawer stop knob [B] counterclockwise, and then remove it.
5. Pull out the PCDU drawer [C].
Use a sheet of clean paper to cover the slit of the Drum Unit where the drum is
visible. This protects the photo-sensitive surface of the drum from overhead light
and direct sunlight.
SM 4-73 D095/M077
Image Creation
6. Turn the drum cleaning unit lock lever [D] counterclockwise.
7. Drum cleaning unit [E]
Cleaning Requirement at PM Replacement
Clean the bottom frame [A] of the development unit drawer with a dry cloth at every drum
cleaning unit replacement.
D095/M077 4-74 SM
Image Creation
When installing a new drum cleaning unit
Check that the "Pro C901" decal is attached to the cleaning unit. The drum cleaning unit with
the "Pro C901" decal can be used for the Pro C901 and Pro C901S models. Never use a
drum cleaning unit for predecessor models. If the wrong type of drum cleaning unit is installed,
image problems may occur due to insufficient drum cleaning.
After installing a new drum cleaning unit
Replacement
Adjustment
1. After you replace the cleaning unit, always coat the drum with Lubricant Powder
and
B1329700. For more, see "p.4-84 "Lubricating the Drum.” This must be done even if the
drum is not replaced.
2. Clear the PM counter for the drum cleaning unit. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in
the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
4.7.3 DRUM LUBRICANT BLADE
1. Drum cleaning unit ( p.4-73)
2. Drum lubricant blade [A] ( x 2)
SM 4-75 D095/M077
Image Creation
After installing a new drum lubricant blade
Clear the PM counter for the drum lubricant blade. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in
the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
4.7.4 DRUM CLEANING GEARS
1. Drum cleaning unit ( p.4-73)
2. Lubricant brush roller gear [A] ( x 1)
3. Idle gear (Z-19) [B] ( x 1)
4. Idle gear (Z-27) [C] ( x 1)
5. Idle gear (Z-22 to -16) [D]
6. Idle gear (Z-16) [E]
7. Toner collection roller gear [F] ( x 1)
8. Drum cleaning brush roller gear [G] ( x 1)
After installing new drum cleaning gears
Clear the PM counter for the drum cleaning Gear: Y, M, C or K. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen
Details” in the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-76 SM
Image Creation
4.7.5 DRUM LUBRICANT BAR AND DRUM LUBRICANT BRUSH
ROLLER
1. Drum cleaning unit ( p.4-73)
2. Drum lubricant blade ( p.4-75)
3. Top cover [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Lubricant bar [B]
A new lubricant bar does not have two springs [C]. Remove these springs form the
old lubricant bar when installing a new lubricant bar.
5. Gear [D] ( x 1) and bushing [E] ( x 1)
SM 4-77 D095/M077
Image Creation
6. Drum lubricant brush roller [E]
A new drum lubricant brush roller for the Pro C901 and Pro C901S is white. Do not
use a drum lubricant roller which is black when installing a new drum lubricant roller.
After installing a new drum lubricant bar and drum lubricant brush roller
Clear the PM counter for the drum lubricant bar and drum lubricant brush roller. See "p.3-4
"PM Parts Screen Details” in the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-78 SM
Image Creation
4.7.6 DRUM CLEANING BLADE
1. Drum cleaning unit ( p.4-73)
2. Drum lubricant blade ( p.4-75)
3. Drum lubricant bar and drum lubricant brush roller ( p.4-77)
4. Pivot bracket [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Drum cleaning blade [B] ( x 2)
After installing a new drum cleaning blade
1. After you replace the cleaning blade, always coat the drum with Lubricant Powder
B1329700. For more, see "p.4-84 "Lubricating the Drum.” This must be done even if the
drum is not replaced.
2. Clear the PM counter for the drum cleaning blade. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details”
in the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
SM 4-79 D095/M077
Image Creation
4.7.7 DRUM CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER
1. Drum cleaning unit ( p.4-73)
2. Drum lubricant blade ( p.4-75)
3. Drum lubricant bar and drum lubricant brush roller ( p.4-77)
4. Drum cleaning blade ( p.4-79)
5. Roller stopper [A] (hook)
6. Rear gear [B] ( x 1)
7. Gear [C] ( x 1)
8. Drum cleaning brush roller [D]
After installing a new drum cleaning brush roller
Clear the PM counter for the drum cleaning brush roller. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen
Details” in the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-80 SM
Image Creation
4.7.8 DRUM UNIT
Do not touch the OPC drum. Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve.
To prevent drum scratches, remove the charge corona unit before pulling out the
drum.
1. PCDU drawer ( p.4-73 "Drum Cleaning Unit")
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Turn the drum lock nut [A] counterclockwise.
3. Rotate the drum unit [B] as shown above, and remove it. and
When installing a new drum unit, hold both sides of the drum unit to carry it. The
drum can fall if you just hold the handle of the drum unit.
SM 4-81 D095/M077
Image Creation
Reassembling the Drum Unit
The gap between the drum and development roller is precisely adjusted at the factory.
However, this gap may be uneven if the drum unit is not correctly installed in the PCDU
drawer after installing or replacing the drum unit. The uneven gap between the drum and the
development roller may cause some image problems (white spots, uneven toner density,
toner blocking in the strips on the development roller and so on). Follow the important point
for the drum unit installation as described below.
Important Point
Rotate the drum lock nut [A] clockwise until the drum lock nut [A] stops and does not
rotate any more when installing or replacing the drum unit.
Cleaning Requirement at PM Replacement
Clean the cover [A] of the drum potential sensor for each color with a dry cloth at every
drum unit replacement. However, never touch the drum potential sensor probe [B] with
a dry cloth. If you do so, static electricity may occur and cause a malfunction of the drum
potential sensor. Use a blower brush when cleaning the drum potential sensor probe.
D095/M077 4-82 SM
Image Creation
Clean the top of the development unit with a dry cloth at every drum unit replacement.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Clean the mylar [A] at the quenching lamp cover with a dry cloth at every drum unit
replacement.
After installing a new drum unit
1. After you replace the drum, always coat the drum with Lubricant Powder B1329700. For
more, see "p.4-84 "Lubricating the Drum.” This must be done even if you put the old
drum back in the machine, without installing a new one.
2. Clear the PM counter for the drum unit. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in the
chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
SM 4-83 D095/M077
Image Creation
4.7.9 LUBRICATING THE DRUM
To prevent scouring a new drum when the machine is turned on, coat the new drum with
Lubricant Powder (B1329700) before you install it.
Important
The Lubricant Powder (B1329700) (composed of Zinc Stearate) can be used for this
machine (M077 or D095).
Never use Setting Powder (54429101) for this machine, or you will damage the drum
charge roller and cause problems with image quality.
You must do PM counter clear or a fatal error will occur.
Reinstallation
Never rotate the drum after reinstalling it.
Always dust the drum before reinstallation after the drum unit has been removed to
replace or service other parts in the PCDU.
Hold both sides of the drum unit to carry it. The drum can fall if you just hold the handle of
the drum unit.
D095/M077 4-84 SM
Image Creation
4.7.10 QUENCHING LAMP
1. Drum unit ( p.4-81)
2. Quenching lamp [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4.7.11 DRUM MOTOR
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Open the controller rear box ( p.4-29).
2. Flywheel [A] ( x 3)
3. Drum motor [B] ( x 4, x 1, x 1)
SM 4-85 D095/M077
Image Creation
4.7.12 DRUM CLEANING MOTOR
1. Open the controller rear box ( p.4-29).
2. Flywheel ( p.4-85 "Drum Motor")
3. Drum cleaning motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
4.7.13 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR
The drum potential sensor is fragile and sensitive. Static electricity may damage this
sensor. Discharge your static electricity before servicing.
Do not clean the probe of the drum potential sensor with a dry cloth. Wiping with a
dry cloth can cause static electricity on the probe of this sensor. This may make the
probe much dirtier. Use a blower brush to clean this probe.
Make sure that the power plug is disconnected.
1. Development unit ( p.4-92)
2. Laser unit ( p.4-38)
If you want to remove the potential sensor for K or C, remove the laser unit for CK
(right one).
If you want to remove the potential sensor for M or Y, remove the laser unit for YM
(left one).
3. Disconnect the harness [A] of the drum potential sensor.
D095/M077 4-86 SM
Image Creation
Disconnect the harness which is for the potential sensor you want to remove.
The picture above shows the harness for magenta.
4. Remove the screw [B], and then push the projection [C] on the sensor base to remove it.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Sensor holder [D] ( x 1)
6. Connector cover [E] ( x 1)
7. Drum potential sensor [F]
SM 4-87 D095/M077
Image Creation
Cleaning Requirement
The drum potential sensor probe [A] for each color must be cleaned with a blower brush at
every 400 K.
Do not clean the probe with a dry cloth.
D095/M077 4-88 SM
Image Creation
4.7.14 POTENTIAL SENSOR HVPS
1. Toner hopper cover ( p.4-55)
2. Laser unit YM ( p.4-38)
3. Laser unit base stay [A] ( x 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Potential sensor HVPS bracket [A] ( x 2, x 4, x 4)
5. Potential sensor HVPS [A] ( x 4)
4.7.15 DUST SHIELD GLASS
1. Drum unit ( p.4-81)
SM 4-89 D095/M077
Image Creation
2. Dust shield glass bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Dust shield glass [B]
When reinstalling the dust shield glass
The dust shield glass must be installed the correct way around. The "UP" label [A] on the
dust shield glass handle [C] should face upward when it is installed.
Do not forget to insert the bracket [B] into the dust shield glass handle [C] when
reinstalling the dust shield glass in the machine. If you insert the dust shield glass without
this bracket, you cannot pull this glass out from this location. In that case, you have to
remove the laser unit to remove this glass.
D095/M077 4-90 SM
Image Creation
4.7.16 ERASE LAMP SHIELD GLASS
1. Drum unit ( p.4-81)
2. Remove screw [A] from the erase lamp shield glass ( x 1).
3. Pull the handle to remove the erase lamp shield glass [B]
Cleaning Requirement
Replacement
Adjustment
The erase lamp shield glass for each color must be cleaned with a blower brush every 400 K.
and
SM 4-91 D095/M077
Image Creation
4.7.17 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Place the development unit on a sheet of paper after its removal. Toner and
developer may fall from the development unit.
Before removal
If you will install a new development unit, do the developer removal first before removing
the old development unit. ( p.4-96 "Developer")
Be careful to handle the development unit after removing it from the slide rails. Hold the
holding positions [A] for the development unit as shown above. Never hold positions
other than holding positions [A]. Otherwise, the surface on the drum may be damaged or
scratched.
D095/M077 4-92 SM
Image Creation
Removal procedure
1. Pull out the development drawer unit ( p.4-73 "Drum Cleaning Unit").
2. Drum cleaning unit ( p.4-73 "Drum Cleaning Unit")
3. Drum unit ( p.4-81)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Bracket [A] ( x 1)
5. Development unit [B]
SM 4-93 D095/M077
Image Creation
Reassembling the Development Unit
If the development unit with developer is removed, and then reinstalled in the main machine,
the developer in the development unit may be uneven. This may cause image problems.
Follow the action for the development unit installation as described below after maintaining
the development unit.
Required Action
1. Reinstall the development unit [A] in the PCDU drawer after maintaining the development
unit.
2. Turn the coupling gear [B] on the rear side of the development unit counterclockwise by
ten rotations or more as shown above. (This agitates the developer in the development
unit, and then the developer becomes even.)
D095/M077 4-94 SM
Image Creation
After installing the new development unit
1. Do the TD sensor initialization for the replaced development unit with SP3-801-xxx.
-001: All units (Bk, C, M, Y)
-002: Color units (C, M, Y)
-003: Bk, -004: C, -005: M, -006: Y
-008: Selected units (select the units with -007)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-95 D095/M077
Image Creation
4.7.18 DEVELOPER
Do not pull out the fusing unit drawer or registration unit drawer while replacing the
developer. Otherwise, the developer replacement may fail.
Removal
1. Front top cover ( p.4-21)
2. Take the correct color of developer bottle [A].
The drawing shows how the projections correspond to the toner color.
3. Check that the developer bottle is empty.
D095/M077 4-96 SM
Image Creation
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Align the hole [B] of the bottle with the projection [C] under the developer outlet where
developer will be emptied.
5. Push the developer bottle [D] to set it in position.
If you want to remove the developer from two development units or more, set
empty bottles in those outlets.
6. Plug in and turn on the machine.
7. Enter the SP mode and then select SP2255-001.
The color selection display appears on the LCD of the operation panel.
8. Select a color or colors for developer removal.
"0": Not selected, "1": Selected
[1] shows the execution flag for the "Black" development unit. Press the "3" key on
the operation panel if you want to select this color.
[2] shows the execution flag for the "Cyan" development unit. Press the "2" key on
the operation panel if you want to select this color.
SM 4-97 D095/M077
Image Creation Rev. 3/29/2011
[3] shows the execution flag for the "Magenta" development unit. Press the "1" key
on the operation panel if you want to select this color.
[4] shows the execution flag for the "Yellow" development unit. Press the "0" key on
the operation panel if you want to select this color.
Do not change the four digits at the left (from bit 7). This will cause the procedure
to fail.
9. Press # (Enter) after you selected all the colors that you need.
⇒ 10. Execute the developer removal with SP2255-002 two times.
It takes approximately 100 seconds to complete this removal.
If the developer bottle feels light, exhaust the developer again.
11. After completing this removal, check the result for each development unit with
SP2255-009 (black), -010 (cyan), -011 (magenta) or -012 (yellow).
0: Failed, 1: Completed
If "0" is displayed on the LCD, see "If the developer removal or installation fails"
described below.
12. Remove the developer bottle by pressing the both lock levers [E] on the developer bottle.
To avoid developer spillage while handling the developer bottle, always keep the
developer bottle perfectly level.
D095/M077 4-98 SM
Image Creation
13. Remove the seal [F] adhered to the developer bottle.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
14. Attach it to the shutter [G] of the developer bottle as shown.
Installation
A new developer bottle has a seal at the inlet. Do not remove this seal before attaching the
developer bottle to the machine completely.
SM 4-99 D095/M077
Image Creation
1. Align the hole [A] of the bottle with the projection [B] on the developer inlet where
developer will be installed.
2. Set and push the developer bottle [C].
3. Pull out the seal [D] horizontally from the new developer bottle.
4. Enter the SP mode, and then select SP2256-001.
5. The color selection display appears on the LCD of the operation panel.
6. Select a color or colors for the developer installation. For details, refer to step 8 in the
"Removal" procedure.
"0": Not selected, "1": Selected
[1]: Black: use "3" to change the number between "0" and "1.”
D095/M077 4-100 SM
Rev. 3/29/2011 Image Creation
[2]: Cyan: use "2" to change the number between "0" and "1"
[3]: Magenta: use "1" to change the number between "0" and "1"
[4]: Yellow: use "0" to change the number between "0" and "1"
Do not change the four digits at the left (from bit 7). The procedure will fail.
7. Press # (Enter) after you selected all the colors that you need.
⇒ 8. Execute the developer installation with SP2256-002.
While filling the developer tap the bottle lightly so that it moves 3mm in either
direction as shown below.
It takes approximately 30 seconds to complete this installation.
9. After completing this installation, check the result for each development unit with
Replacement
Adjustment
SP2256-009 (black), -010 (cyan), -011 (magenta) or -012 (yellow).
and
0: Failed, 1: Completed
If "0" is displayed on the LCD, see "If the developer removal or installation fails"
described below.
10. Remove the developer bottle.
11. Clear the PM counter for each developer. See "PM Counter Clear" in the chapter
"Preventive Maintenance.”
12. Close the left and right front door, and then the machine starts the "Initializing TD Sensor"
automatically.
13. Check the result of "Initializing TD Sensor" with SP3-802-001.
0: Failed, 1: Completed (bit 1: Black, bit 2: Cyan, bit 3: Magenta, bit 4: Yellow)
Other codes
Code Name/ Description/ Countermeasure
2 Execution interrupted
Unexpected program interruption
Door open during TD sensor initialization Retry SP3-801-xxx.
[-001: all, -002: YMC, -003: K, -004: C, -005: M, -006: Y, -007: Color
selection, -008: Execution for selected color TD sensors (-007)]
4 Default (No execution)
SM 4-101 D095/M077
Image Creation
5 Not executed
No TD sensor initialization after installing new developer.
Retry SP3-801-xxx.
9 Vtcnt Error
Vtref adjustment error (out of target range: SP3-001-007)
1. Retry SP3-801-xxx.
2. Refer to the countermeasures in the SC table for each SC code.
Do not execute TD sensor initialization again after completing TD sensor
initialization. If so, the image density may become too dark or light.
14. Reassemble the machine.
If the developer removal or installation fails
If "0 (Failed)" is displayed in the result confirmation screen (SP2255 or SP2256), do the
following procedures.
Removal Failure
1. Check if the developer bottle is correctly set and that the seal is removed, and set it
again.
2. Execute the developer removal again with SP2255-002.
Installation Failure
Installation movement stops just after the machine has started the developer
installation. In this case, the machine prevents the developer from becoming
overloaded in the development unit due to insufficient developer removal.
1. Execute the developer removal again.
2. Execute the developer installation after the developer removal is completed.
The developer installation fails or developer still remains in the developer bottle even
though the machine has executed the developer installation.
1. Execute the developer installation again.
2. Clear the PM counter for each developer with SP7622-001 to -004.
D095/M077 4-102 SM
Image Creation
4.7.19 TD SENSOR
Place the development unit on a sheet of paper after its removal. Toner and
developer may fall from the development unit.
1. Development unit ( p.4-92)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Turn the development unit upside down and place it on the paper.
3. Remove the bottom cover [A] (hook).
4. TD sensor [B] ( x 2, x 1)
5. Install new developer.
SM 4-103 D095/M077
Image Creation
After installing a new TD sensor
Execute SP3801 to initialize the TD sensor settings.
-001: All color
-002: Color (YMC)
-003: (K), -004: (C), -005: (M), -006: (Y)
-007: Multiple colors selection
-008: Multiple colors execution
4.7.20 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR
1. Open the controller rear box ( p.4-29)
2. Flywheel ( p.4-85 "Drum Motor")
3. Development motor [A] ( x 3, x 2)
D095/M077 4-104 SM
Image Creation
4.7.21 DEVELOPMENT FAN
1. Open the controller rear box ( p.4-29).
2. Development fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Development fan [B] ( x 2)
SM 4-105 D095/M077
Image Creation
4.7.22 CHARGE CLEANING MOTOR
1. Open the controller rear box ( p.4-29).
2. Flywheel ( p.4-85 "Drum Motor")
3. Development fan bracket ( p.4-105 "Development Fan")
4. Charge cleaning motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
D095/M077 4-106 SM
Image Transfer
4.8 IMAGE TRANSFER
For some PM parts, automatic adjustment will be executed after clearing the PM
counter ( p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details").Open one of the front doors, and then
close it after clearing the PM counter. The door open/close will execute the automatic
adjustment for the replaced PM parts.
4.8.1 ITB (IMAGE TRANSFER BELT) UNIT DRAWER
Normal Slide-out Position
1. Open the left and right front door.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Inner cover [A] for the ITB unit drawer ( x 4)
3. Remove the two screws [B] at both sides of the ITB unit drawer.
SM 4-107 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4. Turn the ITB unit drawer lock lever [C] and registration unit drawer lock lever [D]
counterclockwise.
5. Pull out the ITB unit drawer [E] while holding the grips on the ITB unit drawer.
D095/M077 4-108 SM
Image Transfer
Full Slide-out Position
1. Pull out the ITB unit drawer to the normal slide-out position (see above).
2. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
3. Release the hooks [A] [B] at the left and right rails of the ITB unit drawer, and then pull
the ITB unit drawer out a little bit.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. The picture above shows that the ITB unit drawer is at the full slide-out position.
SM 4-109 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4.8.2 ITB CLEANING UNIT
1. Open the left and right front doors.
2. Inner cover [A] for the ITB cleaning unit ( x 2)
3. Remove the black screw [B].
4. Turn the cleaning blade contact lever and lubricant blade lever [C] clockwise.
5. Pull the ITB cleaning unit [D] part of the way out of the machine.
D095/M077 4-110 SM
Image Transfer
6. Pull out the ITB cleaning unit while pressing down the lock tab [E].
To avoid toner spillage while handling the image transfer belt cleaning unit,
always keep the ITB cleaning unit level.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-111 D095/M077
Image Transfer
ITB Lubrication
1. Install the new ITB cleaning unit [A] (black screw x 1).
2. Make sure that both cleaning blade and lubricant blade are away from the image transfer
belt.
Turn the levers [B] clockwise so that the levers [B] are to the right of the set
position.
3. Turn on the machine with the right front door open.
Do not close the right front door at this time.
1. Enter the SP mode, and then select SP2311-001.
2. Press "Execute" button on the LCD to lubricate the image transfer belt.
3. Close the right front door.
4. The lubricating mode starts after the right front door has been closed.
Do not open any doors during lubricating mode. The lubricating mode takes
about 5 minutes.
5. Open the right front door after the lubricating mode has completed.
D095/M077 4-112 SM
Image Transfer
6. Turn the levers [C] counterclockwise so that the levers [C] are at the left position.
7. Attach the inner cover [D] for the ITB cleaning unit (black screw x 2).
8. Close the right front door.
The machine starts to warm-up after closing the right front door.
After installing a new ITB cleaning unit
1. Lubricate the image transfer belt ( p.4-112 "ITB Lubrication").
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Clear the PM counter for the ITB cleaning unit. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in
and
the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
SM 4-113 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4.8.3 ITB FAN CLEANING PROCEDURE
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer ( p.4-197).
2. Clean the ITB fan [A] with a dry cloth and/ or blower brush at 400 K intervals.
4.8.4 ITB CLEANING AND ITB LUBRICANT BLADES
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. ITB cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
3. ITB lubricant blade [B] ( x 2)
After installing a new ITB cleaning blade
1. Lubricate the image transfer belt ( p.4-112 "ITB Lubrication").
2. Clear the PM counter for the ITB cleaning blade. See "p.3-4" in the chapter "Preventive
Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-114 SM
Image Transfer
4.8.5 ITB LUBRICANT BRUSH ROLLER AND LUBRICANT BAR
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. ITB lubricant blade ( p.4-114)
3. Rear gear [A] ( x 1)
4. Front bushing [B] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. ITB lubricant brush roller [C]
6. ITB lubricant bar [D]
SM 4-115 D095/M077
Image Transfer
After installing a new ITB lubricant brush roller or ITB lubricant bar
Clear the PM counter for the ITB lubricant brush roller or ITB lubricant bar. See "p.3-4 "PM
Parts Screen Details” in the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
4.8.6 ITB CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. ITB cleaning blade ( p.4-114)
3. Rear gear [A] ( x 1, washer x 1, spring x 1)
4. Roller stopper [B] ( x 2)
5. Front gear [C] ( x 1)
6. ITB cleaning brush roller [D] (bushing x 1)
After installing a new ITB cleaning brush roller
Clear the PM counter for the ITB cleaning brush roller. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details”
in the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-116 SM
Image Transfer
4.8.7 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. Pull out the ITB unit drawer ( p.4-107)
3. Drawer left bracket [A] ( x 3)
4. Drawer right bracket [B] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
When reinstalling the drawer left and right brackets, reinstall the drawer right
and
bracket first, and then reinstall the drawer left bracket. This makes the
reinstallation of the drawer left and right brackets easier.
5. Open the ITB lower door [C] ( x 1).
SM 4-117 D095/M077
Image Transfer
6. Sensor unit bracket [D] ( x 1, x 2)
7. Turn the belt tension lever [E] clockwise.
8. Belt tension roller unit [F] ( x 1)
9. Insert sheets of paper [G] between the Image transfer belt and ITB unit drawer.
The sheets of paper prevent the image transfer belt from being damaged and make
the removal of the image transfer belt easier.
10. Image transfer belt [H]
D095/M077 4-118 SM
Image Transfer
When installing a new image transfer belt
Replacement
Adjustment
and
There are two parallel reference lines [A] on the frame of the image transfer unit drawer.
When installing a new image transfer belt, install the new ITB in the image transfer unit
drawer so that the front edge [B] of the ITB aligns between two lines [C].
After installing a new image transfer belt
1. Lubricate the image transfer belt ( p.4-112 "ITB Lubrication").
2. Clear the PM counter for the image transfer belt. See "PM Counter Clear" in the chapter
"Preventive Maintenance.”
3. Do the ITB Condition Check. ( Troubleshooting – Operation Problems -p.6-42 "ITB
Condition Check ").
SM 4-119 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4.8.8 ID/MUSIC SENSORS
1. Sensor unit bracket ( p.4-117 "Image Transfer Belt")
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2)
3. Disconnect the connector [B].
4. Sensor cover [C] ( x 4)
5. ID/MUSIC sensors [D] ( x 2)
D095/M077 4-120 SM
Image Transfer
After installing new ID/MUSIC sensors
Do the following adjustment after installing new ID/MUSIC sensors.
1. Plug in the power cord and turn on the main power switch of the machine.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Input all correction coefficients [A] for the ID/MUSIC sensors with the SP modes, referring
to the barcode sheet provided with the new ID/MUSIC sensors.
For example, input "1.00" with SP3-362-013.
4. Execute "Process Control" with SP3-820-001 after inputting the adjustment values.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4.8.9 ITB DRIVE MOTOR
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. Pull out the ITB unit drawer to the full slide-out position ( p.4-109).
3. ITB drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
SM 4-121 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4.8.10 ITB MOTOR ROTATION SENSORS
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. Pull out the ITB unit drawer to the full slide-out position ( p.4-109).
3. ITB drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
4. ITB roller bushing [B]
5. Remove the screw [C].
6. ITB sensor cover [D] ( x 4)
7. Gear [E] ( x 1, bearing x 1, small bar [F]x 1)
D095/M077 4-122 SM
Image Transfer
The small bar [F] is extremely small. Do not lose this bar.
8. Sensor bracket [G] ( x 1, x 2)
9. ITB motor rotation sensors [H] ( x 2, x 1, x 1 each)
Reinstalling the ITB motor rotation sensors
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Before reinstalling the sensor bracket, make sure that the small bar [B] is set in the groove [A]
at the rear edge of the ITB drive roller as shown.
SM 4-123 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4.8.11 BELT SPEED SENSOR
1. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117 "Image Transfer Belt")
2. Sensor holder bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Encoder roller [B] with the encoder unit ( x 1, x 1)
The belt speed sensor is located in the encoder unit (black case). However, the
encoder unit (belt speed sensor) cannot be detached from the encoder roller (these
are precisely adjusted). When replacing the encoder unit (belt speed sensor),
replace the encoder roller with the encoder unit.
D095/M077 4-124 SM
Image Transfer
When reinstalling the encoder roller with the encoder unit
1. Do not hold the encoder unit (black case) [A] when reinstalling the encoder roller with the
encoder unit. Hold the shaft [B] of the encoder roller.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Hold the sensor board [A] with your fingers when connecting the harness. Otherwise, the
belt speed sensor may come off from the sensor board and the machine may not detect
the belt speed correctly.
SM 4-125 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4.8.12 ITB BLACK AND COLOR LIFT MOTORS
1. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
2. ITB unit center and right plates [A] ( x 4 each)
3. ITB black lift motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4. ITB color lift motor bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
5. ITB black or color lift motor [C] ( x 2 each)
D095/M077 4-126 SM
Image Transfer
4.8.13 ITB BLACK AND COLOR LIFT SENSORS
1. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
2. ITB unit right plate ( p.4-126 "ITB Black and Color Lift Motors")
3. ITB black lift sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
4. ITB color lift sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Release three hooks as shown above.
SM 4-127 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4.8.14 FRONT AND REAR BELT OVERRUN SENSORS
1. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
2. ITB unit center plate ( p.4-126 "ITB Black and Color Lift Motors")
3. Front ITB overrun sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
4. Rear ITB overrun sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
5. Front or rear ITB overrun sensor [C] (hooks)
D095/M077 4-128 SM
Image Transfer
4.8.15 BELT CENTERING SENSOR
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. Pull out the ITB unit drawer to the full slide-out position ( p.4-109).
3. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
4. Release the hanging wire [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Remove the screw [B] for the belt centering sensor.
6. Belt centering sensor bracket [C] ( x 1)
SM 4-129 D095/M077
Image Transfer
7. Belt centering sensor [D] ( x 2)
4.8.16 IMAGE TRANSFER ROLLERS
1. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
2. ITB unit left, center and right plates [A] ( x 4 each)
3. Front and rear Image transfer roller covers [B]
D095/M077 4-130 SM
Image Transfer
4. Image transfer rollers [C]
After installing new image transfer rollers
Clear the PM counter for the image transfer rollers. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in
the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-131 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4.8.17 ITB BIAS ROLLER
1. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
2. Bias terminal unit [A] ( x 2)
3. ITB bias roller [B]
4. Remove the terminal [C] from the ITB bias roller.
Attach the terminal [C] to a new ITB bias roller when installing a new ITB roller.
Otherwise, SC450 may be issued.
D095/M077 4-132 SM
Image Transfer
This terminal [C] is easily broken because the terminal [C] is made of carbon.
Never hit or cause an impact on the terminal.
If the terminal is cracked or broken, replace it with a new one.
After installing a new ITB bias roller
Clear the PM counter for the ITB bias roller. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in the
chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
4.8.18 ITB CLEANING MOTOR
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. Pull out the ITB unit drawer to the full slide-out position ( p.4-109).
3. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. ITB cleaning gear unit [A] ( x 4, x 1)
5. ITB cleaning motor [B] ( x 4, x 1)
SM 4-133 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4.8.19 ITB CLEANING UNIT SET SENSOR
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. Pull out the ITB unit drawer to the full slide-out position ( p.4-109).
3. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
4. ITB cleaning unit set sensor [A] ( x 1)
D095/M077 4-134 SM
Image Transfer
4.8.20 BELT CENTERING ROLLER SENSOR
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. Pull out the ITB unit drawer to the full slide-out position ( p.4-109).
3. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
4. ITB unit left plate ( p.4-130 "Image Transfer Rollers ")
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
6. Belt centering roller sensor [B] (hooks) and
SM 4-135 D095/M077
Image Transfer
4.8.21 BELT CENTERING ROLLER MOTOR
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. Pull out the ITB unit drawer to the full slide-out position ( p.4-109).
3. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
4. Sensor bracket ( p.4-135 "Belt Centering Roller Sensor")
5. Pull out the belt centering roller motor [A] while lifting up the belt centering roller bracket
[B] as shown ( x 2, x 1)
4.8.22 TRB (TRANSFER RELAY BOARD)
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. Pull out the ITB unit drawer ( p.4-107).
3. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
4. Release the hanging wire [A].
D095/M077 4-136 SM
Image Transfer
5. Roller bracket [B] ( x 1)
6. ID/MUSIC Sensor Roller [C]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
7. TRB [D] ( x all, x 2, stud x 4)
4.8.23 TRANSFER HVPS
1. ITB cleaning unit ( p.4-110)
2. Pull out the ITB unit drawer ( p.4-107).
3. Image transfer belt ( p.4-117)
4. Release the hanging wire ( p.4-136 "TRB (Transfer Relay Board)").
5. Roller bracket [A] ( x 1)
6. ITB cleaning idle roller [B]
SM 4-137 D095/M077
Image Transfer
7. Disconnect five cables [C] from the left side of the transfer HVPS.
8. Pull the transfer HVPS bracket [D] to the right side, and lower it ( x 1, x 2)
9. Transfer HVPS [E] ( x 2, stud x 4)
D095/M077 4-138 SM
Paper Registration
4.9 PAPER REGISTRATION
4.9.1 REGISTRATION UNIT DRAWER
Pulling out the registration unit drawer
1. Open the left and right front doors.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Turn the lock lever [A] for the registration unit drawer counterclockwise, and then pull out
and
the drawer.
Removing the registration unit drawer
This drawer unit is too heavy for one person to lift or move. Two people are required
to lift or move this unit. This unit may cause serious injury to a service engineer or
break itself if a service engineer drops it mistakenly.
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer.
2. Remove the screws [A] [B] at the right and left drawer rails.
3. Lift the registration unit drawer, and then remove it while grabbing the places [C] at the
right and left sides of this unit.
SM 4-139 D095/M077
Paper Registration
Reinstalling the registration unit drawer
This drawer unit is too heavy for one person to lift or move. Two people are required
to lift or move this unit. This unit may cause serious injury to a service engineer or
break itself if a service engineer drops it mistakenly.
1. Align the two tabs [A] on the left rail with the cutouts [B] at the left side of the registration
unit drawer. At the same time, align the two tabs [C] on the right rail with the cutouts [D] at
the right side of the registration unit drawer.
2. Lower the registration unit drawer slowly onto the rails.
D095/M077 4-140 SM
Paper Registration
4.9.2 INNER REGISTRATION COVER
1. Open the front right door.
2. Pull out the registration drawer unit ( p.4-139).
3. Lock lever [A] ( x 1)
4. Inner registration cover [B] ( x 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-141 D095/M077
Paper Registration
4.9.3 LCT ENTRANCE SENSOR
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. LCT entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
3. LCT entrance sensor [B] (hooks)
D095/M077 4-142 SM
Paper Registration
4.9.4 REGISTRATION TIMING SENSOR
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Registration timing sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 3, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Registration timing sensor [B] (Hooks)
SM 4-143 D095/M077
Paper Registration
4.9.5 REGISTRATION ENTRANCE SENSOR
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Open the registration entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 2).
3. Registration entrance sensor [B] (hooks)
D095/M077 4-144 SM
Paper Registration
4.9.6 DOUBLE-FEED SENSOR
Double-Feed Sensor: Receptor
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Double-feed sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Double-feed sensor: receptor [B]
Double-Feed Sensor: LED
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
SM 4-145 D095/M077
Paper Registration
3. Double-feed sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
4. Double-feed sensor: LED [B] ( x 1, x 2, hooks, x 1)
4.9.7 CIS (CONTACT IMAGE SENSOR) UNIT
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Timing roller cover [A] ( x 2)
4. CIS unit bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
D095/M077 4-146 SM
Paper Registration
5. CIS fixing bracket [C] ( x 1)
Note:
When assembling the CIS unit bracket, slide the CIS fixing bracket [C] in the arrow
direction.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Release the two hook plates [D]
7. CIS unit [E]
SM 4-147 D095/M077
Paper Registration Rev. 6/19/2012
After installing a new CIS unit
1. Turn on the main power switch of the mainframe.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Pull out the registration drawer unit ( p.4-139).
⇒ 4. Insert a sheet [A] of paper (A4 or LT SEF) under the shift roller unit [B].
Use either of the following paper:
* Hammermill Fore MP White (20lb) LT
* Data Copy Everyday Printing (80g/m2) A4
⇒ 5. Set the paper so that the leading edge [C] of the paper is visible and the front edge [D] of
the paper is aligned with the front edge [E] of the registration timing sensor bracket.
Make sure that the paper covers the entire area beneath the CIS.
6. Install the registration drawer unit in the machine and close the front cover.
7. Check that the value of SP1916-001 is set to "1.61.”
8. Execute the "CIS LED Power Adjustment" with SP1912-001.
9. Exit the SP mode after the completion message of the "CIS LED Adjustment" has been
displayed.
10. Pull out the registration drawer unit again, and then remove the sheet of paper from the
registration unit.
⇒ 11. Reassemble the machine.
If Jam098 is exhibited after completing the CIS LED adjustment, follow the
troubleshooting instructions for Jam098 in the following Technical Service Bulletin:
D095/M077 - 028 Troubleshooting Jam 098 - Large Paper Skews.
D095/M077 4-148 SM
Paper Registration
4.9.8 PAPER DUST TRAY
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Timing roller cover [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Paper dust tray [B] ( x 2)
Cleaning Requirement
The paper dust tray must be cleaned at 400 K intervals. Clean the area with a dry cloth.
SM 4-149 D095/M077
Paper Registration
4.9.9 SHIFT ROLLER UNIT
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Paper dust tray ( p.4-149)
4. CIS base bracket [C] ( x 4, x 1)
5. Relay board [D] ( x 2, x 1)
D095/M077 4-150 SM
Paper Registration
6. Pull out the shift roller unit shaft [E] toward the rear side ( x 1: front, spring x 1)
NOTE
When the shift roller unit shaft is pulled out, the spring [a] may spring out. Hold
the spring [a] with your hand when you pull out this shaft.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
7. Rotate the shift roller unit motor [F] (it is actually under the shift roller unit) to move the
shift roller unit [G] to the front side as far as possible.
8. Wheel holder bracket [H] ( x 1)
SM 4-151 D095/M077
Paper Registration
9. Shift roller lift lever [I] ( x 1)
10. Shift roller unit [J]
D095/M077 4-152 SM
Paper Registration
4.9.10 SHIFT ROLLER UNIT MOTOR
1. Shift roller unit ( p.4-150)
2. Skew correction adjuster [A] ( x 2)
This adjuster is precisely adjusted at the factory. Mark the position of the skew
Replacement
correction adjuster as a reference for the adjustment position.
Adjustment
and
3. Registration gate [B] ( x 1, spring x 1)
4. Shift roller unit motor bracket [C] ( x 4, x 1, x 2)
SM 4-153 D095/M077
Paper Registration
5. Shift roller unit motor [D] ( x 3, timing belt x 1)
4.9.11 SHIFT ROLLER HP SENSOR
1. Shift roller unit ( p.4-150)
2. Shift roller unit motor bracket ( p.4-153 "Shift Roller Unit Motor")
3. Shift roller HP sensor [A] ( x 2, hooks, x 1)
D095/M077 4-154 SM
Paper Registration
4.9.12 REGISTRATION GATE LIFT SENSOR
1. Shift roller unit ( p.4-150)
2. Registration gate lift sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
3. Registration gate lift sensor [B] (hooks)
4.9.13 PTR TIMING SENSOR
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Timing roller cover ( p.4-146 "CIS (Contact Image Sensor) Unit")
3. PTR timing sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4. PTR timing sensor [B] (hooks)
SM 4-155 D095/M077
Paper Registration
4.9.14 REGISTRATION TIMING MOTOR
1. Registration unit drawer ( p.4-139)
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Motor covers [A] for the registration timing motor (hooks) and [B] for the registration gate
motor (hooks)
4. Large harness cover [C] ( x 1)
5. Registration timing motor [D] ( x 2, x 1)
D095/M077 4-156 SM
Paper Registration
4.9.15 REGISTRATION GATE MOTOR
1. Registration unit drawer ( p.4-139)
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Motor cover[A] for the registration gate motor (hooks)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Registration gate motor [B] ( x 2, x 1)
SM 4-157 D095/M077
Paper Registration
4.9.16 REGISTRATION ENTRANCE MOTOR
1. Registration unit drawer ( p.4-139)
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Motor covers [A] [B]
4. Large harness cover [C] ( x 1)
5. Motor cover [D] for the registration entrance motor (hooks)
6. Tension pulley bracket [E] ( x 2, spring x 1)
D095/M077 4-158 SM
Paper Registration
When reinstalling the tension pulley bracket [E], first secure the tension pulley
bracket temporarily and then install the spring. Tighten two screws on the
tension pulley bracket after installing the spring.
7. Registration entrance motor bracket [F] ( x 2, x 3, x 1)
8. Registration unit entrance motor [G] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-159 D095/M077
Paper Registration
4.9.17 SHIFT ROLLER MOTOR
1. Registration unit drawer ( p.4-139)
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Large harness cover ( p.4-158 "Registration Entrance Motor")
4. Motor cover [A] for the shift roller motor (hooks)
5. Small harness cover [B] ( x 2)
6. Shift roller motor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 3, x 1)
7. Shift roller motor [D] ( x 2)
D095/M077 4-160 SM
Paper Registration
4.9.18 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR 2
1. Registration unit drawer ( p.4-139)
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Motor cover [A] for the duplex transport motor 2 (hooks)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Tension pulley bracket [B] ( x 2, spring x 1)
When reinstalling the tension pulley bracket [E], first secure the tension pulley
bracket temporarily and then install the spring. Tighten two screws on the
tension pulley bracket after installing the spring.
5. Duplex transport motor 2 bracket [C] ( x 3, x 3, x 1)
SM 4-161 D095/M077
Paper Registration
6. Duplex transport motor 2 [D] ( x 2)
4.9.19 PTR TIMING MOTOR
1. Registration unit drawer ( p.4-139)
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Motor cover [A] for the PTR motor (hooks)
4. PTR timing motor bracket [B] ( x 3, x 1)
D095/M077 4-162 SM
Paper Registration
5. PTR timing motor [C] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-163 D095/M077
Paper Registration
4.9.20 DUPLEX TRANSPORT SENSOR 3 AND 4
Duplex Transport Sensor 3
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Duplex transport sensor 3 bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 1)
3. Duplex transport sensor 3 [B] (hooks)
Duplex Transport Sensor 4
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Duplex transport sensor 4 bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
D095/M077 4-164 SM
Paper Registration
4. Duplex transport sensor 4 [B] ( x 3, x 1, hooks)
4.9.21 PTR MOTOR
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Remove the tension spring [A].
4. PTR motor bracket [B] ( x 3, x 1, x 1)
5. PTR motor [C] ( x 3)
SM 4-165 D095/M077
Paper Registration
4.9.22 SEPARATION HVPS
1. PTR motor ( p.4-165)
2. PTR unit ( p.4-170)
3. PTR unit lift plate [A] ( x 3)
This plate is strongly pressed by two arms under the timing roller [B].
4. PTR lift motor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 3)
5. Separation HVPS cover [D] (hook x 4)
D095/M077 4-166 SM
Paper Registration
6. Separation HVPS [E] ( x 3, x 2)
4.9.23 PTR LIFT MOTOR
1. PTR lift motor bracket ( p.4-166 "Separation HVPS")
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Cam gear [A] ( x 1)
3. PTR lift sensor shaft [B] (bushing x 1)
4. PTR lift motor [C] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
SM 4-167 D095/M077
Paper Registration
4.9.24 PTR LIFT SENSOR
1. PTR lift motor bracket ( p.4-166 "Separation HVPS")
2. PTR lift sensor shat ( p.4-167 "PTR Lift Motor")
3. PTR lift sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
4.9.25 RCB
1. Registration unit drawer ( p.4-139)
2. Inner registration cover ( p.4-141)
3. Motor covers and large harness cover ( p.4-156 "Registration Timing Motor")
4. Remove the screw [A] and all connectors [B] on the front frame of the registration drawer
unit.
5. Pull out the RCB unit [C] ( x 3, x all).
D095/M077 4-168 SM
Paper Registration
6. RCB unit top cover [D] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
7. RCB [E] ( x 4, x all, x all))
SM 4-169 D095/M077
Paper Transfer
4.10 PAPER TRANSFER
For some PM parts, automatic adjustment will be executed after clearing the PM
counter ( p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details"). Open one of the front doors, and then
close it after clearing the PM counter. The door open/close will execute the automatic
adjustment for the replaced PM parts.
4.10.1 PTR (PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER) UNIT
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer ( p.4-139).
2. Release the rear lock and front lock [A] ( x 1 each).
3. PTR (paper transfer roller) unit [B]
To avoid toner spillage while handling the PTR unit, always keep the PTR unit level.
D095/M077 4-170 SM
Paper Transfer
After installing a new paper transfer roller unit
Clear the PM counter for the PTR unit. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in the chapter
"Preventive Maintenance.”
4.10.2 PTR ENTRANCE MYLAR CLEANING PROCEDURE
1. Pull out the ITB unit drawer ( p.4-107)
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Clean the PTR entrance mylar [A] with a cloth and alcohol.
and
Cleaning Requirement
This mylar must be cleaned at 400 K intervals.
SM 4-171 D095/M077
Paper Transfer
4.10.3 PTR LUBRICANT BAR
1. PTR unit ( p.4-170)
2. Right paper guide plate [A] ( x 2)
3. PTR lubricant bar unit [B] ( x 2)
4. PTR lubricant bar [C] ( x 1, spring x 4)
After installing a new PTR lubricant bar
Clear the PM counter for the PTR lubricant bar. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in the
chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-172 SM
Paper Transfer
4.10.4 PTR LUBRICANT BRUSH ROLLER
1. PTR unit ( p.4-170)
2. PTR Lubricant Bar ( p.4-172)
3. Rear gear [A] ( x 1)
4. Rear gear bracket [B] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. PTR lubricant brush roller [C]
After installing a new PTR lubricant brush roller
Clear the PM counter for the PTR lubricant brush roller. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details”
in the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
SM 4-173 D095/M077
Paper Transfer
4.10.5 PTR DISCHARGE PLATE
1. PTR unit ( p.4-170)
2. PTR discharge plate [A] ( x 2)
After installing a new PTR discharge plate
Clear the PM counter for the PTR discharge plate. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in
the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-174 SM
Paper Transfer
4.10.6 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER
1. PTR unit ( p.4-170)
2. PTR lubricant bar ( p.4-172)
3. PTR lubricant brush roller ( p.4-173)
4. Rear gear [A] ( x 1)
5. Front gear [B] for PTR cleaning brush roller ( x 1)
Replacement
6. Front gear [C] ( x 1)
Adjustment
and
7. Front gear bracket [D] ( x 2)
8. Remove small cover [E] ( x 1)
9. PTR Discharge plate [F] ( x 2)
10. Paper transfer roller [G] (bushing x 2)
SM 4-175 D095/M077
Paper Transfer
After installing a new paper transfer roller
Clear the PM counter for the paper transfer roller. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in the
chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
4.10.7 PTR CLEANING BLADE
1. PTR unit ( p.4-170)
2. PTR lubricant bar ( p.4-172))
3. PTR lubricant brush roller ( p.4-173)
4. Paper transfer roller ( p.4-175)
5. PTR cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)
After installing a new PTR cleaning blade
Clear the PM counter for the PTR cleaning blade. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in the
chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-176 SM
Paper Transfer
4.10.8 PTR CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER
1. PTR unit ( p.4-170)
2. Paper transfer roller ( p.4-175)
3. PTR cleaning blade ( p.4-176)
4. PTR cleaning brush roller [A] (bushing x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
After installing a new PTR cleaning brush roller
and
Clear the PM counter for the PTR cleaning brush roller. See "p.3-4" in the chapter "Preventive
Maintenance.”
SM 4-177 D095/M077
Paper Feed and Transport
4.11 PAPER FEED AND TRANSPORT
4.11.1 TANDEM TRAY (TRAY 1)
1. Open the tandem tray [A] so that the right tandem tray [B] fully separates from the left
tray.
2. Push in the right tandem tray.
3. Left tandem tray [C] ( x 5)
4. Right tandem tray [D] ( x 2).
Use M4 x 4 screws [E] to secure the right tandem tray when reinstalling this tray.
Screws longer than 4 mm will prevent the right tandem tray from sliding out and in
smoothly.
D095/M077 4-178 SM
Paper Feed and Transport
When reinstalling the right tandem tray
When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the wheels , ride on the
slide rail [A].
When re-installing the right tandem tray, make sure that the tandem tray stopper [B] is set
Replacement
Adjustment
behind the stopper [C] on the copier frame.
and
4.11.2 UNIVERSAL TRAY (TRAY 2)
1. Pull open tray 2 or tray 3 [A].
2. Lift the tray [B] out of the drawer.
SM 4-179 D095/M077
Paper Feed and Transport
4.11.3 PAPER FEED UNIT 1 AND 2
This procedure uses the 1st feed unit as an example. The procedures for the 2nd
and 3rd trays are the same.
1. If the LCT is installed, disconnect it.
2. Open the right front door.
3. Push the lock lever.
4. Right cover ( p.4-20)
5. Lift the vertical transport guide [A] and remove it.
6. Knobs [B] [C] ( x 1 each)
7. Paper tray unit inner cover [D] ( x 2)
8. Upper gear bracket [E] ( x 3)
9. Inner vertical transport guide [F] ( x 2)
When re-installing the inner vertical transport guide, set the pin [G] of the inner
vertical transport guide into the slot on the main body.
D095/M077 4-180 SM
Paper Feed and Transport
10. Paper feed unit [H] ( x 2, x1)
4.11.4 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Remove the target tray.
and
2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)
4. Separation roller [C] ( x 1)
The feed rollers of the main machine and the LCT-MF are not interchangeable
because they turn in different directions.
After replacing a feed roller in the main machine, always make sure that it turns
counterclockwise in the direction of paper feed.
Do not touch the surface of the rollers with your bare hands.
5. Reset the PM count to zero for the new rollers after replacing the above rollers.
SM 4-181 D095/M077
Paper Feed and Transport
4.11.5 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, TRAY LIFT SENSOR
1. Paper feed unit ( p.4-180)
2. Tray lift sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1).
3. Paper end sensor assembly [B] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Paper end sensor [C]
5. Paper feed sensor [D] ( x 1, x 1)
6. Vertical transport sensor [E] ( x1, x1)
4.11.6 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR
1. Pull out the left tandem tray.
2. Rear bottom plate [A] ( x 1).
3. Rear fence return sensor [B] ( x 1).
D095/M077 4-182 SM
Paper Feed and Transport
4.11.7 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR
1. Pull out the left tandem tray.
2. Rear bottom plate [A] ( x 1).
3. Rear fence transport gear [B] ( x 1).
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Move the rear fence [C] to the right.
and
5. Rear fence HP sensor [D] ( x 1).
SM 4-183 D095/M077
Paper Feed and Transport
4.11.8 RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR
1. Right tandem tray ( p.4-178 "Tandem Tray (Tray 1)")
2. Tandem tray cover [A] ( x 2).
3. Side fences [B] ( x 1 each).
When re-installing the side fences, make sure that the position of the side fences
is correct. [A4: Outer, LT: Inner]
4. Bottom plate [C] ( x 4).
5. Right tray paper sensor [D] ( x 1, x 1).
D095/M077 4-184 SM
Paper Feed and Transport
4.11.9 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE
Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom plate lift wire.
The procedure for the two wires is the same.
1. Right tandem tray ( p.4-178 "Tandem Tray (Tray 1)")
2. Tandem tray cover ( p.4-184 "Right Tray Paper Sensor")
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 3) (Front Only).
4. Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook the wire stoppers [B], remove stopper [C]
and actuator [D].
5. Wire covers [E] ( x 1 each).
6. Bracket [F] ( x 1, x 1, bushing x 1) (Front Only).
7. Gear [G] (Front Only).
8. Bottom plate lift wire [H].
SM 4-185 D095/M077
Paper Feed and Transport
Re-installation
When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire:
1. Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B].
2. Set the projection [C] in the hole [D].
3. Position the wire as shown [E].
4. Do not cross the wires.
D095/M077 4-186 SM
Paper Feed and Transport
4.11.10 2ND TRAY PAPER SIZE SWITCH
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29 "Opening the rear controller box").
2. Open the IOB 2 bracket ( p.4-263)
3. Bracket [A] ( x 1)
4. 2nd tray paper size switch bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. 2nd tray paper size switch [C] ( x 1)
SM 4-187 D095/M077
Paper Feed and Transport
4.11.11 PAPER FEED AND GRIP MOTORS
1st Paper Feed and Grip Motor
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29 "Opening the rear controller box").
2. Open the IOB 1 bracket ( p.4-262).
3. 1st tray motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2)
If the 1st/2nd tray motor bracket cannot be removed, the coupling gear [B] of the
1st/2nd paper feed motor may have caught the cutout [C] on the frame. Align the
coupling gear with the cutout by turning the 1st/2nd paper feed motor, and then
remove it
D095/M077 4-188 SM
Paper Feed and Transport
4. 1st paper feed motor [D] ( x 2, x 1)
5. 1st grip motor [E] ( x 2, x 1)
2nd Paper Feed and Grip Motor
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Open the IOB 1 bracket ( p.4-262).
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Disconnect the harnesses of the 1st tray paper feed and grip motors, and the vertical
and
relay motor.
These harnesses interrupt the removal of the 2nd tray motor bracket.
4. 2nd tray motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 2)
If the 1st/2nd tray motor bracket cannot be removed, align the coupling gear with
the cutout. For details, see "Note" below step 3 in the "1st Paper Feed and Grip
Motor" procedure shown above.
SM 4-189 D095/M077
Paper Feed and Transport
5. 2nd paper feed motor [B] ( x 2, x 1)
6. 2nd grip motor [C] ( x 2, x 1)
D095/M077 4-190 SM
Paper Feed and Transport
4.11.12 VERTICAL RELAY MOTOR
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Open the IOB 1 bracket ( p.4-262).
3. Disconnect the harness of the 1st grip motor.
4. Vertical relay motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
If the vertical relay motor bracket cannot be removed, align the coupling gear
and
with the cutout. For details, see "Note" below step 3 in the "1st Paper Feed and
Grip Motor" procedure shown above.
5. Vertical relay motor [B] ( x 2, timing belt)
SM 4-191 D095/M077
Paper Feed and Transport
4.11.13 TRAY LIFT MOTORS
1st tray Lift Motor
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Open the IOB 1 bracket ( p.4-262).
3. 1st tray motor bracket ( p.4-188 "1st Paper Feed and Grip Motor")
4. 1st tray lift motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
5. Bracket [B] ( x 3)
6. 1st tray lift motor [C]
D095/M077 4-192 SM
Paper Feed and Transport
2nd tray Lift Motor
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Open the IOB 1 bracket ( p.4-262).
3. 2nd tray motor bracket ( p.4-189 "2nd Paper Feed and Grip Motor")
4. 2nd tray lift motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-193 D095/M077
Fusing
4.12 FUSING
To prevent electrical shock, switch off the main power switch and disconnect the
power cord from the power source. Disconnect all other cables (USB, network, etc.)
if they are connected. ( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during operation, so to prevent minor burns,
switch the machine off and allow it to cool for at least 30 minutes before you remove
the fusing unit.
The fusing unit is approximately 29.2 kg (64.4 lb.) in weight, so two people are
required to lift and move it. Handle it carefully when you remove it to avoid dropping
it and causing damage or minor injuries.
For some PM parts, automatic adjustment will be executed after clearing the PM
counter ( p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details"). Open one of the front doors, and then
close it after clearing the PM counter. The door open/close will execute the automatic
adjustment for the replaced PM parts.
Check the machine condition before installing a new PM part for the fusing unit or
turning on a machine which has not been turned on for more than one week.
D095/M077 4-194 SM
Fusing
4.12.1 FUSING UNIT
Two people are required to lift or move the fusing unit.
1. Open the left and right front door.
1. Pull out the handle [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Turn the lock lever [A] for the fusing unit drawer counterclockwise, and then pull the
fusing unit drawer.
Remove the fusing knob [B] ( x 1) before pulling out the fusing unit drawer if you
are supposed to remove the fusing front cover after taking out the fusing unit.
3. Remove the screw [A].
SM 4-195 D095/M077
Fusing
4. Attach the handle [A] as shown above.
5. Hold the handle [A], and then lift the fusing unit vertically.
The fusing unit weighs approximately 29.2 kg (64.4 lb.). Two people are required
to lift and move it.
Handle it carefully when you lift it and set it down.
6. Place the fusing unit on a suitable sheet of paper, and then remove the handle.
D095/M077 4-196 SM
Fusing
When reinstalling the fusing unit
Align the arrow decals [A] as shown above when reinstalling the fusing unit.
After installing a new fusing unit
Clear the PM counter for the fusing unit. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in the chapter
"Preventive Maintenance.”
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRAWER
Pulling out the fusing unit drawer
1. Open the left and right front door.
2. Turn the lock lever [A] for the fusing unit drawer counterclockwise, and then pull the
fusing unit drawer.
SM 4-197 D095/M077
Fusing
Removing the fusing unit drawer
The fusing unit drawer is too heavy for one person to lift or move safely. Two people
are required to lift or move the fusing unit drawer.
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer (see above).
2. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
3. Remove the screws at the left [A] and right [B] rails.
4. Fusing unit drawer [C]
D095/M077 4-198 SM
Fusing
4.12.3 FUSING FRONT COVER
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing knob [A] ( x 1)
3. Fusing front cover [B] ( x 3)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
If you cannot remove the fusing knob screw, hold the drive gear [A] with nippers
and remove it.
SM 4-199 D095/M077
Fusing
4.12.4 FUSING REAR COVER
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing rear cover [A] ( x 4)
4.12.5 FUSING UPPER FRAME
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing front cover ( p.4-199)
3. Fusing rear cover ( p.4-200)
4. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 3).
When rerouting the harness as shown above, route the harness between the
connectors [B] and [C].
D095/M077 4-200 SM
Fusing
5. Positioning pins [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Remove the pipe duct on the fusing rear frame if it has already been installed ( x 4).
This pipe duct is for the optional air separator unit.
7. Fusing upper frame [A]
SM 4-201 D095/M077
Fusing
4.12.6 FUSING CLEANING UNIT
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing entrance guide [A] ( x 2)
The default position of the screw on the fusing entrance guide is the upper side. Use
the upper screw holes when reinstalling the fusing entrance guide.
3. Fusing cleaning unit [A] ( x 2)
After installing a new fusing cleaning unit
Clear the PM counter "Web cleaning Unit" for the fusing cleaning unit. See "p.3-4" in the
chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-202 SM
Fusing
4.12.7 CLEANING WEB
1. Fusing cleaning unit ( p.4-202)
2. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 2).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Idle gear (Z20/ Z50) [A]
4. Idle gear (Z24) [B]
5. Cleaning fabric supply roller gear [C] (bushing x 2)
6. Take-up roller gear (Z60) [D] (bushing x 2)
7. Take-up roller gear (Z50) [A] (bushing x 1, x 1)
8. Bushing [B]
SM 4-203 D095/M077
Fusing
9. Fabric pressure roller [A] (bushing x 2, x spring x 2).
The bushing [B] contains a one-way clutch.
10. Cleaning fabric supply roller [A]
11. Take-up roller [B]
D095/M077 4-204 SM
Fusing
When reinstalling the cleaning web
1. Reinstall the shaft [A] at the rear side.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Reinstall the shaft [A] at the front side.
Make sure that the feeler [A] is above the cleaning web [B].
SM 4-205 D095/M077
Fusing
3. Reinstall the fabric pressure roller [A] (bushing x 2, x spring x 2).
The bushing [B] contains a one-way clutch.
4. Reinstall the take-up roller [A].
5. Make sure that the gears rotate smoothly after reinstalling the cleaning web.
D095/M077 4-206 SM
Fusing
4.12.8 FUSING LAMPS
Heating Roller Fusing Lamps
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing front cover ( p.4-199)
3. Fusing rear cover ( p.4-200)
4. Disconnect three connectors.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Connect three connectors as shown above when reinstalling the fusing lamps.
5. Heating roller lamp front holder [A] ( x 1)
6. Lamp rear terminal cover [A] ( x 1)
SM 4-207 D095/M077
Fusing
7. Disconnect three connectors.
Connect three connectors as shown above when reinstalling the fusing lamps.
8. Heating roller lamp rear holder [A] ( x 1)
9. Heating roller fusing lamps [A]
These three lamps are identical.
The longer cord of the fusing lamp should be at the front side when reinstalling
the fusing lamp.
D095/M077 4-208 SM
Fusing
10. Insert the fusing lamp(s) [A] into the heater guide [B].
Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing front cover ( p.4-199)
3. Fusing rear cover ( p.4-200)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Fusing unit left stay [A] ( x 5)
5. Disconnect the connector [A] on the fusing unit front side ( x 2).
SM 4-209 D095/M077
Fusing
6. Pressure roller lamp front holder [A] ( x 1, x 2)
7. Disconnect a connector [A].
8. Pressure roller lamp rear holder [A] ( x 1, x 1)
D095/M077 4-210 SM
Fusing
Important:
When reinstalling the pressure roller lamp rear holder, set the cord [A] of the
pressure roller lamp outside the holder [B].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
9. Pressure roller fusing lamp [A]
SM 4-211 D095/M077
Fusing
When reinstalling the fusing lamps
When reinstalling the fusing lamps, using the heater guide will make the fusing lamp
replacement much easier.
1. Make sure that the fusing lamp(s) [A] are in the heater guide [B].
2. Insert the heater guide [C] in the heating roller or pressure roller.
3. Pull out the heater guide only (keeping the fusing lamp(s) inside the heating or pressure
roller).
D095/M077 4-212 SM
Fusing
4.12.9 FUSING BELT STRIPPER PLATE
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing upper frame ( p.4-200)
3. Fusing belt stripper plate [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Do not loosen the screws [A] of the stripper plate, because they are adjusted at
the factory.
SM 4-213 D095/M077
Fusing
4.12.10 PARTS IN THE FUSING BELT ASSEMBLY
Fusing Belt Assembly
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing upper frame ( p.4-200)
3. Fusing belt stripper plate ( p.4-213)
4. Heating roller fusing lamps ( p.4-207)
5. Pressure roller fusing lamp ( p.4-209)
6. Fusing roller thermistor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
7. Mark the location of the positioning bracket [A] so that you can reinstall it in the correct
position.
8. Positioning bracket [A] ( x 1)
D095/M077 4-214 SM
Fusing
9. Adjusting bracket [A] ( x 4: step screw x 2(blue marks))
Replacement
Adjustment
and
10. Pressure roller positioning front bracket [A] ( x 2)
11. Pressure roller positioning rear bracket [B] ( x 2)
[C]: Pressure roller positioning front bracket
[D]: Pressure roller positioning rear bracket
SM 4-215 D095/M077
Fusing
12. Lift the fusing belt assembly [A].
Fusing Belt Tension Roller
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing belt assembly ( p.4-214)
3. Fusing belt tension roller positioning bracket [A] ( x 2)
4. Push down the bracket [A].
D095/M077 4-216 SM
Fusing
5. Fusing belt tension roller [A]
Hot Roller Gear
1. Fusing belt assembly ( p.4-214)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Hot roller gear [A] (snap ring x 1)
SM 4-217 D095/M077
Fusing
Fusing Belt
1. Fusing belt assembly ( p.4-214)
2. Fusing belt tension roller ( p.4-216)
3. Fusing belt [A]
Cleaning Requirement
Clean the heating roller and hot roller with alcohol when replacing the fusing belt.
After installing a new fusing belt
Clear the PM counter for the fusing belt. See "p.3-4" in the chapter "Preventive
Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-218 SM
Fusing
Hot Roller and Heating Roller
1. Fusing belt assembly ( p.4-214)
2. Fusing belt ( p.4-218)
3. Hot roller gear ( p.4-217)
4. Roller positioning bracket [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Fusing knob shaft [A] on the hot roller ( x 2)
6. Hot roller [A] and heating roller [B]
SM 4-219 D095/M077
Fusing
When reinstalling the heating roller
Each bearing of the heating roller and roller positioning plate has a mark ("F" or "R").
Assemble the heating roller and roller positioning plates so that the mark on the bearing
matches the mark on the roller positioning plate.
When reinstalling the hot roller
Make sure that the longer exposed part of the shaft [C] is at the front when reassembling the
fusing belt assembly.
After installing a new hot roller or heating roller
Clear the PM counter for the hot roller. See "p.3-4" in the chapter "Preventive
Maintenance.”
Fusing Belt Tension Roller Bushing
1. Roller positioning brackets ( p.4-219)
2. Fusing belt tension roller bushings [A] (spring x 1 each)
After installing a new fusing belt tension roller bushing
Clear the PM counter for the fusing belt tension roller bushing. See "p.3-4" in the chapter
"Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-220 SM
Fusing
4.12.11 HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing unit right cover [A] ( x 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Heating roller thermistor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
After installing a new heating roller thermistor
Clear the PM counter for the heating roller thermistor. See "p.3-4" in the chapter "Preventive
Maintenance.”
SM 4-221 D095/M077
Fusing
4.12.12 HEATING ROLLER THERMOSTAT
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing unit right cover ( Heating Roller Thermistor)
3. Thermostat outer covers [D] ( x 2 each)
The removal procedure for each thermostat is identical.
4. Thermostat inner cover [E]
5. Slide the terminal covers [F].
6. Disconnect the cable [G], while releasing the lock tab [H] and the cable at the other side.
7. Heating roller thermostat [I]
These three thermostats are identical.
D095/M077 4-222 SM
Fusing
4.12.13 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER PAWL UNIT
1. Fusing upper frame ( p.4-200)
2. Fusing exit guide [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
[B]: Step screw
and
3. Two fusing exit sensor brackets [B] (each x 1, x 1)
4. Accordion jam sensor bracket [C] ( x 1)
5. Exit sensor bracket [D] ( x 1)
SM 4-223 D095/M077
Fusing
6. Pressure roller stripper pawl unit [D] ( x 2)
After installing a new pressure roller stripper pawl unit
Clear the PM counter "Separation Claw" for the pressure roller stripper pawl unit. See "p.3-4"
in the chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-224 SM
Fusing
4.12.14 ACCORDION JAM SENSOR
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing upper frame ( p.4-200)
3. Fusing belt stripper plate ( p.4-213)
4. Fusing exit guide [A] ( x 2: step screw at the rear side)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Accordion jam sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
6. Accordion jam sensor [B] (hooks)
SM 4-225 D095/M077
Fusing
4.12.15 FUSING EXIT FRONT, CENTER AND REAR SENSOR
Fusing Exit Front Sensor
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing upper frame ( p.4-200)
3. Fusing belt stripper plate ( p.4-213)
4. Fusing exit guide ( p.4-225 "Accordion Jam Sensor")
5. Fusing exit sensor front bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
6. Fusing exit front sensor [B] (hooks)
Fusing Exit Center Sensor
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing upper frame ( p.4-200)
3. Fusing belt stripper plate ( p.4-213)
4. Fusing exit guide ( p.4-225 "Accordion Jam Sensor")
5. Fusing exit sensor center bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
6. Fusing exit center sensor [B] (hooks)
D095/M077 4-226 SM
Fusing
Fusing Exit Rear Sensor
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing upper frame ( p.4-200)
3. Fusing belt stripper plate ( p.4-213)
4. Fusing exit guide ( p.4-225 "Accordion Jam Sensor")
5. Fusing exit sensor rear bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
6. Fusing exit rear sensor [B] (hooks)
and
4.12.16 FRONT AND REAR PRESSURE ROLLER HP SENSORS
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing cleaning unit ( p.4-202)
3. Release the clamp [A], and then remove the bracket [B] ( x 4)
SM 4-227 D095/M077
Fusing
4. Disconnect the connectors [A] ( x 2)
5. Sensor unit [A] ( x 2)
Remove the sensor unit while turning the lever [A] counterclockwise.
D095/M077 4-228 SM
Fusing
6. Front pressure roller HP sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
7. Rear pressure roller HP sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
4.12.17 PRESSURE ROLLER
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing upper frame ( p.4-200)
Replacement
3. Fusing belt assembly ( p.4-214)
Adjustment
4. Pressure roller stripper pawl unit ( p.4-223)
5. Bracket [A] ( x 4) and
6. Remove the spring [B]
7. Idle gear unit [A]
SM 4-229 D095/M077
Fusing
8. Hold both ends of the pressure roller [A], and then remove it.
When installing the pressure roller, make sure that the pressure roller is installed
with its gear facing the front side.
After installing a new pressure roller
Clear the PM counter for the pressure roller. See "p.3-4" in the chapter "Preventive
Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-230 SM
Fusing
4.12.18 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTAT
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
1. Fusing unit left stay [A] ( x 5)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Thermostat outer covers [A] ( x 1 each)
The removal procedure for each thermostat is identical.
3. Pressure roller thermostat [A] ( x 2)
SM 4-231 D095/M077
Fusing
4.12.19 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR
1. Fusing front cover ( p.4-199)
2. Fusing roller thermistor [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
4.12.20 FUSING BELT THERMISTOR
1. Fusing front cover ( p.4-199)
2. Open the fusing exit guide while holding up the D1 lever.
3. Fusing belt thermistor unit [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1).
4. Holder [A] ( x 1)
5. Fusing belt thermistor [B] ( x 1)
D095/M077 4-232 SM
Fusing
4.12.21 CLEANING WEB MOTOR AND CLEANING WEB END
SENSOR
1. Fusing unit ( p.4-195)
2. Fusing upper frame ( p.4-200)
3. Fusing belt assembly ( p.4-214)
4. Disconnect the cleaning web motor connector [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Disconnect the cleaning web end sensor connector [B] ( x 1)
and
6. Bracket [A] ( x 4)
7. Cleaning web motor unit [A] ( x 2)
SM 4-233 D095/M077
Fusing
8. Cleaning web end sensor [A] (hooks)
9. Bracket [A] ( x 1)
10. Cleaning web motor [B]
D095/M077 4-234 SM
Fusing
4.12.22 FUSING MOTOR
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer ( p.4-197).
2. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
3. Duct unit [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Electrical valve unit [B] ( x 2, x 1)
5. Bracket [C] ( x 3)
6. Fusing motor unit [D] ( x 4, x 2, x all)
This unit is heavy. Be very careful when you take out and move the fusing motor unit.
SM 4-235 D095/M077
Fusing
7. Loosen the screw [E], and then remove the spring [F].
8. Fusing motor [G] ( x 4, x 2)
4.12.23 PRESSURE ROLLER LIFT MOTOR
1. Fusing motor unit ( p.4-235 "Fusing Motor")
2. Pressure roller lift motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
D095/M077 4-236 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13 PAPER TRANSPORT AND EXIT
4.13.1 PTB (PAPER TRANSPORT BELT) UNIT
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer. ( p.4-197)
2. Inner cover for PTB [A] ( x 3)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. PTB unit [B] ( x 3, x 3)
SM 4-237 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.2 PAPER TRANSPORT BELT
1. PTB unit ( p.4-237)
2. PTB fan unit [A] ( x 4, x 1, x 1)
3. Ground plate [B] ( x 1)
4. Pull the roller [C] and release it from the bracket.
5. Paper transport belts [D]
D095/M077 4-238 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.3 PTB MOTOR
1. PTB unit ( p.4-237)
2. PTB motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4.13.4 PTB JAM SENSOR
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. PTB unit ( p.4-237)
2. PTB transport belt ( p.4-238)
3. Bracket [A] ( x 2)
4. PTB drive roller [B] (timing belt x 1)
5. PTB jam sensor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
6. PTB jam sensor [D] (hooks)
SM 4-239 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.5 PTB FAN 1 AND 2
1. PTB unit ( p.4-237)
2. Duct bracket [A] ( x 4)
3. PTB fan 1 [B] ( x 1, x 1)
4. PTB fan 2 [C] ( x 2, x 1)
D095/M077 4-240 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.6 PAPER EXIT MOTOR
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29)
2. Left cover ( p.4-20)
3. Duct [A] at the left rear frame ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Fusing fan 5 and 6 unit [B] ( x 2, x 2)
5. Bracket [C] ( x 1)
6. Paper cooling fan 1 duct [D] ( x 2, x 1)
SM 4-241 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
7. Paper cooling fan 2 duct [E] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
8. Paper exit motor [F] ( x 2, x 2)
D095/M077 4-242 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.7 PAPER EXIT SENSOR
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer ( p.4-197).
2. Paper exit sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Paper exit sensor [B] ( x 2, x 1, hooks)
SM 4-243 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.8 EXIT JUNCTION TIMING SENSOR
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer ( p.4-197).
2. Open the jam removal door [A].
3. Timing sensor bracket [B] ( x 2)
4. Exit junction timing sensor [C] ( x 4, x 1, hooks)
D095/M077 4-244 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.9 INVERTER MOTOR
1. Fusing unit drawer ( p.4-198)
2. Inverter motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Inverter motor [B] ( x 2, x 1)
SM 4-245 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.10 INVERTER MOTOR FAN
1. Inverter motor bracket ( p.4-245 "Inverter Motor")
2. Inverter motor fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)
When you reinstall the inverter motor fan, make sure that the inverter motor fan is
installed with its decal facing the rear side.
D095/M077 4-246 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.11 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR 1
1. Fusing unit drawer ( p.4-198)
2. Motor cover [A]
3. Duplex Transport Motor 1 bracket [B] ( x 3, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Duplex Transport Motor 1 [C] ( x 2)
SM 4-247 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.12 SWITCHBACK MOTOR
1. Fusing unit drawer ( p.4-198)
2. Duplex transport motor 1 bracket ( p.4-249 "Duplex transport sensor 1")
3. Gear [A] ( x 1, timing belt x 1)
4. Switchback motor bracket [B] ( x 2, x 1)
5. Switchback motor [C] ( x 2)
D095/M077 4-248 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.13 DUPLEX TRANSPORT SENSOR 1 AND 2
Duplex transport sensor 1
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer ( p.4-197).
2. Lock lever [A] for the fusing unit ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Inner cover [B] for the paper exit unit ( x 3)
and
4. Duplex sensor 1 bracket [C] ( x 1, x 1)
5. Duplex transport sensor 1 [D] (hooks, x 3, x 1)
Duplex transport sensor 2
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer ( p.4-197).
SM 4-249 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
2. Inner cover for PTB ( p.4-237 "PTB (Paper Transport Belt) Unit")
3. Duplex sensor 2 bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
4. Duplex transport sensor 2 [B] (hooks, x 3, x 1)
D095/M077 4-250 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.14 SWITCHBACK SENSOR
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer ( p.4-197).
2. Switchback sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Switchback sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks, x 1)
SM 4-251 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.15 SWITCHBACK LOWER SENSOR
1. Left front door ( p.4-19)
2. Pull out the fusing unit handle [A].
3. Purge tray inner cover [B] ( x 4)
4. Pull out the sensor bracket [C] ( x 1, x 1, x 2)
5. Switchback lower sensor [D] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
D095/M077 4-252 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.16 PTR UNIT COOLING FAN
1. Left front door ( p.4-19)
1. Purge tray inner cover ( p.4-252 "Switchback Lower Sensor")
2. PTR unit cooling fan [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
Replacement
When you reinstall the PTR unit cooling fan, make sure that the PTR unit cooling fan
Adjustment
is installed with its decal facing the front.
and
SM 4-253 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.17 PDB (PAPER EXIT DRIVE BOARD)
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer ( p.4-197).
2. Inner cover for the fusing unit ( p.4-249 "Duplex transport sensor 1")
3. PDB unit [A] ( x 3: front side, x 2, x 3: rear side)
4. PDB [B] ( x 3, x all, stud x2)
D095/M077 4-254 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.18 PAPER EXIT TRANSPORT MOTOR
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer ( p.4-197).
2. Inner cover for the fusing unit ( p.4-249 "Duplex transport sensor 1")
3. Paper exit transport motor bracket [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Paper exit transport motor [B] ( x 2)
SM 4-255 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.19 DE-CURLER UNIT
Most parts in the de-curler unit have been precisely adjusted at the factory. Do not
reassemble the parts, whose replacement procedures are not mentioned in this
manual. Otherwise, the adjustment for the de-curler unit requires the special tools.
Only following parts can be replaced without the de-curler unit adjustment.
De-curler Unit Motor
De-curler Feed Motor
De-curler Unit HP and Limit Sensor
1. Left cover ( p.4-20)
2. Left upper stay [A] ( x 2)
3. Left middle stay [B] ( x 2)
4. De-curler unit [C] ( x 2, x 3)
D095/M077 4-256 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
After installing a new de-curler unit
Each de-curler unit has a setting sheet. Adjustment is required after installing a new de-curler
unit.
Input the value [A] in SP1906-002 and the value [B] in SP1906-003.
Replacement
Adjustment
4.13.20 DE-CURLER UNIT MOTOR
and
1. De-curler unit ( p.4-256)
2. De-curler cover [A] ( x 2)
3. De-curler unit motor bracket [A] ( x 4, timing belt)
SM 4-257 D095/M077
Paper Transport and Exit
4. De-curler unit motor [B] ( x 1)
4.13.21 DE-CURLER FEED MOTOR
1. De-curler unit ( p.4-256)
2. De-curler cover ( p.4-257 "De-curler Unit Motor")
3. De-curler feed motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
D095/M077 4-258 SM
Paper Transport and Exit
4.13.22 DE-CURLER UNIT HP AND LIMIT SENSOR
1. De-curler unit ( p.4-256)
2. De-curler cover ( p.4-257 "De-curler Unit Motor")
3. Turn the pulley to lower the de-curler roller unit [A].
4. De-curler unit limit sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
Replacement
5. De-curler unit HP sensor [C] ( x 1, hooks)
Adjustment
and
SM 4-259 D095/M077
Electrical Components
4.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
4.14.1 BOARD LOCATION
[A]: IOB 1, IOB 2 (outside), BCU (inside)
[B]: AC drive board (outside), FIB, RB, PSU-G (inside)
[C]: CGB HVPS-K, -C, -M, -Y
4.14.2 IOB 1 AND 2
[A]: IOB 1, [B] IOB2
D095/M077 4-260 SM
Electrical Components
IOB 1
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. IOB 1 [A] ( x 7, x all)
IOB 2
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. IOB 2 [A] ( x 7, x all) and
SM 4-261 D095/M077
Electrical Components
4.14.3 IOB BRACKETS
Opening out the IOB 1 Bracket
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Disconnect the three harnesses [A] on IOB 2.
3. Open out the IOB 1 bracket [B] ( x 4)
4. The picture above shows that the IOB 1 bracket is open.
D095/M077 4-262 SM
Electrical Components
Opening out the IOB 2 Bracket
1. Open out the IOB 1 bracket (see the previous procedure).
2. Pull the IOB 2 bracket [A] ( x 4, x 1)
Do not open out the IOB 2 bracket fully at this time. The BCU is connected on
the back side of this bracket with two cables.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Release the three clamps and then disconnect the two cables [B].
4. Open out the IOB 2 bracket fully.
SM 4-263 D095/M077
Electrical Components
4.14.4 BCU
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Open out the IOB 1 and 2 brackets ( p.4-262).
3. BCU [A] ( x 2)
4. NVRAM [B]
Install this NVRAM on the new BCU.
When reinstalling the BCU
The BCU is connected to the IOB 2 via a board-to-board connector. When you reinstall the
BCU, press down the BCU and make sure that the BCU is firmly connected to the IOB 2.
When installing a new BCU
Remove the BCU NVRAM from the old BCU and install it on the new BCU.
D095/M077 4-264 SM
Electrical Components
4.14.5 AC DRIVE BOARD
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. AC drive board [A] ( x 1, stud x 1, x all)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-265 D095/M077
Electrical Components
4.14.6 FIB (FINISHER INTERFACE BOARD) AND RB (RELAY
BOARD)
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Disconnect all connectors, except for the two connectors [A] on the AC drive board, and
release the clamps.
3. Open out the AC drive board bracket [B] ( x 4).
4. FIB [C] ( x 2, x all)
5. RB [D] ( x 2, x all)
D095/M077 4-266 SM
Electrical Components
4.14.7 PSU-G
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Pull out the fusing drawer ( p.4-197)
3. Paper cooling fan 2 duct ( p.4-241 "Paper Exit Motor")
4. Paper exit motor bracket [A] ( x 4, x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Exit fan duct [B] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
6. Remove the stud screw [C].
7. Open out the AC drive board bracket ( p.4-266 "FIB (Finisher Interface Board) and RB
(Relay Board)").
8. Remove the AC drive board bracket [D] ( x all)
SM 4-267 D095/M077
Electrical Components
9. PCU-G [E] ( x 5, stud x 1, x all)
D095/M077 4-268 SM
Electrical Components
4.14.8 CGB HVPS
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. CGB HVPS-Y [A] ( x 2, x 3)
Replacement
3. CGB HVPS-M [B] ( x 2, x 3)
Adjustment
4. CGB HVPS-C [C] ( x 2, x 3) and
5. CGB HVPS-K [D] ( x 2, x 3)
SM 4-269 D095/M077
Electrical Components
4.14.9 CONTROLLER NVRAM AND DIMM
If you change the NVRAM in the controller, and the DataOverwriteSecurity unit is
installed, this DataOverwriteSecurity unit must be replaced with a new one.
Before Controller NVRAM Removal
This procedure is for the controller NVRAM removal. If you just replace a DIMM, skip to the
"Removal Procedure.”
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.
3. Turn off the color controller first and the main switch. Then put a blank formatted SD card
into SD card slot 2.
4. Turn on the main switch.
An error message shows if local user information cannot be stored in an SD card
because the capacity is not enough.
You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write-protected.
5. Copy the NVRAM data ( SP5-824-001) to an SD card if possible.
6. Turn off the color controller first and then the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.
p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power "
D095/M077 4-270 SM
Electrical Components
Removal Procedure for Controller NVRAM
1. Rear lower right cover ( p.4-22)
2. Controller cover [A] ( x 12)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. NVRAM [B] (hooks)
4. DIMMs [C]
SM 4-271 D095/M077
Electrical Components
After New NVRAM Installation
1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch.
2. Check if the serial number shows on the operation panel. (SP5-811-002). Input the serial
number if it does not show. (Contact your supervisor about this setting.)
3. Turn off and on the machine.
4. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (SP5-825-001) if you have successfully
copied them to the SD card.
The counter data in the user code information clears even if step 3 is done
correctly.
An error message shows if the download is incomplete. However, you can still
use the part of a data that has already been downloaded in step 3.
An error message shows when the download data does not exist in the SD card,
or, if it is already deleted.
5. Go out of SP mode. Then turn off the color controller and the main switch. Then remove
the SD card from SD card slot 2.
6. Turn the main switch on.
7. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
8. Copy the Paper Library data from an SD card (use SP 5-711-001).
9. Copy the backup of the Saved Paper Library back to the machine from an SD card (use
SP 5-711-002)
.
10. Do the "ACC" procedure only if a new NVRAM is installed in Copier (D095) model.
D095/M077 4-272 SM
Electrical Components
4.14.10 CONTROLLER BOARD
1. Rear lower right cover ( p.4-22)
2. Controller cover [A] ( x 12)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Disconnect the three connectors [A] on the controller board [B].
When you re-connect the three connectors [A], make sure that the black cable is
on the left-hand side and the red cables are on the right-hand side.
4. Controller unit [C] ( x 3)
SM 4-273 D095/M077
Electrical Components
5. Giga Ethernet board [D] ( x 2)
6. NVRAM [E] and DIMMs [F]
7. Controller board [G]
When installing a new controller board, be sure to remove the NVRAM from the old
board and attach it to the new board.
If you replace the NVRAM, the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit will not work. A new DOS
unit is required for a new NVRAM.
Also, after you turn the machine on again, even if you do not replace the NVRAM, do
the following (the following data is not in the NVRAM):
1. Copy the Paper Library data from an SD card (use SP 5-711-001).
2. Copy the backup of the Saved Paper Library back to the machine from an SD card
(use SP 5-711-002).
If the NVRAM was damaged, the Custom Paper List will be gone. The customer will
have to make this again from the Paper Library data and the backed up Saved Paper
Library data.
D095/M077 4-274 SM
Electrical Components
4.14.11 HDD
The controller recognizes both disks as one disk unit. Both disks must always be
replaced together.
1. Rear lower right cover ( p.4-22).
2. Controller cover ( p.4-273 "Controller Board")
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Disconnect the three connectors [A] ( x 2).
When you re-connect the three connectors [A], make sure that the red flat cable
is connected to CN18 and the dark brown flat cable is connected to CN17.
4. HDD unit box [B] ( x 4)
SM 4-275 D095/M077
Electrical Components
5. Disconnect the black and red cables [C].
6. HDD unit box
If you intend to re-install the same disks in the machine, check how the disks are
connected before you disconnect them. They are not identical, and each disk must
be connected to the correct connector.
When installing new HDDs
1. Format the HDDs with SP5832-001.
2. The DataOverwriteSecurity unit must be set up again if the customer is using the DOS
feature.
Disposal of HDDs
Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client. If the
customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the HDD
must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information.
Specifically, the HDD data stored in temporary files created automatically during job
sorting and jam recovery. Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format so it cannot
normally be read but can be recovered with illegal methods.
D095/M077 4-276 SM
Electrical Components
4.14.12 IPU
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Controller board ( p.4-273)
3. Connector cover [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. All connectors [B] on the IPU ( x 11)
SM 4-277 D095/M077
Electrical Components
5. IPU [C] ( x 9, x 3)
4.14.13 PSU-C
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. PSU-C [A] ( x 7, x 5)
4.14.14 CONTROLLER FANS
Controller Fans 1 and 2
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Controller fan 1 [A] ( x 2, x 1)
3. Controller fan 2 [B] ( x 2, x 1)
When you reinstall controller fan 1 and 2, make sure that these fans are installed
with their decals facing upward.
D095/M077 4-278 SM
Electrical Components
Controller Fans 3 and 4
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Controller fan 3 [A] ( x 2, x 1)
3. Controller fan 4 [B] ( x 2, x 1)
When you reinstall controller fans 3 and 4, make sure that these fans are installed
Replacement
Adjustment
with their decals facing upward.
and
SM 4-279 D095/M077
Electrical Components
4.14.15 PSU-EA1, EA2 AND -EB
1. Rear lower left cover ( p.4-22)
2. Remove:
[A]: PSU-EA1 bracket ( x 3, x all)
[B]: PSU-EA2 bracket ( x 3, x all)
[C]: PSU-EB bracket ( x 3, x all)
Do not pull out the brackets in one motion. Some harnesses and cables do not
have slack. Be careful when you pull out each bracket.
3. PSU-EA1, -EA2 or -EB [D] ( x 6)
The removal procedure for each PSU board is identical.
D095/M077 4-280 SM
Fiery Controller
4.15 FIERY CONTROLLER
Double Pole/ Neutral Fusing
Turn off the main power in the following order before servicing. Otherwise, the data
on the Fiery controller may be damaged.
1. Shut down the Fiery controller first
2. And then turn off the main power switch of the main machine. ( p.2-8 "Correct
Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
4.15.1 FIERY CONTROLLER LEFT AND RIGHT COVER
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Fiery controller right cover [A] ( x 2)
2. Fiery controller left cover [B] ( x 2)
SM 4-281 D095/M077
Fiery Controller
4.15.2 FIERY CONTROLLER FRONT COVER
1. Fiery controller left and right cover ( p.4-281)
2. Front middle cover [A]
3. Fiery controller front cover [A] (hook x 6)
D095/M077 4-282 SM
Fiery Controller
4.15.3 FIERY CONTROLLER TOP COVER AND OPERATION
PANEL BOARD
1. Fiery controller front cover ( p.4-282)
Replacement
2. Remove the cap [A] and the top cover lock cap [B].
Adjustment
and
3. Fiery controller top cover [A].
SM 4-283 D095/M077
Fiery Controller
4. Operation panel board [A] ( x 4, x 1).
4.15.4 VIDEO BOARD
1. Fiery controller left cover ( p.4-281)
2. Video board with bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Video board bracket [A] ( x 2)
4. Video board [B]
D095/M077 4-284 SM
Fiery Controller
4.15.5 FIERY CONTROLLER MOTHER BOARD, DIMM AND CPU
1. Video board ( p.4-284)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Disconnect all harnesses on the mother board.
3. Mother board unit [A] ( x 9)
4. Two DIMMs [A]
5. CPU fan [B]
Make sure that four locks (red arrows as shown above) are correctly installed
after reinstalling the CPU fan [B]
SM 4-285 D095/M077
Fiery Controller
6. Release the lock lever [A].
7. CPU [B]
When you reinstall the CPU [B], make sure that the triangle mark [C] is positioned as
shown above.
When you replace the DIMM, always replace the pair of DIMMs at the same time.
When reassembling
Make sure that the 2-pin cable (power switch) and 2-pin cable (reset switch) are correctly
connected to JP4 on the mother board.
The green wire [A] of the 2-pin cable is connected as shown above (the green wire is on
the upper side).
The blue wire [B] of the 2-pin cable is connected as shown above (the blue wire is on the
upper side).
Do not connect any cables to the pins [C] as shown above.
D095/M077 4-286 SM
Fiery Controller
4.15.6 FIERY CONTROLLER PSU
1. Fiery controller left and right cover ( p.4-281)
2. Fiery controller top cover ( p.4-283)
3. Disconnect the four connectors ( x 1).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Fiery controller PSU [A] ( x 5)
SM 4-287 D095/M077
Fiery Controller
4.15.7 HDD UNIT
1. Fiery controller left and right cover ( p.4-281)
2. Fiery controller front cover ( p.4-282)
3. Disconnect the two connectors and remove the screw.
4. Release the lock lever [A], and then pull out the HDD bracket [B].
5. HDD unit [A] ( x 4)
D095/M077 4-288 SM
Fiery Controller
4.15.8 DVD DRIVE
1. Fiery controller left and right cover ( p.4-281)
2. Fiery controller front cover ( p.4-282)
Replacement
3. Disconnect the seven connectors ( x 1).
Adjustment
and
4. DVD drive bracket [A] ( x 3)
5. DVD drive [A] ( x 3, x 1)
SM 4-289 D095/M077
Fiery Controller
4.15.9 FIERY CONTROLLER FRONT FAN
1. Fiery controller left cover ( p.4-281)
2. Fiery controller front fan [A] ( x 1, x 1, hook x 2)
When you reinstall the Fiery controller front fan, make sure that this fan is installed
with its decal facing the rear side of the Fiery controller.
D095/M077 4-290 SM
Others
4.16 OTHERS
Turn off the main power in the following order before servicing. Otherwise, the data
on the Fiery controller may be damaged.
1. Shut down the Fiery controller first
2. And then turn off the main power switch of the main machine. ( p.2-8 "Correct
Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
4.16.1 DUST FILTERS
The removal procedure for all dust filters (K, C, M, Y) are identical. In this procedure,
the removal procedure for the dust filter-Y is described.
1. Rear upper cover ( p.4-22)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Dust filter cover [A] (hooks)
3. Dust filter [B]
SM 4-291 D095/M077
Others
After installing a new dust filter
Clear the PM counter for the dust filter. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in the chapter
"Preventive Maintenance.”
4.16.2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER
The removal procedures for all dust filters (K, C, M, Y) are identical. In this procedure,
the removal procedure for the dust filter-Y is described.
1. Rear upper cover ( p.4-22)
2. Development filter [A]
Cleaning Requirement
This filter must be cleaned at 400 K intervals. Clean this filter with a vacuum cleaner.
D095/M077 4-292 SM
Others
4.16.3 PSU FILTER
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Remove the screw [A].
3. PSU filter [B]
Cleaning Requirement
Replacement
Adjustment
This filter must be cleaned at 400 K intervals. Clean this filter with a vacuum cleaner.
and
4.16.4 CONTROLLER FILTER
1. Open the rear controller box ( p.4-29).
2. Controller filter [A]
Cleaning Requirement
This filter must be cleaned at 400 K intervals. Clean this filter with a vacuum cleaner.
SM 4-293 D095/M077
Others
4.16.5 OZONE FILTERS
There are two sizes of ozone filters in this machine. Replace both at every PM
interval.
1. Rear lower left cover ( p.4-22)
2. Ozone filter (Large) [A]
1. Ozone filter (Medium) [B]
2. Ozone filter (Small) [C]
After installing new ozone filters
Clear the PM counter for the ozone filters. See "p.3-4 "PM Parts Screen Details” in the
chapter "Preventive Maintenance.”
D095/M077 4-294 SM
Document Feeder (D095 only)
4.17 DOCUMENT FEEDER (D095 ONLY)
4.17.1 ADF UNIT
1. Disconnect the I/F cable of the ADF.
2. Open the ADF [B].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Remove the screws [A] from both hinges.
4. Hold both sides of the ADF unit [B].
5. Slide the ADF unit [B] to the rear side, and then lift it.
SM 4-295 D095/M077
Document Feeder (D095 only)
4.17.2 ADF COVERS
1. Front cover [A] ( x 2)
2. Rear cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Left cover [C] ( x 2, x 2)
4. Original exit tray ( p.4-309 "Optics Dust Filter")
5. Right cover [D] ( x 4, x 2)
6. Upper exit cover [E] ( x 1)
4.17.3 ADF ORIGINAL TRAY
D095/M077 4-296 SM
Document Feeder (D095 only)
Original Tray
1. Remove the ADF front and rear covers. ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. Original tray [A] ( x 4)
Original Table Cover
1. Remove the ADF front and rear covers. ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. Remove the original tray [A].
3. Original table cover [B] ( x 2)
Bottom Plate
1. Remove the ADF front and rear covers. ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. Remove the original tray [A].
3. Bottom plate [C] ( x 1, x 1)
4.17.4 FEED UNIT AND SEPARATION ROLLER
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Open the left cover.
2. Clip [A]
3. Remove the feed unit [B]. Pull the feed unit to the front, release the shaft at the rear, and
release the front bushing.
4. Separation roller cover [C]
5. Torque limiter [D] and separation roller [E] ( x 1)
SM 4-297 D095/M077
Document Feeder (D095 only)
4.17.5 FEED BELT
1. Feed unit ( p.4-297)
2. Pick-up roller unit [A]
3. Feed belt holder [B]
The springs [C] come off the feed belt cover easily.
4. Feed belt [D]
When reinstalling the pick-up roller unit, make sure that levers [E] and [F] on the
front and rear original guides are resting on the pick-up roller unit cover.
D095/M077 4-298 SM
Document Feeder (D095 only)
4.17.6 PICK-UP ROLLER
1. Open the left cover.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Feed unit ( p.4-297)
and
3. Snap rings [A] ( x 2)
4. Two bushings [B]
5. Pick-up roller [C]
When reinstalling the pick-up roller, make sure that the one-way clutch [D] is not on
the gear side.
SM 4-299 D095/M077
Document Feeder (D095 only)
4.17.7 ADF SENSORS
Entrance Sensor and Length Sensor
1. ADF left cover ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. Guide plate [A] ( x 5)
3. Entrance sensor [B] ( x 1)
4. Length sensor bracket [C] ( x 2)
5. Length sensor [D] ( x 1)
Registration Sensor
1. ADF front cover ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. ADF left cover ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
3. Release the entrance guide [A] ( x 2).
4. Release the transport belt unit [B] ( x 3).
5. Sensor bracket [C] ( x 1)
6. Registration sensor [D] ( x 1, x 1)
D095/M077 4-300 SM
Document Feeder (D095 only)
Width Sensors
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. ADF front cover ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. Feed unit ( p.4-297)
3. Stopper screw [A]
4. Guide plate [B] ( x 2)
5. Release the front end of the upper transport roller [C] (bushing x 1, x 1).
6. Sensor bracket [D] ( x 1)
7. Width sensors [E] ( x 1 each)
SM 4-301 D095/M077
Document Feeder (D095 only)
Exit Sensor, Inverter Sensor
1. Front and rear covers ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. Original tray ( p.4-297)
3. Exit guide unit [A] ( x 5, x 1)
4. Exit sensor [B] ( x 1)
When reinstalling the exit guide unit, make sure that the guide plate [C] on the
exit unit is over the exit gate [D].
5. Right cover [E] ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
6. Guide plate [F] ( x 3)
7. Inverter sensor [G] ( x 1)
D095/M077 4-302 SM
Document Feeder (D095 only)
4.17.8 TRANSPORT BELT
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Front cover ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. Release the entrance guide [A] ( x 2).
3. Release the transport belt unit [B] ( x 3).
4. Fold the transport belt assembly extension [C].
5. Transport belt [D]
When installing the transport belt, make sure that the belt passes under the
upper and lower belt guide spacers [E].
6. Execute SP6009 (DF Free Run) to do an ADF free run for 3 minutes. After the free run is
finished, clean off any dust on the exposure glass.
SM 4-303 D095/M077
Document Feeder (D095 only)
4.17.9 ADF MOTORS
Bottom Plate Motor, Pick-up Motor
1. Rear cover ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. Bottom plate motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
3. Pick-up motor [B] ( x 2, x 1)
D095/M077 4-304 SM
Document Feeder (D095 only)
Feed-in, Transport, Feed-out Motors
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Rear cover ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. Feed-in motor [A] ( x 4, x 2)
3. Connector [B]
4. Fins [C]
5. Transport motor [D] ( x 4, x 2).
6. Grounding wire [E] ( x 1).
7. Feed-out motor assembly [F] ( x 2, x 2).
8. Feed-out motor [G] ( x 2).
SM 4-305 D095/M077
Document Feeder (D095 only)
4.17.10 FEED-IN CLUTCH
1. Rear cover ( p.4-296 "ADF Covers")
2. Remove screw [A].
3. Timing belt [B]
4. Pulley [C] and bearing [D] from the feed-in drive shaft ( x 1, pin x 1)
5. Pulley [E] and bushing [F] from the pick-up roller cam shaft ( x 1, pin x 1)
6. Bearings [G] from the feed belt drive shaft ( x 1)
7. Feed-in clutch assembly [H] ( x 5, x 1)
D095/M077 4-306 SM
Document Feeder (D095 only)
8. Two bearings [A] from the feed-in clutch shaft ( x 1 each)
9. Pulley [B] ( x 1), pin and timing belt [C]
10. Feed-in clutch [D]
When re-installing the feed-in clutch, put the stopper screw [E] in the clutch hook.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-307 D095/M077
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
4.18 SCANNER UNIT (D095 ONLY)
4.18.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
1. Open the ADF unit.
2. Left scale [A] ( x 3)
3. Rear scale [B] ( x 2). Slide in the direction of the arrow to remove.
4. Exposure glass [C]
When positioning the exposure glass for re-installation, make sure that the white dot
[D] is at the rear left corner.
D095/M077 4-308 SM
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
4.18.2 OPTICS DUST FILTER
1. Original exit tray [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
2. Optics dust filter [B]
Adjustment
and
SM 4-309 D095/M077
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
4.18.3 TOP FRONT COVER
1. Remove the screw cap [A] on the right upper cover of the LCT-MF.
2. Remove the screw [B] to open the front right door.
3. Open the ADF [A], front left [B] and front right door [C].
4. Remove two screws [D] under the top front cover.
5. Remove the screw covers [A] [B].
6. Top front cover [C] ( x 4)
D095/M077 4-310 SM
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
4.18.4 TOP LEFT COVER
1. Top front cover ( p.4-310)
2. Remove the screw covers [A].
3. Top left cover [B] (step screw [C] x 2, x 2)
Replacement
4.18.5 TOP RIGHT COVER
Adjustment
and
1. Original exit tray ( p.4-309 "Optics Dust Filter")
2. Top right cover [A] ( x 4)
SM 4-311 D095/M077
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
4.18.6 TOP REAR COVER
1. Remove the ADF unit ( p.4-295)
2. Remove the screw core [A].
3. Top rear cover [B] ( x 6, step screw [C] x 2)
4.18.7 LENS BLOCK
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing this
procedure. Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
1. Exposure glass ( p.4-308)
2. Lens cover [A] ( x 5)
3. Lens block [B] ( x 4, x2, x 4)
D095/M077 4-312 SM
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
Hold the board to disconnect connectors , . (They are difficult to disconnect if
you do not hold the board.)
Disconnect the connectors , from the relay board, then remove the lens block.
4. After reassembly, do the scanner and printer copy adjustments. ( p.4-6)
There are no field adjustments for the lens block.
4.18.8 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before performing this procedure.
Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes.
1. Exposure glass ( p.4-308)
2. Lens block ( p.4-312)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Original width sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Original length sensor 1 [B] ( x 1, x 1)
5. Original length sensor 2 [C] ( x 1, x 1).
6. After re-assembly, do the scanner and printer copy adjustments. ( Copy Image
Adjustment: Printing/Scanning)
SM 4-313 D095/M077
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
4.18.9 EXPOSURE LAMPS
1. Exposure glass ( p.4-308)
2. Open the front door, then remove the front upper cover ( p.4-316 "Scanner Motor").
3. Remove five screws [A] on the exposure lamp unit.
4. Disconnect two connectors [B].
5. Rotate the exposure lamp unit [A] clockwise, and then remove it.
D095/M077 4-314 SM
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
6. 1st exposure lamp [A] ( x 2, x 1, x4)
7. 2nd exposure lamp [B] ( x 2, x 1, x3)
8. Exposure lamps [C] ( x 1)
4.18.10 LAMP REGULATORS
1. Exposure glass ( p.4-308)
2. Top front cover ( p.4-310)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Remove:
[A]: Lamp regulator cover ( x 2)
[B]: Left lamp regulator ( x 2, x 2)
[C]: Right lamp regulator ( x 2, x 2)
SM 4-315 D095/M077
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
4.18.11 SCANNER HP SENSOR
1. Front upper cover ( p.4-316 "Scanner Motor")
2. Left lamp regulator ( p.4-315)
3. Scanner HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
4. Scanner HP sensor [B] ( x 1, Pawls x4)
4.18.12 SCANNER MOTOR
1. Exposure glass ( p.4-308)
2. Top front cover ( p.4-310)
3. Top left cover ( p.4-311)
4. Remove the MCU [A] cover ( x 3).
5. Scanner motor assembly [B] ( x2, x 2, x 3)
6. Scanner motor [C] from the bracket ( x 3)
7. After reassembly, do the copy image adjustments. ( p.4-6)
D095/M077 4-316 SM
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
4.18.13 SCANNER DRIVE WIRES
Preparation
1. Remove the ADF unit ( p.4-295).
2. Optics dust filter ( p.4-309)
3. Exposure glass ( p.4-308)
4. Top front cover ( p.4-310)
5. Top rear cover ( p.4-312)
6. Top right cover ( p.4-311)
7. Bracket ( p.4-320 "SIB (Scanner Interface Board)")
Replacement
Adjustment
and
8. Scanner frame [A] ( x 12, x1).
SM 4-317 D095/M077
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
Front, Rear Scanner Drive Wires
1. Wire tension bracket [A] ( x 1).
2. Front scanner wire bracket [B].
3. Front scanner wire.
Reinstallation
1. Scanner wire pulley [C] ( x 1).
2. While making sure of the direction, place the beads on the middle of the wire on the
pulley openings. Then wind the wire (ball side) 3 times and the other side (ring side) once
as shown À. Secure the pulley with tape to keep this condition.
3. Install the pulley on the scanner drive shaft ( x 1).
4. Wind the end of the wire with the ball as shown ( , , ).
5. Wind the end of the wire with the ring as shown ( , , ).
6. Install the tension spring on the tension bracket, and slightly tighten the tension bracket
( x 1).
D095/M077 4-318 SM
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
7. Install the 1st scanner and adjust the position with the positioning tools [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
8. Secure the 1st scanner with the scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1).
9. Tighten the tension bracket [C] and remove the tape.
10. Remove the positioning tools. After sliding the scanner to the right and left several times,
set the positioning tools to check the scanner wire bracket and the tension bracket again.
11. Reassemble the scanner and do the scanner and copy adjustments ( p.4-6 "Image
Adjustment")
The tension of the scanner wire must be adjusted every 3000K. To do this
adjustment, set the positioning tools [A], then loosen the screw at the scanner wire
bracket [B] and retighten it.
SM 4-319 D095/M077
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
4.18.14 MCU (MOTOR CONTROL UNIT)
1. Exposure glass ( p.4-308)
2. Top front cover ( p.4-310)
3. Top left cover ( p.4-311)
4. MCU cover ( p.4-316 "Scanner Motor")
5. MCU board [A] ( x 4, x all)
Insert a screwdriver into the four holes (marked with arrows) on the bracket to
remove the MCU board.
4.18.15 SIB (SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD)
1. Optics dust filter ( p.4-309)
2. Top right cover ( p.4-311)
3. Bracket [A]
D095/M077 4-320 SM
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
4. SIB [A] ( x 4, x all)
Insert a screwdriver into the two holes (marked with arrows) on the bracket to
remove the SIB.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-321 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19 LCT-MF (D095 ONLY)
4.19.1 COVERS
1. Remove:
[A] Rear upper cover ( x 6)
[B] Rear lower cover ( x 6)
[C] Left rear upper cover ( x 5)
[D] Left rear lower cover ( x 5)
[E] Right upper cover ( x 5)
[F] Right lower cover ( x 5)
D095/M077 4-322 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.2 INNER COVERS
1. Open the front cover of the LCT-MF.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Remove:
and
[A] Inner top cover ( x 2)
[B] Inner middle cover ( x 5)
[C] Inner bottom cover ( x 4)
SM 4-323 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.3 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
The side-to-side registration for this LCIT can be adjusted with Super User SP1711-008 for
the upper tray and -009 for the lower tray.
However, if punched hole positions are not aligned on paper fed from this LCIT, you can first
adjust the side registration by changing the tray cover position as described below, and then
adjust the side registration of the image with Super User SP1711-008 and -009 (Side-to-Side
Reg: WIDE LCT).
1. Pull out the tray.
2. Change the screw positions at both the right [A] and left [B] sides as shown.
Adjustment range: 0±2.0 mm, Step: 0.5 mm
D095/M077 4-324 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.4 TRAYS
The tray weighs 25 kg (55.1 lb.) empty.
To prevent damage to the tray and personal injury, never attempt to lift the tray alone,
especially if it is loaded with paper.
Two people are required to carry or move the tray.
1. Pull tray 1 or 2 out of the LCT until it stops.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Tray cover [A] ( x 4).
3. Remove the screws [B] from the right rail ( x 3).
4. Remove the screws [C] from the left rail ( x 3).
You do not need to remove the screw for the stopper pin bracket at the back of
the left rail.
5. Tray 1 or 2 [D]
SM 4-325 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.5 SIDE FENCE
Front Side Fence
1. Pull the tray unit out.
2. Loosen the two fixed screws [A].
3. Remove the two fixed screws [B].
4. Move the front side fence [C] and the rear side fence [D] to loosen them.
5. Harness cover [A] ( x 1).
6. Disconnect the harness [B] at the front side fence.
D095/M077 4-326 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
7. Pull up the front side fence [A], and then remove it ( x 3).
Rear Side Fence
1. Pull the tray unit out.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Loosen the two fixed screws [A].
3. Remove the two fixed screws [B].
4. Move the front side fence [C] and the rear side fence [D] to loosen them.
SM 4-327 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
5. Pull up the rear side fence [A], and then remove it ( x4 x 2, x 1).
The left-hand photo shows the back area of the rear side fence.
4.19.6 SIDE FENCE BLOWER
Front Side Fence Blower
1. Front side fence ( p.4-326).
2. Front side fence blower [A] ( x 2: M4 x 8, x 2).
Rear Side Fence Blower
1. Rear side fence ( p.4-327).
2. Remove the guard bracket [A] ( x 3).
D095/M077 4-328 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
3. Remove the rear side fence blower [A] ( x 2, x 2).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-329 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.7 LCT PAPER LENGTH SENSOR
1. Front and rear side fences ( p.4-326)
2. Bottom plate support brackets [A]
3. End fence grip [A] (Bind screw x 2: M4 x 8).
4. End fence plates [A] as shown above ( x 2).
D095/M077 4-330 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
5. Tray bottom plate [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1).
7. LCT paper length sensor [A]
SM 4-331 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.8 PAPER FEED UNIT
1. Open the front cover of the LCT-MF.
2. Pull tray 1 or 2 out of the LCT until it stops.
3. Pull the paper feed unit [A].
4. Stopper [B] ( x 1)
5. Paper feed unit [A]
When reinstalling the paper feed unit in the LCT-MF, set the paper feed unit so that
the stud screw [C] on the LCT-MF is inserted in the rail [D] of the paper feed unit.
D095/M077 4-332 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.9 PAPER FEED, PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
1. Pull tray 1 or 2 out of the LCT until it stops.
2. Paper tray side bracket [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Pull the paper feed unit [B] ( x 2).
4. Slide the sensor bracket [C] to the front side ( x 1).
SM 4-333 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
5. Remove:
[D] Paper feed roller ( x 1).
[E] Paper pick-up roller ( x 1).
[F] Paper separation roller ( x 1).
Note:
Never touch the surface of the rollers with bare hands.
The LCT pick-up and separation rollers are the same as the pick-up and separation
rollers in the paper trays of the main machine. These rollers are interchangeable.
The feed rollers of the LCT and main machine paper trays are different because they are
designed to rotate in the opposite direction. The feed rollers of the LCT and main
machine are not interchangeable.
D095/M077 4-334 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.10 PAPER FEED, PAPER END AND PAPER LIFT SENSORS
The replacement procedures are identical for the upper tray and the lower tray.
Paper Lift Sensor
1. Paper feed unit ( p.4-332)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Paper lift sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
3. Paper lift sensor [B] (hooks)
Paper Feed and Paper End Sensors
1. Paper feed unit ( p.4-332)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2)
3. Paper feed sensor [B] (hooks)
4. Paper end sensor [C] (hooks)
SM 4-335 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.11 LCT EXIT MOTOR
1. Left rear upper and lower covers ( p.4-322 "Covers").
2. Remove:
[A] Motor unit ( x1, Timing belt x1, x 2)
[B] LCT exit motor ( x 2)
4.19.12 LCT EXIT ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR
1. Left rear upper cover ( p.4-322 "Covers").
2. Remove:
[A] Motor unit ( x1, x 2)
[B] LCT exit roller contact motor ( x 2)
D095/M077 4-336 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.13 LCT VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR
1. Left rear upper and lower covers ( p.4-322 "Covers").
2. Remove:
Replacement
[A] Motor unit ( x1, x 2, Timing belt x 1)
Adjustment
[B] LCT vertical transport motor ( x 4)
and
SM 4-337 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.14 LCT HORIZONTAL RELAY MOTOR
1. Rear upper cover ( p.4-322 "Covers").
2. Remove:
[A] Motor unit [A] ( x1, x 4).
3. Remove:
[A] LCT horizontal relay motor [A] ( x 2)
D095/M077 4-338 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.15 LCT PAPER FEED MOTOR, LCT GRIP MOTOR
1. Rear cover ( p.4-322 "Covers").
Replacement
2. Use a small screwdriver to turn the shaft [A] so that the pin can slip out of the keyhole.
Adjustment
3. Motor unit [B] ( x 4, x2, x2)
and
4. Remove:
[A] Spring x1. First, loosen the screw.
[B] Spring x1. First, loosen the screw.
[C] LCT paper feed motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
[D] LCT grip motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
Reinstallation
First, attach the tension springs.
Second, tighten the screws to tighten the belts.
SM 4-339 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.16 LCT LIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover ( p.4-322 "Covers")
2. Remove:
[A] Motor unit ( x5, x1)
3. Remove:
[A] LCT lift motor ( x 2, Clip x 1, Gear x 1)
D095/M077 4-340 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.17 LCT EXIT SENSOR
1. Remove:
[A] LCT exit sensor ( x 1, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
4.19.18 LCT PAPER EXIT ROLLER CONTACT SENSOR
and
1. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
2. LCT paper exit roller contact sensor [A]: (hooks)
SM 4-341 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.19 LCT VERTICAL TRANSPORT AND GRIP SENSORS
Remove the multi bypass tray first, if it is installed.
1. Remove:
[A] Stay ( x 4).
2. Disconnect the harnesses ( x All).
D095/M077 4-342 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
3. Remove:
[A] Vertical exit unit ( x 4)
Firmly grip the vertical exit unit as shown above, and then remove it from the
LCT unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
Do not grip the guide [B], because it is easy to deform.
and
4. Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket ( x 2, x 1)
[B] LCT sensors (hooks)
LCT grip sensor 1
LCT vertical transport sensor 1
LCT vertical transport sensor 2
LCT grip sensor 2
SM 4-343 D095/M077
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.20 PAPER HEIGHT, PAPER WIDTH SENSORS
Paper Height Sensors
1. Tray 1 or tray 2 ( p.4-325)
2. Remove the rear left upper and lower covers.
3. Remove:
[A] Paper height sensors (x4) ( x1, pawls x 3 each)
Paper Width Sensors
1. Tray 1 or tray 2 ( p.4-325)
2. Remove the rear left cover.
[A] Paper width sensor unit ( x2, x3)
[B] Paper width sensors (x3) ( x1 each, Pawls x 3 each)
D095/M077 4-344 SM
LCT-MF (D095 only)
4.19.21 MAIN BOARD
1. Rear lower cover ( p.4-322 "Covers")
2. Remove:
[A] Main board ( x 7, Standoff x1, x All)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-345 D095/M077
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
Service Program Mode Operation
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes, and adjust
values.
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch the power
off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
5.1.1 SERVICE MODE LOCK/UNLOCK
At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot
operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function
makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the
Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and
then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF. After he or she logs in:
Maintenance
[User Tools] > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
System
This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
The service technician can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and
on. It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine
is turned on.
2. If you must use the printer bit switches, go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1.”
3. After machine servicing is completed:
Change SP5169 from "1" to "0.”
Turn the machine off and on.
Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine.
The administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
SM 5-1 D095/M077
Service Program Mode Operation
5.1.2 TO SWITCH TO THE APL (APPLICATION) WINDOW FOR
TEST PRINTING
1. In the SP mode display, press "APL Window" to switch to the print operation screen when
you need to select paper for a test print.
2. Use the APL window (copier mode) to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for
the test print.
3. Press the "Start key" to execute the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
5.1.3 USING THE SP MODE
SP command numbers can be entered directly (if you know the entire number) or the
command can be selected from the menus.
Direct Entry
If you know all seven digits of the SP code, enter the seven numbers and press Enter key .
However, if you do not know all the numbers, enter only the first four numbers of the
seven-digit SP and press Enter key . The display goes immediately to the first SP of that
group. Then you can use the buttons to browse to the desired selection.
Button Selection Entry
1. Refer to the SP Mode Tables at the end of this section to find the SP that you want to
adjust.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you
want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display the SP number
that you want to open, then, press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you
want to set, and press the Enter key . The small entry box on the right is activated and
displays the default or the current setting below.
5. To enter a setting
Press the key to enter a minus sign. Then use the keypad to enter the
appropriate number. The number you enter will write over the previous setting.
Press the to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, the key
press is ignored.)
Press the Clear key to cancel the data.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window and
select the settings for the test print. Press the Start key.
D095/M077 5-2 SM
Service Program Mode Operation
7. Press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.
8. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.
5.1.4 SP MODE BUTTON SUMMARY
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
Open All:
(1)
Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
Close All:
(2)
Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
Maintenance
System
APL Window:
(3) Opens the APL window (application mode) so you can make test copies. To return
to the SP mode screen, press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window.
SP Direct:
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number, then
(4)
press the Enter key . (SP Direct must be highlighted before you can enter the
number. Just press SP Direct if it is not highlighted.)
Exit:
(5) Press twice to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
SPnxxx:
Press any group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group. For
(6)
example, to open the SP code list for SP1-nnn, press SP1xxx. If an SP has
sublevels, it is marked with a right pointing triangle.
SM 5-3 D095/M077
Service Program Mode Operation
Group:
(7)
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.
Page:
(8) Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen
display (page).
Line:
(9)
Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.
Prev Page or Next Page:
(10)
Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
D095/M077 5-4 SM
Service Program Tables
5.2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES
5.2.1 SP TABLES
See "Appendices" for the following information:
System SP Tables
Printer SP Tables
Scanner SP Tables
Input Check
Output Check
5.2.2 SERVICE TABLE KEY
Notation What it means
Example: [–9 to +9 / xx / 0.1 mm]
The default setting can be adjusted in 0.1mm steps in the range ±9.
[range/default/step]
Note: The default setting for each SP mode is shown on the screen in
the "Initial" box immediately below the entry box.
Maintenance
DFU Denotes "Design or Factory Use.” Do not change this value.
System
Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only. Do not change this value.
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed
SM 5-5 D095/M077
Service Program Tables
5.2.3 ABBREVIATIONS FOR SP SERVICE TABLES
The SP titles are abbreviated so they can be used in smaller the 2-line displays of future
printer models. Refer to this list if you do not understand the meaning of an abbreviation.
Code Meaning
1/3S One-third Speed
1C One Color
1Op 1 Operation (execution cycle)
1-S 1-Side (Simplex)
2-S 2-Side (Duplex)
Abs Absolute
Adj Adjustment
Agi Agitation
Amt Amount
B/W Black-and-White (2-Color)
BotPlt Bottom Plate (Tray)
C Cyan
Calib Calibration
Chg Change
Chk Check
Chrg Charge
Cir. Circulation
Cnt Count
Coeff Coefficient
Col Color
D095/M077 5-6 SM
Service Program Tables
Code Meaning
Cont Continuous Operation
Cor Correction
Ctrl Control
CTL Controller Board (GW)
Den Density
Dev Development
Devr Developer
Disp Display
Dupx Duplex
EMargin Erase Margin
EngSave Energy Save
Ent Entrance
Maintenance
Env Environment
System
Err Error
Exe Execute
FC Full Color
Fin1 Euphrates
Fin2 Victoria-D
Fin3 Zaire (Japan only)
Fwd Forward
Gray Grayscale
Haf Half Speed
Height Hgt
HH Highest (High High)
SM 5-7 D095/M077
Service Program Tables
Code Meaning
HS Half Speed
Htg Htg
Htg Roll Heating Roller
I/O Input/Output
Init Initial power on
Int Interval
IntCnt Interval Count
Inv Inverter
ITR Image Transfer
JG Junction Gate
K Black, BK
L Lengthways (SEF)
LEdge Leading Edge
LL Lowest (Low Low)
Lvl Level
M Motor
M Magenta
Meas Measurement
Mem Memory
MH Medium High
ML Medium Low
MM Medium (Medium Medium)
Norm Normal Paper
NS Normal Speed
D095/M077 5-8 SM
Service Program Tables
Code Meaning
Opt. Optical
Patt Pattern
PE Paper End
Pgs Pages
Photo Pht
PM Pulse Modulation
PolyM Polygon Motor
Pos Position
Poten Potential
PPr Photo Paper
Press Pressure
Prior Priority
Maintenance
P-Roll Pressure Roller
System
Prmr Parameter
ProCon Process Control
Pt Point
PT Paper Transfer
PTR Paper Transfer Roller
Ptype Paper Type
Pwr Power
Recov Recovery
Reg Registration
Reps Repetitions
Rev Reverse
SM 5-9 D095/M077
Service Program Tables
Code Meaning
Roll Roller
Rot Rotation
s seconds
S Sideways (LEF)
SApli Scanner Application
Sep Separation
Shts Sheets
Sn Sensor
Sp1 Special Paper 1
SS Saddle-Stitch
Std Standard
Stp Staple
StrTemp Start Temperature
Sub Sub Hopper
SWT Switch Timing
Syn Synchronization
T1 Tray 1
T2 Tray 2
T3 Tray 3
T4 Tray 4
Tan Tandem
TC Toner Control
TE Toner End
TE Sn Toner End Sensor
D095/M077 5-10 SM
Service Program Tables
Code Meaning
TEdge Trailing Edge
Temp Temperature
Temp Chg Temperature Change
Thk Thick (Paper)
Thresh Threshold
Tmg Timing
TNE Toner Near End
Tnr Toner
Tnr M Toner Motor
Tra Trace (thin) Paper
TxtOCR Text (OCR)
TxtPrt Text (Print)
Maintenance
Usd Tnr Used Toners
System
Vert Vertical
Y Yellow
SM 5-11 D095/M077
Using SP Mode
5.3 USING SP MODE
5.3.1 CPM DOWN (SP1201)
This machine uses CPM (PPM) down control to compensate for insufficient fusing
temperature or high temperature in small size (less than 228 mm) printing. The execution
condition of this control differs depending on the temperature inside the machine (low
temperature or normal temperature). The threshold between low and normal temperature can
be adjustable with SP1107-018.
SP1107-018: Low Temp On/Off
This adjusts the threshold temperature for low temperature condition.
[10 to 23 / 17 / 1 deg]
SP1201-001 and -002: Threshold Temperature for CPM Down
These SPs adjust DOWN or UP threshold.
If the detected fusing temperature is 30°C lower than a target temperature, the machine
enters the CPM down mode.
If the detected fusing temperature is 8°C lower than a target temperature, the machine enters
the CPM up mode.
The target temperature is calculated referring to paper type, condition, print mode
and etc.
-001: Threshold temperature for CPM DOWN
[0 to -50/ -30 / 1 deg]
-002: Threshold temperature for CPM UP
[0 to -50/ -8 / 1 deg]
SP1201-003 to -005: Low Temp.: CPM Down Rate
These SPs adjusts the Low Temp.: CPM Down (PPM) rate. The machine tries to detect a
fusing temperature every 10 seconds (adjustable with SP1201-024). Whenever the machine
gets CPM down, the machine enters a next mode.
For example, the machine enters the Low Temp.: 1st CPM Down after detecting 30°C lower
than a target temperature. If the machine still detects that a fusing temperature is 30°C lower
than a target temperature after 10 seconds, the machine enters the next mode (Low Temp.:
2nd CPM Down). The machine determines which mode the machine is now in every 10
seconds, and then goes forward or back one by one among these modes.
-003: CPM down rate for Low Temp.:1st CPM Down
D095/M077 5-12 SM
Using SP Mode
[10 to 100/ 80 / 1 %]
-004: CPM down rate for Low Temp.:2nd CPM Down
[10 to 100/ 60 / 1 %]
-005: CPM down rate for Low Temp.:3rd CPM Down
[10 to 100/ 40 / 1 %]
SP1201-006 to -011: CPM Down Rate and Mode Threshold Temp
These SPs adjust CMP (PPM) down rate and mode threshold temperature for small size
paper.
For example, the machine enters the "High Temp:1st CPM Down" mode if the paper size to
be used is small size paper (less than 228 mm) and the temperature of the fusing unit
reaches 215°C (threshold temperature for High Temp.:1st CPM Dow) by default setting.
-006: CPM down rate for High Temp.:1st CPM Down
[10 to 100/ 80 / 1 %]
-007: CPM down rate for High Temp.:2nd CPM Down
[10 to 100/ 60 / 1 %]
-008: CPM down rate for High Temp.:3rd CPM Down
[10 to 100/ 40 / 1 %]
-009: Down threshold for High Temp.:1st CPM Dow
[160 to 240/ 215 / 1 deg]
-010: Down threshold for High Temp.:2nd CPM Down
Maintenance
System
[160 to 240/ 219 / 1 deg]
-008: Down threshold for High Temp.:3rd CPM Down
[160 to 240/ 222 / 1 deg]
SP1201-012 to -023: CPM Down Rate for Each Mode
These SPs adjust the Low Temp.: CPM (PPM) Down rates for each paper type and machine's
temperature.
Adjustable range
[0 to 3 / default: see the following table.]
0: No CPM down
1: Low Temp.: 1st CPM Down (Default: 80%)
2: Low Temp.: 2nd CPM Down (Default: 60%)
3: Low Temp.: 3rd CPM Down (Default: 40%)
SM 5-13 D095/M077
Using SP Mode
Low Temp. inside More than Low Temp. inside
Paper Type
Machine Machine
No Control No Control
Plain
(SP1201-012) (SP1201-018)
No Control No Control
Thin
(SP1201-013) (SP1201-019)
No Control No Control
Middle Thick
(SP1201-014) (SP1201-020)
No Control No Control
Thick 1
(SP1201-015) (SP1201-021)
No Control No Control
Thick 2
(SP1201-016) (SP1201-022)
Mode 2 No Control
Thick 3
(SP1201-017) (SP1201-023)
D095/M077 5-14 SM
Using SP Mode
5.3.2 USING THE DEBUG LOG
Overview
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save
and retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory but this
information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later
retrieval.
Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
When a user is experiencing problems with the machine, follow the procedure below to set up
the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD. Then ask the user to
reproduce the problem.
Switching On and Setting Up Save Debug Log
The debug information cannot be saved until the "Save Debug Log" function has been
switched on and a target has been selected.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Press "Copy SP" on the touch-panel.
Maintenance
3. Enter "5", "8", "5", "7", then press .
System
4. Under "5857 Save Debug Log", press "1.”
5. On the control panel keypad, press "1" then press . This switches the Save Debug Log
feature on.
The default setting is "0" (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the
debug information to be saved.
6. Next, select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under
"5857 Save Debug Log", touch "2 Target", enter "2" with the operation panel key to select
the hard disk as the target destination, then press .
SM 5-15 D095/M077
Using SP Mode
Select "3 SD Card" to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is
inserted in the service slot.
7. Now touch "5858" and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log.
SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
Saves data when an engine-related SC code is
1 Engine SC Error
generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-related SC Code
2 Controller SC Error
is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by
3 Any SC Error
entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
More than one event can be selected.
Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press "ON" for each selection. This example shows
"Engine SC Error" selected.
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code
Touch "3 Any SC Error", enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number
keys, then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
D095/M077 5-16 SM
Using SP Mode
For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section "4.
Troubleshooting"
8. Next, select the one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug
information. Touch "5859.”
Under "5859" press the appropriate key item for the module that you want to record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number, then press .
Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The example below shows "Key 1" with "2222" entered.
Maintenance
System
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in
parentheses indicate the names of the modules.)
SM 5-17 D095/M077
Using SP Mode
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
Key No. Copy Printer Scanner Web
1 2222 (SCS)
2 2223 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848(COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
4600
8 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS)
(GPS-PM)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)
The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero ("0").
Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GW Print Service – Print
GSP-PM PTS Print Server
Module
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
System Resource
MCS Memory Control Service SRM
Management
Web Document Box
NCS Network Control Service WebDB
(Document Server)
D095/M077 5-18 SM
Using SP Mode
The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD (the
target selected with SP5-857-002) for the events that you selected SP5-858and the memory
modules selected with SP5-859.
Please keep the following important points in mind when you are doing this setting:
Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer, Scanner,
and Web memory modules.
The initial settings are all zero.
These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings,
especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that
key.
You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding
4-digit numbers from the table.
You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006to010. For
example, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from
the 9 available selections for the "PRINTER" column only.
One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to
4 MB.
Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD
1. Insert the SD card into service slot of the copier.
Maintenance
System
2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857 009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB) to
write the debugging data to the SD card.
The SD card can hold up to 4MB of data. If the debugging data is larger than
4MB, you can switch to another SD card.
3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh
representative by email, or just send the SD card by mail.
SM 5-19 D095/M077
Using SP Mode
Recording Errors Manually
Since only SC errors and jams are recorded to the debug log automatically, for any other
errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site, please instruct customers to
perform the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data. Such problems
would include a controller or panel freeze.
In order to use this feature, the customer engineer must have previously switched on
the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and selected the hard disk as the save
destination (SP5857-002).
1. When the error occurs, on the operation panel, pressJ (Clear Modes).
2. On the control panel, enter "01" then hold down \ for at least 3 sec. until the machine
beeps then release. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an
SD card by the service representatives.
3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk so the service
representatives can retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD
card.
D095/M077 5-20 SM
Using SP Mode
Debug Log Codes
SP5857-015: Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key
This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly
from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in the
log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This function does not copy from one
slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4 MB of file data. Unique file names are created
for the data during the copy operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This
means that log data from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. This
command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the specified key.
SP5857-016: Create a File on HDD to Store a Log
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a completely
empty file. The created file will hold the number "2225" as the SCS key number and other
non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the HDD when
the first log is stored on the HDD, but this operation takes time. This creates the possibility
that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you
execute this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time
required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created
on the HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not require
creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 to delete the debug log data from the
HDD and then execute this SP (SP5857-016).
Maintenance
System
SP5857-017: Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log
This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a completely
empty file. The created file will hold the number "2225" as the SCS key number and other
non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the SD card when
the first log is stored on the SD card, but this operation takes time. This creates the possibility
that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you
execute this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time
required to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file already
created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does
not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to delete the debug log
data from the SD card and then execute this SP (SP5857-017).
SM 5-21 D095/M077
Using SP Mode
5.3.3 PAPER LIBRARY
To copy the Saved Paper Library to an SD card, use SP 5-711-102.
To copy this data from the SD card to another machine, use SP 5-711-2.
D095/M077 5-22 SM
Test Pattern Printing
5.4 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
5.4.1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN: SP2109 002
Some of these test patterns are used for print image adjustments but most are used primarily
for design testing.
Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise,
an SC may occur.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2109-002
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].
3. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, touch "Yes" to select the test pattern
for printing.
4. Touch "APL Window" to open the APL window, then select the settings for the test print
(paper size, etc.)
5. Press the [Start] ( ) key twice (ignore the "Place Original" messages) to start the test
print.
6. After checking the test pattern, press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode
display.
7. Touch "Exit" twice to exit the SP mode.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-23 D095/M077
Test Pattern Printing
Test Pattern Table
These patterns can be selected with SP2109-002.
0 No Pattern 19 Trim Area
1 1-dot Grid Line: ch0 20 100% Coverage
2 1-dot Grid Line: ch1 21 Vertical Cross- Stitch
3 1-dot Grid Line: ch2 22 Horizontal Cross- Stitch
4 1-dot Grid Line: ch3 23 Hori. Cross- Stitch 012
5 1-dot Grid Line: ch4 24 Hori. Cross- Stitch 670
6 1-dot Grid Line: ch5 25 Horizontal Belt
7 1-dot Grid Line: ch6 26 Vertical Belt
8 1-dot Grid Line: ch07 27 Checkered Flag
9 20 mm Grid 28 Stair
10 Slant grid patter 29 Hor. Grayscale 20 mm
11 1-dot Horizontal Line 30 Hor. Grayscale 20 mm-Wht Bands
12 1-dot Vertical Line 31 Hor. Grayscale 40 mm-1
13 2-dot Horizontal Line 32 Hor. Grayscale 40 mm-2
14 2-dot Vertical Line 33 LD Ch. Power Adjst 1
15 1-dot Independent 34 LD Ch. Power Adjst 2
16 2-dot Independent 35 LD Ch. Power Adjst 3
17 4-dot Independent 36 LD Ch. Power Adjst 4
18 Crop Marks
D095/M077 5-24 SM
SMC Lists
5.5 SMC LISTS
The SMC list prints system parameters and report data.
1. Access the SP mode corresponding to the list that you wish to print.
SP5-990-1: All (Data List)
SP5-990-2: SP (Mode Data List)
SP5-990-3: User Program Data
SP5-990-4: Logging Data
SP5-990-5: Diagnostic Report
SP5-990-7: Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
SP5-990-8: NIB Summary
SP5-990-21: Capture Log
SP5-990-22: Printer User Program
Maintenance
2. Touch the "APL Window" key to access the copy mode display.
System
3. Select the paper size and press the "SP Mode" key to retune the SP mode.
4. Press the "Execute" key to print the list.
5. Exit SP mode.
SM 5-25 D095/M077
Memory All Clear: SP5801
5.6 MEMORY ALL CLEAR: SP5801
As a rule, you should always print an SMC Report before initializing or adjusting the SP
settings. The SMC Report provides a concise list of all the SP commands and their current
settings. The report can be used for reference if the service manual is not available.
Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their default
settings except the followings:
SP5-811-1: Machine serial number
SP5-907: Plug & Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting
1. Execute SP5990 to print out all SMC Data Lists.
2. Open SP5801.
3. Press the number for the item that you want to initialize. The number you select
determines which application is initialized. For example, press 1 if you want to initialize all
modules.
No. What It Initializes Comments
1 All modules Initializes items 2 to 16 below.
Initializes all registration settings for the engine and print
2 Engine
process settings.
SCS (System
Initializes default system settings, CSS settings, operation
3 Control Service)
display coordinates.
/SRM
Initializes the printer defaults, programs registered, the
8 Printer application
printer SP bit switches, and the printer CSS counter.
Initializes the system defaults and interface settings (IP
NCS (Network
11 addresses also), the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings,
Control Service)
WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery & Receive Control Server)
14 DCS
settings.
D095/M077 5-26 SM
Memory All Clear: SP5801
No. What It Initializes Comments
Initializes the UCS (User Directory Control Server)
15 UCS
settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service)
16 MIRS
settings.
4. Press Execute, then follow the prompts on the display to complete the procedure.
5. Make sure that you perform the following settings:
Input all required values for the laser unit adjustment on the SMC, and then adjust
the two laser units. For details, see "Laser Unit" in the chapter 3 "Replace and
adjustment.”
Do the printer registration and magnification adjustments.
Do the touch screen calibration ( "p.4-28 "Touch Panel Position Adjustment” in the
chapter "Replacement and Adjustment").
Referring to the SMC data lists, re-enter any values, which had been changed from
their factory settings.
Execute SP3820-001 – Manual Process Control Self Check
6. Check the print quality and the paper path, and do any necessary adjustments.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-27 D095/M077
Software and System Setting Reset
5.7 SOFTWARE AND SYSTEM SETTING RESET
5.7.1 SOFTWARE RESET
The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up. Use the following procedure.
This reboots the engine controller only. If this procedure does not solve the
machine's hang-up error, see p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power "to
shut down the Fiery controller.
Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once,
release both buttons. After "Now loading. Please wait" is displayed for a few seconds, the
printer window will open. The machine is ready for normal operation.
-or-
Turn the main power switch off and on.
5.7.2 RESETTING THE SYSTEM
The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults using the following
procedure.
1. Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode.
2. Press the User Tools key.
3. Hold down the "#" key and touch the "System Setting" key.
4. A confirmation message will be displayed, then press "Yes.”
D095/M077 5-28 SM
PM Counter
5.8 PM COUNTER
5.8.1 ACCESSING THE PM COUNTERS
Each PM part has a counter which counts up at the appropriate time. (For example, the
counter for the hot roller counts up every copy, and the counter for a feed roller counts up
when paper is fed from the corresponding tray.) These counters should be used as
references for part replacement timing.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Press [PM Counter] on the display.
Maintenance
System
3. The menu shown above appears on the display.
SM 5-29 D095/M077
PM Counter
All PM Parts List
"All PM Parts List" displays all the counters for PM parts.
On this screen, the current counter and the target yield of each PM part can be checked.
Additionally, the PM yield indicator setting can be changed. To change the setting press
[Yes/No] key in the "PM yield" column.
When "Parts list for PM yield" is selected in the parts replacement menu, only the parts with
[Yes] in the "PM yield" are listed.
To clear a counter, press [Clear] on the display. The following appears.
Then press [Yes] to clear the counter.
If one of the keys in the "No" column is pressed, the following appears on the display.
D095/M077 5-30 SM
PM Counter
On this screen, the records of the last three part replacements are displayed. When 'Clear
current counter' is pressed, the current counter is cleared, the current counter is overwritten
to "Latest 1", the Latest 1 counter is overwritten to "Latest 2", and the Latest 2 counter is
overwritten to "Latest 3.”
Additionally, the target yield can be changed on this screen. To change the target yield setting,
do the following:
1. Press [Change target yield] on the screen.
2. Input the target yield using the ten-key pad.
3. Press the # key.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-31 D095/M077
PM Counter
Parts List for PM Yield Indicator
On this screen, only the parts selected in the "All PM parts list" screen are displayed.
Normally, the PM parts counters should be checked on this screen.
If the current counter exceeds the target yield, there is a * mark in the "Exceed" column.
Each counter can also be cleared on this screen. To clear all counters on this screen at once,
see 'Counter Clear for Parts Exceeding Target Yield' on the next page.
Parts Exceeding Target Yield
Only the parts whose counters are exceeding the target yield are displayed. If none of the PM
counters is exceeding the target yield, this item cannot be selected from the parts
replacement menu.
D095/M077 5-32 SM
PM Counter
Counter Clear for Parts Exceeding Target Yield
Clears all the counters which are exceeding the target yield. When this item is selected, the
following appears on the display.
Press [Yes] to clear the counters.
Clear All PM Settings
Clears all the PM counters and returns all the settings (PM parts list and target yield) to the
defaults. When this item is selected, the following appears.
Maintenance
System
Press [Yes] to clear the settings.
SM 5-33 D095/M077
PM Counter
Counter List Print Out
Prints a list of all the PM part counters. When this item is selected, the following appears on
the display.
Press [Print] to print out the counter list.
D095/M077 5-34 SM
Firmware Update
5.9 FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.9.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN...
Always obey these rules when handling and using SD cards:
Never connect or remove an SD card with the machine on.
Never turn the power off while the machine is downloading data from an SD card.
The SD card is a precision item. Use it carefully. Do not keep the card in a location where
there is high temperature, high humidity, or light from the sun.
Handle SD cards carefully to avoid bending, scratching, or dropping them.
If a power failure occurs during the firmware update, turn the machine power off/on
without removing the SD card. The firmware update procedure should start again.
( p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power ")
5.9.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE
1. Obtain the System SD card.
2. Disconnect the network cable and other interface cables. This prevents outside
interference caused by data transfers to the machine while the software is being
uploaded.
3. Turn off the machine.
Maintenance
System
Shut down the Fiery controller first.
4. Remove the SD card slot cover ( x 1).
5. Insert the SD card into Slot 2 (upper slot).
6. Turn on the main switch.
You will see "Please Wait" then "Preparing to start firmware update."
The first screen appears after about 90 sec.
7. Check the notations to the right.
"ROM" tells you the module number and version of the currently installed software.
"NEW" tells you the module number and version of software on the SD card in Slot 2.
8. Touch "Engine" or "OpePanel.xxx.” The item that you select changes to dark gray.
SM 5-35 D095/M077
Firmware Update
You can select "Engine" and one "OpePanel" selection if you want to update
both
9. Touch [Update] or push [#] on the 10-key pad to start the update.
While the Update Is in Progress
Remain with the machine. Do not leave it unattended.
The [Start] key flashes RED during firmware update, and then lights GREEN when
the update is finished.
When the [Start] key LED starts flashing rapidly, this means the update is almost
finished.
Never switch the machine off while the [Start] key is flashing RED.
If the machine is switched off or accidentally unplugged before the update is finished,
do not remove the SD card. Just switch the machine on again. The firmware update
should restart automatically. If the firmware update does not recover, obtain a new
System SD card.
The following screen sequence appears after selecting one "OpePanel" selected for
update.
Operation Panel Update
The blocks of the progress bar fill as the update is done.
The update requires about 9 to 10 minutes.
When you see the 'update completed' message, the firmware update is complete.
D095/M077 5-36 SM
Firmware Update
Engine Update
The middle bar tells you the name of the item that you are updating.
The bottom bar shows the progress of the update procedure.
The update is complete when you see the "Update done" message.
The update requires about xx minutes.
1. When you see the update completed message, turn the machine off.
2. Remove the SD card from the SD card slot.
3. Switch the machine on.
Maintenance
4. This completes the update procedure.
System
5.9.3 VERIFYING THE FIRMWARE UPDATE
This "Verify" procedure is not necessary but is strongly recommended.
1. With the System SD card in Slot 2, turn the main power switch on. You see "Please Wait.”
The first screen appears after about 10 sec.
2. Touch "Firmware.”
3. Select the items that you updated, and then push the [Verify] button.
4. If there are no errors the machine displays the "Verify done" message for each updated
item. Go to the next step.
-or-
If you see "Verify Error" in the first bar on the screen, then you must do the procedure
again for the module shown in the bottom bar. For more details, see "Errors During
Firmware Update" below.
5. After the firmware is correctly updated, turn the main power switch off.
p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power "
6. Push the System SD card in a small distance to release it, then pull it out of the slot.
7. Turn the main power switch on, and confirm that the machine operates correctly.
SM 5-37 D095/M077
Firmware Update
Errors during Firmware Update
If an error occurs during a download, an error message will be shown in the first line. The
error code consists of the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
No. Meaning Solution
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or
20 Cannot map logical address
use a different SD card.
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection not correct, or replace hard disk.
Cannot decompress The ROM data on the SD card is not correct, or
22
compressed data data is damaged.
Error occurred when ROM Controller program defective. If the second
23
update program started attempt fails, replace the controller board.
Make sure the SD card is installed correctly, or
24 SD card access error
use a different SD card.
No HDD available for stamp
30 HDD connection not correct or replace hard disks.
data download
Install the SD card with the remaining data
Data incorrect for continuous
31 necessary for the download, then re-start the
download
procedure.
Data incorrect after download Do the recovery procedure for the module, then
32
interrupted repeat the installation procedure.
The ROM data on the SD card is not correct, or
33 Incorrect SD card version
data is damaged.
The data on the SD is not correct. Get the correct
Module mismatch - Correct
34 data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install
module is not on the SD card
again.
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD
Module mismatch – Module on
35 card is for a different machine. Get the correct
SD card is not for this machine
data then install again.
36 Cannot write module – Cause SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD
D095/M077 5-38 SM
Firmware Update
No. Meaning Solution
other than E34, E35 card is for a different machine. Get the correct
data then install again.
Engine module download Replace the data for the module on the SD card
40
failed and try again, or replace the BCU board.
Operation panel module Replace the data for the module on the SD card
42
download failed and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module download Replace the data for the module on the SD card
43
failed and try again, or replace the hard disk.
Controller module download Replace the data for the module on the SD card
44
failed and tray again, or replace the controller board.
SD update data is not correct. The data on the SD
Electronic confirmation check
50 card is for a different machine. Get the correct
failed
data then install again.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-39 D095/M077
Firmware Update
5.9.4 FIERY CONTROLLER SYSTEM UPDATE
Fiery System Installation
System and user software are provided on the following media:
System SoftwareDVD
User Software DVD
The System and User Software DVDs include the system software, fonts, and user software.
You install system and user software when you:
Remedy an error condition (see "Error messages and conditions" on page xxx).
Replace the HDD.
Upgrade to a more recent version of the software.
Software installation takes approximately one hour (not including the time required to
configure or restore Setup).
To Install System and User Software
Notify the network administrator at the customer site that some archived jobs may no
longer print after you install an updated version of system software.
1. If you have not yet done so, consider backing up configuration settings. The settings are
deleted when you install system and user software (see "Backing up and restoring the
Fiery Setup Configuration" in the "Installation and Service Guide").
2. Allow the network administrator the opportunity to print the Job Log. Also, print the
following (if possible):
Configuration page—lists any installed options and records the customer’s current
Setup configuration.
Font List—lists the fonts currently on the HDD. In addition to the fonts provided in
system software, the customer may have installed other fonts.
3. Remove all USB storage devices and dongles (if any) that may be connected to any
Fiery controller USB ports.
The system will hang if USB storage devices or dongles are connected to Fiery
controller USB ports during software installation.
4. Insert the System Software DVD into the DVD/CD-RW drive.
D095/M077 5-40 SM
Firmware Update
If you installed a new HDD, power on the system, insert the System Software
DVD, allow the system to boot, and then proceed to step 6.
5. From the Fiery Control Panel or the copier/printer display panel (or the Start menu, if a
monitor is connected), reboot the Fiery controller.
Allow the system to shut down and reboot. Do not push any buttons during this time.
6. At the message "All data will be deleted?", select Yes.
7. When prompted, select a language.
Wait as messages display describing the installation process.
This installation segment takes approximately 12 minutes.
8. At the message "System Software is copied to the system. Remove media and select OK
to reboot," remove the System Software DVD, and then select OK.
The Fiery controller reboots several times and status messages display as the
installation process continues.
This installation segment takes approximately 12 minutes.
9. At the message "Please insert User Software to continue installation", insert the User
Software DVD into the DVD/CD-RW drive.
If a monitor is connected (FACI), click OK to continue.
Maintenance
System
During this process, the following installations are performed:
The entire contents of the System Software DVD are copied to a shared folder on the
Fiery controller HDD, in e:¥efi¥user_sw.
After installation, when the Fiery controller is connected to the customer’s network,
users can access the user software in the shared folder and install it onto client
computers.
The message "Copying User Software to Fiery shared folder. Please wait" and other
messages display describing the user software installation process.
SM 5-41 D095/M077
Firmware Update
This installation segment takes approximately 30 minutes.
10. At the message "Setup finished. Remove CD/DVD. Press OK to reboot," remove the
User Software DVD and select OK.
If the User Software DVD does not eject automatically, wait for the system to boot
completely and the following logo screen to display on the Fiery controller Control Panel,
then access the Functions menu on the Fiery controller Control Panel and select Eject
CD/DVD to remove the User Software DVD.
The drawing above indicates that the Fiery controller is idle.
This installation segment takes approximately 5 minutes.
11. If user documentation was previously resident on the Fiery controller, remind the site
administrator that user documentation files may be reinstalled to the Fiery controller
shared folder from the User Documentation CD as follows:
If the Fiery controller is equipped with FACI:
– Insert the User Documentation CD in the Fiery controller DVD drive.
– Browse to the desired language folder on the CD.
– Select and copy the files you want to place in the shared folder on the Fiery
controller.
– Browse to the shared file location: e:¥efi¥user_software¥Documentation and paste
the documentation files.
From a client computer on the same network as the Fiery controller (assumes that
the Fiery controller is powered on, has an IP address, and is accessible on the
customer’s network):
– Insert the User Documentation CD in the CD drive of the client computer.
– Browse to the desired language folder on the CD.
– Open a web browser and type two back-slashes followed by the Fiery controller IP
address.
For example: ¥¥xx.xx.xx.x, where xx.xx.xx.x is the IP address of the Fiery controller.
– Open the User-Docs folder.
– Copy and paste the documentation files into the folder.
D095/M077 5-42 SM
Firmware Update
12. Use the System Updates feature to install required software updates that may be
available for the Fiery controller that would have been deleted when you installed system
software (see "Updating the Fiery Controller" described below).
13. Reconnect any USB storage devices or dongles that you may have removed earlier.
14. Input the settings from the Configuration page that you printed earlier, or restore settings
if they were backed up prior to system software installation.
If a backup file of the configuration settings exists, restore it after the network
configuration is completed (see see "Backing up and restoring the Fiery Setup
Configuration" in the "Installation and Service Guide").
Bypass any settings that are not included on the Configuration page if it is more
appropriate for the network administrator to set them. For more information, see
Configuration and Setup on the User Documentation CD.
15. Reinstall fonts or custom simulations that may have been deleted when you installed
software.
Updating the Fiery Controller
Patch installation instructions
1. Make sure the Fiery controller is idle.
2. Execute "____exe" and follow the instructions in the Fiery Patch Downloader.
3. Notes about the Fiery Patch Downloader
a) Login must be admin. This is fixed and cannot be modified.
Maintenance
System
b) Password is the Fiery administrator login password.
c) Hostname can be either the IP address or the Fiery server name.
4. After the patch is downloaded, and when prompted by the Fiery Patch Downloader,
choose Reboot. (If you choose to Restart later, make sure that you manually reboot the
server for changes to take effect.)
5. Wait until the Fiery controller comes to Idle and print the configuration page.
6. Verify that the System Updates Log section contains the patch number "********.”
SM 5-43 D095/M077
TROUBLESHOOTING
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
11 11/22/2011 Corrected Process Control Self-Checks: SP3821
12 07/15/2011 Corrected Potential Sensors Code 16
52 5/21/2012 Paper Jam Display
Program Download
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
6.1.1 OVERVIEW
Here are some important points to keep in mind when downloading software:
If an error interrupts download processing, the machine cannot operate normally with the
program software only partially downloaded.
When download processing execution starts, "Downloading …" is displayed and when
downloading has completed successfully, the message is cleared.
If the download is interrupted when the "Downloading …" message is displayed, the
machine does not attempt a re-try.
The program that downloads firmware from an SD card is part of the GW controller
software. If downloading this software is interrupted, the program stored in the machine
may be corrupted. Because of this, it may not be possible to restart the downloading
program. (In addition, if the GW controller software cannot be downloaded, other
software on other SD cards cannot be downloaded.) However, it may be possible to
restart the program without replacing the board by setting DIP SW 1 on the controller to
ON, and re-starting.
6.1.2 RECOVERY METHODS
When an error occurs during downloading, an error code is displayed on the operation panel.
If the download procedure can be re-started, re-start the download procedure.
If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for other than the GW controller,
shooting
Trouble-
replace the board where the downloaded program is stored.
If the download procedure cannot be downloaded for the GW controller, set DIP SW 1 to
ON. Power the machine off and on to start the downloading program. After downloading
has completed, set the DIP SW to OFF then power the machine off and on again.
p.2-8 "Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power "
SM 6-1 D095/M077
Program Download
6.1.3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES
Display Details Recovery
Controller ROM update error 1
Reboot after
When the update break data is
card insert E01.
01 stored in NVRAM, the break module Use the correct card
Module ID
information and the decompression
Card No. xx/xx
module capable of writing do not
match.
Download Error Controller ROM update error 2.
Cycle the machine
02 E02
Error occurs during ROM update off/on to rewrite
Power off/on
program initialization.
Controller ROM update error 3 Cycle the machine
Download Error
off/on
03 E03
The ROM for the write operation Install the missing
Power off/on
does not exist. ROM DIMM
Controller ROM update error 4 Cycle the machine
off/on
Download Error Set DIP SW 1 to ON
04 E04 and retry
GZIP data confirmation fails. (CRC
Power off/on Replace RAM DIMM
value check)
Replace controller
board
Controller ROM update error 5 Cycle the machine
off/on
Download Error Set DIP SW 1 to ON
05 E05 and retry
Error occurs when writing to the
Power off/on Replace RAM DIMM
device.
Replace controller
board
D095/M077 6-2 SM
Program Download
Display Details Recovery
Controller ROM update error 6 Turn the machine
power off/on.
Set controller
DIPSW-1 to ON to
Download Error
force the machine to
06 E06
CPU clock error. write to ROM.
Power off/on
If you cannot force the
machine to write,
replace the controller
board.
Download Error Controller ROM update error 7
19 E19 Software defective
Power off/on Schedule data is unclear.
System error 1 (+SC991) Cycle the machine
Down Error E20 off/on and re-try
20 The physical address cannot be
Power Off/On Replace controller
mapped. Software/hardware is
board
defective
System error 2 (+SC991) Cycle the machine
Download Error off/on and re-try.
21 E21 Replace RAM
There is not sufficient memory to
Power Off/On Replace the controller
download.
shooting
Trouble-
board
SM 6-3 D095/M077
Program Download
Display Details Recovery
System error 3 (+SC991) Cycle the machine
Download Error
off/on and re-try.
E22
Data fails to decompress. Card Replace card
Module ID
defective. Replace controller
Card No xx/xx
board
22
System error 4 Cycle the machine
off/on and re-try
Set DIP SW 1 to ON
SC991
"Selfupdate" does not execute. and re-try
Software defective. Replace the controller
board
System error 5 Cycle the machine
Download Error off/on and re-try
23 E24 Replace the card
Card read/write error. Software or
Power Off/On Replace the controller
card defective.
board
Download dysfunction 1 HDD defective
HDD harness
30 No Valid Data E30 Print download is not possible.
disconnected,
Cannot download to HDD because
defective
HDD not installed or defective.
Reboot After Card Download dysfunction 2
Insert E31 Set the correct cards
31 Download continuity error with more
Module ID in the correct order
than one card. The second or later
Card No. xx/xx
card is not compatible.
Download dysfunction 3 Use the correct card
Reboot After Card
If power failure caused
Insert E32
32 Download interrupted because card the failure, remove the
Module ID
is not correct, or power failure card and insert
Card No. xx/xx
interrupted download. another.
D095/M077 6-4 SM
Program Download
Display Details Recovery
Download dysfunction 4
33 No Valid Data E33 Card version error. Attempted to Use the correct card
download program using a card with
the wrong version number.
Download dysfunction 5
34 No Valid Data E34 Use the correct card
Specification error. DOM card set in
EXP machine, or vice versa.
Download dysfunction 6
35 No Valid Data E35 Use the correct card
Wrong model. The inserted card is
for another model.
Download dysfunction 7
Use the correct card,
Module error. The program that you
inserted correctly
36 No Valid Data E36 are attempting to download does
Install a ROM DIMM if
not exist on the machine, or the
none is installed
contact points at the card and the
machine slot are not connected.
Download dysfunction 8
37 No Valid Data E37 Use an unused card
Edit option card error. You
shooting
attempted to employ a used card. Trouble-
Download Error Download result failure 1
E40 Cycle the machine
40
Module ID off/on and re-try
Engine download failure.
Card No. xx/xx
Download Error Download result failure 2
E41 Cycle the machine
41
Module ID off/on and re-try
Fax download failure.
Card No. xx/xx
SM 6-5 D095/M077
Program Download
Display Details Recovery
Download result failure 3
Download Error
E42 Operation panel or language Cycle the machine
42
Module ID download failed. For this error, off/on and re-try
Card No. xx/xx sometimes the message may not be
displayed.
Download Error Download result failure 4
E43 Cycle the machine
43
Module ID off/on and re-try
Print download failed.
Card No. xx/xx
Download result failure 5 Turn the machine
power off/on.
Replace the SD card
with the start-up SD
card that has the
source data
Download Error
Set controller
44 E44
The data targeted for the write DIPSW-1 to ON to
Module ID Card No.
operation could not be accessed. force the machine to
write
If you cannot force the
machine to write,
replace the controller
board.
Download invalid
Use the correct SD
50 No Valid Data E50
The source data for the update card.
could not be authenticated.
D095/M077 6-6 SM
Program Download
Display Details Recovery
Remote ROM update failure 1
Turn the machine
The source data for the ROM
51 (no display) power off/on and try
update is corrupted because the
again.
machine is operating and an SC
code has been issued.
Remote ROM update failure 2
The source data received for the Try again with the
52 (no display)
ROM update is corrupted; it failed a correct data.
SUM check due to its abnormal
length.
Download result failure 6
Do the download
53 (no display)
The previous download in progress procedure again.
was cancelled.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-7 D095/M077
Special Procedures
6.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES
6.2.1 SP3812 001 (DEVSETUP EXECUTE) ERRORS
After SP3812 001 executes normally, you should see four 1s:
1111
Reading from left to right, each "1" indicates the status of the PCDUs: K, M, C, Y.
If you see any number other than a "1", this indicates an error.
SP3812 001 Error Codes
Code Error Problem Recovery
Door was opened, or
another color returned
an error. Execution Check the preceding error codes.
Execution
2 halts at the first error Never open the front door during
Interrupted
encountered or if the execution.
front door is opened
during execution.
Check the operation panel for a
developer set error (SC336 to SC339).
The reading of Vt (TD
Check the PCDUs and confirm that all
3 Vt Abnormal sensor output) is less
the film seals have been removed to
than 5 V.
release the developer from the
developer cartridge.
Did Not Displayed when you open this SP
4 SP Default
Execute code. No action is necessary.
At the end of the toner
Toner Supply filling cycle, the toner
8 Check the toner supply unit.
Abnormal end sensor detected
no toner.
D095/M077 6-8 SM
Special Procedures
Code Error Problem Recovery
This is a TD sensor adjustment error
(SC372 to SC375). Execute SP3801
again for the PCDU that returned the
error. If this does not recover
Vtref (control
operation, check the following:
reference voltage)
Film seal not removed from a new
9 Vtcnt Abnormal could not be adjusted
developer pack
to within 0.2 V of Vt
TD harness sensor disconnected,
(TD sensor output).
loose or defective
TD sensor defective
Harness between TD sensor and
drawer disconnected, defective
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-9 D095/M077
Special Procedures
6.2.2 PROCESS CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING
Summary of Process Control SC Codes
This is a list of SC codes that may occur during process control. For more, please refer to the
process control tables on the following pages.
Pre-Processing Check
Vpp is not within the normal range (Vpp: the AC current applied to
the charge roller to compensate for changes in the ambient
SC316 to SC319 temperature and humidity). Insufficient charge causes white spotting
and too much charge causes toner to film on the surface of the drum.
Vpp must be > 2.8 kV.
ID sensor could not be calibrated. An abnormal ID sensor condition
SC400 is detected when before calibration begins, Vsg < 0.5V or after
calibration, Vsg cannot be adjusted to 4.0±0.2V.
SC418 Correct current could not be supplied to the ID sensor.
SC436 to SC439 A problem is detected with a potential sensor during calibration.
Potential Control
The development gamma is out of range (not between 0.3 and 6.0)
SC410 to SC413
for a color.
Vk is out of range (not within ±150V) for a color. If the development
SC414 to SC417
potential is less than Vk, toner is not applied to the drum.
SC420 to SC423 Vd cannot be adjusted to the target voltage for a drum.
The potential sensor detects that Vpl is not ±10V of the target Vpl
SC424 to SC427
after exposure of the ID sensor patterns.
SC432 to SC435 The residual voltage on a drum is greater than -200V.
TD Sensor Output Calibration
An abnormal condition is detected when output of one of the TD
SC360 to SC367
sensors fails to fall within the range of 0.5V to 4.5V.
D095/M077 6-10 SM
Rev. 11/22/2011 Special Procedures
Process Control Gamma Correction
The development gamma for black, magenta, cyan, or yellow is not
SC410 to SC413
within range (0.3 to 6.0).
The development start voltage (Vk) for black, magenta, cyan, or
SC414 to SC417
yellow PCDU is not within range (±150V)
Process Control Self-Check: SP3821
After the process control self-check is executed manually with SP3820, you can execute
SP3821 to check the results of the self-check. The possible error codes are listed in the
"Displayed Code" column in the table below.
When you do SP3821, the normal display (no errors) will look like this:
10101010
⇒Reading from left to right each "10" represents a color: K, C, M, Y.
If a problem occurs, the code will appear in the column for the color PCDU where the error
has occurred. For example, If a Vdhome error (Code 15) (see table below) occurs in the C
PCDU, the display will look like this:
10151010
shooting
Or if an ID sensor error (Code 21) (see table below) occurs in the Y PCDU: Trouble-
10101021
"99" displays while SP3821 executes.
Noise and static electricity can damage the many sensors that are used during the
process control self-check. Because of this, always turn the machine off before doing
any procedure described below that requires disassembly.
SM 6-11 D095/M077
Special Procedures Rev. 07/15/2011
Normal
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
10 Successful ---
Potential Sensors
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
15 VdHome (SP3572) above –900V.
VdHome Error 1 The window of the potential sensor probe fouled
(SC436 to SC439) with toner
Potential sensor damaged
Action:
Do SP2260-001 to check the function of the potential sensor.
Do SP2261 to check the Voffset readings. If Voffset is over 1V, the
potential sensor might be dirty due to scattered toner.
Remove the PCDU. Use a blower brush to clean the window of the
potential sensor probe, then check the sensor again with SP2601.
If normal operation cannot be restored, replace the potential sensor
probe.
⇒ VdHome (SP3572) below –500V.
VdHome Error 2 Potential sensor relay board damaged
(SC436 to SC439) Drum abnormal
Drum motor not operating
Action:
16 Do SP2260 001 to check the function of the potential sensor.
Do SP2261 to check the Vd reading. For more, see Section 6. This
error occurs again if Vd is less than -500V.
Remove the malfunctioning PCDU with a functioning PCDU, turn the
machine off then on, then do the potential sensor check again.
If the replaced PCDU does not function normally, then the problem is
on the machine side, or the potential sensor relay board is
D095/M077 6-12 SM
Special Procedures
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
on the machine side, or the potential sensor relay board is
malfunctioning.
If the replaced PCDU functions normally, then there may be a problem
with the drum or the charge unit. Replace the PCDU.
ID Sensors
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
Vsg_reg (SP3121) is out of range (not within 4.0
ID Sensor Vsg
±0.2V).
Adjust Error
ID sensor fouled with dust, toner
(SC400)
ITB undulating or out of position
Action:
21
Remove the ITB unit.
Make sure the belt is mounted correctly.
Clean the windows of the ID sensors with a cloth moistened with
alcohol.
Be sure to wipe the sensor apertures with a wet cloth. A dry cloth may
generate static which can attract dust.
ID Sensor LED LED PWM (SP3131) greater than 400.
shooting
Trouble-
Current Error ID sensor fouled with dust, toner
(SC418) ID sensor deteriorated
Action:
22 Remove the ITB unit and check the ID sensors.
Clean the windows of the ID sensors with alcohol and a clean cloth.
Be sure to wipe the sensor apertures with a wet cloth. A dry cloth may
generate static which can attract dust.
If the apertures are clean, then the LED of an ID sensor may have
deteriorated. Replace the ID sensor plate.
SM 6-13 D095/M077
Special Procedures
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
Vsg_reg (SP3121) less than 0.5V.
ID sensor harness loose, disconnected,
ID Sensor Output damaged
Error ID sensor damaged
(SC400) Note: Vsg_reg refers to the reading of the ITB
surface done with the direct reflection sensors in both
the color and black ID sensors.
23
Action:
Remove the ITB unit.
Check the ID sensor harness connections and make sure that they are
tight.
Check the harnesses for breaks.
If the harnesses are undamaged and tightening the connections does
not solve the problem, replace the ID sensor plate.
D095/M077 6-14 SM
Special Procedures
AC Charge
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
Vpp could not be adjusted after 20 attempts.
Bias path defective
AC Charge Adjust
Charge gap abnormal (too large)
Error 1
Charge roller dirty
Drum coated with film
31 Action:
Make sure that the bias path and drum are grounded correctly.
Check the drum and both ends of the charger roller for any foreign
matter.
Check the gap between the charge roller and the drum to confirm that it
is not too large.
If the grounds and gap is normal, clean the charger roller or replace it.
Vpp greater than 2.80 kV.
AC Charge Adjust Bias path defective
Error 2 Charge gap abnormal
Charge roller dirty, defective
Action:
32
Make sure that the bias path and drum are grounded correctly.
Check the drum and both ends of the charger roller for any foreign
shooting
matter. Trouble-
Check the gap between the charge roller and the drum to confirm that it
is not too large.
If the grounds and gap is normal, clean the charger roller or replace it.
SM 6-15 D095/M077
Special Procedures
ID Sensor Pattern Detection
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
Development
Development gamma (SP3561) greater than 6.0
Gamma Error 1
(mg/cm2/-kV).
SC410 to SC413
Action:
Switch the machine off and on then do SP3820-002.
Do SP3561-005 to -008 to confirm that development gamma is within
the target range (-0.1 to +0.1)
If not within the target range, do the procedure again.
If the machine returns SC410 to SC413 and process control does not end
55 normally, do this procedure:
1. Change the settings for SP3301-001 to -004 from "0" (PID) to "1" (No
Toner Supply).
2. Do SP2109-002 and select Pattern 12.
3. Change the settings of SP2109-005 to -008 from "15" to "0", except for
the color which showed a development gamma error.
4. Return to the print window and do the test print at least 10 patterns.
5. Do SP3820-002.
6. If the patterns are normal, do Steps 2 and 3.
7. If the patterns are not normal, repeat Steps 2 to 5.
8. Do SP3301-001 to -004 to restore PID toner supply.
D095/M077 6-16 SM
Special Procedures
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
Development Development gamma (SP3561) less than 0.3
56 Gamma Error 2 (mg/cm2/-kV)
(SC410 to SC413) Toner shield glass dirty
Action:
1. Do SP2109-002 and select Pattern "12.”
2. Do SP2109-005 to 008 and change the settings of these SP codes
from "15 (default)" to "0.”
3. Return to the print window and do the test print 1 pattern.
4. Check the pattern to determine whether the image density is extremely
light.
5. Turn the machine off.
6. Open the toner hopper door, remove the toner bottles and check the
toner shield glass for dirt.
7. Remove the face plate, replace the malfunctioning PCDU with a
functioning PCDU, then turn the machine on and repeat Steps 1 to 3 to
print the coverage test pattern.
8. If normal operation cannot be recovered:
Replace the image transfer power pack.
Open the development unit to see if there is too much or too little
developer.
If the developer supply is normal, remove the toner end sensor to see if
shooting
Trouble-
there is toner in the sub hopper.
If the sub hopper is empty, the powder pump is defective. Replace the
toner supply unit.
If the sub hopper is full, the toner end sensor is defective. Replace the
toner supply unit.
If the level of developer is either too high or too low, replace the
developer.
Vk Error 1 Vk (development start voltage) greater than 150V.
57
Action:
Replace the developer.
SM 6-17 D095/M077
Special Procedures
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
Vk (development start voltage) less than
–150V.
Vk Error 2 The window of the potential sensor probe is
covered with toner.
Potential sensor damaged
Action:
58 1. Do SP2260-001 to check the function of the potential sensor.
2. Do SP2261 to check the Voffset readings. If Voffset is over 1V, the
potential sensor might be dirty due to scattered toner.
3. Remove the PCDU. Use a blower brush to clean the window of the
potential sensor probe, then check the sensor again with SP2260-001.
4. If normal operation cannot be recovered, replace the potential sensor
probe.
5. If the Voffset reading is normal, replace the developer.
Insufficient Active Not enough active data to calculate development
Data gamma (only "0" or "1").
59
Action:
Do the "Action" procedure for code "55" described above.
D095/M077 6-18 SM
Special Procedures
Potential Adjustment
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
A laser diode failed to fire and write the ID sensor
pattern.
LD Failure Toner shield glass dirty
PCDU set incorrectly
Laser diode defective
Action:
1. Print the color test pattern to determine which color is abnormal.
2. Turn the machine off.
3. Check the dust shield glass for the laser unit. For details, see "p.4-89
61 "Dust Shield Glass” in the chapter "Replacement and Adjustment.”
4. Reassemble the machine, switch the machine on, then do
SP3820-001.
Notes:
The probes of the potential sensors of each PCDU are located at
different positions. This failure can be caused by installing a potential
sensor at the incorrect position. However, you can eliminate this as a
cause if a new PCDU is installed. (A guide ensures prevents a PCDU
from being installed at the wrong location.)
If the machine fails to return SC240 to SC243, you can eliminate a
defective LD as the cause of the problem.
shooting
Trouble-
Vr (residual voltage) greater than –270V.
Vr Error Drum deteriorated
Toner shield glass dirty
62 Action:
Open the front door, remove the toner supply unit, and check the toner
shield glass for dirt.
Clean the glass then do SP3820 001.
If this does not solve the problem, replace the drum.
SM 6-19 D095/M077
Special Procedures
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
Vd could not be adjusted within ±5V.
Vd Adjust Error
Drum defective
63
Action:
Replace the drum.
Vpl could not be adjusted within ±3V.
Vpl Adjust Error
Drum deteriorated due to filming
64
Action:
Replace the drum.
Abnormal End
Displayed
Item Major Cause
Code
Potential Adjust
SP3501 (potential control method) is set to 1 (Fixed).
Error
90
Action:
Do SP3501-001 and select "0" (Auto).
Door open, power off, or other problem interfering
Forced Termination
with process control self-check.
99
Action:
Make sure the machine is turned on.
Make sure the front door is closed completely.
D095/M077 6-20 SM
Special Procedures
6.2.3 MUSIC ADJUSTMENT RESULT
SP2-194-010 to -012 (MUSIC Execution Result M/C/Y Error)
This SP shows the number as a MUSIC result on the LCD. It shows which color has an error
(M, Y or C).
No. Result Description
0 Not done MUSIC has not been done.
1 Completed successfully MUSIC has been done correctly.
ID sensors have not detected the patterns for
2 Cannot detect patterns
MUSIC.
Fewer lines on the pattern The patterns detected by the ID sensors are not
3
than the target complete enough for MUSIC.
More lines on the pattern
4 Not used in this machine.
than the target
ID sensors have correctly detected the patterns for
Out of the adjustment
5 MUSIC, but the position of the patterns is too far
range
away from the adjustable range.
6-9 Not used -
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-21 D095/M077
Fiery Controller Troubleshooting
6.3 FIERY CONTROLLER TROUBLESHOOTING
For details about Fiery controller troubleshooting, refer to the "Installation and Service Guide"
of the Fiery controller.
D095/M077 6-22 SM
Service Call Conditions
6.4 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
See the Appendices for the following information:
Service Call Tables
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-23 D095/M077
Image Problems
6.5 IMAGE PROBLEMS
6.5.1 WHITE SPOTS
If many white spots occur on outputs, clean the following paper paths and rollers with a cloth
and alcohol.
Mylar at the PTR timing roller
Vertical transport path from trays 1 and 2
Paper path from the LCT-MF or optional LCT
Mylar at the PTR Timing Roller
1. Pull out the registration unit ( p.4-139).
2. Remove the timing roller cover [A] on the PTR timing roller ( x 4).
3. Clean the mylar [A] and other rollers in the registration unit with a cloth moistened with
alcohol.
D095/M077 6-24 SM
Image Problems
Vertical Transport Path from Trays 1 and 2
1. Open the front right door.
2. Open the vertical transport guide [A].
3. Clean the vertical transport path with a cloth moistened with alcohol.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-25 D095/M077
Image Problems
Paper Path from the LCT-MF or Optional LCT
1. Open the front left door of the LCT-MF.
2. Open the vertical transport upper and lower guides [A].
3. Clean the vertical transport upper and lower paths with a cloth moistened with alcohol.
Use an aerosol spray for places where you cannot touch, as shown above.
D095/M077 6-26 SM
Image Problems
6.5.2 COLOR SPOTS
If color spots occur on outputs, print out 150 to 200 copies of a test pattern (SP2109-002) with
a full coverage image.
For Printer M077
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Select "20: 100% Coverage" with SP2109-002.
3. Select all color (YMCK) with SP2-109-004 as shown below.
"0": Not selected, "1": Selected
[1] for "Black.” Press the "3" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[2] for "Cyan.” Press the "2" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[3] for "Magenta.” Press the "1" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[4] for "Yellow.” Press the "0" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
4. Press the "APL Window" button to enter the copy screen.
5. Print a test pattern 150 sheets or more (200 sheets or less) from a PC.
shooting
Trouble-
6. Check the outputs if the problem is solved. If not, try this procedure again.
7. Exit the SP mode after the machine has completed printing.
For Copier D095
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Select "20: 100% Coverage" with SP2109-002.
3. Press the "APL Window" button to enter the copy screen.
4. Input a number of pages from 150 to 200 with the numeric keys, and then select "Full
Color" mode.
5. Press the "Start" key on the operation panel.
6. Exit the SP mode after the machine has completed printing.
SM 6-27 D095/M077
Image Problems
6.5.3 BLURRED IMAGE
Blurred Image due to Ozone
If a blurred image (white lines and drag marks) as shown above occurs on the outputs for the
first job just after turning on the machine or recovering from the low power mode, execute
"Clear blurred img" with SP2810-001 or "0203:Execute photo conductor Refreshing" under
the "Adjustment Settings for Operator" in the User Tools to recover from this problem.
This problem may appear at 314 mm (drum circumference) intervals on the outputs.
D095/M077 6-28 SM
Image Problems
6.5.4 BLURRED TEXT
If text on an output is blurred as shown above, the "Toner Reduction" function in the printer
driver or "Fiery Command WorkStation" can solve this problem.
However, the "Toner Reduction" function may not solve this problem for some image data.
How to Enable Toner Reduction
1. Open the printer driver, and then click "Properties....”
shooting
Trouble-
2. Check the "Toner Reduction" check box [A].
For the "Fiery Command WorkStation", check the "Toner Reduction" check box
under "Properties" in a job.
SM 6-29 D095/M077
Image Problems
Side Effect
The color reproduction of the shadow area may be reduced.
6.5.5 WHITE LINES IN B/W MODE
White lines may occur on outputs in the black and white mode if an image with high black
coverage is printed or copied consecutively (15% or more black coverage and 100 K or
more).
If the white lines occur on outputs in the black and white mode:
1. Clean the drum for black.
2. Replace the drum cleaning unit for black.
6.5.6 VERTICAL WHITE LINE
Vertical white line may occur due to various reasons. This section shows how to decide cause
of a vertical white line and solve the vertical white line problem.
Decision Flow
Check the following points, and then see each counter measure.
1. The problem output is a half-tone image and has a white line at 314 mm intervals.
Yes: See "1. Countermeasure for Drum Problem" described below.
No: Go to next check point.
2. Print out the same image which caused the white line problem again after "2.
Countermeasure for Fusing Belt Error" has been done.
Problem is not solved: See "1. Countermeasure for Drum Problem" described below.
1. Countermeasure for Drum Problem
Symptom
White line occurs on outputs at 314 mm interval.
Problem point differs or problem does not occur depending on which color (YMCK) is
used.
Possible Cause
Charge error due to adhered NOx on the drum surface
Countermeasure
1. Execute "Clear blurred img" (SP2-810-001).
D095/M077 6-30 SM
Image Problems
2. Countermeasure for Fusing Belt Error
Symptom
Uneven glossiness occurs on outputs.
White line occurred on outputs is thick.
Possible Cause
Uneven surface of the fusing belt caused by the multiple printing (50 outputs or more) of
a same image
Countermeasure
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Select "20: 100% Coverage" test pattern for each color with SP2-109-002.
3. Select the following colors for printing with SP2-109-004 as shown below.
"0": Not selected, "1": Selected
[2] for "Cyan.” Press the "2" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[3] for "Magenta.” Press the "1" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[4] for "Yellow.” Press the "0" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
4. Press the "APL Window" button on the top of the LCD
shooting
Trouble-
5. Print a sample image 40 pages from a PC.
A sample page must include black color.
Size : A3/DLT (11x17), Duplex: on
Print a sample image in the largest printable size if paper sizes larger than A3/DLT
such as SRA3, 12x18, 13x18, etc are to be used by a client.
6. Check the outputs if the problem is solved. If not, try this procedure again.
SM 6-31 D095/M077
Image Problems
6.5.7 WHITE SCATTERED DOTS
If a white scattered dots image as shown above occurs on the outputs, do the following
countermeasures.
Before doing countermeasures
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Select "20: 100% Coverage" test pattern for each color with SP2-109-002.
Color select can be done with SP2-109-004 as shown below.
"0": Not selected, "1": Selected
[1] for "Black.” Press the "3" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[2] for "Cyan.” Press the "2" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[3] for "Magenta.” Press the "1" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
[4] for "Yellow.” Press the "0" key on the operation panel if you want to select this
color.
3. Print a sample image 40 pages from a PC.
A sample page must include black color.
Size : A3/DLT (11x17), Duplex: on
4. Check the output to decide a problem drum unit.
5. Do the following countermeasures for the problem drum unit.
D095/M077 6-32 SM
Image Problems
Countermeasures
1. Remove the adhered silica dust on the drum surface.
2. Clean or replace the drum cleaning unit.
6.5.8 BLACK SPOTS AT 125 MM INTERVAL
If black spots at 125 mm interval appear on the outputs, these black spots may be caused by
waste toner [A] adhered on the idle roller [B] against the ITB (Image Transfer Belt) cleaning
brush roller. Clean the idle roller [B] against the ITB cleaning brush roller.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-33 D095/M077
Image Problems
6.5.9 FUSING PROBLEM
Here are four common problems caused by the fusing unit. Do the following
countermeasures for the each fusing problem.
Paper Wrinkles/ Worm Tracks
Sample of Worm Tracks
Countermeasure
Decrease the fusing motor speed with SP1909.
If the fusing speed is decreased too much, SC524 may occur.
D095/M077 6-34 SM
Paper Problems
6.6 PAPER PROBLEMS
6.6.1 CONSECUTIVE JAM 38 (C JAM)
If JAM 38 occurs consecutive times for Thick paper printing (Paper size: LT/ A4 SEF, Paper
weight: 250 to 300 g/m3), change the paper orientation from SEF to LEF.
Jam code 38: This is detected when the fusing exit sensor does not detect paper after the
prescribed time has passed.
If less flexible thick A4/LT SEF paper is used, a sheet [A] of paper may be stopped
between the paper transfer roller [B] and the fusing rollers [C]. This is because the
sheet [A] of paper hangs on the PTR exit guide [D] and the fusing entrance guide [E]
and the paper transfer belt [F] does not move the sheet of paper to the fusing rollers
after it has been fed from the paper transfer roller. As a result, JAM38 can occur.
Changing the paper orientation from SEF to LEF can improve this.
[A]: Thick paper (SEF)
[B]: Paper transfer roller
shooting
[C]: Fusing rollers Trouble-
[D]: PTR exit guide
[E]: Fusing entrance guide
[F]: Paper transfer belt
SM 6-35 D095/M077
Paper Problems
6.6.2 COLOR PAPER AND PREPRINTED PAPER
If color paper or preprinted paper is used for this machine, the CIS adjustment function may
not work properly for adjusting the side-to-side registration. In this case, the side-to-side
registration adjustment is done with the following procedure.
1. Disable the side-to-side registration adjustment by CIS with "0105:Skew Detection" and
"0104:Auto Image Position Adjustment Across Feed Direction" (under "Adjustment
Settings for Operator" in the User Tools) for the paper feed tray.
2. Print a sample, and then adjust the side-to-side registration with SP2-113 or "0102:Adjust
Image Position Across Feed Direction" (under "Adjustment Settings for Operator" in the
User Tools) for the paper feed tray.
6.6.3 SMALL SIZE PAPER
If small size paper (paper width: 139.7 to 147 mm) is used and the printed image is shifted 2
to 3 mm from the center of a printout, the CIS adjustment function may not work properly for
adjusting the side-to-side registration. In this case, the side-to-side registration adjustment is
done with the following procedure.
1. Disable the side-to-side registration adjustment by CIS with "0105:Skew Detection" and
"0104:Auto Image Position Adjustment Across Feed Direction" (under "Adjustment
Settings for Operator" in the User Tools) for the paper feed tray.
2. Print a sample, and then adjust the side-to-side registration with SP2-113 or "0102:Adjust
Image Position Across Feed Direction" (under "Adjustment Settings for Operator" in the
User Tools) for the paper feed tray.
6.6.4 DOUBLE FEED PROBLEM FROM LCT (MAIN AND OPTION)
If double feed occurs several times when paper is fed from an LCT (tray 3, 4, 5, or 6), try the
following countermeasures.
Changing the "Wide LCT Fan Duty Adjustment" (SP1920-xxx)
Turning on the LCT Heater
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray
D095/M077 6-36 SM
Paper Problems
Changing the "Wide LCT Fan Duty Adjustment" (SP1920-xxx)
The LCTs (main and option) have two fans for air-assisted paper feed. Increasing the duty of
the fans can reduce the attraction between each sheet of paper and may reduce double feed
problems.
The setting values for the front and rear air assist fans must be the same value.
The default setting (70%) of SP1920-xxx is recommended for thin paper (60 to 71
g/cm3) and small size paper (B5 or less).
1. Enter the SP mode, and then select SP1920-xxx.
-001: Front air assist fan at A3 LCT Tray 3
-002: Rear air assist fan at A3 LCT Tray 4
-003: Front air assist fan at A3 LCT Tray 5
-004: Rear air assist fan at A3 LCT Tray 6
2. Increase the setting value of SP1920-xxx by 10% (default: 70%).
Print or copy a sample page, and then check if double feed occurs or not.
Retry the "Wide LCT Fan Duty Adjustment" if the following problems occur.
A paper jam occurs at the paper feed sensor in the LCT.
The double feed cannot be solved due to too much duty of the air assist fan.
Turning on the LCT Heater
The LCT heater can remove excessive humidity, and then reduce the attraction between
each sheet of paper.
For details about how to turn on the LCT heater, see Connecting the Upper and Lower
Tray Heaters in the section "p.2-14 "Mainframe.”
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-37 D095/M077
Paper Problems
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray can improve paper separation for
the paper stack in the LCT tray.
1. Pull the paper feed unit of the LCT unit (See "p.4-333 "Paper Feed, Pick-up and
Separation Rollers“).
2. Note the default position of the paper lift sensor bracket by referring to the scale [A] on
the frame.
The scale on the frame is divided into units of 1 mm.
3. Loosen the screw on the paper lift sensor bracket [B].
4. Move the bracket 0.5 mm in the arrow direction as shown above.
5. Tighten the screw on the paper lift sensor bracket [B].
To return the upper limit position to the default position, move the paper lift
sensor bracket 0.5 mm to the opposite side.
Return the upper limit position to the default if a paper jam occurs at the paper
feed sensor in the LCT.
6. This adjustment lowers the upper limit position by 0.8 mm.
D095/M077 6-38 SM
Paper Problems
[A]: Paper stack before adjustment
[B]: Paper stack after adjustment
6.6.5 NO PAPER FEED FROM LCT (MAIN AND OPTION)
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray can prevent paper non-feed from
the paper stack in the LCT tray.
1. Pull the paper feed unit of the LCT unit (See "p.4-333 "Paper Feed, Pick-up and
Separation Rollers").
2. Note the default position of the paper lift sensor bracket by referring to the scale [A] on
the frame.
The scale on the frame is divided into units of 1 mm.
3. Loosen the screw on the paper lift sensor bracket [B].
4. Move the bracket 0.5 mm in the arrow direction as shown above.
5. Tighten the screw on the paper lift sensor bracket [B].
shooting
Trouble-
To return the upper limit position to the default position, move the paper lift
sensor bracket 0.5 mm to the opposite side.
Return the upper limit position to the default if a paper jam occurs at the paper
feed sensor in the LCT.
SM 6-39 D095/M077
Paper Problems
6. This adjustment lifts the upper limit position by 0.8 mm.
[A]: Paper stack before adjustment
[B]: Paper stack after adjustment
D095/M077 6-40 SM
Operation Problems
6.7 OPERATION PROBLEMS
6.7.1 CLEARING SC 471, 475 OR 476
SC 471, 475 or 476 occurs when the ITB is out of the proper position. A physical adjustment
is required to clear the SC 471, 475 or 476 problem after all countermeasures for SC 471,
475 or 476 have failed.
1. Check the belt centering cam position with SP2-920-001 after the machine's warm-up
has completed.
If the checked cam position (number of steps) is within ± 20 steps, this adjustment is
not necessary. Try to find another countermeasure.
2. Open the left and right front door.
3. Remove the inner cover for the ITB unit drawer ( x 4).
4. Calculate how many notches on the scale to adjust, and check the adjustment direction
(+ or –) with the following formula.
Checked cam position (steps) / 18 = necessary adjustment notches
shooting
[A] indicates one notch. Trouble-
For example, if the checked cam position is –27, the necessary adjustment is –1.5
notches (–27 / 18 = –1.5).
5. Loosen the screw [B].
6. Move the adjustor [C] in the + or – direction by the necessary number of notches.
7. Tighten the screw [B] after this adjustment is completed.
8. Reassemble the machine.
SM 6-41 D095/M077
Operation Problems
6.7.2 ITB CONDITION CHECK
ITB condition check is required after installing a new ITB. Three ID/MUSIC sensors (front,
center and rear) check if there are scratches and dents on the ITB. After checking, detection
time is stored in each SP (SP2110-001/ -002/ -003).
Do the following procedure to check the ITB condition.
1. Turn on the mainframe.
2. Enter the "SP2110-004", and then press the "Execute" button on the LCD.
3. Check the following SPs.
SP2110-001 (Front)
SP2110-002 (Center)
SP2110-003 (Rear)
4. Some scratches or dents exist on the ITB if "1" is displayed in the one of the bits (e.g.
"00000001").
5. Reinstall the ITB in the opposite direction.
6. Do steps 2 and 3.
7. Check and clean the ID/Music sensors with a cloth and alcohol if "1" is still displayed in
one of the bits after reinstalling the ITB in the opposite direction.
8. Do steps 2 and 3 again.
6.7.3 STAPLING ERROR FOR FINISHER SR5000 (B830)
If a stapling error occurs due to static electricity on the paper when the SR5000 finisher is
used, install an additional discharge brush in the finisher.
1. Open the front door of the finisher, and then pull out the stapler tray unit [A].
2. Remove the inner cover [B] ( x 3, hooks).
3. Push the stapler tray unit into the finisher.
D095/M077 6-42 SM
Operation Problems
4. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 2).
5. Remove the front tension spring [A] of the paper exit guide plate [B].
shooting
Trouble-
6. Remove the rear tension spring [A] of the paper exit guide plate.
SM 6-43 D095/M077
Operation Problems
7. Remove the clip [A].
8. Move the paper exit guide plate [B] to the rear, and then remove it.
9. Remove the brackets [A] ( x 1 each) from the paper exit guide plate [B], and then
remove the discharge plate.
10. Remove the double sided tape from the discharge brush, and attach the discharge brush
[A] to the discharge plate [B] as shown above.
11. Reassemble the finisher.
D095/M077 6-44 SM
Operation Problems
6.7.4 REAR CONTROLLER BOX CONNECTION ERROR
Detaching the rear controller box from the main engine may be required at machine
installation depending on the customer's environment.
If incorrect connections between the rear controller box and main engine have been done
when reattaching the rear controller box, some SC or errors may occur.
Problem Cause
The connector pin structure of the upper cable group [A] and lower cable group [B] is the
same. As a result, incorrect connections can be done when reattaching the rear controller
box.
CN413 = CN416/ CN411 = CN414/ CN412 = CN415
1. Do not release or remove the clamps [C] when detaching the rear controller box. It is
possible to detach and attach the rear controller box without releasing or removing the
shooting
clamps [C]. Trouble-
2. Check if the cables with black bands [A] must be connected to the connectors [B]
(CN416/ CN414/ CN415).
SM 6-45 D095/M077
Operation Problems
Possible Cause List
Possible Cause Symptom
Wrong connections between CN413
and CN416
SC254 occurs when the machine is turned on.
Wrong connections between CN412
and CN415
Wrong connections between CN411
and CN414/ and between CN412
and CN415
SC254 occurs when power is switched ON.
Wrong connections between CN411
and CN414/ and between CN413and
CN416
Operation is normal after the machine is turned
on and printing operation is normal as well.
Wrong connection between CN411 The following SCs are logged (not displayed on
and CN414 the LCD) in the machine when process control is
executed.
SC424, S425, SC426 and SC427
Wrong connections between CN412
and CN415/ and between CN413and
CN416 Operation is normal after the machine is turned
on, but the output image is abnormal.
All connections are wrong.
SC410 occurs when process control is executed.
CN411 and CN414
CN412 and CN415
CN413 and CN416
SC161-01 is displayed on the LCD. Initial
CN410 disconnected
operation of the machine is normal.
CN418 disconnected SC202 is displayed on the LCD.
CN419 disconnected Initialization of the machine cannot be done.
D095/M077 6-46 SM
Operation Problems
"Please wait" appears on the LCD, but the
CN420 disconnected
machine cannot go to the next operation.
CN423 disconnected All indicators on the operation panel are flashing.
Bad connection between "GW
SC991 is displayed on the LCD.
Controller" and "Fiery Controller"
Abnormal Image when CN412 or CN415 is Disconnected
Incomplete connection of CN412
Here is a sample image if an abnormal image occurs on an output due to the incomplete
connection of CN412.
[A]: Abnormal image
[B]: Normal image
This abnormal image may be output when a full red color job is executed.
Incomplete connection of CN415
shooting
Trouble-
Here is a sample image if an abnormal image occurs on an output due to the incomplete
connection of CN415.
This abnormal image may be output when a full black color job is executed.
SM 6-47 D095/M077
Operation Problems
6.7.5 REMAINING TONER DETECTION ERROR
Toner supply error SC (SC332, 333, 334 or 335) or toner empty message is displayed on the
LCD even though none of the toner cartridges gets the toner near-end or toner end status.
This may be caused by clogged toner in the toner supply tube. Follow the cleaning procedure
for the toner supply tube at 400 K interval.
Cleaning Procedure for the Toner Supply Tube
1. Prepare a vacuum cleaner before starting this procedure.
2. Remove the all toner cartridges or pull them out on the half way from the toner hopper
unit.
3. Open the rear controller box.
4. Remove the toner supply tube [A].
5. Clean the toner supply tube [A] with a vacuum cleaner.
6. Reattach the toner supply tube.
7. Repeat steps from 4 to 6 for all colors.
8. Reattach the rear controller box.
9. Reinstall the all toner cartridge in the toner hopper unit.
D095/M077 6-48 SM
Operation Problems
6.7.6 OPERATION ERROR AFTER CONTROLLER SELECTION
The operation error may occur for each model (printer and copier) if the setting of the
controller selection (SP5-139-001) is set to "0.” The error symptom for each model is different.
Refer to the following recovery procedure for each model.
Recovery of "Please wait" for Printer Model
The printer never gets out of the "Please wait" condition.
1. Shut down the controller.
2. Turn off the machine.
3. Insert the "TEST PRINT TOOL V2" SD-card into SD slot 2.
4. Turn on the machine, and wait approximately 4 minutes while "Please Wait" still appears
on the operation panel.
5. Wait for the "TEST PRINT TOOL V2" menu to appear.
6. Enter the SP mode, and then select SP5-193-001.
7. Select "6" for the Fiery controller or "5" for the Creo controller with SP5-193-001.
8. Turn the machine off and on.
9. Turn on the controller, and then check if the machine operates correctly.
Recovery of No Communication with Controller for Copier Model
The copier never communicates with the controller.
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Select SP5-193-001.
3. Select "6" for the Fiery controller or "5" for the Creo controller with SP5-193-001.
4. Turn off the controller.
5. Turn off the machine and on.
shooting
6. Turn on the controller, and then check if the machine operates correctly. Trouble-
SM 6-49 D095/M077
Electrical Component Defects
6.8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
6.8.1 BROWN FUSE CONDITIONS
PSU Type-EA1
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
200V - 240V
The operation SW is lit, but the machine has no
FU001 3.15 A
response
The machine stops during warming-up and SC311 is
FU002 6.3 A
issued.
Fiery controller LED turns on, but the machine has no
FU3 4A
response.
PSU Type-EA2
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
200V - 240V
The operation SW is lit, but the machine has no
FU001 3.15 A
response
The machine stops during warming-up and SC328 is
FU002 6.3 A
issued.
The machine stops during warming-up and "Door
FU3 4A Open" is displayed. Even when the doors are closed,
"Door Open" still remains.
D095/M077 6-50 SM
Electrical Component Defects
PSU Type-EB
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
200V - 240V
The machine stops during warming-up and SC327 is
FU101 6.3 A
issued.
PSU Type-G
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
200V - 240V
The machine stops during warming-up and "Door
FU2 4A Open" is displayed. Even when the doors are closed,
"Door Open" still remains.
PSU Type-Controller
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
200V - 240V
shooting
Trouble-
FU1 3.15 A No response.
SM 6-51 D095/M077
Jam Detection Rev. 05/21/2012
6.9 JAM DETECTION
⇒ 6.9.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY
SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
CODE: Indicates the hexadecimal jam code.
SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code.
TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.
Paper Size Code
Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size
05h A4 LEF 8Dh B4 SEF
06h A5 LEF 8Eh B5 SEF
0Eh B5 LEF A0h DLT SEF
26h LT LEF A4h LG SEF
2Ch HLT LEF A6h LT SEF
84h A3 SEF ACh HLT SEF
85h A4 SEF AFh 12x18 SEF
86h A5 SEF 1Fh Custom
FFh Others
D095/M077 6-52 SM
Jam Detection
6.9.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES
SP7-504 and SP7-509 show how many jams occurred at each location. Jam codes from 001
to 255 correspond with the suffix number of SP7-504 (e.g. Jam code 001 corresponds with
SP7-504-001) and Jam codes from 256 to 396 correspond with the suffix number of SP7-509
by the following formula.
Suffix number of SP7-509 = Jam code (256 to 396) - 255 (e.g. Jam code 256
corresponds with SP7-509-001)
The following jam code and display code table is used for the printer models (M077) and
copier models (D095).
"P only" denotes that its jam code is used only for the printer models (M077).
Mainframe
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
-001 At power on Initial paper jam -
-003 Paper feed sensor 1: Late Paper is not fed from tray 1. A3
-004 Paper feed sensor 2: Late Paper is not fed from tray 2. A2
-006 Paper feed sensor 3 (A4 Paper is not fed from the upper tray
U2
(P only) LCT): Late of the A4 LCT.
-007 Paper feed sensor 4 (A4 Paper is not fed from the middle
shooting
U4 Trouble-
(P only) LCT): Late tray of the A4 LCT.
-008 Paper feed sensor 5 (A4 Paper is not fed from the lower tray
U5
(P only) LCT): Late of the A4 LCT.
Paper feed sensor Paper is not fed from the by-pass
-009 V
(By-pass): Late tray.
Paper feed sensor upper Paper is not fed from the upper tray
-010 U2
(A3 LCT1): Late of the A3 LCT or LCT-MF.
Paper feed sensor lower Paper is not fed from the lower tray
-011 U4
(A3 LCT1): Late of the A3 LCT or LCT-MF.
SM 6-53 D095/M077
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Paper feed sensor upper Paper is not fed from the upper tray
-012 U2
(A3 LCT2): Late of the A3 LCT.
Paper feed sensor lower Paper is not fed from the lower tray
-013 U4
(A3 LCT2): Late of the A3 LCT.
Vertical Transport Sensor Vertical transport sensor 1 does not
-014 A
1: Late detect paper from tray 1.
Vertical Transport Sensor Vertical transport sensor 1 does not
-015 A
2: Late detect paper from tray 2.
-017 Grip Sensor 1 does not detect
Grip Sensor 1: Late B
(P only) paper.
-018 Grip Sensor 2 does not detect
Grip Sensor 2: Late B
(P only) paper.
-019 Grip Sensor 3 does not detect
Grip Sensor 3: Late B
(P only) paper.
Relay sensor (By-pass):
-020 - V
Late
LCT Grip Sensor 1 (A3 LCT grip sensor 1 (A3 LCT1) does
-021 U, U2
LCT1): Late not detect paper.
LCT Grip Sensor 2 (A3 LCT grip sensor 2 (A3 LCT1) does
-022 U, U4
LCT1): Late not detect paper.
LCT Grip Sensor 1 (A3 LCT grip sensor 1 (A3 LCT2) does
-023 U, U2
LCT2): Late not detect paper.
LCT Grip Sensor 2 (A3 LCT grip sensor 2 (A3 LCT2) does
-024 U, U4
LCT2): Late not detect paper.
-025 Relay sensor (A4 LCT):
- U
(P only) Late
LCT vertical transport LCT vertical transport sensor 3 (A3
-026 U
sensor 3 (A3 LCT1): Late LCT1) does not detect paper.
D095/M077 6-54 SM
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
LCT vertical transport LCT vertical transport sensor 1 (A3
-027 U
sensor 1 (A3 LCT1): Late LCT1) does not detect paper.
LCT vertical transport LCT vertical transport sensor 2 (A3
-028 U
sensor 2 (A3 LCT1): Late LCT1) does not detect paper.
LCT vertical transport LCT vertical transport sensor 1 (A3
-029 U
sensor 1 (A3 LCT2): Late LCT2) does not detect paper.
LCT vertical transport LCT vertical transport sensor 2 (A3
-030 U
sensor 2 (A3 LCT2): Late LCT2) does not detect paper.
-031 LCT exit sensor (A4 LCT): LCT exit sensor (A4 LCT) does not
U
(P only) Late detect paper.
Registration entrance Registration entrance sensor does
-033 B4
sensor: Late not detect paper.
LCT entrance sensor does not
-034 LCT entrance sensor: Late B5
detect paper.
Registration timing sensor: Registration timing sensor does not
-035 B6
Late detect paper.
PTR timing sensor does not detect
-036 PTR timing sensor: Late B6
paper.
shooting
PTB jam sensor does not detect Trouble-
-037 PTB jam sensor: Late C
paper.
Fusing exit sensor does not detect
-038 Fusing exit sensor: Late D1
paper.
Exit junction timing sensor: Exit junction timing sensor does not
-039 D2
Late detect paper.
Paper exit sensor does not detect
-040 Paper exit sensor: Late D2
paper.
Switchback sensor does not detect
-041 Switchback sensor: Late D3
paper.
SM 6-55 D095/M077
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Duplex transport sensor 1: Duplex transport sensor 1 does not
-042 Z1
Late detect paper.
Duplex transport sensor 2: Duplex transport sensor 2 does not
-043 Z1
Late detect paper.
Duplex transport sensor 3: Duplex transport sensor 3 does not
-044 Z4
Late detect paper.
Duplex transport sensor 4: Duplex entrance sensor 4 does not
-045 Z4
Late detect paper.
Paper feed sensor 1: Stay Paper feed sensor 1 does not turn
-053 A3
on off.
Paper feed sensor 2: Stay Paper feed sensor 2 does not turn
-054 A2
on off.
-056 Paper feed sensor upper Paper feed sensor upper (A4 LCT)
U2
(P only) (A4 LCT): Stay on does not turn off.
-057 Paper feed sensor middle Paper feed sensor middle (A4 LCT)
U4
(P only) (A4 LCT): Stay on does not turn off.
-058 Paper feed sensor lower Paper feed sensor lower (A4 LCT)
U5
(P only) (A4 LCT): Stay on does not turn off.
Paper feed sensor Paper feed sensor (By-pass) does
-059 V
(By-pass): Stay on not turn off.
Paper feed sensor upper Paper feed sensor upper (A3
-060 U2
(A3 LCT1): Stay on LCT1) does not turn off.
Paper feed sensor lower Paper feed sensor lower (A3 LCT1)
-061 U4
(A3 LCT1): Stay on does not turn off.
Paper feed sensor upper Paper feed sensor upper (A3
-062 U2
(A3 LCT2): Stay on LCT2) does not turn off.
Paper feed sensor lower Paper feed sensor lower (A3 LCT2)
-063 U4
(A3 LCT2): Stay on does not turn off.
D095/M077 6-56 SM
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Vertical Transport Sensor Vertical transport sensor 1 does not
-064 A
1: Stay on turn off.
Vertical Transport Sensor Vertical transport sensor 2 does not
-065 A
2: Stay on turn off.
-067 4th transport sensor (A4 4th transport sensor (A4 LCT) does
U2
(P only) LCT): Stay on not turn off.
-068 5th transport sensor (A4 5th transport sensor (A4 LCT) does
U4
(P only) LCT): Stay on not turn off.
-069 6th transport sensor (A4 6th transport sensor (A4 LCT) does
U5
(P only) LCT): Stay on not turn off.
Relay sensor (By-pass): Relay sensor (By-pass) does not
-070 U
Stay on turn off.
LCT Grip Sensor 1 (A3 LCT Grip Sensor 1 (A3 LCT1) does
-071 U, U2
LCT1): Stay on not turn off.
LCT Grip Sensor 2 (A3 LCT Grip Sensor 2 (A3 LCT1) does
-072 U, U2
LCT1): Stay on not turn off.
LCT Grip Sensor 1 (A3 LCT Grip Sensor 1 (A3 LCT2) does
-073 U, U2
LCT2): Stay on not turn off.
shooting
LCT Grip Sensor 2 (A3 LCT Grip Sensor 2 (A3 LCT2) does Trouble-
-074 U, U2
LCT2): Stay on not turn off.
-075 Relay sensor (A4 LCT): Relay sensor (A4 LCT) does not
U
(P only) Stay on turn off.
LCT vertical transport
LCT vertical transport sensor 3 (A3
-076 sensor 3 (A3 LCT1): Stay U
LCT1) does not turn off.
on
LCT vertical transport
LCT vertical transport sensor 1 (A3
-077 sensor 1 (A3 LCT1): Stay U
LCT1) does not turn off.
on
SM 6-57 D095/M077
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
LCT vertical transport
LCT vertical transport sensor 2 (A3
-078 sensor 2 (A3 LCT1): Stay U
LCT1) does not turn off.
on
LCT vertical transport
LCT vertical transport sensor 1 (A3
-079 sensor 1 (A3 LCT2): Stay U
LCT2) does not turn off.
on
LCT vertical transport
LCT vertical transport sensor 2 (A3
-080 sensor 2 (A3 LCT2): Stay U
LCT2) does not turn off.
on
-081 LCT exit sensor (A4 LCT): LCT exit sensor (A4 LCT) does not
U
(P only) Stay on turn off.
Registration entrance Registration entrance sensor does
-083 B4
sensor: Stay on not turn off.
LCT entrance sensor: Stay LCT entrance sensor does not turn
-084 B5
on off.
Registration timing sensor: Registration timing sensor does not
-085 B6
Stay on turn off.
PTR timing sensor does not turn
-086 PTR timing sensor: Stay on B6
off.
-087 PTB jam sensor: Stay on PTR jam sensor does not turn off. C
Fusing exit sensor does not turn
-088 Fusing exit sensor: Stay on D1
off.
Exit junction timing sensor: Exit junction timing sensor does not
-089 D2
Stay on turn off.
-090 Paper exit sensor: Stay on Paper exit sensor does not turn off. D2
Switchback sensor: Stay Switchback sensor does not turn
-091 D3
on off.
-092 Duplex transport sensor 1: Duplex transport sensor 1 does not Z1
D095/M077 6-58 SM
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Stay on turn off.
Duplex transport sensor 2: Duplex transport sensor 2 does not
-093 Z1
Stay on turn off.
Duplex transport sensor 3: Duplex transport sensor 3 does not
-094 Z4
Stay on turn off.
Duplex transport sensor 4: Duplex transport sensor 4 does not
-095 Z4
Stay on turn off.
Switchback lower sensor does not
-097 Switchback Sensor E
turn off.
-098 CIS: Skew Detection CIS does not turn off. B6
Double-feed Sensor does not turn
-099 Double-feed Sensor B6
off.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-59 D095/M077
Jam Detection
Finisher SR5000 (B830)
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Entrance Sensor - Fin.: Entrance sensor does not detect
-101 R1 to R3
Paper late error paper.
Entrance Sensor - Fin.
-102 Entrance sensor does not turn off. R1 to R3
(Stay On): Paper lag error
Upper Tray Exit Sensor - Upper tray exit sensor does not
-103 R1 to R3
Fin: Paper late error detect paper.
Upper Tray Exit Sensor -
Upper tray exit sensor does not
-104 Fin (Stay On): Paper lag R1 to R3
turn off.
error
Shift Tray Exit Sensor - Fin: Shift tray exit sensor does not
-105 R1 to R3
Paper late error detect paper.
Shift Tray Exit Sensor - Fin Shift tray exit sensor does not turn
-106 R1 to R3
(Stay On): Paper lag error off.
Staple Tray Exit Sensor - Staple tray exit sensor does not
-107 R4 to R8
Fin: Paper late error detect paper.
Staple Tray Exit Sensor -
Staple tray exit sensor does not
-108 Fin (Stay On): Paper lag R4 to R8
turn off.
error
Staple Tray Paper Sensor - Staple tray paper sensor does not
-109 R4 to R8
Fin: Paper late error detect paper.
Staple Tray Paper Sensor -
Staple tray paper sensor does not
-110 Fin (Stay On): Paper lag R4 to R8
turn off.
error
Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Stack feed-out belt HP sensor does
-111 R4 to R8
Sensor not turn off.
-112 Transport Motors The machine detects a lock signal R1 to R3
D095/M077 6-60 SM
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
from the transport motors.
The machine detects a lock signal
-113 Shift Tray Lift Motor R1 to R3
from the shift tray lift motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-114 Jogger Motor R4 to R8
from the jogger motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-115 Shift Motor R1 to R3
from the shift motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-116 Staple Motor R4 to R8
from the staple motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-117 Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor R4 to R8
from the stack feed-out belt motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-118 Punch Motor R1 to R3
from the punch motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-119 Z-Fold Jam - Fin R4 to R8
from the Z-hold jam motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-120 Pre-Stack Transport Motor from the pre-stack transport jam R4 to R8
motor.
shooting
The machine detects the job data Trouble-
-121 Abnormal Signal - Fin R1 to R3
error.
The machine detects the jam signal
-122 Upper Stopper Motor Lock Ploc
from the Plockmatic unit.
SM 6-61 D095/M077
Jam Detection
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010 (B835)
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
1st Paper Feed Sensor - 1st paper feed sensor does not
-130 Q1
Late detect paper.
1st Paper Feed Sensor - 1st paper feed sensor does not turn
-131 Q1
Lag off.
2nd Paper Feed Sensor - 2nd paper feed sensor does not
-132 Q2
Late detect paper.
2nd Paper Feed Sensor - 2nd paper feed sensor does not
-133 Q2
Lag turn off.
1st transport sensor does not Q3 to
-134 1st Transport Sensor - Late
detect paper. Q4
1st transport sensor does not turn Q3 to
-135 1st Transport Sensor - Lag
off. Q4
2nd Transport Sensor - 2nd transport sensor does not Q3 to
-136
Late detect paper. Q4
2nd transport sensor does not turn Q3 to
-137 2nd Transport Sensor - Lag
off. Q4
1st Vertical Transport 1st vertical transport sensor does Q3 to
-138
Sensor - Late not detect paper. Q4
1st Vertical Transport 1st vertical transport sensor does Q3 to
-139
Sensor - Lag not turn off. Q4
2nd Vertical Transport 2nd vertical transport sensor does Q3 to
-140
Sensor - Late not detect paper. Q4
2nd Vertical Transport 2nd vertical transport sensor does Q3 to
-141
Sensor - Lag not turn off. Q4
Vertical exit sensor does not detect Q3 to
-142 Vertical Exit Sensor - Late
paper. Q4
D095/M077 6-62 SM
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Vertical exit sensor does not turn Q3 to
-143 Vertical Exit Sensor - Lag
off. Q4
Entrance sensor does not detect Q3 to
-144 Entrance Sensor - Late
paper. Q4
Q3 to
-145 Entrance Sensor - Lag Entrance sensor does not turn off.
Q4
Q3 to
-146 Exit Sensor - Late Exit sensor does not detect paper.
Q4
Q3 to
-147 Exit Sensor - Lag Exit sensor does not turn off.
Q4
The machine detects a lock signal
-148 1st Lift Motor Q1
from the 1st lift motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-149 2nd Lift Motor Q2
from the 2nd lift motor
The machine detects a lock signal
-150 1st Pick-Up Motor Q1
from the 1st pick-up motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-151 2nd Pick-Up Motor Q2
from the 2nd pick-up motor
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-63 D095/M077
Jam Detection
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434)
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Entrance: Late Error Entrance sensor does not detect Rb1 to
-160
(D434) paper. Rb5
Rb1 to
-161 Entrance: Lag Error (D434) Entrance sensor does not turn off.
Rb5
Proof Tray Exit: Late Error Proof tray exit sensor does not Rb1 to
-162
(D434) detect paper. Rb5
Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error Proof tray exit sensor does not turn Rb1 to
-163
(D434) off. Rb5
Shift Tray Exit: Late Error Shift tray exit sensor does not Rb1 to
-164
(D434) detect paper. Rb5
Shift Tray Exit: Lag Error Shift tray exit sensor does not turn Rb1 to
-165
(D434) off. Rb5
Staple Tray Exit: Late Error Stapling tray paper sensor does not Rb6 to
-166
(D434) detect paper. Rb8
Staple Tray Exit: Lag Error Stapling tray paper sensor does not Rb10 to
-167
(D434) turn off. Rb17
Pre-Stack Tray: Late Error Pre-stack paper sensor does not Rb6 to
-168
(D434) detect paper. Rb9
Pre-Stack Tray: Lag Error Pre-stack paper sensor does not Rb6 to
-169
(D434) turn off. Rb9
Booklet unit exit sensor detects a Rb10 to
-170 Output (D434)
paper jam. Rb17
Booklet Stapler: Late Fold unit entrance sensor does not Rb10 to
-171
(D434) detect paper. Rb17
Booklet Stapler: Lag Fold unit entrance sensor does not Rb10 to
-172
(D434) turn off. Rb17
D095/M077 6-64 SM
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Booklet Stapler Exit: Late Fold unit exit sensor does not Rb10 to
-173
(D434) detect paper. Rb17
Booklet Stapler Exit: Lag Fold unit exit sensor does not turn Rb10 to
-174
(D434) off. Rb17
The machine detects an error
signal from the stapler JG HP
Rb1 to
-175 Paper Path (D434) sensor or proof tray HP JG sensor
Rb5
or a lock signal from the transport
motors.
The machine detects an error
Shift Tray Lift Drive Train Rb1 to
-176 signal from the paper height
(D434) Rb5
sensors.
The machine detects an error
Jogger Fence Drive Train Rb10 to
-177 signal from the jogger fence HP
(D434) Rb17
sensors or top fence HP sensor
The machine detects an error
signal from the exit guide HP
sensor, shift tray HP sensors, shift Rb1 to
-178 Shift Drive Train (D434)
tray jogger HP sensor, shift tray Rb5
jogger retract HP sensor or drag
shooting
roller HP sensor. Trouble-
The machine detects an error
signal from the corner stapler HP
Rb10 to
-179 Stapler Drive Train (D434) sensor, stapler rotation HP sensors,
Rb17
bottom fence HP sensor or stapler
HP sensor.
The machine detects an error
Stack Output Drive Train Rb10 to
-180 signal from the stack feed-out belt
(D434) Rb17
HP sensor
The machine detects an error Rb1 to
-181 Punch Drive Train (D434)
signal from the punch blade HP Rb5
SM 6-65 D095/M077
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
sensor, punch unit HP sensor or
punch SW.
The machine detects an error
signal from the stack plate HP Rb10 to
-182 Jogger System (D434)
sensors or positioning roller HP Rb17
sensor
The machine detects an error
Pre-Stacker Drive Train Rb6 to
-183 signal from the pre-stack roller HP
(D434) Rb9
sensor.
The machine detects an error
Rb10 to
-184 Booklet Path (D434) signal from the stack transport unit
Rb17
HP sensor or stack JG HP sensor.
The machine detects an error
signal from the booklet top fence
Booklet Stapling System HP sensor, booklet stapler jogger Rb10 to
-185
(D434) HP sensors, booklet stapler bottom Rb17
fence HP sensor or booklet stapler
unit.
The machine detects an error
signal from the fold plate cam HP
Rb10 to
-186 Folding System (D434) sensor, fold plate HP sensor or
Rb17
booklet stapler clamp roller HP
sensor.
The machine detects an error
Main Machine Setting Rb1 to
-187 signal of the communication with an
Incorrect (D434) Rb5
upstream unit.
D095/M077 6-66 SM
Jam Detection
Z-folding Unit ZF4000 (B660)
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
-200 Feed Sensor - Late Feed sensor does not detect paper. N1
-201 Feed Sensor - Lag Feed sensor does not turn off. N1
Fold timing sensor does not detect
-202 Fold Timing Sensor - Late N2, N3
paper.
Fold timing sensor does not turn
-203 Fold Timing Sensor - Lag N2, N3
off.
Leading Edge Sensor - Leading edge sensor does not
-204 N2, N3
Late detect paper.
Leading edge sensor does not turn
-205 Leading Edge Sensor - Lag N2, N3
off.
Upper Stopper HP Sensor - Upper stopper HP sensor does not
-206 N2, N3
Late detect paper.
Upper Stopper HP Sensor - Upper stopper HP sensor does not
-207 N2, N3
Lag turn off.
Upper exit sensor 1 does not detect
-208 Upper Exit Sensor 1 - Late N1
paper.
shooting
Trouble-
Upper exit sensor 1 does not turn
-209 Upper Exit Sensor 1 - Lag N1
off.
Lower exit sensor 2 does not detect
-212 Lower Exit Sensor 2 - Late N2, N3
paper.
Lower exit sensor 2 does not turn
-213 Lower Exit Sensor 2 - Lag N2, N3
off.
The machine detects a lock signal
-214 Feed Motor N1
from the feed motor.
-215 Lower Stopper Motor The machine detects a lock signal N2, N3
SM 6-67 D095/M077
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
from the lower stopper motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-216 Upper Stopper Motor N2, N3
from the upper stopper motor.
D095/M077 6-68 SM
Jam Detection
Trimmer Unit TR5020 (D455)
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Entrance Sensor: Late Entrance sensor does not detect
-220 Rt1, Rt2
Error (D455) paper.
Entrance Sensor: Lag Error
-221 Entrance sensor does not turn off. Rt1, Rt2
(D455)
Skew Sensor: Late Error Stopper sensor does not detect
-222 Rt1, Rt2
(D455) paper.
Skew Sensor: Lag Error
-223 Stopper sensor does not turn off. Rt1, Rt2
(D455)
Exit Sensor: Late Error
-224 Exit sensor does not detect paper. Rt1, Rt2
(D455)
Exit Sensor: Lag Error
-225 Exit sensor does not turn off. Rt1, Rt2
(D455)
Trimming Blade Motor The machine detects a lock signal
-226 Rt1, Rt2
Lock (D455) from the trimming blade motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-227 Cut Position Motor (D455) Rt1, Rt2
from the cut position motor.
shooting
Trouble-
The machine detects a lock signal
-228 Press Roller (D455) Rt1, Rt2
from the press roller motor.
Press/Stopper Roller The machine detects a lock signal
-229 Rt1, Rt2
(D455) from the press stopper motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
-230 Tray Motor (D455) Rt1, Rt2
from the tray motor.
SM 6-69 D095/M077
Jam Detection
High Capacity Stacker SK5000 (D447)
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Entrance: Late Error Entrance sensor (stacker 1) does
-250 L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) not detect paper.
Entrance: Lag Error Entrance sensor (stacker 1) does
-251 L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) not turn off
Proof Tray Exit: Late Error Proof tray exit sensor (stacker 1)
-252 L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) does not detect paper.
Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error Proof tray exit sensor (stacker 1)
-253 L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) does not turn off.
Stack Tray Exit: Late Error Shift tray exit sensor (stacker 1)
-254 L6
(Stacker 1) does not detect paper.
Stack Tray Exit: Lag Error Shift tray exit sensor (stacker 1)
-255 L6
(Stacker 1) does not turn off.
Relay Path: Late Error Transport sensor (stacker 1) does
-256 L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) not detect paper.
Relay Path: Lag Error Transport sensor (stacker 1) does
-257 L1 to L5
(Stacker 1) not turn off.
Straight-Through Exit: Late Exit sensor (stacker 1) does not
-258 L1 to L5
Error (Stacker 1) detect paper.
Straight-Through Exit: Lag Exit sensor (stacker 1) does not
-259 L1 to L5
Error (Stacker 1) turn off.
The machine detects a lock signal
-260 Shift JG Motor (Stacker 1) L6
from the shift JG motor (stacker 1).
D095/M077 6-70 SM
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
The machine detects a lock signal
Proof Tray JG Motor
-261 from the proof tray JG motor L6
(Stacker 1)
(stacker 1).
The machine detects a lock signal
-262 Shift Motor (Stacker 1) from the shift roller motor (stacker L6
1).
The machine detects a lock signal
Front Jogger Fence Motor
-263 from the main jogger front motor L6
(Stacker 1)
(stacker 1).
The machine detects a lock signal
Rear Jogger Fence Motor
-264 from the main jogger rear motor L6
(Stacker 1)
(stacker 1).
The machine detects a lock signal
Jogger Fence Retraction
-265 from the main jogger fence L6
Mtr (Stacker 1)
retraction motor (stacker 1).
The machine detects a lock signal
Sub Jogger Motor (Stacker
-266 from the sub jogger motor (stacker L6
1)
1).
The machine detects a lock signal
shooting
LE Stopper Motor (Stacker Trouble-
-267 from the LE stopper motor (stacker L6
1)
1).
The machine detects a lock signal
-268 Tray Lift Motor (Stacker 1) L6
from the tray lift motor (stacker 1).
The machine detects an error
Main Machine Setting signal from the stacker due to the
-269 L6
Incorrect (Stacker 1) incorrect request sent by the
mainframe.
Entrance: Late Error Entrance sensor (stacker 2) does
-270 L1 to L5
(Stacker 2) not detect paper.
SM 6-71 D095/M077
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Entrance: Lag Error Entrance sensor (stacker 2) does
-271 L1 to L5
(Stacker 2) not turn off
Proof Tray Exit: Late Error Proof tray exit sensor (stacker 2)
-272 L1 to L5
(Stacker 2) does not detect paper.
Proof Tray Exit: Lag Error Proof tray exit sensor (stacker 2)
-273 L1 to L5
(Stacker 2) does not turn off.
Stack Tray Exit: Late Error Shift tray exit sensor (stacker 2)
-274 L6
(Stacker 2) does not detect paper.
Stack Tray Exit: Lag Error Shift tray exit sensor (stacker 2)
-275 L6
(Stacker 2) does not turn off.
Relay Path: Late Error Transport sensor (stacker 2) does
-276 L1 to L5
(Stacker 2) not detect paper.
Relay Path: Lag Error Transport sensor (stacker 2) does
-277 L1 to L5
(Stacker 2) not turn off.
Straight-Through Exit: Late Exit sensor (stacker 2) does not
-278 L1 to L5
Error(Stacker 2) detect paper.
Straight-Through Exit: Lag Exit sensor (stacker 2) does not
-279 L1 to L5
Error(Stacker 2) turn off.
The machine detects a lock signal
-280 Shift JG Motor (Stacker 2) L6
from the shift JG motor (stacker 2).
The machine detects a lock signal
Proof Tray JG Motor
-281 from the proof tray JG motor L6
(Stacker 2)
(stacker 2).
The machine detects a lock signal
-282 Shift Motor (Stacker 2) from the shift roller motor (stacker L6
2).
The machine detects a lock signal
Front Jogger Fence Motor
-283 from the main jogger front motor L6
(Stacker 2)
(stacker 2).
D095/M077 6-72 SM
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
The machine detects a lock signal
Rear Jogger Fence Motor
-284 from the main jogger rear motor L6
(Stacker 2)
(stacker 2).
The machine detects a lock signal
Jogger Fence Retraction
-285 from the main jogger fence L6
Mtr (Stacker 2)
retraction motor (stacker 2).
The machine detects a lock signal
Sub Jogger Motor (Stacker
-286 from the sub jogger motor (stacker L6
2)
2).
The machine detects a lock signal
LE Stopper Motor (Stacker
-287 from the LE stopper motor (stacker L6
2)
2).
The machine detects a lock signal
-288 Tray Lift Motor (Stacker 2) L6
from the tray lift motor (stacker 2).
The machine detects an error
Main Machine Setting signal from the stacker (stacker 2)
-289 L6
Incorrect (Stacker 2) due to the incorrect request sent by
the mainframe.
shooting
Trouble-
SM 6-73 D095/M077
Jam Detection
Perfect Binder (D391)
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
The machine detects a job data
-300 P-Binder:Job Data Error Mk6
error.
P-Binder:S-Through Exit S-Through exit sensor does not
-301 Mk7 to 8
Sn:Late detect paper.
P-Binder:S-Through Exit S-Through exit sensor does not
-302 Mk8
Sn:Stay on turn off.
P-Binder:Cover Regist Cover registration sensor does not
-303 Mk9, Mk10
Sn:Late detect paper.
P-Binder:Cover Regist Cover registration sensor does not
-304 Mk9, Mk10
Sn:Stay on turn off.
P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. S Cover horizontal registration S
-305 Mk9, Mk10
Sn:Late sensor does not detect paper.
P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. S Cover horizontal registration S
-306 Mk9, Mk10
Sn:Stay on sensor does not turn off.
P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. L Cover horizontal registration L
-307 Mk9, Mk10
Sn:Late sensor does not detect paper.
P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. L Cover horizontal registration L
-308 Mk9, Mk10
Sn:Stay on sensor does not turn off.
Entrance sensor does not detect
-309 P-Binder:Entrance Sn:Late Mk11
paper.
P-Binder:Entrance Sn:Stay
-310 Entrance sensor does not turn off. Mk11, Mk12
on
P-Binder:Sign. Path: Sn Signature path sensor 1 does not
-311 Mk11, Mk12
1:Late detect paper.
P-Binder:Sign. Path: Sn Signature path sensor 1 does not Mk3 to 5,
-312
1:Stay on turn off. Mk12
D095/M077 6-74 SM
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
P-Binder:Sign. Path: Sn Signature path sensor 2 does not Mk3 to 5,
-313
2:Late detect paper. Mk12
P-Binder:Sign. Path: Sn Signature path sensor 2 does not
-314 Mk3 to 5
2:Stay on turn off.
Timing sensor does not detect
-315 P-Binder:Timing Sn:Late Mk3 to 5
paper.
P-Binder:Timing Sn:Stay
-316 Timing sensor does not turn off. Mk3 to 5
on
P-Binder:Stck Tray Emp. Stack tray empty sensor does not
-317 Mk3 to 5
Sn:Late detect paper.
P-Binder:Stck Tray Emp. Stack tray empty sensor does not
-318 Mk3 to 5
Sn:Stay on turn off.
P-Binder:SG Paper Sub grip paper sensor does not
-319 Mk3 to 5
Sn:Late detect paper.
P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn Cover path sensor 1 does not
-320 Mk9 to 11
1:Late detect paper.
P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn Cover path sensor 1 does not turn Mk7, Mk9,
-321
1:Stay on off. Mk10
shooting
P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn Cover path sensor 2 does not Mk7, Mk9, Trouble-
-322
2:Late detect paper. Mk10
P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn Cover path sensor 2 does not turn
-323 Mk7
2:Stay on off.
P-Binder:Cover Reg. Cover registration sensor does not
-324 Mk9 to 11
Sn:Late detect paper.
P-Binder:Cover Reg. Cover registration sensor does not
-325 Mk9 to 11
Sn:Stay on turn off.
Inserter: Entrance sensor does not
-326 P-B/Inserter:Com. Sn:Late -
detect paper.
SM 6-75 D095/M077
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
P-B/Inserter:Com. Sn:Stay Inserter: Entrance sensor does not Mk3 to 5,
-327
on stay on. Mk12
P-B/Inserter:U-Tray P-up Inserter: Separation sensor: tray A
-328 Mk1
Sn:Late does not detect paper.
P-B/Inserter:U-Tray P-up Inserter: Separation sensor: tray A
-329 Mk1
Sn:Stay on does not stay on.
P-B/Inserter:L-Tray P-up Inserter: Separation sensor: tray B
-330 Mk1
Sn:Late does not detect paper.
P-B/Inserter:L-Tray P-up Inserter: Separation sensor: tray B
-331 -
Sn:Stay on does not stay on.
P-B/Inserter:Trans. Sn Inserter: Vertical transport sensor 1
-332 Mk1
1:Late does not detect paper.
P-B/Inserter:Trans. Sn Inserter: Vertical transport sensor 1
-333 Mk1
1:Stay on does not stay on.
P-B/Inserter:Trans. Sn Inserter: Vertical transport sensor 2
-334 Mk2
2:Late does not detect paper.
P-B/Inserter:Trans. Sn Inserter: Vertical transport sensor 2
-335 Mk2
2:Stay on does not stay on.
P-B/Relay:Transport Relay: Transport sensor does not
-336 Mk6
Sn:Late detect paper.
P-B/Relay:Transport Relay: Transport sensor does not
-337 Mk6, Mk11
Sn:Stay on stay on
D095/M077 6-76 SM
Jam Detection
Ring Binder RB5000 (D392)
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Entrance sensor does not detect
-350 R-Binder:Entrance Sn:Late Mc1, Mc2
paper.
R-Binder:Entrance Sn:Stay
-351 Entrance sensor does not turn off. Mc1, Mc2
on
R-Binder:Transport Transport sensor does not detect
-352 Mc3, Mc4
Sn:Late paper.
R-Binder:Transport
-353 Transport sensor does not turn off. Mc3, Mc4
Sn:Stay on
-354 R-Binder:Exit Sn:Late Exit sensor does not detect paper. Mc3, Mc4
-355 R-Binder:Exit Sn:Stay on Exit sensor does not turn off. Mc3, Mc4
Pre-punch jogger trigger sensor
-356 R-Binder:Pre-punch Jam Mc5, Mc6
does not turn off.
Binder delivery sensor does not
-357 R-Binder:After-Punch Jam Mc5, Mc6
turn off.
R-Binder:P TE Detect Sn Paper LE detect sensor does not
-358 Mc7, Mc8
Jam turn off.
shooting
Trouble-
R-Binder:P LE Detect Sn Paper LE detect sensor does not
-359 Mc7, Mc8
Jam detect paper.
-360 R-Binder:Ring Error Jam The machine detects a ring error. Mc7, Mc8
R-Binder:Binder Unit Set The machine cannot detect the
-361 Mc7, Mc8
Jam binder unit.
R-Binder:Output Belt 1 Output belt 1 HP sensor does not
-362 Mc9
Jam turn off.
R-Binder:Output Belt 2 Output belt 2 HP sensor does not
-363 Mc9
Jam turn off.
SM 6-77 D095/M077
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
The machine detects an error at the
-364 R-Binder:Stacker Jam Mc10
stacker unit.
R-Binder:Punch Motor The machine detects a lock signal
-365 Mc5, Mc6
Error from the punch motor.
R-Binder:Shutter Motor The machine detects a lock signal
-366 Mc7, Mc8
Error from the shutter motor.
R-Binder:Line-up Pin M The machine detects a lock signal
-367 Mc7, Mc8
Error from the alignment pin motor.
The machine detects an error
-368 R-Binder:Paper Jog Error signal from the pre-punch jogger Mc5, Mc6
unit.
The machine detects an error
-369 R-Binder:Line-up Pin Error Mc7, Mc8
signal from the pre-bind jogger unit.
R-Binder:Clamp Motor The machine detects a lock signal
-370 Mc7, Mc8
Error from the clamp motor.
The machine detects a lock signal
R-Binder:50/100 Adj. M
-371 from the 50/100 clamp Mc7, Mc8
Error
adjust motor.
R-Binder:Out-Belt Rot. M The machine detects a lock signal
-372 Mc9
Error from the output belt rotation motor.
The machine detects the job data
-373 R-Binder:Job Data Error Mc
error.
D095/M077 6-78 SM
Jam Detection
Buffer Pass Unit (M379)
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Transport sensor 1 does not detect
-380 Kc1
Sensor 1: Late paper.
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay
-381 Transport sensor 1 does not turn off. Kc1
Sensor 1: Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Transport sensor 2 does not detect
-382 Kc2
Sensor 2: Late paper.
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay
-383 Transport sensor 2 does not turn off. Kc2
Sensor 2: Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Transport sensor 3 does not detect
-384 Kc3
Sensor 3: Late paper.
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay
-385 Transport sensor 3 does not turn off. Kc3
Sensor 3: Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Transport sensor 4 does not detect
-386 Kc4
Sensor 4: Late paper.
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay
-387 Transport sensor 4 does not turn off. Kc4
Sensor 4: Stay on
shooting
Trouble-
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Transport sensor 5 does not detect
-388 Kc5
Sensor 5: Late paper.
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay
-389 Transport sensor 5 does not turn off. Kc5
Sensor 5: Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Transport sensor 6 does not detect
-390 Kc6
Sensor 6: Late paper.
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay
-391 Transport sensor 6 does not turn off. Kc6
Sensor 6: Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Transport sensor 7 does not detect
-392 Kc7
Sensor 7: Late paper.
SM 6-79 D095/M077
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay
-393 Transport sensor 7 does not turn off. Kc7
Sensor 7: Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Transport sensor 8 does not detect
-394 Kc8
Sensor 8: Late paper.
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay
-395 Transport sensor 8 does not turn off. Kc8
Sensor 8: Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Job Data The machine detects the job data
-396 Kc9
Error error.
D095/M077 6-80 SM
Jam Detection
LCT-MF or LCIT RT5020 (D532)
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
Exit sensor (LCT1 or LCT-MF) does
-400 A3 LCT1:Exit Sn:Late U
not detect paper.
Entrance sensor (LCT1 or LCT-MF)
-401 A3 LCT1:Entrance Sn:Late U8
does not detect paper.
A3 LCT1:Right Ver. LCT right vertical sensor (LCT1 or
-402 U8
Sn:Late LCT-MF) does not detect paper.
LCT horizontal transport entrance
A3 LCT1:H-Trans. Ent.
-403 sensor (LCT1 or LCT-MF) does not U8
Sn:Late
detect paper.
LCT horizontal transport exit sensor
A3 LCT1:H-Trans. Exit
-404 (LCT1 or LCT-MF) does not detect U
Sn:Late
paper.
LCT vertical transport entrance
A3 LCT1:V-Trans. Ent.
-405 sensor (LCT1 or LCT-MF) does not U
Sn:Late
detect paper.
Exit sensor (LCT2) does not detect
-406 A3 LCT2:Exit Sn:Late U
paper.
shooting
Trouble-
A3 LCT1:Entrance Sn:Stay Entrance sensor (LCT1 or LCT-MF)
-451 U8
on does not turn off.
A3 LCT1:Right Ver. LCT right vertical sensor (LCT1 or
-452 U8
Sn:Stay on LCT-MF) does not turn off.
LCT horizontal transport entrance
A3 LCT1:H-Trans. Ent.
-453 sensor (LCT1 or LCT-MF) does not U8
Sn:Stay on
turn off.
LCT horizontal transport exit sensor
A3 LCT1:H-Trans. Exit
-454 (LCT1 or LCT-MF) does not turn U
Sn:Stay on
off.
SM 6-81 D095/M077
Jam Detection
LCD
Jam Code Display Description
Display
LCT vertical transport entrance
A3 LCT1:V-Trans. Ent.
-455 sensor (LCT1 or LCT-MF) does not U
Sn:Stay on
turn off.
Exit sensor (LCT2) does not turn
-456 A3 LCT2:Exit Sn:Stay on U
off.
D095/M077 6-82 SM
D095/M077
SERVICE MANUAL
(Book 2 of 3) 006001MIU
APPENDIX SECTION
D095/M077
SERVICE MANUAL
(BOOK 2 OF 3 APPENDIX SECTION)
D095/M077
SERVICE MANUAL
Book 2 of 3
APPENDIX SECTION
006001MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
© 2010 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
D095 Pro C901s Pro C901s Pro C901s Pro C901s
M077 Pro C901 Pro C901 Pro C901 Pro C901
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 10/2010 Original Printing
D095/M077
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
D095/M077 APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS ................................................... 1-1
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................1-1
1.1.1 MAINFRAME .....................................................................................1-1
Engine ...................................................................................................1-1
Copier (D095 only) ................................................................................1-5
Supported Operating Systems ............................................................1-10
ARDF (D095 only) ...............................................................................1-12
Controller Specifications .....................................................................1-13
Scanner Specifications (D095 only) ....................................................1-15
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ...................................................................1-22
1.2.1 MAINFRAME ...................................................................................1-22
Trays 1 and 2 (Engine)........................................................................1-22
Trays 3 and 4 (LCT-MF: D095 only)....................................................1-26
1.2.2 PERIPHERALS................................................................................1-28
For Printer (M077) and Copier (D095) ................................................1-28
For Printer (M077 only) .......................................................................1-31
1.3 OPTION SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................1-34
1.3.1 A3/11"X17" TRAY UNIT TK5000 (B331) .........................................1-34
1.3.2 LCIT RT5030 (D452) .......................................................................1-35
1.3.3 LCIT RT5050 (13"X19.2" LCT D532) ...............................................1-36
1.3.4 MULTI-BYPASS TRAY (B833) ........................................................1-37
1.3.5 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5010 (B835) .................................1-38
1.3.6 Z-FOLDING UNIT ZF4000 (B660) ...................................................1-39
1.3.7 FINISHER SR5000 (3K FINISHER B830) .......................................1-40
1.3.8 PUNCH UNIT PU5000 (B831) .........................................................1-42
1.3.9 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434) ............................................1-43
General ...............................................................................................1-43
Shift Tray .............................................................................................1-44
Proof Tray ...........................................................................................1-45
Corner Stapling ...................................................................................1-46
Booklet Stapling ..................................................................................1-48
SM Appendix i D095/M077
Punch Unit PU5020 (D449) (Option) ...................................................1-49
1.3.10 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455) ..............................................1-50
1.3.11 RING BINDER RB5000 (D392).................................................1-51
1.3.12 PERFECT BINDER D391 .........................................................1-53
Cover Interposer (Inserter) D391 ........................................................1-53
Perfect Binder (D391) .........................................................................1-54
1.3.13 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447) ..........................1-56
General ...............................................................................................1-56
Shift Tray .............................................................................................1-57
Proof Tray ...........................................................................................1-57
1.3.14 BUFFER PASS UNIT (M379) ...................................................1-57
2. APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................... 2-1
2.1 PM TABLES................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 MAIN MACHINE ................................................................................2-1
Mainframe PM Parts .............................................................................2-2
2.1.2 LCIT RT5050 (D532) .........................................................................2-9
2.1.3 LCIT RT5030 (D452) .........................................................................2-9
2.1.4 BRIDGE UNIT (D379)......................................................................2-10
2.1.5 MULTI-BYPASS TRAY (B833) ........................................................2-10
2.1.6 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B835) .............................................2-11
2.1.7 Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660) ................................................................2-11
2.1.8 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B830) ......................................................2-12
2.1.9 PUNCH (B831) ................................................................................2-12
2.1.10 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434) .....................................2-13
Main ....................................................................................................2-13
Punch Unit ..........................................................................................2-14
Staplers ...............................................................................................2-14
2.1.11 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455) ..............................................2-14
2.1.12 RING BINDER (D392) ..............................................................2-15
2.1.13 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447) ..........................2-16
2.1.14 PERFECT BINDER/INSERTER (D391) ....................................2-17
Inserter Unit ........................................................................................2-18
Horizontal Paper Path .........................................................................2-19
Signature Path ....................................................................................2-20
Stacking Tray ......................................................................................2-21
Main Grip Unit .....................................................................................2-21
Gluing Unit ..........................................................................................2-22
Cover Registration Unit .......................................................................2-22
D095/M077 ii SM Appendix
Signature Rotation Unit .......................................................................2-22
Trimming Unit ......................................................................................2-23
Other ...................................................................................................2-23
3. APPENDIX: SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ................................ 3-1
3.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ...................................................................3-1
3.1.1 SERVICE CALL TABLE.....................................................................3-1
3.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS ..............................................................3-2
3.2 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 1 ......................................................................3-3
3.2.1 SC CODES GROUP 1: SCANNING ..................................................3-3
3.3 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 2 ....................................................................3-12
3.3.1 SC CODES GROUP 2: EXPOSURE ...............................................3-12
3.4 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 3 ....................................................................3-19
3.4.1 SC CODES GROUP 3: IMAGE DEVELOPMENT – 1 .....................3-19
3.5 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 4-1 .................................................................3-32
3.5.1 SC CODES GROUP 4: IMAGE DEVELOPMENT - 2 ......................3-32
3.6 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 4-2 .................................................................3-51
3.7 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 5-1 .................................................................3-68
3.7.1 SC CODES GROUP 5: PAPER FEED ............................................3-68
3.8 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 5-2 .................................................................3-87
3.8.1 SC CODES GROUP 5: PAPER FEED ............................................3-87
3.9 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 6 ..................................................................3-104
3.9.1 SC CODES GROUP 6: DEVICE COMMUNICATION....................3-104
3.10 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 7-1 .........................................................3-122
3.10.1 SC CODES GROUP 7: PERIPHERALS .................................3-122
3.11 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 7-2 .........................................................3-146
3.11.1 SC CODES GROUP 7: PERIPHERALS .................................3-146
SC792-xx: Ring Binder (D392) ..........................................................3-160
3.12 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 8 ............................................................3-275
3.12.1 SC800: OVERALL SYSTEM ...................................................3-275
3.13 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 9 ............................................................3-290
3.13.1 SC900: MISCELLANEOUS ....................................................3-290
4. APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES ................... 4-1
4.1 SYSTEM SP1-XXX: 1 .................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 SP1-XXX FEED .................................................................................4-1
4.2 SYSTEM SP1-XXX: 2 ...............................................................................4-14
4.3 SYSTEM SP1-XXX: 3 ...............................................................................4-37
4.4 SYSTEM SP1-XXX: 4 ...............................................................................4-46
SM Appendix iii D095/M077
4.5 SYSTEM SP1-XXX: 5 ...............................................................................4-54
4.6 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 1 ...............................................................................4-81
4.6.1 SP2-XXX DRUM: 1 ..........................................................................4-81
4.7 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 2 .............................................................................4-105
4.8 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 3 .............................................................................4-135
4.9 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 4 .............................................................................4-153
4.10 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 5 .......................................................................4-181
4.11 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 6 .......................................................................4-211
4.12 SYSTEM SP3-XXX: 1 .......................................................................4-240
4.12.1 SP3-XXX PROCESS ..............................................................4-240
4.13 SYSTEM SP3-XXX: 2 .......................................................................4-271
4.14 SYSTEM SP4-XXX: 1 (D095 ONLY).................................................4-305
4.14.1 SP4-XXX SCANNER ..............................................................4-305
4.15 SYSTEM SP4-XXX: 2 (D095 ONLY).................................................4-319
4.16 SYSTEM SP5-XXX ...........................................................................4-333
4.16.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)...................................................................4-333
4.17 SYSTEM SP5-XXX: 2 .......................................................................4-357
4.18 SYSTEM SP5-XXX: 3 .......................................................................4-375
4.19 SYSTEM SP6-XXX ...........................................................................4-401
4.19.1 SP6-XXX PERIPHERALS .......................................................4-401
4.20 SYSTEM SP7-XXX: 1 .......................................................................4-425
4.20.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ...........................................................4-425
4.21 SYSTEM SP7-XXX: 2 .......................................................................4-441
4.22 SYSTEM SP7-XXX: 3 .......................................................................4-463
4.23 SYSTEM SP8-XXX: 1 .......................................................................4-485
4.23.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2 ...........................................................4-485
4.24 SYSTEM SP8-XXX: 2 .......................................................................4-510
4.25 INPUT CHECK: 1 ..............................................................................4-531
4.25.1 MAIN MACHINE INPUT CHECK: SP5803 .............................4-531
4.26 INPUT CHECK: 2 ..............................................................................4-547
4.26.1 MAIN MACHINE INPUT CHECK: SP5803 .............................4-547
4.27 INPUT CHECK: 3 ..............................................................................4-561
4.27.1 MAIN MACHINE INPUT CHECK: SP5803 .............................4-561
4.28 INPUT CHECK: 4 ..............................................................................4-579
4.28.1 MAIN MACHINE INPUT CHECK: SP5803 .............................4-579
4.28.2 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007 (D095 ONLY) ..........................4-581
4.28.3 FINISHER INPUT CHECK: SP6112 (B830) ...........................4-583
4.28.4 BOOKLET FINISHER INPUT CHECK (D434): SP6218 .........4-585
D095/M077 iv SM Appendix
4.28.5 COVER INTERPOSER INPUT CHECK (B835): SP6400 .......4-589
4.28.6 RING BINDER INPUT CHECK (D392): SP6508.....................4-591
4.28.7 PERFECT BINDER INPUT CHECK (D391): SP6526 .............4-594
4.28.8 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER INPUT CHECK (D447):
SP6600/SP6606 .....................................................................................4-601
4.28.9 TRIMMER UNIT INPUT CHECK (D455): SP6650 ..................4-603
4.29 OUTPUT CHECK ..............................................................................4-604
4.29.1 MAIN MACHINE OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804 .........................4-604
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804)............................................4-604
4.29.2 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008 (D095 ONLY) ......................4-615
4.29.3 FINISHER OUTPUT CHECK SP6113 (B830) ........................4-616
4.29.4 BOOKLET FINISHER OUTPUT CHECK: SP6219 (D434) .....4-618
4.29.5 COVER INTERPOSER (B835) OUTPUT CHECK: SP6401 ...4-620
4.29.6 RING BINDER (D392) OUTPUT CHECK: SP6509.................4-621
4.29.7 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER OUTPUT CHECK (D447):
SP6601/SP6607 .....................................................................................4-623
4.29.8 TRIMMER UNIT OUTPUT CHECK (D455): SP6651 ..............4-624
4.30 PRINTER AND SCANNER SP TABLES ...........................................4-625
4.30.1 PRINTER SP ..........................................................................4-625
4.30.2 SCANNER SP (D095 ONLY) ..................................................4-625
SM Appendix v D095/M077
APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
54 05/31/2012 Updated D391 Paper Thickness Specification.
General Specifications
1. APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Appendix:
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 MAINFRAME
Engine
Items Specification
Configuration Console
4-drum dry electrostatic transfer system with
Copy Process
internal transfer belt
Fusing Oil-less fusing method
90 ppm A4/LT(LEF)
FC
50 ppm A3/DLT(LEF)
Engine Speed
90 ppm A4/LT(LEF)
BK
50 ppm A3/DLT(LEF)
Printer (M077):
Less than 420 s (23C°, rated voltage)
Warm-up Time
Copier (D095):
Less than 420 s (23C°, rated voltage)
Printer (M077):
FC: Less than 13.5 sec
BW: Less than 13.5 sec
Copier (D095):
First Print Time
FC: Less than 13.5 sec
BW: Less than 13.5 sec
(A4/LT(LEF), Tray 1 or Op. LCT upper tray
Face-up)
Multiple print Up to 9,999
Resolution 1,200 dpi, 2-bit
SM Appendix 1-1 D095/M077
General Specifications
Limitless Paper Supply Supported
Paper Size Please refer to "Paper size matrix".
Maximum Printable Area 320 mm x 480 mm / 12.6" x 18.9"
60 - 220g/m2
1st tray
16 - 58 lb Bond/ 80 lb Cover/ 120 lb Index
60 - 220g/m2
2nd tray
16 - 58 lb Bond/ 80 lb Cover/ 120 lb Index
3rd tray 60 - 300 g/m2
Paper weight
(D095 only) 16 - 79 lb Bond/ 140 lb Index/ 100 lb Cover
4th tray 60 - 300 g/m2
(D095 only) 16 - 79 lb Bond/ 140 lb Index/ 100 lb Cover
60 - 300g/m2
Duplex
16 - 79 lb Bond/ 80 lb Cover/ 120 lb Index
Paper Weight 1 (60.0 - 63.0 g/m2)
Paper Weight 2 (63.1 - 80.0 g/m2)
Paper Weight 3 (80.1 - 105.0 g/m2)
Paper weight setting Paper Weight 4 (105.1 - 163.0 g/m2)
Paper Weight 5 (163.1 - 220.0 g/m2)
Paper Weight 6 (220.1 - 256.0 g/m2)
Paper Weight 7 (256.1 - 300.0 g/m2)
NA 208V-240V, 24A, 50/60Hz
Power Specification
EU/ASIA 220/230/240V, 25A, 50/60Hz
Printing: Less than 5,500W
Stand-by: Less than 3,200W
Full System
Finisher SR5000
Max. Power
Booklet Finisher BK5000
Consumption
Z-folding Unit ZF4000
Cover Interposer Tray CI5010
LCIT RT5020
Multi-Bypass Tray BY5000
D095/M077 1-2 SM Appendix
General Specifications
Stand-by: Less than 67 dB (A)
Specifications
Appendix:
Printing: Less than 76 dB (A)
Noise emission:
(Main unit only)
Sound power level
Sound power level is actual values measured in
accordance with ISO 7779.
Printer (M077):
1,280 x 990 x 1,640 mm
(50.4" x 39.0" x 64.6")
Dimension (W x D x H)
Copier (D095):
2,555 x 990 x 1,640 mm
(100.6" x 39.0" x 64.6")
Printer (M077):
Approx. 630 kg, 1389.2 lb. or less (Excluding
Weight Fiery)
Copier (D095):
Approx. 860 kg, 1896.3 lb or less (Excluding Fiery)
Printer (M077): Not available
ARDF
Copier (D095): Standard
1st tray: 1,000 sheets x 2 (Tandem)
2nd tray: 500 sheets
Paper Capacity Standard 3rd tray (D095 only): 2,200 sheets
13"x19.2" LCT
4th tray (D095 only): 2,200 sheets
13"x19.2" LCT
Auto Paper Selection
Paper selection with A4 LCT Tray 1, Tray 2
(M077 only)
Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 5
A4 LCT option is required.
Auto Paper Selection
Paper selection with A3 LCT Tray 1, Tray 2
Tray 3, Tray 4
SM Appendix 1-3 D095/M077
General Specifications
Standard for Copier (D095)
A3 LCT option is required for Printer (M077).
Tray 5, Tray 6
A3 LCT option (including Bridge Unit (D379))
is required for Copier (D095).
By-pass option or Two A3 LCT options
(including Bridge Unit (D379)) are required for
Printer (M077).
Tray 7
By-pass option and A3 LCT option (including
Bridge Unit (D379)) are required for Copier
(D095).
By-pass option and Two A3 LCT options
(including Bridge Unit (D379)) are required for
Printer (M077).
Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Yellow, Green, Blue,
Ivory, Orange, Pink, Red, Gray, Letterhead,
Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper, Envelope,
Displayed Paper Types
Tab Stock*, Label Paper, Coated:Glossy,
Coated:Matted
*: Tab stock is not used for Tray1.
Electronic Sorting Supported (with Finisher)
Stapling Supported, 4 positions (with Finisher)
NA: 2/3 switchable hole punch (with Finisher)
Punch EU: 2/4 switchable hole punch (with Finisher)
Scandinavian: 4 holes punch (with Finisher)
D095/M077 1-4 SM Appendix
General Specifications
Specifications
Copier (D095 only)
Appendix:
Items Specifications
Original Type Book/ Sheet/ Object
Max: A3/ 11" x 17"
Original size
Min: A5, 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
A3-A5, Up to 330 mm x 458 mm
Copy/Print size
11" x 17"-5 1/2 x 8 1/2, 13" x 18"
Less than 13.5 s
FC (A4/LT (LEF), 1st input tray or Std LCT upper
tray, Face-up)
First Copy Output Time
Less than 13.5 s
Bk (A4/LT (LEF), 1st input tray or Std LCT upper
tray, Face-up)
Memory FC 90 cpm (A4/LT (LEF))
retention Bk 90 cpm (A4/LT (LEF))
Multi copy
speed FC 60 cpm (A4/LT (LEF))
ADF 1 to 1
Bk 80 cpm (A4/LT (LEF))
Multi copy Up to 9,999
Copy 1,200dpi 2 bits
Print 1,200dpi 2 bits
Resolution
Scan copy 600dpi 8 bits
Scan send 600dpi 1bit/ 8 bits
7 Reductions & 5 Enlargement
NA ver. 93%, 85%, 78%, 73%, 65%, 50%, 25%
Magnification 121%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%
7 Reductions & 5 Enlargement
EU ver.
93%, 82%, 75%, 71%, 65%, 50%, 25%
SM Appendix 1-5 D095/M077
General Specifications
Items Specifications
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Auto Magnification Select (AMS) Supported
Zoom 25 - 400% (1%/ step)
Size Magnification Supported
Directional Magnification Supported (1%/ step)
Directional Size Magnification Supported (1 mm or 0.1 inch/ step
Full Image Copy Supported (93% and Centering)
Interrupt Copy Standard
Auto Image Density
Image Density
Manual Selection (9 Levels)
Auto Color Selection
Full Color
Black & White
Color Model Single Color
(Default: 12 colors & Black, User Color: 15
colors)
Twin-Color
(Black & Other color, Red & Black)
D095/M077 1-6 SM Appendix
General Specifications
Specifications
Appendix:
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
Map
Original Type Setting
Pale
Generation
Inkjet
Highlight Pen
Auto Paper Selection
1st Tray
2nd Tray
3rd Tray
Paper Selection
4th Tray
5th Tray (LCT option is required.)
6th Tray (LCT option is required.)
7th Tray (LCT and Bypass tray are required.)
Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Yellow, Green,
Blue, Ivory, Orange, Pink, Red, Gray,
Letterhead, Preprinted Paper, Prepunched
Displayed Paper Type
Paper, Envelope, Tab Stock*, Label Paper,
Coated:Glossy, Coated:Matted
*: Tab stock is not used for Tray1.
1 side to 2 side
2 side to 2 side
Duplex
Book to 2 side
Front & Back to 2 side
SM Appendix 1-7 D095/M077
General Specifications
Booklet
Book
Magazine
Book to Simplex
Book / Series
Series Book to Duplex
Combine
Front & Back to 2 sided
Combine 2, 4, 8 into 1 simplex sheet
Combine
Combine 4, 8, 16 into 1 duplex sheet
Margin Adjustment Supported (1mm or 0.1 inch)
Inside
Erase 3 edge Outside Supported
Center/Border
Front Copy or Blank (Copy: Duplex or Simplex)
Cover / Slip sheet Front & Back Copy or Blank (Copy: Duplex or Simplex)
Slip Copy or Blank
Chaptering Supported (Up to 100 positions)
Supported
Paper Designate
(can select from 3 trays. Up to 100 positions)
Image Rotation Supported
Electronic Sort Supported (With finisher)
Stapling Supported, 4 positions (With finisher)
USA: 2/3 switchable hole punch
EU: 2/4 switchable hole punch
Punch
Scandinavian: 4 holes punch
(With finisher)
D095/M077 1-8 SM Appendix
General Specifications
Specifications
Appendix:
Background
Supported
Numbering
Page Numbering 7 stamps
Stamp Date Stamp 6 stamps
User Stamp 5 stamps
Preset Stamp 8 stamps
Stamp Text Supported
Color Balance Adjustment
Color Adjustment Color Balance Program
Color Registration
Sharp / Soft
Contrast
Image
Background Density Adjustment
Adjustment
Under Color Removal
Image Adjustment
Auto Color Selection Sensitivity Adjustment
Text-Photo Separation Sensitivity Adjustment
Color Erase Sensitivity Adjustment
Auto Color Calibration (ACC)
User Code 8 digits / 500 user code
Interrupt Copy Supported
NA Model Electrical and Mechanical counter x2
Copy Counter
EU Model Electrical and Mechanical counter x1
Counterfeit Prevention Bill Recognition & Invisible Marking Function
SM Appendix 1-9 D095/M077
General Specifications
Supported Operating Systems
Windows 2000, XP/
Utility Mac OS X
2003 / Vista
Print Submission & Management
EFI Driver YES YES
EFI Command Workstation YES NO
EFI Command Workstation for Mac NO YES
Fiery Web Tools YES YES
EFI HotFolder YES YES
MS Office Filter for HotFolder YES NO
EFI Virtual Printers YES *1
Macintosh Print Center Plug-ins NO YES
Rush Printing YES NO
Print/Process Next YES NO
Advanced Job Re-Order YES NO
Suspend on Mismatch YES YES
Quick Doc Merge YES NO
Schedule Print YES YES
Color Management & Proofing
EFI Fiery ColorWise YES YES
Fiery Graphic Arts package YES YES
Imposition & Document Assembly
Mixed Media YES YES
Paper Catalogue YES YES
Tab Shift YES YES
D095/M077 1-10 SM Appendix
General Specifications
Windows 2000, XP/
Specifications
Utility Mac OS X
Appendix:
2003 / Vista
Insert Tab YES YES
Booklet Maker YES YES
EFI Impose, Fiery Edition YES NO
Variable Data Printing
EFI Fiery Free Form YES YES
Fiery VDP Resource Manager YES YES
Scanning
Fiery Scan YES YES
Color management & Proofing
Fiery Graphic Arts Package,
YES YES
Premium Edition
EFI Color Profiler Suite YES YES
Imposition & Document Assembly
EFI Compose Fiery Edition YES NO
*1: Users can access Virtual Printers both in Windows and Mac environments, but cannot
create a virtual printer nor predefine its print settings in Mac OS.
SM Appendix 1-11 D095/M077
General Specifications
ARDF (D095 only)
A3 to B5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x
Normal Original Mode:
81/2"
Original Size: A3 to B5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x
Thin Original Mode
81/2"
Duplex Original Mode: A3 to B5, 11" x 17" to 51/2" x 81/2"
Normal Original Mode: 52 to 128 g/m2 (Note 1)
Original Weight: Thin Original Mode 40 to 128 g/m2 (Note 1)
Duplex Original Mode: 52 to 105 g/m2 (Note 2)
Table Capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Original Feeding Speed: 80 cpm (A4/81/2" x 11" LEF, 1 to 1)
Original Standard Position: Rear left corner (Face-up)
Separation: FRR
Original Transport: One flat belt
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Power Source: DC24V±10%, DC38V±10%, DC5V±5% (from the copier)
Power Consumption: Less than 130 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 680 x 560 x 150 mm (26.8" x 22" x 5.9")
Weight Less than 17.5 kg (38.5 lb)
Note 1: 156 g/m2 possible, but not guaranteed.
Note 2: 128 g/m2 possible, but not guaranteed.
D095/M077 1-12 SM Appendix
General Specifications
Specifications
Controller Specifications
Appendix:
GW Controller
Items Specifications
CPU Intel Pentium M 1.4GHz
D095: 2.5 GB
Memory
M077: 1.5 GB
HDD 640 GB
100/10Base-TX x 2
SD Slot x 2
Interface (GW application installation, Service use)
USB2.0 (External appliance)
Counter Interface Slot (Counter Interface)
Network Protocol Network: TCP/IP (Ipv4, Ipv6)
Fiery Controller
The below is description for standard Fiery controller. Please refer to the QX/Creo
Controller regarding printer features of them.
Items Specifications
Fiery System Version Fiery System 8 Release 2
Standard:
Configuration
External Server Type
CPU Single Intel Core 2 Duo E8400 3.0GHz CPU
Memory 2GB (2GBx1)
HDD 160 GB HDD standard
DVD-ROM Drive Built-in
SM Appendix 1-13 D095/M077
General Specifications
Items Specifications
Operating System Windows XPe
TCP/IP_IPv4, IPv6
Network Protocols Apple Talk
SMB
PostScript 3
PCL 5c
PDL PCL 6
Remarks: PCL5 does not support the finishing of
Ring Binder and Perfect Binder.
PDF
Supported Data Formats TIFF
JPEG
PPML
VDP Fiery Free Form
Creo VPS
Max Continuous Printing FC 90ppm (A4 or Letter LEF/ 1200dpi)
Speed BK 90ppm (A4 or Letter LEF/ 1200dpi)
Print Resolution 1200dpi/ 2bit 600dpi in PCL5c
PS3 136 + 2MM
Font
PCL 80
Fiery Menu via Operation
Supported
Panel
Network Interface Ethernet 1000/100/10base-T
Service Interface USB x 4, Technical Service Use
Power Specification 100 - 240 V / 6.0 A, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption Less than 350 W
D095/M077 1-14 SM Appendix
General Specifications
Scanner Specifications (D095 only)
Specifications
Appendix:
GW Scanner Feature
Original type Book / Sheet / Object
100 / 150 / 200 (Default) / 300 / 400 / 600 dpi
Resolution 100-1,200 dpi (Twain: BW)
100-1,200 dip (Twain: Color)
BW and FC: 75 spm
Scan Speed (A4, 200dpi)
*Scan speed (A4 LEF, 200 dpi)
Max Scan Area 297 x 432 mm / 11.7"x17"
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF,
B4 SEF, B5 SEF, B5 LEF
Standard 11"x17" SEF, 8 1/2"x14" SEF, 8 1/2"x13" SEF,
Original Size 8 1/2x11" SEF, 8 1/2"x11" LEF, 5 1/2"x8 1/2" SEF,
5 1/2x8 1/2" LEF
Minimum: 140 x 140 mm
Customized
Maximum: 297 x 432 mm
TIFF (Multi/Single), JPEG,
File Format PDF (Multi/Single),
High compression PDF
Default BW Text/Line Art
BW_Text, BW_Text-Photo, BW_Photo,
Scan Mode Grayscale,
Support
FC_Text-Photo, FC_Photo, Auto Color
Selection
Auto Density
Supported
Image Density Selection
Manual Setting 7 Levels
Thin paper mode Supported
SADF / Batch Mode Supported
Mixed Size Mode Supported
SM Appendix 1-15 D095/M077
General Specifications
GW Scan to E-mail
Requirement SMTP Gateway and TCP/IP
SMTP
Authentication
POP before SMTP
Default: 200 dpi
Resolution
100 / 150 / 200 / 300 / 400 / 600 dpi
Register E-mail Address in HDD Max. 2,000 addresses
Max. 500 Addresses
Register Group Address in HDD Max. 100 Addresses in One Group
Addresses
Direct input on operation panel,
Maintain E-mail Address in HDD
Web image Monitor, Smart Device Monitor
Search E-mail Address in HDD By name & E-mail address
LDAP Yes
Max Address Number per Send Max. 500 addresses
via Address
Max. 500 addresses
Book
Address Number per
send Direct Input Max. 100 addresses
via LDAP Max. 100 addresses
Attention To, cc, bcc
Subject Manual Input Max. 128 characters
D095/M077 1-16 SM Appendix
General Specifications
Specifications
Appendix:
Manual Input Max. 80 characters
5 body message. 80 characters x 5 lines per
Pre-register by a body message.
Body Message user Title name of the body message: Max. 20
characters per a name.
Message: "This e-mail included attached file
Preset
sent from xxxx" (machine model name).
With restriction 128-102,400KB, Default = 2,048 KB
E-mail Size Restriction
W/O restriction 975 MB
Single Page TIFF, Single Page JPEG, Single
Page PDF, Multi Page TIFF,
File Type Multi Page PDF, Single Page
High-compression PDF, Multi Page
High-compression PDF
Program User Setting Yes (Up to 25 programs)
Yes (By page or size) / No, Default = Yes (By
Divided & Send E-mail
size)
Resend Yes / No, Default = Yes
GW Scan to Folder
Protocol Support SMB, FTP, NCP
Client folder log-in (log-in name and
password)
Security
Encryption of log-in name and password
during transmission
Default: 200dpi
Resolution
100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 600dpi
Max. Resisted Client Folder Address in
Max. 2,000 folders
HDD
SM Appendix 1-17 D095/M077
General Specifications
Maintain Client Folder Address in HDD Via Operation Panel, Web Image Monitor
Max. Client Folders per send Max. 50 client folders
Max. 100 destinations (To Folder: 50, To
Group Address
e-mail: 100) *1
Input Subject No
Scan file size 1 document Up to 2,000 MB
128-102,400 KB, Default = 2,048 KB (With
restriction)
File size when combined Scan to Folder
725 MB (W/O restriction)
& Scan to E-mail
(Conforming to the scan to e-mail
specification)
Single Page TIFF/JPEG, Single Page PDF,
Multi Page TIFF, Multi Page PDF, Single
File Type
Page High-compression PDF, Multi Page
High-compression PDF
Program Registration Yes (Up to 25 programs)
Yes (By page or size) / No, Default = Yes (By
size)
Dividing file in Scan to E-mail
(When Scan to PC is combined with Scan to
e-mail)
Resend Yes / No, Default = Yes
*1. The user can send to Max 100 destinations in the same group. But the number of folders
has to be less than 50, because Max. folder destinations are 50. If there are more than 50
folder destinations registered in Group address, the following message pops up.
100 destinations 50 folders included >>>OK
100 destinations 51 folders included >>>NG
Max. address numbers per sending (Combination between E-mail and Folder)
D095/M077 1-18 SM Appendix
General Specifications
Specifications
Appendix:
Condition 2
Condition 1 Condition 3
Max. address
Input via Max. address can Combination of
allow in single
select or input address: Max.
operation
Address
500 500 550
Scan to book
E-mail Manual
100 500 550
input
Address
50 50 550
Scan to book
Folder Manual
50 50 550
input
The number of destinations which the user can put has to satisfy all of the above 3 conditions
GW Network Twain Driver
Windows 2000/XP/Vista
Correspondence OS
Windows Server 2003, Server 2003R2
Resolution 100-1200 dpi
Scan Mode Standard, Photo, OCR, Filing
Brightness, Contrast, Threshold, Gamma Adjustment,
Image Adjustment
Halftone Pattern
Stamp Date, Page Number, Text
Endorse Supported
SM Appendix 1-19 D095/M077
General Specifications
Fiery Scanner Specification
Resolution 100 / 150 / 200* / 300 / 400 / 600 dpi
BW&FC: 50 spm (Single side, Normal scan
Scan Speed (A4, 200dpi)
mode)
Max Scan Area 297 mm x 432 mm
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, Letter, 11 x17, 8.5 x14,
Standard
Original Size 8.5 x13, 5.5 x8.5
Customized 297 mm x 432 mm
File Format TIFF, JPEG, PDF
Black & White: Text/Line Art *
Black & White: Text
Black & White: Text/Photo
Scan Type Black & White: Photo
Grayscale
Full Color: Text/Photo
Full Color: Glossy Photo
Single *
Side Top/top
Top/bottom
Portrait *
Orientation
Landscape
Hold Queue
Mailbox
E-Mail
Destination
FTP
Internet fax
SMB
*: Default value
D095/M077 1-20 SM Appendix
General Specifications
Fiery Scan to E-mail
Specifications
Appendix:
Registered E-mail Address in Address
1,000
Book
Address Number per Address Book 24 K for total size of To and Cc
send LDAP 24 K for total size of To and Cc
Attachment/URL
When URL is specified, the email will be
Attachment sent with a URL linked to the HDD of the
Email to scan mode Fiery server where the scanned data is
stored.
Format TIFF, JPEG, PDF
Fiery Scan to FTP/SMB
Server Name/ IP address, Directory, Port
FTP server
Number can be set.
Timeout 30 s (0 – 999 sec can be set)
Authentication User Name, Password can be set.
Proxy server setup The setup for the FTP server is available.
SMB setup Network path/ Domain name can be set.
Authentication User Name, Password can be set.
SM Appendix 1-21 D095/M077
Supported Paper Sizes
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES
1.2.1 MAINFRAME
Trays 1 and 2 (Engine)
Tray 1 Tray 1 with Tray 2
Paper Size 1,000 x 2 A3/DLT kit 500 x 2
NA EU NA/EU NA EU
A3 SEF 297x420 --- --- SPS AD AD
B4 SEF 257x364 --- --- SPS AD AD
A4 LEF 297x210 SPS A SPS AD AD
A4 SEF 210x297 --- --- SPS AD AD
B5 LEF 257x182 --- --- --- AD AD
B5 SEF 182x257 --- --- --- AD AD
A5 SEF 148x210 --- --- --- AD AD
DLT SEF 8.5"x11" --- --- A AD AD
LG SEF 8.5"x14" --- --- SPS AD AD
LT LEF 11"x8.5" A SPS SPS AD AD
LT SEF 8.5"x11" --- --- SPS AD AD
HLT SEF 5.5"x8.5" --- --- --- AD AD
Foolscap
8.5"x13" --- --- --- AD AD
SEF
Folio SEF 8.25"x13" --- --- --- AD AD
F SEF 8"x13" --- --- --- AD AD
Executive
10.5"x7.25" --- --- --- AD AD
LEF
D095/M077 1-22 SM Appendix
Supported Paper Sizes
Tray 1 Tray 1 with Tray 2
Specifications
Appendix:
Paper Size 1,000 x 2 A3/DLT kit 500 x 2
NA EU NA/EU NA EU
Executive
7.25"x10.5 --- --- --- AD AD
SEF
- SEF 11"x15" --- --- --- #S #S
- SEF 11"x14" --- --- --- #S #S
- SEF 10"x15" --- --- --- #S #S
- SEF 10"x14" --- --- --- #S #S
- SEF 8.25"x14" --- --- --- #S #S
- SEF 10.5"x8" --- --- --- #AU #AU
- SEF 8"x10.5" --- --- --- #AU #AU
- SEF 10"x8" --- --- --- #AU #AU
- SEF 8"x10" --- --- --- #S #S
- SEF 13"x19.2" --- --- --- --- ---
- SEF 13"x18" --- --- --- #AU #AU
SRA3
320x450 --- --- --- #S #S
SEF
- SEF 12"x18" --- --- --- AD AD
Custom Min. --- --- 210.0 #AS 139.7 #AU
size mm
Width Max. --- --- 305.0 #AS 330.2 #AU
SM Appendix 1-23 D095/M077
Supported Paper Sizes
Tray 1 Tray 1 with Tray 2
Paper Size 1,000 x 2 A3/DLT kit 500 x 2
NA EU NA/EU NA EU
Min. --- --- 210.0 #AS 182.0 #AU
Length
Max. --- --- 439.0 #AS 458.0 #AU
Custom Min. --- --- #AS 5.5 #AU
size Inch
Width Max. --- --- #AS 13.0 #AU
Min. --- --- #AS 7.17 #AU
Length
Max. --- --- #AS 18.03 #AU
Remarks
D095/M077 1-24 SM Appendix
Supported Paper Sizes
Specifications
Appendix:
SEF Short Edge Feed
LFE Long Edge Feed
A Paper size to be set in Unit
S Paper size to be set by SP mode
Paper size to be detected automatically. Paper size can be
AD selected by UP mode/ Select paper size from the list on
OP panel.
#AD Paper size to be detected automatically.
Paper size setting is required by UP mode/ Select paper
#S
size from the list on OP panel.
Paper size setting is required by SP mode/ Select paper
SPS
size from the list on OP panel
Paper size setting is required by UP mode/ Input actual
#AU
paper size manually on OP panel
Paper size setting is required by SP mode/ Input actual
#AS
paper size (mm only) manually on OP panel
--- Not supported
SM Appendix 1-25 D095/M077
Supported Paper Sizes
Trays 3 and 4 (LCT-MF: D095 only)
LCT-MF (Trays 3 and 4)
Paper Size 2,000 x 2
NA EU
A3 SEF 297x42 AD ---
B4 SEF 257x364 AD ---
A4 LEF 297x210 AD A
A4 SEF 210x297 AD ---
B5 LEF 257x182 AD SPS
B5 SEF 182x257 #S ---
A5 SEF 148x210 AD SPS
DLT SEF 8.5"x11" AD ---
LG SEF 8.5"x14" #S ---
LT LEF 11"x8.5" AD SPS
LT SEF 8.5"x11" #S ---
HLT SEF 5.5"x8.5" AD SPS
Foolscap SEF 8.5"x13" #S ---
Folio SEF 8.25"x13" #S ---
F SEF 8"x13" AD ---
Executive LEF 10.5"x7.25" #S ---
Executive SEF 7.25"x10.5 #S ---
- SEF 11"x15" #S ---
- SEF 11"x14" #S ---
- SEF 10"x15" #S ---
D095/M077 1-26 SM Appendix
Supported Paper Sizes
LCT-MF (Trays 3 and 4)
Specifications
Appendix:
Paper Size 2,000 x 2
NA EU
- SEF 10"x14" #S ---
- SEF 8.25"x14" #S ---
- SEF 10.5"x8" #AU ---
- SEF 8"x10.5" #AU ---
- SEF 10"x8" #AU ---
- SEF 8"x10" #S ---
- SEF 13"x19.2" #AU ---
- SEF 13"x18" #AU ---
SRA3 SEF 320x450 #S ---
- SEF 12"x18" AD ---
Custom size mm Min. 139.7 #AU
Width Max. 330.2 #AU
Min. 182.0 #AU
Length
Max. 487.7 #AU
Custom size Inch Min. 5.5 #AU
Width Max. 13.0 #AU
Min. 7.17 #AU
Length
Max. 19.2 #AU
SM Appendix 1-27 D095/M077
Supported Paper Sizes
1.2.2 PERIPHERALS
For Printer (M077) and Copier (D095)
A3/DLT LCT (2000 x2) Bypass (500)
Paper Size
NA EU NA EU
A3 SEF 297x420 AD --- AD AD
B4 SEF 257x364 AD --- AD AD
A4 LEF 297x210 AD A AD AD
A4 SEF 210x297 AD --- #S AD
B5 LEF 257x182 AD SPS AD AD
B5 SEF 182x257 #S --- #S #S
A5 SEF 148x210 AD SPS AD AD
DLT SEF 8.5"x11" AD --- AD AD
LG SEF 8.5"x14" #S --- #S #S
LT LEF 11"x8.5" AD SPS AD AD
LT SEF 8.5"x11" #S --- AD #S
HLT SEF 5.5"x8.5" AD SPS AD AD
Foolscap SEF 8.5"x13" #S --- #S #S
Folio SEF 8.25"x13" #S --- #S #S
F SEF 8"x13" AD --- AD AD
Executive LEF 10.5"x7.25" #S --- #S #S
Executive SEF 7.25"x10.5 #S --- #S #S
- SEF 11"x15" #S --- #S #S
- SEF 11"x14" #S --- #S #S
- SEF 10"x15" #S --- #S #S
D095/M077 1-28 SM Appendix
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper Size A3/DLT LCT (2000 x2) Bypass (500)
Specifications
Appendix:
- SEF 10"x14" #S --- #S #S
- SEF 8.25"x14" #S --- #S #S
- SEF 10.5"x8" #AU --- #AU #AU
- SEF 8"x10.5" #AU --- #AU #AU
- SEF 10"x8" #AU --- #AU #AU
- SEF 8"x10" #S --- #S #S
- SEF 13"x19.2" #AU --- #AU #AU
- SEF 13"x18" #AU --- #AU #AU
SRA3 SEF 320x450 #S --- #S #S
- SEF 12"x18" AD --- AD AD
Custom size mm Min. 139.7 #AU 139.7 #AU
Width Max. 330.2 #AU 330.2 #AU
Min. 182.0 #AU 182.0 #AU
Length
Max. 487.7 #AU 487.7 #AU
Custom size Min. 5.5 #AU 5.5 #AU
Inch
Width Max. 13.0 #AU 13.0 #AU
Min. 7.17 #AU 7.17 #AU
Length
Max. 19.2 #AU 19.2 #AU
SM Appendix 1-29 D095/M077
Supported Paper Sizes
Remarks
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
A Paper size to be set in Unit
S Paper size to be set by SP mode
Paper size to be detected automatically. Paper size can be selected by UP
AD
mode/ Select paper size from the list on OP panel.
#AD Paper size to be detected automatically.
Paper size setting is required by UP mode/ Select paper size from the list on
#S
OP panel.
Paper size setting is required by SP mode/ Select paper size from the list on
SPS
OP panel
Paper size setting is required by UP mode/ Input actual paper size manually
#AU
on OP panel
Paper size setting is required by SP mode/ Input actual paper size (mm only)
#AS
manually on OP panel
--- Not supported
D095/M077 1-30 SM Appendix
Supported Paper Sizes
Specifications
For Printer (M077 only)
Appendix:
A4/LT LCT
1,000 x 2 2,500
Paper Size (mm) NA/EU NA EU
A3 SEF 297x420 --- --- AD
B4 SEF 257x364 --- --- AD
A4 LEF 297x210 #AD SPS AD
A4 SEF 210x297 --- --- #S
B5 LEF 257x182 #AD SPS AD
B5 SEF 182x257 --- --- #S
A5 SEF 148x210 #AD SPS AD
DLT SEF 8.5"x11" --- --- AD
LG SEF 8.5"x14" --- --- #S
LT LEF 11"x8.5" #AD A AD
LT SEF 8.5"x11" --- --- AD
HLT SEF 5.5"x8.5" #AD SPS AD
Foolscap
8.5"x13" --- --- #S
SEF
Folio
8.25"x13" --- --- #S
SEF
F SEF 8"x13" --- --- AD
Executive
10.5"x7.25" --- --- #S
LEF
Executive
7.25"x10.5 --- --- #S
SEF
SM Appendix 1-31 D095/M077
Supported Paper Sizes
A4/LT LCT
1,000 x 2 2,500
Paper Size (mm) NA/EU NA EU
- SEF 11"x15" --- --- #S
- SEF 11"x14" --- --- #S
- SEF 10"x15" --- --- #S
- SEF 10"x14" --- --- #S
- SEF 8.25"x14" --- --- #S
- SEF 10.5"x8" --- --- #AU
- SEF 8"x10.5" --- --- #AU
- SEF 10"x8" --- --- #AU
- SEF 8"x10" --- --- #S
- SEF 13"x19.2" --- --- #AU
- SEF 13"x18" --- --- #AU
SRA3 SEF 320x450 --- --- #S
- SEF 12"x18" --- --- AD
Min. 210.0 #AS
Custom size Mm Width
Max. 305.5 #AS
Min. 182.0 #AS
Length
Max. 230.0 #AS
Min. #AS
Custom size Inch Width
Max. #AS
Min. #AS
Length
Max. #AS
D095/M077 1-32 SM Appendix
Supported Paper Sizes
Remarks
Specifications
Appendix:
SEF Short Edge Feed
LFE Long Edge Feed
A Paper size to be set in Unit
S Paper size to be set by SP mode
Paper size to be detected automatically. Paper size can be selected by UP
AD
mode/ Select paper size from the list on OP panel.
#AD Paper size to be detected automatically.
Paper size setting is required by UP mode/ Select paper size from the list on
#S
OP panel.
Paper size setting is required by SP mode/ Select paper size from the list on
SPS
OP panel
Paper size setting is required by UP mode/ Input actual paper size manually
#AU
on OP panel
Paper size setting is required by SP mode/ Input actual paper size (mm only)
#AS
manually on OP panel
--- Not supported
SM Appendix 1-33 D095/M077
Option Specifications
1.3 OPTION SPECIFICATIONS
1.3.1 A3/11"X17" TRAY UNIT TK5000 (B331)
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11"x17" SEF, 81/2"x14" SEF,
Paper Size A4 SEF, A4 LEF, 81/2"x11" SEF, 11"x 81/2" LEF,
305 mm x 439 mm
Paper Weight 52 to 163 g/m2
Tray Capacity 1,000 sheets
Remaining Paper Detection 5-Step: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, End
D095/M077 1-34 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
Specifications
1.3.2 LCIT RT5030 (D452)
Appendix:
Operating
Ranges of temperature and humidity: Same as main machine.
Environment
Paper Feed System: FRR-CF (no air-knife separation)
Tray 1, 2 1,000 sheets (Thickness: 0.11 mm)
Tray Capacity:
Tray 3 2,550 sheets (Thickness: 0.11 mm)
Tray 1, 2 52 to 216 g/m2
Paper Weight
Tray 3 52 to 163 g/m2
A5 LEF, A5 SEF, 5½"x8½" LEF, B5 LEF, 5½"x8½"
Paper Size Tray 1,2,3
SEF, A4 LEF, 8½"x11" LEF
Fixed position side, end fences, adjusted for other
Tray 1, 2
paper sizes by the operator.
Paper Size Switching
Fixed position side, end fences, adjusted by service
Tray 3
technician.
Heater (Option) Anti-condensation heaters: 36W (18W x 2)
Size (W x D x H) 540 x 730 x 980 mm (21.3 x 28.7 x 38.6 in.)
Level Less than 5 mm deviation at front/back, left/right
Weight Less than 88 kg (193.6 lb)
Power Source DC 24 V ±10%
Power Consumption Less than 132 W
I/F Connection Serial connection to main frame
Feed possible from Tray 3 or Tray 4. Requires installation of tab
Tab Sheet: sheet fence.
Note: Only A4 LEF, 8½" x 11" LEF tab sheets can be fed.
Paper Level Trays 3, 4 5 Step: 900, 625, 375, 75, paper end
Detection: Tray 5 5 Step: 2250, 1525, 800, 75, paper end
SM Appendix 1-35 D095/M077
Option Specifications
Accuracy ±30 sheets (Tray 4, 5, 6)
The Multi-Bypass Tray (B833) can be installed on either this
Bypass Tray (Option)
LCIT or LCIT RT5050 (D532).
System
Mode Stand-alone
A B C
Noise Level
Operation < 73 dB < 78 dB < 80 dB < 83 dB
Standby < 64 dB < 70 dB < 78 dB
1.3.3 LCIT RT5050 (13"X19.2" LCT D532)
Speed 555 mm/s
Paper Feed System: FRR-CF (air-assisted separation)
Paper Capacity 2,000 sheets x 2 trays (80 g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
965 x 735 x 980 mm
Dimensions (W x D x H)
1,017 x 730 x 980 mm (With extension tray)
Weight Less than 190 Kg
Power source DC 24 V ±10% (from Mainframe)
Power consumption Less than 240 W
Printing: Less than 78dB (Full system)
Noise (Power level)
Stand-by: Less than 65 dB (Full system)
Paper sizes A5 (SEF)/HLT (SEF) – 13" x 19.2"
60 - 300 g/m2
Paper weight
16 - 79 lb. Bond/ 140 lb. Index/ 100 lb. Cover
Feed from Tray 3 or Tray 4.
The installation of a tab sheet fence is required.
Tab Sheet:
Note: Only A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF tab sheets can be
fed.
D095/M077 1-36 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
1.3.4 MULTI-BYPASS TRAY (B833)
Specifications
Appendix:
The Bypass Tray is attached to the top of the A3/DLT LCT D355.
Speed 555 mm/s
Paper Feed System FRR-CF
Tray Capacity 500 sheets (Paper thickness: 0.11 mm)
Paper Weight 60 to 216 g/m2
A5 LEF, A5 SEF to A3 SEF, HLT LEF
Paper Sizes
HLT SEF to 13"x19.2" SEF
Operator adjustable side fences allow variety of paper
Paper Size Switching
sizes.
Paper Size Detection Automatic (standard sizes only)
Anti-Condensation Heater No
Remaining Paper Detection 4-Step: Including Near-End (Accuracy ±50)
Weight Less than 18 kg (39.6 lb).
Power Source 24 Vdc (from Mainframe), 5 Vdc (from LCT)
Power Consumption Less than 50 W
Dimensions (W x D x H) 710 x 560 x 210 mm (30 x 22 x 8.3 in.)
The installation of a tab sheet fence is required.
Tab Sheets
Note: Only A4 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF tab sheets can be fed.
SM Appendix 1-37 D095/M077
Option Specifications
1.3.5 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5010 (B835)
Speed 439.9 mm/s
Paper Separation FRR System with Feed Belt
Width: A5 SEF/51/2"x81/2" SEF to 13"
Paper Sizes
Length: A5 LEF/51/2"x81/2" LEF to 19.2"
Paper Weight 64 to 216 g/m2
400 sheets (Paper thickness: 0.11 mm, 2 trays 200 sheets
Capacity
each)
Paper Size Detection Automatic (standard sizes only)
Operator adjustable side fences allow variety of paper
Paper Size Switching
sizes.
Side Registration Yes
Power Supply 24 V ± 10% (from Mainframe)
Power Consumption Less than 50 W
Less than 540 x 730 x 1270 mm
Dimensions (W x D x H)
21.2" x 28.7" x 50"
Weight Less than 45 kg (99 lb)
D095/M077 1-38 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
Specifications
1.3.6 Z-FOLDING UNIT ZF4000 (B660)
Appendix:
No Folding (60-300 g/m2):
A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, B6 SEF, 11"x17", 81/2"x14", 81/2"x11"
Paper Sizes SEF, 51/2"x81/2", 12"x18", 13"x19.2", 13"x18", SRA3
Folding (64-80 g/m2):
A3, B4, A4 SEF, 11"x17", 81/2"x14", 81/2"x11" SEF, 12"x18"
Dimensions (W x D x H) 177 x 620 x 960 mm, 7 x 24.5 x 37.8 in.
Weight Less than 55 kg (121 lb)
Power Consumption 100 W max.
North America 120 V, 60 Hz, 1 A
Power Supply
Europe/Asia 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.5 A
SM Appendix 1-39 D095/M077
Option Specifications
1.3.7 FINISHER SR5000 (3K FINISHER B830)
Upper Tray
500 sheets (A4, 81/2" x 11" and smaller)
2
Paper Capacity (80 g/m )
250 sheets (B4, 81/2" x 14" and larger)
Paper Size A3 to A6 SEF, 11"x17" to 51/2"x81/2", 12"x18", 13"x19"
Paper Weight 52 to 216 g/m2
Upper Tray Full Detection Provided
Shift Tray
3000 sheets (A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2" x 11" LEF)
1500 sheets (A3, A4 SEF, B4, B5 SEF, 11"x 17" SEF,
81/2"x14", 81/2"x11" SEF)
2
Paper Capacity (80 g/m )
1000 sheets (12" x 18", 13"x19")
500 sheets (A5 LEF, 51/2" x 81/2" LEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF, 51/2" x 81/2" SEF)
A3 to A5, 11"x17" to 51/2"x81/2", 12"x18", 13"x19"
Paper Sizes
(including tab paper)
Paper Weight 52 to 300 g/m2
Shift Tray Full Detection Provided
Stapler
A4, B5, 81/2"x11" (Max. 100 Sheets)
Stapling Stack Sizes
A3, B4, 11"x17", 81/2"x14" (Max. 50 sheets)
A3 to B5, 11"x17" to 81/2"x11"
Stapling Paper Sizes
Z fold paper: A3 , B4 , 11"x17"
64 to 80 g/m2
Stapling Paper Weight
Z fold paper: 64 to 80 g/m2
D095/M077 1-40 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
4 Modes
Specifications
Appendix:
Staple Positions 1 Staple: Front, Rear, Rear-Oblique
2 Stapes: 2 locations
Staple Capacity 5,000 staples/cartridge
Staple Supply Cartridge or Staple Replacement
Sheets Sets Sizes
10 to 100 200 to 30 A4 SEF, B5 SEF, 81/2"x11" SEF,
No Folding 2 to 9 150 A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2"x11" LEF
Stapled 10 to 50 150 to 30
Stack A3, B4, 11"x17", 81/2"x14"
2 to 9 150
Sizes
Sheets Sets Sizes
Folding A3 Z fold + A4,
1 to 10 30 to 3 B4 Z fold + B5,
11"X17" Z-Fold + 81/2"x11"
Trim Waste Staple Capacity 15,000 or more
Waste Staple Hopper Full
Provided
Detection
Power Consumption Less than 120 W
Power Source DC 24 V (From Mainframe)
Size (W x D x H) 800 x 730 x 980 mm, 1.5 x 28.7 x 38.6 in.
Weight Less than 75 kg (165 lb)
SM Appendix 1-41 D095/M077
Option Specifications
1.3.8 PUNCH UNIT PU5000 (B831)
The punch unit is installed in the Finisher SR5000 (B830).
2/3-hole (North America)
Punch Hole Positions
2/4-hole (Europe)
Punch Paper Size
A6 to A3 SEF, 11"x17" to 51/2"x81/2" SEF
2-Hole (NA)
A5 to A4 LEF, 81/2"x11" LEF, 51/2"x81/2" LEF
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11"x17" SEF
3-Hole (NA)
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2"x11" LEF
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, 11"x17" SEF
4-Hole (EUR/A)
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, 81/2"x11" LEF
Paper Weight
2-Hole (NA) 52 g/m2 to 163 g/m2
3-Hole (NA) 52 g/m2 to 163 g/m2
4-Hole (EUR/A) 52 g/m2 to 128 g/m2
Punch Waste Hopper Capacity
2-Hole (NA) 10 K
3-Hole (NA) 10 K
4-Hole (EUR/A) 15 K
Operation Modes All (Shift, Proof, Staple)
D095/M077 1-42 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
Specifications
1.3.9 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434)
Appendix:
General
Temperature and humidity ranges: Same as main
Operating Environment
machine.
Service Life Expected: Five years or 60,000K
Size (w x h x d) 990 x 730 x 1130 mm (39 x 28.7 x 44.5 in.)
Weight 128 kg (281.6)
NA AC 120V 60 Hz, 15A
Power Supply
EU AC 220 to 240V, 50/60 Hz 10A
Power Consumption 250 W
Level Less than 5 mm deviation at front/back, left/right
Noise Level (dB A) Mode Alone System
Shift < 76 dB ---
Staple < 78 dB < 83 dB
SM Appendix 1-43 D095/M077
Option Specifications
Shift Tray
2500 A4 LEF, B5 LEF, LT LEF
A3, A4 SEF, B4, B5 SEF, LT, LG<
1500
LT SEF, SRA4, 226x310 mm
12x18", SRA3, 13x18", 12.6x1.5",
Unfolded Paper
Capacity 1000 12.6x19.2", 13x19", 13x19.2",
310x432 mm
500 A5 LEF, HLT LEF
100 A5 SEF, HLT SEF
Z-Folded Paper 30
Unfolded Paper A5 to 13x19.2"
Paper Size A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG LT SEF, 12x18",
Z-Folded Paper
8-kai
Unfolded Paper 40 to 300 g/m2
Paper Weight
Z-Folded Paper 64 to 105 g/m2
D095/M077 1-44 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
Specifications
Proof Tray
Appendix:
250 A4, LT or smaller
Unfolded Paper
50 B4, LG or larger
Capacity
20 A4, LT or smaller
Z-Folded Paper
20 B4, LG or larger
Unfolded Paper A6 SEF to 13x19.2", Postcard SEF
Paper Size A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF, 12x18",
Z-Folded Paper
8-kai
Paper Weight Unfolded Paper 52 to 216 g/m2
Z-Folded Paper 64 to 105 g/m2
SM Appendix 1-45 D095/M077
Option Specifications
Corner Stapling
2 to 100 A4, B5, LT
Unfolded Paper
2 to 50 A3, B4, DLT, LG
10
Combined Stack
Z-Folded Unfolded
1 1 to 90
2 0 to 80
Stack Size (80 g/m2) 3 0 to 70
Z-Folded Paper 4 0 to 60
5 0 to 50
6 0 to 40
7 0 to 30
8 0 to 20
9 0 to 10
10 0
Paper Size Unfolded Paper B5 to A3, LT to DLT
Z-Folded Paper A3, B4, DLT
Paper Weight Unfolded Paper 64 to 90 g/m2
Z-Folded Paper 64 to 105 g/m2
1 Staple: Rear, Rear diagonal, or Front
Stapling Positions
2 Staples: Front/Rear
Staple Supply Cartridge with 5000-staple capacity
Tray Capacity After Stapling
D095/M077 1-46 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
Pages Stacks Size
Specifications
Appendix:
20 to 100 125 to 25
10 to 19 200 to 105 A4 LEF, B5 LEF, LT LEF
2 to 9 150
No Folding
10 to 100 150 to 15
A4 SEF, B5 SEF, LT SEF
2 to 9 150
10 to 50 150 to 30
A3, B4, DLT, LG
2 to 9 150
Pages Stacks Size
No Folding, Mixed Sizes A3/A4 LEF
2 to 50 30 B4/B5 LEF
DLT/LT LEF
Pages Stacks Size
Z-Folded, Mixed with A3 Z-fold/A4
Unfolded 1 to 10 30 to 3 B4 Z-fold/B5
DLT Z-fold/LT
Staple Trimming Hopper Capacity 15,000 staples
Hopper Full Alert Photo-sensor
Trimming Disposal Alert, operator
SM Appendix 1-47 D095/M077
Option Specifications
Booklet Stapling
Stack Size 20 64 to 80 g/m2
15 80 to 90 g/m2
13x19.2", 13x19", 12.6x19.2", 12.6x18.5", 13x18",
SRA3 (320x450 mm), 12x18", A3, B4, SRA4 (320 x
Paper Size
225 mm), 226x310 mm, 310 x 432 mm, A4,B5, DLT,
LG, LT
Paper Weight 60 to 90 g/m2
Stapling Positions 2 staples, 2 fixed locations
Staple Supply 2 cartridges, 5000 staples each
Pages Stacks Size
2 to 5 30
Tray Capacity After Stapling 6 to 10 15
All sizes
11 to 15 10
16 to 20 5
D095/M077 1-48 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
Specifications
Punch Unit PU5020 (D449) (Option)
Appendix:
This punch unit is not pre-installed in the finisher. The punch unit must be installed.
North America 2/3 hole selectable
Punching Europe 2/4 hole selectable
Scandinavia 4 hole
Skew Correction Yes
Paper Registration Yes
Holes Edge Size
SEF A6 to A3, HLT to DLT
2 Holes
LEF A5 to A4, HLT to LT
SEF A6 to A3, HLT to DLT
NA 2 Holes
LEF A5 to A4, HLT to LT
Paper Size SEF A3, B4, DLT
3 Holes
LEF A4, B5, LT
SEF A3, B4, DLT
EU 4 Holes
LEF A4, B5, LT
SEF B6 to A3, HLT to DLT
Scn 4 Holes
LEF A5 to A4, HLT to LT
Holes Weight
2 Holes
NA 2 Holes 52 to 209 g/m2
Paper Weight
3 Holes
EU 4 Holes
52 to 163 g/m2
Scn 4 Holes
SM Appendix 1-49 D095/M077
Option Specifications
1.3.10 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455)
This option is installed on the left side of the Booklet Finisher (D434).
Compatible Machines Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434) with the D059/D060/D061
Operating Environment Temperature and humidity ranges: Same as main machine.
Service Life Expected: 5 years or 12,000 K
Paper Size
13x19.2", 13x19", 12.6x19.2", 12.6x18.5", 13x19", SRA3
Standard Sizes (320x450 mm), 12x18", A3, B4, SRA4 (320x225 mm),
226x310 mm, 310 x 432 mm, A4, B5, DLT, LG, LT, 8 kai
Width: 182 to 330 mm
Custom Size
Length: 257 to 488 mm
Stack Size 1 to 20 sheets (folded)
Trimming 40 sheets (80 g/m2)
Pages Sets
1 to 5 60 for all sizes
35 for B5 and A4/LT
6 to 10
40 for B4/LG and A3/DLT
Tray Capacity 11 to 15 25 for all sizes
20 for B5, A4/LT and B4/LG
16 to 18
25 for A3/DLT
20 for B5, A4/LT and B4/LG
19 to 20
25 for A3/DLT
Weight: 80 g/m2
Paper Weight
Weight: 20 lb. Bond
NA AC 120V 60 Hz, 15A
Power Supply
EU AC 220 to 240V, 50/60 Hz 10A
Power Consumption 75W
D095/M077 1-50 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
Size (w x d x h) 1115 x 590 x 555 mm (43.9 x 23.2 x 21.8 in.)
Specifications
Appendix:
Level Less than 5 mm deviation at front/back, left/right
Weight 70 kg or less
Noise Level (dB A) Mode Alone System
Straight-Through < 68 dB < 75 dB
Trimming < 72 dB < 75 dB
1.3.11 RING BINDER RB5000 (D392)
Configuration Console
Paper Transport Centered in paper path
Punching + ring binding
Operation Modes Punching only
Straight-through (downstream delivery)
Signature Thickness 2 to 100 sheets
Punching,
Paper Size A4 LEF, LT LEF
binding
Straight-through (no punching)
A6 to A3 SEF, DLT, HLT, 12"x18", 13"x19",
Unfolded 12.6"x19.2", 13"x19.2", Tab sheets (A4,
LT, LG)
A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF 12"x18"
Z-Folded
(from upstream Z-Folder unit).
Paper Weight 64 to 216 g/m2
Ring Sizes 2 (50-sheet, 100-sheet)
A4 LEF: 23 holes
Punching
LT LEF: 21 holes
Ring Supply Cartridge feed: capacity: 80 rings max.
SM Appendix 1-51 D095/M077
Option Specifications
Output Tray Capacity 11 documents (100-ring bound, A4 SEF)
Thickness Ring On Tray
2 to 10 50 25
11 to 50 50, 100 20
51 to 100 100 11
Punching Only Up to 50 sheets
Dimensions 870 x 730 x 980 mm (34.3 x 28.7 x 38.6 in.)
Weight 140 kg (308 lb)
Power Consumption Less than 400 W
D095/M077 1-52 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
Specifications
1.3.12 PERFECT BINDER D391
Appendix:
Cover Interposer (Inserter) D391
Feed System Automatic Paper Feed
Trays Two. Tray A (upper), Tray B (lower)
Cover Setting Face-up stacking
Feed Top to bottom
Transport Mode Simplex
Standard PPC, Color Paper, Coated Paper
Cover Paper Type
Paper type mixing not recommended
Standard: A4 SEF, A4 LEF, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, LT SEF, LT LEF, EXE
SEF
Cover Size Width: 257 to 330.2 mm
Length: 182 to 487.7 mm
Recommended: 13"x19.2", 13"x19", 13"x18", A3, B4
Up to 200 covers (80 g/m2)
Tray A, B Capacity
Maximum stack thickness: 24 mm
Paper Weight 64 g/m2 to 300 g/m2
Paper Positioning Center aligned
Width: Adjustable slide-fence contact sensors
Paper Size
Tray A, Tray B: 1 sensor each
Detection
Length: Pulse count photo-sensors
Size (w x d x h) 621 x 679 x 213 mm (24.5 x 26.7 x 8.4 in.)
Weight Approximately 17 kg (37.4 lb)
Power Supply DC 24V (supplied from host machine via Perfect Binder)
SM Appendix 1-53 D095/M077
Option Specifications Rev. 05/31/2012
Power Less than 103 W (maximum at operation)
Consumption
Perfect Binder (D391)
Paper Positioning Center aligned
Delivery Face-down
10 to 200 sheets (64 to 80 g/m2)
Signature Thickness 10 to 150 sheets (81 to 105 g/m2)
Max. thickness: Up to 23 mm (0.9 in.)
Paper Size Width: 182 to 228.6 mm
Signature
Length: 257 to 320 mm
Width: 257 to 330.2 mm
Cover
Length: 364 to 487.7 mm
⇒ Signature 64 to 105 g/m2 (See *)
Paper Thickness
Cover 90 to 300 g/m2
Width 139.7 mm to 216 mm
Finished Size
Length 201 to 297 mm
Top 6 to 28 mm
Trimming Range Bottom 6 to 28 mm
Fore Edge 6 to 40 mm
* 106 to 163 g/m2 is available for slip sheets, however, limited to 10 sheets.
D095/M077 1-54 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
Specifications
Appendix:
Target Signature Cover
13"x19.2"
13"x19"
A4 SRA4
13"x18"
Recommended SRA3
Cover/Signature Size Ratios
B5 A4 A3
A5 B5 B4
13"x19.2"
LT 9"x12"
13"x19"
3 cuts: Bottom, top, fore edge
Trimming Modes 1 cut: Fore edge (Limit: 297 mm)
No cuts
Straight-through, no binding
Width: 98.4 to 330.2 mm
Downstream Delivery Size
Length: 139.7 to 500 mm
Paper Weight 52 to 300 g/m2
Max.: 25 mm (80g/m2)
Book Output Tray
Book door locked during operation
Warm-up Time Less than 380 sec. (6.3 min.)
Glue vat 380 g (continuous pellet supply)
Glue Capacity
Approximately A4 to B5 100 books
More than 15 books
Trimmings Box Capacity
Approx. A4 to B5 of 100 sheets each, 80 g/m2
Size (w x d x h) 1090 x 791 x 1387 mm (43 x 31 x 53.5 in.)
Weight 335 kg (737 lb)
EU: 220 to 240V 50/60 Hz
Power Supply
NA: 208 60 Hz
Power Consumption Less than 623 W (with inserter)
SM Appendix 1-55 D095/M077
Option Specifications
1.3.13 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447)
The Tray Cart (D456) is available as an additional option for this unit.
General
Temperature and humidity ranges: Same as main
Operating Environment
machine.
Service Life Expected: 5 years or 60,000 K
Speed 280 to 700 mm/s
Front Door Lock Hasps provided, lock not provided
Size (w x h x d) 900 x 980 x 730 mm (35.4" x 38.6" x 28.7")
Weight 120 kg (264.6 lb.)
NA AC 120V 60 Hz, 15A
Power Supply
EU AC 220 to 240V, 50/60 Hz 10A
Power Consumption 120 W
Level Less than 5 mm deviation at front/back, left/right
Noise Level (dB A) Mode Alone System
Shift < 76 dB < 83 dB
D095/M077 1-56 SM Appendix
Option Specifications
Specifications
Shift Tray
Appendix:
A3 Ext., A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, DLT
5,000
SEF, LG SEF, LT SEF, LT LEF
Capacity (80 g/m2)
B5 SEF, B5 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, HLT SEF,
2,500
HLT LEF
Paper Weight 40 to 300 g/m2
Tray Full Detection 4-Steps: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
Proof Tray
Capacity 250 (A4, LT 80 g/m2)
Paper Size A5 SEF/Postcard to 331 x 499 mm (13" x 19.2")
Paper Weight 40 to 300 g/m2
Tray Full Detection None
1.3.14 BUFFER PASS UNIT (M379)
Dimensions (W x H x D) 330 x 920 x 730 mm, 13.0" x 36.2" x 28.7"
Weight Less than 92 kg, 202.9 lb.
Power consumption Less than 200 W
NA: 100 to 120 V, 50/60 Hz, 3 A
Power source
EU: 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 1 A
331 x 488 mm to A5
Paper Size
13" x 19.2" to 51/2 x 81/2
Paper Weight 52 to 300 g/m2, 14 to 80 lb.
SM Appendix 1-57 D095/M077
APPENDIX:
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
16 10/9/2012 High Capacity Stacker
23 7/18/2011 Trimming Unit
PM Tables
2. APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 PM TABLES
2.1.1 MAIN MACHINE
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Symbol Key for PM Tables
I Inspect. Clean, replace, or lubricate as needed.
C Cleaning required.
R Replacement required.
AN As needed
Lubrication required:
Silicone Grease 501 (52039502)
Grease Barrierta – S552R (A2579300)
L
Grease – KS660 – SHIN-ETSU
Heat Resisting Grease MT-78
Launa Oil 40
SM Appendix 2-1 D095/M077
PM Tables
Mainframe PM Parts
ADF (D095 only)
80K 120K 140K Note
Clean with a damp cloth, or
Transport belt R
alcohol
Feed belt R
Separation roller R
Pick-up roller R
Sensors I I Blower brush
Lubricate with a very small
Drive gears I I
amount of G501.
Scanner Unit (D095 only)
400K 800K 1000K 3000K Note
1st to 3rd mirrors C Optics cloth
Dust Filter I/C Blower brush
Wire Adjustment I
Exposure Glass R
D095/M077 2-2 SM Appendix
PM Tables
PCDU
400K 800K 1200K 1600K 2400K Note
Drum Unit: K R
Drum Unit: CMY R
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Charge Corona Units R
Drum Cleaning
R
Brush Roller
Drum Cleaning
R
Blade
Drum Lubricant
R
Brush Roller
Drum Lubricant
R
Blade
Drum Lubricant Bar R
Drum Cleaning Gear
R
Unit
Developer R
Development Unit I/C
Dust Shield Glass C Blower brush
Erase Lamp Shield
C Blower brush
Glass
Drum Potential
C Blower brush
Sensor
SM Appendix 2-3 D095/M077
PM Tables
Transfer Units
400K 800K 1200K 1600K Note
ITB Unit
ITB (Image Transfer Belt) R
Image Transfer Rollers R
ITB Bias Roller R
All Other Rollers in the ITB Wipe with a dry
I C
Unit cloth
Wipe with a damp
ID and MUSIC Sensors C
cloth (alcohol)
ITB Cleaning Brush Roller R
ITB Cleaning Blade R
These items are
ITB Lubricant Bar R always replaced
as a set.
ITB Lubricant Brush Roller R
ITB lubricant blade R
Blower brush or
ITB Fan C
dry cloth
PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit
Paper Transfer Roller R
PTR Cleaning Brush Roller R
PTR Cleaning Blade R
PTR Lubrication Bar R
PTR Lubrication Brush
R
Roller
PTR Discharge Plate R
PTR Entrance Mylar C Alcohol
D095/M077 2-4 SM Appendix
PM Tables
Toner Hopper
400K 800K 2800K Note
Blower brush or
Toner Hopper Unit C
Maintenance
Preventive
dry cloth
Appendix:
Grease Barrierta -
Toner Bottle Motor Gears L
S552R
Sub-Hopper Unit
400 K 3200K Note
Sub-hopper Unit Gear L Grease Barrierta
Toner Supply Tube Vacuum
( "Remaining Toner
C Detection Error" in the
Troubleshooting section of
the Main Chapters)
Fusing Unit
400K 800K 1600K 2400K Note
Fusing Belt R *1
Hot Roller R
Pressure Roller R
Pressure Roller Stripper Pawl
C Dry cloth
Unit
Fusing Belt Stripper Plate C Dry cloth
Cleaning Web R
Heating Roller Thermistors I R
SM Appendix 2-5 D095/M077
PM Tables
400K 800K 1600K 2400K Note
Blower
Heating Roller Thermopile C
brush
Blower
Pressure Roller Thermopile C
brush
Fusing Entrance Guide I
Fusing Belt Tension Roller
R
Bushings
*1: Clean the heating roller and hot roller with alcohol when replacing the fusing belt.
Paper Feed: Mainframe
400K 800K 1200K Note
Registration Rollers C Damp cloth
All Rollers in Registration Unit C Damp cloth
Registration Feed Guide Plate I Damp cloth
Registration Sensor C Blower brush
Registration Unit Entrance Sensor C Blower brush
Paper Transfer Sensor C Blower brush
Double Feed Sensors C Blower brush
CIS C Blower brush
Paper Dust Tray C Dry cloth.
D095/M077 2-6 SM Appendix
PM Tables
Paper Feed: Trays
300K 400K 800K Note
Pick-up Rollers
(Tray 1 to Tray 2)
Service Life: 1000K
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Paper Feed Rollers Replace if jams and/or
(Tray 1 to Tray 2) double-feeds occur with
increasing frequency.
Separation Rollers
(Tray 1 to Tray 2)
Paper Feed Sensor C Blower brush
Vertical Feed Sensors C Blower brush
Paper Feed Roller
R Damp cloth
(Tray 3 and 4)
Pick-up Roller
R Damp cloth
(Tray 3 and 4)
Separation Roller
R Damp cloth
(Tray 3 and 4)
Transport Guide Plate
Inspect and clean every 500K. (Damp cloth)
(Tray 3 and 4)
Grip Roller
Inspect and clean every 500K. (Damp cloth)
(Tray 3 and 4)
Duplex Unit
400K 800K 1200K Note
Duplex Transport Rollers C Damp cloth
Duplex Transport Sensors C Blower brush
SM Appendix 2-7 D095/M077
PM Tables
Paper Exit
400K 800K 1200K Note
Heat Pipe Roller C Alcohol, dry cloth
Exit Anti-Static Brushes C Blower brush
Paper Exit Rollers (Upper,
C Alcohol, dry cloth
Lower)
Paper Exit Sensor C Blower brush
Transport Rollers C Blower brush
Paper Transport Belt C Damp cloth
Other
220K 400K 1200K Note
Dust Filters R
Development Filters C Vacuum
PSU Filter C Vacuum
Controller Filter C Vacuum
Fiery Controller Filter C Vacuum
Ozone Filters R
Empty and clean every
Waste Toner Bottle I, R
inspection
D095/M077 2-8 SM Appendix
PM Tables
2.1.2 LCIT RT5050 (D532)
300K 1000K Expected Note
Paper Feed Roller R Damp cloth
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Pick-up Roller R Damp cloth
Separation Roller R Damp cloth
Transport Guide Plate Inspect and clean every 500K. (Damp cloth)
Grip Roller Inspect and clean every 500K. (Damp cloth)
2.1.3 LCIT RT5030 (D452)
The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed.
Part 500K 1000K Note
Transport guide plate IC
Grip rollers (drive, idle rollers) IC
Paper feed rollers x3 IC R Clean with damp, clean
Pick-up rollers x3 IC R cloth
Separation rollers x3 IC R
CIS IC IC
Part 1000K 3000K 5000K Notes
Pickup Solenoids IR 3rd, 4th, 5th Tray
Separation Solenoids IR 3rd, 4th, 5th Tray
Lift Motors IR 3rd, 4th, 5th Tray
Lift Motor IR 5th Tray
SM Appendix 2-9 D095/M077
PM Tables
2.1.4 BRIDGE UNIT (D379)
500K 1000K Expected Note
Transport Guide Plate Inspect and clean every 500K. (Damp cloth)
Grip Roller Inspect and clean every 500K. (Damp cloth)
2.1.5 MULTI-BYPASS TRAY (B833)
500K 1000K Expected Note
Paper Feed Roller R
Pick-up Roller R
Separation Roller R
Transport Guide Plate Inspect and clean every 500K.
Grip Roller Inspect and clean every 500K.
D095/M077 2-10 SM Appendix
PM Tables
2.1.6 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY (B835)
The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed.
60 K As Needed Note
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Drive Rollers C Dry cloth
Idle Rollers C Dry cloth
Feed Belt R
Separation Roller R
Pick-up Roller R
Sensors C Blower brush.
Lubricate with a very small amount
Drive Gears I
of G501.
2.1.7 Z-FOLDING UNIT (B660)
As Needed Note
Drive Rollers C Dry cloth.
Idle Rollers C Dry cloth.
Anti-Static Brush C Dry cloth.
Bushings L Silicone Oil
Sensors C Dry cloth.
SM Appendix 2-11 D095/M077
PM Tables
2.1.8 3000-SHEET FINISHER (B830)
350K 700K 1050K Note
FINISHER
Driver rollers I I I Alcohol
Idle rollers I I I Alcohol
Discharge brush I I I Alcohol
Shaft Bearings I I I Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy.
Sensors I I I Blower brush.
Jogger fences I I I Make sure that the screws are tight.
Staple waste
C C C Empty staple waste.
hopper
2.1.9 PUNCH (B831)
300K 450K 600K EM Note
Punch Waste
I I I Remove and empty
Hopper
D095/M077 2-12 SM Appendix
PM Tables
2.1.10 BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 (D434)
Main
Part 5000K 25000K
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Rollers (drive, idle) IC
Alcohol, clean cloth
Discharge brush IC
Lubricate with silicone oil if
Shafts IC
noisy
Sensors IC Blower brush
Jogger fences IC Tighten screws
Staple trimmings hopper IC Empty hopper
Alignment brush roller IR
Positioning roller IR See below
Drag roller (sponge)*1 IR
1. At 25000K, display the PM Counts for the alignment brush roller, positioning roller, and
drag sponge roller.
2. Replace if "Target" has been exceeded.
SM Appendix 2-13 D095/M077
PM Tables
Punch Unit
Part 20000K
Display PM Count for punch unit.
Punch unit IC
Replace if "Target" has been exceeded.
Staplers
Part 50000K 200000K
Corner stapler IR Display PM Count.
Replace if "Target"
Booklet Staplers (x2) IR exceeded.
2.1.11 TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 (D455)
Part PM Visit
Rollers (drive, idle rollers) IC
Water, clean cloth
Belts IC
Discharge brush IC Cloth, blower brush
Roller shafts Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy
Sensors IC Blower brush
Empty, make sure the operator knows how
Paper trimmings hopper IC
to empty the hopper
Replace the blade after 400K. SP7989
Trimming Blade R
(Trim Count) displays the total count.
D095/M077 2-14 SM Appendix
PM Tables
2.1.12 RING BINDER (D392)
Periodically inspect and clean the parts listed in the table below.
Item Action
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Horizontal Transport Path
Anti-static brushes Blower brush
Horizontal transport path sensors Blower brush
Drive rollers, idle rollers Damp cloth
Switchback Unit
Anti-static brushes Blower brush
Switchback area sensors Blower brush
Drive rollers, idle rollers Damp cloth
Binder Unit
Paddle roller Blower brush
Transport path sensors Blower brush
Drive rollers, idle rollers Damp cloth
SM Appendix 2-15 D095/M077
PM Tables Rev. 10/9/2012
2.1.13 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010 (D447)
Part 500K PM Visit
Rollers (drive, idle rollers) IC IC
Alcohol, clean cloth
Anti-static brush IC IC
Lubricate with silicone oil if
Shafts IC IC
noisy.
Sensors IC IC Blower brush
Sub jogger fences IC IC
Main jogger fences IC IC Alcohol, clean cloth
LE stopper IC IC
⇒ Tray Lift Worm Gear
IC IC
Lubricate with Mobiltemp
grease.
D095/M077 2-16 SM Appendix
PM Tables
2.1.14 PERFECT BINDER/INSERTER (D391)
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
1 Inserter Unit 8 Cover Registration Unit
2 Vertical Path (Covers from Inserter) 9 Signature Rotation Unit
3 Horizontal Paper Path 10 Trimming Unit
4 Signature Path 11 Trimming Buffer Unit
5 Stacking Tray 12 Trimmings Box
6 Main Grip Unit 13 Book Buffer
7 Gluing Unit 14 Book Output
SM Appendix 2-17 D095/M077
PM Tables
To reset the PM counters for the Perfect Binder (D391), use the Dip SW on the main board
of the perfect binder. For detail, refer to "Resetting Counter" in the main service manual for
the Perfect Binder (D391).
The following parts are not displayed in the PM counters (SP7621). "PM part replacement
message" is displayed on the LCD if the following parts reach their PM part life.
Blade, Trimmings catcher unit, Blade Cradle, Glue Vat unit
Inserter Unit
Part Clean PM Comments
Feed Roller 40 K sheets 100 K sheets Spurious noise, feed jams
1,000 K 1,000 K
Magnetic Clutch Cover skews, jams
sheets sheets
Pickup Roller 40 K sheets 100 K sheets Feed slippage, feed jams
Spurious noise, double
Separation Roller 40 K sheets 100 K sheets
feeds
Separation Roller Torque 1,000 K Spurious noise, double
Limiter sheets feeds
Skew
Cover Unit Drive Roller 1 EM
Predicted: 30,000 K Sheets
Skew
Cover Unit Drive Roller 2 EM
Predicted: 30,000 K Sheets
D095/M077 2-18 SM Appendix
PM Tables
Horizontal Paper Path
Interval
Part Comments
EM Predicted Clean
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Anti-Static Brush: Cover, signature misaligned due to
2,000 K
Horizontal Path: EM large amount of static charge on
sheets
Small cover
Drawer Harness 20 K Book detected in tray, book stacking
EM
(Female Connector) books tray error
Drawer Harness 20 K Book detected in tray, book stacking
EM
(Male Connector) books tray error
30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in
Entrance Roller EM
sheets sheets feed capability
Horizontal Exit 30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in
EM
Roller 1 sheets sheets feed capability
Horizontal Exit 30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in
EM
Roller 2 sheets sheets feed capability
Horizontal Transport 30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in
EM
Roller 1 sheets sheets feed capability
Horizontal Transport 30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in
EM
Roller 2 sheets sheets feed capability
Horizontal Transport 30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in
EM
Roller 3 sheets sheets feed capability
Horizontal Transport 30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in
EM
Roller 4 sheets sheets feed capability
SM Appendix 2-19 D095/M077
PM Tables
Interval
Part Comments
EM Predicted Clean
Horizontal Transport 30,000 K 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in
EM
Roller 5 sheets sheets feed capability
Relay Reflective
200 K 200 K Jams, sensor adjustment error (if not
Sensor Mirrors: Clean
sheets sheets cleaned)
Large
1,000 K 1,000 K Pressure on paper becomes loose,
Ripple Rollers EM
sheets sheets paper cannot exit
Signature Path
Part Interval Predicted Comments
Due to large amount of discharge, excessive
Anti-Static Brush 2,000 K
EM amount of spill around trimmer unit. Poor
1: Signature Path sheets
stacking in stacking tray.
Due to large amount of discharge, excessive
Anti-Static Brush 2,000 K
EM amount of spill around trimmer unit. Poor
2: Signature Path sheets
stacking in stacking tray.
D095/M077 2-20 SM Appendix
PM Tables
Stacking Tray
Part Interval Predicted Clean Comments
Trailing edge of paper does not return
Switchback 1,000 K
Maintenance
Preventive
EM (Trailing edge does not align correctly
Appendix:
Roller sheets
in stacking tray)
TE Press Roller: 1,000 K
EM Stack edge does not align correctly
Large sheets
TE Press Roller: 1,000 K
EM Stack edge does not align correctly
Small sheets
15,000 K Jogger motor error, signature stack
Jogger Motors EM
sheets does not align correctly
Anti-Static Due to large amount of discharge,
2,000 K
Brush: Stacking EM excessive amount of spill around
sheets
Tray trimmer unit Poor stacking
Rollers: 1,000 K Jam, skew due to deterioration in feed
Clean
Stacking Tray sheets capability
Main Grip Unit
Part Interval Predicted Replace Comments
Main Grip 100 K Main grip motor error, PCB damaged
EM
Motors signatures (blown fuse)
Signature thickness sensor error.
Signature
50 K Use the Service Board DIP switches
Thickness EM
signatures to adjust the signature thickness for
Sensor
25 mm.
SM Appendix 2-21 D095/M077
PM Tables
Gluing Unit
Part PM Comments
Glue Vat Unit 2,000 hours Heater error, warm-up time not within specification
Cover Registration Unit
Part Interval Predicted
1,000 K Poor paper return, causes jams,
Buffer Roller EM
sheets skewing
Anti-Static Brush: Cover 2,000 K Increase in amount of trimmings
EM
Registration: Horizontal Path sheets spillover, trimming unit
Signature Rotation Unit
Part Interval Predicted Replace
20 K Ball screw cannot
Ball Screw Unit EM
times apply pressure
Torque Diode (Signature 50 K
EM Inaccurate cutting
Rotation Unit for Trimming) signatures
D095/M077 2-22 SM Appendix
Rev. 07/18/2011 PM Tables
⇒ Trimming Unit
Part Interval Comments
Blade PM Set the machine in Replacement Mode for
Maintenance
Preventive
replacement.
Appendix:
40 K cuts
Trimmings Catcher PM Note: Blade and Trimmings Catcher are
always replaced together.
Blade Cradle PM 5.5 K Cuts
Signature Exit 100 K Jams, sensor adjustment error (if not
Clean
Sensors (E/R) signatures cleaned)
Trimmings Buffer 50 K
PM
Motor signatures
Other
Part Interval Predicted
Deodorization Filters EM 1,000 K sheets Glue odor noticeable
Deodorization Filters (Gluing Unit) EM 1,000 K sheets Glue odor noticeable
SM Appendix 2-23 D095/M077
APPENDIX:
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
67 02/23/2011 Changed SC498 to SC497 T/H Sensor K Error
85 02/23/2011 Added SC531-017 thru 021
96 ~ 110 05/23/2011 SC571, 572, 576, 577
109 ~ 124 1/24/2012 SC636
277 ~ 279 1/24/2012 SC823
289 1/24/2012 SC899
105 ~ 116 10/17/2011 SC520-021
122 ~ 125 02/23/2011 Added SC720 thru SC721-01 and 02
Service Call Conditions
3. APPENDIX: SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
3.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
3.1.1 SERVICE CALL TABLE
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
Service Call
Conditions
Critical SCs are displayed on the operation Enter SP mode and do SP5810
Appendix:
A panel. The machine is disabled, and operator to release the machine for
cannot reset the SC. servicing.
Turn the main power switch off
SCs that disable only the features that use
and on.
the defective item. These SCs are not shown
"Correct Procedure to Turn
B to the operator under normal conditions. They
Off the Power" under the
are displayed on the operation panel only
Installation Requirement in the
when the defective feature is selected.
Field Service Manual.
SCs that are not shown on the operation
C Logging only
panel. They are internally logged.
Turn the operation switch (or
Turning the operation switch (or main power main power switch) off and on.
switch) off then on resets these SCs. These "Correct Procedure to Turn
D
SCs are displayed on the operation panel and Off the Power" under the
displayed again if the error reoccurs. Installation Requirement in the
Field Service Manual.
SM Appendix 3-1 D095/M077
Service Call Conditions
3.1.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS
Before You Begin…
If a problem concerns a circuit board, disconnect and reconnect the connectors and then
test the machine. Often a loose or disconnected harness is the cause of the problem.
Always do this before you decide to replace the PCB.
If a motor lock error occurs, check the mechanical load before you decide to replace the
motor or sensors.
When a Level "A" or "B" SC occurs while in an SP mode, the machine cannot display the
SC number. If this occurs, check the SC number after leaving the SP mode.
The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level "D" SC code. This is
done for Level "D" SC codes only.
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation switch to switch the power off,
wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
"Correct Procedure to Turn Off the Power" under the Installation Requirement in
the Field Service Manual.
The main power LED lights or flashes while the main machine is communicating with the
network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or
writing data.
D095/M077 3-2 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 1
3.2 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 1
3.2.1 SC CODES GROUP 1: SCANNING
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Exposure Lamp Error (D095 only)
Exposure lamp defective
Lamp stabilizer defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Exposure lamp connector defective
101 B The standard white level was Scanner motor control unit (MCU
not detected properly when board) defective
scanning the white plate. SBU board defective
Dirty standard white plate
Dirty scanner mirror or scanner
mirror or lens block out of position
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Home Position Error 1 (D095 only)
Scanner home position sensor
defective
Poor connection between HP
sensor and MCU board
The scanner home position Scanner motor control unit (MCU
120 B sensor does not detect the board) defective
OFF condition during Scanner wire, timing belt, pulleys, or
initialization or copying carriage out of position
Scanner motor defective
Poor connection or defective
harness between MCU board and
scanner motor
SM Appendix 3-3 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Home Position Error 2 (D095 only)
Scanner home position sensor
defective
Poor connection between MCU
board and scanner home position
sensor
121 B Harness between MCU board and
Scanner home position sensor
sensor defective
does not detect ON.
MCU board defective
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulleys, or
carriage out of position
Scanner drive motor defective
Harness between MCU board and
scanner motor disconnected
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Encoder Signal Error (D095 only)
Scanner motor encoder connector
disconnected
Scanner motor lead connector
disconnected
Scanner motor defective
The scanner motor encoder
124 B MCU board defective (scanner
connector is not set correctly,
motor control unit)
or the encoder signal was not
Scanner wire, timing belt, pulleys, or
input.
carriage installation incorrect
Power supply connector
disconnected (+38V ±24V)
Power supply unit (PSU-E board)
defective
D095/M077 3-4 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Motor Error 1 (D095 only)
Scanner motor defective (high
Scanner motor stopped before
torque)
125 B feedback from scanner HP
Overload on scanner drive
sensor detected, or motor
mechanism
speed too slow when detected
MCU board defective (scanner
at scanner HP sensor.
motor unit control)
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Motor Error 2 (D095 only)
Scanner motor defective (low
The scanner motor does not
torque)
126 B stop within 15 mm after the
Overload on scanner drive
scanner home position sensor
mechanism
turns on when the scanner
MCU board defective (scanner
returns.
motor control unit)
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Motor Error 3 (D095 only)
Scanner motor defective (motor lead
127 B The scanner motor rotates in
connected incorrectly)
the opposite direction to the
MCU board defective (scanner
signal from the MCU board.
motor control unit)
SM Appendix 3-5 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Motor Error 4 (D095 only)
Scanner motor defective
The scanner motor speed does
128 C Overload on scanner mechanism
not reach the target speed by
PSU-Eb board defective
the time the scanning start point
MCU board defective (scanner
is reached.
motor control unit)
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Motor Error 5 (D095 only)
The scanner motor speed is Scanner motor defective
129 C abnormal. The machine will Scanner drive mechanism defective
not stop scanning even after PSU-Eb board defective
the machine detects that MCU board defective (scanner
motor speed is abnormal. motor control unit)
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Black level detection error (D095 only)
When the scanner was SBU to IPU harnesses defective
141 B turned on, AGC (automatic BCU to IPU harnesses defective
gain control) failed to SBU defective
achieve the target value of IPU defective
10 ±3. BCU defective
D095/M077 3-6 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
White level detection error (D095 only)
Standard white plate defective, dirty
When the scanner was
Moisture inside the scanner unit
turned on, the second
142 B SBU to IPU harnesses defective
sampling by AGC (automatic
BCU to IPU harnesses defective
gain control) failed to achieve
SBU defective
a value within the range –7 to
IPU defective
0 of the target value 128.
BCU defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
SBU Error 1 (D095 only)
SBU defective
IPU defective
BCU defective
When the scanner was turned Harness between the SBU and
143 C on, the SBU (Sensor Board IPU defective
Unit) level adjustment, black Harness between the BCU-IPU
level check, and final SBU defective
white level check failed. Standard white plate not installed
correctly, or is dirty
Scanner mirrors and/or lenses are
dirty or installed incorrectly
SM Appendix 3-7 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
SBU Error 2 (D095 only)
At power on:
The SYDI terminal signal did
SBU defective
144 B not go HIGH within 1 s
BCU defective
The specified SBU (Sensor
Harness between SBU and IPU
Board Unit) ID (GASBUP and
defective
LM98513) could not be read
after 3 tries
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
IPU Error
At power on, or when the
161 B machine returns from an IPU defective
energy save mode, the Connection between SBU and IPU
self-diagnostic program is loose, broken, or defective
returned an IPU error.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Unit Fan Error: Scanner Intake Fan (D095 only)
Fan, MCU, SIB harnesses loose or
180 B The MCU issued a lock signal defective
fro the scanner intake fan Scanner intake fan motor defective
(rear, right). MCU defective
SIB defective
D095/M077 3-8 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Unit Fan Error: Lamp Regulator Fan (Right) (D095 only)
Fan, MCU harness loose, defective
181 B The MCU issued a lock signal Lamp regulator (right) fan motor
for the lamp regulator fan defective
(front, right). MCU defective
SIB defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Unit Fan Error: SBU Cooling Fan (D095 only)
Scanner unit harness loose,
defective
182 B The MCU issued a motor lock
Fan, MCU harness loose, defective
signal for the SBU cooling fan
SBU Fan motor defective
in the scanner unit
MCU defective
SIB defective
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Unit Fan Error: Lamp Regulator Fan (Left) (D095 only)
Scanner unit harness loose,
defective
183 B The MCU issued a lock signal Fan, MCU harness loose, defective
for the lamp regulator fan Lamp regulator (left) fan motor
(front, left). defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
SM Appendix 3-9 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Exposure Lamp 1 Lamp Regulator (Right) Error (D095 only)
1st exposure lamp defective
1st lamp FFC (flat film cable) loose
The MCU detected a defect in or defective
185 B the lamp regulator (right) MCU to lamp regulator (left)
when the 1st exposure lamp harness defective
lit. . Lamp regulator (left) is defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Exposure Lamp 2 Lamp Regulator (Left) Error (D095 only)
2nd exposure lamp defective
2nd lamp FFC (flat film cable) loose
or defective
186 B The MCU detected a defect in
MCU to lamp regulator (left)
the lamp regulator (left) when
harness defective
the 2nd exposure lamp lit. .
Lamp regulator (left) is defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
D095/M077 3-10 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Unit Fan Error: Scanner Unit Exhaust Fan (D095 only)
Scanner unit harness loose,
defective
187 B The MCU issued a lock signal Fan, MCU harness loose, defective
for the the scanner unit Scanner unit exhaust fan motor
exhaust fan (rear, left). defective
MCU defective
SIB defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Scanner Unit Fan Error: Scanner Motor Cooling Fan (D095 only)
Scanner unit harness loose, defective
Fan, MCU harness loose, defective
188 B The MCU issued a lock
Scanner unit exhaust fan motor
signal for the scanner
defective
motor cooling fan.
MCU defective
SIB defective
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Serial Number Error
The serial number in the NVRAM does not match the one in the BCU.
Incorrect serial number
195 D Incorrect firmware installed
Check if the engine firmware in the machine is correct.
Input the correct serial number. For details about inputting a serial
number, consult your supervisor.
SM Appendix 3-11 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 2
3.3 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 2
3.3.1 SC CODES GROUP 2: EXPOSURE
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Polygon motor error 1: Laser Unit YM
The polygon mirror motor of LD unit YM does not reach the targeted
operating speed within the prescribed time.
Harness to the IPU disconnected
Harness inside the laser unit YM disconnected
202 D Polygon motor drive board defective
IPU defective
1. Check the harness connection to the IPU.
2. Check the harness connection inside the laser unit YM.
3. Replace the polygon motor drive board.
4. Replace the IPU.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Polygon motor error 3: Laser Unit YM
The polygon motor stops operating while the LD units of the laser unit
204 D CK are firing.
Same as SC202
Same as SC202
D095/M077 3-12 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Polygon motor error 1: Laser Unit CK
The polygon mirror motor of LD unit YM does not reach the targeted
operating speed within the prescribed time.
Harness to the IPU disconnected
Harness inside the laser unit CK disconnected
206 D Polygon motor drive board defective
IPU defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
1. Check the harness connection to the IPU.
2. Check the harness connection inside the laser unit CK.
3. Replace the polygon motor drive board.
4. Replace the IPU.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Polygon motor error 3: Laser Unit CK
The polygon motor stops operating while the LD units of the laser unit
208 D CK are firing.
See SC206 for possible cause.
See SC206 for troubleshooting details.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
FGATE ON error: Bk
The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 20 ms after processing
the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position K.
230 D Poor connection between BCU and IPU.
Defective IPU
1. Check the connection between the BCU and the IPU.
2. Replace the IPU.
SM Appendix 3-13 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
FGATE OFF error: Bk
The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within prescribed time after
231 D
processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position K.
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
FGATE ON error: Y
The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 20 ms after processing
the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position Y.
232 D Poor connection between BCU and IPU.
Defective IPU
1. Check the connection between the BCU and the IPU.
2. Replace the IPU.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
FGATE OFF error: Y
The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within the prescribed time after
233 D
processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position Y.
See SC 232 for troubleshooting details.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
FGATE ON error: C
The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 20 ms after processing
the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position C.
234 D Poor connection between BCU and IPU
Defective IPU
1. Check the connection between the BCU and the IPU.
2. Replace the IPU.
D095/M077 3-14 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
FGATE OFF error: C
The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within the prescribed time after
235 D
processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position C.
See SC 234 for troubleshooting details.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
FGATE ON error: M
The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 20 ms after processing
the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position M.
236 D Poor connection between BCU and IPU
Defective IPU
1. Check the connection between the BCU and the IPU.
2. Replace the IPU.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
FGATE OFF error: M
The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within the prescribed time after
237 D
processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position M.
See SC 234 for troubleshooting details.
SM Appendix 3-15 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
240 C LD error: Bk
241 C LD error: C
242 C LD error: M
243 C LD error: Y
The IPU detects excessive current (100 mA or more) while the LDB unit
is firing.
Poor connection between laser unit and IPU
Poor connection around PSU-G and FIB
- - Worn-out LD
Defective LD board
1. Check the harness connection (laser unit and IPU).
2. Check the harness connection of PSU-G and FIB
3. Replace the laser unit.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
250 D Laser synchronizing detection error: Start position [Y]: LD1
251 D Laser synchronizing detection error: Start position [M]: LD1
252 D Laser synchronizing detection error: Start position [C]: LD1
253 D Laser synchronizing detection error: Start position [K]: LD1
254 D Laser synchronizing detection error: Start position [Y]: LD2
255 D Laser synchronizing detection error: Start position [M]: LD2
256 D Laser synchronizing detection error: Start position [C]: LD2
257 D Laser synchronizing detection error: Start position [K]: LD2
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the
- - LDB [Y], [M], [C] or [K] is not detected while the LDB unit is in the
READY state.
D095/M077 3-16 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Disconnected or defective harness to synchronizing detector for
start position
Defective laser synchronizing detector for start position
Defective LDB
1. Check the harness connection between IPU and laser unit or
around OPI.
2. Check the connectors inside the laser unit.
3. Replace the laser synchronizing detector for start position.
4. Replace the laser unit.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
258 C Laser synchronizing detection error: End position [Y]
259 C Laser synchronizing detection error: End position [M]
260 C Laser synchronizing detection error: End position [C]
261 C Laser synchronizing detection error: End position [K]
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the end position of LDB [Y],
[M], [C] or [K] is not detected when detecting the main scan length.
Disconnected or defective harness to synchronizing detector for
- - end position
Defective synchronizing detector board for end position
1. Check the harness connection to the laser synchronizing detector.
2. Replace the laser synchronizing detector for end position.
SM Appendix 3-17 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
270 C Skew correction error: [Y]
271 C Skew correction error: [M]
272 C Skew correction error: [C]
The accumulated pulses of the BTL adjustment motor is outside the
correct range (± 150 pulses).
Disconnected or defective harness to the BTL adjustment motor for
the LD unit.
Defective skew correction motor
- -
Defective IOB 1
1. Check the harness connection to the BTL adjustment motor for the
LD unit.
2. Replace the laser unit.
3. Replace the IOB 1.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
285 C MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction) error
MUSIC adjustment fails four times consecutively.
Color registration error is too high
Defective MUSIC sensor
- -
Low toner density
1. Check the amount of toner.
2. Replace the MUSIC and ID sensor board.
D095/M077 3-18 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 3
3.4 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 3
3.4.1 SC CODES GROUP 3: IMAGE DEVELOPMENT – 1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
300 D Charge corona wire high voltage error: K
301 D Charge corona wire high voltage error: C
302 D Charge corona wire high voltage error: M
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
303 D Charge corona wire high voltage error: Y
The high voltage error signal of the charge corona wire is detected for
60 ms or more.
Disconnected harnesses
Defective charge corona unit
Defective CGB HVPS
Defective BCU
- -
Defective ground plate of the drum unit
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Reinstall or replace the charge corona unit.
3. Replace the CGB HVPS.
4. Replace the BCU.
5. Replace the drum unit.
SM Appendix 3-19 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
304 D Charge grid high voltage error: K
305 D Charge grid high voltage error: C
306 D Charge grid high voltage error: M
307 D Charge grid high voltage error: Y
The high voltage error signal of the charge grid is detected for 60 ms or
more.
Disconnected harnesses
Defective charge corona unit
Defective CGB HVPS
- - Defective BCU
1. Reinstall the charge corona unit
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the charge corona unit.
4. Replace the CGB HVPS.
5. Replace the BCU.
D095/M077 3-20 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
308 D Charge cleaning unit: Position error: K
309 D Charge cleaning unit: Position error: C
310 D Charge cleaning unit: Position error: M
311 D Charge cleaning unit: Position error: Y
The machine does not detect an "OFF" signal from the cleaning unit HP
sensor for 3 seconds after the cleaning pad unit has moved to the rear
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
side from its home position (front side).
The machine does not detect an "ON" signal from the cleaning unit HP
sensor for 18 seconds after the cleaning pad unit has returned to its
home position (front side) from the rear side.
Disconnected harnesses (charge cleaning HP sensor or charge
- - cleaning motor)
Defective charge cleaning HP sensor
Defective charge cleaning motor
1. Check if the charge cleaning HP sensor is correctly set or the
sensor bracket is not bent.
2. Check the harness connection of sensor and motor.
3. Replace the charge cleaning HP sensor.
4. Replace the charge cleaning motor.
SM Appendix 3-21 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
320 D Development bias: high voltage error: K
321 D Development bias: high voltage error: C
322 D Development bias: high voltage error: M
323 D Development bias: high voltage error: Y
The high voltage error signal of the development unit is detected for 60
ms or more.
Defective development HVPS
- -
1. Check the harness connection of the development HVPS.
2. Replace the development HVPS.
3. Replace the development unit.
D095/M077 3-22 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
324 D Development motor error: K
325 D Development motor error: C
326 D Development motor error: M
327 D Development motor error: Y
The lock signal remained HIGH or LOW for longer than the prescribed
time for the K, M, C, or Y, development motor.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Disconnected harness from the development motor
Development motor shaft locked, blocked by obstruction
+24V off
Development motor defective
1. Check if the developer in the development unit is stuck.
2. Check the development motor operation with Output Check
- - (SP5-804-162 to -165) after the development unit has been pulled
out from the machine.
3. Check the harness connection of the development motor.
4. Remove the obstruction around the development motor shaft.
5. Check if the +24V at the motor connector is ON. If not, check the
following:
Check if 24V is output from the PSU-EB.
Check all harness connections on the PSU-EB.
Replace the PSU-EB.
6. Replace the development motor.
SM Appendix 3-23 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
328 D Toner supply motor error
2 sec. after the motor START signal is output, a LOCK signal cannot be
detected.
Motor harness disconnected, loose, or defective
Toner pump overload
- -
Sub hopper overload
Toner supply motor defective
1. Remove the obstruction around the sub-hopper unit.
2. Replace the sub-hopper unit.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
332 D Toner supply error: K
333 D Toner supply error: C
334 D Toner supply error: M
335 D Toner supply error: Y
The machine fails the toner filling up for a color after the toner end
sensor detected "Toner Empty".
Toner condensation in the toner bottle
Toner stuck in the toner supply tube
Bent toner supply tube
Defective toner pump
Defective toner bottle motor
- -
1. Straighten the toner supply tube.
2. Clean the toner supply tube with a vacuum. ( "Remaining Toner
Detection Error" under "Troubleshooting" chapter in the Field
Service Manual.)
3. Replace the toner pump.
4. Replace the toner bottle motor, and then execute SP2-253-xxx.
(-001: K, -002: C, -003: M, -004: Y, -005: YMC, -006: All colors)
D095/M077 3-24 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
When executing SP2-253-xxx, make sure the following
conditions;
Fist, turn off and on the machine after opening the front left or
right door.
Make sure that the target color toner bottle is installed and the
toner hopper cover is close.
Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP2-253-xxx.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
344 D Drum cleaning motor LOCK error: K
345 D Drum cleaning motor LOCK error: C
346 D Drum cleaning motor LOCK error: M
347 D Drum cleaning motor LOCK error: Y
The lock signal remained HIGH or LOW for longer than the prescribed
time for the K, M, C, or Y, drum cleaning motor.
Drum cleaning blade turned up (flipped)
Waste toner stuck in the drum cleaning unit
Drum filming
Disconnected harness from the drum cleaning motor
- - Drum cleaning motor shaft locked, blocked by obstruction
Drum cleaning motor defective
1. Check or replace the drum cleaning blade.
2. Clear the waste toner stuck in the drum cleaning unit.
3. Check the harness connection of the drum cleaning motor.
4. Remove the obstruction around the drum cleaning motor shaft.
5. Replace the drum cleaning motor.
SM Appendix 3-25 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
348 D Toner pump error: K
349 D Toner pump error: C
350 D Toner pump error: M
351 D Toner pump error: Y
The toner end sensor for a color does not detect toner for 120 seconds
after the toner pump clutch turned on.
Bad connection of the toner supply tube between the toner bottle
and toner pump.
- - Defective toner pump
Defective toner bottle motor
1. Check or reinstall the toner supply tube,
2. Replace the toner pump.
3. Replace the toner bottle motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
352 D Toner bottle motor error: K
353 D Toner bottle motor error: C
354 D Toner bottle motor error: M
355 D Toner bottle motor error: Y
If the error flag occurs for a toner bottle motor 5 times, the machine
issues this SC. This error flag is calculated as follows.
The error flag of the toner bottle motor is made when the machine
detects a LOCK signal of the toner bottle motor for 0.9 seconds
- - during the toner bottle motor rotating (1 second).
The error flag of the toner bottle motor is cleared when the machine
detects a LOCK signal of the toner bottle motor less than 0.9
seconds during the toner bottle motor rotating (1 second).
Solidified toner in the toner bottle
D095/M077 3-26 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Toner supply tube bent
Incorrect setting of the toner bottle
Broken toner bottle
1. Shake the toner bottle five or six times.
2. Check if the toner supply tube to sub-hopper unit is bent.
3. Check and reinstall the toner bottle.
4. Replace the toner bottle.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
356 D Development roller error: K
357 D Development roller error: C
358 D Development roller error: M
359 D Development roller error: Y
The development roller sensor for a color does not detect the rotation of
the development roller for 0.5 seconds after the development motor for
each color has turned on.
- - Defective development unit drive gears
Defective development roller sensor
1. Replace the development unit drive gears.
2. Replace the development roller sensor.
SM Appendix 3-27 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
360 D Low toner density error: K
361 D Low toner density error: C
362 D Low toner density error: M
363 D Low toner density error: Y
The output from the TD sensor for a color exceeds 3.5V or more during
image processing.
Insufficient toner
Disconnected or defective harness
- -
Defective TD sensor
1. Replace the toner bottle.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the TD sensor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
364 D High toner density error: K
365 D High toner density error: C
366 D High toner density error: M
367 D High toner density error: Y
The output from the TD sensor for a color goes below 1.5V during
image processing.
Too much toner
Disconnected or defective harness
- - Defective TD sensor
1. Print a job without toner supply (Set the SP setting of 2-252 to "0").
2. Replace the developer.
3. Replace the TD sensor.
4. Replace the development unit.
D095/M077 3-28 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
372 D TD sensor adjustment error: K
373 D TD sensor adjustment error: C
374 D TD sensor adjustment error: M
375 D TD sensor adjustment error: Y
During TD sensor initialization, the output value of the black, magenta,
cyan, or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the specified value
(default: 2.5V) ±0.1V
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
TD sensor harness disconnected, loose or defective
- - TD sensor defective
Development unit defective
1. Check the harness connection of the TD sensor.
2. Replace the TD sensor.
3. Replace the development unit.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
388 C Quenching error: K
389 C Quenching error: C
390 C Quenching error: M
391 C Quenching error: Y
The drum potential sensor for a color detects 2.0V (Vd: 400V) or more
for 0.3 seconds after the charge corona wire has turned off.
Disconnected or broken harness of the quenching lamp
- -
Dirty surface of the quenching lamp glass
1. Check the harness or harness connection.
2. Clean the surface of the quenching lamp glass.
SM Appendix 3-29 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
396 Drum rotation error: K
397 Drum rotation error: C
398 Drum rotation error: M
399 Drum rotation error: Y
Drum stop error
The drum encoder counter for a color does not increase for 20 ms while
the drum motor is rotating.
Drum cleaning blade turned up (flipped)
Waste toner stuck in the drum cleaning unit
Drum filming
Developer stuck in the development unit
Motor lock due to the overload to the drum motor
-001 D Defective drum rotation sensor or harness
Defective drum motor
Defective or dirty drum encoder
1. Check if the drum cleaning blade is bent.
2. Check or replace the drum cleaning unit.
3. Check or replace the development unit.
4. Check the harness connection.
5. Replace the drum rotation sensor
6. Replace the drum motor
7. Replace the drum encoder.
Drum rotation speed error
The drum rotation time for a color change is more than ±5% compared
with a previous rotation time after 4 seconds has elapsed from the drum
-002 D start.
Possible causes are same as SC396-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC396-001.
D095/M077 3-30 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 3
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Drum abnormal rotation error
The drum rotation pulse for a color changes more than ±20% compared
-003 D with the standard rotation pulse.
Possible causes are same as SC396-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC396-001.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
SM Appendix 3-31 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-1
3.5 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 4-1
3.5.1 SC CODES GROUP 4: IMAGE DEVELOPMENT - 2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
400 D ID sensor error: Calibration
Before adjustment Vsg_reg<0.5, but Vsg_reg could not be adjusted to
the target Vsg_reg = 4.0 ±0.5V during process control.
ID sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective
ID sensor dirty
ID sensor defective
ID/ MUSIC sensor shutter defective
ITB dirty
ITB incorrectly set
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Clean the drawer connector of the registration unit drawer.
3. Clean the image transfer belt.
4. Check if the image transfer belt is correctly set.
5. Clean or replace the ID/ MUSIC sensors.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
410 D ID sensor error: Development gamma K
411 D ID sensor error: Development gamma C
412 D ID sensor error: Development gamma M
413 D ID sensor error: Development gamma Y
Development gamma for black, magenta, cyan, or yellow is not
within range (0.3 to 6.0). Process control halts when this SC is
issued.
ID/ MUSIC sensor shutter defective
LD sensor harness loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-32 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
LD unit not firing
CGB HVPS harness loose, broken, defective
CGB HVPS defective
Developer worn
Check the result of process control with SP3-821-001.
Result code: 55 or 59
Replace the developer.
Result code: 56
1. Clean the dust shield glass of the LD unit.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
2. Replace the CGB HVPS.
Result code: 61
1. Check the harness connection to the LD unit.
2. Replace the LD unit.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
414 D ID sensor error: Development start voltage K
415 D ID sensor error: Development start voltage C
416 D ID sensor error: Development start voltage M
417 D ID sensor error: Development start voltage Y
The development start voltage in the development of the black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow PCU is not within the correct range
(±150V)
ID/ MUSIC sensor shutter defective
LD sensor harness loose, broken, defective
LD unit not firing
CGB HVPS harness loose, broken, defective
CGB HVPS defective
Developer worn
Check the result of process control with SP3-821-001.
Result code: 57
Replace the developer.
SM Appendix 3-33 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Result code: 58
1. Check if the ID/ MUSIC sensor is clean.
2. Clean the ID/ MUSIC sensor.
3. Replace the developer.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
LED error during Vsg adjustment
PWM value: Ifsg > 1,000 or Ifsg < 50
This means the current to the LED of the ID sensor is abnormal.
ID sensor dirty or defective
418 D ITB dirty or scratched
ID/ MUSIC sensor shutter defective
1. Check the harness connection to the ID/ MUSIC sensors.
2. Clean or replace the ID/ MUSIC sensors.
3. ITB cleaning unit.
D095/M077 3-34 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
420 C Potential sensor error: Vd Adjustment K
421 C Potential sensor error: Vd Adjustment C
422 C Potential sensor error: Vd Adjustment M
423 C Potential sensor error: Vd Adjustment Y
The drum potential sensor detects 150V or more on the drum (Vd) for
0.7 msec. when the high voltage charge is supplied to the drum for
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
the initial sampling before exposure.
Drum potential sensor harness, connector is loose, broken,
defective
Drum potential sensor dirty
Drum potential sensor defective
Drum connector, harness loose, broken, defective
Drum worn
1. Clean the drum potential sensor.
2. Replace the drum unit.
SM Appendix 3-35 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
424 C Potential sensor error: Vl adjustment K
425 C Potential sensor error: Vl adjustment C
426 C Potential sensor error: Vl adjustment M
427 C Potential sensor error: Vl adjustment Y
Vpl could not be adjusted to within ±5V of the target Vpl after
exposure of the ID sensor patterns.
Drum potential sensor dirty or defective
Drum worn
Poor drum ground connection
1. Clean the drum potential sensor.
2. Replace the drum unit.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
432 C Potential sensor error 1: Vr adjustment K
433 C Potential sensor error 2: Vr adjustment C
434 C Potential sensor error 3: Vr adjustment M
435 C Potential sensor error 4: Vr adjustment Y
Vr < –200V. The residual voltage (Vr), the amount of voltage that
remains on the surface of the drum after the QL fires is less than
–200V.
Drum potential sensor dirty
Drum potential sensor defective
Drum worn
1. Clean the drum potential sensor.
2. Replace the drum unit.
D095/M077 3-36 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
436 D Potential sensor error: Vd adjustment K
437 D Potential sensor error: Vd adjustment C
438 D Potential sensor error: Vd adjustment M
439 D Potential sensor error: Vd adjustment Y
The Vd Home reading, the first step of the process control self-check,
detected that the development potential of the unexposed areas of the
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
drum are not within the prescribed range (-500 to -900)
Drum potential sensor dirty
Drum potential sensor defective
Clean or replace the drum potential sensor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
440 D Image transfer HVPS error: K
441 D Image transfer HVPS error: C
442 D Image transfer HVPS error: M
443 D Image transfer HVPS error: Y
An interrupt checks the status of the HVPS every 10 ms. This SC is
issued if the BCU detects a short in the HVPS for K, M, C, or Y.
Transfer HVPS cable disconnected or damaged
Transfer HVPS defective
1. Check the cables or cable connections of the transfer HVPS.
2. Replace the transfer HVPS.
SM Appendix 3-37 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
446 D ITB black lift sensor error
447 D ITB color lift sensor error
The ITB black/color lift sensor does not detect an "OFF" signal for
884 ms after machine initializing or for 484 ms after job end.
The ITB black/color lift sensor does not detect an "ON" signal for 484
ms after a print job has been processed.
Overload on the ITB black lift motor
Lift spring worn out
ITB black/color lift sensor defective
1. Clear the overload on the ITB black/color lift motor.
2. Replace the ITB black/color lift sensor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
450 D PTR HVPS output error
An interrupt checks the status of the PTR HVPS every 10 ms. This SC
is issued if the BCU detects a short in the PTR HVPS 10 times within
500 ms.
The output voltage from the PTR HVPS is leaking.
Replace the transfer HVPS.
D095/M077 3-38 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
452 C PTR HVPS: low voltage error
The machine detects low voltage (0.1 V or less) from the PTR HVPS.
The resistant rate of the ITB bias roller decreases due to HH
environment.
This SC does not affect the machine's operation. This is for analytical
use only.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
453 C ITB Bias Roller End
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
ITB bias roller because it is near the end of its service life.
Check the connections to the transfer HVPS
Replace the image transfer roller
Transfer HVPS defective
1. Replace the ITB bias roller.
2. Check the harness connection to the transfer HVPS.
3. Replace the transfer HVPS.
SM Appendix 3-39 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: K (LLL)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Black in LLL condition because it is near the
end of its service life.
LLL: Absolute humidity is 2.5 g/m3 or less.
456
C Check the connections between the transfer HVPS and the roller.
-001
Service life of image transfer roller for Black is near end.
Transfer HVPS defective
1. Replace the image transfer roller for Black.
2. Check the connections between the transfer HVPS and the roller.
3. Replace the transfer HVPS.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: K (LL)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Black in LL condition because it is near the end
456 of its service life.
C
-002 LL: Absolute humidity is more than 2.5 g/m3 and 5.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC456-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC456-001.
D095/M077 3-40 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: K (ML)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Black in ML condition because it is near the end
456 of its service life.
C
-003 ML: Absolute humidity is more than 5.0 g/m3 and 8.4 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC456-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC456-001.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: K (MM)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
transfer roller because it is near the end of its service life.
456 The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
C
-004 image transfer roller for Black in MM condition because it is near the
end of its service life.
MM: Absolute humidity is more than 8.4 g/m3 and 15.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC456-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC456-001.
SM Appendix 3-41 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: K (MH)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Black in MH condition because it is near the
456 end of its service life.
C
-005 MH: Absolute humidity is more than 15.0 g/m3 and 24.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC456-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC456-001.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: K (HH)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for K in MH condition because it is near the end of
456 its service life.
C
-006 HH: Absolute humidity is more than 24.0 g/m3.
Possible causes are same as SC456-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC456-001.
D095/M077 3-42 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: C (LLL)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Cyan in LLL condition because it is near the
end of its service life.
LLL: Absolute humidity is 2.5 g/m3 or less.
457
C Check the connections between the transfer HVPS and the roller.
-001
Service life of image transfer roller for Cyan is near end.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Transfer HVPS defective
1. Replace the image transfer roller for Cyan.
2. Check the connections between the transfer HVPS and the roller.
3. Replace the transfer HVPS.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: C (LL)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Cyan in LL condition because it is near the end
457 of its service life.
C
-002 LL: Absolute humidity is more than 2.5 g/m3 and 5.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC457-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC457-001.
SM Appendix 3-43 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: C (ML)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Cyan in ML condition because it is near the end
457 of its service life.
C
-003 ML: Absolute humidity is more than 5.0 g/m3 and 8.4 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC457-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC457-001.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: C (MM)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Cyan in MM condition because it is near the
457 end of its service life.
C
-004 MM: Absolute humidity is more than 8.4 g/m3 and 15.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC457-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC457-001.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: C (MH)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Cyan in MH condition because it is near the
457 end of its service life.
C
-005 MH: Absolute humidity is more than 15.0 g/m3 and 24.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC457-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC457-001.
D095/M077 3-44 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: C (HH)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Cyan in HH condition because it is near the end
457 of its service life.
C
-006 HH: Absolute humidity is more than 24.0 g/m3.
Possible causes are same as SC457-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC457-001.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: M (LLL)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Magenta in LLL condition because it is near the
end of its service life.
LLL: Absolute humidity is 2.5 g/m3 or less.
458
C Check the connections between the transfer HVPS and the roller.
-001
Service life of image transfer roller for Magenta is near end.
Transfer HVPS defective
1. Replace the image transfer roller for Magenta.
2. Check the connections between the transfer HVPS and the roller.
3. Replace the transfer HVPS.
SM Appendix 3-45 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: M (LL)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Magenta in LL condition because it is near the
458 end of its service life.
C
-002 LL: Absolute humidity is more than 2.5 g/m3 and 5.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC458-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC458-001.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: M (ML)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Magenta in ML condition because it is near the
458 end of its service life.
C
-003 ML: Absolute humidity is more than 5.0 g/m3 and 8.4 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC458-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC458-001.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: M (MM)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Magenta in MM condition because it is near the
458 end of its service life.
C
-004 MM: Absolute humidity is more than 8.4 g/m3 and 15.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC458-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC458-001.
D095/M077 3-46 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: M (MH)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Magenta in MH condition because it is near the
458 end of its service life.
C
-005 MH: Absolute humidity is more than 15.0 g/m3 and 24.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC458-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC458-001.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: M (HH)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Magenta in HH condition because it is near the
458 end of its service life.
C
-006 HH: Absolute humidity is more than 24.0 g/m3.
Possible causes are same as SC458-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC458-001.
SM Appendix 3-47 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: Y (LLL)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Yellow in LLL condition because it is near the
end of its service life.
LLL: Absolute humidity is 2.5 g/m3 or less.
459
C Check the connections between the transfer HVPS and the roller.
-001
Service life of image transfer roller for Yellow is near end.
Transfer HVPS defective
1. Replace the image transfer roller for Yellow.
2. Check the connections between the transfer HVPS and the roller.
3. Replace the transfer HVPS.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: Y (LL)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Yellow in LL condition because it is near the
459 end of its service life.
C
-002 LL: Absolute humidity is more than 2.5 g/m3 and 5.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC459-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC459-001.
D095/M077 3-48 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: Y (ML)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Yellow in ML condition because it is near the
459 end of its service life.
C
-003 ML: Absolute humidity is more than 5.0 g/m3 and 8.4 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC459-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC459-001.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: Y (MM)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Yellow in MM condition because it is near the
459 end of its service life.
C
-004 MM: Absolute humidity is more than 8.4 g/m3 and 15.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC459-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC459-001.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: Y (MH)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Yellow in MH condition because it is near the
459 end of its service life.
C
-005 MH: Absolute humidity is more than 15.0 g/m3 and 24.0 g/m3 or less.
Possible causes are same as SC459-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC459-001.
SM Appendix 3-49 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Image Transfer Roller End: Y (HH)
The machine detected an abnormal reading of the resistance of the
image transfer roller for Yellow in HH condition because it is near the
459 end of its service life.
C
-006 HH: Absolute humidity is more than 24.0 g/m3.
Possible causes are same as SC459-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC459-001.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Separation HV output error
An interrupt checks the status of the HVPS every 10 ms. This SC is
issued if the BCU detects a short in the HVPS 20 times at PWM D(ac).
460 D Damaged insulation on the PTR HVPS cable
Damaged insulation around the PTR HVPS
1. Replace the PTR HVPS cable.
2. Replace the PTR HVPS.
3. Replace the RCB.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ITB cleaning unit set error
The machine detects a setting error for the ITB cleaning unit while both
465 C front doors are closed.
Incorrect installation of the ITB cleaning unit
Check and reinstall the ITB cleaning unit.
D095/M077 3-50 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-2
3.6 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ITB cleaning motor lock error
The machine detects an error of the ITB cleaning motor while it is
rotating.
Harness to the ITB cleaning motor disconnected
469 D
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Overload to the ITB cleaning motor
ITB cleaning motor defective
1. Check the harness connection to the ITB cleaning motor.
2. Remove the obstacle that affects the ITB cleaning motor.
3. Replace the ITB cleaning motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
470 ITB rotation error (Speed error)
The machine detects a big speed difference while the ITB drive motor is
rotating.
Overload on the ITB drive motor (ITB cleaning blade rolled in) or
motor defective
-01 D Defective belt speed sensor
Dirty or broken encoder for the belt speed sensor
1. Check or replace the ITB drive motor.
2. Check the harness connection, or replace the belt speed sensor.
3. Clean the encoder for the belt speed sensor.
ITB rotation error (Measurement error)
The machine detects a data error from the belt speed sensor.
-02 D
Overload on the ITB drive motor (ITB cleaning blade rolled in) or
motor defective
Defective belt speed sensor
SM Appendix 3-51 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Dirty or broken encoder for the belt speed sensor
1. Check or replace the ITB drive motor.
2. Check the harness connection, or replace the belt speed sensor.
3. Clean the encoder for the belt speed sensor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ITB skew adjustment error: time out
The machine cannot complete the ITB centering control for 120
seconds after the ITB motor has started rotating.
Belt centering roller out of home position
ITB motor rotation sensor defective
471 D Belt centering roller sensor defective
Belt centering roller motor defective
1. Execute "Clearing SC471/475/476". ( "Clearing SC 471, 475 or
476" under "Troubleshooting" chapter in the Field Service Manual.)
2. Replace the ITB motor rotation sensor.
3. Replace the belt centering roller sensor.
4. Replace the belt centering roller motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Belt centering roller HP error
The belt centering roller sensor does not detect the belt centering
roller at HP during initialization.
The belt centering roller sensor still detects the belt centering roller
472 D at HP after the belt centering roller motor has started rotating.
Belt centering roller sensor detective
Belt centering roller motor defective
1. Replace the belt centering roller sensor.
2. Replace the belt centering roller motor.
D095/M077 3-52 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ITB skew error
The machine detects the ITB skew error.
ITB abnormal
Belt centering roller out of home position
ITB motor rotation sensor defective
Belt centering roller sensor defective
473 D Belt centering roller motor defective
1. Reinstall the ITB in the opposite direction or replace it.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
2. Execute "Clearing SC471/475/476". ( "Clearing SC 471, 475 or
476" under "Troubleshooting" chapter in the Field Service Manual.)
3. Replace the ITB motor rotation sensor defective.
4. Replace the belt centering roller sensor.
5. Replace the belt centering roller motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ITB position error 1
The belt centering sensor detects an ITB position error.
ITB abnormal
Belt centering roller out of home position
ITB motor rotation sensor defective
Belt centering roller sensor defective
474 D Belt centering roller motor defective
1. Reinstall the ITB in the opposite direction or replace it.
2. Execute "Clearing SC471/475/476". ( "Clearing SC 471, 475 or
476" under "Troubleshooting" chapter in the Field Service Manual.)
3. Replace the ITB motor rotation sensor defective.
4. Replace the belt centering roller sensor.
5. Replace the belt centering roller motor.
SM Appendix 3-53 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ITB position error 2
The belt overrun front sensor detects an ITB position error.
Belt overrun sensor: front defective
ITB abnormal or worn
Belt centering roller out of home position
ITB motor rotation sensor defective
Belt centering roller sensor defective
475 A Belt centering roller motor defective
1. Replace the belt overrun sensor: front.
2. Reinstall the ITB in the opposite direction or replace it.
3. Execute "Clearing SC471/475/476". ( "Clearing SC 471, 475 or
476" under "Troubleshooting" chapter in the Field Service Manual.)
4. Replace the ITB motor rotation sensor defective.
5. Replace the belt centering roller sensor.
6. Replace the belt centering roller motor.
D095/M077 3-54 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ITB position error 3
The belt overrun rear sensor detects an ITB position error.
Belt overrun sensor: rear defective
ITB abnormal or worn
Belt centering roller out of home position
ITB motor rotation sensor defective
Belt centering roller sensor defective
Service Call
Conditions
476 A
Appendix:
Belt centering roller motor defective
1. Replace the belt overrun sensor: rear.
2. Reinstall the ITB in the opposite direction or replace it.
3. Execute "Clearing SC471/475/476". ( "Clearing SC 471, 475 or
476" under "Troubleshooting" chapter in the Field Service Manual.)
4. Replace the ITB motor rotation sensor defective.
5. Replace the belt centering roller sensor.
6. Replace the belt centering roller motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
PTR motor lock error
The machine detects an error of the PTR motor while it is rotating.
PTR cleaning blade flipped or overloaded
477 D PTR drive overloaded
PTR motor defective
1. Check or replace the PTR unit.
2. Check or replace the PTR motor
SM Appendix 3-55 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
PTR position error
The PTR lift sensor detects an error of the PTR lift motor while it is
rotating.
479 D PTR lift sensor detective
PTR lift motor defective
1. Check or replace the PTR lift sensor.
2. Check or replace the PTR lift motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ITB feed-back counter error
The ITB feed-back sensor detects an error of the ITB feed-back
encoder counter.
480 C
Noise
This SC does not affect the machine's operation. This is for analytical
use only.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Waste toner transport motor 1: Lock error
The machine detects an error of the waste toner transport motor 1 while
it is rotating.
Harness loose or disconnected
485 D Waste toner transport motor 1 defective
Blocking in the toner collection tube to the waste toner bottle.
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the waste toner transport motor 1.
3. If necessary, unblock the toner transport path.
D095/M077 3-56 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Waste toner transport motor 2: Lock error
The machine detects an error of the waste toner transport motor 2 while
it is rotating.
486 D Harness loose or disconnected
Blocking in the toner collection tube to the waste toner bottle.
Waste toner transport motor 2 defective
1. Check the harness connection.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
2. Replace the waste toner transport motor 2.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Waste toner transport motor 2 sensor error
The machine detects an error of the waste toner transport motor 2.
Blocking in the toner collection tube to the waste toner bottle.
489 D Waste toner transport motor 2 defective
Waste toner transport motor 2 sensor defective
1. Check or replace the waster toner bottle.
2. Replace the waster toner transport motor 2
3. Replace the waster toner transport motor 2 sensor
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Charge unit cleaning motor K error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the charge unit
cleaning motor K (black).
490 Harness from IOB 1 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
D
-001 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the charge corona unit cleaning motor.
SM Appendix 3-57 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Charge unit cleaning motor C error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the charge unit
490 cleaning motor C (cyan).
D
-002
Possible causes are same as SC490-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC490-001.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Charge unit cleaning motor M error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the charge unit
490 cleaning motor M (magenta).
D
-003
Possible causes are same as SC490-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC490-001.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Charge unit cleaning motor Y error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the charge unit
490 cleaning motor Y (yellow).
D
-004
Possible causes are same as SC490-001.
Countermeasures are same as SC490-001.
D095/M077 3-58 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Drum motor K error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the drum motor
K (black).
490 Harness from IOB 1 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
D
-005 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
3. Replace the drum motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Drum motor C error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the drum motor
490 C (cyan).
D
-006
Possible causes are same as SC490-005.
Countermeasures are same as SC490-005.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Drum motor M error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the drum motor
490 M (magenta).
D
-007
Possible causes are same as SC490-005.
Countermeasures are same as SC490-005.
SM Appendix 3-59 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Drum motor Y error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the drum motor
490 Y (yellow).
D
-008
Possible causes are same as SC490-005.
Countermeasures are same as SC490-005.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
IITB black lift motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the ITB black
motor.
ITB drawer incorrectly set
490 Harness from IOB 2 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
D
-009 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check if the ITB drawer is correctly set.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the harness.
4. Replace the ITB black lift motor.
D095/M077 3-60 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ITB color lift motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the ITB color
motor.
ITB drawer incorrectly set
490 Harness from IOB 2 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
D
-010 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check if the ITB drawer is correctly set.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the harness.
4. Replace the ITB color lift motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Belt centering motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the belt
centering motor.
ITB drawer incorrectly set
490 Harness from IOB 2 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
D
-011 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check if the ITB drawer is correctly set.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the harness.
4. Replace the belt centering motor.
SM Appendix 3-61 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ITB drive motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the ITB drive
motor.
ITB drawer incorrectly set
490 Harness from IOB 2 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
D
-012 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check if the ITB drawer is correctly set.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the harness.
4. Replace the ITB drive motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
PTR lift motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the PTR lift
motor.
490 ITB drawer incorrectly set
D Harness from RCB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
-013
Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the PTR lift motor.
D095/M077 3-62 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
492 D TD sensor K error
493 D TD sensor C error
494 D TD sensor M error
495 D TD sensor Y error
The TD sensor for a color determines that no developer is in the
development unit at TD sensor initialization.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
The TD sensor for a color does not detect a normal output from
the development unit during printing.
No developer in the development unit
Agitation auger defective
1. Check or reinstall developer in the development unit.
2. Replace the development unit.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
496
C MUSIC sensor: Front LED adjustment error
-011
-012 C MUSIC sensor: Center LED adjustment error
-013 C MUSIC sensor: Rear LED adjustment error
The LED adjustment for the front, center or rear MUSIC sensor fails
at the Vsg adjustment.
ID/MUSIC sensor unit shutter defective
Harness of sensor unit disconnected or broken
Front, center or rear MUSIC sensor defective
1. Check the harness and connection.
2. Replace the ID/MUSIC sensor unit.
SM Appendix 3-63 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
496
C MUSIC sensor: Front patterns error 1
-014
-015 C MUSIC sensor: Center patterns error 1
-016 C MUSIC sensor: Rear patterns error 1
The front, center or rear MUSIC sensor detects the less number of
the MUSIC patterns on the ITB.
Sensor harness disconnected or broken
LD board(s) defective
Image transferring to the ITB insufficient
1. Check the harness and connection.
2. Replace the laser unit(s).
Note: If one of SC250 to SC257 has occurred before, you can tell
which is the problem laser unit (YM or CK).
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
496
C MUSIC sensor: Front patterns error 2
-017
-018 C MUSIC sensor: Center patterns error 2
-019 C MUSIC sensor: Rear patterns error 2
The front, center or rear MUSIC sensor detects too many MUSIC
patterns on the ITB.
ITB scratched or broken
Dust on the ITB
1. Clean the ITB.
2. Replace the ITB.
D095/M077 3-64 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
496
C MUSIC sensor: Y color shift error 1
-020
-021 C MUSIC sensor: M color shift error 1
-022 C MUSIC sensor: C color shift error 1
The yellow, magenta or cyan image shifting in the sub-scan direction
exceeds the capable correction range during process control
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
ITB scratched or broken
Dust on the ITB
New laser unit installed
Process control execution incorrect
1. Execute the manual process control with SP3820-001.
2. Clean or replace the ITB.
3. Replace the laser unit YM or CK.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
496
C MUSIC sensor: Y color shift error 2
-023
-024 C MUSIC sensor: M color shift error 2
-025 C MUSIC sensor: C color shift error 2
The yellow, magenta or cyan image shifting in the main-scan
direction exceeds the capable correction range in the process control
ITB scratched or broken
Dust on the ITB
New laser unit installed
Process control incorrect
1. Execute the manual process control with SP3820-001.
2. Clean or replace the ITB.
3. Replace the laser unit YM or CK.
SM Appendix 3-65 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
496
C MUSIC sensor: Y magnification correction error 1
-026
-027 C MUSIC sensor: M magnification correction error 1
-028 C MUSIC sensor: C magnification correction error 1
The magnification correction in the main-scan for yellow, magenta or
cyan image exceeds the capable range in the process control.
ITB scratched or broken
Dust on the ITB
New laser unit installed
Process control execution incorrect
1. Execute the manual process control with SP3820-001.
2. Clean or replace the ITB.
3. Replace the laser unit YM or CK.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
496
C MUSIC sensor: Y magnification correction error 2
-029
-030 C MUSIC sensor: M magnification correction error 2
-031 C MUSIC sensor: C magnification correction error 2
The left and right magnification correction in the main-scan for yellow,
magenta or cyan image exceed the capable range in the process
control.
ITB scratched or broken
Dust on the ITB
New Laser unit installed
Process control execution incorrect
1. Execute the manual process control with SP3820-001.
2. Clean or replace the ITB.
3. Replace the laser unit YM or CK.
D095/M077 3-66 SM Appendix
Rev. 02/23/2011 Service Call Tables - 4-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
⇒ Temperature/Humidity sensor K error
The output of the temperature sensor was not within the prescribed
range (0.5V to 4.2V) for 3 minutes.
Temperature and humidity sensor harness disconnected, loose,
497 C defective
Temperature and humidity sensor defective
1. Check the connector and harness.
2. Replace the Temperature/Humidity sensor K below the black
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
PCDU.
SM Appendix 3-67 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-1
3.7 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 5-1
3.7.1 SC CODES GROUP 5: PAPER FEED
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Tray 1 (tandem tray) feed error
The tray 1 lift sensor does not switch on 10 s after the tray lift motor
switches on and starts lifting the bottom plate.
When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5
sec.
501 B
Tray lift motor 1 defective or disconnected
Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor
Pick-up solenoid 1 disconnected or blocked by an obstacle
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Check or clear obstacles between tray and motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Tray 2 (universal tray) feed error
The lift sensor is not activated within 10 seconds after the tray lift
motor starts lifting the bottom plate.
When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5
sec.
502 B Tray lift motor 2 defective or disconnected
Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor
Pick-up solenoid 2 disconnected or blocked by an obstacle
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Check or clear obstacles between tray and motor.
3. Check or clear obstacles around the pick-up solenoid.
D095/M077 3-68 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
503 B Tray 3 (A4 LCT) feed error (M077 only)
504 B Tray 4 (A4 LCT) feed error (M077 only)
505 B Tray 5 (A4 LCT) feed error (M077 only)
One of the following conditions is detected in tray 3, 4 or 5 of the A4
LCT:
The tray 3, 4 or 5 lift sensor is not activated for 10 s after the tray 3,
4 or 5 lift motor turned on.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Upper limit is not detected within 10 s while the paper tray is lifting
during paper feed.
The tray 3, 4 or 5 lift sensor is already activated when tray 3, 4 or 5
is placed in the machine
Poor connection or defective tray 3, 4 or 5 lift motor
Poor connection or defective tray 3, 4 or 5 lift sensor
Remaining paper or another obstruction has stopped the tray
and motor.
Pick-up solenoid 3, 4 or 5 connector is loose.
Pick-up solenoid 3, 4 or 5 is blocked by an obstruction.
1. Replace the tray 3, 4 or 5 lift motor.
2. Replace the tray 3, 4 or 5 lift sensor.
3. Check or clear obstacles around pick-up solenoid 3, 4, or 5.
SM Appendix 3-69 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
506 B Tray 3 (1st A3 LCT) feed error
507 B Tray 4 (1st A3 LCT) feed error
One of the following conditions is detected in tray 3 or 4 of the 1st
A3 LCT:
The tray 3 or 4 lift sensor is not activated for 10 s after the tray 3 or
4 lift motor turned on.
Upper limit is not detected within 10 s while the paper tray is lifting
during paper feed.
The tray 3 or 4 lift sensor is already activated when tray 3 or 4 is
placed in the machine
Poor connection or defective tray 3 or 4 lift motor
Poor connection or defective tray 3 or 4 lift sensor
Remaining paper or another obstruction has stopped the tray
and motor.
Pick-up solenoid 3 or 4 connector is loose.
Pick-up solenoid 3 or 4 is blocked by an obstruction.
1. Replace the tray 3 or 4 lift motor.
2. Replace the tray 3 or 4 lift sensor.
3. Check or clear obstacles around pick-up solenoid 3 or 4.
D095/M077 3-70 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
508 B Tray 5 (2nd A3 LCT) feed error
509 B Tray 6 (2nd A3 LCT) feed error
One of the following conditions is detected in tray 5 or 6 of the 2nd
A3 LCT:
The tray 5 or 6 lift sensor is not activated for 10 s after the tray
5 or 6 lift motor turned on.
Upper limit is not detected within 10 s while the paper tray is
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
lifting during paper feed.
The tray 5 or 6 lift sensor is already activated when tray 5 or 6
is placed in the machine
Poor connection or defective tray 5 or 6 lift motor
Poor connection or defective tray 5 or 6 lift sensor
Remaining paper or another obstruction has stopped the tray
and motor.
Pick-up solenoid 5 or 6 connector is loose.
Pick-up solenoid 5 or 6 is blocked by an obstruction.
1. Replace the tray 5 or 6 lift motor.
2. Replace the tray 5 or 6 lift sensor.
3. Check or clear obstacles around pick-up solenoid 5 or 6.
SM Appendix 3-71 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Bypass Tray (tray 7) feed error
One of the following conditions is detected in the optional bypass tray.
The bypass upper limit sensor is not activated for 10 s after the tray
lift motor turned on.
The bypass lower limit sensor is not detected within 10 s while the
paper tray is going down after paper feed.
The bypass tray lift sensor is already activated paper is placed in
the bypass (tray 7) tray.
Poor connection or defective bypass tray lift motor
510 B Poor connection or defective bypass upper limit sensor
Poor connection or defective bypass lower limit sensor
Remaining paper or another obstruction has stopped the tray and
motor.
Bypass pick-up solenoid connector is loose.
Bypass pick-up solenoid is blocked by an obstruction.
1. Check the harness connection or replace it.
2. Replace the bypass tray lift motor.
3. Replace the bypass upper limit sensor.
4. Replace the bypass lower limit sensor.
5. Check or clear obstacles around the bypass pick-up solenoid.
D095/M077 3-72 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
511 B A3 LCT exit roller contact motor 1 error
512 B A3LCT exit roller contact motor 2 error
One of the following conditions is detected in the A3 LCT.
The LCT exit roller sensor is not activated within 225 pulses after
the LCT exit roller contact motor has turned on at its initialization.
The LCT exit roller sensor detects for 25 pulses even after the
LCT exit roller has moved away from its home position.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
The LCT exit roller sensor does not detect within 25 pulses after
the LCT exit roller has moved back to its home position.
Poor connection or defective LCT exit roller contact motor
Poor connection or defective LCT exit roller sensor
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the LCT exit roller contact motor.
3. Replace the LCT exit roller sensor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Registration gate position error
The registration gate HP sensor does not detect the registration gate
position properly.
520 B Dirt or defective registration gate lift sensor
Defective registration gate motor
1. Check the harness connection of the above devices.
2. Clean or replace the registration gate lift sensor.
3. Replace the registration gate motor.
SM Appendix 3-73 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Shift roller unit position error
The shift roller HP sensor does not detect the shift roller unit position
properly.
521 B Dirt or defective shift roller HP sensor
Defective shift roller unit motor
1. Check the harness connection of the above devices.
2. Clean or replace the shift roller HP sensor.
3. Replace the shift roller unit motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fusing motor lock error
The machine detects a rotation error of the fusing motor for 1
second after the fusing motor has rotated for 1 second.
The machine does not detect any signal from the fusing motor for 1
second when the fusing motor is in the ready condition
523 B Fusing oil not circulated in the fusing unit
Overload to the fusing motor
Poor connection or defective LCT exit roller contact motor
1. Check or replace the fusing unit.
2. Check if remaining paper or obstruction in the fusing unit stops the
fusing motor drive.
3. Replace the fusing motor.
D095/M077 3-74 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Paper exit motor error
The machine detects the motor lock signal from the paper exit motor.
Overload on the paper exit motor because the paper transfer belt
stuck to the PTB rollers. This happened because there was no
operation for a long time.
524 B Overload on the paper exit motor due to the different rotation
speeds between the paper exit motor and fusing motor.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
1. Rotate the fusing knob manually.
2. Input the default setting for the paper exit motor with SP1-805-001.
3. Input the default setting for the fusing motor with SP1-907-001.
1. Replace the paper exit motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Drive motor (right) error (M379)
The machine detects a lock signal of the drive motor (right) in the buffer
pass unit (M379) for 1.2 seconds after the drive motor (right) has
rotated for 2 seconds.
525 B
Harness disconnected or broken
Defective drive motor (right) (M379)
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the motor (right).
SM Appendix 3-75 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Drive motor (left) error (M379)
The machine detects a lock signal of the drive motor (left) in the buffer
pass unit (M379) for 1.2 seconds after the drive motor (left) has rotated
for 2 seconds.
526 B
Harness disconnected or broken
Defective drive motor (left) (M379)
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the motor (left).
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: PTB (Paper Transport Belt) fan 1
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from PTB fan 1 for 0.1 second
during the fan operation.
530 An obstruction has stopped PTB fan 1.
D
-001 Harness disconnected
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer and then push it into the machine.
2. Check the harness connection to PTB fan 1.
3. Replace PTB fan 1.
D095/M077 3-76 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: PTB (Paper Transport Belt) fan 2
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from PTB fan 2 for 0.1 second
during the fan operation.
530 An obstruction has stopped PTB fan 2.
D
-002 Harness disconnected
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer and then push it into the machine.
2. Check the harness connection to TB fan 2.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
3. Replace PTB fan 2.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: PTB motor fan
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the PTB motor fan for 0.1
second during the fan operation.
530 An obstruction has stopped the PTB motor fan.
D
-003 Harness disconnected
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer and then push it into the machine.
2. Check the harness connection to the PTB motor fan.
3. Replace the PTB motor fan.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: Paper cooling fan 3
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from paper cooling fan 3 for 0.1
second during the fan operation.
530 An obstruction has stopped paper cooling fan 3.
D
-004 Harness disconnected
1. Pull out the fusing unit drawer and then push it into the machine.
2. Check the harness connection to paper cooling fan 3.
3. Replace paper cooling fan 3.
SM Appendix 3-77 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: ITB fan
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the ITB fan for 0.1 second
during the fan operation.
530 An obstruction has stopped the ITB fan.
D
-005 Harness disconnected
1. Pull out the ITB unit drawer and then push it into the machine.
2. Check the harness connection to the ITB fan.
3. Replace the ITB fan.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: Paper cooling fan 1
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from paper cooling fan 1 for 0.1
second during the fan operation.
530
D An obstruction has stopped paper cooling fan 1.
-006
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to paper cooling fan 1.
2. Replace paper cooling fan 1.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: Paper cooling fan 2
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from paper cooling fan 2 for 0.1
second during the fan operation.
530
D An obstruction has stopped the paper cooling fan 2.
-007
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to paper cooling fan 2.
2. Replace paper cooling fan 2.
D095/M077 3-78 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: Laser unit YM fan
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the laser unit YM fan for
0.1 second during the fan operation.
530
D An obstruction has stopped the laser unit YM fan.
-008
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to the laser unit YM fan.
2. Replace the laser unit YM fan.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: Laser unit CK fan
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the laser unit CK fan for
0.1 second during the fan operation.
530
D An obstruction has stopped the laser unit CK fan.
-009
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to the laser unit CK fan.
2. Replace the laser unit CK fan.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: CIS cleaning fan
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the CIS cleaning fan for
0.1 second during the fan operation.
530 An obstruction has stopped the CIS cleaning fan.
D Harness disconnected
-010
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer and then push it into the
machine.
2. Check the harness connection to the CIS cleaning fan.
3. Replace the CIS cleaning fan.
SM Appendix 3-79 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: Registration unit fan
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the registration unit fan for
0.1 second during the fan operation.
530 An obstruction has stopped the registration unit fan.
D Harness disconnected
-011
1. Pull out the registration unit drawer and then push it into the
machine.
2. Check the harness connection to the registration unit fan.
3. Replace the registration unit fan.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: Black PCDU fan
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the black PCDU fan for
0.1 second during the fan operation.
530
D An obstruction has stopped the black PCDU fan.
-012
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to the black PCDU fan.
2. Replace the registration unit fan.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: Inverter/paper exit fan
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the inverter/paper exit fan
for 0.1 second during the fan operation.
530
D An obstruction has stopped the inverter/paper exit fan.
-013
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to the inverter/paper exit fan.
2. Replace the Inverter/paper exit fan.
D095/M077 3-80 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
530
D Fan alarm 1: Development unit K fan
-014
-015 D Fan alarm 1: Development unit C fan
-016 D Fan alarm 1: Development unit M fan
-017 D Fan alarm 1: Development unit Y fan
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the development unit K,
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
C, M or Y fan for 0.1 second during the fan operation.
An obstruction has stopped the development unit K, C, M or Y
fan.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to the development unit K, C, M
or Y fan.
2. Replace the development unit K, C, M or Y fan.
SM Appendix 3-81 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
530
D Fan alarm 1: Fusing fan 1
-018
-019 D Fan alarm 1: Fusing fan 2
-020 D Fan alarm 1: Fusing fan 3
-021 D Fan alarm 1: Fusing fan 4
-022 D Fan alarm 1: Fusing fan 5
-023 D Fan alarm 1: Fusing fan 6
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from fusing unit fan 1, 2, 3, 4,
5 or 6 for 0.1 second during the fan operation.
An obstruction has stopped fusing unit fan 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to fusing unit fan 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
2. Replace fusing unit fan 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fan alarm 1: Inverter motor fan
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the inverter motor fan for
0.1 second during the fan operation.
530
D An obstruction has stopped the inverter motor fan.
-024
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to the inverter motor fan.
2. Replace the inverter motor fan.
D095/M077 3-82 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
531
D Fan alarm 2: Ozone fan K
-001
-002 D Fan alarm 2: Ozone fan C
-003 D Fan alarm 2: Ozone fan M
-004 D Fan alarm 2: Ozone fan Y
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the ozone fan K, C, M
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
or Y for 0.1 second during the fan operation.
An obstruction has stopped the ozone fan K, C, M or Y.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to the ozone fan K, C, M or Y.
2. Replace the ozone fan K, C, M or Y.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
531
D Fan alarm 2: PSU fan 1
-005
-006 D Fan alarm 2: PSU fan 2
-007 D Fan alarm 2: PSU fan 3
-008 D Fan alarm 2: PSU fan 4
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from PSU fan 1, 2, 3 or 4 for
0.1 second during the fan operation.
An obstruction has stopped PSU fan 1, 2, 3 or 4.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to PSU fan 1, 2, 3 or 4.
2. Replace PSU fan 1, 2, 3 or 4.
SM Appendix 3-83 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
531
D Fan alarm 2: Fusing exhaust fan 1
-009
-010 D Fan alarm 2: Fusing exhaust fan 2
-011 D Fan alarm 2: Fusing exhaust fan 3
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from fusing exhaust fan 1, 2
or 3 for 0.1 second during the fan operation.
An obstruction has stopped fusing exhaust fan 1, 2 or 3.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to fusing exhaust fan 1, 2 or 3.
2. Replace fusing exhaust fan 1, 2 or 3.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
531
D Fan alarm 2: Controller fan 1
-012
-013 D Fan alarm 2: Controller fan 2
-014 D Fan alarm 2: Controller fan 3
-015 D Fan alarm 2: Controller fan 4
-016 D Fan alarm 2: Controller fan 5
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from controller fan 1, 2, 3, 4
or 5 for 0.1 second during the fan operation.
An obstruction has stopped controller fan 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to controller fan 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
2. Replace controller fan 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
D095/M077 3-84 SM Appendix
Rev. 02/23/2011 Service Call Tables - 5-1
⇒ No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
531 Fan alarm 2: Plotter cooling fan 1
D
-017 (Right fan from front view)
-018 Fan alarm 2: Plotter cooling fan 2
D
(Center fan from front view)
-019 Fan alarm 2: Plotter cooling fan 3
D
(Left fan from front view)
-020 Fan alarm 2: Compressor fan 1
D
(Right fan from front view)
-021 Fan alarm 2: Compressor fan 2
D
(Left fan from front view)
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the plotter cooling fan 1,
2, 3, or compressor fan 1 or 2 0.1 second during the fan operation.
Service Call
An obstruction has stopped plotter cooling fan 1, 2, 3, or
Conditions
Appendix:
compressor fan 1 or 2.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to plotter cooling fan 1, 2, 3, or
compressor fan 1 or 2.
2. Replace plotter cooling fan 1, 2, 3, or compressor fan 1 or 2.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
532
B Fan alarm 3: A3 LCT front air assist fan 1
-001
-002 B Fan alarm 3: A3 LCT rear air assist fan 1
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from front or rear air assist
fan 1 for 0.7 second after the paper exit motor has started rotating for
1 second.
An obstruction has stopped front or rear air assist fan 1.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to front or rear air assist fan 1.
2. Replace front or rear air assist fan 1.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
533
B Fan alarm 4: A3 LCT front air assist fan 2
-001
-002 B Fan alarm 4: A3 LCT rear air assist fan 2
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from front or rear air assist
fan 2 for 0.7 second after the paper exit motor has started rotating for
1 second.
An obstruction has stopped front or rear air assist fan 2.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to the front or rear air assist fan 2.
2. Replace front or rear air assist fan 2.
SM Appendix 3-85 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
534
B Fan alarm 5: A3 LCT rear air assist fan 3
-001
-002 B Fan alarm 5: A3 LCT rear air assist fan 3
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from front or rear air assist
fan 3 for 0.7 second after the paper exit motor has started rotating for
1 second.
An obstruction has stopped front or rear air assist fan 3.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to front or rear air assist fan 3.
2. Replace front or rear air assist fan 3.
D095/M077 3-86 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-2
3.8 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 5-2
3.8.1 SC CODES GROUP 5: PAPER FEED
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
535
B Fan alarm 6: A3 LCT rear air assist fan 4
-001
-002 B Fan alarm 6: A3 LCT rear air assist fan 4
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from front or rear air
assist fan 4 for 0.7 second after the paper exit motor has started
rotating for 1 second.
An obstruction has stopped front or rear air assist fan 4.
Harness disconnected
1. Check the harness connection to front or rear air assist fan 4.
2. Replace front or rear air assist fan 4.
Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting
No. Type
Procedures)
536 B Fan alarm 7: Upper and lower cooling fans
-001
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the upper cooling
to
fans or lower cooling fans in the buffer pass unit (M379) for 10
-004
seconds during the fan operation.
An obstruction has stopped the upper or lower cooling fans.
Harness disconnected
1. Check and remove the obstruction from the upper or lower
cooling fans.
2. Check the harness connection to the upper or lower cooling
fans.
3. Replace the upper or lower cooling fans.
SM Appendix 3-87 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
536 B Fan alarm 8: Upper and lower exhaust fans
-005
The machine detects a fan alarm signal from the upper exhaust fans or
to
lower exhaust fans in the buffer pass unit (M379) for 10 seconds during
-008
the fan operation.
An obstruction has stopped the upper or lower exhaust fans.
Harness disconnected
1. Check and remove the obstruction from the upper or lower exhaust
fans.
2. Check the harness connection to the upper or lower exhaust fans.
3. Replace the upper or lower exhaust fans.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Heating roller thermopile error
The temperature measured by the thermopile does not reach 0°C for 10
seconds.
541 A Loose connection of the thermopile
Defective thermopile
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.
2. Check if the thermopile is firmly connected.
3. Replace the thermopile.
D095/M077 3-88 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Heating roller warm-up error 1
The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach the
ready temperature for 830 seconds after the heating lamp on.
The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach 100°C
542 A for 400 seconds after the heating roller lamp on.
Dirty or defective thermopile
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
2. Check if the thermopile is firmly connected.
3. Replace the thermopile.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Heating roller overheat 1 (software error)
The detected fusing temperature (center) stays at 225°C for 10
seconds.
TRIAC short, AC drive board defective
Defective IOB 2
543 A Defective BCU
Related SC code: SC 553, SC563
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.
2. Replace the AC drive board.
3. Replace the IOB 2.
4. Replace the BCU.
SM Appendix 3-89 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Heating roller thermopile (center) error 3
The thermopile detected a temperature over 260°C.
TRIAC short, AC drive board defective
Defective IOB 2
Defective BCU
544 A
Related SC code: SC 553, SC563
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.
2. Replace the AC drive board.
3. Replace the IOB 2.
4. Replace the BCU.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Heating roller fusing lamp on error
After fusing belt reached warm-up temperature, the heating roller fusing
lamp remained on for 360 sec. while the hot roller was not rotating.
545 A Thermopile damaged, or out of position
Fusing lamp disconnected, broken
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.
2. Replace the thermopile.
D095/M077 3-90 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Zero cross error
The zero cross signal is detected once in the three zero cross
signal detections even though the heater relay is off when turning
on the main power.
The detection error occurs twice or more in the 10 zero cross signal
detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross
signal is less than 44.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Defective fusing relay
Defective fusing relay circuit
Shorted +24V fuse on the PSU
Unstable power supply
547 D Defective breaker or breaker off
Defective FIB (+6VGINT off)
Defective AC drive board (Defective power relay)
Defective IOB 2
1. Check the power supply source.
2. Make sure that the breaker is turned on.
3. Replace the breaker if the breaker is not turned on.
4. Replace the FIB if +6VGINT (CN337-1 on IOB 2) is OFF.
5. Replace the AC drive board.
6. Replace the IOB 2.
7. Replace the +24V fuse on the PSU.
8. Replace the PSU
SM Appendix 3-91 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Pressure roller thermistor error
The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor does not
reach 0°C for 120 seconds.
Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor
551 A Defective pressure roller thermistor
Related SC code: SC 541, SC561
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.
2. Check that the pressure roller thermistor is firmly connected.
3. Replace the pressure roller thermistor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Pressure roller warm-up error 2
The pressure roller temperature does not reach the ready
temperature for 1600 seconds after the heating lamp on.
The pressure roller temperature does not reach 100°C for 700
seconds after the pressure roller lamp on.
552 A Defective thermistor
Related SC code: SC 542, SC562
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.
2. Check if the pressure roller thermistor is firmly connected.
3. Replace the pressure roller thermistor.
D095/M077 3-92 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Pressure roller overheat (software error)
The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 10
seconds.
TRIAC short, AC drive board defective
Defective IOB 2
553 A Defective BCU
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Related SC code: SC 543, SC563
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.
2. Replace the AC drive board.
3. Replace the IOB 2.
4. Replace the BCU.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Pressure roller fusing lamp remains on
After hot roller reaches warm-up temperature, the pressure roller fusing
lamp remained for 360 sec. while the hot roller is not rotating.
555 A
Thermistor damaged, or out of position
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.
2. Replace the pressure roller thermistor.
SM Appendix 3-93 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Zero cross frequency error
The detection error occurs twice or more in the 10 zero cross signal
detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is
557 C less than 44.
Noise (High frequency)
Check the power supply source.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Consecutive fusing jam
The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times. The paper
jam counter is cleared if the paper is fed correctly.
559 A This SC is activated only when SP1159-001 is set to "1" (default "0").
Paper jam in the fusing unit.
Remove the paper that is jammed in the fusing unit. Then make sure
that the fusing unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper feed path.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Heating roller thermistor error (end)
The temperature measured by the heating roller thermistor does not
reach 0°C after 45 sec. and remains over this temperature for 10
561 A readings.
Loose connection of the heating roller thermistor
Defective heating roller thermistor
Replace the heating roller thermistor.
D095/M077 3-94 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Heating roller warm-up error 3
The heating roller temperature does not reach the ready
temperature for 850 seconds after the heating roller lamp on.
The heating roller temperature does not reach 100°C for 400
seconds after the heating roller lamp on.
562 A
Defective thermistor
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Related SC code: SC 542, SC552
1. Check if the heating roller thermistor is firmly connected.
2. Replace the heating roller thermistor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Heating roller overheat 2 (software error)
The detected heating roller temperature (end) stays at 225°C or more
for 10 seconds.
Defective AC drive board
Defective IOB 2
563 A Defective BCU
Related SC code: SC 543, SC553
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code.
2. Replace the AC drive board.
3. Replace the IOB 2.
4. Replace the BCU.
SM Appendix 3-95 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-2 Rev. 05/23/2011
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Pressure roller lift error
Pressure roller lift motor not operating correctly. (No signal to indicate
completion of operation.)
569 D Pressure roller lift motor defective
Pressure roller lift sensor connection loose, broken, damaged
Pressure roller lift motor blocked by an obstruction
1. Replace the pressure roller lift motor.
2. Replace the pressure roller lift sensor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
⇒
Fusing roller thermistor error (Fusing roller thermistor)
The core temperature of the hot roller does not reach 0 degrees Celsius
571 A
for 2100 seconds.
Defective fusing roller thermistor
Loose connection of the fusing roller thermistor
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code. Turn the main power off,
and then on.
2. Check if the fusing roller thermistor is firmly connected.
3. Replace the fusing roller thermistor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
⇒
Hot roller warm-up error (Fusing roller thermistor)
The core temperature of the hot roller does not reach 45 degrees
572 A
Celsius for 2100 seconds after the hot roller lamp turned on.
The core temperature of the hot roller does not reach the warm-up
temperature for 4000 seconds after the hot roller lamp turned on.
Defective fusing roller thermistor
Loose connection of the fusing roller thermistor
D095/M077 3-96 SM Appendix
Rev. 05/23/2011 Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code. Turn the main power off,
and then on.
2. Check the appearance of the fusing roller thermistor for any
anomalies and the input voltage.
3. Check if the fusing lamps are firmly connected.
4. Replace the fusing roller thermistor.
5. Replace the thermostat.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
⇒
Fusing belt thermistor error (Fusing belt thermistor)
The temperature of fusing belt does not reach 0 degrees Celsius for
576 A
135 seconds.
Defective fusing roller thermistor
Loose connection of the fusing roller thermistor
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code. Turn the main power off,
and then on.
2. Check if the fusing roller thermistor is firmly connected.
3. Replace the fusing roller thermistor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
⇒
Hot roller warm-up error (Fusing belt thermistor)
The temperature of the fusing belt does not reach 90 degrees
577 A
Celsius for 306 seconds after the hot roller lamp turned on.
The temperature of the fusing belt does not reach the “warm-up
temperature – 35 degrees Celsius (SP correlated value)” when
a) the pressure roller reaches its target core and surface
temperatures, and b) the time for warm-up has elapsed.
Defective (deformed) fusing belt thermistor
Loose connection of the fusing lamps
1. Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code. Turn the main
power off, and then on.
SM Appendix 3-97 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-2 Rev. 05/23/2011
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
2. Check the appearance of the fusing belt thermistor for any
anomalies and the input voltage.
3. Check if the fusing lamps are firmly connected.
4. Replace the fusing belt thermistor.
5. Replace the thermostat.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
De-curler unit HP detection error
The de-curler unit HP sensor does not detect a home position for 6
seconds after the de-curler unit has tried to search for its home position.
584 A De-curler unit HP sensor connection loose or disconnected
De-curler unit HP sensor defective
1. Check the connection of the de-curler unit HP sensor.
2. Replace the de-curler unit HP sensor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Double-feed led adjustment error
The calibration of the double-feed LED for the paper type failed to reach
the target voltage.
585 C Double-feed sensor: LED and receptor dirty
Sensor: LED and receptor connectors loose, broken, defective
1. Check the connection of the double-feed sensor: LED and
Receptor.
2. Replace the double-feed sensor: LED and Receptor.
D095/M077 3-98 SM Appendix
Rev. 05/23/2011 Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
De-curler limit sensor error
The de-curler unit moves beyond the regulated range.
The de-curler limit sensor does not detect any signal.
De-curler unit HP sensor connection loose or disconnected
De-curler unit HP sensor defective
586 A De-curler unit limit sensor connection loose or disconnected
De-curler unit limit sensor defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
1. Check the connection of the de-curler unit HP sensor.
2. Replace the de-curler unit HP sensor.
3. Check the connection of the de-curler unit limit sensor.
4. Replace the de-curler unit limit sensor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
590
C Paper feed motor 1 error
-001
-002 C Paper feed motor 2 error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in paper feed
motor 1 or 2.
Harness from IOB 2 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
Coil in one of these motors short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace paper feed motor 1 or 2.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
590
C Grip motor 1 error
-003
-004 C Grip motor 2 error
SM Appendix 3-99 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-2 Rev. 05/23/2011
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
-005 C Grip motor 3 error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in grip motor 1,
2 or 3.
Harness from IOB 2 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
Coil in one of these motors short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace grip motor 1, 2 or 3.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Pressure roller lift motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the pressure
roller lift motor.
590 Harness from IOB 2 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-006 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the pressure roller lift motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
De-curler feed motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the de-curler
feed motor.
590 Harness from IOB 2 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-008 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the de-curler feed motor.
D095/M077 3-100 SM Appendix
Rev. 05/23/2011 Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
De-curler unit motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the de-curler
unit motor.
590 Harness from IOB 2 to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-009 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the de-curler unit motor.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Registration entrance motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the registration
entrance motor.
590 Harness from RCB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-010 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the registration entrance motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Registration timing motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the registration
timing motor.
590 Harness from RCB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-011 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the registration timing motor.
SM Appendix 3-101 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-2 Rev. 05/23/2011
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Shift roller motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the shift roller
motor.
590 Harness from RCB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-012 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the shift roller motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
PTR timing motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the PTR timing
motor.
590 Harness from RCB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-013 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the PTR timing motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Shift roller unit motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the shift roller
unit motor.
590 Harness from RCB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-014 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the shift roller unit motor.
D095/M077 3-102 SM Appendix
Rev. 05/23/2011 Service Call Tables - 5-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Registration gate motor
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the registration
gate unit motor.
590 Harness from RCB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-015 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the registration gate motor.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Duplex transport motor 2 error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the duplex
transport motor 2.
590 Harness from RCB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-016 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the duplex transport motor 2.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Inverter motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the inverter
motor.
590 Harness from PDB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-017 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the inverter motor.
SM Appendix 3-103 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 5-2 Rev. 05/23/2011
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Switchback motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the switchback
motor.
590 Harness from PDB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-018 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the switchback motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Duplex transport motor 1 error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the duplex
transport motor 1.
590 Harness from PDB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C
-019 Coil in this motor short or open
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the duplex transport motor 1.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
PTB motor error
The machine detects a short or open signal of the coil in the PTB motor.
590 Harness from PDB to this motor short, broken or disconnected
C Coil in this motor short or open
-020
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the PTB motor.
D095/M077 3-104 SM Appendix
Rev. 10/17/2011 Service Call Tables - 6
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
590 Inverter motor error
⇒ -021 The machine detects a short or open signal of the inverter motor, or
the safety function went off to prevent temperature rise.
Harness from PDB to this motor short or disconnected
Coil in this motor short or open
Relay connector between PDB and this motor disconnected
D
PDB board defect
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Turn machine power Off and On either by the main power switch or
the power button on the control panel.
Replace the PDB motor.
Check the harness connection. Replace the harness if damaged.
Replace the PDB board.
3.9 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 6
3.9.1 SC CODES GROUP 6: DEVICE COMMUNICATION
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Communication Error between BCU and MCU (D095 only)
One or more of the following occurred:
The BCU cannot communicate with the MCU (LCT-MF) within 100
ms after power on after 3 tries.
A BREAK signal was detected after connection between the BCU
and MCU.
After a communication error, three tries to communicate with the
SC601 B MCU failed.
Poor connection between BCU and MCU
BCU defective
MCU defective
1. Check or replace the harness between the BCU and MCU.
2. Replace the BCU.
3. Replace the MCU in the LCT-MF.
SM Appendix 3-105 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 6 Rev. 10/17/2011
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
610 D Mechanical counter error: K
611 D Mechanical counter error: FC
This SC is only for NA models.
The machine detects the mechanical counter error.
- - Disconnected mechanical counter
Defective mechanical counter
Check or replace the mechanical counter.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ADF Communication Error (D095 only)
No response from the ADF to the ACK signal issued by the IPU.
Poor connection between the IPU and ADF
Electrical noise interfering with communication between electrical
components
620 B ADF cable or connector loose, broken, defective
ADF defective
IPU defective
1. Check or replace the cable between IPU and ADF.
2. Replace the ADF.
3. Replace the IPU.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
621 D Finisher communication error
While the IOB 2 communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is
displayed if the IOB 2 receives the break signal which is generated by
- - the peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on.
Finisher I/F cable problems
Finisher main board problems
D095/M077 3-106 SM Appendix
Rev. 10/17/2011 Service Call Tables - 6
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
IOB 2 problems
BCU problems
1. Check if the finisher I/F cables are correctly connected.
2. Replace the main board of the finisher where you think the problem
is occurring.
3. Replace the IOB 2.
4. Replace the BCU.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
622 D 1st LCT communication error
623 D 2nd LCT communication error
While the IOB 2 communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is
displayed if the IOB 2 receives the break signal which is generated by
the peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on.
LCT I/F cable problems
LCT main board problems
- - IOB 2 problems
BCU problems
1. Check if the LCT I/F cable is correctly connected.
2. Replace the main board of the LCT.
3. Replace the IOB 2.
4. Replace the BCU.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
RCB module version error
The RCB module version in the main machine does not match the one
625 D in the LCT.
Incorrect registration unit installed
Install the correct registration unit.
SM Appendix 3-107 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 6 Rev. 10/17/2011
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
BCU-RCB communication error
The IOB 1 does not receive an OK signal from RCB for a certain time
after sending a command to it and the IOB 1 still does not receive an
OK signal after sending the command 3 times.
Registration drawer connection defective
626 D Disconnected harness between IOB 1 and RCB
RCB software not installed correctly
Defective IOB 1
Defective RCB
1. Check the connection between the above devices.
2. Replace the RCB.
3. Replace the IOB 1.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Counter device error 1
After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via
the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100
CTL ms.
632
B
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board
and copier control board is disconnected or damaged
Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter
device.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Counter device error 2
After communication is established, the controller receives the break
CTL signal from the accounting device.
633
B
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board
and copier control board is disconnected or damaged
Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter
D095/M077 3-108 SM Appendix
Rev. 1/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 6
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
device.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Counter device error 3
CTL A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device.
634
B
Counter device control board defective
Backup battery of counter device defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Counter device error 4
CTL A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.
635
B
Counter device control board defective
Backup battery of counter device defective
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
636-01 SD Card Error
⇒ Expanded authentication module error
1. Install the expanded authentication module
2. Install the SD Card
3. Install the DESS module
636-02 Improper IC module version
⇒ Improver version of IC module is used.
Re-install IC module.
SM Appendix 3-109 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 6 Rev. 1/24/2012
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
⇒ Error in software
636-99 Improper certification information accumulates inside software.
Turn main power off/on.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
BCU control data transfer abnormal
A sampling of the control data sent from the BCU reveals an
abnormality.
CTL Controller board defective
641
D External noise
BCU board defective
1. Replace the controller board.
2. Replace the BCU board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Communication error of the remote service modem (Embedded
650
RCG-M)
Authentication error
The authentication for the Embedded RCG-M fails at a dial up
connection.
CTL
-001 Incorrect SP settings
B
Disconnected telephone line
Disconnected modem board
Check and set the correct user name (SP5816-156) and password
(SP5816-157).
CTL Incorrect modem setting
-004
B Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting.
D095/M077 3-110 SM Appendix
Rev. 1/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 6
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Same as -001
Check and set the correct AT command (SP5816-160).
Communication line error
The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to a defective communication
-005 - line or defective connection.
Same as -001
Consult with the user's local telephone company.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Incorrect network setting
Both the NIC and Embedded RCG-M are activated at the same time.
-011 -
Same as -001
Disable the NIC with SP5985-1.
Modem board error
The modem board does not work properly even though the setting of
the modem board is installed with a dial up connection.
-012 -
Same as -001
1. Install the modem board.
2. Check and reset the modem board setting with SP5816.
3. Replace the modem board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
651 Incorrect dial up connection
-001 CTL C Program parameter error
-002 CTL C Program execution error
An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M)
tries to call the center with a dial up connection.
SM Appendix 3-111 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 6 Rev. 1/24/2012
Caused
by a
softwar
e bug
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Timer error
The machine fails to read the internal timer.
660 D
Defective engine firmware
Update the engine firmware to the latest version.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Engine start up: Time out error
The image processing check after machine power on does not
complete after 10 seconds.
661 D
Incorrect timing adjustment SP settings
Image processing cannot be controlled.
Input the correct settings for the timing adjustment SP codes.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Slave CPU error
The slave CPU does not send a clear signal for the watchdog timer for
662 A the specified time (408 - 1496 ms.).
Slave CPU out of control
Update the engine firmware to the latest version firmware.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
663 D CPU communication error
D095/M077 3-112 SM Appendix
Rev. 1/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 6
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
The communication between the master and slave CPU on the BCU
does not complete after 100 msec.
Defective engine firmware
Defective DP-RAM
1. Update the engine firmware to the latest version.
2. Replace the BCU.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Engine start up error
CTL The ready signal from the engine board is not detected.
670
D Defective engine board.
Replace the engine board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Engine board mismatch error
Engine board and controller mismatch detected.
CTL Wrong engine board installed.
671 Wrong controller board installed.
D
Check the type of engine board and controller board.
1. Replace the BCU.
2. Replace the controller board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup
After powering on the machine, the communication circuit between the
CTL
672 controller and the operation panel is not opened, or communication with
D
controller is interrupted after a normal startup.
Controller stall
SM Appendix 3-113 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 6 Rev. 1/24/2012
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Controller board installed incorrectly
Controller board defective
Operation panel connector loose or defective
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the controller board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
674 Board Power Error-1
PSU-EA1 ch1: 24V power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the PSU-EA1.
Harness broken or disconnected
Interlock signal from IOB 2 detected
-001 D RB defective
PSU-EA1 defective
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the PSU-EA1.
3. Replace the RB.
IOB 1: 24V_1AINT power off error 1
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 1.
-002 D PSU-EA1 defective
FU203 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
1. Replace the IOB 1.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
IOB 1: 24V_1AINT power off error 1
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 1.
-003 D PSU-EA1 defective
FU210 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
1. Replace the IOB 1.
D095/M077 3-114 SM Appendix
Rev. 1/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 6
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
1. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
675 Board Power Error-2
PSU-EA1 ch2: 24V power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the PSU-EA1.
Service Call
Harness broken or disconnected
Conditions
Appendix:
Interlock signal from IOB 2 detected
-001 D RB defective
PSU-EA1 defective
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the PSU-EA1.
3. Replace the RB.
IOB 1: 24V_2AINT power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 1.
-002 D PSU-EA1 defective
FU105 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
1. Replace the IOB 1.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
IOB 1: 24V_2BINT power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 1.
-003 D PSU-EA1 defective
FU104 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
1. Replace the IOB 1.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
RCB: 24V_2BINT power off error
-004 D
The machine detects 24 V power off from the RCB.
SM Appendix 3-115 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 6 Rev. 1/24/2012
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
PSU-EA1 defective
IOB 1 defective
Registration unit disconnected
1. Check the registration unit connection.
2. Replace the IOB 1.
3. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
IOB 1: 24VINT power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 1.
-005 D
PSU-EA1 defective
Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
IOB 1: 24VINTA power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 1.
PSU-EA1 defective
-006 D IOB 1 defective
FU104 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
1. Replace the IOB 1.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
RCB: 24VINTA1 power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the RCB.
Registration unit disconnected
-007 D PSU-EA1 defective
IOB 1 defective
1. Check the registration unit connection.
2. Replace the IOB 1.
3. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
RCB: 24VINTA2 power off error
-008 D The machine detects 24 V power off from the RCB.
Registration unit disconnected
D095/M077 3-116 SM Appendix
Rev. 1/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 6
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
PSU-EA1 defective
IOB 1 defective
1. Check the registration unit connection.
2. Replace the IOB 1.
3. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
IOB 2: 24VINT power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 2.
-009 D
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
PSU-EA1 defective
Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
IOB 2: 24VINTA
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 2.
-010 D PSU-EA1 defective
FU101 on the IOB 2 shorted or opened
1. Replace the IOB 2.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
676 Board Power Error-3
PSU-EA1: 24V_ch3 power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the PSU-EA1.
-001 D Harness broken or disconnected
PSU-EA1 defective
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the PSU-EA1.
IOB 2: 24V_3A power off error
-002 D The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 2.
PSU-EA1 defective
SM Appendix 3-117 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 6 Rev. 1/24/2012
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
FU103 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
1. Replace the IOB 1.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
IOB 2: 24V_3B power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 2.
-003 D PSU-EA1 defective
FU102 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
1. Replace the IOB 1.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
IOB 2: 24V_3C power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 2.
-004 D PSU-EA1 defective
FU104 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
1. Replace the IOB 1.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA1.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
677 Board Power Error-4
PSU-EA1: 24V_ch4 power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the PSU-EA1.
-001 D Harness broken or disconnected
PSU-EA1 defective
1. Check or replace the harness.
2. Replace the PSU-EA1.
IOB 1: 24V_3A power off error
-002 D The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 1.
PSU-EA2 defective
D095/M077 3-118 SM Appendix
Rev. 1/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 6
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
FU106 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
1. Replace the IOB 1.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA2.
IOB 1: 24V_3B power off error
The machine detects 24 V power off from the IOB 1.
-003 D PSU-EA2 defective
FU107 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
1. Replace the IOB 1.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA2.
IOB 1: TSNS_VCC power off error
The machine detects TSNS_VCC power off from the IOB 1.
PSU-EA2 defective
-004 D FU104 on the IOB 1 shorted or opened
IOB 1 defective
1. Replace the IOB 1.
2. Check or replace the PSU-EA2.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
678 Board Power Error-5
CTB_+24V_off error
The machine detects 24 V power off for 1 second from the PSU in the
buffer pass unit after +24V power was turned on.
Harness disconnected or broken
-001 D PSU (Buffer Pass Unit) defective
Main board (Buffer Pass Unit) defective
Shortage due to overload on the motor or fan
Fuse tripped or defective
1. Check or replace the harnesses to the PSU in the buffer pass unit.
SM Appendix 3-119 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 6 Rev. 1/24/2012
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
2. Replace the PSU in the buffer pass unit.
3. Replace the main board in the buffer pass unit.
4. Remove any obstacle to the motor or fan or replace the motor or
fan.
5. Check or replace the fuses on the PSU.
CTB_+24VINT_off error
The machine detects 24 V power off for 1 second from the PSU in the
buffer pass unit after +24V power was turned off and front doors have
been closed.
-002 D Harness disconnected or broken
PSU (Buffer Pass Unit) defective
Main board (Buffer Pass Unit) defective
1. Check or replace the harnesses to the PSU in the buffer pass unit.
2. Replace the PSU in the buffer pass unit.
3. Replace the main board in the buffer pass unit.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
681 D Communication error: Toner cartridge and RFID
The machine detects a communication error between the toner
cartridge and RFID at starting the communication.
The machine cannot recover the communication between the toner
cartridge and RFID after the third communication retry.
-001 -
RFID defective
ASAP I/F disconnected
Incorrect communication due to noise
ID chip defective or not installed in a toner cartridge
-001 1. Check the harness connection.
to - 2. Replace the IOB 1.
-005 3. Replace the RFID.
-011 1. Check if the toner bottle is correctly installed in the machine.
-
to 2. Install the correct toner bottle in the machine.
D095/M077 3-120 SM Appendix
Rev. 1/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 6
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
-014 The suffix number of the SC code indicates the following:
-011: K, -012: C, -013: M, -014: Y
-015 Replace the RFID.
to - The suffix number of the SC code indicates the following:
-018 -015: K, -016: C, -017: M, -018: Y
No action except turning off and on is required.
-019
The suffix number of the SC code indicates the following:
to -
-019/-023/-027: K, -020/-024/-028: C, -021/-025/-029: M,
-030
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
-022/-026/-030: Y
Replace the toner bottle.
-031
The suffix number of the SC code indicates the following:
to -
-031/-035/-039/-043: K, -032/-036/-040/-044: C, -033/-037/-041/-045:
-046
M, -034/-038/-042/-046: Y
-047 No action except turning off and on is required.
to - The suffix number of the SC code indicates the following:
-054 -047/-051: K, -048/-052: C, -049/-053: M, -050/-054: Y
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
683 C Toner bottle checking error: Toner cartridge and RFID
The machine detects a communication error between the toner
cartridge and RFID at checking the toner bottles even though no toner
bottle is installed in the machine.
Incorrect communication due to noise
-035
ID chip defective or not installed in a toner cartridge
To -
-045 1. Check if the ID chip on the toner bottle is installed.
2. Install the correct toner bottle in the machine.
The suffix number of the SC code indicates the following:
-035/-039/-043: K, -036/-040/-044: C, -037/-041/-045: M,
-038/-042/-045: Y
SM Appendix 3-121 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1 Rev. 1/24/2012
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
BCU-IPU communication error
The BCU detects a communication error with the IPU three times
consecutively.
BCU defective
686 D IPU defective
I/F cable disconnected or broken
1. Replace the BCU.
2. Replace the IPU.
3. Replace the I/F cable between BCU and IPU.
3.10 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 7-1
3.10.1 SC CODES GROUP 7: PERIPHERALS
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ADF Pickup Roller Release Malfunction (D095 only)
The pick-up roller HP sensor does not activate or de-activate when the
pick-up motor turns on.
HP sensor connector, harness loose, broken, defective
Pick-up motor connector, harness loose, broken defective
701 B Pick-up roller HP sensor defective
Pick-up motor defective
ADF main control board defective
1. Check the harness connections.
2. Replace the pick-up roller HP sensor.
3. Replace the pick-up motor.
4. Replace the main board of the ADF.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ADF Feed-In Motor Error (D095 only)
While the feed motor is operating, the encoder pulse signal is not
received within the specified time, or the paper size length encoder
signal cannot be detected within the specified time (the encoder is built
into the feed-in motor).
702 B
Feed-in motor connector, harness loose, broken, defective
Paper length sensor connector, harness loose, broken, defective
Feed-in motor defective
Paper length sensor or encoder is defective
ADF main control board defective
D095/M077 3-122 SM Appendix
Rev. 1/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
1. Check the harness connections.
2. Replace the feed-in motor.
3. Replace the paper length sensor.
4. Replace the main board of the ADF.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ADF Transport Belt Motor Error (D095 only)
The encoder pulse signal did not change within 100 ms after 3 attempts
to detect any change, causing a "P1" jam error.
Transport belt motor defective
703 B
Service Call
Poor connection between the transport motor and ADF main board
Conditions
Appendix:
ADF main board defective
1. Replace the transport belt motor.
2. Check or replace the harness connections.
3. Replace the transport belt motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ADF Feed-Out Motor Error (D095 only)
The encoder pulse signal did not change within 80 ms after 3 attempts
to detect any change, causing a "P2 jam error.
Feed-out motor defective
704 B Poor connection between the feed-out motor and ADF main board
ADF main control board defective
1. Replace the feed-out motor.
2. Check or replace the harness connections.
3. Replace the ADF main control board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
ADF Original Table Lift Malfunction (D095 only)
One of the following conditions was detected.
The bottom plate position sensor did not activate when the bottom
plate motor lifted the original table.
705 B
The bottom plate HP sensor did not activate when the bottom plate
motor lowered the original table.
Bottom plate position sensor defective
Bottom plate HP sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-123 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1 Rev. 1/24/2012
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Bottom plate motor defective
ADF main control board defective
1. Replace the bottom plate position sensor.
2. Replace the bottom plate HP sensor.
3. Replace the bottom plate motor
4. Replace the ADF main control board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Finisher (B830) upper transport motor error
No encoder pulse signal is detected for the transport motor within the
prescribed time. The 1st failure causes this SC code.
Upper transport motor disconnected, defective
720 D Finisher connection to transport motor loose, defective
Upper transport motor defective
Finisher main board defective
1. Check the harness of the upper transport motor.
2. Replace the upper transport motor.
3. Replace the main board of the finisher (B830).
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
720 D Finisher (D453): Entrance roller motor error
-01
-02 D Finisher (D453): Proof tray vertical motor error
-03 D Finisher (D453): Horizontal roller motor error
-04 D Finisher (D453): Registration motor error
The motor driver for each motor detects short or open signal from each
motor.
Motor disconnected, defective
Motor overloaded due to obstruction
1. Check and remove obstruction to the target motor.
2. Check the harness connections.
3. Replace the target motor; entrance roller motor for 720-01, proof
tray vertical motor error for 720-02, horizontal roller motor error for
720-03 or registration motor for 720-04.
D095/M077 3-124 SM Appendix
Rev. 02/23/2011 Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
⇒ 721 B Finisher (B830) jogger motor error
The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor
output does not change within the specified number of pulses.
The 1st failure causes an original jam message, and the 2nd failure
causes this SC code.
Jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective
Jogger motor disconnected, defective
Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
Finisher main board and jogger motor connection loose,
defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Finisher main board defective
1. Check and remove obstruction to the jogger motor.
2. Check the harness connections.
3. Replace the jogger HP sensor.
4. Replace the jogger motor.
5. Replace the main board of the finisher (B830).
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
⇒ 721 B Finisher (D434) jogger motor error: Front
-01
-02 B Finisher (D434) jogger motor error: Rear
The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor
output does not change within the specified number of pulses.
The 1st failure causes an original jam message, and the 2nd failure
causes this SC code.
Jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective
Jogger motor disconnected, defective
Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
Finisher main board and jogger motor connection loose,
defective
Finisher main board defective
Check and remove obstruction to the jogger motor.
1. Check the harness connections.
2. Replace the jogger HP sensor.
3. Replace the jogger motor.
4. Replace the main board of the finisher (D434).
SM Appendix 3-125 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Finisher feed-out motor
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not activate within the specified
time after the stack feed-out belt motor turns on. The 1st detection
failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
Stack feed-out HP sensor disconnected, defective
723 B Feed-out motor disconnected, defective
Finisher main board connection to feed out motor disconnected,
defective
Motor overload due to obstruction
1. Check or clear obstructions around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Replace the stack feed-out motor.
3. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Finisher stapler hammer motor error
Stapling does not finish within the prescribed time after the staple
hammer motor turns on. The 1st detection failure causes a jam error,
and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
Stapler hammer motor overloaded due to obstruction, jammed
staple, number of sheets exceeds limit for stapling
724 B Stapler hammer motor disconnected, defective
Staple hammer motor HP sensor disconnected, defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the staple hammer motor HP sensor if the motor is
rotating.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-126 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Finisher exit guide plate motor error
After moving away from the guide plate position sensor, the exit guide is
not detected at the home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.
Guide plate motor disconnected, defective
725 B Guide plate motor overloaded due to obstruction
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Guide plate position sensor disconnected, defective
1. Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned
above.
2. Check for blockages in the guide plate motor mechanism.
3. Replace the guide plate position sensor and/or guide plate motor
4. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Shift jogger motor 1 error
The sides fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the shift
jogger motor switches on. The 1st detection failure causes a jam error,
and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
Shift jogger motor disconnected, defective
726 B Shift jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
Shift jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the shift jogger HP sensor
4. Replace the shift jogger motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
SM Appendix 3-127 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Shift jogger retraction motor error
The side fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the
retraction motor switches on. The 1st detection failure causes a jam
error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC code.
Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
Motor defective
728 B Motor overload
HP sensor defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the shift tray jogger lift HP sensor.
4. Replace the shift jogger retraction motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Lower Transport Motor Error: 3K Finisher B830
No encoder pulse signal is detected for the lower transport motor within
600 ms. The 1st failure issues this SC code.
Lower transport motor disconnected, defective
Finisher connection to lower transport motor loose, defective
730 B Lower transport motor blocked by an obstruction
Lower transport motor defective
Finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the lower transport motor.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-128 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Upper Tray Exit Motor Error (Proof Tray): 3K Finisher B830
No encoder pulse signal is detected for the upper transport motor within
600 ms. The 1st failure issues this SC code.
Upper tray exit motor disconnected, defective
Finisher connection to upper transport motor loose, defective
731 B Upper tray exit motor blocked by an obstruction
Upper tray exit motor defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the upper tray exit motor.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Shift Tray Exit Motor: 3K Finisher B830
The shift tray exit motor is not operating.
The 1st failure issues this SC code.
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor is blocked by an obstruction
732 B Motor defective
Finisher main control board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the shift tray exit motor.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
SM Appendix 3-129 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Stapler Exit Motor: 3K Finisher B830
The stapler exit motor is not operating.
The 1st failure issues this SC code.
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor is blocked by an obstruction
733 B Motor defective
Finisher main control board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the stapler exit motor.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor: 3K Finisher B830
The upper tray junction gate HP sensor did not detect the gate at the
home position within 200 ms after two attempts.
-or-
The HP sensor twice detected the gate at the home position for more
than 200 ms after it was supposed to open.
The 1st failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC
code.
734 B Junction gate did not arrive at the home position within the
specified time.
Junction gate did not leave the home position within the specified
time.
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the upper tray junction gate HP sensor.
4. Replace the upper tray junction gate motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-130 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Staple Junction Gate Motor Error: 3K Finisher B830
The staple tray junction gate HP sensor did not detect the gate at the
home position within 200 ms after two attempts.
-or-
The HP sensor twice detected the gate at the home position for more
than 200 ms after it was supposed to open.
The 1st failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC
code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
735 B Junction gate did not arrive at the home position within the
specified time
Junction gate did not leave the home position within the specified
time
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the staple tray junction gate HP sensor.
4. Replace the staple junction gate motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
SM Appendix 3-131 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor Error: 3K Finisher B830
The pre-stack junction gate HP sensor did not detect the gate at the
home position for within 200 ms after two attempts.
-or-
The HP sensor twice detected the gate at the home position for more
than 200 ms after it was supposed to open.
The 1st failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC
code.
736 B Junction gate did not arrive at the home position within the
specified time
Junction gate did not leave the home position within the specified
time
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the pre-stack junction gate HP sensor.
4. Replace the pre-stack junction gate motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-132 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Pre-Stack Transport Motor Error: 3K Finisher B830
The pre-stack transport motor is not operating.
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor is blocked by an obstruction
737 B Motor defective
Finisher main control board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the pre-stack transport motor.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Pre-Stack Junction Gate Release Motor Error: 3K Finisher B830
The pre-stack junction gate release HP sensor did not detect the gate
at the home position within 200 ms after two attempts.
-or-
The HP sensor twice detected the gate at the home position for more
than 200 ms after it was supposed to open.
The 1st failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC
code.
738 B Junction gate did not arrive at the home position within the
specified time.
Junction gate did not leave the home position within the specified
time.
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the pre-stack junction gate release HP sensor.
4. Replace the pre-stack junction gate release motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
SM Appendix 3-133 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Finisher corner stapler motor error: 3K Finisher B830
The stapler motor did not switch off within 600 ms after operating. The
1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this
SC code.
Number of sheets in the stack exceeded the limit for stapling
Stapler rotation sensor 1 defective
Staple jam
740 B Motor blocked by an obstruction
Stapler motor harness loose, broken, defective
Corner stapler motor defective
Main control board defective
1. Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned
above.
2. Check or clear staple jams around the stapler.
3. Replace the stapler.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-134 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error: 3K Finisher B830
The stapler did not return to its home position within the specified time
after stapling.
-or-
The stapler failed to leave the home position within the specified time.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Service Call
Conditions
741 B
Appendix:
Defective stapler rotation motor
Overload to the stapler rotation motor
Defective stapler rotation HP sensor
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the stapler rotation HP sensor.
4. Replace the corner stapler rotation motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Finisher Stapler Movement Motor Error: 3K Finisher B830
Staple movement is not finished for a certain time.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Motor overload
Loose connection of the stapler home position sensor
742 B Loose connection of the stapler movement motor
Defective stapler home position sensor
Defective stapler movement motor
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the stapler home position sensor.
4. Replace the stapler movement motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
SM Appendix 3-135 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Booklet Stapler Motor Error 1: Front Motor (Booklet Finisher D434)
The booklet stapler - front does not start operation within the specified
time.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Booklet stapler motor (front) harness loose, broken, defective
743 B Booklet stapler motor (front) overloaded due to obstruction
Booklet stapler motor (front) defective
Booklet finisher control board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the booklet stapler motor - front.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Booklet Stapler Motor Error 2: Rear Motor (Booklet Finisher D434)
The booklet stapler - rear does not start operation within the specified
time.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Booklet stapler motor (rear) harness loose, broken, defective
744 B Booklet stapler motor (rear) overloaded due to obstruction
Booklet stapler motor (rear) defective
Booklet finisher control board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the booklet stapler motor - rear.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-136 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Feed-Out Belt Motor Error (Finisher B830)
The stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not activate within the specified
time after the stack feed-out belt motor turns on.
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes
this SC code.
If the motor is operating
Stack feed-out HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Stack feed-out HP sensor defective
745 B If the motor is not operating:
Feed-out belt motor blocked by an obstruction
Feed-out belt motor harness loose, broken, defective
Feed-out belt motor defective
Booklet finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the stack feed-out belt HP sensor.
4. Replace the feed-out belt motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Stack Plate Motor Error 1: Center Motor (B830)
The stack plate HP sensor (center) does not activate within 500 ms
after the motor turns on.
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes
this SC code.
746 B
If the motor is operating
Center stack plate HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Center stack plate HP sensor defective
If the motor is not operating:
Motor blocked by an obstruction
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-137 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Motor defective
Finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the stack plate HP sensor (center).
4. Replace the stack plate motor (center).
5. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Stack Plate Motor Error 2: Front Motor (B830)
The stack plate HP sensor (front) does not activate within 500 ms after
the motor turns on.
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes
this SC code.
If the motor is operating
Front stack plate HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Front stack plate HP sensor defective
747 B If the motor is not operating:
Motor blocked by an obstruction
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the stack plate HP sensor (front).
4. Replace the stack plate motor (front).
5. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-138 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Stack Plate Motor Error 3: Rear Motor (B830)
The stack plate HP sensor (rear) does not activate within 500 ms after
the motor turns on. The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the
2nd failure causes this SC code.
If the motor is operating
Rear stack plate HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Rear stack plate HP sensor defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
If the motor is not operating:
748 B Motor blocked by an obstruction
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the stack plate HP sensor (rear).
4. Replace the stack plate motor (rear).
5. Replace the finisher main board.
SM Appendix 3-139 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Tray 1 (Upper Tray Lift) Motor Error: 3K Finisher B830
The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status within 20
sec. after the tray raises or lowers.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Tray lift motor disconnected, defective
750 B Upper tray paper height sensor disconnected, defective
Finisher main board connection to motor loose
Finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the upper tray paper height sensor.
4. Replace the upper tray lift motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-140 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Drag Drive Motor Error: 3K Finisher B830
The drag drive HP sensor did not detect the stacking roller at the HP
sensor within 1 sec.
-or-
The drag roller did not leave the home position at the specified time.
The 1st failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC
code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
If the motor is operating
Drag drive HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
753 B Drag drive HP sensor defective
If the motor is not operating:
Motor blocked by an obstruction
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the drag drive HP sensor.
4. Replace the drag drive motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
SM Appendix 3-141 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Drag Roller Motor Error: 3K Finisher B830
The stacking roller drag motor did not turn on.
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
754 B Finisher control board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the drag roller motor.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-142 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Shift Motor Error: 3K Finisher (B830)
The shift tray half-turn sensors:
Failed twice to detect the shift tray at the home position at the specified
time.
-or-
Failed twice to detect that the shift tray had left the home position.
The 1st failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes this SC
code.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
If the motor is operating
Half-turn sensor 1, 2 harnesses loose, broken, defective
755 B One of the half-turn sensors defective
If the motor is not operating:
Motor blocked by an obstruction
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the shift tray half-turn sensor 1 or 2.
4. Replace the shift motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
SM Appendix 3-143 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Finisher punch motor error: 3K Finisher B830
The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the
punch motor turned on.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Punch HP sensor disconnected, defective
760 B Punch motor disconnected or defective
Punch motor overload due to obstruction
1. Check the connections and cables for the punch motor and HP
sensor.
2. Check for blockages in the punch motor mechanism.
3. Replace the punch HP sensor and/or punch motor
4. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fold Plate Motor Error: Booklet Finisher D434
The fold plate moves but is not detected at the home position within the
specified time.
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
Fold plate HP sensor disconnected, defective
761 B Fold plate motor disconnected, defective
Fold plate motor overloaded due to obstruction.
1. Check the connections and cables for the fold plate motor and HP
sensor.
2. Check for blockages in the folder plate motor mechanism.
3. Replace the fold plate HP sensor and/or fold plate motor
4. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-144 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-1
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor Error: Booklet Finisher D434
The fold unit bottom fence did not return to the home position within the
specified time.
Fold bottom fence mechanism overloaded due to an obstruction
Fold bottom fence HP sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Fold bottom fence HP sensor defective
765 B Fold bottom fence lift motor connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Fold bottom fence lift motor defective
Main control board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the fold bottom fence HP sensor.
4. Replace the fold bottom fence lift motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Clamp Roller Retraction Motor: Booklet Finisher D434
The clamp roller did not return to the home position within the specified
time.
Clamp roller mechanism overloaded due to an obstruction
Clamp roller HP sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Clamp roller HP sensor defective
766 B Clamp roller retraction motor connector loose, broken, defective
Clamp roller retraction motor defective
Main control board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the clamp roller HP sensor.
4. Replace the clamp roller retraction motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
SM Appendix 3-145 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
3.11 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 7-2
3.11.1 SC CODES GROUP 7: PERIPHERALS
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Stack JG Motor (Booklet Finisher: D434)
The stack junction gate motor did not return to the home position within
the prescribed time.
767 Check junction gate for obstruction and remove it
B
-01 Stack JG HP sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Stack JG motor connector loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Finisher main board defective
Stack Transport Unit Motor (Booklet Finisher: D434)
The stack transport unit HP sensor did not detect the stack transport
unit at (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
Check for any obstruction around the motor and remove it
-02 B
Stack transport unit motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Stack transport unit HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Motor defective
Finisher main board defective
D095/M077 3-146 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
770 B Cover Interposer Lift Motor 1 Error
In the first tray:
The upper limit sensor did not detect the bottom plate within the
specified time after the lift motor switched on to lift the bottom plate.
The lower limit sensor did not direct the bottom plate within the
specified time after the lift motor switched on to lower the bottom
plate.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
In both cases, 1 error count indicates a jam, 2 error counts
cause this SC code.
Lift motor, upper limit sensor, lower limit sensor harnesses,
connectors loose, broken, defective
Lift motor defective
Upper limit sensor defective
Lower limit sensor defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace lift motor 1.
4. Replace the 1st paper upper limit sensor.
5. Replace the 1st paper lower limit sensor.
SM Appendix 3-147 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
771 B Cover Interposer Lift Motor 2 Error
In the second tray:
The upper limit sensor did not detect the bottom plate within the
specified time after the lift motor switched on to lift the bottom plate.
The lower limit sensor did not direct the bottom plate within the
specified time after the lift motor switched on to lower the bottom
plate.
In both cases, 1 error count indicates a jam, 2 error counts
cause this SC code.
Lift motor, upper limit sensor, lower limit sensor harnesses,
connectors loose, broken, defective
Lift motor defective
Upper limit sensor defective
Lower limit sensor defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace lift motor 2.
4. Replace the 2nd paper upper limit sensor.
5. Replace the 2nd paper lower limit sensor.
D095/M077 3-148 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
772 B Cover Interposer Pickup Motor 1 Error
In the first tray:
While the pick-up roller motor was on, the pick-up roller HP sensor
did not detect the pick-up roller at the home position within the
specified number of pulses.
While the pick-up roller motor was on, the pick-up roller HP sensor
did not detect the pick-up roller at the home position above the
specified number of pulses.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
In both cases, 1 error count indicates a jam, 2 error counts
cause this SC code.
Pick-up motor, pick-up roller HP sensor harnesses, connectors
were loose, broken, defective
Pick-up motor overload due to an obstruction
Pick-up motor defective
Pick-up roller HP sensor defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the 1st pick-up roller HP sensor.
4. Replace the 1st pick-up motor.
SM Appendix 3-149 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
773 B Cover Interposer Pickup Motor 2 Error
In the second tray:
While the pick-up roller motor was on, the pick-up roller HP sensor
did not detect the pick-up roller at the home position within the
specified number of pulses.
While the pick-up roller motor was on, the pick-up roller HP sensor
did not detect the pick-up roller at the home position above the
specified number of pulses.
In both cases, 1 error count indicates a jam, 2 error counts
cause this SC code.
The pick-up motor, pick-up roller HP sensor harnesses, connectors
were loose, broken, defective
Pick-up motor overload due to an obstruction
Pick-up motor defective
Pick-up roller HP sensor defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the 2nd pick-up roller HP sensor.
4. Replace the 2nd pick-up motor.
D095/M077 3-150 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
775 B Jogger Top Fence Motor: 3K Finisher B830
The top fence HP sensor detected that:
The top fence did not arrive at the home position within the specified
number of pulses.
-or-
The top fence failed to leave the home position within the specified
number of pulses.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
If the jogger top fence motor is operating:
Top fence HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Top fence HP sensor defective
If the jogger top fence motor is not operating:
Motor blocked by an obstruction
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the top fence HP sensor.
4. Replace the top fence motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
SM Appendix 3-151 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
776 B Jogger Bottom Fence Motor: 3K Finisher B830
The bottom fence HP sensor detected that:
The bottom fence did not arrive at the home position at the specified
time.
-or-
The bottom fence failed to leave the home position at the specified
time.
If the jogger bottom fence motor is operating:
1. Bottom fence HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
2. Bottom fence HP sensor defective
If the jogger bottom fence motor is not operating:
1. Motor blocked by an obstruction
2. Motor harness loose, broken, defective
3. Motor defective
4. Finisher main board defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the top fence HP sensor.
4. Replace the top fence motor.
5. Replace the finisher main board.
D095/M077 3-152 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Z-Fold Feed Motor Error
The feed motor that drives the feed rollers and exit rollers in the Z-fold
unit is not operating. The 1st alert signals a jam, the 2nd alert triggers
this SC.
780 B Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Motor blocked by an obstruction
Motor defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the feed motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Z-Fold Lower Stopper Motor Error
The lower stopper failed to leave the home position with the specified
number of motor pulses.
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd
failure causes this SC code.
781 B
Lower stopper motor disconnected, defective
Lower stopper motor overloaded due to obstruction
Lower stopper HP sensor disconnected, defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the lower stopper motor.
SM Appendix 3-153 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Z-fold Upper Stopper Motor
The upper stopper failed to leave the home position with the specified
number of motor pulses.
The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure causes
this SC code.
782 B Upper stopper motor disconnected, defective
Upper stopper motor overloaded due to obstruction
Upper stopper HP sensor disconnected, defective
1. Check or clear obstacles around the motor drive mechanism.
2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the upper stopper motor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Z-Fold Timing Sensor Adjustment Error 1
The output voltage light emitted from the sensor changed, but the
return input was not sufficient to attain V0.
784 B Sensor, mirror dirty from paper dust, other particles
Harness loose, broken, defective
Mirror out of position
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the fold timing sensor.
D095/M077 3-154 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Z-Fold Timing Sensor Adjustment Error 2
The output voltage light emitted from the sensor changed, but the
return input was not sufficient to attain V0.
785 B Sensor, mirror dirty from paper dust, other particles
Harness loose, broken, defective
Mirror out of position
1. Check the harness connection.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
2. Replace the leading edge sensor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Z-Fold Memory Error
Several attempts to write to the Z-fold memory failed.
786 B Turn the machine power off/on
EEPROM on Z-Folder main board defective
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the main board.
SM Appendix 3-155 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Entrance motor error (Stacker 1: D447)
The motor drive PCB detected an error at the motor.
787 Loose, broken, defective harness or connector of the entrance
D motor
-01
Defective motor or motor drive board
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the entrance motor.
Shift JG motor error (Stacker 1: D447)
The shift tray JG HP sensor did not detect the shift junction gate in (or
out of) its home position. The 1st occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd
occurrence causes this SC code.
Dirty shift tray JG HP sensor
-02 D Loose, broken, defective sensor harness or connector
Loose, broken, defective shift tray JG motor harness or connector
Defective JG HP sensor
Defective shift JG motor or motor drive board
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the JG HP sensor.
3. Replace the shift JG motor.
Transport Motor Error (Stacker 1: D447)
The motor drive PCB detected an error at the motor.
-03 D Loose, broken, defective harness of the transport motor
Defective transport motor or motor drive board
1. Check the harness connection.
1. Replace the transport motor.
Proof Tray JG Motor (Stacker 1: D447)
-04 D The proof tray JG HP sensor did not detect the proof tray junction gate
in (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
D095/M077 3-156 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
Loose, broken, defective sensor harness or connector
Dirt or defective Proof tray JG HP sensor
Defective proof tray JG HP sensor
Defective proof tray JG Motor or motor drive board
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the proof tray JG HP sensor.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
1. Replace the proof tray JG motor.
Proof Tray Exit Motor Error (Stacker 1: D447)
The motor drive PCB detected an error at the motor.
-05 D Loose, broken, defective proof tray exit motor harness or connector
Defective proof tray exit motor or motor drive board
1. Check the harness connection.
2. Replace the proof tray exit motor.
Two High-Capacity Stackers can be installed in the same line.
The following SC Codes (SC788-1 to 5) apply to the second stacker in the line if it is
installed.
SC Codes SC787-1 to -5 apply to the first stacker.
SM Appendix 3-157 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
788 Entrance motor error (Stacker 2: D447)
D
-01 See SC787-01.
Shift JG motor error (Stacker 2: D447)
-02 D
See SC787-02.
Transport Motor Error (Stacker 2: D447)
-03 D
See SC787-03.
Proof Tray JG Motor (Stacker 2: D447)
-04 D
See SC787-04.
Proof Tray Exit Motor Error (Stacker 2: D447)
-05 D
See SC787-05.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Booklet Stapler Jogger Motor Error (Booklet Finisher: D434)
The jogger fence HP sensor failed to detect the jogger fence at the
home position within the specified time.
If the booklet stapler jogger motor is operating:
1. Jogger fence HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
790 B
2. Jogger fence HP sensor defective
If the jogger bottom fence motor is not operating:
1. Motor blocked by an obstruction
2. Motor harness loose, broken, defective
3. Motor defective
4. Finisher main board defective
D095/M077 3-158 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence Motor (Booklet Finisher: D434)
The bottom fence failed to return to home position or failed to leave the
home position within the prescribed time.
791 B An obstruction is blocking the movement of the bottom fence
Motor harness loose, broken, defective
Bottom fence HP sensor loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-159 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
SC792-xx: Ring Binder (D392)
Junction gate error
Detected at HP after the time
prescribed to leave the HP had
Path JG motor (M201) defective
elapsed (more than 36 pulses) (1
Motor connector loose, broken,
detection, jam, twice detected, SC
defective
792-1 D error)
Motor overload
-or-
Path JG sensor (S203)
Not detected at HP after the time
connector loose, broken,
prescribed to arrive at the HP had
defective
elapsed (more than 22 pulses) (1
Sensor (S203) defective
detection, jam, twice detected, SC
error)
Pre-punch side fence HP error
Detected at HP after the time
prescribed to leave the HP had Side jogger motor (M302)
elapsed (more than 400 pulses) (1st connector loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-2 D error) Motor overload
-or- Motor defective
Not detected at HP after the time Pre-punch jogger HP sensor
prescribed to arrive at the HP had (S301) connector loose, broken,
elapsed (more than 600 pulses) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor (S301) defective
error)
D095/M077 3-160 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Pre-punch jogger roller HP error
Detected at HP after the time
prescribed to leave the HP had Jog roller lift motor (M305)
elapsed (more than 36 pulses) (1st connector loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-3 D error) Motor overload
-or- Motor defective
Not detected at HP after the time Jog roller lift HP sensor (S309)
prescribed to arrive at the HP had connector loose, broken,
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
elapsed (more than 22 pulses) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
Punch defective
One or more of the following Punch motor (M304) connector
occurred: loose, broken, defective
Punch unit not detected at Motor overload
initialization. Motor defective
792-4 D No motor rotation detected at HP at Punch HP sensor (S302)
30 ms after the DC motor turned on connector loose, broken,
No encoder pulse detected at HP at defective, or sensor defective
5 ms after the DC motor turned on Punch encoder sensor (S303)
Not detected at HP at 400 ms after connector loose, broken,
the DC motor turned on defective, or sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-161 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Paddle roller HP error
Not detected at HP after the time
prescribed to arrive at the HP had Paddle roller lift motor (M603)
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st connector loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-5 D error) Motor overload
-or- Motor defective
Detected at HP after the time Paddle roller HP sensor (S602)
prescribed to leave the HP had connector loose, broken,
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
Jogger fence 1 error
Not detected at HP after the time
prescribed to arrive at the HP had Jog fence 1 motor (M604)
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st connector, loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-6 D error) Motor defective
-or- Motor overload
Detected at HP after the time Side fence 1 HP sensor (S601)
prescribed to leave the HP had connector, loose, broken,
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
D095/M077 3-162 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Jogger fence 2 error
Not detected at HP after the time
prescribed to arrive at the HP had Jog fence 2 motor (M606)
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st connector, loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-7 D error) Motor defective
-or- Motor overload
Detected at HP after the time Side fence HP sensor 1 (S611)
prescribed to leave the HP had connector loose, broken,
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
Stack tamper HP error
Not detected at HP after the time
prescribed to arrive at the HP had Stack tamper motor (M607)
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st connector, loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-8 D error) Motor defective
-or- Motor overload
Detected at HP after the time Stack tamper HP sensor (S612)
prescribed to leave the HP had connector loose, broken,
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
SM Appendix 3-163 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Pre-bind jogger clamp HP error
Not detected at HP after the time
prescribed to arrive at the HP had Spine clamp motor (M605)
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st connector loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-9 D error) Motor defective
-or- Motor overload
Detected at HP after the time Clamp HP sensor (S603)
prescribed to leave the HP had connector loose, broken,
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
Binder unit runout error
Not detected at HP after the time
prescribed to arrive at the HP had Runout press roller motor
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st (M610) connector loose,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC broken, defective
792-10 D error) Motor defective
-or- Motor overload
Detected at HP after the time Runout roller HP sensor (S614)
prescribed to leave the HP had connector loose, broken,
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
D095/M077 3-164 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Clamp thickness error
50-sheet detection sensor (S606)
went OFF during pre-bind jogging
when a 100-sheet thickness was
50-sheet detection sensor
792-11 D detected. (1st detection jam, 2nd
(S606) connector loose, broken,
detection SC error)
defective
-or-
Sensor defective
50-sheet detection sensor went
OFF at initialization when the
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
clamp moved to the open position.
Alignment pin error
Not detected at HP after the time
prescribed to arrive at the HP had Alignment pin motor (M602)
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st connector loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-12 D error) Motor overload
-or- Motor defective
Detected at HP after the time Alignment pin HP sensor
prescribed to leave the HP had (S604) connector loose,
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st broken, defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
SM Appendix 3-165 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Pre-bind jogger shutter error
Not detected at HP after the time
prescribed to arrive at the HP had Shutter motor (M608)
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st connector loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-13 D error) Motor overload
-or- Motor defective
Detected at HP after the time Shutter HP sensor (S605)
prescribed to leave the HP had connector loose, broken,
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
50/100 clamp adjustment error
Not detected at HP after the time 50/100 adjustment motor (M702)
prescribed to arrive at the HP had connector loose, broken,
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Motor overload
792-14 D error) Motor defective
-or- Ring switch HP sensor (S706)
Detected at HP after the time connector loose, broken,
prescribed to leave the HP had defective, or sensor defective
elapsed (more than 400 ms) (1st Ring switch timing sensor (S707)
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC connector loose, broken,
error) defective, or sensor defective
D095/M077 3-166 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Timing sensor interval error
Clamp unit motor (M701)
connector loose, broken,
The bind timing sensor (S702)
defective
remained ON or OFF longer than
792-15 D Motor overload
the prescribed time (1500 ms)
Motor defective
during initialization or ring binding
Bind timing sensor (S702)
(1st detection: jam, 2nd
connector loose, broken,
detection: SC error)
defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Sensor defective
Clamp unit HP error
At initialization or during ring
binding, did not arrive at the home Clamp unit motor (M701)
position within the prescribed time connector loose, broken,
(1500 ms) (1st detection: jam, 2nd defective
792-16 D detection: SC error) Motor overload
-or- Motor defective
Detected at HP after the time Clamp unit HP sensor (S701)
prescribed to leave the HP had connector loose, broken,
elapsed (more than 1500 ms) (1st defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
SM Appendix 3-167 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Spine alignment error
Alignment pin motor (M602)
connector loose, broken, defective
Motor overload
During pin alignment operation, Motor defective
the pin did not reach the up Alignment pin HP sensor (S604)
792-17 D position or return to the home connector loose, broken, defective,
position with the prescribed or sensor defective
time (400 ms), and one retry Alignment pin up sensor (S610)
failed within the same time limit. connector loose, broken, defective,
or sensor defective
Stack not jogged correctly, or not
punched correctly
Binder unit not detected
792-18 D Drawer connector loose, broken,
The binder unit could not be
defective
detected at initialization.
Drawer connector defective
Output belt unit rotation error
Detected at HP after the time
prescribed to leave the HP had Output belt rotation motor
elapsed (more than 800 pulses) (1st (M403) connector loose,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC broken, defective
792-19 D error) Motor overload
-or- Motor defective
Not detected at HP after the time Output belt rotation HP sensor
prescribed to arrive at the HP had (S403) connector loose,
elapsed (more than 2300 pulses) broken, defective
(1st detection, jam, 2nd detection, Sensor defective
SC error)
D095/M077 3-168 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Output belt 1 HP error
Detected at HP after the time
prescribed to leave the HP had Output belt 1 motor (M401)
elapsed (more than 200 pulses) (1st connector loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-20 D error) Motor overload
-or- Motor defective
Not detected at HP after the time Output belt 1 HP sensor
prescribed to arrive at the HP had (S401) connector loose,
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
elapsed (more than 2125 pulses) (1st broken, defective
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC Sensor defective
error)
Output belt 2 HP error
Detected at HP after the time
prescribed to leave the HP had Output belt 2 motor (M402)
elapsed (more than 200 pulses) (1st connector loose, broken,
detection, jam, 2nd detection, SC defective
792-21 D error) Motor overload
-or- Motor defective
Not detected at HP after the time Output belt 2 HP sensor (S402)
prescribed to arrive at the HP had connector loose, broken,
elapsed (more than 3130 pulses) defective
(1st detection, jam, 2nd detection, Sensor defective
SC error)
SM Appendix 3-169 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Stack height error
Stacker motor (M501)
connector loose, broken,
Stack height sensor remained ON
defective
792-22 D while moving toward the top.
Motor overload
-or-
Stack height sensor (S502)
The sensor did not go ON within 6
connector loose, broken,
sec. after the motor turned on.
defective
Sensor defective
Stacker error
Although the stacker was full at the
start and end of stacker operation
Stacker HP sensor (S501)
with the stacker full (stacker
connector loose, broken,
sensors ON together), no
defective, or sensor defective
documents were detected (also
Stacker height HP sensor
792-23 D when documents were leaning)
(S502) connector loose,
-or-
broken, defective, or sensor
Although the stacker was detected
defective
full with the stacker stopped, no
Stacker detect sensor (S504)
documents were detected within 2
loose, broken, defective, or
sec.
sensor defective
(1st detection jam, 2nd detection
SC error)
D095/M077 3-170 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Shift Motor Error Stacker 1 (D447)
The shift roller HP sensor did not detect the shift roller at (or out of) its
home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence causes a
jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
Shift roller HP sensor dirty
SC793-1 D
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Check for and remove any obstructions that interfere with the
operation of the motor
Shift motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Sensor defective
Motor or motor drive board defective
Front Jogger Fence Motor Error Stacker 1 (D447)
The front jogger fence HP sensor did not detect the front jogger fence
at (or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
SC793-2 D Front jogger fence HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Check for and remove any obstructions that interfere with the
operation of the motor
Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Motor or shift motor drive board defective
SM Appendix 3-171 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Rear Jogger Fence Motor Error Stacker 1 (D447)
The rear jogger fence HP sensor did not detect the rear jogger fence at
(or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
SC793-3 D Rear jogger fence HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Check for and remove any obstructions that interfere with the
operation of the motor
Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Motor or shift motor drive board defective
Jogger Fence Retraction Motor Error Stacker 1 (D447)
The jogger fence retraction HP sensor did not detect the jogger fences
at (or out of) their home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
SC793-4 D Jogger fence retraction HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Check for and remove any obstructions that interfere with the
operation of the motor
Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Motor or shift motor drive board defective
D095/M077 3-172 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Sub Jogger Motor Error Stacker 1 (D447)
The sub jogger HP sensor did not detect the sub jogger fence at (or
out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
Sub jogger fence HP sensor dirty
SC793-5 D
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Check for and remove any obstructions that interfere with the
operation of the motor
Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Sensor defective
Motor or shift motor drive board defective
SC793-6 D LE Stopper Motor Error Stacker 1 (D447)
The LE stopper HP sensor did not detect the leading edge stopper at
(or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
LE stopper HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Check for and remove any obstructions that interfere with the
operation of the motor
Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Motor or shift motor drive board defective
SM Appendix 3-173 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
SC793-7 D Tray Lift Motor Error Stacker 1 (D447)
When the tray was ascending (or descending), the state of the paper
height sensor did not change at the prescribed time to detect the
height of the stack and adjust the height of the tray. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
Check for and remove any obstructions that interfere with the
operation of the tray lift motor or paper height sensor actuator
Sensor actuator loose or broken
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Motor defective
Proof Tray Exit Motor Error Stacker 1 (D447)
The motor drive PCB detected an error at the motor.
SC793-8 D
Motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Motor or motor drive board defective
Two High-Capacity Stackers can be installed in the same line.
The following SC Codes (SC794-1 to 8) apply to the second stacker in the line if it is
installed.
SC Codes SC793-1 to 8 apply to the first stacker.
D095/M077 3-174 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
SC794 Shift Motor Error Stacker 2 (D447)
D
-01 See SC793-1.
Front Jogger Fence Motor Error
-02 D
See SC793-2.
Rear Jogger Fence Motor Error
-03 D
See SC793-3.
Jogger Fence Retraction Motor Error
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
-04 D
See SC793-4.
Sub Jogger Motor Error
-05 D
See SC793-5.
LE Stopper Motor Error
-06 D
See SC793-6.
Tray Lift Motor Error
-07 D
See SC793-7.
Proof Tray Exit Motor Error
-08 D
See SC793-8.
SM Appendix 3-175 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
SC795-1 A Master-to-Slave Board Communication Errors PB (D391)
Master/Slave Control Board Communication Error 1
Master control board could not communicate with the slave control
board for over 5 sec. and issued the communication alarm.
Slave board connector loose, broken, defective
Slave board defective
Master/Slave Control Board Communication Error 2
Slave control board could not communicate with the master control
board for over 5 sec. and issued the communication alarm.
Received data corrupted
Cycle the machine power off/on
Slave control board defective
Download Error
The version of the slave control board could not be detected at power
on. Communication between the master and slave control boards is not
possible if the slave board firmware cannot be written to the board.
Slave board firmware not written
Cycle the machine power off/on
Slave control board defective
D095/M077 3-176 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Master-to-Relay Board Communication Error PB (D391)
The master control board could not communicate with the relay control
board.
Master control board, relay control board connectors loose,
broken, defective
SC795-2 A Master control board defective
Relay control board defective
Download Error
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
The version of the master control board could not be detected at power
on
Master control board firmware not written
SM Appendix 3-177 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
SC795-3 A Slave-to-Cutter Control Board Communication Error PB (D391)
Slave-to-Cutter Board Communication Error 1
Slave control board could not communicate with the cutter control
board (it detected the communication alarm for over 5 sec.
Cutter board connector loose, broken, defective
Cutter control board defective
Slave-to-Cutter Board Communication Error 2
Cutter control board could not communicate with the slave control
board and detected the communication alarm for over 5 sec.
More than twice the maximum allowed alarm recovery time (2 to 3 sec.)
Slave control board connectors loose, broken, defective
Cutter control board connectors loose, broken, defective
Slave control board defective
Cutter control board defective
Download Error
The version of the firmware on the cutter control board could not be
detected at power on. Communication between the slave and cutter
control boards is not possible if the cutter board firmware cannot be
written to the board.
Cutter control board connection loose, broken, defective
Cutter control board defective
D095/M077 3-178 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Bookbinder EEPROM Error PB (D391)
EEPROM Read Error
After EEPROM write operation was completed, the data was read from
the same address.
Master control board EEPROM not installed, not installed correctly
EEPROM defective
SC795-4 A
EEPROM Write Error
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
When data was written to the EEPROM, the EEPROM signaled that it
was busy for longer than 25 ms and did not recover.
The error time exceeded three times the maximum time allowed for
recovery (8 ms)
Master control board EEPROM not installed, not installed correctly
EEPROM defective
SM Appendix 3-179 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
SC795-5 A Master-to-Inserter Board Communication Error PB (D391)
Communication Error at Initialization
After the ConfigSet (parallel signal) went ON while the inserter
connection status was being checked, the initialization did not end
successfully within 5 sec. The error time exceeded three times the
maximum time allowed for the initialization communication (1.5 ms).
Inserter board connector loose, broken, defective
Inserter board defective
Bookbinder-to-Inserter Communication Error
A command response for the inserter was not issued within the time
prescribed for the timeout.
There was an overflow in memory where information required for
paper feed is stored. (Master control board detection.)
Inserter control board defective
Inserter control board connector loose, broken, defective
Download Error
The version of the firmware on the inserter control board could not be
detected at power on.
Inserter control board defective
Inserter control board connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-180 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
24V Check Signal Error 1 PB (D391)
The 24V1 monitor signal of the master control board did not go off
even though the front door switch was closed. (Relay circuit failed to
SC795-6 A go ON.)
Front cover switch error
24V1 monitor signal error
24V1 power supply error
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
SC795-7 A 24V Check Signal Errors PB (D391)
24V Check Signal Error 1
The top cover switch is open or the master control board 24V2 monitor
signal failed to go OFF within 5 sec., even though the front door switch
and top cover sensor are closed.
Top cover switch error
Front cover switch error
Stacking cover switch error
Master control board connection loose, broken, defective
Master control board defective
24V Check Signal Error 2
The 24V2 check signal of the slave control board failed to go OFF
within 5 sec. even though the front door and top cover are closed.
Top cover switch error
Front cover switch error
Slave control board connection loose, broken, defective
Slave control board defective
SM Appendix 3-181 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
24V Check Signal Error PB (D391)
The 24V3 check signal of the slave control board failed to go OFF
within 5 sec. even though the front door is closed.
SC795-8 A
Front cover switch error
Slave control board connection loose, broken, defective
Slave control board defective
Power Supply Fan Lock Errors
Power Supply Fan (R) Lock
PB (D391)
Power Supply Fan (C) Lock
Power Supply Fan (L) Lock
A fan lock signal was detected during rotation of the power supply fan
SC795-9 A
motor in one of the power supply fans (Right, Center, Left). Two retries
were attempted at 12 sec. intervals after detection of the firs lock
signal.
Fan overload
Confirm that there are no obstructions interfering with operation of
the fan
Fan motor defective
D095/M077 3-182 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Spine Plate Lower Fan Errors
Spine Plate Lower Fan (F) Lock PB (D391)
Spine Plate Lower Fan (R) Lock
A fan lock signal was detected for 1 sec. during rotation of one of the
SC795-10 A lower spine plate fan motors. Two retries were attempted at 12 sec.
intervals after detection of the first lock signal.
Fan overload
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Confirm that there are no obstructions interfering with operation of
the fan
Fan motor defective
Spine Plate Upper Fan Errors
Spine Plate Upper Fan (F) Lock PB (D391)
Spine Plate Upper Fan (R) Lock
A fan lock signal was detected for 1 sec. during rotation of one of the
SC795-11 A upper spine plate fan motors. Two retries were attempted at 12 sec.
intervals after detection of the first lock signal.
Fan overload
Confirm that there are no obstructions interfering with operation
of the fan
Fan motor defective
SM Appendix 3-183 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Signature Fan 2 Error
Signature Fan 2F Lock PB (D391)
Signature Fan 2R Lock
A fan lock signal was detected for 1 sec. during rotation of one of the
SC795-12 A signature fan 2 motors (Front/Rear). Two retries were attempted at 12
sec. intervals after detection of the first lock signal.
Fan overload
Confirm that there are no obstructions interfering with operation of
the fan
Fan motor defective
Signature Fan 1 Errors
Signature Fan 1F Lock PB (D391)
Signature Fan 1R Lock
A fan lock signal was detected for 1 sec. during rotation of one of the
SC795-13 A signature fan 1 motors (Front/Rear). Two retries were attempted at 12
sec. intervals after detection of the first lock signal.
Fan overload
Confirm that there are no obstructions interfering with operation of
the fan
Fan motor defective
D095/M077 3-184 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Glue Supply Fan H Lock PB (D391)
A fan overload/lock signal was detected for 1 sec. during rotation of
the upper side glue supply fan motor. Two retries were attempted at
12 sec. intervals after the detection of the first lock signal.
SC795-14 A
Fan overload
Confirm that there are no obstructions interfering with operation of
the fan
Fan motor defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Glue Supply Fan L Lock PB (D391)
A fan overload/lock signal was detected for 1 sec. during rotation of
the lower glue supply fan motor. Two retries were attempted at 12 sec.
intervals after the detection of the first lock signal.
SC795-15 A
Fan overload
Confirm that there are no obstructions interfering with operation of
the fan
Fan motor defective
Grip HP Sensor (S93) Error PB (D391)
The grip unit did not pull away from the HP sensor during operation.
-or-
The grip unit did not arrive at the HP sensor
SC795-16 A
Book grip motor (M43) connection loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Grip HP sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-185 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Signature Sensor (S55) PB (D391)
The main grip signature sensor did not go off after the main grip unit
released the signature and moved the prescribed distance.
-or-
The grip unit did not arrive at the sensor.
SC795-17 A
Front and rear main grip motors (M23, M24) connection loose,
broken, defective
Motor defective
Main grip signature sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Trimming Buffer HP Sensor: Left (S103) Error PB (D391)
The trimmings buffer sensor (S103):
Did not go ON within 3 sec. when it was supposed to move to the right
to its home position.
Did not go OFF within 5 sec. when it was supposed to move to the left
away from its home position.
SC795-18 A
Clear jammed trimming scraps away from the trimmings buffer
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) connections loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
D095/M077 3-186 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Trimming Buffer HP Sensor: Right (S100)
PB (D391)
Error
The trimmings buffer failed to move away from the dump port on top of
the trimmings box or failed to arrive at the port.
The trimmings buffer sensor: right (S100) did not go OFF within 3 sec.
when the trimmings buffer was supposed to move away from the
sensor.
The trimmings buffer sensor: right (S100) did not go ON within 5
SC795-19 A
seconds when the trimmings buffer was supposed to arrive at the
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
sensor.
Clear jammed trimming scraps away from the trimmings buffer
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) connections loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Trimmings Buffer Motor (M37) Error PB (D391)
The trimmings buffer motor is not rotating.
Clear jammed trimming scraps away from the trimmings buffer
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) connections loose, broken,
SC795-20 A
defective
Motor defective
Trimmings buffer sensor: left/right (S103/S100) harness loose,
broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-187 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Press Plate Sensor (S104) Error PB (D391)
The trimmings buffer and book press plate did not move after the
trimmings buffer motor turned on.
The book press plate sensor did not go OFF with 3 sec..
-or-
The book press plate sensor did not go ON within 3 sec.
SC795-21 A
Clear jammed trimming scraps away from the trimmings buffer
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) connections loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Trimmings buffer sensor: left/right (S103/S100) harness loose,
broken, defective
Sensor defective
Book Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) PB (D391)
The book buffer tray failed to move to the rear or failed to move to the
front.
The book buffer tray HP sensor failed to go ON within 3 sec. when the
tray was supposed to move front to rear.
The book buffer tray HP sensor failed to go OFF within 3 sec. when
the tray was supposed to move rear to front.
SC795-22 A
Book jammed on the rail of the book buffer tray
Book buffer tray overloaded
Book buffer tray motor (M39) connections loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Book buffer tray HP sensor (M78) harness loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
D095/M077 3-188 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Edge Press Plate HP Sensor (S90) Error PB (D391)
During edge press plate operation during trimming:
The edge press plate HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time because it failed to pull away from the HP sensor.
The edge press plate HP sensor did not ON within the prescribed time
because it failed to arrive at the HP sensor.
The edge press motor (M36) stopped when the press HP sensor
SC795-23 A
(S90) switched ON, but after the motor stopped the HP sensor went
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
OFF.
Edge press motor (M36) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Edge press plate HP sensor (S90) harness loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Press End Sensor (S87) Error PB (D391)
The press end sensor did not detect the release of the edge press
plate (END of operation) against the book in the trimming unit. The
sensor did not go ON within 8 sec.
-or-
The press end sensor went ON the edge press plate motor (M36)
SC795-24 A
stopped, but the sensor went OFF again after the motor stopped.
Edge press plate motor (M36) connections loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Press end sensor (S87) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-189 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Press Limit Sensor (S89) Error PB (D391)
The press limit sensor went ON and detected the edge press plate
beyond its maximum position.
Edge press plate motor (M36) connections loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
SC795-25 A
Press limit sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Plate out of position (see below)
Note: For a detailed description about how to correct this problem,
please refer to the replacement and adjustment procedures in the
Perfect Binder manual under "Trimming Unit" in the "Common
Procedures" section.
Slide HP Sensor (S82) Error PB (D391)
The slide motor (M44) did not leave the home position. When the slide
was raised, the slide HP sensor did not go OFF within 180 mm of
movement.
-or-
The slide motor (M44) did not reach the home position. The slide HP
SC795-26 A sensor did not go ON within 180 mm of movement after the slide was
lowered.
Signature has jammed during transport.
Slide motor (M44) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Slide HP sensor (S82) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
D095/M077 3-190 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Rotate HP Sensor 1 (S95) Error PB (D391)
Rotate motor 1 (M42) did not leave the home position and the HP
sensor did not go OFF after enough time elapsed for rotation through
an arc of 50°.
-or-
The motor did not arrive at the HP sensor. When rotate motor 1 (M42),
SC795-27 A rotate motor 2 (M41) were both initialized, their HP sensors did not
turn ON after enough time elapsed for rotation through an arc of 440°.
Jam or overload during book rotation.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Rotate motor 1 (M42) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Rotate HP sensor 1 (S95)harness loose, broken, defective
Rotate HP sensor (S95) defective
Rotate HP Sensor 2 (S91) PB (D391)
Rotate motor 2 (M41) did not leave the home position and the HP
sensor did not go OFF after enough time has elapsed for rotation
through an arc of 30°.
-or-
Rotate motor 2 (M41) did not reach the home position and the HP
SC795-28 A sensor did not go ON after enough time had elapsed for rotation
through an arc of 400°.
Jam or overload during book rotation.
Rotate motor 2 (M41) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Rotate HP sensor (S91) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-191 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Cutter Motor (M35) Error PB (D391)
One of the following occurred:
The cutter blade did not move after it was moved to the rear (it did
not leave home position).
The blade did not move away from the cutting point on the blade
cradle (it did not arrive at the home position).
The blade did not move for a rear-to-front cut.
The blade did not move away from the blade cradle to the front
within 10 sec.
When moving from the front, the blade did not reach the blade
SC795-29 A
cradle within 10 sec.
When moving from the rear, the blade did not reach the blade
cradle.
Cutter motor (M35) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Blade sensor 1, 2 (S84, S85) sensor harness loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Blade is dull, cutting poorly
Note: Sensors S84, S85 are on the cutter area PCB.
D095/M077 3-192 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Trimmer Limit Sensor (S86) Error PB (D391)
The blade reached the limit position and the trimmer limit sensor went
ON.
Cutter motor (M35) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
SC795-30 A Trimmer limit sensor (S86) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Note: For a detailed description about how to correct this problem,
please refer to the replacement and adjustment procedures in the
Perfect Binder manual under "Trimming Unit" in the "Common
Procedures" section.
Book Lift Tray HP Sensor (S79) Error PB (D391)
The book lift tray did not go up because the book tray lift HP sensor
did not go OFF within 1 sec. after the book tray lift motor (M38) turned
on to raise the tray.
-or-
The book lift tray did not go down because the book tray lift HP sensor
SC795-31 A
did not go ON within 1.5 sec. after the book tray lift motor (M38)
turned on to lower the tray.
Book tray lift motor (M38) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book lift tray HP sensor (S79) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-193 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Lift Tray Motor (M38) Error PB (D391)
The motor is not rotating. The encoder is checked for motor lock at 50
ms intervals.
Book lift tray motor (M38) locked, blocked by the book press plate
SC795-32 A
or a jammed book.
Motor connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book lift tray HP sensor (S79) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Book Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) Error PB (D391)
The book buffer tray did not leave the home position. The book
collection buffer tray HP sensor did not go OFF within 1 sec. after the
book buffer tray motor (M39) turned on.
-or-
The book buffer tray did not reach the home position. After the book
buffer tray motor (M39) turned on, the book buffer tray did not reach
SC795-33 A the HP sensor within 3.5 sec.
Book collection buffer tray overloaded.
Book buffer tray motor (M39) connections loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Book buffer tray HP sensor (S78) harness loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
D095/M077 3-194 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Blade Cradle HP Sensor (S83) Error PB (D391)
The blade cradle did not go up after the trimming blade cradle motor
(M40) turned on long enough to raise the blade cradle 12 mm to
switch the blade cradle HP sensor OFF.
-or-
The blade cradle did not go down after the trimming blade cradle
motor (M40) turned on long enough to lower the cradle 21 mm to turn
SC795-34 A
the blade cradle HP sensor ON.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Blade cradle motor (M40) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Blade cradle HP sensor (S83) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Book press plate or cutter has interfered with the blade cradle
movement.
Book Stacker Door Lock Solenoid (SOL5) Error PB (D391)
The book stacker door is locked but the book stacker door sensor
(S98) did not go OFF.
SC795-35 A Book stacker door lock solenoid (SOL5) connections loose,
broken, defective
Solenoid defective
Book stacker door sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-195 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Glue Heater (HTR1) Errors PB (D391)
Heater failed to start: Error 1
600 sec. after the bookbinder left the energy save mode, the glue
thermistor could not detect the target temperature (+-5).
SC795-36 A Heater (HTR1), glue temperature thermistor (S56) defective
Heater failed to start: Error 2
After the glue thermistor detected a glue temperature of 50°C, it could
not detect a temperature above 140°C within 200 sec.
Heater, glue temperature thermistor (S56) defective
Electrical Short in the Gluing Unit PB (D391)
Heater short. The glue unit thermistor detected a temperature
higher than 200C for longer than 1 sec.
Heater wire break or short circuit. The gluing unit thermistor
detected a temperature of less than 5C for more than 1 sec.
SC795-37 A (more than 10 sec. after power on).
Glue level thermistor (S58) broken
The AD value of the glue level thermistor (S58) remained at 1023
for 10 sec.
Thermistor abnormal, wire breakage, short circuit, broken wire:
Replace the gluing unit
D095/M077 3-196 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Temperature Detection
PB (D391)
Error
Low temperature detected while regulating glue temperature.
After adjustment of the glue temperature, the glue temperature
thermistor (S56) detected a temperature lower than 135°C for more
than 10 sec.
Heater, glue temperature thermistor (S56) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
SC795-38 A Glue level thermistor: Error 1
The glue level thermistor detected a temperature higher than 170°C
for longer than 10 sec. after the glue had warmed up.
Glue level thermistor (S58) defective
Glue level thermistor: Error 2
The glue level thermistor detected a temperature higher than 100°C
for longer than 10 sec. after the glue had warmed up.
Glue level thermistor (S58) defective
Protective Circuit Error PB (D391)
The thermostat (THSW1) inside the gluing unit detected an
abnormally high temperature.
SC795-39 A
Abnormal thermostat detection
Glue heater defective
Thermostat defective
SM Appendix 3-197 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Glue Surface Error 1 PB (D391)
The surface of the glue in the vat did not reach the lower or upper limit
position. This error is issued when the glue surface was detected
below the lower limit position 4 times in succession during the glue
SC795-40 A
re-supply cycle.
Glue has clogged in the vat
Glue supply defective
Glue level thermistor (S58) defective
Glue Surface Error 2 PB (D391)
The glue surface has not dropped below the upper limit mark. Without
a glue vat refill, the glue level thermistor could not detect the level of
SC795-41 A the glue below the upper limit (full) level, even after the application of
25.42 g of glue.
Glue application abnormal (not applying correctly)
Glue level thermistor (S58) defective
D095/M077 3-198 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Glue Level Thermistor (S58) Adjustment Error PB (D391)
One of the following errors occurred in the adjustment data for the glue
level thermistor:
Glue level thermistor 1 value (low limit) was out of the range:
128°C±14°C)
Glue level thermistor 2 value (high limit) was out of the range:
SC795-42 A 142°C±10°C)
Glue level thermistor adjustment value 1 was larger than for
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
adjustment 1.
The difference between the values for adjustment 1 and 2 was
less than 5°C.
Slave control board connection loose, broken, defective
Slave control board defective
Timing Sensor (S5) Adjustment Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the timing sensor exceeded the upper
limit. When the A/D input for the timing sensor is lower than 3.0V to
3.5V, even if the timing sensor D/A output is as high as 3.5V, the A/D
input value will not fall within the 3.0-to-3.5V range.
-or-
SC795-43 A The value for the adjustment of the timing sensor was lower than the
lower limit. When the A/D input for the timing sensor is higher than
3.0V to 3.5V, even if the timing sensor D/A output is as low as 0.1V,
the A/D input value will not fall within the 3.0-to-3.5V range.
Timing sensor defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
SM Appendix 3-199 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Cover Registration Sensor (S21) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the cover registration sensor was
higher than or lower than the target range: 3V to 3.5V
SC795-44 A
Cover registration sensor (S21) defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Small
PB (D391)
(S71)
The value for the adjustment of the cover registration sensor was
SC795-45 A higher than or lower than the target range: 3.2V to 3.5V
Cover horizontal registration sensor: small (S71) defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Large (S72) PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the cover horizontal registration
sensor (for large covers) was higher than or lower than the target
SC795-46 A range: 3.2V to 3.54V
Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Large (S72) defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
D095/M077 3-200 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the book exit sensor was higher than
or lower than the target range: 3.2V to 3.54V
SC795-47 A
Signature exit sensor defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Leading Edge Sensor (S65) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the leading edge sensor was higher
than or lower than the target range: 3.2V to 3.54V
SC795-48 A
Leading edge sensor S65) defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
Trim Unit Entrance Sensor (S92) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the sensor was out of range.
SC795-49 A
Trim unit entrance sensor (S92) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-201 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Registration Sensor (S88) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the book registration sensor was out of
range.
SC795-50 A
Slide motor (M44) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book registration sensor (S88) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
LE Detection Sensor (S65) Error PB (D391)
No book could be detected in the path for trimming (the sensor could
SC795-51 A
not detect a leading edge of a book).
The book has slipped out of the grip of the book rotation plates
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Error PB (D391)
No book could be detected at the entrance of the trimming unit.
-or-
The book did not arrive in the trimming unit because it jammed. (The
SC795-52 A trim unit entrance sensor (S92) did not go ON.)
Main grip lift motor (M22) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book exit sensor (S64) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
D095/M077 3-202 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Registration Sensor (S88) Error PB (D391)
A book was not detected at the book registration sensor pair (the book
registration sensor did not go ON).
Book jammed, failed to arrive at book registration sensor
SC795-53 A
Slide motor (M44) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book registration sensor (S88) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Sensor flag error, overload
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Error PB (D391)
The book exit sensor went ON when the system was turned ON,
indicating that a book was at the book exit sensor above the book grip
SC795-54 A
and rotation unit.
Book jammed at the entrance of the book grip and rotation unit.
Book exit sensor (S64) defective
Exit Sensor (S64) Error PB (D391)
The slave control board could detect no paper at the entrance of the
SC795-55 A trimming unit. The entrance sensor did not detect the signature within
6860 ms from when the signature exited the gluing unit.
Trim unit entrance sensor (S92) defective
SM Appendix 3-203 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Signature Sensor (S55) Error PB (D391)
No signature was detected in the gripper of the main grip unit.
-or-
SC795-56 A
No signature was detected in the main grip unit after the signature
passed from the sub grip to the main grip.
Main grip signature sensor (S55) defective
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Error PB (D391)
The trim unit entrance sensor remained ON (when no book should
have been present).
-or-
The trim unit entrance sensor (S92) went ON when the system was
turned on.
SC795-57 A -or-
The book exit sensor (S64) remained ON after jam removal.
Book jam at power on
Main group lift motor (M22) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book exit sensor (S64) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
D095/M077 3-204 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Registration Sensor (S92) Lag Error PB (D391)
The book registration sensor remained ON because the book did not
move from the sensor location.
-or-
The book registration sensor went on when the system was turned on.
SC795-58 A
Book jam above the trimmer unit
Slide motor (M44) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book registration (S92) sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Sensor defective
Book Arrival Sensor (S76) Lag Error PB (D391)
The book arrival sensor remained ON because the book did not leave
the sensor location. The book remained in the book buffer area and
failed to fall onto the book output tray.
SC795-59 A
Slide motor (M44) connections loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Book arrival sensor (S76) harness loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
SM Appendix 3-205 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Trimming Scrap Error PB (D391)
The trimming scraps did not fall from the trimmings buffer, or
trimmings were jammed between the trimmings buffer and the book
press plate. After retrieving the scraps after the 2nd cut (top edge) or
3rd cut (fore edge), the edge press plate sensor did not go ON.
SC795-60 A Trimming scraps have jammed in or around the trimmings buffer
Edge press plate motor (M36) connections loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Edge press plate HP sensor (S90) harness loose, broken,
defective
Sensor defective
Sub Grip Signature Lag Error PB (D391)
The sub grip signature sensor remained ON because the signature
failed to move out of the sub grip unit.
SC795-61 A
Signature jam in the sub grip unit
Sub grip signature sensor (S39) defective (did not go OFF even
with sub grip unit open and the signature removed)
D095/M077 3-206 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Lag Jam PB (D391)
The main grip signature sensor remained ON because the book failed
to move from the main grip unit to the trimming unit.
SC795-62 A
Book jam in the main grip unit
Main grip signature sensor (S39) defective (did not go OFF even
with the book removed)
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Signature Thickness Error PB (D391)
Signature thickness reading is smaller than the allowed minimum size.
-or-
Signature thickness reading is larger than the allowed maximum size.
SC795-63 A
-or-
The signature thickness reading did not change after the main
grippers opened and closed.
Signature thickness sensor (S50) defective.
Glue Vat HP Sensor (S73) Error PB (D391)
The glue vat HP sensor at the rear of the bookbinder failed to go ON
within the prescribed time.
-or-
SC796-1 A
The glue vat HP sensor at the rear of the bookbinder failed to go OFF.
Glue vat motor (M32) defective
Glue vat HP sensor (S73) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-207 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Glue Vat Roller Rotation Error PB (D391)
The glue vat roller did not start rotating within the prescribed time.
SC796-2 A
Glue vat roller motor (M25) defective
Glue vat roller rotation sensor (S59) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Glue Supply Motor (M33) Error PB (D391)
The glue supply motor did not arrive at its home position. The glue
supply HP sensor (S75) did not turn ON within the prescribed time after
the glue supply motor (S33) turned on.
-or-
SC796-3 A
The glue supply motor did not leave its home position.
Glue pellet supply lock
Glue supply motor (M33) defective
Glue supply HP sensor (S75) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Spine Fold HP Sensor: Left (S60) Error PB (D391)
The spine fold plate did not reach the left HP sensor (the sensor did not
go ON) within the prescribed time after the left spine fold plate motor
turned on.
-or-
SC796-4 A
The spine fold plate did not leave the left HP sensor position (the
sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time).
Spine fold plate motor: left (M28) defective
Spine fold HP sensor: left (S60) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-208 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Spine Fold Close Sensor: Left (S61) Error PB (D391)
The sensor did not turn ON within the prescribed time, or the sensor
was already OFF when the spine fold plate was supposed to move from
the closed to the open position.
-or-
The sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time after the spine
SC796-5 A
fold plate motor: left turned on to open the spine fold plate, or the
sensor was already ON when the spine fold plate was supposed to
move from the open to the closed position.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Spine fold plate motor: left (M28) defective
Spine fold close sensor: left (S61) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Dual Spine Plate Sensor Error: Left PB (D391)
The spine plate HP sensor (S60) and spine plate close sensor (S63)
turned ON at the same time.
SC796-6 A
Spine fold HP sensor: left (S60) defective
Spine fold close sensor (S63) defective
A sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-209 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Spine Fold HP Sensor: Right (S66) Error PB (D391)
The spine fold plate did not reach the right HP sensor within the
prescribed time (sensor did not go ON) after the spine fold plate motor
(M29) turned on to open the fold plate, or the right HP sensor was
already OFF when the spine fold plate was supposed to move from the
open to the closed position.
SC796-7 A -or-
The spine fold plate did not leave the right HP sensor position (sensor
did not go OFF) within the prescribed time after the spine fold motor:
right turned on to close the fold plate.
Spine fold motor: right (M29) defective
Spine fold HP sensor: right (S66) defective
Connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-210 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
SC796-8 A Spine Fold Close Sensor: Right (S69) Error PB (D391)
The right fold plate close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the spine fold plate motor: right turned on to close the fold
plate, or the close sensor on the right was already OFF when the spine
fold plate was supposed to close the plate.
-or-
The right spine fold plate close sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the spine fold plate motor: right turned on to open
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
the plate, or the spine fold page close sensor on the right was already
ON when the spine fold plate was supposed to move from the open to
the closed position.
Spine fold motor: right (M29) defective
Spine fold close sensor: right (S69) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Dual Spine Plate Sensor Error: Right PB (D391)
The spine fold HP sensor: right (S66) and spine fold close sensor: right
(S69) turned ON at the same time.
SC796-9 A
Spine fold HP sensor: right (S66) defective
Spine fold close sensor: right (S69) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-211 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Spine Plate Open Sensor (S62) Error PB (D391)
The spine plate open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the spine plate motor turned on to open the plate.
-or-
SC796-10 A The spine plate open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the spine plate motor turned on to close the plate.
Spine plate motor (M26) defective
Spine plate open sensor (S62) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Spine Plate Closed Sensor (S63) PB (D391)
The spine plate close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the spine plate motor turned on to close the plate.
-or-
SC796-11 A The spine plate close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the spine plate motor turned on to open the plate.
Spine plate motor (M26) defective
Spine plate closed sensor (S63) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-212 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Front Door Lock Error PB (D391)
The right front door sensor did not go OFF even though the front
doors closed and locked.
-or-
The right front door sensor did not go ON even though the front doors
SC796-12 A released and opened.
The right front door solenoid (SOL3) defective
Right front door sensor (S30) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
One or more of the front door switches (MSW1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7) is
defective
Solenoid, sensor, or MSW connector loose, broken, defective
Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) Error PB (D391)
The switchback flapper HP sensor in the stacking tray did not go ON
after the motor turned on long enough to raise the flapper through an
arc of 50 degrees.
-or-
SC796-13 A The switchback flapper HP sensor did not go OFF after the motor
remained on long enough to lower the flapper through an arc of 150
degrees.
Switchback flapper HP sensor (S10) defective
Switchback flapper motor (M8) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-213 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
TE Press Lever HP Sensor (S3) Error PB (D391)
The TE press lever HP sensor in the stacking tray did not go ON the
TE press lever motor remained on long enough to move the lever
through and arc of 30 degrees to release the lever.
-or-
SC796-14 A The TE press lever HP sensor did not go OFF when the TE press
lever motor remained on long enough to move the lever through and
arc of 20 degrees to close the lever.
TE press lever HP sensor (S3) defective
TE press lever motor (M3) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Front/Small (S12) Error PB (D391)
The front jog fence HP sensor in the stacking tray for small size paper
did not go ON within the prescribed time after the front jogger motor
turned on long enough to move the fence front jog fence.
-or-
SC796-15 A The front jog fence HP sensor for small size paper did not go OFF
within the prescribed time after the front jogger motor turned on to
move the front fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: front/small (S12) defective
Jogger motor: front (M4) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-214 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Front/Large (S14) Error PB (D391)
The front jog fence HP sensor for large size paper in the stacking tray
did not go ON within the prescribed time after the front jogger motor
turned on to move the front fence.
-or-
SC796-16 A The front jog fence HP sensor for large size paper in the stacking tray
did not go OFF within the prescribed time after the front jogger motor
turned on to move the front fence.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Jog fence HP sensor: front/large (S14) defective
Jogger motor: front (M4) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Rear/Small (S13) Error PB (D391)
The rear jog fence HP sensor for small size paper in the stacking tray
did not go ON within the prescribed time after the rear jogger motor
turned on to move the rear fence.
-or-
SC796-17 A The rear jog fence HP sensor for small size paper in the stacking tray
did not go OFF within the prescribed time after the rear jogger motor
turned on to move the rear fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: rear/small (S13) defective
Jogger motor: rear (M5) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-215 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Rear/Large (S15) Error PB (D391)
The rear jog fence HP sensor for large size paper in the stacking tray
did not go ON after the rear jogger motor turned on to move the rear
fence.
-or-
SC796-18 A The rear jog fence HP sensor for large size paper in the stacking tray
did not go OFF after the rear jogger motor turned on to move the rear
fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: rear/large (S15) defective
Jogger motor: rear (M5) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Switchback Roller HP Sensor (S11) Error PB (D391)
The switchback roller HP sensor in the stacking tray did not go ON
after the motor turned on long enough to raise the roller through an arc
of 40 degrees.
-or-
SC796-19 A The switchback roller HP sensor in the stacking tray did not go OFF
after the motor turned on long enough to lower the roller through an
arc of 20 degrees.
Switchback roller HP sensor (S11) defective
Switchback roller motor (M7) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-216 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) Error PB (D391)
Stacking tray lower limit sensor did not go ON within the prescribe
time after the stacking tray lift motor turned to lower the tray.
-or-
SC796-20 A Stacking tray lower limit sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise tray.
Stacking tray lower limit sensor (S7) defective
Stacking tray lift motor (M2) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Paper Detection Sensor: Fron/Rear (S1/S2)
SC796-21 A PB (D391)
Error
The paper detection sensor at the front of the stacking tray did not go
ON within the prescribed time after the stacking tray overflow sensor
(S6) went ON and the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the
tray.
-or-
The paper detection sensor at the front of the stacking tray did not go
OFF within the prescribed time after the stacking tray lift motor turned
on to lower the tray.
-or-
The paper detection sensor at the rear of the stacking tray did not go
ON within the prescribed time after the stacking tray overflow sensor
(S6) went ON and the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the
tray.
-or-
The paper detection sensor at the rear of the stacking tray did not go
OFF within the prescribed time after the stacking tray lift motor turned
on to lower the tray
Paper Detect Sensor: Front (S1) defective
Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-217 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) Error PB (D391)
The stacking tray overflow sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the tray.
-or-
The stacking tray overflow sensor did not go OFF within the
SC796-22 A
prescribed time after the stacking tray lift motor turned on to lower the
tray.
Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) defective
Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Dual Stacking Tray Errors PB (D391)
The Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) and Stacking Tray
Overflow Sensor (S6) went ON at the same time.
Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) defective
Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
The Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) went OFF when the stacking
SC796-23 A tray was raised to its upper limit. When the tray was raised, the
stacking tray overflow sensor (S6) went OFF and: (1) the stacking tray
empty sensor (S8) was OFF and (2) one or both the paper detect
sensors (S1: Front/S2: Rear) were ON.
Stacking Tray Empty Sensor (S8) defective
Paper Detect Sensors: Front/Rear (S1/S2) defective
Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) defective
Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-218 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Stacking Tray HP Sensor (S9) Error PB (D391)
The stacking tray HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the stacking tray motor turned on to move the tray toward the
sensor.
-or-
SC796-24 A The stacking tray HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the stacking tray motor turned on to move the tray away from the
sensor.
Stacking HP Sensor (S9) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Stacking Tray Motor (M9) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Stacking Weight HP Sensor (S16) Error PB (D391)
The stacking weight HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time the stacking weight motor turned on to move the tray toward the
sensor.
-or-
The stacking tray HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
SC796-25 A
when the stacking tray motor turned on to move the tray away from
the sensor.
Stacking weight HP sensor did not go ON.
Stacking Weight HP Sensor (S16) defective
Stacking Weight Motor (M6) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-219 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Left Cover Guide Error PB (D391)
The left cover guide HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the left cover guide motor turned on.
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Left (S27) defective
Cover Guide Motor: Left (M15) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SC796-26 A
The left cover guide open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the left cover guide motor turned on to retract the left cover
guide.
Cover Guide Open Sensor: Left (S28) defective
Cover Guide Motor: Left (M15) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Left Cover Guide Dual Sensor Errors PB (D391)
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Left (S27) and Cover Guide Open Sensor:
Left (S28) went ON at the same time.
SC796-27 A
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Left (S27) defective
Cover Guide Open Sensor: Left (S28) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-220 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Right Cover Guide Error PB (D391)
The right cover guide HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the right cover guide motor turned on.
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Right (S22) defective
Cover Guide Motor: Right (M16) defective
SC796-28 A
The cover guide open sensor: right did not go ON within the
prescribed time after the right cover guide motor turned on to move
the right cover guide to the home position.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Right (S23) defective
Cover Guide Motor: Right (M16) defective
Right Cover Guide Dual Sensor Errors PB (D391)
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Right (S22) and Cover Guide Open Sensor:
Right (S23) went ON at the same time.
SC796-29 A
Cover Guide HP Sensor: Right (S23) defective
Cover Guide Open Sensor: Right (S23) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-221 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Cover Registration HP Error PB (D391)
Cover Registration HP Sensor: Small/Large (S71, S72) did not go ON
within the prescribed time after the cover horizontal registration motor
turned on.
-or-
Cover Registration HP Sensor: Small/Large (S71, S72) did not go
SC796-30 A
OFF within the prescribed time after the cover horizontal registration
motor turned on.
Cover Horizontal Registration Motor (M31) defective
Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Small/Large (S71, S72)
defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Sub Grip HP Sensor (S37) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time after
the sub grip lift motor turned on to raise the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC796-31 A The sub grip HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribe time after
the sub grip lift motor turned on to lower the sub grip unit.
Sub Grip Lift Motor (M17) defective
Sub Grip HP Sensor (S37) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-222 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
SC796-32 A Sub Grip Size HP Sensor (S38) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip size HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the sub grip size motor turned on for horizontal adjustment to
the paper size.
-or-
The sub grip size HP sensor was already OFF when the sub grip size
horizontal adjustment started (from the open to closed position).
Sub Grip Size Motor (S19) defective
Sub Grip Size HP Sensor (S38) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
The sub grip size HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the sub grip size motor turned on to close sub grippers for
horizontal adjustment of the paper size.
-or-
The sub grip size HP sensor was already ON when the sub grip size
horizontal adjustment started (from the close to open position).
Sub Grip Size Motor (S19) defective
Sub Grip Size HP Sensor (S38) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Sub Grip Open Sensor (S40) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to open the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC796-33 A The sub grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to close the sub grip unit.
Sub Gripper Motor (M20) defective
Sub Grip Open Sensor (S40) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-223 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Sub Grip Close Sensor (S41) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to close the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC796-34 A The sub grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip open motor turned on to open the sub grip unit.
Sub Gripper Motor (M20) defective
Sub Grip Close Sensor (S41) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Sub Grip Dual Sensor Error PB (D391)
The Sub Grip Open Sensor (S40) and Sub Grip Close Sensor (S41)
went ON at the same time.
SC796-35 A
Sub Grip Open Sensor (S40) defective
Sub Grip Close Sensor (S41) defective
A sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Signature HP Sensor (S34) Error PB (D391)
The signature HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the signature move motor turned on to move the sub grip to the
home position.
-or-
SC796-36 A The signature HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the signature move motor turned on to move the sub grip to the
signature transfer position (from sub grip to main grip).
Signature Move Motor (M18) defective
Signature HP Sensor (S34) defective
Connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-224 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Signature Main Grip Position Sensor (S35) Error PB (D391)
The signature main grip position sensor did not go ON within the
prescribed time after the signature move motor turned for delivery of
the signature from the sub grip to the main grip.
-or-
Due to incorrect timing during delivery of the signature from sub grip
to main grip, the signature was gripped at the main grip HP sensor
position.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
SC796-37 A Signature Move Motor (M18) defective
Signature Main Grip Position Sensor (M35) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
The signature HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the signature move motor turned on to move the sub grip to the
home position.
Signature Move Motor (M18) defective
Signature Main Grip Position Sensor (M35) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Main Grip Rotate Enable Sensor (S36) Error PB (D391)
The main grip rotate enable sensor did not go ON within the prescribe
time after the signature move motor turned on to move the sub grip to
the home position.
-or-
SC796-38 A The main grip rotate enable sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the signature move motor turned on to move the
sub grip to the signature transfer position (from sub grip to main grip).
Signature Move Motor (M18) defective
Main Grip Rotate Enable Sensor (S36) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-225 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Sub Grip Dual Sensor Error PB (D391)
The Signature HP Sensor (S34) and Signature Main Grip Position
Sensor (S35) went ON at the same time.
SC796-39 A
Signature HP Sensor (S34) defective
Signature Main Grip Position Sensor (M35) defective
A sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Main Grip HP Sensor (S44) Error PB (D391)
The main grip HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribe time after
the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit, or the
main grip HP sensor was already ON when the motor started to lower
the main grip unit.
-or-
SC796-40 A The main grip HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit, or
the main grip HP sensor was already ON when the motor started to
lower the main grip unit.
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Main Grip HP Sensor (S44) Error
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-226 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Press Sensor 1 (M48)Error PB (D391)
The main grip press sensor 1 did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit
from the main grip signature registration position.
-or-
SC796-41 A The main grip press sensor 1 did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit
to the main grip signature registration position.
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Main Grip Press Sensor 1 (S48) defective
Connector loose, broken, defective
Main Grip Press Sensor 2 (S49) Error PB (D391)
The main grip press sensor 2 did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit and
signature to the point where the signature was to be pressed into the
center of the cover.
-or-
SC796-42 A The main grip press sensor 2 did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit
away from the point where the signature was pressed into the center
of the cover.
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Main Grip Press Sensor 2 (S49) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-227 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Signature Exit Error PB (D391)
The signature exit sensor did not go ON after the main grip lift motor
moved the signature to the delivery point when the signature was
passed from the main grip unit to the signature exit roller.
SC796-43 A
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Signature Exit Sensor (S64) defective
Signature broken, bent
Signature stuck in the main grip unit
Main Grip HP Sensor: High (S45) Error PB (D391)
The main grip high HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit.
-or-
SC796-44 A The main grip high HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit.
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Main Grip HP Sensor: High (S45) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-228 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Rotate HP Sensor (S43) Error PB (D391)
The main grip rotate HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the main grip rotation motor turned to rotate the main grip
unit for delivery of the signature from the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC796-45 A The main grip rotate HP sensor did not go OFF with the prescribed
time after the main grip rotation motor turned on to rotate the grip unit
and signature to the vertical.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Main Grip Rotation Motor (M21) defective
Main Grip Rotate HP Sensor (S43) defective
Motor or connector loose, broken, defective
Rotate-to-Binding Position Sensor (S42) Error PB (D391)
The main grip rotate-to-binding position sensor did not go ON within
the prescribed time after the main grip rotation motor turned on to
rotate the grip unit and signature to the vertical.
-or-
The main grip rotate to binding position sensor did not go OFF within
SC796-46 A
the prescribed time after the main grip rotation motor turned to rotate
the main grip unit to the left for delivery of the signature from the sub
grip unit.
Main Grip Rotation Motor (M21) defective
Rotate to Binding Position Sensor (S42) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-229 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Rotation Dual Sensor Errors PB (D391)
Main Grip Rotate HP Sensor (S43) and Rotate-to-Binding Position
Sensor (S42) went ON at the same time.
SC796-47 A
Main Grip Rotate HP Sensor (S43) defective
Rotate to Binding Position Sensor (S42) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SC796-48 A Main Grip Open/Close Sensor: Rear (S47, S48) PB (D391)
The rear main grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the rear grip motor turned on to open the main grip unit.
-or-
The rear main grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the rear grip motor turned on to close the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Rear (M23) defective
Main Grip Open Sensor: Rear (S47) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
The rear main grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the rear grip motor turned on to close the main grip unit.
-or-
The rear main grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the rear grip motor turned on to open the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Rear (M23) defective
Main Grip Close Sensor: Rear (S54) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-230 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Encoder: Rear Sensor (S46) Error PB (D391)
The rear main grip encoder sensor could not be detected ON/OFF
within the prescribed time after the rear grip motor turned on to open
SC796-49 A and close the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Rear (M23) defective
Main Grip Encoder: Rear Sensor (S46) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Rear Main Group Dual Sensor Error PB (D391)
Main Grip Open Sensor: Rear (S47) and Main Grip Close Sensor:
Rear (S48) went ON at the same time.
SC796-50 A
Main Grip Open Sensor: Rear (S47) defective
Main Grip Close Sensor: Rear (S48) defective
A sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-231 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
SC796-51 A Main Grip Open/Close Sensor: Front (S51, S53) PB (D391)
The front main grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the front grip motor turned on to open the main grip unit.
-or-
The front main grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the front grip motor turned on to close the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Front (M24) defective
Main Grip Open Sensor: Front (S51) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
The front main grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the front grip motor turned on to close the main grip unit.
-or-
The front main grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the front grip motor turned on to open the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Front (M24) defective
Main Grip Close Sensor: Front (S53) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Main Grip Encoder: Front Sensor (S52) Error PB (D391)
The front main grip encoder sensor could not be detected ON/OFF
within 200 ms after the front grip motor turned on to open/close the
main grip unit.
SC796-52 A
Main Grip Encoder: Front Sensor (S52) defective
Grip Motor: Front (M24) defective
Main Grip Encoder: Front Sensor (S52) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-232 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Front Main Group Dual Sensor Error PB (D391)
Main Grip Open Sensor: Front (S51) and Main Grip Close Sensor:
Front (S53) went ON at the same time.
SC796-53 A
Main Grip Open Sensor: Front (S51) defective
Main Grip Close Sensor: Front (S53) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Signature Exit Path HP Sensor (S67) Error PB (D391)
The signature exit path HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the signature exit path motor turned on to retract the
signature exit roller.
-or-
SC796-54 A The signature exit path HP sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to move
the signature exit roller.
Signature Exit Path Motor (M30) defective
Signature Exit Path HP Sensor (S67) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-233 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Signature Exit Path Press Sensor (S68) Error PB (D391)
The signature exit path press sensor did not go ON within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to feed
the book into the nip of the signature exit roller.
-or-
SC796-55 A The signature exit path press sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to retract
the signature exit roller.
Signature Exit Path Motor (M30) defective
Signature Exit Path Press Sensor (S68) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Signature Exit Roller Error PB (D391)
The leading edge sensor did not go ON within the time prescribed for
the signature exit roller to reverse feed the signature during signature
SC796-56 A exit.
Signature Roller Exit Motor (M27) defective
Leading Edge Sensor (S65) defective
Signature torn, bent
Inserter EEPROM Error PB (D391)
CHECKSUM error at power on.
-or-
SC796-57 A
EEPROM write error.
EEPROM not installed, or not installed correctly
EEPROM defective
D095/M077 3-234 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Inserter Drive Switch Sensor (S16) Error PB (D391)
The drive switch sensor in the inserter did not go OFF within the time
prescribed after the drive switch motor (M2) turned on.
-or-
The drive switch sensor in the inserter did not go ON within the time
SC796-58 A
prescribed after the drive switching motor (M2) turned on.
Drive switch motor (M2) defective
Drive switch sensor (S16) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Connector loose, broken, defective
Inserter Tray A Error PB (D391)
Inserter Tray A (upper tray) failed to leave its lower limit sensor within
the prescribed time after Tray A lift motor turned on.
Lift Motor: Tray A (M3) defective
Lower Limit Sensor: Tray A (S11) defective
SC796-59 A Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Inserter Tray A (upper tray) failed to arrive at its paper feed sensor
within the prescribed time after the Tray A lift motor turned on.
Lift Motor: Tray A (M3) defective
Paper Feed Sensor: Tray A (S4) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-235 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Inserter Tray B Error PB (D391)
Inserter Tray B (lower tray) failed to leave its lower limit sensor within
the prescribed time after the Tray B lift motor turned on.
Lift Motor: Tray B (M4) defective
Lower Limit Sensor: Tray B (S12) defective
SC796-60 A Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Inserter Tray B (lower tray) failed to arrive at its paper feed sensor
within the prescribed time after the Tray B lift motor turned on.
Lift Motor: Tray B (M4) defective
Paper Feed Sensor: Tray B (S10) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Relay Unit EEPROM Error PB (D391)
EEPROM write error (successful completion of data write operation not
detected within the prescribed time).
SC796-61 A
Relay board EEPROM not installed, or installed incorrectly
EEPROM damaged
Relay board defective
Relay/ Bookbinder Communication Error PB (D391)
Communication error between relay unit and bookbinder.
SC796-62 A
Relay I/F cable disconnected or damaged
Relay unit PCB in bookbinder damaged, not installed correctly
PCB in relay unit damaged, not installed correctly
D095/M077 3-236 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Lower Performance Mode Error PB (D391)
These are the conditions that must be met before the bookbinder
enters low performance mode:
The location where the error occurred has no effect on the
operation of the horizontal feed path for downstream delivery.
The jam has occurred in the horizontal feed path but it can be
removed easily.
SC796-63 D The unit where the error occurred allows use of the horizontal
feed path.
These conditions determine whether downstream delivery is
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
possible after an error occurs in the bookbinder.
Correct the problem and release the bookbinder from the low
performance mode. See Section 3 of the Perfect Binder manual for
more about how to release the Perfect Binder from the low
performance mode.
Grip HP Sensor (S93) Error PB (D391)
The grip HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
because the main grip did not leave its home position.
-or-
SC797-1 B The main grip unit did go ON because it did not arrive at the HP
position after signature release.
Book grip motor (M43) defective
Grip HP sensor (S93) defective
Sensor or motor harness loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-237 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Grip End Sensor (S94) Error PB (D391)
The grip end sensor (S94) did not go OFF after the grip unit released
the signature and moved the prescribed distance.
Book grip motor (M43) defective
Grip end sensor (S94) defective
Sensor or motor harness loose, broken, defective
SC797-2 B
The grip end sensor (S94) did not go ON because the grip unit did
arrive at the sensor position.
Book grip motor (M43) defective
Grip end sensor (S94) defective
Sensor or motor harness loose, broken, defective
Data received for signature data was incorrect.
Trimmings Buffer HP Sensor: Left (S103) Error PB (D391)
The trimmings buffer sensor: left (S103) did not go OFF within the
prescribed time because it failed to leave the HP sensor.
-or-
The trimmings buffer sensor: left (S103) did not go ON within the
SC797-3 B
prescribed time because it failed to arrive at the HP sensor.
Trimmed scraps in or around the trimmings buffer
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) defective
Left trimmings buffer sensor (S103) defective
Sensor or motor harness loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-238 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Trimmings Buffer HP Sensor: Right (S100) Error PB (D391)
Trimmings buffer did not reach the trimmings dump port because:
The trimmings buffer sensor: right (S100) did not go OFF within the
prescribed time because it failed to leave the HP sensor.
-or-
SC797-4 B The trimmings buffer sensor: right (S103) did not go ON within the
prescribed time because it failed to arrive at the HP sensor.
Trimmed scraps in or around the trimmings buffer
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Right trimmings buffer sensor (S100) defective
Sensor or motor harness loose, broken, defective
Trimmings Buffer Motor (M37) Error PB (D391)
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) is not running.
SC797-5 B Trimming scrap jam
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) defective
Right or left trimmings buffer sensor (S100, S103) defective
Motor or sensor connections loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-239 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Failure to Detect Book Press Plate Position PB (D391)
The book press plate sensor (S104) did not go OFF because the
trimmings buffer left the HP sensor position.
-or-
The book press plate sensor (S104) did not go ON because the
SC797-6 B
trimmings buffer did not arrive at the HP sensor position.
Trimming scraps jammed in or around the trimmings buffer
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) defective
Book press plate sensor (S104) defective
Sensor or motor harness loose, broken, defective
Book Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) Error PB (D391)
The HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time after the
buffer tray the book buffer tray motor turned on to pull the tray to the
rear.
-or-
The HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time after the book
SC797-7 B
buffer tray motor turned on to push the tray to the front.
Book has jammed on the rail of the buffer
Buffer tray overloaded
Book buffer tray motor (M39) defective
Book buffer tray HP sensor (S78) defective
Motor or sensor connection loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-240 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Edge Press Plate HP Sensor (S90) PB (D391)
The edge press plate did not go OFF within the prescribed time after
the edge press plate motor turned on to press the plate against the
spine of the book.
-or-
SC797-8 B The edge press plate did not go ON within the prescribed time after the
edge press plate motor turned on to pull the plate away the spine of the
book.
Edge press plate motor (M36) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Edge press plate HP sensor (S90) defective
Motor or sensor connection loose, broken, defective
Press end Sensor (S87) Error PB (D391)
The press end HP sensor did not go OFF within the time prescribed for
press END.
-or-
Press end sensor went OFF after press end sensor went ON and
SC797-9 B stopped the press motor (M36).
Edge press plate motor (M36) defective
Press end sensor (S87) defective
Data received for signature data was incorrect because signature
thickness sensor (S50) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-241 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Slide HP Sensor (S82) Error PB (D391)
The HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time because
the slide motor did not leave the home position.
-or-
The HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time because the
SC797-10 B
slide motor did not arrive at the home position.
Signature jam, overload
Slide motor (M44) defective
Slide HP sensor (S82) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Book Rotation HP Sensor 1 (S95) Error PB (D391)
Book rotation sensor 1 did not go OFF because the book rotation
motor 1 (M41) did not leave the home position.
-or-
Book rotation sensor 1 did not go ON because the book rotation
motor 1 (M41) did not arrive at the home position.
SC797-11 B -or-
At power on, book rotation motor 1 failed to rotate the left plate
through the prescribed arc for initialization.
Jam or overload during book rotation
Book rotation motor 1 (M41) defective
Book rotation HP sensor 1 (S95) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-242 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Rotation HP Sensor 2 (S91) PB (D391)
Book rotation sensor 2 did not go OFF because the book rotation
motor 1 (M42) did not leave the home position.
-or-
Book rotation sensor 1 did not go ON because the book rotation
motor 1 (M42) did not arrive at the home position.
SC797-12 B -or-
At power on, book rotation motor 1 failed to rotate the left plate
through the prescribed arc for initialization.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Jam or overload during book rotation
Book rotation motor 1 (M42) defective
Book rotation HP sensor 1 (S91) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Cutter Motor (M35) Error PB (D391)
The blade in the trimming unit did not move from the home position or
reach the blade cradle during cutting.
Blade is dull, cutting poorly
SC797-13 B Cutter motor (M35) defective
Blade sensor 1, blade sensor 2 defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Note: Blade sensors 1 and 2 (S84, S85) are mounted on the cutter
control board.
SM Appendix 3-243 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Lift Tray HP Sensor (S79) Error PB (D391)
The book tray lift HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the book tray lift motor (M38) turned on to raise the tray and
receive a finished book from the trimming unit.
-or-
The book tray lift HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
SC797-14 B
after the book tray lift motor (M38) turned on to lower the tray and
book.
Book jammed under the tray
Book tray lift motor (M38) defective
Book lift tray HP sensor (S79) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Book Lift Tray Motor (M38) Error PB (D391)
The book lift tray motor was not rotating.
Book lift tray motor (M38) locked, blocked by the press plate or a
SC797-15 B
jammed book
Motor defective
Book lift tray HP sensor (S79) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-244 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Buffer Tray HP Sensor (S78) Error PB (D391)
The book collection buffer tray HP sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the book buffer tray motor (M39) turned on to
raise the tray.
-or-
The book collection buffer tray HP sensor did not go ON within the
SC797-16 B
prescribed time after the book buffer tray motor (M39) turned on to
lower the tray.
Book buffer tray overloaded.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Book buffer tray motor (M39) defective
Book buffer tray HP sensor (M78) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Blade Cradle HP Sensor (S83) Error PB (D391)
The blade cradle HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the blade cradle motor (M40) turned on to raise it.
-or-
The blade cradle HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
SC797-17 B after the blade cradle motor (M40) turned on to lower it.
Edge press plate or cutter interfered with movement of the blade
cradle
Blade cradle motor (M40) defective
Blade cradle HP sensor (S83) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-245 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Door Lock Solenoid (SOL5) Error PB (D391)
The book stack door is locked but the book door sensor (S98) did not
go OFF.
SC797-18 B
Book door sensor (S98) defective
Book door lock solenoid (SOL5) defective
Solenoid or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Glue Heater (HTR1) Error PB (D391)
The heater failed to start because:
600 sec. after the bookbinder left the energy save mode, the glue
thermistor did not detect the target temperature (153°C±5).
SC797-19 B -or-
After the glue thermistor detected a glue temperature of 50°C, it did
not detect a temperature above 140°C within 200 sec.
Heater (HTR1) defective
Glue thermistor (S56) defective
Electrical Short in the Gluing Unit PB (D391)
A short circuit or wire breakage occurred in the gluing unit.
The glue thermistor (S56) detected:
A temperature over 200°C more than 1 sec. (short circuit)
A temperature of less than 5°C for more than 1 sec. or more than
SC797-20 B
10 sec. after power on (wire breakage)
The AD value of the glue level thermistor (S58) remained at 1023
for 10 sec (wire breakage).
Heater (HTR1) defective
Glue thermistor (S56) defective
D095/M077 3-246 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Temperature Detection Error PB (D391)
After adjustment of the glue temperature, the glue temperature
thermistor (S56) detected a temperature lower than 135C for more
than 10 sec.
Heater (HTR1) defective
Glue thermistor (S56) defective
SC797-21 B
The glue level thermistor detected a temperature higher than 170°C
for longer than 10 sec. after the glue had warmed up.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
-or-
The glue level thermistor detected a temperature higher than 100°C
for longer than 10 sec. after the glue had warmed up.
Glue level thermistor (S58) defective
Protection Circuit Error PB (D391)
The thermostat (THSW1) inside the gluing unit detected an
SC797-22 B abnormally high temperature.
Glue heater (HTR1)defective
Thermostat (THSW1) defective
SM Appendix 3-247 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Glue Surface Error 1 PB (D391)
The surface of the glue in the vat did not reach the lower limit
position. This error occurred when the glue surface was detected
below the lower limit position 4 times in succession during the glue
replenishment cycle.
Glue has clogged in the vat
Glue supply defective
SC797-23 B
Glue level thermistor (S58) defective
The glue level thermistor could not detect the glue surface at the
upper limit position: 1) After glue was detected above the low limit
mark, and 2) After 12 glue packets were supplied, and 3) No glue had
been recently applied.
Glue has clogged in the vat
Glue level thermistor (S58) defective
Glue Surface Error 2 PB (D391)
Without a glue vat refill, the glue level thermistor could not detect the
level of the glue below the upper limit (full) level, even after the
SC797-24 B
application of 25.42 g of glue.
Glue application abnormal (not applying correctly)
Glue level thermistor (S58) defective
D095/M077 3-248 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Glue Level Thermistor (S58) Adjustment Error PB (D391)
One of the following errors occurred in the adjustment data for the
glue level thermistor:
1. Glue level thermistor 1 value (low limit) was out of the range:
128°C±14C
SC797-25 B
2. Glue level thermistor 2 value (high limit) was out of the range:
142°C±10C
3. Glue level thermistor adjustment value 1 was larger than for
adjustment 1.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Replace the EEPROM on the slave control board
Timing Sensor (S5) Adjustment Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the timing sensor was out of range
(3.0V to 3.5V)
SC797-26 B
Timing sensor (S5) defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
Cover Registration Sensor (S21) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the cover registration sensor was out
of range (3.0V to 3.5V)
SC797-27 B
Cover registration (S21) sensor defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
SM Appendix 3-249 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Small (S71) PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the cover horizontal registration
sensor: small was out of range (3.0V to 3.5V)
SC797-28 B
Cover horizontal registration sensor: small (S71) defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Large (S72) PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the cover horizontal registration
sensor: large was out of range (3.0V to 3.5V)
SC797-29 B
Cover horizontal registration sensor: large (S72) defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the book exit sensor (S64) was out of
range (3.2V to 3.54V)
SC797-30 B
Signature Exit Sensor (S64) defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
D095/M077 3-250 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Leading Edge Sensor (S65) Error PB (D391)
The value for the adjustment of the LE sensor (S65) was out of range
(3.2V to 3.54V)
SC797-31 B
Leading edge sensor (S65) defective
D/A converter defective
A/D converter defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Trim Unit Entrance Sensor (S92) Error PB (D391)
The adjusted value for the trim unit entrance sensor was higher or
lower than the target range.
SC797-32 B
Book grip motor (M43) defective
Trim unit entrance sensor (S92) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Book Registration Sensor (S88) Error PB (D391)
The adjusted value for the book registration was higher or lower than
the target range.
SC797-33 B
Book grip motor (M43) defective
Book registration sensor (S88) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-251 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Leading Edge Sensor (S65) Error PB (D391)
A book was not detected in the path for trimming when the slave
control board received the signal for transport end. The book has
SC797-34 B fallen past the sensor.
Main grip motors: front/rear (M24/M23) defective.
Leading edge sensor (S65) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Error PB (D391)
The book exit sensor (S64) did not turn ON, even after the book
transport end signal was received when the book was passed from the
gluing unit to the trimming unit. No book was detected at the entrance
SC797-35 B of the trimming unit.
Failure to deliver the signature (due to a jam)
Signature path exit motor (M30) defective
Book exit sensor (S64) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Late Error PB (D391)
A book was not detected in the trimming unit because the book
registration sensor failed to go ON.
SC797-36 B
Main grip lift motor (M22) defective
Book exit sensor (S64) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-252 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Lag Error PB (D391)
The book exit sensor detected a book at power on. The cover path
SC797-37 B was closed and there was no book at the LE sensor (S65)
Book exit sensor (S64) defective
Sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Book Exit Sensor (S64) Error PB (D391)
The book exit sensor did not detect the signature within the
SC797-38 B prescribed time after the glued signature exited the gluing unit.
Book exit sensor (S64) connector loose, broken, defective
Sensor defective
Main Grip Signature Sensor (S55) Error PB (D391)
No signature was detected in the main grip unit after the signature
SC797-39 B passed from the sub grip to the main grip.
Main grip signature sensor (S55) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-253 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Cutter Entrance Sensor Error PB (D391)
The cutter entrance sensor (S65) went ON at power on after the
finisher initialized.
SC797-40 B -or-
The signature exit senor remained ON after the power on jam
recovery.
Detected a signature jam at power on.
Signature Registration Sensor Lag Error PB (D391)
The signature registration sensor went ON at warm-up after power
on.
-or-
SC797-41 B
When the signature exited and the lift tray lowered, the sensor went
ON.
Detected a jammed book at power on.
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Book Arrival Sensor (S76) PB (D391)
After the book output operation ended, the book arrival sensor
remained ON because the book failed to move from the buffer tray to
SC797-42 B the output tray.
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) defective
Book arrival sensor (S76) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-254 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Trimming Jam Scrap Error PB (D391)
The strips cut from the book could not be dumped into the trimmings
box or the strips jammed between the trimmings buffer and edge
press plate and trimming stopped. Three attempts failed to restore
operation, then the jam alert was issued.
Strips jammed between the edge press plate and trimmings
SC797-43 B buffer.
Trimmings buffer motor (M37) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Trimmings buffer HP sensors: right or left (S100, S103) defective
Motor or sensor harness loose, broken, defective
Note: Trimming strips wider that 29 mm at the bottom and top edges
(1st and 2nd cuts) and wider than 41 mm at the fore edge (3rd cut)
will cause the trimming unit to jam.
Sub Grip Signature Sensor (S39) Lag Error PB (D391)
The sub grip signature sensor did not go OFF after the sub grippers
released the signature to the main grip because the signature did not
SC797-44 B move.
Signature jammed in sub grip unit
Sub grip signature sensor defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-255 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Signature Sensor (S55) Lag Jam PB (D391)
The main grip signature sensor did not go OFF after the main
grippers released the signature to the trimming unit because the book
SC797-45 B did not move.
Book jammed in main grip unit
Main grip signature sensor (S55) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Signature Thickness Sensor (S50) Error PB (D391)
The size of the signature measured by the signature thickness sensor
SC797-46 B was smaller than the minimum.
Signature thickness sensor (S50) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Glue Vat Roller Rotation Error PB (D391)
The glue vat roller sensor did not detect any rotation at the glue vat
roller within the prescribed time after the glue vat roller motor turned
SC797-47 B on.
Glue vat roller motor (M25) defective
Glue vat roller rotation sensor (S59) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-256 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Glue Supply Motor (M33) Error PB (D391)
The glue supply HP sensor (S75) did not turn ON within the
prescribed time after the glue supply motor (S33) turned on. The
motor did not arrive at its home position.
SC797-48 B
Glue pellet jam in the glue feeder
Glue supply motor (M33) defective
Glue supply HP sensor (S75) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Front Door Lock Error PB (D391)
The right front door sensor did not go OFF even though the front
doors were closed and locked.
-or-
The right front door sensor did not go ON even though the front doors
released and opened.
-or-
SC797-49 B
Front doors are detected open even though the front doors are
closed and locked.
Right front door solenoid (SOL3) defective
Right front door sensor (S30) defective
Sensor connector loose, broken, defective
One or more of the front door micro-switches (MSW1, 2, 4, 5, 6,
7) defective
SM Appendix 3-257 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) Error PB (D391)
The switchback flapper HP sensor did not go ON within the
prescribed time after the motor turned on long enough to raise the
flapper through an arc of 50 degrees.
-or-
SC797-50 B The switchback flapper HP sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the motor turned on long enough to lower the
flapper through an arc of 150 degrees.
Switchback Flapper HP Sensor (S10) defective
Switchback flapper motor (M8) defective
Motor or sensor connector loose, broken, defective
TE Press Lever HP Sensor (S3) Error PB (D391)
The TE press lever HP sensor did not go ON when the TE press lever
motor turned on to move the lever through an arc of 30 degrees to
release the lever.
-or-
SC797-51 B The TE press lever HP sensor did not go OFF when the TE press
lever motor turned on to move the lever through an arc of 20 degrees
to close the lever.
TE press lever HP sensor (S3) defective
TE press lever motor (M3) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-258 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Front/Small (S12) Error PB (D391)
The front jog fence HP sensor for small size paper did not go ON
within the prescribed time when the front jogger motor turned on to
move the fence.
-or-
SC797-52 B The front jog fence HP sensor for small size paper did not go OFF
within the prescribed time when the front jogger motor turned on to
move the fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: front/small (S12) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Jogger motor: front (M4) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Front/Large (S14) Error PB (D391)
The front jog fence HP sensor for large size paper did not go ON within
the prescribed time when the front jogger motor turned on to move the
fence.
-or-
SC798-1 B The front jog fence HP sensor for large size paper did not go OFF within
the prescribed time when the front jogger motor turned on to move the
fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: front/large (S14) defective
Jogger motor: front (M4) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-259 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Rear/Small (S13)
PB (D391)
Error
The rear jog fence HP sensor for small size paper did not go ON
within the prescribed time when the rear jogger motor turned on to
move the fence.
-or-
SC798-2 B
The rear jog fence HP sensor for small size paper did not go OFF
within the prescribed time when the rear jogger motor turned on to
move the fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: rear/small (S13) defective
Jogger motor: rear (M5) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Jog Fence HP Sensor: Rear/Large (S15) Error PB (D391)
The rear jog fence HP sensor for large size paper did not go ON
within the prescribed time when the rear jogger motor turned on to
move the fence.
-or-
SC798-3 B The rear jog fence HP sensor for large size paper did not go OFF
within the prescribed time when the rear jogger motor turned on to
move the fence.
Jog fence HP sensor: rear/large (S15) defective
Jogger motor: rear (M5) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-260 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Switchback Roller HP Sensor (S11) Error PB (D391)
The switchback roller HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the motor turned on to raise the roller through an arc of 40
degrees.
-or-
SC798-4 B The switchback roller HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time when the motor turned on to lower the roller through an arc of 20
degrees.
Switchback Roller HP Sensor (S11) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Switchback Roller Motor (M7) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) Error PB (D391)
The stacking tray lower limit sensor did not go ON within the
prescribed time when the stacking tray lift motor turned on to lower the
tray.
-or-
SC798-5 B The stacking tray lower limit sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time when the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the
tray 30 mm.
Stacking Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S7) defective
Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-261 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Paper Detection Sensor: Front/Rear (S1/S2) PB (D391)
The paper detection sensor at the front of the stacking tray did not go
ON within the prescribed time after the stacking tray overflow sensor
(S6) went ON and the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the tray.
-or-
The paper detection sensor at the front of the stacking tray did not go
OFF within the prescribed time when the stacking tray lift motor turned
on to lower the tray.
-or-
SC798-6 B
The paper detection sensor at the rear of the stacking tray did not go
ON within the prescribed time after the stacking tray overflow sensor
(S6) went ON and the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the tray.
-or-
The paper detection sensor at the rear of the stacking tray did not go
OFF within the prescribed time when the stacking tray lift motor turned
on to lower the tray.
Paper Detect Sensor: Front (S1) defective
Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) defective
Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) Error PB (D391)
The stacking tray overflow sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time when the stacking tray lift motor turned on to raise the tray 70 mm.
-or-
The stacking tray overflow sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
SC798-7 B
time after the stacking tray lift motor turned on to lower the tray so
paper could be removed from the tray by the operator.
Stacking Tray Overflow Sensor (S6) defective
Stacking Tray Lift Motor (M2) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-262 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Stacking Tray HP Sensor (S9) Error PB (D391)
The stacking tray HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
when the stacking tray motor turned on to move the tray toward the
sensor.
-or-
SC798-8 B
The stacking tray HP sensor did not go OFF when the stacking tray
motor turned on to move the tray away from the sensor.
Stacking HP Sensor (S9) defective
Stacking Tray Motor (M9) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Stacking Weight HP Sensor (S16) Error PB (D391)
The stacking weight HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time when the stacking weight motor turned on to move the tray toward
the sensor.
-or-
SC798-9 B The stacking weight HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time when the stacking tray motor turned on to move the tray away
from the sensor.
Stacking Weight HP Sensor (S16) defective
Stacking Weight Motor (M6) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-263 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Sub Grip HP Sensor (S37) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time after
the sub grip lift motor turned on to raise the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC798-10 B The sub grip HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to lower the sub grip unit.
Sub Grip Lift Motor (M17) defective
Sub Grip HP Sensor (S37) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Sub Grip Size HP Sensor (S38) PB (D391)
The sub grip size HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the sub grip size motor turned on for horizontal adjustment to
the paper size, or the sub grip size HP sensor was already OFF when
the sub grip size horizontal adjustment started.
-or-
SC798-11 B The sub grip size HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the sub grip size motor turned on to close for horizontal
adjustment to the paper size, or the sub grip size HP sensor was
already ON when the sub grip size horizontal adjustment started.
Sub Grip Size Motor (S19) defective
Sub Grip Size HP Sensor (S38) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-264 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Sub Grip Open Sensor (S40) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to open the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC798-12 B The sub grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to close the sub grip unit.
Sub Grip Open Motor (S20) defective
Sub Grip Open Sensor (S40) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Sub Grip Close Sensor (S41) Error PB (D391)
The sub grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the sub grip lift motor turned on to close the sub grip unit.
-or-
SC798-13 B The sub grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the sub grip open motor turned on to open the sub grip unit.
Sub Grip Open Motor (S20) defective
Sub Grip Close Sensor (S41) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-265 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip HP Sensor (S44) Error PB (D391)
The main grip HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time
after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit, or
the main grip HP sensor was already ON when the motor started to
lower the main grip unit.
-or-
SC798-14 B The main grip HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed time
after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit, or
the main grip HP sensor was already ON when the motor started to
lower the main grip unit.
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Main Grip HP Sensor (S44) Error
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Main Grip Press Sensor 1 (S48) Error PB (D391)
The main grip press sensor 1 did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit
from the main grip signature registration position.
-or-
SC798-15 B The main grip press sensor 1 did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit
to the main grip signature registration position.
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Main Grip Press Sensor 1 (S48) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-266 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Press Sensor 2 (S49) Error PB (D391)
The main grip press sensor 2 did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit
and signature to the point where the signature was to be pressed into
the center of the cover.
-or-
SC798-16 B The main grip press sensor 2 did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit
away from the point where the signature was pressed into the center
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
of the cover.
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Main Grip Press Sensor 2 (S49) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Main Grip Signature Exit Error PB (D391)
The book exit sensor did not go ON within the prescribed time after
the main grip lift motor moved the signature to the delivery point when
the signature was passed from the main grip unit to the book exit
roller.
SC798-17 B
Signature broken, bent
Signature jammed in the main grip unit
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Book Exit Sensor (S64) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-267 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip HP Sensor: High (S45) Error PB (D391)
The main grip high HP sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to raise the main grip unit.
-or-
SC798-18 B The main grip high HP sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the main grip lift motor turned on to lower the main grip unit.
Main Grip Lift Motor (M22) defective
Main Grip HP Sensor: High (S45) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Main Grip Open Sensor: Rear/Front (S47, S48) PB (D391)
The rear main grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the rear grip motor turned on to open the main grip unit.
-or-
The rear main grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the rear grip motor turned on to close the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Rear (M23) defective
Main Grip Open Sensor: Rear (S47) defective
SC798-19 B
The rear main grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the rear grip motor turned on to close the main grip unit.
-or-
The rear main grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the rear grip motor turned on to open the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Rear (M23) defective
Main Grip Close Sensor: Rear (S54) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-268 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Encoder: Rear Sensor (S46) Error PB (D391)
The rear main grip encoder sensor could not be detected ON/OFF
within the prescribed time after the rear grip motor turned on to open
and close the main grip unit.
SC798-20 B
Main Grip Encoder: Rear Sensor (S46) defective
Grip Motor: Rear (M23) defective
Main Grip Encoder: Rear Sensor (S46) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Main Grip Open/Close Sensor: Front (S51,S53) PB (D391)
The front main grip open sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the front grip motor turned on to open the main grip unit.
-or-
The front main grip open sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the front grip motor turned on to close the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Front (M24) defective
Main Grip Open Sensor: Front (S51) defective
SC798-21 B Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
The front main grip close sensor did not go ON within the prescribed
time after the front grip motor turned on to close the main grip unit.
-or-
The front main grip close sensor did not go OFF within the prescribed
time after the front grip motor turned on to open the main grip unit.
Grip Motor: Front (M24) defective
Main Grip Close Sensor: Front (S53) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-269 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Main Grip Encoder: Front Sensor (S52) Error PB (D391)
The front main grip encoder sensor could not be detected ON/OFF
within the prescribed time after the front grip motor turned on to
open/close the main grip unit.
SC798-22 B
Main Grip Encoder: Front Sensor (S52) defective
Grip Motor: Front (M24) defective
Main Grip Encoder: Front Sensor (S52) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Signature Exit Path HP Sensor (S67) Error PB (D391)
The signature exit path HP sensor did not go ON within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to retract
the signature exit roller.
-or-
SC798-23 B The signature exit path HP sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to move
the signature exit roller.
Signature Exit Path Motor (M30) defective
Signature Exit Path HP Sensor (S67) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-270 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Signature Exit Path Press Sensor (S68) Error PB (D391)
The signature exit path press sensor did not go ON within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to feed
the book into the nip of the signature exit roller.
-or-
SC798-24 B The signature exit path press sensor did not go OFF within the
prescribed time after the signature exit path motor turned on to retract
the signature exit roller.
Signature Exit Path Motor (M30) defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Signature Exit Path Press Sensor (S68) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Inserter Drive Switch Sensor (S16) PB (D391)
The drive switch sensor in the inserter unit did not go OFF within the
time prescribed for the drive switching motor (M2) to switch drives.
-or-
SC798-25 B The drive switch sensor in the inserter unit did not go ON within the
prescribed time.
Drive switch motor (M2) defective
Drive switch sensor (S16) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
SM Appendix 3-271 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Inserter Tray A Error PB (D391)
Inserter Tray A (upper tray) failed to leave its lower limit sensor (S11)
within the prescribed time after the Tray A lift motor turned on.
-or-
Inserter Tray A (upper tray) failed to arrive at its paper feed sensor
SC798-26 B
(S4) within the prescribed time after the Tray A lift motor turned on.
Lift Motor: Tray A (M3) defective
Lower limit sensor: Tray A (S11) defective
Paper feed sensor (S4) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
Inserter Tray B Error PB (D391)
Inserter Tray B (lower tray) failed to leave its lower limit sensor (S12)
within the prescribed time after the Tray B lift motor turned on.
-or-
SC798-27 B Inserter Tray B (lower tray) failed to arrive at its paper feed sensor
(S10) within the prescribed time after the Tray B lift motor turned on.
Lift Motor: Tray B (M4) defective
Lower Limit Sensor: Tray B (S12) defective
Sensor or motor connector loose, broken, defective
D095/M077 3-272 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Trimming Blade Motor Error Trimmer (D455)
The trimming blade HP sensor did not detect the blade at (or out of)
its home position within the prescribed time during trimming. The 1st
detection causes a jam signal if the error occurred during cutting. The
2nd detection causes this SC code if the error occurred at the start or
end of cutting.
SC799-1 D Check for and remove any obstacles (jammed paper scraps)
around the blade, motor, or sensor
Trimming blade HP sensor dirty
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Trimming blade motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Trimming unit main board defective
Press Roller Motor Error Trimmer (D455)
The press roller HP sensor did not detect the press roller at (or out of)
its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
SC799-2 D Check for and remove any obstacles around the motor and sensor
Press roller motor HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Press roller motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Trimming unit main board defective
SM Appendix 3-273 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 7-2
Cut Position Motor Error Trimmer (D455)
The cut position HP sensor did not detect the cut position stopper at
(or out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
occurrence causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC
code.
SC799-3 D
Check for and remove any obstacles around the motor and sensor
Cut position HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Cut position motor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Motor defective
Trimming unit main board defective
Press Stopper Motor Error Trimmer (D455)
The press stopper HP sensor did not detect the press stopper at (or
out of) its home position within the prescribed time. The 1st occurrence
causes a jam, and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code.
Check for and remove any obstacles around the motor and sensor
SC799-4 D
Press stopper HP sensor dirty
Sensor harness or connector loose, broken, defective
Press stopper motor harness or connector loose, broken,
defective
Motor defective
Trimming unit main board defective
D095/M077 3-274 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 8
3.12 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 8
3.12.1 SC800: OVERALL SYSTEM
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Energy saving I/O sub-system error
CTL The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error.
816
D Controller board defective
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Replace the controller board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Boot loader error
The boot loader cannot read one of the following: self-diagnostic
module, kernel, or one of the files of the root file system, or the check of
one of these items on the system SD card failed.
CTL
817
D File or module on the system SD card is corrupted
File or module on the system SD card is illegal
Make sure that the system SD card is the one designed for the
machine
Replace controller board.
SM Appendix 3-275 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Fatal kernel error
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system
processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
CTL
819 0x5032 HAIC-P2 error
D
System program defective
0x766d vm_pageout: VM is full Controller board defective
4361 Cache Error Optional board defective
Replace controller firmw
Other
For more details about this SC code error, execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so
you can read the error code list. The error code is not displayed on the operation
panel.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
CTL Self-diagnostics error: ASIC
821
D [XXXX]: Detailed error code
ASIC detection error
The I/O ASIC for system control is not detected.
[0B06] Defective ASIC
Defective North Bridge and PCI I/F
Replace the controller board.
D095/M077 3-276 SM Appendix
Rev. 01/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
CTL Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
822
B [XXXX]: Detailed error code
[3003] Timeout error
[3004] Command error
When the main switch is turned on or starting the self-diagnostic, the
HDD stays busy for the specified time or more.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Loose connection
Defective HDD
Defective controller
2. Check that the HDD is correctly connected to the controller.
1. 3. Replace the HDD.
4. Replace the controller.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
823 Self-diagnosis error: NIB
[6101]
MAC address check sum error
The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check
sum stored in ROM.
[6104]
PHY IC error
⇒ The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized.
[6105]
PHY IC loop-back error
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the
controller.
Replace the controller.
SM Appendix 3-277 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 8 Rev. 01/24/2012
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
[1401]
Self-diagnosis error: Standard NVRAM
The controller cannot recognize the standard NVRAM installed or
detects that the NVRAM is defective.
CTL Loose connection
824
D Defective standard NVRAM
Defective controller
1. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly inserted into the socket.
2. Replace the NVRAM.
3. Replace the controller
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Self-diagnostic error 5: Optional RAM
Verify error for optional RAM.
CTL Make sure that the resident RAM is installed in the correct slot.
829
B Make sure the optional RAM is installed in the correct slot (Slot 0)
1. Install the optional RAM on the controller board.
2. Replace the controller board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
CTL
833 Self-diagnostic error 8: Engine I/F ASIC
C
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI
[0F30] configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
[0F31]
Replace the VBCU
ASIC (Mandolin) for system control could not be detected. After the PCI
[0F41] configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
Replace the VBCU
D095/M077 3-278 SM Appendix
Rev. 01/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
[0F21] The machine detects an error from the resident RAM on the controller
board at write/verify check.
Replace the controller board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Self-diagnostic error 9: Optional Memory RAM DIMM
The write/verify check for the optional RAM chip on the controller
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
834 CTL board returned an error.
[5101] C
Controller defective
Replace the controller board.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
IEEE1394 interface error
The 1394 interface is unusable.
CTL Defective IEEE1394
851 Defective controller.
B
1. Turn the main switch off and on.
2. Replace the IEEE1394 interface board.
3. Replace the controller.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Wireless LAN card not detected
The wireless LAN card is not detected before communication is
CTL established, though the wireless LAN board is detected.
853
B
Loose connection
Check the connection.
SM Appendix 3-279 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Wireless LAN/Bluetooth card not detected
The wireless LAN/Bluetooth card is not detected after communication is
CTL established, but the wireless LAN board is detected.
854
B
Loose connection
Check the connection.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Wireless LAN/Bluetooth card error
An error is detected in the wireless LAN/Bluetooth card.
855 CTL Loose connection
856 B Defective wireless LAN/Bluetooth card
1. Check the connection.
2. Replace the wireless LAN/Bluetooth card.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
USB interface error
The USB interface cannot be used due to a driver error.
CTL Defective USB driver
857
B Loose connection
1. Check the connection.
2. Replace the USB board.
D095/M077 3-280 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
CTL Data Encryption Error 1
858
A These are errors of the HDD Data Encryption Option D377.
Key could be acquired.
0 Key Acquistion
Replace the controller board
The key was acquired but the HDD could not be
HDD Key Setting set.
1
Error Turn the machine power off/on several times.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
Replace the controller board.
NVRAM data conversion failed (mismatch with
NVRAM Read
2 nvram.conf)
Error
Replace the NVRAM
DFU. May occur during development.
NVRAM Before
30 Turn the machine power off/on several times.
Replace Error
Replace the controller board.
SM Appendix 3-281 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
CTL Data Encryption Error 2
859
B These are errors of the HDD Data Encryption Option D377.
Data conversion was attempted with no HDD unit
present.
Confirm that HDD unit installed correctly
8 HDD Check Error Initialize HDD with SP5832-1
Note:
After installation, a new HDD should be formatted
with SP5832-1
Power Loss Data conversion stopped before NVRAM/HDD data
9 During Data was converted.
Conversion Format HDD with SP5832-1
More than two illegal DMAC communications were
returned.
Data Read
10 HDD defective
Command Error
Format HDD with SP5832-1
Replace HDD
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
HDD: Initialization error
The controller detects that the hard disk fails.
CTL HDD not initialized
860
B Defective HDD
1. Reformat the HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.
D095/M077 3-282 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
HDD: Reboot error
The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is
supplied to the HDD.
Loose connection
CTL Defective cables
861 Defective HDD
D
Defective controller
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
1. Check the connection between the HDD and controller.
2. Check and replace the cables.
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Replace the controller.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
HDD: Read error
The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly.
CTL Defective HDD
863
D Defective controller
1. Replace the HDD.
2. Replace the controller.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
HDD: CRC error
While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data
CTL transmission fails.
864
D
Defective HDD
Replace the HDD.
SM Appendix 3-283 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
HDD: Access error
CTL An error is detected while operating the HDD.
865
D Defective HDD
Replace the HDD.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
SD card authentication error
CTL A correct license is not found in the SD card.
866
B SD-card data is corrupted.
Store correct data in the SD card.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
SD card error
CTL The SD card is ejected from the slot.
867
D
1. Install the SD card.
2. Turn the main switch off and on.
D095/M077 3-284 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
SD card access error
-13 to -3: File system error
Other number: Device error
An error report is sent from the SD card reader.
CTL
868 An error is detected in the SD card.
D
1. For a file system error, format the SD card on your PC.
2. For a device error, turn the mains switch off and on.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
3. Replace the SD card.
4. Replace the controller.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Address book error
An error is detected in the data copied to the address book over a
network.
CTL Defective software program
870 Defective HDD
B
Incorrect path to the server
1. Initialize the address book data (SP5-846-050).
2. Initialize the user information (SP5-832-006).
3. Replace the HDD.
SM Appendix 3-285 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
HDD mail data error
An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.
CTL Defective HDD
872 Power failure during an access to the HDD
B
1. Turn the main switch off and on.
2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-007).
3. Replace the HDD.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
HDD mail transfer error
An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.
CTL Defective HDD
873
B Power failure during an access to the HDD
1. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-008).
2. Replace the HDD.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Delete All error 1: HDD
An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted
physically by the Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735).
CTL
874 Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) not installed
D
Defective HDD
1. Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735).
2. Replace the HDD.
D095/M077 3-286 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Delete All error 2: Data area
An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted
CTL logically by the Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735).
875
D
The logical format for the HDD fails.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Log Data Error
CTL An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or
876
D during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the
machine off while it is operating.
Log Data Error 1
-001 Damaged log data file in the HDD
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 2
An encryption module not installed
-002
1. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 ("0" is off.)
2. Install the DESS module.
Log Data Error 3
Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data
-003
1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
2. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 ("0" is off.)
Log Data Error 4
-004 Unusual log encryption function due to defective NVRAM data
Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
-005 Log Data Error 5
SM Appendix 3-287 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine
1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
2. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
Log Data Error 99
-099 Other than the above causes
Ask your supervisor.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error
The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but the Data Overwrite
Security Unit (B735) is installed and activated.
CTL
877 Defective SD card (B735)
B
SD card (B735) not installed
1. Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card (B735).
2. Check and reinstall the SD card (B735).
D095/M077 3-288 SM Appendix
Rev. 01/24/2012 Service Call Tables - 8
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
TPM authentication error
The authentication information mismatch between TPM and USB flash
CTL ROM on the controller board occurs.
878
D Incorrect system updating
USB flash ROM defective
Replace the controller board.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
⇒ Software Error
A software error occurred in the GW controller.
899 1. Update all the firmware to the latest versions.
2. If above action did not solve the issue, replace the GW controller
SM Appendix 3-289 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 9
3.13 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 9
3.13.1 SC900: MISCELLANEOUS
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Electric counter error
Abnormal data in the counters.
CTL Defective NVRAM
900 Defective controller
D
1. Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller.
2. Replace the NVRAM.
3. Replace the controller.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
910 External Controller Error 1
911 External Controller Error 2
CTL
912 External Controller Error 3
B
913 External Controller Error 4
914 External Controller Error 5
- - The external controller alerted the machine about an error.
Please refer to the instructions for the external controller
- -
(application).
D095/M077 3-290 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 9
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
External controller down
The EAC received an interrupt signal from the FLUTE serial driver
CTL during print jobs in progress and the connection between the copier and
919
D external controller was broken.
Note: The EAC is the External Api Converter.
Switch the machine off and on.
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Printer application error
An error is detected in the printer application program.
CTL Defective software
920 Unexpected hardware resource (e.g., memory shortage)
D
1. Software defective; switch off/on, or change the controller firmware
if the problem is not solved
2. Insufficient memory
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Printer font error
A necessary font is not found in the SD card.
CTL
921 A necessary font is not found in the SD card.
D
The SD card data is corrupted.
1. Check that the SD card has the correct data.
SM Appendix 3-291 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 9
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Software performance error
The software makes an unexpected operation.
Defective software
Defective controller
CTL
990 Software error
D
1. Turn the main switch off and on.
2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine main firmware.
See Note 1 at the end of the SC table.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Software continuity error
The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation.
However, unlike SC 990, the object of the error is continuity of the
CTL software.
991
C
Software program error
Internal parameter incorrect, insufficient working memory.
1. This SC is not displayed on the LCD (logging only).
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Undefined error
CTL
992 Defective software program
D
An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred
D095/M077 3-292 SM Appendix
Service Call Tables - 9
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Application function selection error
The application selected by the operation panel key does not start
or ends abnormally.
Software (including the software configuration) defective
An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not
installed
Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated
CTL
997
Service Call
Conditions
Appendix:
B 1. Check the devices necessary for the application program. If
necessary devices have not been installed, install them.
2. Check that application programs are correctly configured.
3. For a fax operation problem, simplify the nesting of the fax group
addresses.
4. Take necessary countermeasures specific to the application
program. If the logs can be displayed on the operation panel, see
the logs.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Application start error
No applications start within 60 seconds after the power is turned on.
Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM
Defective controller
CTL Software problem
998
D
1. Check the setting of SP5875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)",
change it to "0 (OFF)".
2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-DIMM are correctly connected.
3. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
4. Replace the controller.
SM Appendix 3-293 D095/M077
Service Call Tables - 9
Note 1
If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file),
the problem may be caused by a software error. In this case, the following data and information
needs to be sent back to your product specialist. Please understand that it may take some time
to get a reply on how to solve the problem, because in some cases the design staff in Japan
must analyze the data.
Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
SMC - All (SP5-990-001)
SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the
problem is logged.)
Image file which causes the problem, if possible
D095/M077 3-294 SM Appendix
APPENDIX:
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
40 ~ 41 01/11/2011 Changed Air Separator setting from 0,1,2 to 0,1 only
239 7/25/2012 SP2992-001, 2993-001
334 02/22/2011 Corrected SP5045-001 Accounting Counter
350 05/16/2012 Added SP5711-202 Standard Paper Data Ver. (SD Card)
432 ~ 433 07/22/2011 SP7504-123
610 & 614 05/04/2011 Added Note for additional procedures for SP152, 162 thru 165
System SP1-xxx: 1
4. APPENDIX: SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
TABLES
4.1 SYSTEM SP1-XXX: 1
4.1.1 SP1-XXX FEED
1002* Side-to-Side Regist Adjustment
001 Main-scan
Adjusts the laser scanning timing in the main scan direction.
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
1003* Paper Buckle Adjustment
001 Plain Paper
Adjusts the paper buckle for plain paper mode.
[0 to 10 / 6 / 1 mm]
1004* Leading Edge Regist Adjustment
001 Sub-scan
Adjusts the leading edge registration.
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
SM Appendix 4-1 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 1
1104* Fusing Temp Control 2
101 Plain:Weight 1
[100 to 200 / 145 / 1°C]
102 Plain:Weight 2
[100 to 200 / 150 / 1°C]
103 Plain:Weight 3
[100 to 200 / 155 / 1°C]
104 Plain:Weight 4
[100 to 200 / 165 / 1°C]
105 Plain:Weight 5
[100 to 200 / 175 / 1°C]
106 Plain:Weight 6
[100 to 200 / 175 / 1°C]
107 Plain:Weight 7
[100 to 200 / 175 / 1°C]
109 Matte:Weight 2
[100 to 200 / 145 / 1°C]
110 Matte:Weight 3
[100 to 200 / 150 / 1°C]
111 Matte:Weight 4
[100 to 200 / 155 / 1°C]
112 Matte:Weight 5
[100 to 200 / 165 / 1°C]
113 Matte:Weight 6
D095/M077 4-2 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 1
[100 to 200 / 175 / 1°C]
114 Matte:Weight 7
[100 to 200 / 175 / 1°C]
116 Glossy:Weight 2
[100 to 200 / 140 / 1°C]
117 Glossy:Weight 3
[100 to 200 / 150 / 1°C]
118 Glossy:Weight 4
[100 to 200 / 160 / 1°C]
119 Glossy:Weight 5
Appendix:
[100 to 200 / 170 / 1°C]
Program
Service
Mode
120 Glossy:Weight 6
[100 to 200 / 175 / 1°C]
121 Glossy:Weight 7
[100 to 200 / 180 / 1°C]
122 Envelope:Weight 5
[100 to 200 / 175 / 1°C]
123 Envelope:Weight 6
[100 to 200 / 175 / 1°C]
124 Envelope:Weight 7
[100 to 200 / 175 / 1°C]
SM Appendix 4-3 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 1
1105* Fusing Temp Control 1
029 Htg Roll: Reload
Adjusts the reload temperature of the heating roller.
[100 to 200 / 165 / 1°C]
030 Htg Roll: Rotation after Reload
Adjusts the threshold temperature for the idle rotation of the heating roller
after reload.
[100 to 200 / 165 / 1°C]
031 Htg Roll: Stand-by: Normal Temp.
Adjusts the target temperature of the heating roller in stand-by mode for
normal temperature.
[100 to 200 / 165 / 1°C]
032 Htg Roll: Stand-by:Low Temp.
Adjusts the target temperature of the heating roller in stand-by mode for low
temperature.
[100 to 200 / 175 / 1°C]
033 Htg Roll: Stand-by:High Temp.
Adjusts the target temperature of the heating roller in stand-by mode for
high temperature.
[100 to 200 / 165 / 1°C]
D095/M077 4-4 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 1
1107* Mode Shift Setting
001 Add Temp:Weight 1
Adjusts the additional temperature at 1st printing for weight 1 paper.
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 deg]
002 Add Temp:Weight 2
Adjusts the additional temperature at 1st printing for weight 2 paper.
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 deg]
003 Add Temp:Weight 3
Adjusts the additional temperature at 1st printing for weight 3 paper.
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 deg]
004 Add Temp:Weight 4
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Adjusts the additional temperature at 1st printing for weight 4 paper.
[0 to 30 / 15 / 1 deg]
005 Add Temp:Weight 5
Adjusts the additional temperature at 1st printing for weight 5 paper.
[0 to 30 / 15 / 1 deg]
006 Add Temp:Weight 6
Adjusts the additional temperature at 1st printing for weight 6 paper.
[0 to 30 / 20 / 1 deg]
007 Add Temp:Weight 7
Adjusts the additional temperature at 1st printing for weight 7 paper.
[0 to 30 / 20 / 1 deg]
009 Overshoot Prevent Temp.
Adjusts the threshold temperature for executing fusing idle rotation to
prevent the overheating of the fusing unit.
[0 to 250 / 220 / 1 deg]
SM Appendix 4-5 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 1
010 Overshoot Prevent Time
Adjusts the time of the fusing idle rotation.
[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec.]
018 Low Temp On/Off
Adjusts the threshold temperature for the low temperature condition.
[10 to 23 / 17 / 1°C]
019 High Temp On/Off
Adjusts the threshold temperature for the high temperature condition.
[24 to 40 / 28 / 1°C]
020 Low Temp:Reload
Adjusts the temperature to be added to the reload temperature in the low
temperature condition.
[0 to 15 / 5 / 1°C]
021 High Temp:Reload
Adjusts the temperature to be subtracted from the reload temperature in the
high temperature condition.
[0 to 15 / 0 / 1°C]
022 Low Temp:Feed
Adjusts the additional temperature to the paper feeding temperature in the
low temperature condition
[0 to 15 / 13 / 1°C]
023 High Temp:Feed
Adjusts the subtractive temperature to the paper feeding temperature in the
high temperature condition
[0 to 15 / 0 / 1°C]
024 Fuser Roll Sensor ON/OFF
Enables or disables the function of the hot roller thermistor.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
D095/M077 4-6 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 1
025 Reload Permit:Fuser Roll Temp
Adjusts the threshold temperature of the hot roller thermistor for the reload
mode.
[0 to 70 / 10 / 1°C]
026 Fsr Core:Low Threshold Temp
Adjusts the threshold temperature of the hot roller thermistor between low
temperature and normal temperature.
[0 to 100 / 50 / 1°C]
027 Fsr Core:High Threshold Temp
Adjusts the threshold temperature of the hot roller thermistor between
normal temperature and high temperature.
[0 to 100 / 70 / 1°C]
Appendix:
028 Fsr Core:Low Temp:Fuser Speed
Program
Service
Mode
Adjusts the additional line speed rate in the low temperature condition
judged by the hot roller thermistor just after the machine's power-on.
[-10 to 10 / 2.5 / 0.1 %]
029 Additional Temp:Thin
Adjusts the additional line speed rate in the high temperature condition
judged by the hot roller thermistor just after the machine's power-on.
[-10 to 10 / 1 / 0.1 %]
030 Fsr Core:Low Temp:Stand-by
[0 to 15 / 5 / 1°C]
031 Fsr Core:High Temp:Stand-by
[0 to 15 / 0 / 1°C]
032 Fsr Core:Low Temp:Feed
[0 to 15 / 5 / 1°C]
033 Fsr Core:High Temp:Feed
[0 to 15 / 0 / 1°C]
SM Appendix 4-7 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 1
034 Idle Time:After Reload
[0 to 60 / 7 / 1 min]
035 Additional Temp:Time
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 sec]
036 Reload Extension: Low Temp
[0 to 255 / 150 / 1 sec]
038 Idle Rotation:Standby:Temp
[0 to 150 / 80 / 1 deg]
039 Idle Rotation:Standby:Time
[0 to 360 / 30 / 1 sec]
077 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 1
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 deg]
078 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 1
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
079 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 2
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 deg]
080 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 2
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
081 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 3
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 deg]
082 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 3
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
083 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 4
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
D095/M077 4-8 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 1
084 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 4
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
085 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 5
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
086 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 5
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
087 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 6
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
088 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 6
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
089 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 7
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
090 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 7
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
091 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 1
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
092 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 1
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
093 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 2
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
094 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 2
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
SM Appendix 4-9 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 1
095 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 3
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
096 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 3
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
097 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 4
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
098 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 4
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
099 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 5
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
100 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 5
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
101 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 6
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
102 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 6
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
103 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 7
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
104 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 7
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
107 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 2
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 deg]
108 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 2
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
D095/M077 4-10 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 1
109 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 3
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 deg]
110 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 3
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
111 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 4
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
112 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 4
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
113 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 5
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
Appendix:
114 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 5
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
115 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 6
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
116 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 6
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
117 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 7
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
118 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 7
[0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg]
121 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 2
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
122 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 2
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
123 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 3
SM Appendix 4-11 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 1
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
124 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 3
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
125 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 4
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
126 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 4
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
127 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 5
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
128 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 5
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
129 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 6
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
130 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 6
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
131 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 7
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
132 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 7
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 deg]
133 L-Limit Temp Correction
[-30 to 30 / -30 / 1 deg]
134 H-Limit Temp Correction
[-30 to 30 / 30 / 1 deg]
D095/M077 4-12 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 1
141 Idle Rotation after Feed:Time
[0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec.]
143 Low Temp Coeff:Htg Roll:Feed
[0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1]
144 High Temp Coeff:Htg Roll:Feed
[0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1]
145 Low Temp Coeff:Press Roll:Feed
[0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1]
146 High Temp Coeff:Press Roll:Feed
[0 to 3 / 1 / 0.1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
SM Appendix 4-13 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
4.2 SYSTEM SP1-XXX: 2
1108* Fusing Temp Control 3
101 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
102 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
103 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
104 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
105 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
106 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
107 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
109 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
110 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
111 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
112 Matte:Weight 5
D095/M077 4-14 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
113 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
114 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
116 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
117 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
118 Glossy:Weight 4
Appendix:
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
Program
Service
Mode
119 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
120 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
121 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
122 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
123 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
124 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1°C]
SM Appendix 4-15 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
1109* Fusing Temp Change
007 Temperature 1
[–20 to 20 / 0 / 1°C]
008 Temperature 2
[–20 to 20 / –5 / 1°C]
009 Temperature 3
[–20 to 20 / 0 / 1°C]
010 Temperature 4
[–20 to 20 / –5 / 1°C]
011 Temperature 5
[–20 to 20 / 0 / 1°C]
012 Temperature 6
[–20 to 20 / –5 / 1°C]
013 Temperature 7
[–20 to 20 / 0 / 1°C]
014 Temperature 8
[–20 to 20 / –5 / 1°C]
015 Control Time A
[1 to 500 / 30 / 1 sec]
016 Control Time B
[1 to 500 / 100 / 1 sec]
017 Control Time C
[1 to 500 / 30 / 1 sec]
D095/M077 4-16 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
018 Control Time D
[1 to 500 / 100 / 1 sec]
019 Paper Weight 1
[0 or 1/ 0 / -]
020 Paper Weight 2
[0 or 1/ 0 / -]
021 Paper Weight 3
[0 or 1/ 0 / -]
022 Paper Weight 4
[0 or 1/ 0 / -]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
023 Paper Weight 5
[0 or 1/ 0 / -]
024 Paper Weight 6
[0 or 1/ 0 / -]
025 Paper Weight 7
[0 or 1/ 0 / -]
1113* 1st Power On Thresh. Temp
001 Adjusts the threshold temperature for the 1st power-on.
[0 to 100 / 60 / 1°C]
SM Appendix 4-17 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
1141* Fusing SC Issue Time Info
001 SC Number
Displays the fusing SC number.
002 SC Cause
Displays the fusing SC cause.
101 Htg Roller Thermopile 1
Displays the thermopile temperature of the heating roller when an SC was
issued.
102 Prs Roller Thermopile 2
Displays the thermopile temperature of the pressure roller when an SC was
issued.
103 Htg Roller Thermistor 1
Displays the thermistor temperature of the heating roller when an SC was
issued.
104 Fsr Roller Thermistor 2
Displays the thermistor temperature of the fusing belt when an SC was
issued.
105 Fsr Core Thermistor 3
Displays the thermistor temperature of the hot roller when an SC was
issued.
D095/M077 4-18 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
1159* Fusing SC Setting
001 3 Jams SC 0:OFF/1:ON
Turns on or off the SC detection for three consecutive jams at the fusing
unit.
[0: OFF, 1:ON]
1161* Process Speed
Selects the process line speed for each type of paper.
0: Normal Speed, 1: Slowdown
101 Plain:Weight 1
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
102 Plain:Weight 2
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
103 Plain:Weight 3
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
104 Plain:Weight 4
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
105 Plain:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
106 Plain:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
107 Plain:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
109 Matte:Weight 2
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
SM Appendix 4-19 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
110 Matte:Weight 3
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
111 Matte:Weight 4
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
112 Matte:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
113 Matte:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
114 Matte:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
116 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
117 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
118 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
119 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
120 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
121 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
122 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
D095/M077 4-20 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
123 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
124 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
1191* L Temp:CPM Down
Selects the CPM down level in the low temperature condition for each paper
type.
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
101 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
Appendix:
102 Plain:Weight 2
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
103 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
104 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
105 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
106 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 3 / 3 / -]
107 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 3 /3 / -]
109 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
SM Appendix 4-21 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
110 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
111 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
112 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
113 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 3 / 3 / -]
114 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 3 / 3 / -]
116 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
117 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
118 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
119 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
120 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 3 / 3 / -]
121 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 3 / 3 / -]
122 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
D095/M077 4-22 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
123 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
124 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
1200* Over N-Temp:CPM Down
Selects the CPM down level in the medium temperature condition for each
paper type.
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
101 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
Appendix:
102 Plain:Weight 2
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
103 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
104 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
105 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
106 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
107 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
109 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
SM Appendix 4-23 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
110 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
111 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
112 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
113 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
114 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
116 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
117 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
118 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
119 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
120 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
121 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
122 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
D095/M077 4-24 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
123 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
124 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 3 / 0 / -]
1201* CPM Down Setting
001 L Temp:CPM Down Temp
[–50 to 10 / –30 / 1°C]
002 L Temp:CPM Up Temp
[–50 to -8 / –8 / 1°C]
003 L Temp:1st CPM Down
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[10 to 100 / 80 / 10 %]
004 L Temp:2nd CPM Down
[10 to 100 / 60 / 10 %]
005 L Temp:3rd CPM Down
[10 to 100 / 40 / 10 %]
006 H Temp:1st CPM Down
[10 to 100 / 80 / 10 %]
007 H Temp:2nd CPM Down
[10 to 100 / 60 / 10 %]
008 H Temp:3rd CPM Down
[10 to 100 / 40 / 10 %]
009 H Temp:1st CPM Down Temp
[160 to 240 / 215 / 1°C]
SM Appendix 4-25 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
010 H Temp:2nd CPM Down Temp
[160 to 240 / 219 / 1°C]
011 H Temp:3rd CPM Down Temp
[160 to 240 / 222 / 1°C]
024 CPM Judge Interval
[1 to 255 / 10 / 1 sec]
025 L Temp:CPM Down:Weight 1
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
026 L Temp:CPM Down:Weight 2
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
027 L Temp:CPM Down:Weight 3
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
028 L Temp:CPM Down:Weight 4
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
029 L Temp:CPM Down:Weight 5
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
030 L Temp:CPM Down:Weight 6
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
031 L Temp:CPM Down:Weight 7
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
D095/M077 4-26 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
032 Over L-Temp:CPM Down:Weight 1
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
033 Over L-Temp:CPM Down:Weight 2
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
034 Over L-Temp:CPM Down:Weight 3
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
035 Over L-Temp:CPM Down:Weight 4
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
036 Over L-Temp:CPM Down:Weight 5
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
037 Over L-Temp:CPM Down:Weight 6
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
038 Over L-Temp:CPM Down:Weight 7
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: No CPM Down, 1: CPM Down 1, 2: CPM Down 2, 3: CPM Down 3
1202* Low Power Mode
001 Htg Roll Temp:Low Power Mode
[0 to 150 / 110 / 1°C]
SM Appendix 4-27 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
1206* Paper Shift Setting
001 Shift Mode Selection
Selects the paper shift mode. The paper feeding position on the fusing belt
is shifted at specific interval (number of outputs) to prevent uneven wearing
of the fusing belt if this setting is set to "0" or "2". The setting "2" is
recommended for a machine which has a finisher with the punch unit, Ring
Binder or Perfect Binder.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Shift: On; 1: Shift: Off; 2: Shift: Off (Punch Mode)
1207* Fixed Paper Intrvl (Fixed Paper Interval Setting)
Adjusts the interval of feeding paper.
These SPs are effective only when fixed feeding paper is selected.
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
101 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
102 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
103 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
104 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
105 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
106 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
107 Plain:Weight 7
D095/M077 4-28 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
109 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
110 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
111 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
112 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
113 Matte:Weight 6
Appendix:
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
Program
Service
Mode
114 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
116 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
117 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
118 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
119 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
120 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
SM Appendix 4-29 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
121 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
122 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
123 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
124 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1]
1208 Fusing Temp Control 4
Press Roll Ctr:Reload
002 Adjusts the reload temperature of the pressure roller.
[70 to 160 / 100 / 1°C /step]
Press Roll Ctr:Idle:Reload
003 Adjusts the temperature of the pressure roller during the extra idle rotation
after the reload.
[70 to 160 / 100 / 1°C /step]
Press Roll Ctr:Standby:Normal Temp
004 Adjusts the target temperature of the pressure roller in the stand-by mode of
the normal temperature condition.
[70 to 160 / 100 / 1°C /step]
Press Roll Ctr:Standby:Low Temp
005 Adjusts the target temperature of the pressure roller in the stand-by mode of
the low temperature condition.
[70 to 160 / 100 / 1°C /step]
Press Roll Ctr:Standby:High Temp
006
Adjusts the target temperature of the pressure roller in the stand-by mode of
D095/M077 4-30 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
the high temperature condition.
[70 to 160 / 100 / 1°C /step]
Press Roll Temp:Low Power Mode
013 Adjusts the target temperature of the pressure roller in the low power mode.
[70 to 150 / 100 / 1°C /step]
1209* Productivity Up Mode
Configures the settings of the productivity priority mode.
001 Productivity Up:ON/OFF
Turns on or off the productivity priority mode. If this setting is set to "1",
waiting time is reduced.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Appendix:
0: OFF, 1: ON
Program
Service
Mode
002 L Temp:CPM Up Temp
Specifies the threshold temperature for the CPM Up when the productivity
priority mode is selected.
[-50 to -8 / -20 / 1 deg]
003 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 1
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
004 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 1
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
005 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 2
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
006 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 2
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
007 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 3
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
SM Appendix 4-31 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
008 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 3
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
009 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 4
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
010 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 4
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
011 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 5
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
012 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 5
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
013 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 6
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
014 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 6
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
015 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 7
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
016 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Plain 7
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
017 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 1
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
018 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 1
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
D095/M077 4-32 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
019 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 2
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
020 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 2
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
021 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 3
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
022 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 3
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
023 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 4
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
024 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 4
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
025 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 5
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
026 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 5
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
027 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 6
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
028 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 6
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
029 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 7
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
SM Appendix 4-33 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
030 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Plain 7
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
031 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 2
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
032 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 2
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
033 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 3
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
034 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 3
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
035 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 4
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
036 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 4
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
037 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 5
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
038 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 5
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
039 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 6
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
040 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 6
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
041 L-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 7
[0 to 50 / 10 / 1 deg]
D095/M077 4-34 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 2
042 H-Limit:Htg Roll:Feed Coated 7
[0 to 50 / 15 / 1 deg]
043 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 2
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
044 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 2
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
045 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 3
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
046 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 3
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
Appendix:
047 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 4
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
048 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 4
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
049 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 5
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
050 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 5
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
051 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 6
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
052 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 6
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
SM Appendix 4-35 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 2
053 L-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 7
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
054 H-Limit:Pr Roll:Feed Coated 7
[0 to 50 / 30 / 1 deg]
D095/M077 4-36 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 3
4.3 SYSTEM SP1-XXX: 3
1802* Resist Speed DFU
Selects the line speed of the registration unit.
001 Plain:Weight 1
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
004 Plain:Weight 4
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
012 Matte:Weight 2
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
013 Matte:Weight 3
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
014 Matte:Weight 4
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-37 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 3
015 Matte:Weight 5
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
016 Matte:Weight 6
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
017 Matte:Weight 7
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
022 Glossy:Weight 2
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
023 Glossy:Weight 3
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
024 Glossy:Weight 4
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
025 Glossy:Weight 5
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
026 Glossy:Weight 6
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
027 Glossy:Weight 7
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
Envelope:Weight 5
075
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
Envelope:Weight 6
076
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
Envelope:Weight 7
077
[-2 to 4 / 1 / 1]
D095/M077 4-38 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 3
1805* Motor Rotational Setting
001 Exit Motor
Adjusts the rotation speed of the exit motor.
[1000 to 3000 / 1592.9 / 0.1 rpm]
Exit Motor:Slow Down1
002 Adjusts the rotation speed of the exit motor.
[600 to 3000 / 1238.9 / 0.1 rpm]
1806* Rotation Speed DFU
001 Feed Motor 1
Adjusts the rotation speed of the drive motor right in the buffer pass unit
(M379).
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[1000 to 2500 / 1232.5 / 0.1 rpm]
002 Feed Motor 2
Adjusts the rotation speed of the drive motor left in the buffer pass unit
(M379).
[1000 to 2500 / 1232.5 / 0.1 rpm]
1807* Flip Setting
001 Flip Point
Selects the activating timing (length between the edge of the exit junction
gate and feeding paper) of the exit junction gate.
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1]
0: 5 mm, 1: 6.5 mm, 2: 7.5 mm, 3: 8.5 mm, 4: 9.5 mm, 5: 10.5 mm
1808* Tab Bleeding
001 Bleeding Position
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: TAB Shift Mode, 1: Full TAB Printing Mode
SM Appendix 4-39 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 3 Rev. 01/11/2011
⇒ 1901* Air Separator Setting
Selects the air blowing method for the air separator option.
0: No air blowing, 1: Normal air blowing
101 Plain: Weight 1
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
102 Plain: Weight 2
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
103 Plain: Weight 3
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
104 Plain: Weight 4
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
105 Plain: Weight 5
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
106 Plain: Weight 6
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
107 Plain: Weight 7
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
109 Matte: Weight 2
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
110 Matte: Weight 3
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
111 Matte: Weight 4
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
112 Matte: Weight 5
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-40 SM Appendix
Rev. 01/11/2011 System SP1-xxx: 3
⇒ 113 Matte: Weight 6
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
114 Matte: Weight 7
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
116 Glossy: Weight 2
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
117 Glossy: Weight 3
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
118 Glossy: Weight 4
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Appendix:
119 Glossy: Weight 5
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
120 Glossy: Weight 6
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
121 Glossy: Weight 7
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
122 Envelope: Weight 5
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
123 Envelope: Weight 6
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
124 Envelope: Weight 7
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
201 Air Separator: ON/OFF
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
SM Appendix 4-41 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 3
202 Air Blow Starting Time:normal speed
Specifies the air blowing timing.
[0 to 342 / 25 / 1 msec]
203 Air Blow Starting Time:slowdown
Specifies the air blowing timing.
[0 to 440 / 25 / 1 msec]
204 Air Blow Duration Time:normal speed
Specifies the air blowing time.
[0 to 322 / 50 / 1 msec]
205 Air Blow Duration Time:slowdown
Specifies the air blowing time.
[0 to 414 / 50 / 1 msec]
206 Air Release Time
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 msec]
207 Air Pressure Time
Specifies the air release time.
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 msec]
208 Air Release Waiting Time
Specifies the air release time.
[0 to 10 / 30 / 1 msec]
1902* Cleaning Web Setting
001 Web Consumption
Displays the web consumption rate.
[0 to 107 / 0 / 1%]
002 Web Motor Interval
[3 to 130 / 11.3 / 0.1 sec]
D095/M077 4-42 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 3
003 Web Motor Rotation Time
[0.3 to 3.5 / 5.0 / 0.1 sec]
004 Web Near End Setting
[0 to 100 / 81 / 1 %]
006 Web Near End/End Clear
Clears the near end and end counter.
007 Correction Coeff alpha
[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01]
008 Web Motor Rotation
[0 to 30 / 6 / 1]
Appendix:
009 Thermopile Value
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 200 / 200 / 1°C]
011 Web Motor Rotation:1st Power On
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1]
012 Duplex Correction
[0.01 to 1 / 0.77 / 0.01]
1903* Web Drive Time
001 Web: Total Page Counter
[0 to 999,999,999 / - / 1 sec]
002 Web: Total Motor Rotation Time
[0 to 25.5 / 0 / 0.1 sec]
SM Appendix 4-43 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 3
1904* Web Feed Interval
101 Plain:Weight 1
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
102 Plain:Weight 2
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
103 Plain:Weight 3
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
104 Plain:Weight 4
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
105 Plain:Weight 5
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
106 Plain:Weight 6
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
107 Plain:Weight 7
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
109 Matte:Weight 2
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
110 Matte:Weight 3
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
111 Matte:Weight 4
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
112 Matte:Weight 5
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
D095/M077 4-44 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 3
113 Matte:Weight 6
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
114 Matte:Weight 7
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
116 Glossy:Weight 2
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
117 Glossy:Weight 3
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
118 Glossy:Weight 4
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
119 Glossy:Weight 5
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
120 Glossy:Weight 6
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
121 Glossy:Weight 7
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
122 Envelope:Weight 5
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
123 Envelope:Weight 6
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
124 Envelope:Weight 7
[0.01 to 3 / 1 / 0.01]
SM Appendix 4-45 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 4
4.4 SYSTEM SP1-XXX: 4
1905* Nip Width Setting
Selects the position of the pressure roller.
1 < 2 < 3 < 4 (Strongest pressure)
101 Plain:Weight 1
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
102 Plain:Weight 2
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
103 Plain:Weight 3
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
104 Plain:Weight 4
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
105 Plain:Weight 5
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
106 Plain:Weight 6
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
107 Plain:Weight 7
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
109 Matte:Weight 2
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
110 Matte:Weight 3
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
111 Matte:Weight 4
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
D095/M077 4-46 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 4
112 Matte:Weight 5
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
113 Matte:Weight 6
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
114 Matte:Weight 7
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
116 Glossy:Weight 2
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
Glossy:Weight 3
117
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
Appendix:
Glossy:Weight 4
Program
Service
Mode
118
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
Glossy:Weight 5
119
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
Glossy:Weight 6
120
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
Glossy:Weight 7
121
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
Envelope:Weight 5
122
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
Envelope:Weight 6
123
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
Envelope:Weight 7
124
[1 to 4 / 4 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-47 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 4
201 Pressure Position1
Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller lift motor for the position 1.
[0 to 10000 / 638 / 1 msec.]
202 Pressure Position2
Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller lift motor for the position 2.
[0 to 10000 / 1145 / 1 msec.]
203 Pressure Position3
Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller lift motor for the position 3.
[0 to 10000 / 1651 / 1 msec.]
204 Pressure Position4
Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller lift motor for the position 4.
[0 to 10000 / 2802 / 1 msec.]
1906* De-curler Setting
002 Default Position:Lower Path
[–3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
003 Default Position:Upper Path
[–3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
004 Line Speed Adjust:Default Pos
[–2.5 to 12.5 / 0 / 0.5%]
005 Line Speed Adjust:Pos.1
[–2.5 to 12.5 / 2 / 0.5%]
006 Line Speed Adjust:Pos.2
[–2.5 to 12.5 / 3 / 0.5%]
D095/M077 4-48 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 4
007 Line Speed Adj:Slow Down1:Def
Specifies the line speed rate of the decurl unit for the normal curl mode in
the slowdown mode.
[–2.5 to 12.5 / 0 / 0.5%]
008 Line Speed Adj:Slow Down1:Pos1
Specifies the line speed rate of the decurl unit for the weak curl mode in the
slowdown mode.
[–2.5 to 12.5 / 2 / 0.5%]
009 Line Speed Adj:Slow Down1:Pos2
Specifies the line speed rate of the decurl unit for the strong curl mode in
the slowdown mode.
[–2.5 to 12.5 / 3 / 0.5%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
1907* Fusin Motor Rotation
001 Fusing Motor Rotation Control
[678.8 to 1584 / 980 / 0.1 rpm]
SM Appendix 4-49 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 4
1908* Erase Margin Adj Leading Edge:Air
These SPs are designed for implementing paper separation of various
paper types at the fusing exit.
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
008 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
009 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
010 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
011 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
D095/M077 4-50 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 4
012 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
013 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
014 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
015 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
016 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Appendix:
017 Glossy:Weight 5
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
018 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
019 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
020 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
021 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
022 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
SM Appendix 4-51 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 4
1909* Fusing Mtr Rotation Correct
These SPs correct the rotation of the fusing motor for each paper type.
101 Plain:Weight 1
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
102 Plain:Weight 2
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
103 Plain:Weight 3
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
104 Plain:Weight 4
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
105 Plain:Weight 5
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
106 Plain:Weight 6
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
107 Plain:Weight 7
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
109 Matte:Weight 2
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
110 Matte:Weight 3
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
111 Matte:Weight 4
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
112 Matte:Weight 5
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
D095/M077 4-52 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 4
113 Matte:Weight 6
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
114 Matte:Weight 7
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
116 Glossy:Weight 2
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
Glossy:Weight 3
117
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
Glossy:Weight 4
118
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
Appendix:
Glossy:Weight 5
Program
Service
Mode
119
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
Glossy:Weight 6
120
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
Glossy:Weight 7
121
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
Envelope:Weight 5
122
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
Envelope:Weight 6
123
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
Envelope:Weight 7
124
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1% /step]
SM Appendix 4-53 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
4.5 SYSTEM SP1-XXX: 5
1911* Dbl-Feed Comp Std Value
001 Last
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
002 Last2
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
003 Last3
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
004 Last4
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
005 Last5
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
1912 CIS LED Power Adjustment
001 Execute
Executes the LED power adjustment of the CIS.
1913* CIS LED Adj. Result Displ
001 PWM Duty
[0 x 00 to 0 x AA / 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-54 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
1914* CIS P Pass Pixel Display
001 Main U Tray:LEdge1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
002 Main U Tray:LEdge2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
003 Main U Tray:LEdge3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
004 Main U Tray:LShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
005 Main U Tray:LShift2
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
006 Main U Tray:LShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
007 Main U Tray:TShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
008 Main U Tray:TShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
009 Main U Tray:TShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
010 Main L Tray:LEdge1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
011 Main L Tray:LEdge2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
SM Appendix 4-55 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
012 Main L Tray:LEdge3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
013 Main L Tray:LShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
014 Main L Tray:LShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
015 Main L Tray:LShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
016 Main L Tray:TShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
017 Main L Tray:TShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
018 Main L Tray:TShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
019 A4LCT U Tray:LEdge1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
020 A4LCT U Tray:LEdge2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
021 A4LCT U Tray:LEdge3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
022 A4LCT U Tray:LShift1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
023 A4LCT U Tray:LShift2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
D095/M077 4-56 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
024 A4LCT U Tray:LShift3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
025 A4LCT U Tray:TShift1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
026 A4LCT U Tray:TShift2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
027 A4LCT U Tray:TShift3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
028 A4LCT M Tray:LEdge1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
Appendix:
029 A4LCT M Tray:LEdge2 (M077 only)
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
030 A4LCT M Tray:LEdge3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
031 A4LCT M Tray:LShift1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
032 A4LCT M Tray:LShift2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
033 A4LCT M Tray:LShift3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
034 A4LCT M Tray:TShift1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
035 A4LCT M Tray:TShift2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
SM Appendix 4-57 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
036 A4LCT M Tray:TShift3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
037 A4LCT L Tray:LEdge1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
038 A4LCT L Tray:LEdge2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
039 A4LCT L Tray:LEdge3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
040 A4LCT L Tray:LShift1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
041 A4LCT L Tray:LShift2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
042 A4LCT L Tray:LShift3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
043 A4LCT L Tray:TShift1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
044 A4LCT L Tray:TShift2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
045 A4LCT L Tray:TShift3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
046 By-Pass Tray:LEdge1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
047 By-Pass Tray:LEdge2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
D095/M077 4-58 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
048 By-Pass Tray:LEdge3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
049 By-Pass Tray:LShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
050 By-Pass Tray:LShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
051 By-Pass Tray:LShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
052 By-Pass Tray:TShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
Appendix:
053 By-Pass Tray:TShift2
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
054 By-Pass Tray:TShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
055 A3LCT1 U Tray:LEdge1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
056 A3LCT1 U Tray:LEdge2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
057 A3LCT1 U Tray:LEdge3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
058 A3LCT1 U Tray:LShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
059 A3LCT1 U Tray:LShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
SM Appendix 4-59 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
060 A3LCT1 U Tray:LShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
061 A3LCT1 U Tray:TShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
062 A3LCT1 U Tray:TShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
063 A3LCT1 U Tray:TShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
064 A3LCT1 L Tray:LEdge1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
065 A3LCT1 L Tray:LEdge2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
066 A3LCT1 L Tray:LEdge3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
067 A3LCT1 L Tray:LShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
068 A3LCT1 L Tray:LShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
069 A3LCT1 L Tray:LShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
070 A3LCT1 L Tray:TShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
D095/M077 4-60 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
071 A3LCT1 L Tray:TShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
072 A3LCT1 L Tray:TShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
073 A3LCT2 U Tray:LEdge1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
074 A3LCT2 U Tray:LEdge2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
075 A3LCT2 U Tray:LEdge3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
076 A3LCT2 U Tray:LShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
077 A3LCT2 U Tray:LShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
078 A3LCT2 U Tray:LShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
079 A3LCT2 U Tray:TShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
080 A3LCT2 U Tray:TShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
081 A3LCT2 U Tray:TShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
SM Appendix 4-61 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
082 A3LCT2 L Tray:LEdge1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
083 A3LCT2 L Tray:LEdge2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
084 A3LCT2 L Tray:LEdge3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
085 A3LCT2 L Tray:LShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
086 A3LCT2 L Tray:LShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
087 A3LCT2 L Tray:LShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
088 A3LCT2 L Tray:TShift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
089 A3LCT2 L Tray:TShift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
090 A3LCT2 L Tray:TShift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
091 Back:LEdge1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
092 Back:LEdge2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
093 Back:LEdge3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
D095/M077 4-62 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
094 Back:LE_Shift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
095 Back:LE_Shift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
096 Back:LE_Shift3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
097 Back:TE_Shift1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
098 Back:TE_Shift2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
Appendix:
099 Back:TE_Shift3
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
1915* CIS P Pass Pixel: Stndrd Displ
001 Tray 1: 1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
002 Tray 1: 2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
003 Tray 1: 3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
004 Tray 2: 1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
005 Tray 2: 2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
SM Appendix 4-63 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
006 Tray 2: 3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
007 A4 LCT: Upper Tray: 1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
008 A4 LCT: Upper Tray: 2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
009 A4 LCT: Upper Tray: 3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
010 A4 LCT: Middle Tray: 1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
011 A4 LCT: Middle Tray: 2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
012 A4 LCT: Middle Tray: 3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
013 A4 LCT: Lower Tray: 1 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
014 A4 LCT: Lower Tray: 2 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
015 A4 LCT: Lower Tray: 3 (M077 only)
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
016 By-pass Tray: 1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
017 By-pass Tray: 2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
D095/M077 4-64 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
018 By-pass Tray: 3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
019 A3 LCT1: Upper Tray: 1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
020 A3 LCT1: Upper Tray: 2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
021 A3 LCT1: Upper Tray: 3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
022 A3 LCT1: Lower Tray: 1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
Appendix:
023 A3 LCT1: Lower Tray: 2
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
024 A3 LCT1: Lower Tray: 3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
025 A3 LCT2: Upper Tray: 1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
026 A3 LCT2: Upper Tray: 2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
027 A3 LCT2: Upper Tray: 3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
028 A3 LCT2: Lower Tray: 1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
029 A3 LCT2: Lower Tray: 2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
SM Appendix 4-65 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
030 A3 LCT2: Lower Tray: 3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
031 Back 1
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
032 Back 2
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
033 Back 3
[0 to 1216 / 0 / 1 dot]
1916* CIS LED Power Magnification
001 Variable Magnification
[1 to 5 / 1.61 / 0.01 ]
1917* Skew Detect
001 Thresh Adj
[0.1 to 10 / 3 / 0.1 mm]
1918* Double-feed Detect
001 Thresh Adj:M1
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1%]
002 Thresh Adj:M2
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1%]
003 Thresh Adj:M3
[0 to 100 / 5 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-66 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
1920* Wide LCT Fan Duty Adj
001 A3LCT:UTray Tray3
[1 to 100 / 70 / 1%]
002 A3LCT: Tray4
[1 to 100 / 70 / 1%]
003 A3LCT: Tray5
[1 to 100 / 70 / 1%]
004 A3LCT: Tray6
[1 to 100 / 70 / 1%]
1921* Wide LCT Fan Start Time Setting
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
001 A3LCT:UTray Tray3
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]
002 A3LCT:UTray Tray4
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]
003 A3LCT:UTray Tray5
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]
004 A3LCT:UTray Tray6
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec]
SM Appendix 4-67 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
1922* Wide LCT Fan ON/OFF Setting
001 A3LCT:UTray Tray3
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Auto, 1: ON, 2: OFF
002 A3LCT:UTray Tray4
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Auto, 1: ON, 2: OFF
003 A3LCT:UTray Tray5
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Auto, 1: ON, 2: OFF
004 A3LCT:UTray Tray6
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Auto, 1: ON, 2: OFF
1923* WideLCT Pickup Assist ON/OFF
001 A3LCT:UTray Tray3
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Auto, 1: ON, 2: OFF
002 A3LCT:UTray Tray4
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Auto, 1: ON, 2: OFF
003 A3LCT:UTray Tray5
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Auto, 1: ON, 2: OFF
004 A3LCT:UTray Tray6
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Auto, 1: ON, 2: OFF
D095/M077 4-68 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
1924* LCT Paper Select
Selects the coated paper setting or uncoated paper setting for each paper
type.
001 Special 1
For special paper 1
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Uncoated paper setting
1: Coated paper setting
002 Special 2
For special paper 2
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Uncoated paper setting
1: Coated paper setting
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
003 Special 3
For special paper 3
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Uncoated paper setting
1: Coated paper setting
004 Special 4
For special paper 4
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Uncoated paper setting
1: Coated paper setting
005 Special 5
For special paper 5
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Uncoated paper setting
1: Coated paper setting
SM Appendix 4-69 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
006 Special 6
For special paper 6
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Uncoated paper setting
1: Coated paper setting
1940* Stand-by Setting
001 Fusing Fan 5-6
[0 to 1270 / 0 / 1min]
002 Fusing Fan 1-3
[0 to 1270 / 0 / 1min]
003 Ozone Fan:YMCK
[0 to 1270 / 56 / 1min]
004 Development Fan:YMCK
[0 to 1270 / 56 / 1min]
005 Black PCDU Fan
[0 to 1270 / 0 / 1min]
006 Fusing Fan 4
[0 to 1270 / 0 / 1min]
007 Fusing Exhaust Fan 1-3
[0 to 1270 / 0 / 1min]
008 Cooling Unit Fan
[0 to 60 / 1 / 1min]
D095/M077 4-70 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
1941* Stand-by:Execute Setting
001 Fusing Fan 5-6
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
002 Fusing Fan 1-3
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
003 Ozone Fan:YMCK
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
004 Development Fan:YMCK
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
005 Black PCDU Fan
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
006 Fusing Fan 5-6:Half Speed
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
007 Fusing Exhaust Fan 1-3:Half Speed
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
008 Fusing Fan 4
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
SM Appendix 4-71 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
009 Fusing Exhaust Fan 1-3
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
010 Fusing Fan 4:Half Speed
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
011 Fusing Exhaust Fan 1-3:Half Speed
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
1942* Fan drive:Execute Setting
001 Cooling Unit Fan
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1]
0: FAN OFF, 1: Paper Weight, FAN ON
1950* Control Selection
001 Line Speed Fine Adjustment
Turns on or off the line speed adjustment in the sub scan direction.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
002 Auto Paper Feed Out Mode
Turns on or off the automatic purge mode at the paper jam removal.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
D095/M077 4-72 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
1971* Erase Margin Adj Trailing Edge
101 Plain:Weight 1
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm]
102 Plain:Weight 2
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm]
103 Plain:Weight 3
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
104 Plain:Weight 4
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm]
105 Plain:Weight 5
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
106 Plain:Weight 6
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
107 Plain:Weight 7
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
108 Glossy:Weight 2
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm]
SM Appendix 4-73 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
109 Glossy:Weight 3
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm]
110 Glossy:Weight 4
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm]
111 Glossy:Weight 5
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
112 Glossy:Weight 6
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
113 Glossy:Weight 7
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
114 Matte:Weight 2
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm]
115 Matte:Weight 3
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm]
116 Matte:Weight 4
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm]
D095/M077 4-74 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
117 Matte:Weight 5
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
118 Matte:Weight 6
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
119 Matte:Weight 7
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
120 Envelope:Weight 5
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
Appendix:
Program
Service
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Mode
121 Envelope:Weight 6
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
122 Envelope:Weight 7
Specifies the erase margin for the paper trailing edge.
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
SM Appendix 4-75 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
1978* LCT Tray Fan ON/OFF 2
Turns on or off the LCT tray fan for each paper.
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
009 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
010 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
011 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
012 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
D095/M077 4-76 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
013 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
014 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
016 Matte:Weight 2
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
017 Matte:Weight 3
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
018 Matte:Weight 4
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
Appendix:
019 Matte:Weight 5
Program
Service
Mode
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
020 Matte:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
021 Matte:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
022 Label:Weight 1
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
023 Label:Weight 2
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
024 Label:Weight 3
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
025 Label:Weight 4
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
SM Appendix 4-77 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
026 Label:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
027 Label:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
028 Label:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
033 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
034 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
035 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
1979* LCT Tray Fan ON/OFF 2
Turns on or off the pickup roller assist for each paper.
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
D095/M077 4-78 SM Appendix
System SP1-xxx: 5
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
009 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
010 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
011 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
012 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
013 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
014 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
016 Matte:Weight 2
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
017 Matte:Weight 3
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
SM Appendix 4-79 D095/M077
System SP1-xxx: 5
018 Matte:Weight 4
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
019 Matte:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
020 Matte:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
021 Matte:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
026 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
027 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
028 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
D095/M077 4-80 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
4.6 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 1
4.6.1 SP2-XXX DRUM: 1
2101* Color Interval Registration Adjustment
001 Main Scan Dot:BK
[-99 to 99 / 0 / 1 dot]
002 Main Scan Dot:C
[-99 to 99 / 0 / 1 dot]
003 Main Scan Dot:M
[-99 to 99 / 0 / 1 dot]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
004 Main Scan Dot:Y
[-99 to 99 / 0 / 1 dot]
005 Main Scan:Bk:Sub-Dot
[-31 to 31 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
006 Main Scan:Bk-C:Sub-Dot
[-31 to 31 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
007 Main Scan:Bk-Y:Sub-Dot
[-31 to 31 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
008 Main Scan:Bk-M:Sub-Dot
[-31 to 31 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
013 SubScan Line:BK
[-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 X8line]
014 SubScan Line:BK
[-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 X8line]
SM Appendix 4-81 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
015 Sub Scan:Bk-C:Line
[-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 X8line]
016 Sub Scan:Bk-M:Line
[-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 X8line]
017 Sub Scan:Bk-C:Drum Motor Adj
[-200 to 200 / 0 / 1 m]
018 Sub Scan:Bk-M:Drum Motor Adj
[-200 to 200 / 0 / 1 m]
019 Sub Scan:Bk-Y:Drum Motor Adj
[-200 to 200 / 0 / 1 m]
020 Sensor Offset 1
[-200 to 200 / 0 / 1 m]
Sensor Offset 2
021
[-200 to 200 / 0 / 1 m]
D095/M077 4-82 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
2102* LD Channel Interval Adj
030 Bk LD-X1:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
031 Bk LD-X2:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
032 Bk LD-X3:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
033 Bk LD-X4:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
034 Bk LD-X5:Main Scan
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
035 Bk LD-X6:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
036 Bk LD-D:Main Scan
[-99 to 99 / 0 / 1 m]
040 C LD-X1:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
041 C LD-X2:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
042 C LD-X3:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
SM Appendix 4-83 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
043 C LD-X4:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
044 C LD-X5:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
045 C LD-X6:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
046 C LD-D:Main Scan
[-99 to 99 / 0 / 1 m]
050 M LD-X1:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
051 M LD-X2:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
052 M LD-X3:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
053 M LD-X4:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
054 M LD-X5:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
055 M LD-X6:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
056 M LD-D:Main Scan
[-99 to 99 / 0 / 1 m]
060 Y LD-X1:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
D095/M077 4-84 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
061 Y LD-X2:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
062 Y LD-X3:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
063 Y LD-X4:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
064 Y LD-X5:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
065 Y LD-X6:Main Scan
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 m]
Appendix:
066 Y LD-D:Main Scan
Program
Service
Mode
[-99 to 99 / 0 / 1 m]
2103* Print Magnification Adjustment DFU
001 Bk LD0:Main Scan Mag TBL-No
[-1500 to 1500 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
002 Bk LD1:Main Scan Mag TBL-No
[-1500 to 1500 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
005 M LD0:Main Scan Mag TBL-No
[-1500 to 1500 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
006 M LD1:Main Scan Mag TBL-No
[-1500 to 1500 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
009 C LD0:Main Scan Mag TBL-No
[-1500 to 1500 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
SM Appendix 4-85 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
010 C LD1:Main Scan Mag TBL-No
[-1500 to 1500 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
013 Y LD0:Main Scan Mag TBL-No
[-1500 to 1500 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
014 Y LD1:Main Scan Mag TBL-No
[-1500 to 1500 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
2104* Skew Adjustment Display
001 Bk-C
[-150 to 150 / 0 / 1 pulse]
002 Bk-M
[-150 to 150 / 0 / 1 pulse]
003 Bk-Y
[-150 to 150 / 0 / 1 pulse]
004 Bk
-150 to 150 / 0 / 1 pulse]
2105* LD Initial Power Adj
001 Bk LD0
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
002 Bk LD1
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
003 Bk LD2
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
004 Bk LD3
D095/M077 4-86 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
005 Bk LD4
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
006 Bk LD5
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
007 Bk LD6
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
008 Bk LD7
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
009 C LD0
Appendix:
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
Program
Service
Mode
010 C LD1
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
011 C LD2
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
012 C LD3
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
013 C LD4
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
014 C LD5
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
015 C LD6
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
016 C LD7
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
SM Appendix 4-87 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
017 M LD0
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
018 M LD1
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
019 M LD2
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
020 M LD3
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
021 M LD4
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
022 M LD5
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
023 M LD6
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
024 M LD7
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
025 Y LD0
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
026 Y LD1
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
027 Y LD2
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
028 Y LD3
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
029 Y LD4
D095/M077 4-88 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
030 Y LD5
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
031 Y LD6
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
032 Y LD7
[32 to 255 / 128 / 1 dec]
2108 Specify Color Stop
Specifies disabled colors in a test pattern.
0: Printed, 1: Not printed
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
001 Bk
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
002 C
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 M
[[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
004 Y
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
SM Appendix 4-89 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
2109 Write Test Pattern
001 Image Add (Not used)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ]
002 Select Pattern
[0 to 36 / 0 / 1 ]
0: No Pattern 19: Trim Area
1: 1-dot Grid Line: ch0 20: 100% Coverage
2: 1-dot Grid Line: ch1 21: Vertical Cross-stitch
3: 1-dot Grid Line: ch2 22: Horizontal Cross-stitch
4: 1-dot Grid Line: ch3 23: Hori. Cross-Stitch 012
5: 1-dot Grid Line: ch4 24: Hori. Cross-Stitch 670
6: 1-dot Grid Line: ch5 25: Horizontal Belt
7: 1-dot Grid Line: ch6 26: Vertical Belt
8: 1-dot Grid Line: ch7 27: Checkered Flag
9: 20 mm Grid 28: Stair
10: Slant Grid Pattern 29: Hori. Grayscale 20mm
11: 1-dot Horizontal Line 30: Hori. G-scale 20mm-wht Boards
12: 1-dot Vertical Lint 31: Hori. Grayscale 40mm-1
13: 2-dot Horizontal Line 32: Hori. Grayscale 40mm-2
14: 2-dpt Vertical Line 33: LP Ch. Power Adjst 1
15: 1-dot Independent 34: LP Ch. Power Adjst 2
16: 2-dot Independent 35: LP Ch. Power Adjst 3
17: 4-dot Independent 36: LP Ch. Power Adjst 4
18: Crop Marks
D095/M077 4-90 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
004 Select Color:KCMY
[[0 x 00 to 0 x 0F / 0 x 0F / 1]
Selects color for test pattern from bit3, bit2, bit1 or bit0.
Bit3: Bk, Bit2: C, Bit1: M. Bit0: Y
005 Density:BK
[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 ]
006 Density:C
[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 ]
007 Density:M
[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 ]
008 Density:Y
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 ]
011 Grey Density 1
[0 to 15 / 1 / 1 ]
012 Grey Density 2
[0 to 15 / 2 / 1 ]
013 Grey Density 3
[0 to 15 / 3 / 1 ]
014 Grey Density 4
[0 to 15 / 4 / 1 ]
015 Grey Density 5
[0 to 15 / 5 / 1 ]
016 Grey Density 6
[0 to 15 / 6 / 1 ]
017 Grey Density 7
[0 to 15 / 7 / 1 ]
SM Appendix 4-91 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
018 Grey Density 8
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 ]
019 Grey Density 9
[0 to 15 / 9 / 1 ]
020 Grey Density 10
[0 to 15 / 10 / 1 ]
021 Grey Density 11
[0 to 15 / 11 / 1 ]
022 Grey Density 12
[0 to 15 / 12 / 1 ]
023 Grey Density 13
[0 to 15 / 13 / 1 ]
024 Grey Density 14
[0 to 15 / 14 / 1 ]
025 Grey Density 15
[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 ]
D095/M077 4-92 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
2110 ITB Check
001 F-ID Sensor Detection Time
Displays the detection times for scratches and dents on the front side of the
ITB.
[0 x 00 to 0 x 0F / 0 / 1]
002 C-ID Sensor Detection Time
Displays the detection times for scratches and dents on the center position
of the ITB.
[0 x 00 to 0 x 0F / 0 / 1]
003 R-ID Sensor Detection Time
Displays the detection times for scratches and dents on the rear side of the
Appendix:
ITB.
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
004 Execute
Executes the ITB condition check.
[0 x 00 to 0 x 0F / 0 / 1]
005* Error Thresh Value
[0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.1 V]
SM Appendix 4-93 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
2111* Erase Margin Adj
001 Leading Edge
[0 to 9 / 4 / 0.1 mm]
002 Trailing Edge
[0 to 9 / 2.5 / 0.1 mm]
003 Front Side
[0 to 9 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm]
004 Rear Side
[0 to 9 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm]
005 Leading Edge:No Air
Specifies the erase margin for the leading edge without the air separation
option.
[0 to 9 / 5.0 / 0.1 mm]
D095/M077 4-94 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
2113* Side-to-Side Regist Adj
001 Main U Tray
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 Main L Tray
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
004 A4 LCT1 Upper Tray (M077 only)
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
005 A4 LCT1 Middle Tray (M077 only)
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
006 A4 LCT1 Lower Tray (M077 only)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
007 Bypass Tray
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
008 A3 LCT1 Upper Tray
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
009 A3 LCT1 Lower Tray
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
010 A3 LCT2 Upper Tray
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
011 A3 LCT2 Lower Tray
[–10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
SM Appendix 4-95 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
2115* LDB Interval Mag. Adj
001 Bk-A
[–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 m]
Bk-B
002
[–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 m]
Ma-A1
003
[–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 m]
Ma-B1
004
[–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 m]
Cy-A
005
[–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 m]
Cy-B
006
[–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 m]
Ye-A1
007
[–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 m]
Ye-B1
008
[–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 m]
D095/M077 4-96 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
2117 Skew Adj Setting Reset
001 Reset Skew Motor C Setting
Executes the skew motor reset for Cyan.
002 Reset Skew Motor M Setting
Executes the skew motor reset for Magenta.
003 Reset Skew Motor Y Setting
Executes the skew motor reset for Yellow.
004 Reset Skew Motor K Setting
[Executes the skew motor reset for Black.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
2118 Skew Adjustment Execute
001 Execute Skew Motor C Adj
Executes the skew motor adjustment for Cyan.
002 Execute Skew Motor M Adj
Executes the skew motor adjustment for Magenta.
003 Execute Skew Motor Y Adj
Executes the skew motor adjustment for Yellow.
004 Execute Skew Motor K Adj
Executes the skew motor adjustment for Black.
SM Appendix 4-97 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
2119 Skew Adj Value Display
001 Skew Motor C
[–100 to 100 / 0 / 1 pulse]
002 Skew Motor M
[–100 to 100 / 0 / 1 pulse]
003 Skew Motor Y
[–100 to 100 / 0 / 1 pulse]
004 Skew Motor K
[–100 to 100 / 0 / 1 pulse]
2130* LD Beam Adjustment
001 BK LD0
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
002 BK LD1
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
003 BK LD2
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
004 BK LD3
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
005 BK LD4
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
006 BK LD5
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
007 BK LD6
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
D095/M077 4-98 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
008 BK LD7
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
009 C LD0
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
010 C LD1
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
011 C LD2
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
012 C LD3
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
Appendix:
013 C LD4
Program
Service
Mode
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
014 C LD5
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
015 C LD6
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
016 C LD7
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
017 M LD0
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
018 M LD1
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
019 M LD2
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
020 M LD3
SM Appendix 4-99 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
021 M LD4
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
022 M LD5
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
023 M LD6
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
024 M LD7
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
025 Y LD0
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
026 Y LD1
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
027 Y LD2
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
028 Y LD3
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
029 Y LD4
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
030 Y LD5
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
031 Y LD6
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
032 Y LD7
[350 to 800 / 560 / 1 W]
D095/M077 4-100 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
2149* Adjust LR density difference
001 Bk
[–5 to 5 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
002 C
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
003 M
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
004 Y
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
2150* Area Mag. Pulse Adj
001 Bk LD0-1:Area0
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
002 Bk LD0-1:Area1
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
003 Bk LD0-1:Area2
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
004 Bk LD0-1:Area3
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
005 Bk LD0-1:Area4
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
006 Bk LD0-1:Area5
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
007 Bk LD0-1:Area6
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
SM Appendix 4-101 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
008 Bk LD0-1:Area7
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
009 Bk LD0-1:Area8
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
081 M LD0-1:Area0
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
082 M LD0-1:Area1
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
083 M LD0-1:Area2
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
084 M LD0-1:Area3
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
085 M LD0-1:Area4
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
086 M LD0-1:Area5
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
087 M LD0-1:Area6
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
088 M LD0-1:Area7
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
089 M LD0-1:Area8
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
161 C LD0-1:Area0
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
162 C LD0-1:Area1
D095/M077 4-102 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 1
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
163 C LD0-1:Area2
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
164 C LD0-1:Area3
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
165 C LD0-1:Area4
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
166 C LD0-1:Area5
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
167 C LD0-1:Area6
Appendix:
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
Program
Service
Mode
168 C LD0-1:Area7
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
169 C LD0-1:Area8
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
241 Y LD0-1:Area0
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
242 Y LD0-1:Area1
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
243 Y LD0-1:Area2
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
244 Y LD0-1:Area3
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
245 Y LD0-1:Area4
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
SM Appendix 4-103 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 1
246 Y LD0-1:Area5
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
247 Y LD0-1:Area6
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
248 Y LD0-1:Area7
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
249 Y LD0-1:Area8
[–120 to 120 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
D095/M077 4-104 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
4.7 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 2
2151* Adjusted Shading Coeff
001 Bk LD0-1 Area01
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
002 Bk LD0-1 Area02
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
003 Bk LD0-1 Area03
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
004 Bk LD0-1 Area04
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
005 Bk LD0-1 Area05
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
006 Bk LD0-1 Area06
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
007 Bk LD0-1 Area07
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
008 Bk LD0-1 Area08
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
009 Bk LD0-1 Area09
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
010 Bk LD0-1 Area10
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
011 Bk LD0-1 Area11
SM Appendix 4-105 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
012 Bk LD0-1 Area12
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
013 Bk LD0-1 Area13
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
014 Bk LD0-1 Area14
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
015 Bk LD0-1 Area15
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
031 C LD0-1 Area01
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
032 C LD0-1 Area02
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
033 C LD0-1 Area03
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
034 C LD0-1 Area04
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
035 C LD0-1 Area05
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
036 C LD0-1 Area06
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
037 C LD0-1 Area07
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
038 C LD0-1 Area08
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
D095/M077 4-106 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
039 C LD0-1 Area09
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
040 C LD0-1 Area10
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
041 C LD0-1 Area11
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
042 C LD0-1 Area12
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
043 C LD0-1 Area13
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
Appendix:
044 C LD0-1 Area14
Program
Service
Mode
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
045 C LD0-1 Area15
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
061 M LD0-1 Area01
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
062 M LD0-1 Area02
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
063 M LD0-1 Area03
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
064 M LD0-1 Area04
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
065 M LD0-1 Area05
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
066 M LD0-1 Area06
SM Appendix 4-107 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
067 M LD0-1 Area07
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
068 M LD0-1 Area08
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
069 M LD0-1 Area09
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
070 M LD0-1 Area10
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
071 M LD0-1 Area11
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
072 M LD0-1 Area12
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
073 M LD0-1 Area13
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
074 M LD0-1 Area14
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
075 M LD0-1 Area15
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
091 Y LD0-1 Area01
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
092 Y LD0-1 Area02
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
093 Y LD0-1 Area03
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
D095/M077 4-108 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
094 Y LD0-1 Area04
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
095 Y LD0-1 Area05
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
096 Y LD0-1 Area06
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
097 Y LD0-1 Area07
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
098 Y LD0-1 Area08
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
Appendix:
099 Y LD0-1 Area09
Program
Service
Mode
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
100 Y LD0-1 Area10
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
101 Y LD0-1 Area11
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
102 Y LD0-1 Area12
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
103 Y LD0-1 Area13
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
104 Y LD0-1 Area14
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
105 Y LD0-1 Area15
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
SM Appendix 4-109 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
2152* Shading Coeff
001 Bk LD0-1 Area01
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
002 Bk LD0-1 Area02
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
003 Bk LD0-1 Area03
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
004 Bk LD0-1 Area04
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
005 Bk LD0-1 Area05
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
006 Bk LD0-1 Area06
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
007 Bk LD0-1 Area07
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
008 Bk LD0-1 Area08
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
009 Bk LD0-1 Area09
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
010 Bk LD0-1 Area10
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
011 Bk LD0-1 Area11
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
012 Bk LD0-1 Area12
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
D095/M077 4-110 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
013 Bk LD0-1 Area13
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
014 Bk LD0-1 Area14
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
015 Bk LD0-1 Area15
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
031 C LD0-1 Area01
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
032 C LD0-1 Area02
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
Appendix:
033 C LD0-1 Area03
Program
Service
Mode
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
034 C LD0-1 Area04
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
035 C LD0-1 Area05
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
036 C LD0-1 Area06
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
037 C LD0-1 Area07
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
038 C LD0-1 Area08
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
039 C LD0-1 Area09
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
040 C LD0-1 Area10
SM Appendix 4-111 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
041 C LD0-1 Area11
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
042 C LD0-1 Area12
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
043 C LD0-1 Area13
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
044 C LD0-1 Area14
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
045 C LD0-1 Area15
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
061 M LD0-1 Area01
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
062 M LD0-1 Area02
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
063 M LD0-1 Area03
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
064 M LD0-1 Area04
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
065 M LD0-1 Area05
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
066 M LD0-1 Area06
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
067 M LD0-1 Area07
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
D095/M077 4-112 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
068 M LD0-1 Area08
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
069 M LD0-1 Area09
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
070 M LD0-1 Area10
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
071 M LD0-1 Area11
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
072 M LD0-1 Area12
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
Appendix:
073 M LD0-1 Area13
Program
Service
Mode
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
074 M LD0-1 Area14
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
075 M LD0-1 Area15
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
091 Y LD0-1 Area01
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
092 Y LD0-1 Area02
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
093 Y LD0-1 Area03
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
094 Y LD0-1 Area04
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
095 Y LD0-1 Area05
SM Appendix 4-113 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
096 Y LD0-1 Area06
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
097 Y LD0-1 Area07
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
098 Y LD0-1 Area08
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
099 Y LD0-1 Area09
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
100 Y LD0-1 Area10
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
101 Y LD0-1 Area11
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
102 Y LD0-1 Area12
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
103 Y LD0-1 Area13
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
104 Y LD0-1 Area14
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
105 Y LD0-1 Area15
[50 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
2153 MUSIC Condition Settings 1
001 Manual Execute:Mode a
[Execute]
D095/M077 4-114 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
002 Manual Execute:Mode b
[Execute]
004 Manual Execute:Mode c
[Execute]
010 Sensor Error Adjust Mode
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
020* Sensor Power Adj 1
[0 to 1023 / 400 / 1]
021* Sensor Power Adj 2
[0 to 1023 / 400 / 1]
Appendix:
022* Sensor Power Adj 3
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1023 / 400 / 1]
2180 Line Position Adj. Setting Clear
001 Color Regist.
[Execute]
003 MUSIC Result
[Execute]
004 Area Magnification Correction : C
[Execute]
005 Area Magnification Correction : M
[Execute]
006 Area Magnification Correction : Y
[Execute]
007 Main Mag. TBL
SM Appendix 4-115 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
[Execute]
2181* Position Alignment Result DFU
001 Bk LD0 2-Point Syn Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
002 Bk LD0 Mag Correct
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
003 Bk LD1 2-Point Syn Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
004 Bk LD1 Mag Correct
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
008 C Sub Skew Left
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
009 C Sub Skew Center
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
010 C Sub Skew Right
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
011 C Skew Amt
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
012 C Main Skew Amt
[–20 to 20 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
013 C LDO 2-Point Syn Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
014 C LD0 Mag Correct
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
D095/M077 4-116 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
015 C LD1 2-Point Syn Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
016 C LD1 Mag Correct
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
017 C Left Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
018 C Right Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
019 C Sub Scan:Line Corr
[–29 to 29 / 0 / 1 x8 lines]
Appendix:
020 C Sub Scan:Sub Line Corr
Program
Service
Mode
[–200 to 200 / 0 / 1 m]
021 C Main Scan:Dot Skew Amt
[–500 to 500 / 0 / 1 dot]
024 M Sub Skew Left
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
025 M Sub Skew Center
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
026 M Sub Skew Right
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
027 M Skew Amt
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
028 M Main Skew Amt
[–20 to 20 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
029 M LDO 2-Point Syn Mag
SM Appendix 4-117 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
[–32767 to 32767 /0 / 1 sub-dot]
030 M LD0 Mag Correct
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
031 M LD1 2-Point Syn Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
032 M LD1 Mag Correct
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
033 M Left Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
034 M Right Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
035 M Sub Scan:Line Corr
[–29 to 29 / 0 / 1 x8 lines]
036 M Sub Scan:Sub Line Corr
[–200 to 200 / 0 / 1 m]
037 M Main Scan:Dot Skew Amt
[–500 to 500 / 0 / 1 dot]
040 Y Sub Skew Left
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
041 Y Sub Skew Center
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
042 Y Sub Skew Right
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
043 Y Skew Amt
[–10000 to 10000 / 0 / 0.1 m]
D095/M077 4-118 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
044 Y Main Skew Amt
[–20 to 20 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
045 Y LDO 2-Point Syn Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
046 Y LD0 Mag Correct
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
047 Y LD1 2-Point Syn Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
048 Y LD1 Mag Correct
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
Appendix:
049 Y Left Mag
Program
Service
Mode
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
050 Y Right Mag
[–32767 to 32767 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
051 Y Sub Scan:Line Corr
[–29 to 29 / 0 / 1 x8 lines]
052 Y Sub Scan:Sub Line Corr
[–200 to 200 / 0 / 1 m]
053 Y Main Scan:Dot Skew Amt
[–500 to 500 / 0 / 1 dot]
SM Appendix 4-119 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
2182* Color Regist Adj:Sub Offset DFU
022 C
[–50 to 50 / - / 1 x8 lines]
028 M
[–50 to 50 / - / 1 x8 lines]
034 Y
[–50 to 50 / - / 1 x8 lines]
2183 Main Scan Length Detection Execute DFU
001 BkLD0
[Execute]
002 BkLD1
[Execute]
004 MLD0
[Execute]
005 MLD1
[Execute]
007 CLD0
[Execute]
008 CLD1
[Execute]
010 YLD0
[Execute]
011 YLD1
[Execute]
D095/M077 4-120 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
2184 Main Scan Length Detection Target Execute
001 Std Value:Bk
[Execute]
002 Std Value:M
[Execute]
003 Std Value:C
[Execute]
004 Std Value:Y
[Execute]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
2185* 2-Point Std Val Display DFU
001 Bk LD0
[0 to 300000 / 261543 / 1 sub-dot]
002 Bk LD1
[0 to 300000 / 261543 / 1 sub-dot]
003 M LD0
[0 to 300000 / 261543 / 1 sub-dot]
004 M LD1
[0 to 300000 / 261543 / 1 sub-dot]
005 C LD0
[0 to 300000 / 261543 / 1 sub-dot]
006 C LD1
[0 to 300000 / 261543 / 1 sub-dot]
007 Y LD0
[0 to 300000 / 261543 / 1 sub-dot]
SM Appendix 4-121 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
008 Y LD1
[0 to 300000 / 261543 / 1 sub-dot]
2186* 2-Point Synchronizing
001 Selection
Enables or disables the 2-point synchronizing.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
002 Paper Interval
Specifies the interval for the 2-point synchronizing during job.
[0 to 999 / 1 / 1 sec]
003 Paper Interval Corr: ON/ OFF
Selects the method of the 2-point synchronizing during job.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: D-Phase correction, 1: PLL, D-Phase correction
2190* Line Position Adj. DFU
Turns the magnification correction for each area on or off.
001 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: Bk
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
002 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: C
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
003 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: M
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
004 Paper Int. Mag.: Subdot: Y
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
005 M. Scan Mag.: Subdot: C
D095/M077 4-122 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
006 M. Scan Mag.: Subdot: M
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
007 M. Scan Mag.: Subdot: Y
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
008 Area Mag.: Subdot: C
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
009 Area Mag.: Subdot: M
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
010 Area Mag.: Subdot: Y
Appendix:
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
Program
Service
Mode
011 Area Mag.: Subdot: Bk
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
2191* Line Position Adj. Offset DFU
001 C Mag Adj
[–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%]
M Mag Adj
002
[–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%]
003 Y Mag Adj
[–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%]
004 C Main Regist
[–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot]
005 M Main Regist
[–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot]
SM Appendix 4-123 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
006 Y Main Regist
[–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot]
007 C Main Regist
[–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
008 M Main Regist
[–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
009 Y Main Regist
[–15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot]
2193* MUSIC Condition Settings 3
001 Auto Execution
Turns the automatic MUSIC execution on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: Off, 1: On
002 Page: Job End: BW+FC
[0 to 4000 / 3000 / 1 page]
003 Page: Job End: FC
[0 to 4000 / 2000 / 1 page]
004 Page: Interrupt: BW+FC
[0 to 4000 / 2000 / 1 page]
005 Page: Interrupt: FC
[0 to 4000 / 2000 / 1 page]
006 Page: Interrupt: BW
[0 to 4000 / 2000 / 1 page]
007 Page: Interrupt: FC
[0 to 4000 / 2000 / 1 page]
008 MUSIC Thresh:Temp Change
D095/M077 4-124 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
[0 to 100 / 2 / 1°C]
009 MUSIC Thresh:Elapsed Time
[1 to 1440 / 30 / 1 min]
010 MUSIC Thresh:Mag Change
[0 to 10 / 1 / 0.1%]
011 MUSIC Thresh:Temp Change 2
[0 to 100 / 5 / 1°C]
012 MUSIC Thresh:Elapsed Time 2
[1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 min]
013 MUSIC Thresh:Temp Change 3
Appendix:
[0 to 100 / 2 / 1°C]
Program
Service
Mode
014 MUSIC Thresh:Elapsed Time 3
[1 to 1440 / 5 / 1 min]
SM Appendix 4-125 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
2194* MUSIC Execution Result
001 Year
[2006 to 2050 / 2006 / 1 ]
Month
002
[1 to 12 / 4 / 1 ]
Day
003
[1 to 31 / 1 / 1 ]
Hour
004
[0 to 24 / 1 / 1 ]
Minute
005
[0 to 59 / 0 / 1 ]
Temperature
006
[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 ]
Execution Result
007 Displays the result of the MUSIC adjustment.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 ] 0: Success, 1: Failure
Number of Execution
008
[0 to 65500 / 0 / 1 ]
Number of Failure
009
[0 to 999 / 0 / 1 ]
C Error Counter
010 Displays the result of MUSIC for cyan. For details, see "MUSIC Adjustment
Result" under "Troubleshooting" chapter in the Field Service Manual.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 ]
011 M Error Counter
D095/M077 4-126 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
Displays the result of MUSIC for magenta. For details, see "MUSIC
Adjustment Result" under "Troubleshooting" chapter in the Field Service
Manual.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 ]
Y Error Counter
Displays the result of MUSIC for yellow. For details, see "MUSIC
012 Adjustment Result" under "Troubleshooting" chapter in the Field Service
Manual.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 ]
2195* Procon Coeff DFU
001 Bk LD0-1
[60 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
C LD0-1
003
[60 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
M LD0-1
005
[60 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
Y LD0-1
007
[60 to 150 / 100 / 0.1%]
SM Appendix 4-127 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
2196* Procon Correct Coeff DFU
009 Bk LD0-1
[20 to 255 / 70 / 0.1%]
011 C LD0-1
[20 to 255 / 70 / 0.1%]
013 M LD0-1
[20 to 255 / 70 / 0.1%]
015 Y LD0-1
[20 to 255 / 70 / 0.1%]
2197* LD DRV Setting DFU
001 Max Voltage
[0.1 to 1 / 0.8 / 0.01V]
002 Adj Voltage
[0.1 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01V]
003 Adj Value
[1 to 255 / 48 / 1 dec]
2201* Set Charge Grid DFU
001 K
[–999 to 0 / –700 / 1V]
002 C
[–999 to 0 / –700 / 1V]
003 M
[–999 to 0 / –700 / 1V]
D095/M077 4-128 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
004 Y
[–999 to 0 / –700 / 1V]
2202* Set Charge Current DFU
001 K
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1 A]
002 C
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1 A]
003 M
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1 A]
004 Y
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1 A]
2203* Charge Current: Display
Displays the current of the charge corona unit for each color.
001 K
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1 A]
002 C
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1 A]
003 M
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1 A]
004 Y
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1 A]
SM Appendix 4-129 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
2212* Set Dev DC DFU
001 Std Speed: K
[–800 to 0 / –500 / 1 V]
002 Std Speed: C
[–800 to 0 / –500 / 1 V]
003 Std Speed:M
[–800 to 0 / –500 / 1 V]
004 Std Speed:Y
[–800 to 0 / –500 / 1 V]
2213* Set LD Power DFU
001 Std Speed: K
[60 to 150 / 100 / 1%]
002 Std Speed: C
[60 to 150 / 100 / 1%]
003 Std Speed:M
[60 to 150 / 100 / 1%]
004 Std Speed:Y
[60 to 150 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-130 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
2215* Reciprocity Compensation DFU
001 Corr Amt K
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 dec]
002 Corr Amt C
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 dec]
003 Corr Amt M
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 dec]
004 Corr Amt Y
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 dec]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
2251* Force Tnr Supply
001 Execute:K
002 Execute:C
003 Execute:M
004 Execute:Y
005 Execute:Col
006 Execute:All Col
007 Manual Execute:ON Time
[2 to 510 / 100 / 2 msec]
008 Manual Execute:OFF Time
[2 to 510 / 200 / 2 msec]
009 Manual Execute:Repeat Times
[1 to 10 / 8 / 1 time]
SM Appendix 4-131 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
2252* Set Tnr Supply
001 Supply Times:K
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 time]
002 Supply Times:C
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 time]
003 Supply Times:M
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 time]
004 Supply Times:Y
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 time]
2253 Toner Fill
When executing SP2-253-001 to -006, make sure the following conditions;
1. Fist, turn off and on the machine after opening the front left or right
door.
2. Make sure that the target color toner bottle is installed and the toner
hopper cover is close.
3. Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP2-253-xxx.
001 Manual Execute:K
Executes the manual toner supplement for Black.
002 Manual Execute:C
Executes the manual toner supplement for Cyan.
003 Manual Execute:M
Executes the manual toner supplement for Magenta.
004 Manual Execute:Y
Executes the manual toner supplement for Yellow.
005 Manual Execute:Col
D095/M077 4-132 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 2
Executes the manual toner supplement for Color (YMC).
006 Manual Execute:All Col
Executes the manual toner supplement for all color.
007* Fill Time:K
Specifies the time for the manual toner filling for black (SP2253-001).
[0 to 200 / 120 / 1 sec]
008* Fill Time:Col
Specifies the time for the manual toner filling for color (SP2253-002 to
-006).
[0 to 200 / 120 / 1 sec]
2255 Developer Exhaust
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
001 Select Color:KCMY
[0 x 00 to 0 x 0F / 0x00 / -]
002 Execute
Executes the developer exhaust mode.
009* Result:K
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Failure, 1: Success
010* Result:C
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Failure, 1: Success
011* Result:M
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Failure, 1: Success
012* Result:Y
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Failure, 1: Success
SM Appendix 4-133 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 2
2256 Developer Fill
001 Select Color:KCMY
[0x00 to 0x0F / 0x00 / 1]
002 Execute
Executes the developer filling mode.
009* Result:K
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Failure, 1: Success
010* Result:C
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Failure, 1: Success
011* Result:M
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Failure, 1: Success
012* Result:Y
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Failure, 1: Success
D095/M077 4-134 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 3
4.8 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 3
2260 Pot.Sn Check
001 Execute: All Col
Execute the potential sensor check for the all drums (YMCK).
The result of this check can be confirmed with SP2261.
002 Execute:K
Execute the potential sensor check for the black drum.
The result of this check can be confirmed with SP2261-001.
003 Execute:C
Execute the potential sensor check for the cyan drum.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
The result of this check can be confirmed with SP2261-002.
004 Execute:M
Execute the potential sensor check for the magenta drum.
The result of this check can be confirmed with SP2261-003.
005 Execute:Y
Execute the potential sensor check for the yellow drum.
The result of this check can be confirmed with SP2261-004.
SM Appendix 4-135 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 3
2261* Pot.Sn Chk Disp
001 Vd:K
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V]
002 Vd:C
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V]
003 Vd:M
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V]
004 Vd:Y
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V]
2264 ID Sn Chk
001 Execute Chk
Executes the ID sensor check. The result of this check is displayed in
SP3-121-001.
2281* Image Coverage Rate:Displ
001 Last Page: K
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01%]
002 Last Page: C
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01%]
003 Last Page: M
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01%]
004 Last Page: Y
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01%]
D095/M077 4-136 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 3
2304* Env Correct:Set Temp Thresh DFU
001 Abs Humid:Thresh 1
[0 to 63 / 2.5 / 0.01 g/m3]
002 Abs Humid:Thresh 2
[0 to 63 / 5 / 0.01 g/m3]
003 Abs Humid:Thresh 3
[0 to 63 / 8.4 / 0.01 g/m3]
004 Abs Humid:Thresh 4
[0 to 63 / 15 / 0.01 g/m3]
005 Abs Humid:Thresh 5
Appendix:
[0 to 63 / 24 / 0.01 g/m3]
Program
Service
Mode
2310* Vltg Monitor Execution Set DFU
001 At Initialization
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
002 Set At Recovery
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
003 At Job End
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
2311* Manual Lubrication Exe
001 ITB Cleaning
[Execute]
SM Appendix 4-137 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 3
2322* Vltg Measure Result DFU
Next Update SP No
100
[1 to 5 / 1 / - ]
101 PTR:1
[0 to 10 / - / 0.01 kV]
102 PTR:2
[0 to 10 / - / 0.01 kV]
103 PTR:3
[0 to 10 / - / 0.01 kV]
104 PTR:4
[0 to 10 / - / 0.01 kV]
105 PTR:5
[0 to 10 / - / 0.01 kV]
110 Next Update SP No.
[1 to 5 / 1 / - ]
111 Paper Changed:PTR:1
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
112 Paper Changed:PTR:2
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
113 Paper Changed:PTR:3
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
114 Paper Changed:PTR:4
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
115 Paper Changed:PTR:5
D095/M077 4-138 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 3
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
120 Next Update SP No.
[1 to 30 / 1 / - ]
121 Per Page:PTR:1
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
122 Per Page:PTR:2
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
123 Per Page:PTR:3
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
124 Per Page:PTR:4
Appendix:
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
Program
Service
Mode
125 Per Page:PTR:5
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
126 Per Page:PTR:6
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
127 Per Page:PTR:7
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
128 Per Page:PTR:8
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
129 Per Page:PTR:9
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
130 Per Page:PTR:10
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
131 Per Page:PTR:11
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
SM Appendix 4-139 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 3
132 Per Page:PTR:12
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
133 Per Page:PTR:13
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
134 Per Page:PTR:14
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
135 Per Page:PTR:15
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
136 Per Page:PTR:16
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
137 Per Page:PTR:17
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
138 Per Page:PTR:18
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
139 Per Page:PTR:19
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
140 Per Page:PTR:20
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
141 Per Page:PTR:21
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
142 Per Page:PTR:22
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
143 Per Page:PTR:23
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
144 Per Page:PTR:24
D095/M077 4-140 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 3
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
145 Per Page:PTR:25
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
146 Per Page:PTR:26
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
147 Per Page:PTR:27
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
148 Per Page:PTR:28
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
149 Per Page:PTR:29
Appendix:
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
Program
Service
Mode
150 Per Page:PTR:30
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
2324* Resist Coeff ON/OFF DFU
002 PTR
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
SM Appendix 4-141 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 3
2325* Current Resist Level Disp DFU
100 Next Update SP No.
[1 to 5 / - / 1 ]
101 PTR:1 Display the environmental resist level.
102 PTR:2
103 PTR:3
104 PTR:4
105 PTR:5
2326* Current Resist Range Disp DFU
Displays the current resist range for PTR.
011 PTR:1
[0 to 6 / 3 / - ]
012 PTR:2
[0 to 6 / 3 / - ]
013 PTR:3
[0 to 6 / 3 / - ]
014 PTR:4
[0 to 6 / 3 / - ]
015 PTR:5
[0 to 6 / 3 / - ]
2327* Feedback:Current Disp DFU
100 Next Update SP No
[1 to 5 / 1 / - ]
D095/M077 4-142 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 3
101 PTR:1
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1]
102 PTR:2
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
103 PTR:3
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
104 PTR:4
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
105 PTR:5
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
Appendix:
110 Next Update SP No.
Program
Service
Mode
[1 to 5 / 1 / - ]
111 Paper Changed:PTR:1
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
112 Paper Changed:PTR:2
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
113 Paper Changed:PTR:3
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
114 Paper Changed:PTR:4
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
115 Paper Changed:PTR:5
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
120 Next Update SP No.
[1 to 30 / 1 / - ]
121 Per Page:PTR:1
SM Appendix 4-143 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 3
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
122 Per Page:PTR:2
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
123 Per Page:PTR:3
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
124 Per Page:PTR:4
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
125 Per Page:PTR:5
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
126 Per Page:PTR:6
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
127 Per Page:PTR:7
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
128 Per Page:PTR:8
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
129 Per Page:PTR:9
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
130 Per Page:PTR:10
[-300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
131 Per Page:PTR:11
132 Per Page:PTR:12
133 Per Page:PTR:13
134 Per Page:PTR:14
135 Per Page:PTR:15
136 Per Page:PTR:16
D095/M077 4-144 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 3
137 Per Page:PTR:17
138 Per Page:PTR:18
139 Per Page:PTR:19
140 Per Page:PTR:20
141 Per Page:PTR:21
142 Per Page:PTR:22
143 Per Page:PTR:23
144 Per Page:PTR:24
145 Per Page:PTR:25
146 Per Page:PTR:26
Appendix:
147 Per Page:PTR:27
Program
Service
Mode
148 Per Page:PTR:28
149 Per Page:PTR:29
150 Per Page:PTR:30
SM Appendix 4-145 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 3
2329* Resist Correct:Std Current DFU
050 Margin 1 Bk
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
051 Margin 1 FC
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
052 Margin 2 Bk
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
053 Margin 2 FC
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
2330* Environment Level Disp DFU
100 Next Update SP Num
[1 to 5 / 1 / - ]
101 Current:PTR 1
Display environmental
102 Current:PTR 2
Display environmental
103 Current:PTR 3
Display environmental
104 Current:PTR 4
Display environmental
105 Current:PTR 5
Display environmental
200 Next Update SP Num
[1 to 5 / 1 / - ]
D095/M077 4-146 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 3
201 Paper Changed:PTR 1
Display environmental
202 Paper Changed:PTR 2
Display environmental
203 Paper Changed:PTR 3
Display environmental
204 Paper Changed:PTR 4
Display environmental
205 Paper Changed:PTR 5
Display environmental
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
2331* Environment Range Disp DFU
100 Next Update SP Num
[1 to 5 / 1 / - ]
101 Current:PTR 1
[1 to 6 / 4 / - ]
102 Current:PTR 2
[1 to 6 / 4 / - ]
103 Current:PTR 3
[1 to 6 / 4 / - ]
104 Current:PTR 4
[1 to 6 / 4 / - ]
105 Current:PTR 5
[1 to 6 / 4 / - ]
200 Next Update SP Num
SM Appendix 4-147 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 3
[1 to 5 / 1 / - ]
201 Paper Changed:PTR 1
[1 to 6 / 4 / - ]
202 Paper Changed:PTR 2
[1 to 6 / 4 / - ]
203 Paper Changed:PTR 3
[[1 to 6 / 4 / - ]
204 Paper Changed:PTR 4
[1 to 6 / 4 / - ]
205 Paper Changed:PTR 5
[1 to 6 / 4 / - ]
2334* Set R Thresh:LLL DFU
001 R Thresh1:PTR
[0 to 10 / 1.33 / 0.01 kV]
002 R Thresh2:PTR
[0 to 10 / 1.87 / 0.01 kV]
003 R Thresh3:PTR
[0 to 10 / 3.13 / 0.01 kV]
004 R Thresh4:PTR
[0 to 10 / 4.8 / 0.01 kV]
005 R Thresh5:PTR
[0 to 10 / 5.2 / 0.01 kV]
D095/M077 4-148 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 3
2335* Set R Thresh:LL DFU
001 R Thresh1:PTR
[0 to 10 / 1 / 0.01 kV]
002 R Thresh2:PTR
[0 to 10 / 1.33 / 0.01 kV]
003 R Thresh3:PTR
[0 to 10 / 2.2 / 0.01 kV]
004 R Thresh4:PTR
[0 to 10 / 3.8 / 0.01 kV]
005 R Thresh5:PTR
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 10 / 5.2 / 0.01 kV]
2336* Set R Thresh:ML DFU
001 R Thresh1:PTR
[0 to 10 / 0.73 / 0.01 kV]
002 R Thresh2:PTR
[0 to 10 / 1.0 / 0.01 kV]
003 R Thresh3:PTR
[0 to 10 / 1.6 / 0.01 kV]
004 R Thresh4:PTR
[0 to 10 / 2.93 / 0.01 kV]
005 R Thresh5:PTR
[0 to 10 / 4.93 / 0.01 kV]
SM Appendix 4-149 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 3
2337* Set R Thresh: MM DFU
001 R Thresh1:PTR
[0 to 10 / 0.73 / 0.01 kV]
002 R Thresh2:PTR
[0 to 10 / 1.0 / 0.01 kV]
003 R Thresh3:PTR
[0 to 10 / 1.6 / 0.01 kV]
004 R Thresh4:PTR
[0 to 10 / 2.93 / 0.01 kV]
005 R Thresh5:PTR
[0 to 10 / 4 / 0.01 kV]
2338* Set R Thresh:MH DFU
001 R Thresh1:PTR
[0 to 10 / 0.4 / 0.01 kV]
002 R Thresh2:PTR
[0 to 10 / 0.53 / 0.01 kV]
003 R Thresh3:PTR
[0 to 10 / 0.93 / 0.01 kV]
004 R Thresh4:PTR
[0 to 10 / 1.53 / 0.01 kV]
005 R Thresh5:PTR
[0 to 10 / 2.53 / 0.01 kV]
D095/M077 4-150 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 3
2339* Set R Thresh:MH DFU
001 R Thresh1:PTR
[0 to 10 / 0.33 / 0.01 kV]
002 R Thresh2:PTR
[0 to 10 / 0.47 / 0.01 kV]
003 R Thresh3:PTR
[0 to 10 / 0.67 / 0.01 kV]
004 R Thresh4:PTR
[0 to 10 / 1.07 / 0.01 kV]
005 R Thresh5:PTR
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 10 / 1.73 / 0.01 kV]
SM Appendix 4-151 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 3
2340* R Coeff:PTR
Adjusts the resist rate for the paper transfer roller.
001 R-3
[50 to 255 / 225 / 1%]
002 R-2
[50 to 255 / 225 / 1%]
003 R-1
[50 to 255 / 200 / 1%]
004 R-0
[50 to 255 / 180 / 1%]
005 R+1
[50 to 255 / 170 / 1%]
006 R+2
[50 to 255 / 160 / 1%]
006 R+3
[50 to 255 / 140 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-152 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
4.9 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 4
2370* Paper Type Range Disp DFU
Next Update SP Num
100
[1 to 5 / 1 / 1 ]
Paper Changed:PTR 1
101
[0 to 11 / 0 / 1]
Paper Changed:PTR 2
102
[0 to 11 / 0 / 1]
Paper Changed:PTR 3
Appendix:
103
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 11 / 0 / 1]
Paper Changed:PTR 4
104
[0 to 11 / 0 / 1]
Paper Changed:PTR 5
105
[0 to 11 / 0 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-153 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
2371* Paper Type Range Disp DFU
Next Update SP Num
100
[1 to 5 / 1 / 1]
Paper Changed:PTR 1
101
[0 to 5 / 1 / 1]
Paper Changed:PTR 2
102
[0 to 5 / 1 / 1]
Paper Changed:PTR 3
103
[0 to 5 / 1 / 1]
Paper Changed:PTR 4
104
[0 to 5 / 1 / 1]
Paper Changed:PTR 5
105
[0 to 5 / 1 / 1]
2372* Eng Spd Coeff DFU
90ppm
001
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
70ppm
002
[50 to 200 / 78 / 1%]
Line Speed 2
003
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-154 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
2380* Env Coeff:PTR
LLL:Bk:1st
001
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
LLL:Bk:2nd
002
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
LLL:FCk:1st
003
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
LLL:FC:2nd
004
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
LLL:Non Image
Appendix:
Program
Service
005
Mode
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
LL:Bk:1st
011
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
LL:Bk:2nd
012
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
LL:FCk:1st
013
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
LL:FC:2nd
014
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
LL:Non Image
015
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
ML:Bk:1st
021
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-155 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
ML:Bk:2nd
022
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
ML:FCk:1st
023
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
ML:FC:2nd
024
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
ML:Non Image
025
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
MM:Bk:1st
031
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
MM:Bk:2nd
032
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
MM:FCk:1st
033
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
MM:FC:2nd
034
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
MM:Non Image
035
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
MH:Bk:1st
041
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
MH:Bk:2nd
042
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
MH:FCk:1st
043
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-156 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
MH:FC:2nd
044
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
MH:Non Image
045
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
HH:Bk:1st
051
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
HH:Bk:2nd
052
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
HH:FCk:1st
053
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Appendix:
HH:FC:2nd
Program
Service
Mode
054
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
HH:Non Image
055
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-157 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
2401* Bk:Bias Setting DFU
Image Transfer:Image Area 1
001
[0 to 150 / 60 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Margin 1
002
[0 to 150 / 60 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Margin 2
005
[0 to 150 / 60 / 1 A]
PTR
007
[–400 to 0 / –80 / 1 A]
2402* PTR Bias Display
Main U Tray:Front
001
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
Main U Tray:Back
002
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
Main L Tray:Front
003
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
Main L Tray:Back
004
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
A4 LCT U Tray:Front (M077 only)
007
[–300 to 0 / - / 1 A]
A4 LCT U Tray:Back (M077 only)
008
[–300 to 0 / - / 1 A]
A4 LCT M Tray:Front (M077 only)
009
[–300 to 0 / - / 1 A]
D095/M077 4-158 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
A4 LCT M Tray:Back (M077 only)
010
[–300 to 0 / - / 1 A]
A4 LCT L Tray:Front (M077 only)
011
[–300 to 0 / - / 1 A]
A4 LCT L Tray:Back (M077 only)
012
[–300 to 0 / - / 1 A]
Bypass Tray:Front
013
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
Bypass Tray:Back
014
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
Appendix:
A3 LCT1 U Tray:Front
Program
Service
Mode
015
[–300 to 0 / 0- / 1 A]
A3 LCT1 U Tray:Back
016
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
A3 LCT1 L Tray:Front
017
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
A3 LCT1 L Tray:Back
018
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
A3 LCT2 U Tray:Front
019
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
A3 LCT2 U Tray:Back
020
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
A3 LCT2 L Tray:Front
021
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
SM Appendix 4-159 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
A3 LCT2 L Tray:Back
022
[–300 to 0 / 0 / 1 A]
2405* FC:Bias Setting:Y DFU
Image Transfer:Image Area 1
001
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Margin 1
002
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Monitor Current
003
[0 to 150 / 50 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Procon
004
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Margin 2
007
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
2406* FC:Bias Setting:M DFU
Image Transfer:Image Area 1
001
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Margin 1
002
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Monitor Current
003
[0 to 150 / 50 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Procon
004
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
007 Image Transfer:Margin 2
D095/M077 4-160 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
2407* FC:Bias Setting:C DFU
Image Transfer:Image Area 1
001
[0 to 150 / 50 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Margin 1
002
[0 to 150 / 50 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Monitor Current
003
[0 to 150 / 50 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Procon
004
[0 to 150 / 50 / 1 A]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Image Transfer:Margin 2
007
[0 to 150 / 50 / 1 A]
2408* FC:Bias Setting:K DFU
Image Transfer:Image Area 1
001
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Margin 1
002
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Monitor Current
003
[0 to 150 / 50 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Procon
004
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
Image Transfer:Margin 2
007
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
SM Appendix 4-161 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
2411* Correction ON/OFF DFU
Image Transfer:Corr All
001 [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: ON, 1: OFF
2412* Resist Coeff:ITB DFU
Threshold Page Setting
001
[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 page]
Last Environment Range
002
[0 to 200 / 0 / 1 page]
2416* Env Corr:ITransfer:Separation DFU
Abs Humid:Thresh1
001
[0 to 63 / 2.5 / 0.01 g/m3]
Abs Humid:Thresh2
002
[0 to 63 / 5 / 0.01 g/m3]
Abs Humid:Thresh3
003
[0 to 63 / 8.4 / 0.01 g/m3]
Abs Humid:Thresh4
004
[0 to 63 / 15 / 0.01 g/m3]
Abs Humid:Thresh5
005
[0 to 63 / 24 / 0.01 g/m3]
D095/M077 4-162 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
2417* Image Transfer Bias
LEdge ON Timing
001
[0 to 100 / 10 / 2 msec]
LEdge OFF Timing
002
[0 to 100 / 10 / 2 msec]
2420* Set R Thresh:LLL DFU
R Thresh1:ITB
001
[0 to 10 / 1.35 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh2:ITB
002
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 10 / 1.65 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh3:ITB
003
[0 to 10 / 2.15 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh4:ITB
004
[0 to 10 / 3.45 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh5:ITB
005
[0 to 10 / 6 / 0.01 kV]
SM Appendix 4-163 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
2421* Set R Thresh:LL DFU
R Thresh1:ITB
001
[0 to 10 / 1.35 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh2:ITB
002
[0 to 10 / 1.65 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh3:ITB
003
[0 to 10 / 2.15 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh4:ITB
004
[0 to 10 / 3.45 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh5:ITB
005
[0 to 10 / 6 / 0.01 kV]
2422* Set R Thresh:ML DFU
R Thresh1:ITB
001
[0 to 10 / 1.35 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh2:ITB
002
[0 to 10 / 1.65 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh3:ITB
003
[0 to 10 / 2.15 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh4:ITB
004
[0 to 10 / 3.45 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh5:ITB
005
[0 to 10 / 6 / 0.01 kV]
D095/M077 4-164 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
2423* Set R Thresh:MM DFU
R Thresh1:ITB
001
[0 to 10 / 1.35 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh2:ITB
002
[0 to 10 / 1.65 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh3:ITB
003
[0 to 10 / 2.15 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh4:ITB
004
[0 to 10 / 3.45 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh5:ITB
Appendix:
Program
Service
005
Mode
[0 to 10 / 6 / 0.01 kV]
2424* Set R Thresh:MH DFU
R Thresh1:ITB
001
[0 to 10 / 1.35 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh2:ITB
002
[0 to 10 / 1.65 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh3:ITB
003
[0 to 10 / 2.15 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh4:ITB
004
[0 to 10 / 3.45 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh5:ITB
005
[0 to 10 / 6 / 0.01 kV]
SM Appendix 4-165 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
2425* Set R Thresh:HH DFU
R Thresh1:ITB
001
[0 to 10 / 1.35 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh2:ITB
002
[0 to 10 / 1.65 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh3:ITB
003
[0 to 10 / 2.15 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh4:ITB
004
[0 to 10 / 3.45 / 0.01 kV]
R Thresh5:ITB
005
[0 to 10 / 6 / 0.01 kV]
2428* TEdge Cor DFU
Uncoated Thick3 Front:Bk:PTR
211
[0 to 250 / NA: 80, EU: 100 / 1%]
Uncoated Thick3 Front:FC:PTR
213
[0 to 250 / NA: 80, EU: 100 / 1%]
Special4 Thick3 Front:Bk:PTR
239
[0 to 250 / 100 / 1%]
Special4 Thick3 Front:FC:PTR
241
[0 to 250 / 100 / 1%]
Special5 Thick3 Front:Bk:PTR
243
[0 to 250 / 100 / 1%]
Special5 Thick3 Front:FC:PTR
245
[0 to 250 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-166 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
Special6 Thick3 Front:Bk:PTR
247
[0 to 250 / 100 / 1%]
Special6 Thick3 Front:FC:PTR
249
[0 to 250 / 100 / 1%]
2449* Env Correction:Display
001 Temperature:Sn K
[0 to 100 / - / 1°C]
002 R-Humidity:Sn K
[0 to 100 / - / 1%RH]
003 A-Humidity:Sn K
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 63 / - / 1 g/m3]
004 Environment Display:Sn K
Display the environmental range.
005 Temperature:Sn Y
[0 to 100 / - / 1°C]
006 R-Humidity:Sn Y
[0 to 100 / - / 1%RH]
007 A-Humidity:Sn Y
[0 to 63 / - / 1 g/m3]
008 Environment Display:Sn Y
Display the environmental range.
SM Appendix 4-167 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
2450* Resist Coeff:ITB DFU
001 R-2:Image Area 1:BK
[10 to 200 / 116 / 1%]
002 R-1:Image Area 1:BK
[10 to 200 / 108 / 1%]
003 R0:Image Area 1:BK
[10 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
004 R+1:Image Area 1:BK
[10 to 200 / 95 / 1%]
005 R+2:Image Area 1:BK
[10 to 200 / 90 / 1%]
006 R+3:Image Area 1:BK
[10 to 200 / 80 / 1%]
101 R-2:Image Area 1:FC
[10 to 200 / 116 / 1%]
102 R-1:Image Area 1:FC
[10 to 200 / 108 / 1%]
103 R0:Image Area 1:FC
[10 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
R+1:Image Area 1:FC
104
[10 to 200 / 95 / 1%]
R+2:Image Area 1:FC
105
[10 to 200 / 90 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-168 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
R+3:Image Area 1:FC
106
[10 to 200 / 80 / 1%]
R-2:Procon 1:FC
107
[10 to 200 / 116 / 1%]
R-1:Procon 1:FC
108
[10 to 200 / 108 / 1%]
R0:Procon 1:FC
109
[10 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
R+1:Procon 1:FC
110
[10 to 200 / 95 / 1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
R+2:Procon 1:FC
111
[10 to 200 / 90 / 1%]
R+3:Procon 1:FC
112
[10 to 200 / 80 / 1%]
2451* Vltg Meas Result DFU
001 ITB:Y
[0 to 10 / - / 0.01 kA]
002 ITB:M
[0 to 10 / - / 0.01 kA]
003 ITB:C
[0 to 10 / - / 0.01 kA]
004 ITB:K
[0 to 10 / - / 0.01 kA]
SM Appendix 4-169 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
2452* Vltg Measure:Env DFU
001 Image Transfer:Disp:Sn Y
[ML / MM]
003 I Image Transfer:Disp:Sn K
[ML / MM]
2453* Current Resist Lv Disp DFU
001 IImage Transfer:Y
002 Image Transfer:M
003 Image Transfer:C
004 Image Transfer:K
2457* Vd Meas Result DFU
001 Resist Coeff:ITB:Y
[–1 to 0 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
002 Resist Coeff:ITB:M
[–1 to 0 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
003 Resist Coeff:ITB:C
[–1 to 0 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
004 Resist Coeff:ITB:K
[–1 to 0 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
D095/M077 4-170 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
2458* Vltg Cal Result DFU
001 Resist Coeff:ITB:Y
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
002 Resist Coeff:ITB:M
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
003 Resist Coeff:ITB:C
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
004 Resist Coeff:ITB:K
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.01 kV]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
2470* Env Coeff:LLL
Bk
001
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Bk:Non image
002
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y
011
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:Y:Non image
012
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y:ProCon
013
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-171 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
FC:M
021
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M:Non image
022
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M:ProCon
023
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:C
031
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:C:Non image
032
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:C:ProCon
033
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K
041
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:K:Non image
042
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K:ProCon
043
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-172 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
2471* Env Coeff:LL
Bk
001
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Bk:Non image
002
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y
011
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:Y:Non image
012
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y:ProCon
Appendix:
Program
Service
013
Mode
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M
021
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M:Non image
022
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M:ProCon
023
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:C
031
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:C:Non image
032
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-173 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
FC:C:ProCon
033
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K
041
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:K:Non image
042
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K:ProCon
043
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
2472* Env Coeff:ML
Bk
001
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Bk:Non image
002
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y
011
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:Y:Non image
012
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y:ProCon
013
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M
021
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-174 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
FC:M:Non image
022
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M:ProCon
023
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:C
031
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:C:Non image
032
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:C:ProCon
033
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
FC:K
041
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:K:Non image
042
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K:ProCon
043
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-175 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
2473* Env Coeff:MM
Bk
001
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Bk:Non image
002
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y
011
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:Y:Non image
012
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y:ProCon
013
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M
021
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M:Non image
022
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M:ProCon
023
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:C
031
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:C:Non image
032
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-176 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
FC:C:ProCon
033
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K
041
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:K:Non image
042
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K:ProCon
043
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
2474* Env Coeff:MH
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Bk
001
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Bk:Non image
002
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y
011
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:Y:Non image
012
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y:ProCon
013
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M
021
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-177 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
FC:M:Non image
022
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M:ProCon
023
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:C
031
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:C:Non image
032
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:C:ProCon
033
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K
041
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:K:Non image
042
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K:ProCon
043
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-178 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 4
2475* Env Coeff:HH
Bk
001
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Bk:Non image
002
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y
011
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:Y:Non image
012
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:Y:ProCon
Appendix:
Program
Service
013
Mode
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M
021
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M:Non image
022
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:M:ProCon
023
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:C
031
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:C:Non image
032
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-179 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 4
FC:C:ProCon
033
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K
041
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
BF:K:Non image
042
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
FC:K:ProCon
043
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
2480* Speed Coeff:ITB
001 90ppm
[50 to 130 / 100 / 1%]
002 70ppm
[50 to 130 / 78 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-180 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
4.10 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 5
2500* Correction ON/OFF
001 Separation:Environ
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
2501* Sep:Margin Bias DFU
001 DC:Bias
[0 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 A]
002 AC:Bias
Appendix:
Program
Service
[8 to 12 / 8 / 0.1 kV]
Mode
Separation:Bias
2520*
Adjusts the switch timing of the separation bias.
001 ON Switch Timing
[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 msec]
002 OFF Switch Timing
[0 to 100 / 50 / 1 msec]
SM Appendix 4-181 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
2521* Separation:Env Correction
001 Temp Display:Sensor TR
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1°C]
002 R-Humidity:Sn TR
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH]
003 A-Humidity:Sn TR
[0 to 63 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3]
004 Env Current Level:Sn TR
DFU
2522* Detected Alarm Signal DFU
001 HVPS Leak: ITB
[1 to 50 / 20 / 1 time]
002 HVPS Leak: PTR
[1 to 50 / 50 / 1 time]
003 HVPS Leak: Separation
[1 to 50 / 20 / 1 time]
D095/M077 4-182 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
2530* Env Coeff:DC
2531* Env Coeff:AC
001 LLL:Bk:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
002 LLL:Bk:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
003 LLL:FC:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
004 LLL:FC:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
011 LL:Bk:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
012 LL:Bk:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
013 LL:FC:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
014 LL:FC:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
021 ML:Bk:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
022 ML:Bk:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-183 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
023 ML:FC:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
024 ML:FC:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
031 MM:Bk:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
032 MM:Bk:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
033 MM:FC:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
034 MM:FC:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
041 MH:Bk:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
042 MH:Bk:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
043 MH:FC:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
044 MH:FC:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-184 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
051 HH:Bk:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
052 HH:Bk:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
053 HH:FC:1st
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
054 HH:FC:2nd
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
2535* Sep Length:DC:LEdge
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
2536* Sep Length:DC:TEdge
001 Paper Weight 1
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
002 Paper Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
003 Paper Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
004 Paper Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
005 Paper Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
SM Appendix 4-185 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
006 Paper Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
007 Paper Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
2537* Sep Length:AC:LEdge
2538* Sep Length:AC:TEdge
001 Paper Weight 1
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
002 Paper Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
003 Paper Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
004 Paper Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
005 Paper Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
006 Paper Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
007 Paper Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
D095/M077 4-186 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
2540* Speed Coeff:DC
001 90ppm
[50 to 130 / 100 / 1 %]
002 70ppm
[50 to 130 / 78 / 1 %]
2541* Speed Coeff:AC
001 90ppm
[50 to 130 / 100 / 1 %]
002 70ppm
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[50 to 130 / 78 / 1 %]
2761* Paper Size:Coeff
001 Weight 1:1st
[50 to 600 / 140 / 1%]
002 Weight 2:1st
[50 to 600 / 160 / 1%]
003 Weight 3:1st
[50 to 600 / 165 / 1%]
004 Weight 4:1st
[50 to 600 / 170 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-187 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
005 Weight 5:1st
[50 to 600 / 175 / 1%]
006 Weight 6:1st
[50 to 600 / 180 / 1%]
007 Weight 7:1st
[50 to 600 / 190 / 1%]
2762* Paper Size:Coeff
001 Weight 1:2nd
[50 to 600 / 140 / 1%]
002 Weight 2:2nd
[50 to 600 / 160 / 1%]
003 Weight 3:2nd
[50 to 600 / 165 / 1%]
004 Weight 4:2nd
[50 to 600 / 170 / 1%]
005 Weight 5:2nd
[50 to 600 / 175 / 1%]
006 Weight 6:2nd
[50 to 600 / 180 / 1%]
007 Weight 7:2nd
[50 to 600 / 190 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-188 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
2803 Chg Wire Cleaning
Cleans the charge corona unit for each color.
001 Execute Wire Cleaning K
002 Execute Wire Cleaning C
003 Execute Wire Cleaning M
004 Execute Wire Cleaning Y
2804 Chg Wire Cleaning
001* Execution Timing
[0 to 4 / 1 / -]
Appendix:
0: No Exo, 1: procon Sync, 2: Interval,
Program
Service
Mode
3: Power On & Procon Sync, 4: Power On & Interval
002* Chg Wire Cleaning Int/Dist Execution Interval:K
[100 to 100000 / 3000 / 1 sheet]
003* Chg Wire Cleaning Int/Dist Execution Interval:C
[100 to 100000 / 3000 / 1 sheet]
004* Chg Wire Cleaning Int/Dist Execution Interval:M
[100 to 100000 / 3000 / 1 sheet]
005* Chg Wire Cleaning Int/Dist Execution Interval:Y
[100 to 100000 / 3000 / 1 sheet]
SM Appendix 4-189 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
006* Disp CH Clean Cnt:K
Displays the execution times of the charge cleaning unit K.
[0 to 400000 / 0 / 1]
007* Disp CH Clean Cnt:C
Displays the execution times of the charge cleaning unit C.
[0 to 400000 / 0 / 1]
008* Disp CH Clean Cnt:M
Displays the execution times of the charge cleaning unit M.
[0 to 400000 / 0 / 1]
009* Disp CH Clean Cnt:Y
Displays the execution times of the charge cleaning unit Y.
[0 to 400000 / 0 / 1]
010 Clear CH Clean Cnt:K
Clears the counter for the charge cleaning unit K.
011 Clear CH Clean Cnt:C
Clears the counter for the charge cleaning unit C.
012 Clear CH Clean Cnt:M
Clears the counter for the charge cleaning unit M.
013 Clear CH Clean Cnt:Y
Clears the counter for the charge cleaning unit Y.
014* Environment Range: Power On
Displays the environment range at power-on.
D095/M077 4-190 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
015* Execution Env Range Setting
Select the environment range for the charge corona unit cleaning at
power-on.
[1 to 6 / 6 / -]
1: LLL, 2: LL, 3: ML, 4: MM, 5. MH, 6: HH
2810 Clear blurred img
001 Execute
This SP is used for recovering from blurred image on outputs at first printing
just after turning on the machine.
002 select clear blurred img mode
Appendix:
Selects the execution condition for the clear blurred image mode.
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Clear blurred img always on
1: Clear blurred img HH on
2: Clear blurred img always off
003 execute page
Specifies the interval for the execution of the clear blurred image.
[0 to 9999 / 30 / 1000 pages/1 step]
004 execute time
Specifies the execution time for the clear blurred image mode.
[120 to 360 / 120 / 1 sec.]
005 execute environment
[0 to 100 / 13 / 1 g/m3]
SM Appendix 4-191 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
2812* Job Divide mode
001 Continuous Printing
Specifies the threshold pages for the job divide mode.
The machine will stop operation for 120 seconds (adjustable with
SP2812-004) after the threshold pages are printed.
[0 to 9999 / 2000 / 1 page]
002 Operating Environment
Selects the execution condition for the job divide mode
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Always off
1: On in LLL or LL condition
2: Always on
003 Toner Coverage
Specifies the threshold coverage for the job divide mode.
[0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %]
004 Waiting Time
Specifies the waiting time for the job divide mode.
[0 to 999 / 120 / 1 sec]
D095/M077 4-192 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
2834* LEdge Coeff:On
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
005 Plain:Weight 5
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
SM Appendix 4-193 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
D095/M077 4-194 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 msec.]
2838* TEdge Coeff:On
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
SM Appendix 4-195 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
D095/M077 4-196 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 msec.]
2840* SepDC:1st
2841* SepDC:2nd
001 Plain:Weight 1
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
SM Appendix 4-197 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
D095/M077 4-198 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
025 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1 A]
2842* SepAC:1st
2843* SepAC:2nd
001 Plain:Weight 1
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
SM Appendix 4-199 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
004 Plain:Weight 4
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
D095/M077 4-200 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
022 Matte:Weight 2
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
027 Matte:Weight 7
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[8 to 12 / 10 / 0.1 kV]
SM Appendix 4-201 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
2844* SepDC:LEdge:Coeff
2845* SepDC:TEdge:Coeff
001 Plain:Weight 1
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-202 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
023 Matte:Weight 3
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-203 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[50 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
2846* SepAC:LEdge:Coeff
2847* SepAC:TEdge:Coeff
001 Plain:Weight 1
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-204 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
007 Plain:Weight 7
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-205 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
025 Matte:Weight 5
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[50 to 200 / 105 / 1%]
2850* PTR Bias:Bk
001 Plain:Weight 1
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
D095/M077 4-206 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
005 Plain:Weight 5
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[-300 to 0 / -60/ 1 A]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
SM Appendix 4-207 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
023 Matte:Weight 3
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[-300 to 0 / -60 / 1 A]
D095/M077 4-208 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 5
2851* PTR Bias:FC
001 Plain:Weight 1
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
005 Plain:Weight 5
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
SM Appendix 4-209 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 5
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
D095/M077 4-210 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
4.11 SYSTEM SP2-XXX: 6
2852* LEdge Coeff:Bk
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 300 / 160 / 1%]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 155 / 1%]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 155 / 1%]
004 Plain:Weight 4
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 120 / 1%]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 155 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-211 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 120 / 1%]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 155 / 1%]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-212 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 150 / 1%]
2853* LEdge Coeff:FC
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 300 / 145 / 1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 145 / 1%]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 140 / 1%]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 140 / 1%]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-213 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 110 / 1%]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 140 / 1%]
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 140 / 1%]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 110 / 1%]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 140 / 1%]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 140 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-214 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
025 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 240 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-215 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
2854* LEdge Length:Bk
2855* LEdge Length:FC
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
D095/M077 4-216 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
023 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
SM Appendix 4-217 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
027 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 2 / 1 mm]
2856* TEdge Coeff:Bk
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 90 / 1%]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 90 / 1%]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 90 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-218 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 90 / 1%]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 90 / 1%]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-219 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
024 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 90 / 1%]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 90 / 1%]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 90 / 1%]
2857* TEdge Coeff:FC
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 300 / 90 / 1%]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 90 / 1%]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 85 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-220 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 85 / 1%]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 85 / 1%]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 85 / 1%]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 85 / 1%]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-221 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
022 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 95 / 1%]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 300 / 85 / 1%]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 300 / 85 / 1%]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 300 / 85 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-222 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
2858* TEdge Length:Bk
2859* TEdge Length:FC
001 Plain:Weight 1
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
002 Plain:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
005 Plain:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
007 Plain:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
SM Appendix 4-223 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
025 Matte:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
D095/M077 4-224 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
2880* PTR Speed Control
001 Plain:Weight 1
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
002 Plain:Weight 2
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
003 Plain:Weight 3
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
004 Plain:Weight 4
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
005 Plain:Weight 5
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
006 Plain:Weight 6
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
SM Appendix 4-225 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
007 Plain:Weight 7
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
012 Glossy:Weight 2
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
013 Glossy:Weight 3
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
014 Glossy:Weight 4
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
015 Glossy:Weight 5
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
016 Glossy:Weight 6
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
017 Glossy:Weight 7
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
022 Matte:Weight 2
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
023 Matte:Weight 3
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
024 Matte:Weight 4
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
D095/M077 4-226 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
025 Matte:Weight 5
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
026 Matte:Weight 6
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
027 Matte:Weight 7
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
075 Envelope:Weight 5
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
076 Envelope:Weight 6
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
077 Envelope:Weight 7
[-1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
2901 Disp T/H Sn:K
001 Humid:Recent
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1°C]
002 Rel Humid:Recent
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH]
003 Abs Humid:Recent
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3]
004 Environ:Recent
DFU
SM Appendix 4-227 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
005* Temp:Prev
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1°C]
006* Rel Humid:Prev
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH]
007* Abd Humid:Prev
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3]
008* Environ:Prev
DFU
2902 SBU Test Pattern (D095 only)
004 Select Test Pattern
Selects the test pattern of SBU.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
0: Normal Scanner output
1: Fixed Value Output (adjustable with SP2902-005)
2: Main Scan Grayscale Output
3: Sub Scan Grayscale Output
4: Grid Output
005 Set Output Level
Specifies the output level for the SBU test pattern.
This can be activated only when the setting of SP2902-004 is set to "1".
[0 to 1023 / 512 / 1]
D095/M077 4-228 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
2904* ITB Motor Setting DFU
001 Reverse Amt
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 step]
2905* Waste Toner Full Sn SSP
001 Toner Volume
Specifies the maximum toner amount for the machine operating after the
waste tone full sensor has detected the full condition of the waste toner
bottle.
[0 to 1000 / 0 / 10 g]
002 N Pgs
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Specifies the maximum number of pages for the machine operating after the
waste tone full sensor has detected the full condition of the waste toner
bottle.
[0 to 1000 / 0 / 10 pages]
2907* ACS Switch Set:FC Mode
001 Cont Bk Image N Sheets
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sheet]
002 BW Select (0:Normal/1:High Prod)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Normal ACS, 1: No ACS
010 Mode FC Fixed Boot
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Enable, 1: Disable
SM Appendix 4-229 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
2908* Process Interval DFU
010 Additional Time
[0 to 8 / 1.3 / 0.1 sec]
011 Extend JobEnd Prcn
[0 to 99 / 0 / 1 sec]
2910* Polygon Motor:Fine Adj
001 Back Reduction Set
[0.1 to 0.5 / 0.5 / 0.1%]
2912* Drum Motor Set DFU
001 Reverse Amt
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 step]
2913* PTR Mtr Setting DFU
001 Standard Rotation (90ppm)
[1000 to 2000 / 1259.2 / 0.1 rpm]
002 Standard Rotation (70ppm)
[1000 to 2000 / 979.4 / 0.1 rpm]
D095/M077 4-230 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
2915* PTR Motor Environment Correction DFU
001 LLL
[–1 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.1%]
002 LL
[–1 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.1%]
003 ML
[–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
004 MM
[–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
005 MH
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[–1 to 1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
006 HH
[–1 to1 / -0.2 / 0.1%]
2916* ITB Cleaning Motor Setting
001 Motor Rotation
Specifies the rotation times of the ITB cleaning motor.
[500 to 2000 / 1015.4 / 0.1 rpm]
SM Appendix 4-231 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
2917* PTB Motor Setting DFU
001 Speed Adjustment (90ppm)
Adds or subtracts PTR timing roller speed for each paper type. (1 step =
0.2%)
[–15 to 16 / 5 / -]
002 Speed Adjustment (70ppm)
Adds or subtracts PTR timing roller speed for each paper type. (1 step =
0.2%)
[–15 to 16 / 3 / -]
2920* Belt Centering Roller
001 Current Position
[–100 to 100 / 0 / 1 step]
Roller Position Detection
002
Execute the ITB centering for each mode.
Roller Pos.: No-contact
003 Displays the position of the belt centering roller when the ITB is away from
the drums.
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1step]
Roller Position: Bk
004 Displays the position of the belt centering roller at the B/W printing mode.
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1step]
D095/M077 4-232 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
Roller Position: Color
005 Displays the position of the belt centering roller at the color printing mode.
[-100 to 100 / 0 / 1step]
Roller Holding Setting
Holds or does not hold the position of the belt centering roller when the ITB
006 moves to the drums or away from the drums.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Hold (5 seconds)
1: Does not hold
2921* LD Off Check
001 Displays the LD status.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: LD On. 1: LD Off
2933* high density mode
Configures the settings of the drum idling mode for a multiple printing job.
001 density1
Specifies the threshold coverage 1 for the drum idling mode. No drum idling
mode is executed if the setting of this SP is set to "0" (default).
[0 to 300 / 0 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-233 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
002 density2
Specifies the threshold coverage 2 for the drum idling mode. No drum idling
mode is executed if the setting of this SP is set to "0" (default).
[0 to 300 / 0 / 1%]
003 speed1
Specifies the additional motor speed 1 of the drum cleaning motor during
the drum idling mode.
[0 to 100 / 20 / 1%]
004 speed2
Specifies the additional motor speed 1 of the drum cleaning motor during
the drum idling mode.
[0 to 100 / 20 / 1%]
005 sheets1
Specifies the execution threshold 1 for the drum idling mode. No drum idling
mode is executed if the setting of this SP is set to "0" (default).
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheet]
006 sheets2
Specifies the execution threshold 2 for the drum idling mode. No drum idling
mode is executed if the setting of this SP is set to "0" (default).
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 sheet]
D095/M077 4-234 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
2950* PTR Bias:Bk
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the current of the paper transfer roller in BK printing for each
customer paper setting.
[-300 to 0 / -65 / 1 A]
2951* PTR Bias:FC
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the current of the paper transfer roller in FC printing for each
customer paper setting.
[-300 to 0 / -85 / 1 A]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
2952* LEdge Coeff:Bk
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the leading edge bias correction of the paper transfer roller in Bk
printing for each customer paper setting.
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
2953* LEdge Coeff:FC
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the leading edge bias correction of the paper transfer roller in FC
printing for each customer paper setting.
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-235 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
2954* LEdge Length:Bk
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the leading edge switch timing of the paper transfer roller in Bk
printing for each customer paper setting.
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
2955* LEdge Length:FC
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the leading edge switch timing of the paper transfer roller in FC
printing for each customer paper setting.
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
2956* TEdge Coeff:Bk
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the trailing edge bias correction of the paper transfer roller in Bk
printing for each customer paper setting.
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
2957* TEdge Coeff:FC
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the trailing edge bias correction of the paper transfer roller in FC
printing for each customer paper setting.
[0 to 300 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-236 SM Appendix
System SP2-xxx: 6
2958* TEdge Length:Bk
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the trailing edge switch timing of the paper transfer roller in Bk
printing for each customer paper setting.
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
2959* TEdge Length:FC
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the trailing edge switch timing of the paper transfer roller in FC
printing for each customer paper setting.
[0 to 30 / 5 / 1 mm]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
2962* ITB:BK
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the current of the image transfer roller in Bk printing for each
customer paper setting.
[0 to 150 / 60 / 1 A]
2963* ITB:FC:Y
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the current of the image transfer roller Yellow in FC printing for
each customer paper setting.
[0 to 150 / 65 / 1 A]
SM Appendix 4-237 D095/M077
System SP2-xxx: 6
2964* ITB:FC:M
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the current of the image transfer roller Magenta in FC printing for
each customer paper setting.
[0 to 150 / 65 / 1 A]
2965* ITB:FC:C
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the current of the image transfer roller Cyan in FC printing for each
customer paper setting.
[0 to 150 / 55 / 1 A]
2966* ITB:FC:K
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the current of the image transfer roller Black in FC printing for
each customer paper setting.
[0 to 150 / 60 / 1 A]
2980* PTR Speed Control
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the motor speed correction of the PTR motor for each customer
paper setting.
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.1%]
D095/M077 4-238 SM Appendix
Rev. 07/25/2012 System SP2-xxx: 6
2986* 2nd Bias Coeff:BK
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the current coefficient of the paper transfer roller in Bk printing for
the 2nd side of each customer paper.
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
2987* 2nd Bias Coeff:FC
-001 to Custom Paper 001 to 100
-100
Specifies the current coefficient of the paper transfer roller in FC printing for
the 2nd side of each customer paper.
[0 to 200 / 100 / 1%]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
2992 KCMY: Drum Motor Rev
⇒ -001 Drum process speed
[0]
2993 KCMY: Drum FW Setting
⇒ -001 Drum drive control range
[0]
SM Appendix 4-239 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
4.12 SYSTEM SP3-XXX: 1
4.12.1 SP3-XXX PROCESS
3001* ID Sn:Vt Display
001 Current Val:K
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
002 Current Val:C
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
003 Current Val:M
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
004 Current Val:Y
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
005 Target
[0 to 5 / 3 / 0.01V]
006 Developer Threshold
[0 to 5 / 0.5 / 0.01V]
007 Adjustable Range
[0 to 5 / 0.2 / 0.01V]
D095/M077 4-240 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
3002* Vtcnt:Disp/Set DFU
001 Current Val:K
[0 to 12 / 6 / 0.01V]
002 Current Val:C
[0 to 12 / 6 / 0.01V]
003 Current Val:M
[0 to 12 / 6 / 0.01V]
004 Current Val:Y
[0 to 12 / 6 / 0.01V]
005 Initial Val:K
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 12 / 6 / 0.01V]
006 Initial Val:C
[0 to 12 / 6 / 0.01V]
007 Initial Val:M
[0 to 12 / 6 / 0.01V]
008 Initial Val:Y
[0 to 12 / 6 / 0.01V]
009 Developer Detection Set
[0 to 1024 / 768 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-241 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
3003* Vtref:Disp/Set DFU
001 Current Val:K
[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
002 Current Val:C
[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
003 Current Val:M
[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
004 Current Val:Y
[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
005 Initial Val:K
[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
006 Initial Val:C
[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
007 Initial Val:M
[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
008 Initial Val:Y
[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.01V]
D095/M077 4-242 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
3004* Vtref:Disp/Set DFU
001 Upper:K
[0 to 5 / 3.8 / 0.01 V]
002 Upper:C
[0 to 5 / 3.8 / 0.01 V]
003 Upper:M
[0 to 5 / 3.8 / 0.01 V]
004 Upper:Y
[0 to 5 / 3.8 / 0.01 V]
005 Lower:K
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 5 / 1.4 / 0.01 V]
006 Lower:C
[0 to 5 / 1.4 / 0.01 V]
007 Lower:M
[0 to 5 / 1.4 / 0.01 V]
008 Lower:Y
[0 to 5 / 1.4 / 0.01 V]
SM Appendix 4-243 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
3019* TD.Sens Sensitivity
001 Std Speed:K
[0.2 to 0.7 / 0.4 / 0.001 -V/wt%]
002 Std Speed:C
[0.2 to 0.7 / 0.4 / 0.001 -V/wt%]
003 Std Speed:M
[0.2 to 0.7 / 0.4 / 0.001 -V/wt%]
004 Std Speed:Y
[0.2 to 0.7 / 0.4 / 0.001 -V/wt%]
005 Low Speed:K
[0.2 to 0.7 / 0.4 / 0.001 -V/wt%]
006 Low Speed:C
[0.2 to 0.7 / 0.4 / 0.001 -V/wt%]
007 Low Speed:M
[0.2 to 0.7 / 0.4 / 0.001 -V/wt%]
008 Low Speed:Y
[0.2 to 0.7 / 0.4 / 0.001 -V/wt%]
D095/M077 4-244 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
3020* Vt Shift :Set
001 Low Spd:K
[0 to 5 / 0.12 / 0.01 V]
002 Low Spd:C
[0 to 5 / 0.12 / 0.01 V]
003 Low Spd:M
[0 to 5 / 0.12 / 0.01 V]
004 Low Spd:Y
[0 to 5 / 0.12 / 0.01 V]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
3021* TD SN Error Thresh
001 Average:Low TC
[0 to 5 / 2.5 / 0.1V]
002 Average:High TC
[0 to 5 / 1.5 / 0.1V]
003 Dev Rotation Thresh:Low TC
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
004 Dev Rotation Thresh:Mid TC
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
005 Dev Rotation Thresh:High TC
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
SM Appendix 4-245 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
3022* ID Sn Error Condition
These displays error detected condition for each color.
1:HH, 2:MM, 3:LL
001 Thresh Condition:Bk
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
002 Thresh Condition:C
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
003 Thresh Condition:M
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
004 Thresh Condition:Y
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
3042* Set Vtref Cor DFU
001 Vref Corr Mode
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Vfref Correction: ON, 1: Vfref Correction: OFF
002 Corr Amt(+):K
[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01V]
003 Corr Amt(+):C
[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01V]
004 Corr Amt(+):M
[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01V]
D095/M077 4-246 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
005 Corr Amt(+):Y
[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01V]
006 Corr Amt(-):K
[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01V]
007 Corr Amt(-):C
[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01V]
008 Corr Amt(-):M
[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01V]
009 Corr Amt(-):Y
[0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01V]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
010 Vref Corr Target:K
[-0.1 to 0.1 / 0 / 0.001 mg/cm2]
011 Vref Corr Target:C
[-0.1 to 0.1 / 0 / 0.001mg/cm2]
012 Vref Corr Target:M
[-0.1 to 0.1 / 0 / 0.001mg/cm2]
013 Vref Corr Target:Y
[-0.1 to 0.1 / 0 / 0.001mg/cm2]
014 Vref Corr Target:K
[0 to 0.1 / 0.012 / 0.001mg/cm2]
SM Appendix 4-247 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
015 Vref Corr Target:C
[0 to 0.1 / 0.015 / 0.001mg/cm2]
016 Vref Corr Target:M
[0 to 0.1 / 0.015 / 0.001mg/cm2]
017 Vref Corr Target:Y
[0 to 0.1 / 0.015 / 0.001mg/cm2]
3044* ImgArea
These SP displays average coverage for each color.
S: Average of 10 sheets, M: Average of 100 sheets
005 Ave.S:K
[0 to 500 / 3 / 0.01%]
006 Ave.S:C
[0 to 500 / 3 / 0.01%]
007 Ave.S:M
[0 to 500 / 3 / 0.01%]
008 Ave.S:Y
[0 to 500 / 3 / 0.01%]
009 Ave.M:K
[0 to 500 / 3 / 0.01%]
010 Ave.M:C
[0 to 500 / 3 / 0.01%]
D095/M077 4-248 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
011 Ave.M:M
[0 to 500 / 3 / 0.01%]
012 Ave.M:Y
[0 to 500 / 3 / 0.01%]
017 Set N Pgs Ave.:S
[1 to 100 / 10 / 1sheet]
018 Set N Pgs Ave.:M
[1 to 500 / 100 / 1sheet]
3101* ID Pattern:Disp
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
001 Applied:K
[0 to 2 / 0 / 0.001mg]
002 Applied:C
[0 to 2 / 0 / 0.001mg]
003 Applied:M
[0 to 2 / 0 / 0.001mg]
004 Applied:Y
[0 to 2 / 0 / 0.001mg]
SM Appendix 4-249 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
3111* ID Sn:Voffset DFU
001 Voffset_Reg:Col_C
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
002 Voffset_Dif:Col_C
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
003 Voffset_Reg:Col_M
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
004 Voffset_Dif:Col_M
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
005 Voffset_Reg:Col_Y
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
006 Voffset_Dif:Col_Y
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
007 Voffset_Reg:K:Last
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
3121* Adjusted Vsg
001 Vsg_Reg:Col_C:Las
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
002 Vsg_Dif:Col_C:Last
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
003 Vsg_Reg:Col_M:Last
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
004 Vsg_Dif:Col_M:Last
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
D095/M077 4-250 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
005 Vsg_Reg:Col_Y:Last
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
006 Vsg_Dif:Col_Y:Last
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
007 Vsg_Reg:K:Last
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
3122* Vsg_reg
001 TM_F(Ctr:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
002 TM_F(Ctr:min)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
003 TM_C(Ctr:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
004 TM_C(Ctr:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
005 TM_R(Ctr:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
006 TM_R(Ctr:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
007 K(Ctr:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
SM Appendix 4-251 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
008 K(Ctr:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
009 C(Ctr:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
010 C(Ctr:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
011 M(Ctr:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
012 M(Ctr:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
013 Y(Ctr:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
014 Y(Ctr:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
015 TM_F(Ini:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
016 TM_F(Ini:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
017 TM_C(Ini:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
D095/M077 4-252 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
018 TM_C(Ini:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
019 TM_R(Ini:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
020 TM_R(Ini:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
021 K(Ini:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
022 K(Ini:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
023 C(Ini:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
024 C(Ini:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
025 M(Ini:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
026 M(Ini:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
027 Y(Ini:MAX)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
028 Y(Ini:min)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
SM Appendix 4-253 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
3131* Ifsg After Vsg
001 Ifsg:K:Last
[0 to 4096 / 0 / 1]
002 Ifsg:Col_C:Last
[0 to 4096 / 0 / 1]
003 Ifsg:Col_M:Last
[0 to 4096 / 0 / 1]
004 Ifsg:Col_Y:Last
[0 to 4096 / 0 / 1]
005 Vsg K:min
[0 to 4096 / 1000 / 1]
006 Vsg C:min
[0 to 4096 / 1000 / 1]
007 Vsg M:min
[0 to 4096 / 1000 / 1]
008 Vsg Y:min
[0 to 4096 / 1000 / 1]
D095/M077 4-254 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
3141* ID Sn:Vmin DFU
004 Vmin:K(Rear)
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01V]
3161* ID Pattern Setting:Paper Int
001 Target Toner Amt:K
[0 to 2 / 0.32 / 0.001mg/mc2]
3171* ID Pattern:Int
001 Create Int
Appendix:
Program
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1sheets]
Service
Mode
002 Sheets counter
[0 to 200 / 10 / 1sheets]
3194* ID Coeff Display
001 K2:Col_C:Last
[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.0001]
002 K5:Col_C:Last
[0 to 5 / 2.3 / 0.0001]
003 K2:Col_M:Last
[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.0001]
SM Appendix 4-255 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
004 K5:Col_M:Last
[0 to 5 / 2.3 / 0.0001]
005 K2:Col_Y:Last
[0 to 5 / 1 / 0.0001]
006 K5:Col_Y:Last
[0 to 5 / 2.3 / 0.0001]
3251* Tnr Supply Time
Displays the total toner supply time for each color.
001 Sub Hopper CL:K
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1msec]
002 Sub Hopper CL:C
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1msec]
003 Sub Hopper CL:M
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1msec]
004 Sub Hopper CL:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1msec]
005 Toner Pump CL:K
[0 to 5000 / 0 / 1s]
006 Toner Pump CL:C
[0 to 5000 / 0 / 1s]
D095/M077 4-256 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
007 Toner Pump CL:M
[0 to 5000 / 0 / 1s]
008 Toner Pump CL:Y
[0 to 5000 / 0 / 1s]
3253* Toner Pump Fill Amt DFU
001 K:Remain Level1
[0 to 5 / 1.96 / 0.01g/s]
002 K:Remain Level2
[0 to 5 / 1.8 / 0.01g/s]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
003 K:Remain Level3
[0 to 5 / 1.78 / 0.01g/s]
004 K:Remain Level4
[0 to 5 / 1.71 / 0.01g/s]
005 C:Remain Level1
[0 to 5 / 1.96 / 0.01g/s]
006 C:Remain Level2
[0 to 5 / 1.8 / 0.01g/s]
007 C:Remain Level3
[0 to 5 / 1.78 / 0.01g/s]
008 C:Remain Level4
[0 to 5 / 1.71 / 0.01g/s]
SM Appendix 4-257 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
009 M:Remain Level1
[0 to 5 / 1.96 / 0.01g/s]
010 M:Remain Level2
[0 to 5 / 1.8 / 0.01g/s]
011 M:Remain Level3
[0 to 5 / 1.78 / 0.01g/s]
012 M:Remain Level3
[0 to 5 / 1.71 / 0.01g/s]
013 Y:Remain Level1
[0 to 5 / 1.82 / 0.01g/s]
014 Y:Remain Level2
[0 to 5 / 1.65 / 0.01g/s]
015 Y:Remain Level3
[0 to 5 / 1.62 / 0.01g/s]
016 Y:Remain Level4
[0 to 5 / 1.58 / 0.01g/s]
D095/M077 4-258 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
3301* Tnr Supply DFU
001 K
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: PID, 1: No Toner Supply
002 C
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: PID, 1: No Toner Supply
003 M
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: PID, 1: No Toner Supply
004 Y
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: PID, 1: No Toner Supply
3303* Tnr Supply Rate
001 Last Val:K
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
002 Last Val:C
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
003 Last Val:M
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
004 Last Val:Y
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-259 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
3304* Tnr SupplyLimits DFU
001 Max Supply Rate:K
[0 to 150 / 95 / 1%]
002 Max Supply Rate:C
[0 to 150 / 105 / 1%]
003 Max Supply Rate:M
[0 to 150 / 110 / 1%]
004 Max Supply Rate:Y
[0 to 150 / 120 / 1%]
005 Min Supply Time:K
[0 to 1000 / 75 / 1msec]
006 Min Supply Time:C
[0 to 1000 / 75 / 1msec]]
007 Min Supply Time:M
[0 to 1000 / 75 / 1msec]
008 Min Supply Time:Y
[0 to 1000 / 75 / 1msec]
009 High Cov:Supply Max Rate:K
[0 to 150 / 90 / 1%]
010 High Cov:Supply Max Rate:C
[0 to 150 / 100 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-260 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
011 High Cov:Supply Max Rate:M
[0 to 150 / 105 / 1%]
012 High Cov:Supply Max Rate:Y
[0 to 150 / 115 / 1%]
3305* ID Sensor Coefficient DFU
001 Image Coverage Rate 1
[0 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.1]
002 Image Coverage Rate 2
[0 to 2 / 0.6 / 0.1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
003 Image Coverage Rate 3
[0 to 2 / 0.8 / 0.1]
004 Image Coverage Rate 4
[0 to 2 / 0.9 / 0.1]
3306* Tnr Supply Coeff DFU
001 Ratio Coeff1:K
[0 to 4300 / 400 / 1]
002 Ratio Coeff1:C
[0 to 4300 / 400 / 1]
003 Ratio Coeff1:M
[0 to 4300 / 400 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-261 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
004 Ratio Coeff1:Y
[0 to 4300 / 400 / 1]
021 P_Vt_Coeff:K
[0 to 100 / 25 / 1%]
022 P_Vt_Coeff:C
[0 to 100 / 25 / 1%]
023 P_Vt_Coeff:M
[0 to 100 / 25 / 1%]
024 P_Vt_Coeff:Y
[0 to 100 / 25 / 1%]
025 I_VtCoef:K
[0 to 10000 / 0 / 1]
026 I_VtCoef:C
[0 to 10000 / 0 / 1]
027 I_VtCoef:M
[0 to 10000 / 0 / 1]
028 I_VtCoef:Y
[0 to 10000 / 0 / 1]
033 P_Px1_Coeff1:K
[0 to 150 / 85 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-262 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
034 P_Px1_Coeff1:C
[0 to 150 / 95 / 1%]
035 P_Px1_Coeff1:M
[0 to 150 / 100 / 1%]
036 P_Px1_Coeff1:Y
[0 to 150 / 110 / 1%]
037 P_PxlCoef2:K
[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01]
038 P_PxlCoef2:C
[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
039 P_PxlCoef2:M
[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01]
040 P_PxlCoef2:Y
[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01]
041 P_PxlCoef3:K
[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01]
042 P_PxlCoef3:C
[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01]
043 P_PxlCoef3:M
[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01]
044 P_PxlCoef3:Y
[0 to 2.55 / 1 / 0.01]
SM Appendix 4-263 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
3308* Interval mode
001 Execute page
Specifies the threshold pages for the interval mode.
This SP can be activated only when the setting of the idling time
(SP3308-002) is set to a value more than "0".
[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page]
Use this SP to prevent the vertical white line problem caused by multiple
printing.
002 Idling time
Specifies the idling time for the interval mode.
This SP can be activated only when the setting of the execute page
(SP3308-001) is set to a value more than "0".
[0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 sec.]
3310* Next Tnr Supply
Displays the next toner supply amount for each color.
001 K Amount
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1mg]
002 C Amount
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1mg]
003 M Amount
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1mg]
004 Y Amount
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1mg]
D095/M077 4-264 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
005 K Image Area
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1cm2]
006 C Image Area
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1cm2]
007 M Image Area
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1cm2]
008 Y Image Area
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1cm2]
009 K Wait Time
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1msec]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
010 C Wait Time
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1msec]
011 M Wait Time
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1msec]
012 Y Wait Time
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1msec]
3311* Low Process DEV exhaust mode
Displays the activation time of the toner pump clutch in the low speed printing
for each color.
001 Mohno clutch On time:K
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 msec.]
SM Appendix 4-265 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
002 Mohno clutch On time:M
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 msec.]
003 Mohno clutch On time:C
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 msec.]
004 Mohno clutch On time:Y
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 msec.]
3362* ID Sensor Sensitivity: Setting DFU
001 K2: Upper
[0 to 1 / 0.32 / 0.01]
002 K2: Lower
[0 to 1 / 0.22 / 0.01]
003 K5: Upper
[0 to 10 / 5 / 0.01]
004 K5: Lower
[0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01]
005 Kn: Upper
[0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01]
006 Kn: Lower
[0 to 1 / 0.9 / 0.01]
007 K5 Edit Point
[0 to 1 / 0.15 / 0.01]
D095/M077 4-266 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
008 K5 Target Voltage
[0 to 5 / 1.63 / 0.01]
010 K2: Upper/Lower Limit Coefficient 1
[0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01]
011 K2: Upper Limit Correction
[-0.2 to 0.4 / 0.07 / 0.01]
012 K2: Lower Limit Correction
[-0.4 to 0.2 / -0.07 / 0.01]
013 Diffusion Correction: C
[0.75 to 1.35 / 1 / 0.01]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
014 Diffusion Correction: M
[0.75 to 1.35 / 1 / 0.01]
015 Diffusion Correction: Y
[0.75 to 1.35 / 1 / 0.01]
016 K2: Check: C
[0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.001]
017 K2: Check: M
[0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.001]
018 K2: Check: Y
[0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.001]
SM Appendix 4-267 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
3371* M/A Calculation DFU
002 Correction Coefficient: C
[0.5 to 2 / 1 / 0.01]
Correction Coefficient: M
003
[0.5 to 2 / 1 / 0.01]
Correction Coefficient: Y
004
[0.5 to 2 / 1 / 0.01]
3410* Toner Bottle Info
Displays the toner bottle information for each color.
0: End, 1: Near end, 2: Cover open, 3: Cover close,
4: Near end recovery, 10: Full
001 Condition:K
[0 to 10 / 10 / 1]
Condition:C
002
[0 to 10 / 10 / 1]
Condition:M
003
[0 to 10 / 10 / 1]
Condition:Y
004
[0 to 10 / 10 / 1]
Remain Toner:K
005
[0 to 4000 / - / 0.01]
D095/M077 4-268 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 1
Remain Toner:C
006
[0 to 4000 / - / 0.01]
Remain Toner:M
007
[0 to 4000 / - / 0.01]
Remain Toner:Y
008
[0 to 4000 / - / 0.01]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
SM Appendix 4-269 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 1
3411* TNE Detect:Disp/Set
001 TNE:Threshold:K
[0 to 30 / 3 / 1]
TNE:Threshold:Col
002
[0 to 30 / 3 / 1]
TNE:Pg Count:K
003
[0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
TNE:Pg Count:C
004
[0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
TNE:Pg Count:M
005
[[0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
TNE:Pg Count:Y
006
[0 to 99 / 0 / 1]
TNE:Start-up Thresh:K
007
[0 to 4000 / 150 / 1]
TNE:Start-up Thresh:Col
008
[0 to 4000 / 150 / 1]
D095/M077 4-270 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
4.13 SYSTEM SP3-XXX: 2
3412* TE Detect:Disp/Set
001 TE:Pg Thresh:Min:K
[0 to 1000 / 10 / 1]
TE:Pg Thresh:Min:Col
002
[0 to 1000 / 10 / 1]
TE:Pg Thresh:Max:K
003
[0 to 10000 / 4000 / 1]
TE:Pg Thresh:Max:Col
Appendix:
004
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 10000 / 4000 / 1]
TE:Pixel Thresh:K
005
[0 to 1000 / 200 / 1]
TE:Pixel Thresh:Col
006
[0 to 1000 / 200 / 1]
TE:Supply Thresh:K
007
[0 to 200 / 32 / 1s]
TE:Supply Thresh:Col
008
[0 to 200 / 32 / 1s]
TE:Pg Count:K
009
[0 to 10000 / 0 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-271 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
TE:Pg Count:C
010
[0 to 10000 / 0 / 1]
TE:Pg Count:M
011
[0 to 10000 / 0 / 1]
TE:Pg Count:Y
012
[0 to 10000 / 0 / 1]
TE:Pixel Count:K
013
[0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 cm2]
TE:Pixel Count:C
014
[0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 cm2]
TE:Pixel Count:M
015
[0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 cm2]
TE:Pixel Count:Y
016
[0 to 1000000 / 0 / 1 cm2]
TE:Supply Count:K
017
[0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 ms]
TE:Supply Count:C
018
[0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 ms]
TE:Supply Count:M
019
[0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 ms]
TE:Supply Count:Y
020
[0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 ms]
D095/M077 4-272 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
3413* Toner End Recovery
001 Toner Pump U-Limit:K
[0 to 200 / 50 / 1 s]
Toner Pump U-Limit:Col
002
[0 to 200 / 50 / 1 s]
3414* Toner End Recovery
001 Error Thresh:K
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 ]
Error Supply:Col
002
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 50 / 20 / 1 ]
3415* Restoration Toner Filling
001 Start Count
Specifies the counter threshold of the toner near end for entering the CPM
down mode.
[0 to 40 / 15 / 1]
002 CPM
Specifies the CPM down rate to compensate for the toner near end.
[0 to 100 / 50 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-273 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
3501* Select ProCon DFU
001 Recov Min:Col
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Process Control: ON, 1: Process Control: OFF
002 Before Job
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON
003 Density Adj Mode
[0 to 3 / 1 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: 1st Power On,
2: 1st Power On & Job End, 3: All Process Control
004 ACC Before ProCon
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1]
0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: Toner Density Adjust.
005 DnstyAdjTimes
[1 to 10 / 10 / 1]
006 DevGamma(EnvCorrct)
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Environmental Correct: ON, 1: Environmental Correct: OFF
007 DevGamma(TimeCorrct)
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Time Correct. ON, 1: Time Correct OFF
D095/M077 4-274 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
008 Control Selection
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Special mode on, 1: Special mode off
009 Dev Gamma Adjustment
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Dev. Gamma Tc: ON, 1: Dev. Gamma Tc: OFF
010 Paper Intvl Corr Amt
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Page Interval: ON, 1: Page Interval: OFF
3511* Poten Tbl:Disp DFU
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
001 Value:K
[1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
Value:C
002
[1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
Value:M
003
[1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
Value:Y
004
[1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
Target:K
005
[1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-275 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
Target:C
006
[1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
Target:M
007
[1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
Target:Y
008
[1 to 99 / 10 / 1]
3531* ProCon Target
001 Max Tnr Amt:K
[0 to 1 / 0.476 / 0.01 mg/cm2]
002 Max Tnr Amt:C
[0 to 1 / 0.476 / 0.01 mg/cm2]
003 Max Tnr Amt:M
[0 to 1 / 0.476 / 0.01 mg/cm2]
004 Max Tnr Amt:Y
[0 to 1 / 0.476 / 0.01 mg/cm2]
005 Max M/A Adj.:K
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 1]
006 Max M/A Adj.:C
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-276 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
007 Max M/A Adj.:M
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 1]
008 Max M/A Adj.:Y
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 1]
009 Line Width Adj.:K
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 1]
010 Line Width Adj.:C
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 1]
011 Line Width Adj.:M
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
012 Line Width Adj.:Y
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 1]
3551* Set Procon:Job End
Adjusts the timing of Job End process control.
001 B/W Mode
[0 to 9999/ 0 / 1sheet]
Color Mode
002
[0 to 9999/ 2000 / 1sheet]
Pg Cnt:B&W Mode
003
[0 to 9999/ 0 / 1sheet]
Pg CntColor Mode
004
[0 to 9999/ 0 / 1mai]
SM Appendix 4-277 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
3554* Init ProCon Set
Adjusts the timing of Initial process control.
001 Fusing Temperature Thresh
[0 to 230 / 100 / 1deg]
Non-use Time Setting
002
[0 to 1440 / 240 / 1 minute]
Temperature Range
003
[0 to 99 / 10 / 1deg]
Relative Humidity Range
004
[0 to 99 / 50 / 1%RH]
Absolute Humidity Range
005
[0 to 99 / 6 / 1g/m3]
006 Stirring extension ON/OFF
Turns on or off the extension rotation of the development unit at the process
control after power-on.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On (SP3554-007)
007 Stirring extension time
Specifies the extension rotation time of the development unit at the process
control after power-on.
[1 to 900 / 360 / 1 sec.]
D095/M077 4-278 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
3555* Before Job Procon
These SPs are designed to correct the change of the toner density between
the executions of the normal process control.
001 Short Idle Time ON/ OFF
Turns on or off the process control for a short idle time.
The idle time (threshold for the process control) of the machine can be
adjusted with SP3555-002.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: On, 1: Off
Idling Time
002 Specifies the threshold time of the process control for a short idle time.
[0 to 999 / 20 / 1min]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Temperature Range ON/ OFF
Turns on or off the process control for the temperature change inside the
machine.
003 The temperature change (threshold for the process control) of the machine
can be adjusted with SP3555-004.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
0: On, 1: Off
Temperature Range
004 Specifies the threshold temperature of the process control for the
temperature change inside the machine
[0 to 99 / 2 / 1°C]
SM Appendix 4-279 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
3556* Last Image Process Time
001 Year
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1]
Month
002
[1 to 12 / 1 / 1]
Day
003
[1 to 31 / 1 / 1]
Hour
004
[0 to 23 / 0 / 1]
Minute
005
[0 to 59 / 0 / 1]
3560 Developer Status
001 Weight%: Bk
[0 to 15 / 0 / 0.01 wt%]
Weight%: C
002
[0 to 15 / 0 / 0.01 wt%]
Weight%: M
003
[0 to 15 / 0 / 0.01 wt%]
Weight%: Y
004
[0 to 15 / 0 / 0.01 wt%]
D095/M077 4-280 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
Charge/g: Bk
005
[0 to 50 / 0 / -0.1 C/g]
Charge/g: C
006
[0 to 50 / 0 / -0.1 C/g]
Charge/g: M
007
[0 to 50 / 0 / -0.1 C/g]
Charge/g: Y
008
[0 to 50 / 0 / -0.1 C/g]
3561 Dev gamma:Disp/Set DFU
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
001 Actual Val:K
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.01]
Actual Val:C
002
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.01]
Actual Val:M
003
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.01]
Actual Val:Y
004
[0 to 6 / 0 / 0.01]
Target Val:K
005*
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.01]
SM Appendix 4-281 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
Target Val:C
006*
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.01]
Target Val:M
007*
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.01]
Target Val:Y
008*
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.01]
Initial Val:K
009*
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.01]
Initial Val:C
010*
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.01]
Initial Val:M
011*
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.01]
Initial Val:Y
012*
[0 to 6 / 1.5 / 0.01]
Environ Corr1:K
031*
[-5 to 5 / -0.2 / 0.01]
Environ Corr2:K
032*
[-5 to 5 / -0.1 / 0.01]
Environ Corr3:K
033*
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
D095/M077 4-282 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
Environ Corr4:K
034*
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
Environ Corr5:K
035*
[-5 to 5 / 0.12 / 0.01]
Environ Corr6:K
036*
[-5 to 5 / 0.24 / 0.01]
Environ Corr7:K
037*
[-5 to 5 / 0.3 / 0.01]
Environ Corr8:K
038*
[-5 to 5 / 0.35 / 0.01]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Environ Corr1:Col
039*
[-5 to 5 / -0.2 / 0.01]
Environ Corr2:Col
040*
[-5 to 5 / -0.1 / 0.01]
Environ Corr3:Col
041*
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
Environ Corr4:Col
042*
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
SM Appendix 4-283 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
Environ Corr5:Col
043*
[-5 to 5 / 0.12 / 0.01]
Environ Corr6:Col
044*
[-5 to 5 / 0.24 / 0.01]
Environ Corr7:Col
045*
[-5 to 5 / 0.3 / 0.01]
Environ Corr8:Col
046*
[-5 to 5 / 0.35 / 0.01]
060 TimeLapse corr:DEV Consume1
[0 to 9999 / 10 / 1 KP]
061 TimeLapse corr:DEV Consume2
[0 to 9999 / 100 / 1 KP]
070 TimeLapse corr1:Bk
[-5 to 5 / 0.1 / 0.01]
071 TimeLapse corr2:Bk
[-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.01]
072 TimeLapse corr3:Bk
[-5 to 5 / -0.1 / 0.01]
D095/M077 4-284 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
073 TimeLapse corr1:Color
[-5 to 5 / 0.05 / 0.01]
074 TimeLapse corr2: Color
[-5 to 5 / -0.05 / 0.01]
075 TimeLapse corr3: Color
[-5 to 5 / -0.15 / 0.01]
3562 Display Vk DFU
001 K
[-300 to 300 / 0 / 1V]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
C
002
[-300 to 300 / 0 / 1V]
M
003
[-300 to 300 / 0 / 1V]
Y
004
[-300 to 300 / 0 / 1V]
SM Appendix 4-285 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
3563 Display Vr: DFU
001 K
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
002 C
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
003 M
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
004 Y
[-999 to 0 / 0/ 1V]
3564 Display VL
001 K
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
002 C
[-999 to 0 / 0/ 1V]
003 M
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
004 Y
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
D095/M077 4-286 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
3565 Display VpL
001 K
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
002 C
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
003 M
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
004 Y
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
3566 Display Vd
001 K
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
002 C
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
003 M
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
004 Y
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
SM Appendix 4-287 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
3567 Display DEV Speed
001 K
[700 to 1500 / 1038.6 / 0.1rpm]
002 C
[700 to 1500 / 1038.6 / 0.1rpm]
003 M
[700 to 1500 / 1038.6 / 0.1rpm]
004 Y
[700 to 1500 / 1038.6 / 0.1rpm]
3572 Display VdHome DFU
001 K
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
C
002
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
M
003
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
Y
004
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
K:Ctr MAX
005
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
D095/M077 4-288 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
K:Ctr min
006
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
C:Ctr MAX
007
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
C:Ctr min
008
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
M:Ctr MAX
009
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
M:Ctr min
010
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Y:Ctr MAX
011
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
Y:Ctr min
012
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
K:Ini MAX
013
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
K:Ini min
014
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
C:Ini MAX
015
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
SM Appendix 4-289 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
C:Ini min
016
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
M:Ini MAX
017
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
M:Ini min
018
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
Y:Ini MAX
019
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
Y:Ini min
020
[-999 to 0 / 0 / 1V]
3573* Temp/Humid Disp
001 Temp DispK
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1°C]
002 Rel Humidity DispK
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %RH]
003 Abs Humidity DispK
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3]
004 Current Env DispK
LL/ ML/ MM/ MH/ HH
D095/M077 4-290 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
005 Temp DispY
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1°C]
006 Rel Humidity DispY
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %RH]
007 Abs Humidity DispY
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m3]
008 Current Env DispY
LL/ ML/ MM/ MH/ HH
3575* Dev DC Control DFU
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
001 K
[-800 to -200 / -500 / 1V]
C
002
[-800 to -200 / -500 / 1V]
M
003
[-800 to -200 / -500 / 1V]
Y
004
[-800 to -200 / -500 / 1V]
005 Low Speed:K
[-800 to -200 / -500 / 1V]
SM Appendix 4-291 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
006 Low Speed:C
[-800 to -200 / -500 / 1V]
007 Low Speed:M
[-800 to -200 / -500 / 1V]
008 Low Speed:Y
[-800 to -200 / -500 / 1V]
3576* Grid Control: Display DFU
001 K
[-999 to -300 / -700 / 1V]
C
002
[-999 to -300 / -700 / 1V]
M
003
[-999 to -300 / -700 / 1V]
Y
004
[-999 to -300 / -700 / 1V]
005 Low Speed:K
[-999 to -300 / -700 / 1V]
006 Low Speed:C
[-999 to -300 / -700 / 1V]
D095/M077 4-292 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
007 Low Speed:M
[-999 to -300 / -700 / 1V]
008 Low Speed:Y
[-999 to -300 / -700 / 1V]
3577* Charge Current Contrl:Displ DFU
001 Charge Switch:Execute Setting
Enables or disables the Charge Switch mode.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
002 Charge Switch Execute Page
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 KP]
003 LL
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1 A]
004 MM
[0 to 1800 / 1500 / 1 A]
005 HH
[0 to 1800 / 1200 / 1 A]
006 Fixed
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1 A]
SM Appendix 4-293 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
010 Normal Speed K
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1uA]
Normal Speed C
011
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1uA]
Normal Speed M
012
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1uA]
Normal Speed Y
013
[0 to 1800 / 1800 / 1uA]
3581* LD Power Control DFU
001 K
[20 to 255 / 70 / 0.1%]
002 C
[20 to 255 / 70 / 0.1%]
003 M
[20 to 255 / 70 / 0.1%]
004 Y
[20 to 255 / 70 / 0.1%]
005 Low Speed:K
[20 to 255 / 70 / 1%]
006 Low Speed:C
[20 to 255 / 70 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-294 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
007 Low Speed:M
[20 to 255 / 70 / 1%]
008 Low Speed:Y
[20 to 255 / 70 / 1%]
3583* Patch LD Power Adj DFU
001 Col_LD
[10 to 255 / 55 / 1dec]
K_LD
002
[10 to 255 / 55 / 1dec]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
3591* Vd Potential Correct DFU
001 Coefficient
[0 to 1 / 0.48 / 0.01]
Max
002
[0 to 1000 / 225 / 1V]
Min
003
[0 to 1000 / 135 / 1V]
Vd U-Limit:Exceeded Control
004
[0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01]
Vd L-Limit:Exceeded Control
005
[0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01]
Vd Constant
006
[-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 1V]
SM Appendix 4-295 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
3701* Tnr Refresh Mode DFU
001 Image Area:K
[0 to 100 / 12.5 / 0.01%]
002 Image Area:C
[0 to 100 / 6 / 0.01%]
003 Image Area:M
[0 to 100 / 6 / 0.01%]
004 Image Area:Y
[0 to 100 / 6 / 0.01%]
005 Image Area Thresh:K
[0 to 100 / 12.5 / 0.1%]
006 Image Area Thresh:C
[0 to 100 / 6 / 0.1%]
007 Image Area Thresh:M
[0 to 100 / 6 / 0.1%]
008 Image Area Thresh:Y
[0 to 100 / 6 / 0.1%]
009 Max Pattern Length
[0 to 25 / 25 / 1mm]
D095/M077 4-296 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
010 Need Ref Length:K
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1mm]
011 Need Ref Length:C
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1mm]
012 Need Ref Length:M
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1mm]
013 Need Ref Length:Y
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1mm]
014 Interrupt Thresh
[0 to 65535 / 300 / 1mm]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
015 Idling Time 1
[0 to 250 / 0 / 1 sec.]
016 Idling Time 2
[0 to 250 / 25 / 1 sec.]
017 Repeat Time
[1 to 30 / 7 / 1 time]
020 Exe Tnr Ref:KCMY
Executes the toner refresh mode for all colors.
SM Appendix 4-297 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
021 Exe Tnr Ref:K
Executes the toner refresh mode for all colors.
022 Exe Tnr Ref:C
Executes the toner refresh mode for all colors.
023 Exe Tnr Ref:M
Executes the toner refresh mode for all colors.
024 Exe Tnr Ref:Y
Executes the toner refresh mode for all colors.
3702* Toner Consumption
001 PCU: Bk
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1g]
002 PCU: C
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1g]
003 PCU: M
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1g]
004 PCU: Y
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1g]
005 Development: Bk
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1g]
D095/M077 4-298 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
Development: C
006
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1g]
Development: M
007
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1g]
Development: Y
008
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1g]
3703* life prediction
001 remaining PCU:Bk life
[-99999999 to 99999999 / 0 / 1page]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
002 remaining PCU:C life
[-99999999 to 99999999 / 0 / 1page]
003 remaining PCU:M life
[-99999999 to 99999999 / 0 / 1page]
004 remaining PCU:Y life
[-99999999 to 99999999 / 0 / 1page]
005 PCU:BK
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.0001 m]
006 PCU: C
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.0001 m]
SM Appendix 4-299 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
007 PCU: M
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.0001 m]
008 PCU: Y
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.0001 m]
009 remaining DEV:Bk life
Displays the remaining part life of the developer in the black development
unit.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page]
010 remaining DEV:C life
Displays the remaining part life of the developer in the cyan development
unit.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page]
011 remaining DEV:M life
Displays the remaining part life of the developer in the magenta
development unit.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page]
012 remaining DEV:Y life
Displays the remaining part life of the developer in the yellow development
unit.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page]
013 runtime DEV:BK
Displays the rotation time of the black development unit.
[0 to 999999/ - / 1 min.]
D095/M077 4-300 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
014 runtime DEV:C
Displays the rotation time of the cyan development unit.
[0 to 999999 / - / 1 min.]
015 runtime DEV:M
Displays the rotation time of the magenta development unit.
[0 to 999999 / - / 1 min.]
016 runtime DEV:Y
Displays the rotation time of the yellow development unit.
[0 to 999999 / - / 1 min.]
017 Tnr supply time:BK
Displays the activation time of the black toner supply clutch.
Appendix:
Program
Service
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sec.]
Mode
018 Tnr supply time:C
Displays the activation time of the cyan toner supply clutch.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sec.]
019 Tnr supply time:M
Displays the activation time of the magenta toner supply clutch.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sec.]
020 Tnr supply time:Y
Displays the activation time of the yellow toner supply clutch.
[0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sec.]
SM Appendix 4-301 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
3801 Init TD Sensor
001 All Colors
Executes the TD sensor initialization for all development units.
002 Col
Executes the TD sensor initialization for the color development units.
003 K
Executes the TD sensor initialization for the black development unit.
004 C
Executes the TD sensor initialization for the cyan development unit.
005 M
Executes the TD sensor initialization for the magenta development unit.
Y
006
Executes the TD sensor initialization for the yellow development unit.
Execute Color Select
007* Selects the execution color(s) for the TD sensor initialization.
[0 x 0F to 0 x 00 / 0 x 0F / 1]
Execute:Slected Colors
008
Executes the TD sensor initializing for the selected color.
3802* TD Sn Init OK?
001 From Left:KCMY
[0 to 9999 / 4444 / 1]
1: Success, 4: Not executed, 9: Failure
D095/M077 4-302 SM Appendix
System SP3-xxx: 2
3820 Manual ProCon
001 Normal ProCon
Executes the process control.
002 Exe Density Adj
Executes the toner density adjustment.
003 ACC RunTime ProCon
Executes the process control before ACC.
ProCon OK?
3821* For details, see "Process Control Troubleshooting" under "Troubleshooting"
Appendix:
chapter in the Field Service Manual".
Program
Service
Mode
001 History:Last
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
002 History:Last2
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
003 History:Last3
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
004 History:Last4
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-303 D095/M077
System SP3-xxx: 2
005 History:Last5
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
006 History:Last6
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
007 History:Last7
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
008 History:Last8
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
009 History:Last9
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
010 History:Last10
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-304 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
4.14 SYSTEM SP4-XXX: 1 (D095 ONLY)
4.14.1 SP4-XXX SCANNER
4008 Sub Scan Magnification Ad
Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for scanning. If this value is
changed, the scanner motor speed is changed.
[-0.9 to +0.9 / 0 / 0.1 %]
Use the " " key to enter the minus ( –) before entering the value.
Setting a lower value reduces the motor speed and lengthens the image in the
sub scan direction (paper direction). Setting a larger value increases the motor
speed and shortens the image in the sub scan direction.
Appendix:
Program
Service
4010 Sub Scan Registration Adj
Mode
Adjusts the leading edge registration for scanning.
[-9.0 to +9.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Use the "" " key to enter the minus ( –) before entering the value.
A minus setting moves in the direction of the leading edge. A larger value shifts
the image away from the leading edge, and a smaller value shifts the image
toward the leading edge.
4011 Main Scan Reg
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning.
[-2.0 to +2.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
(–): The image disappears at the left side.
(+): The image appears at the left side.
Use the " " key to enter the minus ( –) before entering the value.
SM Appendix 4-305 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
4012 Set Scale Mask
Adjusts the erase margin for scanning. The leading, trailing, right and left margins
can be set independently. Do not adjust this unless the user wishes to have a
scanner margin that is greater than the printer margin.
Leading edge, sub scan direction
001
Book:Sub LEdge [0 to 3.0 / 1 / 0.1 mm]
Trailing edge, sub scan direction
002
Book:Sub TEdge [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Book:Main: Front, main scan direction
003
LEdge [0 to 3.0 / 1 / 0.1 mm]
Back, main scan direction
004
Book:Main:TEdge [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
4013 Scanner Free Run
Allows scanner free running with exposure lamp
001 Lamp OFF
off.
Allows scanner free running with the exposure
002 Lamp ON
lamp on.
4014 Scan 1Scan
Scan 1 time with the exposure lamp on.
4015 Scanner Speed Adjustment
Displays the value of the scanner speed fine adjustment.
[-20 to +20 / 0 / 1mm]
Scanner speed fine adjustment is automatically done when the main switch is
turned on, and the current setting is overwritten.
D095/M077 4-306 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
4301 APS Sensor Output Display
Displays the APS sensor output signals when an original is placed on the
exposure glass.
4303 APS A5 / HLT Size Detection
Selects whether or not the machine detects the original as A5 or HLT size when
the APS sensor does not detect the size.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: No original
1: A5 length/51/2" x 81/2"
If 1 is selected, the paper size is determined as A5 length/51/2" X 81/2" even if the
paper size is too small to be detected on the exposure glass.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
4305 8K/16K Detection
Change the size detection.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: Normal Detection
1: A4/LT detected : LEF=A4, SEF=LT
2: A4/LT detected : LEF=LT, SEF=A4
3: 8K/16K series: A3/B4=8KSEF, A4SEF/B4SEF/A5SEF=16K SEF
A4LEF/B4LEF/A5LEF=16K LEF
4400 Original Edge Mask
This SP sets the mask area to remove shadows when scanning originals from
the exposure glass in Book mode.
Note: "LE" denotes "leading edge" and "TE" denotes "trailing edge".
001 Sub:LEdge
002 Sub:TEdge
[0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
003 Main:LEdge
004 Main:TEdge
SM Appendix 4-307 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
IPU Test Pattern
4417
Test Pattern: [0 to 24 / 0 / 1]
11: Color patch 16 (2)
12: Color patch 64
0: Scanned image
13: Grid pattern CMYK
1: Gradation main scan A
14: Color patch CMYK
2: Gradation main scan B
15: Gray pattern (1)
3: Gradation main scan C
16: Gray pattern (2)
4: Gradation main scan D
17: Gray pattern (3
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
18: Shading pattern
6: Grid Pattern
19:Thin line pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
8: Gradation RGBCMYK
21: Scanned + Gray scale
9: UCR pattern
22: Scanned + Color patch
10: Color patch 16 (1)
23: Scanned + Slant grid C
24:: Scanned + Slant grid D
Saturation Adj
4440
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1]
4460 Scanner Digital AE Setting
This SP sets the lower limit and level for background removal when background
removal is selected with a scanner application.
001 Set Low Limit [0 to 1023 / 392 / 1]
002 Background Level [0 to 1023 / 972 / 1]
D095/M077 4-308 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
4501 ACC Target Den
001 Copy:K:Text
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1]
002 Copy:C:Text
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1]
003 Copy:M:Text
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1]
004 Copy:Y:Text
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1]
005 Copy:K:Photo
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1]
006 Copy:C:Photo
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1]
007 Copy:M:Photo
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1]
Copy:Y:Photo
008
[0 to 10 / 5 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-309 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
4505 ACC Cor:Bright
001 Master:K
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
002 Master:C
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
003 Master:M
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
004 Master:Y
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
005 Slave:K
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
006 Slave:C
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
007 Slave:M
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
Slave:Y
008
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-310 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
4506 ACC Cor:Dark
001 Master:K
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
002 Master:C
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
003 Master:M
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
004 Master:Y
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
005 Slave:K
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
006 Slave:C
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
007 Slave:M
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
Slave:Y
008
[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-311 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
4540 Print Coverage
001 RY Phase: Option
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
002 RY Phase: R
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
003 RY Phase: G
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
004 RY Phase: B
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
005 YR Phase: Option
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
006 YR Phase: R
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
007 YR Phase: G
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
YR Phase: B
008
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
YG Phase: Option
009
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
D095/M077 4-312 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
YG Phase: R
010
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
YG Phase: G
011
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
YG Phase: B
012
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
GY Phase: Option
013
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
GY Phase: R
014
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
GY Phase: G
015
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
GY Phase: B
016
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
GC Phase: Option
017
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
GC Phase: R
018
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
SM Appendix 4-313 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
GC Phase: G
019
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
GC Phase: B
020
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
CG Phase: Option
021
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
CG Phase: R
022
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
CG Phase: G
023
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
CG Phase: B
024
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
CB Phase: Option
025
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
CB Phase: R
026
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
CB Phase: G
027
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
D095/M077 4-314 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
CB Phase: B
028
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
BC Phase: Option
029
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
BC Phase: R
030
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
BC Phase: G
031
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
BC Phase: B
032
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
BM Phase: Option
033
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
BM Phase: R
034
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
BM Phase: G
035
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
BM Phase: B
036
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
SM Appendix 4-315 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
MB Phase: Option
037
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
MB Phase: R
038
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
MB Phase: G
039
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
MB Phase: B
040
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
MR Phase: Option
041
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
MR Phase: R
042
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
MR Phase: G
043
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
MR Phase: B
044
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
RM Phase: Option
045
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
D095/M077 4-316 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
RM Phase: R
046
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
RM Phase: G
047
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
RM Phase: B
048
[0 to 255 / 0 /1]
4550 Scanner: Text/
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
4551 Scanner: Text
4552 Scanner: Dropout Color: Text
4553 Scanner: Text/Photo
4554 Scanner: Photo
4565 Scanner: Grayscale
4570 Scanner: Color: Text/Photo
4571 Scanner: Color: Photo
4572 Scanner: Auto Color
SM Appendix 4-317 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 1 (D095 only)
Sets the MTF level (Modulation Transfer Function)
designed to improve image contrast. Set higher for
005 MTF Filter:0-15
stronger effect, lower for weaker effect.
[0 to 15/8/1]
Use to remove "jaggies" if they appear. Set higher
006 Smoothing Filter:0-7 for smoother.
[0 to 7/4/1]
Set higher for darker, set lower for lighter.
007 Brightness:1-255
[1 to 255/128/1]
Set higher for more contrast, set lower for less
008 Contrast:1-255 contrast.
[1 to 255/128/1]
This SP sets the level for removing dots when a
color original is scanned with a scanner software
009 Isolated Dot Removal:0-7 application. The higher the setting, the greater the
effect applied for removing background dots.
[0 to 7/0/1]
4600 Display the ID of ASIC
Displays the SBU ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after
001 VSBCNT the SBU adjusts automatically at power on. DFU
[0 to 0xFF / - / 1]
Displays the SBU ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after
002 DAGL_L the SBU adjusts automatically at power on. DFU
[0 to 0xFF / - / 1]
Displays the SBU ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after
003 DAGL_F the SBU adjusts automatically at power on. DFU
[0 to 0xFF / - / 1]
D095/M077 4-318 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4.15 SYSTEM SP4-XXX: 2 (D095 ONLY)
4603 AGC Operation
001 HP Detect enable Execute SBU registration adjustment (factory default)
4609 Gray Balance Adj Value R
001 [-256 to 255 / 27 / 1]
4610 Gray Balance Adj Value G
001 [-256 to 255 / 18 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
4611 Gray Balance Adj Value B
001 [-256 to 255 / -14 / 1]
4628 Gain Range Adj Value R
001 FC:F:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
4629 Gain Range Adj Value G
001 FC:F:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-319 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4630 Gain Range Adj Value B
001 FC:F:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:R [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
4631 Gain Adj Value R
4632 Gain Adj Value G
4633 Gain Adj Value B
001 FC:F:RE [0 or 1023 / 0 / 1]
002 FC:F:RO [0 or 1023 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:RE [0 or 1023 / 0 / 1]
004 FC:L:RO [0 or 1023 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:RE [0 or 1023 / 0 / 1]
006 BK:F:RO [0 or 1023 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:RE [0 or 1023 / 0 / 1]
008 BK:L:RO [0 or 1023 / 0 / 1]
4641 LoopNumber:WhiteLevel
FC
001
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
BK
002
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-320 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4646 ErrorFlag:Auto-Adj Scanner
001 Gain1:First [0 or 4095 / 0 / 1]
002 Gain1:Last [0 or 4095 / 0 / 1]
003 Gain2:First [0 or 4095 / 0 / 1]
004 Gain2:Last [0 or 4095 / 0 / 1]
005 Black Level :First :FC [0 or 4095 / 0 / 1]
006 Black Level :Last :FC [0 or 4095 / 0 / 1]
007 Black Level :First :BK [0 or 4095 / 0 / 1]
008 Black Level :Last :BK [0 or 4095 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
4647 ErrorFlag:Scanner Hardware
001 [0 or 1023 / 0 / 1]
4677 Gain Range Adj Value R
4678 Gain Range Adj Value G
4679 Gain Range Adj Value B
001 FC:F:R:Factory Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:R:Factory Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:R:Factory Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:R:Factory Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-321 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4680 Gain Adj Value R
001 FC:F:RE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
002 FC:F:RO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:RE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
004 FC:L:RO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:RE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
006 BK:F:RO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:RE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
008 BK:L:RO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
4681 Gain Adj Value G
001 FC:F:GE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
002 FC:F:GO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:GE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
004 FC:L:GO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:GE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
006 BK:F:GO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:GE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
008 BK:L:GO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-322 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4682 Gain Adj Value B
001 FC:F:BE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
002 FC:F:BO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:BE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
004 FC:L:BO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:BE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
006 BK:F:BO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:BE:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
008 BK:L:BO:Factory Setting [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
4690 White Level Peak Data
001 FC:F:GE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
002 FC:F:GO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:GE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004 FC:L:GO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:GE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
006 BK:F:GO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:GE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
008 BK:L:GO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-323 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4691 White Level Peak Data
001 FC:F:GE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
002 FC:F:GO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:GE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004 FC:L:GO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:GE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
006 BK:F:GO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:GE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
008 BK:L:GO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
4692 White Level Peak Data
001 FC:F:BE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
002 FC:F:BO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:L:BE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004 FC:L:BO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:F:BE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
006 BK:F:BO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
007 BK:L:BE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
008 BK:L:BO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
4693 Black Level Data
001 FC:F:REE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
002 FC:F:ROE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:F:REO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004 FC:F:ROO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-324 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
005 FC:L:REE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
006 FC:L:ROE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
007 FC:L:REO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
008 FC:L:ROO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009 BK:F:REE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
010 BK:F:ROE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
011 BK:F:REO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
012 BK:F:ROO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
013 BK:L:REE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
014 BK:L:ROE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
015 BK:L:REO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
Program
Service
Mode
016 BK:L:ROO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
4694 Black Level Data
001 FC:F:GEE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
002 FC:F:GOE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:F:GEO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004 FC:F:GOO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005 FC:L:GEE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
006 FC:L:GOE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
007 FC:L:GEO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
008 FC:L:GOO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009 BK:F:GEE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
010 BK:F:GOE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
011 BK:F:GEO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-325 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
012 BK:F:GOO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
013 BK:L:GEE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
014 BK:L:GOE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
015 BK:L:GEO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
016 BK:L:GOO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
4695 Black Level Data
001 FC:F:BEE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
002 FC:F:BOE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
003 FC:F:BEO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004 FC:F:BOO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005 FC:L:BEE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
006 FC:L:BOE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
007 FC:L:BEO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
008 FC:L:BOO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009 BK:F:BEE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
010 BK:F:BOE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
011 BK:F:BEO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
012 BK:F:BOO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
013 BK:L:BEE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
014 BK:L:BOE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
015 BK:L:BEO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
016 BK:L:BOO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-326 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4804 Home Position Operation
001 Execute home positioning 1 time.
4806 FL Correction ON/OFF
001 RED [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
002 GREEN [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
003 BLUE [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
004 BK:RED [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
005 BK:GREEN [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
006 BK:BLUR [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
4808 Result FL Detection
001-020 FC:FR1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
021-040 FC:LR1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
041-060 FC:FG1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
061-080 FC:LG1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
081-100 FC:FB1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
101-120 FC:LB1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
121-140 BK:FR1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
141-160 BK:LR1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
161-180 BK:FG1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
181-200 BK:LG1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
201-220 BK:FB1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
221-240 BK:LB1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-327 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4809 Result FL Correction
001-020 FC:FR1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
021-040 FC:LR1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
041-060 FC:FG1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
061-080 FC:LG1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
081-100 FC:FB1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
101-120 FC:LB1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
121-140 BK:FR1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
141-160 BK:LR1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
161-180 BK:FG1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
181-200 BK:LG1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
201-220 BK:FB1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
221-240 BK:LB1-20 [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1]
4813 ThickPaper Adjust
001 ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Value R [80 or 100 / 95 / 1%]
003 Value G [80 or 100 / 95 / 1%]
004 Value B [80 or 100 / 95 / 1%]
D095/M077 4-328 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4820 Lamp Detection
002 Lamp1 Counter [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
003 Lamp2 Counter [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
Clear the values of the lamp1 detection counter
004 Clear Counters
and the lamp2 detection counter.
005 Lamp1White Level FE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
006 Lamp1White Level FO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
007 Lamp1White Level LE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
008 Lamp2White Level LO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
009 Lamp2White Level FE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
010 Lamp2White Level FO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
011 Lamp2White Level LE [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
012 Lamp2White Level LO [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
4901 Scan Correction
Background Erase: Blue Original (Lighter)
020
[0 to 192 / 63 / 1]
Background Erase: Blue Original (Normal)
021
[0 to 192 / 85 / 1]
Background Erase: Blue Original (Darker)
022
[0 to 192 / 100 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-329 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4902 Disp ACC Data
001 R_DATA1 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
002 G_DATA1 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
003 B_DATA1 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
004 R_DATA2 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
005 G_DATA2 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
006 B_DATA2 [0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
4904 Test Scan IPU
001 Test 1
Performs write and read test for the CPU on the IPU by conducting a compare
check that reads and writes to each register of the ASIC.
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
002 Test 2
Performs a check of the image paths and connections and displays the location
of an error is detected.
[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1]
4905 Select Gradation Level
Changes the threshold parameters of error diffusion.
001
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1]
4918 Man Gamma Adj
009 [0 / 0 / 0]
D095/M077 4-330 SM Appendix
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4954 Read/Restore Std
Reads the "Standard Color Test Chart" to calibrate the
001 Read New Chart
scanner gamma curve.
Restores the scanner gamma to the previous value (not
002 Recall Prev Chart
the factory setting).
004 Set Std Chart Overwrite the standard data of the scanner gamma.
4991 IPU Image Pass Selection
Selects the image path of the IPU.
001
[0 to 11 / 2 / 1]
0: Scanned RGB image
Appendix:
1: RGB image in scanner I/F
Program
Service
Mode
2: RGB image after shading correction (default)
3: RGB image after shading correction
4: Test pattern data (grayscale)
5: RGB image after line interval correction
6: RGB image after digital AE correction
7: RGB image after vertical line correction
8: RGB image after scanner gamma correction
9: RTB image after filtering with MTF
10: RGB image after ADS
11: RGB image after color processing
SM Appendix 4-331 D095/M077
System SP4-xxx: 2 (D095 only)
4993 Highlight Correction
Sets the level of sensitivity for the removal of shadows that can
be caused with originals that have been marked up with
highlighter pens.
001 Sensibility
[0 to 9/4/1]
Lowering the setting reduces the removal effect, and raising the
setting increases the removal effect.
Sets the region where highlight removal is applied.
[0 to 9/4/1]
002 Region
A lower setting increases the size of the region, and a higher
setting reduces the size of the region.
4994 Scanner Text/Photo Judgment
Use this SP to adjust the copier capability to distinguish between text and
photo areas of images. This adjustment applies only to scanner applications
using the high compression PDF mode.
[0 to 2/1/1]
0: Nearer text
1: Default
2: Nearer photo
D095/M077 4-332 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
4.16 SYSTEM SP5-XXX
4.16.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)
Paper Size
5019
Selects the paper size for each tray.
A4 LEF, LT LEF, A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG,
002 Tray 1 *CTL
LT SEF or Custom SIze
004 Tray 3 *CTL
A4 LEF, B5 LEF, A5 SEF, LT LEF, HLT or
005 Tray 4 *CTL
Custom SIze
006 Tray 5 *CTL
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
mm/inch Display Selection
5024
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
0: mm (Europe/Asia)
001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL
1: inch (USA)
Custom Size: Vertical
5040
Specifies the length of the custom size.
002 Tray 1 *CTL
004 Tray 3 *CTL
005 Tray 4 *CTL
006 Tray 5 *CTL
SM Appendix 4-333 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx Rev. 02/22/2011
5041 Custom Size: Vertical
Specifies the width of the custom size.
002 Tray 1 *CTL
004 Tray 3 *CTL
005 Tray 4 *CTL
006 Tray 5 *CTL
⇒
Difference from Pro C900/C720 Series
Accounting Counter • On Pro C900/C720 series (A3/DLT & Larger) displays the sum
of FC A3/DLT & Larger and BW A3/DLT & Larger.
• On Pro C901 series (A3/DLT & Larger) displays FC A3/DLT &
Selects the counting method. Larger and BW A3/DLT & Larger separately.
5045 NOTE: Pro C901 [M077]: The counting method can be changed only once,
regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive.
Pro C901S [D095]: The counting method can be changed many times,
regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive.
[0 - 6 / 0 (D095) 1 (M077) / - ]
001 Counter Method *CTL 0: Developer 2: Coverage 5: Developer *
1: Prints 3, 4: Not Used 6: Prints *
*(A3/DLT & larger)
5047 Paper Display *CTL
Determines whether the tray loaded with paper printed on one side is displayed.
[0 to 1 / 0]
0: Not displayed,
1: Displayed
Refill Toner Detection Display
5051
Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
Refill Toner Detection [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
001 *CTL
Display 0: ON, 1: OFF
D095/M077 4-334 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
Display IP Address
5055
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF 1: ON
[Coverage Counter Display]
5056
Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
- *CTL
0: Not display, 1: Display
Parts PM Display Setting
5062
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Determines whether each PM part counter is displayed.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: ON, 1: OFF
A3/DLT Double Count SSP
5104 Specifies whether the counter is double clicked for A3/DLT size prints.
When you have to change this SP, ask your supervisor.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: NO (Normal count)
001 A3 Double Count *CTL 1: YES (Double count)
2: YES except By-pass (Normal count for
unknown size)
SM Appendix 4-335 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx
5112 Non-Std. Paper Sel. *CTL
Determines whether a non-standard paper size can be input for the universal
cassette trays (Tray 2, Tray 3)
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
0: No
1: Yes. If "1" is selected, the customer will be able to input a non-standard paper
size using the UP mode.
5113 Optional Counter Type *CTL
Default Optional Counter Type
Selects the type of counter:
001 0: None
1: Key card (RK3, 4) Japan only
2: Key card down
5: MF key card
External Optional Counter Type
Enables the SDK application. This lets you select a number for the external
device for user access control.
Note: "SDK" refers to software on an SD card.
002 [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
0: None
1: Expansion Device 1
2: Expansion Device 2
3: Expansion Device 3
Optional Counter I/F *CTL -
5114 This SP sets the machine for use with the optional counter.
Default: Off
0: OFF, 1: ON
D095/M077 4-336 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
5118 Disable Copying
Temporarily denies access to the machine.
[0 to 1/ 0 /-]
0: Release for normal operation
1: Prohibit access to machine
5120 Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal *CTL
Do not change.
[0 to 2 / 0]
0: Yes. Normal reset
1: Standby. Resets before job start/after completion
2: No. Normally no reset
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5121 Counter Up Timing *CTL
Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed-in or at
paper exit.
[0 to 1 / 0]
0: Feed count
1: No feed count
5126* Set F-size Document (D095 only)
Selects the size for F-size document detection.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
001 0: Foolscap (8 1/2 x 13)
1: Folio (8 1/4 x 13)
2: F (8 x 13)
SM Appendix 4-337 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx
5127 APS OFF Mode (D095 only)
This SP can be used to switch APS (Auto Paper Select) off when a coin lock or
pre-paid key card device is connected to the machine.
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]
0: On, 1: Off
5128 Code Mode With Key/Card Option Japan Only
5131* Paper Size Type Selection
Selects the paper size type (for originals and copy paper).
[0 to 2 / 1: NA, 2: EU / 1]
001
0: Japan, 1: NA, 2: EU
After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on.
Size Detection OFF
5148
Turns on or off the automatic paper size detection.
004 Tray 3 *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
005 Tray 4 *CTL
0: On, 1: Off
006 Tray 5 *CTL
5162 App. Switch Method *CTL
Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a
software switch.
[0 to 1 / 0]
0: Soft Key Set
1: Hard Key Set
D095/M077 4-338 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
[CE Login]
5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must 'log in' to service mode
with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 CE Login *CTL 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
HDD Pages Mgmt (D095 only)
5182
Selects the LS area for the page management on the HDD.
001 Release LS Limit *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
002 Change Pages/ Doc *CTL 0: Standard. 1: Extension
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5187 PM Counter Print Out in UP
This setting determines whether the PM parts counter list is printed with or
without the standard values.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Does not print standard values
1: Prints standard values
5188 Copy NV Version (D095 only)
Displays the version number of the NVRAM
001 *CTL
on the controller board.
SM Appendix 4-339 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx
5193 External Controller Info. Settings (DFU)
001 - *CTL [0 to 10 / 6 / 1/step]
Sets the external controller type. This setting is appropriately adjusted if an
external controller is installed in the machine.
0: No external controller installed
1: EFI controller
2: Ratio controller
3: Egret controller
4: GJ
5: Creo
6: QX-100
7 to 10: Reserved
5195 Limitless SW DFU
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
001 *CTL 0: Productivity priority
1: Tray priority
Selects the paper feed mode.
Productivity priority:
This changes the feeding tray as soon as the machine detects the priority tray
even the paper still remains in the feeding tray.
Tray priority:
This changes the feeding tray after the paper in the tray where the machine has
been feeding paper has been run out of.
This SP is activated only when a customer selects the "Auto Paper Select".
D095/M077 4-340 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
5199 Paper Set After Staple End
003 - *CTL
Enables or disables feeding out of the finisher without stapling.
[0: OFF] [1: ON]
0: OFF"
Paper feeds out with stapling at the maximum number of the finisher stapling
when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum number).
1: ON
Paper feeds out without stapling at the maximum number of the finisher
stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum
number).
Page Numbering (D095 only)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
5212 A "– value" moves the page number positions to the left edge or leading edge
(high position). A "+ value" moves the page number positions to the right edge
or trailing edge (low position).
Duplex Printout
003 *CTL [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Right/Left Position
Duplex Printout
004 *CTL [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
High/Low Position
SM Appendix 4-341 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx
Set Time
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302 NA: -300 (New York)
EU: + 60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
002 Time Difference *CTL# [-1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step ]
5307 Summer Time
ON/OFF
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
[ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
001 1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this
SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Start - -
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the
first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
003 3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
D095/M077 4-342 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
End - -
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.
There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
004 3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
The digits are counted from the left.
Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Access Control DFU
Appendix:
Program
5401
Service
Mode
When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings.
Whenever a new login user is added to the
address book in external certification mode
(for Windows, LDAP, RDH), the default
document ACL is updated according to this
SP setting.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
103 Default Document ACL *CTL
0: View
1: Edit
2: Edit/Delete
3: Full control
Note: This SP setting is ignored on a
machine that is not using document server.
This ID is overwritten by SAS (VAS) when
200 SDK1 Unique ID *CTL
you install or uninstall the SDK application.
SDK1 Certification
201 *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
210 SDK2 Unique ID *CTL -
SM Appendix 4-343 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx
SDK2 Certification
211 *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
220 SDK3 Unique ID *CTL -
SDK3 Certification
221 *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Method
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Disable
230 SDK Certification Device *CTL
1: Enable
Bit 7 to Bit 0
5404 User Code Counter Clear
001 UCodeCtrClr *CTL Clears all counters for users.
5414 Access Mitigation
Mitigation On/Off
Switches on/off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are
identical.
001
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Off
1: On
Mitigation Time
Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identical user IDs
002
and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 /1 min]
5416 Access Information
Access User Max Number
Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack
001
detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 /1 users]
D095/M077 4-344 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
Access Password Max Number
Limits the number of passwords used by the access exclusion and password
002
attack detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 /1 passwords]
Monitor Interval
Sets the processing time interval for referencing user ID and password
003
information.
[1 to 10 / 3 /1 sec]
Authentication Error Code
5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
System Log Disp
Appendix:
Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user
Program
Service
Mode
authentication failure occurs.
001
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 ]
0: Off
1: On
Panel Disp
Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user
authentication failure occurs.
002
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 ]
1: On
0: Off
5501 PM Alarm *CTL -
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Alarm off
001 PM Alarm Level
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x
1000 > PM counter
SM Appendix 4-345 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx
5504 Jam Alarm *CTL -
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not
included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
001 0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
Error Alarm
Sets the error alarm level.
5505 The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the error
alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set number
of printed sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
001 - *CTL [0 to 255 / 85 / 100 pages /step]
5507 Supply Alarm *CTL -
001 Paper Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
002 Staple Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
003 Toner Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On
Waste Toner Bottle
006 0: Off, 1: On
Supply Alarm
Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply Call" via
the NRS, when the next conditions occur.
080 Toner Call Timing
0: At replacement
1: At near end
128 Interval :Others
132 Interval :A3 [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step]
133 Interval :A4
D095/M077 4-346 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
134 Interval :A5
141 Interval :B4
142 Interval :B5
160 Interval :DLT
164 Interval :LG
166 Interval :LT
172 Interval :HLT
5508 CC Call
001 Jam Remains Enables/disables initiating a call.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
002 Continuous Jams
Appendix:
0: Disable
Program
Service
Mode
003 Continuous Door Open 1: Enable
Sets the length of time to determine the
011 Jam Detection: Time Length length of an unattended paper jam.
[3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute]
Sets the number of continuous paper jams
Jam Detection Continuous
012 required to initiate a call.
Count
[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 time]
Sets the length of time the remains opens
013 Door Open: Time Length to determine when to initiate a call.
[3 to 30/ 10 / 1 minute]
SM Appendix 4-347 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx
5513 Parts Alarm Level Count
001 Normal [1 to 9999 / 300 / 1K]
Sets the parts replacement alarm counter for the number of paper.
002 DF [1 to 9999 / 300 / 1K]
Sets the parts replacement alarm counter for the number of scanned originals.
5514 Parts Alarm
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
001 Normal
0: OFF, 1: ON
Turns on or off the parts replacement alarm for the number of paper.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
002 DF
0: OFF, 1: ON
Turns on or off the parts replacement alarm for the number of scanned originals.
[SC/Alarm Setting] *CTL -
5515 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an
SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC
error occurs.
001 SC Call
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
002 Service Parts Near End Call
0: Off, 1: On
003 Service Parts End Call
004 User Call
006 Communication Test Call [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
007 Machine Information Notice 0: Off, 1: On
008 Alarm Notice
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
009 Non Genuine Toner Alarm
0: Off, 1: On
D095/M077 4-348 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
011 Supply Management Report Call 0: Off, 1: On
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
012 Jam/Door Open Call
0: Off, 1: On
Failure Prediction *CTL -
5517 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an
SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC
error occurs.
Alarm On/Off Setting
001 Enables or disables the notification alarm for the @Remote.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Appendix:
0: Off, 1: On
Program
Service
Mode
Alarm Interval
002 Specifies the alarm interval for the @Remote.
[0 to 1000 / 10 / 100 sheets/step]
5610 Base Gamma Ctrl Pt:Execute (D095 only)
004 Get Factory Default
005 Set Factory Default
006 Restore Orginal Value
SM Appendix 4-349 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx Rev. 05/16/2012
5611 Toner Color in 2C (D095 only)
001 B-C [0 TO 128 / 100 / 1]
002 B-M [0 TO 128 / 100 / 1]
003 G-C [0 TO 128 / 100 / 1]
004 G-Y [0 TO 128 / 100 / 1]
005 R-M [0 TO 128 / 100 / 1]
006 R-Y [0 TO 128 / 100 / 1]
5618 Color Mode Display Selection (D095 only)
This SP switches the color display for the operation panel LCD.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
0: Domestic Japan
1: Overseas (Outside Japan)
User Paper Settings Data
5711 *CTL -
Setup
User Paper Settings Data UpLoad
001
Copies the paper library data of the SD card to the mainframe.
User Data UpLoad
002
Copies the user paper setting data of the SD card to the mainframe.
102 User Paper Settings Data Download
Copies the user paper setting data of the mainframe to the SD card in the SD
slot 2. "user.mqp"
⇒ 202
Standard Paper Data Ver. (SD Card)
Displays the version of the Paper Library loaded.
D095/M077 4-350 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
5715 Custom Paper: Thick *CTL -
001 to ID1 to !D100
100 [0 to 7 / 1 / 1]
5716 Custom Paper: Thin *CTL -
001 to ID1 to !D100
100 [0 to 7 / 1 / 1]
Custom Paper: UP/Web
5717 *CTL -
Info. 1: P-Type
001 to ID1 to !D100
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
100 [0 to 0xFFFF / 1 / 1]
Custom Paper: UP/Web
5718 *CTL -
Info. 2: P-Type
001 to ID1 to ID100
100 [0 to 0xFFFF / 1 / 1]
Custom Paper: UP/Web
5719 *CTL -
Info. 3: P-Type
001 to ID1 to ID100
100 [0 to 0xFFFF / 1 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-351 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx
Custom Paper: UP/Web
5720 *CTL -
Info. 4: P-Type
001 to ID1 to ID100
100 [0 to 0xFFFF / 1 / 1]
5721 Custom Paper: Size Code *CTL -
001 to ID1 to ID100
100 [0 to 0xFF / 1 / 1]
Custom Paper: Width
5722 *CTL -
(M-scan 0.1 mm)
001 to ID1 to ID100
100 [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 1 / 1]
Custom Paper: Length
5723 *CTL -
(S-scan 0.1 mm)
001 to ID1 to ID100
100 [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 1 / 1]
Custom Paper: MQP
5724 *CTL -
Version
001 to ID1 to ID100
100 [0 to 99 / 1 / 1]
5725 Custom Paper: Data Type *CTL -
001 to ID1 to ID100
100 [0 to 99 / 1 / 1]
D095/M077 4-352 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
5789* Custom Paper Value Initialize DFU
Custom Paper
001 Specifies the target custom paper to be initialized.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
0: All custom paper, 1: ID1, ----, 100: ID100
[Memory Clear]
5801
NOTE: For more information, see "NOTE 1" following "SP8-xxx" table.
All Clear
Resets all correction data for process control and all software counters, and
001 returns all modes and adjustments to their default values.
Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the machine has
malfunctioned due to a damaged NVRAM.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Engine
002
Clears the engine settings.
SCS - -
003
Clears the system settings.
Copier application (D095
- -
006 only)
Clears the copier application settings.
Printer Application - -
008
Clears the printer application settings.
Scanner Application
- -
009 (D095 only)
Clears the scanner application settings.
Web Service
- -
010 (D095 only)
Clears the web service settings.
SM Appendix 4-353 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx
NCS - -
011 Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also),
SmartDeviceMonitor for
Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
Clear DCS Settings - -
014
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Clear UCS Settings - -
015
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
MIRS Setting - -
016
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings.
CCS - -
017
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.
SRM Memory Clr - -
018
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager) settings.
LCS Clear - -
019
Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
WebUapl
- -
020 (D095 only)
Initializes the webuapl settings.
ECS - -
021
Initializes the ECS settings.
5803 Input Check - See p.4-531 "Input Check: 1" in this section.
5804 Output Check - See p.4-604 "Output Check" in this section.
D095/M077 4-354 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx
5805 Unit Initializing
Return the each motor position to the default position.
001 Pressure Roller Lift Motor
002 PTR Lift Motor
003 ITB Black Lift Motor
004 ITB Color Lift Motor
005 Belt Centering Roller Motor
006 ITB Motor
007 Registration Gate Motor
008 Shift Roller Unit Motor
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
010 ACTIVATE Movement
015 De-curler Unit HP Detection
016 De-curler Unit Move:Upper Default
017 De-curler Unit Move:Lower Default
5807* Area Selection
001 Select the area (JPN/ NA/ EU).
[1 to 3 / JPN, NA or EU / 1]
1: JPN, 2: NA, 3: EU
SM Appendix 4-355 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx
5810 Fusing SC Cancel
Executes the fusing SC clear.
When the machine issues one of the "Level A" SC codes shown below, this
001 indicates a serious problem in the fusing unit. The machine is disabled and the
operator cannot reset the SC. The machine requires servicing immediately.
Select "1" and then touch [EXECUTE] release the machine for servicing.
5811* Machine Serial
002 Display
This SP displays the machine serial number.
5812 [Service TEL]
Telephone *CTL -
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed
001 on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user's "Counter" menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can
be input).
Facsimile *CTL -
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
002 printed on the Counter List.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can
be input).
Supply *CTL -
003
Displayed on the initial SP screen.
Operation *CTL -
004 Allows the service center contact telephone number to be displayed on the initial
screen.
D095/M077 4-356 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 2
4.17 SYSTEM SP5-XXX: 2
5816 [Remote Service] *CTL -
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
001 [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: @Remote remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
002 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to "2".
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.
003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SSL Disable
Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG.
007 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Uses the RCG certification
1: Does no use the RCG certification
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]
SM Appendix 4-357 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 2
RCG Write Timeout
009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable -
Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method.
011 [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
RFU Timming
013 [0 or 1 / 1 /-]
0: Always enable
1: Energy save mode
RCG-C Registered
021 This SP displays the embedded RCG installation end flag.
0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
RCG-C Regist Detail
This SP displays the external RCG installation status.
022 0: External RCG not registered
1: External RCG registered
2: Device registered
D095/M077 4-358 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 2
Connect Mode (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the embedded RCG connection method.
023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
061 Cert. Expire Timing DFU Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between
Appendix:
embedded RCG-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the
Program
Service
Mode
customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set up embedded
063 RCG-N.
The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond
the 128 character are ignored.
This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between embedded RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up
064 embedded RCG-N.
[0 to 6553 / 0 / 1]
This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
SM Appendix 4-359 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 2
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065
The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character
beyond the 31st character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066
The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character
beyond the 31st character is ignored.
This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
CERT: UP State
067
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by embedded RCG is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received
1
from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified
2
of the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
3
failed update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
4
update is being sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue
11
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being
12
notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed
13 successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update
request from the rescue GW URL.
D095/M077 4-360 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 2
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
14
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
15
the successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
16
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
17
completed, but an certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL
18
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
CERT: Error
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
068 Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of
the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
Request for certification update in progress. The current certification
1
has expired.
An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
2
has expired.
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual
3
certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
SM Appendix 4-361 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 2
069 CERT: UP The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This setting determines if the firmware can be
updated, even without the HDD installed.
084 Non-HDD Firm Up
0: Not allowed update
1: Allowed update
This SP setting determines if the operator can
confirm the previous version of the firmware before
the firmware update execution. If the option to
085 Firm Up User Check confirm the previous version is selected, a
notification is sent to the system manager and the
firmware update is done with the firmware files from
the URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of
086 Firmware Size the firmware data files during the firmware update
execution.
Displays the macro version of the @Remote
087 CERT: Macro Version
certification.
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote
088 CERT: PAC Version
certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces
are displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (***)
089 CERT: ID2 Code indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
"000000___________" indicates "Common
certification".
D095/M077 4-362 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 2
Displays the common name of the @Remote
certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes.
Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks
090 CERT: Subject
(***) indicate that no DESS exists.
"000000___________" indicates "Common
certification".
Displays serial number for the @Remote
091 CERT: Serial Number certification. Asterisks (***) indicate that no DESS
exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the
092 CERT: Issuer @Remote certification. CN = the following 30 bytes.
Asteriskes (***) indicate that no DESS exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the
093 CERT: Valid Start
Appendix:
Program
Service
current @Remote certification is enabled.
Mode
Displays the end time of the period for which the
094 CERT: Valid End
current @Remote certification is enabled.
Line type Automatic Judgment
Press [Execute].
Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where embedded RCG-M is
connected as either dial-up (pulse dial) or push (DTMF tone) type, so embedded
RCG-M can automatically distinguish the number that connects to the outside
151 line.
The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be displayed
with SP5816-152.
If the execution succeeded, SP5816-153 will display the result for
confirmation and SP5816-154 will display the telephone number for the
connection to the outside line.
SM Appendix 4-363 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 2
152 Line Type Judgment Result
Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816-151. Here is a
list of what the numbers mean.
0: Success
1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.
2: Line abnormal
3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically
4: Line is disconnected
5: Insufficient electrical power supply
6: Line classification not supported
7: Error because fax transmission in progress ioctl() occurred.
8: Other error occurred
9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.
153 Selection Dial/Push
This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the
access point for embedded RCG-M. The number displayed (0 or 1) is the result
of the execution of SP5816-151. However, this setting can also be changed
manually.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Tone Dialing Phone, 1: Pulse Dialing Phone
154 Outside Line Outgoing Number
The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for
embedded RCGM in a system that employs a PBX (internal line).
If the execution of SP5816-151 has succeeded and embedded RCG-M has
connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.
If embedded RCG-M has connected to an internal line, then the number of
the connection to the external line is displayed.
If embedded RCG-M has connected to an external line, a comma is
displayed with the number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause.
The number setting for the external line can be entered manually (including
commas).
D095/M077 4-364 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 2
156 Dial Up User Name
Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules
when setting a user name:
Name length: Up to 32 characters
Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double
quotation marks (").
157 Dial Up Password
Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules
when setting a user name:
Name length: Up to 32 characters
Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double
quotation marks (").
161 Local Phone Number
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where embedded RCG-M is
connected.
This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return calls.
Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only)
163 Access Point
This is the telephone number of the dial-up access point for embedded RCG-M.
If no setting is done for this SP code, then a preset value (determined by the
country selected) is used.
Default: 0
Allowed: Up to 16 numeral characters
SM Appendix 4-365 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 2
164 Line Connecting
This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting dedicates
the line to embedded RCG-M only, or sets the line for sharing between
embedded RCG-M and a fax unit.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
0: Line shared by embedded RCG-M/Fax
1: Line dedicated to embedded RCG-M only
If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on.
SP5816-187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used to
interrupt an embedded RCG-M transmission in progress to open the line for
fax transaction.
173 Modem serial No.
This SP displays the serial number registered for the embedded RCG-M.
174 Retransmission Limit
Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update
requests, and for the notification that the certification has been completed.
However, embedded RCGM generates charges based on transmission time for
the customer, so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions.
If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP to
cancel the time restriction.
187 FAX TX Priority
This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt an
embedded RCGM transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction.
This SP can be used only if SP5816-164 is set to "0".
[0 or 1/ 0 / - ]
0: Disable. Setting the fax unit off-hook does not interrupt a fax transaction in
progress. If the off-hook button is pushed during a embedded RCG-M
transmission, the button must be pushed again to set the fax unit on-hook after
the embedded RCG-M transmission has completed.
1: Enable. When embedded RCG-M shares a line with a fax unit, setting the fax
unit off-hook will interrupt a embedded RCG-M transmission in progress and
open the line for a fax transaction.
D095/M077 4-366 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 2
200 Manual Polling - Executes the manual polling.
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the registered device by the embedded RCG nor embedded RCG
device is set.
1: The embedded RCG device is being set. Only Box registration is completed.
201 In this status the external RCG unit cannot answer a polling request.
2: The embedded RCG device is set. In this status the external RCG unit cannot
answer a polling request.
3: The registered device by the embedded RCG is being set. In this status the
embedded RCG device cannot be set.
4: The registered module by the embedded RCG has not started.
Allows entry of the number of the request needed
202 Letter number
for the embedded RCG device.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Executes the inquiry request to the @Remote
203 Confirm Execute
GateWay URL.
Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with
SP5816-203.
0: Succeeded
1: Inquiry number error
2: Registration in progress
204 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Inquiry executing
SM Appendix 4-367 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 2
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in
answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the
GW URL.
206 Register Execute Executes Embedded RCG Registration.
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0: Succeeded
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
208 Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
Illegal Modem Parameter -11002 Chat execution error
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without
-12002
acquiring device status.
Attempted registration without
Operation Error, Incorrect
-12003 execution of an inquiry and no previous
Setting
registration.
Attempted setting with illegal entries for
-12004
certification and ID2.
D095/M077 4-368 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 2
@Remote communication is prohibited.
-12005 The device has an Embedded RC
gate-related problem.
A confirmation request was made after
-12006 the confirmation had been already
completed.
The request number used at
-12007 registration was different from the one
used at confirmation.
Update certification failed because
-12008
mainframe was in use.
Attempted dial up overseas without the
-2385 correct international prefix for the
telephone number.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
Error Caused by
Response from GW URL -2392 Parameter error
-2393 External RCG not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for External RCG is illegal
-2396 Device ID for External RCG is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
SM Appendix 4-369 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 2
Releases the machine from its embedded RCG
209 Instl Clear
setup.
250 Comm Log Print Prints the communication log.
5821* Remote Service Address
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) destination for call
002 -
processing at the remote service center.
[00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / - / 1]
NV-RAM Upload
5824 Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number)
from the NVRAM to an SD card.
001 NV-RAM Upload # -
[NV-RAM Download]
5825
Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM.
001 NV-RAM Download # -
5828 Network Setting
Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.
1284 Compatibility
050 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
(Centro)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
052 ECP (Centro)
This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is
set to "1".
D095/M077 4-370 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 2
Enables/disables Job Spooling.
065 Job Spooling [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at
Job Spooling Clear: power on.
066
Start Time 0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for
each protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
Job Spooling bit1: FTP
069
(Protocol) bit2: IPP
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.
TELNET (0: OFF 1:
090 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
ON)
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables or disables the Web operation.
091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
Active IPv6 Link Local
145 "Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
Address
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
SM Appendix 4-371 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 2
Active IPv6 Stateless
147
Address 1
Active IPv6 Stateless
149 These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5)
Address 2
referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b)
Active IPv6 Stateless in the format:
151
Address 3 "Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
Active IPv6 Stateless
153 in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
Address 4
Active IPv6 Stateless
155
Address 5
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on
the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
156 IPv6 Manual Address "Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured
in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
D095/M077 4-372 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 2
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the
Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The IPv6 address
IPv6 Gateway
158 consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16
Address
bits each. These notations can be abbreviated. See
"Note: IPV6 Addresses" below this table.
Note: IPV6 Addresses
Ethernet and the Wireless LAN (802.11) reference the IPV6 "Link-Local address
+ Prefix Length". The IPV6 address consists of 128 bits divided into 8 blocks of
16 bits: aaaa:bbbb:cccc:dddd:eeee:ffff:gggg:hhhh:
The prefix length is inserted at the 17th byte (Prefix Range: 0x0 to 0x80). The
initial setting is 0x40 (64).
For example, the data: "2001123456789012abcdef012345678940h" is
expressed:
"2001:1234:5678:9012:abcd:ef01:2345:6789": prefixlen 64
Appendix:
Program
Service
However, the actual IPV6 address display is abbreviated according to the
Mode
following rules.
Rules for Abbreviating IPV6 Addresses
The IPV6 address is expressed in hexadecimal delimited by colons (:) with the
characters "0123456789abcdefABCDEF".
1. A colon is inserted as a delimiter every 4th hexadecimal character.
fe80:0000:0000:0000:0207:40ff:0000:340e
2. The notations can be abbreviated by eliminating zeros where the MSB and
digits following the MSB are zero. The example in "2" above, then, becomes
fe80:0:0:0207:40ff:0:340e
Sections where only zeros exist can be abbreviated with double colons (::). This
abbreviation can be done also where succeeding sections contain only zeros
(but this can be done only at one point in the address). The example in "2" and
"3" above then becomes:
fe80::207:40ff:0:340e (only the first null sets zero digits are abbreviated as "::")
-or-
fe80:0:0:0:207:40ff::340e (only the last null set before "340e" is abbreviated as
"::")
SM Appendix 4-373 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 2
IPv6 Stateless Auto Enable or disables the automatic setting for IPv6
161
Setting stateless.
D095/M077 4-374 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
4.18 SYSTEM SP5-XXX: 3
5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL -
Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press #. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
Appendix:
Program
Service
006 HDD Formatting (User Info.)
Mode
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
009 HDD Formatting (Data for Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F DeskTopBinder)
SM Appendix 4-375 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
Capture Settings
5836 *CTL
(D095 only)
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable
001 With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot
be initialized, displayed, or selected.
Panel Setting 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
002
Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.
5836-71 to 5836-76, Copier and Printer Document Reduction
The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent
to the document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
071 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
074 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
075 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
Reduction for Printer Color 1200
077 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8
dpi
Reduction for Printer B&W 1200
078 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8
dpi
5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format
The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents
sent to the document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
081 Format for Copy Color
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
082 Format for Copy B&W Text 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
D095/M077 4-376 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
083 Format for Copy B&W Other
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
084 Format for Printer Color
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
085 Format for Printer B&W
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
086 Format for Printer B&W HQ
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document
management server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Appendix:
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
Program
Service
Mode
SM Appendix 4-377 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
5840 [IEEE 802.11b]
[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel Max *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the
006 wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust
the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU
Do not change the setting.
[1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel Min *CTL Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the
007 wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the
lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU
Do not change the setting.
WEP key Select *CTL
011
Default [00000000]
5841 Supply Name Setting
Press the User Tools key. These names appear when the user presses the
Inquiry button on the User Tools screen.
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta
008 Paste Name
D095/M077 4-378 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
011 StapleStd1
012 StapleStd2
013 StapleStd3 Standard Staples
014 StapleStd4
021 StapleBind1
022 StapleBind2 Booklet Staples
023 StapleBind3
031 Ring Name (50/Black) Ring Binders (D392)
032 Ring Name (50/White)
033 Ring Name (100/Black)
Appendix:
034 Ring Name (100/White)
Program
Service
Mode
5842 GWWS Analysis Mode (D095 only: DFU)
Default: 00000000 – do not change
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the
001 Setting 1 *CTL
document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
Adjusts the debug program modesetting.
Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting
002 Setting 2 *CTL 0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msec.
0 to 6: Not used
SM Appendix 4-379 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
5844 USB
0x01: Full speed
001 Transfer Rate *CTL 0x04: Auto Change
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
002 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU
003 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version
004 Device Release Number *CTL
number. DFU
Delivery Server Setting
*CTL
5845 (D095 only) -
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port No. [0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]
001
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
IP Address (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
002 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is
displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile
application and an external device.
IP Address (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255
008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as
the secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting
of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model [0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]
009 Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
D095/M077 4-380 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr Capability [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the registered I/O device.
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
010
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists
Appendix:
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Program
Service
Mode
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to "0")
Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
011
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Server Scheme (Primary) DFU
013
This is used for the scan router program.
Server Port Number (Primary) DFU [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 /step]
014
This is used for the scan router program.
Server URL Path (Primary) DFU
015
This is used for the scan router program.
Server Scheme (Secondary) DFU
016
This is used for the scan router program.
SM Appendix 4-381 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
Server Port Number (Secondary)
[1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 /step]
017 DFU
This is used for the scan router program.
Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU
018
This is used for the scan router program.
Capture Server Scheme DFU
019
-
Capture Server Port Number DFU
020
-
Capture Server URL Path DFU
021
-
Rapid Sending Control
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
022 error.
[0 to 1 / 0 / -]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
5846 UCS Settings *CTL -
Machine ID (For Delivery Server)
Displays ID
(D095 only)
001 Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The
value is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the
NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte
binary.
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server)
Clears ID
(D095 only)
002 Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer
directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server
is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again
D095/M077 4-382 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
Maximum Entries
[2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]
(D095 only)
003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is
cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
(D095 only)
006
Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
delivery server address book.
Delivery Server Retry Times
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
(D095 only)
007
Appendix:
Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the
Program
Service
Mode
delivery server address book.
Delivery Server Maximum Entries
[2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]
(D095 only)
008
Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user
information managed by UCS.
LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
010
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
SM Appendix 4-383 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a
basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the
new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
041 Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install a new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
5. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the
system administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes
successfully, any user can access the address book.
Displays the slot number where an address book
data is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed
043 Addr Book Media 1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing
Clears the local address book information,
047 Initialize Local Addr Book
including the user code.
Initialize Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book information,
048
Book (D095 only) except the user code.
Clears the LDAP address book information,
049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book
except the user code.
Clears all directory information managed by
050 Initialize All Addr Book
UCS, including all user codes.
D095/M077 4-384 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
Downloads all directory information from the SD
052 Restore All Addr Book
card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD card
in the service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from
this machine.
This feature does not work if the card is
053 Clear Backup Info write-protected.
After you do this SP, go out of the SP
mode, and then turn the power off.
Do not remove the SD card until the
Power LED stops flashing.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Search Option
Mode
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local
address book.
Bit: Meaning
060 0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used
Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
This SP does not normally require adjustment.
This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
063 Complexity Option 2 DFU
SM Appendix 4-385 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
064 Complexity Option 3 DFU
065 Complexity Option 4 DFU
Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution
FTP Auth Port Setting server address book that is used in the
091
(D095 only) identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function for
094 Encryption Stat
the address book data.
Rep Resolution Reduction
*CTL -
(D095 only)
SP5847-1 through SP5847-3 changes the default settings of image data
transferred externally by the Net File page reference function.
5847 [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]
SP5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by
NetFile.
"Net files" are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software.
0: 1x, 1: 1/2x, 2: 1/3x, 3: 1/4x, 4:
001 Rate for Copy Color
1/6x, 5: 1/8x
0: 1x, 1: 1/2x, 2: 1/3x, 3: 1/4x, 4:
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text
1/6x, 5: 1/8x
0: 1x, 1: 1/2x, 2: 1/3x, 3: 1/4x, 4:
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other
1/6x, 5: 1/8x
0: 1x, 1: 1/2x, 2: 1/3x, 3: 1/4x, 4:
004 Rate for Printer Color
1/6x, 5: 1/8x
0: 1x, 1: 1/2x, 2: 1/3x, 3: 1/4x, 4:
005 Rate for Printer B&W
1/6x, 5: 1/8x
0: 1x, 1: 1/2x, 2: 1/3x, 3: 1/4x, 4:
006 Rate for Printer Color 1200 dpi
1/6x, 5: 1/8x
D095/M077 4-386 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
0: 1x, 1: 1/2x, 2: 1/3x, 3: 1/4x, 4:
007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200 dpi
1/6x, 5: 1/8x
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
021 This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option
installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
Web Service
*CTL -
(D095 only)
5848 SP5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.
Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
Appendix:
SP 5848-100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The
Program
Service
Mode
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
0000: No access control
Access Ctrl: Repository
002 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
(only Lower 4 bits)
0010: No writing control
Access Ctrl: Doc. Svr. Print
003
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: udirectory (only
004
Lower 4 bits)
Switches access control on and off.
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower
009 0000: No access control
4 bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Access Ctrl: Device
011
management (Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Delivery
021
(Lower 4 bits)
SM Appendix 4-387 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
Access Ctrl: uadministration
022
(Lower 4bits)
Repository: Download
099 DFU
Image Setting
Specifies the max size of the image data that
Repository: Download
100 the machine can download.
Image Max. Size
[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]
210 Setting: Log Type: Job 1 -
211 Setting: Log Type: Job 2 -
212 Setting: Log Type: Access -
213 Setting: Primary Srv -
214 Setting: Secondary Srv -
215 Setting: Start Time -
216 Setting: Interval Time -
217 Setting: Timing -
5849 [Installation Date] *CTL -
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to
001 Display
"Installation Date" or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is
printed on the printout for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print [0 to 1 / 1 / -]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
003 Total Counter [0 or 99999999 / - / - ]
D095/M077 4-388 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
[Bluetooth Mode]
5851 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
Stamp Data Download (D095 only)
Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the
ROM and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as
5853 required. This SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard
disks.
This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
Appendix:
Remote ROM Update
Program
Service
Mode
5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port (IEEE1284)
when updating the remote ROM.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port *CTL 0: Disable
1: Enable
SM Appendix 4-389 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL -
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: OFF, 1: ON
001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured
until this feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card
002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions
set with SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
Save to HDD
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD.
005 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the
SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be
copied one by one to each SD Card.
Save to SD Card
006
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card.
009 HDD to SD Card Latest
010 HDD to SD Card Any
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data
013 Free Space on SD Card
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB)
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4MB Any)
016 Make HDD Debug
017 Make SD Debug
D095/M077 4-390 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
[Debug Log Save: SC] *CTL -
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
5858 destination selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC
error codes.
Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated
by copier engine errors.
001 Engine SC Error
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated
by GW controller errors.
002 Controller SC Error
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.
004 Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
SM Appendix 4-391 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL -
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log
005 Key 5 files for functions that use common memory on the
006 Key 6 controller board.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL -
Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / – ]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is
not received during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – ]
021 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
0: No
1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
022 validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From item switched.
D095/M077 4-392 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.
Bit switch:
Bit 0: LOGIN
Bit 1: PLAIN
025 Bit 2: CRAM MD5
Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP
mode.
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail sent by
S/MIME.
S/MIVE: MIME Header [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
026
Mode
Setting 0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
5866 E-mail Alert Not Used
Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.
001 Report Validity
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Adds or does not add the date field to the
header of the alert mail.
005 Add Date Field *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: Not added, 1: Added
SM Appendix 4-393 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
5870 Common Key Info Writing
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for
001 Writing *CTL validating the device for @Remote
specifications.
Initializes the authentication data (used for
003 Initialize *CTL
@Remote) in the memory.
5873 SD Card Appli Move
This SP copies the application programs from the original SD
001 Move Exec
card in SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.
This SP copies back the application programs from an SD
card in SD Card Slot 1 to the original SD card in SD card slot
002 Undo Exec
2. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied some
programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).
5875 SC Auto Reboot
This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC
error occurs.
The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes.
[0 to 1/ 0 / 1]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the machine
001 Reboot Setting issues an SC error and logs the SC error code. If the same
SC occurs again, the machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
002 Reboot Type
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
D095/M077 4-394 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
5878 Option Setup
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit.
001 Option Setup *CTL Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel.
Then turn the machine off and on.
002 HDD Encryption Installs the HDD Encryption unit.
5881 Fixed Phase Block Erasing DFU
Detects fixed phase.
5885* Set WIM Function *CTL
Allows or disallows the functions of web image monitor.
020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl
Appendix:
0: OFF, 1: ON
Program
Service
Mode
Bit:
0: Forbid all document server access
1: Forbid user mode access
2: Forbid print function
3: Forbid Fax
4: Forbid scan sending
5: Forbid download
6: Forbid delete
7: Forbid guest user
DocSvr Format
050 Selects the display type for the document box list.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details
SM Appendix 4-395 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
DocSvr Trans
051 Sets the number of documents to be displayed in the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
100 Set Signature
Set Encryption
Determines whether the scanned documents with the WIM are encrypted when
101 they are transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption
200 Detect Mem Leak
201 DocSvr Timeout
Permit ROM Updating DFU
5886
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - *CTL
0: ON, 1: OFF
5887 SD Get Counter
This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (upper slot).
The operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of
the SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed
with the number of the machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 (upper slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch [EXECUTE].
3. Touch [Execute] in the message when you are prompted.
D095/M077 4-396 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
5896* Copy/Printer Priority *CTL
Selects the priority function. This SP optimizes the memory partition for the
selected function.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Copy priority, 1: Printer priority
Plug & Play Maker/Model Name
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play. This
information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these names
5907 should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
Appendix:
[0 to 23 / - / 1 step] FA
Program
Service
Mode
5913 Switchover Permission Time (D095 only)
Print Application Timer *CTL [3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]
002 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and
the operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can
gain control of the display.
5919 HDD Encryption Setting *CTL
001 State Confirm -
002 Execute Update Execute
003 Release Execute
SM Appendix 4-397 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
Copy Server Set Function
5967 *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF
(D095 only)
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
001
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.
Cherry Server
5974* Selects which version of the Scan Router application program, "Light" or
"Full" (Professional) is installed.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Device Setting
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this
SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is
limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
Other network applications than @Remote or
LDAP/NT authentication are not available when
this SP is set to "2". Even though you can
change the initial settings of those network
applications, the settings do not work
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
0: Disable, 1: Enable
D095/M077 4-398 SM Appendix
System SP5-xxx: 3
5988 [Service Contract Setting]
Including Toner/Excluding [32: Excluding Toner]
*CTL
001 Toner [33: Including Toner]
Selects the contract type.
[SP print mode]
5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
001 All (Data List) -
002 SP (Mode Data List) -
003 User Program Data -
Appendix:
004 Logging Data - -
Program
Service
Mode
005 Diagnostic Report -
006 Non-Default -
007 NIB Summary -
008 Capture Log -
021 Copier User Program -
022 Scanner SP -
023 Scanner User Program -
024 SDK/J Summary -
025 SDK/J Application Info -
SM Appendix 4-399 D095/M077
System SP5-xxx: 3
5999 Firmware Update
001 Engine
Copy the SP data for @Remote on the controller to the SP data on the engine
board.
D095/M077 4-400 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
4.19 SYSTEM SP6-XXX
4.19.1 SP6-XXX PERIPHERALS
6006* DF Registration Adjustment (D095 only)
001 Side-to-Side Regist:Front Adjusts the side-to-side registration of originals
with the ADF.
002 Side-to-Side Regist:Rear [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct
003 LeadingEdge(ThinOriginal) original skew.
[-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 step]
005 LeadingEdge(Duplex-1st) Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct
original skew for the front and rear sides.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
006 LeadingEdge(Duplex-2nd) [-29 to 29 / 0 / 0.1 step]
6007 ADF Input Check (D095 only)
( p.4-579 "Input Check: 4")
6008 ADF Output Check (D095 only)
( p.4-604 "Output Check")
6009 DFFreeRun (D095 only)
This SP does an ADF free run in duplex original
002 [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
mode.
SM Appendix 4-401 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6015* ADF Scale Seting (D095 only)
Selects the ADF scale setting.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001
0: EXP SCALE
1: DOM SCALE
6019* ADF Motor Speed Auto Adjustment (D095 only)
Turns on or off the automatic speed adjustment of the ADF motor.
001 [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: On, 1: Off
6020* ADF Motor Speed Adjustment (D095 only)
Turns on or off the speed adjustment of the ADF motor.
001
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
6100* Staple Position Adjustment
001 (A3-Lengthwise)
002 (B4-Lengthwise)
003 (A4-Lengthwise)
004 (A4-Sideways)
005 (B5-Lengthwise)
006 (B5-Sideways) [-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
007 (DLT-Lengthwise)
008 (LG-Lengthwise)
009 (LT-Lengthwise)
010 (LT-Sideways)
011 (Others)
D095/M077 4-402 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
6101* Punch Hole Position Adjustment
001 JPN/EU: 2-Hole
002 JPN/NA: 3-Hole
003 EU: 4-Hole [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
004 NA: 4-Hole
005 NA: 2-Hole
6102* Fine Adjust Stapler Jogger Fences
Use this SP code to adjust the positions of the jogger fences when the pages
are aligned (jogged) horizontally in the stapling tray for corner stapling in the
Finisher B830. These jogger fences close in on the sides of the stack on the
paper tray. These side fences move in and out perpendicular to the direction of
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
paper feed.
The higher the setting, the narrower the jogger span and the smaller the
gaps between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is tighter.
The lower the setting, the wider the jogger span and the wider the gaps
between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is not as precise.
001 A3 Lengthwise
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF The settings are done for each paper size.
SEF denotes "Short Edge Feed".
006 B5 LEF
LEF denotes "Long Edge Feed".
007 DLT [–1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
008 LG
009 LT SEF
010 LT Sideways
011 Others
SM Appendix 4-403 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6103* Adjust Output Jog Position
Use this SP code to adjust the positions of the jogger fences when the pages
are aligned (jogged) horizontally in the stapling tray for stapling in the Booklet
Finisher B836. The jogger fences close in on the sides of the stack on the paper
tray. These side fences move in and out perpendicular to the direction of paper
feed.
[–1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
The higher the setting, the narrower the jogger span and the smaller the
gaps between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is tighter.
The lower the setting, the wider the jogger span and the wider the gaps
between the fences and the edges of the paper. Stacking is not as tight.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
The settings are done for each paper size.
008 B5 LEF SEF denotes "Short Edge Feed".
LEF denotes "Long Edge Feed".
009 DLT
010 LG
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
016 Other
D095/M077 4-404 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
6104* Pre-Stack Adjustment
001 A4 LEF
Set the number of sheets for pre-stacking.
002 B5 LEF
[0 to 2 / 2 / 2 sheets]
003 LT LEF
6105 Adj Leading Edge Stopper Pressure
001 A4 LEF [–2.5 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 B5 LEF [–2.5 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
003 LT LEF [–2.5 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
Appendix:
6106* Staple Jogging Repeat Settings
Program
Service
Mode
Allows you to increase by 1 the number of times the stack is jogged on the
stapling tray.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 time]
6107* Staple Tray Jog Off/On
Allows you to switch jogging on the stapling tray off and on for the paper sizes
listed below.
001 A3 SEF 0:On 1:Off
002 B4 SEF 0:On 1:Off
003 A4 SEF 0:On 1:Off
004 A4 LEF 0:On 1:Off The default for each paper size is "0" (On)
005 A5 SEF 0:On 1:Off
006 B5 SEF 0:On 1:Off
007 B5 LEF 0:On 1:Off
SM Appendix 4-405 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
008 DLT SEF 0:On 1:Off
009 LG SEF 0:On 1:Off
010 LT SEF 0:On 1:Off
011 LT LEF 0:On 1:Off
012 HLT SEF 0:On 1:Off
013 Other 0:On 1:Off
6112 Finisher Input Check
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher.
( p.4-579 "Input Check: 4")
6113 Finisher Output Check
Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes.
( p.4-604 "Output Check")
6200 Adj Booklet Stapling Position
Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is
stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434).
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF [–2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
003 A4 SEF
– Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5 SEF
005 12" x 18" SEF
006 13" x 19" SEF
007 DLT
008 LG
D095/M077 4-406 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
009 LT SEF
010 Other
6201 Adjust Booklet Fold Position
This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the
Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434).
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF [–2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
004 B5 SEF – Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
005 12"x18" SEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
006 13" x 19" SEF
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 Other
SM Appendix 4-407 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6202 Fine Adjust Staple Jogger Fence Position
This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
stack on the finisher stapling tray in the Booklet Finisher SR5020 (D434). The
adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
[–1.0 to +1.0 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
004 B5 SEF
+ Value: Increases distance between jogger fences
005 12"x18" and the sides of the stack.
– Value: Decreases the distance between the jogger
006 13" x 19" SEF
fences and the sides of the stack.
007 DLT SEF
008 LG SEF
009 LT SEF
010 Other
6203* Set Number of Folds
001 Default:0 -1 to +9
D095/M077 4-408 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
6205* Adj Booklet Stapler Jog Pawl (D434)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 B5 SEF
005 12 x 18 SEF
[-3 to +3 / 0 / 0.2]
006 13 x 19 SEF
007 DLT
008 LG
009 LT SEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
010 Other
SM Appendix 4-409 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6208* Adj Staple Position (D434)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT
[-1 + 1 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
008 LG
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 8-Kai SEF
012 16-Kai SEF
013 16-Kai LEF
014 Other
6209* Adj Punch Posi Sub Scan (D434)
001 2-Hole EU/JPN
002 3-Hole NA
003 4-Hole EU [-3.5 +3.5 / 0 / 0.5]
004 4-Hole Scandinavia
005 2-Hole NA
D095/M077 4-410 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
6210* Adj Punch Posi Sub Scan (D434)
001 2-Hole EU/JPN
002 3-Hole NA
003 4-Hole EU [-3 to +3 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
004 4-Hole Scandinavia
005 2-Hole NA
6211 Adj End Bind Jogger (D434)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT
[-3 to +3 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
008 LG
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 8-Kai SEF
012 16-Kai SEF
013 16-Kai LEF
014 Other
SM Appendix 4-411 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6212* Adj Output Jog Position (D434)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF [-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
009 DLT
010 LG
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
6213* Adj Pre Stack Number (D434)
001 A3 SEF
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1 Sheet]
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
[0 to 5 / 5 / 1 Sheet]
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 Sheet]
D095/M077 4-412 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
008 LG
009 LTSEF
010 LT LEF
011 8-Kai SEF
012 16-Kai SEF
013 16-Kai LEF [0 to 5 / 5 / 1 Sheet]
014 Other
6214* Adj Leading Edge Stopper (D434)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
005 B5 SEF
006 B5 LEF
007 DLT
[-2.5 to +2.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
008 LG
009 LT SEF
010 LT LEF
011 8-Kai SEF
012 16-Kai SEF
013 16-Kai LEF
014 Other
SM Appendix 4-413 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6215* Staple Jogging Repeat Setting (D434)
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1]
[0: Default]
[1: High Precision]
6216* Staple Tray Jog Off/On (D434)
001 A3 SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
002 B4 SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
003 A4 SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
004 A4 LEF 0: ON 1: OFF
005 A5 SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
006 A5 LEF 0: ON 1: OFF
007 B5 SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
008 B5 LEF 0: ON 1: OFF
009 DLT 0: ON 1: OFF
010 LG 0: ON 1: OFF
011 LT SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
012 LT LEF 0: ON 1: OFF
013 HLT SEF 0: ON 1: OFF
014 HLT LEF 0: ON 1: OFF
015 Other 0: ON 1: OFF
D095/M077 4-414 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
6217 Adj Top/Bottom Jog (D434)
[-10 to +10/ 0 / 5 deg.]
-10, -5, 0, +5, +10
Booklet Finisher Input Check (D434)
6218 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the finisher. (
p.4-579 "Input Check: 4")
6219 Booklet Finisher Output Check (D434)
Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes.
( p.4-604 "Output Check")
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
6221* Adj Registration Control(D434)
Skew Correction 0:ON 1:OFF
001
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]]
6222* Adj Registration Buckle (D434)
001 A4 LEF
002 A5 SEF
003 A5 LEF
004 B5 LEF
[-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.5 mm]
005 LT LEF
006 HLT SEF
007 HLT LEF
008 Other
SM Appendix 4-415 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6301* Fine Adj Z-Fold 1
Use this SP code to adjust the position of the first fold. For detail, see NOTE
following this table.
[–2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm]
001 A3 (1st Fold Position) 009 A3 (2nd Fold Position)
002 B4 (1st Fold Position) 010 B4 (2nd Fold Position)
003 A4 (1st Fold Position) 011 A4 (2nd Fold Position)
004 DLT (1st Fold Position) 012 DLT (2nd Fold Position)
005 LG (1st Fold Position) 013 LG (2nd Fold Position)
006 LT (1st Fold Position) 014 LT (2nd Fold Position)
007 12"x18" (1st Fold Position) 015 12"x18" (2nd Fold Position)
008 Others (1st Fold Position) 016 Others (2nd Fold Position)
NOTE
SP6301 001 to 008
Adjust the position of the first fold [A]. This adjustment decreases or increases the
distance (A) between the leading edge [B] and the crease of the 2nd fold [C].
SP6301 009 to 016
Adjusts the position of the 2nd fold [C] to decrease or increase the length (L1) of the sheet
between the trailing edge [D] and the 2nd fold.
6400 Cover Inserter Input Check
D095/M077 4-416 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the cover interposer
tray. ( p.4-579 "Input Check: 4")
6401 Cover Inserter Output Check
Turn on the electrical components of the cover interposer tray individually for test
purposes. ( p.4-604 "Output Check")
6500* Pre-Punch Jog Adjustment (D392)
001 A4 LEF
[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
6501* Paddle Roller Position Adjustment (D392)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
001 - [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
6502* Pre-Bind Jog Adjustment 1 (D392)
001 A4 LEF
[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
6503* Pre-Bind Jog Adjustment 2 (D392)
001 A4 LEF
[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
6504 Pre-Punch Jog Adjustment (D392)
001 A4 LEF
[-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
SM Appendix 4-417 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6505 Paddle Roller Position Adjustment (D392)
001 - [-3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
6506 Pre-Bind Jog Adjustment 1 (D392)
001 A4 LEF
[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
6507 Pre-Punch Jog Adjustment 2 (D392)
001 A4 LEF
[-2 to 2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
002 LT LEF
6508 Ring Binder Input Check
( p.4-579 "Input Check: 4")
6509 Ring Binder Output Check
( p.4-604 "Output Check")
6524 Stack Thickness Volume Adjustment (D391)
001 0mm Adjust [0 to 1023 / 97 / 1]
002 25 mm Adjust [0 to 1023 / 865 / 1]
6525 Glue Remain Thermistor: Wet Side (D391)
Glue Vat: Wet Side Lower
001 [0 to 255 / 132 / 1]
Limit
Glue Vat: Wet Side Upper
002 [0 to 255 / 142 / 1]
Limit
D095/M077 4-418 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
6526 Input Check: Perfect Binder
( p.4-579 "Input Check: 4")
6600 Input Check: Stacker 1
( p.4-579 "Input Check: 4")
6601 Output Check: Stacker 1
( p.4-604 "Output Check")
6602* Jog Fence Adjust: Stacker 1 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
Appendix:
Program
002 B4 SEF
Service
Mode
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
[-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF
009 DLT SEF
010 LG SEF
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF [-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
SM Appendix 4-419 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6603* LE Stopper Adjust: Stacker 1 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
[-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF
009 DLT SEF
010 LG SEF
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF [-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
6604* Sub Jog Fence Adjust: Stacker 1 Hi Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
009 DLT SEF [+2 to -2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
010 LG SEF
015 Other
D095/M077 4-420 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
6606 Input Check: Stacker 2
( p.4-579 "Input Check: 4")
6607 Output Check: Stacker 2
( p.4-604 "Output Check")
6608* Jog Fence Adjust: Stacker 2 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
Appendix:
004 A4 LEF
Program
Service
Mode
[-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF
009 DLT SEF
010 LG SEF
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF [-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
SM Appendix 4-421 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6609* LE Stopper Adjust: Stacker 2 High Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
003 A4 SEF
004 A4 LEF
[-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
005 A5 SEF
006 A5 LEF
007 B5 SEF
008 B5 LEF
009 DLT SEF
010 LG SEF
011 LT SEF
012 LT LEF [-2 to +2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
013 HLT SEF
014 HLT LEF
015 Other
6610* Sub Jog Fence Adjust: Stacker 2 Hi Capacity Stacker (D447)
001 A3 SEF
002 B4 SEF
009 DLT SEF [+2 to -2 / 0 / 0.1 mm]
010 LG SEF
015 Other
D095/M077 4-422 SM Appendix
System SP6-xxx
6612 Stacker 1 Fan Setting High Capacity Stacker (D447)
0: ON, 1: OFF
6613 Stacker 2 Fan Setting High Capacity Stacker (D447)
0: ON, 1: OFF
6650 Input Check: Trimmer (D455)
( p.4-579 "Input Check: 4")
6651 Output Check: Trimmer (D455)
( p.4-604 "Output Check")
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
6770* Stack Full Setting
001 - [0 to 3 / 0 / 1]
6800 Sheet Conversion (Stapling: Thick Paper) DFU
Selects the count type for stapling the thick paper. The machine calculates one
sheet of thick paper as three sheets of plain paper by default.
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1]
001
1: 1 sheet
2: 2 sheets
3: 3 sheets
SM Appendix 4-423 D095/M077
System SP6-xxx
6810 Ring Binding Thick Paper DFU
Selects the count type for binding the thick paper. The machine calculates one
sheet of thick paper as three sheets of plain paper by default.
[1 to 3 / 3 /1 ]
1: 1 sheet
2: 2 sheets
3: 3 sheets
6830 Extra Staples DFU
More than the standard number of corner staples can be loaded. This SP
recognizes the maximum number of staples (This Setting + Standard Number).
If the number of the maximum for staples is increased, and the mechanical
warranty of the unit can be guaranteed, then the setting can take effect
without changing the controller software.
However, assurance that mechanical performance can be guaranteed is
required before changing the setting to increase the staple load for more
than the maximum in the feed/exit specifications. Raising this setting
without quality assurance could damage the machine.
0 to 50 (Initial: 0)
001
[0 to 50 / 0 /1]
0 to 50 (Initial: 0)
002
[0 to 50 / 0 /1]
6890 Punch Function Enabled (Z-Fold)
Permission for punching thick (tab) paper is forbidden and it is up to the
service technician to pass this on to the customer.
001 [0 or 1/ 0 / -]
0: Simultaneous use forbidden
1: Simultaneous use allowed
D095/M077 4-424 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 1
4.20 SYSTEM SP7-XXX: 1
4.20.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)
7001 Engine Drive Distance Counter
001 Total Drive Time:Drum K
Displays the total drive time of the K drum.
[0 to 99999999 / - / 1 min]
[Total SC Counter]
7401
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
Appendix:
001 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ]
Program
Service
Mode
[SC History]
7403 Logs the SC codes detected.
The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but
can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
*CTL -
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
SM Appendix 4-425 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 1
[SC 991 History]
7404
Logs the SC 991 code detected.
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
*CTL -
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
[Total Paper Jam Counter]
7502
Displays the total number of jams detected.
001 Total Jam * CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
[Total Original Jam Counter] (D095 only)
7503
Displays the total number of original jams detected.
001 Total Jam * CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
D095/M077 4-426 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 1
7504 [Paper Jam Location]
Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were
detected.
001 At power on *CTL
003 Paper feed sensor 1: Late *CTL
004 Paper feed sensor 2: Late *CTL
Paper feed sensor upper (A4 LCT): Late
006 *CTL
(M077 only)
007 Paper feed sensor middle (A4 LCT): Late (M077 only) *CTL
Paper feed sensor lower (A4 LCT): Late
008 *CTL
(M077 only)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
009 Paper feed sensor (By-pass): Late *CTL
010 Paper feed sensor upper (A3 LCT1): Late *CTL
011 Paper feed sensor lower (A3 LCT1): Late *CTL
012 Paper feed sensor upper (A3 LCT2): Late *CTL
013 Paper feed sensor lower (A3 LCT2): Late *CTL
014 Vertical Transport Sensor 1: Late *CTL
015 Vertical Transport Sensor 2: Late *CTL
4th transport sensor (A4 LCT): Late
017 *CTL
(M077 only)
5th transport sensor (A4 LCT): Late
018 *CTL
(M077 only)
6th transport sensor (A4 LCT): Late
019 *CTL
(M077 only)
SM Appendix 4-427 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 1
020 7th Transport Sensor: Late *CTL
021 3rd Transport Sensor: Late *CTL
022 4th Transport Sensor: Late *CTL
023 5th Transport Sensor: Late *CTL
024 6th Transport Sensor: Late *CTL
025 Relay sensor (A4 LCT): Late (M077 only) *CTL
026 Bypass: Vertical Transport Sn: Late *CTL
027 Vertical Transport Sn 3: Late *CTL
028 Vertical Transport Sn 4: Late *CTL
029 Vertical Transport Sn 5: Late *CTL
030 Vertical Transport Sn 6: Late *CTL
031 LCT exit sensor (A4 LCT): Late (M077 only) *CTL
033 Registration entrance sensor: Late *CTL
034 LCT entrance sensor: Late *CTL
035 Registration timing sensor: Late *CTL
036 PTR timing sensor: Late *CTL
037 PTB jam sensor: Late *CTL
038 Fusing exit sensor: Late *CTL
039 Exit junction timing sensor: Late *CTL
040 Paper exit sensor: Late *CTL
041 Switchback sensor: Late *CTL
042 Duplex transport sensor 1: Late *CTL
D095/M077 4-428 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 1
043 Duplex transport sensor 2: Late *CTL
044 Duplex transport sensor 3: Late *CTL
045 Duplex transport sensor 4: Late *CTL
053 Paper feed sensor 1: Stay on *CTL
054 Paper feed sensor 2: Stay on *CTL
Paper feed sensor upper (A4 LCT): Stay on
056 *CTL
(M077 only)
Paper feed sensor middle (A4 LCT): Stay on
057 *CTL
(M077 only)
Paper feed sensor lower (A4 LCT): Stay on
058 *CTL
(M077 only)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
059 Paper feed sensor (By-pass): Stay on *CTL
060 Paper feed sensor upper (A3 LCT1): Stay on *CTL
061 Paper feed sensor lower (A3 LCT1): Stay on *CTL
062 Paper feed sensor upper (A3 LCT2): Stay on *CTL
063 Paper feed sensor lower (A3 LCT2): Stay on *CTL
064 Vertical Transport Sensor 1: Stay on
065 Vertical Transport Sensor 2: Stay on
4th transport sensor (A4 LCT): Stay on
067 *CTL
(M077 only)
5th transport sensor (A4 LCT): Stay on
068 *CTL
(M077 only)
6th transport sensor (A4 LCT): Stay on
069 *CTL
(M077 only)
SM Appendix 4-429 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 1
070 Relay sensor (By-pass): Stay on *CTL
071 LCT Grip Sensor 1 (A3 LCT1): Stay on *CTL
072 LCT Grip Sensor 2 (A3 LCT1): Stay on *CTL
073 LCT Grip Sensor 1 (A3 LCT2): Stay on *CTL
074 LCT Grip Sensor 2 (A3 LCT2): Stay on *CTL
075 Relay sensor (A4 LCT): Stay on (M077 only) *CTL
076 LCT vertical transport sensor 3 (A3 LCT1): Stay on *CTL
077 LCT vertical transport sensor 1 (A3 LCT1): Stay on *CTL
078 LCT vertical transport sensor 2 (A3 LCT1): Stay on *CTL
079 LCT vertical transport sensor 1 (A3 LCT2): Stay on *CTL
080 LCT vertical transport sensor 2 (A3 LCT2): Stay on *CTL
081 LCT exit sensor (A4 LCT): Stay on (M077 only) *CTL
083 Registration entrance sensor: Stay on *CTL
084 LCT entrance sensor: Stay on *CTL
085 Registration timing sensor: Stay on *CTL
086 PTR timing sensor: Stay on *CTL
087 PTB jam sensor: Stay on *CTL
088 Fusing exit sensor: Stay on *CTL
089 Exit junction timing sensor: Stay on *CTL
090 Paper exit sensor: Stay on *CTL
091 Switchback sensor: Stay on *CTL
092 Duplex transport sensor 1: Stay on *CTL
D095/M077 4-430 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 1
093 Duplex transport sensor 2: Stay on *CTL
094 Duplex transport sensor 3: Stay on *CTL
095 Duplex transport sensor 4: Stay on *CTL
098 CIS: Skew Detection *CTL
099 Double-feed Sensor *CTL
Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations – Finisher B830
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press
7504 the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are
caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Paper late error: Paper failed to arrive at prescribed time.
Appendix:
Paper lag error: Paper failed to leave at prescribed time.
Program
Service
Mode
On Screen What It Means
101 Entrance Sensor – Fin. Paper late error
102 Entrance Sensor – Fin. (Stay On) Paper lag error
103 Upper Tray Exit Sensor – Fin Paper late error
104 Upper Tray Exit Sensor – Fin (Stay On) Paper lag error
105 Shift Tray Exit Sensor – Fin Paper late error
106 Shift Tray Exit Sensor – Fin (Stay On) Paper lag error
107 Staple Tray Exit Sensor – Fin Paper late error
108 Staple Tray Exit Sensor – Fin (Stay On) Paper lag error
109 Staple Tray Paper Sensor – Fin Paper late error
Staple Tray Paper Sensor – Fin (Stay
110 Paper lag error
On)
SM Appendix 4-431 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 1 Rev. 07/22/2011
111 Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
112 Transport Motors
113 Shift Tray Lift Motor
114 Jogger Motor
115 Shift Motor
116 Staple Motor
Malfunction
117 Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
118 Punch Motor
119 Z-Fold Jam – Fin
120 Pre-Stack Transport Motor
121 Abnormal Signal – Fin
122 Upper Stopper Motor Lock
123 Paper Jam Count by Location: Fin GBC Punch Unit Jam
⇒
Note: Every time the GBC Front Door is opened, even if the jam is not in the
GBC paper path, it will record JAM Code 123, and you will see JAM Code 123
increment by 1. Closing the front door of the GBC, Jam 123 is cleared and
machine will operate normally.
Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations – Cover Interposer B835
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press
7504 the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are
caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Paper late error: Paper failed to arrive at prescribed time.
Paper lag error: Paper failed to leave at prescribed time.
On Screen What It Means
130 1st Paper Feed Sensor – Late Paper late error
131 1st Paper Feed Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
D095/M077 4-432 SM Appendix
Rev. 07/22/2011 System SP7-xxx: 1
132 2nd Paper Feed Sensor – Late Paper late error
133 2nd Paper Feed Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
134 1st Transport Sensor – Late Paper late error
135 1st Transport Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
136 2nd Transport Sensor – Late Paper late error
137 2nd Transport Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
1st Vertical Transport Sensor -
138 Paper late error
Late
1st Vertical Transport Sensor -
139 Paper lag error
Lag
Appendix:
2nd Vertical Transport Sensor -
Program
Service
Mode
140 Paper late error
Late
2nd Vertical Transport Sensor -
141 Paper lag error
Lag
142 Vertical Exit Sensor – Late Paper late error
143 Vertical Exit Sensor - Lag Paper lag error
144 Entrance Sensor – Late Paper late error
145 Entrance Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
146 Exit Sensor – Late Paper late error
147 Exit Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
148 1st Lift Motor
149 2nd Lift Motor
Malfunction
150 1st Pick-Up Motor
151 2nd Pick-Up Motor
SM Appendix 4-433 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 1
Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations – Finisher D434
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press
7504 the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are
caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Paper late error: Paper failed to arrive at prescribed time.
Paper lag error: Paper failed to leave at prescribed time.
On Screen What It Means
160 Entrance Sensor – Late Paper late erro
161 Entrance Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
162 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor – Late Paper late erro
163 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
164 Stack Present Sensor – Late Paper late erro
165 Stack Present Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
166 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor – Late Paper late erro
167 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
168 Fold Unit Exit Sensor – Late Paper late erro
169 Fold Unit Exit Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
170 Exit Sensor – Late Paper late erro
171 Exit Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
174 Jogger Fence
175 Stack Feed-Out Belt
176 Booklet Stapler – Front Malfunction
177 Booklet Stapler – Rear
178 Stack Junction Gate Motor
D095/M077 4-434 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 1
179 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor
180 Bottom Fence Lift Motor
181 Fold Plate Motor
182 Bind: Job data Err
183 Pre-Stacker Drive Train
184 Booklet Path
Malfunction
185 Booklet Stapling System
186 Folding System
187 Main Machine Setting Incorrect
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations – Z-Fold Unit B660
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press
7504 the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are
caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Paper late error: Paper failed to arrive at prescribed time.
Paper lag error: Paper failed to leave at prescribed time.
200 Feed Sensor – Late Paper late error
201 Feed Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
202 Fold Timing Sensor – Late Paper late error
203 Fold Timing Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
204 Leading Edge Sensor – Late Paper late error
205 Leading Edge Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
SM Appendix 4-435 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 1
Upper Stopper HP Sensor –
206 Paper late error
Late
207 Upper Stopper HP Sensor – Lag Paper lag error
208 Upper Exit Sensor 1 – Late Paper late error
209 Upper Exit Sensor 1- Lag Paper lag error
212 Lower Exit Sensor 2 – Late Paper late error
213 Lower Exit Sensor 2 – Lag Paper lag error
214 Feed Motor Feed Motor
215 Lower Stopper Motor Lower Stopper Motor
216 Upper Stopper Motor Upper Stopper Motor
Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations – Trimmer D455
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press
7504 the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are
caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Paper late error: Paper failed to arrive at prescribed time.
Paper stay error: Paper failed to leave at prescribed time.
220 Entrance Sensor: Late Error
221 Entrance Sensor: Lag Error
222 Skew Sensor: Late Error
223 Skew Sensor: Lag Error
224 Exit Sensor: Late Error
225 Exit Sensor: Lag Error
D095/M077 4-436 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 1
226 Trimming Blade Motor Lock
227 Cut Position Motor
228 Press Roller
229 Press/Stopper Roller
230 Tray Motor
Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations – Stacker D447
Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred. Press
7504 the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location. These jams are
caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
Paper late error: Paper failed to arrive at prescribed time.
Appendix:
Paper stay error: Paper failed to leave at prescribed time.
Program
Service
Mode
250 Stacker1: Entrance
251 Stacker1: Ex-Tray: P
252 Stacker1: Ex-Tray: P
253 Stacker1: S-Tray: P
254 Stacker1: S-Tray: P
255 Stacker1: Bridge Pa
7505 Original Jam Detection
Displays the list of possible locations where an original jam could have occurred.
These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate.
001 At Power On
003 Feed Jam
004 Exit Jam
SM Appendix 4-437 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 1
[Jam Count by Paper Size]
7506
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
005 A4 LEF
006 A5 LEF
014 B5 LEF
038 LT LEF
044 HLT LEF
132 A3 SEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
141 B4 SEF
142 B5 SEF
160 DLT SEF
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
D095/M077 4-438 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 1
[Plotter Jam History]
7507
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
*CTL -
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
SM Appendix 4-439 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 1
[Original Jam History] (D095 only)
7508
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
*CTL -
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
D095/M077 4-440 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
4.21 SYSTEM SP7-XXX: 2
[Paper Jam Loc]
7509 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were
detected.
001 Stacker1: Br-Path E *CTL
002 Stacker1: Br-Path E *CTL
003 Stacker1: Off-set U *CTL
004 Stacker1: Side Jogg *CTL Stacker 1 (D447)
005 Stacker1: L-Edge Jo *CTL
Appendix:
Program
Service
006 Stacker1: Stack Tra *CTL
Mode
007 Stacker1: Job Data *CTL
015 Stacker2: Entrance *CTL
016 Stacker2: Ex-Tray: P *CTL
017 Stacker2: Ex-Tray: P *CTL
018 Stacker2: S-Tray: P *CTL
019 Stacker2: S-Tray: P *CTL
Stacker 2 (D447)
020 Stacker2: Bridge Pa *CTL
021 Stacker2: Br-Path E *CTL
022 Stacker2: Br-Path E *CTL
023 Stacker2: Off-set U *CTL
024 Stacker2: Side Jogg *CTL
SM Appendix 4-441 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
025 Stacker2: L-Edge Jo *CTL
026 Stacker2: Stack Tra *CTL
027 Stacker2: Job Data *CTL
045 P-Binder:Job Data Error *CTL
046 P-Binder:S-Through Exit Sn:Late *CTL
047 P-Binder:S-Through Exit Sn:Stay on *CTL
048 P-Binder:Cover Regist Sn:Late *CTL
049 P-Binder:Cover Regist Sn:Stay on *CTL
050 P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. S Sn:Late *CTL
051 P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. S Sn:Stay on *CTL
052 P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. L Sn:Late *CTL Perfect Binder (D391)
053 P-Binder:Cover H-Reg. L Sn:Stay on *CTL
054 P-Binder:Entrance Sn:Late *CTL
055 P-Binder:Entrance Sn:Stay on *CTL
056 P-Binder:Sign. Path: Sn 1:Late *CTL
057 P-Binder:Sign. Path: Sn 1:Stay on *CTL
058 P-Binder:Sign. Path: Sn 2:Late *CTL
059 P-Binder:Sign. Path: Sn 2:Stay on *CTL
060 P-Binder:Timing Sn:Late *CTL
061 P-Binder:Timing Sn:Stay on *CTL Perfect Binder (D391)
062 P-Binder:Stck Tray Emp. Sn:Late *CTL
D095/M077 4-442 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
063 P-Binder:Stck Tray Emp. Sn:Stay on *CTL
064 P-Binder:SG Paper Sn:Late *CTL
065 P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn 1:Stay on *CTL
066 P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn 1:Late *CTL
067 P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn 2:Late *CTL
068 P-Binder:Cover Path: Sn 2:Stay on *CTL
069 P-Binder:Cover Reg. Sn:Late *CTL
070 P-Binder:Cover Reg. Sn:Stay on *CTL
071 P-B/Inserter:Com. Sn:Late *CTL
072 P-B/Inserter:Com. Sn:Stay on *CTL
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
073 P-B/Inserter:U-Tray P-up Sn:Late *CTL
074 P-B/Inserter:U-Tray P-up Sn:Stay on *CTL
075 P-B/Inserter:L-Tray P-up Sn:Late *CTL
076 P-B/Inserter:L-Tray P-up Sn:Stay on *CTL
Perfect Binder (D391)
077 P-B/Inserter:Trans. Sn 1:Late *CTL
078 P-B/Inserter:Trans. Sn 1:Stay on *CTL
079 P-B/Inserter:Trans. Sn 2:Late *CTL
080 P-B/Inserter:Trans. Sn 2:Stay on *CTL
081 P-B/Relay:Transport Sn:Late *CTL
082 P-B/Relay:Transport Sn:Stay on *CTL
SM Appendix 4-443 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
095 R-Binder: Entrance *CTL
096 R-Binder: Entrance *CTL
097 R-Binder: Transport *CTL
098 R-Binder: Transport *CTL
099 R-Binder: Exit Sn: L *CTL
100 R-Binder: Exit Sn: S *CTL
Ring Binder (D392)
101 R-Binder: Pre-punch *CTL
102 R-Binder: After-pun *CTL
103 R-Binder: P TE Data *CTL
104 R-Binder: P LE Data *CTL
105 R-Binder: Ring Erro *CTL
106 R-Binder: Binder Un *CTL
107 R-Binder: Output Be *CTL
108 R-Binder: Output Be *CTL
109 R-Binder: Stacker J *CTL
110 R-Binder: Punch Mot *CTL
111 R-Binder: Shutter M *CTL Ring Binder (D392)
112 R-Binder: Line-up P *CTL
113 R-Binder: Paper Jog *CTL
114 R-Binder: Line-up P *CTL
115 R-Binder: Clamp Mot *CTL
D095/M077 4-444 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
116 R-Binder: 50/100 ad *CTL
117 R-Binder: Out-Belt *CTL
118 R-Binder: Job Data *CTL
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 1:
125 *CTL
Late
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 1:
126 *CTL
Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 2:
127 *CTL
Late
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 2:
128 *CTL
Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit (M379)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 3:
Mode
129 *CTL
Late
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 3:
130 *CTL
Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 4:
131 *CTL
Late
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 4:
132 *CTL
Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 5:
133 *CTL
Late
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 5:
134 *CTL Buffer Pass Unit (M379)
Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 6:
135 *CTL
Late
SM Appendix 4-445 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 6:
136 *CTL
Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 7:
137 *CTL
Late
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 7:
138 *CTL
Stay on
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 8:
139 *CTL
Late
Buffer Pass Unit: Relay Sensor 8:
140 *CTL
Stay on
141 Buffer Pass Unit: Job Data Error *CTL
145 A3 LCT1: Exit Sn:La *CTL
146 A3 LCT1: Entrance S *CTL
147 A3 LCT1: Right Ver. *CTL
LCT-MF or LCT (D532)
148 A3 LCT1: H-Trans. E *CTL
148 A3 LCT1: H-Trans. E *CTL
150 A3 LCT1: V-Trans. E *CTL
151 A3 LCT1: Exit Sn: La *CTL
196 A3 LCT1: Entrance S *CTL
197 A3 LCT1: Right Ver. *CTL
LCT-MF or LCT (D532)
198 A3 LCT1: H-Trans. E *CTL
199 A3 LCT1: H-Trans. E *CTL
200 A3 LCT1: V-Trans. E *CTL
201 A3 LCT2: Exit Sn: *CTL LCT (D532)
D095/M077 4-446 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
7617 PM Parts Counter
Displays the each counter for PM parts alarm.
001 Normal (Paper Feed Counter)
002 Df (Original Feed Counter)
7618 PM Parts Counter Reset
Clears the each counter for PM parts alarm.
001 Normal (Paper Feed Counter)
002 Df (Original Feed Counter)
Appendix:
7621 PM Counter
Program
Service
Mode
Displays the total counter for each PM parts.
001 Y PCU Developer
002 M PCU Developer
003 C PCU Developer
004 Bk PCU Developer
005 Y PCU Drum
006 M PCU Drum
007 C PCU Drum
008 Bk PCU Drum
009 Used Toner Bottle
010 Dust Filter:K
011 Dust Filter:YCM
SM Appendix 4-447 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
012 Ozone Filter
016 Charge Corona Unit:Y
022 Charge Corona Unit:M
028 Charge Corona Unit:C
034 Charge Corona Unit:Bk
040 Drum Cleaning Unit:Y
041 Drum Cleaning Brush Roller:Y
042 Drum Cleaning Blade:Y
043 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:Y
044 Drum Lubricant Blade:Y
045 Drum Lubricant Bar:Y
046 Drum Cleaning Gear:Y
053 Drum Cleaning Unit:M
054 Drum Cleaning Brush Roller:M
055 Drum Cleaning Blade:M
056 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:M
057 Drum Lubricant Blade:M
058 Drum Lubricant Bar:M
059 Drum Cleaning Gear:M
066 Drum Cleaning Unit:C
067 Drum Cleaning Brush Roller:C
068 Drum Cleaning Blade:C
D095/M077 4-448 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
069 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:C
070 Drum Lubricant Blade:C
071 Drum Lubricant Bar:C
072 Drum Cleaning Gear:C
079 Drum Cleaning Unit:K
080 Drum Kleaning Brush Roller:K
081 Drum Kleaning Blade:K
082 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:K
083 Drum Lubricant Blade:K
084 Drum Lubricant Bar:K
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
085 Drum Kleaning Gear:K
092 Image Transfer Roller:Y
093 Image Transfer Roller:M
094 Image Transfer Roller:C
095 Image Transfer Roller:K
096 ITB
097 ITB Bias Roller
098 ITB Cleaning Unit
099 ITB Cleaning Blade
100 ITB Cleaning Brush Roller
101 ITB Lubricant Brush Roller
SM Appendix 4-449 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
102 ITB Lube Bar
105 PTR Unit
106 Paper Transfer Roller
107 PTR Cleaning Brush Roller
108 PTR Lubricant Brush Roller
109 PTR Cleaning Blade
110 PTR Lubricant Bar
111 PTR Discharge Plate
112 Brush Roller Gear
115 Fusing Unit
117 Hot Roller
118 Fusing Belt
119 Pressure Roller
125 Thermistor 1 2 3
129 Web Cleaning Unit
151 Pick-up Roller:Tray 1
152 Feed Roller:Tray 1
153 Separation Roller:Tray 1
154 Pick-up Roller:Tray 2
155 Feed Roller:Tray 2
156 Separation Roller:Tray 2
D095/M077 4-450 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
157 Pickup:A4LCT Upper (M077 only)
158 Feed:A4LCT Upper (M077 only)
159 Separate:A4LCT Upper (M077 only)
160 Pickup:A4LCT Middle (M077 only)
161 Feed:A4LCT Middle (M077 only)
162 Separate:A4LCT Middle (M077 only)
163 Pickup:A4LCT Lower (M077 only)
164 Feed:A4LCT Lower (M077 only)
165 Separate:A4LCT Lower (M077 only)
178 ADF Transport Belt (D095 only)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
179 ADF Reverse Roller (D095 only)
180 ADF Feed Belt # (D095 only)
181 ADF Separation (D095 only)
182 By-pass:Pick-up Roller
183 By-pass:Feed Roller
184 By-pass:Separation Roller
185 Contact Glass (Exposure Glass) (D095 only)
186 Inserter Tray1: Feed belt : U-Tray
187 Inserter Tray1: Separation Roller : U-Tray
188 Inserter Tray1: Pick-up Roller : U-Tray
190 Inserter Tray2: Feed Belt : L-Tray
SM Appendix 4-451 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
191 Inserter Tray2: Separation Roller : L-Tray
192 Inserter Tray2: Pick-up Roller : L-Tray
198 Pickup Roller:Perfect Binder:Lower-Tray
199 Separation Roller:Perfect Binder:Lower-Tray
200 Feed Roller:Perfect Binder:Lower-Tray
201 Switchback Rollers Torque Limiter : Cover Transport
202 Signature Thickness Sensor Volume : Perfect Binder
203 Electro Magnetic Clutch:Perfect Binder:Lower-Tray
204 Torque Diode : Trimming Signature Rotation Unit : Perfect Binder
205 Trimming Buffer Motor : Perfect Binder
206 Pickup Roller : Perfect Binder
207 Separation Roller : Perfect Binder
208 Feed Roller : Perfect Binder
209 Magnetic Clutch : Perfect Binder
210 Torque Limiter : Perfect Binder
211 Grip Motor Gear : Perfect Binder
212 Torque Limiter : Perfect Binder : Lower-Tray
213 Torque Limiter : Trimming Signature Rotation U
214 Right Spine Fold Unit Harness: Perfect Binder
215 Left Spine Fold Unit Harness: Perfect Binder
232 A3LCT Tray3 Paper Feed
D095/M077 4-452 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
233 A3LCT Tray3 Pickup
234 A3LCT Tray3 Feed
235 A3LCT Tray3 Separate
236 A3LCT Tray4 Paper Feed
237 A3LCT Tray4 Pickup
238 A3LCT Tray4 Feed
239 A3LCT Tray4 Separate
240 A3LCT Tray5 Paper Feed
241 A3LCT Tray5 Pickup
242 A3LCT Tray5 Feed
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
243 A3LCT Tray5 Separate
244 A3LCT Tray6 Paper Feed
245 A3LCT Tray6 Pickup
246 A3LCT Tray6 Feed
247 A3LCT Tray6 Separate
7622 Reset (PM Counter)
Resets the total counter for each PM parts.
7623 Standard Value (of PM Parts Life)
Displays the standard value of PM parts life for each PM parts.
SM Appendix 4-453 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
7624 Operational Value
Uses or does not use the PM counters as the reference for displaying the
alert on the SMC.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Does not use, 1: Uses
7625 Pg Count History:Latest 1 Displays the PM counter history.
7626 Pg Count History:Latest 2 Displays the PM counter history.
7628 Clear PM Counter
001 Clear Exceeded Counts
Clears the PM counters which exceed the PM life for each PM part.
002 Reset All Counts
Resets the all PM counters and standard values of the PM parts life.
7801 ROM No./Firmware Version
Displays the serial number and the ROM version for each unit or peripheral.
002 Engine
005 ADF (D095 only)
007 FNS1 (3000-sheet Finisher: B830)
008 FNS2 (Booklet Finisher: D434)
010 LCT1 (A4 LCT B832 or 1st A3 LCT: D355)
020 Cover Interposer (B835)
025 Folding Unit (Z-Folding Unit ZF4000: B660)
D095/M077 4-454 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
028 LCT 2: Board Serial No. (2nd A3 LCT: D532)
029 Ring Binder: Board1 Serial No. (D392)
030 Ring Binder:Board2 Serial No (D392)
031 Perfect Binder: Board1 Serial No. (D391) for future use
032 Perfect Binder: Board2 Serial No. (D391) for future use
033 Perfect Binder: Board3 Serial No. (D391) for future use
034 Perfect Binder: Board4 Serial No. (D391) for future use
035 Perfect Binder: Board5 Serial No. (D391) for future use
036 Stacker 1: Board Serial No. (D447)
037 Stacker 2: Board Serial No. (D447)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
038 Engine2
039 Buffer Pass Unit (M379)
102 Engine
107 FNS1
108 FNS2
110 LCT1
120 Cover Interposer
125 Folding Unit
128 LCT 2:Version No.
129 Ring Binder:Board1 Version No.
SM Appendix 4-455 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
130 Ring Binder:Board2 Version No.
131 Perfect Binder:Board1 Version No. for future use
132 Perfect Binder:Board2 Version No. for future use
133 Perfect Binder:Board3 Version No. for future use
134 Perfect Binder:Board4 Version No. for future use
135 Perfect Binder:Board5 Version No. for future use
136 Stacker 1:Version No.
137 Stacker 2:Version No.
138 Engine2
139 Buffer Pass Unit (M379)
255 Rom Version
7803 PM Counter Display
001 - CTL* Displays the PM count since the last PM.
7804 PM Counter Reset
001 - CTL* Clears the PM count.
[SC/Jam Counter Reset]
7807
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
001 SC/Jam Clear - -
D095/M077 4-456 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
7826 MF Error Counter
001 Error Staple - -
002 Error Total
7827 MF Error Counter Clear
001 Execute
[Self-Diagnose Result Display]
7832
Displays the result of the diagnostics.
001 Diag. Result *CTL -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
7835 ACC Counter (D095 only)
Displays the ACC execution times for
001 Copy ACC *CTL
each mode.
Total Memory Size
7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
7855 Coverage Range
001 Coverage Range 1 - [1 to 200 / 5 / 1%]
002 Coverage Range 2 - [1 to 200 / 20 / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-457 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
7860 Fusing: Paper Pass Time
Displays the paper passing time history from the PTB sensor to the fusing exit
sensor.
001 Latest 1
002 Latest 2
003 Latest 3
004 Latest 4
005 Latest 5
006 Latest 6
007 Latest 7
008 Latest 8
009 Latest 9
010 Latest 10
011 Latest 11
012 Latest 12
013 Latest 13
014 Latest 14
015 Latest 15
016 Latest 16
D095/M077 4-458 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
[Assert Info] DFU
7901 Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data
stored in this SP is used for problem analysis.
001 File Name
002 Number of Lines *CTL -
003 Location
7931* Toner Bottle Bk
7932* Toner Bottle M
7933* Toner Bottle C
Appendix:
7934* Toner Bottle Y
Program
Service
Mode
Displays the toner bottle information for each color.
001 Model ID (API code)
002 Cartridge Ver (Version)
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Production ID (Toner amount information)
006 Color ID
007 Maintenance ID
[20H: Excluding toner, 21H: Including toner, 99H: Sample]
008 New
SM Appendix 4-459 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
Recycle Count
009
Displays the recycled times.
010 Product Date
011 Serial No
012 Toner Remaining
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%]
013 EDP Code
014 Toner End
[E: Toner end detected, N: Toner near end detected]
015 Toner Refill
[RF: Toner refill detected, IS: IS product detected]
016 Total Count Start
The total counter (BW or Mono Color) of the mainframe is stored when a toner
bottle has been installed in the mainframe.
017 Total Count Start
The total counter (Color) of the mainframe is stored when a toner bottle has
been installed in the mainframe.
018 Total Count End
The total counter (BW or Mono Color) of the mainframe is stored when the
toner end for a toner bottle has been detected.
019 Total Count End
The total counter (Color) of the mainframe is stored when the toner end for a
toner bottle has been detected.
020 Set Date
The date of a toner installation is stored.
021 End Date
The date of toner end is stored.
D095/M077 4-460 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 2
7935* Toner Bottle Log 1 to 5: Bk
7936* Toner Bottle 1 to 5: M
7937* Toner Bottle 1 to 5: C
7938* Toner Bottle 1 to 5: Y
Displays the toner bottle information for each color.
001 Serial No (Log 1)
002 Set Date (Log 1)
003 Total Count Start (Log 1)
004 Toner Refill (Log 1)
011 Serial No (Log 2)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
012 Set Date (Log 2)
013 Total Count Start (Log 2)
014 Toner Refill (Log 2)
021 Serial No (Log 3)
022 Set Date (Log 3)
023 Total Count Start (Log 3)
024 Toner Refill (Log 3)
031 Serial No (Log 4)
032 Set Date (Log 4)
033 Total Count Start (Log 4)
SM Appendix 4-461 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 2
034 Toner Refill (Log 4)
041 Serial No (Log 5)
042 Set Date (Log 5)
043 Total Count Start (Log 5)
044 Toner Refill (Log 5)
D095/M077 4-462 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
4.22 SYSTEM SP7-XXX: 3
7940* Drive Distance:End Std Value
Displays the standard value (motor rotation count) of PM end for each PM
part.
001 Y PCU Developer [0 to 99999999 / 368602 / 1 m]
002 M PCU Developer [0 to 99999999 / 368602 / 1 m]
003 C PCU Developer [0 to 99999999 / 368602 / 1 m]
004 Bk PCU Developer [0 to 99999999 / 349125 / 1 m]
005 Y PCU Drum [0 to 99999999 / 993571 / 1 m]
Appendix:
Program
Service
006 M PCU Drum [0 to 99999999 / 993571 / 1 m]
Mode
007 C PCU Drum [0 to 99999999 / 993571 / 1 m]
008 Bk PCU Drum [0 to 99999999 / 595582 / 1 m]
009 Used Toner Bottle [0 to 99999999 / 99999999 / 1 m]
010 Dust Filter:K [0 to 99999999 / 188528 / 1 m]
011 Dust Filter:YCM [0 to 99999999 / 188528 / 1 m]
012 Ozone Filter [0 to 99999999 / 565582 / 1 m]
016 Charge Corona Unit:Y [0 to 99999999 / 194937 / 1 m]
022 Charge Corona Unit:M [0 to 99999999 / 194937 / 1 m]
028 Charge Corona Unit:C [0 to 99999999 / 194937 / 1 m]
034 Charge Corona Unit:K [0 to 99999999 / 184764 / 1 m]
040 Drum Cleaning Unit:Y [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
SM Appendix 4-463 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
041 Drum Cleaning Brush Roller:Y [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
042 Drum Cleaning Blade:Y [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
043 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:Y [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
044 Drum Lubricant Blade:Y [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
045 Drum Lubricant Bar:Y [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
046 Drum Cleaning Gear:Y [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
053 Drum Cleaning Unit:M [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
054 Drum Cleaning Brush Roller:M [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
055 Drum Cleaning Blade:M [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
056 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:M [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
057 Drum Lubricant Blade:M [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
058 Drum Lubricant Bar:M [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
059 Drum Cleaning Gear:M [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
066 Drum Cleaning Unit:C [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
067 Drum Cleaning Brush Roller:C [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
068 Drum Cleaning Blade:C [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
069 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:C [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
070 Drum Lubricant Blade:C [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
071 Drum Lubricant Bar:C [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
072 Drum Cleaning Gear:C [0 to 99999999 / 198342 / 1 m]
D095/M077 4-464 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
079 Drum Cleaning Unit:K [0 to 99999999 / 188163 / 1 m]
080 Drum Kleaning Brush Roller:K [0 to 99999999 / 188163 / 1 m]
081 Drum Kleaning Blade:K [0 to 99999999 / 188163 / 1 m]
082 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:K [0 to 99999999 / 188163 / 1 m]
083 Drum Lubricant Blade:K [0 to 99999999 / 188163 / 1 m]
084 Drum Lubricant Bar:K [0 to 99999999 / 188163 / 1 m]
085 Drum Kleaning Gear:K [0 to 99999999 / 188163 / 1 m]
092 Image Transfer Roller:Y [0 to 99999999 / 370704 / 1 m]
093 Image Transfer Roller:M [0 to 99999999 / 370704 / 1 m]
094 Image Transfer Roller:C [0 to 99999999 / 370704 / 1 m]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
095 Image Transfer Roller:K [0 to 99999999 / 370704 / 1 m]
096 ITB [0 to 99999999 / 722582 / 1 m]
097 ITB Bias Roller [0 to 99999999 / 361291 / 1 m]
098 ITB Cleaning Unit [0 to 99999999 / 180646 / 1 m]
099 ITB Cleaning Blade [0 to 99999999 / 180646 / 1 m]
100 ITB Cleaning Brush Roller [0 to 99999999 / 180646 / 1 m]
101 ITB Lubricant Brush Roller [0 to 99999999 / 180646 / 1 m]
102 ITB Lube Bar [0 to 99999999 / 180646 / 1 m]
105 PTR Unit [0 to 99999999 / 181089 / 1 m]
106 Paper Transfer Roller [0 to 99999999 / 181089 / 1 m]
SM Appendix 4-465 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
107 PTR Cleaning Brush Roller [0 to 99999999 / 181089 / 1 m]
108 PTR Lubricant Brush Roller [0 to 99999999 / 181089 / 1 m]
109 PTR Cleaning Blade [0 to 99999999 / 181089 / 1 m]
110 PTR Lubricant Bar [0 to 99999999 / 181089 / 1 m]
111 PTR Discharge Plate [0 to 99999999 / 181089 / 1 m]
112 Brush Roller Gear [0 to 99999999 / 99999999 / 1 m]
115 Fusing Unit [0 to 99999999 / 212667 / 1 m]
117 Hot Roller [0 to 99999999 / 425334 / 1 m]
118 Fusing Belt [0 to 99999999 / 425334 / 1 m]
119 Pressure Roller [0 to 99999999 / 425334 / 1 m]
125 Thermistor 1 2 3 [0 to 99999999 / 850668 / 1 m]
129 Web Cleaning Unit [0 to 99999999 / 99999999 / 1 m]
7941* Drive Distance:N-End Std Value
Displays the standard value (motor rotation count) of PM near-end for each
PM part.
001 Y PCU Developer [0 to 99999999 / 331742 / 1 m]
002 M PCU Developer [0 to 99999999 / 331742 / 1 m]
003 C PCU Developer [0 to 99999999 / 331742 / 1 m]
004 Bk PCU Developer [0 to 99999999 / 324146 / 1 m]
005 Y PCU Drum [0 to 99999999 / 894214 / 1 m]
006 M PCU Drum [0 to 99999999 / 894214 / 1 m]
D095/M077 4-466 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
007 C PCU Drum [0 to 99999999 / 894214 / 1 m]
008 Bk PCU Drum [0 to 99999999 / 509024 / 1 m]
009 Used Toner Bottle [0 to 99999999 / 99999999 / 1 m]
010 Dust Filter: K [0 to 99999999 / 174564 / 1 m]
011 Used Toner Bottle [0 to 99999999 / 174564 / 1 m]
016 Charge Corona Unit:Y [0 to 99999999 / 175444 / 1 m]
022 Charge Corona Unit:M [0 to 99999999 / 175444 / 1 m]
028 Charge Corona Unit:C [0 to 99999999 / 175444 / 1 m]
034 Charge Corona Unit:K [0 to 99999999 / 166288 / 1 m]
040 Drum Cleaning Unit:Y [0 to 99999999 / 178508 / 1 m]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
053 Drum Cleaning Unit:M [0 to 99999999 / 178508 / 1 m]
066 Drum Cleaning Unit:C [0 to 99999999 / 178508 / 1 m]
079 Drum Cleaning Unit:K [0 to 99999999 / 169347 / 1 m]
098 ITB Cleaning Unit [0 to 99999999 / 162582 / 1 m]
105 PTR Unit [0 to 99999999 / 162981 / 1 m]
115 Fusing Unit [0 to 99999999 / 189238 / 1 m]
7942* Drive Distance % Counter
Displays the drive distance rate (motor rotation count) of PM parts life for each
PM part.
[0 to 255
/ - / 1%]
SM Appendix 4-467 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
7943 Drive Distance PM Mode
Selects the PM counter mode.
001 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Drive distance counter, 1: Page counter
7944* Drive Distance Counter
Displays the drive distance counter for each PM part.
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
7945* Pg Counter
Displays the page counter for each PM part.
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 page]
7946* Pick Count
Displays the page counter for each PM part.
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 page]
7951* Page Counter:End Std Value
Displays the standard value (page count) of PM end for each PM part.
001 Y PCU Developer
[0 to 99999999 / 1,200,000 / 1 page]
002 M PCU Developer
[0 to 99999999 / 1,200,000/ 1 page]
003 C PCU Developer
[0 to 99999999 / 1,200,000 / 1 page]
D095/M077 4-468 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
004 Bk PCU Developer
[0 to 99999999 /1,200,000 / 1 page]
005 Y PCU Drum
[0 to 99999999 / 2,400,000 / 1 page]
006 M PCU Drum
[0 to 99999999 / 2,400,000 / 1 page]
007 C PCU Drum
[0 to 99999999 / 2,400,000 / 1 page]
008 Bk PCU Drum
[0 to 99999999 / 2,400,000 / 1 page]
009 Used Toner Bottle [0 to 99999999 / 230,000 / 1 page]
Appendix:
010 Dust Filter:K
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
011 Dust Filter:YCM
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
012 Ozone Filter
[0 to 99999999 / 1200000 / 1 page]
016 Charge Corona Unit:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
022 Charge Corona Unit:M
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
028 Charge Corona Unit:C
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
034 Charge Corona Unit:Bk
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
SM Appendix 4-469 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
040 Drum Cleaning Unit:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
041 Drum Cleaning Brush Roller:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
042 Drum Cleaning Blade:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
043 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
044 Drum Lubricant Blade:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
045 Drum Lubricant Bar:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
046 Drum Cleaning Gear:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
053 Drum Cleaning Unit:M
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
054 Drum Cleaning Brush Roller:M
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
055 Drum Cleaning Blade:M
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
056 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:M
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
057 Drum Lubricant Blade:M
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
D095/M077 4-470 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
058 Drum Lubricant Bar:M
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
059 Drum Cleaning Gear:M
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
066 Drum Cleaning Unit:C
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
067 Drum Cleaning Brush Roller:C
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
068 Drum Cleaning Blade:C
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
069 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:C
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
070 Drum Lubricant Blade:C
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
071 Drum Lubricant Bar:C
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
072 Drum Cleaning Gear:C
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
079 Drum Cleaning Unit:K
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
080 Drum Kleaning Brush Roller:K
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
081 Drum Kleaning Blade:K
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
SM Appendix 4-471 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
082 Drum Lubricant Brush Roller:K
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
083 Drum Lubricant Blade:K
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
084 Drum Lubricant Bar:K
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
085 Drum Kleaning Gear:K
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
092 Image Transfer Roller:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 800000 / 1 page]
093 Image Transfer Roller:M
[0 to 99999999 / 800000 / 1 page]
094 Image Transfer Roller:C
[0 to 99999999 / 800000 / 1 page]
095 Image Transfer Roller:K
[0 to 99999999 / 800000 / 1 page]
096 ITB
[0 to 99999999 / 1600000 / 1 page]
097 ITB Bias Roller
[0 to 99999999 / 800000 / 1 page]
098 ITB Cleaning Unit
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
099 ITB Cleaning Blade
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
D095/M077 4-472 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
100 ITB Cleaning Brush Roller
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
101 ITB Lubricant Brush Roller
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
102 ITB Lube Bar
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
105 PTR Unit
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
106 Paper Transfer Roller
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
107 PTR Cleaning Brush Roller
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
108 PTR Lubricant Brush Roller
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
109 PTR Cleaning Blade
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
110 PTR Lubricant Bar
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
111 PTR Discharge Plate
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
112 Brush Roller Gear [0 to 99999999 / 99999999/ 1 page]
115 Fusing Unit
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
117 Hot Roller
[0 to 99999999 / 800000 / 1 page]
SM Appendix 4-473 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
118 Fusing Belt
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
119 Pressure Roller
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
125 Heating Roller Thermistor
[0 to 99999999 / 1600000 / 1 page]
129 Web Cleaning Unit
[0 to 99999999 / 400000 / 1 page]
7952* Pick Counter:End Std Value
Displays the standard value (pick-up count) of PM end for each PM part.
151 Pick-up Roller:Tray 1 [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
152 Feed Roller:Tray 1 [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
153 Separation Roller:Tray 1 [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
154 Pick-up Roller:Tray 2 [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
155 Feed Roller:Tray 2 [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
156 Separation Roller:Tray 2 [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
157 Pickup:A4LCT Upper [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
(M077 only)
158 Feed:A4LCT Upper [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
(M077 only)
159 Separate:A4LCT Upper [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
(M077 only)
D095/M077 4-474 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
160 Pickup:A4LCT Middle [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
(M077 only)
161 Feed:A4LCT Middle [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
(M077 only)
162 Separate:A4LCT Middle [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
(M077 only)
163 Pickup:A4LCT Lower [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
(M077 only)
164 Feed:A4LCT Lower [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
(M077 only)
165 Separate:A4LCT Lower [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
(M077 only)
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
178 ADF Transport Belt [0 to 99999999 / 140000 / 1 sheet]
179 ADF Reverse Roller # [0 to 99999999 / 120000 / 1 sheet]
180 ADF Feed Belt # [0 to 99999999 / 120000 / 1 sheet]
181 ADF Pickup Roller # [0 to 99999999 / 120000 / 1 sheet]
182 By-pass:Pick-up Roller [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
183 By-pass:Feed Roller [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
184 By-pass:Separation Roller [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
185 Contact Glass [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet] (D095 only)
186 Feed Belt:U-Tray [0 to 99999999 / 600000 / 1 sheet]
187 Separation Roller:U-Tray [0 to 99999999 / 600000 / 1 sheet]
188 Pick-up Roller:U-Tray [0 to 99999999 / 600000 / 1 sheet]
SM Appendix 4-475 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
190 Feed Belt:L-Tray [0 to 99999999 / 600000 / 1 sheet]
191 Separation Roller:L-Tray [0 to 99999999 / 600000 / 1 sheet]
192 Pick-up Roller:L-Tray [0 to 99999999 / 600000 / 1 sheet]
198 Pickup Roller:Perfect Binder:Lower-Tray
[0 to 99999999 / 100000 / 1 sheet]
199 Separation Roller:Perfect Binder:Lower-Tray
[0 to 99999999 / 100000 / 1 sheet]
200 Feed Roller:Perfect Binder:Lower-Tray
[0 to 99999999 / 100000 / 1 sheet]
201 Switchback Rollers Torque Limiter : Cover Transport
[0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
202 Signature Thickness Sensor Volume : Perfect Binder
[0 to 99999999 / 50000 / 1 sheet]
203 Electro Magnetic Clutch:Perfect Binder:Lower-Tray
[0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
204 Torque Diode : Trimming Signature Rotation Unit : Perfect Binder
[0 to 99999999 / 50000 / 1 sheet]
205 Trimming Buffer Motor : Perfect Binder
[0 to 99999999 / 50000 / 1 sheet]
206 Pickup Roller : Perfect Binder [0 to 99999999 / 100000 / 1 sheet]
207 Separation Roller : Perfect Binder [0 to 99999999 / 100000 / 1 sheet]
208 Feed Roller : Perfect Binder [0 to 99999999 / 100000 / 1 sheet]
209 Magnetic Clutch : Perfect Binder [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
210 Torque Limiter : Perfect Binder [0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
D095/M077 4-476 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
211 Grip Motor Gear : Perfect Binder [0 to 99999999 / 50000 / 1 sheet]
212 Torque Limiter : Perfect Binder : Lower-Tray
[0 to 99999999 / 1000000 / 1 sheet]
213 Torque Limiter : Trimming Signature Rotation U
[0 to 99999999 / 50000 / 1 sheet]
214 Right Spine Fold Unit Harness: Perfect Binder
[0 to 99999999 / 50000 / 1 sheet]
215 Left Spine Fold Unit Harness: Perfect Binder
[0 to 99999999 / 50000 / 1 sheet]
232 A3LCT Tray3 Paper Feed
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
Appendix:
233 A3LCT Tray3 Pickup
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
234 A3LCT Tray3 Feed
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
235 A3LCT Tray3 Separate
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
236 A3LCT Tray4 Paper Feed
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
237 A3LCT Tray4 Pickup
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
238 A3LCT Tray4 Feed
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
239 A3LCT Tray4 Separate
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
SM Appendix 4-477 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
240 A3LCT Tray5 Paper Feed
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
241 A3LCT Tray5 Pickup
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
242 A3LCT Tray5 Feed
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
243 A3LCT Tray5 Separate
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
244 A3LCT Tray6 Paper Feed
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
245 A3LCT Tray6 Pickup
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
246 A3LCT Tray6 Feed
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
247 A3LCT Tray6 Separate
[0 to 99999999 / 300000 / 1 sheet]
7953* Page Counter:N-End Std Value
Displays the standard value (page count) of PM near-end for each PM part.
001 Y PCU Developer
[0 to 99999999 / 1,080,000 / 1 page]
002 M PCU Developer
[0 to 99999999 / 1,080,000 / 1 page]
003 C PCU Developer
[0 to 99999999 / 1,080,000 / 1 page]
D095/M077 4-478 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
Bk PCU Developer
004
[0 to 99999999 / 1,080,000 / 1 page]
Y PCU Drum
005
[0 to 99999999 / 2,304,000 / 1 page]
M PCU Drum
006
[0 to 99999999 / 2,304,000 / 1 page]
C PCU Drum
007
[0 to 99999999 / 2,304,000 / 1 page]
Bk PCU Drum
008
[0 to 99999999 / 2,304,000 / 1 page]
009 Used Toner Bottle [0 to 99999999 / 180000 / 1 page]
Appendix:
016 Charge Corona Unit:Y
Program
Service
Mode
[0 to 99999999 / 360000 / 1 page]
022 Charge Corona Unit:M
[0 to 99999999 / 360000 / 1 page]
028 Charge Corona Unit:C
[0 to 99999999 / 360000 / 1 page]
034 Charge Corona Unit:K
[0 to 99999999 / 360000 / 1 page]
040 Drum Cleaning Unit:Y
[0 to 99999999 / 360,000 / 1 page]
053 Drum Cleaning Unit:M
[0 to 99999999 / 360,000 / 1 page]
066 Drum Cleaning Unit:C
[0 to 99999999 / 360,000 / 1 page]
SM Appendix 4-479 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
079 Drum Cleaning Unit:K
[0 to 99999999 / 360,000 / 1 page]
098 ITB Cleaning Unit
[0 to 99999999 / 360,000 / 1 page]
105 PTR Unit
[0 to 99999999 / 360,000 / 1 page]
115 Fusing Unit
[0 to 99999999 / 360,000 / 1 page]
7954* Consumption Rate Counter
Displays the consumption rate counter (page count) of PM parts life for each
PM part.
[0 to 255 / - / 1%]
7955* Pick Counter: N-End Std Value
A3LCT Tray3 Paper Feed
220
[0 to 99999999 / 270000 / 1 page]
236
240
244
A3LCT Tray3 Paper Feed
232
[0 to 99999999 / 270000 / 1 page]
236
240
244
D095/M077 4-480 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
7956* TCRU Mode
Selects whether the TCRU (trained customer replaceable unit) mode is used.
[0 or 1 / 0 /
1]
0: No
Operation,
1:
Operation
7957* TCRU Target
Fusing Unit
Selects whether the fusing unit is set as a TCRU (trained customer
Appendix:
Program
Service
replaceable unit).
Mode
[0 or 1 /
0 / 1]
0:
Target,
1: Not
Target
SM Appendix 4-481 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
7963* Operation Env. Log:PCU:Bk
Displays the drive distance of the drum motor: K when the machine is
operated in the following conditions.
001 Temp<=5: 0<=Hum<30
This condition is "Temperature < 5/ 0% < Humidity < 30%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
002 Temp<=5: 30<=Hum<55
This condition is "Temperature < 5/ 30% < Humidity < 55%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
003 Temp<=5: 55<=Hum<80
This condition is "Temperature < 5/ 55% < Humidity < 80%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
004 Temp<=5: 80<=Hum<100
This condition is "Temperature < 5/ 80% < Humidity < 100%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
005 5<Temp<=15: 0<=Hum<30
This condition is "5 < Temperature < 15/ 0% < Humidity < 30%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
006 5<Temp<=15: 30<=Hum<55
This condition is "5 < Temperature < 15/ 30% < Humidity < 55%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
D095/M077 4-482 SM Appendix
System SP7-xxx: 3
007 5<Temp<=15: 55<=Hum<80
This condition is "5 < Temperature < 15/ 55% < Humidity < 80%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
008 5<Temp<=15: 80<=Hum<100
This condition is "5 < Temperature < 15/ 80% < Humidity < 100%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
009 15<Temp<=25: 0<=Hum<30
This condition is "15 < Temperature < 25/ 0% < Humidity < 30%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
010 15<Temp<=25: 30<=Hum<55
This condition is "15 < Temperature < 25/ 30% < Humidity < 55%".
Appendix:
Program
Service
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
Mode
011 15<Temp<=25: 55<=Hum<80
This condition is "15 < Temperature < 25/ 55% < Humidity < 80%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
012 15<Temp<=25: 80<=Hum<100
This condition is "15 < Temperature < 25/ 80% < Humidity < 100%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
013 25<Temp<=30: 0<=Hum<30
This condition is "25 < Temperature < 30/ 0% < Humidity < 30%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
SM Appendix 4-483 D095/M077
System SP7-xxx: 3
014 25<Temp<=30: 30<=Hum<55
This condition is "25 < Temperature < 30/ 30% < Humidity < 55%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
015 25<Temp<=30: 55<=Hum<80
This condition is "25 < Temperature < 30/ 55% < Humidity < 80%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
016 25<Temp<=30: 80<=Hum<100
This condition is "25 < Temperature < 30/ 80% < Humidity < 100%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
017 30<=Temp: 0<=Hum<30
This condition is "30 < Temperature/ 0% < Humidity < 30%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
018 30<=Temp: 30<=Hum<55
This condition is "30 < Temperature/ 30% < Humidity < 55%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
019 30<=Temp: 55<=Hum<80
This condition is "30 < Temperature/ 55% < Humidity < 80%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
020 30<=Temp: 80<=Hum<100
This condition is "30 < Temperature/ 80% < Humidity < 100%".
[0 to 99999999 / – / 1 m]
7964 Operation Env. Log Clear
001 Clears all operation environmental logs
7989
D095/M077 4-484 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
4.23 SYSTEM SP8-XXX: 1
4.23.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as
sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in
combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8 211 to SP8 216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8 401 to SP8 406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8 691 to SP8 696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Appendix:
Program
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:
Service
Mode
How is the document server actually being used?
What application is using the document server most frequently?
What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications
T: Total: (Grand Total).
(C, F, P, etc.)..
C: Copy application.
F: Fax application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each
application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application. document server.
S: Scan application.
SM Appendix 4-485 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.
The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
mode (from the document server window), or from
Local storage
L: another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
(document server)
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image
(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example) group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them
on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of
abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not
understand.
D095/M077 4-486 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,
DesApl Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
SM Appendix 4-487 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
GPC
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
ImgEdt
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
New Remote Service (@Remote), which allows a service center
NRS to monitor machines remotely. "@Remote" is used overseas,
"CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows
print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the
Palm 2
network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.
PGS Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two
pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
D095/M077 4-488 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2
R only. This machine is under development and currently not
available.
RCG Remote Communication Gate
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters
SMC
Appendix:
are recorded in the SMC report.
Program
Service
Mode
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
SM Appendix 4-489 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
T:Total Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of times each
8 001
application is used to do a job.
8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL
other applications are used to send a job to the
8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL document server, plus the number of times a file
already on the document server is used.
8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does
not (the document server is not used).
A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast
are not counted separately).
A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If
one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the
transmission has been completed.
A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a
print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters
both increment.
When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document
server, only the L: counter increments.
When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document
server, only the L: counter increments.
When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
D095/M077 4-490 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter
increments.
8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL
These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the
8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL document server by each application, to reveal how
8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL local storage is being used for input.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored
from within the document server mode screen at
8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL
the operation panel.
8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you
enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter
increments.
When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL
These SPs reveal how files printed from the
8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL document server were stored on the document
8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL server originally.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
stored from within the document server mode
8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL
screen at the operation panel.
8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL
SM Appendix 4-491 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C:
counter increments.
When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the
document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P:
counters both increment.
When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L:
counter increments.
When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the
S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode,
then the L: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2),
are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web
Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
These SPs reveal what applications were
8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL used to output documents from the document
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL server.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs
printed from within the document server mode
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
screen at the operation panel.
8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the
application that started the print job is incremented.
When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image
Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.
D095/M077 4-492 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored
files on the document server that were later
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
accessed for transmission over the telephone
8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL line or over a network (attached to an e-mail,
or as a fax image by I-Fax).
8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
separately.
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL scanned from within the document server
mode screen at the operation panel.
When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent
Appendix:
as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
Program
Service
Mode
8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to
send files from the document server over the
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
telephone line or over a network (attached to
8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
merged for sending are counted separately.
8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
from within the document server mode screen
8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL at the operation panel.
If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the
O: counter increments.
SM Appendix 4-493 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 062
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 065
L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 066
O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is
8 06x 1 Sort set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L:
counter increments. (See SP8 066 1)
8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in
8 06x 4 Booklet
staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
8 06x 5 Z-Fold
and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a
8 06x 6 Punch
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
D095/M077 4-494 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in
the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 072
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the
number of pages in the job.
S:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 075
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 076
O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs (Web
Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.
8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
8 07x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
8 07x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages
For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document
server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
SM Appendix 4-495 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as
2.)
The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of
pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 131 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document
server was used or not.
S: S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 135 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document
server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS
These counters count jobs, not pages.
If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be
color or black-and-white then counted.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is
waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what
stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC,
or if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For
example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is
counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
D095/M077 4-496 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 141 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
scanned and sent to a Scan Router server.
S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 145 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8 14x 1 B/W
8 14x 2 Color
8 14x 3 ACS
These counters count jobs, not pages.
Appendix:
Program
The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router
Service
Mode
server cannot be confirmed.
If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a
"Color" job.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is
waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what
stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
SM Appendix 4-497 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 151 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
scanned and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 155 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
8 15x 3 ACS
These counters count jobs, not pages.
If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what
stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL
These SPs count the pages scanned by each
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL application that uses the scanner to scan
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL images.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL
SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical
pages.
These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust
color.
Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
D095/M077 4-498 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
Examples
If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the
S: count is 4.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store
File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission
are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools
8 201
display.
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
fax transmission.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools
display.
S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
8 205 scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are
not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools
display.
8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned into the document server .
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
SM Appendix 4-499 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
Reading user stamp data is not counted.
If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6
and the L: count is 6.
If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 221 These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
8 221 1 Front
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for
duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by which
side the user loads face up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:
With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
8 221 2 Back scanning.
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
rear-side scanning.
When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting.
Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
D095/M077 4-500 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be
8 231 1 Large Volume
loaded in the ADF at one time.
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through
8 231 2 SADF
the ADF.
Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation
8 231 3 Mixed Size
panel.
8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the
8 231 5 Platen
Appendix:
original directly on the platen.
Program
Service
Mode
8 231 6 Mixed 1side/ 2side Simplex and Duplex mode.
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the
original's page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is
enabled.
In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with
SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
SM Appendix 4-501 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 241 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for
all jobs, regardless of which application was used.
C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 245 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 246 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen
8 241 8 242 8 245 8 246
8 24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No No No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No No No
8 24x 8: Binary Yes No Yes No
8 24x 9: Grayscale Yes No Yes No
8 24x 10: Color Yes No Yes No
8 24x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes
D095/M077 4-502 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit
features have been selected at the operation
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
panel for each application. Some examples of
S : Scan these editing features are:
8 255 *CTL
PGS/ImgEdr Erase> Border
Erase> Center
8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
Image Repeat
Centering
Positive/Negative
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL Note: The count totals the number of times the
edit features have been used. A detailed
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
breakdown of exactly which features have
been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen.
8 261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL -
8 265 S:Scn PGS/Color *CTL -
8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 26x 1 Color Conversion
8 26x 2 Color Erase These SPs show how many times color creation
features have been selected at the operation
8 26x 3 Background panel.
8 26x 4 Other
SM Appendix 4-503 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used
for delivery functions.
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen
T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 301 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
8 302 output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output page size [SP 8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output page size [SP 8-445].
D095/M077 4-504 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored
8 306 from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-446].
8 30x 1 A3
8 30x 2 A4
8 30x 3 A5
8 30x 4 B4
8 30x 5 B5
8 30x 6 DLT
Appendix:
Program
-
Service
Mode
8 30x 7 LG
8 30x 8 LT
8 30x 9 HLT
8 30x 10 Full Bleed
8 30x 254 Other (Standard)
8 30x 255 Other (Custom)
T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 311 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned
by applications that can specify resolution settings.
SM Appendix 4-505 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
by the customer. The counter for the
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL
application used for storing the pages
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL increments.
[0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
with the Store File button from within the Copy
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL
mode screen go to the C: counter.
When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are
counted for the application that stored them.
These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports,
etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
D095/M077 4-506 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
8 401 T: PrtPGS/LS *CTL
8 402 C: PrtPGS/LS *CTL
8 404 P: PrtPGS/LS *CTL
8 405 S: PrtPGS/LS *CTL
8 406 L:T PrtPGS/LS *CTL
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back
counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing. Last
8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL
pages printed only on one side are not counted.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Appendix:
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
Program
Service
Mode
8 421 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
8 422 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 424 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
SM Appendix 4-507 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 1
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 427 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of
pages processed for printing by Other applications
8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex
8 42x 2 Duplex> Duplex
8 42x 3 Book> Duplex
8 42x 4 Simplex Combine
8 42x 5 Duplex Combine
8 42x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8 42x 7 4> 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)
8 42x 8 6> 6 pages on 1 side (6-Up)
8 42x 9 8> 8 pages on 1 side (8-Up)
8 42x 10 9> 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)
8 42x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)
8 42x 12 Booklet -
8 42x 13 Magazine -
These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to
improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
D095/M077 4-508 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 1
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
SM Appendix 4-509 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
4.24 SYSTEM SP8-XXX: 2
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 432
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 434 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with the print application.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 435
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 436
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 437 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below with Other applications.
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or
8 43x 2 Series/Book
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were
8 43x 3 User Stamp applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.
D095/M077 4-510 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 2
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 441 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 444 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
printer application.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
8 44x 1 A3
8 44x 2 A4
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
8 44x 3 A5
8 44x 4 B4
8 44x 5 B5
8 44x 6 DLT
8 44x 7 LG
8 44x 8 LT
8 44x 9 HLT
8 44x 10 Full Bleed
8 44x 254 Other (Standard)
8 44x 255 Other (Custom)
These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
SM Appendix 4-511 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
001 Bypass Bypass Tray
002 Tray 1 Copier
003 Tray 2 Copier
004 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit or LCT (Option)
005 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
006 Tray 5 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
007 Tray 6 Currently not used.
008 Tray 7 Currently not used.
009 Tray 8 Currently not used.
010 Tray 9 Currently not used.
011 Tray 10
012 Tray 11
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is
8 461 based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers.
However, these counts are based on output timing.
Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 462
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 464
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
D095/M077 4-512 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 2
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 466
8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)
8 46x 7 OHP
Appendix:
8 46x 8 Other
Program
Service
Mode
SM Appendix 4-513 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
001 < 49%
002 50% to 99%
003 100%
004 101% to 200%
005 201% <
Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing
magnification adjustment as well.
Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the
document server are not counted.
Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying
are counted.
The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned
a rate of 100%.
8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
8 484 switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-514 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 2
8 491 T: PrtPGS/LS *CTL
8 492 C: PrtPGS/LS *CTL
8 496 P: PrtPGS/LS *CTL
8 497 S: PrtPGS/LS *CTL
8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Mono Color
8 50x 3 Full Color
8 50x 4 Single Color
8 50x 5 Two Color
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
8 501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 502 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
printed in the Color Mode by the print
8 505 S:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL application.
8 506 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 507 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Mono Color
8 50x 3 Full Color
8 50x 4 Single Color
8 50x 5 Two Color
SM Appendix 4-515 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 511
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 514
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
001 RPCS
002 RPDL
003 PS3
004 R98
005 R16
006 GL/GL2
007 R55
008 RTIFF
009 PDF
010 PCL5e/5c
011 PCL XL
012 IPDL-C
013 BM-Links (Japan Only)
014 Other
SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print
application.
Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
D095/M077 4-516 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 2
T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 522
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 524 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the
Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 525
Appendix:
L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
Program
Service
Mode
8 526
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam
recoveries are counted.
SM Appendix 4-517 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
This SP counts the amount of staples used by the
8 531 Staples *CTL machine.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 581 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these
counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8 581 1 Total
002 Total: Full Color
003 B&W/Single Color
004 Development: CMY
005 Development: K
006 Copy: Color
007 Copy: B/W
008 Print: Color
009 Print: B/W
010 Total: Color
011 Total: B/W
012 Full Color: A3
013 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
014 Full Color Print
015 Mono Color Print
016 Full Color GPC
D095/M077 4-518 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 2
C:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 582
001 B/W
002 Single Color
003 Two Color
004 Full Color
P:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 584 These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by color
output.
Appendix:
001 B/W
Program
Service
Mode
002 Mono Color
003 Full Color
004 Single Color
005 Two Color
L:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 586
-
001 B/W
002 Single Color
003 Two Color
004 Full Color
SM Appendix 4-519 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
O:Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
001 A3/DLT
002 Duplex
Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages
for each printing mode.
001 B/W
002 Color
011 B/W Printing Pages
012 Color Printing Pages
021 Coverage Counter 1
022 Coverage Counter 2
023 Coverage Counter 3
T: S-to Email PGS *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 651
001 B/W
002 Color
D095/M077 4-520 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 2
T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 665 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by the Scan application.
8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color
The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the
Scan Router server.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts
are not done.
The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan
Router server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S: Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
SM Appendix 4-521 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
8 691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent from
the document server. The counter for the
8 692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL
application that was used to store the pages is
8 694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL incremented.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of pages
stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with
8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
the Store File button from within the Copy mode
screen go to the C: counter.
Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted
for the application that stored them.
When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the
number of pages sent to each destination.
TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 701 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 701 5 Network
D095/M077 4-522 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 2
8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 715
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other
8 715 5 PDF/Comp
RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Appendix:
Program
Service
8 741
Mode
These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
8 741 1 PSTN-1 -
8 741 2 PSTN-2 -
8 741 3 PSTN-3 -
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4) -
8 741 5 Network -
SM Appendix 4-523 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the development
rollers) for black and other color toners.
001 Total
002 K
003 Y
004 M
005 C
Toner Bottle Info. *ENG [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 781 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
001 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles
002 Toner: Y The number of yellow-toner bottles
003 Toner: M The number of magenta-toner bottles
004 Toner: C The number of cyan-toner bottles
This SP displays the percent of space
available on the document server for
8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL
storing documents.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
D095/M077 4-524 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 2
Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
8 801 allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is
better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments
of 10 (10% steps).
001 K
002 Y
003 M
004 C
Appendix:
8 851 Cvr Cnt: 0 – 10% - -
Program
Service
Mode
011 0 to 2%
012 0 to 2%
013 0 to 2%
014 0 to 2%
021 3 to 4%
022 3 to 4%
023 3 to 4%
024 3 to 4%
031 5 to 7%
032 5 to 7%
033 5 to 7%
SM Appendix 4-525 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
034 5 to 7%
041 8 to 10%
042 8 to 10%
043 8 to 10%
044 8 to 10%
Toner Coverage 11-20% [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8861 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color
toners.
001 K Black toner Do not display for this machine.
Toner Coverage 21-30% [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8871 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color
toners.
001 K Black toner Do not display for this machine.
Toner Coverage 31 -% [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8881 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color
toners.
001 K Black toner Do not display for this machine.
Printing PGS: Present Ink [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8891
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner.
Printing PGS: Log: Latest 1 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8901
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner.
D095/M077 4-526 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 2
Printing PGS: Log: Latest 2 [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8911
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner.
Coverage Count:
*CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 921 Total
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 BK (%)
002 Y (%)
003 M (%)
004 C (%)
Appendix:
011 BK (Page)
Program
Service
Mode
012 Y (Page)
013 M (Page)
014 C (Page)
SM Appendix 4-527 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
Machine Status *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation
mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine
operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while
001 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
002 Standby Time saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing
003 Energy Save Time
background printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
004 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
Includes time while machine is performing
005 Off Mode Time background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
006 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
Total time when paper jams have been staying
007 PrtJam
during printing.
Total time when original jams have been staying
008 OrgJam
during scanning.
009 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying
D095/M077 4-528 SM Appendix
System SP8-xxx: 2
AddBook Register *CTL
8 951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
User Code/User
8 951 1 User code registrations.
ID
8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
Group destination [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 951 4 Group
registrations.
Transfer Fax relay destination
8 951 5
Request registrations for relay TX.
Appendix:
Program
Service
8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
Mode
Copy application registrations
8 951 7 Copy Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Fax application registrations
8 951 8 Fax Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]
Printer application registrations
8 951 9 Printer Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner application
Scanner
8 951 10 registrations with the Program
Program
(job settings) feature.
SM Appendix 4-529 D095/M077
System SP8-xxx: 2
Adomin. Counter List *CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]
8 999
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
001 Total
006 Printer Full Color
007 Printer BW
008 Printer Single Color
009 Printer Two Color
0012 A3/DLT
013 Duplex
014 Coverage: Color (%)
015 Coverage: BW (%)
016 Coverage: Color Print Page (%)
017 Coverage: BW Print Page (%)
020 Full Color GPC
D095/M077 4-530 SM Appendix
Input Check: 1
4.25 INPUT CHECK: 1
4.25.1 MAIN MACHINE INPUT CHECK: SP5803
This procedure allows you to test sensors and other components of the machine. After you
select one of the categories below by number, you will see a small 8-bit table with the number
of the bit and its current setting (0 or 1) or current input value from a target device.
In the 8-bit tables, the bits are numbered 0 to 7, reading right to left.
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 9 Belt Centering Sensor Input [mm]
5803 38 Temp/Humidity Sensor K: Temp Input [deg]
Appendix:
Program
Service
5803 39 Temp/Humidity Sensor K: Hum Input [%RH]
Mode
5803 40 Temp/Humidity Sensor Y: Temp Input [deg]
5803 41 Temp/Humidity Sensor Y: Hum Input [%RH]
5803 42 T/H Sensor Laser Unit:Temp Input [deg]
5803 43 T/H Sensor Laser Unit:Hum Input [%RH]
5803 44 Temp/Humidity Sensor Rear:Temp Input [deg]
5803 45 Temp/Humidity Sensor Rear:Hum Input [%RH]
5803 46 Double-feed Sensor (Recep) Input [V]
5803 47 CIS Input [dot]
SM Appendix 4-531 D095/M077
Input Check: 1
5803 50 RCB-eIO1-PORTB Reading
0 1
Bit 7 PTR Motor Flag Off On
Bit 6 Duplex Transport Motor 2 Flag Off On
Bit 5 PTR Timing Motor Flag Off On
Bit 4 Shift Roller Unit Motor Flag Off On
Bit 3 PTR Timing Motor Flag Off On
Bit 2 Registration Timing Motor Flag Off On
Bit 1 Registration Entrance Motor Off On
Flag
Bit 0 Registration Gate Motor Flag Off On
5803 51 RCB-eIO1-PORTL Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 PTR Lift Sensor Off On
Bit 2 CIS Fan Alarm Off On
Bit 1 Separation HV Alarm Off On
Bit 0 - -
D095/M077 4-532 SM Appendix
Input Check: 1
5803 52 RCB-H8-PORT7 Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 24VINTA2 Off On
Bit 1 24V_2BINT Off On
Bit 0 24VINTA1 Off On
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 101 Mst eIo1-PortC Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 Development Fan Y Alarm Off On
Bit 2 Development Fan M Alarm Off On
Bit 1 Development Fan C Alarm Off On
Bit 0 Development Fan K Alarm Off On
SM Appendix 4-533 D095/M077
Input Check: 1
5803 102 Mst eIo1-PortD Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Ozone Fan-Y Alarm Off On
Bit 6 Ozone Fan-M Alarm Off On
Bit 5 Ozone Fan-C Alarm Off On
Bit 4 Ozone Fan-K Alarm Off On
Bit 3 Controller Fan1 Alarm Off On
Bit 2 Controller Fan2 Alarm Off On
Bit 1 Controller Fan3 Alarm Off On
Bit 0 Controller Fan4 Alarm Off On
5803 103 Mst eIo1-PortE Reading
0 1
Bit 7 PSU Fan 1 Alarm Off On
Bit 6 PSU Fan 2 Alarm Off On
Bit 5 PSU Fan 3 Alarm Off On
Bit 4 PSU Fan 4 Alarm Off On
Bit 3 PSU Fan 5 Alarm Off On
Bit 2 YM Laser Unit Fan Off On
Bit 1 CK Laser Unit Fan Off On
Bit 0 Registration Drawer Set Off On
Detection
D095/M077 4-534 SM Appendix
Input Check: 1
5803 104 Mst eIo2-PortA Reading
0 1
Charge Cleaning Unit HP Off On
Bit 7
Sensor Y
Bit 6 Charge Cleaning Unit HP Off On
Sensor M
Bit 5 Charge Cleaning Unit HP Off On
Sensor C
Bit 4 Charge Cleaning Unit HP Off On
Sensor K
Bit 3 Registration Entrance Sensor Off On
Appendix:
Program
Service
Bit 2 LCT Entrance Sensor Off On
Mode
Bit 1 Duplex Transport Sensor 3 Off On
Bit 0 Duplex Transport Sensor 4 Off On
SM Appendix 4-535 D095/M077
Input Check: 1
5803 105 Mst eIo2-PortD Reading
0 1
Drum Cleaning Unit Set Sensor Off On
Bit 7
Y
Bit 6 Drum Cleaning Unit Set Sensor Off On
M
Bit 5 Drum Cleaning Unit Set Sensor Off On
C
Bit 4 Drum Cleaning Unit Set Sensor Off On
K
Bit 3 Drum Cleaning Motor Y Off On
Bit 2 Drum Cleaning Motor M Off On
Bit 1 Drum Cleaning Motor C Off On
Bit 0 Drum Cleaning Motor K Off On
5803 106 Mst eIo2-PortF Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Shift Roller HP Sensor Off On
Bit 6 Registration Gate Lift Sensor Off On
Bit 5 Registration Timing Sensor Off On
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
D095/M077 4-536 SM Appendix
Input Check: 1
5803 107 Mst eIo2-PortL Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Toner End Sensor Y Off On
Bit 6 Toner End Sensor M Off On
Bit 5 Toner End Sensor C Off On
Bit 4 Toner End Sensor K Off On
Bit 3 Not used - -
Bit 2 Not used - -
Bit 1 Not used - -
Bit 0 Not used - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 108 Mst eIo3-PortA Reading
0 1
Development Roller Rotation Off On
Bit 7
Sensor Y
Bit 6 Development Unit Y Set Off On
Detection
Bit 5 Development Unit Y Color Off On
Detection: Bit0
Bit 4 Development Unit Y Color Off On
Detection: Bit1
Bit 3 Development Roller Rotation Off On
Sensor M
SM Appendix 4-537 D095/M077
Input Check: 1
Bit 2 Development Unit M Set Off On
Detection
Bit 1 Development Unit M Color Off On
Detection: Bit0
Bit 0 Development Unit M Color Off On
Detection: Bit1
5803 109 Mst eIo3-PortB Reading
0 1
Development Roller Rotation Off On
Bit 7
Sensor C
Bit 6 Development Unit C Set Off On
Detection
Bit 5 Development Unit C Color Off On
Detection: Bit0
Bit 4 Development Unit C Color Off On
Detection: Bit1
Bit 3 Development Roller Rotation Off On
Sensor K
Bit 2 Development Unit K Set Off On
Detection
Bit 1 Development Unit K Color Off On
Detection: Bit0
Bit 0 Development Unit K Color Off On
Detection: Bit1
D095/M077 4-538 SM Appendix
Input Check: 1
5803 110 Mst eIo3-PortD Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Development Motor Y Off On
Bit 6 Development Motor M Off On
Bit 5 Development Motor C Off On
Bit 4 Development Motor K Off On
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 Waste Toner Transport Motor 1 Off On
Bit 0 Toner Supply Motor Off On
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 111 Mst eIo4-PortB Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Y Charge HV Alarm Off On
Bit 6 Y Grid HV Alarm Off On
Bit 5 Y Bias HV Alarm Off On
Bit 4 M Charge HV Alarm Off On
Bit 3 M Grid HV Alarm Off On
Bit 2 M Bias HV Alarm Off On
Bit 1 Toner Bottle Motor Y Error Off On
Bit 0 Toner Bottle Motor M Error Off On
SM Appendix 4-539 D095/M077
Input Check: 1
5803 112 Mst eIo4-PortC Reading
0 1
Bit 7 C Charge HV Alarm Off On
Bit 6 C Grid HV Alarm Off On
Bit 5 C Bias HV Alarm Off On
Bit 4 K Charge HV Alarm Off On
Bit 3 K Grid HV Alarm Off On
Bit 2 K Bias HV Alarm Off On
Bit 1 Toner Bottle Motor C Error Off On
Bit 0 Toner Bottle Motor K Error Off On
5803 113 Mst eIo4-PortE Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 Toner Hopper Door Switch Off On
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 Key Card Set Detection Off On
Bit 0 Key Counter Set Detection Off On
D095/M077 4-540 SM Appendix
Input Check: 1
5803 114 Mst eIo2-PortM Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 Development CK Fan Off On
Bit 3 Registration Fan Off On
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 115 Mst eIo3-PortE Reading
0 1
Bit 7 +24V_2AINT Off On
Bit 6 +24V_2BINT Off On
Bit 5 +24V_1AINT Off On
Bit 4 +24V_4A Off On
Bit 3 +24V_4B Off On
Bit 2 +24VINTA Off On
Bit 1 TSNS_VCC Off On
Bit 0 - -
SM Appendix 4-541 D095/M077
Input Check: 1
5803 116 Mst eIo1-PortF Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 Not used - -
Bit 5 Not used - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
5803 117 Mst eIo1-PortP Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 Fusing Exhaust Fan 1 Off On
Bit 1 Fusing Exhaust Fan 2 Off On
Bit 0 Fusing Exhaust Fan 3 Off On
D095/M077 4-542 SM Appendix
Input Check: 1
5803 118 Mst eIo5-PortL Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 Waste Toner Bottle Full Off On
SensorNot used
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Bit 0 - -
5803 119 Mst eIo5-PortM Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 PTB Cooling Fan Off On
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 Waste Toner Bottle Near-Full Off On
Sensor
Bit 0 - -
SM Appendix 4-543 D095/M077
Input Check: 1
5803 120 Mst eIo5-PortB Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Fusing Fan 1 Off On
Bit 6 Fusing Fan 2 Off On
Bit 5 Fusing Fan 3 Off On
Bit 4 Fusing Fan 4 Off On
Bit 3 Fusing Fan 5 Off On
Bit 2 Fusing Fan 6 Off On
Bit 1 PTB FAN 1 Off On
Bit 0 PTB FAN 2 Off On
5803 121 Mst eIo5-PortC Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Paper Cooling Fan 3 Off On
Bit 6 Paper Cooling Fan 1 Off On
Bit 5 Paper Cooling Fan 2 Off On
Bit 4 ITB FAN Off On
Bit 3 Exit Fan Off On
Bit 2 Off On
Bit 1 Off On
Bit 0 PTB FAN 2 Off On
D095/M077 4-544 SM Appendix
Input Check: 1
5803 122 Mst eIo5-PortD Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Not used - -
Bit 6 Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor Off On
Bit 5 Decurler Unit HP Sensor Off On
Bit 4 Decurler Unit Limit Sensor Off On
Bit 3 Paper Exit Sensor Off On
Bit 2 Switchback Lower Sensor Off On
Bit 1 Exit Junction Timing Sensor Off On
Bit 0 Switchback Sensor Off On
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 123 Mst eIo5-PortE Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Duplex Transport Sensor 1 Off On
Bit 6 Duplex Transport Sensor 2 Off On
Bit 5 Inverter/ Paper Exit Drawer Set Off On
Detection
Bit 4 Accordion Jam Sensor Off On
Bit 3 Pressure Roller Lift Sensor Off On
Bit 2 Oil End Sensor Off On
Bit 1 Web End Sensor Off On
Bit 0 +24V Power Off On
SM Appendix 4-545 D095/M077
Input Check: 1
5803 124 Mst eIo5-PortF Reading
0 1
Bit 7 +24VINT Power Off On
Bit 6 Waste Toner Transport Motor 2 Off On
Sensor
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
5803 125 Mst eIo5-PortJ Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 Fusing Exit Sensor Off On
Bit 4 PTB Jam Sensor Off On
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
D095/M077 4-546 SM Appendix
Input Check: 2
4.26 INPUT CHECK: 2
4.26.1 MAIN MACHINE INPUT CHECK: SP5803
5803 126 Mst eIo5-PortP Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 Waste Toner Transport Motor 2 Off On
Bit 4 Paper Exit Motor Overload Off On
Signal
Appendix:
Program
Service
Bit 3 Fusing Unit Drawer Set Off On
Mode
Detection
Bit 2 Fusing Motor Overload Signal Off On
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
5803 127 Mst eIo6-PortE Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 PTR HV Alarm Off On
Bit 3 K ITB Roller HV Alarm Off On
Bit 2 C ITB Roller HV Alarm Off On
SM Appendix 4-547 D095/M077
Input Check: 2
Bit 1 M ITB Roller HV Alarm Off On
Bit 0 Y ITB Roller HV Alarm Off On
5803 128 Mst eIo6-PortF Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 Front Left Door Open Switch Off On
Bit 5 Inverter Motor Fan Off On
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
5803 129 Mst eIo6-PortJ Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 Not used - -
Bit 4 Front Door Open Detection Off On
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
D095/M077 4-548 SM Appendix
Input Check: 2
5803 130 Mst eIo3-PortL Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 +24V_EA1CH2INT Off On
Bit 4 +24V_EA2CH4 Off On
Bit 3 +24V_EA1CH1INT Off On
Bit 2 +24VINT Off On
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 131 Mst eIo4-PortA Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Drum Motor Y Flag Off On
Bit 6 Drum Motor M Flag Off On
Bit 5 Drum Motor C Flag Off On
Bit 4 Drum Motor K Flag Off On
Bit 3 Charge Cleaning Motor Y Flag Off On
Bit 2 Charge Cleaning Motor M Flag Off On
Bit 1 Charge Cleaning Motor C Flag Off On
Bit 0 Charge Cleaning Motor K Flag Off On
SM Appendix 4-549 D095/M077
Input Check: 2
5803 132 Mst eIo5-PortA Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 Oil Pump Alarm Off On
Bit 0 Oil Supply Unit Sensor Off On
5803 133 Mst eIo6-PortA Reading
0 1
Bit 7 +24V_3A Off On
Bit 6 +24V_3B Off On
Bit 5 +24V_3C Off On
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
D095/M077 4-550 SM Appendix
Input Check: 2
5803 134 Mst eIo6-PortB Reading
0 1
Bit 7 +24VINT Off On
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 135 Mst eIo6-PortC Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 Mechanical Counter 2 Set Off On
Detection
Bit 0 Mechanical Counter 1 Set Off On
Detection
SM Appendix 4-551 D095/M077
Input Check: 2
5803 136 Mst eIo6-PortD Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 PTB Motor Flag Off On
Bit 0 - -
5803 137 Mst eIo6-PortL Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 FIB Boost Converter 3 Error Off On
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 FIB Boost Converter 1 Error Off On
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 FIB Boost Converter 2 Error Off On
Bit 0 - -
D095/M077 4-552 SM Appendix
Input Check: 2
5803 138 Mst eIo6-PortM Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 - -
Bit 5 Inverter Motor Flag Off On
Bit 4 - -
Bit 3 Not used - -
Bit 2 - -
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 139 Mst eIo6-PortP Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - -
Bit 6 Duplex Transport Motor Flag Off On
Bit 5 - -
Bit 4 Not used - -
Bit 3 Decarler Feed Motor Flag Off On
Bit 2 Pressure Roller Lift Motor Flag Off On
Bit 1 Decarler Drive Motor Flag Off On
Bit 0 Oil Supply Motor Flag Off On
SM Appendix 4-553 D095/M077
Input Check: 2
5803 140 CTB_H8S-PORT9 Reading
(Buffer Pass Unit: M379)
0 1
Bit 7 Reserve Fan 4 - -
Bit 6 Reserved - -
Bit 5 Lower Exhaust Fan Normal Error
Bit 4 Lower Exhaust Fan Normal Error
Bit 3 Reserve Fan 3 - -
Bit 2 Reserved - -
Bit 1 Lower Cooling Fan Normal Error
Bit 0 Lower Cooling Fan Normal Error
5803 141 CTB_H8S-PortA Reading
(Buffer Pass Unit: M379)
0 1
Bit 7 Interlock Switch: Front Door Close Open
Bit 6 Debug monitor SCI
Bit 5 Debug monitor SCI
Bit 4 LED On Off
Bit 3 Not used - -
Bit 2 Not used - -
Bit 1 Not used - -
Bit 0 Not used - -
D095/M077 4-554 SM Appendix
Input Check: 2
5803 142 CTB_H8S-PortB Reading
(Buffer Pass Unit: M379)
0 1
Bit 7 Drive Motor Left Normal Error
Bit 6 Drive Motor Right Normal Error
Bit 5 Drive Motor Left Motor Lock
Bit 4 Drive Motor Left CCW CW
Bit 3 Drive Motor Left On Off
Bit 2 Drive Motor Right Motor Lock
Bit 1 Drive Motor Right CCW CW
Bit 0 Drive Motor Right On Off
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 143 CTB_H8S-PortC Reading
(Buffer Pass Unit: M379)
0 1
Bit 7 Reserve Fan 2 - -
Bit 6 Reserved - -
Bit 5 Upper Exhaust Fan Normal Error
Bit 4 Upper Exhaust Fan Normal Error
Bit 3 Reserve Fan 1 - -
Bit 2 Reserved - -
Bit 1 Upper Cooling Fan Normal Error
Bit 0 Upper Cooling Fan Normal Error
SM Appendix 4-555 D095/M077
Input Check: 2
5803 144 CTB_H8S-PortD Reading
(Buffer Pass Unit: M379)
0 1
Transport Sensor 6 Paper detected Paper not
Bit 7
detected
Bit 6 Transport Sensor 3 Paper detected Paper not
detected
Bit 5 Transport Sensor 7 Paper detected Paper not
detected
Bit 4 Transport Sensor 2 Paper detected Paper not
detected
Bit 3 Transport Sensor 8 Paper detected Paper not
detected
Bit 2 Transport Sensor 1 Paper detected Paper not
detected
Bit 1 Not used - -
Bit 0 Not used - -
5803 145 CTB_H8S-PortE Reading
(Buffer Pass Unit: M379)
0 1
Bit 7 Not used - -
Bit 6 Not used - -
Bit 5 +24V +24V On +24V Off
Bit 4 +24V INT +24V_INT On +24V_INT Off
Bit 3 Not used - -
Bit 2 Not used - -
Bit 1 Transport Sensor 5 Paper detected Paper not
detected
D095/M077 4-556 SM Appendix
Input Check: 2
Bit 0 Transport Sensor 4 Paper detected Paper not
detected
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 150 Htg Roller Thermistor 1
5803 151 Prs Roller Thermistor 2 Input [deg]
5803 152 Thermopile
5803 154 IOB:3V Std Voltage (S) Input [V]
5803 155 Slv eIo1-PortK Reading
Appendix:
Program
0 1
Service
Mode
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 1st Paper Feed Motor Flag Off On
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
SM Appendix 4-557 D095/M077
Input Check: 2
5803 156 Slv eIo1-PortL Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 1st Grip Motor Off On
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 2nd Paper Feed Motor Off On
Bit 0 - - -
5803 157 Slv eIo1-PortM Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 2nd Grip Motor Off On
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
D095/M077 4-558 SM Appendix
Input Check: 2
5803 158 Slv eIo2-PortJ Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 Zero Cross 1 Off On
Bit 4 Belt Centering Roller Sensor Off On
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 159 Slv eIo2-PortK Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 Vertical Relay Mot Off On
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
SM Appendix 4-559 D095/M077
Input Check: 2
5803 160 Slv eIo2-PortL Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 ITB Color Lift Motor Flag Off On
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 Belt Centering Roller Motor Off On
Flag
Bit 0 - - -
5803 161 Slv eIo1-PortB Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Paper Feed Sensor 1 Off On
Bit 6 Paper End Sensor 1 Off On
Bit 5 Vertical Transport Sensor 1 Off On
Bit 4 Paper Feed Sensor 2 Off On
Bit 3 Paper End Sensor 2 Off On
Bit 2 Vertical Transport Sensor 2 Off On
Bit 1 Tray Lift Sensor 1 Off On
Bit 0 Tray Lift Sensor 2 Off On
D095/M077 4-560 SM Appendix
Input Check: 3
4.27 INPUT CHECK: 3
4.27.1 MAIN MACHINE INPUT CHECK: SP5803
5803 162 Slv eIo2-PortM Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 ITB Black Lift Motor Flag Off On
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
5803 164 Slv eIo1-PortN Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Paper Off On
Height Sensor 1
Bit 4 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Paper Off On
Height Sensor 2
Bit 3 Rear Fence HP Sensor Off On
Bit 2 Rear Fence Return Sensor Off On
SM Appendix 4-561 D095/M077
Input Check: 3
Bit 1 Left Tray Paper Sensor Off On
Bit 0 - - -
5803 165 Slv eIo2-PortA Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Paper Height Sensor 1 Off On
Bit 6 Paper Height Sensor 2 Off On
Bit 5 Paper Height Sensor 3 Off On
Bit 4 Paper Height Sensor 4 Off On
Bit 3 Front Side Fence Open Sensor Off On
Bit 2 Front Side Fence Close Sensor Off On
Bit 1 Rear Side Fence Open Sensor Off On
Bit 0 Rear Side Fence Close Sensor Off On
5803 166 Slv eIo2-PortC Reading
0 1
Bit 7 ITB Unit Drawer Set Detection Off On
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 ITB Cleaning Motor Off On
D095/M077 4-562 SM Appendix
Input Check: 3
5803 167 Slv eIo2-PortE Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Tray1: Right Tray Set Detection Off On
Bit 6 Tray1: Left Tray Set Detection Off On
Bit 5 Right Tray 1 Paper Sensor Off On
Bit 4 Paper Size Switch 1 Off On
Bit 3 Paper Size Switch 2 Off On
Bit 2 Paper Size Switch 3 Off On
Bit 1 Paper Size Switch 4 Off On
Bit 0 Paper Size Switch 5 Off On
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 168 Slv eIo2-PortF Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Lower Limit Sensor Off On
Bit 6 Zero Cross 1 Off On
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
SM Appendix 4-563 D095/M077
Input Check: 3
5803 169 Slv eIo2-PortN Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 ITB Drive Motor Flag Off On
Bit 3 ITB Black Lift Sensor Off On
Bit 2 ITB Color Lift Sensor Off On
Bit 1 ITB Cleaning Unit Set Sensor Off On
Bit 0 - - -
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 170 Belt Overrun Sensor:Front Not overrun Overrun
5803 171 Belt Overrun Sensor:Rear Not overrun Overrun
5803 172 PTR Timing Sensor No paper
Paper detected
detected
D095/M077 4-564 SM Appendix
Input Check: 3
5803 181 A4LCT:CPU-Port7 Reading
(M077 only)
0 1
Bit 7 LCT Exit Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 LCT Front Door Safety Switch Close Open
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 182 A4LCT:eIO2-PortP Reading
(M077 only)
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 Transport Sensor Bypass Paper detected Not detected
Bit 0 - - -
SM Appendix 4-565 D095/M077
Input Check: 3
5803 183 A4LCT:eIO2-PortA Reading
(M077 only)
0 1
Bit 7 3rd Transport Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 6 3rd Lift Sensor Upper limit Not upper limit
Bit 5 3rd Paper End Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 4 3rd Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 3rd Paper Size Sensor 3 On Off
Bit 1 3rd Paper Size Sensor 2 On Off
Bit 0 3rd Paper Size Sensor 1 On Off
When this LCT is installed in another mainframe, the upper tray of this LCT may show
"4th".
5803 184 A4LCT:eIO2-PortB Reading
(M077 only)
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 3rd Paper Height Sensor 4 Off On
Bit 2 3rd Paper Height Sensor 3 Off On
Bit 1 3rd Paper Height Sensor 2 Off On
Bit 0 3rd Paper Height Sensor 1 Off On
D095/M077 4-566 SM Appendix
Input Check: 3
When this LCT is installed in another mainframe, the upper tray of this LCT may show
"4th".
5803 185 A4LCT:eIO2-PortC Reading
(M077 only)
0 1
Bit 7 4th Transport Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 6 4th Lift Sensor Upper limit Not upper limit
Bit 5 4th Paper End Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 4 4th Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 3 - - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Bit 2 4th Paper Size Sensor 3 On Off
Mode
Bit 1 4th Paper Size Sensor 2 On Off
Bit 0 4th Paper Size Sensor 1 On Off
When this LCT is installed in another mainframe, the upper tray of this LCT may show
"5th".
SM Appendix 4-567 D095/M077
Input Check: 3
5803 186 A4LCT:eIO2-PortD Reading
(M077 only)
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 4th Paper Height Sensor 4 Off On
Bit 2 4th Paper Height Sensor 3 Off On
Bit 1 4th Paper Height Sensor 2 Off On
Bit 0 4th Paper Height Sensor 1 Off On
When this LCT is installed in another mainframe, the upper tray of this LCT may show
"5th".
5803 187 A4LCT:eIO3-PortA Reading
(M077 only)
0 1
Bit 7 5th Transport Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 6 5th Lift Sensor Upper limit Not upper limit
Bit 5 5th Paper End Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 4 5th Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 5th Paper Size Sensor 3 On Off
Bit 1 5th Paper Size Sensor 2 On Off
Bit 0 5th Paper Size Sensor 1 On Off
D095/M077 4-568 SM Appendix
Input Check: 3
When this LCT is installed in another mainframe, the upper tray of this LCT may show
"6th".
5803 188 A4LCT:eIO3-PortB Reading
(M077 only)
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 5th Paper Height Sensor 4 Off On
Appendix:
Program
Service
Bit 2 5th Paper Height Sensor 3 Off On
Mode
Bit 1 5th Paper Height Sensor 2 Off On
Bit 0 5th Paper Height Sensor 1 Off On
When this LCT is installed in another mainframe, the upper tray of this LCT may show
"6th".
SM Appendix 4-569 D095/M077
Input Check: 3
5803 189 A4LCT:eIO2-PortE (M077 only) Reading
(By-pass Unit B833)
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 Paper Length Sensor On Off
Bit 4 Paper Width Switch 5 On Off
Bit 3 Paper Width Switch 4 On Off
Bit 2 Paper Width Switch 3 On Off
Bit 1 Paper Width Switch 2 On Off
Bit 0 Paper Width Switch 1 On Off
5803 190 A4LCT:eIO3-PortC (M077 only) Reading
(By-pass Unit B833)
0 1
Bit 7 Relay Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 6 Lift Sensor Upper limit Not upper limit
Bit 5 Paper End Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 4 Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
D095/M077 4-570 SM Appendix
Input Check: 3
5803 191 A4LCT:eIO3-PortD Reading
(M077 only)
0 1
Bit 7 Feed Unit Slide Detection Close Open
Bit 6 Feed Unit Set Detection Set Not set
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 Tray Lift Switch On (Pushed) Off
Bit 3 Tray Lower Limit Sensor Not lower limit Lower limit
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 Paper End Sensor Off On
Bit 0 Paper Near End Sensor Off On
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor (D095 only) Open Close
SM Appendix 4-571 D095/M077
Input Check: 3
5803 202 Scanner fan lock signal Reading
(D095 only)
0 1
Bit 7 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
Bit 6 Lamp Regulator Fan (Right) Normal Lock
Bit 5 SBU Cooling Fan Normal Lock
Bit 4 Scanner Intake Fan Normal Lock
Bit 3 Scanner Unit Exhaust Fan Normal Lock
Bit 2 Lamp Regulator Fan (Left) Normal Lock
Bit 1 Scanner Motor Cooling Fan Normal Lock
Bit 0 Not used - -
5803 211 A3LCT1:CPU-Port7 Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 Right Door Open Switch Close Open
Bit 2 Left Door Open Switch Close Open
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
D095/M077 4-572 SM Appendix
Input Check: 3
5803 212 A3LCT1:CPU-Port9 Reading
0 1
Bit 7 - - -
Bit 6 - - -
Bit 5 - - -
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 Dip Switch 101-1 On Off
Bit 2 Dip Switch 101-2 On Off
Bit 1 Dip Switch 101-3 On Off
Bit 0 Dip Switch 101-4 On Off
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 213 A3LCT1:eIO2-PortA Reading
0 1
Bit 7 LCT Paper Width Sensor 1: T1 Off On
Bit 6 LCT Paper Width Sensor 2: T1 Off On
Bit 5 LCT Paper Width Sensor 3: T1 Off On
Bit 4 LCT Paper Length Sensor 1 Off On
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
SM Appendix 4-573 D095/M077
Input Check: 3
5803 214 A3LCT1:eIO2-PortB Reading
0 1
Bit 7 LCT Paper Height Sensor 1: T1 Off On
Bit 6 LCT Paper Height Sensor 2: T1 Off On
Bit 5 LCT Paper Height Sensor 3: T1 Off On
Bit 4 LCT Paper Height Sensor 4: T1 Off On
Bit 3 LCT Paper End Sensor 1 Paper detected Not detected
Bit 2 LCT Paper Lift Sensor 1 Upper limit Not upper limit
Bit 1 LCT Tray Set Detection: T1 Set Not set
Bit 0 - - -
5803 215 A3LCT1:eIO2-PortC Reading
0 1
Bit 7 LCT Paper Width Sensor 1: T2 Off On
Bit 6 LCT Paper Width Sensor 2: T2 Off On
Bit 5 LCT Paper Width Sensor 3: T2 Off On
Bit 4 LCT Paper Length Sensor 2 Off On
Bit 3 - - -
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
D095/M077 4-574 SM Appendix
Input Check: 3
5803 216 A3LCT1:eIO2-PortD Reading
0 1
Bit 7 LCT Paper Height Sensor 1: T2 Off On
Bit 6 LCT Paper Height Sensor 2: T2 Off On
Bit 5 LCT Paper Height Sensor 3: T2 Off On
Bit 4 LCT Paper Height Sensor 4: T2 Off On
Bit 3 LCT Paper End Sensor 2 Paper detected Not detected
Bit 2 LCT Paper Lift Sensor 2 Upper limit Not upper limit
Bit 1 LCT Tray Set Detection: T2 Set Not set
Bit 0 - - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
5803 217 A3LCT1:eIO2-PortE Reading
(By-pass Unit B833)
0 1
Bit 7 Paper Width Switch 1 On Off
Bit 6 Paper Width Switch 2 On Off
Bit 5 Paper Width Switch 3 On Off
Bit 4 Paper Width Switch 4 On Off
Bit 3 Paper Width Switch 5 On Off
Bit 2 Paper Length Sensor On Off
Bit 1 - -
Bit 0 - - -
SM Appendix 4-575 D095/M077
Input Check: 3
5803 218 A3LCT1:eIO2-PortP Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Air Assist fan 1: Front Error No Error Error
Bit 6 Air Assist fan 1: Rear Error No Error Error
Bit 5 Air Assist fan 1: Left Error No Error Error
Bit 4 - No Error Error
Bit 3 Air Assist fan 2: Front Error No Error Error
Bit 2 Air Assist fan 2: Rear Error No Error Error
Bit 1 Air Assist fan 2: Left Error No Error Error
Bit 0 - - -
5803 219 A3LCT1:eIO3-PortA Reading
0 1
Bit 7 LCT Paper Feed Sensor 1 Paper detected Not detected
Bit 6 LCT Paper Feed Sensor 2 Paper detected Not detected
Bit 5 (Bypass) Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 LCT Grip Sensor 1 Paper detected Not detected
Bit 2 LCT Grip Sensor 2 Paper detected Not detected
Bit 1 (Bypass) Relay Sensor Paper detected Not detected
Bit 0 - - -
D095/M077 4-576 SM Appendix
Input Check: 3
5803 220 A3LCT1:eIO3-PortB Reading
0 1
LCT Vertical Transport
Bit 7 Paper detected No paper
Sensor 1
Bit 6 LCT Vertical Transport
Paper detected No paper
Sensor 2
Bit 5 LCT Vertical Transport
Paper detected No paper
Sensor 3
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 LCT Exit Sensor Paper detected No paper
Bit 2 - - -
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Bit 1 - - -
Bit 0 - - -
SM Appendix 4-577 D095/M077
Input Check: 3
5803 221 A3LCT1:eIO3-PortC Reading
0 1
Bit 7 LCT Entrance Sensor Paper detected No paper
Bit 6 LCT Right Vertical Sensor Paper detected No paper
Bit 5 LCT Horizontal Transport
Paper detected No paper
Entrance Sensor
Bit 4 LCT Horizontal Transport Exit
Paper detected No paper
Sensor
Bit 3 LCT Vertical Transport
Paper detected No paper
Entrance Sensor
Bit 2 - - -
Bit 1 LCT Horizontal Bridge Unit Set
Set Not set
Detection
Bit 0 LCT Paper Exit Roller Contact
Contact Not contact
Sensor
D095/M077 4-578 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
4.28 INPUT CHECK: 4
4.28.1 MAIN MACHINE INPUT CHECK: SP5803
5803 222 A3LCT1:eIO3-PortD Reading
(By-pass Unit B833)
0 1
Bit 7 Paper Near End Sensor Off On
Bit 6 Paper End Sensor Off On
Bit 5 Tray Lower Limit Sensor Not low limit Low limit
Bit 4 Tray Lift Switch On (Pushed) Off
Bit 3 Paper End Sensor (Tray) Paper detected No paper
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
Bit 2 Lift Sensor Upper limit Not upper limit
Bit 1 Bypass Set Detection Set Not set
Bit 0 Bypass Slide Open Detection Close Open
SM Appendix 4-579 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
5803 223 A3LCT1:eIO3-PortP Reading
0 1
Bit 7 Reserved Sensor 1 - -
Bit 6 Reserved Sensor 2 - -
Bit 5 Reserved Sensor 3
Bit 4 - - -
Bit 3 Dip Switch 740-1 On Off
Bit 2 Dip Switch 740-2 On Off
Bit 1 Dip Switch 740-3 On Off
Bit 0 Dip Switch 740-4 On Off
5803 231 A3LCT2:CPU-Port7 Same as SP5803-211
5803 232 A3LCT2:CPU-Port9 Same as SP5803-212
5803 233 A3LCT2:eIO2-PortA Same as SP5803-213
5803 234 A3LCT2:eIO2-PortB Same as SP5803-214
5803 235 A3LCT2:eIO2-PortC Same as SP5803-215
5803 236 A3LCT2:eIO2-PortD Same as SP5803-216
5803 237 A3LCT2:eIO2-PortE Same as SP5803-217
5803 238 A3LCT2:eIO2-PortP Same as SP5803-218
5803 239 A3LCT2:eIO3-PortA Same as SP5803-219
5803 240 A3LCT2:eIO3-PortB Same as SP5803-220
5803 241 A3LCT2:eIO3-PortC Same as SP5803-221
5803 242 A3LCT2:eIO3-PortD Same as SP5803-222
5803 243 A3LCT2:eIO3-PortP Same as SP5803-223
D095/M077 4-580 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
4.28.2 ADF INPUT CHECK: SP6007 (D095 ONLY)
6007 ADF Input Check Reading
(D095 only)
0 1
Original
001 Original Set Sensor No original
detected
Original
002 Original Width Sensor 1 No original
detected
Original
003 Original Width Sensor 2 No original
detected
Original
004 Original Width Sensor 3 No original
detected
Appendix:
Program
Service
Original
Mode
005 Entrance Sensor No original
detected
Original
006 Registration Sensor No original
detected
Original
007 Exit Sensor No original
detected
Original
008 Inverter Sensor No original
detected
009 DF Position Sensor Down Up
010 APS Start Sensor Start Off
011 Feed Cover Sensor Close Open
012 Exit Cover Sensor Close Open
At home Not home
013 Bottom Plate HP Sensor
position position
014 Bottom Plate Position Sensor Detected Not detected
Not home
015 Pick-up Roller HP Sensor Home position
position
SM Appendix 4-581 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
Change the "0" and "1" during
016 Feed-in Motor Encoder Pulse
rotation
Change the "0" and "1" during
017 Transport Motor Encoder Pulse
rotation
Change the "0" and "1" during
018 Feed-out Motor Encoder Pulse
rotation
Original
019 Original Length Sensor No original
detected
D095/M077 4-582 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
4.28.3 FINISHER INPUT CHECK: SP6112 (B830)
No. Description No. Description
001 Entrance Sensor 026 Exit Guide Open Sensor
002 Upper Exit Tray Sensor 027 Stapler Rotation Sensor 2
003 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 1 028 Staple Ready Sensor
004 Stapler Tray Exit Sensor 029 Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front)
005 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor 030 Stack Plate HP Sensor (Back)
006 Shift Tray Near Full Sensor 031 Positioning Roller HP Sensor
007 Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor 032 Return Drive HP Sensor
Appendix:
Program
008 Jogger HP Sensor 033 Stapling Paper Height Sensor
Service
Mode
Shift Lower Limit Sensor (Large
009 Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor 1 034
Paper)
010 Stapler HP Sensor (Front/Rear) 035 Punch HP Sensor 2
011 Stapler HP Sensor 036 Shift Jogger Sensor
012 Staple Out Sensor 037 Shift Jogger HP Sensor
013 Staple Tray Paper Sensor 038 Shift Jogger Retraction HP Sensor
014 Front Door Open Switch 039 Emergency Stop Switch
015 Punch Detection Sensor 040 Top Fence HP Sensor
016 Punch HP Sensor 1 041 Bottom Fence HP Sensor
Shift Tray Full Sensor (Z-Folded
017 Punch-out Hopper Full Sensor 042
Paper)
018 Stapling Paper Height Sensor 043 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 2
019 Staple Mode HP Sensor 044 Upper Tray Junction Gate HP Sensor
020 Jam Detection Sensor 045 Staple Junction Gate HP Sensor
SM Appendix 4-583 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
021 Upper Tray Full Sensor 046 Pre-Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor
022 Stapler Rotation Sensor 1 047 Pre-Stack Sensor (Right)
Stapler Trimmings Hopper Full Pre-Stack Junction Gate Release HP
023 048
Sensor Sensor
024 Pre-Stack Sensor 049 Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor 2
025 Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center) 050 Staple Trimmings Hopper Set Sensor
D095/M077 4-584 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
4.28.4 BOOKLET FINISHER INPUT CHECK (D434): SP6218
Booklet Finisher Input Check (D434)
6218 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet
finisher.
001 Finisher Entrance Sensor
002 Pre-Stack Paper Sensor
003 Pre-Stack Roller HP Sensor
004 Proof Tray JG HP Sensor
005 Stack JG HP Sensor
006 Proof Tray Exit Sensor
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
007 Proof Tray Full Sensor
008 Punch Vertical Registration Sensor
009 Punch Side-to-Side Registration Sensor
010 Punch Blade HP Sensor
011 Punch Unit HP Sensor
012 Punch Switch
013 Punch Hopper Full Sensor
014 Punch Set Sensor
015 Stack Plate HP Sensor: Front
016 Stack Plate HP Sensor: Center
017 Stack Plate HP Sensor: Rear
018 Corner Stapler HP Sensor
019 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor: Front
020 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor: Rear
SM Appendix 4-585 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
021 Bottom Fence HP Sensor
022 Jogger Fence HP Sensor: Front
023 Jogger Fence HP Sensor: Rear
024 Positioning Roller HP Sensor
025 Top Fence HP Sensor
026 Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
027 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor
028 Corner Stapler HP Sensor
029 Staple End Sensor
030 Self-Limit Sensor
031 Staple Trimmings Hopper Set Sensor
032 Staple Trimmings Hopper Full Sensor
033 Stapling Tray Entrance Sensor
034 Stack Transport Unit HP Sensor
035 Stack JG HP Sensor
036 Booklet Top Fence HP Sensor
037 Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller HP Sensor
038 Fold Plate Cam HP Sensor
039 Fold Plate HP Sensor
040 Booklet Stapler Side Fence HP Sensor (Front)
041 Booklet Stapler Side Fence HP Sensor (Rear)
042 Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence HP Sensorr
043 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor
044 Booklet Stapler Entrance Sensor
045 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor
D095/M077 4-586 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
046 Booklet Stapler Staple End Sensor: Front
047 Booklet Stapler Staple End Sensor: Rear
048 Booklet Tray Full Sensor: Upper
049 Booklet Tray Full Sensor: Lower
050 Shift Tray Exit Sensor: Long
051 Shift Tray Exit Sensor: Short
052 Exit Guide HP Sensor
053 Drag Roller HP Sensor
054 Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch
055 Shift Tray HP Sensor: Front
Appendix:
056 Shift Tray HP Sensor: Rear
Program
Service
Mode
057 Paper Height Sensor: Staple
058 Paper Height Sensor: Shift
059 Paper Height Sensor: Z-Fold
060 Paper Height Sensor: TE
061 Shift Tray Full Sensor: 2500
062 Shift Tray Full Sensor: 1500
063 Shift Tray Full Sensor: 1000
064 Shift Tray Full Sensor: 500
065 Shift Tray Emergency Stop Switch
066 Shift Tray Jogger HP Sensor
SM Appendix 4-587 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
067 Shift Jogger Fence Retract HP Sensor
068 Shift Tray Jogger HP Sensor
069 Front Door Switch
070 Punch Type 1
071 Punch Type 2
072 Staple Tray Set Sensor
073 Sub Board Set Sensor
074 Reserved
D095/M077 4-588 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
4.28.5 COVER INTERPOSER INPUT CHECK (B835): SP6400
No. Description
001 1st Paper Feed Sensor
002 2nd Paper Feed Sensor
003 1st Transport Roller
004 2nd Transport Roller
005 1st Vertical Transport Sensor
006 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor
007 Output Sensor
Appendix:
Program
008 Entrance Sensor
Service
Mode
009 Exit Sensor
010 1st Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
011 2nd Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
012 1st Upper Limit Sensor
013 2nd Upper Limit Sensor
014 1st Lower Limit Sensor
015 2nd Lower Limit Sensor
016 1st Paper Near End Sensor
017 2nd Paper Near End Sensor
018 1st Paper End Sensor
019 2nd Paper End Sensor
020 1st Paper Length Sensor
021 2nd Paper Length Sensor
022 1st Paper Width Sensor 1
SM Appendix 4-589 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
023 1st Paper Width Sensor 2
024 1st Paper Width Sensor 3
025 1st Paper Width Sensor 4
026 1st Paper Width Sensor 5
027 2nd Paper Width Sensor 1
028 2nd Paper Width Sensor 2
029 2nd Paper Width Sensor 3
030 2nd Paper Width Sensor 4
031 2nd Paper Width Sensor 5
032 1st Feed Cover Sensor
033 2nd Feed Cover Sensor
034 Cover Vertical Transport Switch
035 Front Door Open Switch
D095/M077 4-590 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
4.28.6 RING BINDER INPUT CHECK (D392): SP6508
6508 Input Check: Ring Binder Ring Binder D392
001 Entrance Sensor
002 Transport Sensor
003 Exit Sensor
004 Punch Reference Sensor
005 Binder Delivery Base Sensor
006 Path JG HP Sensor
007 Paper Jog HP Sensor
Appendix:
Program
008 Jog Roller Lift HP Sensor
Service
Mode
009 Punch HP Sensor
010 Punch Encoder Sensor
011 Unit Detect Sensor
012 Punch Size A4/LT Sensor
013 Punch Type Sensor
014 Full Sensor
015 Chad Box Sensor
016 Output Belt 1 HP Sensor
017 Output Belt 2 HP Sensor
018 Output Belt Rotation HP Sensor
SM Appendix 4-591 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
019 Output Unit Entrance Sensor
020 Booklet Pass Sensor
021 Stack HP Sensor
022 Stack Height Sensor 1
023 Stack Height Sensor 2
024 Stacker Paper Detect Sensor
025 Tray Detect Sensor
026 Obstacle Detect Sensor
027 Book Position Sensor
028 Binder Unit Sensor
029 Width Align HP Sensor 1
030 Paddle Roller HP Sensor
031 Clamp HP Sensor
032 Alignment Pin HP Sensor
033 Shutter HP Sensor
034 50-Sheet Detect Sensor
035 Paper Thickness Sensor
037 Paper LE Detect Sensor
038 Alignment Pin Top Edge Sensor
039 Width Align HP Sensor 2
040 De-curler Motor HP Sensor
041 Shutter Motor HP Sensor
042 Roller Lift Motor HP Sensor
043 Binder HP Sensor
D095/M077 4-592 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
044 Bind Timing Sensor
045 Ring Replace HP Sensor
046 Ring Replace Timing Sensor
047 Ring Supply Detect Sensor
048 Cartridge Reversed Sensor
049 Ring Near-End Sensor
050 Ring 50/100 Sensor
051 Ring A4/LT Sensor
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
SM Appendix 4-593 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
4.28.7 PERFECT BINDER INPUT CHECK (D391): SP6526
6526 Input Check: Perfect Binder Perfect Binder (D391)
001 Entrance sensor
002 Timing Sensor
003 Jog Sensor HP: Front
004 Jog Sensor HP: Rear
005 Jog Sensor HP: Front Large
006 Jog Sensor HP: Rear Large
007 Cover Path: Sensor 1
008 Cover Path: Sensor 2
009 Signature Path: Sensor 1
010 Signature Path: Sensor 2
011 Inserter Communication Sensor: Before Joining
012 Switchback Flapper HP Sensor
013 Switchback Roller HP Sensor
014 Cover Registration Sensor
015 Straight-Through Exit Sensor
016 TE Press Lever HP Sensor
017 Stack Overflow Sensor
018 Tray Lower Limit Sensor
019 Paper Detect Sensor: Front
D095/M077 4-594 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
020 Paper Detect Sensor: Rear
021 Cover Guide HP Sensor: Right
022 Cover Guide HP Sensor: Left
023 Cover Guide Open Sensor: Right
024 Cover Guide Open Sensor: Left
025 Stack Weight Move HP Sensor
026 Stack Tray HP Sensor
027 Front Door SW
028 Top Cover Sensor
029 Top Cover Switch
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
030 Glue Tank Cover Sensor
031 Temperature Start Switch
032 Inserter Connect Signal
033 Glue Tank Empty Sensor
034 Glue Tank Full Sensor
035 24 V Guard 1
036 24 V Guard 2
037 Stack Tray Empty Sensor
038 Front Door Lock Sensor
039 Power Supply Fan Lock: Left
040 Sub Grip Upper HP Sensor
SM Appendix 4-595 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
041 Signature Exit Sensor
042 Size Move HP Sensor
043 Registration Unit HP Sensor
044 Post Main Grip Encoder Sensor
045 24V 2 Check Signal
046 Spine Fold Press Sensor: Right
047 Main Grip HP Sensor: Left
048 Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Small
049 Cover Horizontal Registration Sensor: Large
050 Glue Tank HP Sensor
051 Main Grip HP Sensor
052 Main Grip Front Encoder Sensor
053 24V 3 Check Signal
054 Main Grip Press Sensor: Left
055 Main Grip Press Sensor: Small
056 Sub Grip Paper Sensor
057 Sub Grip Open Sensor
058 Sub Grip Close Sensor
059 Spine Fold Close Sensor: Left
060 Spine Plate Open Sensor
061 Spine Plate Closed Sensor
D095/M077 4-596 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
062 Spine Fold HP Sensor: Left
063 Spine Fold HP Sensor: Right
064 Cutter LE Detect Sensor
065 Main Grip Rotate Enable Sensor
066 Main Grip Rotate Bind Position Sensor
067 Main Grip Rotate HP Sensor
068 Rear Main Grip Open Sensor
069 Rear Main Grip Close Sensor
070 Front Main Grip Open Sensor
071 Front Main Grip Close Sensor
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
072 Main Grip Signature Sensor
073 Thermostat Abnormal
074 Glue Heater Thermistor
075 Glue Unit HP Sensor
076 Book Output Path HP Sensor
077 Book Output Path Push Sensor
078 Sub Grip HP Sensor
079 Signature Main Grip Position Sensor
080 Signature Fan 2 Lock: Rear
081 Signature Fan 2 Lock: Front
082 Signature Fan 1 Lock: Rear
SM Appendix 4-597 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
083 Signature Fan 1 Lock: Front
084 Power Supply Fan Lock: Center
085 Power Supply Fan Lock: Rear
086 Spine Plate Fan Lock: Upper Rear
087 Spine Plate Fan Lock: Front
088 Spine Plate Fan Lock: Lower Rear
089 Spine Plate Fan Lock: Lower Front
090 Glue Tank Roller: Rotate Detect Sensor
091 Glue Tank HP Sensor: Front
092 Glue Supply Fan: Lock 1
093 Glue Supply Fan Lock 2
094 Book Catch Fence HP Sensor
095 Output Stack Door Sensor
096 Output Stack Door Switch
097 Book Buffer Tray HP Sensor
098 Trim Scrap Buffer HP Sensor: Right
099 Press HP Sensor
100 Blade Cradle HP Sensor
101 Cutter Limit Sensor
102 Cutter Area Sensor 1
103 Entrance Path Sensor
D095/M077 4-598 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
104 Book Registration Sensor
105 Cutter Area Sensor 2
106 LE Detect Sensor
107 Grip End Sensor
108 Book Rotate HP Sensor 1: Right
109 Press End Sensor
110 Slide HP Sensor
111 Grip HP Sensor
112 Book Rotate HP Sensor 2: Left
113 Press Limit Sensor
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
114 Trim Scrap Box Sensor
115 Book Arrival Sensor
116 Book Detect Sensor: Output Tray
117 Output Tray HP Sensor
118 Trim Scrap Buffer HP Sensor
119 Trim Scrap Box Full Sensor
120 Front Door SW: Center
121 Front Door SW: 36V
122 Thrust Plate Sensor
123 Upper Tray Empty Sensor
124 Lower Tray Empty Sensor
SM Appendix 4-599 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
125 Upper Tray Pickup Sensor
126 Lower Tray Pickup Sensor
127 Inserter Cover Sensor
128 Lower Tray Paper Out Sensor
129 Lower Tray Registration Sensor
130 Upper Tray Registration Sensor
131 Upper Tray: Large Paper Sensor
132 Upper Tray: Small Paper Sensor
133 Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor
134 Transport Sensor: Midway
135 Inserter Unit Sensor
136 Upper Tray Lower Limit Sensor
137 Drive Gear Switching Sensor
138 Transport Sensor 1
139 Transport Sensor 2
140 Relay Unit Transport Sensor
141 Relay Unit Front Door Sensor
D095/M077 4-600 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
4.28.8 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER INPUT CHECK (D447):
SP6600/SP6606
6600 Input Check: Stacker 1
High Capacity Stacker (D447)
6606 Input Check: Stacker 2
001 Entrance Sensor
002 Shift Tray Exit Sensor
003 Proof Tray Exit Sensor
004 Exit Sensor
005 Transport Sensor
006 Proof Tray Full Sensor
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
007 Shift Tray JG HP Sensor
008 Proof Tray JG HP Sensor
009 Shift Tray Roller HP Sensor
010 Front Jogger Fence HP Sensor
011 Rear Jogger Fence HP Sensor
012 Jogger Fence Retraction HP Sensor
013 LE Stopper HP Sensor
014 Paper Height Sensor
015 Shift Tray Paper Sensor
016 Tray Full Sensor 1: 25%
017 Tray Full Sensor 2: 50%
018 Tray Full Sensor 3: 75%
SM Appendix 4-601 D095/M077
Input Check: 4
019 Tray Full Sensor 4: 100%
020 Tray Low Limit Sensor
021 Roll Away Cart Set SW
022 Tray Guard Sensor 1
023 Tray Guard Sensor 2
024 Sub Jogger HP Sensor
025 Down Button
026 Jam Button
027 Top DoorSW
028 Front Door SW
D095/M077 4-602 SM Appendix
Input Check: 4
4.28.9 TRIMMER UNIT INPUT CHECK (D455): SP6650
6650 Input Check: Trimmer (D455)
001 Entrance Sensor
002 Stopper Sensor
003 Exit Sensor
004 Booklet Sensor 1
005 Booklet Sensor 2
006 Booklet Sensor 3
007 Trimming Blade HP Sensor
Appendix:
Program
008 Cut Position HP Sensor
Service
Mode
009 Press Roller HP Sensor
010 Press Stopper HP Sensor
011 Scrap Hopper Full HP Sensor
012 Scrap Hopper HP Sensor
013 Door Switch
SM Appendix 4-603 D095/M077
Output Check
4.29 OUTPUT CHECK
4.29.1 MAIN MACHINE OUTPUT CHECK: SP5804
Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor signals. To
prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an electrical component on for
a long time.
Main Machine Output Check (SP5-804)
1. Open SP mode 5-804.
2. Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check. (Refer to the
table on the next page.)
3. Press "On" then press "Off" to test the selected item.
No. Description
001 Switchback Gate Solenoid
002 Exit Gate Solenoid
003 Inverter Roller Solenoid
004 Regist Entrance Solenoid
005 LCT Entrance Solenoid
006 ID/MUSIC Sensor Shutter Sol
007 Tandem Tray Connect Solenoid
008 Left Tray Lock Solenoid
009 Separation Roller 1 Solenoid
010 Separation Roller 2 Solenoid
011 Pick-up Roller 1 Solenoid
012 Pick-up Roller 2 Solenoid
013 Front Side Fence Solenoid
014 Rear Side Fence Solenoid
D095/M077 4-604 SM Appendix
Output Check
015 Tray 1 Lift Motor
016 Tray 2 Lift Motor
017 PTB Cooling Fan
018 Fusing Fan 4
019 PSU Fan 4-5
020 Fusing Fan 1-3
021 Controller Fan 3-4
022 Fusing Fan 4:Half Speed
023 YM-CK Laser Unit Fan:Half Speed
024 PSU Fan 1-3:Half Speed
Appendix:
025 PSU Fan 4-5:Half Speed
Program
Service
Mode
026 Fusing Ex Fan 1-3:Half Speed
027 Controller Fan 1-2:Half Speed
028 Controller Fan 3-4:Half Speed
029 ITB Fan:Half Speed
030 Toner Pump Clutch Y
031 Toner Pump Clutch M
032 Toner Pump Clutch C
033 Toner Pump Clutch K
034 Toner Supply Clutch Y
035 Toner Supply Clutch M
036 Toner Supply Clutch C
037 Toner Supply Clutch K
SM Appendix 4-605 D095/M077
Output Check
038 Toner Bottle Motor Y
039 Toner Bottle Motor M
040 Toner Bottle Motor C
041 Toner Bottle Motor K
042 Oil Pump
044 PTB Fan 1-2
045 Fusing Fan 5-6
046 Fusing Fan 1-3
047 YM-CK Laser Unit Fan
048 Paper Cooling Fan 1-2
049 PSU Fan 1-3
050 Controller Fan 1-2
051 Ozone Fan Y
052 Ozone Fan M
053 Ozone Fan C
054 Ozone Fan K
055 Development Fan Y
056 Development Fan M
057 Development Fan C
058 Development Fan K
059 CIS Fan
D095/M077 4-606 SM Appendix
Output Check
060 ITB Fan
061 Paper Cooling Fan 3
062 Fusing Fan 5-6:Half Speed
063 Fusing Fan 1-3:Half Speed
068 Registration Fan
069 Paper Exit Fan
070 Black PCDU Fan
071 Mechanical Counter 1
072 Mechanical Counter 2
073 Fusing Lamp 1:Htg Roller
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
074 Fusing Lamp 2:Htg Roller
076 LCT Tray Heater
077 Fusing Lamp 3:Htg Roller
078 Fusing Lamp 4:Prs Roller
081 Erase Lamp Y
082 Erase Lamp M
083 Erase Lamp C
084 Erase Lamp K
093 Y Bias:HV
094 M Bias:HV
095 C Bias:HV
SM Appendix 4-607 D095/M077
Output Check
096 K Bias:HV
097 Separation:HV DC
098 Separation:HV AC
100 BTL Adjust Motor Y
101 BTL Adjust Motor M
102 BTL Adjust Motor C
103 BTL Adjust Motor K
104 Duplex Transport Motor 1
105 Switchback Motor
106 Inverter Motor
107 Oil Supply Motor
108 Pressure Roller Lift Motor
109 De-curler Feed Motor
111 PTB Motor
112 PTR Lift Motor
113 Duplex Transport Motor 2
114 Charge Unit Cleaning Motor Y
115 Charge Unit Cleaning Motor M
116 Charge Unit Cleaning Motor C
117 Charge Unit Cleaning Motor K
118 Shift Roller Unit Motor
D095/M077 4-608 SM Appendix
Output Check
119 Registration Gate Motor
120 Registration Entrance Motor
121 Registration Timing Motor
122 Shift Roller Motor
123 PTR Timing Motor
124 1st Paper Feed Motor
125 2nd Paper Feed Motor
126 1st Grip Motor
127 3rd Grip Motor
128 2nd Grip Motor
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
129 Belt Centering Roller Motor
130 ITB Color Lift Motor
131 ITB Black Lift Motor
132 Drum Motor Y
133 Drum Motor M
134 Drum Motor C
135 Drum Motor K
136 ITB Motor
142 RFID ON/OFF:Y
143 RFID ON/OFF:M
144 RFID ON/OFF:C
SM Appendix 4-609 D095/M077
Output Check Rev. 05/04/2011
145 RFID ON/OFF:K
146 RFID ON:Y
147 RFID ON:M
148 RFID ON:C
149 RFID ON:K
150 Fusing Motor
151 Paper Exit Motor
⇒ 152 Waste Toner Transport Motor 1 (See NOTE)
153 Waste Toner Transport Motor 2
158 Drum Cleaning Motor Y
159 Drum Cleaning Motor M
160 Drum Cleaning Motor C
161 Drum Cleaning Motor K
⇒ 162 Development Motor Y (See NOTE)
⇒ 163 Development Motor M (See NOTE)
⇒ 164 Development Motor C (See NOTE)
⇒ 165 Development Motor K (See NOTE)
166 PTR Motor
168 Toner Supply Motor
169 ITB Cleaning Motor
D095/M077 4-610 SM Appendix
Output Check
Feed Motor 1
170
(Drive Motor Right in Buffer Pass Unit (M379))
Feed Motor 2
171
(Drive Motor Left in Buffer Pass Unit (M379))
Cool Fan Drv 1
172
(Upper Cooling Fan in Buffer Pass Unit (M379))
Exhaust Fan Drv 1
173
(Upper Exhaust Fan in Buffer Pass Unit (M379))
Cool Fan Drv 2
174
(Lower Cooling Fan in Buffer Pass Unit (M379))
Exhaust Fan Drv 2
175
(Lower Exhaust Fan in Buffer Pass Unit (M379))
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
From -190 to -199 only for M077
190 A4LCT Upper Feed Motor
191 A4LCT Middle Feed Motor
192 A4LCT Lower Feed Motor
193 A4LCT Upper Transport Motor
194 A4LCT Middle Transport Motor
195 A4LCT Lower Transport Motor
196 A4LCT Upper Relay Motor
197 A4LCT Middle Relay Motor
198 A4LCT Lower Relay Motor
199 A4LCT Exit Motor
SM Appendix 4-611 D095/M077
Output Check
200 Web Motor
From -202 to -206 only for D095
202 Scanner lamp1 (Exposure Lamp 1)
203 Scanner lamp2 (Exposure Lamp 2)
Scanner fanmotor A
204
(Lamp Regulator Fan: Left and Right)
Scanner fanmotor B
205
(Scanner Motor Cooling Fan)
Scanner fanmotor C
206
(Scanner Intake and Exhaust Fan)
From -210 to -215 only for M077
210 A4LCT Upper Pick-up SOL
211 A4LCT Middle Pick-up SOL
212 A4LCT Lower Pick-up SOL
213 A4LCT Upper Separation Roller SOL
214 A4LCT Middle Separation Roller SOL
215 A4LCT Lower Separation Roller SOL
216 A3 LCT1:Paper Feed Motor 1
217 A3 LCT1:Paper Feed Motor 2
218 A3 LCT1:Grip Motor 1
219 A3 LCT1:Grip Motor 2
D095/M077 4-612 SM Appendix
Output Check
220 A3 LCT1:V-Transport Motor 1
221 A3 LCT1:V-Transport Motor 2
222 A3 LCT1:Exit Motor
223 A3 LCT1:Horizontal Relay Motor
224 A3 LCT1:Entrance Motor
225 A3 LCT1:Exit Roller Contact Motor
226 A3 LCT1:Pick-up Solenoid 1
227 A3 LCT1:Pick-up Solenoid 2
228 A3 LCT1:Air Assist Front Fan 1
229 A3 LCT1:Air Assist Rear Fan 1
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
230 A3 LCT1:Air Assist Front Fan 2
231 A3 LCT1:Air Assist Rear Fan 2
232 By-pass Feed Motor
233 By-pass Transport Motor
234 By-pass V-Transport Motor
235 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid
236 A3 LCT2:Paper Feed Motor 1
237 A3 LCT2:Paper Feed Motor 2
238 A3 LCT2:Grip Motor 1
239 A3 LCT2:Grip Motor 2
240 A3 LCT2:V-Transport Motor 1
SM Appendix 4-613 D095/M077
Output Check Rev. 05/04/2011
241 A3 LCT2:V-Transport Motor 2
242 A3 LCT2:Exit Motor
243 A3 LCT2:Horizontal Relay Motor
244 A3 LCT2:Entrance Motor
245 A3 LCT2:Exit Roller Contact Motor
246 A3 LCT2:Pick-up Solenoid 1
247 A3 LCT2:Pick-up Solenoid 2
248 A3 LCT2:Air Assist Front Fan 1
249 A3 LCT2:Air Assist Rear Fan 1
250 A3 LCT2:Air Assist Front Fan 2
251 A3 LCT2:Air Assist Rear Fan 2
⇒ NOTE:
Additional procedures required when performing the following Output Checks:
Development Motor (SP5804 -162: Y, -163: M, -164: C, -165: K)
Waste Toner Transport Motor 1 (SP5804-152).
Output Check Required Procedure
Development Motor Output checks Waste Toner Transport Motor 1
(SP5804 -162:Y, -163:M, -164:C, (SP5804-152) and Waste Toner Transport Motor 2
-165:K) (SP5804-153) to be performed together.
Waste Toner Transport Motor 1 Output check Waste Toner Transport Motor 2
(SP5804-152) (SP5804-153) to be performed together.
Note, the output check for Waste Toner Transport Motor 2 (SP5804-153) could be performed
independently and does not require an additional procedure.
The above additional procedures are required to prevent toner from clogging. If output check
for the Development Motor is run independently, toner could clog between the Development
Motor and the Waste Toner Transport Motor 1. If output check for the Waste Toner Transport
Motor 1 is run independently, toner could clog between the Waste Toner Transport Motor 1 and
Waste Toner Transport Motor 2.
D095/M077 4-614 SM Appendix
Output Check
4.29.2 ADF OUTPUT CHECK: SP6008 (D095 ONLY)
No. Description
001 Feed-in Motor(Fast)
002 Feed-in Motor(Slow)
003 Transport Motor (Forward)
004 Transport Motor (Reverse)
005 Feed-out Motor
006 Exit Gate SOL
007 Inverter Gate SOL
Appendix:
Program
008 Check LEDs
Service
Mode
009 Pick-up Motor
010 Bottom Plate Motor
011 Paper Feed Clutch
SM Appendix 4-615 D095/M077
Output Check
4.29.3 FINISHER OUTPUT CHECK SP6113 (B830)
No. Description
001 OFF (Stop)
002 Upper Transport Motor
003 Shift Tray Exit Motor
004 Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor
005 Shift Tray Lift Motor
006 Jogger Motor
007 Shift Jogger Motor
008 Staple Hammer Motor
009 Punch Motor
010 Staple Junction Gate Motor
011 Positioning Roller Motor
012 Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
013 Shift Motor
014 Stapler Rotation Motor
015 Staple Tray Exit Motor
016 Exit Guide Motor
017 Stack Plate Motor (Center)
018 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor
019 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Release Motor
020 Stack Plate Motor (Front)
021 Stack Plate Motor (Rear)
022 Stacking Roller Motor
D095/M077 4-616 SM Appendix
Output Check
023 Stacking Roller Drag Motor
024 Shift Jogger Motor
025 Shift Jogger Lift Motor
026 Jogger Top Fence Motor
027 Jogger Bottom Fence Motor
028 Lower Transport Motor
029 Upper Tray Exit Motor
030 Positioning Transport Motor
031 Pre-Stack Transport Motor
032 Staple Trimming Shooter Solenoid
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
SM Appendix 4-617 D095/M077
Output Check
4.29.4 BOOKLET FINISHER OUTPUT CHECK: SP6219 (D434)
6219 Finisher Output Check (D434)
001 Entrance Motor
002 Registration Motor
003 Proof Tray Vertical Transport Motor
004 Pre-stack Release Motor
005 Pre-stack Motor
006 Shift JG Motor
007 Stapler JG Motor
008 Proof Tray Exit Motor
009 Horizontal Transport Motor
010 Punch Movement Motor
011 Punch Switch Motor
012 Punch Drive Motor
013 Stapling Tray Entrance Motor
014 Stack Plate Motor: Front
015 Stack Plate Motor: Center
016 Stack Plate Motor: Rear
017 Punch S-to-S Registration: CIS Lamp
018 Stapler Rotation Motor
019 Stapler Movement Motor
020 Bottom Fence Lift Motor
021 Front Jogger Fence Motor
022 Rear Jogger Fence Motor
D095/M077 4-618 SM Appendix
Output Check
023 Positioning Roller Rotation Motor
024 Positioning Roller Motor
025 Stack Feed-out Belt Motor
026 Top Fence Motor
027 Shutter Solenoid
028 Booklet Stapler Motor
029 Stack Transport Motor
030 Stack JG Motor
031 Stack Transport Motor
032 Reserved
Appendix:
033 Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Motor
Program
Service
Mode
034 Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence Motor
035 Booklet Stapler Side Fence Motor
036 Booklet Stapler Top Fence Motor
037 Booklet Stapler Motor
038 Fold Roller Motor
039 Fold Plate Motor
040 Shift Tray Exit Motor
041 Shift Motor
042 Drag Drive Motor
043 Drag Roller Motor
044 Exit Guide Motor
045 Shift Tray Lift Motor
046 Shift Tray Jogger Fence Motor
047 Shift Tray Jogger Fence Retraction Motor
SM Appendix 4-619 D095/M077
Output Check
4.29.5 COVER INTERPOSER (B835) OUTPUT CHECK: SP6401
No. Description
001 OFF (Stop)
002 1st Pick-up Motor
003 2nd Pick-up Motor
004 1st Paper Feed Motor
005 2nd Paper Feed Motor
006 1st Transport Motor
007 2nd Transport Motor
008 Vertical Transport Motor
009 Horizontal Transport Motor
D095/M077 4-620 SM Appendix
Output Check
4.29.6 RING BINDER (D392) OUTPUT CHECK: SP6509
6509 Output Check: Ring Binder Ring Binder D392
001 Entrance Motor
002 Transport Motor
003 Exit Motor
004 Path JG Motor
005 Jog Roller Motor
006 Side Jogger Motor
007 After-Punch Output Motor
Appendix:
Program
008 Jog Roller Lift Motor
Service
Mode
009 Hole Clear Motor
010 Top Fence SOL
011 Output Belt 1 Motor
012 Output Belt 2 Motor
013 Output Belt Rotation Motor
014 Stacker Motor
015 De-curler Motor
016 Shutter Motor
017 Paddle Roller Motor
SM Appendix 4-621 D095/M077
Output Check
018 Alignment Pin Motor
019 Paddle Roller Lift Motor
020 Width Align Motor 1
021 Clamp Motor
022 Width Align Motor 2
023 Roller Motor
024 Roller Lift Motor
025 Main Lift Motor
026 50/100 Adjustment Motor
D095/M077 4-622 SM Appendix
Output Check
4.29.7 HIGH CAPACITY STACKER OUTPUT CHECK (D447):
SP6601/SP6607
6601 Output Check: Stacker 1
High Capacity Stacker (D447)
6607 Output Check: Stacker 2
001 Stop
002 Entrance Motor
003 Proof Tray Exit Motor
004 Shift Exit Motor
005 Transport Motor
006 Shift JG Motor
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
007 Proof Tray JG Motor
008 Shift Motor
009 Front Jogger Fence Motor
010 Rear Jogger Fence Motor
011 Jogger Fence Retraction Motor
013 LE Stopper Motor
014 Sub Jogger Motor
015 Tray Lift Motor
016 Front Door Lock SOL
017 Fan Motor
018 Tray Full LED
019 Jog In Progress LED
020 Tray Lift LED
021 Error LED
SM Appendix 4-623 D095/M077
Output Check
4.29.8 TRIMMER UNIT OUTPUT CHECK (D455): SP6651
6651 Output Check: Trimmer (D455)
001 Entrance Motor
002 Exit Motor
003 Press Roller Motor
004 Cut Position Motor
005 Press Stopper Motor
006 Tray Motor
007 Trimming Blade Motor
D095/M077 4-624 SM Appendix
Printer and Scanner SP Tables
4.30 PRINTER AND SCANNER SP TABLES
4.30.1 PRINTER SP
There are no printer SPs in this model.
4.30.2 SCANNER SP (D095 ONLY)
1001 [Scan Nv Version]
1001 5 *CTL Displays the NV version of the scanner.
[Compression Type]
1004
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
Appendix:
Program
Service
Mode
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1004 1 Compression Type *CTL
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase margin]
1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP is
activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
SM Appendix 4-625 D095/M077
D095/M077
SERVICE MANUAL
(Book3 of 3) 006001MIU
Accessories & Point to Point Diagrams
D095/M077
SERVICE MANUAL
(BOOK 3 of 3)
Accessories &
Point to Point Diagrams
D095/M077
SERVICE MANUAL
Book 3 of 3
Accessories & Point to Point Diagrams
006001MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including
desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
© 2010 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN
D095 Pro C901s Pro C901s Pro C901s Pro C901s
M077 Pro C901 Pro C901 Pro C901 Pro C901
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 10/2010 Original Printing
B331
A3/DLT TRAY KIT
B331 A3/DLT TRAY KIT REVISION HISTORY
Page Date Added/Updated/New
None
A3/DLT TRAY KIT B331
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................2
2.1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT ........................................... 2
3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................4
3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 4
SM i B331
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION
For details about installing the A3/DLT Kit B331, please refer to the instructions you
received with the instructions or the “1. Installation” in the main machine service
manual.
A3/DLT Tray
B331
Kit
SM 1 B331
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
2.1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire, remove the front bottom
plate lift wire. The procedure for the two wires is the same.
[F]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[A]
[B] B331R102.WMF
1. Remove the tray.
2. Remove the inner cover (2 screws).
3. Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook the wire stoppers [A] (2 stoppers
[B]).
4. Remove the wire cover [C] (1 E-ring each).
5. Remove the bracket [D] (1 screw, 1 E-ring, and 1 bushing).
6. Remove the gear [E].
7. Replace the bottom plate lift wire [F].
B331 2 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B331R061.WMF
NOTE: When re-installing the bottom plate lift wire:
1) Set the positioning pin [A] in the hole [B] and set the projection [C] in the
hole [D].
2) Position the wire as shown [E].
3) Do not cross the wires.
A3/DLT Tray
B331
Kit
SM 3 B331
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
3.1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
B331D201.WMF
This tray mechanism is basically same as the tandem LCT. This tray bottom plate
[A] is lifted through the tray wires [B] by the lift motor [C] rotation. There is no
remaining paper capacity detection.
The paper remaining sensors [D] trigger messages on the LCD to let the user know
how much paper remains in the tray.
The operation panel LCD displays “full” whether there is paper in the tray. Except
for the above matter, refer to the main copier tandem LCT section for details.
B331 4 SM
Z-FOLDING UNIT ZF4000
B660
Z-FOLDING UNIT ZF4000 (B660) REVISION HISTORY
Page Date Added/Updated/New
None
Z-FOLDING UNIT B660
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN .................................................................................. 1
1.2 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 2
1.3 FEED MOTOR.............................................................................................. 3
1.4 UPPER EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................ 4
1.5 UPPER STOPPER MOTOR/HP SENSOR, FEED SENSOR ....................... 5
1.6 FOLD TIMING SENSOR .............................................................................. 6
1.7 LOWER STOPPER MOTOR/HP SENSOR, RELAY BOARD....................... 7
1.8 LEADING EDGE SENSOR, LOWER EXIT SENSOR .................................. 8
1.9 ANTI-STATIC BRUSH .................................................................................. 9
1.10 FOLD ROLLER MOTOR .......................................................................... 10
1.11 MAIN CONTROL BOARD ........................................................................ 11
1.12 PSU .......................................................................................................... 12
1.13 UNEVEN FOLDING ADJUSTMENT ......................................................... 13
1.13.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... 13
1.13.2 Z-FOLD ADJUSTMENT SCREWS .................................................. 14
1.13.3 Z-FOLD ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE ........................................... 15
1st Fold Adjustment ............................................................................... 15
2nd Fold Adjustment .............................................................................. 16
1.13.4 Z-FOLD ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE TABLE ............................... 17
2. SERVICE TABLES .........................................................................18
3. DETAILS.........................................................................................19
3.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................ 19
3.2 Z-FOLDING UNIT PAPER PATH ............................................................... 21
3.2.1 PAPER PATH WITH NO FOLDING................................................... 21
3.2.2 PAPER PATH WITH Z-FOLDING...................................................... 22
3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 26
3.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................... 27
3.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 27
3.4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY .......................................... 28
SM i B660
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
[A]
[A]
Z-Folding Unit
B660I900.WMF
[B]
B660
1. Disengage the Z-folding unit from the machine.
2. Disengage the Z-folding unit from the finisher (or cover sheet feeder).
3. At the bottom on the sides of the Z-folding unit:
• Remove the lock bracket [A] ( x 1).
• Pull out the foot extension [B].
• Re-attach the bracket [A] to lock the foot in the open position ( x 1).
Reinstallation
Do this procedure in the opposite sequence to retract and lock the extensions
below the Z-folding unit.
CAUTION
The Z-folding unit is not stable, with or without the feet extended. Do your
work carefully; do not tilt the unit.
SM 1 B660
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.2 COVERS
[E]
[A]
[H]
[B]
[G]
[D]
[F] [C] B660I901.WMF
• Open the front door [A].
• Lift the horizontal transport plate [B] to the left until it locks on the left side.
• Pull out the Z-fold mechanism [C].
[D] Front cover ( x 6)
[E] Top cover ( x 4)
[F] Left cover ( x 4)
[G] Right cover ( x 5)
[H] Rear cover ( x 6)
B660 2 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.3 FEED MOTOR
[C]
[A]
Z-Folding Unit
[B]
B660
B660R102.WMF
1. Pull the Z-folding mechanism out of the unit, but not fully.
2. Remove: (
1.2)
• Left cover
• Right cover
• Rear cover
[A]: Motor cover ( x 3)
[B]: Feed Motor ( x 2,
x 1, timing belt x 1)
Reinstallation
• Confirm that the motor cover is below the leaf springs at [C].
SM 3 B660
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4 UPPER EXIT SENSOR
[C]
[B]
[A]
B660R103.WMF
Left cover ( 1.2)
[A]: Bracket ( x 2)
[B]: Upper exit sensor unit ( x 1, = x 1, x 1)
[C]: Upper exit sensor
B660 4 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.5 UPPER STOPPER MOTOR/HP SENSOR, FEED
SENSOR
[E]
[D]
[A]
Z-Folding Unit
B660
[B]
[C]
B660R104.WMF
Front cover ( 1.2)
[A]: Upper stopper motor unit ( x 3, = x 2, x 2)
[B]: Upper stopper motor HP sensor
[C]: Upper stopper motor ( x 2)
[D]: Feed sensor unit ( x 1, x 1)
[E]: Feed sensor
SM 5 B660
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6 FOLD TIMING SENSOR
[B]
[A]
[C]
B660R105.WMF
Pull the Z-fold mechanism out of the unit.
[A]: Open the right vertical transport unit cover.
[B]: Plate ( x 4)
[C]: Fold timing sensor ( x 1, x 1)
B660 6 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.7 LOWER STOPPER MOTOR/HP SENSOR, RELAY
BOARD
[C] [B]
[A]
Z-Folding Unit
B660
[D] B660R106.WMF
Front cover ( 1.2)
[A]: Lower stopper motor unit ( x 3, = x 2, x 2),
[B]: Lower stopper HP sensor
[C]: Lower stopper motor ( x 2)
[D]: Relay board ( x 4, = x 3, x 10)
SM 7 B660
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.8 LEADING EDGE SENSOR, LOWER EXIT SENSOR
[C]
[A] [D]
B660R107.WMF
[G]
[B]
[H]
[E]
[F]
[J] [I]
B660R108.WMF
Pull out the Z-folding mechanism.
Open the right vertical transport cover [E].
[A]: Left link arm ( x 1)
[B]: Left corner bracket ( x 1)
[C]: Right link arm ( x 1)
[D]: Right corner bracket ( x 1)
[E]: Vertical transport cover.
[F]: Lower fold roller cover ( x 2)
[G]: Leading edge sensor unit ( x 1, x 1)
[H]: Leading edge sensor ( x 1)
[I]: Lower exit sensor unit ( x 1, x 1)
[J]: Lower exit sensor
B660 8 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.9 ANTI-STATIC BRUSH
[B]
[A]
[C]
[F]
[G]
[D]
Z-Folding Unit
[E]
B660
B660R109.WMF
1. Pull out the Z-folding mechanism.
2. Open the left vertical transport cover [A].
3. Open the vertical transport assembly [B].
Remove:
[C] Left link screw
[D] Right link screw
[E] Link screw [E]
[F] Bracket
[G] Anti-static brush
SM 9 B660
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.10 FOLD ROLLER MOTOR
[C]
[A]
[B]
B660R110.WMF
1. Pull the Z-folding mechanism out of the unit, but not fully.
2. Remove: (
1.2)
• Left cover
• Right cover
• Rear cover
[A]: Motor cover ( x 3)
[B]: Fold roller motor ( x 6,
x 1, timing belt x 1)
Reinstallation
Make sure that the motor cover is below the leaf springs [C].
B660 10 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.11 MAIN CONTROL BOARD
[A]
Z-Folding Unit
B660
B660R111.WMF
Remove:
• Rear cover. (
1.2)
[A] Main control board [A] ( x 4,
x 10)
SM 11 B660
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.12 PSU
[A]
[E]
[B]
[D] [C]
B660R112.WMF
• Open the front door.
• Pull the Z-fold mechanism out of the unit.
Remove:
• Left cover and right cover. ( 1.2)
[A] Base top cover ( x 3).
[B] Base left cover ( x 2).
[C] Base right cover ( x 2).
• Make a mark at the positions of the connectors, then disconnect them.
NOTE: These connectors do not have different colors. To help you connect
them again correctly, make marks on them.
[D] Power supply unit (PSU) ( x4, x 4).
• Pull the PSU out of the right side of the bottom.
[E] Power supply board ( x 4, x 1).
B660 12 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.13 UNEVEN FOLDING ADJUSTMENT
1.13.1 OVERVIEW
Printed Side (1 Side)
1st Fold
Z-Folding Unit
2nd Fold D
B660
B660R200.WMF
This procedure describes how to correct uneven folding (D) in paper folded with the
Z-Fold unit. Before doing this procedure, please note the names and positions of
the 1st and 2nd Fold.
Section 3.2.2 provides a full description of how Z-folding is done.
SM 13 B660
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.13.2 Z-FOLD ADJUSTMENT SCREWS
The adjustment of the 1st fold is done by
turning an adjustment screw linked to the
paper stopper.
Pull out the Z-fold mechanism. [A]
Open the right cover to see the
adjustment screw located at [A].
This is the screw used to adjust the 1st
fold.
B660R206.BMP
Open the left cover to see the screw
located at [B].
This is the screw used to adjust the 2nd
fold.
[B]
B660R210.BMP
B660 14 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.13.3 Z-FOLD ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1st Fold Adjustment
1. Print one A3 copy and send it through 1
the Z-fold unit.
2
2. Open the 2nd fold .
1
3. Turn the paper over so the edge is 3
aligned with the crease of the 2nd fold.
4. Open the right door and locate the
screw that adjusts the 1st fold (see
previous page).
5. Use a plus screwdriver to turn the
screw [A] to the left to loosen the nut. 3
• If the corner is over the right edge,
turn the screw to the right.
• If the corner is over the left edge,
Z-Folding Unit
turn the screw to the left.
B660
NOTE:
• The illustration above shows the
corner over the right edge.
• You can see the pointer [B] change
position on the notches of the B660R215.WMF
adjustment scale as you turn the
screw.
6. Close the Z-Fold unit.
[A]
7. Do another test print.
8. If the 1st fold is still misaligned, repeat
this procedure until the alignment is [B]
correct.
9. After the adjustment is completed, use
a screw driver to hold the screw in
position, then retighten the nut you
B660R220.BMP
loosened in Step 2. Do not turn the
screw.
SM 15 B660
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
2nd Fold Adjustment
1. Print one A3 copy and send it through the Z- 1
fold unit.
2
2. Open the folded sheet at the 1st fold then
lay it down flat.
3. Stand the sheet on its end so the edge is
up and the crease of the 1st fold is facing
out. 3
4. Open the left door and locate the screw that
adjusts the 2nd fold (see previous page).
3
5. Use a plus screwdriver to turn the screw [A]
to the left to loosen the nut.
• If the corner is over the right edge, turn
the screw to the right.
• If the corner is over the left edge, turn the
screw to the left.
NOTE:
• The illustration shows the corner over the
right edge.
• You can see the pointer [B] change
position on the notches of the adjustment B660R225.WMF
scale as you turn the screw.
6. Close the Z-Fold unit.
7. Do another test print.
8. If the 1st fold is still misaligned, repeat [B]
this procedure until the alignment is
correct.
9. After the adjustment is completed, use [A]
a screw driver to hold the screw in
position, then retighten the nut you
loosened in Step 2. Do not turn the
screw. B660R230.BMP
B660 16 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.13.4 Z-FOLD ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE TABLE
1st Fold Adjustment
Turn screw right Turn screw left
X X
B660R235.WMF
2nd Fold Adjustment
Z-Folding Unit
X X
B660
Turn screw right Turn screw left
B660R240.WMF
NOTE: A one-notch adjustment on the scale means the alignment is corrected by
about 1 mm.
SM 17 B660
SERVICE TABLES
2. SERVICE TABLES
Two SP codes have been added for the Z-folding unit, to adjust the positions of the
folds.
[D]
[A]
L1
[B] A
[C]
B660S901.WMF
Use these SPs to adjust the locations of the first fold and the second fold.
The illustration shows the position of the sheet while it goes through the lower exit
rollers after it has been folded.
SP6301 001 to 008 Fine Adjustment – 1st Fold Position
[-4 ~ +4/0/ 0.2 mm]
Adjusts the position of the first fold [A] to decrease or increase the
distance (A) between the leading edge [B] and the crease of the 2nd
fold [C].
SP6301 009 to 016 Fine Adjustment – 2nd Fold Position
[-4 ~ +4/0/ 0.2 mm]
Adjusts the position of the 2nd fold [C] to decrease or increase the
length (L1) of the sheet between the trailing edge [D] and the 2nd
fold.
B660 18 SM
DETAILS
3. DETAILS
3.1 OVERVIEW
1
26 3
4
25
24 5
23
Z-Folding Unit
6
B660
22
21 7
20 8
19 9
18
10
17
11
16
15 12
14 13
B660D102.WMF
SM 19 B660
DETAILS
1. Front Door Sensor 14. Grip Rollers
2. Junction Gate 15. Lower Stopper
3. Feed Rollers 16. Leading Edge Sensor
4. Feed Sensor 17. Vertical Feed Rollers – 1
5. Fold Timing Sensor 18. Anti-Static Brush
6. Pinch Idle Roller 19. 1st Fold Roller
7. Upper Stopper 20. Vertical Feed Rollers – 2
8. Upper Stopper Path Sensor 21. Upper Stopper HP Sensor
9. 3rd Fold Roller 22. Pinch Feed Roller
10. 2nd Fold Roller 23. Vertical Feed Rollers – 3
11. Lower Stopper HP Sensor 24. Vertical Feed Rollers – 4
12. Lower Exit Rollers 25. Upper Exit Sensor
13. Lower Exit Sensor 26. Upper Exit Rollers
B660 20 SM
DETAILS
3.2 Z-FOLDING UNIT PAPER PATH
3.2.1 PAPER PATH WITH NO FOLDING
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
Z-Folding Unit
B660
B660D901.WMF
The feed rollers [1] feed the paper from the main machine into the Z-folding unit.
If Z-folding was not used for the job, the sheet feeds above the closed junction gate
[2].
The upper exit sensor [3] detects the leading and trailing edge of the unfolded
sheet.
The upper exit rollers [4] feed the unfolded sheet out of the Z-folding unit and into
the finisher.
SM 21 B660
DETAILS
3.2.2 PAPER PATH WITH Z-FOLDING
[2] [1]
[5]
[7]
[9]
[6]
[3]
[11]
[8]
[4] [10]
B660D201.WMF
The feed rollers [1] feed the paper from the main machine into the Z-folding unit.
The junction gate solenoid energizes and opens the junction gate [2]. The junction
gate sends the sheet down into the Z-folding paper path.
The upper and lower stopper motors move the upper stopper [3] and lower stopper
[4] to the positions for the paper size that was used for the job.
The feed sensor [5] detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the sheet. The
pinch idle roller solenoid (upper) pulls the pinch idle roller [6] away from the pinch
feed roller [7] and the paper can fall between the pinch rollers.
The anti-static brush [8] removes static electricity from the sheet.
When the fold timing sensor [9] detects the trailing edge of the sheet, it energizes
the pinch idle roller solenoid (lower). This pushes the pinch idle roller [6] against
the opposite pinch feed roller [7].
The lower stopper [10] stops the sheet and buckles it slightly toward the nip [11] of
the 1st and 2nd fold rollers.
B660 22 SM
DETAILS
[9]
[8]
[1]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[4] [5]
Z-Folding Unit
[2]
B660
B660D202.WMF
The pinch feed roller [1] turns and feeds the sheet down against the lower stopper
[2]
At the correct time, the fold roller motor switches on and turns the:
• 1st fold roller [3]
• 2nd fold roller [4]
• 3rd fold roller [5]
The sheet continues to buckle until it feeds into the nip [6] of the 1st and 2nd fold
rollers. These two rollers fold the sheet.
The leading edge sensor [7] detects the leading edge of the sheet:
• When the leading edge goes by while the paper feeds down (to the lower
stopper).
• When the leading edge goes by again while the paper feeds up into the nip of
the 1st and 2nd fold rollers.
If the leading edge sensor does not detect the leading edge at the correct time, this
sensor signals a jam.
At the correct time, the pinch idle roller [8] is pulled away from the pinch feed roller
[9] by the pinch idle roller solenoid (upper).
SM 23 B660
DETAILS
[3]
[4]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[5]
B660D203.WMF
The 1st fold roller [1] and 2nd fold roller [2] continue to turn. This feeds the edge of
the 1st fold up until it hits the upper stopper [3].
The sheet lifts the feeler of the upper stopper path sensor [4]. This sensor:
• Detects when the sheet comes to the upper stopper path.
• Detects when the sheet goes out of the upper stopper path.
The upper stopper sensor detects a jam if it does not detect that the sheet comes
and goes at the correct times.
When the sheet feeds between the 1st and 2nd fold rollers, this pushes the first
fold against the upper stopper. The sheet buckles down into the gap between the
2nd fold roller [5] and 3rd fold roller [6]. The second fold is made when the sheet
feeds between the 2nd and 3rd feed rollers.
B660 24 SM
DETAILS
[8]
[7]
[6] [9]
[2]
[10]
[12]
[1]
[3]
Z-Folding Unit
[11]
[4] [5]
B660
B660D204.WMF
The 2nd and 3rd fold rollers [1] continue to turn and feed the sheet down.
The feeler of the upper stopper path sensor [2] falls and the sensor detects that the
sheet is gone. The fold rollers feed the folded sheet to the lower exit rollers [3].
The lower exit sensor [4] detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the sheet. If
the trailing edge is not detected during the correct time interval, the sensor detects
a jam.
The grip rollers [5] feed the folded sheet to the four pairs of vertical feed rollers [6].
The upper exit sensor [7] detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each folded
sheet. If the leading and trailing edge are not detected during the correct time
interval, this sensor detects a jam.
The upper exit rollers [8] feed the folded sheet into the finisher.
At the correct time:
• The upper stopper motor lifts the upper stopper [9] until the upper stopper sensor
[10] detects that the upper stopper is at its home position. This stops the motor.
• The lower stopper motor lowers the lower stopper [11] until the lower stopper
sensor [12] detects that the lower stopper is at its home position. This stops the
motor.
SM 25 B660
DETAILS
3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
13
12 2
3
11
10
9
B660D103.WMF 4
8 7 6 5
1. Feed Motor 8. 1st Fold Roller
2. Feed Rollers 9. Vertical Feed Rollers – 1
3. Fold Roller Motor 10. Vertical Feed Rollers – 2
4. Lower Exit Rollers 11. Vertical Feed Rollers – 3
5. Grip Rollers 12. Vertical Feed Rollers – 4
6. 3rd Fold Roller 13. Upper Exit Rollers
7. 2nd Fold Roller
B660 26 SM
DETAILS
3.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.4.1 OVERVIEW 1
2
22
3
21
4
20
5
6
19 7
Z-Folding Unit
8
B660
9
18
10
17 11
12
16 15 14 13 B660D101A.WMF
1. Upper Exit Sensor 12. DC Relay Board
2. Front Door Sensor 13. Lower Stopper Motor
3. Junction Gate Solenoid 14. Relay
4. Feed Sensor 15. Breaker
5. Pinch Idle Roller Solenoid – Upper 16. Power Supply Unit
6. Pinch Idle Roller Solenoid – Lower 17. Surge Protector Board
7. Fold Timing Sensor 18. Leading Edge Sensor
8. Upper Stopper Motor 19. Main Control Board
9. Upper Stopper HP Sensor 20. Upper Stopper Path Sensor
10. Lower Exit Sensor 21. Fold Roller Motor
11. Lower Stopper HP Sensor 22. Feed Motor
SM 27 B660
DETAILS
3.4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY
Motors
No. Name Description
M1 Feed Motor Drives the feed rollers and exit rollers of the Z-folding unit.
M2 Fold Roller Motor Drives the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd fold rollers.
M3 Lower Stopper Raises and lowers the lower stopper. It 1) Raises the upper stopper to
Motor the proper position for the size of the paper selected for the job, and 2)
Lowers the lower stopper until the lower stopper sensor detects that the
lower stopper is at its home position where it remains until the start of
the next job.
M4 Upper Stopper Lowers and raises the upper stopper. It 1) Lowers the upper stopper to
Motor the proper position for the size of the paper selected for the job, and 2)
Raises the upper stopper until the upper stopper sensor detects that the
upper stopper is at its home position where it remains until the start of
the next job.
PCBs
No. Name Description
PCB1 Main Control Board Controls the operation of the Z-folding unit.
PCB2 PSU Supplies the dc power for the Z-folding unit.
PCB3 Surge Protector Board AC input and breaker relay board.
PCB4 DC Relay Board PSU DC output and DC motors and sensor relay board.
Sensors
No. Name Description
S1 Feed Sensor Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the sheet at the top
of the paper path before Z-Folding. When the feed sensor detects
the leading edge, it energizes the pinch idle roller solenoid. The
solenoid pulls the pinch idle roller away from the pinch feed roller
so the paper can fall below these opposing rollers.
S2 Fold Timing Sensor (1) Detects the leading edge of the sheet and energizes the pinch
idle roller solenoid (upper) to pull the pinch idle roller away from
the pinch feed roller so the sheet falls through the gap between
these rollers. (2) Detects the trailing edge of the sheet and
energizes the pinch idle roller solenoid (lower) to push the pinch
idle roller against the pinch feed roller.
S3 Front Door Sensor Detects when the top cover of the Z-folding unit is closed and
signals an alert that the cover is open. The unit cannot be used
until this cover is closed.
S4 Leading Edge Sensor Mounted above the lower stopper. The leading edge sensor 1)
detects the leading edge of the sheet when drops onto the lower
stopper, 2) detects the leading edge again when the paper is
pulled up into the nip of the 1st and 2nd fold rollers. If the leading
edge sensor does not detect the edge at the prescribed times, it
will signal an error.
S5 Lower Exit Sensor Mounted below the lower exit rollers. Detects the leading/trailing
edges of the folded sheet as it passes below. If these edges do
not pass at the times prescribed for the selected paper size, the
sensor will signal a jam alert.
S6 Lower Stopper HP Detects the lower stopper when it reaches its home position and
Sensor turns off the lower stopper motor.
S7 Upper Exit Sensor 1) Detects the leading/trailing edges of each sheet unfolded sheet
after it passes over the closed junction gate, 2) Detects the
leading/trailing edge of each folded sheet as it leaves the vertical
feed path below. If the edges do not go by for the time prescribed
for the paper size, the sensor will send a jam alert.
S8 Upper Stopper HP Detects the upper stopper when it reaches its home position and
B660 28 SM
DETAILS
Sensors
No. Name Description
Sensor turns off the upper stopper motor.
S9 Upper Stopper Path Mounted below the upper stopper. 1) When the feeler of the upper
Sensor stopper path sensor detects the paper when the crease of the first
fold stops at the upper stopper, it delays long enough so the
1st/2nd feed rollers can continue to rotate and buckle the trailing
edge of the paper below at the nip of the 2nd/3rd feed rollers, then
the sensor switches off the 1st/2nd feed rollers and switches on
the 2nd/3rd feed roller pair. The 2nd/3rd feed rollers pull the
buckle into the nip and create the 2nd crease. 2) Detects the
paper when it leaves the upper stopper path and signals an error if
the paper does not leave at the prescribed time.
Solenoids
No. Name Description
SOL1 Junction Gate Opens and closes the junction gate solenoid. When not
Solenoid energized, the junction gate remains closed and paper passes
over the back of the closed junction gate and through the Z-
folding unit. When energized it opens the junction gate which
guides paper down and into the paper path of the Z-folding unit.
SOL2 Pinch Idle Roller Attached to the pinch idle roller, this solenoid pushes the pinch
Solenoid idle roller and closes the gap between the pinch idle/pinch feed
Z-Folding Unit
(Lower) rollers when the fold timing sensor at the above the pinch idle
roller detects the trailing edge of the sheet so the rollers can
B660
pinch and stop the paper in the paper path.
SOL3 Pinch Idle Roller Attached to the pinch idle roller, this solenoid pulls the pinch idle
Solenoid roller away from the pinch feed roller when the feed sensor at
(Upper) the top of the Z-fold paper path detects the leading edge of the
sheet so the paper can drop between these opposing rollers.
Switches
No. Name Description
SW1 Breaker Opens and breaks the power circuit if the Z-folding unit
overheats.
Relays
No. Name Description
RA1 Relay Switch relay
SM 29 B660
FINISHER SR5000
B830
Finisher SR5000 (B830) REVISION HISTORY
Page Date Added/Updated/New
None
FINISHER B830
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 FRONT DOOR, INNER COVER .......................................................... 1
Front Door ................................................................................................ 1
Left Inner Cover ....................................................................................... 1
Inner Cover .............................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 SIDE TABLE AND UPPER TRAY ....................................................... 2
1.1.3 LEFT COVERS, REAR COVER .......................................................... 3
1.1.4 TOP COVER ....................................................................................... 3
1.1.5 SHIFT TRAY ........................................................................................ 3
1.1.6 JOGGER UNIT COVER ...................................................................... 4
1.2 ROLLERS ..................................................................................................... 5
1.2.1 DRAG ROLLER ................................................................................... 5
1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER ...................................................................... 6
1.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER ........................................................... 7
1.3 JOGGER FENCE ......................................................................................... 8
1.4 SENSORS .................................................................................................... 9
1.4.1 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS ............................................................... 9
1.4.2 EXIT GUIDE HP SENSOR ................................................................ 10
1.4.3 UPPER TRAY FULL AND EXIT SENSORS ...................................... 11
Upper Tray Full Sensor .......................................................................... 11
Upper Tray Exit Sensor.......................................................................... 11
1.4.4 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR ............................................................. 12
1.4.5 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS ........... 13
Entrance Sensor .................................................................................... 13
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor ................................................................ 13
1.4.6 MAIN BOARD, PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR ................................ 14
1.4.7 STAPLE TRIMMINGS HOPPER FULL SENSOR.............................. 16
1.4.8 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS............ 17
1.5 STAPLER ................................................................................................... 18
1.6 SHIFT TRAY............................................................................................... 19
1.6.1 SHIFT TRAY EXIT, SHIFT TRAY LIFT MOTOR ............................... 19
Shift Tray Exit Motor .............................................................................. 19
Shift Tray Lift Motor................................................................................ 20
1.6.2 DRAG ROLLER/DRAG DRIVE MOTORS,
DRAG DRIVE HP SENSOR ........................................................ 21
1.6.3 SHIFT MOTOR AND SENSORS ....................................................... 24
1.6.4 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR ........................................................ 25
1.6.5 JOGGER UNIT .................................................................................. 26
1.6.6 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR ................................................ 27
1.7 PUNCH UNIT ............................................................................................. 28
1.7.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT ................................................... 28
SM i B830
Front to Rear Adjustment ....................................................................... 28
Right to Left Adjustment......................................................................... 28
1.8 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT ..................................................................... 29
1.8.1 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT ............................................................ 29
1.8.2 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT PCB .................................................... 30
1.8.3 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT MOTORS............................................ 31
1.9 MOTORS .................................................................................................... 32
1.9.1 TRANSPORT MOTORS, EXIT GUIDE MOTOR ............................... 32
Upper Tray Transport Motor .................................................................. 32
Lower Transport Motor........................................................................... 33
Exit Guide Motor .................................................................................... 33
1.9.2 UPPER TRAY MOTORS ................................................................... 34
Upper Tray Exit Motor ............................................................................ 34
Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor ............................................................ 35
1.9.3 PRE-STACK MOTORS ..................................................................... 36
Pre-Stack Transport Motor..................................................................... 36
Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor .............................................................. 37
Pre-Stack Stopper Motor ....................................................................... 37
1.9.4 PUNCH MOTOR................................................................................ 38
Punch Motor .......................................................................................... 38
1.9.5 STAPLE MOTORS ............................................................................ 39
Staple Junction Gate Motor ................................................................... 39
Stapler Exit Motor .................................................................................. 40
2. SERVICE TABLES .........................................................................41
2.1 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................... 41
2.2 TEST POINTS ............................................................................................ 41
2.3 FUSES ....................................................................................................... 41
3. DETAILS.........................................................................................42
3.1 UPPER TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATES................................... 42
3.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING ........................................................................... 43
3.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING ..................................................... 44
3.4 STAPLING .................................................................................................. 45
3.5 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT .................................................................... 46
Side-to-Side ........................................................................................... 46
Rotation (1) ............................................................................................ 47
Rotation (2) ............................................................................................ 47
3.6 STAPLER ................................................................................................... 48
3.7 FEED-OUT ................................................................................................. 50
3.8 PAPER EXIT STACKING ........................................................................... 51
3.9 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION......................................................................... 52
3.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 52
3.9.2 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAND-BY MODE ................................ 54
3.9.3 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: SHIFT MODE ........................................ 55
3.9.4 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAPLE MODE .................................... 56
3.9.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: Z-FOLDED PAPER ............................... 57
3.9.6 SHIFT TRAY FULL AND NEAR-FULL DETECTION ......................... 58
3.10 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT .............................................. 59
B830 ii SM
3.11 PUNCH UNIT ........................................................................................... 60
3.11.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE....................................................................... 60
3.11.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ...................................................... 61
3.12 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT ................................................................... 62
3.12.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT ........................................ 62
3.12.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE .................................................................... 63
4. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ...........................................64
4.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................... 64
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 65
4.2.1 MAIN DRIVE ...................................................................................... 65
4.2.2 STAPLING TRAY DRIVE .................................................................. 66
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................... 67
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY ................................................... 70
SM iii B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 COVERS
[A]
[D]
Finisher
B830
[C]
[B]
B830R901.WMF
B830R902.WMF
1.1.1 FRONT DOOR, INNER COVER
Front Door
1. Remove the front door screw [A] ( x 1).
2. Remove the front door [B].
Left Inner Cover
1. Remove the front door.
2. Remove the left inner cover [C] ( x 1).
Inner Cover
1. Remove the inner cover [D] ( x 3).
SM 1 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1.2 SIDE TABLE AND UPPER TRAY
[C]
[B]
[A]
B830R903.WMF
1. Remove the side table [A] ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove it.
2. Click the release lever [B] and remove the upper tray [C].
B830 2 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[D]
[E]
[A]
[H]
[F]
[G]
[B]
[C]
B830R504.WMF
B830R904.WMF
Finisher
1.1.3 LEFT COVERS, REAR COVER
B830
Remove:
• Shift tray jogger unit (
1.8.1)
• Remove the door and left inner cover. (
1.1.1)
[A] Remove the left upper cover ( x 2,
x 2).
[B] Remove the rear cover ( x 2).
[C] Remove the left lower cover ( x 4).
1.1.4 TOP COVER
Remove:
• Side table, upper tray (
1.1.2)
[D] Step screws ( x 2).
[E] Top cover ( x 2). Slide to the right to remove.
1.1.5 SHIFT TRAY
• If you need to lower the shift tray, support the bottom of the tray with your hand,
then pull the gear toward you to release the tray and lower it.
Remove:
[F] Remove the shift tray ( x 4).
[G] Shift tray rear cover ( x 1)
[H] Shift tray front cover [H] ( x 1).
SM 3 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1.6 JOGGER UNIT COVER
[B]
[A]
B830Ｒ101.WMF
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the stapler tray unit [A].
3. Remove the jogger unit cover [B] ( x2)
B830 4 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.2 ROLLERS
1.2.1 DRAG ROLLER
[A]
[B]
Finisher
B830
[C]
B830R905.WMF
1. Above the shift tray, pull the roller mount [A] out.
2. Remove the rollers [B] and [C] ( x 1 each)
SM 5 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER
[C]
[B]
[A] B830R906.WMF
1. Remove the jogger unit cover ( 1.1.6)
2. Remove the snap ring [A].
3. Release the rubber belt [B].
4. Replace the positioning roller [C].
B830 6 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.2.3 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
B830R507.WMF
[H] [G]
[E]
Finisher
B830
[I] [F]
B830R907.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the staple unit.
2. Remove the rear cover.
3. Remove the main board bracket and all connectors ( x 8). (
1.4.6)
4. Remove the screw [A] and tension spring [B] for the tension bracket [C], and
release the tension of the timing belt.
5. Remove the pulley [D] and bearing [E].
6. Remove the inner cover [F] ( x 1).
7. Open the guide [G], then remove the alignment brush roller assembly [H].
8. Remove the alignment brush roller [I] ( x2, Bearing x 1 front/back, x1).
SM 7 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.3 JOGGER FENCE
[B] [A]
B830R909.WMF
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the jogger and stapler unit.
3. Push both fences to the center.
4. Remove the left jogger fence [A] ( x 1)
5. Remove the right jogger fence [B] ( x 1).
NOTE: If the screws are difficult to remove or re-attach, remove the jogger
fence belt and spring plate.
B830 8 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4 SENSORS
1.4.1 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS
[C]
[D]
[F]
Finisher
B830
[B] [E]
[A] B830R509.WMF
Remove:
• Top cover. (
1.1.1)
• Left upper panel and left upper cover ( x 2,
x 2) (
1.1.3)
[A] Protector plate ( x 1).
[B] Feeler ( x 1).
[C] Sensor bracket ( x 1).
[D] Paper height sensor – staple mode (
x 1, Pawls x4)
[E] Paper height sensor – standby mode (
x 1, Pawls x4)
[F] Paper height sensor – shift/Z-Fold(
x 1, Pawls x4).
SM 9 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4.2 EXIT GUIDE HP SENSOR
1. Remove the top cover. ( 1.1.1)
2. Remove the left upper panel and left upper cover ( x 2, x 2).
3. Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
[A]
B830R980.BMP
[B] Exit guide HP sensor ( x 1,
Pawls x3).
[B]
B830R981.BMP
B830 10 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4.3 UPPER TRAY FULL AND EXIT SENSORS
[D]
[C]
[B] [E]
[A]
Finisher
B830
B830R510.WMF
Upper Tray Full Sensor
1. Remove the top cover.
2. Remove the sensor cover [A] ( x 2).
3. Remove the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1).
4. Replace the upper tray full sensor [C] ( x 1, x1).
Upper Tray Exit Sensor
5. Remove the sensor bracket [D] ( x 1).
6. Replace the upper tray exit sensor [E] ( x 1, x 1).
SM 11 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4.4 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR
Remove the top cover ( 1.1.4)
Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket ( x1)
[A]
B830R982.BMP
[B] Shift tray exit sensor 1 ( x1, x1)
[B]
B830R983.BMP
[C] Shift tray exit sensor 2 ( x1, x1)
[C]
B830R984.BMP
B830 12 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4.5 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS
[B]
[A]
B830R985.WMF
[D]
Finisher
B830
[C]
B830R986.WMF
Entrance Sensor
1. Disconnect the finisher from the copier.
2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
3. Replace the entrance sensor [B] ( x 1) (
x 1).
Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove the sensor bracket [C] ( x 1).
3. Replace the stapler tray entrance sensor [D] ( x 1)(
x 1).
SM 13 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4.6 MAIN BOARD, PRE-STACK PAPER SENSOR
{
~
}
B830R987.BMP
1. Remove the rear cover. ( 1.1.4)
2. Remove the main board bracket ( x 4, = x8, x All).
3. Open the front door.
B830 14 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[C]
B830R516.WMF
[G]
Loosen the screw [A] ( x1)
Finisher
Remove:
B830
[B] Gear cover ( x1)
[C] Gear ( x1, Timing belt x1) [F]
[D] Gear ( x1)
[E] Plate ( x2)
[F] Left vertical transport guide
[G] Middle vertical transport guide
[H] Pre-stack paper sensor (
x1)
[H]
B830R516A.WMF
SM 15 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4.7 STAPLE TRIMMINGS HOPPER FULL SENSOR
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B830R988.BMP
B830R989.BMP
• Open the front door
• Pull out the stapler unit
• Remove the rear cover ( x 2).
Remove:
[A] Staple trimmings hopper
[B] Hopper holder (= x1, Hook x1, x1)
[C] Hopper full sensor ( x 1)
[D] Hopper set sensor ( x 1)
B830 16 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4.8 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS
[C]
[A]
Finisher
[B]
B830
B830R990.WMF
1. Remove the stapler unit. (See next page.)
2. Remove the stapler mount bracket [A] ( x 4) (Springs x 2).
3. Replace the stapler rotation HP sensor [B] ( x 1).
4. Replace the stapler return sensor [C] ( x 1).
SM 17 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.5 STAPLER
[B]
[A] B830R518.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the staple tray.
2. Remove the stapler unit harness cover [A] ( x 2).
3. Lift the stapler [B] off of its pegs (
x 2)
4. Remove plate [C] ( x 2).
5. Attach this plate to the new stapler with the
same screws ( x 2)
[C]
B830R421.BMP
6. Replace the frame guard [D] with the one
provided with the new stapler.
[D]
B830R422.BMP
B830 18 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6 SHIFT TRAY
1.6.1 SHIFT TRAY EXIT, SHIFT TRAY LIFT MOTOR
Finisher
B830
B830R901.BMP
{ Shift Tray Exit Motor
| Shift Tray Lift Motor
Shift Tray Exit Motor [A]
• Rear cover ( 1.1.4)
[A] Shift tray exit motor bracket
( x2, x1, = X1, Timing belt x1)
[B] Shift tray exit motor ( x2)
[B]
B830R940.BMP
SM 19 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Shift Tray Lift Motor
[B]
[A]
[C]
B830R946.BMP
B830R947.BMP
• Rear cover ( 1.1.4)
[A] Gear cover ( x2)
[B] Shift tray lift motor bracket ( x2)
[C] Shift tray lift motor ( x,2 x1, Timing belt x1)
B830 20 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6.2 DRAG ROLLER/DRAG DRIVE MOTORS, DRAG DRIVE HP
SENSOR
[A]
[B]
Finisher
B830
B830R526.WMF
Remove:
• Front door and all covers, except the left lower cover, top cover (
1.1)
NOTE: Be sure to lower the shift tray by pulling the gear toward you. The shift
tray must be down.
1. Remove the left stay [A] (x 2)
2. Remove the shift tray mounting plate [B] ( x 2).
SM 21 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
B830R527.WMF
B830R991.WMF
3. Remove the end fence [A] and plate ( x8, = x6,
x2).
4. Remove cover [B] ( x 4).
5. Remove the motor stay [C] ( x4, = x7,
x4).
NOTE: Make sure the motor and sensor connectors are disconnected before
removing.
B830 22 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
B830R992.BMP
Finisher
B830
6. Remove the drag roller motor unit [A] (Bearing x1, x2, = x1)
7. Remove the drag roller motor ( x2)
8. Remove the drag roller HP sensor unit [B] ( x1)
9. Remove the drag roller HP sensor (
x1, Pawls x3)
10. Remove the paper height sensor – shift/Z-fold unit [C] ( x2, = x2)
11. Remove the paper height sensor shift/Z-fold (
x1, Pawls x3)
12. Remove the drag drive motor unit (= x4,
x2)
13. Remove the drag drive motor (
x2)
SM 23 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6.3 SHIFT MOTOR AND SENSORS
[A]
[C]
[B]
B830R950.BMP
[D]
B830R951.BMP
1. Remove the end fence ( 1.6.2)
2. Remove the shift motor bracket [A] (with motor) ( x 4, = x1, x1)
3. Remove the shift motor ( x4)
4. Remove the half-turn sensor bracket [B] ( x 1)
5. Remove half-turn sensor 1 [C] ( x1, Pawls x3)
6. Remove half-turn sensor 2 [D] ( x1, Pawls x3)
B830 24 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6.4 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR
[A]
[B]
Finisher
B830
B830Ｒ102.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit. (
1.1.6)
2. Remove the jogger unit cover ( x2)
3. Remove the motor bracket [A] ( x2, timing belt x1)
4. Remove the jogger top fence motor [B] ( x2 = x1
x1)
SM 25 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6.5 JOGGER UNIT
[A]
B830Ｒ103.WMF
1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the jogger unit cover ( x2)
3. Remove the jogger unit [A] ( x4, = x5,
x5)
B830 26 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6.6 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR
[A]
Finisher
B830R993.BMP
B830
1. Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit.
2. Remove the jogger bottom fence motor unit [A] ( x3, timing belt x1, = x1,
x1).
SM 27 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.7 PUNCH UNIT
1.7.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT
[A]
B830R994.WMF
The position of the punched holes can be adjusted in two ways.
Front to Rear Adjustment
Three spacers [A] are provided with the punch unit for manual adjustment of the
hole position in the main scan direction:
• 2 mm (x 1)
• 1 mm (x 2)
NOTE: One spacer was installed at installation and the remaining spacers were
fastened with a screw to the rear frame of the finisher under the rear cover
and slightly above the lock bar.
Right to Left Adjustment
The position of the punched holes can be adjusted right to left in the sub scan
direction with SP6101 Punch Hole Position Adjustment. The position can be
adjusted in the range ±7.5 mm in 0.5 mm steps. The default setting is 0.
Press the key to toggle the ± selection. A +ve value shifts the punch holes left
toward the edge of the paper, and a -ve value shifts the holes right away from the
edge.
B830 28 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.8 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT
1.8.1 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT
[A]
Finisher
B830
B830R995.WMF
[B]
B830R996.WMF
1. Remove the jogger unit cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Remove the jogger unit [B] ( x 2, x 1).
SM 29 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.8.2 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT PCB
[A]
B830R001B.WMF
1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. ( 1.8.1)
2. Remove the jogger unit control PCB [A] ( x 2, x 3)
B830 30 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.8.3 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT MOTORS
[A]
[B]
B830R997.WMF
Finisher
B830
1. Remove the jogger unit from the finisher. (
1.8.1)
2. Remove the shift tray jogger motor [A] ( x 2,
x 1).
3. Remove the shift tray jogger retraction motor [B] ( x 2,
x 1).
SM 31 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.9 MOTORS
1.9.1 TRANSPORT MOTORS, EXIT GUIDE MOTOR
B830R901.BMP
{ Upper Transport Motor
| Lower Transport Motor
Upper Tray Transport Motor
• Rear cover ( 1.1.4)
[A] Upper transport motor ( x4, x1)
[A]
B830R905.BMP
B830 32 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Lower Transport Motor
• Rear cover ( 1.1.4)
[A] Lower transport motor ( x4, x1)
[A]
B830R906.BMP
Exit Guide Motor
Finisher
B830
[A]
[B]
B830R955.BMP
B830R956.BMP
• Top cover ( 1.1.4)
[A] Bracket ( x2, x1)
[B] Exit guide motor ( x2, x1, Timing belt x1)
SM 33 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT Rev. 09/2006
1.9.2 UPPER TRAY MOTORS
B830R901.BMP
{ Upper Tray Exit Motor
| Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor
Upper Tray Exit Motor
⇒
B830R910.BMP
• Rear cover ( 1.1.4)
[A] Motor bracket ( x2, x1) [A]
[B] Upper tray exit motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
[B]
B830 34 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor
• Rear cover ( 1.1.4) [A]
[A] Upper tray junction gate motor( x2, = x1)
B830R911.BMP
Finisher
B830
SM 35 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.9.3 PRE-STACK MOTORS
{ |
B830R902.BMP
The photograph above shows the main control board removed ( x4, x All).
{ Pre-Stack Transport Motor
| Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor
} Pre-Stack Stopper Motor
Pre-Stack Transport Motor
• Rear cover ( 1.1.4)
• Main control board bracket
( x4, x All, = x8)
• Motor unit ( x2, x1)
[A] Pre-stack transport motor ( x2)
[A]
B830R920.BMP
B830 36 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor
• Rear cover ( 1.1.4)
• Main control board bracket
( x4, x All, = x8)
[A] Pre-stack junction gate motor ( x2, = x1, x1)
[A
B830R921.BMP
Pre-Stack Stopper Motor
• Rear cover ( 1.1.4)
• Main control board bracket ( x4, x All, = x8)
Finisher
[B]
B830
[A] Pre-stack stopper motor ( x2, = x1,
x1)
[A]
B830R922.BMP
SM 37 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.9.4 PUNCH MOTOR
B830R901.BMP
{ Punch Motor
Punch Motor
• Rear cover (
1.1.4)
[A] Punch motor bracket ( x3, = x2,
x1,
[A]
Timing belt x1)
[B] Punch motor ( x2)
[B]
B830R925.BMP
B830 38 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.9.5 STAPLE MOTORS
*
Finisher
B830R901.BMP
B830
{ Staple Junction Gate Motor
Staple Junction Gate Motor
• Rear cover ( 1.1.4)
[A] Staple junction gate motor ( x2, = x1, x1)
[A]
B830R930.BMP
SM 39 B830
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Stapler Exit Motor
B830R931.BMP
B830R932.BMP
{ Stapler Exit Motor
• Main control board bracket ( x4, = x 8, x All)
1. Remove the stapler exit motor { ( x2 , , x2, Timing belt x1)
B830 40 SM
SERVICE TABLES
2. SERVICE TABLES
For details about 3000-Sheet Finisher B830 SP codes, please refer to “5. Service
Tables” in the main machine service manual.
2.1 DIP SWITCHES
DIP SW100
This DIP SW100 settings are for designer and factory use only. Do not change
them.
DIP SW 101: 1 to 4
DPS100
Description
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Default
1 0 0 0 Free run: 135 ppm (649 mm/s) A4 LEF, 5 sheets
0 1 0 0 Proof tray free run for durability testing: proof tray + punch +
junction gate operation + proof tray output.:
Finisher
0 0 1 0 Shift free run: Shift mode simulation 136 ppm (649 mm/s) A4
B830
SEF, 5 sheets, continuous punching 110 ppm (515mm/s)
0 0 0 1 Sensor check before shipping, lowering the tray before shipping.
DFU. Do not change.
2.2 TEST POINTS
100 to 110
No. Label Monitored Signal Comment
TP100 (5V) +5 V Used for sensor point testing,
TP101 (GND) Ground lowering the tray to shipping
TP102 (RXD) RXD position. DFU.
TP103 (TXD) TXD
2.3 FUSES
No. Function
FU100 Protects 24 V.
SM 41 B830
DETAILS
3. DETAILS
3.1 UPPER TRAY AND STAPLER JUNCTION GATES
Upper Tray Mode
[B]
[A]
B830D506B.WMF
Sort/Stack Mode Staple Mode [D]
[C]
[B]
[C]
B830D505B.WMF B830D507B.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combinations of open and closed junction gates.
Selected Operation Mode
Solenoid/Gate
Upper Tray Sort/Stack Staple
[A] Upper tray junction gate motor ON Off Off
[B] Upper tray junction gate OPEN Closed Closed
[C] Stapler junction gate Closed Closed OPEN
[D] Stapler junction gate motor Off Off ON
B830 42 SM
DETAILS
3.2 PAPER PRE-STACKING
2 2 2 2
1 1
3 3 3 3
B830D901A
B830D901A.WMF
[A] [B] [C] [D] [E] [F] [G]
Sequence 1
The first three sheets of each job feed to trays { Æ | Æ } ([A], [B], [C]), then the
first three sheets feed together to the staple tray [D].
Sequence 2
Finisher
B830
Thereafter, the remaining sheets feed to trays | Æ } ([E], [F]), then the two sheets
feed together to the staple tray [G]. Sequence 2 continues until the end of the job.
Junction gate mechanism:
• Three junction gates at the top of the pre-stack tray send the sheet of paper
down path , , or .
• The pre-stack junction gate motor controls the junction gates.
• The pre-stack junction gate HP sensor detects when the junction gates are at
home position.
• The pre stack paper sensor – left detects paper jams in path .
• The pre stack paper sensor – right detects paper jams in path .
Stopper mechanism:
• The pre-stack stopper releases the three sheets of paper from the pre-stack tray
after the previous set is stapled.
• The pre-stack stopper motor controls the stopper at the bottom of the tray.
• The pre-stack stopper HP sensor detects when the stopper is at home position.
SM 43 B830
DETAILS
3.3 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING
[C] [B]
[A]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[J]
[I]
[H] B830D508.WMF
In the staple mode, as every sheet of paper arrives in the jogger unit, it is vertically
and horizontally aligned, then the staple edge is pressed flat to ensure the edge of
the stack is aligned correctly for stapling.
Vertical Paper Alignment: About 60 ms after the trailing edge of the copy passes
the staple tray entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller motor [B] is energized to
push the positioning roller [C] into contact with the paper. The positioning roller and
alignment brush roller [D] rotate to push the paper back and align the trailing edge
of the paper against the stack stopper [E].
Horizontal Paper Alignment: When the print key is pressed, the jogger motor [F]
turns on and the jogger fences [G] move to the wait position about 7.2 mm wider
than the selected paper size on both sides. When the trailing edge of the paper
passes the staple tray entrance sensor, the jogger motor moves the jogger fences
3.7 mm towards the paper. Next, the jogger motor turns on again for 3.5 mm for the
horizontal paper alignment then goes back to the wait position.
Paper Stack Correction: After the paper is aligned in the stapler tray, the left [H],
center [I], and right [J] stack plate motors switch on briefly and drive the front stack,
center stack, and rear stack plates against the edge of the stack to flatten the edge
completely against the staple tray for stapling. When the next copy paper turns on
the stapler entrance sensor, the stack plate motors turn on and return to their home
positions. The home positions are detected by stack plate HP sensors , , .
B830 44 SM
DETAILS
3.4 STAPLING
|
2
5
}
3
~
4
Finisher
B830
{1
B830D004.WMF
B830D005.WMF
Here is the operation sequence for jogging and stapling:
① The lower jogger fence lifts to receive the sheets.
② The top fence moves down, to the horizontal position.
③ A sheet of paper goes into the stapler tray.
④ The positioning roller turns when each sheet is fed to the stapler tray.
⑤ Each sheet is fed down against the lower jogger fence to align the bottom edge.
⑥ After the set number of sheets come in, the top fence motor switches on and lowers
the top fence against the top of the stack. This aligns the stack for stapling.
⑦ The bottom fence motor lowers the aligned stack to the stapling position.
⑧ The stapler staples the stack.
SM 45 B830
DETAILS
3.5 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT
[A]
[B]
B830D513.WMF
[C]
Side-to-Side
The stapler motor [A] moves the stapler [B] from side to side. After the start key is
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, for the first stack the stapler moves to the
rear stapling position first, staples, moves to the front position, staples and waits at
the front. For the second stack, the stapler staples the front corner first, then moves
to the rear corner and staples.
NOTE: For continuous stapling jobs, the corners are stapled rear then front for the
odd number stacks and stapled front then rear for even number stacks.
After the job is completed, the stapler returns to its home position. This is detected
by the stapler HP sensor [C].
B830 46 SM
DETAILS
[E]
[D]
[A]
[B] B830D514.WMF
[C] B830D515.WMF
Rotation (1)
Finisher
B830
In the oblique staple position mode, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the
stapler unit [B] 45° to counterclockwise after it moves to the stapling position.
Rotation (2)
When the staple end condition arises, the stapler motor moves the stapler to the
front and the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove
the staple cartridge [C]. This allows the user to add new staples.
Once the staples have been installed, and the front door closed, the stapler unit
returns to its home position.
Sensors
Two sensors [D] and [E] detect the angle of the stapler. There are three positions:
horizontal, 45 degrees, 75 degrees.
SM 47 B830
DETAILS
3.6 STAPLER
[A] [E]
[D]
[B]
[F]
[C]
B830D516.WMF B830D522.WMF
[H]
[G]
When the stapler cartridge is locked and in position, actuator [A] deactivates the
cartridge set sensor [B] and the stapler is ready for operation.
When aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the positioning roller
and jogger fences, the staple hammer motor [C] starts stapling.
During stapling, the stapler trims off the excess length of the staples. This length of
the trimmings depends on the number of copies in the set. They will be very small
for a stack containing 100 sheets.
The staple trimmings drop into the trap door [D] inside the stapler. When the
stapler unit returns to its home position, solenoid {E} energizes opens the trap door.
The staple trimmings drop into the staple trimmings hopper [F].
The staple trimmings hopper descends as it fills, until actuator [G] activates the
staple trimmings hopper full sensor [H]. A message asks the user to empty the
staple trimmings.
B830 48 SM
DETAILS
[C]
[B]
[E]
[A]
B830D518.WMF
[D]
Finisher
B830
B830D517.WMF
The stapler has a staple end sensor [A] and cartridge set sensor [B]. When the
staple cartridge is inserted, it pushes the actuator [C] into the gap of the cartridge
set sensor. This tells the machine the stapler is ready for operation.
When a staple end or no cartridge condition is detected, a message is displayed
advising the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is detected during
a copy job, the indication will appear, and the copy job will stop.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [D] where jammed staples collect. The
operator can remove the jammed staples from the clinch area by raising and
lowering bracket lever [E].
SM 49 B830
DETAILS
3.7 FEED-OUT
[G] [D]
[A]
[B] [E]
[H]
[C] [F]
B830D920.WMF
[I]
B830D512.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts.
The pawl [B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up
and feeds it to the shift tray exit roller [D].
When stapling starts, the exit guide motor [E] opens the upper exit guide [F], which
includes the upper shift tray exit roller [G], in order to feed out the leading edge of
the copy set smoothly.
The exit guide motor turns on again at the prescribed time after stapling finishes,
and the upper exit guide plate is lowered. Then the shift tray exit roller takes over
the stack feed-out.
The on-off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by the exit guide open sensor
[H].
The stack-feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt
home position sensor [I].
B830 50 SM
DETAILS
3.8 PAPER EXIT STACKING
[A]
[B]
[F] [E]
[C]
[D]
[G] [H] [I]
B830D524.WMF
Finisher
B830
The drag roller assembly [A] is fastened to a plate [B] on a shaft by a spring [C].
The cam [D], in contact with the bottom of the plate, is connected to the drag drive
motor [E] via a timing belt.
The drag drive motor and timing belt rotate the cam against the bottom of the plate
to move the rollers forward and back with each sheet ejected onto the shift tray.
The drag roller motor [F] drives the shaft [G] that rotates the drag rollers counter-
clockwise as the rollers move back. The simultaneous rotation and backward
movement of the roller assembly pulls each sheet back toward the copier to align
the edges of the stack on the shift tray.
The actuator [H] is mounted on the cam and rotating with both rotating clockwise)
and detects the roller assembly home position when the actuator leaves the gap of
the drag drive HP sensor [I] and signals the machine that the rollers are at the
home position. The machine uses this information to control paper feed timing and
confirm that the mechanism is operating correctly. The cam and actuator make one
complete rotation for every sheet fed out of the machine onto the shift tray.
SM 51 B830
DETAILS
3.9 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION
3.9.1 OVERVIEW
[C] [B]
[A]
[D]
B830D010.WMF
The movement of the shift tray is controlled by four sensors , ,, and and a
feeler [A] with two actuators [B] and [C].
• The notched actuator [B] is used with sensors and .
• The flat actuator [C] is used with sensor .
• Sensor is provided with its own actuator [D].
The operation mode determines which parts are used to control the movement of
the shift tray.
Sensor Names
No. Name
Paper Height Sensor – Staple Mode
Paper Height Sensor – Standby Mode
Paper Height Sensor – Z-Fold Full
Paper Height Sensor – Shift/Z-Fold
B830 52 SM
DETAILS
Finisher
B830
B830D010.WMF
Sensors and Operation Modes
Mode Function
Shift Sensor detects the amount of paper on the shift tray in shift mode to
control operation of the tray lift motor.
Staple Sensor detects the amount of paper on the shift tray in staple mode
to control the tray lift motor.
Standby • When the machine is turned on, Sensor is used to position the tray
at the standby position and keep it there when the shift is not in use
or when the upper tray (proof tray) is used.
• If the shift tray is not attached to the machine (if it has been removed
for servicing, for example), if the machine is switched on the tray
mount will push up the feeler and switch off Sensor to switch off
the tray lift motor. (Sensor cannot operate if the tray has been
removed.)
Z-Fold, Z-Fold • Sensor detects the height of the tray when the output includes Z-
Staple folded sheets with and without stapling.
• Sensor detects when the tray is full when the output includes Z-
folded sheets with and without stapling.
These operations are described in more detail in the following sections.
SM 53 B830
DETAILS
3.9.2 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAND-BY MODE
[B] [A]
B830D010.WMF
Standby Mode
When the machine is switched on:
1. The shift tray lift motor switches on and lowers the tray.
2. The feeler [A] descends and raises the hooked actuator [B] out of the gap of
Sensor and switches Sensor ON.
3. When Sensor switches ON this reverses the shift tray motor.
4. The shift tray motor raises the shift tray and pushes up the feeler, the actuator
descends into the gap of Sensor , and switches Sensor OFF
5. When Sensor switches OFF, this stops the shift tray lift motor with the shift
tray at the standby position.
This sequence repeats every time the machine is powered on.
Sensor also switches off the shift tray lift motor when the machine is switched on
with the shift tray removed for servicing. When the machine is switched on without
the shift tray attached to the side of the finisher:
1. The shift tray mount will push the feeler [A] up until the actuator [B] enters the
gap of Sensor and switches Sensor 2 ON.
2. When Sensor switches ON this switches the shift tray motor OFF and stops
the tray.
NOTE: Sensor cannot operate with the shift tray removed so Sensor is
used to switch off the shift tray motor and stop the shift tray mount.
B830 54 SM
DETAILS
3.9.3 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: SHIFT MODE
[A]
Finisher
B830
[B]
B830D010.WMF
Sensor and its feeler [A] and actuator [B] control the movement of the shift tray
when paper is output in the sort/stack mode:
1. Paper is output to the tray.
2. As the height of the stack increases, this pushes up the feeler [A].
3. When the actuator [B] of the ascending feeler actuates Sensor , this switches
the sensor OFF and switches the tray lift motor ON.
4. The tray lift motor lowers the tray until the feeler descends far enough to raise
the actuator out of the gap of Sensor .
5. When the actuator leaves the gap of Sensor , this switches Sensor ON,
switches the motor OFF, and stops the tray.
The sequence repeats until the end of the job or until the tray becomes full.
(
3.9.6)
SM 55 B830
DETAILS
3.9.4 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAPLE MODE
[B]
[A]
B830D010A.WMF
Sensor , feeler [A] and its notched actuator [B] control the movement of the shift
tray when paper is output to the shift tray in the staple mode:
1. A stapled stack is output to the tray.
2. The tray lift motor switches ON and lowers the tray the prescribed distance.
3. Next, the tray lift motor raises the tray and feeler [A] until actuator [B] leaves the
gap of Sensor .
4. When the actuator [b] leaves the gap of sensor , this switches Sensor OFF
and switches the tray lift motor OFF.
This sequence repeats every time a stack is output to the tray until the end of the
job or until the tray becomes full. (
3.9.6)
B830 56 SM
DETAILS
3.9.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: Z-FOLDED PAPER
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
Finisher
B830
B830D010.WMF
Sensor and its feeler [A] and actuator [B], and Sensor with its feeler [C] and
flat actuator [D] control the movement of the shift tray when Z-folded paper is
output to the shift tray.
1. Z-folded paper is output to the tray.
2. As the height of the stack increases, this pushes up feeler [A] of Sensor .
3. When the actuator [B] of the ascending feeler enters the gap of Sensor , this
switches the sensor OFF and switches the tray lift motor ON.
4. The tray lift motor lowers the tray until the feeler descends far enough to raise
the actuator out of the gap of Sensor .
5. When the actuator leaves the gap of Sensor , this switches Sensor ON,
switches the motor OFF, and stops the tray.
6. Steps 1 to 5 repeat until the top of the paper stack pushes feeler [C] up and
actuator [C] into the gap of Sensor .
7. When the actuator enters the gap of Sensor , this switches the sensor off and
switches Sensor OFF, signals that the tray is full and stops the job.
SM 57 B830
DETAILS
3.9.6 SHIFT TRAY FULL AND NEAR-FULL DETECTION
[A]
[D]
B830D010.WMF
[C]
[B]
This machine has two shift tray full sensors: the shift tray full sensor (large paper)
[A] for B4 and larger, and the shift tray full sensor [B] for small paper (smaller than
B4).
NOTE: Sensor [C] (S20) is the near-full sensor.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [A] while using large paper (about 1500
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
When the actuator [D] enters sensor [B] while using small paper (about 3,000
sheets are on the tray), a message will be displayed and copying will stop.
B830 58 SM
DETAILS
3.10 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT
[D]
[A] [F]
[G]
[C]
[E]
[B] B830D520.WMF
Finisher
B830
In sort/stack mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of
copies.
The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor [B] and shift
gear disk [C]. After one set of copies is made and delivered to the shift tray, the
shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the shaft [D]. The end fence [E]
is positioned by the shaft, creating the side-to-side movement.
The next set of copies is then delivered. The motor turns on, repeating the same
process and moving the tray back to the previous position.
The disk is rotated alternately clockwise and counter-clockwise through an arc of
180 degrees.
The notches cut into the shift gear disk control the operation of the shift motor,
using shift tray half-turn sensors [F] and [G].
If the job ends with the disk at with only one sensor deactivated, the motor
rotates the disk to the position where both sensors are deactivated. This is the
home position.
SM 59 B830
DETAILS
3.11 PUNCH UNIT
3.11.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE
[A] [C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
B830D102.WMF
The punch unit makes 2 or 3 holes at the trailing edge of the paper. The number of
holes depends on a selection made on the operation panel.
The cam [A] has 2 punches on one side and 3 punches on the other, and is turned
by the punch motor [B]. The punch motor turns on immediately after the trailing
edge of the paper passes the entrance sensor. The punches on the cam rotate
downward and punch holes in the paper.
After punching a sheet of paper, the cam returns to home position and stops.
Home position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are being made, so there
are two punch HP sensors. Punch HP sensor 1 [C] is used when 2-hole punching
is selected, and punch HP sensor 2 [D] is used when 3-hole punching is selected.
When the cut-out [E] enters the slot of the punch HP in use (sensor 1 or 2-hole
punching) the motor stops.
The knob (not shown) on the front end of the punch unit can be turned in either
direction to clear paper jammed in the punch unit.
B830 60 SM
DETAILS
3.11.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION
[A]
[B]
[C]
Finisher
B830
B830D103.WMF
Punch waste is collected in the punch waste hopper [A] positioned under the punch
unit.
When the level of the punch waste in the hopper rises as far as the hole [B] in the
hopper, the punch hopper full sensor [C] turns on, stops the job, and triggers a
message on the operation to indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed
and emptied.
The job resumes automatically after the hopper is emptied and returned to the
finisher.
The punch hopper full sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor. When the
hopper is not in the finisher, or if it is not inserted completely, the spring loaded
sensor arm rotates up and to the right with the punch waste sensor away from the
hole in the hopper holder and a message is displayed. The message in this case is
the same as the hopper full message.
SM 61 B830
DETAILS
3.12 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT
3.12.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT
1 2
B830D003.WMF
1. Shift Tray Jogger Retraction Motor
2. Shift Tray Jogger Motor Timing Belt
3. Shift Tray Jogger Motor
4. Shift Tray Jogger Fence Timing Belt
5. Shift Tray Jogger Fences
6. Shift Tray Jogger HP Sensor
7. Shift Tray Jogger Lift HP Sensor
B830 62 SM
DETAILS
3.12.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE
[C]
[H]
[B] [A]
[D]
[I]
[J]
[G]
[F]
[E]
Finisher
B830
B830D002.WMF
After the first sheet exits, the shift tray jogger motor [A] switches on and rotates the
jogger timing belt [B], gear [C] and jogger fence timing belt [D]. This closes the
jogger fences [E] against the sides of the first sheet to align it and stops. Next, the
motor reverses to open the fences for the next sheet. The jogger motor alternates
its direction of rotation to open and close the jogger fences. The timing is
prescribed by the width of the paper selected for the job.
At the end of the job, the actuator [F] activates the shift tray jogger HP sensor [G]
which shuts off the jogger motor and starts the jogger fence retraction motor [H].
The jogger fence retraction motor rotates the shaft which raises the jogger fences
and lowers the actuator [I] into the slot of the jogger fence retraction HP sensor [J].
The activated sensor turns off the jogger fence retraction motor and the jogger
fences remain at the raised position.
SM 63 B830
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
4. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
4.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
21
20 8
9
19
10
18
17 11
16
15 12
13
14
B830V500.WMF
1. Upper Tray 12. Stack Plate
2. Middle Transport Rollers 13. Stapler
3. Upper Tray Exit Roller 14. Staple Trimmings Hopper
4. Upper Transport Rollers 15. Alignment Brush Roller
5. Upper Tray Junction Gate 16. Positioning Roller
6. Stapler Junction Gate 17. Stack Feed-out Belt
7. Entrance Rollers 18. Shift Tray Drive Belt
8. Punch Unit 19. Lower Transport Rollers
9. Pre-stack Junction Gates (x2) 20. Shift Tray
10. Punch Waste Hopper 21. Shift Tray Exit Roller
11. Pre-stack Tray
B830 64 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
4.2.1 MAIN DRIVE
1 2 3 4
Finisher
B830
5
B830V503.WMF
1. Upper Transport Motor
2. Upper Tray Exit Motor
3. Shift Tray Lift Motor
4. Shift Tray Exit Motor
5. Stapler Exit Motor
6. Pre-Stack Transport Motor
7. Lower Transport Motor
SM 65 B830
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
4.2.2 STAPLING TRAY DRIVE
1 2 3
10 9 8 B830V504.WMF
1. Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
2. Jogger Motor
3. Top Fence Motor
4. Positioning Roller Drive Motor
5. Positioning Roller Motor
6. Stack Plate Motor (Rear)
7. Stapler Movement Motor
8. Stack Plate Motor (Center)
9. Stack Plate Motor (Front)
10. Stapler Rotation Motor
B830 66 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1 2 3 4
5
24
23
6
22
21
7
20
19 8
9
18
10
17
Finisher
B830
16
11
15 14 13 12 B830V502D.WMF
1. Top Fence HP Sensor 13. Stack Plate Motor (Front)
2. Top Fence Motor 14. Staple Trimming Chute Solenoid
3. Positioning Roller Drive Motor 15. Stapler Rotation Motor
4. Positioning Roller Motor ) 16. Stapler HP Sensor (Front/Rear)
5. Positioning Roller HP Sensor 17. Stapler Rotation Sensor 2
6. Bottom Fence HP Sensor 18. Stapler Rotation Sensor 1
7. Stack Plate HP Sensor (Rear) 19. Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
8. Stack Plate Motor (Rear) 20. Staple Tray Full Sensor
9. Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center) 21. Bottom Fence Motor
10. Stack Plate Motor (Center) 22. Jogger HP Sensor
11. Staple Hammer Motor 23. Jogger Motor
12. Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front) 24. Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
SM 67 B830
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1 2 3 4
5
15
14
6
13 7
12 8
11
9
10 B830V502E.WMF
1. Exit Guide HP Sensor 9. Staple Trimmings Hopper Set Sensor
2. Exit Guide Motor 10. Staple Trimmings Hopper Full Sensor
3. Upper Tray Full Sensor 11. Stapler Tray Exit Sensor
4. Upper Tray Exit Sensor 12. Pre-Stack Tray Paper Sensor (Right)
5. Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 13. Front Door Safety Switch
6. Entrance Sensor 14. Shift Tray Exit Sensor 2
7. Punch-Out Hopper Full Sensor 15. Shift Tray Exit Sensor 1
8. Pre-Stack Tray Paper Sensor (Left)
B830 68 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1 2 3 4 5
15
14
13
12
11
10
Finisher
B830
8
7
6
B830V502F.WMF
1. Upper Transport Motor 9. Pre-Stack Junction Gate HP
2. Stapler Junction Gate HP Sensor Sensor
3. Upper Tray Exit Motor 10. Pre-Stack Junction Gate Motor )
4. Shift Tray Lift Motor 11. Pre-Stack Transport Motor
5. Shift Tray Exit Motor 12. Upper Tray Junction Gate Motor
6. Lower Transport Motor 13. Upper Tray Junction Gate HP
7. Pre-Stack Stopper HP Sensor Sensor
8. Pre-Stack Stopper Motor 14. Stapler Junction Gate Motor
15. Punch Motor
SM 69 B830
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY
Motors
No. Name Description
M01 Shift Tray Exit Motor Drives the exit roller for the shift tray.
M02 Shift Tray Lift Motor Moves the shift tray up or down.
M03 Exit Guide Motor Opens and closes the upper exit guide. When stapling starts, the
exit guide motor opens the upper exit guide, which includes the
upper shift tray exit roller, in order to feed out the leading edge of
the copy set smoothly. The exit guide motor turns on again a
certain time after stapling is complete, and the upper exit guide
plate is lowered. Then the shift tray exit roller takes over the stack
feed-out. The on-off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by
the exit guide HP sensor.
M04 Stapler Exit Motor Drives the rollers that feed stapled stacks out of the stapling unit.
M05 Upper Tray Exit Motor Drives the rollers that output paper to the proof tray (top tray).
M06 Shift Motor Moves the shift tray from side to side.
M07 Upper Tray Junction Gate Operates the upper tray junction gate.
Motor
M08 Stapler Junction Gate Motor Operates the staple junction gate that directs paper into the
stapling path.
M09 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Operates the pre-stack junction gates that direct paper into path 1,
Motor 2, or 3 of the pre-stack unit.
M10 Pre-Stack Transport Motor Drives the rollers that feed paper into the pre-stack paper paths.
M11 Pre-Stack Stopper Motor Controls the stopper that stops the sheets in the pre-stack unit and
then releases them to the staple tray.
M12 Positioning Roller Motor Moves the positioning roller into contact with the paper.
M13 Positioning Roller Drive Rotates the positioning roller.
Motor
M14 Drag Drive Motor Extends the sponge roller that drags the stapled stack on the shift
tray toward the finisher so that the edge of the stack is aligned
against the back of the shift tray.
M15 Drag Roller Motor Rotates the drag roller counter-clockwise to pull the ejected paper
toward the machine so that the edge of the stack on the shift tray
is aligned against the back of the shift tray.
M16 Jogger Motor Moves the jogger fences of the stapling tray.
M17 Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor Drives the stack feed-out belt which lifts the stapled stack and
feeds it out of the finisher. The stack-feed-out motor turns off when
the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor.
M18 Stack Plate Motor (Center) Presses down the center of the edge for stapling.
M19 Stack Plate Motor (Front) Presses down the front corner of the edge for stapling.
M20 Stack Plate Motor (Rear) Presses down the rear corner of the edge for stapling.
M21 Stapler Movement Motor Moves the staple unit side-to-side.
M22 Stapler Rotation Motor Rotates the stapler 45 degrees for oblique stapling.
M23 Staple Hammer Motor Drives the staple hammer.
M24 Top Fence Motor After the specified number of sheets has been fed, this motor
lowers the top fence against the leading edges of the sheets to
align them for stapling and then raises the top fence to its home
position after stapling.
Operates the top fence that jogs pre-stacked paper vertically (in
the direction of paper feed).
M25 Bottom Fence Motor After the specified number of sheets has been fed, this motor
lowers the bottom fence to position the stack for stapling and then
raises the bottom fence to its home position after stapling.
M27 Upper Transport Motor Feeds paper in the upper transport area. Drives the rollers that
transport paper toward the proof tray (top tray).
B830 70 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Motors
No. Name Description
M28 Lower Transport Motor Drives the rollers that transport paper in the shift and stapling
paper path.
M29 Punch Motor Drives the punch shaft and roller.
M30 Shift Tray Jogger Motor Drives the shift tray jogger fences against the sides of the sheets
to align the stack, then reverses to return them to the home
position
M31 Shift Tray Jogger Retraction Raises the shift tray jogger fences after aligning the stack, then
Motor reverses and lowers them to them to the home position.
PCBs
No. Name Description
PCB Main Board (Output Jogger) Controls operation of the shift and output jogger mechanisms.
PCB Main Board Controls the finisher and communicates with the copier.
Sensors
No. Name Description
S01 Entrance Sensor Detects the copy paper entering the finisher and checks for
misfeeds.
S02 Upper Tray Exit Sensor Checks for misfeeds at the upper tray.
S03 Upper Tray Full Sensor Detects when the upper tray is full.
S04 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 1 Controls the output timing of stapled stacks and detects jams.
Finisher
S05 Shift Tray Exit Sensor 2 Controls the timing of paper in the shift path and detects paper
B830
jams.
S06 Exit Guide HP Sensor Detects whether the guide plate is opened or not.
S07 Paper Height Sensor – Detects the height of the tray when the machine is turned on to
Standby Mode position the tray at the standby position.
S08 Paper Height Sensor – Detects the height of the paper output on the shift tray and adjusts
Staple Mode the height of the tray in the staple mode.
S09 Paper Height Sensor – Z- Detects the height of the paper output on the shift tray and signals
Fold Full when the tray is full when Z-folded paper is output to the shift tray.
S10 Paper Height Sensor – Detects the amount of paper on the shift tray 1) in shift
Shift/Z-Fold mode to control operation of the tray lift motor, and 2) when
Z-folded paper is output to the shift tray.
S11 Drag Drive HP Sensor Controls the push and pull movement of the drag roller when it
extends and drags paper back against the back of the shift tray to
keep the edge of the stack aligned on the shift tray.
S12 Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor Detects whether the shift tray is at either the front or back position.
1 Controls the side-to-side movement of the shift tray. (This pair of
sensors is used to detect the positions of the leading and trailing
edges of the sheets controls operation of the shift mechanism.)
S13 Shift Tray Half-Turn Sensor Detects whether the shift tray is at either the front or back position.
2 Controls the side-to-side movement of the shift tray.
S14 Upper Tray Junction Gate Detects the upper tray junction gate at its home position.
HP Sensor
S15 Stapler Junction Gate HP Detects the staple junction gate at its home position.
Sensor
S16 Pre-Stack Junction Gate Detects the pre-stack junction gate mechanism at its home
HP Sensor position.
S17 Pre-Stack Tray Paper Detects paper feed in the right side of the pre-stack unit and
Sensor (Right) detects jams.
S18 Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full for paper smaller than B4. The
tray is at its lower limit.
S19 Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full for large size paper (B4 or
(Large Paper) larger).
S20 Shift Tray Near-Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is nearly full.
S21 Stapler Tray Exit Sensor Detects jams at the staple tray exit.
S22 Staple Trimmings Hopper Detects when the staple trimmings hopper is full.
SM 71 B830
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION Rev. 09/2006
Sensors
No. Name Description
Full Sensor
S23 Staple Trimmings Hopper Detects if the hopper that holds stapling trimmings is set correctly
Set Sensor or incorrectly.
S24 Pre-Stack Stopper HP Detects the pre-stack stopper mechanism at its home position.
Sensor
S25 Pre-Stack Tray Paper Detects paper feed in the right side of the pre-stack unit. Controls
Sensor (Left) the release timing of the pre-stack stopper, and starts the pre-
stack transport motor. Also detects paper jams.
S26 Stapler Tray Entrance Detects a paper jam if there is paper at the entrance of the stapler
Sensor unit junction gate when the machine is turned on or after the door
is closed.
S27 Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Detects the home position of the stack feed-out belt.
Sensor
S28 Staple Tray Full Sensor Detects paper in the stapler tray.
S29 Jogger HP Sensor Detects the home position of the jogger fence in the stapler tray.
S30 Bottom Fence HP Sensor Detects the bottom fence at its home position.
S31 Top Fence HP Sensor Detects the top fence at its home position.
S32 Positioning Roller HP Detects the home position of the positioning roller.
Sensor
S33 Stack Plate HP Sensor Detects the home position of the center stack plate.
(Center)
S34 Stack Plate HP Sensor Detects the home position of the front stack plate.
(Front)
S35 Stack Plate HP Sensor Detects the home position of the rear stack plate.
(Rear)
S36 Stapler HP Sensor Detects the home position of the staple unit for side-to-side
(Front/Rear) movement.
S37 Stapler Rotation Sensor 1 Paired with Stapler Rotation Sensor 2. .This sensor pair controls
o
the positioning of the corner stapler for the horizontal, 45 angle,
o
⇒
and 75 angle stapling positions.
S38 Stapler Rotation Sensor 2 Paired with Stapler Rotation Sensor 1 .This sensor pair controls
the positioning of the corner stapler for the horizontal and 45o
angle stapling positions.
S39 Punch-out Hopper Full Detects when the punch-out hopper is full and detects when the
Sensor punch tray is set.
S40 Punch HP Sensor 1 Detects the cam home position for the 2-hole punch. After
punching a sheet of paper, the cam returns to home position and
stops. Home position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are
being made, so there are two punch HP sensors. Punch HP
sensor 1 is used when 2-hole punching is selected, and punch HP
sensor 2 is used when 3-hole punching is selected. When the cut-
out enters the slot of the punch HP in use (sensor 1 or 2-hole
punching) the motor stops.
S41 Punch HP Sensor 2 Detects the cam home position for 3-hole punch. After punching a
sheet of paper, the cam returns to home position and stops. Home
position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are being made,
so there are two punch HP sensors. Punch HP sensor 1 is used
when 2-hole punching is selected, and punch HP sensor 2 is used
when 3-hole punching is selected. When the cut-out enters the
slot of the punch HP in use (sensor 1 or 2-hole punching) the
motor stops.
S42 Shift Tray Jogger HP Detects the actuator on the rear shift tray jogger fence and
Sensor switches off the shift tray jogger motor, and signals the machine to
turn on the shift tray jogger retraction motor to raise the fences at
the end of a job.
S43 Shift Tray Jogger Detects the jogger fences of the shift tray jogger unit at their home
Retraction HP Sensor positions.
B830 72 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Solenoids
No. Name Description
SOL Staple Trimming Chute Opens and closes the trap door that drops staple trimmings into
Solenoid the stapling trimmings hopper.
Switches
No. Name Description
SW Front Door Safety Switch Detects when the front door is open. The finisher does not
operate until the front door has been closed.
SW Emergency Stop Switch Switches the current job off and on to allow time for the operator
to remove paper from the shift tray.
SW Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch Cuts the power to the shift tray lift motor when the shift tray
position is at its upper limit.
Finisher
B830
SM 73 B830
MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000
B833
MULTI BYPASS TRAY BY5000 (B833) REVISION HISTORY
Page Date Added/Updated/New
None
MULTI BYPASS TRAY B833
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 OPENING THE BYPASS TRAY ................................................................... 1
1.2 BYPASS TRAY COVERS ............................................................................ 2
1.3 TRAY LIFT SWITCH, FEED TRAY .............................................................. 3
1.4 FEED ROLLERS .......................................................................................... 5
1.5 BYPASS TRAY PCB .................................................................................... 6
1.6 PAPER FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................... 7
1.7 PAPER FEED AND LIFT SENSORS ........................................................... 8
Sensor Removal ...................................................................................... 8
1.8 PICK-UP SOLENOID ................................................................................... 9
1.9 PAPER WIDTH SWITCH, PAPER END AND
PAPER LENGTH SENSORS ..................................................................... 10
1.10 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS, LIFT MOTOR ............................................. 11
2. DETAILS.........................................................................................12
2.1 TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................. 12
2.2 PAPER FEED ............................................................................................. 13
Feed....................................................................................................... 13
Tray Lift .................................................................................................. 13
2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ......................................................................... 14
Paper Size Detection Table ................................................................... 15
Selecting the Paper Size for Undetectable Sizes ................................... 15
3. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ...........................................16
3.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................... 16
3.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................... 17
3.2.1 LAYOUT ............................................................................................ 17
3.2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY ......................................... 18
3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .......................................................................................... 19
SM i B833
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 OPENING THE BYPASS TRAY
[A]
B833R901.WMF
1. Pull in the direction indicated by the arrow at the front left cover.
CAUTION
When moving the LCT with the bypass unit attached, grip and push
the body of the LCT unit. To avoid damaging the bypass tray, never
attempt to push or rotate the assembled units by pulling or pushing
on the bypass tray.
Multi Bypass
B833
Tray
SM 1 B833
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.2 BYPASS TRAY COVERS
[B]
[D]
[A] [C]
B833R004.WMF
1. Open the bypass tray. ( 1.1)
2. Front cover [A] ( x 1).
3. Rear cover [B] ( x 1).
4. Pull off the pick-up roller cover [C].
5. Top cover [D] ( x 2).
B833 2 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.3 TRAY LIFT SWITCH, FEED TRAY
[A]
[C]
[B]
[E] [D]
B833R902.WMF
1. Open the bypass tray. ( 1.1)
2. Remove the covers. ( 1.2)
3. Use the tip of a screwdriver to remove the tray lift switch cover [A].
4. Remove the tray lift switch [B] ( x 1, hook x 1, standoff x 1, x 1).
Multi Bypass
5. Disconnect the tray lift switch connector [C].
B833
Tray
6. Disconnect the paper width switch [D] ( x 2, harness clamp x 1).
7. Remove the feed tray [E] ( x 4).
SM 3 B833
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
8. Pull out the extension tray [A]．
NOTE: The extension tray must be removed
to separate the top and bottom of the
bypass feed tray.
[A]
B833R903.BMP
9. Remove the bottom plate rear right cover [B] [C] [B]
( x1)
10. Remove the bottom plate rear left cover [C]
B833R904.BMP
11. Remove the plate [D] and shaft ( x1, x1).
[D]
12. Separate the top and bottom of the feed tray
( x2, x1).
B833R905.BMP
B833 4 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4 FEED ROLLERS
[D]
[C]
[E]
[A]
[B]
B833R906.WMF
1. Pull off the pick-up roller cover [A].
2. Pull off the separation roller cover [B].
3. Remove the pick-up roller [C] ( x 1).
4. Remove the feed roller [D] ( x 1).
5. Remove the separation roller [E] ( x 1).
NOTE: After re-installing the feed roller, make sure that it rotates clockwise.
Multi Bypass
B833
6. Reset the PM count to zero for the new rollers. Tray
SM 5 B833
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.5 BYPASS TRAY PCB
[A]
B833R907.BMP
1. Remove the rear cover. ( 1.2)
2. Remove the bypass tray PCB [A] ( x 9, x 2, standoffs x 2).
NOTE: Before disconnecting CN210 and CN211, mark either connector with a
marker to make sure that you re-connect them correctly. The shapes of
these connectors are the same and the wires are the same color.
B833 6 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6 PAPER FEED MOTOR, TRANSPORT MOTOR
[B]
[A]
DSCN1932.BMP
1. Remove the rear cover. ( 1.2)
2. Remove the paper feed motor [A] ( x3, Spring x1, Timing belt x1, x1)
3. Remove the transport motor [B] ( x3, Spring x1, Timing belt x1, x1)
Multi Bypass
B833
Tray
SM 7 B833
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.7 PAPER FEED AND LIFT SENSORS
[A] [D]
[C]
[B]
B833R920.BMP
Sensor Removal
1. Remove the rear, front, and top covers. (
1.2)
2. Remove the paper feed bracket [A] (Step x 1, x 1).
3. Remove the paper feed sensor [B] (Hooks x 3,
x 1)
4. Remove the lift sensor bracket [C] ( x 1).
5. Remove the lift sensor [D] (Hooks x 3,
x 1).
B833 8 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.8 PICK-UP SOLENOID
[A]
B833R921.WMF
1. Remove the rear, front, and top covers. ( 1.2)
2. Remove the pick-up solenoid [A] ( x 2, x 1, harness clamp x 1)
NOTE: When re-installing the solenoid, make sure that the arm of the solenoid is
positioned above and in contact with the plate of the pick-up roller shaft
below. To confirm correct installation, manually move the solenoid to the
left and right. When the solenoid plunger is moved, the pick-up roller
should move up and down smoothly.
Multi Bypass
B833
Tray
SM 9 B833
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.9 PAPER WIDTH SWITCH, PAPER END AND PAPER
LENGTH SENSORS
[E]
[F]
[G]
[C] [B]
[D]
DSCN1924.BMP
[A] B833R922.WMF
1. Remove the feed tray and separate the top and bottom. (
1.3)
2. Turn over the top half of the feed tray [A] then lay it on a flat surface.
3. Remove the cable cover [B] (Hooks x2)
4. Paper end sensor bracket [C] (Hook x1).
5. Paper end sensor [D] (Hooks x 2,
x 1).
6. Paper length sensor bracket [E] (Hook x 1, x 1).
7. Paper length sensor [F] (Hooks x 2,
x 1).
8. Paper width switch [G] ( x 1, Harness clamp x 1,
x 1).
B833 10 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.10 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS, LIFT MOTOR
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
B833R933.BMP
B833R924.BMP
1. Open the bypass tray. ( 1.1)
2. Remove the bypass tray covers. ( 1.2)
3. Remove the feed tray. ( 1.3)
Paper Height Sensors
1. Paper Height Sensor 1 [A] (Hooks x 3, x 1)
2. Paper Height Sensor 2 [B] (Hooks x 3, x 1)
3. Paper Height Sensor 3 [C] (Hooks x 3, x 1)
Multi Bypass
B833
Lift Motor Tray
1. Remove screws ( x6) then push lift motor [D] to loosen its frame.
2. Raise the loosened frame slightly to remove the lift motor ( x2,
x1)
SM 11 B833
DETAILS
2. DETAILS
2.1 TRAY LIFT
[D] [E]
[C] [F]
[A]
[G]
[B]
B833D901.WMF
When the tray lift switch is pressed, the lift motor [A] switches on and pushes the lift
plate [B] against the bottom of the feed tray until the top of the stack is at the
correct feed position.
NOTE: If there is paper in the bypass tray when the main machine has just been
switched on, the lift motor will turn on and lift the stack to the feed position.
As paper is fed, the pick-up roller [C] lowers until it activates the lift sensor which
switches on the lift motor again to raise the stack to the feed level again. (
0)
As the bottom plate shaft rotates and raises the bottom plate, the actuator [D]
lowers and activates paper height sensor 1 [E] and then paper height sensor 2 [F]
as the bottom plate continues to rise. With the tray full, the actuator remains upright
and deactivates neither paper height sensor. During continuous feed, the actuator
rotates downward through three positions, deactivating the first sensor, then both
sensors, then only the second sensor. These states are used to report the amount
of paper on the operation panel.
SN1 SN2 Paper Remaining Status
OFF OFF 100% (Full)
ON OFF 90%
ON ON 50%
OFF ON 25%
After the last sheet feeds, the paper end sensor [G] below the feed tray detects
that the tray is empty.
NOTE: When you re-load the tray with paper, be sure to press the tray lift button to
raise the bottom of the tray so the stack is at the correct feed position.
B833 12 SM
DETAILS
2.2 PAPER FEED [F]
[G]
[D] [A]
[C]
[H]
[E]
[B]
B833D003.WMF
Feed
The bypass tray can hold 500 sheets of standard weight paper.
The bypass tray uses the standard FRR (Feed and Reverse Roller) feed system.
Handling Paper> Paper Feed Methods> Forward and Reverse Roller
(FRR)
When the job starts, the feed motor [A] switches on and rotates the pick-up roller
[B]. At the same time, the pick-up solenoid [not shown] switches on and lowers the
pick-up roller. The lift motor [C] switches on to raise the stack until the top of the
stack reaches the correct feed level. At that time, the paper pushes the pick-up
roller down. When the actuator [not shown] goes out of the lift sensor [not shown],
the lift motor stops.
The pick-up roller picks up and feeds the first sheet to the feed roller [D] and
separation roller [E]. When the feed sensor [not shown] detects the leading edge of Multi Bypass
B833
Tray
the sheet, the pick-up solenoid raises the pick-up roller and the feed roller feeds
the sheet.
NOTE: Unlike the separation rollers in the LCT, the separation roller always
remains in contact with the feed roller above.
The transport motor [F] then feeds the paper into the bypass tray, and the relay
motor [G] feeds the paper out of the bypass tray, and into the machine through the
LCT.
Tray Lift
When the pick-up roller [B] lowers far enough to go into the lift sensor, the lift motor
switches on to raise the bottom plate until the actuator goes out of the lift sensor
again and switches off the lift motor. This movement is repeated to maintain the
correct height of the stack for paper feed.
Actuator [H] is used by the height sensors, to detect the amount of remaining paper.
SM 13 B833
DETAILS
2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[C] [B]
[A] B833D002.WMF
The side fences [A] can be adjusted to standard and non-standard paper sizes.
Paper size is measured with the paper width switch [B] and the paper length
sensor [C].
When the side fences are moved to match the paper width, four feelers inside the
paper width switch [B] slide along the wiring patterns on the paper width switch
terminal plate. The status of each feeler is read to determine whether it is High (in
contact with a pattern wire) or Low (not in contact with a wire).
The paper length sensor reading (ON or OFF) is used with the paper width reading
to determine the paper size. For more details about how the paper size is
determined, see the paper size detection table on the next page.
The paper end sensor [C] de-activates when the last sheet is fed, reports that the
paper tray is empty, and halts the job.
B833 14 SM
DETAILS
Paper Size Detection Table
Paper Width SW Length Area
Paper Size
1 2 3 4 5 Sensor NA EU
12" x 18" O O
Large 13" x 19" H H H H L L P P
320 x 340 mm P P
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm L O O
H H H L L
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm H O O
DLT SEF 11" x 17" L O O
H H H L H
LT LEF 11" x 81/2" H O O
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm L O O
H H L L H
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm H O O
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm P O
L
LT SEF 81/2" x 11" O P
H H L H H
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm P O
H
HLT LEF 81/2" x 51/2" O P
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm P P
H L L H H L
F SEF 8" x 13" O O
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm H L H H H H O O
HLT SEF 51/2 " x 81/2 " L L H H H H O O
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm P P
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm O O
L H H H H H
Post- 100 x 148 mm P P
card
Table Key
The paper size switch consists of 5 feelers that slide along the wiring patterns
of the paper width switch terminal plate when the side fences are manually
1, 2, 3, 4,
adjusted to fit the size of the paper loaded in the tray. The H, L status of each
and 5
feeler is determined by whether the feeler is in contact with the wire of a
pattern.
H High (5 V) (Inactive)
Multi Bypass
L Low (0 V) (Active)
The machine determines the paper size automatically by reading the output of
B833
O Tray
the paper size switches and the paper length sensor.
The machine cannot detect the paper size automatically. The user must select
P
the paper size manually before starting the job. See below.
Selecting the Paper Size for Undetectable Sizes
Press the [Tray Paper Settings] key on the operation panel to select paper sizes
that are not detected automatically by the combination of paper size and paper
length sensor readings (marked “P” in the table above and any other paper size
not listed that requires pulling out the paper tray extension).
NOTE: Mixed paper sizes cannot be loaded into the bypass tray. Loading paper of
different sizes will cause a paper jam.
SM 15 B833
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
7 8 9
5 6 10
11
3 4
12
2
1
16 13
15 14
B833D951.WMF
1. Transport Roller 3 9. Transport motor
2. Relay Sensor 10. Pick-up Roller
3. Relay Motor 11. Paper Height Sensor 1
4. Transport Roller 2 12. Paper Height Sensor 2
5. Transport Roller 1 13. Lift Plate Actuator
6. Paper Feed Sensor 14. Lift Plate
7. Paper Feed Roller 15. Separation Roller
8. Lift Sensor 16. Paper Feed Motor
B833 16 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.2.1 LAYOUT
3 4 5
2
1 6
7
12
9 8
11
10 B833D002.WMF
1. Relay Sensor
2. Relay Motor
3. Pick-up Solenoid
4. Transport Motor
5. Feed Motor
6. Lift Motor
7. Bypass Unit Control Board
8. Paper Length Sensor
9. Paper Width Switch
10. Paper End Sensor
11. Tray Lift Switch
12. Paper Feed Sensor Multi Bypass
B833
Tray
Lift Sensor
Tray Lower Limit Sensor
Paper Near End Sensor
Paper End Sensor
SM 17 B833
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY
Motors
No. Name Description
M1 Feed Motor Drives the paper feed roller in the feed mechanism.
M2 Lift Motor Raises and lowers the bottom plate below the paper stack.
M3 Relay Motor Drives the relay rollers that feed the paper from the bypass tray into
the feed path of the LCT below.
M4 Transport Motor Drives the transport roller of the bypass tray that pulls the paper out
of the tray and sends it to the relay roller.
PCB
No. Name Description
PCB1 Bypass Unit Control Board Controls operation of all bypass unit electrical components.
Sensors
No. Name Description
S1 Lift Sensor Detects when the paper in the bypass tray is at the proper height
for paper feed.
S2 Tray Lower Limit Sensor Detects when the tray is at its lowest possible position.
S3 Paper End Sensor Informs the copier when the paper in the bypass tray has run
out.
S4 Paper Feed Sensor Detects the copy paper coming to the 4th paper feed roller and
checks for misfeeds.
S5 Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper end sensor. The paper height sensor pair (1 and 2) work
together to monitor the height of the paper stack in the bypass
tray.
S6 Paper Height Sensor 2 Paper near end sensor. The paper height sensor pair (1 and 2)
work together to monitor the height of the paper stack in the
bypass tray.
S7 Paper Length Sensor Used with the paper width switch to determine paper size. This
sensor is activated when paper is set for short edge feed. For
example, when the paper width switch detects A4 width and this
sensor is off, the machine determines A4 is set for long edge
feed. When A4 width is detected and the paper length sensor is
on, then the machine determines that A3 is loaded for short
edge feed.
S8 Relay Sensor Detects jams in the paper path after paper is fed from the feed
roller..
Solenoids
No. Name Description
SOL1 Pick-up Solenoid Controls up-down movement of the pick-up roller in the bypass
tray.
Switches
No. Name Description
SW1 Tray Lift Switch Switches the tray lift motor on and off to raise and lower the
bottom plate of the tray to the feed position. This switch must be
pressed to start paper feed.
SW2 Paper Width Switches A slide switch connected to the side fences. When the side
fences are moved to match the paper width, four feelers inside
the paper size switch slide along wiring patterns of a terminal
plate. The wire pattern detected determines the paper width.
B833 18 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT 5
4
3
6
2
1
7
8
11
10 9 B833D003.WMF
1. Transport Roller 2
2. Transport Roller 1
3. Grip Roller
4. Relay Motor
5. Transport Motor
6. Feed Motor
7. Lift Motor
8. Lift Plate
9. Pick-up Roller
10. Separation Roller
11. Feed Roller Multi Bypass
B833
Tray
SM 19 B833
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CI5000
B835
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY CL5000 (B835) REVISION HISTORY
Page Date Added/Updated/New
None
COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B835
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1
1.1 COVERS ...................................................................................................... 1
1.2 1ST, 2ND TRAYS ......................................................................................... 4
1.3 FEED UNITS ................................................................................................ 5
1.4 BOARDS ...................................................................................................... 6
1.4.1 TRAY UNIT CONTROL BOARD.......................................................... 6
1.4.2 MAIN CONTROL BOARD ................................................................... 7
1.5 MOTORS ...................................................................................................... 8
1.5.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR ...................................................... 8
1.5.2 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................ 9
1.5.3 1ST, 2ND LIFT MOTORS .................................................................. 10
1.5.4 1ST, 2ND FEED MOTORS ................................................................ 11
1.5.5 1ST, 2ND TRANSPORT MOTORS ................................................... 12
1.5.6 1ST, 2ND PICK-UP MOTORS ........................................................... 13
1.6 SENSORS .................................................................................................. 14
1.6.1 PAPER WIDTH SWITCH, SET SENSORS, LENGTH SENSOR ............ 14
1.6.2 TRAY COVER SENSORS ................................................................. 16
1.6.3 1ST TRANSPORT SENSOR ............................................................. 17
1.6.4 FEED UNIT SENSORS ..................................................................... 18
1.6.5 2ND VERTICAL TRANSPORT, EXIT SENSORS ............................. 19
1.6.6 ENTRANCE SENSOR ....................................................................... 20
1.7 ROLLERS ................................................................................................... 21
1.7.1 SEPARATION ROLLER .................................................................... 21
1.7.2 FEED BELT UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ...................................... 22
1.7.3 FEED BELT ....................................................................................... 23
2. DETAILS.........................................................................................24
2.1 PAPER PATH ............................................................................................. 24
2.2 PAPER FEED ............................................................................................. 25
2.2.1 FEED MECHANISM .......................................................................... 25
2.2.2 PAPER NEAR END/PAPER END ..................................................... 26
2.2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ................................................................ 27
3. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ...........................................29
3.1 MAIN LAYOUT ........................................................................................... 29
3.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 30
3.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................... 31
3.3.1 FEED MOTORS, PCB ....................................................................... 31
3.3.2 LIFT MOTORS, TRAY SENSORS..................................................... 32
3.3.3 PAPER PATH SENSORS 1 .............................................................. 33
3.3.4 PAPER PATH SENSORS 2, PCB ..................................................... 34
3.3.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY .......................................... 35
SM i B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 COVERS
[A]
B835R901.BMP
1. Open the vertical feed cover [A].
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 1 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[G] [E] [A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[F] B835R105.WMF
2. Remove:
[A] Top cover ( x2)
[B] Inner cover with front door [C] ( x2)
[D] 1st tray cover holder ( x1)
[E] 1st tray cover. Slide the cover toward you to remove it from the inside pins.
[F] Base cover (Knob x1)
[G] Tray unit rear cover ( x2)
B835 2 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[E]
B835I113.WMF
B835R124.WMF
3. Remove:
[A] Front door (L-pins x2)
• Swing the upper L-pin [B] out of its groove and pull it up.
• Swing the lower L-pin [C] out of its groove and pull it down.
[D] Rear top cover of the feed unit ( x2)
[E] Feed unit rear upper cover ( x4)
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 3 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.2 1ST, 2ND TRAYS
[A], [C]
B835R118A.WMF
[B], [D]
Remove:
• Inner cover with tray unit front door (
1.1)
• Tray unit rear cover (
1.1)
1st Tray
[A] Disconnect:
• 1st lift motor (= 1x,
x1)
• White connectors (
x2)
[B] 1st tray ( x5)
2nd Tray
Remove:
• Inner cover with tray unit front door (
1.1)
• Tray unit rear cover (
1.1)
[C] Disconnect:
• 2nd lift motor (= 1x,
x1)
• Red, blue connectors (
x2)
[D] 2nd tray ( x5)
B835 4 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.3 FEED UNITS
1st Tray
[A]
[D] [B]
2nd Tray
B835R114.WMF
[E]
[C]
1st Feed Unit
B835R101.WMF
Remove:
• Top cover (
1.1)
• Inner cover with front door (
1.1)
• Tray unit rear cover (
1.1)
[A] Stay ( x5)
[B] Open the 1st tray cover and hold it open
[C] 1st feed belt unit
[D] 1st feed unit ( x,
x )
2nd Feed Unit
• Open the vertical feed cover (
1.1)
• Remove inner cover with tray unit front door (
1.1)
• 2nd feed belt unit (same as [C])
[E] 2nd feed unit ( x2,
x2)
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 5 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4 BOARDS
1.4.1 TRAY UNIT CONTROL BOARD
[A]
[B]
B835R110.WMF
Remove:
• Tray unit rear cover ( x2) (
1.1)
[A] Board cover ( x3, = x8)
[B] Tray unit control board (
x 17, x5, Standoff x1)
B835 6 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.4.2 MAIN CONTROL BOARD
[B]
[A]
B835R127.WMF
• Transport unit rear upper cover ( 1.1)
[A] Connector bracket ( x2)
[B] Main control board ( x4, = x2, x14, Standoff x2)
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 7 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.5 MOTORS
1.5.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR
[A]
[B]
B835R125.WMF
Remove:
• Transport unit rear cover (
1.1)
[A] Motor unit ( x2,
x1, Timing belt x1)
[B] Vertical transport motor ( x2)
B835 8 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.5.2 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTOR
[A]
[B]
B835R126.WMF
Remove:
• Transport unit rear cover (
1.1)
[A] Motor unit ( x2,
x1, Timing belt x1)
[B] Horizontal transport motor ( x2)
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 9 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.5.3 1ST, 2ND LIFT MOTORS
[A]
[B]
B835R109.WMF
• Tray unit rear cover ( 1.1)
[A] 1st lift motor ( x2, x1)
[B] 2nd lift motor ( x2, x1)
B835 10 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.5.4 1ST, 2ND FEED MOTORS
[A]
[B], [D]
[C]
B835R108.WMF
• Tray unit rear cover ( 1.1)
[A] 1st feed motor unit ( x3, = x2, x1)
[B] 1st feed motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
[C] 2nd feed motor unit ( x3, x1)
[D] 2nd feed motor unit ( x2, Timing belt x1)
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 11 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.5.5 1ST, 2ND TRANSPORT MOTORS
[A], [C]
B835R107.WMF
[B], [D]
B835R111.WMF
• Tray unit rear cover ( 1.1)
1st Transport Motor
[A] 1st transport motor unit ( x3, x1)
[B] 1st transport motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
2nd Transport Motor
Tray unit control board unit (Hooks, x3, x9 (Motor x8, CN216))
[C] 2nd transport motor unit ( x3)
[D] 2nd transport motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
B835 12 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.5.6 1ST, 2ND PICK-UP MOTORS
[A], [C]
[B], [D]
B835R106.WMF
B835R111.WMF
• Tray unit rear cover ( 1.1)
1st Pick-up Motor
[A] 1st pick-up motor unit ( x1, x3)
[B] 1st pick-up motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
2nd Pick-up Motor
Tray unit control board unit (Hooks, x3, x9 (Motor x8, CN216))
[C] 2nd pick-up motor unit ( x1, x3)
[D] 2nd pick-up motor ( x2, Timing belt x1) Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 13 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6 SENSORS
1.6.1 PAPER WIDTH SWITCH, SET SENSORS, LENGTH SENSOR
[B]
B835R118B.WMF
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C] B835R119.WMF
Remove:
• 1st or 2nd paper tray (
1.2)
[A] Front cover ( x1)
[B] Rear cover ( x1)
[C] Bottom cover ( x2)
[D] Holder pin (x1, Spring x1)
[E] Bottom plate ( x1)
• Turn over the bottom plate so it is facing up.
B835 14 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[C] [D]
[B]
B835R121.WMF
B835R120.WMF
Remove:
[A] Harness cover (Hooks x2)
[B] Paper width switch (Hooks x2, = x4,
x1)
[C] Paper set sensor (Hook x1,
x1)
[D] Paper length sensor (Hooks x1,
x1)
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 15 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6.2 TRAY COVER SENSORS
[B]
[A]
B835R902.BMP
1st Tray Cover Sensor
• Remove the tray unit rear cover ( 1.1)
• Open the 1st tray cover
Remove:
[A] Sensor unit ( x1, x1)
[B] Tray cover sensor (Pawls x2)
2nd Tray Cover Sensor
Remove the tray unit control board unit ( 1.5.5)
Remove:
[A] Sensor unit ( x1, x1). Remove with the 2nd tray cover open.
[B] Tray cover sensor (Pawls x2)
B835 16 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6.3 1ST TRANSPORT SENSOR
[B]
[C] [A]
B835R117.WMF
• Top cover
• Vertical feed cover
• Stay (
1.5)
Remove:
[A] Upper paper guide ( x2)
[B] Sensor unit ( x2,
x1, = x1)
[C] 1st transport sensor (Pawls x2)
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 17 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6.4 FEED UNIT SENSORS
[A]
[B]
B835R114.WMF
[C]
[D]
[J]
[E] [F] B835R115.WMF
[G]
[H] [I]
Remove:
[A] 1st feed unit (
1.3)
[B] 2nd feed unit (
1.3)
[C] Sensor bracket ( x1,
x1)
[D] Pick-up roller HP sensor (Pawls x2)
[E] Sensor bracket ( x1,
x1, = 1x)
[F] Bottom plate position sensor (Pawls x2)
[G] Sensor bracket ( x1,
x1) (2nd feed unit only)
[H] 1st Vertical transport sensor (Pawls x2) (2nd feed unit only)
[I] Sensor bracket ( x1,
x1, = x1)
[J] Paper Feed sensor (Pawls x2)
B835 18 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6.5 2ND VERTICAL TRANSPORT, EXIT SENSORS
[A] [B]
[C]
[E]
[D] B835R123.WMF
[F]
Remove:
[A] Sensor unit ( x1,
x1, = x1)
[B] 2nd vertical transport sensor (Pawls x2)
[C] Sensor unit ( x2,
x1, = x1)
[D] Vertical exit sensor (Pawls x2)
[E] Sensor unit ( x2,
x1, = x1)
[F] Exit sensor (Pawls x2)
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 19 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.6.6 ENTRANCE SENSOR
[B]
[A]
B835R122.WMF
[A] Sensor unit ( x2, x1, = x1)
[B] Entrance sensor (Pawls x2)
B835 20 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.7 ROLLERS
1.7.1 SEPARATION ROLLER
[A]
[B]
B835R116.WMF
• 1st (or 2nd) feed unit ( 1.3)
[A] Cover
[B] Separation Roller ( x1)
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 21 B835
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.7.2 FEED BELT UNIT AND PICK-UP ROLLER
[A]
[B]
B835R101.WMF
B835R102.WMF
• Open the 1st tray cover.
[A]: Feed belt unit
• The unit is spring loaded. Push it to the right to release it, then lift it out.
[B]: Pick-up roller ( x 2, bushings x 2)
B835 22 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.7.3 FEED BELT
[B]
[D]
[F]
[A] [E]
[C]
B835R103.WMF
B835R104.WMF
• Feed belt unit ( 1.7.2)
[A]: Pick-up roller unit.
• Pull the unit away from the bushings in the direction of the arrow.
[B]: Feed belt holder
• Hold the feed belt holder by the sides, then lift up to separate from the
holder.
• Pull slowly to avoid losing the springs.
[C]: Feed belt.
Re-assembly
1. Position the pick-up roller unit [A] and feed belt holder [B] as shown above.
2. On the rear side, slide out the bushing, and rotate guide plate [D] until its
stepped side attaches at [E] as shown above, then snap the guide plate on.
3. On the front side, rotate guide plate [F] until its flat side is parallel with [D], then
snap it on. Viewed from the bottom, the plates must be aligned.
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 23 B835
DETAILS
2. DETAILS
2.1 PAPER PATH
1
2 3 4
6
7 8
9
15
10
11
12 14
13
Interposer Tray B835 Mainframe
B835D87.BMP
1. 1st Paper Feed Motor 9. 2nd Transport Sensor
2. 1st Paper Feed Sensor 10. 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor
3. 1st Transport Motor 11. Vertical Transport Motor
4. 1st Transport Sensor 12. Vertical Exit Sensor
5. 1st Vertical Transport Sensor 13. Interposer Exit Sensor
6. 2nd Paper Feed Motor 14. Interposer Entrance Sensor
7. 2nd Paper Feed Sensor 15. Horizontal Transport Motor
8. 2nd Transport Motor
B835 24 SM
DETAILS
2.2 PAPER FEED
2.2.1 FEED MECHANISM
[C]
[B] [A]
[D] [E] [F]
[G]
B835D111.WMF
[H] B835D112.WMF
When paper is placed on the tray, the 1st paper set sensor in the tray actuates and
switches on the 1st tray lift motor. The pick-up roller unit drops and the top of the
stack in the tray pushes up the pick-up roller unit until its actuator actuates the 1st
bottom plate position sensor [A] and switches the motor 1st tray lift motor off.
The 1st pick-up roller HP sensor [B] controls the operation of the 1st pick-up motor
[C]. The 1st pick-up motor is off when the actuator is up and there is no paper in
the tray. This is the pick-up roller home position. When the actuator de-actuates the
sensor after the tray lifts, this switches on the 1st pick-up roller motor. At the end of
the job, the actuator descends with the bottom plate and switches the motor off.
The pick-up roller [D] picks up the sheet, and the feed belt [E] feeds the sheet to
the paper feed roller [F]. The separation roller [G] reverses if more than one sheet
is fed. This is a standard FFR device.
The paper feed sensor [H] detects the timing of the feed and signals a jam if the
Interposer
Cover
B835
paper does not arrive or if the paper stops.
Tray
As sheets feed from the top of the stack:
• The pick-up roller unit descends until the actuator on the pick-up roller unit drops
out of the 1st bottom plate position sensor [A]. This activates the 1st tray lift
motor.
• The 1st tray lift motor switches on to raise the stack until the actuator enters the
pick-up roller unit position sensor again and switches the lift motor off.
• This cycle repeats until the end of the job or until paper runs out.
SM 25 B835
DETAILS
2.2.2 PAPER NEAR END/PAPER END
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
B835D106.WMF
When feed starts with a full tray, the actuator [A] on the rotating shaft of the bottom
plate lift arm [B] is at the 1st tray lower limit sensor [C].
As paper feeds and the stack grows smaller, the lift arm rises and the actuator
descends until the actuator reaches the 1st tray upper limit sensor [D]. At this time
the operation panel signals near-end for the 1st tray.
When the last sheet feeds, the paper feed sensor, a photosensor (not shown)
signals that paper has run out.
B835 26 SM
DETAILS
2.2.3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
B835D105.WMF
The side fences and can be adjusted to standard and non-standard paper
sizes.
When the side fences are moved to match the paper width, a feeler [A] slides along
the wiring patterns on the paper width switch terminal plate [B].
The combination of the following two factors determines the paper size:
• The position where the feeler activates the terminal
• The status of the paper length sensor [C] (ON or OFF).
The paper end sensor [D] de-activates when the last sheet is fed and reports that
the paper tray is empty. Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 27 B835
DETAILS
The paper size is detected by six sensors whose combined readings are used to
detect the following paper sizes.
Paper Size Detection Bits Area
Paper Size W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 L1 NA EU
Large Size 12×18 in. H H H H L L YES YES
Large Size 13×19 in. H H H H L L @ @
Large Size 320×450 mm H H H H L L @ @
A3 SEF 297×420 mm H H H L L L YES YES
A4 LEF 297×210 mm H H H L L H YES YES
DLT SEF 11×17 in. H H H L H L YES YES
LT LEF 11×8½ in. H H H L H H YES YES
B4 SEF 257×364 mm H H L L H L YES YES
B5 LEF 257×182 mm H H L L H H YES YES
A4 SEF 210×297 mm H H L H H L YES YES
LT SEF 8½×11 in. H H L H H L YES @
A5 LEF 210×148 mm H H L H H H @ YES
HLT LEF 8½×5½ in. H H L H H H YES @
B5 SEF 182×257 mm H L L H H L @ @
F SEF 8×13 in. H L L H H L YES YES
A5 SEF 148×210 mm H L H H H H YES YES
HLT SEF 5½×8½ in. L L H H H H YES YES
Yes： Width and length sensors can detect paper sizes automatically.
@： Accurate paper size detection requires setting with the "Tray Paper Setting" key on the
operation panel.
H: 5V
L: 0V
B835 28 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.1 MAIN LAYOUT
1
2 3
4
5
6
9
13 8
7
12
11
10
B835V901.WMF
1. 1st Pick-up Motor 8. 2nd Paper Feed Motor
2. 1st Transport Motor 9. 2nd Lift Motor
3. 1st Paper Feed Motor 10. Control Board
4. 1st Lift Motor 11. Door Open Switch (Interlock)
5. Driver Board 12. Horizontal Transport Motor
6. 2nd Pick-up Motor 13. Vertical Transport Motor
7. 2nd Transport Motor
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 29 B835
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
5
4
B835V902.WMF
1. 1st Transport roller
2. 2nd Transport roller
3. Vertical Transport Motor
4. Horizontal Transport Motor
The 1st transport roller [1] (driven by the 1st transport motor) pulls the paper from
the 1st tray and feeds it into the vertical paper path.
The 2nd transport roller [2] (driven by the 2nd transport motor) pulls the paper from
the 2nd tray and feeds it into the vertical path.
The vertical transport motor [3] drives the vertical transport rollers and that
feed the sheets into the horizontal feed path.
The horizontal transport motor [4] drives the horizontal transport rollers and
that feed the covers (and paper passing straight through) out of the cover
interposer tray.
B835 30 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.3.1 FEED MOTORS, PCB
1 2 3
5
7
B835V903.WMF
1. 1st Paper Feed Motor
2. 1st Transport motor
3. 1st Pick-Up Motor
4. 2nd Pick-Up Motor
5. 2nd Transport motor
6. 2nd Paper Feed Motor
7. Tray Unit Control Board
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 31 B835
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.3.2 LIFT MOTORS, TRAY SENSORS
3 4 5
2
1
6
12
7
11
B835V904.WMF
10 9
1. 1st Paper Length Sensor 7. 2nd Lower Limit Sensor
2. 1st paper upper limit sensor 8. 2nd paper set sensor
3. 1st Lift Motor 9. 2nd Paper Width Sensor
4. 1st Lower Limit Sensor 10. 2nd Paper Length Sensor
5. 1st paper set sensor 11. 2nd paper upper limit sensor
6. 1st Paper Width Sensor 12. 2nd Lift Motor
B835 32 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.3.3 PAPER PATH SENSORS 1
1 2
3
4 5
12
11 7
10
9 B835V905.WMF
8
1. 1st Tray Cover Sensor 7. 1st Vertical Transport Sensor
2. 1st Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor 8. 2nd Transport Sensor
3. 1st bottom plate position sensor 9. 2nd Paper Feed Sensor
4. 1st Transport Sensor 10. 2nd bottom plate position sensor
5. 1st Paper Feed Sensor 11. 2nd Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor
6. Vertical Feed Cover Switch 12. 2nd Tray Cover Sensor
Interposer
Cover
B835
Tray
SM 33 B835
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.3.4 PAPER PATH SENSORS 2, PCB
1 2
7 3
4
6
B835V906.WMF
1. 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor
2. Entrance Sensor
3. Vertical Exit Sensor
4. Exit Sensor
5. Feed Unit Front Door Safety Switch
6. Main Control Board
7. Horizontal Transport Motor
8. Vertical Transport Motor
B835 34 SM
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
3.3.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY
Motors
No. Name Description
M1 1st Lift Motor Drives the bottom plate of the 1st tray up and
down.
M2 1st Paper Feed Motor Rotates the feed rollers that feed paper from the
1st tray.
M3 1st Pick-up Motor Moves the 1st pick-up roller up and down.
M4 1st Transport Motor Drives the 1st Transport roller that takes the paper
fed from the 1st feed roller and feeds it to the
vertical path.
M5 2nd Feed Motor Rotates the feed rollers that feed paper from the
2nd tray.
M6 2nd Lift Motor Drives the bottom plate of the 2nd tray up and
down.
M7 2nd Pick-up Motor Moves the 2nd pick-up roller up and down.
M8 2nd Transport Motor Drives the 2nd Transport roller that takes the
paper fed from the 1st feed roller and feeds it to
the vertical path.
M9 Horizontal Transport Motor Drives the rollers in the horizontal path that feed
paper from the copier and covers from the vertical
path out of the cover interposer tray.
M10 Vertical Transport Motor Drives the rollers in the vertical path that feed the
covers down to the horizontal path.
PCBs
No. Name Description
PCB1 Driver Board Controls operation of the unit. (All DIP SWs should be
set to OFF.)
PCB2 Main Control Board
Sensors
No. Name Description
S1 1st Tray Cover Sensor Detects when the 1st tray cover is open/closed.
S2 1st Lower Limit Sensor Detects 1) whether the 1st tray is down or not
when the tray is not operating, and 2) detects
when the tray is full when the 1st tray is
operating.
S3 1st paper set sensor Detects paper end after the last sheet feeds
from the 1st tray.
S4 1st Paper Feed Sensor Detects paper placed on the tray and starts the
1st lift motor to raise the bottom plate. This
sensor also detects a jam if the paper stops and
Interposer
does not leave the 1st tray
Cover
S5 1st Paper Length Sensors Used in combination with 1st tray width sensors
B835
Tray
to determine the size of paper in the 1st tray.
S6 1st paper upper limit sensor When an actuator falls into the gap of this
sensor, this signals paper near end in the 1st
tray.
S7 1st Pick-up Roller HP Sensor Detects whether the 1st pick-up roller is up or
not.
S8 1st Transport Sensor Detects jams at the point where the 1st
Transport roller pulls paper from the 1st tray.
S9 1st Transport Sensor Detects jams in the path of the 1st tray.
SM 35 B835
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Sensors
No. Name Description
S10 1st bottom plate position sensor Detects the top of the paper stack in the 1st tray
when it is at the proper height for feeding and
stops the 1st lift motor.
S11 2nd Lower Limit Sensor Detects 1) whether the 2nd tray is down or not
when the tray is not operating, and 2) detects
when the tray is full when the 2nd tray is
operating.
S12 2nd tray cover sensor Detects when the 2nd tray cover is open/closed.
S13 2nd paper set sensor Detects paper placed on the tray and starts the
2nd lift motor to raise the bottom plate. This
sensor also detects a jam if the paper stops and
does not leave the 2nd tray
S14 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Detects jams when the feed roller feeds paper
from the 2nd tray.
S15 2nd Paper Length Sensor Used in combination with 1st tray width sensors
to determine the size of paper in the 1st tray.
S16 2nd paper upper limit sensor When an actuator falls into the gap of this
sensor, this signals paper near end in the 2nd
tray.
S17 2nd Pick-up Roller HP Sensor Detects whether the 2nd pick-up roller is up or
not.
S18 2nd Transport Sensor Detects jams at the point where the 2nd
Transport roller pulls paper from the 1st tray.
S19 2nd bottom plate position sensor Detects the top of the paper stack in the 2nd tray
when it is at the proper height for feeding and
stops the 2nd lift motor.
S20 2nd Vertical Transport Sensor Detects jams in the vertical path after a sheet is
fed from the 2nd tray.
S21 Entrance Sensor Detects paper jams where paper from the copier
enters the unit in the horizontal feed path.
S22 Exit Sensor Detects jams where through-paper and covers
exit the unit.
S23 Vertical Exit Sensor Detects jams where through-paper and covers
exit the vertical feed path.
Switches
No. Name Description
SW1 Front Door Switch Detects whether the front door is properly closed.
The unit will not operate when the front door is
open.
SW2 Transport Cover Switch This is the cover on the right side of the tray unit.
Detects whether the cover is opened or closed.
SW3 1st Paper Width Switch Used in combination with the length sensors to
determine the size of paper in the 1st tray.
SW4 2nd Paper Width Switch Used in combination with the length sensors to
determine the size of paper in the 2nd tray.
B835 36 SM
BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020
D434
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
BOOKLET FINISHER SR5020 D434
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................ 1
1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES ........................................................................... 1
1.1.1 OVERVIEW.......................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 COVERS .............................................................................................. 3
Rear Upper Cover ................................................................................... 3
Rear Lower Cover ................................................................................... 3
Lower Inner Cover: Rb10, Rb11 .............................................................. 5
Center Inner Cover: Rb14, Rb16 ............................................................. 5
Upper Inner Cover: Rb2, Rb8 .................................................................. 6
Front Door ............................................................................................... 7
Corner Strip Cover .................................................................................. 7
Top Rear Cover ....................................................................................... 8
Shift Tray Jogger Unit .............................................................................. 8
Left Upper Cover ..................................................................................... 9
Proof Tray................................................................................................ 9
Top "L" Cover ........................................................................................ 10
Right Upper Panel ................................................................................. 11
Right Lower Panel ................................................................................. 11
Shift Tray ............................................................................................... 12
Booklet Tray .......................................................................................... 12
1.1.3 BOOKLET UNIT ................................................................................. 12
Booklet Stapler ...................................................................................... 12
Booklet Unit ........................................................................................... 13
Handling and Moving the Booklet Unit .................................................. 17
1.1.4 SIDE FENCE ..................................................................................... 17
Exit Roller Cover ................................................................................... 17
Shift Tray, Booklet Tray ......................................................................... 18
Shift Tray Base ...................................................................................... 19
Left Lower Cover, Booklet Tray Actuator Arm ....................................... 22
End Fence ............................................................................................. 23
1.1.5 DRAG ROLLER UNIT ........................................................................ 25
SM i D434
1.2 HORIZONTAL PAPER FEED ..................................................................... 27
1.2.1 ENTRANCE ....................................................................................... 27
Entrance Roller Motor ........................................................................... 27
Entrance Sensor.................................................................................... 29
1.2.2 REGISTRATION ................................................................................ 30
Registration Motor ................................................................................. 30
Horizontal Transport Motor .................................................................... 31
1.2.3 EXIT ................................................................................................... 33
Shift Tray Exit Motor .............................................................................. 33
1.3 PUNCH UNIT .............................................................................................. 35
1.3.1 PUNCH MOTORS AND SENSORS .................................................. 35
Punch Movement Motor ........................................................................ 35
Punch Unit HP Sensor .......................................................................... 36
Punch Drive Motor................................................................................. 36
Punch RPS Sensor ............................................................................... 37
Punch-out Hopper Full Sensor .............................................................. 38
1.4 PROOF TRAY ............................................................................................. 39
1.4.1 PROOF TRAY MOTORS ................................................................... 39
Proof Tray JG Motor .............................................................................. 39
Proof Tray Vertical Transport Motor ...................................................... 40
Proof Tray Exit Motor ............................................................................ 42
1.4.2 PROOF TRAY SENSORS ................................................................. 43
Proof Tray JG HP Sensor ...................................................................... 43
Proof Tray Exit Sensor, Proof Tray Full Sensor..................................... 44
1.5 SHIFT TRAY ............................................................................................... 47
1.5.1 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT ....................................... 47
Shift Motor ............................................................................................. 47
Shift Tray HP Sensors (Front, Rear) ..................................................... 48
1.5.2 SHIFT TRAY EXIT ............................................................................. 49
Shift Tray Exit Motor .............................................................................. 49
Shift Tray Exit Sensors (Long and Short) .............................................. 50
1.5.3 DRAG ROLLER MOTORS, SENSORS ............................................. 53
Drag Roller Motor .................................................................................. 53
Drag Drive Motor ................................................................................... 54
Drag Roller HP Sensor .......................................................................... 55
1.5.4 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT............................................................. 56
D434 ii SM
Shift Jogger Motor ................................................................................. 56
Shift Tray Jogger Fence HP Sensor ...................................................... 57
Shift Jogger Retraction Motor ................................................................ 58
Shift Jogger Fence Retract HP Sensor ................................................. 59
1.5.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION ................................................................ 60
Shift Tray Lift Motor ............................................................................... 60
Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3 (Shift, Staple, Z-Fold) ............................. 62
Paper Height Sensor (TE), Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch ..................... 63
Shift Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3, 4 (500) .................................................. 65
1.6 PRE-STACKER........................................................................................... 67
1.6.1 PRE-STACKER MOTORS ................................................................. 67
Pre-Stack Motor .................................................................................... 67
Pre-Stack Release Motor ...................................................................... 68
1.6.2 PRE-STACKER SENSORS ............................................................... 70
Pre-stack Roller HP Sensor................................................................... 70
1.7 CORNER STAPLER UNIT .......................................................................... 72
1.7.1 CORNER STAPLER UNIT ENTRANCE ............................................ 72
Stapler JG Motor ................................................................................... 72
Stapler JG HP Sensor ........................................................................... 73
Stapling Tray Entrance Sensor.............................................................. 73
Stapling Tray Entrance Motor ................................................................ 75
Stapling Tray Paper Sensor .................................................................. 76
1.7.2 CORNER STAPLER SIDE-TO-SIDE JOGGING ................................ 77
Front Jogger Fence Motor ..................................................................... 77
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (Front) .......................................................... 79
Rear Jogger Fence Motor ..................................................................... 80
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (Rear) ........................................................... 82
1.7.3 CORNER STAPLING BOTTOM/TOP JOGGING ............................... 82
Positioning Roller Rotation Motor .......................................................... 82
Positioning Roller Motor ........................................................................ 84
Positioning Roller HP Sensor ................................................................ 85
Corner Stapler Bottom Fence Motor ...................................................... 86
Bottom Fence HP Sensor ...................................................................... 87
Corner Stapler Top Fence Motor ........................................................... 88
Top Fence HP Sensor ........................................................................... 90
1.7.4 CORNER STAPLING EDGE PRESS BEFORE STAPLING .............. 91
SM iii D434
Edge Press Motor/Sensor Plate ............................................................ 91
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Rear)................................. 93
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center).............................. 95
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front) ................................ 98
1.7.5 CORNER STAPLING ....................................................................... 100
Corner Stapler ..................................................................................... 100
Corner Stapler Movement Motor ......................................................... 102
Stapler Rotation Motor ........................................................................ 103
Staple Trimmings Hopper Full/Set Sensors......................................... 104
Stapler Movement Sensors ................................................................. 106
1.7.6 CORNER STAPLED STACK FEED OUT ........................................ 108
Stack Transport Unit HP Sensor ......................................................... 108
Stack Transport Motor ......................................................................... 109
Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor .................................................................. 110
Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor .......................................................... 111
Stack Junction Gate Motor .................................................................. 112
Stack JG HP Sensor ........................................................................... 113
1.7.7 CORNER STAPLED STACKS EXIT TO SHIFT TRAY .................... 114
Exit Guide Motor.................................................................................. 114
Exit Guide HP Sensor ......................................................................... 116
1.8 BOOKLET UNIT ........................................................................................ 117
1.8.1 BOOKLET STAPLER ....................................................................... 117
1.8.2 BOOKLET UNIT TRANSPORT, ENTRANCE .................................. 118
Fold Unit Entrance Sensor .................................................................. 118
1.8.3 BOOKLET SIDE-TO-SIDE JOGGING ............................................. 118
Booklet Stapler Side Fence Motor ....................................................... 118
Booklet Stapler Side Fence HP Sensor (Front) ................................... 119
Booklet Stapler Jogger HP Sensor (Rear) ........................................... 120
1.8.4 BOOKLET BOTTOM/TOP JOGGING .............................................. 120
Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence Motor ................................................... 120
Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence HP Sensor .......................................... 121
Booklet Stapler Top Fence Motor ........................................................ 122
Booklet Top Fence HP Sensor ............................................................ 123
1.8.5 BOOKLET PRESS FOR STAPLING ................................................ 124
Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Motor, Booklet Unit Exit Sensor ............ 124
Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Sensor .................................................. 130
D434 iv SM
1.8.6 BOOKLET FOLDING ....................................................................... 132
Fold Plate Motor .................................................................................. 132
Fold Plate Cam HP Sensor ................................................................. 133
Fold Plate HP Sensor .......................................................................... 133
1.8.7 BOOKLET EXIT, BOOKLET TRAY .................................................. 135
Fold Roller Motor ................................................................................. 135
Booklet Stapler Exit Sensor ................................................................. 136
Booklet Staple Tray Full Sensors (Upper/Lower) ................................ 136
1.9 BOARDS ................................................................................................... 139
1.9.1 SUB BOARD .................................................................................... 139
1.9.2 MAIN BOARD .................................................................................. 139
1.9.3 PUNCH UNIT PCB .......................................................................... 142
1.9.4 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT PCB .................................................. 142
1.9.5 PSU ................................................................................................. 143
1.10 SWITCHES ......................................................................................... 144
1.10.1 FRONT DOOR SWITCH ............................................................ 144
1.10.2 BREAKER SWITCH ................................................................... 144
1.10.3 EMERGENCY SHIFT TRAY STOP SWITCH............................. 145
1.11 ROLLERS AND BRUSHES ................................................................. 147
1.11.1 ROLLERS................................................................................... 147
Drag Roller .......................................................................................... 147
Positioning Roller ................................................................................ 147
Alignment Brush Roller ........................................................................ 148
1.11.2 DISCHARGE BRUSHES ............................................................ 150
Shift Tray Exit ...................................................................................... 150
Corner Stapler Entrance ...................................................................... 150
Booklet Unit Exit .................................................................................. 150
1.12 SPECIAL ADJUSTMENTS .................................................................. 152
1.12.1 HORIZONTAL SKEW ................................................................. 152
[A] Adjustment: Rear Fence Low ......................................................... 153
[B] Adjustment: Front Fence Low ........................................................ 154
1.12.2 VERTICAL SKEW ...................................................................... 155
1.12.3 BOTTOM FENCE REPLACEMENT ........................................... 156
2. DETAILS ...................................................................................... 160
2.1 PAPER PATH ........................................................................................... 160
SM v D434
2.2 PROOF TRAY, STAPLER JUNCTION GATES ........................................ 162
2.3 PUNCH UNIT ............................................................................................ 163
2.3.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE ....................................................................... 163
2.3.2 PUNCH-OUT COLLECTION............................................................ 165
2.4 PRE-STACKING ....................................................................................... 166
2.4.1 PAPER SIZES A4 AND SMALLER .................................................. 166
2.4.2 PAPER SIZES B4 AND LARGER .................................................... 166
2.5 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING .................................................... 168
2.6 STAPLING ................................................................................................ 170
2.7 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT ................................................................... 171
2.8 STAPLER .................................................................................................. 173
2.9 FEED-OUT ................................................................................................ 175
2.10 PAPER EXIT ....................................................................................... 176
2.11 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION ................................................................. 177
2.11.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 177
2.11.2 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAND-BY MODE......................... 179
2.11.3 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: SHIFT MODE ................................ 180
2.11.4 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAPLE MODE ............................. 181
2.11.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: Z-FOLDED PAPER ....................... 182
2.11.6 SHIFT TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS ................................ 183
2.12 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT ......................................... 184
2.13 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT .............................................................. 185
2.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT ................................... 185
2.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE ............................................................... 186
2.14 BOOKLET UNIT .................................................................................. 187
2.14.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 187
2.14.2 FOLDING, STAPLING OPERATION .......................................... 189
2.15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS............................................................ 196
2.15.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................... 196
2.15.2 MOTORS.................................................................................... 197
Main Motors......................................................................................... 197
Paper Transport Motors ...................................................................... 198
Operation Motors................................................................................. 199
2.15.3 SENSORS .................................................................................. 200
Paper Path Sensors ............................................................................ 200
Sensors around the Shift Tray, Trimmings Hopper ............................. 201
D434 vi SM
Shift Tray Jogger Unit .......................................................................... 202
2.15.4 CORNER STAPLER .................................................................. 203
2.15.5 BOOKLET STAPLER ................................................................. 206
2.15.6 PUNCH UNIT ............................................................................. 207
2.15.7 BOARDS, SWITCHES ............................................................... 208
2.15.8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY .................................. 208
SM vii D434
Read This First
Safety, Conventions, Trademarks
Conventions
Common Terms
This is a list of symbols and abbreviations used in this manual.
Symbol What it means
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
= Harness clamp
FFC Flexible Film Cable
JG Junction Gate
LE Leading Edge of paper
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed
TE Trailing Edge of paper
S31E The "Emitter" sensor of a sensor pair
S31R The "Receptor" sensor of a sensor pair
The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe the direction of paper feed, with the arrows
indicating paper feed direction.
Warnings, Cautions, Notes
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning
could result in death or serious injury.
A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution
could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the finisher or other property.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,
loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this
manual handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
Switches and Symbols
Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the
meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer
Reference Material for Maintenance
Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer
engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer engineers
shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the “CE Safety Guide”.
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the
machine.
Before Installation, Maintenance
Power
Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After
switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other
devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few
seconds, then unplug the machine from the power source.
Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do
checks or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears,
timing belts, etc.).
After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from
electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit,
gears, timing belts, etc.
Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments
After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the
machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping
materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for
installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This
also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal
operation.
Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use
your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
Special Tools
Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.
For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described in the
service manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could damage parts,
could damage the machine or cause injuries.
During Maintenance
General
Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2)
Disconnect the power plug from the power source, 3) Allow the machine to cool for
at least 10 minutes.
Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot
surfaces.
Safety Devices
Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace
safety devices immediately.
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device.
Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire
and personal injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is
operating normally and safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with
the machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine
could lead to a fire and personal injuries.
Organic Cleaners
During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.)
other than those described in the service manual.
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use
organic solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming
nauseous.
Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any
part that generates heat.
Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials
to prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg
injuries. Use “My Ace” Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak up spills. For
more details, please refer to Technical Bulletin “Silicone Oil Removal” (A024-50).
Ozone Filters
Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as described in
the service manual).
An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone
filters if they are not replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause
personnel working around the machine to feel unwell.
Power Plug and Power Cord
Before servicing the machine (especially when responding to a service call),
always make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the
power source. A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a
power surge caused by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it
if necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power
cord if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short
circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock.
Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make
sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg.
Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a
fire.
Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power
cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the
ground wire on the plug.
Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension
cord.
When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the
plug, not the cable.
After Installation, Servicing
Disposal of Used Items
Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums,
etc.) in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of
such items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste
from consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items
at one of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
Points to Confirm with Operators
At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine.
Emphasize the following points.
Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems
by following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to
remove.
Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the
machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described
in the operating instructions.
Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the
plug, not the cord) if any of the following events occur: 1) something has spilled into the
product, 2) service or repair of the product is necessary, 3) the product cover has been
damaged.
Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They should
never allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall into the
machine.
Safety Instructions for this Machine
1. The installation must be done by trained service technicians.
2. This machine weighs 316 kg. (695 lb.). At least four persons are required to remove
the machine from its pallet and position it for installation.
3. To prevent fire hazards never use flammable solvents around the machine.
4. Never place any object on the machine.
5. If anything falls into the machine, turn off the main power switch on the right side of the
machine, then disconnect the power cord from the power source.
6. Locate the machine on a sturdy flat surface where it will not be exposed to excessive
vibration.
7. To avoid fire hazard, confirm that the ventilation ports are not blocked, so air can flow
freely.
8. Gas generated by the molten glue can irritate the eyes, throat, and nose. The machine
should always be used in a well ventilated room.
9. To avoid the dangers of fire and electrical shock, make sure that the machine is never
exposed to:
Excessive high temperatures and/or humidity
Dust
Water
Direct sunlight
Open flame
Corrosive gases
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with
those marks.
Common Procedures
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES
1.1.1 OVERVIEW
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
SM 1 D434
Common Procedures
[A] Open the front door open
[B] Adjustable caster
[C] Pull the stack/stapler unit out (pull handle Rb12)
1. Inner covers:
D434 2 SM
Common Procedures
[A] Upper: Rb2, Rb8
[B] Center: Rb14, Rb16
[C] Lower Rb10, Rb11
1.1.2 COVERS
Rear Upper Cover
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Rear upper cover ( x5)
The rear upper cover must be removed before the rear lower cover.
Rear Lower Cover
Preparation
Rear upper cover
SM 3 D434
Common Procedures
1. Rear lower cover ( x4)
The screw near the power connection point is difficult to see.
Re-installation
1. Engage both tabs on the bottom of the rear lower cover before fastening the screws.
D434 4 SM
Common Procedures
Lower Inner Cover: Rb10, Rb11
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove handles Rb11, Rb12 ( x1 each, Pin x1 each)
2. Make sure that the pins [A] are removed and stored with the screws.
Remove the cover ( x2, Tabs x2)
Center Inner Cover: Rb14, Rb16
Preparation
SM 5 D434
Common Procedures
Lower inner cover
1. Remove:
[A] Rb16
[B] Rb 14 ( x1)
[C] Cover ( x4)
Upper Inner Cover: Rb2, Rb8
1. Remove:
[A] Rb2, Rb8.
If these tab releases are stiff, use the point of a sharp tool to release these knobs, then
pull them off. Work carefully to avoid breaking the tab releases.
[B] Cover ( x5)
D434 6 SM
Common Procedures
Front Door
Finisher
1. Remove [A] ( x1)
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Raise the hinge pin and bracket [B] out of the top of the door and pull the door away.
3. Lift the door off its bottom post.
Corner Strip Cover
1. Remove the top and bottom screws [1], [2] ( x2).
2. Disconnect the tabs at the top and bottom.
3. Twist the cover away from the corner.
SM 7 D434
Common Procedures
Top Rear Cover
1. Remove screws from the cover [A] ( x2).
2. Slowly disconnect the tabs of cover [A].
Shift Tray Jogger Unit
1. Remove:
[A] Jogger unit cover ( x2)
[B] Jogger unit screws ( x2)
D434 8 SM
Common Procedures
2. At the left rear corner, disconnect the jogger unit { and emergency shift tray stop
switch (= x2,
x2).
3. Lift the jogger unit [A] off (Hooks x2).
Left Upper Cover
Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit cover
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Shift tray jogger unit
D434
1. At the rear corner, make sure that the connector [A] of the harness running through the
cover is disconnected.
2. Remove the cover [B] ( x2),.
Proof Tray
Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit cover
Shift tray jogger unit
Left upper cover
SM 9 D434
Common Procedures
1. Remove proof tray [A] ( x2)
Top "L" Cover
Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit cover
Shift tray jogger unit
Left upper cover
Proof tray
1. Top tray screws [A] ( x4)
2. Disengage tabs:
[A] Front
[B] Right
D434 10 SM
Common Procedures
Right Upper Panel
1. Remove the right upper panel [A] ( x4)
Right Lower Panel
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The right lower panel covers the PSU, which retains residual voltage after the
system is switched off.
Before removing the right lower panel for any procedure, switch the machine off
and wait 30 min. for the charge on the PSU to discharge.
1. Remove right lower panel [A] ( x6)
SM 11 D434
Common Procedures
Shift Tray
1. While supporting the tray with one hand, pull gear [A] toward you to release the tray.
2. Lower the tray [B] slowly until it stops, then remove it. ( x4)
Booklet Tray
1. Just lift and pull the booklet tray [A] away from the side.
1.1.3 BOOKLET UNIT
Booklet Stapler
The booklet stapler weighs about 3 kg (6.6 lb.)
Preparation
Open the front door.
Pull stack/stapler unit out with Rb12
D434 12 SM
Common Procedures
1. Remove both booklet staplers.
2. Remove booklet stapler unit cover [A] ( x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Remove stapler unit [A] (
x1, x4)
4. Make sure connector [B] is disconnected.
5. Remove the stapler unit with its handle [C].
Booklet Unit
Preparation
Open the front door.
Front door
Corner strip cover
Lower inner cover Rb10, Rb11
Booklet stapler (recommended)
SM 13 D434
Common Procedures
The booklet unit weighs about 18 kg (40 lb.) with the booklet stapler installed.
The booklet stapler weighs about 3 kg (6.6 lb.)
The booklet unit is lighter and easier to remove and re-install with the booklet
stapler removed.
1. Make sure that the stack/staple unit is closed.
2. Locate the two motors attached to the rear of the stack/staple unit.
3. Disconnect the two motors {, ( x2).
4. Disconnect the connectors of the other harnesses attached to the rear of the
stack/staple unit at , ~, (= x2, x2).
D434 14 SM
Common Procedures
5. Push the stack/staple unit [A] out about halfway, until you can see the two black
connectors.
6. Disconnect the connectors [B] (
x2).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
7. Pull the stack/staple unit out until it stops.
SM 15 D434
Common Procedures
8. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x2)
9. Grip the unit [A] at { and , slide it to the right, and set it down on the floor.
D434 16 SM
Common Procedures
Handling and Moving the Booklet Unit
The metal edges of the booklet unit are sharp and can easily cut your hands or
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
fingers. Always handle the unit carefully.
1. Always lift the booklet unit with your hands positioned at { and .
2. Never attempt to lift the booklet unit by the edges (shown above by the red dotted
lines).
1.1.4 SIDE FENCE
Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit.
Pull stack/stapler unit out with handle Rb12.
Exit Roller Cover
This is the exit roller cover [A].
SM 17 D434
Common Procedures
1. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x2)
2. Remove the cover.
Shift Tray, Booklet Tray
1. Remove the booklet tray [A].
D434 18 SM
Common Procedures
2. Support the shift tray with your hand.
3. At the left rear corner, pull the gear [A] toward to release the tray, then lower the tray.
4. Remove the screws [B] (x3)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
5. Support the tray [A] with your hand to prevent it from falling, then remove the last screw.
( x1)
Shift Tray Base
This is the shift tray base [A].
SM 19 D434
Common Procedures
1. Rear cover [A] ( x1).
2. Slide the cover off. You do not need to remove the screw.
3. Front cover [A] ( x1)
4. Slide the cover off. You do not need to remove the screw.
5. Front belt clamp [A] ( x1)
D434 20 SM
Common Procedures
6. Rear belt clamp [A] ( x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
7. At the front, pull the belt [A] out and set it behind the plate.
8. Front base plate [A] ( x2)
SM 21 D434
Common Procedures
9. Disconnect the rear end of the base [A] from the side fence (you do not need to
remove the plate).
Left Lower Cover, Booklet Tray Actuator Arm
1. Half-turn sensor harness [A] (= x6, x1)
2. Rear cover [A] ( x3)
D434 22 SM
Common Procedures
3. Booklet tray actuator arm [A] ( x2)
End Fence
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Disconnect:
[A] Motor (= x 1,
x1)
[B] Half-turn sensor (= x 1,
x1)
SM 23 D434
Common Procedures
2. Rear:
[A] Top ( x1)
[B] Center ( x1)
[C] Bottom ( x1)
3. Front:
[A] Top ( x1)
[B] Center ( x1)
[C] Bottom ( x1)
Re-installation
1. When you re-attach the exit roller cover [A]:
Make sure the small mylar { is set as shown above.
Make sure the large mylars and } are set as shown above.
D434 24 SM
Common Procedures
1.1.5 DRAG ROLLER UNIT
Preparation
Side fence
This is the drag roller unit [A].
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Harness connectors (= x7)
2. Connectors (= x1, x2)
SM 25 D434
Common Procedures
3. Motor harnesses ( x2)
4. Remove:
[A] Front ( x2)
[B] Rear ( x2)
5. Remove the drag roller unit [A].
D434 26 SM
Horizontal Paper Feed
1.2 HORIZONTAL PAPER FEED
1.2.1 ENTRANCE
Entrance Roller Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear lower cover
Right upper panel
Sub board
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The entrance roller motor is under the entrance paper guide.
SM 27 D434
Horizontal Paper Feed
1. Disconnect and remove the main board [A] ( x4, Ground connectors x2,
x All,
x All) so you can access the motor bracket [B].
2. Disconnect the motor bracket [A] ( x2, Timing belt x1, Spring x1).
3. From inside the unit, pull the bracket [A] (with the motor attached) through the hole.
D434 28 SM
Horizontal Paper Feed
4. Remove the motor [A] from the bracket ( x 2).
Entrance Sensor
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The entrance sensor port is above the paper guide.
1. Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket ( x1)
[B] Sensor (
x1, Pawls x5)
SM 29 D434
Horizontal Paper Feed
1.2.2 REGISTRATION
Registration Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Right upper panel
Sub board
The registration motor is behind the sub board.
1. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x2, x1, Belt x1)
D434 30 SM
Horizontal Paper Feed
2. Remove motor [A] ( x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Horizontal Transport Motor
D434
Preparation
Rear upper cover
The horizontal transport motor is in the center.
SM 31 D434
Horizontal Paper Feed
1. Disconnect motor [A] ( x2)
2. Disconnect the motor bracket:
[A] Left hook
[B] Right hook
3. Disconnect motor [A] (Belt x1, x1)
4. Remove bracket [B] ( x2)
D434 32 SM
Horizontal Paper Feed
1.2.3 EXIT
Shift Tray Exit Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The shift tray exit motor is at the rear left corner.
1. Disconnect motor [A] ( x2, = x2)
SM 33 D434
Horizontal Paper Feed
2. Disconnect motor bracket [A] (Hook x1, x 1)
3. Motor bracket [A] ( x2)
D434 34 SM
Punch Unit
1.3 PUNCH UNIT
1.3.1 PUNCH MOTORS AND SENSORS
Punch Movement Motor
Preparation
Punch unit
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Punch movement motor bracket [A] ( x1)
2. Remove:
[A] Spring x1
[B] Bracket ( x1)
SM 35 D434
Punch Unit
3. Disconnect motor [A] (= x1, x1)
Punch Unit HP Sensor
Preparation
Punch unit
1. Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket ( x1)
[B] Sensor (
x1, Pawls x5)
Punch Drive Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
D434 36 SM
Punch Unit
1. Disconnect:
[A] Motor (= x1,
x1)
[B] Bracket ( x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Remove motor [A].
Punch RPS Sensor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
1. Sensor [A] (= x1, x1, Pawls x5)
SM 37 D434
Punch Unit
Punch-out Hopper Full Sensor
Preparation
Remove the right upper panel
1. Sensor swing plate [A] (Spring x1, x1, = x1, x1)
2. Sensor ( x1)
D434 38 SM
Proof Tray
1.4 PROOF TRAY
1.4.1 PROOF TRAY MOTORS
Proof Tray JG Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Punch unit PCB
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The proof tray JG motor is located here.
1. Disconnect motor [A] (= x4, x2)
SM 39 D434
Proof Tray
2. Bracket of the motor [A] ( x2)
3. Remove:
[A] Motor with bracket
[B] Bracket ( x2)
Proof Tray Vertical Transport Motor
D434 40 SM
Proof Tray
The proof tray vertical transport motor is located here, partially covered by the punch unit
PCB.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Top rear cover
Punch unit PCB
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Bracket of the motor [A] ( x2)
2. Pull out motor [A] (Hook x1, Belt x1, x1)
SM 41 D434
Proof Tray
3. Remove bracket [A] ( x2)
Proof Tray Exit Motor
Preparation
Rear cover
Top rear cover
The proof tray exit motor is located here.
D434 42 SM
Proof Tray
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x2, Hook x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Remove the motor [A] and bracket (Belt x1,
x1. x2)
1.4.2 PROOF TRAY SENSORS
Proof Tray JG HP Sensor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] and sensor ( x1, x1, Pawls x5)
SM 43 D434
Proof Tray
Re-installation
1. Turn the proof JG motor [A] gear to move the actuator to the left if the sensor is difficult
to re-install.
Proof Tray Exit Sensor, Proof Tray Full Sensor
Preparation
Upper inner cover
Rear top cover
Shift tray jogger unit
Left upper cover
Proof tray
These sensors are mounted on the same bracket under the paper path cover.
D434 44 SM
Proof Tray
1. At the front, disconnect the shaft [A] of plate Rb5. ( x1)
2. Remove Rb5 [B]
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Use a short screwdriver to remove bracket plate [A]. ( x1)
4. Use a pencil or marker to mark the color and location of the harnesses.
5. Disconnect a standoff { to create slack in the harnesses.
6. Disconnect the bracket and sensors [A] (= x4,
x2).
SM 45 D434
Proof Tray
7. Remove:
[A] Tray full sensor ( x1)
[B] Tray exit sensor (Pawls x5)
D434 46 SM
Shift Tray
1.5 SHIFT TRAY
1.5.1 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT
Shift Motor
Preparation
Side fence
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The shift motor is visible inside the machine, but the side fence must be removed for
servicing this motor.
1. Lay the side fence on a flat surface.
2. Remove bracket [A] ( x4, Hook x1)
SM 47 D434
Shift Tray
3. Turn the bracket over and remove the motor [A] ( x2, Belt x1)
Shift Tray HP Sensors (Front, Rear)
These sensors are mounted on the same bracket as the shift motor.
Preparation
Side fence
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
2. Remove sensors ( x2, = x3, Pawls 5 each)
D434 48 SM
Shift Tray
1.5.2 SHIFT TRAY EXIT
Shift Tray Exit Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The shift tray exit motor is at the rear left corner.
1. Disconnect motor [A] ( x2, = x2)
SM 49 D434
Shift Tray
2. Disconnect motor bracket [A] (Hook x1)
3. Motor bracket [A] ( x2)
Shift Tray Exit Sensors (Long and Short)
Preparation
Proof tray
D434 50 SM
Shift Tray
1. Lift arm [A] ( x1).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. At the front, remove the bushing ( x1).
3. At the rear, remove:
[A] Gear ( x1, Belts x2)
SM 51 D434
Shift Tray
[B] Bushing ( x1)
4. At the rear, disconnect the sensor harness.
5. Pull it though the hole into the machine.
6. Pull the plate assembly out from the front of the machine.
7. Lay the assembly on a flat surface.
8. Remove the plate [A].
D434 52 SM
Shift Tray
9. Remove:
[A] Exit sensor (long) (Tab x1,
x1)
[B] Exit sensor (short) (Tab x1,
x1))
1.5.3 DRAG ROLLER MOTORS, SENSORS
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Drag Roller Motor
The drag roller motor is visible inside the machine, but the side fence and drag roller unit
must be removed to service this motor.
Preparation
Side fence
Drag roller unit
SM 53 D434
Shift Tray
1. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x2).
2. Turn the drag roller unit over and remove the motor [B].
3. Remove motor [A] (= x1, x1).
Drag Drive Motor
The drag roller motor is visible inside the machine, but the side fence and drag roller unit
must be removed to service this motor.
D434 54 SM
Shift Tray
Preparation
Side fence
Drag roller unit
1. Turn the drag roller unit on its side with the face of the motor down.
2. Remove the motor [A] ( x2).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Drag Roller HP Sensor D434
Preparation
Side fence
Drag roller unit
SM 55 D434
Shift Tray
1. Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket ( x1)
[B] Sensor (
x1, Pawls x5)
1.5.4 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT
Shift Jogger Motor
This motor is on top of the shift tray jogger unit, near the center.
Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit
D434 56 SM
Shift Tray
This is the location of the motor with the shift jogger unit removed.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Turn the unit over and disconnect the motor ( x2, Belt x1).
2. Disconnect motor [A] ( x1)
Shift Tray Jogger Fence HP Sensor
Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit
SM 57 D434
Shift Tray
1. Remove sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5)
Shift Jogger Retraction Motor
This is the motor on the end of the shift tray jogger unit.
Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit
1. Disconnect the motor harness [A] (= x1, x1)
D434 58 SM
Shift Tray
2. Disconnect the retraction HP sensor on the same bracket as the motor [A] (= x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Disconnect motor bracket [A] (= x1, x2)
Shift Jogger Fence Retract HP Sensor
Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit
SM 59 D434
Shift Tray
1. Remove sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5)
If it is difficult to remove the sensor directly from the frame (or re-install), do
the procedure in the previous section to remove the shift jogger retraction
motor bracket.
1.5.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION
Shift Tray Lift Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear top cover
Proof tray
D434 60 SM
Shift Tray
The shift tray lift motor is near the left rear corner.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Disconnect the motor drive board (
x1).
2. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x1)
SM 61 D434
Shift Tray
[B] Front ( x1)
3. Pull the motor and drive board motor out.
Paper Height Sensors 1, 2, 3 (Shift, Staple, Z-Fold)
Preparation
Proof tray
1. Remove the protector plate [A] ( x1).
2. Remove feeler [A] ( x1).
D434 62 SM
Shift Tray
3. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, Standoffs x2)
4. Sensors ( x1 each)
{ Paper Height Sensor 1: Staple Mode
Paper Height Sensor 2: Shift Mode
} Paper Height Sensor 3: Z-Fold Mode
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Paper Height Sensor (TE), Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch
D434
The actuator [A] of the paper height sensor performs two functions:
First, it rises and actuates the Paper Height Sensor (TE) [B] to detect tray full.
Second, if the actuator rises far enough through the gap of the interrupt sensor (TE) it
will trip the arm [C] of a micro-switch [D]. This is a fail-safe device to switch the finisher
off if one or more other sensors fail.
Preparation
Side fence
Drag roller assembly
Paper Height Sensor (TE)
SM 63 D434
Shift Tray
1. Remove sensor plate [A] ( x2, = x2)
2. Sensor ( x1, Pawls x5)
Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch
1. Turn the drag roller unit [A] over so that you can see the micro-switch [B].
D434 64 SM
Shift Tray
2. Remove the switch [A] from the frame (= x2, x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Disconnect the switch (
x2)
Shift Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3, 4 (500)
The tray full sensors are all mounted on the same vertical stay at the left rear corner of the
finisher:
Shift Tray Full Sensor (500)
Shift Tray Full Sensor (1000)
Shift Tray Full Sensor (1500)
Shift Tray Full Sensor (2500)
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear lower panel
SM 65 D434
Shift Tray
1. Remove the vertical stay cover ( x3).
2. The four sensors, ( x1 each, Pawls x5 each)
{ Shift Tray Full Sensor (500)
Shift Tray Full Sensor (1000)
} Shift Tray Full Sensor (1500)
~ Shift Tray Full Sensor (2500)
D434 66 SM
Pre-Stacker
1.6 PRE-STACKER
1.6.1 PRE-STACKER MOTORS
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
With the right upper panel removed, the pre-stack motor is visible from the right side of the
finisher below the lock bar.
Pre-Stack Motor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Right upper panel
Rear lower panel
Sub board
Main board
Right lower plate
The motor does not hang on a bracket. Work carefully and do not allow it to
fall after you remove the last screw.
SM 67 D434
Pre-Stacker
1. Rear [A] ( x2, Belt x1)
2. Front [B]: Remove the motor ( x1)
Pre-Stack Release Motor
D434 68 SM
Pre-Stacker
The pre-stack motor is only partially visible behind the sub board and main board.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Right upper panel
Rear lower panel
Sub board
Main board
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. At the rear, disconnect the motor (
x1).
2. Disconnect the drive assembly cam and cam follower at [A] (Teflon gear x1, x1, Belt
x1).
3. Remove the motor bracket ( x2).
SM 69 D434
Pre-Stacker
4. Remove motor [A] ( x2)
Re-installation
1. If the Teflon gear [A] will not lock in place, behind the frame pull the shaft of the
pre-stack roller [B] toward the motor.
1.6.2 PRE-STACKER SENSORS
Pre-stack Roller HP Sensor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear lower panel
Sub board
Main board
D434 70 SM
Pre-Stacker
1. Disconnect sensor harness [A] ( x1)
2. Remove sensor bracket [B] ( x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Sensor (Pawls x5)
SM 71 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
1.7 CORNER STAPLER UNIT
1.7.1 CORNER STAPLER UNIT ENTRANCE
Stapler JG Motor
The stapler junction gate motor is behind the punch unit PCB.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Punch unit PCB
1. Open the harness clamps of the motor [A] (= x3)
2. Disconnect the motor at [B] ( x1)
D434 72 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Remove motor bracket [A] ( x2)
Slowly, pull the bracket away.
Make sure the Teflon collar [B] does not fall off the end of the junction gate shaft.
Remove it so that it does not accidentally slip off the end of the shaft.
Stapler JG HP Sensor
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Preparation
D434
Rear upper cover
Punch unit PCB
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x).
2. Sensor (Pawls x5).
Stapling Tray Entrance Sensor
Preparation
Right lower panel
Pull out the stack/staple unit
SM 73 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
The stapling tray entrance sensor is under the bracket [A] at the right rear corner of the
stack/staple unit.
1. .At the back of the stack/staple unit, disconnect the sensor at [B] (
x1)
2. Remove bracket [A] ( x2)
3. Remove sensor [A] ( x1, x1)
D434 74 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
Stapling Tray Entrance Motor
The stapling tray entrance motor is on the back of the stack/staple unit.
Finisher
Preparation
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Rear upper cover
Rear lower panel
Sub board
Main board
1. Remove motor [A] ( x1, x2)
SM 75 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Remove motor [A] ( x2).
Stapling Tray Paper Sensor
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12)
The stapling tray paper sensor shares the same bracket with the top fence HP
sensor.
Use a marker to mark one of the harnesses to prevent incorrect correction at
re-installation.
The stapling tray paper sensor is on bracket [A].
D434 76 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Remove and disconnect bracket [A] ( x, = x5, x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Remove the paper sensor [A] (the photosensor) ( x1)
The other sensor is the top fence HP sensor.
1.7.2 CORNER STAPLER SIDE-TO-SIDE JOGGING
Front Jogger Fence Motor
The front jogger fence motor is behind the front plate of the stack/staple unit.
Preparation
SM 77 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12)
1. Loosen screw [A] to release the belt tension ( x1).
2. Disconnect motor [B] (= x1, x1, x1)]
3. Remove motor [A] (= x1, Belt 1).
4. Disconnect motor [A] ( x2)
Re-installation
D434 78 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. After re-installing the motor, be sure to re-tighten the belt screw.
Make sure the belt is tight.
The tension of the belt can be adjusted to compensate for stretching in the belt
that may occur when it reaches the end of its service life.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (Front)
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12)
1. Disconnect:
[A] Spring x1
[B]
x1
[C] Pawls x5
SM 79 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Rear Jogger Fence Motor
The rear jogger fence motor is mounted on the rear plate of the stack/staple unit.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12)
1. Loosen screw [A] to release the belt tension ( x1).
D434 80 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Disconnect motor [A] (= x1, x1, x2).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Disconnect motor [A] ( x2)
Re-installation
1. After re-installing the motor, be sure to re-tighten the belt screw.
Make sure the belt is tight.
SM 81 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
The tension of the belt can be adjusted to compensate for stretching in the belt
that may occur when it reaches the end of its service life.
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (Rear)
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12)
1. Disconnect and remove the sensor:
{ = x1
= x1
} x1
~ Pawls x5
1.7.3 CORNER STAPLING BOTTOM/TOP JOGGING
Positioning Roller Rotation Motor
The positioning roller rotation motor is under the motor cover on the right side of the
D434 82 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
stack/staple unit.
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
1. Remove motor cover [A] ( x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Remove motor [A] (= x1,
x1, x2)
SM 83 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Positioning Roller Motor
The positioning roller motor is under the motor cover on the right side of the stack/staple
unit.
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
Right lower panel
1. Remove motor cover [A] ( x2)
D434 84 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Remove motor [A] ( x1, x2, Belt x1)
Positioning Roller HP Sensor
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove motor cover [A] ( x2).
2. Remove sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5)
SM 85 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Corner Stapler Bottom Fence Motor
The corner stapler bottom fence motor is near the center of the stack/staple unit.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12)
1. Remove motor [A] ( x1, x2).
D434 86 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Separate motor [A] from the bracket ( x2).
Bottom Fence HP Sensor
Preparation
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12)
D434
The bottom fence HP sensor shares the same bracket with the stack feed-out belt
HP sensor. Use a marker to mark one of the harnesses to avoid incorrect
connection at re-installation.
1. Remove bracket [A] ( x1, = x1)
SM 87 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Disconnect the bottom fence HP sensor { (= x1, x2, Pawls x5).
The bottom fence HP sensor { (the interrupt sensor without the feeler) is on the same
bracket as the (sensor with feeler attached).
Corner Stapler Top Fence Motor
The corner stapler top fence motor is on the rear panel of the corner stapler unit.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear lower cover
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12)
D434 88 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Disconnect motor [A] ( x1)
2. Push the stack/staple unit [B] into the finisher until it stops and locks.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Remove the belt { and screw . ( x1, Belt x1)
4. Loosen screw } slightly.
Do not remove screw }! The motor will fall if you remove this screw.
SM 89 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
5. While supporting the motor [A] with your right hand to prevent the motor from falling,
remove the remaining screw from behind the panel ( x1).
Top Fence HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12)
The top fence HP sensor is on bracket [A].
1. Remove and disconnect bracket [A] ( x, = x5, x2)
D434 90 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Remove the top fence HP sensor [A] (the photointerrupter sensor with the feeler ( x1)
The other sensor is the stapling tray paper sensor.
1.7.4 CORNER STAPLING EDGE PRESS BEFORE STAPLING
Edge Press Motor/Sensor Plate
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The removal of this motor/sensor plate is a common procedure for the next three
procedures below.
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
Right lower panel
1. Remove cover [A] ( x1)
SM 91 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
2. At the back, disconnect the motors and sensors {, , } ( x3, x3)
3. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x2)
4. Remove the plate [A] and set it on a flat surface.
{ Front motor, sensor, plunger
Center motor, sensor, plunger
} Rear motor, sensor, plunger
D434 92 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Rear)
The rear stack plate motor is under the motor cover with the front and center stack motor.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Preparation
Edge Press Motor/Sensor Plate
Stack Plate Motor (Rear)
1. Depress plunger [A] to see the other screw.
2. Remove both screws ( x2).
3. Turn the plate over.
4. Remove motor [B] ( x1, = x1)
SM 93 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Stack Plate HP Sensor (Rear)
1. Rotate the gear and belt to move actuator [A] out of the gap of the sensor [B]
2. Turn the plate over.
D434 94 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Disconnect the sensor at [A] ( x1).
4. Turn the plate over.
5. Remove sensor [B] (Pawls x5).
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The center stack plate motor is under the motor cover with the front and rear stack motors.
Preparation
Edge Press Motor/Sensor Plate
Stack Plate Motor (Center)
1. Rotate the gear clockwise to raise the plunger [A] and relieve the tension on the spring
[B].
2. Remove spring [B].
SM 95 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Disconnect shafts { and and slide them out ( x2).
4. Turn the plate over.
5. Remove the screws ( x2).
D434 96 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
6. Remove the motor (= x1, x1).
Stack Plate HP Sensor (Center)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Rotate the gear to move actuator [A] out of the gap [B].
2. Turn the plate over.
3. Disconnect the sensor at [C]
4. Remove sensor [A] (Pawls x5)
SM 97 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Stack Plate Motor, Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front)
Preparation
Edge Press Motor/Sensor Plate
Stack Plate Motor (Front)
1. Depress plunger [A] so you can see the screw.
2. Remove the screws. ( x2)
D434 98 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Remove motor [A] (= x1, x1, Belt x1).
Stack Plate HP Sensor (Front)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Rotate the gear to move plunger [A] out of the gap of the sensor [B].
2. Turn the plate over.
SM 99 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Disconnect the sensor at [A] ( x1).
4. Remove sensor [B] Pawls x5).
1.7.5 CORNER STAPLING
Corner Stapler
Preparation
Pull the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
1. Remove the stapler cartridge [A].
2. Remove cover [A] ( x2)
D434 100 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
3. Disconnect the stapler [A] ( x2).
4. Lift the stapler off its posts but do NOT pull it away.
This is still one harness connected inside the stapler.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
5. Disconnect harness [A] (= x3,
x1)
SM 101 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
Corner Stapler Movement Motor
The corner stapler movement motor is at the bottom of the corner stapler unit.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.17)
1. On the left [A], disconnect the motor ( x1).
2. On the right [B], remove the motor ( x2, Belt x1)
D434 102 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
Stapler Rotation Motor
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
You can see the stapler rotation motor on the bottom of the corner stapler unit next to the D434
corner stapler.
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
SM 103 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Disconnect the motor at [A] ( x1).
2. Remove the motor at [B] ( x2, Belt x1).
Staple Trimmings Hopper Full/Set Sensors
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
Rear upper cover
Rear lower panel
Trimmings Hopper Unit
D434 104 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Remove the staple trimmings hopper.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Free the harness [A] and disconnect it from the main board [B] (= x11,
x1).
3. Gather the disconnected harness [A].
4. Disconnect the trimmings collection unit [B] ( x2).
SM 105 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
5. Disconnect tab [A] (Tab x1, = x2).
6. Release hinge shaft [B] ( x1).
7. Open the unit.
8. Detach:
{ Hopper set sensor (Pawls x5)
Hopper full sensor
Stapler Movement Sensors
Common procedures
Corner Stapler HP Sensor
Corner Stapler Rotation HP Sensor (Rear)
Corner Stapler Rotation HP Sensor (Front)
Preparation
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12.
Corner stapler
D434 106 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Push the stapler to the rear [A].
2. Remove the screw of the stapler guide rail [B] ( x1).
3. Push the guide rail [C] to the rear and remove it.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
4. Remove spring [A].
5. Loosen screw [B] (do not remove it).
6. Rotate the plate down to relieve tension on the belt.
7. Disconnect the belt at the front and back.
8. Lift the stapler mount [A] off its rails and turn it toward the rear so you can see the back
of the mount. The mount is on two steel rollers { and that rest on the bottom rail of
SM 107 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
the corner stapler unit.
9. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x2).
Three sensors are on this bracket:
{ Rotation HP sensor (rear) ( x1, Pawls x5)
Rotation HP sensor (front) ( x1, Pawls x5)
} Stapler HP sensor ( x1, Pawls x5)
Re-installation
1. When you set the stapler mount on its rails, make sure the belt [A] is not tangled and
above the two rollers.
1.7.6 CORNER STAPLED STACK FEED OUT
Stack Transport Unit HP Sensor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
1. Remove the stacker transport motor
D434 108 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Remove sensor bracket and sensor [A] ( x1).
3. Remove the sensor ( x1, Pawls x5)
Stack Transport Motor
Preparation
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Rear upper cover
D434
Rear lower cover
1. Remove motor [A] (= x3, x1, x2)
SM 109 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Separate motor [A] from the bracket ( x2).
Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
The stack feed-out belt motor is behind the front plate of the corner stack/staple unit.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12)
1. Behind the front plate [A], disconnect the motor ( x1).
D434 110 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
2. On the face of the front plate [B], remove the screws ( x2)
3. Remove the motor (Belt x1).
4. Separate the bracket and motor [A] ( x2).
Stack Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
Preparation
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12)
D434
1. Remove bracket [A] ( x1, = x1)
SM 111 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
2. Disconnect the stack feed-out belt HP sensor (= x1,
x2, Pawls x5).
The bottom fence HP sensor { (the photointerrupter without the feeler) is on the same
bracket as the stack feed-out belt HP sensor (sensor with feeler attached).
Stack Junction Gate Motor
The stack junction gate motor is on the back of the finisher.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
D434 112 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Remove motor [A] ( x1, x2).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Separate the bracket and motor [A] ( x2).
Stack JG HP Sensor
Preparation
Rear upper cover
SM 113 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
1. If the actuator [A] is in the gap of the sensor, rotate gear and belt [B] until the actuator
is out of the gap.
2. Remove sensor bracket [C] ( x1).
3. Remove sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5).
1.7.7 CORNER STAPLED STACKS EXIT TO SHIFT TRAY
Exit Guide Motor
The exit guide motor assembly is at the left rear corner of the finisher.
Preparation
Proof tray
D434 114 SM
Corner Stapler Unit
1. Disconnect the harnesses (= x2, x1).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Disconnect sensor harness [A] (= x3,
x1)
3. Disconnect and remove rocker arm [A] ( x1).
SM 115 D434
Corner Stapler Unit
4. Remove the exit guide plate assembly [A] ( x2).
5. Disconnect motor [A] ( x2, Belt x1)
6. Separate the motor [B] and bracket ( x2).
Exit Guide HP Sensor
Preparation
Proof tray
1. Remove the exit guide motor assembly (see the previous procedure)
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1)
2. Remove sensor [B] (Pawls x5).
D434 116 SM
Booklet Unit
1.8 BOOKLET UNIT
1.8.1 BOOKLET STAPLER
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12).
This procedure describes removal of the booklet stapler after the booklet unit has
been removed.
Actually, the booklet stapler can be easily removed before removing the booklet
unit.
Removing the booklet stapler from the booklet stapler unit is recommended. This
makes the booklet unit lighter and easier to handle.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove cover [A] ( x2).
2. Remove the stapler unit [B] ( x4,
x1)
3. Lift the stapler unit [A] out with its handle.
4. Four sensors are behind the stapler unit:
{ Rear jogger fence HP sensor
Front jogger fence HP sensor
} Bottom fence HP sensor
~ Folder unit entrance sensor
SM 117 D434
Booklet Unit
1.8.2 BOOKLET UNIT TRANSPORT, ENTRANCE
Fold Unit Entrance Sensor
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12).
Booklet stapler
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
2. Remove sensor [B] ( x1, Pawls x5)
1.8.3 BOOKLET SIDE-TO-SIDE JOGGING
Booklet Stapler Side Fence Motor
The booklet stapler side fence motor is on the back of the booklet unit.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12).
D434 118 SM
Booklet Unit
1. Remove motor [A] (= x1, x1, x2)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Separate motor [A] from the bracket ( x2).
Booklet Stapler Side Fence HP Sensor (Front)
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12).
Booklet stapler
1. Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket ( x1)
SM 119 D434
Booklet Unit
[B] Sensor ( x1, Pawls x5)
Booklet Stapler Jogger HP Sensor (Rear)
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12).
Booklet stapler
1. Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket ( x1)
[B] Sensor (
x1, Pawls x5)
1.8.4 BOOKLET BOTTOM/TOP JOGGING
Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence Motor
The booklet stapler bottom fence motor is on the back of the booklet unit.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12).
D434 120 SM
Booklet Unit
1. Remove motor [A] ( x2, x1).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Separate the motor [A] from the bracket ( x2).
Booklet Stapler Bottom Fence HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12).
Booklet stapler
The bottom fence HP sensor is fastened to the right plate of the booklet unit.
SM 121 D434
Booklet Unit
1. On the right side, remove brace [A] so that you can see the sensor pawls ( x2).
2. Release the pawls [B] and push them through the plate (Pawls x5).
3. Disconnect the sensor ( x1).
Booklet Stapler Top Fence Motor
The top fence motor and sensor are on top of the booklet unit.
D434 122 SM
Booklet Unit
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12).
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
2. Separate motor [A] from the bracket ( x2)
Booklet Top Fence HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12).
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
2. Remove sensor [B] (= x1, x1, Pawls x5)
SM 123 D434
Booklet Unit
1.8.5 BOOKLET PRESS FOR STAPLING
Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Motor, Booklet Unit Exit Sensor
The clamp roller motor { and exit sensor cannot be removed until the motor base has
been removed.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12).
Motor Base Plate
1. Remove cover [A] ( x2).
D434 124 SM
Booklet Unit
2. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] and harness [B] ( x1, = x2, x1).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Disconnect motor harness [A] (= x6,
x1).
4. Pull belt { until you can see through the hole that the edge of the actuator } below
the hole is aligned as shown.
The edge of the actuator and the line on the left side of the hole must be aligned.
This releases the clamp roller so that there is no pressure on the base plate.
SM 125 D434
Booklet Unit
5. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x3)
6. Remove base plate [A].
7. Remove end-piece [B].
Exit Sensor
D434 126 SM
Booklet Unit
A guide shaft blocks access to the exit sensor bracket [A].
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove guide shaft screw [A] ( x1).
2. Rotate then slide the guide shaft [B] to the rear until you have enough space to remove
the bracket screw. (The guide does not need to be removed.)
3. Use a short screwdriver to remove the exit sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
4. Disconnect the exit sensor [B] (
x1, Pawls x5).
SM 127 D434
Booklet Unit
Clamp Roller Motor
Preparation
Motor base plate
1. Lay the motor base plate [A] on a flat surface.
2. Turn the base plate over.
3. Remove motor [A] ( x2, Belt x1).
Re-installation
To make sure there is no pressure on the base plate, pull belt { until you can see
D434 128 SM
Booklet Unit
through the hole that the edge of the actuator } below the hole is aligned as shown.
Turn gear [A] so that you can see the cut-out. The post of the linkage must be
re-inserted here when the motor base plate is re-installed.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
After the motor base plate [A] has been re-installed, the linkage will not be straight. It
will slant slightly from rear to front. This is normal.
SM 129 D434
Booklet Unit
Confirm that the ends of the vertical shafts fit correctly through the holes in the motor
base plate before you re-attach any screws.
Re-attach end-piece [A] at the front before you re-attach any other screws.
Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Sensor
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12).
1. Remove cover [A] ( x2)
D434 130 SM
Booklet Unit
2. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Remove sensor [A] (
x1, Pawls x5).
SM 131 D434
Booklet Unit
1.8.6 BOOKLET FOLDING
Fold Plate Motor
The fold plate motor is on the back of the booklet unit, below the fold roller motor.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12).
1. Remove motor [A] ( x2, Belt x1)
D434 132 SM
Booklet Unit
Fold Plate Cam HP Sensor
Preparation
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Remove the booklet unit (
p.12).
D434
Fold roller motor (described in the previous section)
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, = x1, x1).
2. Sensor (Pawls x5)
Fold Plate HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit ( p.12).
SM 133 D434
Booklet Unit
1. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x2)
2. Remove cross-brace [A] (= x2, x1)
3. Sensor [A] (Pawls x5)
D434 134 SM
Booklet Unit
1.8.7 BOOKLET EXIT, BOOKLET TRAY
Fold Roller Motor
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The fold roller motor is on the back of the booklet unit, above the fold plate motor.
Preparation
Remove the booklet unit (
p.117 "Booklet Stapler").
1. Remove motor [A] ( x2, Belt x1)
SM 135 D434
Booklet Unit
Booklet Stapler Exit Sensor
See "Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Motor, Booklet Unit Exit Sensor" ( p.12).
Booklet Staple Tray Full Sensors (Upper/Lower)
These sensors are on the same bracket.
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12.
Right lower panel
Rear upper tray
1. Raise the shift tray if it is down.
2. At the top of the left rear corner, pull gear [A] out while supporting the tray [B] with your
other hand, then push the tray up.
D434 136 SM
Booklet Unit
3. Remove the booklet tray [A].
4. Remove the left lower cover [B] ( x3).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
5. Remove the booklet tray actuator arm [A] ( x2).
6. Inside the finisher, open one or two clamps to create some slack in the harness. (=
x2)
SM 137 D434
Booklet Unit
7. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x2)
{ Upper sensor (= x2, x1)
Lower sensor (= x1, x1)
D434 138 SM
Boards
1.9 BOARDS
1.9.1 SUB BOARD
The sub board can be removed without removing the main board.
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Disconnect the harnesses (
x10).
2. Remove the sub board:
Screws {, ( x2)
Standoffs x3, }, ~,
3. Raise the board and disconnect it from the main board below.
1.9.2 MAIN BOARD
Preparation
Rear upper cover
Rear lower panel
Sub board
SM 139 D434
Boards
1. The sub board { and main board are on the back of the finisher.
2. Remove the sub board.
3. Disconnect the main board harnesses (
x38).
4. On the left, disconnect grid wires [A] and harnesses ( x2, = x5).
D434 140 SM
Boards
5. Open harness clamps:
[A] Top (= x3)
[B] Bottom (= x5)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
6. Remove the board bracket:
[A] Left ( x2)
[B] Top ( x1)
[C] Right ( x1)
SM 141 D434
Boards
7. Separate the board from the bracket ( x8)
1.9.3 PUNCH UNIT PCB
1. Remove the punch unit PCB ( x6, Standoffs x4).
1.9.4 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT PCB
Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit
D434 142 SM
Boards
1. Lay the shift jogger unit [A] on a flat surface.
2. Disconnect motor [B]. ( x1)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Remove PCB [A] (
x5, x2).
1.9.5 PSU
Preparation
Switch the system off.
Disconnect the finisher from its power source.
Wait at least 30 minutes for the PSU to cool.
Right lower panel
1. Remove the PSU board ( x6, x4)
SM 143 D434
Switches
1.10 SWITCHES
1.10.1 FRONT DOOR SWITCH
Preparation
Open the front door
Upper inner cover
1. Locate the door switch [A] on the front.
2. Inside the finisher, disconnect switch [B] ( x4).
3. Pinch both sides of the switch and push it out.
1.10.2 BREAKER SWITCH
Preparation
Switch the system off.
Disconnect the finisher from its power source.
Rear upper cover
D434 144 SM
Switches
Rear lower cover
1. Remove mounting bracket [A] ( x3).
2. Disconnect breaker switch [B] ( x4)
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Remove breaker switch [A] ( x2)
1.10.3 EMERGENCY SHIFT TRAY STOP SWITCH
Preparation
Shift tray jogger unit cover
Shift tray jogger unit
Left upper cover
SM 145 D434
Switches
The switch [A] is on the front end of the left upper cover.
1. Turn the cover over.
2. Remove the switch [A] ( x2, x1).
D434 146 SM
Rollers and Brushes
1.11 ROLLERS AND BRUSHES
1.11.1 ROLLERS
Drag Roller
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Replace:
[A] Rear ( x1, Belt x1)
[B] Front ( x1, Belt x1)
Positioning Roller
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
1. Remove motor cover [A] ( x2).
SM 147 D434
Rollers and Brushes
2. Replace sponge roller [A] ( x1, Belt x1)
Alignment Brush Roller
Preparation
Open the front door
Lower inner cover Rb10, Rb11
Center inner cover Rb14, Rb 16
Right lower panel
Rear
1. Remove gear [A].
2. Remove gear and bushing (Gear x1, Belt x1, Bushing x1)
Front
D434 148 SM
Rollers and Brushes
1. Remove the bushing [A] ( x1).
2. Remove the alignment brush roller.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Re-installation
1. The end of the shaft with the flat bevel is the rear end of the shaft where the gear and
belt must be re-attached.
SM 149 D434
Rollers and Brushes
1.11.2 DISCHARGE BRUSHES
Shift Tray Exit
1. Remove discharge brush [A] ( x2).
Corner Stapler Entrance
Preparation
Open the front door
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
1. Remove cover [A] ( x2)
2. Raise Rb13 [A].
3. Remove discharge brush [B] ( x2)
Booklet Unit Exit
Preparation
Remove booklet unit ( p.12).
D434 150 SM
Rollers and Brushes
The discharge brush [A] is on the left side of the booklet unit.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Remove:
[A] Rear ( x2)
[B] Front ( x2)
SM 151 D434
Special Adjustments
1.12 SPECIAL ADJUSTMENTS
1.12.1 HORIZONTAL SKEW
The booklet unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from
the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
1. Run a fold/staple job through the booklet unit with A3 (or DLT) paper.
2. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face-up (the same way
that it came out of the finisher).
3. Referring to the diagram above, determine if the skew is [A] or [B].
[A] indicates that the rear fence is low and must be raised.
[B] indicates that the front fence is low and must be raised.
Preparation
Pull the stack/staple unit out with handle Rb12
Remove the lower inner cover Rb10, Rb11
D434 152 SM
Special Adjustments
1. Before doing any adjustment:
Rotate the knob counter-clockwise { so that it is loose.
Rotate the knob clockwise until you feel some resistance, then stop.
2. Remove the screw.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
There is only one screw to remove. Check both holes.
The screw may be at the front or at the rear, depending on where it was
attached before shipping from the factory.
[A] Adjustment: Rear Fence Low
1. For [A] type skew, turn the adjustment screw on the front of the booklet unit to the left
(clockwise) to raise the rear fence.
Every notch adjusts the height 0.1 mm.
SM 153 D434
Special Adjustments
Turning the adjustment screw to the right may the rear fence so the holes at the rear
will no longer be aligned.
2. Re-attach the screw in the front hole where the holes are aligned.
[B] Adjustment: Front Fence Low
1. For [B] type skew, turn the adjustment screw on the front of the booklet unit to the
right (clockwise) to raise the front fence.
D434 154 SM
Special Adjustments
2. Re-attach the screw at the front hole.
1.12.2 VERTICAL SKEW
The booklet unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from
the factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
1. Switch the main machine and do a test run for booklet folding with either A3 or DLT
paper
This procedure shows you how to test and adjust vertical skew for A3/DLT
paper.
This same adjustment can be done for other paper sizes as well with SP6201.
2. Look at the paper and determine what kind of skew (if any is present).
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
3. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is positive or negative.
4. Measure the amount of skew.
5. Enter the SP mode
Europe, Asia: Use SP6201-1 (this is for A3 paper).
North America: Use SP 6201-7 (this is for DLT paper).
The illustration above shows the effects of +/- adjustment with SP6201.
The vertical arrows show the direction of paper feed.
SM 155 D434
Special Adjustments
6. Enter one-half the measured amount of skew.
Example: If the measure amount of skew is -1.2 mm, enter -0.6 mm
The range for measurement is –2.0 mm to +2.0 mm in 0.2 mm steps for every
notch adjustment.
7. Exit the SP mode, do another test print and repeat the adjustment procedure if
necessary.
1.12.3 BOTTOM FENCE REPLACEMENT
Before You Begin
The bottom fences can be replaced together or together.
Only replacement of the front fence is described here. The replacement procedure for
the rear bottom fence is the same.
Preparation
Pull out the stack/staple unit with handle Rb12
Remove the booklet unit ( p.117 "Booklet Stapler")
1. Look at the corner staple unit from the left side:
[A] Rear bottom fence
[B] Front bottom fence
D434 156 SM
Special Adjustments
2. Use a socket wrench or socket driver to remove the bottom fence [A] ( x1).
These screws are very tight, so we recommend use of a socket wrench or
socket driver to avoid damaging the screw heads.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
This shows the front bottom fence removed.
The mount where the new bottom fence will be attached has a scale on each side { and .
SM 157 D434
Special Adjustments
1. Attach both the rear and front screws.
Do not tighten the front screw.
Align the rear screw with the center line of the rear scale { and tighten it slightly.
Leave the front screw loose.
2. On the right side, set a sheet of A3 (or DLT) paper in the tray.
3. Look under the unit to confirm that the edge of the paper is flat and level on the side
fence.
D434 158 SM
Special Adjustments
4. Align the front end of the fence at with the center line of its scale and tighten the front
screw.
5. Check the alignment of the paper again.
6. If the paper is slightly out of alignment, adjust the front of the bottom fence to the paper
and tighten the front screw.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
SM 159 D434
Paper Path
2. DETAILS
2.1 PAPER PATH
Straight-Through
Paper enters the finisher at {, continues past both closed junction gates, and exits the
finisher onto the shift tray .
Proof Tray
Paper enters the finisher at {. The staple tray junction gate remains closed, the proof tray
junction gate opens and guides the paper into the vertical paper path. The paper exits the
finisher onto the proof tray }.
Corner Stapling
Paper enters the finisher at {. The staple tray junction gate opens and guides the paper
down to the pre-stacker ~. Paper (up to 5 sheets) is held in the pre-stacker long enough for
the downstream stack to be stapled. The paper enters the corner stapling unit where it is
aligned (by the top fence, bottom fence, and side fences) and then stapled. The feed-out
belt raises the stack. The exit rollers feed the stack onto the shift tray .
D434 160 SM
Paper Path
Booklet Folding, Stapling
Paper enters the finisher at {. The staple tray junction gate opens and guides the paper
down to the pre-stacker ~. Paper (up to 5 sheets) is held in the pre-stacker long enough for
the downstream stack to be jogged and stapled. The paper enters the corner stapling unit
where it is aligned by the top fence, bottom fence, and side fences. The feed-out belt
raises the stack. The stack junction gate opens and guides to the stack to the booklet unit
. The booklet unit staples and folds the paper in the center. The booklet unit exit rollers
feed the paper onto the booklet tray .
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
SM 161 D434
Proof Tray, Stapler Junction Gates
2.2 PROOF TRAY, STAPLER JUNCTION GATES
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or down by
the combinations of opened and closed junction gates.
Selected Operation Mode
Motor/Gate
Proof tray Shift Staple
[A] Proof tray JG motor ON Off Off
[B] Proof tray junction gate OPEN Closed Closed
[C] Stapler junction gate Closed Closed OPEN
[D] Stapler JG motor Off Off ON
D434 162 SM
Punch Unit
2.3 PUNCH UNIT
2.3.1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The punch unit movement motor moves the punch unit above the paper (centered in the
paper path) to the correct punch position.
The optimum position is determined by input from the side-to-side registration sensor
mounted above the paper path. This sensor unit is equipped with a CIS (Contact Image
Sensor) mechanism.
While it is not in use the punch unit resides 7.5 mm to the front of center. This is the standy
position (home position) of the punch unit. When the CIS unit detects a sheet of paper in
the paper path below, it signals the punch unit PCB which switches on the punch
movement motor and moves the punch unit far enough to compensate for any diffence
between the present position of the paper and the correct position for punching.
SM 163 D434
Punch Unit
Next, the punch unit, a straight punch (not a rotator punch) punches the paper. The punch
hammers are driven by the punch drive motor.
After it punches the paper the punch movement motor returns the punch unit to its home
position. The punch unit HP sensor detects the actuator on the side of the punch unit and
switches off the punch movement motor when the unit reaches its home position. The
punch unit waits here for the next sheet.
The following diagram summarizes operation of the punch unit above the paper path.
D434 164 SM
Punch Unit
2.3.2 PUNCH-OUT COLLECTION
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Punch-outs are collected in the punch-out hopper [A] positioned under the punch unit.
When the level of the punch-outs in the hopper rises as far as the hole [B] in the hopper,
the punch hopper full sensor [C] turns on, stops the job, and triggers a message on the
operation to indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed and emptied.
The job resumes automatically after the hopper is emptied and returned to the finisher.
The punch hopper full sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor. When the hopper is
not in the finisher, or if it is not inserted completely, the spring loaded sensor arm rotates up
and to the right with the punch-out sensor away from the hole in the hopper holder and a
message is displayed. The message in this case is the same as the hopper full message.
SM 165 D434
Pre-Stacking
2.4 PRE-STACKING
In the staple mode paper is guided from the horizontal feed path to the corner staple unit
below by the the stapler junction gate. But before the first sheets of paper reach the
stapling tray, they are stopped and shunted into the pre-stacker where they are held long
enough for the stack ahead to be aligned and stapled.
2.4.1 PAPER SIZES A4 AND SMALLER
The first sheet (red line in the drawing above) is directed in the pre-stack paper path by the
staple junction gate. The sheet brushes past the spring loaded pre-stack junction gate. The
weight of the paper allows it to push past the junction gate and then the spring attached to
the gate pulls it closed.
The pre-stack paper sensor detects each sheet of paper that enters the pre-stack paper
path. The sensor switches on the pre-stack motor that rotates the 1st and 2nd pre-stack
rollers to feed the leading edge of the paper the prescribed distance (a).
The motor stops, reverseses, and the rollers feed the paper under the pre-stacker junction
gate and into the shunt of the pre-stacker unit where the leading edge of the paper stops at
the nip of the 1st pre-stack rollers (b).
Next, the 2nd sheet (blue line in the drawing above) feeds (c). When it reaches the 1st
pre-stack rollers, the pre-stack roller motor switches on and the 1st and 2nd sheets feed
together (d). The pre-stack motor reverses again and both sheets are fed up into the shunt.
This cycle can repeat up to 5 times until finally, after one additional sheet feeds, all 6 of the
sheets are fed together to the corner stapling tray.
Up to 4 sheets are held in the pre-stack unit for stapling at one corner.
Up to 5 sheets are held in the pre-stack unit for stapling at two places on the edge of
the stack.
2.4.2 PAPER SIZES B4 AND LARGER
The sequence of events in the pre-stacker unit for large paper sizes is the same as that for
D434 166 SM
Pre-Stacking
A4 and smaller sizes with one important exception.
Before large paper sizes are fed in staple mode, the pre-stack release motor switches on
and pulls the drive roller of the 1st pre-stack roller pair away from its idle roller (a). The
forward and reverse feeding is performed by the pre-stack motor driving the 2nd pre-stack
rollers and feeding the paper only as far as the nip of the 2nd pre-stack rollers. The nip of
the 1st pre-stack rollers remains open.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Reverse feeding the leading edges as far as the 2nd pre-stack rollers saves time. (Reverse
and forward feeding the leading edges as far as the 1st pre-stack rollers would require
more time.)
SM 167 D434
Jogger Unit Paper Positioning
2.5 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING
In the staple mode, as every sheet of paper arrives in the jogger unit, it is vertically and
horizontally aligned, then the staple edge is pressed flat to ensure the edge of the stack is
aligned correctly for stapling.
Vertical Paper Alignment: After the trailing edge of the copy passes the staple tray
entrance sensor [A], the positioning roller motor [B] is energized to push the positioning
roller [C] into contact with the paper. The positioning roller and alignment brush roller [D]
rotate to push the paper back and align the trailing edge of the paper against the bottom
fence [E].
Horizontal Paper Alignment: When the jog starts the jogger motor [F] turns on and the
jogger fences [G] move to the wait position slightly wider than the selected paper size on
both sides. When the trailing edge of the paper passes the staple tray entrance sensor, the
jogger motor moves the jogger fences closer to the paper. Next, the jogger motor turns on,
both jogger fences move against the sides of thestack to align it, then side fences return to
the wait position.
Paper Stack Correction: After the paper is aligned in the stapler tray, the left [H], center [I],
D434 168 SM
Jogger Unit Paper Positioning
and right [J] stack plate motors switch on briefly and drive the front stack, center stack, and
rear stack plates against the edge of the stack to flatten the edge completely against the
staple tray for stapling. When the next copy paper turns on the stapler entrance sensor, the
stack plate motors turn on and return to their home positions. The home positions are
detected by stack plate HP sensors , , .
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
SM 169 D434
Stapling
2.6 STAPLING
Here is the operation sequence for jogging and stapling:
{ Paper enters the tray from the pre-stacker.
Bottom fence rises to catch the paper.
Top fence descends as far as the edge of the paper.
Positioning roller starts rotating and descends, feeding each sheet down.
Alignment roller (a brush roller) also feeds the paper toward the bottom fence to
align the edge.
The bottom fence motor lowers the aligned stack to the stapling position.
The corner stapler staples the stack.
D434 170 SM
Stapler Unit Movement
2.7 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Side-to-Side
D434
The stapler motor [A] moves the stapler [B] from side to side. After the start key is pressed,
the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
If two-staple-position mode is selected, for the first stack the stapler moves to the rear
stapling position first, staples, moves to the front position, staples and waits at the front. For
the second stack, the stapler staples the front corner first, then moves to the rear corner
and staples.
For continuous stapling jobs, the corners are stapled rear then front for the odd number
stacks and stapled front then rear for even number stacks.
After the job is completed, the stapler returns to its home position. This is detected by the
stapler HP sensor [C].
SM 171 D434
Stapler Unit Movement
Rotation (1)
In the oblique staple position mode, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the stapler unit [B]
45° to counterclockwise after it moves to the stapling position.
Rotation (2)
When the staple end condition arises, the stapler motor moves the stapler to the front and
the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove the staple cartridge
[C]. This allows the user to add new staples.
Once the staples have been installed, and the front door closed, the stapler unit returns to
its home position.
Sensors
Two sensors [D] and [E] detect the angle of the stapler. There are three positions:
horizontal, 45 degrees, 75 degrees.
D434 172 SM
Stapler
2.8 STAPLER
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
When the staple cartridge is locked and in position, actuator [A] deactivates the cartridge
set sensor [B] and the stapler is ready for operation.
When aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the positioning roller and
jogger fences, the staple hammer motor [C] starts stapling.
During stapling, the stapler trims off the excess length of the staples. This length of the
trimmings depends on the number of copies in the set. They will be very small for a stack
containing 100 sheets.
The staple trimmings drop into the trap door [D] inside the stapler. When the stapler unit
returns to its home position, solenoid [E] energizes opens the trap door.
The staple trimmings drop into the staple trimmings hopper [F].
The staple trimmings hopper descends as it fills, until actuator [G] activates the staple
trimmings hopper full sensor [H]. A message asks the user to empty the staple trimmings.
SM 173 D434
Stapler
The stapler has a staple end sensor [A] and cartridge set sensor [B]. When the staple
cartridge is inserted, it pushes the actuator [C] into the gap of the cartridge set sensor. This
tells the machine the stapler is ready for operation.
When a staple end or no cartridge condition is detected, a message is displayed advising
the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is detected during a copy job, the
indication will appear, and the copy job will stop.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [D] where jammed staples collect. The operator can
remove the jammed staples from the clinch area by raising and lowering bracket lever [E].
D434 174 SM
Feed-Out
2.9 FEED-OUT
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts.
D434
The pawl [B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift tray exit roller [D].
When stapling starts, the exit guide motor [E] opens the upper exit guide [F], which
includes the upper shift tray exit roller [G], in order to feed out the leading edge of the copy
set smoothly.
The exit guide motor turns on again at the prescribed time after stapling finishes, and the
upper exit guide plate is lowered. Then the shift tray exit roller takes over the stack
feed-out.
The on-off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by the exit guide open sensor [H].
The stack-feed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt home
position sensor [I].
SM 175 D434
Paper Exit
2.10 PAPER EXIT
The drag roller assembly [A] is fastened to a plate [B] on a shaft by a spring [C]. The cam
[D], in contact with the bottom of the plate, is connected to the drag drive motor [E] via a
timing belt.
The drag drive motor and timing belt rotate the cam against the bottom of the plate to move
the rollers forward and back with each sheet ejected onto the shift tray.
The drag roller motor [F] drives the shaft [G] that rotates the drag rollers counter-clockwise
as the rollers move back. The simultaneous rotation and backward movement of the roller
assembly pulls each sheet back toward the copier to align the edges of the stack on the
shift tray.
The actuator [H] is mounted on the cam and rotating with both rotating clockwise) and
detects the roller assembly home position when the actuator leaves the gap of the drag
drive HP sensor [I] and signals the machine that the rollers are at the home position. The
machine uses this information to control paper feed timing and confirm that the mechanism
is operating correctly. The cam and actuator make one complete rotation for every sheet
fed out of the machine onto the shift tray.
D434 176 SM
Shift Tray Operation
2.11 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION
2.11.1 OVERVIEW
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The movement of the shift tray is controlled by four sensors , , , and and a feeler [A]
with two actuators [B] and [C].
The notched actuator [B] is used with sensors and .
The flat actuator [C] is used with sensor .
Sensor is provided with its own actuator [D].
The operation mode determines which sensor is used to control the movement of the shift
tray.
Sensor Names
No. Name
Paper Height Sensor – Staple Mode
Paper Height Sensor – Standby Mode
Paper Height Sensor – Z-Fold Full
SM 177 D434
Shift Tray Operation
Paper Height Sensor – Shift/Z-Fold
Sensors and Operation Modes
Mode Function
Sensor detects the amount of paper on the shift tray in shift mode
Shift
to control operation of the tray lift motor.
Sensor detects the amount of paper on the shift tray in staple
Staple
mode to control the tray lift motor.
When the machine is turned on, Sensor is used to position the tray
at the standby position and keep it there when the shift is not in use
or when the proof tray (proof tray) is used.
If the shift tray is not attached to the machine (if it has been removed
Standby
for servicing, for example), if the machine is switched on the tray
mount will push up the feeler and switch off Sensor to switch off
the tray lift motor. (Sensor cannot operate if the tray has been
removed.)
Z-Fold, Z-Fold Sensor detects the height of the tray when the output includes
D434 178 SM
Shift Tray Operation
Staple Z-folded sheets with and without stapling.
Sensor detects when the tray is full when the output includes
Z-folded sheets with and without stapling.
2.11.2 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAND-BY MODE
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Standby Mode
When the machine is switched on:
1. The shift tray lift motor switches on and lowers the tray.
2. The feeler [A] descends and raises the hooked actuator [B] out of the gap of Sensor .
3. When Sensor cannot detect the actuator this reverses the shift tray motor.
4. The shift tray lift motor raises the shift tray and pushes up the feeler, the actuator
descends into the gap of Sensor .
5. When Sensor detects the actuator this stops the shift tray lift motor with the shift tray
at the standby position.
This sequence repeats every time the machine is powered on.
Sensor also switches off the shift tray lift motor:
When the machine is switched on with the shift tray removed for servicing.
When the machine is switched on without the shift tray attached to the side of the
finisher:
SM 179 D434
Shift Tray Operation
1. The shift tray mount will push the feeler [A] up until the actuator [B] enters the gap of
Sensor .
2. When Sensor detects the actuator this switches the shift tray motor OFF and stops
the tray.
Sensor cannot operate with the shift tray removed so Sensor is used to switch
off the shift tray motor and stop the shift tray mount.
2.11.3 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: SHIFT MODE
Sensor and its feeler [A] and actuator [B] control the movement of the shift tray when
paper is output in the shift mode:
1. Paper is output to the tray.
2. As the height of the stack increases, this pushes up the feeler [A].
3. When Sensor detects the actuator [B] of the ascending feeler, this switches the tray
lift motor ON.
4. The tray lift motor lowers the tray until the feeler descends far enough to raise the
actuator out of the gap of Sensor .
5. When Sensor can no longer detect the actuator, this switches the motor OFF, and
stops the tray.
The sequence repeats until the end of the job or until the tray becomes full.
D434 180 SM
Shift Tray Operation
2.11.4 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: STAPLE MODE
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Sensor , feeler [A] and its notched actuator [B] control the movement of the shift tray
when paper is output to the shift tray in the staple mode:
1. A stapled stack is output to the tray.
2. The tray lift motor switches ON and lowers the tray the prescribed distance.
3. Next, the tray lift motor raises the tray and feeler [A] until actuator [B] leaves the gap of
Sensor .
4. When the actuator [b] leaves the gap of sensor , and the sensor can no longer detect
the actuator this switches the tray lift motor OFF and stops the tray.
This sequence repeats every time a stack is output to the tray until the end of the job or
until the tray becomes full.
SM 181 D434
Shift Tray Operation
2.11.5 SHIFT TRAY OPERATION: Z-FOLDED PAPER
Sensor and its feeler [A] and actuator [B], and Sensor with its feeler [C] and flat
actuator [D] control the movement of the shift tray when Z-folded paper is output to the shift
tray.
1. Z-folded paper is output to the tray.
2. As the height of the stack increases, this pushes up feeler [A] of Sensor .
3. When the actuator [B] of the ascending feeler enters the gap of Sensor , this
switches the tray lift motor ON.
4. The tray lift motor lowers the tray until the feeler descends far enough to raise the
actuator out of the gap of Sensor .
5. When the actuator leaves the gap of Sensor , this switches the motor OFF, and stops
the tray.
6. Steps 1 to 5 repeat until the top of the paper stack pushes feeler [C] up and actuator
[C] into the gap of Sensor .
7. When the actuator enters the gap of Sensor , this signals that the tray is full and
stops the job.
D434 182 SM
Shift Tray Operation
2.11.6 SHIFT TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
This machine has four shift tray full sensors mounted near the left rear rail of the shift tray.
When the actuator enters the gap of the sensor assigned to the paper size in use, this
signals approximately how much paper is on the tray.
Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects Tray Full For:
{ 500 A5, HLT paper (500 sheets).
1000 SR_A3 (320 x 450 mm) paper (1000 sheets).
} 1500 A3, DLT paper (1500 sheets).
~ 2500 A4, LT paper (2500 sheets).
SM 183 D434
Shift Tray Side-To-Side Movement
2.12 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT
In shift mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side between sets to stagger the sets to
make them easier to separate.
The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor [B] and shift gear disk
[C]. After one set of copies is made and delivered to the shift tray, the shift motor turns on,
driving the shift gear disk and the shaft [D]. The end fence [E] is positioned by the shaft,
creating the side-to-side movement.
The next set of copies is then delivered. The motor turns on, repeating the same process
and moving the tray back to the previous position.
The disk is rotated alternately clockwise and counter-clockwise through an arc of 180
degrees.
The notches cut into the shift gear disk control the operation of the shift motor, using shift
tray half-turn sensors [F] and [G].
If the job ends with the disk at with only one sensor deactivated, the motor rotates the
disk to the position where both sensors are deactivated. This is the home position.
D434 184 SM
Shift Tray Jogger Unit
2.13 SHIFT TRAY JOGGER UNIT
2.13.1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Shift Tray Jogger Retraction Motor
2. Shift Tray Jogger Motor Timing Belt
3. Shift Tray Jogger Motor
4. Shift Tray Jogger Fence Timing Belt
5. Shift Tray Jogger Fences
6. Shift Tray Jogger HP Sensor
7. Shift Tray Jogger Retract HP Sensor
SM 185 D434
Shift Tray Jogger Unit
2.13.2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE
After the first sheet exits, the shift tray jogger motor [A] switches on and rotates the jogger
timing belt [B], gear [C] and jogger fence timing belt [D]. This closes the jogger fences [E]
against the sides of the first sheet to align it and stops. Next, the motor reverses to open
the fences for the next sheet. The jogger motor alternates its direction of rotation to open
and close the jogger fences. The timing is prescribed by the width of the paper selected for
the job.
At the end of the job, the actuator [F] activates the shift tray jogger HP sensor [G] which
shuts off the jogger motor and starts the jogger fence retraction motor [H].
The jogger fence retraction motor rotates the shaft which raises the jogger fences and
lowers the actuator [I] into the slot of the jogger fence retraction HP sensor [J]. The
activated sensor turns off the jogger fence retraction motor and the jogger fences remain at
the raised position.
D434 186 SM
Booklet Unit
2.14 BOOKLET UNIT
2.14.1 OVERVIEW
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
Rotates up, descends and tamps the top of the stack to align the
Booklet top fence
stack vertically against the bottom fence.
Booklet side fences (Not shown) Align the sides of the stack (front-to-rear).
Bottom fence catches the stack. Aligns the stack vertically with the
Booklet bottom
top fence. Also lowers and raises the stack to the stapling position
fence
and folding postion after stapling.
Feed the stack into the booklet unit. After the stack is in the booklet
Clamp roller pair unit the clamp roller releases the booklet so it can be positioned for
stapling and folding.
SM 187 D434
Booklet Unit
Booklet stapler unit Staples the booklet with two staples at the center fold.
Pushes the fold plate into the center of the stack toward the nip of
Fold plate
the fold rollers.
Fold rollers Fold the stack along its spine after stapling.
The crease roller runs rear to front, then front to rear to sharpen the
Crease roller
crease in the fold created by the fold plate and fold rollers.
Exit rollers Feed the booklet out of the booklet unit onto the booklet tray.
Sensors
Corner stapler entrance sensor
Detects the stack when it enters the corner stapling tray. This triggers positioning
and top/bottom jogging on the corner stapling tray before the stack is sent to the
booklet unit.
Stack feed-out belt HP sensor
Detects the home position of the stack feed-out belt that feeds the stack from the
corner stapling tray into the booklet unit.
Booklet top fence sensor
Detects the home position of the booklet top fence.
Fold unit entrance sensor
Detects each stack as it enters the booklet unit.
Fold plate HP sensor
Detects when the fold plate is in and out of its home position.
Booklet bottom fence HP sensor
Detects when the bottom fence is in and out of its home position.
Exit sensor
Detects each folding and stapled booklet as it leaves the booklet unit.
D434 188 SM
Booklet Unit
2.14.2 FOLDING, STAPLING OPERATION
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The stack is fed onto the stapling tray of the corner stapler unit where the sides of the stack
are aligned by the side fences and the top and bottom aligned by the top and bottom
fences [A]. The stack feed-out belt motor turns on and swings the stack feed-out belt pawl
[B] up between the bottom fences and catches the edge of the stack and raises it upward.
The stack JG motor switches on and closes the stack junction gate just before the top of
the stack reaches the top of the stapling tray. This guides the stack into the vertical path of
the booklet unit.
SM 189 D434
Booklet Unit
The booklet unit entrance sensor detects the stack in the booklet unit and triggers the
following sequence.
After the stack enters the booklet unit the stack JG motor reverses and opens the stack
junction gate.
The bottom fence motor switches on and lowers the bottom fence to the stapling
position. The stapling position is prescribed by the size of the paper.
The clamp rollers feed the booklet down to the bottom fence. The stack transport
motor stops and the clamp rollers stop.
The booklet unit bottom fence [A] stops stack here for stapling.
D434 190 SM
Booklet Unit
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The clamp roller motor switches on and retracts the clamp roller [A] to open the nip of
the clamp rollers.
The booklet stapler side fence motor switches on and aligns the sides of the stack (not
shown above).
The top fence motor switches on and the top fence [B] rotates up, swings down, and
tamps the top of the stack to align the top and bottom edge.
The booklet stapler staples the stack in the center [C] at two locations.
SM 191 D434
Booklet Unit
The top fence motor reverses and returns the top fence to its home position [A]. The
top fence HP sensor detects the top fence and switches off the top fence motor.
The bottom fence motor switches on and raises the stapled stack to the folding position,
centering the stack on the edge of the fold plate. Once again, this position is prescribed
by the size of the paper.
D434 192 SM
Booklet Unit
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
The fold plate motor and fold roller motors switch on.
The fold plate motor pushes the center [A] of the stack into the nip of the rotating folder
rollers [B].
SM 193 D434
Booklet Unit
The fold roller motor and fold rollers [A] (controlled by a cam) rotate long enough to
feed the folded edge as far as the crease roller.
The fold rollers retract, the fold plate returns to its home position, and the bottom plate
returns to its home position.
The crease roller motor switches on and drives the crease roller [B] along the length of
the fold from rear to front, reverses, and drives the roller front to rear. The motor
switches off after the crease roller returns to its home position at the rear.
D434 194 SM
Booklet Unit
1. Timing Belt 4. Creases Roller movable range
2. Guide Shaft 5. Crease Roller
3. Guide Plate 6. Spring
Here is a side view of the crease roller mechanism.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
The spring loaded crease roller mounted on a steel guide shaft applies pressure to the
D434
stapled and folded edge as it is driven rear to front and the front to rear.
Finally, the fold rollers [A] once again clamp the booklet and together with the exit rollers [B]
feed the booklet out of the booklet unit onto the booklet tray.
SM 195 D434
Electrical Components
2.15 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
2.15.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1. Proof Tray 11. Feed-Out Belt
2. Vertical Paper Path 12. Corner Stapler
3. Proof Tray Junction Gate 13. Trimmings Hopper Unit
4. Staple Tray Junction Gate 14. Booklet Unit
5. Finisher Entrance 15. Booklet Bottom Fence
6. Pre-Stack Tray 16. Booklet Tray
7. Corner Stapler Unit 17. Fold Rollers
8. Corner Staple Tray 18. Booklet Top Fence
9. Positioning Roller 19. Shift Tray
10. Bottom Fence 20. Shift Tray Jogger Unit
D434 196 SM
Electrical Components
2.15.2 MOTORS
Main Motors
These are the main motors, viewed from the rear with the rear covers removed.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Registration Motor 5. Horizontal Transport Motor
2. Proof Tray Vertical Transport Motor 6. Pre-Stack Motor
3. Proof Tray Exit Motor 7. Entrance Roller Motor
4. Shift Tray Exit Motor
SM 197 D434
Electrical Components
Paper Transport Motors
1. Entrance Roller Motor 10. Booklet Stapler Clamp Roller Motor
2. Registration Motor 11. Fold Roller Motor
3. Horizontal Transport Motor 12. Fold Plate Motor
4. Proof Tray Vertical Transport Motor 13. Booklet Side Fence Motors (x2)
5. Proof Tray Exit Motor 14. Booklet Bottom Fence Motor
6. Shift Tray Exit Motor 15. Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
7. Stack Transport Motor 16. Stapling Tray Entrance Motor
8. Stack JG Motor 17. Pre-Stack Motor
9. Booklet Stapler Top Fence Motor 18. Positioning Roller Rotation Motor
D434 198 SM
Electrical Components
Operation Motors
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Stapler JG Motor 9. Stack Transport Motor
2. Proof Tray JG Motor 10. Shift Motor
3. Stack JG Motor 11. Stapler Movement Motor
4. Tray Lift Motor 12. Stapler Rotation Motor
5. Shift Jogger Motor 13. Edge Press Motors (x3)
6. Shift Jogger Retraction Motor 14. Positioning Roller Motor
7. Drag Roller Drive Motor 15. Pre-Stack Release Motor
8. Drag Roller Motor
SM 199 D434
Electrical Components
2.15.3 SENSORS
Paper Path Sensors
1. Entrance Sensor 5. Proof Tray Exit Sensor
2. Pre-Stack Paper Sensor 6. Proof Tray Full Sensor
3. Stapler JG HP Sensor 7. Shift Tray Exit Sensor: Short
4. Proof Tray HP JG Sensor 8. Shift Tray Exit Sensor: Long
D434 200 SM
Electrical Components
Sensors around the Shift Tray, Trimmings Hopper
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Tray Lift Motor 9. Shift Motor
2. Drag Drive Motor 10. Shift Tray Full Sensor (500)
3. Drag Roller Motor 11. Shift Tray Full Sensor (1000)
4. Drag Roller HP Sensor 12. Shift Tray Full Sensor (1500)
5. Shift Tray Upper Limit Switch 13. Shift Tray Full Sensor (2500)
6. Paper Height Sensor (TE) 14. Trimmings Hopper Set Sensor
7. Shift Tray HP Sensor: Front 15. Trimmings Hopper Full Sensor
8. Shift Tray HP Sensor: Rear
SM 201 D434
Electrical Components
Shift Tray Jogger Unit
1. Shift Tray Jogger Retraction Motor
2. Shift Tray Jogger HP Sensor
3. Shift Tray Jogger Retract HP Sensor
4. Shift Tray Jogger Unit PCB
5. Shift Tray Jogger Motor
D434 202 SM
Electrical Components
2.15.4 CORNER STAPLER
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Stack JG HP Sensor 6. Top Fence HP Sensor
2. Stack JG Motor 7. Corner Stapler Top Fence Motor
3. Stack Transport Motor 8. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor
4. Stack Transport Unit HP Sensor 9. Feed-Out Belt HP Sensor
5. Stack Transport Motor 10. Stack Feed-Out Belt Motor
SM 203 D434
Electrical Components
1. Positioning Roller Rotation Motor 7. Stack Plate Motor: Rear
2. Positioning Roller Motor 8. Stack Plate HP Sensor: Center
3. Positioning Roller HP Sensor 9. Stack Plate Motor: Rear
4. Stapling Tray Entrance Motor 10. Stack Plate Motor HP Sensor: Front
5. Stapling Tray Entrance Sensor 11. Stack Plate Motor: Front
6. Stack Plate HP Sensor: Rear
D434 204 SM
Electrical Components
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Bottom Fence Motor 7. Stapler Rotation Motor
2. Rear Jogger Fence HP Sensor 8. Stapler HP Sensor
3. Rear Jogger Fence Motor 9. Rotation HP Sensor: Front
4. Bottom Fence HP Sensor 10. Rotation HP Sensor: Rear
5. Corner Stapler Movement Motor 11. Front Fence Jogger Motor
6. Trimmings Trap Door Solenoid 12. Front Fence HP Sensor
SM 205 D434
Electrical Components
2.15.5 BOOKLET STAPLER
1. Bottom Fence Motor 9. Clamp Roller Motor
2. Booklet Stapler Side Fence Motor 10. Side Fence HP Sensor: Rear
3. Fold Plate Motor 11. Booklet Stapler (S2)
4. Fold Roller Motor 12. Booklet Unit Entrance Sensor
5. Side Fence HP Sensor: Rear 13. Booklet Stapler (S2)
6. Top Fence Sensor 14. Booklet Stapler Tray Full Sensor: Upper
7. Bottom Fence HP Sensor 15. Booklet Stapler Tray Full Sensor: Lower
8. Top Fence Motor 16. Booklet Unit Exit Sensor
D434 206 SM
Electrical Components
2.15.6 PUNCH UNIT
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
1. Punch Unit PCB 6. Punch Blade HP Sensor
2. Punch RPS Sensor 7. Punch Registration Sensor
3. Punch Drive Motor 8. Punch-out Hopper Full Sensor
4. Punch Unit HP Sensor 9. CIS
5. Punch Movement Motor
SM 207 D434
Electrical Components
2.15.7 BOARDS, SWITCHES
1. Main Board
2. Sub Board
3. Front Door Switch
4. Emergency Shift Tray Stop Switch
5. PSU
6. Breaker Switch
2.15.8 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY
Motors
Proof Tray Vertical Drives the transport rollers in the vertical paper path from
M36
Transport Motor the proof tray junction gate to the proof tray exit.
D434 208 SM
Electrical Components
Switches the punch mechanism for number of holes
M43 Punch Switch Motor
selected for punching. (EU punch unit only.)
Drives the crank mechanism that moves the shift tray to
M11 Shift Motor
the rear and front.
M6 Shift Tray Exit Motor Drives the shift tray exit rollers.
Moves the shift jogger fences forward and back during
M7 Shift Jogger Motor alignment of the front and back edges of the stack on the
shift tray.
Shift Jogger Rotates the shift jogger fences up during alignment of the
M8
Retraction Motor front and back edges of the stack on the shift tray.
M10 Drag Roller Motor Rotates the drag roller.
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
M9 Drag Drive Motor Moves the drag roller left and right.
D434
M1 Shift Tray Lift Motor Raises and lowers the shift tray.
Operates the junction gate that guides paper to the shift
M3 Stapler JG Motor
tray or to the stapler unit.
Stapling Tray
M23 Drives the rollers that feed paper into the stapling tray.
Entrance Motor
Front Jogger Fence Operates the front jogger fence when the paper stack is
M17
Motor aligned (front/back) on the stapling tray.
Rear Jogger Fence Operates the rear jogger fence when the paper stack is
M16
Motor aligned (front/back) on the stapling tray.
Positioning Roller Drives the rotation of the positioning roller above the
M21
Rotation Motor stapling tray.
Positioning Roller
M22 Operates the position roller above the stapling tray.
Motor
Operates the jogger fence at the leading edge to align the
Booklet Stapler
M30 leading edge of the stack in the direction of paper feed for
Bottom Fence Motor
stapling in the booklet stapler unit.
SM 209 D434
Electrical Components
Bottom Fence Lift Operates the bottom fence that lifts the stack on the
M12
Motor stapling tray.
Operates the pressure plate that presses against trailing
Stack Plate Motor
M18 edge of the stack on the stapling tray just before the stack
(Rear)
is stapled.
Operates the pressure plate that presses against trailing
Stack Plate Motor
M20 edge of the stack on the stapling tray just before the stack
(Center)
is stapled.
Operates the pressure plate that presses against trailing
Stack Plate Motor
M19 edge of the stack on the stapling tray just before the stack
(Front)
is stapled.
Corner Stapler Moves the corner stapler toward the rear (and to the
M27
Movement Motor front?).
Stapler Rotation
M26 Rotates the corner stapling for diagonal stapling.
Motor
Stack Feed-Out Belt Drives the feed-out belt that feeds corner stapled paper to
M14
Motor the shift tray.
M4 Exit Guide Motor Opens and closes the exit guide.
Operates the junction gate that guides paper into the
M24 Stack JG Motor
booklet stapler.
Stack Transport Drives the transport rollers that feed stacks into the
M25
Motor booklet stapler feed path.
Stack Transport Unit Lifts and releases rollers that feed the stack to the booklet
M13
Motor stapler.
Booklet Stapler Side Operates the jogger fences that align the front and back
M31
Fence Motor edges of the stack for stapling in the booklet stapler unit.
Booklet Stapler Operates the jogger fence that aligns the trailing edge of
M32
Bottom Fence Motor the stack for stapling in the booklet stapler unit.
M15 Booklet Stapler Top Operates the top fence that aligns the leading edge of the
D434 210 SM
Electrical Components
Fence Motor paper stack on the stapling tray.
Operates the fold plate pushed into the center of the stack
M33 Fold Plate Motor
to start center folding.
Operates the roller that folds the stack into halves during
M34 Fold Roller Motor
center folding in the folder unit.
Entrance Roller
M38 Drives the entrance roller.
Motor
M37 Registration Motor Drives the registration roller.
Horizontal Transport Drives the transport roller on the downstream side of the
M5
Motor punch unit.
Punch Movement Operates the left/right and front/back movement of the
M41
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Motor punch unit.
D434
M42 Punch Drive Motor Drives the paper punch mechanism inside the punch unit.
Operates the junction gate that guides paper to the shift
M2 Proof Tray JG Motor
tray or to the upper tray.
M35 Proof Tray Exit Motor Operates the rollers that feed paper to the proof tray.
M40 Pre-Stack Motor Drives the pre-stack roller.
Pre-Stack Release Moves the pre-stack roller to relieve feed (transport)
M39
Motor pressure on the stack.
Corner Stapler Motor: This is the relay connector to the harness of the stapling
M
CN411 mechanism of the corner stapler.
Corner Stapler Motor: This is the relay connector to the signal harness of the
M
CN413 corner stapler.
Moves the booklet stapler transport roller to release
Booklet Stapler
M29 pressure on the stack. Also drives the horizontal fold
Clamp Roller Motor
roller.
SM 211 D434
Electrical Components
Boards
PCB1 Main Board Performs overall control of the finisher.
Controls paper feed system motors and booklet stapling
PCB4 Sub Board
motors.
The board that contains the drive circuitry to control the
PCB5 Punch Control Board
punch unit.
PCB2 PSU Steps down power source voltage to 24V power supply.
Shift Tray Jogger
PCB3 Controls the shift jogger fence motors.
Unit PCB
This is the relay board between CIS and punch control
PCB6 CRB
board.
Sensors
The encoder that detects the number of rotations of the
S58 Punch RPS Sensor
punch drive motor.
Shift Tray HP Sensor The HP sensor that detects the tray at its front HP
S30
(Front) position.
Shift Tray HP Sensor
S31 The HP sensor that detects the tray at its rear HP position.
(Rear)
Shift Tray Exit
S5 Detects paper as it is fed to the shift tray in staple mode.
Sensor (Long)
Shift Tray Exit
S6 Detects paper as it is fed to the shift tray.
Sensor (Short)
Detects the actuator on the rear shift jogger fence and
Shift Tray Jogger HP switches off the shift jogger motor and signals to turn on
S11
Sensor the shift jogger left motor to raise the fences at the end of
a job.
S12 Shift Jogger Fence Detects the home positions of the shift jogger fences after
D434 212 SM
Electrical Components
Retract HP Sensor they raised up during alignment of the front and back
edges of the stack on the shift tray.
Drag Roller HP Detects when the drag roller at the shift tray exit is in or
S29
Sensor out of its home position.
Paper Height Sensor Functions as the paper height sensor in shift mode to
S8
(Shift) adjust height of the shift tray. Used in shift mode only.
Paper Height Sensor Functions as the paper height sensor in staple mode to
S9
(Staple) adjust height of the shift tray. Used in staple mode only.
Paper Height Sensor
S28 Detects the height of the stack on the shift tray.
(TE)
Used in combination with two other paper height sensors
Paper Height Sensor
S10 (shift and staple paper height sensors) to detect the height
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
(Z-Fold)
D434
of the stacked paper on the shift tray.
Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full of A5, HLT paper (500
S33
(500) sheets).
Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full of SR_A3 paper (1000
S32
(1000) sheets).
Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full of A3, DLT paper (1500
S24
(1500) sheets).
Shift Tray Full Sensor Detects when the shift tray is full of A4, LT paper (2500
S25
(2500) sheets).
Stapler JG HP Detects when the stapling junction gate (shift tray/stapling
S35
Sensor tray) is in or out of its home position.
Stapling Tray Detects each sheet of paper as it passes the entrance to
S43
Entrance Sensor the stapling tray.
Stapling Tray Paper
S42 Detects paper in the stapling tray.
Sensor
Positioning Roller HP Detects when the positioning roller above the stapling tray
S49
Sensor is at its home position.
SM 213 D434
Electrical Components
Detects when the bottom fence that holds the trailing edge
Bottom Fence HP
S38 at the bottom of the stapler unit is in or out of its home
Sensor
position.
Detects when the top fence that jogs the leading edge of
Top Fence HP
S41 the stack in the stapling tray is in or out of its home
Sensor
position.
Stack Plate HP At the rear of the bottom fence of the stapling tray, detects
S46
Sensor (Rear) when the bottom fence is in or out of its home position.
At the center of the bottom fence of the stapling tray,
Stack Plate HP
S45 detects when the bottom fence is in or out of its home
Sensor (Center)
position.
Stack Plate HP At the front of the bottom fence of the stapling tray, detects
S44
Sensor (Front) when the bottom fence is in or out of its home position.
Stapler Rotation HP Detects when the corner stapler is rotated to its home
S52
Sensor (Rear) position at the rear.
Stapler Rotation HP Detects when the corner stapler is in its home position at
S51
Sensor (Front) the front.
Staple Trimmings
S13 Detects when the staple trimmings hopper is full.
Hopper Full Sensor
Staple Trimmings Detects when the staple trimmings hopper is set and
S14
Hopper Set Sensor removed.
Stack Transport Unit
S47 Detects when the transport unit is at its home position.
HP Sensor
Stack Feed-Out Belt Detects when the pawl on the stack feed-out belt is in or
S37
HP Sensor out of its home position.
S48 Stack JG HP Sensor Detects when the stack JG plate is at its home position.
Fold Unit Entrance
S23 Detects when a stack arrives in the booklet stapler.
Sensor
S15 Booklet Stapler Side Detects when the front jogger fence that aligns the front
D434 214 SM
Electrical Components
Fence HP Sensor edge of the stack for booklet stapling is in or out of its
(Front) home position.
Booklet Stapler Detects when the rear jogger fence that aligns the trailing
S17 Jogger HP Sensor edge of the stack for booklet stapling is in or out of its
(Rear) home position.
Booklet Stapler Detects when the trailing edge fence that aligns the
S16 Bottom Fence HP trailing edge of the stack on the booklet stapling tray is in
Sensor or out of its home position.
Detects when the pawl that aligns the stack in the booklet
Booklet Top Fence
S19 stapler in the direction of paper feed is in or out of its
HP Sensor
home position.
Fold Plate Cam HP Detects when the cam that operates the fold plate is in or
S22
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
Sensor out of its home position.
D434
Fold Plate HP Detects when the fold plate in the booklet stapler unit is in
S18
Sensor or out of its home position.
Booklet Stapler Exit Detects when paper passes between the fold roller and
S21
Sensor the booklet stapler exit.
S3 Entrance Sensor
Exit Guide HP
S7 Detects when the exit guide plate is at its home position.
Sensor
Punch Blade HP Detects when the punch blade in or out of its home
S57
Sensor position.
Punch Vertical Mounted above the paper path in the punch unit, detects
S55
Registration Sensor the passing of the paper below.
Punchout Hopper Detects when the punch-out hopper is full and when the
S53
Full Sensor hopper is out of the finisher.
Proof Tray JG HP Detects when the proof tray junction gate (proof tray/shift
S34
Sensor tray) is in or out of its home position.
S1 Proof Tray Exit Detects each sheet of paper as it exits onto the proof tray.
SM 215 D434
Electrical Components
Sensor
Proof Tray Full
S2 Detects when the proof tray is full.
Sensor
Pre-Stack Paper
S36 Detects paper at the pre-stack position.
Sensor
Corner Stapler HP
S50 Detects when the corner stapler is at its home position.
Sensor
Booklet Stapler
Detects when the booklet stapler transport roller has been
S20 Clamp Roller HP
moved to release pressure on the stack.
Sensor
Booklet Tray Full Operates with the upper booklet tray full sensor to detect
S27
Sensor (Lower) when the booklet output tray is full.
Booklet Tray Full Operates with the lower booklet tray full sensor to detect
S26
Sensor (Upper) when the booklet output tray is full.
Solenoid
Operates the shutter that opens and closes the chute
SOL1 Shutter Solenoid where staple trimmings drop to the staple trimmings
hopper below.
Switches
Changes the type and number of punch holes, based on
SW5 Punch Switch
the selection.
Shift Tray Upper Cuts the power to the shift tray lift motor if the shift tray
SW1
Limit Switch reaches its maximum height (due to a malfunction).
Cuts the 24V power supply to the finisher when the front
SW3 Front Door Switch
door is opened.
SW4 Breaker Switch Trips and shuts off power immediately if a short circuit
D434 216 SM
Electrical Components
occurs in the finisher.
Emergency Stop
SW2 Stops the shift tray and lowers it.
Switch
Finisher
Booklet
SR5020
D434
SM 217 D434
HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010
D447
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
1
HIGH CAPACITY STACKER SK5010
D447
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................ 1
1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES ........................................................................... 1
1.1.1 ROLL-AWAY CART D456.................................................................... 1
1.1.2 COVERS .............................................................................................. 2
Door and Cover Names ........................................................................... 2
Rear Lower Cover, Rear Upper Cover .................................................... 4
Corner Cover ........................................................................................... 4
Left Exit Cover Plate ................................................................................ 5
Left Cover ................................................................................................ 5
Front Door ............................................................................................... 6
Top Door ................................................................................................. 7
Front Right Cover .................................................................................... 8
Right Inner Cover .................................................................................... 8
Front Door Bottom Hinge Cover .............................................................. 9
Front Left Cover ...................................................................................... 9
Left Inner Cover..................................................................................... 10
Top Center Cover .................................................................................. 11
Top Front Cover .................................................................................... 11
Proof Tray.............................................................................................. 12
Top Rear Cover ..................................................................................... 13
1.1.3 JOGGER UNIT .................................................................................. 14
Jogger Unit Removal ............................................................................. 14
Main Jogger Cover Plate ....................................................................... 17
1.2 STRAIGHT PAPER PATH .......................................................................... 20
1.2.1 MOTORS ........................................................................................... 20
Entrance Motor ...................................................................................... 20
Transport Motor ..................................................................................... 21
1.2.2 SENSORS ......................................................................................... 22
Entrance Sensor.................................................................................... 22
SM i D447
Common Procedures
Transport Sensor ................................................................................... 23
Exit Sensor ............................................................................................ 24
1.3 PROOF TRAY ............................................................................................. 25
1.3.1 MOTORS ........................................................................................... 25
Proof Tray JG Motor .............................................................................. 25
Proof Tray Exit Motor ............................................................................ 26
1.3.2 SENSORS ......................................................................................... 28
Proof Tray JG HP Sensor ...................................................................... 28
Proof Tray Exit Sensor, Proof Tray Full Sensor..................................... 29
1.4 SHIFT TRAY ............................................................................................... 32
1.4.1 PAPER SHIFT OPERATION ............................................................. 32
Shift Tray JG Motor ............................................................................... 32
Shift Tray JG HP Sensor ....................................................................... 33
Shift Motor, Shift HP Sensor.................................................................. 34
Shift Exit Motor ...................................................................................... 36
Shift Tray Exit Sensor, Paper Height Sensor......................................... 39
1.4.2 PAPER JOGGING ............................................................................. 43
Main Jogger Front Fence Motor, Front Fence HP Sensor ..................... 43
Main Jogger Rear Fence Motor, Rear Fence HP Sensor ...................... 45
Main Jogger Fence Retraction Motor, Fence Retraction HP Sensor ..... 47
LE Stopper Motor, LE Stopper HP Sensor ............................................ 49
Sub Jogger Motor .................................................................................. 51
Sub Jogger HP Sensor .......................................................................... 52
1.4.3 SHIFT TRAY LIFT CONTROL ........................................................... 54
Roll Away Cart Set SW ......................................................................... 54
Shift Tray Paper Sensor ........................................................................ 55
Tray Lift Motor ....................................................................................... 56
Paper Height Sensor ............................................................................. 60
Tray High Limit SW ............................................................................... 61
Tray Guard Sensors 1, 2 ....................................................................... 62
Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3, 4 ................................................................... 63
Tray Full Sensor 4, Tray Low Limit Sensor, Tray Low Limit Switch ....... 65
1.4.4 SHIFT TRAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 68
Check for Skew ..................................................................................... 68
Front-to-Rear Adjustment ...................................................................... 69
Left-to-Right Adjustment ........................................................................ 74
D447 ii SM
1.4.5 PADDLE ROLLER ............................................................................. 78
Paddle Roller Cleaning .......................................................................... 78
Replacing Paddles ................................................................................ 79
1.4.6 CLEANING EXIT, SHIFT ROLLER SHAFT ....................................... 82
1.4.7 ANTI-STATIC BRUSH REPLACEMENT............................................ 84
1.5 SWITCHES, SOLENOID ............................................................................. 86
1.5.1 DOOR SWITCHES ............................................................................ 86
Front Door SW ...................................................................................... 86
Top Door SW......................................................................................... 87
1.5.2 BREAKER SWITCH, SOLENOID ...................................................... 88
Breaker Switch ...................................................................................... 88
Front Door Lock SOL ............................................................................ 90
1.6 FANS .......................................................................................................... 93
1.6.1 ENTRANCE FAN MOTORS .............................................................. 93
1.6.2 PCB COOLING FAN .......................................................................... 97
1.7 BOARDS ..................................................................................................... 98
1.7.1 MAIN BOARD .................................................................................... 98
1.7.2 PSU ................................................................................................... 99
1.7.3 OPERATION PANEL PCB ............................................................... 101
2. DETAILS ...................................................................................... 103
2.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 103
2.1.1 MAIN MOTORS ............................................................................... 103
2.1.2 SENSORS ....................................................................................... 104
Paper Path, Paper Height Sensors ..................................................... 104
Sensors, Boards, Solenoid .................................................................. 105
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................ 106
2.1.4 PAPER PATH .................................................................................. 111
2.1.5 JOGGER UNIT ................................................................................ 112
2.2 PAPER PATH ........................................................................................... 113
2.2.1 PAPER PATH MOTORS.................................................................. 113
2.2.2 PAPER PATH SENSORS ................................................................ 114
2.3 PAPER SHIFT AND ALIGNMENT ............................................................ 115
2.3.1 PAPER SHIFT ................................................................................. 115
2.3.2 PAPER ALIGNMENT: JOGGING .................................................... 116
Leading Edge ...................................................................................... 116
SM iii D447
Common Procedures
Main, Sub Jogger ................................................................................ 117
Jog points: Smaller Than 300 mm ....................................................... 118
Jog points: 300 mm and Larger ........................................................... 119
2.4 SHIFT TRAY LIFT AND HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ..................................... 120
D447 iv SM
Read This First
Safety, Conventions, Trademarks
Conventions
Common Terms
This is a list of symbols and abbreviations used in this manual.
Symbol What it means
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
= Harness clamp
FFC Flexible Film Cable
JG Junction Gate
LE Leading Edge of paper
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed
TE Trailing Edge of paper
S31E The "Emitter" sensor of a sensor pair
S31R The "Receptor" sensor of a sensor pair
The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe the direction of paper feed, with the arrows
indicating paper feed direction.
Warnings, Cautions, Notes
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning
could result in death or serious injury.
A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution
could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the finisher or other property.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,
loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this
manual handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
Switches and Symbols
Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the
meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer
Reference Material for Maintenance
Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer
engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer engineers
shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the “CE Safety Guide”.
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine.
Before Installation, Maintenance
Power
Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After
switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other
devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds,
then unplug the machine from the power source.
Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do checks
or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears, timing
belts, etc.).
After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from
electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit,
gears, timing belts, etc.
Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments
After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the
machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping
materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for
installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This
also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal
operation.
Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use
your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
Special Tools
Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.
For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described in the
service manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could damage parts,
could damage the machine or cause injuries.
During Maintenance
General
Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2)
Disconnect the power plug from the power source, 3) Allow the machine to cool for
at least 10 minutes.
Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces.
Safety Devices
Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace
safety devices immediately.
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification
or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal
injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating
normally and safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with
the machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine
could lead to a fire and personal injuries.
Organic Cleaners
During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.)
other than those described in the service manual.
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic
solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous.
Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part
that generates heat.
Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials
to prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg
injuries. Use “My Ace” Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak up spills. For more
details, please refer to Technical Bulletin “Silicone Oil Removal” (A024-50).
Ozone Filters
Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as described in
the service manual).
An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone filters
if they are not replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause
personnel working around the machine to feel unwell.
Power Plug and Power Cord
Before servicing the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always
make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source.
A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge caused
by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it if
necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power
cord if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short
circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock.
Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make
sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg.
Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a fire.
Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power
cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the
ground wire on the plug.
Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension
cord.
When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the
plug, not the cable.
After Installation, Servicing
Disposal of Used Items
Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.)
in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such
items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste from
consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items at one
of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
Points to Confirm with Operators
At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine.
Emphasize the following points.
Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems
by following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to
remove.
Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the
machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described in
the operating instructions.
Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the
plug, not the cord) if any of the following events occur: 1) something has spilled into the
product, 2) service or repair of the product is necessary, 3) the product cover has been
damaged.
Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They should
never allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall into the
machine.
Safety Instructions for this Machine
1. The installation must be done by trained service technicians.
2. This machine weighs 316 kg. (695 lb.). At least four persons are required to remove the
machine from its pallet and position it for installation.
3. To prevent fire hazards never use flammable solvents around the machine.
4. Never place any object on the machine.
5. If anything falls into the machine, turn off the main power switch on the right side of the
machine, then disconnect the power cord from the power source.
6. Locate the machine on a sturdy flat surface where it will not be exposed to excessive
vibration.
7. To avoid fire hazard, confirm that the ventilation ports are not blocked, so air can flow
freely.
8. Gas generated by the molten glue can irritate the eyes, throat, and nose. The machine
should always be used in a well ventilated room.
9. To avoid the dangers of fire and electrical shock, make sure that the machine is never
exposed to:
Excessive high temperatures and/or humidity
Dust
Water
Direct sunlight
Open flame
Corrosive gases
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with
those marks.
Common Procedures
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES
1.1.1 ROLL-AWAY CART D456
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
To prevent damage to the tray switches at the back of the machine, always remove
the tray cart before moving the stacker unit.
Always remove the cart before servicing.
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the cart.
SM 1 D447
Common Procedures
1.1.2 COVERS
Door and Cover Names
Front Door ( x1)
Bottom Hinge Cover ( x1)
Front Left Cover ( x2)
Front Right Cover ( x2)
Top Door ("L" Pins x2)
Top Front Cover ( x2)
Top Center Cover ( x2)
Proof Tray ( x2)
Top Rear Cover ( x2)r
D447 2 SM
Common Procedures
Exit Cover Plate ( x2)
High Capacity
Left Cover ( x4)
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Rear Upper Cover ( x4)
Rear Lower Cover ( x4)
Corner Cover ( x4)
SM 3 D447
Common Procedures
Rear Lower Cover, Rear Upper Cover
1. The rear lower cover should be removed before the rear upper cover.
2. Rear lower cover [A] ( x4)
3. Rear upper cover [B] ( x4)
Corner Cover
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
D447 4 SM
Common Procedures
1. Corner cover [A] ( x4)
Left Exit Cover Plate
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
If a peripheral unit has been installed downstream of the stacker, this cover was removed at
D447
installation.
1. Left exit cover plate [A] ( x2)
Left Cover
Preparation
Remove the left exit cover plate
SM 5 D447
Common Procedures
1. Left cover [A] ( x4)
Remove the last screw carefully. The left cover may fall suddenly because there are
no hooks holding it in place.
Never place your hand or fingers below the bottom edge of the cover when
removing it.
Front Door
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove screw [A] ( x1)
D447 6 SM
Common Procedures
3. Raise hinge [B] out of the hole at the top of the door.
4. Pull the door off the bottom hinge.
Top Door
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Open the top door.
2. Remove the "L" hinges from the right and left ends of the door.
3. Pull the door away from the stacker.
4. You may want to re-insert the "L" hinges in their holes { and so that they do not get
misplaced.
SM 7 D447
Common Procedures
Front Right Cover
1. Front right cover [A] ( x2).
2. Push cover [B] to the right to remove it. (You do not need to remove the lock hasp.)
Right Inner Cover
Preparation
Remove the front right cover
1. Right inner cover [A] ( x4). (You do not need to remove knob [B].)
D447 8 SM
Common Procedures
Front Door Bottom Hinge Cover
1. Hinge cover [A] ( x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Pull the cover away from the hinge.
Front Left Cover
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Front door
Front door bottom hinge cover
SM 9 D447
Common Procedures
1. Front left cover [A] ( x2)
Left Inner Cover
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Front door
Front door bottom hinge cover
Front left cover
1. Left inner cover [A] ( x4)
D447 10 SM
Common Procedures
Top Center Cover
1. Top center cover [A] ( x2)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Pull the cover to the right to remove it.
Top Front Cover
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Right inner cover
Left inner cover
Top center cover
SM 11 D447
Common Procedures
1. Top front cover [A] ( x2)
2. Disconnect the tabs on the right and left ends of the cover.
3. Turn the cover over and disconnect the operation panel PCB (
x1).
Proof Tray
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Left exit cover plate
Left cover
D447 12 SM
Common Procedures
1. Proof tray [A] ( x2)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Slowly pull the proof tray off the top of the stacker.
Top Rear Cover
1. Top rear cover [A] ( x2)
SM 13 D447
Common Procedures
2. Release the tabs on both ends.
1.1.3 JOGGER UNIT
Jogger Unit Removal
The jogger unit must be removed at these times:
To service the motors and sensors of the jogger unit
To access other areas of the stacker for other procedures
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Right inner cover
Rear lower tray
Rear upper tray
Rear
1. At the rear, you must remove three screws and disconnect five connectors.
2. Remove the screw on the right through the frame cutout [A] ( x3)
D447 14 SM
Common Procedures
3. Disconnect:
[A] Center: Harnesses {, , } (
x3)
[B] Right: Harnesses ~, (
x2)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
4. Remove the four steel jogger unit legs.
Front
SM 15 D447
Common Procedures
5. Disconnect the jogger unit ( x4).
The jogger unit is held in place by four hooks. It will not fall after the screws have been
removed.
6. Remove the lock plate [A] ( x2).
7. Screw each leg into the bottom of the jogger unit [A].
D447 16 SM
Common Procedures
8. Grip one leg at the front {, and one at the rear .
9. Push the jogger unit to the left } to disengage the hooks.
10. Slowly lower the jogger unit to the right ~ and pull it out of the stacker.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
11. Set the jogger unit on a flat surface.
Main Jogger Cover Plate
The main jogger cover plate must be removed to service these parts:
Main jogger front fence motor and HP sensor
Main jogger rear fence motor and HP sensor
Shift tray paper sensor
Rear
SM 17 D447
Common Procedures
1. Disconnect the rear fence HP sensor harness [A] ( x1, = x4).
2. Disconnect the rear fence motor [A] ( x1, = x3).
Front
3. Disconnect the dual harness [A] for the main jogger fence retraction HP sensor and
front fence HP sensor (
x2, = x7).
4. Disconnect the front fence motor harness [A] ( x1, = x3).
D447 18 SM
Common Procedures
5. Remove the plate:
[A] Front ( x1)
[B] Rear ( x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
SM 19 D447
Straight Paper Path
1.2 STRAIGHT PAPER PATH
1.2.1 MOTORS
Entrance Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x1, x2, Hook x1, Belt x1)
D447 20 SM
Straight Paper Path
2. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
Transport Motor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x1, x2, Hook x1, Belt x1)
SM 21 D447
Straight Paper Path
2. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
1.2.2 SENSORS
Entrance Sensor
The entrance sensor is on the right side of the stacker.
1. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1
2. Sensor [B] Pawls x5)
D447 22 SM
Straight Paper Path
Transport Sensor
Preparation
Remove the jogger unit
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
You can see the sensor bracket on the bottom of the transport plate from inside the stacker.
1. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
SM 23 D447
Straight Paper Path
2. Sensor plate [A] and sensor [B] (= x1, x1, x1, Pawls x5)
Exit Sensor
Preparation
Remove the exit cover plate
The illustration below shows the left cover removed, but this is not required.
1. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
2. Sensor [B] ( x1, Pawls x5)
D447 24 SM
Proof Tray
1.3 PROOF TRAY
1.3.1 MOTORS
Proof Tray JG Motor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x1, x2)
SM 25 D447
Proof Tray
2. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
Proof Tray Exit Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
D447 26 SM
Proof Tray
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x1, x2, Hook x1, Belt x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
SM 27 D447
Proof Tray
1.3.2 SENSORS
Proof Tray JG HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
1. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
2. Sensor [B] ( x1, Pawls x5)
D447 28 SM
Proof Tray
Proof Tray Exit Sensor, Proof Tray Full Sensor
Proof Tray Full Sensor Located above the proof tray,.
Proof Tray Exit Sensor Shown with the top center cover removed.
High Capacity
Preparation
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
Proof tray
Top center cover
Top rear cover
Common Procedure
1. Plate [A] must be removed,
SM 29 D447
Proof Tray
2. Remove:
[A] Front ( x2)
[B] Rear ( x2, = x1) (Opening the harness clamp creates slack in the harness and
allows free movement of the plate.)
3. Pull away the cover plate.
4. Remove the tray full sensor, or the tray exit sensor. See below.
Tray Full Sensor
1. Turn the plate over.
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x2)
D447 30 SM
Proof Tray
3. Sensor [A] (= x1, x1, x1)
Tray Exit Sensor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Remove the lower bracket screw [A], not the upper screw (= x2, x1).
2. Sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5)
SM 31 D447
Shift Tray
1.4 SHIFT TRAY
1.4.1 PAPER SHIFT OPERATION
Shift Tray JG Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
1. Slowly remove motor bracket [A] ( x1, x, 2)
D447 32 SM
Shift Tray
2. Remove this Teflon sleeve [B] so that it does not fall.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
3. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
Shift Tray JG HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
SM 33 D447
Shift Tray
Rear upper cover
1. Sensor bracket [A] (= x1, x1).
2. Sensor [B] ( x1, Pawls x5)
Shift Motor, Shift HP Sensor
Shift Motor
Shift HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
D447 34 SM
Shift Tray
Common
1. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x1,
x2, = x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Remove motor bracket [A] ( x2)
Shift Motor
SM 35 D447
Shift Tray
1. Separate the bracket and the motor ( x2)
Shift Roller Sensor
1. Sensor [A] (Pawls x5)
Shift Exit Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
D447 36 SM
Shift Tray
1. Plates { and must be removed.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Remove plate {.
[A] Top ( x2)
[B] Bottom ( x2)
3. Remove plate ( x6, Hook x1)
SM 37 D447
Shift Tray
4. Remove plate [A] ( x1)
5. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x2)
6. Push the shaft [A] out of the hole and remove motor bracket [B].
D447 38 SM
Shift Tray
7. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
Shift Tray Exit Sensor, Paper Height Sensor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Both sensors are difficult to see.
Shift Tray Exit
Under the plate.
Sensor
Right side, under the right plate facing the interior of the
Paper Height Sensor
machine.
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
Jogger unit
Common
SM 39 D447
Shift Tray
1. Remove plate [A] ( x4)
2. Cover [A] must be removed.
3. Disconnect tray high limit switch [A] ( x1, = x5)
D447 40 SM
Shift Tray
4. Disconnect the cover:
[A] Front ( x3)
[B] Rear ( x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
5. Remove the cover [A].
Paper Height Sensor
1. Paper height sensor [A] ( x2, = x1, Pawls x5)
Shift Entrance Sensor
SM 41 D447
Shift Tray
1. Remove roller [A]. The roller is spring loaded. Just push it to the rear and disconnect at
the front.
2. Use a short screwdriver to remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
3. Sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5)
D447 42 SM
Shift Tray
1.4.2 PAPER JOGGING
Main Jogger Front Fence Motor, Front Fence HP Sensor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Main Jogger Front Fence Motor
Main Jogger Front Fence HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Jogger unit
Main jogger cover plate
Front Fence Motor
SM 43 D447
Shift Tray
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x2, x1, Belt x1)
2. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
Front Fence Jogger HP Sensor
1. Sensor [A] (Pawls x5)
D447 44 SM
Shift Tray
Main Jogger Rear Fence Motor, Rear Fence HP Sensor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Main Jogger Rear Fence Motor
Main Jogger Rear Fence HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Jogger unit
Main jogger cover plate
Rear Fence Motor
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x2, x1, Belt x1)
SM 45 D447
Shift Tray
2. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
Rear Fence HP Sensor
1. Sensor [A] (Pawls x5)
D447 46 SM
Shift Tray
Main Jogger Fence Retraction Motor, Fence Retraction HP Sensor
High Capacity
Preparation
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Remove these parts:
Jogger unit
Main jogger cover plate
Fence Retraction Motor
1. Disconnect the front fence retraction HP sensor harness [A] ( x1, = x3).
SM 47 D447
Shift Tray
2. Disconnect the front fence retraction motor harness [A] ( x1, = x3).
3. Motor bracket [A] ( x2)
4. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
Fence Retraction HP Sensor
D447 48 SM
Shift Tray
1. Sensor [A] (Pawls x5)
LE Stopper Motor, LE Stopper HP Sensor
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
LE Stopper Motor
LE Stopper HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Jogger unit
Main jogger cover plate
LE Stopper Motor
SM 49 D447
Shift Tray
1. Motor bracket [A] ( x2)
2. Separate the motor and the bracket ( x2)
LE Stopper HP Sensor
1. Sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5)
D447 50 SM
Shift Tray
Sub Jogger Motor
Preparation
Remove the jogger unit
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Disconnect these harnesses:
[A] Sub jogger fence HP sensor (
x1, = x1)
[B] Tray guard sensor 1 (
x1, = x1)
[C] Tray guard sensor 2 (
x1, = x1)
[D] Sub jogger motor (
x1, = x1)
SM 51 D447
Shift Tray
2. Remove cover [A] ( x4)
3. Motor [A] ( x1, Belt x1, x1)
Sub Jogger HP Sensor
Preparation
Remove the jogger unit
D447 52 SM
Shift Tray
1. Disconnect pulley [A] and belt. ( x1, Pulley x1, Belt x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Sensor [A] (
x1, Pawls x5)
SM 53 D447
Shift Tray
1.4.3 SHIFT TRAY LIFT CONTROL
Roll Away Cart Set SW
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Cart
Rear lower cover
1. Switch [A] ( x1)
D447 54 SM
Shift Tray
2. Switch [A] ( x2)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
3. Depress the clamps on both sides of switch [A] and separate the switch from clamp [B].
Shift Tray Paper Sensor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
SM 55 D447
Shift Tray
Jogger unit
Main jogger cover plate
1. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] and rails { and ( x4).
2. Slide the rails to the rear.
3. Remove sensor [B] ( x1, Pawls x5)
Tray Lift Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
D447 56 SM
Shift Tray
1. Plates { and must be removed.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Remove plate {.
[A] Top ( x2)
[B] Bottom ( x2)
3. Remove belt cover plate | ( x6, Hook x1).
SM 57 D447
Shift Tray
4. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x4)
5. Disconnect the belt below the motor (Belt x1)
Re-installation
Whenever the belt cover plate has been removed, you should check and re-set the tension
on the transverse belt before re-attaching the belt cover plate.
D447 58 SM
Shift Tray
This is the belt tension adjustment mechanism.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Remove spring [1].
2. Loosen screw [2] (do not remove it) to raise the tension bracket to the left.
3. Hang the belt cover plate [A] on the hook {.
4. Make sure the bearings | and } are snug in the holes.
SM 59 D447
Shift Tray
5. Attach screws {, , }, ~ and tighten.
6. Attach screws , but do not tighten.
7. Re-attach the removed spring .
8. Above the spring, pull the tension bracket down [1] as far as it will go, and tighten
tension screw [2]
9. Tighten all the screws ( x6).
Paper Height Sensor
The paper height sensor is mounted on the same bracket as the shift entrance sensor.
D447 60 SM
Shift Tray
For details about this procedure, please refer to Shift Tray Exit Sensor, Paper Height Sensor.
(
xref)
Tray High Limit SW
This switch is on the right side of the stacker.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Remove plate [A] ( x4)
2. Disconnect switch [A] ( x1, = x2)
SM 61 D447
Shift Tray
3. Remove switch [A] ( x2).
Tray Guard Sensors 1, 2
Preparation
Remove the jogger unit
Tray Guard Sensor 1
D447 62 SM
Shift Tray
1. Sensor [A] 5302 ( x1, Pawls x5)
Tray Guard Sensor 2
1. Sensor [A] 5302 ( x1, Pawls x5)
High Capacity
Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3, 4
SK5010
Stacker
D447
There are four tray full sensors mounted on the same vertical support:
{ Tray Full Sensor 1: 25%
SM 63 D447
Shift Tray
Tray Full Sensor 2: 50%
} Tray Full Sensor 3: 75%
~ Tray Full Sensor 4: 100%
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
Left cover
Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3
1. The pawls of these sensors are visible behind the frame (
x1, Pawls x5 each)
Tray Full Sensor 4
See the next procedure below.
D447 64 SM
Shift Tray
Tray Full Sensor 4, Tray Low Limit Sensor, Tray Low Limit Switch
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Tray Full Sensor 4 100%
Tray Low Limit Sensor
Tray Low Limit Switch
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Left cover
SM 65 D447
Shift Tray
1. Right side [A]:
Ground wire { ( x1)
Bracket ( x1)
2. Left side [B]:
Bracket } ( x1)
3. Open the clamps (= x2)
D447 66 SM
Shift Tray
4. Use a short screwdriver to move the left lower screw, then remove the other screws at
each corner of the plate. ( x4)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
5. Remove (in any order):
Tray Full Sensor 4 100% {
Tray Low Limit Sensor
Tray Low Limit Switch }
SM 67 D447
Shift Tray
1.4.4 SHIFT TRAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT
The shift tray timing belts can be adjusted to ensure that the shift tray is level:
Front-to-rear. This adjustment is done first.
Left-to-right. This adjustment is done after front-to-rear adjustment.
Always do the front-to-rear adjustment first on both sides, then do the left-to-right
adjustment.
Never do the front-to-rear adjustments without later checking and setting the
left-to-right alignment of the tray.
Check for Skew
Right Side
1. Press the button on the stacker operation panel to lower the shift tray.
2. Open the front door and pull out the tray cart.
3. Check the front-to-rear alignment of the tray.
Front left, below stacker exit
Front right, below stacker entrance
D447 68 SM
Shift Tray
4. Check the alignment of the left and right sides of the tray brackets.
5. Determine if the brackets are at the same level:
Front-to-back
Left-to-right
High Capacity
If the brackets are at the same level, no adjustment is required.
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Front-to-Rear Adjustment
1. Remove:
Top door (Pins x2).
Front right cover ( x2)
Right inner cover [A] ( x4)
SM 69 D447
Shift Tray
2. Remove the right vertical stay [A] ( x2, x1)
3. Remove the screws of the front door switch bracket [A] ( x2). You do not need to
remove the bracket.
D447 70 SM
Shift Tray
4. Loosen the tension on the belt:
Loosen screw [A].
High Capacity
The tension bracket [B] will rise.
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Tighten screw [A].
5. Adjust the belt:
If the front end is low, pull up the left side of the belt [1] to raise the front.
If the front end is high, pull up the right side of the belt [2] to lower the front.
Every notch adjustment (you will be able to hear it click) adjusts the height of the
front by 5 mm.
SM 71 D447
Shift Tray
6. Re-set the belt tension:
Loosen screw [A].
Pull down the spring [B] to apply tension to the belt.
Tighten screw [A] with the bracket pulled down.
Left Side
1. Remove:
Top front door ("L" x2)
Front door
Front door bottom hinge cover ( x1)
Left front cover ( x2)
2. Loosen the tension on the belt:
D447 72 SM
Shift Tray
Loosen tension screw [A].
The tension bracket [B] will rise.
Tighten screw [A].
High Capacity
3. Adjust the belt:
SK5010
Stacker
D447
If the front end is low, pull up the left side of the belt [1] to raise the front.
If the front end is high, pull up the right side of the belt [2] to lower the front.
Every notch adjustment (you will be able to hear it click) adjusts the height of the
front by 5 mm.
4. Set the belt tension:
Loosen screw [A].
Pull down the spring [B] to apply tension to the belt.
Tighten screw [A] with the bracket down.
SM 73 D447
Shift Tray
Left-to-Right Adjustment
1. Check the lines inside the stacker to determine if the tray is slanting to the left or right.
2. Remove:
Rear lower cover ( x4)
Rear upper cover ( x4)
Corner cover ( x4)
3. Remove the vertical stay [A] ( x4).
4. Remove the rear timing belt cover plate [A] ( x6).
5. Release the tension on the timing belt:
Remove spring [1].
D447 74 SM
Shift Tray
Loosen tension screw [2].
Slide bracket [3] up to the left.
6. Adjust the belt position:
To lower the right side of the tray below the stacker entrance, pull the belt in the
High Capacity
direction of the arrow at [A] while rotating the top of the tray lift motor [B]
SK5010
Stacker
D447
counter-clockwise.
To raise the right side of the tray below the stacker entrance, pull the belt in the
direction of the arrow at [A] while rotating the top of the tray lift motor {B] clockwise.
Re-installation
Whenever the belt cover plate has been removed, you should check and re-set the tension
on the transverse belt before re-attaching the belt cover plate.
SM 75 D447
Shift Tray
This is the belt tension adjustment mechanism.
1. Remove spring [1].
2. Loosen screw [2] (do not remove it) to raise the tension bracket to the left.
3. Hang the belt cover plate [A] on the hook {.
4. Make sure the bearings and } are snug in the holes.
D447 76 SM
Shift Tray
5. Attach screws {, , }, ~ and tighten.
6. Attach screws , but do not tighten.
7. Re-attach the removed spring .
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
8. Above the spring, pull the tension bracket down [1] as far as it will go and tighten tension
screw [2]
9. Tighten all the screws ( x6).
SM 77 D447
Shift Tray
1.4.5 PADDLE ROLLER
Paddle Roller Cleaning
Preparation
Open the front door
Remove the roll-away cart
1. You can see the paddles at six locations behind on the right side between the jogger
fences.
2. Use a dry cloth to clean:
[A] Top and bottom surfaces of each paddle
[B] Tip of each paddle
D447 78 SM
Shift Tray
3. Rotate the exit roller [A] to expose the next paddle [B].
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 at each location until all the paddles have been cleaned.
There are four paddles at each of the six locations where the paddles are exposed.
High Capacity
Replacing Paddles
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Removing the Paddle Roller
1. Remove plate [A] ( x4)
2. With the plate removed, you can see the paddle roller [A].
SM 79 D447
Shift Tray
3. A spring is attached to the left end of the paddle roller shaft [A].
4. A groove in the shaft coupling [B] on the right is set on a straight pin that drives the
roller.
5. Use your finger or the tip of a flat screwdriver to push the coupling [A] to the front and
disconnect it from its drive pin.
6. Lift the roller up and pull it out.
D447 80 SM
Shift Tray
7. Place the paddle roller on a clean, flat surface.
Replacing Paddles
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. To remove an old paddle, twist the paddle slightly to the right and pull it out of its slot.
2. To attach a new paddle [A], insert the right end first then twist to the left until its left tab
locks in place.
3. Make sure that the new paddle [B] is straight and firmly set.
Re-installing the Paddle Roller
SM 81 D447
Shift Tray
1. First, set the left of the paddle roller shaft [A] in it its hole. Make sure that it is completely
inserted.
2. Push the coupling [A] to the left and set it on the tip of the pin coupling [B].
3. Rotate the coupling [C] until the pin snaps into its groove.
4. Rotate the roller with your hand to make sure that it is set properly.
1.4.6 CLEANING EXIT, SHIFT ROLLER SHAFT
Preparation
Open the front door
Remove the roll-away cart
D447 82 SM
Shift Tray
1. You can see the roller shaft exposed at six locations above the paddles of the paddle
roller.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
2. Use a soft dry cloth to clean the shaft at the first cutout.
SM 83 D447
Shift Tray
3. Rotate the exit roller [A] and push it from side to side while holding the cloth in place.
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 at each location.
5. Clean the rollers [A] and [B].
1.4.7 ANTI-STATIC BRUSH REPLACEMENT
Preparation
Open the front door
Remove the roll-away cart
1. You can see the anti-static brush [A] between the jogger fences.
D447 84 SM
Shift Tray
2. Remove the anti-static brush [A] ( x2).
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
SM 85 D447
Switches, Solenoid
1.5 SWITCHES, SOLENOID
1.5.1 DOOR SWITCHES
Front Door SW
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Top front cover off
Top center cover off
1. Loosen connectors [A] ( x2)
D447 86 SM
Switches, Solenoid
2. Depress releases [B] on both sides of the switch and remove ( x2).
Top Door SW
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Top front cover off
Top center cover off
SM 87 D447
Switches, Solenoid
1. Remove bracket [A] ( x4).
2. Disconnect switch [B] ( x1)
3. Depress releases [A] then remove switch [B].
1.5.2 BREAKER SWITCH, SOLENOID
Breaker Switch
Preparation
Remove the rear lower cover
D447 88 SM
Switches, Solenoid
1. Right side [A]:
Ground wire { ( x1)
Bracket ( x1)
2. Left side [B]:
Bracket } ( x1)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
3. Disconnect breaker switch [A] ( x2)
4. Disconnect and remove breaker switch [A] ( x4)
SM 89 D447
Switches, Solenoid
Front Door Lock SOL
Preparation
Open the front door
Remove the front right cover
1. Plate [A] must be removed.
D447 90 SM
Switches, Solenoid
2. Disconnect the solenoid at the top ( x1, = x3)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
3. Remove the plate:
[A] Top ( x2)
[B] Bottom ( x2)
4. Cover plate [A] ( x2)
SM 91 D447
Switches, Solenoid
5. Turn the plate over.
6. Remove the solenoid [A] ( x2)
D447 92 SM
Fans
1.6 FANS
1.6.1 ENTRANCE FAN MOTORS
High Capacity
Below the stacker entrance, three fan motors are mounted on the same plate:
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Fan 1 Motor
Fan 2 Motor
Fan 3 Motor
Preparation
Remove these parts:
Rear lower cover
Rear upper cover
Open the front door
Right inner cover
Top center cover
1. Remove plate [A] ( x4)
SM 93 D447
Fans
2. Disconnect the motor mount.
[A] Front ( x2)
[B] Rear ( x2)
3. Remove the cover plate screws:
[A] Front ( x1)
[B] Rear ( x1)
4. Raise cover plate [A] as high as possible.
5. Disconnect the harnesses and fans to clear the area in front of the motor mount [B] (=
x5, x3).
D447 94 SM
Fans
6. Disconnect entrance sensor bracket [A] and pull it aside ( x1, = x3)
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
7. Trace gray harness [A] to its connector near the main board.
8. Disconnect (
x1, = x 1)
9. Pull the gray harness back through the hole
SM 95 D447
Fans
10. Disconnect front door switch harness [A] to create some slack in the white harness (=
x2,
x2)
11. Pull out fan motor mount [A].
12. Each fan motor is fastened with two screws ( x2)
D447 96 SM
Fans
1.6.2 PCB COOLING FAN
Preparation
Remove the rear lower cover
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Remove cooling fan [A] from the PCU ( x2,
x1)
SM 97 D447
Boards
1.7 BOARDS
1.7.1 MAIN BOARD
Preparation
Remove the rear lower cover
1. Remove brace [A] ( x3)
D447 98 SM
Boards
2. Remove the main board ( x28, x6)
1.7.2 PSU
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
Preparation
Remove the rear lower cover
1. Disconnect the PSU at the bottom ( x3)
SM 99 D447
Boards
2. Remove the PSU ( x5, Standoff x1)
3. Bayonet connectors ( x2).
These connectors may be too stiff to disconnect before removing the board.
Disconnect them after removing the board.
D447 100 SM
Boards
1.7.3 OPERATION PANEL PCB
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
Preparation
D447
Remove the top front cover
1. Turn over the top front cover [A].
2. Under the LED display, remove plate [B] ( x2)
3. Spring plate [A] ( x2)
SM 101 D447
Boards
4. PCB [B] ( x2)
D447 102 SM
Overview
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MAIN MOTORS
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Transport Motor
2. Proof Tray Exit Motor
3. Proof Tray JG Motor
4. Entrance Motor
5. Shift Tray JG Motor
6. Front, Rear Jogger Fence Motors x2
7. Main Jogger Fence Retraction Motor
SM 103 D447
Overview
8. Tray Lift Motor
9. Shift Exit Motor
10. Shift Motor
11. Sub Jogger Motor
12. LE Stopper Motor
2.1.2 SENSORS
Paper Path, Paper Height Sensors
1. Entrance Sensor 10. Tray Guard Sensors 1, 2
2. Proof Tray Exit Sensor 11. Sub Jogger Fence HP Sensor
3. Proof Tray Full Sensor 12. Tray Full Sensor 1 25%
4. Transport Sensor 13. Tray Full Sensor 2 50%
D447 104 SM
Overview
5. Exit Sensor 14. Tray Full Sensor 3 75%
6. Shift Tray Exit Sensor 15. Tray Full Sensor 4 100 %
7. Tray High Limit Switch 16. Tray Lower Limit Sensor
8. Paper Height Sensor 17. Tray Lower Limit Switch
9. Shift Tray Paper Sensor
Sensors, Boards, Solenoid
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Tray Lift Motor 8. Tray Full Sensor 4 100%
2. Main Board 9. Front Door Switch
3. Cart Set Sensor 10. Tray Full Sensor 3 75%
4. Front Door Lock Solenoid 11. Tray Full Sensor 2 50%
5. PSU 12. Top Door Switch
6. Tray Low Limit Switch 13. Tray Full Sensor 1 25%
7. Tray Low Limit Sensor 14. Operation Panel PCB
SM 105 D447
Overview
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Motors
Drives the entrance rollers that feed each sheet of
M01 Entrance Motor
paper as it enters the stacker.
Opens the shift junction gate that directs paper the shift
M02 Shift Tray JG Motor tray. Paper goes past this junction gate when it is
closed to the proof tray or stacker exit.
Drives the transport rollers that feed paper through the
M03 Transport Motor
finisher between the entrance and exit.
Drives the shift exit rollers that output paper to the shift
M04 Shift Exit Motor
tray.
Moves the shift roller set (drive roller and idle roller) to
the front and back. For every other document set, the
M05 Shift Motor
shift roller will take each sheet of paper and move it to
the front so every other stack is staggered.
Drives the proof tray exit roller that outputs each sheet
M06 Proof Tray Exit Motor
of paper to the proof tray on top of the stacker.
Opens the shift junction gate that directs the paper to
the proof tray on top of the stacker. When this gate is
M07 Proof Tray JG Motor
closed, paper goes past this gate and goes to the
stacker exit.
Moves the front jogger fence of the main jogger unit
Main Jogger Front
M08 that aligns the front edge of the paper on the shift tray
Fence Motor
(near the front corner of the trailing edge).
Moves the rear jogger fence of the main jogger unit that
Main Jogger Rear
M09 aligns the rear edge of the paper on the shift tray (near
Fence Motor
the rear corner of the trailing edge).
D447 106 SM
Overview
Motors
Raises both the rear and front jogger fences of the main
Main Jogger Fence jogger unit after each set is output to the shift tray and
M10
Retraction Motor aligned. The fences are raised to position them for the
next shifted set.
This is the small cooling fan mounted on the left lower
M11 PSU Cooling Fan
corner of the PSU. It cools the area around the PSU.
Moves the leading edge stopper to the leading edge of
the paper on the shift tray and stops. The leading edge
M12 LE Stopper Motor of each sheet of paper is aligned against this stationary
stopper. This aligns the stack in the direction of paper
feed.
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
Operates the front and back fences of the sub jogger.
D447
The sub jogger is used to align either the front or rear
edge of the stack near the front or rear corner at the LE
M13 Sub Jogger Motor stopper. This motor controls the movement of both the
front and rear fence with a single belt. (The front and
rear fence of the main jogger unit have independent
motors and drive belts.)
Raises and lowers the shift tray mounted on the
M14 Tray Lift Motor
roll-away cart.
M15 Fan 1 Motor
These fans cool the area directly below the stacker
M16 Fan 2 Motor entrance where paper enters the stacker and the shift
tray.
M17 Fan 3 Motor
Sensors
Detects each sheet of paper as it enters the
S01 Entrance Sensor stacker. Also signals a jam if the paper fails to
arrive or leave within the prescribed time.
S02 Shift Tray Exit Sensor Detects each sheet of paper as it enters the shift
SM 107 D447
Overview
Sensors
tray. Also signals a jam if the paper fails to arrive
or leave within the prescribed time.
Detects each sheet of paper as it is output to the
S03 Proof Tray Exit Sensor proof tray. Also signals a jam if the paper fails to
arrive or leave within the prescribed time.
When this photo-sensor detects the top of the
S04 Proof Tray Full Sensor stack in the proof tray, it signals that the proof tray
is full and stops the stacking operation.
Detects the height of the paper stack on the shift
S05 Paper Height Sensor tray. The readings of this sensor are used to keep
the tray at its optimum height for paper stacking.
Detects the shift tray junction gate when it reaches
S08 Shift Tray JG HP Sensor its home position and switches off the shift tray JG
motor.
Detects the proof tray junction gate when it
Proof Tray JG HP
S09 reaches its home position and switches off the
Sensor
proof tray JG motor.
Detects the home position of the shift rollers and
S10 Shift HP Sensor
switches off the shift motor.
Detects the home position of the front fence of the
S11 Front Fence HP Sensor main jogger unit and switches off the front fence
jogger motor.
Detects the home position of the rear fence of the
S12 Rear Fence HP Sensor main jogger unit and switches off the rear fence
jogger motor.
Detects the home position of the front and rear
Jogger Fence fences after they have been lowered by the main
S13
Retraction HP Sensor jogger fence retraction motor and switches off the
retraction motor.
D447 108 SM
Overview
Sensors
Detects the presence absence of paper on the
S14 Shift Tray Paper Sensor
shift tray.
S15 Tray Guard Sensor 1 Switches off the stacker if the top of the stack
pushes up the front or back plate and actuates the
sensor. This stops stacker output (the
S16 Tray Guard Sensor 2 straight-through and proof paper paths can still be
used.)
Detects paper as it exits to the finisher
S17 Exit Sensor
downstream.
Monitors the passage of each sheet of paper in the
S18 Transport Sensor feed path between the entrance and exit of the
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
stacker.
D447
Detects the leading edge stopper when it reaches
S19 LE Stopper HP Sensor its home position and switches off the LE stopper
motor
Detects the sub jogger when it reaches its home
S20 Sub Jogger HP Sensor
position and switches off the sub jogger motor.
S21 Tray Full Sensor 1: 25% Detects when the shift tray is 25% full.
S22 Tray Full Sensor 2: 50% Detects when the shift tray is 50% full.
S23 Tray Full Sensor 3: 75% Detects when the shift tray is 75% full.
Tray Full Sensor 4: Detects when the shift tray is 100% full. Signals
S24
100% tray full and shuts down the stacker.
Detects the low limit of the shift tray and signals
S25 Tray Low Limit Sensor
that the tray must be removed.
Boards
PCB1 Main Board Performs overall control of the stacker.
SM 109 D447
Overview
Boards
Steps down power source voltage to 24V power
PCB2 PSU
supply.
Controls the buttons used for manual operation of the
Operation Panel
PCB3 stacker tray, and contains the LEDs that indicate the
PCB
status of the stacker.
Solenoid
Front Door Lock Keeps the front door of the stacker locked so it cannot
SOL1
SOL be opened while the stacker is operating.
Switches
Detects when the top door is open. While the top door
SW1 Top Door SW is open, the power supply to the proof tray and
straight-through paper path remains off.
Detects when the front door is opened. While the
SW2 Front Door SW front door is open, the power supply to the tray lift
motor and the stacker drive system remains off.
A micro-switch that detects the high limit for shift tray
SW3 Tray High Limit SW operation and cuts power to the tray lift motor to shut it
off.
Detects the lower limit for shift tray operation and cuts
SW4 Tray Low Limit SW
power to the tray lift motor to shut it off.
Detects when the tray cart is in the stacker. If the tray
Roll Away Cart Set cart is not set inside the stacker, the power supply to
SW5
SW the tray lift motor and the stacker drive system
remains off.
Shuts down the operation of the stacker in the event
SW6 Breaker Switch
of a power surge.
D447 110 SM
Overview
2.1.4 PAPER PATH
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
1. Fan 1, 2, 3 Motors 7. Shift HP Sensor
2. Shift Tray Exit Sensor 8. Proof Tray JG Motor
3. Tray High Limit Switch 9. Proof Tray Exit Sensor
4. Paper Height Sensor 10. Proof Tray Full Sensor
5. Shift Tray JG Motor 11. Transport Sensor
6. Shift Motor 12. Exit Sensor
SM 111 D447
Overview
2.1.5 JOGGER UNIT
1. Main Jogger Rear Fence Motor 8. Tray Guard Sensor 1
2. Rear Fence HP Sensor 9. Sub Jogger Fence Motor
3. Shift Tray Paper Sensor 10. LE Stopper HP Sensor
4. Main Jogger Front Fence Motor 11. LE Stopper Motor
5. Front Fence HP Sensor 12. Sub Jogger Fence HP Sensor
Main Jogger Fence Retraction HP
6. 13. Tray Guard Sensor 2
Sensor
7. Main Jogger Fence Retraction Motor
D447 112 SM
Paper Path
2.2 PAPER PATH
2.2.1 PAPER PATH MOTORS
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
These are the motors that drive the rollers of the stacker:
[1] Entrance motor. Drives the entrance rollers and other transport rollers that feed the
paper straight through the stacker to the transport motor.
[2] Shift tray exit motor. Drives the rollers that feed paper from the shift tray junction
gate onto the shift tray.
[3] Proof tray exit motor. Drives the rollers that feed paper up from the proof tray
junction gate to the proof tray on top of the stacker.
[4] Transport motor. Drives the rollers that feed paper out of the stacker from the
straight-through paper path.
This is a cross-sectional view of the paper feed motors.
The entrance motor [1] drives not only the entrance roller but several other feed rollers as
SM 113 D447
Paper Path
well.
The shift tray junction gate [2] is opened by the shift tray junction gate motor [3]. When the
junction gate is opened, paper is guided to the shift tray. The shift tray exit motor [4] drives
the shift rollers that feed the paper onto the shift tray. When the shift tray junction gate is
closed, paper passes over to the proof tray junction gate.
The proof tray junction gate [5] is closed by the proof junction gate motor [6]. When the gate
is closed paper passes over the junction gate into the paper path for the proof tray [7] above.
The proof tray exit motor [8] drives the rollers in the paper path to the proof tray. When the
proof tray junction gate is open, the paper passes below to the stacker exit.
Once the paper has passed both junction gates the paper will be fed by the rollers driven by
the transport motor [9] until it exits the stacker at [10].
2.2.2 PAPER PATH SENSORS
There are five main sensors at critical points in the paper paths. Each sensor detects the
leading and trailing edge of each sheet of paper as it passes. If the paper fails to arrive (late
error) or leave (lag error) within the prescribed time interval. the sensor will signal a jam.
{ Entrance sensor
| Shift tray exit sensor
} Proof tray exit sensor
~ Transport sensor
Exit sensor
D447 114 SM
Paper Shift and Alignment
2.3 PAPER SHIFT AND ALIGNMENT
2.3.1 PAPER SHIFT
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
D447
In the shift mode, the paper is fed past the open shift tray junction gate and onto the shift
tray.
1. When the first set { starts to feed:
The leading edge of the paper is fed into the nip of the shift rollers (drive and idle
roller pair.)
After the trailing edge of the sheet leaves the nip of the upstream rollers, the shift
motor [1] switches on.
The belt pushes the shift rollers [2] with the paper still feeding between them to the
front and stops.
The paper feeds onto the tray at the forward position.
The shift motor reverses and rotates the belt until the shift rollers return to the home
position. The shift HP sensor [3] detects the home position of the rollers and
switches off the shift motor.
This sequence repeats for the 1st set until the last sheet has been fed.
The amount of shift from the center is fixed at 10 mm. (This cannot be adjusted.)
1. When the second set | starts to feed:
SM 115 D447
Paper Shift and Alignment
The leading edge of the paper is fed into the nip of the shift rollers (drive and idle
roller pair.)
After the trailing edge of the sheet leaves the nip of the upstream rollers, the shift
motor [1] switches on.
The belt pulls the shift rollers [2] with the paper still feeding between them to the
rear and stops.
The paper feeds onto the tray at the rear position.
The shift motor reverses and rotates the belt until the shift rollers return the home
position. The shift HP sensor [3] detects the home position of the rollers and
switches off the shift motor.
This sequence repeats for the 2nd set until the last sheet has been fed.
The amount of shift from the center is fixed at 10 mm. (This cannot be adjusted.)
2.3.2 PAPER ALIGNMENT: JOGGING
Leading Edge
To keep the leading edges of the stacks aligned:
At the start of a job in the shift mode the LE stopper motor [1] switches on.
The belt moves the leading edge stopper { to a position 15 mm away from the leading
edge of the paper selected for the job..
The leading edge stopper moves right and left to align the leading edge of each sheet
as it is fed.
At the end of the job the LE stopper motor reverses, and the belt moves the leading
edge stopper to its home position.
D447 116 SM
Paper Shift and Alignment
When the LE stopper HP sensor detects the stopper at its home position, this switches
off the motor.
Main, Sub Jogger
High Capacity
SK5010
Stacker
The following parts comprise the main jogger which operates the front fence { and rear
D447
fence |:
[1] Front fence motor
[2] Front fence HP sensor
[3] Rear fence motor
[4] Rear fence HP sensor
The movements of the front fence { and rear fence | during jogging (paper edge
alignment) are controlled independently by two separate motors.
Unlike the main jogger fences the front fence } and rear fence ~ of the sub jogger unit are
controlled by one motor, the sub jogger fence motor [5]. The motor switches on, and the belt
drives the fences in. The motor reverses and when the sub jogger HP sensor [6] detects the
fences at their home positions, it switches off the sub jogger fence motor.
The main jogger is also provided with a fence retraction mechanism that raises front and
rear fences after each set has been aligned. The main jogger fence retraction motor [1]
switches on and raises both the front fence { and rear fence | together after the edge of
each set is aligned. The motor reverses and lowers both fences, the fence retraction HP
sensor [2] detects the home position of the fences and switches off the motor. The sub
jogger has no such mechanism.
SM 117 D447
Paper Shift and Alignment
Jog points: Smaller Than 300 mm
The jogger unit uses only the main jogger to align paper sizes smaller than 300 mm. The
sub jogger does not operate.
Set 1
The shift motor switches on and off, moving the shift rollers and each sheet 10 mm to
the rear.
The leading edge of each shifted sheet output to the shift tray is aligned by the leading
edge stopper {.
The main jogger rear and front jogger fence motors switch on and push the rear and
front fence against the shifted edge of the stack at | and }.
The front fence moves on top of the stack below. The front fence is light so it does not
interfere with the top sheet of the stack below.
After the last sheet of the set has fed and been aligned, the main jogger retraction motor
raises both fences and positions them at the front for the next set.
Set 2
When the next set (blue above) is output to the shift tray in shift mode:
The shift motor switches on and off, moving the shift rollers and each sheet 10 mm to
the front.
The leading edge of each shifted sheet output to the shift tray is aligned by the leading
edge stopper ~.
The main jogger front fence and rear fence motors switch on and push the front and
rear fence against the edges of the stack at and .
The rear fence moves on top of the stack below. The rear fence is light so it does not
interfere with the top sheet of the stack below.
After the last sheet of the set has fed and been aligned, the main jogger retraction motor
raises both fences and positions them at the rear for the next set.
At the end of the job, the rear and front fence motors reverse and move the rear and front
fences back to the home position and stop.
The stack is jogged at three points: at the leading edge by the LE stopper, and at the front
and rear of the trailing edge by the main jogger unit.
D447 118 SM
Paper Shift and Alignment
Jog points: 300 mm and Larger
The jogger unit uses both the main jogger and one fence of the sub jogger to align papers
sizes 300 mm and larger.
Set 1
The set (red above) is shifted and output to the tray.
High Capacity
The LE stopper { jogs the leading edge of the stack.
SK5010
Stacker
D447
The front and rear jogger fences | align the front and rear of the trailing edge. (This is
the same operation as for smaller paper sizes.)
The sub jogger fence motor switches on and moves its front and rear fence. Only the
rear fence } touches the rear corner of the stack near the LE stopper. The front fence ~
also moves but does not touch the front edge of the stack. (There is only one sub jogger
motor so both sub jogger fences move.)
The paper is aligned at four points: at the leading edge by the LE stopper, at the front and
rear corners of the trailing edge by the main jogger fences, and at the rear corner near the
leading edge by the sub jogger rear fence.
Set 2
The set (blue above) is shifted and output to the tray..
The LE stopper jogs the leading edge of the stack.
The main jogger fences align the paper at the front and rear of the trailing edge. (This
is the same operation as for smaller paper sizes.)
The sub jogger fence motor switches on and moves both the front and rear fence. Only
the front fence touches the front corner of the stack near the LE stopper. The rear
fence also moves but does not touch the rear edge of the stack. (There is only one
sub jogger motor so both sub jogger fences move.)
The paper is aligned at four points: at the leading edge by the LE stopper, at the front and
rear corners of the trailing edge by the main jogger fences, and at the front corner near the
leading edge by the sub jogger front fence.
SM 119 D447
Shift Tray Lift and Height Adjustment
2.4 SHIFT TRAY LIFT AND HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
1. Tray Lift Motor
2. Paper Tray
3. Shift Tray Paper Sensor (in jogger unit)
4. Paper Height Sensor
5. Tray High Limit Switch (micro-switch)
6. Tray Guard Sensors 1, 2
7. Tray Full Sensors 1, 2, 3, 4 (25%, 50%, 75%, 100%)
8. Tray Low Limit Sensor
9. Tray Low Limit Switch (micro-switch)
Sensor, Switch Summary
The tray lift motor [1] raises and lowers the paper tray [2].
The shift paper sensor [3] is mounted in the jogger unit.
D447 120 SM
Shift Tray Lift and Height Adjustment
When there is no paper on the tray its actuator falls into a cutout on the tray and signals
no paper on the tray.
When there is paper on the tray (at least one sheet) the actuator remains up signaling
paper on the tray.
When the top of the stack grows high enough as paper is output onto the tray, the actuator
enters the gap of the paper height sensor [4]. This signals the tray lift motor to lower the tray
the prescribed distance so the tray can accept more paper. This sequence of is repeated
until the tray is full.
The tray upper limit switch [5] is mounted behind the paper height sensor. If the edge of the
tray (not the stack) raises high to push up the actuator along the length of the tray edge, this
will trigger the micro-switch, signal the high limit of the tray switch off the stacking operation.
There are two tray guard sensors [6] mounted side by side in the jogger unit. Each sensor is
mounted above a swinging plate with an actuator on top. If the top of the stack pushes up
either plate far enough to activate either sensor, this will shut down operation of the stacker
High Capacity
immediately. These sensors are also fail safe mechanisms. If stack on the tray skews and
SK5010
Stacker
D447
either the paper height sensor or tray high limit switch fail to detect the top of the stack, one
of the guard sensors will trigger a signal to shut down the stacker. This prevents the top of
the stack (or empty) tray from striking the bottom of the paper transport plates above and
causing damage.
The four tray full sensors [7] signal the status of the tray on the main machine operation
panel at each stage: 25% full, 50% full, 75% full, 100% full. When the actuator on the tray
reaches tray full sensor 4 (100%) the stacking operation will stop, signaling the operator that
the cart is full and must be emptied.
The tray low limit sensor [8] signals when the tray is down (the cart can be removed).
The tray low limit switch [9] will shut down the stacker if the edge of the tray hits this
micro-switch. This is one additional fail-safe mechanism designed to shut down the stacker
if either sensor above (Tray Full 4, Tray Low Limit Sensor) fails to signal tray full.
Power Off
At the end of the job:
The tray does not lower.
The operator must press the DOWN button on the stacker operation panel to lower the
tray and remove the paper stacked on the cart.
Power ON
If there is no paper on the tray:
The shift paper sensor [3] detects no paper.
SM 121 D447
Shift Tray Lift and Height Adjustment
The tray lift motor raises the tray until the paper height sensor [4] is pushed up far
enough to detect the top of the tray and then stops.
The tray lift motor reverses and lowers the tray to the start position.
If there is paper on the tray:
The shift paper sensor [3] detects paper.
The tray lift motor raises the tray until the paper height sensor [4] detects the top of the
tray and then stops.
The tray lift motor reverses and lowers the tray far enough to accept more paper.
D447 122 SM
LCIT RT5030
D452
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
LCIT RT5030 D452
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................ 1
1.1 DOOR AND COVERS ................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 FRONT DOOR AND COVERS ............................................................ 1
1.1.2 INNER COVERS .................................................................................. 1
Inner Upper Cover ................................................................................... 1
Inner Lower Cover ................................................................................... 2
1.2 TRAYS .......................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 TOP TRAY (TRAY 4) ........................................................................... 3
1.2.2 MIDDLE TRAY (TRAY 5) ..................................................................... 3
1.2.3 BOTTOM TRAY (TRAY 6) ................................................................... 4
1.3 PAPER FEED ............................................................................................... 6
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT ............................................................................. 6
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Top Tray ................................................. 6
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Middle Tray ............................................ 7
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Bottom Tray ............................................ 8
1.3.2 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION AND PICKUP ROLLERS ................... 10
Top Tray ................................................................................................ 10
Middle or Bottom Tray ........................................................................... 10
1.4 LCT MOTORS............................................................................................. 12
1.4.1 PAPER FEED, GRIP MOTORS ......................................................... 12
1.4.2 6TH LIFT MOTOR ............................................................................. 13
1.4.3 4TH TRANSPORT MOTOR ............................................................... 13
1.4.4 5TH TRANSPORT MOTOR ............................................................... 14
1.4.5 LCT EXIT MOTOR ............................................................................. 15
1.4.6 6TH TRANSPORT MOTOR ............................................................... 16
1.4.7 4TH, 5TH LIFT MOTORS .................................................................. 17
1.4.8 COOLING FAN .................................................................................. 17
1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................... 19
1.5.1 PAPER FEED AND END SENSORS ................................................. 19
When reinstalling the sensor bracket .................................................... 19
1.5.2 LIFT SENSOR ................................................................................... 19
SM i D452
1.5.3 IMAGE POSITION SENSOR BOARD, EXIT SENSOR ..................... 20
Image Position Sensor .......................................................................... 20
Image Position Sensor Board ................................................................ 21
Exit Sensor ............................................................................................ 21
1.5.4 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS, PAPER SIZE SENSORS .................... 21
1.5.5 MAIN CONTROL BOARD .................................................................. 22
Main Control Board ............................................................................... 22
Main Control Board Bracket .................................................................. 22
1.6 ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................ 24
1.6.1 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT .............................................. 24
1.6.2 ADJUSTING IMAGE POSITION SENSOR STRENGTH AND
SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ................................................................ 24
1.6.3 DOUBLE FEED PROBLEM FROM THE LCT .................................... 26
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray .................. 26
2. DETAILS ........................................................................................ 28
2.1 MECHANICAL OVERVIEW ........................................................................ 28
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................ 28
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ................................................................................. 30
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .......................................................... 32
2.1.4 A4/LT LCT B832 LAYOUT (WITH BYPASS) ..................................... 35
2.1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY ......................................... 37
Motors ................................................................................................... 37
PCBs ..................................................................................................... 38
Sensors ................................................................................................. 38
Solenoids............................................................................................... 43
Switches ................................................................................................ 44
Other ..................................................................................................... 44
2.2 PAPER HANDLING .................................................................................... 45
2.2.1 PAPER FEED ROLLERS................................................................... 45
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MOTORS.................................................................... 46
2.2.3 PICK-UP AND FEED ......................................................................... 47
2.2.4 TRAY DETECTION ............................................................................ 47
2.2.5 LIFT MECHANISM ............................................................................. 48
2.2.6 LIFT SENSOR ................................................................................... 49
2.2.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTION ................................................................ 49
D452 ii SM
2.2.8 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION .................................................... 50
2.2.9 PAPER END DETECTION................................................................. 51
2.2.10 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION ............................................... 52
SM iii D452
Door and Covers
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 DOOR AND COVERS
1.1.1 FRONT DOOR AND COVERS
[A] Top cover ( x 4).
[B] Front door ( x 1).
While lifting the top cover, remove the snap ring and front door.
[C] Rear cover ( x 6).
[D] Right cover ( x 6).
[E] Paper slot cover ( x 2).
1.1.2 INNER COVERS
Inner Upper Cover
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the top tray and middle tray.
SM 1 D452
Door and Covers
3. Remove:
[A] Knobs (x 2) ( x 1 each)
[B] Inner upper cover ( x 2)
Inner Lower Cover
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the middle tray and bottom tray.
3. Remove:
[A] Inner lower cover ( x 2)
D452 2 SM
Trays
1.2 TRAYS
1.2.1 TOP TRAY (TRAY 4)
1. Open the front door [A].
2. Pull open the top tray [B] until it stops.
3. Lift the top tray [A] out of the drawer (black screw x 4).
1.2.2 MIDDLE TRAY (TRAY 5)
1. Open the front door.
SM 3 D452
Trays
2. Pull open the middle tray [A] until it stops.
3. Lift the middle tray [A] out of the drawer ( x 4, black screw x 2).
1.2.3 BOTTOM TRAY (TRAY 6)
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull open the bottom tray [A] until it stops.
D452 4 SM
Trays
3. Lift the bottom tray [A] out of the drawer ( x 4, black screw x 2).
SM 5 D452
Paper Feed
1.3 PAPER FEED
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Top Tray
1. Open the front door.
2. Inner upper cover ( Inner Covers)
3. Rear cover ( Front Door and Covers)
4. Top tray ( Top Tray (Tray 4))
5. Cover bracket [A] ( x 4)
6. Push the slide rails [A] into the machine.
D452 6 SM
Paper Feed
7. Remove the screw [A] at the rear, indicated by the triangle mark.
8. Stay [A] ( x 2)
9. Pull the paper feed unit [B], and then move it to the lower right side ( x 2).
10. Paper feed unit [A]
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Middle Tray
1. Open the front door.
2. Inner upper cover ( Inner Covers)
3. Rear cover ( Front Door and Covers)
4. Middle tray ( Middle Tray (Tray 5))
SM 7 D452
Paper Feed
5. Push the slide rails [A] into the machine.
6. Remove the screw [A] at the rear, indicated by the triangle mark.
7. Pull out the top tray [A].
8. Pull the paper feed unit with stay [B], and then move it to the lower right side ( x 2,
black screw x 2).
9. Stay [C] (step screw x 2)
10. Paper feed unit [D]
For the Paper Feed Unit in the Bottom Tray
1. Open the front door.
D452 8 SM
Paper Feed
2. Inner upper cover (
Inner Covers)
3. Rear cover (
Front Door and Covers)
4. Bottom tray (
Bottom Tray (Tray 6))
5. Push the slide rails [A] into the machine.
6. Remove the screw [A] indicated by the triangle mark at the rear.
7. Pull out the middle tray.
8. Pull the paper feed unit with stay [A], and then move it to the right-lower side ( x 2,
black screw x 2).
9. Stay [B] (step screw x 2)
SM 9 D452
Paper Feed
10. Paper feed unit [C]
1.3.2 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION AND PICKUP ROLLERS
Before doing this procedure, turn off the main machine and disconnect it from its
power source.
Top Tray
1. Top tray (
Top Tray (Tray 4))
2. Remove:
[A]: Paper feed roller ( x 1)
[B]: Separation roller ( x 1)
[C]: Pickup roller ( x 1)
Middle or Bottom Tray
1. Middle tray or Bottom tray ( Middle Tray (Tray 5) or Bottom Tray (Tray 6))
2. Inner upper cover for the middle tray or Inner lower cover for the bottom tray ( Inner
Covers)
D452 10 SM
Paper Feed
3. Tray side plate [A] (black screw x 4).
4. Pull the paper feed unit [A].
5. Remove:
[B]: Paper feed roller ( x 1)
[C]: Separation roller ( x 1)
[D]: Pickup roller ( x 1)
SM 11 D452
LCT Motors
1.4 LCT MOTORS
1.4.1 PAPER FEED, GRIP MOTORS
Each paper feed unit has a paper feed motor and a grip motor . The removal procedure
is the same for each feed tray.
Remove:
1. Rear cover (
Front Door and Covers)
[A] Motor unit ( x4,
x2)
[A] Springs (x 2), First, loosen the screws (x2)
[B] Paper feed motor ( x2)
D452 12 SM
LCT Motors
[C] Grip motor ( x2)
Reinstallation
Attach the tension spring, then tighten the screws to tighten the belts.
1.4.2 6TH LIFT MOTOR
Remove:
Rear cover (
Front Door and Covers)
Right cover (
Front Door and Covers)
[A] 6th lift motor ( x 4,
x1)
1.4.3 4TH TRANSPORT MOTOR
Remove:
Rear cover (
Front Door and Covers
[A] 4th Transport motor unit ( x 5,
x 1).
SM 13 D452
LCT Motors
[B] Spring (x1). First, loosen screw ( x 1).
[A] 4th transport motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
Reinstallation
Be sure that the tension spring is connected, then tighten the screw .
1.4.4 5TH TRANSPORT MOTOR
Remove:
Rear cover (
Front Door and Covers)
[A] Motor unit ( x4,
x 1).
[B] Spring (x1). First, loosen screw ( x 1).
D452 14 SM
LCT Motors
[A] 5th Transport motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
Reinstallation
Be sure that the tension spring is connected, then tighten the screw .
1.4.5 LCT EXIT MOTOR
Remove:
Rear cover (
Front Door and Covers)
[A] Motor unit ( x6,
x 1).
SM 15 D452
LCT Motors
[A] Spring (x1). First, loosen screw ( x 1).
[B] LCT exit motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
Reinstallation
Be sure that the tension spring is connected, then tighten the screw .
1.4.6 6TH TRANSPORT MOTOR
Remove:
Rear cover (
Front Door and Covers)
[A] Motor unit ( x6,
x 1).
[B] Spring (x1). First, loosen screw ( x 1).
D452 16 SM
LCT Motors
[A] LCT exit motor ( x2, Timing belt x1)
Reinstallation
Be sure that the tension spring is connected, then tighten the screw .
1.4.7 4TH, 5TH LIFT MOTORS
1. Remove:
Rear cover (
Front Door and Covers)
Main control board bracket (
Main Control Board)
[A] 4th lift motor ( x3,
x 1)
[B] 5th lift motor ( x3,
x 1)
1.4.8 COOLING FAN
1. Rear cover ( Front Door and Covers)
SM 17 D452
LCT Motors
2. Cooling fan [A] ( x 2, = x 1, x 1)
When reinstalling the cooling fan, make sure that the cooling fan is installed with
its decals facing upward.
D452 18 SM
Electrical Components
1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1.5.1 PAPER FEED AND END SENSORS
1. Paper feed unit ( Paper Feed Unit)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, = x 3, x 1)
3. Remove:
[A]: Paper feed sensor (hooks)
[B]: Paper end sensor (hooks)
When reinstalling the sensor bracket
Make sure that the white connector is connected to the paper feed sensor and the red
connector is connected to the paper end sensor.
1.5.2 LIFT SENSOR
1. Paper feed unit ( Paper Feed Unit)
SM 19 D452
Electrical Components
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, = x 1, x 1)
3. Lift sensor [A] (hooks)
1.5.3 IMAGE POSITION SENSOR BOARD, EXIT SENSOR
Image Position Sensor
1. Disconnect the LCT from the copier.
2. Remove:
D452 20 SM
Electrical Components
[A] Harness cover ( x1, = x1)
[B] Image position sensor unit ( x1, = x1, x1)
[C] Stopper ( x1)
[D] Image position sensor
After replacing the image position sensor, do the procedure for image position sensor
adjustment. ( Adjusting Image Position Sensor Strength and Side-To-Side
Registration)
Image Position Sensor Board
1. Remove:
[E] Image position sensor board ( x2, = x1, x 2)
Exit Sensor
1. Remove:
[F] Exit sensor unit ( x1,
x1, = x 1)
[G] Exit sensor
1.5.4 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS, PAPER SIZE SENSORS
Remove:
Rear cover (
Front Door and Covers)
Right cover (
Front Door and Covers)
[A] Paper height sensor unit (= x2, x 1,
x 4).
[B] Paper height sensors (Hooks x 4 each)
[C] Paper size sensors (
x 1 each)
SM 21 D452
Electrical Components
1.5.5 MAIN CONTROL BOARD
Main Control Board
Remove:
Rear cover (
Front Door and Covers)
[A] Main control board ( x 7, Standoffs x 1,
x All)
Main Control Board Bracket
1. Rear cover ( Front Door and Covers)
1. Bracket [A] ( x 3)
D452 22 SM
Electrical Components
2. Main control board bracket [A] ( x 8, = x 3, x All)
SM 23 D452
Adjustment
1.6 ADJUSTMENT
1.6.1 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
Normally the side registration of the image can be adjusted with SP1002 004-006
(Side-to-Side Registration – Tray 4, 5, 6). When the punch hole positions are not aligned
from a particular feed station, adjust the side registration by changing the tray cover
position for the tray, as described below. Then adjust the side registration of the image with
SP1002.
1. Pull out the tray.
1. Change the screw positions [A] at both the right and left sides as shown.
Adjustment range: 0 ± 2.0 mm adjustment step: 0.5 mm/step
1.6.2 ADJUSTING IMAGE POSITION SENSOR STRENGTH AND
SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION
1. Turn off the main power of the main machine.
D452 24 SM
Adjustment
1. Disconnect the LCT from the mainframe with the LCT [A] separated from the
mainframe, reconnect the LCT cable to the mainframe.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
3. Insert one sheet of plain white paper [B] in the paper path.
4. Make sure that the paper covers the entire area below the image position sensor (CIS)
[C].
5. Enter the SP mode and do SP1910-002 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: LED
Strength - LCT). This calibrates the amount of light to be emitted from the CIS.
6. Do SP1909 002 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: PWM After Adjustment - LCT).
If the displayed value is between 10 (Ah) and 40 (28h), the CIS is calibrated
successfully. (The display is in hexadecimal code.)
If the value is outside this range, do SP 1910-002 and 1909-002 again. If the value
does not come between 20 and 40, the CIS may be defective.
7. Exit the SP mode.
8. Reinstall the LCT to the side of the copier.
9. Push [User Tools]> [Adjust Settings for Operators].
10. Do "0111-4 to -7" for Trays 4, 5, 6, 7 and set the value for each tray to "Off".
11. Exit from SP 1911 and return to the SP mode menu.
12. Adjust the image positions in the main scan direction.
Do SP2902-003, select Pattern 27, then print the trimming pattern.
Do SP1002 and adjust the image position in the main scan direction for Trays 4, 5,
6, and 7.
Print the trimming pattern from each tray of the LCT and from the bypass tray (if
installed).
SM 25 D452
Adjustment
To do this, touch "Copy Window" in the SP display, select a tray, then push [Start].
The distance of the test pattern line from the paper edge for each tray must be 2
mm. If it is not 2 mm, adjust with SP1002-004 to -007, depending on which tray is
not within the specified 2 mm.
13. Do SP1912-002 (CIS Image Position Adjustment: Normal Paper). This sets the CIS for
operation with standard copy paper.
14. Exit the SP mode.
15. Push [User Tools]> [Adjust Settings for Operators].
16. Once again, do "0111-4 to -7" (CIS Image Position Adjustment: Feed Setting) and reset
the values for Trays 4, 5, 6, and 7 to "On".
1.6.3 DOUBLE FEED PROBLEM FROM THE LCT
If double feed occurs several times when paper is fed from an LCT, try to change the upper
limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray
Changing the upper limit of the paper stack in the LCT tray can improve paper separation
for the paper stack in the LCT tray.
D452 26 SM
Adjustment
1. Remove the paper feed unit of the LCT unit (
Paper Feed Unit).
2. Loosen the screw on the lift sensor bracket [A].
3. Move the bracket 0.7 mm in the arrow direction as shown above.
4. Tighten the screw on the lift sensor bracket [A].
To return the upper limit position to the default position, move the paper lift sensor
bracket 0.7 mm to the opposite side.
Return the upper limit position to the default if a paper jam occurs at the paper
feed sensor in the LCT.
SM 27 D452
Mechanical Overview
2. DETAILS
2.1 MECHANICAL OVERVIEW
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
D452 28 SM
Mechanical Overview
1. 4th Paper Feed Unit *1
2. 5th Paper Feed Unit
3. 6th Paper Feed Unit
4. 4th Tray Drive Belt
5. 5th Tray Drive Belt
6. 6th Tray Drive Belt
7. Lower Transport Rollers
8. Horizontal Transport Roller
9. LCT Exit roller
10. Upper Transport Rollers
11. Feed Slot (from Bypass Tray)
SM 29 D452
Mechanical Overview
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
D452 30 SM
Mechanical Overview
1. 4th Lift Motor
2. 5th Lift Motor
3. 6th Lift Motor
4. 6th Paper Feed Motor
5. 6th Grip Motor
6. 6th Transport Motor
7. 5th Paper Feed Motor
8. 5th Grip Motor
9. LCT Exit Motor
10. 5th Transport Motor
11. 4th Transport Motor
12. 4th Grip Motor
13. 4th Paper Feed Motor
SM 31 D452
Mechanical Overview
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
D452 32 SM
Mechanical Overview
1. LCT Image Position Sensor
2. Exit Sensor
3. 5th Transport Sensor
4. Image Position Sensor Board
5. 4th Relay Sensor
6. 4th Transport Sensor
7. 4th Paper Height Sensor
8. 4th Paper Size Sensors
9. 4th Paper Height Sensor 3
10. 4th Paper Height Sensor 2
11. 4th Paper Height Sensor 1
12. 5th Paper Height Sensor 4
13. 5th Paper Size Sensors
14. 5th Paper Height Sensor 3
15. 5th Paper Height Sensor 2
16. 5th Paper Height Sensor 1
17. 6th Paper Size Sensors
18. 6th Paper Height Sensor 4
19. 6th Paper Height Sensor 3
20. 6th Paper Height Sensor 2
21. 6th Paper Height Sensor 1
22. 6th Transport Sensor
23. Door Safety Switch
24. 6th Separation Solenoid
25. 6th Paper End Sensor
26. 6th Paper Feed Sensor
27. 6th Lift Sensor
28. 6th Pick-up Solenoid
SM 33 D452
Mechanical Overview
Items 24, 25, 26, 27 and 28 are duplicated in the 4th and 5th units.
1. 5th Transport Motor 9. 5th Lift Motor
2. 4th Transport Motor 10. 6th Paper Feed Motor
3. 4th Grip Motor 11. 6th Lift Motor
4. 4th Paper Feed Motor 12. Anti-Condensation Heaters
5. 5th Grip Motor 13. Cooling Fan
6. 5th Paper Feed Motor 14. 6th Grip Motor
7. 4th Lift Motor 15. 6th Transport Motor
8. Main Control Board 16. LCT Exit Motor
D452 34 SM
Mechanical Overview
2.1.4 A4/LT LCT B832 LAYOUT (WITH BYPASS)
SM 35 D452
Mechanical Overview
1. Paper Feed Motor (Bypass)
2. Paper Feed Sensor (Bypass)
3. Grip Motor (Bypass)
4. Transport Sensor (Bypass)
5. Transport Motor (Bypass)
6. 4th Paper Feed Motor
7. 4th Paper Feed Sensor
8. 4th Grip Motor
9. 4th Transport Sensor
10. 4th Transport Motor
11. 4th Relay Sensor
12. 5th Paper Feed Motor
13. 5th Paper Feed Sensor
14. 5th Grip Motor
15. 5th Transport Motor
16. 5th Transport Sensor
17. 6th Paper Feed Motor
18. 6th Paper Feed Sensor
19. 6th Grip Motor
20. 6th Transport Sensor
21. 6th Transport Motor
22. LCT Exit Motor
23. LCT Exit Sensor
D452 36 SM
Mechanical Overview
2.1.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT SUMMARY
Motors
No. Name Description
4th Grip
M1 Drives the separation roller and the grip roller of the 4th tray.
Motor
M2 4th Lift Motor Drives the bottom plate of the 4th tray up and down.
4th Paper Drives the pick-roller and feed roller that picks up each sheet and
M3
Feed Motor starts to feed it out of the 4th tray.
4th Transport Drives the rollers in the vertical feed path that feed the paper from
M4
Motor the 4th tray to the LCT exit motor.
5th Grip
M5 Drives the separation roller and the grip roller of the 5th tray.
Motor
M6 5th Lift Motor Drives the bottom plate of the 5th tray up and down.
5th Paper Drives the pick-roller and feed roller that picks up each sheet and
M7
Feed Motor starts to feed it out of the 5th tray.
5th Transport Drives the transport rollers in the vertical feed path that feed the
M8
Motor paper from the 4th tray and the 5th tray to the LCT exit motor.
6th Grip
M9 Drives the separation roller and the grip roller of the 6th tray.
Motor
M10 6th Lift Motor Drives the 5th tray up and down.
6th Paper Drives the pick-roller and feed roller that picks up each sheet and
M11
Feed Motor starts to feed it out of the 6th tray.
6th Transport Drives the rollers in the vertical feed path that feed the paper from
M12
Motor the 6th tray to the LCT exit motor.
LCT Exit
M13 Feeds the paper out the LCT and into the entrance of the copier.
Motor
SM 37 D452
Mechanical Overview
PCBs
No. Name Description
Main
PCB1 Control Controls the operation of all motors and sensors in the LCT unit.
Board
Image Operates the CIS sensor (performs waveform correction) in the LCT.
Position The CRB (CIS Relay Board) and CIS sensor perform side-to-side
PCB2
Sensor image correction. The CRB and CIS are a single unit. The CRB is
Board not a separate board.
Sensors
No. Name Description
4th Lift Detects when the paper in the 4th tray is at the correct height for
S1
Sensor paper feed and switches the 4th lift motor off.
4th Paper
S2 Detects when the last sheet feeds from the 4th tray.
End Sensor
4th Paper Detects the paper when it arrives at the 4th paper feed roller and
S3
Feed Sensor checks for misfeeds.
4th Paper
S4 Height 4th from the bottom of the 4th tray, detects stack height: 100%
Sensor 1
4th Paper
S5 Height 5th from the bottom of the 4th tray, detects stack height: 75%
Sensor 2
4th Paper
S6 Height 6th from the bottom of the 4th tray, detects stack height: 50%
Sensor 3
D452 38 SM
Mechanical Overview
No. Name Description
4th Paper
4th from the bottom of the 4th tray, detects stack height: 25% and
S7 Height
signals near-end.
Sensor 4
4th Paper
Length Detects the length of the paper in the 4th tray (used in combination
S8
Sensor with the paper width sensors).
(B834)
4th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 4th
S9 Width Sensor
tray.
1 (B834)
4th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 4th
S10 Width Sensor
tray.
2 (B834)
4th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 4th
S11 Width Sensor
tray.
3 (B834)
4th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 4th
S12 Size Sensor 1
tray.
(B832)
4th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 4th
S13 Size Sensor 2
tray.
(B832)
4th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 4th
S14 Size Sensor 3
tray.
(B832)
Detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper in the paper path
4th Relay
S15 near the bottom of the 4th tray. Checks the timing of the feed and
Sensor
signals a jam if the paper is late or lags at this location.
S16 4th Relay Detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper in the paper path
SM 39 D452
Mechanical Overview
No. Name Description
Sensor - near the top of the 4th tray. Checks the timing of the feed and
Upper (B834) signals a jam if the paper is late or lags at this location.
4th Transport Detects jams in the paper path where the transport motor feeds the
S17
Sensor paper from the 4th tray.
5th Lift Detects when the paper in the 5th tray is at the correct height for
S18
Sensor paper feed and switches the 4th lift motor off.
5th Paper
S19 Detects when the last sheet feeds from the 5th tray.
End Sensor
5th Paper Detects the paper when it arrives at the 5th paper feed roller and
S20
Feed Sensor checks for misfeeds.
5th Paper
S21 Height 4th from the bottom of the 5th tray, detects stack height: 100%
Sensor 1
5th Paper
S22 Height 5th from the bottom of the 5th tray, detects stack height: 75%
Sensor 2
5th Paper
S23 Height 6th from the bottom of the 5th tray, detects stack height: 50%
Sensor 3
5th Paper
4th from the bottom of the 5th tray, detects stack height: 25% and
S24 Height
signals near-end.
Sensor 4
5th Paper
Length Detects the length of the paper in the 5th tray (used in combination
S25
Sensor with the paper width sensors).
(B834)
5th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 5th
S26 Width Sensor
tray.
1 (B834)
D452 40 SM
Mechanical Overview
No. Name Description
5th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 5th
S27 Width Sensor
tray.
2 (B834)
5th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 5th
S28 Width Sensor
tray.
3 (B834)
5th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 5th
S29 Size Sensor 1
tray.
(B832)
5th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 5th
S30 Size Sensor 2
tray.
(B832)
5th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 5th
S31 Size Sensor 3
tray.
(B832)
5th Relay Detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper in the paper path
S32 Sensor near the 5th tray. Checks the timing of the feed and signals a jam if
(B834) the paper is late or lags at this location.
5th Transport Detects jams in the paper path where the transport motor feeds the
S33
Sensor paper from the 5th tray.
6th Lift Detects when the paper in the 6th tray is at the correct height for
S34
Sensor paper feed and switches the 4th lift motor off.
6th Paper
S35 Detects when the last sheet feeds from the 6th tray.
End Sensor
6th Paper Detects the paper when it arrives at the 6th paper feed roller and
S36
Feed Sensor checks for misfeeds.
6th Paper
S37 Height 4th from the bottom of the 6th tray, detects stack height: 100%
Sensor 1
SM 41 D452
Mechanical Overview
No. Name Description
6th Paper
S38 Height 5th from the bottom of the 6th tray, detects stack height: 75%
Sensor 2
6th Paper
S39 Height 6th from the bottom of the 6th tray, detects stack height: 50%
Sensor 3
6th Paper
4th from the bottom of the 6th tray, detects stack height: 25% and
S40 Height
signals near-end.
Sensor 4
6th Paper
Length Detects the length of the paper in the 6th tray (used in combination
S41
Sensor with the paper width sensors).
(B834)
6th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 6th
S42 Width Sensor
tray.
1 (B834)
6th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 6th
S43 Width Sensor
tray.
2 (B834)
6th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 6th
S44 Width Sensor
tray.
3 (B834)
6th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 6th
S45 Size Sensor 1
tray.
(B832)
6th Paper
1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 6th
S46 Size Sensor 2
tray.
(B832)
S47 6th Paper 1 of a set of 3 sensors that detect the width of the paper in the 6th
D452 42 SM
Mechanical Overview
No. Name Description
Size Sensor 3 tray.
(B832)
6th Relay Detects the leading and trailing edges of the paper in the paper path
S48 Sensor near the 6th tray. Checks the timing of the feed and signals a jam if
(B834) the paper is late or lags at this location.
6th Transport Detects jams in the paper path where the transport motor feeds the
S49
Sensor paper from the 6th tray.
LCT Exit
S50 Detects jams at the exit of the LCT unit.
Sensor
Mounted on the CRB (CIS Relay Board), this contact image sensor
LCT Image
detects the side-to-side edges of the paper in the paper path. The
S51 Position
machine uses this information to correct the position of the image
Sensor
when the lasers fire.
Solenoids
No. Name Description
Engages/disengages rotation of the pick-up roller in the 4th
SOL1 4th Pick-up Solenoid
tray.
4th Separation Controls up-down movement of the separation roller in the
SOL2
Solenoid 4th tray.
Engages/disengages rotation of the pick-up roller in the 5th
SOL3 5th Pick-up Solenoid
tray.
Controls up-down movement of the separation roller in the
SOL4 5th Separation SOL
5th tray.
Engages/disengages rotation of the pick-up roller in the 6th
SOL5 6th Pick-up Solenoid
tray.
SOL6 6th Separation Controls up-down movement of the separation roller in the
SM 43 D452
Mechanical Overview
No. Name Description
Solenoid 6th tray.
Switches
No. Name Description
Door Safety An interlock safety switch that detects when the front door is
SW1
Switch opened and closed.
Other
No. Name Description
H1, Anti-Condensation Evaporates moisture around the trays in the LCT (230V
H2 Heaters 18W).
D452 44 SM
Paper Handling
2.2 PAPER HANDLING
2.2.1 PAPER FEED ROLLERS
This LCT has three paper tray feed stations:
The 4th and 5th tray each hold 1,000 sheets of paper. The 6th tray holds 2,550 sheets of
paper. Total: 4,550 sheets
Each tray contains four rollers:
[A] Pick-up roller
[B] Paper feed roller
[C] Separation roller
[D] Grip roller
The pick-up roller, paper feed roller, and separation roller are a standard FRR
paper feed system.
SM 45 D452
Paper Handling
2.2.2 PAPER FEED MOTORS
Two stepper motors control the paper feed drive:
[A] Paper feed motor
[B] Grip motor
The paper feed motor drives the pick-up roller [C] and the paper feed roller [D].
The grip motor drives the grip roller [E] that feeds the paper out of the tray, and the
separation roller [F].
D452 46 SM
Paper Handling
2.2.3 PICK-UP AND FEED
When a paper feed station is not selected:
Separation roller solenoid [A] is de-activated
Separation roller [B] turns freely.
When the paper feed station is selected for a job:
Paper feed motor [C] and grip motor [D] turn on.
When the feed motor [C] turns on, it drives the feed roller [E]. It also drives the pick-up
roller [F] because the pick-up roller is linked to the feed roller by an idle gear.
When the separation solenoid [A] turns on, the separation roller [B] contacts the paper feed
roller [E] and turns with the feed roller, unless more than one sheet of paper is fed. The
three trays of the LCT unit use the standard FRR mechanism.
When the paper feed motor turns on, the pick-up solenoid turns on and the pick-up roller
[F] lowers until it contacts the top sheet of the paper stack and then sends it to the paper
feed and separation rollers.
When the paper feed sensor detects the leading edge of the paper, the paper feed motor
switches off, the pick-up roller lifts, and the grip rollers [G] feed the paper out of the tray.
2.2.4 TRAY DETECTION
When a tray is set in the machine, the tray detection method used depends on the tray:
The upper tray and middle tray are detected when any one of the paper size switch
signals is low.
The lower tray is detected when the switch 1 signal of the paper size switch is low.
SM 47 D452
Paper Handling
2.2.5 LIFT MECHANISM
When the machine detects that the paper tray is set in the machine, the tray lift motor [A]
rotates and the coupling gear [B] on the tray lift motor engages the pin [C] of the lift drive
shaft [D]. The tray drive belts [E] are connected to the tray bottom plate [F] and are driven
by the tray lift motor via the lift drive shaft [D] and tray drive pulleys [G]. When the lift motor
turns counterclockwise, the tray bottom plate [F] moves up. The tray goes up until the top
of the paper stack pushes up the pick-up roller and the lift sensor in the feed unit is
de-activated.
When the actuator [H] on the rear end of the bottom plate activates the paper height
sensors [I], the remaining paper capacity is detected. (
Remaining Paper Detection)
When pulling out the tray, the coupling gear [B] separates from the pin [C], so that the tray
bottom plate moves downward. In the bottom tray, the damper [J] lets the tray bottom plate
drop slowly.
D452 48 SM
Paper Handling
2.2.6 LIFT SENSOR
When the lift motor turns on, the pick-up solenoid [A] activates to lower the pick-up roller [B].
When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper feed level, the paper pushes up the
pick-up roller and the actuator [C] on the pick-up roller supporter [D] de-activates the lift
sensor [E] to stop the lift motor.
After several paper feeds, the paper level gradually lowers, then the lift sensor is activated
and the lift motor turns on again until the lift sensor is de-activated again.
2.2.7 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
SM 49 D452
Paper Handling
A4-LEF B5-LEF A5-LEF A5-SEF LT-LEF HLT-LEF HTL-SEF
SW1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
SW2 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
SW3 1 1 0 1 0 0 0
1: HIGH, 0: LOW
Top Tray (Tray 4) and Middle Tray (Tray 5)
For the top and middle trays, the paper size switch [A] detects the paper size. The paper
size switch contains three microswitches. The paper size switch is actuated by an actuator
plate [B] at the rear of the tray. Each paper size has its own unique combination as shown
in the table and the CPU determines the paper size by the combination.
Bottom Tray (Tray 6)
The bottom tray has the same switch as the top and middle trays. However, it is only used
for detecting when the tray is pushed in.
For the bottom tray, the paper size must be selected with SP5019-007:
2.2.8 REMAINING PAPER DETECTION
The amount of paper remaining in the tray is detected by the three paper height
photo-interrupter sensors on the left rail as the bottom plate rises. Five states, determined
by the position of the actuator are possible.
1. With the actuator [A] below paper height sensor 1 [B], no sensor is actuated and the
display indicates 100%.
D452 50 SM
Paper Handling
2. When the actuator passes paper height sensor 1 [B] , the display indicates 75% of the
paper supply remaining.
3. When the actuator passes paper height sensor 2 [C], the display indicates 50% of the
paper supply remaining.
4. When the actuator passes paper height sensor 3 [D], the display indicates 25% of the
paper supply remaining.
When the actuator enters the gap of the near end sensor [E], the machine
signals near end.
Finally, when the last sheet feeds, the paper end sensor signals that the tray is empty. (
Paper End Detection)
2.2.9 PAPER END DETECTION
The paper end sensor [A] detects the top sheet of the paper in the tray by monitoring the
reflected light. When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end sensor does not
receive the reflected light due to the cutout [B]. Then, the tray lift motor rotates backwards 2
seconds to drop the tray bottom plate.
SM 51 D452
Paper Handling
2.2.10 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION
The image position sensor [A] is located in the LCT paper path above the paper path and in
front of the LCT exit rollers. (This sensor is mounted on its own control board.)
The sensor is a CIS (Contact Image Sensor). It checks the side edges of each sheet as it
passes, and feeds this information back to the machine.
If the side-to-side registration of the paper is slightly out of alignment, the machine will
correct the image position when the laser writes the image on the surface of the drum. This
function does not correct the position of the paper.
D452 52 SM
TRIMMER UNIT TR5020
D455
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
TRIMMER UNIT TR5020 D455
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................ 1
1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES ........................................................................... 1
1.1.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN ......................................................................... 1
1.1.2 COVERS, TRAY UNIT, DOOR ............................................................ 2
Rear Cover .............................................................................................. 2
Left Upper Cover ..................................................................................... 3
Top Cover................................................................................................ 3
Door ........................................................................................................ 5
Left Lower Cover ..................................................................................... 6
Tray Unit .................................................................................................. 7
1.1.3 FEED UNIT .......................................................................................... 9
1.1.4 TRIM POSITIONING UNIT ................................................................ 12
1.1.5 TRANSPORT UNIT ........................................................................... 15
1.2 TRIMMING BLADE, BLADE CRADLE ........................................................ 18
1.2.1 TRIMMING BLADE COVER .............................................................. 18
1.2.2 TRIMMING BLADE ............................................................................ 19
1.2.3 BLADE CRADLE ................................................................................ 23
1.3 MOTORS .................................................................................................... 24
1.3.1 CUTTER MOTOR .............................................................................. 24
1.3.2 FEED UNIT ........................................................................................ 24
Feed Motor ............................................................................................ 24
1.3.3 TRIM POSITIONING UNIT ................................................................ 25
Cut Position Motor ................................................................................. 25
Press Stopper Motor ............................................................................. 26
Press Roller Motor................................................................................. 28
1.3.4 TRANSPORT UNIT ........................................................................... 31
Exit Motor .............................................................................................. 31
1.3.5 TRAY UNIT ........................................................................................ 33
Tray Motor ............................................................................................. 33
1.4 SENSORS, SWITCHES .............................................................................. 38
1.4.1 FEED UNIT ........................................................................................ 38
SM i D455
Entrance Sensor.................................................................................... 38
1.4.2 TRIM POSITIONING UNIT ................................................................ 38
Stopper Assembly HP Sensor ............................................................... 38
Press Stopper HP Sensor ..................................................................... 39
Press Roller HP Sensor ........................................................................ 40
Stopper Sensor ..................................................................................... 42
1.4.3 TRIMMING UNIT ............................................................................... 44
Scrap Hopper Full Sensor ..................................................................... 44
Scrap Hopper HP Sensor ...................................................................... 46
Trimming Blade HP Sensor ................................................................... 47
1.4.4 TRANSPORT UNIT ........................................................................... 49
Exit Sensor ............................................................................................ 49
1.4.5 TRAY UNIT ........................................................................................ 50
Booklet Sensor 1 ................................................................................... 50
Booklet Sensor 3 ................................................................................... 51
Exit Sensor ............................................................................................ 53
1.4.6 SWITCHES ........................................................................................ 54
Door Switch ........................................................................................... 54
Breaker Switch ...................................................................................... 57
1.5 BOARDS ..................................................................................................... 59
1.5.1 MAIN BOARD .................................................................................... 59
1.5.2 VOLTAGE REGULATOR ................................................................... 60
2. DETAILS ........................................................................................ 63
2.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 63
2.2 MOTORS AND SENSORS ......................................................................... 64
2.3 OPERATION ............................................................................................... 67
2.3.1 LAYOUT............................................................................................. 67
2.3.2 OPERATION FLOW .......................................................................... 68
General ................................................................................................. 68
Booklet Feed ......................................................................................... 70
Positioning the Booklet for Trimming ..................................................... 71
Trimming ............................................................................................... 73
Booklet Feed-out ................................................................................... 75
Output Tray ........................................................................................... 77
Limitless Output..................................................................................... 78
D455 ii SM
Read This First
Safety, Conventions, Trademarks
Conventions
Common Terms
This is a list of symbols and abbreviations used in this manual.
Symbol What it means
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
= Harness clamp
FFC Flexible Film Cable
JG Junction Gate
LE Leading Edge of paper
LEF Long Edge Feed
SEF Short Edge Feed
TE Trailing Edge of paper
S31E The "Emitter" sensor of a sensor pair
S31R The "Receptor" sensor of a sensor pair
The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe the direction of paper feed, with the arrows
indicating paper feed direction.
Warnings, Cautions, Notes
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning
could result in death or serious injury.
A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution
could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the finisher or other property.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,
loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this
manual handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
Switches and Symbols
Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the
meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer
Reference Material for Maintenance
Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer
engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer engineers
shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the “CE Safety Guide”.
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine.
Before Installation, Maintenance
Power
Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After
switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other
devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds,
then unplug the machine from the power source.
Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do checks
or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears, timing
belts, etc.).
After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from
electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit,
gears, timing belts, etc.
Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments
After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the
machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping
materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for
installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This
also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal
operation.
Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use
your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
Special Tools
Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.
For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described in the
service manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could damage parts,
could damage the machine or cause injuries.
During Maintenance
General
Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2)
Disconnect the power plug from the power source, 3) Allow the machine to cool for
at least 10 minutes.
Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces.
Safety Devices
Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace
safety devices immediately.
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification
or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal
injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating
normally and safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with
the machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine
could lead to a fire and personal injuries.
Organic Cleaners
During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.)
other than those described in the service manual.
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic
solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous.
Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part
that generates heat.
Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials
to prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg
injuries. Use “My Ace” Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak up spills. For more
details, please refer to Technical Bulletin “Silicone Oil Removal” (A024-50).
Ozone Filters
Always replace ozone filters as soon as their service life expires (as described in
the service manual).
An excessive amount of ozone can build up around machines that use ozone filters
if they are not replaced at the prescribed time. Excessive ozone could cause
personnel working around the machine to feel unwell.
Power Plug and Power Cord
Before servicing the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always
make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source.
A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge caused
by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it if
necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power
cord if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short
circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock.
Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make
sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg.
Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a fire.
Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power
cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the
ground wire on the plug.
Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension
cord.
When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the
plug, not the cable.
After Installation, Servicing
Disposal of Used Items
Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.)
in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such
items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste from
consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items at one
of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
Points to Confirm with Operators
At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine.
Emphasize the following points.
Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems
by following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to
remove.
Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the
machine.
Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described in
the operating instructions.
Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the
plug, not the cord) if any of the following events occur: 1) something has spilled into the
product, 2) service or repair of the product is necessary, 3) the product cover has been
damaged.
Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They should
never allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall into the
machine.
Safety Instructions for this Machine
1. The installation must be done by trained service technicians.
2. This machine weighs 316 kg. (695 lb.). At least four persons are required to remove the
machine from its pallet and position it for installation.
3. To prevent fire hazards never use flammable solvents around the machine.
4. Never place any object on the machine.
5. If anything falls into the machine, turn off the main power switch on the right side of the
machine, then disconnect the power cord from the power source.
6. Locate the machine on a sturdy flat surface where it will not be exposed to excessive
vibration.
7. To avoid fire hazard, confirm that the ventilation ports are not blocked, so air can flow
freely.
8. Gas generated by the molten glue can irritate the eyes, throat, and nose. The machine
should always be used in a well ventilated room.
9. To avoid the dangers of fire and electrical shock, make sure that the machine is never
exposed to:
Excessive high temperatures and/or humidity
Dust
Water
Direct sunlight
Open flame
Corrosive gases
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with
those marks.
Common Procedures
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES
1.1.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
Remove the covers, door, and tray in this order for major maintenance and cleaning:
{ Rear cover ( x3)
Left upper cover ( x2)
} Top cover ( x5)
~ Front door ( x4)
Left bottom cover ( x2)
Tray unit ( x2, x2)
SM 1 D455
Common Procedures
1.1.2 COVERS, TRAY UNIT, DOOR
Rear Cover
1. Rear cover [A] ( x3)
2. Raise the bottom [B] to separate the metal tabs at the top.
3. Pull I/F connector [A] through the hole.
Re-installation
1. Be sure to engage the tabs on the top edge of the rear cover before re-attaching the
D455 2 SM
Common Procedures
bottom screws.
Left Upper Cover
1. Left upper cover [A] ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
2. Slowly pull the top away slowly and disengage the two tabs below.
Top Cover
Preparation
Rear cover ( x3)
SM 3 D455
Common Procedures
1. Remove six screws that hold the top cover [A].
2. Remove screws at:
[A] Left ( x2)
[B] Rear ( x1)
D455 4 SM
Common Procedures
[C] Front ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
3. Lift the top cover off.
Door
Preparation (recommended)
Rear cover ( x3)
Top cover ( x6)
SM 5 D455
Common Procedures
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove top hinge [A] ( x2).
3. Lift the door off the post of its bottom hinge.
Left Lower Cover
Preparation
Door ( x2)
Left upper cover ( x2)
D455 6 SM
Common Procedures
1. Left lower cover [A] ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
2. Slowly pull the cover away and disengage both tabs from the holes below.
Tray Unit
Preparation
Left upper cover ( x2)
Door ( x2)
Left lower cover ( x2)
SM 7 D455
Common Procedures
1. Remove two connectors at the left rear corner ( x2).
2. Remove two screws below the tray [A] ( x2).
3. Grip both sides of the tray [A], lift it straight up to disengage the four metal hooks from
their holes, then pull the tray away from the side of the trimmer unit.
D455 8 SM
Common Procedures
1.1.3 FEED UNIT
Preparation
Rear cover ( x3)
Top cover ( x5)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1. Rotate lever A1 [A] clockwise to lower the feed unit.
2. Disconnect feed motor [B] (
x1, Standoff x1)
3. Disconnect arm [A] ( x2).
SM 9 D455
Common Procedures
4. Grip lever A1 [A] with your left hand, and place your right hand at [B] under the feed unit.
5. Under the feed unit, look at the front where the arm roller and swing plate [C] are
connected.
6. While slowly raising the transport plate with your right hand, rotate lever A1 toward you
until the roller is aligned with the gap at [A].
7. While still holding the feed unit, rotate lever A1 down to separate the roller and swing
plate at [B]. This separates the rollers from the swing plates at the front and back.
D455 10 SM
Common Procedures
8. At the rear end of shaft [A], remove the e-ring ( x1).
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
9. At the front end of the shaft [A], remove the e-ring ( x1).
10. Pull off the bushing [B].
A harness is still connected below the feed unit. Do not try to pull the feed unit
away from the trimmer unit.
SM 11 D455
Common Procedures
11. Slowly lift the feed unit [A] and set it down against the trimmer unit as shown.
12. Disconnect and remove the sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
The feed unit [A] is now completely separated from the trimmer unit.
1.1.4 TRIM POSITIONING UNIT
Preparation
Rear cover ( x3)
Top cover ( x5)
Door ( x2)
Left upper cover ( x2)
Left lower cover ( x2)
Tray unit ( x2, x2)
D455 12 SM
Common Procedures
1. Disconnect sensor [A] and pull the harness out through the hole ( x1).
Trimmer Unit
2. Press in the releases on both sides of sensor [B], push it through its hole, then do the
TR5020
D455
same for sensor [C].
3. Remove the left cover plate:
[A] Left ( x7)
[B] Front ( x2)
SM 13 D455
Common Procedures
[C] Rear ( x2)
[D] Remove the plate
4. Open the harness clamps and pull out the harnesses (= x5).
5. Close the harness clamps to prevent entangling the loose harnesses when the unit is
removed.
6. Disconnect the harnesses connectors (
x4)
7. Disconnect the unit:
D455 14 SM
Common Procedures
[A] Front ( x2)
[B] Rear ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
8. Pull the harnesses [A] out from behind the shaft.
9. Lift the trim position unit [B] straight up and remove it.
1.1.5 TRANSPORT UNIT
Preparation
Remove the trim positioning unit
SM 15 D455
Common Procedures
1. Connectors [A] and [B] ( x2)
2. At the front [A], disconnect the swing frame shaft ( x1).
3. At the rear [B], while supporting the middle of the unit with your right hand, disconnect
the shaft ( x1).
4. Raise the unit [A] with both hands until it is level.
5. Look at the rear where the roller [B] is connected to the swing frame.
6. While holding lever A1 at the front, move the unit and pull the roller out of the gap at [B].
D455 16 SM
Common Procedures
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
7. Pull the transport unit away from the trimmer unit and set it on a flat surface.
Re-installation
To set the transport unit on its rollers:
At the front, set the roller in the cut-out in the swing frame [B].
At the rear, set the roller in its cut-out [A].
SM 17 D455
Trimming Blade, Blade Cradle
1.2 TRIMMING BLADE, BLADE CRADLE
1.2.1 TRIMMING BLADE COVER
Preparation
Rear cover ( x3)
Left upper cover ( x2)
Top cover ( x5)
The trimming blade [A] cover protects the trimming blade
1. Disconnect the trimming blade cover in this order:
[A] Side, bottom screws
D455 18 SM
Trimming Blade, Blade Cradle
[A] Rear ( x1)
[B] Front ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
2. Separate the arm [A] from the bracket while you remove the cover.
3. The cleaning blade [B] is exposed.
The blade is extremely sharp.
Work carefully around the edge [C] of the blade and handle it carefully after it has
been removed.
1.2.2 TRIMMING BLADE
Preparation
Rear cover ( x3)
Left upper cover ( x2)
Top cover ( x5)
Trimming blade cover ( x5)
SM 19 D455
Trimming Blade, Blade Cradle
1. Look for the handle [A], which is attached to the frame of the trimmer unit.
2. Remove the handle [A] ( x2)
3. Open the feed unit [A].
D455 20 SM
Trimming Blade, Blade Cradle
Remove the screws of the guard plate [A] ( x2).
The guard plate is permanently attached to the blade; it will not come off after
the screws have been removed.
1. Use the guard plate screws to attach the handle [B] to the side of the guard plate ( x2).
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
2. Use the Allen key (provided with the new blade) to remove the blade hex screws.
The blade is compressed by these screws and three very strong springs.
Insert the Allen key into the first hex screw [A].
Attach an adjustable wrench [B] as shown.
Raise the wrench to relieve tension on the springs.
Loosen each screw a full turn each to gradually relieve the tension on each screw.
Continue to loosen each screw in turns to remove them.
The screws should be removed gradually.
To avoid stripping the threads of the other holes or screws, never remove any
screw completely before the others.
SM 21 D455
Trimming Blade, Blade Cradle
3. Grip the handle [A] and slowly lift the blade off the heads of the large hex bolts [B] and
[C].
Obey local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of items like the used
trimming blade.
Re-installation
1. Grip the new blade by the handle [A] and set it on the heads [B] and [C] of the hex bolts.
2. Position the screw [A] at the first hole.
D455 22 SM
Trimming Blade, Blade Cradle
3. Raise the plate with the wrench [B].
4. Insert the first screw in the hole, then turn it until the screw is firmly attached. Do not
tighten it completely.
5. Start the other two screws in their holes while continuing to relieve tension on the
springs with the wrench.
6. After all the screws have been attached, tighten them one by one by about one full turn
until they are all tightened completely.
7. Attach the provided mylar to the new blade.
1.2.3 BLADE CRADLE
Preparation
Trimming blade cover ( x5)
Trimming blade ( x3)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1. Use an Allen key to remove the hex bolts of the blade cradle [A] ( x8)
2. Remove the cradle and set it on a flat surface.
Obey local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of items like the blade
cradle.
SM 23 D455
Motors
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 CUTTER MOTOR
Removing the cutter motor [A] is a dangerous procedure.
Never attempt to remove the cutter motor.
If the cutter motor fails, the trimmer unit must be replaced.
1.3.2 FEED UNIT
Feed Motor
Preparation
Remove the paper feed unit
1. Motor connector [A] ( x1)
D455 24 SM
Motors
2. Motor [A] ( x2)
Re-installation
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1. Position the motor behind the frame.
2. Align the Teflon tooth [A] with its notch.
3. Press the motor against the frame and re-fasten the screws ( x2).
The tooth must be seated properly in its notch, so that the motor mount is flat
against the back of the frame.
If the screws are re-attached while the tooth is out of the notch, the motor will not be
straight and the gears will not mesh properly.
1.3.3 TRIM POSITIONING UNIT
Cut Position Motor
Preparation
Trim positioning unit ( p.12)
SM 25 D455
Motors
1. Motor connector [A] ( x1)
2. Remove the screws on the other side, then remove the motor [A] ( x2).
Press Stopper Motor
Preparation
Trim positioning unit ( p.12)
D455 26 SM
Motors
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The press stopper motor is under the trim positioning unit.
1. Turn over the trim positioning unit so that you can see the motor.
2. Remove bracket screws { and . ( x2)
3. Pull away the bracket [A] with the motor.
SM 27 D455
Motors
4. Disconnect the motor ( x1).
5. Remove the motor from the bracket ( x2).
Press Roller Motor
Preparation
Trim positioning unit ( p.12)
D455 28 SM
Motors
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The press roller motor is visible from the top of the trim positioning unit, near the center.
1. Move the stopper assembly [A] away from the motor [B].
SM 29 D455
Motors
2. Remove the two standoffs.
3. Remove the motor ( x1, x2).
D455 30 SM
Motors
Re-installation
1. Position the motor behind the frame.
2. Align the Teflon tooth [A] with its notch.
Trimmer Unit
3. Press the motor against the frame and re-fasten the screws ( x2).
TR5020
D455
The tooth must be seated properly in its notch, so that the motor mount is flat
against the back of the frame.
If the screws are re-attached while the tooth is out of the notch, the motor will not be
straight and the gears will not mesh properly.
1.3.4 TRANSPORT UNIT
Exit Motor
Preparation
Trim positioning unit ( p.12)
Transport unit ( p.15)
SM 31 D455
Motors
The exit motor is under the left, rear corner of the transport unit.
1. Turn the transport unit over so that you can see the motor [A].
2. Disconnect the motor at [B] (
x1).
D455 32 SM
Motors
3. Remove the motor [A] ( x2).
Re-installation
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1. Position the motor behind the frame.
2. Align the Teflon tooth [A] with its notch.
3. Press the motor against the frame and re-fasten the screws ( x2).
The tooth must be seated properly in its notch, so that the motor mount is flat
against the back of the frame.
If the screws are re-attached while the tooth is out of the notch, the motor will not be
straight and the gears will not mesh properly.
1.3.5 TRAY UNIT
Tray Motor
Preparation
SM 33 D455
Motors
Left upper cover ( x2)
Left lower cover ( x2)
Tray unit ( x2, x2)
The tray motor is on the bottom of the tray unit and covered by the bottom plate. (The photo
above shows the tray unit with bottom plate removed.)
1. Lay the tray unit upside down on a flat surface.
2. Remove bottom cover [A] ( x 6) so that you can see the motor [B].
3. Remove side panel [A]
D455 34 SM
Motors
4. Disconnect motor bracket [A] ( x4).
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
5. Remove bottom end cover [A] ( x4).
SM 35 D455
Motors
6. Remove screws {, , } ( x3).
7. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] ( x2)
8. Disconnect sensor [B] ( x1)
9. Disconnect motor [A] ( x1).
10. Pull harness [B] through the hole.
D455 36 SM
Motors
11. Remove the motor [A] ( x2).
Re-installation
1. Position the motor behind the frame.
2. Align the Teflon tooth [A] with its notch.
Trimmer Unit
3. Press the motor against the frame and re-fasten the screws ( x2).
TR5020
D455
The tooth must be seated properly in its notch, so that the motor mount is flat
against the back of the frame.
If the screws are re-attached while the tooth is out of the notch, the motor will not be
straight and the gears will not mesh properly.
SM 37 D455
Sensors, Switches
1.4 SENSORS, SWITCHES
1.4.1 FEED UNIT
Entrance Sensor
Preparation
Feed unit ( p.9)
1. Disconnect and remove the sensor [A] (Standoff x1, x1, Pawls x5)
1.4.2 TRIM POSITIONING UNIT
Stopper Assembly HP Sensor
Preparation
Trim positioning unit ( p.12)
D455 38 SM
Sensors, Switches
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The stopper assembly HP sensor is at the rear of the trim positioning unit.
1. Disconnect sensor [A] (
x1, Pawls x5).
Press Stopper HP Sensor
Preparation
Trim positioning unit ( p.12)
The press stopper HP sensor [A] is located near the left, rear corner of the trim positioning
SM 39 D455
Sensors, Switches
unit.
1. Remove clamp screw [A] ( x1). This creates enough slack in the harness so that you
can detach and re-attach the sensor connector.
2. Disconnect the sensor ( x1, Pawls x5).
Press Roller HP Sensor
Preparation
Trim positioning unit ( p.12)
D455 40 SM
Sensors, Switches
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The press roller HP sensor [A] is on the side, facing down.
1. Free the harness [A] (Standoffs x2, = x1). This creates enough slack in the harness so
that you can detach and re-attach the sensor connector.
SM 41 D455
Sensors, Switches
2. Remove the sensor ( x1, Pawls x5).
Stopper Sensor
Preparation
Trim positioning unit (
p.12)
This sensor is on the right side of the trim positioning unit, below the center.
D455 42 SM
Sensors, Switches
Trimmer Unit
1. Turn the trim positioning unit over so that you can see the sensor [A].
TR5020
D455
2. Free the harness [A] (Standoffs x2,
x1). This creates enough slack in the harness so
that you can disconnect and re-connect the sensor.
SM 43 D455
Sensors, Switches
3. Disconnect the sensor bracket [A] and sensor harness [B] ( x2,
x1).
4. Remove the sensor and actuator (Pawls x5).
1.4.3 TRIMMING UNIT
Scrap Hopper Full Sensor
Preparation
Feed unit ( p.9).
The scrap hopper full sensor is visible on the right side of the trimmer unit, below the
entrance.
D455 44 SM
Sensors, Switches
1. Disconnect the plate [A] ( x2).
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
2. Disconnect the harness and remove plate [A] (= x1).
3. Disconnect sensor [A] ( x1).
SM 45 D455
Sensors, Switches
4. Remove the sensor and bracket [A] ( x2).
Scrap Hopper HP Sensor
Preparation
Rear cover (
p.2 "Covers, Tray Unit, Door")
D455 46 SM
Sensors, Switches
1. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x2).
2. Disconnect and remove sensor [A] (Standoffs x2, x1, Pawls x5).
Trimming Blade HP Sensor
Preparation
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
Trim position unit (
p.12)
D455
Transport unit (
p.15)
The trimming blade HP sensor is located inside the trimming motor box, next to the blade
motor.
SM 47 D455
Sensors, Switches
1. Remove blade motor cover [A] ( x3).
2. Remove sensor bracket [A] ( x1, = x1)
3. Disconnect and remove the sensor ( x1, Pawls x5)
D455 48 SM
Sensors, Switches
1.4.4 TRANSPORT UNIT
Exit Sensor
Preparation
Trim position unit ( p.12)
Transport unit ( p.15)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The exit sensor is under the transport unit.
1. Turn the transport unit over so that you can see the sensor.
2. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
SM 49 D455
Sensors, Switches
3. Disconnect and remove sensor [A] (Standoff x1, x1, Pawls x5)
1.4.5 TRAY UNIT
Booklet Sensor 1
Preparation
Left upper cover ( x2) ( p.2 "Covers, Tray Unit, Door")
1. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] ( x1).
D455 50 SM
Sensors, Switches
2. Disconnect and remove sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5)
Booklet Sensor 3
Preparation
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
Left upper cover ( x2)
D455
Left lower cover ( x2)
Tray unit (
x2, x2)
This sensor is under the bottom end plate of the tray unit.
SM 51 D455
Sensors, Switches
1. Remove the bottom end cover [A] ( x4).
2. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] ( x2).
3. Remove harness clamp screws {, , } ( x3).
D455 52 SM
Sensors, Switches
4. Remove the sensor [A] ( x1, Pawls x5).
Exit Sensor
Preparation
Left upper cover ( x2)
Left lower cover ( x2)
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
Tray unit (
x2, x2)
D455
The exit sensor is located under the bottom cover of the tray unit.
1. Lay the tray unit upside down on a flat surface.
2. Remove bottom cover [A] ( x6) so that you can see the sensor [B].
SM 53 D455
Sensors, Switches
3. Disconnect sensor bracket [A] and sensor [B] ( x1, x1).
4. Remove the sensor (Pawls x5)
1.4.6 SWITCHES
Door Switch
1. Open the front door and locate the switch [A].
D455 54 SM
Sensors, Switches
Trimmer Unit
2. Remove switch bracket [A] ( x2).
TR5020
D455
3. On the side, pull out three standoffs to free the harness [A]. This creates enough slack
in the harness so that you can disconnect and reconnect the harness connectors.
4. Disconnect the switch [B] (
x2).
SM 55 D455
Sensors, Switches
5. Remove switch cover [A] ( x2).
6. Press in on both sides of the switch [A].
7. Push the switch through the bracket and remove it.
D455 56 SM
Sensors, Switches
Breaker Switch
Preparation
Rear cover (
p.2 "Covers, Tray Unit, Door")
1. Locate the breaker switch [A] at the rear.
Trimmer Unit
2. Disconnect the switch bracket [B] ( x2).
TR5020
D455
3. Disconnect breaker switch [A] ( x4).
SM 57 D455
Sensors, Switches
4. At each corner, press down the release and push the corner out.
5. Pull the switch out of the bracket.
D455 58 SM
Boards
1.5 BOARDS
1.5.1 MAIN BOARD
Preparation
Rear cover ( p.2 "Covers, Tray Unit, Door")
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The main board [A] is on the left.
1. Remove the main board ( x14, x4).
SM 59 D455
Boards
1.5.2 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Preparation
Rear cover ( p.2 "Covers, Tray Unit, Door")
The voltage regulator [A] is the board on the right, covered by the wire mesh
D455 60 SM
Boards
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1. Disconnect the board:
[A] Top (
x2)
[B] Bottom (
x1)
2. Detach the board bracket:
[A] Top ( x3)
[B] Bottom ( x2)
SM 61 D455
Boards
3. Lay the screen on a flat surface.
4. Remove the screen:
[A] Left side ( x2).
[B] Right side ( x2).
5. Remove the board ( x1).
D455 62 SM
Overview
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1 Feed Unit
Sends the stack from the upstream unit to the transport unit.
2 Trim Positioning Unit
Determines the cutting position for the paper.
3. Trimming Unit
Trims the edge of the stack.
4 Paper Scrap Hopper
Holds the paper trimmed by the cutter blade from the edge of the stack.
5 Transport Unit
Takes the paper from the feed unit and sends it to the cut position unit.
6 Tray Unit
Collects and holds the stacks after trimming.
The trimmer unit receives folded and stapled booklets from the Booklet Finisher SR5020
D434-17 and trims their fore edges.
The trimmer unit can be connected only to the Booklet Finisher D434-17.
The trimmer unit handles stapled booklets only.
Due to its length and configuration, the trimmer unit must be installed as the last
peripheral downstream of the main machine and Booklet Finisher D434-17.
SM 63 D455
Motors and Sensors
2.2 MOTORS AND SENSORS
No. Part Function
1. Cut Position Motor Positions the stack for trimming.
Stopper assembly HP Detects when the trim unit is in or out of its home
2.
Sensor position.
Press Stopper HP Detects when the stopper and pressure plate are in and
3.
Sensor out of their home positions.
The motor that raises and lowers the stopper plate to the
4. Press Stopper Motor prescribed position where the plate applies pressure to
the folded leading edge of the stack.
5. Main Board The PCB that controls the operation of the unit.
Raises and lowers the press roller at the entrance of the
6. Press Roller Motor
cut position unit to set the trimming position.
D455 64 SM
Motors and Sensors
No. Part Function
Drives the rollers at the entrance of the unit that feed
7. Feed Motor
paper sent from the upstream unit.
Press Roller HP Detects when the press roller is in and out of its home
8.
Sensor positions.
Detects the paper and confirms that it has entered the
9. Entrance Sensor
paper path of the unit.
Detects the leading edge of the stack before the stack
10. Stopper Sensor
touches the stopper.
Scrap Hopper Full
11. Detects when the paper scrap hopper is full.
Sensor
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
Detects when the front door is opened or closed, and
D455
12. Door Switch switches off the DC24V power supply to the unit when
the door is opened and restores it when it is closed.
Scrap Hopper HP Detects when the scrap hopper is in or out of its home
13.
Sensor position.
14. Trimming Blade Motor Drives the operation of the cutter unit.
Trimming Blade HP Detects when the cutter unit blade is in and out of its
15.
Sensor home positions.
The 2nd switch that detects when the output tray is full
16. Booklet Sensor 2
(2).
The 3rd switch that detects when the output tray is full
17. Booklet Sensor 3
(3).
18. Tray Motor Drives the tray transport belt.
19. Power Inlet Connection point for AC power cord.
Trips and immediately cuts the power supply to the unit if
20. Breaker Switch
a short circuit occurs in the unit.
21. Voltage Regulator The power of stable voltage supplied to the main control
SM 65 D455
Motors and Sensors
No. Part Function
board after AC to DC conversion.
The sensor that confirms the exit of each trimmed stack
22. Exit Sensor
from the unit.
The motor that drives the rollers that send the trimmed
23. Exit Motor
stacks out of the unit onto the output tray.
The 1st switch that detects when the output tray is full
24. Booklet Sensor 1
(1).
D455 66 SM
Operation
2.3 OPERATION
2.3.1 LAYOUT
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
1 Press Stopper Motor 16 Trimming Unit
2 Press Stopper HP Sensor 17 Trimming Blade HP Sensor
3 Stopper assembly HP Sensor 18 Trimming Blade Motor
4 Press Roller Motor 19 Exit Motor
5 Press Roller HP Sensor 20 Booklet Sensor 2
6 Upper Feed Guide 21 Tray Unit
7 Feed Unit 22 Tray Motor
8 Entrance Sensor 23 Booklet Sensor 3
9 Lower Feed Guide 24 Cut Positioning Unit
10 Entrance Guide 25 Exit Sensor
11 Feed Motor 26 Stopper Sensor
12 Scrap Hopper Full Sensor 27 Booklet Sensor 1 Arm
SM 67 D455
Operation
13 Door Switch 28 Booklet Sensor 1
14 Scrap Hopper 29 Cut Position Motor
15 Scrap Hopper HP Sensor
2.3.2 OPERATION FLOW
General
The trimmer is installed on the left side of the Booklet Finisher (D434).
[1] Trimmer unit
[2] Front door
[3] Output tray
Front door open shows:
[1] Door switch
[2] Trimming scrap hopper
[3] Feed unit plate handle
[4] Transport unit plate handle
D455 68 SM
Operation
For jam removal:
The feed unit plate handle [1] lowers to the feed plate.
The transport plate handle [2] lowers the transport plate.
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The operator removes the hopper [1] to empty it when it becomes full of paper scraps
trimmed from the booklets.
There are two hopper sensors:
Hopper full sensor [1] (a photo-sensor) detects when the hopper is full.
Hopper set sensor [2] detects when the hopper is set.
SM 69 D455
Operation
A breaker switch [1] is on the rear cover next to the power connection point.
Booklet Feed
Booklets are fed one at a time. When a booklet enters the trimmer:
The entrance sensor [1] actuator is pushed down by the leading edge of the booklet..
The entrance motor [2] turns on and rotates the feed rollers [3].
The rubber bands of the 2nd feed roller [1] feed the leading edge of the booklet on the left.
The feed roller assembly is mounted on a shaft [2] so the rollers can swing freely up and
D455 70 SM
Operation
down to accommodate the thickness of the booklet.
The rollers of the 1st feed roller [3] will not contact the surface of the booklet unless it is very
thick.
Positioning the Booklet for Trimming
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The stopper assembly [1] (shown at the home position) is mounted on two rails and driven
by two belts. The cut positioning motor drives the belts.
When the entrance sensor goes ON:
The cut positioning motor [1] switches on and moves the stopper assembly [2] to the
left.
The press roller motor [3] goes ON and lowers two rollers [4] onto the transport belt
The exit motor (not shown) below the transport belt goes ON and drives the transport
belts { and .
SM 71 D455
Operation
The stopper sensor [1] goes ON when the leading edge of the booklet trips the actuator of
the stopper sensor on the bottom of the stopper assembly.
Next, the press stopper motor [1] goes ON and lowers the stopper [2] then the stopper plate
[3] onto the leading edge of the booklet.
The stopper plate [1] goes down first. This stops the booklet aligns the booklet when the
leading edge of the booklet hits it. The exit motor switches off and stops the transport
belts.
The stopper plate [3] goes down next. This clamps the leading edge for moving to the
cut position and trimming.
The press roller motor switches on and raises the press rollers on the right (see
previous illustration).
D455 72 SM
Operation
Next, the cut positioning motor [1] goes ON and moves the stopper assembly [2] to the
trimming position on the right (the position is prescribed by the size of the paper selected for
the job) and stops.
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The press roller motor [1] goes ON and lowers the press rollers [2] onto the booklet. The
press rollers compress the trailing edge of the booklet for trimming.
Trimming
When the cut positioning motor goes OFF, the trimming motor goes ON and drives the
trimming blade down.
SM 73 D455
Operation
The trimming blade [1] (a guillotine blade) descends, trims the edge, and the scraps fall into
the hopper below.
The trimming blade motor [1] reverses. The trimming blade HP sensor [2] detects the blade
actuator at its home position and switches off the trimming blade motor.
After the trimming blade returns to its home position, the press stopper motor [1] goes ON,
raises the stopper and plate to their home positions.
The press/stopper HP sensor [2] detects the home position and switches off the motor. This
clears the feed path so the booklet can exit the trimmer.
D455 74 SM
Operation
The press rollers { and remain down for feed out. They will function as feed rollers
opposing the booklet and transport belt below.
Booklet Feed-out
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The exit motor [1] switches on, drives the transport belts, and starts to feed the booklet out of
the trimmer.
The leading edge of the booklet [1] depresses the exit sensor actuator [2].
SM 75 D455
Operation
The press roller motor [1] switches on and raises the press rollers to their home positions.
The press roller HP sensor [2] detects the home position and switches off the motor.
The cut position motor [1] switches on and returns the stopper assembly [2] to its home
position. The stopper assembly HP sensor (not shown) detects the home position and
switches off the motor.
The booklet exits the trimmer.
D455 76 SM
Operation
Output Tray
[1] is booklet sensor 2. When the booklet [2] exits it depresses booklet sensor 2.
Trimmer Unit
TR5020
D455
The tray motor inside the tray switches on and moves each booklet slightly to the left as
each booklet exits the trimmer.
When the leading edge of the first booklet reaches left end of the tray this activates booklet
sensor 3 [1].
SM 77 D455
Operation
The trimmer will continue to feed booklets until there are enough booklets at the trimmer exit
to raise the actuators [1] and activate booklet sensor 1.
When all three booklet sensors are activated, this signals that the tray is full and stops the
trimmer. The booklets on the tray must be removed for the operation to continue.
Limitless Output
The trimmer can be set up for limitless output.
1. First, remove the end stopper from the output tray.
D455 78 SM
Operation
2. Next, disable booklet sensor 3. This requires a service call by a trained service
Trimmer Unit
technician to disconnect the sensor.
TR5020
D455
With booklet sensor 3 disabled, the trimmer will not detect tray full.
The trimmer will operate continuously without interruption. The booklets will fall off
the end of the tray into a container placed at the end of the tray.
SM 79 D455
D532
LCIT RT5050
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (D532)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1
1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES ............................................................................ 1
1.1.1 COVERS .............................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 INNER COVERS .................................................................................. 2
1.1.3 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ................................................ 3
1.1.4 TRAYS .................................................................................................. 4
1.1.5 SIDE FENCE ........................................................................................ 5
Front Side Fence...................................................................................... 5
Rear Side Fence ...................................................................................... 6
1.1.6 SIDE FENCE BLOWER ........................................................................ 7
Front Side Fence Blower .......................................................................... 7
Rear Side Fence Blower .......................................................................... 7
1.1.7 LCT PAPER LENGTH SENSOR .......................................................... 9
1.2 PAPER FEED .............................................................................................. 11
1.2.1 PAPER FEED UNIT............................................................................ 11
1.2.2 PAPER FEED, PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLERS .................. 12
1.2.3 PAPER FEED, PAPER END AND PAPER LIFT SENSORS .............. 14
Paper Lift Sensor ................................................................................... 14
Paper Feed and Paper End Sensors ..................................................... 14
1.3 MOTORS ..................................................................................................... 15
1.3.1 LCT EXIT MOTOR.............................................................................. 15
1.3.2 LCT EXIT ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR ............................................ 16
1.3.3 LCT VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR ............................................. 16
1.3.4 LCT HORIZONTAL RELAY MOTOR .................................................. 17
1.3.5 LCT PAPER FEED MOTOR, LCT GRIP MOTOR .............................. 18
1.3.6 LCT LIFT MOTOR .............................................................................. 19
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS .................................................................... 20
1.4.1 LCT EXIT SENSOR ............................................................................ 20
1.4.2 LCT PAPER EXIT ROLLER CONTACT SENSOR ............................. 21
1.4.3 LCT VERTICAL TRANSPORT AND GRIP SENSORS ....................... 22
1.4.4 PAPER HEIGHT, PAPER WIDTH SENSORS .................................... 24
Paper Height Sensors ............................................................................ 24
SM i D532
Paper Width Sensors ............................................................................. 24
1.4.5 MAIN BOARD ..................................................................................... 25
D532 ii SM
Read This First
Safety, Conventions, Trademarks
Conventions
Symbol What it means
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
Harness clamp
FFC Flexible Film Cable
The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe the direction of paper feed. The arrows indicate the
direction of paper feed.
Warnings, Cautions, Notes
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could
result in death or serious injury.
A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could
result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss
of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this
manual handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
Switches and Symbols
Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the
meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer
Customer Engineer
Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have completed service
training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine.
Reference Material for Maintenance
Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer engineers
shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the “CE Safety Guide”.
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine.
Before Installation, Maintenance
Shipping and Moving the Machine
Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine. If the machine is heavy, two or
more customer engineers may be required to prevent injuries (muscle strains, spinal
injuries, etc.) or damage to the machine if it is dropped or tipped over.
Personnel moving or working around the machine should always wear proper clothing
and footwear. Never wear loose fitting clothing or accessories (neckties, loose
sweaters, bracelets, etc. ) or casual footwear (slippers, sandals, etc.) when lifting or
moving the machine.
Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the product.
Before you move the product, arrange the power cord so it will not fall under the
product.
Power
Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After
switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other
devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds,
then unplug the machine from the power source.
Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work carefully
to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do checks or
adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears, timing belts,
etc.).
After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from
electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit,
gears, timing belts, etc.
Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments
After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the
machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping
materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for
installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This
also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal
operation.
Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use your
fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
Special Tool
Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.
For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described in the
service manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could damage parts, could
damage the machine or cause injuries.
During Maintenance
General
Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2) Disconnect
the power plug from the power source, 3) Allow the machine to cool for at least 10
minutes.
Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces.
Safety Devices
Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace safety
devices immediately.
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification or
removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal injury.
Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating normally and
safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with the
machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine could
lead to a fire and personal injuries.
Organic Cleaners
During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.) other
than those described in the service manual.
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic
solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous.
Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part
that generates heat.
Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials to
prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg injuries.
Use dry rags to soak up spills.
Power Plug and Power Cord
Before serving the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always
make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source. A
partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge caused by
high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it if
necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power cord
if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short circuit
which could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock.
Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make
sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg.
Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a fire.
Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power
cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the
ground wire on the plug.
Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension cord.
When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the plug,
not the cable.
After Installation, Servicing
Disposal of Used Items
Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges.
Toner or toner cartridges thrown into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious
injury. At the work site always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with
plastic bags to avoid spillage before disposal or removal.
Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.) in
accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste from
consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items at one of
our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
Return used selenium drums to the service center for handling in accordance with
company policy regarding the recycling or disposal of such items.
Safety Instructions for this Machine
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that
the machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged.
2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while
the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven
components.
5. If the [Start] key is pressed before the machine completes the warm-up period (the [Start]
key starts blinking red and green ), keep hands away from the mechanical and the
electrical components as the machine starts making copies as soon as the warm-up
period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine
is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
7. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and
aerosols.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
1. The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if
replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer
recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used
NVRAM must be handled in accordance with local regulations.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with
those marks.
Common Procedures
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 COMMON PROCEDURES
1.1.1 COVERS
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
1. Remove:
[A] Rear upper cover ( x 6)
[B] Rear lower cover ( x 6)
[C] Left rear upper cover ( x 5)
[D] Left rear lower cover ( x 5)
[E] Right upper cover ( x 5)
[F] Right lower cover ( x 5)
SM 1 D532
Common Procedures
1.1.2 INNER COVERS
1. Remove the right upper and lower covers ( p.1).
2. Remove:
[A] Inner top cover ( x 2)
[B] Inner middle cover ( x 5)
[C] Inner bottom cover ( x 4)
D532 2 SM
Common Procedures
1.1.3 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
The side-to-side registration for this LCIT can be adjusted with Super User SP1711-008 for the
upper tray and -009 for the lower tray.
However, if punched hole positions are not aligned on paper fed from this LCIT, you can first
adjust the side registration by changing the tray cover position as described below, and then
adjust the side registration of the image with Super User SP1711-008 and -009 (Side-to-Side
Reg: WIDE LCT).
1. Pull out the tray.
2. Change the screw positions at both the right [A] and left [B] sides as shown.
Adjustment range: 0±2.0 mm, Step: 0.5 mm
SM 3 D532
Common Procedures
1.1.4 TRAYS
The tray weighs 25 kg (55.1 lb.) empty.
To prevent damage to the tray and personal injury, never attempt to lift the tray alone,
especially if it is loaded with paper.
Two people are required to carry or move the tray.
1. Pull tray 1 or 2 out of the LCT until it stops.
2. Remove the tray cover [A] ( x 4).
3. Remove the screws [B] from the right rail ( x 3).
4. Remove the screws [C] from the left rail ( x 3).
You do not need to remove the screw for the stopper pin bracket at the back of the
left rail.
5. Tray 1 or 2 [D]
D532 4 SM
Common Procedures
1.1.5 SIDE FENCE
Front Side Fence
1. Pull the tray unit out.
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
2. Loosen the two fixed screws [A].
3. Remove the two fixed screws [B].
4. Move the front side fence [C] and the rear side fence [D] to loosen them.
5. Remove two screws (M4 x 8).
6. Carefully pull the front side fence [A] down and forward, and disconnect the harness.
7. Pull up the front side fence [A], and then remove it with the plate guide [B].
SM 5 D532
Common Procedures
Rear Side Fence
1. Pull the tray unit out.
2. Loosen the two fixed screws [A].
3. Remove the two fixed screws [B].
4. Move the front side fence [C] and the rear side fence [D] to loosen them.
5. Carefully pull the rear side fence [A] down and forward, and then disconnect the harness
( x 2).
6. Pull up the front side fence [A], and then remove it with the tray plate guide [B].
D532 6 SM
Common Procedures
1.1.6 SIDE FENCE BLOWER
Front Side Fence Blower
1. Remove the front side fence ( p.5)
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
2. Remove the front side fence blower [A] ( x 2: M4 x 8, x 2).
Rear Side Fence Blower
1. Remove the rear side fence ( p.5).
2. Remove the guard bracket [A] ( x 3).
SM 7 D532
Common Procedures
3. Remove the rear side fence blower ( x 2, x 2).
D532 8 SM
Common Procedures
1.1.7 LCT PAPER LENGTH SENSOR
1. Remove the front and rear side fences ( p.5).
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
2. Remove the end fence grip [A] (Bind screw x 2: M4 x 8).
3. Remove the end fence plate [A] as shown above ( x 2).
4. Remove the tray bottom plate [A].
SM 9 D532
Common Procedures
5. Remove the bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1).
6. Remove the LCT paper length sensor [A] from the bracket.
D532 10 SM
Paper Feed
1.2 PAPER FEED
1.2.1 PAPER FEED UNIT
1. Open the front cover of the LCT-MF.
2. Pull tray 1 or 2 out of the LCT until it stops.
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
3. Pull the paper feed unit [A].
4. Stopper [B] ( x 1)
5. Paper feed unit [A]
When reinstalling the paper feed unit in the LCT-MF, set the paper feed unit so that the
stud screw [C] on the LCT-MF is inserted in the rail [D] of the paper feed unit.
SM 11 D532
Paper Feed
1.2.2 PAPER FEED, PICK-UP AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
1. Pull tray 1 or 2 out of the LCT until it stops.
2. Paper tray side bracket [A] ( x 2)
3. Pull the paper feed unit [B] ( x 2).
4. Slide the sensor bracket [C] to the front side ( x 1).
D532 12 SM
Paper Feed
5. Remove:
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
[D] Paper feed roller ( x 1).
[E] Paper pick-up roller ( x 1).
[F] Paper separation roller ( x 1).
Note:
Never touch the surface of the rollers with bare hands.
The LCT pick-up and separation rollers are the same as the pick-up and separation rollers
in the paper trays of the main machine. These rollers are interchangeable.
The feed rollers of the LCT and main machine paper trays are different because they are
designed to rotate in the opposite direction. The feed rollers of the LCT and main machine
are not interchangeable.
SM 13 D532
Paper Feed
1.2.3 PAPER FEED, PAPER END AND PAPER LIFT SENSORS
The replacement procedure below for the upper tray and lower tray is identical.
Paper Lift Sensor
1. Paper feed unit ( p.11)
2. Paper lift sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
3. Paper lift sensor [B] (hooks)
Paper Feed and Paper End Sensors
1. Paper feed unit ( p.11)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2)
3. Paper feed sensor [B] (hooks)
4. Paper end sensor [B] (hooks)
D532 14 SM
Motors
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 LCT EXIT MOTOR
1. Remove the left rear upper and lower covers. ( p.1)
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
2. Remove:
[A] Motor unit ( x 1, Timing belt x1, x 2)
[B] LCT exit motor ( x 2)
SM 15 D532
Motors
1.3.2 LCT EXIT ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR
1. Remove the left rear upper cover. ( p.1)
2. Remove:
[A] Motor unit ( x 1, x 2)
[B] LCT exit roller contact motor ( x 2)
1.3.3 LCT VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR
1. Remove the left rear upper and lower covers. ( p.1)
2. Remove:
[A] Motor unit ( x 1, x 2, Timing belt x 1)
[B] LCT vertical transport motor ( x 4)
D532 16 SM
Motors
1.3.4 LCT HORIZONTAL RELAY MOTOR
1. Remove the rear upper cover. ( p.1)
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
2. Remove:
[A] Motor unit [A] ( x 1, x 4).
3. Remove:
[A] LCT horizontal relay motor [A] ( x 2)
SM 17 D532
Motors
1.3.5 LCT PAPER FEED MOTOR, LCT GRIP MOTOR
1. Remove the rear cover. ( p.1)
2. Use a small screwdriver to turn the shaft [A] so that the pin can slip out of the keyhole.
3. Remove the motor unit [B] ( x 4, x 2, x 2)
4. Remove:
[A] Spring x1. First, loosen the screw.
[B] Spring x1. First, loosen the screw.
[C] LCT paper feed motor ( x 2, Timing belt x1)
[D] LCT grip motor ( x 2, Timing belt x1)
Reinstallation
First, attach the tension springs.
Second, tighten the screws to tighten the belts.
D532 18 SM
Motors
1.3.6 LCT LIFT MOTOR
1. Remove the rear cover. ( p.1)
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
2. Remove:
[A] Motor unit ( x 5, x1)
3. Remove:
[A] LCT lift motor ( x 2, Clip x 1, Gear x 1)
SM 19 D532
Electrical Components
1.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1.4.1 LCT EXIT SENSOR
1. LCT exit sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
D532 20 SM
Electrical Components
1.4.2 LCT PAPER EXIT ROLLER CONTACT SENSOR
RT5050
1. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
(D532)
LCIT
2. LCT paper exit roller contact sensor [A]: (hooks)
SM 21 D532
Electrical Components
1.4.3 LCT VERTICAL TRANSPORT AND GRIP SENSORS
Remove the multi bypass tray first, if it is installed.
1. Remove:
[A] Stay ( x 4).
2. Disconnect the harnesses ( x All).
D532 22 SM
Electrical Components
3. Remove:
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
[A] Vertical exit unit ( x 4)
Firmly grip the vertical exit unit as shown above, and then remove it from the LCT
unit.
Do not grip the guide [B], because it is easy to deform.
4. Remove:
[A] Sensor bracket ( x 2, x 1)
[B] LCT sensors (hooks)
LCT Vertical transport sensor 3
LCT grip sensor 1
LCT vertical transport sensor 1
LCT vertical transport sensor 2
LCT grip sensor 2
SM 23 D532
Electrical Components
1.4.4 PAPER HEIGHT, PAPER WIDTH SENSORS
Paper Height Sensors
1. Tray 1 or tray 2 ( p.4)
2. Remove the rear left upper and lower covers.
3. Remove:
[A] Paper height sensors (x4) ( x1, pawls x 3 each)
Paper Width Sensors
1. Tray 1 or tray 2 ( p.4)
2. Remove the rear left cover.
[A] Paper width sensor unit ( x 2, x 3)
[B] Paper width sensors (x3) ( x 1 each, Pawls x 3 each)
D532 24 SM
Electrical Components
1.4.5 MAIN BOARD
1. Rear lower cover ( p.1)
RT5050
(D532)
LCIT
2. Remove:
[A] Main board ( x 7, Standoff x1, x All)
SM 25 D532
BUFFER PASS UNIT (M379)
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
SM i M379
BUFFER PASS UNIT (M379)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT .................................... 1
1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS............................................................................ 1
1.1.1 REAR COVER ............................................................................. 1
1.1.2 TOP COVER ................................................................................ 1
1.1.3 RIGHT COVER ............................................................................ 2
1.1.4 LEFT COVER .............................................................................. 2
1.1.5 OPERATION PANEL ................................................................... 3
1.2 DRIVE COMPONENTS ........................................................................ 4
1.2.1 DRIVE MOTOR ............................................................................ 4
1.2.2 DRIVE MOTOR BASE ................................................................. 5
Removing the Drive Motor Base...................................................... 5
Reinstall the Drive Motor Base ........................................................ 5
1.3 COOLING AND EXHAUST FANS......................................................... 6
1.3.1 COOLING FANS .......................................................................... 6
Upper Cooling Fans ........................................................................ 6
Lower Cooling Fans ........................................................................ 7
1.3.2 EXHAUST FANS ....................................................................... 10
Upper Exhaust Fans ...................................................................... 10
Lower Exhaust Fans ...................................................................... 10
1.4 SENSORS AND SWITCHES .............................................................. 11
1.4.1 TRANSPORT SENSORS .......................................................... 11
1.4.2 SWITCHES ................................................................................ 14
Paper Path Unit Set Switch ........................................................... 14
Front Door Switch .......................................................................... 14
1.5 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS .......................................................... 16
1.5.1 CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................. 16
Controller Board Bracket ............................................................... 16
Controller Board ............................................................................ 16
SM i M379
1.5.2 PSU ........................................................................................... 17
Removing the PSU ........................................................................ 17
Reinstalling the PSU ..................................................................... 17
PSU Fuse Rating........................................................................... 18
1.5.3 SRB ........................................................................................... 19
1.5.4 INTERFACE CABLE .................................................................. 19
2. DETAILS ................................................................................ 20
2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 20
2.1.1 COMPONENTS LAYOUT .......................................................... 20
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................... 21
2.2 PAPER PATH ..................................................................................... 22
2.3 PAPER COOLING .............................................................................. 23
M379 ii SM
Read This First
Safety, Conventions, Trademarks
Conventions
Symbol What it means
Core Tech Manual
Screw
Connector
E-ring
C-ring
Harness clamp
FFC Flexible Film Cable
The notations "SEF" and "LEF" describe the direction of paper feed. The arrows indicate
the direction of paper feed.
Warnings, Cautions, Notes
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning
could result in death or serious injury.
A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution
could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other
property.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals,
loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine
This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
General Safety Instructions
For your safety, please read this manual carefully before you use this product. Keep this
manual handy for future reference.
Safety Information
Always obey the following safety precautions when using this product.
Safety During Operation
In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
Switches and Symbols
Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas, the
meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417.
Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer
Customer Engineer
Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have completed
service training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine.
Reference Material for Maintenance
Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals,
technical bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer
engineers).
In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer engineers
shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the “CE Safety Guide”.
Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the
machine.
Before Installation, Maintenance
Shipping and Moving the Machine
Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine. If the machine is heavy, two or
more customer engineers may be required to prevent injuries (muscle strains,
spinal injuries, etc.) or damage to the machine if it is dropped or tipped over.
Personnel moving or working around the machine should always wear proper
clothing and footwear. Never wear loose fitting clothing or accessories (neckties,
loose sweaters, bracelets, etc. ) or casual footwear (slippers, sandals, etc.) when
lifting or moving the machine.
Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the product.
Before you move the product, arrange the power cord so it will not fall under the
product.
Power
Always disconnect the power cord from the inlet of the buffer pass unit and unplug
the mainframe before doing any maintenance procedure.
After switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and
other devices. To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few
seconds, then unplug the machine from the power source.
Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work
carefully to avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do
checks or adjustments, never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears,
timing belts, etc.).
After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from
electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit,
gears, timing belts, etc.
Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments
After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the
machine to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping
materials, protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for
installation, have been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This
also ensures that all release interlock switches have been restored to normal
operation.
Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use
your fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
Special Tool
Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.
For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described in the
service manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could damage parts,
could damage the machine or cause injuries.
During Maintenance
General
Before you begin a maintenance procedure: 1) Switch the machine off, 2)
Disconnect the power plug from the power source, 3) Allow the machine to cool for
at least 10 minutes.
Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot
surfaces.
Safety Devices
Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace
safety devices immediately.
Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device.
Modification or removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire
and personal injury. Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is
operating normally and safely after removal and replacement of any safety device.
For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with
the machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine
could lead to a fire and personal injuries.
Organic Cleaners
During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.)
other than those described in the service manual.
Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use
organic solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming
nauseous.
Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any
part that generates heat.
Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials
to prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg
injuries. Use “My Ace” Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak up spills. For
more details, please refer to Technical Bulletin “Silicone Oil Removal” (A024-50).
Power Plug and Power Cord
Before serving the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always
make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source.
A partially inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge
caused by high resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it
if necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power
cord if necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short
circuit which could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock.
Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make
sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg.
Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a
fire.
Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power
cord can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the
ground wire on the plug.
Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension
cord.
When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the
plug, not the cable.
After Installation, Servicing
Disposal of Used Items
Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges.
Toner or toner cartridges thrown into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious
injury. At the work site always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with
plastic bags to avoid spillage before disposal or removal.
Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums,
etc.) in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of
such items.
To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste
from consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items
at one of our dealers or at an authorized collection site.
Return used selenium drums to the service center for handling in accordance with
company policy regarding the recycling or disposal of such items.
Safety Instructions for this Machine
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure
that the machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged.
2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open
while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically
driven components.
5. If the [Start] key is pressed before the machine completes the warm-up period (the
[Start] key starts blinking red and green ), keep hands away from the mechanical and
the electrical components as the machine starts making copies as soon as the
warm-up period is completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the
machine is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare
hands.
7. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases,
and aerosols.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
1. The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer
service representative who has completed the training course on those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if
replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer
recommends replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used
NVRAM must be handled in accordance with local regulations.
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with
those marks.
Exterior Covers
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS
Disconnect the power cord from the inlet of the buffer pass unit and unplug the
mainframe before starting the following procedure.
Do not pull out the buffer pass unit drawer until this unit has been docked to the
mainframe. Otherwise, the buffer pass unit can fall down.
1.1.1 REAR COVER
Buffer Pass
(M379)
Unit
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 5)
1.1.2 TOP COVER
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove two screws on the front upper side ( x 2)
SM 1 M379
Exterior Covers
3. Rear cover ( p.1)
4. Push the top cover [A] to the front side, and then remove it.
1.1.3 RIGHT COVER
1. Right cover [A] ( x 6)
1.1.4 LEFT COVER
M379 2 SM
Exterior Covers
1. Left cover [A] ( x 6)
1.1.5 OPERATION PANEL
1. Top Cover ( p.1)
2. Operation Panel ( x 2, x 1)
Buffer Pass
(M379)
Unit
SM 3 M379
Drive Components
1.2 DRIVE COMPONENTS
Disconnect the power cord from the inlet of the buffer pass unit and unplug the
mainframe before starting the following procedure.
Do not pull out the buffer pass unit drawer until this unit has been docked to the
mainframe. Otherwise, the buffer pass unit can fall down.
1.2.1 DRIVE MOTOR
1. Rear cover ( p.1)
2. Controller board bracket ( p.16)
3. Drive Motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
There are two drive motors (right and left) in the buffer pass unit. The both removal
procedures are identical.
M379 4 SM
Drive Components
1.2.2 DRIVE MOTOR BASE
Removing the Drive Motor Base
1. Rear cover ( p.1)
2. Controller board bracket ( p.16 "Controller Board Bracket")
Buffer Pass
(M379)
3. Drive Motor Bases [A] ( x 3, x 1 each)
Unit
Reinstall the Drive Motor Base
1. Open the front door.
2. Turn the C2 lever completely counterclockwise.
3. Pull out the paper path unit slightly ( p.7 "Lower Cooling Fans").
4. Install the drive motor base ( x 3).
5. Push the paper path unit completely and close the front door.
6. Attach the rear cover.
SM 5 M379
Cooling and Exhaust Fans
1.3 COOLING AND EXHAUST FANS
Disconnect the power cord from the inlet of the buffer pass unit and unplug the
mainframe before starting the following procedure.
Do not pull out the buffer pass unit drawer until this unit has been docked to the
mainframe. Otherwise, the buffer pass unit can fall down.
1.3.1 COOLING FANS
Upper Cooling Fans
1. Open the front door.
2. Remove two screws and the bracket [A].
3. Disconnect the harness [A] ( x 1).
M379 6 SM
Cooling and Exhaust Fans
4. Pull out the upper cooling fan unit [A].
Buffer Pass
(M379)
Unit
5. Upper cooling fan bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 2)
6. Upper cooling fans [B] ( x 2 each)
Reinstalling the upper cooling fans
Make sure that the decals on the fans face downward when reinstalling the upper cooling
fans.
Lower Cooling Fans
1. Open the front door.
SM 7 M379
Cooling and Exhaust Fans
2. Turn the C2 handle [A] counter-clockwise.
3. Pull out the paper path unit [A]
Take care to pull out the paper path unit so that the buffer pass unit does not fall
down to the front. It is because the weight of the paper path unit is heavier than
that of the buffer pass unit.
4. Left cover ( p.2)
5. Lower cooling fan cover [A] ( x 2)
M379 8 SM
Cooling and Exhaust Fans
6. Lower cooling fans [A] ( x 2 each, x 2, x 2)
Reinstalling the lower cooling fans
Make sure that the decals on the fans face upward when reinstalling the lower cooling fans.
Buffer Pass
(M379)
Unit
SM 9 M379
Cooling and Exhaust Fans
1.3.2 EXHAUST FANS
Upper Exhaust Fans
1. Rear cover ( p.1)
2. Upper exhaust fans [A] ( x 2 each, x 1)
Reinstalling the upper exhaust fans
Make sure that the decals on the fans are upside down and face the rear side when
reinstalling the upper exhaust fans.
Lower Exhaust Fans
1. Rear cover ( p.1)
2. Lower exhaust fans [A] ( x 2 each, x 1)
Reinstalling the lower exhaust fans
Make sure that the decals on the fans face the rear side when reinstalling the lower exhaust
fans.
M379 10 SM
Sensors and Switches
1.4 SENSORS AND SWITCHES
Disconnect the power cord from the inlet of the buffer pass unit and unplug the
mainframe before starting the following procedure.
Do not pull out the buffer pass unit drawer until this unit has been docked to the
mainframe. Otherwise, the buffer pass unit can fall down.
1.4.1 TRANSPORT SENSORS
1. Open the front door.
Buffer Pass
(M379)
Unit
2. Turn the C2 handle [A] completely counterclockwise.
3. Pull out the paper path unit [A].
SM 11 M379
Sensors and Switches
4. C2 handle [A] ( [B] x 1)
5. Front inner cover [A] ( x 6)
6. Remove sensors bracket (each x1, x1, x1)
[1] Transport Sensor 1
[2] Transport Sensor 2
[3] Transport Sensor 3
M379 12 SM
Sensors and Switches
[4] Transport Sensor 4
[5] Transport Sensor 5
[6] Transport Sensor 6
[7] Transport Sensor 7
[8] Transport Sensor 8
Buffer Pass
(M379)
Unit
7. Transport sensor [A] (hook x 4, x 1)
SM 13 M379
Sensors and Switches
1.4.2 SWITCHES
Paper Path Unit Set Switch
1. Rear cover ( p.1)
2. Controller board bracket ( p.16)
3. Paper path unit set switch [A] ( x3)
Front Door Switch
1. Left cover ( p.2)
2. Open the front door.
3. Pull out the paper path unit.
4. Lower cooling fan cover ( p.7 "Lower Cooling Fans")
5. Front door switch assembly [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1)
M379 14 SM
Sensors and Switches
6. Front door switch bracket cover [A] ( x 2, x 1)
7. Front door switch bracket [B].
Buffer Pass
(M379)
Unit
SM 15 M379
Electronic Components
1.5 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
Disconnect the power cord from the inlet of the buffer pass unit and unplug the
mainframe before starting the following procedure.
Do not pull out the buffer pass unit drawer until this unit has been docked to the
mainframe. Otherwise, the buffer pass unit can fall down.
1.5.1 CONTROLLER BOARD
Controller Board Bracket
1. Rear cover ( p.1).
2. Controller board bracket ( x 4, all s, all s)
Controller Board
1. Rear cover ( p.1)
M379 16 SM
Electronic Components
2. Controller board ( x 11, x 2, hook [A] x 4)
1.5.2 PSU
Removing the PSU
Buffer Pass
(M379)
1. Rear cover ( p.1)
Unit
2. PSU bracket ( x 4, x 6, x 2)
Reinstalling the PSU
Make sure that the power connectors should be connected correctly.
SM 17 M379
Electronic Components
Upper [A]: White or blue connector.
Lower [B]: Black or brown connector.
PSU Fuse Rating
For replacements, use only the correct fuses rated for use with the machine. Using
replacement devices not designed for use with the machine could lead to a fire and
personal injuries.
Rating
Fuse
115 V 210 to 230V
FU1 15A/125Vac 8A/250125Vac
FU2 8A/125125Vac T4A L/250125Vac
M379 18 SM
Electronic Components
1.5.3 SRB
1. Rear cover ( p.1)
2. SRB ( x2, x2, hook x 2)
Buffer Pass
1.5.4 INTERFACE CABLE
(M379)
Unit
1. Rear cover ( p.1)
2. Interface cable [A]
SM 19 M379
Overview
2. DETAILS
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1 COMPONENTS LAYOUT
1. Upper cooling fans
2. Upper exhaust fan
3. Transport roller
4. Transport sensor 1
5. Drive motor: right
6. Transport sensor 2
7. Transport sensor 3
8. Transport sensor 4
9. Lower cooling fans
10. Front door switch
11. Transport sensor 5
12. Transport sensor 6
13. Lower exhaust fans
14. Transport sensor 7
15. Drive motor: left
16. Transport sensor 8
M379 20 SM
Overview
2.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
Buffer Pass
(M379)
Unit
1. Paper transport right knob
2. Timing belt: right side
3. Drive motor right
4. Drive motor left
5. Timing belt: left side
6. Paper transport left knob
SM 21 M379
Paper Path
2.2 PAPER PATH
When a sheet of paper is fed to the entrance [A] of the buffer pass unit from the mainframe,
the drive motor right [B] turns on 1.05 seconds after the mainframe has received a print job
or copy job, and then drives six transport rollers [C] at the right paper path area and feeds a
sheet of paper to the left paper path area.
The drive motor left [D] turns on 1.05 seconds after the drive motor [B] has turned on and
then drives six transport rollers [E] at the left paper path area and feeds a sheet of paper to
the exit.
There are eights transport sensors in the paper path. The machine stops the print/copy
operation if one of these sensors detects a paper jam.
M379 22 SM
Paper Cooling
2.3 PAPER COOLING
Buffer Pass
(M379)
Unit
There two sets of exhaust fans and two sets of cooling fans in the buffer pass unit. These
fans turn on at 0.1 seconds interval as follows below after the mainframe has turned on or
received a print job or copy job.
Upper exhaust fans [A] > lower exhaust fans [B] > upper cooling fans [C] > lower cooling
fans [D]
The lower cooling fans [D] draw air in the buffer pass unit from the outside, and then move
the air [E] to the upper area as well as the outer paper path. This makes the outer paper path
cooler. Finally air around the upper area is expelled out of the unit by the upper exhaust fans
[A].
Also the upper cooling fans [C] draw air into the buffer pass unit from the outside, and then
move air [F] to the center area along with the inner paper path. This makes the inner paper
path cooler. Finally air around the center area is expelled out of the unit by the lower exhaust
SM 23 M379
Paper Cooling
fans [B].
Two sides of the paper path guide remove heat from a sheet of paper while paper is being
transported. As a result, paper from the exiting the unit is properly cooled.
The fan operation time after the initialization or job end can be adjusted by SP1940-008
(adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes/ default: 10 minutes).
M379 24 SM
M390
FUSER UNIT AIR SEPARATOR
TYPE C901
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
M390
FUSER UNIT AIR SEPARATOR
TYPE C901
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1
1.1 COMPONENTS ............................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 AIR SEPARATOR COVER ................................................................... 1
1.1.2 CCB (COMPRESSOR CONTROL BOARD) ......................................... 2
1.1.3 COMPRESSOR FANS ......................................................................... 3
1.1.4 AIR COMPRESSOR UNIT ................................................................... 4
SM i M390
Components
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 COMPONENTS
1.1.1 AIR SEPARATOR COVER
Air Separator
Fusing Unit
1. Air separator cover [A] ( x 2)
(M390)
SM 1 M390
Components
1.1.2 CCB (COMPRESSOR CONTROL BOARD)
1. Air separator cover ( p.1)
2. CCB [A] ( x 2, x 2)
M390 2 SM
Components
1.1.3 COMPRESSOR FANS
1. Air separator cover ( p.1)
Air Separator
Fusing Unit
(M390)
2. Compressor fan unit [A] ( x 4, x 3, x 2)
3. Compressor fans [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1 each)
When reinstalling the compressor fans, install them with their decals facing upward.
SM 3 M390
Components
1.1.4 AIR COMPRESSOR UNIT
1. Remove the air separator unit.
For details, see the installation procedure for "Fuser Unit Air Separator Type C901
(M390)" in the Field Service Manual of the Model Pro-C901S/ Pro C901.
2. Compressor fan unit ( p.3 "Compressor Fans")
3. Remove the air tubes [A] from the compressor unit.
4. Two ground cables [A] ( x 1 each)
5. Compressor unit [B] ( x 4 each)
M390 4 SM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A 1 3 1 10 1 A
Plotter Cooling Fan 1:+24V_4B
2 2 2 9 2
CCB Plotter Cooling Fan 1:Alarm
JCN
1 12 1 12
Relay ON+5V Plotter Cooling Fan 1 M105 3 1 3 8 3
2 11 2 11 Plotter Cooling Fan 1-4:Drive
P1/9 (G10) 3 10 3 10
Triac ON 1 3 4 7 4
Plotter Cooling Fan 2:+24V_4B IOB1 CN270 ~ Fusing Exhaust Fan CN045 IOB1 CN242 ~ CT BOX CT FAN
GND 2 2 5 6 5 CN242-A6 CN1 -3
JCN
CN046
To CN278 4 9 4 9
Air Separator Unit Detection Plotter Cooling Fan 2 M106 3 1 6 5 6
Plotter Cooling Fan 2:Alarm CN270-7 CN045-9 Fusin EX FAN1:+24V CT FAN1 +24V
5 8 5 8 Plotter Cooling Fan 1-4:Drive 1 6 -A7 -2
CN277
on IOB1 El Valve +24V 1 3 7 4 7 RSV FAN 1:+24V_B -8 -8 Fusin EX FAN1:ALM CT FAN1 ALM
CN047
6 7 6 7 Plotter Cooling Fan 3:+24V_4B 2 5 P1/9 (A1)
CN682
El Valve ON 2 2 8 3 8 RSV FAN 1:ALM -9 -7 Fusin EX FAN1:ON -A8 -1 CT FAN1 DRV
JCN
1 6 7 6 1 2 Plotter Cooling Fan 3 M107 Plotter Cooling Fan 3:Alarm 3 4 To CN047 Relay
CN683
Reserve Fan 1 +24V El Valve ON Electrical Valve 3 1 9 2 9 RSV FAN123:Drive -10 -6 -A9 CN2 -3 CT FAN2 +24V
2 5 8 5
Reserve Fan 1 Alarm El Valve +24V 2 1 SOL1 10 1 10
Plotter Cooling Fan 1-4:Drive RSV FAN2:+24V_B 4 3
To RearUNIT CN682
Fusin EX FAN2:+24V
IOB1(1/3) -A10 -2
CN275
3 4 9 4 Plotter Cooling Fan 4:+24V_4B 5 2 -11 -5 Fusin EX FAN2:ALM CT FAN2 ALM
Reserve Fan 1 ON 11 RSV FAN:ALM
P1/9(A13) 4 3 10 3
Reserve Fan 1 +24V 12
Plotter Cooling Fan 4:Alarm RSV FAN123:Drive 6 1 -12 -4 Fusin EX FAN2:ON -A11 -1 CT FAN2 DRV
To CN275 5 2 11 2 Plotter Cooling Fan 1-4:Drive 7 -A12 CN3 -3 CT FAN3 +24V
Reserve Fan 2 Alarm RSV FAN3:+24V_B -13 -3 Fusin EX FAN3:+24V
on IOB1 6
7
1 12 1
Reserve Fan 2 ON
Ozone Fan-Y
1
2
3
2
1
2
12
11
1
2
Ozone Fan-Y +24VINT_OZB
(PCB4) RSV FAN3:ALM
RSV FAN123:Drive
8
9 -14 -2 Fusin EX FAN3:ALM -A13 -2 CT FAN3 ALM
JCN
1 M1 Ozone Fan-Y Alarm -A14 -1
B
8
9
Compressor 2 RSRV FAN2 ON N 1
2
1
2
3
2
3
1
1
3
3
4
10
9
3
4
Ozone Fan-Y Drive
Ozone Fan-M +24VINT_OZB
-15 -1 Fusin EX FAN3:ON
-A15 CN4 -3
CT FAN3 DRV
CT FAN4 +24V B
JCN
RSRV FAN2 ALM P FAN2 Compressor Fan 2 2 2 5 8 5
3 3 1 Ozone Fan-M -A16 -2 CT FAN4 ALM
JCN
CN034
+24V_4B M2 Ozone Fan-M Alarm
CN684
FG 1 4 1 3 3 1 6 7 6
Ozone Fan-M Drive -A17 -1 CT FAN4 DRV
CN241
CCB_L DRSRV FAN1 ON-N 1 3 7 6 7
2 5 2 2 Ozone Fan-C +24VINT_OZB
JCN
Compressor_L DRSRV FAN1 ALM P
Transformer
CN681
3 6 3 1 FAN1 Compressor Fan 1 Ozone Fan-C 2 2 8 5 8
JCN
4
CCB_N +24V_4B M3 3 1 9 4 9
Ozone Fan-C Alarm
Ozone Fan-C Drive A1 A17
Rear Controller BoxUNIT Relay CN036J ~ CN531P
Compressor_N 1 3 10 3 10 Y_DRUM_M_CLK_P Y_DRUM_M_CLK_P (DEV Mtr), CN471, CN481 (Polygon Drv)
Ozone Fan-K +24VINT_OZB A2 A16
Ozone Fan-Bk 2 2 11 2 11 M_DRUM_M_CLK_P M_DRUM_M_CLK_P
IOB2(1/5) CN036J-1 CN531P-1
JCN
M4 3 1 12 1 12
Ozone Fan-K Alarm C_DRUM_M_CLK_P A3
A4
A15
A14
C_DRUM_M_CLK_P
+24V
Ozone Fan-K Drive K_DRUM_M_CLK_P K_DRUM_M_CLK_P -2 -2 +24V
1 A5 A13
+24VINT_OZB:INT LOCK PW GND GND -5 -3 GND
Air Separator Unit (Option) 2 A6 A12
(PCB5)
CCB_N
CN279
CCB_L
N.C. Y_DRUM_REV_SNS1_P Y_DRUM_REV_SNS1_P -6 -4 GND
240V
230V
220V
208V
200V
3 A7 A11
+24V_4A Y_DRUM_REV_SNS2_P Y_DRUM_REV_SNS2_P
0V
3 A6 M_DRUM_REV_SNS1_P A8 A10
M_DRUM_REV_SNS1_P
-3 CN471J-1 +24V
CN1 CT Fan1 +24V_4B A9 A9 -7 -2 GND
2 A7 M_DRUM_REV_SNS2_P M_DRUM_REV_SNS2_P
JCN
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
8
CT Fan1 Alarm A10 A8
1 A8
CT Fan1-2 Drive GND GND -4 CN481J-1 +24V
C Fusing Exhaust
1
2
3
2
1
2
9
8
1
2
9
8
7
8
3
2
A9
A10
CT Fan2 +24V_4B C_DRUM_REV_SNS1_P
C_DRUM_REV_SNS2_P
A11
A12
A7
A6
C_DRUM_REV_SNS1_P
C_DRUM_REV_SNS2_P
-8 -2 GND C
JCN
M5
JCN
3 1 3 7 3 7 9 CT Fan1-2 Drive A13 A5
Fan 1 P8/9 (A3) 1 A11 K_DRUM_REV_SNS1_P K_DRUM_REV_SNS1_P
CT Fan2 Drive
1 3 4 6 4 6 10 P5/9 (D12) 3 A12 K_DRUM_REV_SNS2_P A14 A4
K_DRUM_REV_SNS2_P Right I/F of Mainframe
CN231
CN304
T1 To Controller Fan
CN045
2 2 5 5 5 5 11 CT Fan3 +24V_4B A15 A3
Fusing Exhaust To CN270 on IOB1 2 A13 GND GND
JCN
JCN
JCN
CE-550 M6 3 1 6 4 6 4 12 1 A14
CT Fan3 Alarm A16 A2
Fan 2 CT Fan3-4 Drive RCB_RST_N RCB_RST_N
1 3 7 3 7 3 13 3 A15 PFGATE_K A17 A1
CT Fan4 +24V_4B PFGATE_K A1 8
2 2 8 2 8 2 14 B1 B17
Fusing Exhaust 2 A16 TR_TIMING_SNS_N TR_TIMING_SNS_N
JCN
JCN
M7
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3 1 9 1 9 1 15 CT Fan4 Alarm B2 B16 A2 7
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4 CN5 Fan 3 1 A17 GND IOB1_CONECT A3 6
CT Fan3-4 Drive B3 B15
A18 GND GND A4 5
N.C B4 B14
CN35
1 3 1 18 B1 CIS:LED PWM CIS:LED PWM
JCN
PSU Fan1 +24V_4B B5 B13 A5 4
2 2 2 17 B2 CIS_CLK_N1 CIS_CLK_N1
PSU Fan 1 M8
JCN
PSU Fan1 Alarm B6 B12 A6 3
3 1 3 16 B3 CIS_SYNC_P1 CIS_SYNC_P1 P6/9 (G10) A7 2
PSU Fan1-3 Drive B7 B11
1 3 4 15 B4 CIS_DIN_P CIS_DIN_P A8 1
PSU Fan2 +24V_4B B8 B10 To CN253 on
To ADF
2 2 5 14 B5
Power Plug CN6 PSU Fan 2 GND GND
JCN
M9 3 1 6 13 B6
PSU Fan2 Alarm
GATE_RTR_M_CLK_P B9 B9
GATE_RTR_M_CLK_P IOB1 A9
1
2
B1 9
PSU Fan1-3 Drive B10 B8
D
CN242
AC 200V 1 3 7 12 B7 UNIT_SHIFT_M_CLK_P UNIT_SHIFT_M_CLK_P
D
CN033
PSU Fan3 +24V_4B B2 8
Rear Controller Box PSU Fan 3 2 2 8 11 B8 TR_TIMING_M_CLK B11 B7
TR_TIMING_M_CLK_P
JCN
M10 PSU Fan3 Alarm B12 B6 B3 7
3 1 9 10 B9 GND GND B4 6
PSU Fan1-3 Drive B13 B5
1 3 10 9 B10 +5VE +5VE B5 5
PSU Fan4 +24V_4B B14 B4
CN36
2 2 11 8 B11 GND GND
JCN
PSU Fan 4
JCN
M11 3 1 12 7 B12
PSU Fan4 Alarm
PSU Fan4-5 Drive Platen Cover Sn:OUT B15 B3
Platen Cover Sn:OUT
B6
B7
4
3
1 3 13 6 B13 Original Set Sn:OUT B16 B2
PSU Fan5 +24V_4B Original Set Sn:OUT B8 2
2 2 14 5 B14 Flip Pressure Mtr:CLK B17 B1
PSU Fan 5 Flip Pressure Mtr:CLK
JCN
M12 3 1 15 4 B15
PSU Fan5 Alarm
PSU Fan4-5 Drive
B9 1
1 3 16 3 B16 1 6
PSU-EA1 Trigger A1 A20
2 2 17 2 B17 P6/9 (H10)
JCN
To Scanner
PSU-EA2 Trigger IOB Path:Data0 IOB Path:Data0 2 5
P3/9(H4) 3 1 18 1 B18 IOB Path:Data1 A2 A19 3 4
PSU-G EN Saver Trigger IOB Path:Data1 To CN255 on
CN37
A3 A18
JCN
5 1 5 A1 IOB Path:Data4 IOB Path:Data4 4 3
PSU-EB:GND
4 2 4 A2
PSU-EB GND IOB Path:Data5 A4 A17
IOB Path:Data5 IOB1 5 2
1
2
3
PSU-EB:24VINT Trigger PSU-EB 24VINT Trigger GND A5 A16 6 1
3 3 3 A3 GND
CN042
CN733
PSU-EB:38VINT Trigger PSU-EB 38V Trigger IOB Path:Write A6 A15
IOB Path:Write
E
PSU-EB:5V
PSU-EB:PSU:24V
2
1
4
5
2
1
A4
A5
PSU-EB +5VL
PSU-EB +24V_4B
GND
IOB Path:Address21
A7
A8
A14
A13
GND
IOB Path:Address21
E
1 1 IOB Path:Address22 A9 A12
AC(H)-B +38V IOB Path:Address22
CN734
2 2 A10 A11
CN716
AC(N)-B MCU:+38V IOB Path:Address25 IOB Path:Address25
3 3 1 1 1 IOB Path:Address26 A11 A10
N.C +38V GND IOB1:+24V_ADF IOB Path:Address26
4 2 2 2 GND A12 A9
MCU:MGND GND
CN039P
IOB1:+38V_ADF
Left I/F of Mainframe
CN252
CN039J
3 3 3 IOB Path:Address29 A13 A8
1 IOB1:GND(+24V) IOB Path:Address29
+24V 4 4 4 IOB Path:Address30 A14 A7
TB1 IOB1:GND(+38V) IOB Path:Address30
CN303
2 1
PSU-EB 24V DEV M
3 IOB Path:Chip1 A15 A6
IOB Path:Chip1
4
3
N.C IOB Path:Chip2 A16 A5
L1 N1 L2 N2 4 2 IOB Path:Chip2
1 1 1 1 A17 A4
CN715
24V DEV M IOB1:+24V_EA1CH1INT GND GND
CN232
NF1 5 2 2 2 2 A18 A3
Noise Filter (PCB1) 24V GND
GND
N.C
6
7
8
5
6
3
4
5
3
4
5
5 3
4
5
IOB1:+24V_EA1CH1INT
IOB1:+24V_EA1CH2INT
IOB1:+24V_EA2CH4
IOB1 I/F:eIO1IOB1 I/F:eIO1
IOB1 I/F:eIO2 INT
IOB1 I/F:Access ENB
A19
A20
B1
A2
A1
B20
IOB1 I/F:eIO1 INT
IOB1 I/F:eIO2 INT
IOB1 I/F:Access ENB
P2/9 (D8)
To JNC CN
(GND) on PSU-G
3
4
5
9
8
7
To Downstream OP
GND IOB1:+24V_EA2CH4 IOB1 I/F:Read/Write IOB1 I/F:Read/Write 6 6
6 6 6 IOB1 I/F:eIO4 INT B2 B19
IOB1:+5VL IOB1 I/F:eIO4 INT
CN4
7 7 7 B3 B18 3 5
P2/9 (D8)
2
1
IOB1:+5V IOB1 I/F:eIO3 INT IOB1 I/F:eIO3 INT
8 8 8 B4 B17
F GND GND 4 4
CN031P
N.C
CN031J
1 To JNC CN (24V)
CN245
+24V_CH1 9 9 3 9 B5 B16 5 3
IOB1:GND IOB Path:Chip3 IOB Path:Chip4
F
3
1
N.C. 2 10 10 4 10 B6 B15
+24V_CH1
3 IOB1:GND IOB Path:Chip3
B7 B14
IOB Path:Chip3 on PSU-G 6 2
1 +24V_CH2 11 11 8 11 IOB1 I/F:RESET IOB1 I/F:RESET 1
AC(H)-B IOB1:GND
CB1 2 4 12 12 12 B8 B13
CN732
AC(N)-B +24V_CH2 IOB1:GND IOB Path:Address31 IOB Path:Address31
3 5 13 13 13 B9 B12
CN713
+24V_CH2 1 8
Braker 1
••••••••••••
N.C 6 IOB1:GND GND GND
N.C 14 14 14 IOB Path:Address28 B10 B11 2 7
7 IOB1:GND IOB Path:Address28
GND 15 15 15 B11 B10 3 6
1 GND 8 16 16 16
IOB1:GND IOB Path:Address27
B12 B9
IOB Path:Address27 P2/9 (C9) 4 5
N.C N.C IOB Path:Address24 IOB Path:Address24
CN704
2 9 B13 B8 To CN924 FI021
4
2
GND 5 4
CN5
N.C 10 IOB Path:Address23 IOB Path:Address23
3 GND 12 1 B14 B7 6 3
PSU-EA1:Low Power Trigger 11 Comp Relay:+5V GND GND
GND 1 1 6 11 2 B15 B6 7 2
12 2 2 7 P1/9 (A1) Comp Relay:Drive IOB Path:Lead
B16 B5
IOB Path:Lead
N.C 10 3 8 1
CN035P
GND
CN035J
3 3 9 To CN047 of Air GND GND
1 9 4 B17 B4
CN278
5VL IOB1 Comp:Set Detect IOB Path:Data7 IOB Path:Data7
2
4 4 10 Separator Unit 8 5 IOB Path:Data6 B18 B3
IOB Path:Data6
5VL IOB2 ELC Valve:+24V_4B B19 B2
3 7 6
3
1
Juntion CN N.C ELC Valve:Drive IOB Path:Data3 IOB Path:Data3
CN711
1 1 B20 B1
G CB2
8
7
GND
GND
N.C
4
5
6
2
3
2
3
IOB Path:Data2
A1 A12
IOB Path:Data2
Right I/F of Mainframe G
Y Drum Motor:ENB
CN703
6 1 Y Drum Motor:ENB
Braker 2 5 2
Energy Save:GND (PSU-EA1)
1
4
5
CN029P
CN029J
4
5 Y Drum Motor:CCW A2 A11
Y Drum Motor:CCW
Energy Save:5V (PSU-EA1) +5V IOB1 A3 A10
4 2 6 6 Y Drum Motor:Current DOWN Y Drum Motor:Current DOWN
+5V IOB2 Y Drum Motor:Current UP A4 A9
3 3 7 7 Y Drum Motor:Current UP
A5 A8
CN712
2 N.C GND GND
4
2
1 GND 4 8 8 A6 A7
1 2
AC-L 5 9 9 CN662 ~ Fusing Motor CN1, Paper Exit Motor CN2 M Drum Motor:ENB M Drum Motor:ENB
CN702
GND A7 A6 1 7
M Drum Motor:CCW M Drum Motor:CCW SBU_RST_N
3 CN662-2 CN1 -1 Fusing Motor:+24VINT 2 6
1
2
3
4
AC-N M Drum Motor:Current DOWN A8 A5 SBU:GND
1 1 1 1 M Drum Motor:Current DOWN
To Scanner
P2/9 (G4) +24V_CH3 CN661 -8 CN1 -2 Fusing Motor:GND A9 A4 3 5
2 2 2 2 M Drum Motor:Current UP M Drum Motor:Current UP SBU_DAGL_CS_N
A10 A3 4 4
IOB1:+24VINT-1
IOB1:+24VINT-1
IOB1:GND
IOB1:GND
To CN610 on AC +24V_CH3 -3 CN2 -1
CN305
SBU_SYCS_N
CN15
Paper Exit Motor:+24VINT GND
JCN
1 GND
4
3
+24V_CH3 3 3 3 3 A11 A2 5 3
Drive Board AC-L IOB1:Connect Detect SBU_SYCLK_P
-9 CN2 -2 IOB1:Connect Detect
CN233
CN302
2 4 4 4 4 Paper Exit Motor:GND
CN701
6 2
NF2 3
+24V_CH3
5 5 5 5 PSU-G EN Saver Trigger A12 A1
PSU-G EN Saver Trigger SBU_SYDO_P
7 1
CN714
AC-N +24V 1 P3/9(F3) B1 B12 SBU_SYDI_P SB
Braker 2 6 6 6 6 C Drum Motor:ENB
B2 B11
C Drum Motor:ENB 8
1
2
3
+24V Junction CN
CN032P
CN032J
7 7 7 7 2 To Relay CN1 of C Drum Motor:CCW C Drum Motor:CCW N.C.
9
PSU-EA1 GND 3 B3 B10 N.C.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
H GND
GND
8
9
10
8
9
10
8
9
10 10
8
9 1
2
Fusing Motor
P3/9(F3)
C Drum Motor:Current DOWN
C Drum Motor:Current UP
GND
B4
B5
B9
B8
C Drum Motor:Current DOWN
C Drum Motor:Current UP
GND
N.C.
10
H
To Relay CN2 of B6 B7
(PCB2) GND
2
1
11 11 11 11 3 K Drum Motor:ENB K Drum Motor:ENB
GND 1 Paper Exit Motor K Drum Motor:CCW B7 B6 A1 8
12 12 12 12 IOB2:+24VINT K Drum Motor:CCW LCT:Serial Data1
GND 1 2 K Drum Motor:Current B8 B5 A2 7
Fusing Motor:+24VINT K Drum Motor:Current DOWN LCT:GND
••CN 2 1 3 K Drum Motor:Current UP B9 B4 A3 6
K Drum Motor:Current UP
CN11
RB:+24V-1 Paper Exit Motor:+24VINT B10 B3 LCT:Serial Data1
3 2 4 GND GND A4 5
RB:+24V-1 IOB1:+24VINT B11 B2 LCT:GND
9 3 5 N.C N.C A5 4
CN662
RB:GND IOB1:+24VINT LCT:Serial Data2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 1 1 CN1-1 10 4 6 N.C B12 B1 A6 3
Lamp:+24 RB:GND IOB1:+24VINT-2 N.C LCT:GND
2 2 2 2 11 5 7 A7 2
CN652
SW1 SBU:+24V
MCU:+24V 3 3 3 3 1 6
RB:+24V-2
RB:+24V-2
IOB2:GND
8 1
LCT:Serial Data2
LCT:GND
A8 1
CN313
2 7 Fusing Motor:GND IOB1:+24VINT
24V Mirror M 4 4 4 4 RB:+24V-2 9 2
CN038P
1 Paper Exit Motor:GND IOB1:+24VINT
CN038J
CN247
AC(H)-B 5 5 5 5 8 10 3 B1 9
CN732
CN720
2 24V Mirror M RB:GND IOB1:GND IOB1:GND AC Drive Board:T5V_3
Main Power SW
B2345632
AC(N)-B 6 6 6 6 3 9 11 4 B2 8
3 24V OPU RB:GND IOB1:GND IOB1:GND AC Drive Board:TGND
N.C 7 7 7 7 4 10 12 B3 7
Lamp:GND RB:GND IOB1:GND AC Drive Board:T5V_1
8 8 8 8 B4 6
To LCT
SBU:GND AC Drive Board:TGND
I 1 MCU:PGND 9 9 9 9
RB (1/3) AC Drive Board:T5V_2
B5 5
I
CN23
N.C 10 10 10 10 B6 4
2 GND AC Drive Board:TGND
CN708
N.C 11 B7 3
3 GND 2 1 1 1 AC Drive Board:T5V_4
1
2
3
4
PSU-EA2:Low Power Trigger 12 P5/9 (G2) 1 B8 2
(PCB6)
CN030P
GND 4 2 2 2 RB:+6VGINT N.C.
2 1
CN531P
CN030J
3 3 3 To Relay CN531J 1 3
IOB2:GND
CN335
CN651
+24V_CH4 1 4 4 4 of DEV Unit RB:INT Trigger RB:INT Lock Trigger
1
2
3
4
1 2 4
CN707
Energy Save:GND (PSU-EA2) 2 RB:+6VGINT IOB2:+24VINT
CN036P
+24V_CH4 6 5 5
CN036J
2 3 5 IOB2:GND
Energy Save 5V (PSU-EA2) +24V 8 6 6
4 7 7 1
+24V LCT
5 P7/9 (A7)
CN719
+24V LCT 8 8 2 To CN471 of Drv.CK
+24V 6 CN037J-1 1 1 1
1 7 Junction CN 1 1
AC-L 1 IOB2:+24V_3 2 2 2 2
2 GND P7/9 (A7)
CN706
CN4P
2 2
CN4J
8 2 IOB2:+24V_3 3 3 3 3
To Downstream OP
3 GND To CN481 of Drv.YM 3 3
AC-N GND 9 IOB2:+24V_3 4 4 4 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10 4 4
GND IOB2:+24V_3
11 1 1 CN4J-1 5 5
IOB2:+5VL
J GND
12 2 2 2 6 6
IOB2:+5V
J
CN325
1 GND 7 7
CN037P
3 3 3
CN037J
AC-L IOB2:GND Junction CN-2 1
2 8 8
CN705
4 4 4 IOB2:GND 3 2
3 +5V IOB1 1 5 5 9 9
AC-N 2 IOB2:GND CN038J-3 3
+5V IOB2 10 10 JunctionCN-6 4
3 IOB2:GND
CN718
N.C 11 11 7 5
IOB2:GND
TB2 GND 4 12 12
CN1
5 Rear Cotroller Box IOB2:GND CN038J-6 6
L1 N1 L2 N2 L3 N3
PSU-EA2 GND
5VL IPU 1
1
2
3 P8/9(I3)
To Relay CN044J/P
7
8
9
7
8
9
(PCB3) 5VL IPU
5VL IPU
2
3
4
5 on PU CN425 PSU-EA1, EA2 ~ CT BOX 10 10
CN717
GND 4 6 CN720-6 CN425-7 24V OPU
GND 5 7 -12 -8 GND
GND 6 8
FG CN717-1 -1 5VL IPU
1 P8/9(J3) -2 -2 5VL IPU
K 2
3
To Relay CN1P
PSU-C CN751
-3
-4
-3
-4
5VL IPU
GND
K
1 P8/9(J3) -5 -5 GND
2 To CN043 on PSU-C -6 -6 GND
CN762
CN702-1 CN721-1 AC-L
-2 -2 AC-N
FG FG Junction CN -1 CN732-1 EN Saver +5V
-5 -2 EN Saver GND
D095/M077 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (1/9)
L L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Paper Cooling Front Door SW - L Front Door SW - R
Fan 3
9 1 3 1 SW3 SW2
A
JCN
8 2 2 2
7 3 1 3 M13 A
6 4 2
CN101
Mechanical Upper Front Cover SW L
5 5 1 C1 Counter 1
4 6 2
C2 Mechanical
1
2
3 7 1
IOB2 (2/5) MCH_CNT1:+24 1 2 8 Counter 2 SW4 SW5
CN
2 1 9 CN1
MCH_CNT1:DRV
(PCB5) 3 1 1
Front Door SW - R
1
2
MCH_CNT2:+24
MCH_CNT2:DRV 4 LEFT_DOOR_OPN_SNS_N 2 2
PSU-G 5 3 1
CN930
6 2 2
PSU-G
PSU-G
7 1 3 SW6
8 CN CN1
CN3
REAR_UINT_OPENS 1 1 1 1
REAR_UINT_OPEN 9
10 2 2 2 2
LEFT_DOOR_OPN
11
B LEFT_DOOR_OPNS
12
PSU_COOL_FAN5:+ B
1
2
PSU_COOL_FAN5:ALM 13
CN
PSU_COOL_FAN5:D 14 P7/9(J7)
To LD PW Junction
CN926
1
1
2
CN5, CN6 +5VG_2-1
2
+5VG_2-1INT 1
2 PGN
CN3
+5VGO 1 2
+5VG PGN
3
CN6-
CN5-
CN6-
CN5-
GAIA PW:+5V (Front Door SW))
GND 1 8 4 PSU-G EN Save Relay:5VE
FI012 CN923 ~ LD PW Junction CN5, CN6
CN284
Finisher Serial 2 7 5 N.C.
CN923-1 CN6 -1 GND 3 6 6 N.C.
LDB(KM):+6V P1/9(F16)
CN924
Finisher:Serial 4 5 7 N.C.
-2 CN5 -1 LDB(CY):+6V To Relay CN5 of Finisher on Left I/F
Finisher:+5V PW 5 4 of Mainframe 8 PSU-G FAN:DRV
-3 CN6 -5 LDB(KM):G Finisher:+5V 6 3 9 N.C.
Finisher:GND 7 2 10 N.C.
-4 CN5 -5
C LDB(CY):G
Finisher:GND 8 1
C
1
2
3
4
+5VG_1 1 1 GAIA PW:+5V
CN9 2
+5VG_2-1 2 GAIA PW:+5V
CN285
LDB(MY):+6
CN921
LDB(KC):+6
3 3
LDB(MY):
LDB(KC):
+5VG_2-1 GAIA PW:+5V
GND 4 4 GAIA PW:GND
1 1 +6VGI 5 5
CN3
+6VGI
CN9
2 2 GND GAIA PW:GND
GN GN GND 6 6 GAIA PW:GND
9
FIB 8
7
ENABLE 3
1
2
7
6
ENABLE 3 (PCB7) 6
5 4 GAIA PW:+24V
CN286
ENABLE 2 ENABLE 2 4 3
3 5 GAIA PW:+24V
D ENABLE 1 ENABLE 1 3 2 GAIA PW:GND(+24V)
CN3
CN9
4 4
GN 5 3
GN
RXD_FIN_P (FIB->IOB2) P1/9(F16)
2 1 GAIA PW:GND(+24V) Relay CN606 ~ PFU Heater CN1,CN2 D
RXD_FIN_P (FIB->IOB2) 1
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
6 2 GN To Relay CN4 of Finisher on Left I/F CN606-1 CN1 -1
GN Heater (H)
7 1 TXD_FIN_P (IOB2->FIB) of Mainframe
TXD_FIN_P (IOB2->FIB) -5 -2 Heater (L)
Junction CN (+24V) Junction CN (GND) -2 CN2 -5 Heater (H)
1 1 AC:HOT
PSU-G:AC:HOT -6 -2
CN611
Heater (L)
CN281
2 2 N.C.
N.C. 3 3
N.C. AC:N
PSU-G:AC:N
4 4 N.C. PSU-G
1 15
ACB_P_RELAY2_DR
(PCB9) FG
ACB_P_RELAY2_DR 2 14
ACB_T5V_2 3 13 ACB_T5V_2
ACB_P_RELAY1_DR 4 12 ACB_P_RELAY1_DR 1
ACB_T5V_1 ACB_T5V_1 OIL Pump:HOT 2
5 11
E
CN617
ACB_P_RELAY3_DR OIL Pump:HOT
ACB_P_RELAY3_DR
ACB_T5V_3
6 10
ACB_T5V_3 N.C.
3 TS1 TS2 E
7 9 4
ACB_DRY_HEATR_ ACB_DRY_HEATR_ OIL Pump:N
8 8 5
Fusing Unit
CN6
ACB_DRY:+5 ACB_DRY:+5 OIL Pump:N Thermostat5 160
ACB_ZEROX1_IN
9 7
ACB_ZEROX1_IN
Thermostat4 159
CN3
10 6
ACB_TGND 11 5 ACB_TGND
GND
TS3
GND 12 4
ACB_HEATR_TR 13 3 ACB_HEATR_TR Thermostat3 190
ACB_HEATR_TR ACB_HEATR_TR 1 6 6
Heater HOT(H) TS4
14 2
AC Drive Board
CN604
ACB_HEATR_TR ACB_HEATR_TR 2
15 1 Heater HOT(H) 1 1
ACB_HEATR_TR ACB_HEATR_TR 3 1 1
16 Heater HOT(H) 4 2 2 4 4 Thermostat2 190
ACB:GAIA_RLY_TRG
ACB:T5V-4
17
18 3
ACB:+5VL
(PCB8) Heater HOT(H)
1
3
4
3
4
7 7 TS5
CN620P
ACB:ZEROX2 8 8
CN620J
2 Heater 1 (N) Thermostat1 190
CN6
ACB:T5V-4 2 5 5
1 N.C. 5 5
CN605
ACB:ZEROX2 3 6 6
F Heater 3 (N) 4 7 7 2 2
Heater 1 (H) 5 8 8 3 3
F
N.C. 6
1
OIL
Heater 4 (N) G G TB3 L1
2 1 1
3 OIL
CN6
4 N. CN
OIL PUMP:N FG Fusing Lamp 1
5
OIL 1 1 1 1 FG
1L2 1
CN2 CN1
Heater HOT(H) 2 2 2 2
Heater HOT(H) P4/9 (J14)
1 3 3 3 Rlay CN1, CN2 of Heater on Fusing Lamp 2 CN
OIL 1
CN050 Fusin Unit Drawer 24P+G
CN050 Fusin Unit Drawer 24P+G
Heater HOT(H)
CN606P
2 4 PFU
L3
CN606
3 OIL Heater HOT(H) 2 G1784457(N G1784458(N
CN602 5 4 4 1 1
CN6
4 N. N.C. G1784520(E G1784521(E
OIL PUMP:N 6 5 5
5 Heater HOT(L) 7 6 6 Fusing Lamp 3 CN
OIL PUMP:N Heater HOT(L)
Heater HOT(L)
8 7 7 1 1 1 1L4 1
CN4 CN3
9
G P1/9 (H1) Heater HOT(L)
2
1
To LCT CN Fusing Lamp 4 CN G
CN03
To Relay CN30P 3 1
on TB2 AC- 2
CN6
4 2
3 N. 3
AC- 7
Heater HOT(L)
OIL PUMP:HOT
OIL PUMP:HOT
4 6
P1/9 (E1) Heater HOT(L)
Right Lower I/F of
OIL PUMP:N
OIL PUMP:N
OIL PUMP:N
OIL PUMP:N
3 T 5
CN606
C
To NF1 Heater HOT(L)
4
T
N.C.
Heater HOT(H) 3 Mainframe
Heater HOT(H) 2
OIL
OIL
1
N.
N.
Heater HOT(H)
CN6 CN6
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
H 1 6 1 24 24 6 1 2
FUS_P_EX_JAM_SNS-F_N:GND
2 5 2 23 23 5 2 3 H
FUS_P_EX_JAM_SNS-
CN696
S15 Fusing Exit Sensor: Front
CN697
3 4 3 22 22 4 3 1
FUS_P_EX_JAM_SNS-F:+5V
4 3 4 21 21 3 4 2
FUS_P_EX_JAM_SNS-R:GND
5 2 5 20 20 2 5 3
S101
CN307
FUS_P_EX_JAM_SNS-R:OUT
FUS_P_EX_JAM_SNS-R:+5V
6 1 6 19 19 1 6 1 Fusing Exit Sensor: Rear
7 18 18
Reserved 1:GND
8 17 17
Reserved 1:OUT
9 16 16
Reserved 1:+5V
10 15 15
Reserved 2:GND
11 14 14
Reserved 2:OUT
12 13 13 NA :M0774262 ••••:••:•••:NA
Reserved 2:+5V
I N.C.
13 12 12 EU :M0774272 ••••:••:•••:EU
11 11 I
10 10
9 9
16 1
A1 A15 A1 15 2 3 1 3
BR_OC_POS_F-
2
CN1
A2 A14 A2 14 3 2 2
BR_OC_POS_F-SNS_P
BR_OC_POS_F-
A3 A13 A3 13 4 1 3 1 S5 Front Pressure Roller Lift Sensor
A4 A12 A4 12 5 3
WEB_END_SNS_P:
A5 A11 A5 11 6 2
WEB_END_SNS_P:
A6 A10 A6 10 7 1 S6 Web End Sensor
CN691
CN693
WEB_END_SNS_P:
A7 A9 A7 9 8 2
WEB_CLN_M:DRV
JCN
J WEB_CLN_M
A8 A8 A8 8 9 M30 Web Motor (5V)
1
THERMISTOR_SNS
A9 A7 A9 7 10 2 J
THERMISTOR_SN
A10
A11
A6
A5
A10
A11
6
5
11
12
1
2
TH1 Heating Roller Thermistor 1
THERMISTOR_SNS
TH2 Fusing belt thermistor
CN690 Fusin Unit Drawer
CN690 Fusin Unit Drawer
A12 A4 A12 4 13 1
THERMISTOR_SNS
A13 A3 A13 3 14 3 1 3
BR_OC_POS_R-
CN2
A14 A2 A14 2 15 2 2 2
CN310
BR_OC_POS_R-SNS_P
BR_OC_POS_R-
A15 A1 A15 1 16 1 3 1 S1 Rear Pressure Roller Lift Sensor
B1 B15 B1
N.
B2 B14 B2 14 1
CN695
THERMISTOR_SNS3
B3 B13 B3 13 2
THERMISTOR_SNS3:
B4 B12 B4 12 3
FU_ID_BIT0_P A FU_ID_BIT
B5 B11 B5 11 4
FU_ID_BIT0:G 2
B6 B10 B6 10 5
CN692
CN694
K FU_ID_BIT1_P
B7 B9 B7 9 6
B FU_ID_BIT 1 TH3 Hot Roller Thermistor
FU_ID_BIT1:G
B8 B8 B8 8 7 K
Fusing
B9 B7 B9 7 8
Fusing CONNECT
B10 B6 B10 6 9 2
Accordion JAM
B11 B5 B11 5 10 3
Accordion JAM S7 Accordion Jam Sensor
D095/M077 POINT TO POINT Accordion JAM
BR_OC_POS_C-
BR_OC_POS_C-
BR_OC_POS_C-
B12
B13
B14
B15
B4
B3
B2
B1
B12
B13
B14
B15
4
3
2
1
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
1 S8 Fusing Exit Sensor: Center
Destination
A
B
NA
Open
Open
Open
EU
Short
L
DIAGRAM (2/9) L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A 1
2
Masere Reserve SN1:GND
Master Reserve SN1 ON A
3
+5V
4
GND
5
Master Reserve SN2 ON
6
+5V
7
CN307
GND
8
Slave Reserve SN1 ON
9
+5V
10
Slave Reserve SN2 ON
11
Slave Reserve SN2 ON
12
+5V
13
N.C.
B B
3 A1
+24V_3C
2 A2
Fusing Fan 1 M14
JCN
HR_COOL_FAN1_ALM_P
1 A3
HR_COOL_FAN13_ON_N
3 A4
+24V_3C
2 A5
Fusing Fan 2 M15
Fusing Drawer Unit, PTB Unit
JCN
HR_COOL_FAN2_ALM_P
1 A6
HR_COOL_FAN13_ON_N
3 A7
+24V
2 A8
Fusing Fan 3 M16
JCN
HR_COOL_FAN3_ALM_P
1 A9
HR_COOL_FAN13_ON_N
3 A10 3 1 3
+24V_3C
2 A11 2 2 2
S9
CN672
Fusing Fan 4 M17 PTB Jam Sensor C
JCN
HR_COOL_FAN4_ALM_P
C 1
3
A12
A13
HR_COOL_FAN4_ON_N
+24V_3C
1 3 1
2 A14
Exit Fan M23
JCN
SB_EXIT _FAN_ALM_P
1 A15 3 1 3
”½“]”rŽ†¸°ØݸÞ̧Ý:ÄÞײÌÞ•M•†
3 1 3 A16 A1 A12 A1 2 2 2
CN675
ITB FAN M22 2 2 2 A17
+24V_3C GND
A2 A11 A2 1 3 1 S10 Switchback Sensor
JCN
JCN
MID_TRANS_FAN_ALM_P TH_JAM_SNS_N
CN316
1 3 1 A18 A3 A10 A3
MID_TRANS_FAN_ON_N 5VL
4 B1 A4 A9 A4
+24V_3C GND
3 B2 A5 A8 A5 3 1 3
HR_COOL_FAN5_ALM_P TH_JAM_SNS:SIG
Fusing Fan 5 M18
JCN
4 2 B3 A6 A7 A6 2 2 2
S11 Duplex Transport Sensor 1
CN676
3 HR_COOL_FAN5_6_ON_N 5VL
1 B4 A7 A6 A7 1 3 1
Heating Roler Thermopile TP1 2 4 B5
HR_COOL_FAN5_HI_N
+24V_3C
GND
Duplex Transport Sensor1:SIG A8 A5 A8
1 3 B6 A9 A4 A9
HR_COOL_FAN6_ALM_P 5VL
Fusing Fan 6 M19
CN628
D
JCN
2 B7 A10 A3 A10 3 1 3
D 1 B8
HR_COOL_FAN5_6_ON_N GND
A11 A2 A11 2 2 2
CN677
3 B9
HR_COOL_FAN6_HI_N Duplex Transport Sensor 2:SIG
A12 A1 A12 1 3 1 S12 Duplex Transport Sensor 2
CN625
+24V_3C 5VL
2 B10 B1 B12 B1 8 1
Paper Cooling Fan 1 M20
JCN
HR_COOL_FAN1_ALM_P (Reserved)
1 B11 B2 B11 B2 7 2 3
HR_COOL_FAN13_ON_N 24V
3 B12 B3 B10 B3 6 3 2
M31 PTB FAN 1
JCN
+24V_3C TH_M_COOL_FAN_ALM_N
2 B13 B4 B9 B4 5 4 1
CN671
Paper Cooling Fan 2 M21 JCN
1 B14
HR_COOL_FAN2_ALM_P
HR_COOL_FAN13_ON_N
TH_FEED_FAN1_ON
(Reserved) B5 B8 B5 4 5
B15 B6 B7 B6 3 6 3
N.C. TH_FEED_FAN2_ON:24V
B16 B7 B6 B7 2 7 2
IOB2 M32 PTB FAN 2
JCN
N.C. TH_FEED_FAN2_ALM
B17 B8 B5 B8 1 8 1
N.C. TH_FEED_FAN2_ON_N
B18 B9 B4 B9
N.C. (Reserved)
B10 B3 B10 3
1 4 1 (PCB5) +24V
B11 B2 B11 2
M33 PTB Cooling Fan E
JCN
THERMOPILE_THRM_AN TH_M_COOL_FAN_ALM_N
2 3 2 B12 B1 B12 1
E +5VL TH_M_COOL_FAN_ON_N
CN640
3 2 3
GND
4 1 4
THERMOPILE_SNS_AN
RB(2/3)
CN320
1 5
GND
6 1 12 1 12 1 12
OIL_END_SNS_P GND GND GND GND 1 6 1 6 1 6
7 2 11 2 11 2 11
PTR Unit Cooling Fan M104
1
2
8
+5V
GND
GND
GND 3 10
GND
GND (PCB6) GND
GND 3 10 3 10
GND
GND
+24V
TH_FEED_M_OUTA 2 5 2 5 2 5
JCN
JCN
9 3 4 3 4 3 4
CN678
CN624
CN673
4 9 4 9 4 9
JCN
TH_FEED_M_OUTXA
3 10
OIL_UNIT_REV_SNS_P GND GND GND GND 4 3 4 3 4 3 M34 PTB Motor
CN664
+5V +24V_3A 5 8 +24V +24VINT 5 8 5 8 +24V
+24VINT 5 2 5 2 5 2
CN334
CN654
CN053
CN057
CN621
+24V_3A 6 7 +24V +24VINT 6 7 6 7 TH_FEED_M_OUTB
+24VINT 6 1 6 1 6 1
1 +24V_3A 7 6 +24V +24VINT 7 6 7 6 TH_FEED_M_OUTXB
+24V 3C +24VINT
2 +24V_3A 8 5 +24V +24VINT 8 5 8 5
PTR Unit Cooling Fan_ALM +24VINT
3 9 4 9 4 9 4
CN315
+24V_3A +24V +24VINT +24VINT
CN1J, CN2J to RB CN661 2 4
PTR Unit Cooling Fan_DRV
+24V 3C TH_FEED_FAN2_ALM_P 10 3 TH_FEED_FAN2_ALM_P TH_FEED_FAN2_ALM_P 1 3 10 3
TH_M_COOL_FAN2_ALM_N SOL1 Inverter Roller Solenoid
11 2 2 2 11 2
F
CN665
CN1J -1 CN661-2 +24VINT P1/8(I9) 4 5 RSV FAN2: ALM TH_FEED_FAN_ON_N TH_FEED_FAN_ON_N TH_FEED_FAN_ON_N TH_FEED_FAN_ON_N
12 1 3 1 12 1
-2 -8 GND To RB CN662 8 6 RSV FAN2: DRV TH_FEED_FAN1_ALM_P TH_FEED_FAN1_ALM_P TH_FEED_FAN1_ALM_P TH_M_COOL_FAN1_ALM_N 24V 1 15 1 2
2 F
JCN JCN JCN
2 14 2 1
10 FLIP_RTR_SOL_ON_N SOL3 Exit Junction Gate Solenoid
JCN
CN2J -1 -4 +24VINT 1 10 1 3 13 3 2 1 1
(Reserved) 24V
-2 -10 GND (Reserved) 2 9 2 4 12 4 1 2
3 8 3 3 SB_GATE_SOL_ON_N
FLIP_M_CL_FAN_ALM_P TH_M_COOL_FAN_ALM_N 24V 5 11 5 2
1 1 1 4 7 4 2 SOL2 Switchback Junction Gate Solenoid
CN636
TH_M_COOL_FAN_ALM_N TH_M_COOL_FAN_ALM_N FLIP_GATE_SOL_ON_N 6 10 6 1
2 2 2
CN1P
CN1J
5 6 5 1 7 9 7 6 1
CN312
CN055
CN059
TH_M_COOL_FAN_ON_N TH_M_COOL_FAN_ON_N GND
CN626
CN629
3 3 3 6 5 6 5 8 8 8 5 2
5 1 5 FLIP_PRESS_M_REF_N FLIP_PRESS_M_REF_N EXIT_SNS_N 3
7 4 7 4 9 7 9 4 3
CN674
Fusing Motor M24 4 2 4 RETURN1_M_FLAG_P
8 3 8 3
RETURN1_M_REF_N 5VL 2
S13
CN627
3 3 3 SB_M_FLAG_P
9 2 9 2
SB_M_REF_N GND 10 6 10 3 4
1 Paper Exit Sensor
JCN
FLIP_M_FLAG_P FLIP_M_REF_N FLIP_SNS_N 11 5 11 2 5
2 4 2 A1 10 1 10 1 12 4 12 1 6 3
HR_M_OL_N TH_FEED_M_FLAG_P TH_FEED_M_REF_N 5VL
1 5 1 A2 2
HR_M_BR_P GND 13 3 13
S14 Exit Junction Timing
G
1 A3
HR_M_TRG_N N.C. A1 A20
N.C. 14 2 14 1
G
CN051 Fusing Drawer_DC
2 A4 A2 A19 Inverter Roller Position Sensor
CN2J
HR_M_CLK_P N.C. N.C. 5VL 15 1 15
3 A5 A3 18 1 A18 4
FG GND +5V +5V
5 A6
EXIT_M_OL_N A4 17 2 A17 3 Pressure Roller
Paper Exit Motor M25 4
3
A7
A8
(Reserved)
FLIP_PRESS_M_CD_P
RETURN1_M_CD_P A5 16 3 A16
FLIP_PRESS_CD_N
RETURN1_M_CD_N
2 TP2 Thermopile
EXIT_M_TRG_N A6 15 4 A15 1
2 A9 FUS_DC_DRWR_CNCT_N STM Driver Reset
CN318
EXIT_M_CLK_P EXIT_SNS_N A7 14 5 A14
1 A10 Paper Exit Senosor:SIG
GND FLIP_SNS_N A8 13 6 A13
3 1 3 1 3 B1 FLIP_SNS:SIG
+5VL FLIP_RTR_POS_SNS_N A9 12 7 A12
2 2 2 2 2 B2 FLIP_RTR_POS_SNS:SIG
Switchback Lower Sensor S2 A10 11 8 A11
JCN
JCN
SB_LOW_SNS_P LIP_RTR_SOL_ON_N FLIP_RTR_SOL_ON_N
1 3 1 3 1 B3 A11 10 9 A10
GND SB_GATE_SOL_ON_N SB_GATE_SOL_ON_N
B4 A12 9 10 A9
GND FLIP_GATE_SOL_ON_N
CN052
CN056
B5 FLIP_GATE_SOL_ON_N
DECRLR_POS_SNS1_N GND A13 8 11 A8
B6 GND
+5V SB_EXIT_SET_N A14 7 12 A7
Fusing Drawer Unit Detection
H Decurler Unit HP Sensor S3
3
2
1
2
6
5
B7
B8
B9
GND
DECRLR_POS_SNS2_N
GND
RTN_SNS2_N
A15
A16
6
5
13
14
A6
A5
GND
Duplex Transport Sensor2:SIG
H
1 3 4 +5V A17 4 15 A4
JCN
B10 RTN_SNS1_N Duplex Transport Sensor1:SIG
3 4 3 N.C. SB_SNS_N A18 3 16 A3
Switchback Sensor:SIG
2 5 2 A19 2 17 A2
Decurler Unit Limit Sensor S4 1 6 1
TH_JAM_SNS_N
+5VL A20 1 18 A1
TH_JAM_SNS_N:SIG
5VL
1 6 1 +24V_3A B1 20 1 B20
CN622
CN311
2 5 2 FLIP_PRESS_M_FLAG_P Inverter Motor 1
DECRLR_FEED_STM_PHA RETURN1_M_FLAG_P B2 19 2 B19
3 4 3 Duplex Transport Motor 1:FLAG 2
DECRLR_FEED_STM_PHXA B3 18 3 B18
JCN
Decarler Feed Motor M26 4 3 4 +24V_3A
SB_M_FLAG_P
FLIP_M_FLAG_P B4 17 4 B17
SB_M_FLAG_P
Inverter Motor:FLAG
3
4
5 2 5
CN332
DECRLR_FEED_STM_PHB TH_FEED_M_FLAG_P B5 16 5 B16 7 1
6 1 6 TH_FEED_M:FLAG 5
DECRLR_FEED_STM_P FLIP_PRESS_M_CCW_P B6 15 6 B15 6 2
1 6 7 Exit Junction TM:CCW 6
Paper Exit Transport
JCN
24V_3A B7 14 7 B14 5 3
I 2 5 8 DECRLR_M_PHA
RETURN1_M_CCW_P
B8 13 8 B13
Duplex Transport Motor1:CCW
4 4
7 M29
Decarler Drive Motor M27
3 4 9 DECRLR_M_PHXA
SB_M_CCW_P
B9 12 9 B12
Switchback Motor:CCW FLIP_M:24V 1 8 Motor I
JCN
FLIP_M_CCW_P Inverter Motor:CCW 2 3 5 9
CN642
4 3 10 +24V_3A B10 11 10 B11 FLIP_M_CL_FAN:ALM
FLIP_PRESS_M_CLK_P FLIP_PRESS_M_CLK_N 3 2 6 10
5 2 11 B11 10 11 B10 FLIP_M:ON
CN054
CN058
DECRLR_M_PHB
Decarler Option 6
(Red)
1 12 DECRLR_M_PHXB
RETURN1_M_CLK_P
SB_M_CLK_P
FLIP_M_CLK_P
B12
B13
9
8
12
13
B9
B8
Duplex Transport Motor 1:CLK
Switchback Motor:CLK
Switchback Motor:CLK
N.C.(FLIP_PRESS_M:COM)
N.C.(FLIP_PRESS_M:A)
A1
A2
1
12
11
7
1
2
11
TH_FEED_M_CLK_P B14 7 14 B7 A3 10 3
TH_FEED_M_CLK N.C.(FLIP_PRESS_M:/A)
FLIP_PRESS_M_ENB_N B15 6 15 B6 A4 9 4 3
1 1 1 6 1 FLIP_PRESS_M_ENB N.C.(FLIP_PRESS_M:COM)
BR_OC_M_PHA BR RETURN1_M_ENB_ B16 5 16 B5 A5 8 5 2
RETURN1_M_ENB_N
M35 Inverter Motor Fan
JCN
2 2 2 5 2 B17 4 17 B4 N.C.(FLIP_PRESS_M:B)
+24V_3B SB_M_ENB_N SB_M_ENB_N A6 7 6 1
CN331
3 3 3 4 3 N.C.(FLIP_PRESS_M:/B)
CN631
B18 3 18 B3
JCN
CN1P
BR_OC_M_PHXA
Pressure Roller Lift Motor M28 A7 6 7 6
CN1J
4 4 4 3 4 FLIP_M_ENB_N FLIP_M_ENB_N Return Motor1:A
BR_OC_M_PHB BR TH_FEED_M_ENB_N B19 2 19 B2 A8 5 8 5
5 5 5 2 5 TH_FEED_M_ENB_N Return Motor1:COM
+24V_3B GND B20 1 20 B1 A9 4 9 4
GND
JCN
6 6 6 1 6 Return Motor1:/A
J BR_OC_M_PHXB BR
Return Motor1:B A10 3 10 3 M36 Duplex Transport Motor 1
J
CN623
Return Motor1:COM A11 2 11 2
Return Motor1:/B A12 1 12 1
FLIP_M:COM B1 14 1 6
FLIP_M:A B2 13 2 5
B3 12 3 4
JCN
FLIP_M:/A
FLIP_M:COM B4
B5
11
10
4
5
3
2
M37 Inverter Motor
FLIP_M:B
FLIP_M:/B B6 9 6 1
CN632
SB_M:COM B7 8 7 6
SB_M:A B8 7 8 5
B9 6 9 4
JCN
PDB1
SB_M:/A
SB_M:COM B10
B11
5
4
10
11
3
2
M38 Switchback Motor
SB_M:B
K (PCB10) SB_M:/B B12 3
2
12
13
1
K
1 14
L
D095/M077 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (3/9)
L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Lower Waste Toner
A Transport Path Unit
3 1 9 A1
GND
TANDEM_R_TRAY_SET_P A1
A2
1
2
1
2 1
Paper Tray Unit A
+5V
Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor S27 2 2 8 A2
WTNRBTL_SET_SNS_P A3 3 3 2
S31 Front Side Fence Open Sensor
CN902J TANDEM_R_TRAY_DRAWER 32P
1 3 7 A3 F_BCK_FNC_OPEN_SN_P
+5V A4 4 4 3
4 6 A4 GND
CN902P TANDEM_R_TRAYDrawer 32P
A5 5 5 1
CN668
3 GND +5V
5 5 A5 6 6
Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor S28 2
1
6
7
4
3
A6
A7
WST_TNR_FUL_AN
+5V
F_BCK_FNC_CLOS_SN_P
GND
A6
A7 7 7
2
3 S32 Front Side Fence Close Sensor
GND A8 8 8 1
8 2 A8 +5V
Waste Toner Bottle Near Full 3
9 1 A9
WST_TNR_P_FUL_AN R_BCK_FNC_OPEN_SN_P A9 9
10
9
10
2
S33 Rear Side Fence Open Sensor
Sensor S29 2
1 A10
A11
+5V
N.C.
GND
+5V
A10
A11 11 11
3
1
A12 12 12 2
A12
N.C.
N.C.
R_BCK_FNC_CLOS_SN_P
A13 13 13 3 S34 Rear Side Fence Close Sensor
B
A13
A14
N.C.
GND
+24V A14 14 14 1 B
15 15
SOL5 Front Side Fence Solenoid
JCN
N.C. A15 2
CN317
11 B1 F_BACK_FNC_SOL_ON_N
CN322
+5V A16 1 32 32
10 B2 TANDEM_L_TRAY_SET_P
GND A17 2 B1 31 31 1
TRANSPORT_M_OUTA
ITB Unit
9 B3 3 30 30
SOL6 Rear Side Fence Solenoid
JCN
TNR_CLLCT2_M_GH_P TRANSPORT_M_OUTXA A18 B2 2
8 B4 A19 5 B3 29 29
TNR_CLLCT2_M_CW_P GND
7 B5 A20 6 B4 28 28 1
TNR_CLLCT2_M_CLK_P TRANSPORT_H_POS_SN_P
6 B6
Waste Toner Transport Motor 2 M44 5 B7
TNR_CLLCT2_M_RDY_P
TNR_CLLCT2_M_TRG_P
+5V A21
A22
7
9
B5
B6
27
26
27
26
2
3 S35 Right Tray 1 Paper Sensor
4 B8 GND
GND A23 B7 25 25
7 3 B9 N.C.
A24 B8 24 24
1
2
6
5
8
9
N.C.
ITB Drive Motor:A TRB 2
1
B10
B11
GND
+24V
N.C.
N.C. A25 B9 23 23
BL1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
31 22 22
10
B1 B10
11
ITB Drive Motor:+24VINT +24V 2
ITB Drive Motor M39
3
4
JCN 4
3
10
11
ITB Drive Motor:/A
(PCB33) 3
B12
B13
GND
R_BACK_FNC_SOL_ON_N
+24V B2
B3
30
29
B11
B12
21
20
21
20
1 S36 Paper Height Sensor 4
ITB Drive Motor:B 2 T_CLLCT_REV_SNS2_P GND 3
5 2 12
Waste Toner Transport Motor S30 B14 B4 28 B13 19 19
C 6 1 13
ITB Drive Motor:+24VINT
ITB Drive Motor:/B
1 +5V R_TRAY_P_SET_SNS_P
B5 27 B14 18 18
2
S37 Paper Height Sensor 3 C
CN515
1 6 1 6 1 +5V 1
Belt Centering Roller Motor:+24V B6 26 B15 17 17 3
2 5 2 5 2 1ST_TRAY_REM_SNS4_P
B7 25 16 16
3 4 3 4 3
Belt Centering Roller Motor:A 1ST_TRAY_REM_SNS3_P
B8 24 FG FG 2
S38 Paper Height Sensor 2
JCN
Belt Centering Roller Motor M40 Belt Centering Roller Motor:/A 1
CN522
4 3 4 3 4 1ST_TRAY_REM_SNS2_P
RB(3/3)
Belt Centering Roller Motor:+24V B9 23 3
5 2 5 2 5 GND
Belt Centering Roller Motor:B B10 22 2
6 1 6 1 6
Belt Centering Roller Motor:/B
1 1
1ST_TRAY_REM_SNS1_P
+5V B11
B12
21
20
1 S39 Paper Height Sensor 1
1
2
3
6
5
4
1
3
12
11
10
1
2
3
ITB Lift Motor - YCM:A
ITB Lift Motor - YCM:+24V
1 1
(PCB6) ITB Unit:+24V
ITB Unit:+24V 2
3
2
3
+24V_3B
+24V_3B
GND
LOW_LIMIT_DET_SNS_P
+5V
B13
B14
19
18
3
2
1 S40 Lower Limit Sensor
CN653
1 1 1 1 GND
JCN
ITB Color Lift Motor M41
CN328
ITB Lift Motor - YCM:/A ITB Unit:24VINT ITB Unit:24VINT ITB Unit:GND B15 17
4 3 4 9 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 GND GND
ITB Lift Motor - YCM:B ITB Unit:24V ITB Unit:24V ITB Unit:GND B16 10
CN901P TANDEM_L_TRAY_DRAWER 16P
5 2 5 8 5 5 5
CN663
ITB Lift Motor - YCM:+24V 3 3 3 3 3 3 +5VL GND A16 1 1
CN901J TANDEM_L_TRAY_RAWER 16P
N.C.
CN501P
ITB Unit:GND B17 11
CN501J
6 1 6 7 6 ITB Unit:GND
CN511
ITB Lift Motor - YCM:/B 4 17 17 4 4 4 6 GND PRESS_DET_SNS_P A17 2 2 1
CN523
ITB Unit:GND B18 12
1
2
6
5
7
8
6
5
7
8
ITB Contact Motor - K:A ITB Unit:+5VL 5 18 18 5 5 ITB Unit:GND +5V
B19 13 A18 3 3 2 M45 Rear Fence Drive Motor
D 3 4 9 4 9 CN516 ITB Contact Motor - K:+24V ITB Unit:GND 6 19 19 6 6 L_TRAY_P_SET_SNS_N
GND B20 14 4 4
D
JCN
ITB Black Lift Motor M42 4 3 10 3 10
ITB Contact Motor - K:/A
A1 4 4 1 13 A1 +5V B21 15 A19
A20
5
6
5
6
3
2
5
6
2
1
11
12
2
1
11
12
ITB Contact Motor - K:B
ITB Contact Motor - K:+24V
Belt Contact Motor - K:ENB
Belt Contact Motor - K:CLK A2 5 5 2 12 A2
BELT_RTR_K_M_ENB_N
BELT_RTR_K_M_CLK_P
N.C.
N.C.
B22
B23 A21 7 7 1 S41 Rear Fence HP Sensor
ITB Contact Motor - K:/B Belt Contact Motor - K:CD A3 6 6 3 11 A3 BELT_RTR_K_M_CD_P A22 9 9
13 N.C. B24
ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid:+24V Belt Centering Roller Motor:ENB A4 7 7 4 10 A4 BELT_STER_M_ENB_N B16 10 10 3
14 N.C. B25
CN524 A5 8 8 5 9 A5 B17 11 11 2
CN060P ITBDrawerA 32P
P_SNS_SHTR_SOL_ON_N
S42 Rear Fence Return Sensor
CN060J ITBDrawerA 32P
2 1 2 Belt Steering Motor:CLK BELT_ STER _M_CLK_P
A6 9 9 6 8 A6 B18 12 12 1
ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid SOL4 Belt Centering Roller Motor:CD BELT_ STER _M_CD_P
JCN
JCN
1 2 1 A7 10 10 7 7 A7 B19 13 13 3
CN502
Belt Steering Motor:CCW BELT_ STER _M_CCW_P
A8 11 11 8 6 A8 B20 14 14 2
Stepping Motor_RST_N
Belt Cleaning Motor:TRG A9
A10
12
13
12
13
9
10
5
4
A9
A10
SLV_STM_DRV_RST_P
BELT_CLNR_M_TRG_N B21 15 15 1 S43 Left Tray Paper Set Sensor
Belt Cleaning Motor:LOCK BELT_CLNR_M_LOCK_P 16 16
3 Belt Cleaning Motor:CLK A11 14 14 11 3 A11 BELT_CLNR_M_CLK_P 8 8
1 9 1 A12 15 15 12 2 A12 FG FG
Belt Centering Roller Sensor S15 2 Belt centering roller sensor:GND Belt Cleaning Motor:CW BELT_CLNR_M_CW_P
CN512
CN329
1 2 8 2 A13 16 16 13 1 A13
STEERING_ROL_SNS_P Belt Cleaning Motor:GAIN BELT_CLNR_M_GAIN_P
3 7 3 B1 20 1 14
E Belt Centering Roller Sensor S16
3
2
1
2
3
2
4
5
6
5
4
5
Belt centering roller sensor:+5VL
ITB Cleaning Set Sesnor:GND
ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid:ON
Belt Drive Motor:REF B2 21 20 2 13 B1 P_SNS_SHTR_SOL_ON_N E
CN525
B3 22 21 3 12 B2 A1 A16 A1 16 1 3
CN537
BELT_CLEANER_SNS_P Belt Centering Roller Motor:REF BELT_M_REF_AN GND
1 3 1 6 4 6 B4 23 22 4 11 B3 A2 A15 A2 15 2 2
3 7 3 7
ITB Cleaning Set Sesnor:+5VL
Belt Overrun Sensor Rear:GND
Belt Contact Motor:REF
Belt Contact Motor - K:REF B5 24 23 5 10 B4
BELT_STER_M_REF_AN
BELT_RTR_M_REF_AN
PAPER_FEED_SNS1_P
+5V A3 A14 A3 14 3 1 S44 Paper Feed Sensor 1
ITB Cleaning Unit Set Sensor S17 2
1
8
9
2
1
8
9
BELT_CLEANER_SNS_P Belt Drive Motor:ENB B6 25 24 6 9 B5 BELT_RTR_K_M_REF_AN GND A4 A13 A4 13 4 3
B7 26 25 7 8 B6 A5 A12 A5 12 5 2
S45 Paper End Sensor1
CN507
Belt Overrun Sensor Rear:+5VL Belt Drive Motor:CLK BELT_M_ENB_N PAPER_END_SNS1_P
CN517
3 1 3 10 B8 27 26 8 7 B7 A6 A11 A6 11 6 1
ITB Motor Rotation Sensor 1:GND Belt Drive Motor:CD BELT_ M_CLK_P +5V
ITB Motor Rotation Sensor 1 S18 2 2 2 11 B9 28 27 9 6 B8 A7 A10 A7 10 7 3
CN527 CN526
ITB Motor Rotation Sensor 1:P Belt Drive Motor:CU BELT_ M_CD_P GND
CN903
1 3 1 12 B10 29 28 10 5 B9
3 1 3 13
ITB Motor Rotation Sensor 1:+5VL
ITB Motor Rotation Sensor 2:GND
Belt Drive Motor:CCW
Belt Contact Motor:ENB B11 30 29 11 4 B10
BELT_ M_CU_N
BELT_ M_CCW_P
HIGH_LIMIT_SNS1_P
+5V
A8
A9
A9
A8
A8
A9
9
8
8
9
2
1 S46 Tray Lift Sensor 1
2 2 2 14
ITB Motor Rotation Sensor 2 S19 1 3 1 15
ITB Motor Rotation Sensor 2:P Belt Contact Motor:CLK B12 31 30 12 3 B11 BELT_RTR_M_ENB_N GND A10 A7 A10 7 10 3
ITB Motor Rotation Sensor 2:+5VL Belt Contact Motor:CD B13 32 31
32
13
14
2
1
B12
B13
BELT_RTR_M_CLK_P
BELT_RTR_M_CD_P
LENGTH_P_FD_SNS1_P
+5V
A11
A12
A6
A5
A11
A12
6
5
11
12
2
1 S47 Vertical Transport Sensor 1
4 1 +24V_3C A13 A4 A13 4 13
Belt Centering Sensor:GND A14 A3 A14 3 14 2
Belt Centering Sensor S20
3 2
Belt Centering Sensor:P PICK_UP_SOL1_ON_N
SOL7 Pick-up Solenoid 1
JCN
CN518
2 3 A15 A2 A15 2 15 1
+24V_3C
F
CN324
Belt Centering Sensor:+5VL A16 A1 A16 1 16
1 4 PRESSURE_SOL1_ON_N
CN931
Belt Centering Sensor:LED
2
SOL8 Separation Roller Solenoid 1 F
JCN
3 1 9 1 18 1 18 1 20 1 1
Belt Overrun Sensor Front:GND Belt Drive Motor:FLAG BELT_M_FLAG_P
2 2 8 2 17 2 17 2 19 2
Belt Overrun Sensor Front S21 1 3 7 3
Belt Overrun Sensor Front:P
Belt Overrun Sensor Front:+5VL
Belt Steering Motor:FLAG
BELT_RTR_M:FLAG 16 3 16 3 18 3
BELT_STER_M_FLAG_P
BELT_RTR_M_FLAG_P GND B1 B16 B1 16 1 3
B2 B15 B2 15 2 2
3 4 6 4
ITB Black Lift Sensor:GND Belt Contact Motor - K:FLAG 15 4 15 4 17 4 BELT_RTR_K_M_FLAG_P PAPER_FEED_SNS2_P
B3 B14 B3 14 3 1 S48 Paper Feed Sensor 2
ITB Black Lift Sensor 2 5 5 5 14 5 14 5 16 5
CN528
S22 1 6 4 6
K_TR1_CNTACT_SNS_P
ITB Black Lift Sensor:+5VL
GND(ITBUset:P)
Belt Overrun Sensor Front:P 13 6 13 6 15 6
IT_UNIT_SET_N
BELT_OVERRUN_SNS1_N
+5V
GND B4 B13 B4 13 4 3
CN519
3 7 3 7
ITB Color Lift Sensor:GND K_TR1_CNTACT_SNS_P 12
11
7
8
12
11
7
8
14
13
7
8
K_TR1_CNTACT_SNS_P PAPER_END_SNS2_P B5
B6
B12
B11
B5
B6
12
11
5
6
2
1 S49 Paper End Sensor2
ITB Color Lift Sensor S23 2 8 2 8 K_TR1_CNTACT_SNS_P +5V
CN066
CN062
YMC_TR1_CNTACT_SN_P K_TR1_CNTACT_SNS_P B7 B10 B7 10 7 3
1 9 1 9 10 9 10 9 12 9
CN513
GND
CN905
ITB Color Lift Sensor:+5VL BELT_DR_REV_SNS:LED BELT_DR_REV_SNS:LED B8 B9 B8 9 8 2
4
3
1
2
4
3
10
11
Belt Speed Sensor:LED BELT_DR_REV_SNS_P 9
8
10
11
9
8
10
11
11
10
10
11
BELT_DR_REV_SNS_P HIGH_LIMIT_SNS2_P
+5V B9 B8 B9 8 9 1 S50 Tray Lift Sensor 2
Belt Speed Sensor S24 Belt Speed Sensor:GND Belt Centering Sensor:Sample Hold BELT_SKEW_SN_SH_P
CN529
2 3 2 12 7 12 7 12 9 12 GND B10 B7 B10 7 10 3
Belt Speed Sensor:P Belt Centering Sensor:P BELT_SKEW_SNS_AN B11 B6 B11 6 11 2
G
1 4 1 13
Belt Speed Sensor:+5VL Belt Centering Sensor:LED
STEERING_ROL_SNS_P
6
5
13
14
6
5
13
14
8
7
13
14
BELT_SKEW_SN_LED_P
STEERING_ROL_SNS_P
LENGTH_P_FD_SNS2_P
+5V B12 B5 B12 5 12 1 S51 Vertical Transport Sensor 2 G
4 15 4 15 6 15 +24V_3C B13 B4 B13 4 13
BELT_CLEANER_SNS_P BELT_CLEANER_SNS_P B14 B3 B14 3 14 2
3 16 3 16 5 16
1 11 1 11 BELT_OVERRUN_SNS2_P BELT_OVERRUN_SNS2_P PICK_UP_SOL2_ON_N
SOL9 Pick-up Solenoid 2
JCN
ITBCleanerBLM:+24VINT_3 2 17 2 17 4 17 B15 B2 B15 2 15 1
2 10 2 10 ITB Motor Rotation Sensor 1:P BELT_DR_REV_SNS1_P +24V_3C
ITBCleanerBLM:+24VINT_3 1 18 1 18 3 18 PRESSURE_SOL2_ON_N B16 B1 B16 1 16
3 9 3 9 ITB Motor Rotation Sensor 2:P BELT_DR_REV_SNS2_P
JCN
ITBCleanerBLM:GND 19 2 19
4 8 4 8 N.C. 2
CN308
ITBCleanerBLM:GND 20 1 20
SOL10 Separation Roller Solenoid 2
JCN
5 7 5 7 N.C. 1
BELT_CLNR_M_TRG_N 1 20 21 40 21
CN538
6 6 6 6 GND
ITB Cleaning Motor M43 BELT_CLNR_M_LOCK_P 19 1 19 2 19 22 39 22
CN514
7 5 7 5 TM_SNS_F_AN
ITBCleanerBLM:CLK 18 2 18 3 18 23 38 23 1 2
8 4 8 4 TM_SNS_C_AN
9 3 9 3
ITBCleanerBLM:CW/CCW
BELT_CLNR_M_GAIN_P
17
16
3
4
17
16
4
5
17
16
24
25
37
36
24
25
TMS_LED_R_ON_N
1ST_TRY_LFT_M_OUTA
1ST_TRY_LFT_M_OUTXA 2
3
1 M46 1st Tray Lift Motor
10 2 10 2 TMS_LED_F_ON_N 2ND_TRAY_PAP_RMN1_P
ITB Unit:GND 15 5 15 6 15 26 35 26 4 5
11 1 11 1 TMS_LED_C_ON_N GND
ITB Unit:+5V 14 6 14 7 14 27 34 27 5 4
TMS_LED_R_ON_N 2ND_TRAY_PAP_RMN2_P
M47 2nd Tray Lift Motor
CN061P ITB DrawerB 60P
CN061J ITB DrawerB 60P
13 7 13 8 13 28 33 28 6 3
TP_SNS_C_IRR_AN 2ND_TRY_LFT_M_OUTA
H
12
11
8
9
12
11 10
9 12
11
29
30
32
31
29
30
TP_SNS_M_IRR_AN 2ND_TRY_LFT_M_OUTXA 7
8
2
1 H
CN068
CN521
CN064
TP_SNS_Y_IRR_AN +24V_3C
CN323
10 10 10 11 10 31 30 31 9
S25 9 11 9 12 9 32 29 32
TP_SNS_K_REG_AN
TP_SNS_C_REG_AN
L_TRY_LCK_SOL_ON_N
+24V_3C 10 2
SOL11 Left Tray Lock Solenoid
JCN
8 12 8 13 8 33 28 33 11 1
TP_SNS_M_REG_AN JOINT_RLS_SOL_ON_N
ID/MUSIC Sensors 7
6
13
14
7
6
14
15
7
6
34
35
27
26
34
35
TP_SNS_Y_REG_AN GND 12
13 2
TPS_LED_K_ON_N 2ND_TRAY_SIZE_SN5_P SOL12 Tandem Tray Connect Solenoid
JCN
5 15 5 16 5 36 25 36 14 1
TPS_LED_C_ON_N 2ND_TRAY_SIZE_SN4_P
4 16 4 17 4 37 24 37 15 6 1 6
TPS_LED_M_ON_N 2ND_TRAY_SIZE_SN3_P
3 17 3 18 3 38 23 38 16 5 2 5
2 18 2 19 2 39 22 39
TPS_LED_Y_ON_N 2ND_TRAY_SIZE_SN2_P
17 4 3 4 S52
JCN
GND 2ND_TRAY_SIZE_SN1_P
1 19 1 20 1 40 21 40
+5V 3
2
4
5
3
2 AW500010A 2nd Tray Paper Size Switch
1 6 1
Transfer HVPS B12
B11
I Image transfer:GND
1ST_TR_PP_K-AN
B10
B9
1
2
10
9
1
2
12
11
1
2
GND
1ST_TR_PP_K-AN
GRIP1_M_OUTA
+24V_3B
1
2
3
6
5
4 I
JCN
1ST_TR_PP_C-AN B8 3 8 3 10 3
1ST_TR_PP_C-AN GRIP1_M_OUTXA
M48 1st Grip Motor
CN326
4 3
HVPS1 1ST_TR_PP_M-AN B7 4 7 4 9 4 GRIP1_M_OUTB
1ST_TR_PP_M-AN 5 2
1ST_TR_PP_Y-AN B6 5 6 5 8 5 +24V_3B
1ST_TR_PP_Y-AN 6 1
2ND_TR_PP-AN B5 6 5 6 7 6 GRIP1_M_OUTXB
2ND_TR_PP-AN
CN069
CN065
B4 7 4 7 6 7
N.C. A1 6
1ST_TR_PP_K_ALM-P B3 8 3 8 5 8 GRIP2_M_OUTA
T1 Paper Trasfer Roller 1ST_TR_PWM_K-P B2 9 2 9 4 9
1ST_TR_PP_K_ALM-P
1ST_TR_PWM_K-P +24V_3B A2
A3
5
4
ACDriver Relay CN606 to Tray Heater
JCN
B1 10 1 10 3 10 GRIP2_M_OUTXA
M49 Vertical Relay Motor
JCN
1ST_TR_PP_C_ALM-P 1ST_TR_PP_C_ALM-P A4 3
11 2 11 GRIP1_M_OUTB
N.C. A5 2
12 1 12 +24V_3B CN606-1 CN1 -1 Dry heater(H)
K Image Trasfer(K) 1ST_TR_PWM_C-P A12
A11
1
2
12
11
13
14
24
23
13
14 CN336
N.C.
1ST_TR_PWM_C-P GRIP2_M_OUTXB
GRIP3_M_OUTA
A6
A7
1
6 -5 -2 Dry Heater(N)
1ST_TR_PP_M_ALM-P -2 CN2 -1
CN790
1ST_TR_PP_M_ALM-P A8 5 Dry Heater(H)
A10 3 10 15 22 15 +24V_3B
J C Image Trasfer(C)
1ST_TR_PWM_M-P 1ST_TR_PWM_M-P A9 4 -6 -2 Dry Heater(N)
JCN
1ST_TR_PP_Y_ALM-P
1ST_TR_PWM_Y-P
A9
A8
4
5
9
8
16
17
21
20
16
17
1ST_TR_PP_Y_ALM-P
1ST_TR_PP_Y_ALM-P
GRIP3_M_OUTXA
GRIP3_M_OUTB A10
A11
3
2
M50 2nd Grip Motor J
A7 6 8 18 19 18
CN327
2ND_TR_PP_ALM-P +24V_3B
A6 7 6 19 18 19
2ND_TR_PP_ALM-P
GRIP3_M_OUTXB A12 1 CN1
M Image Trasfer(M) 2ND_TR_PP_ALM-P
A5 8 5 20 17 20
2ND_TR_PWM-P B1 6 1
H1
CN067
CN063
FEED1_M_OUTA
Image Transfer:GND A4 9 4 21 16 21
N.C.
2ND_TR_PP_ALM-P 1st Paper Feed Motor:+24V B2
B3
5
4
1
2
2 Tray Heater
JCN
Y Image Transfer(Y)
Image Transfer:GND
Image Transfer:+24VINT
A3
A2
10
11
3
2
22
23
15
14
22
23
GND
GND
FEED1_M_OUTXA
FEED1_M_OUTB B4
B5
3
2
M51 1st Paper Feed Motor To CN606
5
CN2
1
Image Transfer:+24VINT A1 12 1 24 13 24
+24VINTA 1st Paper Feed Motor:+24V
FEED1_M_OUTXB B6
B7
1
6
6 2 H2 UVTray Heater
FEED2_M_OUTA
2nd Paper Feed Motor:+24V B8 5
IOB2 B9 4
M52 2nd Paper Feed Motor
JCN
FEED2_M_OUTXA
FEED2_M_OUTB B10 3
B11 2
(PCB5) 2nd Paper Feed Motor:+24V
FEED2_M_OUTB B12 1
K K
D095/M077 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (4/9)
L L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A 2
3
4
S71 Potential Sensor Board Drum Potential Sensor Y A
Temperature/Humidity Sensor Y Temperature/Humidity Sensor: Laser CH1:COMMON 1
2
1
2
4 1 12 1 1 7 1 7 CH1:SIGNAL IN
TEMP_SNS_Y_AN 1 +24V_2AINT +24V+24V CH1:OFFSET 3 3
S52
3
2
2
3
11
10
2
3
GND
HUMI_SNS_Y_AN
2
GND
SHV_SNS_Y_AN
GND 2
3
6
5
2
3
6
5
GND CH1:VD2 4
5
4
5
S72
3 GND
CN258
1 4 9 4 GND CH1:VD1
CN24
SHV_SNS_M_AN 4 4 4 4 6 6
CN1
+5V 4 SHV_SNS_Y_AN SHV_SNS_Y_AN CH1:V+
1 4 5 8 5 SHV_SNS_C_AN 5 3 5 3 7
TEMP_SNS_OPT_AN 5 SHV_SNS_M_AN SHV_SNS_M_AN -
6 7 (Sensor Output Monitor)
CN272
2 3 6 SHV_SNS_K_AN 6 2 6 2 8
GND
Drum Potential Sensor M
JCN
6 SHV_SNS_C_AN SHV_SNS_C_AN
CN17
3 2 7 6 7 GND 7 1 7 1 -
HUMI_SNS_OPT_AN 7 SHV_SNS_K_AN SHV_SNS_K_AN 9
CN2
4 1 8 5 8 TNR_CNTRL_SNS_Y_AN2 -
CN261
+5V 8 CH2:COMMON 10 1
4 1 4 9 4 9 TNR_CNTRL_SNS_M_AN2 11 2
TEMP_SNS_K_AN 9 CH2:SIGNAL IN
3 2 3 10 3 10 TNR_CNTRL_SNS_C_AN2 12 3
GND
JCN
Temperature/Humidity Sensor: Rear Bottom S53 2 3 2 11 2 11 10
TNR_CNTRL_SNS_K_AN2 +24V A1 10 1 2 CH2:OFFSET
S73
B 1
4
4
1
1
4
12 1 12
13
HUMI_SNS_K_AN
+5V
TEMP_SNS_TR_AN
1
2
Reserve Motor_A
LED_ERS_Y_ON_N
GND
A2
A3
9
8
2
3
1
3
CH2:VD2
CH2:VD1
13
14
15
4
5
6
B
A4 7 4 2 CH2:V+
Temperature/Humidity Sensor K S54
3 2 3 14
GND 3
+24V Y_CHCL_HP_SNS_P S76 Charge Cleaning Unit HP Sensor Y
JCN
2 3 2 15 Reserve Motor_XA A5 6 5 1
CN271
HUMI_SNS_TR_AN 4 +5V
Drum Potential Sensor C
CN12
(STM Sub) A6 5 6 2
1 4 1 16
+5V 5
Reserve Motor_B
+24V
+24V_4A
LED_ERS_M_ON_N A7 4 7 1 Development CK Fan 1 1
6 A8 3 8 3 6 1 3 1 CH3:COMMON
Reserve Motor_XB GND 2 2
A9 2 9 2 5 2 2 2 CH3:SIGNAL IN
M57
CN38
Development Roller Rotation Sensor C M_CHCL_HP_SNS_P S77 Charge Cleaning Unit HP Sensor M 3 3
Development Unit C
A10 1 10 1 4 3 1 3 CH3:OFFSET
1 1
S74
CN45
1 6 1 +5V CH3:VD2 4 4
1 2 2 1 13 A1 +24V_4B A11 3 1 3 4 3
+5V Registration Fan 2 5 2
DEV_CK_CL_FAN_ALM_P +24V
A12 2 2 2 5 2 P6/8(K6) CH3:VD1 5 5
CN047P Development Unit C 16P
CN047J Development Unit C 16P
2 3 3 2 12 A2
JCN
3 4 3 6 6
S55 C_MGR_REV_SNS_N DEV_CK_CL_FAN _ON_P YM_OPT_FAN_ALM_P
A13 1 3 1 6 1 MY OPT CH3:V+
JCN
CN251
3 4 4 3 11 A3 1 3 4 3 4 OPT_FAN_ON_N 7
5 5 GND +24V_4B B1 13 1 10 1 2 To FAN -
4 10 A4
M58 2 2 5 2 5 +24V_4A 8 Drum Potential Sensor K
JCN
DEV_C_CNCT_N
CN3
6 6 5 9 A5 REG_COOL_FAN_ALM_P B2 12 2 9 2 1 -
GND 3 1 6 1 6 LED_ERS_C_ON_N LED CH4:COMMON 9 1
7 7 6 8 A6 REG_COOL_FAN _ON_P B3 11 3 8 3 3
DEV_C_CLR_ID_B0_N 9 7 GND CH4:SIGNAL IN 10 2
+24V B4 10 4 7 4 2
S78 Charge Cleaning Unit HP Sensor C
CN23
C
10 10 7 7 A7
GND 8 8
HR_FAN1_ALM_P1 C_CHCL_HP_SNS_P
B5 9 5 6 5 1 CH4:OFFSET 11 3
C
CN270
11 8 6 A8
11 DEV_C_CLR_ID_B1_N 7 9 +5V 12 4 S75
CN44
CN14
1 12 9 5 A9 HR_FAN_ON_P B6 8 6 5 6 2 CH4:VD2
12 GND P1/8(B6) 6 10 +24V_4A 13 5
CH4:VD1
TD Sensor C S56
2
3
13
14
13
14
10
11
4
3
A10
A11
TNR_SNS_REF_C_AN
TSNS_VCC
CN045
To Fusing Exhaust Fan 1
5
4
11
12
+24V
HR_FAN2_ALM_P1
HR_FAN_ON_P
LED_ERS_K_ON_N LED
GND
B7
B8
B9
7
6
5
7
8
9
4
3
2
7
8
9
1
3
2
(PCB11) CH4:V+ 14 6
1 2
4
1
15
8
15
8
12
13
2
1
A12
A13
TNR_CNTRL_SNS_C_AN
GND
3
2
13
14
+24V K_CHCL_HP_SNS_P
+5V B10 4 10 1 10 1 S79 Charge Cleaning Unit HP Sensor K
LED3 HR_FAN3_ALM_P1 B11 3 11 3
JCN
2 1 2 16 16 A14 1 15 +24V_4A
N.C. P6/8(K7)
CN
9 9 HR_FAN_ON_P B12 2 12 2
CK_OPT_FAN_ALM_P
B13 1 13 1 KC OPT
Quenching Lamp C FG 1 7 A1
OPT_FAN_ON_N
To FAN
FG +24VINT_1AINT
CN234
Development Roller Rotation Sensor K 1 1
2 6 A2
+24VINT_1AINT +5V A1 11
CN45 To MY OPT Laser Unit Fan CN32
Development Unit M Development Unit Y Development Unit K
3 5 A2 10
1 2 2 1 13 B1 4 4 A3 GND CN44 To KC OPT Laser Unit Fan CN15
+5V Y_CCM_PH_A A3 9
JCN
CN046P Development Unit K 16P
3 3 C_DRUM_CLN_M_GH_P
2 2 12
Charge Unit Cleaning Motor Y M59
CN046J Development Unit K 16P
B2
S57 3 4 4 3 11 B3
K_MGR_REV_SNS_N 5 3 A4
Y_CCM_PH_XA C_DRUM_CLN_M_CW_P A4 8 CN45-4 CN32-3 +24V_4A
D 5
6
5
6
4
5
10
9
B4
B5
GND
DEV_K_CNCT_N
6
7
1
2
1
7
A5
A6
A7
Y_CCM_PH_B
Y_CCM_PH_XB
C_DRUM_CLN_M_CLK_P
C_DRUM_CLN_M_RDY_N
A5
A6
7
6
M67 Drum Cleaning Motor C
-5
-6
-2
-1
YM_OPT_FAN_ALM_P
OPT_FAN_ON_N
D
GND +24VINT_1AINT C_DRUM_CLN_M_TRG_N A7 5
7 7 6 8 B6 2 6 A8 A8 4 CN44-11 CN15-3 +24V_4A
DEV_K_CLR_ID_B0_N +24VINT_1AINT
CN22
10 10 7 7 B7 3 5 GND
11 11 GND GND A9 3 -12 -2 CK_OPT_FAN_ALM
8 6 B8 4 4 A9 A10 2
DEV_K_CLR_ID_B1_N M_CCM_PH_A -13 -1
JCN
1 12 12 +24VINT_2AINT OPT_FAN_ON_N
2 13 13
9
10
5
4
B9
B10
GND Charge Unit Cleaning Motor M M60 5 3 A10
M_CCM_PH_XA +24VINT_2AINT A11 1
TD Sensor K S58 14 14 TNR_SNS_REF_K_AN 6 2 A11
M_CCM_PH_B C_DCLN_SET_SNS_N A12 2 1 2
3 11 3 B11
SW8 Drum Cleaning Unit Set SW C
JCN
TSNS_VCC 7 1 A12 A13 1 2 1
CN236
4 15 15 12 2 B12 M_CCM_PH_XB GND
TNR_CNTRL_SNS_K_AN 1 7 B1 A14
1 2 1 8 8 13 1 B13 +24V_1AINT
2 6 B2
CN256
GND
JCN
LED4 2 1 2 16 16 2 1 B14
N.C. 3 5
+24V_1AINT
B1 11
CN
9 9 1 2 4 4 B3 +5V
B2 10
Quenching Lamp K C_CCM_PH_A
JCN
FG Charge UnitCleaning Motor C M61 5 3 B4
C_CCM_PH_XA
GND
K_DRUM_CLN_M_GH_P B3 9
6 2 B5 B4 8
FG C_CCM_PH_B K_DRUM_CLN_M_CW_P
Development Roller Rotation Sensor Y 1 1
7 1 B6
C_CCM_PH_XB K_DRUM_CLN_M_CLK_P B5 7
E
E 1 2 2 1 13 A1
+5V
1
2
7
6
B7
B8
+24VINT_1AINT K_DRUM_CLN_M_RDY_N B6
B7
6
5 M68 Drum Cleaning Motor K
CN049P Development Unit Y 16P
2 3 3 2 12 A2 +24VINT_1AINT K_DRUM_CLN_M_TRG_N
CN049J Development Unit Y 16P
S59 3 4 4 3 11 A3
Y_MGR_REV_SNS_N
GND
3
4
5
4 B9 GND B8
B9
4
3
K_CCM_PH_A
JCN
5 5
6 6
4
5
10
9
A4
A5
DEV_Y_CNCT_N
GND
Charge Unit Cleaning Motor K M62 5
6
3
2
B10
B11
K_CCM_PH_XA
GND
+24VINT B10 2
FG 7 7 6 8 A6 K_CCM_PH_B +24VINT_2AINT B11 1
DEV_Y_CLR_ID_B0_N 7 1 B12 B12 2 1 2
10 10 7 7 A7 K_CCM_PH_XB K_DCLN_SET_SNS_N
CN25
SW9 Drum Cleaning Unit Set SW K
JCN
11 11 GND B13 1 2 1
8 6 A8 GND
12 12 DEV_Y_CLR_ID_B1_N B14
1 9 5 A9 N.C
13 13 GND 1 6 A1
2 10 4 A10 Y_DRUM_M_PH_A
TNR_SNS_REF_Y_AN
TD Sensor Y S60 3 14 14 11 3 A11
TSNS_VCC
2
3
5
4
A2
A3
+24VINT_1AINT +5V A1 11
JCN
4 15 15 12 2 A12 Y_DRUM_M_PH_XA A2 10
1 2 1 8 8 13 1 A13
TNR_CNTRL_SNS_Y_AN
GND
Drum Unit Y M63 4 3 A4
Y_DRUM_M_PH_B
GND
Y_DRUM_CLN_M_GH_P A3 9
5 2 A5
LED1
JCN
2 1 2 16 16 2 1 +24VINT_1AINT A4 8
CN
9 9 1 2 6 1 A6 Y_DRUM_CLN_M_CW_P
Y_DRUM_M_PH_XB Y_DRUM_CLN_M_CLK_P A5 7
1 6 A7
F Quenching Lamp Y FG 2 5 A8
M_DRUM_M_PH_A Y_DRUM_CLN_M_RDY_N A6 6
M69 Drum Cleaning Motor Y
+24VINT_1AINT A7 5
F
CN235
3 4 A9 Y_DRUM_CLN_M_TRG_N
FG
JCN
Development Roller Rotation Sensor M 1 1 Drum Unit M M64 4 3 A10
M_DRUM_M_PH_XA
M_DRUM_M_PH_B
GND A8
A9
4
3
1 2 2 1 13 B1
+5V
5
6
2
1
A11
A12
+24VINT_1AINT
GND
+24VINT A10 2 CGB HVPS-Y
CN048P Development Unit M 16P
CN048J Development Unit M 16P
2 3 3 2 12 B2
CN237
S61 3 4 4 3 11 B3
M_MGR_REV_SNS_N
GND 1 6
A13
B1
M_DRUM_M_PH_XB
N.C.
+24VINT
Y_DCLN_SET_SNS_N
A11
A12 2 1
1
2
A1
A2
15
14
GND
PP_ALM_B_Y_P
5 5 4 10 B4
SW10 Drum Cleaning Unit Set SW Y
JCN
C_DRUM_M_PH_A A13 1 2 1
CN257
DEV_M_CNCT_N GND A3 13
FG
6
7
6
7
5 9 B5
GND
2
3
5
4
B2
B3
+24VINT_1AINT A4 12
PWM_PP_B_Y_P
PP_ALM_G_Y_P
CN3 C
JCN
6 8 B6 C_DRUM_M_PH_XA
10 10 7 7 B7
DEV_M_CLR_ID_B0_N
GND
Drum Unit C M65 4
5
3
2
B4
B5
C_DRUM_M_PH_B +5V B1 11
A5
A6
11
10
PWM_PP_G_Y_P
11 11 8 6 B8 PP_ALM_C_Y_P 1
CN24
B2 10
1 12 12 9 5 B9
DEV_M_CLR_ID_B1_N
GND
6 1 B6
+24VINT_1AINT
C_DRUM_M_PH_XB
GND
M_DRUM_CLN_M_GH_P B3 9
A7
A8
9
8
PWM_PP_C_Y_P Y: GRID
N.C 2 G
2 13 13 10 4 B10 1 6 B7 GND 3
TNR_SNS_REF_M_AN K_DRUM_M_PH_A B4 8 A9 7 N.C
S62 3 14 14 11 3 B11 2 5 B8 M_DRUM_CLN_M_CW_P GND 4
CN4
TSNS_VCC +24VINT_1AINT B5 7 A10 6 N.C
TD Sensor M 15 15 3 4 B9 M_DRUM_CLN_M_CLK_P +24VINT 5
JCN
4 12 2 B12
G 8 TNR_CNTRL_SNS_M Drum Unit K M66 4 3 B10
K_DRUM_M_PH_XA M_DRUM_CLN_M_RDY_N B6 6
M70 Drum Cleaning Motor M A11 5
+24VINT N.C
G
CN
1 2 1 8 13 1 B13 K_DRUM_M_PH_B B7 5 4 N.C 6
GND M_DRUM_CLN_M_TRG_N
JCN
5 2 B11
LED2 2 1 2 16 16 2 1 +24VINT_1AINT B8 4 3
N.C
Y HVPS BIAS 7
B
CN
9 9 1 6 1 B12 GND N.C
2 K_DRUM_M_PH_XB B9 3
Quenching Lamp M FG
1
2
3
PCL••••_Y:+24V_1BINT
PCL••••_Y:••••••••
B13
N.C.
GND
+24VINT_2AINT
+24VINT_2AINT
B10
B11
2
1
2
1 HVPS2
N.C
N.C
FG PCL••••_M:+24V_1BINT B12 2 1 2
CN280
4 A1 M_DCLN_SET_SNS_N
Y_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XA
SW11 Drum Cleaning UnitSet SW M CGB HVPS-M
JCN
PCL••••_M:•••••••• A2 B13 1 2 1
1 5 Y_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XB GND
P1/8(I6) PCL••••_C:+24V_1BINT P6/8(B6) A3
2 6 +24V_4A N.C B1 15
Rear Controller Box U CN036 PCL••••_C:•••••••• GND
MY ADJ Motor Relay
CN531J
3 7 A4 B2 14
PCL••••_K:+24V_1BINT Y_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_B PP_ALM_B_M_P
4 To Relay CN531P 8 To CN488 A5 A1 CGB HVPS-Y -15 B3 13
PCL••••_K:+24V_1BINT Y_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_A Y_BTL GND
A6
A7
M_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XA PP_ALM_B_Y_P A2 14 B4 12
PWM_PP_B_M_P
PP_ALM_G_M_P
CN3 C
M_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XB PWM_PP_B_Y_P A3 13 B5 11
A8 A4 12 PWM_PP_G_M_P
+24V_4A B6 10
Development Motor Y A9
A10
M_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_B
PP_ALM_G_Y_P
PWM_PP_G_Y_P A5 11 B7 9
PP_ALM_C_M_P
PWM_PP_C_M_P M HVPS GRID 1
2 G
H M_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_A PP_ALM_C_Y_P A6 10 B8 8
GND N.C
H
CN17
B1 A7 9 B9 7 3
CN238
Y_DEV_M_CLK_P 3 C_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XA PWM_PP_C_Y_P GND N.C
M53 B2 4
CN4
1 2 C_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XB GND A8 8 B10 6 N.C
P6/8(B10)
CN8
+24V Y_DEV_M_RDY_N B3 A9 7 +24VINTA 5
2 1 +24V_4A GND B11 5 N.C
GND Y_DEV_M_TRG_N +24VINTA
CN
KC ADJ Motor Relay B4
C_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_B +24VINTA A10 6 4 N.C 6
To CN478 B5 N.C 7
A11 5
B
CN248
C_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_A +24VINTA 3 M HVPS BIAS
1 B6 N.C
Development Motor M 2
Y_DEV_M_CLK_P
Y_DEV_M_RDY_N B7
K_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XA
K_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XB
GND B1
B2
CGB HVPS-M -15
14
2
1 HVPS3
N.C
3 B8 PP_ALM_B_M_P N.C
Y_DEV_M_TRG_N B3 13
CN18
3 4 +24V_4A PWM_PP_B_M_P
B9
1 M54 M_DEV_M_CLK_P
2 5
M_DEV_M_CLK_P K_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_B PP_ALM_G_M_P B4 12
B10 B5 11
CGB HVPS-C
CN7
+24V M_DEV_M_RDY_N Y_DEV_M_RDY_N K_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_A PWM_PP_G_M_P
2 1 6 B6 10
GND M_DEV_M_TRG_N M_DEV_M_TRG_N PP_ALM_C_M_P
7 B7 9 A1 13 1 15
C_DEV_M_CLK_P GND
CN262
8 PWM_PP_C_M_P A2 12 2 14
C_DEV_M_RDY_N GND B8 8 PP_ALM_B_C_P
Development Motor C 9
10
C_DEV_M_TRG_N GND B9 7 A3
A4
11
10
3
4
13
12
PWM_PP_B_C_P CN3 C
K_DEV_M_CLK_P CN238 to OPT ADJ Motor CN488,CN478 B10 6 PP_ALM_G_C_P
I 11 +24VINTA A5 7 5 11
CN19
1
M55 C_DEV_M_CLK_P 3
2
12
K_DEV_M_RDY_N
K_DEV_M_TRG_N
CN238-A1 CN488-10 Y_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XA GND B11 5
A6 8 6 10
PWM_PP_G_C_P
PP_ALM_C_C_P 1 I
CN10
G
CN6
+24V_4B C_DEV_M_RDY_N -A2 " -9 Y_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XB A7 7 7 9 YC HVPS GRID
2 1 A1 13 PWM_PP_C_C_P 2
GND C_DEV_M_TRG_N GND A8 6 8 8 N.C
-A3 " -8 +24V_4A PP_ALM_B_C_P A2 12 A9 5 9 7
GND
N.C 3
" -A4 " -7 A3 11 GND 4
CN4
Y_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_B PWM_PP_B_C_P A10 4 10 6 N.C
Development Motor K " -A5 " -6 Y_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_A PP_ALM_G_C_P A4
A5
10
7
A11 3 11 5
+24VINTA
+24VINTA N.C 5
CN
PWM_PP_G_C_P 2 12 4 N.C 6
" -A6 " -5 M_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XA
M56 A6 8 N.C
CN20
7
K_DEV_M_CLK_P 3
" -A7 " -4 M_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XB
PP_ALM_C_C_P
A7 7
1 13 3
N.C Y HVPS BIAS
C B
1 2 PWM_PP_C_C_P 2
HVPS4
CN5
K_DEV Motor:+24V K_DEV_M_RDY_N " -A8 " -3 +24V_4A A8 6 N.C
2 1 GND 1
GND K_DEV_M_TRG_N A9 5 N.C
-A9 " -2 GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
M_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_B A10 4
+24VINTA
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN -A10 " -1 M_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_A A11 3
CN " -B1 CN478-10 C_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XA
+24VINTA
N.C A12
B1 11 1 15
CGB HVPS-K
CN249
" -B2 " -9
J 3
2
" -B3 " -8
C_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XB
+24V_4A
GND
PP_ALM_B_K_P B2
B3
10
9
2
3
14
13
GND
PP_ALM_B_K_P
J
Drum Rotation Sensor Y-1 S63 1 1 3 A1
GND
" -B4 " -7 C_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_B PWM_PP_B_K_P
PP_ALM_G_K_P B4 8 4 12
PWM_PP_B_K_
PP_ALM_G_K_P
CN3 C
2 2 A2 " -B5 " -6 C_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_A B5 7 5 11
JCN
3 Y_DRUM_REV_SNS1_N PWM_PP_G_K_P PWM_PP_G_K_P G
2 3 1 A3 " -B6 " -5 B6 6 6 10
Drum Rotation Sensor Y-2 S64 1 3 A4
+5V K_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XA PP_ALM_C_K_P PP_ALM_C_K_P 1
CN11
1
2 2 A5
GND " -B7 " -4 K_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_XB PWM_PP_C_K_P B7 5 7 9
PWM_PP_C_K_P K HVPS GRID
2 G
CN531 To PSU-EB RelayCN036 B8 4 8 8 N.C
JCN
Y_DRUM_REV_SNS2_N " -B8 " -3 +24V_4A GND GND 3
3 1 A6 B9 3 9 7 N.C
+5V GND GND 4
CN036 -1
CN4
CN531-1 +24V DEVM 3 1 3 A7
GND " -B9 " -2 K_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_B +24VINTA B10 2 10 6
+24VINTA N.C
2 2 2 A8 5
-2 -2 +24V DEVM Drum Rotation Sensor M-1 S65 -B10 " -1 B11 1 11 5 N.C
JCN
M_DRUM_REV_SNS1_N K_BTL_ADJ_M_PH_A +24VINTA +24VINTA
CN
1 3 1 A9 B12 4 N.C 6
-3 -5 GND
3 1 3 A10
+5V N.C N.C 7
-4 -6 GND 2 2 2 A11
GND A1 3 1
3
N.C K HVPS BIAS B
Drum Rotation Sensor M-2 S66 2
HVPS5
JCN
M_DRUM_REV_SNS2_N A2 2 2 N.C
1 3 1 A12 +24V_4B
M71 Development Fan Y
JCN
+5V 1
3 1 3 B1 Y_DEV_FAN_ALM_P A3 1 3 N.C
CN263
GND
K IOB1 CN270 To Fusing Exhaust Fan Relay CN045 Drum Rotation Sensor C-1 S67 2 2 2 B2 Y_DEV_FAN_ON_N A4
JCN
CN270-7 CN045-9 +24V_4B
1
3
3
1
1
3
B3
B4
C_DRUM_REV_SNS1_N
+5V
GND
Y_DEV_FAN_HI_N
+24V_4B
A5
A6
3
2
1
2
K
M72 Development Fan M
JCN
-8 -8 HR_FAN1_ALM_P1 2 2 2 B5 M_DEV_FAN_ALM_P
Drum Rotation Sensor C-2 S68
JCN
C_DRUM_REV_SNS2_N A7 1 3
-9 -7 1 3 1 B6 M_DEV_FAN_ON_N
-10 -6
HR_FAN_ON_P
+24V_4B
1 3 B7
+5V
GND IOB1 (2/3) M_DEV_FAN_HI_N
A8
D095/M077 POINT TO POINT
CN243
2 2 B8 +24V_4B B1 3 1
JCN
-11 -5 HR_FAN2_ALM_P1 3 K_DRUM_REV_SNS1_N C_DEV_FAN_ALM_P
3 1 B9
(PCB4) B2 2 2
M73 Development Fan C
JCN
2 +5V
-12
-13
-4
-3
HR_FAN_ON_P Drum Rotation Sensor K-1 S69 1
1
2
3
2
B10
B11
GND
C_DEV_FAN_ON_N
C_DEV_FAN_HI_N
B3 1 3
JCN
+24V_4B K_DRUM_REV_SNS2_N
-14
-15
-2
-1
HR_FAN3_ALM_P1
HR_FAN_ON_P Drum Rotation Sensor K-2 S70
3
2
1
3 1 B12
+5V
+24_4B
K_DEV_FAN_ALM_P
K_DEV_FAN_ON_N
B4
B5
B6
3
2
1
2
M74 Development Fan K
DIAGRAM (5/9)
JCN
K_DEV_FAN_HI_N B7 1 3
L B8
L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Sub-Hopper Unit
A A
Toner Supply Clutch K
Toner Pump Clutch C
Toner Pump Clutch Y
Toner Supply Clutch Y
Toner Supply Clutch C
Toner Supply Clutch M
Toner Pump Clutch M
Toner Pump Clutch K
Registration Unit 13 1
3 1 3 1 3 1 A1 12 2 6 1
GND +24V_2BINT
2 2 2 2 2 2
Toner End Sensor Y S80
CN27
CN34
Y_TNR_EMPTY_SNS_N REG_ENTR_M_OUTA A2 11 3 5 2
1 3 1 3 1 3 3 1 6 1 A3 10 4 4 3
+5V
JCN
3
2
1
2
3
2
4
5
GND Registration Entrance Sensor S84 2 2 5 2
GND
REG_ENTR_SNS_N
REG_ENTR_M_OUTXA
+24V_2BINT A4 9 5 3 4 M80 Registraiotn Entrance Motor
Toner End Sensor M S81 1 3 4 3
CN28
A5 8 6 2 5
CN820
Y_TNR_EMPTY_SNS_N
CN809
+5VL REG_ENTR_M_OUTB
CN822
1 3 1 6 3 1 3 4 3 4 A6 7 7 1 6
+5V
CN260
3 1 3 7 GND REG_ENTR_M_OUTXB
GND LCT Entrance Sensor S85 2 2 2 5 2 5 A7 6 8 6 1
JCN
2 2 2 8 LCT_ENTR_SNS_N REG_TIMING_M_OUTA
Toner End Sensor C S82 1 3 1 6 1 6
CN29
C_TNR_EMPTY_SNS_N A8 5 9 5 2
B MC1 MC2 MC3 MC4 MC5 MC6 MC7 MC8
1 3 1 9
+5V
+5VL +24V_2BINT
A9 4 10 4 3 B
JCN
3
2
1
2
3
2
10
11
GND
REG_TIMING_M_OUTXA
REG_TIMING_M_OUTB A10 3 11 3 4 M81 Registration Timing Motor
Toner End Sensor K S83
CN30
K_TNR_EMPTY_SNS_N +24V_2BINT A11 2 12 2 5
1 3 1 12 A12 1 13 1 6
+5V REG_TIMING_M_OUTXB
B1 12 1 6 1
CN803
+24V_2BINT
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
SHIFT_ROL_M_OUTA B2 11 2 5 2
B3 10 3 4 3
JCN
JCN JCN JCN JCN JCN JCN JCN JCN SHIFT_ROL_M_OUTXA
+24V_2BINT B4
B5
9
8
4
5
3
2
4
5
M82 Shift Roller Unit Motor
SHIFT_ROL_M_OUTB
CN823
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
A1 SHIFT_ROL_M_OUTXB B6 7 6 1 6
+24V_4A B7 6 7 6 1
A2 GATE_RTR_M_OUTA
Y_TNR_PMP_CLT_ON_N B8 5 8 5 2
A3 +24V_2BINT
+24V_4A TXD_RCB A1 A20 A1 20 1 A20 B9 4 9 4 3
A4 RXD_IOB1
JCN
A5
M_TNR_PMP_CLT_ON_N
+24V_4A
GND
RXD_RCB
A2
A3
A19
A18
A2
A3
19
18
2
3
A19
A18
GND
GATE_RTR_M_OUTXA
GATE_RTR_M_OUTB B10
B11
3
2
10
11
3
2
4
5
M83 Registration Gate Motor
A6 TXD_IOB1 +24V_2BINT
C_TNR_PMP_CLT_ON_N A4 A17 A4 17 4 A17 B12 1 12 1 6
C
A7
A8
A9
+24V_4A
K_TNR_PMP_CLT_ON_N
GND
+5VL
+5VL
A5
A6
A16
A15
A5
A6
16
15
5
6
A16
A15
GND
+5VL
+5VL
GATE_RTR_M_OUTXB
14
13
1
2
C
+24V_4A REG_UNIT_SET_N A7 A14 A7 14 7 A14 A1 12 3 6 1
A10 REG_UNIT_SET_N +24V_2BINT
Y_TNR_FEED_CLT_ON_N GND A8 A13 A9 13 8 A13 A2 11 4 5 2
A11 GND TR_TIMING_M_OUTA
+24V_4A +5V A9 A12 A9 12 9 A12 A3 10 5 4 3
A12 +5V
JCN
A13
M_TNR_FEED_CLT_ON_N
+24V_4A
+5V
REG_ENTR_M_CLK_P
A10
A11
A11
A10
A10
A11
11
10
10
11
A11
A10
+5V
TR_TIMING_M_OUTXA
+24V_2BINT A4
A5
9
8
6
7
3
2
4
5
M84 PTR Timing Motor
CN073
CN077
A14 REG_TIMING_M_CLK_P TR_TIMING_M_OUTB
CN824
C_TNR_FEED_CLT_ON_N REG_TIMING_M_CLK_P A12 A9 A12 9 12 A9 A6 7 8 1 6
A15 REG_TIMING_M_CLK_P TR_TIMING_M_OUTXB
+24V_4A SHIFT_ROL_M_CLK_P A13 A8 A13 8 13 A8 A7 6 9 6 1
A16 SHIFT_ROL_M_CLK_P +24V_2BINT
K_TNR_FEED_CLT_ON_N UNIT_SHIFT_M_CCW_P A14 A7 A14 7 14 A7 A8 5 10 5 2
A17 UNIT_SHIFT_M_CCW_P RETURN2_M_OUTA
N.C RETURN2_M_CLK_P A15 A6 A15 6 15 A6 A9 4 11 4 3
RETURN2_M_CLK_P
JCN
GND
GATE_RTR_M_CLK_P
A16
A17
A5
A4
A16
A17
5
4
16
17
A5
A4
GND
RETURN2_M_OUTXA
+24V_2BINT A10
A11
3
2
12
13
3
2
4
5
M85 Duplex Transport Motor 2
B1 GATE_RTR_M_CLK_P RETURN2_M_OUTB
CN648J/P B2
Y_TNR_BTL_M_ON_N UNIT_SHIFT_M_CLK_P A18 A3 A18 3 19 A3
UNIT_SHIFT_M_CLK_P A12 1 14 1 6
RETURN2_M_OUTXB
CN239
1 1 1 +24VINT_THCA A19 A2 A19 2 19 A2
D Toner Hopper Door Switch SW12 2 2 2
B3
B4
M_TNR_BTL_M_ON_N
TR_TIMING_M_CLK_P
GND A20 A1 A20 1 20 A1
TR_TIMING_M_CLK_P
GND
N.C A13
B1 12 1 6 1 6 1 D
CN804
+24V_2BINT
CN47
+24VINT_THCA B2 11 2 5 2 5 2
CN250
CN801
B5 PTR_RTR_M_OUTA
C_TNR_BTL_M_ON_N CIS_DIN_P B1 B20 B1 18 1 B20 B3 10 3 4 3 4 3
B6 CIS_DIN_P
CN826
JCN
PTR_RTR_M_OUTXA
M86 PTR Lift Motor
Toner Hopper Unit
+24VINT_THCA CIS_SYNC_P1 B2 B19 B2 17 2 B19 B4 9 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 8 B7 CIS_SYNC_P1 +24V_2BINT
K_TNR_BTL_M_ON_N B3 B18 B3 16 3 B18
Toner Bottle Motor Y M75
CN070P Registration Drawer 60P
CN070J Registration Drawer 60P
B8 CIS_CLK_N1 CIS_CLK_N1 B5 8 5 3 5 2 5
JCN
2 1 2 7 PTR_RTR_M_OUTB
CN825
+24VINT_THCA CIS_LED_PWM_P1 B4 B17 B4 15 4 B17 B6 7 6 1 6 1 6
3 6 B9 CIS_LED_PWM_P1 PTR_RTR_M_OUTXB
N.C GND B5 B16 B5 14 5 B16 B7 6 7 6 1
4 5 B10 GND UNIT_SHIFT_M_OUTA
N.C B6 B15 B6 13 6 B15
CN643
5 4 B11 RCB_RST_N RCB_RST_N +24V_2BINT B8 5 8 5 2
1 2 N.C B7 B14 B7 12 7 B14 B9 4 9 4 3
Toner Bottle Motor M M76 B12 RCB_CTRL_N RCB_CTRL_N
JCN
6 3 UNIT_SHIFT_M_OUTXA
M87 Shift Roller Unit Motor
JCN
2 1 N.C B8 B13 B8 11 8 B13 B10 3 10 3 4
7 2 B13 TR_TIMING_SNS_N TR_TIMING_SNS_N UNIT_SHIFT_M_OUTB
N.C IMG_WR_N IMG_WR_N B9 B12 B9 10 9 B12 B11 2 11 2 5
CN071
CN075
8 1 B14 IMG_WR_N IMG_WR_N +24V_2BINT
N.C GND B10 B11 B10 9 10 B11 B12 1 12 1 6
B15 GND UNIT_SHIFT_M_OUTXB
1 2 N.C GATE_RTR_SNS_P B11 B10 B11 8 11 B10 B13
Toner Bottle Motor C M77 B16 GATE_RTR_SNS_P N.C
JCN
2 1 N.C REG_TIMING_SNS_N B12 B9 B12 7 12 B9
B17 REG_TIMING_SNS_N
CN837
N.C B13 B8 B13 6 13 B8
E
UNIT_SHIFT_SNS_P
RETURN_SNS3_N B14 B7 B14 5 14 B7
UNIT_SHIFT_SNS_P
RETURN_SNS3_N REG_ENTR_SOL_ON 1 2 1
SOL13 Registration Entrance Solenoid E
JCN
CN240 B15 B6 B15 4 15 B6 24V 2 1 2
1 2 1 RETURN_SNS4_N RETURN_SNS4_N 3
+24V_4A
Toner Bottle Motor K M78
CN805
B16 B5 B16 3 16 B5 LCT_ENT_SOL_ON
JCN
2 1 2 LCT_ENTR_SNS_N LCT_ENTR_SNS_N 4
+24VINT_THCA B17 B4 B17 2 17 B4 24V CN8271
REG_ENTR_SNS_N REG_ENTR_SNS_N 5 2
B18 B3 B18 1 18 B3 N.C
GND GND SOL14 LCT Entrance Solenoid
JCN
3 1 9 A1 B19 B2 B19 B2 1 2
Y_TBTL_EMPTY_SNS_N N.C N.C
2 2 8 A2
Toner Bottle Empty Sensor Y 1 3 7 A3
GND
+5V
N.C B20 B1 B20 B1
N.C
3 4 6 A4 12 1
M_TBTL_EMPTY_SNS_N 11 2 1 17 1 10
Toner Bottle Empty Sensor M 2 5 5 A5
GND
GND
2 16 2 9
CN025
1 20 1 10 3 20
Not used 1
3
6
7
4
3
A6
A7
+5V +24VINTA
+24VINTA 2 19 2 9 4 19
+24VINTA2
+24VINTA2
5V
PTR_M_M_GH_P 3 15 3 8
C_TBTL_EMPTY_SNS_N 3 18 3 8 5 18 PTR_M_CLK_P 4 14 4 7
2 8 2 A8
Toner Bottle Empty Sensor C GND +24VINTA +24VINTA2 5 13 5 6
CN259
1 9 1 A9 4 17 4 7 6 17 PTR_M_LCK_P
+24VINTA
M88 PTR Motor
CN072
CN076
+5V +24V_2BINT 6 12 6 5
3 1 10 B1 +24VINTA 5 16 5 6 7 16 PTR_M_TRG_P
K_TBTL_EMPTY_SNS_N +24V_2BINT 7 11 7 4
6 15 6 5 8 15
Toner Bottle Empty Sensor K 2 2 9 B2
GND +24VINTA
7 14 7 4 9 14
+24V_2BINT GND
GND 8 10 8 3
CN806
CN829
1 3 8 B3
F 4 7 B4
+5V
RFID:GND
+24VINTA
GND 8 13 8 3 10 13
+24V_2BINT
GND +24VINTA1 9
10
9
8
9
10
2
1
F
CN48
5 6 B5
RFID:+5VL GND 9 12 9 2 11 12
GND +24VINTA1
11 7 11 HVPS6
CN026
6 5 B6 +24VINTA 10 11 10 1 12 11 N.C
+24VINTA1
CN246
CN802
RFID:TXD N.C 12 6 12
6 7 4 B7
RFID:GND RFID:RXD 11 10 11 10 1 10 13 5 13 5 1 5
(PCB12) RFID:+5V 5
4
8
9
3
2
B8
B9
RFID:RST
RFID:GND
+24VINTA
+24VINTA 12 9 12 9 2 9
+24VINTA1
+24VINTA1
24VINTA2
GND 14
15
4
3
14
15
4
3
2
3
4
3
+24VINT
GND
CN1
CN831
CN175
RFID:TXD 10 1 GND 13 8 13 8 3 8 AC_HVS_PWM_AC AC_HVP_PWM_AC
3 GND 16 2 16 2 4 2
RFID:RXD
RFID_RST_N 2
1 10 A1
GND
GND
14
15
7
6
14
15
7
6
4
5
7
6
GND
GND
AC_HVP_PWM_DC
AC_HVP_ALM 17 1 17 1 5 1
AC_HVP_PWM_DC
AC_HVP_ALM_P
T1 D
RFID:GND GND 16 5 16 5 6 5
9 A2
RFID-CPU
GND
CN074
CN078
+5V GND
8 A3 GND 17 4 17 4 7 4
TNR_M_GH_P GND
7 A4 GND 18 3 18 3 8 3 A1 A18 A1 3
1 TNR_M_CLK_P GND GND
RFID_CLK_P 6 A5 19 2 19 2 9 2 A2 A17 A2 2
RFID_CLK_P 2
3 Toner Supply Motor M79 5 A6
TNR_M_RDY_N
TNR_M_TRG_N
GND
GND 20 1 20 1 10 1
GND
GND
REG_TIMING_SNS_N
+5VL A3 A16 A3 1 S86 Registration Timing Sensor
RFID_CLK_P 4 A7 A4 A15 A4 3
G 4 GND GND
G
CN6
RFID_CLK_P 3 A8 A5 A14 A5 2
RFID:ANTB:+5V 5
6
2 A9
GND
+24V
TR_TIMING_SNS_N
+5VL A6 A13 A6 1 S87 PTR Timing Sensor
RFID:ANTB:TXD 1 A10 A7 A12 A7 3
CN244
RFID:ANTB:RXD 7 +24V GND
A11
RFID:ANTB:GND 8
11 B1
N.C.
+5V
ADF:GND(+38V ADF)
ADF:+38V
A1
A2
8
7
GATE_RTR_SNS_P
+5V
A8
A9
A11
A10
A8
A9
2
1 S88 Registration Gate Lift Sensor
10 B2 A3 6 A10 A9 A10 2 1 2
GND DBLFEED_SNS_PWM_P
WKUP_AKS_N
LED5 Double-feed Sensor (LED)
JCN
9 B3 A4 5 A11 A8 A11 1 2 1
TNR_CLLCT1_M_GH_P +5V
CN35
8 B4 WKUP_DOCSET_E A12 A7 A12
TNR_CLLCT1_M_CW_P ADF:GND(+24V) A5 4 GND CN833
1
RFID_ANT_GND Waste Toner Transport 7 B5
TNR_CLLCT1_M_CLK_P A6 3 DBLFEED_SNS_NORPAPER A13 A6 A13
(PCB13) 2
M90 6 B6 ADF:GND(+24V) A14 A5 A14 G1785796
To P1/8(J14) Right I/F Cover Relay CN35,36,37
RFID_ANT_RXD TNR_CLLCT1_M_RDY_N A7 2 DBLFEED_SNS_PAPE2
Motor 1 ADF:+24V
CN253
RFID_ANT_TXD 3 5 B7 A8 1 A15 A4 A15 5 1 5
4 TNR_CLLCT1_M_TRG_N ADF:+24V DBLFEED_SNS_ANA_P
+5V 4 B8 A9 A16 A3 A16 4 2 4
5 GND N.C. +5V
3 B9 A17 A2 A17 3 3 3
S89 Double-feed Sensor (Reception)
CN834
CN7
RFID_CLK_P GND B1 9 N.C.
CN808
CN830
6 2 B10 ADF:+38V A18 A1 A18 2 4 2
RFID_CLK_P +24V_4B ADF:+38V B2 8 N.C.
7 1 B11 B1 B18 B1 1 5 1
IDChip K RFID_CLK_P +24V_4B B3 7 GND
RFID K
ADF:GND(+38V ADF)
H RFID_CLK_P 8
ADF:GND(+38V ADF) B4
B5
6
5
SUBSNS_P
+5V
B2
B3
B17
B16
B2
B3 H
CN36
ADF:TXD B4 B15 B4
1 13 1 ADF:GND B6 4 GND
RFID_ANT_CLK +5VL B7 3 Sensor sub B5 B14 B5 3 1 3
2 12 2 ADF:RXD B6 B13 B6 2 2 2
CN838
RFID_ANT_CLK
RFID_ANT_CLK 3
4 P7/8(H8)
11
10
3
4
KEYCARD_SET_N
KEYCARD_SIZE1_N
ADF:+5VE
N.C.
B8
B9
2
1
+5V
GND B7 B12 B7 1 3 1 S90 Shift Roller HP Sensor
CN8
+5V KEYCARD_SIZE2_N UNIT_SHIFT_SNS_P B8 B11 B8
RFID_ANT_TXD
RFID_ANT_RXD
5
6 Key Counter 9
8
5
6
KEYCARD_SIZE3_N
MCU:TXD 1 6 +5V B9
B10
B10
B9
B9
B10 3 1 3
KEYCARD_SIZE4_N 2 5
CN254
7 To MKB 7 7 MCU:RXD GND
B11 B8 B11 2 2 2
CN835
GND KEYCARD_MODE1_N 3 4
RCB PTR_LIFT_SNS_P S91 PTR Lift Sensor
CN255
6 8 GND
CN37
KEYCARD_MODE2_N 4 3 +5V B12 B7 B12 1 3 1
5 9 KEY_CNT_SET_N B13 B6 B13 3
KEYCARD_BOTH_N 5 2 GND
4 10 +24V
GND 1 3
2
11
12
KEYCARD_MOTOR_N
GND
KEY_CNT_TRG_N 6 1
(PCB17) RETURN_SNS3_N
+5VL
B14
B15
B5
B4
B14
B15
2
1 S92 Duplex Transport Sensor 3
(PCB14) RFID_ANT_RXD 2
1 13
KEYCARD_CNT_TRG_P GND B16
B17
B3
B2
B16
B17
3
2
1
2
3
2
S93 Duplex Transport Sensor 4
CN832
3
I RFID_ANT_TXD
+5V 4
+24V_KAKIN RETURN_SNS4_N
+5VL B18 B1 B18 1 3 1
I
5
IOB1(3/3)
CN9
RFID_ANT_CLK
RFID_ANT_CLK 6
7
CIS Relay Board
IDChip C RFID_ANT_CLK
(PCB5)
RFID C
1 1 13 1 9
(PCB18) N.C. 1
2 7
RFID_ANT_CLK CRB:+24V_2BINT +24V_2BINT CIS_LED:+24V_2BINT
RFID_ANT_CLK 2 2 12 2 8 3 6
3 CRB:PWM CIS_LED_PWM CIS_LED:PWM
RFID_ANT_CLK CRB:+5V 3 11 3 7 4 5
+5V CIS:+5V
CN342
CIS1
CN10
+5V 4 4 10 4 6 5 4
5 CRB:CLK_N CIS_CLK CIS_CLK_N
5 9 5 5 6 3
RFID_ANT_TXD
IOB1 CN253,CN255 CRB:SYNC_P CIS_SYNC CIS_SYNC_P
CN341
RFID_ANT_RXD 6 6 8 6 4 7 2
CRB:GND GND CIS:GND
CN807
CN828
GND 7 to Right I/F Cover CN35,CN36,CN37 (For DEBUG_MONITOR) 7 7 7 3 8 1
CRB:DIN_P
IDChip Y UART 8 6 8 2
CIS_DIN CIS_ANALOG_DATA
J CN253-A1 CN35-8 ADF:GND(+38V ADF)
4
3
1
2
+5V CRB:COMP_P
CRB_ANA_S 9 5 9 1
CIS_COMP_TH_PWM
CIS_AIN
J
CN836
TXD_DEBUG_MONITOR B2345280A
CN810
2 3 10 4 10
-A2 -7 ADF:+38V RXD_DEBUG_MONITOR N.C.
11 3 11
1 1 4 +24V_2BINT
GND -A3 -6
(PCB15) RFID_ANT_RXD
RFID_ANT_TXD
2
3 -A4 -5
WKUP_AKS_N
WKUP_DOCSET_E
GND
CIS_FAN_LCK
CIS_Fan_TRG_P
12
13
2
1
12
13 3 1
-A5 -4 2 2
M89 CIS Fan
JCN
+5V 4 ADF:GND(+24V)
1 3
CN11
RFID_ANT_CLK 5 -A6 -3 ADF:GND(+24V)
6
RFID_ANT_CLK -A7 -2 ADF:+24V
IDChip M RFID_ANT_CLK 7
8 RFID Y -A8 -1 ADF:+24V
RFID M
-B1 CN36-9 ADF:+38V
8 MKB CN3 to IOB1 CN254 -B2 -8 ADF:+38V
RFID_ANT_CLK 1 7 1
2 6
RFID_ANT_CLK
2 MKB CN3-13 CN254-1 +5VL -B3 -7 ADF:GND(+38V ADF)
RFID_ANT_CLK RFID_ANT_CLK -12 -2
RFID_ANT_CLK 3 5 RFID_ANT_CLK 3 KEYCARD_SET_N -B4 -6 ADF:GND(+38V ADF)
K
CN12
4 4 4 -11 -3 -B5 -5
CN13
KEYCARD_SIZE1_N
+5V +5V ADF:TXD
K
CN
5 3 5 -10 -4
RFID_ANT_TXD RFID_ANT_TXD KEYCARD_SIZE2_N -B6 -4 ADF:GND
RFID_ANT_RXD
GND
6
7
2
1
RFID_ANT_RXD
GND
(PCB16) 6
7 -9
-8
-5
-6
KEYCARD_SIZE3_N
KEYCARD_SIZE4_N
-B7
-B8
-3
-2
ADF:RXD
ADF:+5VE
-7 -7 KEYCARD_MODE1_N -B9 -1 N.C.
-6 -8 KEYCARD_MODE2_N CN255-1 CN37-6 MCU:TXD
-5 -9 KEYCARD_BOTH_N -2 -5 MCU:RXD
D095/M077 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM (6/9)
-4 -10 KEYCARD_MOTOR_N -3 -4 GND
-3 -11 GND -4 -3 KEY_CNT_SET_N
-2 -12 KEYCARD_CNT_TRG_P -5 -2 +24V
-1 -13 +24V_KAKIN -6 -1 KEY_CNT_TRG_N
L L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
P1/8(I6)
Laser Unit MY To CN036 on Rear Controller Box Laser Unit KC
A 1
(PCB19)
CN410 CN410
(PCB25)
1
A
CN471J/P
4
8
7
3
2 2
CN481P/J
+24V 1 1 1 1 1 1 +24V
3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
GND GND
Polygon Motor KC
4 4
Polygon Motor YM
5 5 Rear Controller Box Relay CN036 to CN471, CN481
6 6 1 6 6 1 6 6
7
GND GND
7
CN036J-3 CN471 -1 +24V
P_MOTOR_CLK 5 2 5 5 2 5 P_MOTOR_CLK -7 -2 GND
M91 8 4 3 4 4 3 4 8
M95
CN482
CN472
P_MOTOR_RDY P_MOTOR_RDY
-4 CN481 -1
CN411
CN411
9 3 4 3 3 4 3 9 +24V
CN412
CN412
P_MOTOR_TRG P_MOTOR_TRG
10 GND 2 5 2 2 5 2 GND 10 -8 -2 GND
11 P_MOTOR_TUNE 1 6 1 1 6 1 P_MOTOR_TUNE 11
12 12
13 13
14 5 1 5 1 10 A1 B1 10 1 5 1 5 14
15 4 2 4 2 9 A2 B2 9 2 4 2 4 15
Polygon Motor Drive Board1 M92 3 3 3 3 8 A3 B3 8 3 3 3 3
M96 Polygon Motor Drive Board2 IOB2 CN238 to BTL Adjust_M Relay CN478, CN488 B
JCN
JCN
B 2 4 2 4 7 A4 P4/8(H7) B4 7 4 2 4 2
1 5 1 5 6 A5 P4/8(I7) B5 6 5 1 5 1 CN238-A1 CN488-10 +24V
5 1 5 6 5 A6 To CN238 on IOB1 To CN238 IOB1 B6 5 6 5 1 5 -A2 -9 +24V
BTL Adjustment Motor C
CN488
CN478
BTL Adjustment Motor Y
LDB Y 4
3
2
3
4
3
7
8
4
3
A7
A8
B7
B8
4
3
7
8
4
3
2
3
4
3 LDB C -A3 -8 GND
JCN
JCN
2 4 2 9 2 A9 B9 2 9 2 4 2
-A4 -7 GND
1 A18 A18 1
LDD0P Y LDD0P C -A5 -6 +24V
(PCB20) LDD0N Y 2
3
A17
A16
1 5 1 10 1 A10 B10 1 10 1 5 1 A17
A16
2
3
LDD0N C
(PCB26) -A6 -5 GND
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
LDD1P Y G1785688 G1785677 LDD1P C
LDD1N Y 4 A15 A15 4 LDD1N C -A7 -4 +24V
5 A14 Harness CN418 Harness A14 5 -A8 -3 GND
LDD2P Y A18 LDD2P C
6 A13 1 A18 A1 A18 LDD0P Y LDD0P C A1 A18 1 A13 6
LDD2N Y
7 A12 2 A17 A2 A17 A17 A2 A17 2 A12 7
LDD2N C -A9 -2 +24V
P_MOTOR_TUNE_YM
P_MOTOR_TUNE_YM
LDD3P Y LDD0N Y LDD0N C LDD3P C
P_MOTOR_RDY_YM
P_MOTOR_TRG_YM
P_MOTOR_RDY_YM
P_MOTOR_TRG_YM
-A10 -1
P_MOTOR_CLK_YM
P_MOTOR_CLK_YM
8 A11 3 A16 A3 A16 A16 A3 A16 3 A11 8 GND
LDD3N Y LDD1P Y LDD1P C LDD3N C
9 A10 4 A15 A4 A15 LDD1N Y LDD1N C A15 A4 A15 4 A10 9 -B1 CN478-10 GND
GND GND
10 A9 5 A14 A5 A14 LDD2P Y LDD2P C A14 A5 A14 5 A9 10 -B2 -9 +24V
GND GND
C C
CN402
CN402
11 A8 6 A13 A6 A13 LDD2N Y LDD2N C A13 A6 A13 6 A8 11
LDD4P Y
12 A7 7 A12 A7 A12 A12 A7 A12 7 A7 12
LDD4P C -B3 -8 GND
LDD4N Y LDD3P Y LDD3P C LDD4N C -B4 -7
GND
GND
GND
GND
13 A6 8 A11 A8 A11 A11 A8 A11 8 A6 13 +24V
LDD5P Y LDD3N Y LDD3N C LDD5P C
CN415
14 A5 9 A10 A9 A10 GND GND A10 A9 A10 9 A5 14 -B5 -6 GND
LDD5N Y A9 LDD5N C
15 A4 10 A9 A10 A9 GND GND A10 A9 10 A4 15 -B6 -5 GND
LDD6P Y A8 LDD6P C
16 A3 11 A8 A11 A8 LDD4P Y LDD4P C A11 A8 11 A3 16
LDD6N Y
17 A2 12 A7 A12 A7 A7 A12 A7 12 A2 17
LDD6N C -B7 -4 +24V
LDD7P Y LDD4N Y LDD4N C LDD7P C
LDD7N Y 18 A1 13 A6 A13 A6 LDD5P Y LDD5P C A6 A13 A6 13 A1 18 LDD7N C
-B8 -3 GND
14 A5 A14 A5 LDD5N Y LDD5N C A5 A14 A5 14 -B9 -2 +24V
LDLVL0 Y
LDLVL1 Y
1
2
A12
A11
15
16
17
A4
A3
A2
A15
A16
A17
A4
A3
A2
LDD6P Y
LDD6N Y
IPU (1/2) LDD6P C
LDD6N C
A4
A3
A2
A15
A16
A17
A4
A3
A2
15
16
17
A12
A11
1
2
LDLVL0 C
LDLVL1 C
-B10 -1 GND
3 A10 LDD7P Y LDD7P C A10 3
LDLVL2 Y
4 A9 18 A1 A18 A1 LDD7N Y
(PCB24) LDD7N C A1 A18 A1 18 A9 4
LDLVL2 C
CN494
CN491
CN412
LDLVL3 Y 1 B18 B1 B18 B18 B1 B18 1 LDLVL3 C
5 A8 LDD0P M LDD0P K A8 5
FIB CN923 to Laser Unit Cover SW(+6V) CN5, CN6
CN491
CN494
LDLVL4 Y 2 B17 B2 B17 B17 B2 B17 2 LDLVL4 C
6 A7 LDD0N M LDD0N K A7 6
LDLVL5 Y 3 B16 B3 B16 B16 B3 B16 3 LDLVL5 C
D
CN403
CN403
D LDLVL6 Y
LDLVL7 Y
7
8
9
A6
A5
A4
4
5
B15
B14
B4
B5
B15
B14
LDD1P M
LDD1N M
LDD2P M
LDD1P K
LDD1N K
LDD2P K
B15
B14
B4
B5
B15
B14
4
5
A6
A5
A4
7
8
9
LDLVL6 C
LDLVL7 C
CN923 -1
-2
CN6 -1
CN5 -1
+6V
+6V
GND 6 B13 B6 B13 B13 B6 B13 6 GND -3 CN6 -5 GND
ADIN Y 10 A3 LDD2N M LDD2N K A3 10 ADIN C
11 A2 7 B12 B7 B12 LDD3P M LDD3P K B12 B7 B12 7 A2 11 -4 CN5 -5 GND
GND 8 B11 B8 B11 B11 B8 B11 8 GND
GND 12 A1 LDD3N M LDD3N K A1 12 GND
9 B10 B9 B10 GND GND B10 B9 B10 9
10 B9 B10 B9 GND GND B9 B10 B9 10
11 B8 B11 B8 B8 B11 B8 11 CN404
1 LDD4P M LDD4P K 1
+6VGINT 12 B7 B12 B7 B7 B12 B7 12 +6V
CN404
LDD4N M LDD4N K
GND 2 13
14
B6
B5
B13
B14
B6
B5
LDD5P M LDD5P K B6
B5
B13
B14
B6
B5
13
14
2 GND IOB2 CN251 to Laser Unit FAN Relay CN13, CN15
LDD5N M LDD5N K CN251-A11 CN13 -3 Laser Unit Fan YM:+24V
15 B4 B15 B4 LDD6P M LDD6P K B4 B15 B4 15
XAPC0_Y 1 A20 16 B3 B16 B3 B3 B16 B3 16 A20 1 XAPC0_C -A12 -2 Laser Unit Fan YM:Alarm
2 A19 LDD6N M LDD6N K A19 2
XAPC1_Y 17 B2 B17 B2 LDD7P M LDD7P K B2 B17 B2 17 XAPC1_C -A13 -1 Laser Unit Fan YM:Drive
E
XAPC2_Y
XAPC3_Y
3
4
5
A18
A17
A16
18 B1 B18 B1 LDD7N M LDD7N K B1
G1785678
B18 B1 18 A18
A17
A16
3
4
5
XAPC2_C
XAPC3_C
-B11
-B12
CN15 -3
-2
Laser Unit Fan CK:+24V
Laser Unit Fan CK:Alarm
E
XAPC4_Y XAPC4_C
XAPC5_Y 6 A15
1 A12 A1 A12 A12
Harness A1 A12 1
A15 6 XAPC5_C -B13 -1 Laser Unit Fan CK:Dorive
CN401
XAPC6_Y 7 A14 LDLVL0 Y LDLVL0 C A14 7 XAPC6_C
2 A11 A2 A11 LDLVL1 Y LDLVL1 C A11 A2 A11 2
XAPC7_Y 8 A13 A13 8 XAPC7_C
3 A10 A3 A10 A10 A3 A10 3
CN401
GND 9 A12 LDLVL2 Y LDLVL2 C A12 9 GND
4 A9 A4 A9 LDLVL3 Y LDLVL3 C A9 A4 A9 4
LDOFF_Y 10 A11 A11 10 LDOFF_C
5 A8 A5 A8 LDLVL4 Y LDLVL4 C A8 A5 A8 5
XLDERR_Y 11 A10 A10 11 XLDERR_C
A9 6 A7 A6 A7 LDLVL5 Y LDLVL5 C A7 A6 A7 6
DROPEN_Y 12 A9 12 DROPEN_C
7 A6 A7 A6 LDLVL6 Y LDLVL6 C A6 A7 A6 7
+5V 13 A8 A8 13 +5V
8 A5 A8 A5 LDLVL7 Y LDLVL7 C A5 A8 A5 8
14 A7 A7 14
CN414
GND 9 A4 A9 A4 A4 A9 A4 9 GND
GND GND
10 A3 A10 A3 ADIN Y ADIN C A3 A10 A3 10
11 A2 A11 A2 GND GND A2 A11 A2 11
1 A6 12 A1 A12 A1 GND GND A1 A12 A1 12 A6 1
CN490
CN493
1 B12 B1 B12 B12 B1 B12 1
Laser Synchronizing Detector Y: LE S94 2 A5 LDLVL0 M LDLVL0 K A5 2
S98 Laser Synchronizing Detector C: LE
CN493
CN490
CN411
F 3
1
A4
A3
2
3
4
B11
B10
B9
B2
B3
B4
B11
B10
B9
LDLVL1 M
LDLVL2 M
LDLVL1 K
LDLVL2 K
B11
B10
B9
B2
B3
B4
B11
B10
B9
2
3
4
A4
A3
3
1
F
Laser Synchronizing Detector Y: TE S95 2
3
A2
A1 5 B8 B5 B8
LDLVL3 M
LDLVL4 M
LDLVL3 K
LDLVL4 K B8 B5 B8 5
A2
You might also like
- Ricoh Aficio MP C4000, MP C5000 Parts & Service Manual PDF73% (15)Ricoh Aficio MP C4000, MP C5000 Parts & Service Manual PDF1,484 pages
- BizhubC360i C300i C250i ServiceManual v4.0 April 2021100% (1)BizhubC360i C300i C250i ServiceManual v4.0 April 20211,364 pages
- ImageRUNNER ADVANCE DX C3900 Series Installation Manual - en - 6.0No ratings yetImageRUNNER ADVANCE DX C3900 Series Installation Manual - en - 6.0495 pages
- Ricoh Aficio SP c830dn-c831dn AP-p3 (m124-m125) FSM100% (1)Ricoh Aficio SP c830dn-c831dn AP-p3 (m124-m125) FSM1,064 pages
- Ricoh Color Copier (D027, D029) Aficio MP C4000, MP C5000 Parts & Service Manual PDF67% (3)Ricoh Color Copier (D027, D029) Aficio MP C4000, MP C5000 Parts & Service Manual PDF1,484 pages
- rfg074865-D296-D297-D298-D299 Service ManualNo ratings yetrfg074865-D296-D297-D298-D299 Service Manual1,104 pages
- D196/D214/D219/D220/D236 Service ManualNo ratings yetD196/D214/D219/D220/D236 Service Manual1,356 pages
- Konica Bizhub Press C7000-C7000p-C70hc-C6000 PDF100% (1)Konica Bizhub Press C7000-C7000p-C70hc-C6000 PDF2,026 pages
- HL-820, HL-1020, HL-1040, HL-1050 Parts and Service ManualNo ratings yetHL-820, HL-1020, HL-1040, HL-1050 Parts and Service Manual305 pages
- Konicaminolta Bizhub c220 c280 c360 Service Manual FreeNo ratings yetKonicaminolta Bizhub c220 c280 c360 Service Manual Free47 pages
- Manual%20 De%20 Servicio%20 Aficio%20 Color%20 MPC2030No ratings yetManual%20 De%20 Servicio%20 Aficio%20 Color%20 MPC20301,171 pages
- QB Parts Guide Manual Bizhub C454e (1st Edition)No ratings yetQB Parts Guide Manual Bizhub C454e (1st Edition)75 pages
- MX910 MX911 MX912 XM9145 XM9155 XM9165 7421 SMNo ratings yetMX910 MX911 MX912 XM9145 XM9155 XM9165 7421 SM827 pages
- BizhubC452 C552 C552DS C652 C652DSPrintOperationsUserGuide0% (1)BizhubC452 C552 C552DS C652 C652DSPrintOperationsUserGuide312 pages
- 700-700i DCP v3.7 MN SW Release Notes 20111028100% (1)700-700i DCP v3.7 MN SW Release Notes 2011102828 pages
- Product Support Guide: D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D202No ratings yetProduct Support Guide: D197/D198/D199/D200/D201/D20246 pages
- Efi Fiery Xerox Exi c60c70 v2 FPP Ds en Us PDF100% (1)Efi Fiery Xerox Exi c60c70 v2 FPP Ds en Us PDF2 pages
- SVC Manual CLX-9201 9251 9301 Series Eng 120329No ratings yetSVC Manual CLX-9201 9251 9301 Series Eng 120329299 pages
- A + (HARDWARE PLUS), 449 QUESTION & ANSWER HCL CDC MEERUT (A+ Related Networking Course Ques & Ans) by Deepak Kumar.88% (24)A + (HARDWARE PLUS), 449 QUESTION & ANSWER HCL CDC MEERUT (A+ Related Networking Course Ques & Ans) by Deepak Kumar.25 pages
- 7166398-Ricoh Aficio 2232c Color Copier Service Manual100% (1)7166398-Ricoh Aficio 2232c Color Copier Service Manual580 pages
- Konica Minolta Bizhub Pro C6501 User Manual SecurityNo ratings yetKonica Minolta Bizhub Pro C6501 User Manual Security32 pages
- Cheap DIY Front Panels: Step 1: Design and Print Your Panel Graphics100% (1)Cheap DIY Front Panels: Step 1: Design and Print Your Panel Graphics10 pages
- Nmec-I Basics of Computers and Office Automation UNIT-I (Start) Introduction To ComputersNo ratings yetNmec-I Basics of Computers and Office Automation UNIT-I (Start) Introduction To Computers21 pages
- Chapter 3 Computer System Components - HardwareNo ratings yetChapter 3 Computer System Components - Hardware9 pages
